Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Pali English Dictionary, 1921 25, V1
Pali English Dictionary, 1921 25, V1
Pali-English
Dictionary
EDITED BY
T. W. RHYS DAVIDS F.B.A. D.Sc. Ph.D. LL.D. D.Litt
and WILLIAM STEDE Ph.D.
[1921-1925]
a aa i ii u uu e o .m
A.
List of the Chiefs Books consulted for Vocabulary
(with Abbreviations).
1. PALI BOOKS.
1a Canonical.
Niddesa II Culla PTS. 191S (Nd2 ).
Paisambhidmagga 2 vols. PTS. 1905, 1907 (Ps).
Peta-Vatthu PTS. 1889 (Pv).
Puggala-Paatti PTS. 1883 (Pug).
Sayutta-Nikya 5 vols. PTS. 18841898 (S).
Sutta-Nipta PTS. 1913 (Sn).
Thera-thergth PTS. 1883 (Th 1) & (Th 2).
Udna PTS. 1S85 (Ud).
Vibhanga PTS. 1904 (Vbh).
Vimna-Vatthu PTS. 1886 (Vv).
Vinaya-Piaka 5 vols. London 1S7983 (Vin).
1b Post-Canonical.
Atthaslin, PTS. 1897 (DhsA).
Buddhadatta's Manuals, PTS. 1915 (Bdhd).
Dhvasa, J PTS. 1884 (Dvs).
Dhammapada Commentary, 4 vols. PTS. 190614 (DhA).
Dpavasa, London 1879 (Dpvs).
Jtaka, 6 vols. London 187790 (J).
Khuddaka-Pha Cnmmentary, PTS. 1915 (KhA).
Mahvasa, PTS. 1908 (Mhvs).
Mah-Bodhi-Vasa, PTS. 1891 (Mhbv).
Milindapaha, London 1880 (Miln).
Note. The system adopted in quotations of passages from Pali text is that proposed in J PTS. 1909, pp. 38587, with this modification
that Peta-vatthu (Pv) is quoted by canto and verse, and Culla-Niddesa (Nd2 ) by number of word in "Explanatory Matter".
2. BUDDHIST SANSKRIT.
Avadna-ataka, ed. J. S. Speyer (Bibl. Buddhica III), 2 vols., St. Petersbourg 1906. (Av. .).
Divyvadna, ed. Cowell & Neill, Cambridge 1886. (Divy).
Jtaka-ml, ed. H. Kern (Haward Or. Ser. I), Boston 1891. (Jtm).
Lalita-vistara, ed. S. Lefmann, I. Halle 1902. (Lai. V.).
Mah-vastu, ed. . Senart, 3 vols., Paris 18821897.
ik-samuccaya. Ed. C. Bendall. St. Petersburg, 1902 (ik).
3. TRANSLATIONS.
Buddh. Manual of Psychological Ethics (trsl. of the Dhamma-sangani) by Mrs. Rhys Davids (R. As. Soc. Trsl. Fund
XII), London 1900. (Dhs trsl.).
Compendium of Philosophy (trsl. of the Abhidhamm' attha-sangaha) by S. Z. Aung and Mrs. Rhys Davids, PTS. Trsl.
1910. (Cpd.).
Dialogues of the Buddha, trsl. by T. W. and C. A. F. Rhys Davids, London I. 1899; II. 1910; III. 1921. (Dial.).
Expositor (trsl. of the Attha-slin), by Maung Tin, PTS. Trsl. 1920, 21.
Kathvatthu trsl. ("Points of Controversy"), by Aung and Mrs. Rhys Davids, PTS. Trsl. 1915. (Kvu trsl.).
Kindred Sayings (Sayutta Nikya I), by Mrs. Rhys Davids, PTS. Trsl. 1917. (KS.).
Mahvasa trsl. by W. Geiger, PTS. Trsl. 1912.
B. LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS.
1. Titles Of Books (the no. refers to section of A).
A
Anguttara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1a
Abhp
Abhidhnappadpik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Ap
Apadna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1a
Av. . Avadana-ataka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Bdhd
Buddhadatta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Brethren: see Psalms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Bu
Buddha-vasa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1a
Cp
Cariya-pitaka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1a
Cpd
Compendium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
D
Digha . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . la
Dvs
Daha-vasa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1b
Dh
Dhammapada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1a
Dhs
Dhammasangani . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1a
Dhs trsl. Atthaslini . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Dial.
Dialogues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Divy
Divyvadana . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Dpvs
Dipavamsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1b
Halyudha:
see Aufrecht . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
It
Itivuttaka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1a
J
Jataka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1b
J.A.O.S. Journal Amer. Or. Soc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
J.As.
J.P.T.S.
J.R.A.S.
Jtm
Kacc
Kh
S
Kvu
KZ
Lai.V.
M
Mhbv
Mhvs
Miln
M Vastu
Mvyut
Mystic:
Nd1
Nd2
Nett
Pgdp
2
Asiatique. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Pali Text Soc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Royal Asiatic Soc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Jatakaml . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Kaccyana . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Khuddakapatha . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1a
Kindred Sayings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Kathavatthu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1a
Kuhn's Zeitschrift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Laiita Vistara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Majjhima . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1a
Mahbodhi-varjsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1b
Mahvarjsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1b
Milinda-paha . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1b
Mah-vastu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Mahvyutpatti . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
see Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Mahniddesa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1a
Cullaniddesa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1a
Netti-pakarana . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1b
Pacagati-dpana . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1b
Ps
Pug
Pv
S
SBE
Sdhp
Siks
Sisters:
Sn
Th 1
Paisambhid-magga . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1a
Puggala-paatti . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .la
Petavatthu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . la
Sayutta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1a
Sacred Books of the East . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Saddhammopyana . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lb
Siksasamuccaya . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
see Psalms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Sutta-nipta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . la
Theragath . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1a
Th 2
Toev.
Ud
Vbh
Vin
Vism
Vv
ZDMG.
Thergatha . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . la
Toevoegselen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Udna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1a
Vibhanga . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1a
Vinaya . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1a
Visuddhi-magga . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1b
Vimnavatthu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . id
Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenlndischen
Gesellschaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
abl.
abs.
abstr.
ace.
act.
add.
adj.
adv.
Ags.
aor.
appl.
art.
attr.
Av.
BB
bef.
BSk.
Burmese MSS
before
Buddhist Sanskrit
dative
denominative
derived, derivation
desiderative
dialect(ical)
different
distinct, distinguished
E.
e.g.
English
for instance
encl.
ep.
esp.
etym.
exc.
excl.
expl.
enclitic
epithet
especially
etymology
except
exclamation, exclusive
explanation, explained
f.
fig.
foil.
form.
fr.
freq.
fut.
feminine
figurative(ly)
following
formation
from
frequently, Frequentative
future
Gall.
gen.
ger.
Ger.
Goth.
Gr.
gram.
grd.
Gallic
genitive
gerund
German
Gothic
Greek
grammar, atical
gerundive
ibid.
id.
id.p.
i.e.
i.g.
imper.
impers.
impf.
Ind.
ind.
indecl.
indef.
inf.
instr.
interr.
intrs.
iter.
Lat.
1.c.
lit.
Lit.
Latin
loco citato
literal(ly), literary
Lithuanian
loc.
locative
m.
med.
masculine
medium (middle)
N.
n.
nom.
Np.
Npl.
nt.
num.
Name
noun, note
nominative
Name of person
place
neuter
numeral
Obulg.
Ohg.
Oicel.
Oir.
onom.
opp.
ord.
orig.
Old-bulgarian
Old-high-german
-icelandic
-irish
onomatopoetic
opposed, opposite
ordinal, ordinary
original(ly)
P.
part.
pass
perf.
pers.
pi.
pop.
poss.
pot.
pp.
ppr.
prec.
pred.
pref.
prep.
pres.
pret.
Prk.
prob.
pron.
pt.
PTS.
Pali
particle
passive
perfect
personal
plural
popular
possessive
potential
past participle
present
preceding
predicative
prefix
preposition
present
preterite
Prakrit
probably
pronoun
part
Pali Text Society
q.v.
ref.
refl.
reference, referred
reflexive
rel.
relation, relative
sep.
sg.
Sk.
sq.
SS.
ster.
suff.
separate(ly)
singular
Sanskrit
and following
Singhalese MSS.
stereotype
suffix
sup.
s.v.
syn.
superlative
sub voce (under the word
mentioned)
synonym(ous)
T.
trans.
trsl.
t.t.
Text
transitive
translated, translation
technical term
t.t.g.
in grammar
v.
verse
var.
variant, various
var.lect. various reading
voc.
vocative
Wtb.
Wrterbuch
3. Typographical.
*(s)uel indicates a (reconstructed or conjectured) Indogermanic root.
*Sk means, that the Sanskrit word is constructed after the Pali word; or as Sk. form is only found in lexicographical
lists.
: the cap over a vowel indicates that the a is the result of a syncope a + a (e.g. khuddnukhudda), whereas
represents the proper , either pure or contracted with a preceding a (khsava = kha + sava).
represents the head-word either as first () or second () part of a compound; sometimes also
an easily supplemented part of a word.
> indicates an etymological relation or line of development between the words mentioned.
and means "at similar" or "at identical, parallel passages".
The meaning of all other abbreviations may easily be inferred from the context.
Akka
A
A-1 the prep. shortened before double cons., as akko- sati (
+ kru), akkhti ( + khy), abbahati ( + bh). Best to
be classed here is the a- we call expletive. It represents a reduction of - (mostly before liquids and nasals and with single
consonant instead of double). Thus anantaka (for -nantaka
= nantaka) Vv.807 ; amajjapa (for -majjapa = majjapa) J
vi.328; ampaya (for mpaya = mpaya) J vi.518; apassato (= passantassa) J vi.552.
Akcin (adj.) = akca Vv 601 . Kern (Toevoegselen s. v.) proposes reading akkcin (= Sk. arka arcin shining as the sun),
but VvA 253 expls by niddosa, and there is no v. l. to warrant
a misreading.
Aksiya (adj. n.) [a + ksika?] "not from the Ks country" (?); official name of certain tax gatherers in the king's
service J vi.212 (aksiya-sankht rja-puris C.).
A-4 the sound a (a-kra) J vi.328, 552; VvA 279, 307, 311.
Akiccakra (adj.) [a + kicca + kra] 1. not doing one's duty, doing what ought not to be done A ii.67; Dh 292; Miln 66; DA
i.296. 2. ineffective (of medicine) Miln 151.
Asa1 [Vedic asa; cp. Gr. , Lat. umerus, Goth ams, Arm.
us] (a) the shoulder A v. 110; Sn 609. ase karoti to put on
the shoulder, to shoulder J i.9. (b.) a part (lit. side) (cp. sa in
kohsa and expln of asa as kohsa at DA i.312, also v. l.
mettsa for mettasa at It 22). att'ase in former times,
formerly D ii.224; Th 2, 314. mettasa sharing friendship
(with) A iv.151 = It 22 = J iv.71 (in which connection Miln
402 reads ahis). Disjunctive ekena asena... ekena
asena on the one hand (side)... on the other, partly... partly
A i.61. From this: ekasa (adj.) on the one hand (only), i. e.
incomplete (opp. ubhayasa) or (as not admitting of a counterpart) definite, certain, without doubt (opp. dvidh): see
ekasa. -paccasena according to each one's share A iii.38.
puasena with a knapsack for provisions D i.117; A ii 183;
cp. DA i.288, with v. l. puosena at both passages.
-ka "shoulder prominence", the shoulder Vin iii.127;
DhA iii.214; iv.136; VvA 121. vaaka a shoulder strap
(mostly combd with kyabandhana; vv. ll. vaddhaka, bandhaka) Vin i.204 (T. bandhaka); ii.114 (ddh); iv.170 (ddh); Vv
3340 (T. bandhana, C. v. l. vaaka); DhA iii.452.
Asa2 [see next] point, corner, edge; freg. in combn with numer-
Akka
Akkhara
(? read akka ).
Akkamana (nt.) [cp. BSk. kramaa Jtm 3158 ] going near, approaching, stepping upon, walking to J i.62.
Akkhaka [akkha1 + ka] the collar bone Vin iv.213 (adhakkhaka); y.216.
Akkhata (adj.) [pp. of a + kan, cp. parikkhata1 ] unhurt, without fault Mhvs 19, 56 (C. niddosa). acc.
akkhata (adv.) in safety, unhurt. Only in one phrase Vv
8452 (paccgamu Paliputta akkhata) & Pv iv.111
(nessmi ta Paliputta akkhata); see VvA 351 & PvA
272.
Akkhaya (adj.) [a + khaya, ki] not decaying, in akkhayapaibhna, of unfailing skill in exposition Miln 3, 21.
Akkha2 [Vedic aka, prob. to aki & Lat. oculus, "that which has
eyes" i. e. a die; cp. also Lat. lea game at dice (fr.* asclea?)]
a die D i.6 (but expld at DA i.86 as ball game: guaka); S
i.149 = A v.171 = Sn 659 (appamatto aya kali yo akkhesu
dhanaparjayo); J i.379 (k a false player, sharper, cheat)
anakkha one who is not a gambler J v.116 (C.: ajtakara).
Cp. also accha3 .
-dassa (cp. Sk. akadaraka) one who looks at (i. e. examines) the dice, an umpire, a judge Vin iii.47; Miln 114, 327,
343 (dhamma nagare). -dhutta one who has the vice of
gambling D ii.348; iii.183; M iii.170; Sn 106 (+ itthidhutta &
surdhutta). -va fence round an arena for wrestling J iv.81.
Akkhara
Agra
vi.191. -mala dirt from the eye Pv iii.53 (= gtha C.). -roga
eye disease DhA i.9.
Akkhobbha (adj.) [a + kubh, see khobha] not to be shaken, imperturbable Miln 21.
Agaru (adj.) [cp. Sk. aguru, a + garu] (a) not heavy, not troublesome, only in phrase: sace te agaru "if it does not inconvenience you, if you don't mind" (cp. BSk. yadi te aguru. Av.
S i.94, 229; ii.90) Vin. i.25; iv.17, D i.51; DhA i.39. (b)
disrespectful, irreverent (against = gen.) D i.89; Sn p. 51.
Agra
Agga
etc. (b.) fig. the best part, the ideal, excellence, prominence, first place, often to be trsl. as adj. the highest, best of
all etc. S ii.29 (aggena aggassa patti hoti: only the best attain
to the highest); Mhvs 7, 26. Usually as ; e. g. dum the
best of trees, an excellent tree Vv 3541 (cp. VvA 161); dhan
plenty D iii.164; madhur S i.41, 161, 237; bhav the best
existence S iii.83; rp extraordinary beauty J i.291; lbh
highest gain J iii.127; sambodhi-y-agga highest wisdom Sn
693 (= sabbauta an SnA 489; the best part or quality of anything, in enumn of the five "excellencies" of first
fruits (panca aggni, after which the N. Pacaggadyaka),
viz. khettaggan rs koh kumbhi bhojan SnA 270. sukh
perfect bliss Sdhp 243. Thus freq. in phrase agga akkhyati
to deserve or receive the highest praise, to be the most excellent D i.124; S iii.156, 264; A ii.17 (Tathgato); It 87 (id.); Nd2
517 D (appamdo); Miln 183. 3. Cases as adv.: aggena
(instr.) in the beginning, beginning from, from (as prep.), by
(id.) Vin ii.167. (aggena gahti to take from, to subtract, to
find the difference; Kern Toev. s. v. unnecessarily changes
aggena into agghena), 257 (yadaggena at the moment when or
from, foll. by tad eva "then"; cp. agge), 294 (bhikkh from
alms); Vbh 423 (vass by the number of years). aggato (abl.)
in the beginning Sn 217 (+ majjhato, sesato). aggato kata taken
by its worth, valued, esteemed Th 2, 386, 394. agge (loc) 1.
at the top A ii.201 (opp. mle at the root); J iv.156 (id.); Sn
233 (phusit with flowers at the top: supupphitaggaskh KhA
192); J ii.153 (ukkh); iii.126 (kp). 2 (as prep.) from.
After, since, usually in phrases yad (foll. by tad) from what
time, since what date D i.152; ii.206; & ajja t agge from
this day, after today D i.85; M i.528; A v.300; Sn p. 25 (cp.
BSk. adygrena Av. ii.13); at the end: bhattagge after a
meal Vin ii.212.
-angul the main finger, i. e. index finger J vi.404.
-sana main seat DA i.267. -upahka chief personal attendant D ii.6. -krik first taste, sample Vin iii.80. -kulika
of an esteemed clan Pv iii.55 (= seh PvA 199). -a recognized as primitive primeval, D iii.225 (pora +), A ii.27
sq.; iv.246, Kvu 341. -danta one who is most excellently
self restrained (of the Buddha) Th i.354. -dna a splendid gift Vin iii.39. -dvra main door J i.114. -nakha tip
of the nail Vin iv.221. -nagara the first or most splendid of
cities Vin i.229. -nikkhitta highly praised or famed Miln 343.
-nikkhittaka an original depository of the Faith Dpvs iv.5. pakatimant of the highest character J v.351 (= aggasabhva).
-patta having attained perfection D iii.48 sq. -pasda the
highest grace A ii.34; It 87. -pia the best oblation or alms
i.141; M i. 28; ii.204. -piika receiving the best oblations
J vi.140. -puggala the best of men (of the Buddha) Sn 684;
DhA ii.39; Sdhp. 92, 558. -purohita chief or prime minister
J vi.391. -phala the highest or supreme fruit (i. e. Arahantship) J i.148; Pv iv.188 ; PvA 230. -bja having eggs from
above (opp. mla), i. e. propagated by slips or cuttings D
i.5; DA i.81. -magga (adj.) having reached the top of the
path, i. e. Arahantship ThA 20. -mahesi the king's chief
wife, queen consort J i.262; iii.187, 393; v.88; DhA i.199;
PvA 76. -rj the chief king J vi.391; Miln 27. -vara most
meritorious, best Dpvs vi.68. -vda the original doctrine (=
theravda) Dpvs iv.13. -vdin one who proclaims the highest
good (of the Buddha) Th 1, 1142.
Agga
Aggha
kindling a holy fire on the day the child is born and keeping
it up throughout his life, is also referred to by that commentary e. g. J i.285; ii.43. Aggi paricarati (cp. paricriy)
to serve the sacred fire Vin i.31 (jail agg paricaritukm);
A v.263, 266; Th 2, 143 (= aggihutta paric ThA 136); Dh
107; J i.494; DhA ii.232. aggi juhati (cp. homa, hutta) to
sacrifice (in)to the fire A ii.207; often combd. with aggihutta
paricarati, e. g. S i.166; Sn p. 79. aggi namati & santappeti to worship the fire A v.235. aggissa (gen.) paricriko J
yi.207 (cp. below paricrika); aggissa dhna A iv.41.
3. (ethical, always ) the fire of burning, consuming, feverish sensations. Freq. in standard set of 3 fires, viz. rg, dos,
moh, or the fires of lust, anger and bewilderment. The number three may possibly have been chosen with reference to the
three sacrificial fires of Vedic ritual. At S iv.19; A iv.41 sq.
there are 7 fires, the 4 last of which are huneyy, gahapat,
dakkhieyy, kah. But this trinity of cardinal sins lies at
the basis of Buddhist ethics, & the fire simile was more probably suggested by the number. D iii.217; It 92, Vbh 368. In
late books are found others: ind the fire of the senses PvA
56; dukkh the glow of suffering ib. 60; bhavadukkh of the
misery of becomings Sdhp. 552; vippaisr burning remorse
PvA 60; sok burning grief ib. 41.
Note. The form aggini occurs only at Sn 668 & 670 in the
meaning of "pyre", and in combn. with sama "like", viz. aggini sama jalita 668 (= samantato jali ta aggi Sn A
480); aggini samsu 670 (= aggisamsu Sn A 481). The
form aggin in phrase niccaggin can either be referred to gini
(q. v.) or has to be taken as nom. of aggini (in adj. function with metri causa; otherwise as adj. aggini), meaning
looking constantly after the fire, i. e. careful, observant, alert.
-agra (agygra) a heated room or hut with a fire Vin
i.24; iv.109; D i.101, 102 (as v. l. BB for agra); M i.501;
A v.234, 250. -khandha a great mass of fire, a huge fire,
fire brand S ii.85; A iv. 128; Th 2, 351 (samkm); J
iv.139; vi.330; Ps i.125; Dpvs vi.37; Miln 304. -gata having become (like) fire Miln 302. ja fire born J v.404
(C; text aggijta). -ha fire place J v.155. -hna fire
place Vin ii.120 (jantghare, in bathroom). -daha consumed by fire Dh 136; Pv i.74 . -dha (mah) a holocaust
A i.178. -niksin like fire J iii.320 (suriya). -nibbna the
extinction of fire J i.212. -pajjota fire light A ii.140 (one
of the 4 lights, viz. canda, suriya, a, pa). -paricaraa
( hna) the place where the (sacrificial) fire is attended
to DhA i.199. -paricariy fire worship DhA ii.232; Sn
A 291 (pri) 456. -paricrika one who worship the fire a
v.263 (brhmaa). -sl a heated hall or refectory Vin i.25, 49
= ii.210; i.139; ii.154. -sikh the crest of the fire, the flame,
in simile pama, like a flaming fire Sn 703; Dh 308 = It 43,
90 (ayogua). -hutta (nt.) the sacrificial fire (see above 2),
Vin i.33, 36 = J i.83; Vin i.246 = Sn 568 (mukha yaa);
S i.166; Dh 392; Sn 249, p. 79; J iv.211; vi.525; ThA 136 (=
aggi); DhA iv.151 ( brhmao namati). -huttaka (nt.) fire
offering J vi.522 (= aggi jhana C.). -hotta = hutta
SnA 456 (v. l. BB hutta). -homa fire oblation (or perhaps
sacrificing to Agni) D i.9 (= aggi jhana DA i.93).
Aggat (f.) [abstr. of agga] pre eminence, prominence, superiority Kvu 556 ( gata); Dpvs iv.1 (guaggata gat).
(adj.) mahaggata of great value or superiority D i.80; iii.224.
Aggatta (nt.) [abstr. of agga = Sk. agratvan] the state or condition
of being the first, pre eminence PvA 9, 89.
Aggavant (adj.) occupying the first place, of great eminence A
i.70, 243.
Aggalu see agalu.
Aggaa & Agga (f.) (also occasionally with l.) [cp. Sk. argala
& argal to *areg to protect, ward off, secure etc., as in Ags.
reced house; *aleg in Sk. rakati to protect, Gr. id.,
Ags. ealh temple. Cp. also *areq in Gr. = Lat. arceo,
Orcus, Ohg rigil bolt.] a contrivance to fasten anything for security or obstruction: 1. a bolt or cross bar Vin i.290; D
i.89 ( kotei to knock upon the cross bar; a. = kava
DA i.252); A iv.359 (id.); S. iv.290; A i.101 = 137 = iv.231.
(phusit with fastened bolts, securely shut Th 1,385 (id.); Vin
iv.47; J. v.293 ( uppeti to lift up the cross bar. 2. a
strip of cloth for strengthening a dress etc., a gusset Vin i.290
(+ tunna), 392 (Bdhgh on MV viii.21, 1); J i.8 (+ tunna) vi.71
( datv); Vin iv.121.
-dna putting in a gusset J i.8. -phalaka the post or
board, in which the cross bar is fixed (cp. vai) M iii.95.
-vai = phalaka Vin ii.120, 148. -sci bolting pin M i.126.
Aggi [Vedic agni = Lat. ignis. Besides the contracted form aggi
we find the diaeretic forms gini (q. v.) and aggini (see below)] fire. 1. fire, flames, sparks; conflagration, Vin ii.120
(fire in bathroom); M i.487 (anhro nibbuto f. gone out for
lack of fuel); S iv.185, 399 (sa updno jalati provided with
fuel blazes); Sn 62; Dh 70 (= asaniaggi DhA iii.71); J i.216
(sparks), 294 (pyre); ii.102; iii.55; iv.139; VvA 20 (aggimhi
tpana + udake temana). The var. phases of lighting
and extinguishing the fire are given at A iv.45: aggi ujjleti
(kindle, make burn), ajjhupekkhati (look after, keep up), nibbpeti (extinguish, put out), nikkhipati (put down, lay). Other
phrases are e. g. aggi jleti (kindle) J ii.44; gahti (make or
take) J i.494 (cp. below b); deti (set light to) J i.294; nibbpeti
(put out) It 93; Sdhp 552. aggi nibbyati the f. goes out S
ii.85; M i.487; J i.212 (udake through water); Miln 304. aggi
nibbuto the f. is extinguished (cp. nibbna) J i.61; Miln 304.
aggin dahati to burn by means of fire, to set fire to A i.136,
199; PvA 20. udar the fire supposed to regulate digestion
PvA 33; cp. Dial. ii.208, note 2; kappuhn the universal conflagration J iii.185; dv a wood or jungle fire J i.212;
na the burning of a reed J vi.100; padp fire of a lamp Miln
47. 2. the sacrificial fire: In one or two of the passages in
the older texts this use of Aggi is ambiguous. It may possibly
be intended to denote the personal Agni, the fire god. But
the commentators do not think so, and the Jtaka commentary,
when it means Agni, has the phrase Aggi Bhagav the Lord
Agni, e. g. at J i.285, 494; ii.44. The ancient ceremony of
Aggika (adj.) [aggi + ka] one who worships the fire Vin i.71 (jailaka); D ii.339 sq. (jaila); S i.166 (brhmaa).
Aggha
Anketi
Aggha [see agghati] 1. price, value, worth, Miln 244; Mhvs 26,
22; 30, 76; VvA 77. mahaggha (adj.) of great value J
iv.138; v.414; vi.209; Pv ii.118 . See also mahraha. appaggha
(adj.) of little value J. iv.139; v.414. anaggha (nt.) pricelessness, J v.484; cattari anagghni the four priceless things,
viz. setacchatta, nisdanapallanka, dhraka, pdaphik DhA
iii.120, 186. (adj.) priceless, invaluable J v.414; Mhvs 26, 25;
DhA iv.216. agghena (instr.) for the price of Vin ii.52, cp.
Bdhgh on p. 311, 312. 2. an oblation made to a guest D
ii.240; J iv.396 = 476.
-kraka a valuator J i.124. -pada valuableness J v.473
(lakkhaa nma manta).
Aghammiga [to agha1 ?] a sort of wild animal J vi.247 (= aghvaha miga) 507 (= aghakara). Cp. BSk. agharika Divy 475.
Aghavin (adj.) [to agha1 ] suffering pain, being in misery Sn 694
(= dukkhita SnA 489).
Anka1 = anga, sign, mark, brand Miln 79; karana branding J
iv.366, 375. See also anketi.
Anka2 [Vedic anka hook, bent etc., anc, cp. ankura & ankusa. Gr.
elbow, = anchor; Lat. uncus nail; Ohg. angul
= E. angle] (a.) a hook J v.322 = vi.218 (v. l. BB anga).
(b.) the lap (i. e. the bent position) or the hollow above the
hips where infants are carried by Hindoo mothers or nurses
(ankena vahati) Vin ii.114; D ii.19 (anke pariharati to hold
on one's lap or carry on one's hips), 20 (nisdpeti seat on
one's lap); M ii.97 (ankena vahitv); Th 1, 299; J i.262 (anke
nisinna); ii.127, 236; vi.513; DhA i.170 (ankena vahitv)
PvA 17 (nisdpeti).
Agghika (nt.) () [= agghiya] an oblation, decoration or salutation in the form of garlands, flowers etc., therefore meaning "string, garland" (cp. Sinhalese g "festoon work") Mhvs
19, 38 (pupph) 34, 73 (ratan) 34, 76 (dhaj); Dvs i.39
(pupphamay); v.51 (kusum).
10
Anketi
Angraka
limb or the other, limbs great and small M i.81; J vi 20, used
(a) collectively: the condition of perfect limbs, or adj. with
perfect limbs, having all limbs Pv ii.1212 (= paripua sabbanga paccangavat PvA 158); SnA 383; DhA i.390; ThA
288; Sdhp 83 fig. rathassa angapaccangan M i.395; sabbanga
paccangni all limbs Miln 148. (b) distributively (cp.
similar redupl. formations like chiddvachidda, sehnu
sehi, khakhaa, cuavicua) limb after limb, one limb
after the other (like angamangni above 1), piecemeal M i.133
(e daseyya), 366; J i.20; iv.324 (chinditv). -paccangat
the condition or state of perfect limbs, i. e. a perfect body
VvA 134 (suvisuddh). -paccangin having all limbs (perfect) D i.34 (sabbanga peccang); PvA 189. -rga painting or rouging the body Vin ii.107 (+ mukha).
-lahi
sprout, offshoot ThA 226. -vta gout Vin i.205. -vijj
the art of prognosticating from marks on the body, chiromantics, palmistry etc. (cp. above 3) D i.9 (see expl. at DA i.93);
J i.290 (ya cheka clever in fortune telling); nubhva
the power of knowing the art of signs on the body J ii.200;
v.284; phaka one who in versed in palmistry etc. J ii.21,
250; v.458. -vekalla bodily deformity DhA ii.26. -sattha
the science of prognosticating from certain bodily marks DA
i.92. -sambhra the combination of parts Miln 28 = S i.135;
Miln 41. -hetuka a species of wild birds, living in forests J
vi.538.
Ankola [dial.
for ankura] a species of tree Alangium
Hexapetalum J vi.535. Cp. next.
Ankolaka = ankola J iv.440; v.420.
Anga (nt.) [Vedic anga, anc cp. Lat. angulus = angle, corner
etc., ungulus finger ring = Sk. angulya. See also anka, anguha & angula] (1) (lit.) a constituent part of the body, a limb,
member; also of objects: part, member (see cpd. sambhra);
uttamanga the reproductive organ J v.197; also as "head"
at ThA 209. Usually in cpds. (see below, esp. paccanga),
as sabbanga-kaly perfect in all limbs Pv iii.35 (= sobhaa
sabbanga paccang PvA 189) and in redupln. anga-mangni limb by limb, with all limbs (see also below anga +
paccanga) Vin iii.119; Vv 382 (ehi naccamna); Pv ii.1210 ,
13 18
, (sunakho te khdati). (2) (fig.) a constituent part of
a whole or system or collection, e. g. uposath the vows of
the fast J i.50; bhavanga the constituents or the condition of
becoming (see bhava & cp. Cpd. 265 sq.); bojjhanga (q. v.).
Esp. with numerals: cattri angni 4 constituents A ii.79 (viz.
sla, samdhi, pa. vimutti and rpa, vedan, sa, bhava),
ahangika (q. v.) magga the Path with its eight constituents
or the eightfold Path (KhA 85: ah angni ass ti) navanga
Buddha ssana see nava. (3) a constituent part as characteristic, prominent or distinguishing, a mark, attribute, sign,
quality D i.113 sq., 117 (imin p angena by this quality, or:
in this respect, cp. below 4; DA i.281 expls tena kra ena).
In a special sense striking (abnormal) sign or mark on the body
D i.9, from which a prophesy is made (: hattha pddisu
yena kenaci evarpena angena samanngato dghyu.. hot ti..
angasatthan = chiromantics DA i.92). Thus in combn. with
samanngata & sampanna always meaning endowed with
"good", superior, remarkable "qualities", e. g. J i.3 (sabbanga
sampanna nagara a city possessing all marks of perfection); ii.207. In enumn. with var. numerals: thi angehi
s. A i.115; cattri sotapannassa a D iii.227 = A iv.405 sq.;
pacanga vippahno (i. e. giving up the 5 hindrances, see
nvaraa) and pacanga samanngato (i. e. endowed with
the 5 good qualities, viz. the sla kkhandha, see kkhandha
ii.A d) S i.99 = A i.161; v.15, 29. Similarly the 5 attributes of
a brahmin (viz. sujta of pure birth, ajjhyaka a student of the
Vedas, abhirpa handsome, slava of good conduct, paita
clever) D i.119, 120. Eight qualities of a king D i.137. Ten
qualities of an Arahant (cp. dasa1 B 2) S iii.83; Kh iv.10
= KhA 88; cp. M i.446 (dasah angehi samanngato rao
assjniyo). (4) (modally) part, share, interest, concern;
ajjhattika anga my own part or interest (opp. bhira the
interest in the outside world). A i.16 sq. = S v.101 sq.; It 9.
rao anga an asset or profit for the king M i.446. Thus adv.
tadanga (see also ta i.a) as a matter of fact, in this respect, for
sure, certainly and tadangena by these means, through this,
therefore M i.492; A iv.411; Sdhp 455, 456; imin p angena
for that reason M ii.168. In compn. with verbs angi (ang):
angigata having limbs or ports, divided DA i.313; cp. samangi
( bhta).
-jta "the distinguishing member", i. e. sign of male or
female (see above 3); membrum virile and muliebre Vin i.191
(of cows); iii.20, 37, 205; J ii.359; Miln 124. -paccanga one
Angaa1 (nt.) [cp. Sk. angaa & na; to anga?] an open space,
a clearing, Vin ii.218; J i.109 (= manussnan sacaraa
hne anvae bhmibhge C.); ii.243, 290, 357; Dvs i.27.
cetiy an open space before a Chaitya Miln 366, DA i.191,
197; VvA 254. rj the empty space before the king's palace,
the royal square J i.124, 152; ii.2; DhA ii.45.
-hna a clearing (in a wood or park) J i.249, 421.
-pariyanta the end or border of a clearing J ii.200.
Angaa2 [prob. to anj, thus a variant of ajana, q. v.]; a speck
or freckle (on the face) A v.92, 94 sq. (+ raja). Usually in
neg. anangana (adj.) free from fleck or blemish, clear, (of
the mind) (opp. sngana Sn 279); D i.76; M i.24 sq.; 100 (+
raja); A ii.211; Sn 517 (+ vigata raja = anganan abhv
malna ca vigam... SnA 427), 622 = Dh 125 (= nikkilesa
DhA iii.34); Dh 236, 351; Pug 60; Nett 87.
Angada [cp. Sk. angada; prob. anga + da that which is given
to the limbs] a bracelet J v.9, 410 (citt, adj. with manifold
bracelets).
Angadin (adj.) [to angada] wearing a bracelet J v.9.
Angra (m. nt.) [Vedic angra] charcoal, burning coal, embers
A iii.97, 380, 407; J i.73; iii.54, 55; v.488; Sn 668; Sdhp 32.
kul the charcoal of the family, a squanderer S iv.324 (see under kula).
-kaha a pot for holding burning coal, a charcoal pan DA
i.261. -kapalla an earthenware pan for ashes DhA i.260; Dhs
A 333; VvA 142. -kammakara a charcoal burner J vi.209.
-ksu a charcoal pit M i.74, 365; Th 2, 491; J i.233; Sn 396;
ThA 288; DhA i.442; Sdhp 208. -pacchi a basket for ashes
DhA iv.191. -pabbata the mountain of live embers, the glowing mount (in Niraya) A i.141; Miln 303; PvA 221 (ropaa);
Sdhp 208. -masa roast meat Mhvs 10, 16. -masi ashes
DhA iii.309. -rsi a heap of burning coal J iii.55.
11
Angraka
Accasara
Acela (adj. n.) [a + cela] one who is not clothed, esp. t. t. for
an anti Buddhist naked ascetic D i.161, 165; iii.6, 12, 17
sq.; S i.78; J v.75.
Angin (adj.) limbed, having limbs or parts, fold, see catur &
pacc (under anga paccangin). f. angin having sprouts
or shoots (of a tree) Th 2, 297 (= ThA 226).
Anguha [cp. Sk. anguha, see etym. under anga] 1. the thumb
Vin iii.34; Miln 123; PvA 198. 2. the great toe J ii.92;
Mhvs 35, 43.
-pada thumb mark A iv.127 = S iii.154. -sineha love
drawn from the thumb, i. e. extraordinary love Pv iii.52 , cp.
PvA 198.
Accanta (adj. & adv. ) [ati + anta, lit. "up to the end"] 1.
uninterrupted, continuous, perpetual J i.223; Miln 413; VvA
71; PvA 73, 125, 266; Sdhp 288. 2. final, absolute, complete; adv. thoroughly S i.130 ( hataputt mhi); iii.13 = A
i.291 sq.; v.326 sq. (niha, yogakkhemin); Kvu 586 (niymat final assurance; cp. Kvu trsl. 340). 3. () exceedingly, extremely, very much A i.145 (sukhumla, extremely
delicate), Miln 26 (id.); Sn 794 (suddhi = param ttha accantasuddhi SnA 528); Th 1, 692 (ruci); Dh 162 (dusslya =
ekanta DhA iii.153).
Angula [Vedic angula, lit. "limblet" see anga for etym.] 1. a finger or toe M i.395 (vank angula karoti to bend the fingers,
v. l. anguli); A iii.6 (id.); J v 70 (go adj. with ox toes,
expld. by C. as with toes like an ox's tail; vv. ll. anguha and
angul). 2. a finger as measure, i. e. a finger breadth,
an inch Vin ii.294, 306 (dvangula 2 inches wide); Mhvs 19,
11 (ah); DhA iii.127 (ek).
-ahi (? cp. anga lahi) fingers (or toes) and bones
DA i.93. -anguli fingers and toes DhA iii.214. -antarik
the interstices between the fingers Vin iii.39; Miln 180; DhA
iii.214.
12
Accasara
Acchati
thus meaning "mindful of a fault"] 1. going beyond the limits (of proper behaviour), too self sure, overbearing, arrogant, proud S i.239 (v. l. accayasara caused by prolepsis of
foll. accaya); J iv.6 (+ atisara); DhA iv.230 (= expecting too
much). 2. going beyond the limits (of understanding), beyond grasp, transcendental (of paha a question) M i.304; S
v.218 (v. l. SS for BB reading ajjhapara). Cp. accasrin.
Accupahapeti at J v.124 is to be read with v.l. as apaccupahapeti (does not indulge in or care for).
Accussanna (adj.) [ati + ussanna] too full, too thick Vin ii.151.
Accyika (adj.) [fr. accaya] out of time, viz. 1. irregular, extraordinary J vi.549, 553. 2. urgent, pressing M i.149 (karaiyan
business) ii.112; J i.338; v.17 (nt.) hurry DhA i.18. See
also acceka.
Accha1 (adj.) [cp. Sk. accha, dial., to c (see accati), thus "shining"; cp. Sk. ka bald, bare and Vedic kvan bright. Monier
Williams however takes it as a + cha fr. chad, thus "not covered, not shaded"] clear, transparent Vin i.206 (kajika); D
i.76 (mai = tanucchavi DA i.221), 80 (udakapatta), 84 (udaka
rahada); M i.100; S ii.281 (patta); iii.105 (id.); A i.9; J
ii.100 (udaka); Vv 7910 (vri); DA i.113 (ygu).
-odaka having clear water, with clear water (of lotus
ponds) Vv 4411 ; 815 ; f. odik Vv 412 = 602 .
Accsanna (adj.) [ati + asanna] very near, too near PvA 42 (na a.
n'tidra neither too near nor too far, at an easy distance).
Acchita (adj.) [ati + ahita] very cruel, very unfriendly, terrible J
iv.46 = v.146 (= ati ahita C.) = vi.306 (id.).
Acci & (in verse) acc (f.) [Vedic arci m. & arcis nt. & f. to c,
cp. accati] a ray of light, a beam, flame S iv.290 (spelt acchi), 399; A iv.103; v.9; Sn 1074 (vuccati jlasikh Nd2 11); J
v.213; Miln 40; ThA 154 (dp ); Sdhp 250.
Accimant (adj.) [fr. acci, cp. Vedic arcimant & arcimant] flaming, glowing, fiery; brilliant Th 1, 527; J v.266; vi.248; Vv
388 .
Accha4 (adj.) [Ved. ka] hurtful, painful, bad DhA iv.163 (ruja).
Acchaka = accha2 , a bear J v.71.
Acchati [Vedic syati & ste, s; cp. Gr. ] 1. to sit, to sit
still Vin i.289; A ii.15; It 120 (in set carati tihati a. sayati,
where otherwise nisinna stands for acchati); Vv 741 (= nisdati
VvA 298); PvA 4. 2. to stay, remain, to leave alone Th 1,
936; J iv.306. 3. to be, behave, live Vin ii.195; D i.102; S
i.212; Vv 112 ; Pv iii.31 (= nisdati vasati PvA 188); Miln 88;
DhA i.424. In this sense often pleonastic for finite verb, thus
aggi karitv a. (= aggi karoti) D i.102; aggi paricaranto
a. (= aggi paricarati) DA i.270; tanta pasrento a. (= tan-
ac-
Acchati
Aja
their hearts full of wonder and surprise DhA iv.52; PvA 6, 50.
See also acchera & accheraka.
Acchar1 (f.) [etym. uncertain, but certainly dialectical; Trenckner connects it with cchurita (Notes 76); Childers compares
Sk. akara (see akkhara); there may be a connection with
akkhaa in akkhaa vedhin (cp. BSk. accha Divy 555),
or possibly a relation to + tsar, thus meaning "stealthily", although the primary meaning is "snapping, a quick sound"] the
snapping of the fingers, the bringing together of the finger
tips: 1. (lit.) acchara paharati to snap the fingers J ii.447;
iii.191; iv.124, 126; v.314; vi.366; DhA i.38, 424. As measure: as much as one may hold with the finger tips, a pinch
J v.385; DhA ii.273 (gahaamatta); cp. ekacchara matta
DhA ii.274. 2. (fig.) a finger's snap, i. e. a short moment,
in ekacchara-kkhae in one moment Miln 102, and in def.
of acchariya (q. v.) at DA i.43; VvA 329.
-sanghta the snapping of the fingers as signifying a short
duration of time, a moment, matta momentary, only for one
moment (cp. BSk. acchasanghta Divy 142) A i.10, 34, 38;
iv.396; Th 1, 405; 2, 67 (expld. at ThA 76 as ghaikmattam pi
khaa angulipohanamattam pi kla). -sadda the sound
of the snapping of a finger J iii.127.
Accharika (nt. or f.?) [fr. acchar2 ] in vdeti to make heavenly music (lit. the sounds of an acchar or heavenly nymph)
A iv.265.
Acchariya (adj. nt.) [cp. Sk. carya since Upanishads of
uncertain etym. The conventional etym. of Pli grammarians connects it with acchar1 (which is prob. correct &
thus reduces Sk. carya to a Sanskritisation of acchariya) viz.
Dhammapla: anabhiha ppavattitya accharpaharaa
yogga that which happens without a moment's notice, at the
snap of a finger; i. e. causally unconnected (cp. Goth. silda
leiks in similar meaning) VvA 329; and Buddhaghosa: acchar yoggan ti acchariya acchara paharitu yuttan ti
attho DA i.43] wonderful, surprising, strange, marvellous D
ii.155; M i.79; iii.118, 125, 144 (an); S iv.371; A i.181; Miln
28, 253; DhA iii.171; PvA 121; VvA 71 (an). As nt. often in
exclamations: how wonderful! what a marvel! J i.223, 279;
iv.138; vi.94 (a. vata bho); DhA iv.51 (aho a.); VvA 103 (aho
ti acchariyatthena nipto). Thus freq. combd. with abbhuta
= how wonderful & strange, marvellous, beyond comprehension, e. g. D i.2, 60, 206, 210; ii.8; and in phrase acchariy
abbhut dhamm strange & wonderful things, i. e. wonderful signs, portents marvels, M iii.118, 125; A iv.198; Miln 8;
also as adj. in phrase acchariyaabbhuta- (citta- )jt with
14
Aja
Ajjhatta
iv.363. -pada goat footed M i.134. -pla goatherd, in nigrodharukkha (Npl.) "goatherds' Nigrodha tree" Vin i.2 sq.
Dpvs i.29 (cp. M Vastu iii.302). -plik a woman goatherd
Vin iii.38. -lakkhaa "goat sign", i. e. prophesying from
signs on a goat etc. D i.9 (expld. DA i.94 as "evarpna ajna mansa khditabba evarpna na khditabban ti").
-laik (pl.) goats' dung, in phrase nimatt a. a cup full of
goats' dung (which is put down a bad minister's throat as punishment) J i.419; DhA ii.70; PvA 282. -vata "goats' habit", a
practice of certain ascetics (to live after the fashion of goats) J
iv.318.
aja pada refers to a stick cloven like a goat's hoof; so
also at Vism 161.
998; Dh 326; J i.279; iii.425 (read bahuta ajj; not with Kern,
Toev. s. v. as "food"); Pv i.117 (= idni PvA 59); PvA 6, 23;
Mhvs 15, 64. Freq. in phrase ajjatagge (= ajjato + agge(?)
or ajja tagge, see agga3 ) from this day onward, henceforth
Vin i.18; D i.85; DA i.235.
-kla (adv.) this morning J vi.180; -divasa the present
day Mhvs 32, 23.
Ajjatana (adj.) [cp. Sk. adyatana] referring to the day, today's,
present, modern (opp. pora) Th 1, 552; Dh 227; J ii.409.
dat. ajjatanya for today Vin i.17; PvA 171 & passim.
Ajjat (f.) [abstr. fr. ajja] the present time, in ajjata ca this very
day S i.83 (v. l. ajjeva).
Ajjati [Vedic arjati, j, a variant of arh, see arahati] to get, procure, obtain J iii.263 (?). pp. ajjita (q. v.).
Ajaka a goat, pl. goats Vin ii.154. f. ajik J iii.278 & ajiy J
v.241.
Ajjava (adj. n.) [cp. Sk. rjava, to ju, see uju] straight, upright (usually combd. with maddava gentle, soft) D iii.213; A
i.94; ii.113; iii.248; Sn 250 (+ maddava), 292 (id.); J iii.274;
Dhs 1339; Vbh 359 (an); SnA 292 (= ujubhva), 317 (id.).
Ajjavat (f.) [fr. prec.] straight forwardness, rectitude, uprightness Dhs 1339. (+ ajimhat & avankat).
Ajamoja [Sk. ajamoda, cp. Sk. ajj] cummin seed VvA 186.
Aj (f.) a she goat J iii.125; iv.251.
Ajjuho (adv.) [haplology fr. ajja juho; see juh] this moonlight night Vin i.25; iv.80.
Ajina (nt.) [Vedic ajina, to aja, orig. goats' skin] the hide of the
black antelope, worn as a garment by ascetics D i.167; Sn
1027; J i.12, 53; iv.387; v.407. kharjina a rough skin (as
garment) M i.343; S iv.118; A ii.207; Sn 249 (= kharni a
cammni SnA 291). dantjina? ivory (q. v.).
-khipa a cloak made of a network of strips of a black antelope's hide D i.167; S i.117; A i.240, 295; ii.206; Vin i.306;
iii.34; J vi.569. -pavei a cloth of the size of a couch made
from pieces of ant. skin sewn together Vin i.192; D i.7 (= ajina
cammehi macappamena sibbitv kat pavei DA i.87);
A i.181. -s a garment of skins (= ajina camma s
DhA iv.156) Dh 394 = J i.481 = iii.85.
Ajjuna [Vedic arjuna, to raj; cp. Gr. white, silver, Lat. argentum] the tree Pentaptera Arjuna J vi.535; DhA
i.105 (rukkha).
Ajjh- Assimilation group of adhi + vowel.
Ajjhag [adhi + ag 3rd sg. pret. of adhigacchati (q. v. for similar forms) he came to, got to, found, obtained, experienced
S i.12 (vimna); Sn 225 (expld. at KhA 180 by vindi pailabhi), 956 (rati; expld. at Nd1 457 by adhigacchi); It 69 (jtimaraa); Dh 154 (tahna khaya); Vv 327 (visesa attained distinction; expld. at VvA 135 by adhigata); 5021 (amata santi; expld. VvA 215 by v. l. SS adhigachi, T. adhigacchati).
Ajjhatta (adj. n.) [cp. Sk. adhytma, cp. att], that which
is personal, subjective, arises from within (in contrast to anything outside, objective or impersonal); as adv. & interior,
personal, inwardly (opp. bahiddh bhira etc. outward, outwardly); Cp. ajjhattika & see Dhs. trsl. 272. D i.37 (subjective, inward, of the peace of the 2nd jhna), 70 = A ii.210;
v.206 (inward happiness. a. sukkha = niyakajjhatta attano santne ti attho DA i.183 cp. DhsA 169, 338, 361); S
i.70, 169; ii..27 (katha kath hoti is in inward doubt), 40
(sukha dukkha); iii.180 (id.); iv.1 sg. (yatanni), 139,
196; v.74 (hita citta ajjhatta susahita suvimutta
a mind firm, inwardly well planted, quite set free), 110, 143,
263, 297, 390; A i.40 (rpasa), 272 (kmacchanda etc.);
ii.158. (sukhadukkha), 211; iii.86 (cetosamatha), 92 (vpasantacitta); iv.32 (sankhitta), 57 (itthindriya), 299 (citta),
15
Ajjhatta
Ajjhvuttha
Ajjhyaka [cp. Sk. adhyyaka, cp. ajjhayana] (a brahmin) engaged in learning the Veda (mantajjhyaka J vi.209; SnA
192), a scholar of the brahmanic texts, a studious, learned person D i.88, 120; iii.94; A i.163; iii.223; Sn 140 (kula: thus
for ajjhyakula Fsb.); Th 1, 1171; J i.3; vi.201, 498; DA i.247.
Ajjhvuttha [cp. Sk. adhyuita; pp. of ajjhvasati] inhabited, occupied (of a house) Vin ii.210; J i.145; ii.333; PvA 24 (ghara);
16
Ajjhvuttha
Ajjhomucchita
Nd2 16 (= ajjhiha).
Ajjhopanna (?) only found in one stock phrase, viz. gathita (q.
v.) mucchita ajjhopanna with ref. to selfishness, greed, bonds
of craving. The reading ajjhopanna is the lectio difficilior,
but the accredited reading ajjhosna seems to be clearer and
to harmonize better with the cognate ajjhosita & ajjhosna (n.)
in the same context. The confusion between the two is old
standing and hard to be accounted for. Trenckner under v. l. to
M i.162 on p. 543 gives ajjhopanna as BB (= adhi opanna).
The MSS. of Nd2 clearly show ajjhopanna as inferior reading,
which may well be attributable to the very frequent SS substitution of p for s (see Nd2 Introd. xix.). Besides this mixture of
vv. ll. with s and p there is another confusion between the vv.
ll. ajjhpanna and ajjhopanna which adds to the complication of the case. However since the evidence of a better reading between these two preponderates for ajjhopanna we may
consider the o as established, and, with a little more clearness
to be desired, may in the end decide for ajjhosna (q. v.),
which in this case would have been liable to change through
analogy with ajjhpanna, from which it took the and p. Cp.
also ajjhosita. The foll. is a synopsis of readings as preferred
or confused by the Ed. of the var. texts. 1. ajjhopanna as
T. reading: M i.162, 173, 369; A i.74; ii.28; iii.68, 242; Md
75, 76; DA i.59; as v. l.: D i.245. 2. ajjhosna as v. l.:
A i.74 (C. expls. ajjhosya gilitv hita); Nd2 under nissita &
passim; Ud 75, 76 (ajjhosanna); DA i.59 (id.). 3. ajjhpanna as T. reading: D i.245; iii.43, 46; S. ii.194, 270: iv.332
(ajjhapaa); A v.178, 181; Nd2 under nissita; Miln 401; as v.
l.: M i.162; A iii.242; Ud 75, 76.
Ajjhobhavati [adhi + ava + bhu, Sk. abhi] to overcome, overpower, destroy J ii.80 (aor. ajjhobhavi = adhibhavi C.).
Ajjhomucchita [pp. adhi + ava + mrch, cp. adhimuccita] stiffened out (in a swoon), lying in a faint (?) A iii.57 sq. (v. l.
ajjhomucta or muccita better: sarre attached to her body,
17
Ajjhomucchita
Ajita
Ajati1 [= Sk. jati, jyati to stretch, pull along, draw out, erect;
cp. Sk. ju straight, caus. irajyati; Gr. ; Lat. rego, rectus = erect. See also P. uju, achati, ajjita, naja nejja].
See aja, ajaya, ajali, ajasa.
Ajan (f.) [fr. ajana] a box for ointment, a collyrium pot Vin
i.203, 204; ii.135; iv.168; M ii.65 = Th 1, 773.
Ajanisalk (f.) a stick to put the ointment on with Vin i.203;
ii.135; J iii.419.
Ajaya (adj.) [from ajati1 ] straight J iii.12 (vv. ll. ajjava & and
jjava better?) expld by C. as ujuka, akuila. See also ajjava.
Should we assume misreading for ajasa?
Ajjhohata [pp. of ajjhoharati] having swallowed Sdhp 610 (balisa maccho viya: like a fish the fishhook).
Ajalik (f.) [= ajali] the raising of the hands as a sign of respectful salutation Vv 15 (expld at VvA 24 as dasanakha samodhna samujjala ajali sirasi paggahant gua visihna apacayna aksi).
Ajasa [Sk. jasa (?). Cp. rjava = P. ajjava, see ajati1 & ajaya] straight, straightforward (of a road) D i.235; J i.5; Th 2,
99; Vv 5020 (cp. VvA 215); VvA 84 (= akuila); Mhvs 25, 5;
Miln 217; Sdhp 328, 595. Cp. pajasa.
Ajita
Aadatthu
19
Aadatthu
Aita
cp. also Nd1 168); Miln 133; VvA 58; PvA 97, 114.
-dasa sure seeing, seeing everything, all pervading D
i.18; iii.135, 185; A ii.24; iii.202; iv.89, 105; It 15.
Aa2 [cp. Sk. artha, see also attha 5 b] lawsuit, case, cause Vin
iv.224; J ii.2, 75; iv.129 ( vinicchinti to judge a cause),
150 ( treti to see a suit through); vi.336.
Aa3 [Sk. rta, pp. of ardati, d to dissolve, afflict etc.; cp. Sk.
rdra (= P. adda and alla); Gr. to moisten, dirt.
See also ayati & aita] distressed, tormented, afflicted; molested, plagued, hurt Sn 694 (+ vyasanagata; SnA 489 tura);
Th 2, 439 (= aita ThA 270), 441 (= pita ThA 271); J iv.293
(= tura C.); Vv 809 (= attita upadduta VvA 311). Often :
iaa oppressed by debt M i.463; Miln 32; cht tormented by
hunger VvA 76; vedan afflicted by pain Vin ii.61; iii.100; J
i.293; scik (read for scikaha) pained by stitch Pv iii.23 .
-ssara cry of distress Vin iii.105; S ii.255; J i.265; ii.117;
Miln 357; PvA 285.
Atvin (adj. n.) [from jnti] one who has complete insight DhsA 291.
-indriya (tv indr.) the faculty of one whose knowledge
is made perfect Dhs 555 (cp. Dhs trsl. 150) and same loci as
under aindriya (see a).
Aoa see aa B 2 c.
Ahamna [Sk. anna, ppr. med. of anti, a to eat] eating,
taking food; enjoying: only SS at Sn 240; all MSS at 239 have
20
Aita
Aha
Aha
Aha
eight nails or claws J vi.354 (: ekekasmi pde dvinna dvinna khurna vasena C.). -nava eight or nine DhA iii.179.
-pada 1. a chequered board for gambling or playing drafts
etc., lit. having eight squares, i. e. on each side (DA i.85:
ekekya pantiy aha aha padni ass ti), cp. dasapada D
i.6. 2. eightfold, folded or plaited in eight, cross plaited
(of hair) Th 1, 772 (ahpada kat kes); J ii.5 (hapana
= cross plaiting). -padaka a small square (1/8), i. e. a
patch Vin i.297; ii.150. -pda an octopod, a kind of (fabulous) spider (or deer?) J v.377; vi.538; cp. Sk. aapda =
arabha a fabulous eight legged animal. -mangala having eight anspicious signs J v.409 (expld. here to mean a horse
with white hair on the face, tail, mane, and breast, and above
each of the four hoofs). -vanka with eight facets, lit. eight
crooked, i. e. polished on eight sides, of a jewel J vi.388.
-vidha eightfold Dhs 219.
Aha2 see attha.
Ahaka (adj.) [Sk. aaka] 1. eightfold Vin i.196 = Ud 59
(vaggikni); VvA 75 = DhA iii.104 (bhatta). 2. (f.)
the eight day of the lunar month (cp. aham), in phrase rattsu antar ahaksu in the nights between the eighths, i. e.
the 8th day before and after the full moon Vin i.31, 288 (see
Vin Texst i.130n ); M i.79; A i.136; Miln 396; J i.390. 3.
(nt.) an octad Vv 672 (ah eight octads = 64); VvA 289, 290.
On sabbahaka see aha B 1 a. See also antara.
Ahama (num. ord.) [Sk. aama, see aha1 ] the eighth Sn 107,
230 (cp. KhA 187), 437. f. the eighth day of the lunar
half month (cp. ahak) A i.144; Sn 402; Vv 166 (in all three
pass. as pakkhassa ctuddas pacadas ca aham); A i.142;
Sn 570 (ito atthami, scil. divase, loc.).
Aha1 (& addha) [etym. uncertain, Sk. ardha] one half, half;
usually in compn. (see below), like diyaha 1 1/2 (sata 150)
PvA 155 (see as to meaning Stede, Peta Vatthu p. 107). Note.
aha is never used by itself, for "half" in absolute position
upaha (q. v.) is always used.
-akkhika with furtive glance ("half an eye") DhA iv.98.
-aha half of eight, i. e. four (cp. ahaha) S ii.222
(ratana); J vi.354 (pda quadruped; v. l. for ahaha).
-ahaka 1/2 an ahaka (measure) DhA iii.367. -uha [cp.
Mahrr form cauha = Sk. caturtha] three and a half J i.82;
iv.180; v.417, 420; DhA i.87; Mhvs 12, 53. -ocitaka half
plucked off J i.120. -karsa ( matta) half a k. in extent
VvA 64 (cp. aha karsa). -kahpaa 1/2 kahpaa A
v.83. -ksika (or ya) worth half a thousand ksiyas (i. e.
of Benares monetary standard) Vin i.281 (kambala, a woollen
garment of that value; cp. Vin Texts ii.195); ii.150 (bimbohanni, pillows; so read for ahakyikni in T.); J v.447 (a
ksigaik for a ksiya a courtezan who charges that
price, in phrase a k gaik viya na bahunna piy
manp). -kumbha a half ( filled) pitcher Sn 721. -kusi
(tt. of tailoring) a short intermediate cross seam Vin i.287.
-kosa half a room, a small room J vi.81 (= a kosantara C.).
-gvuta half a league J vi 55. -ca (vh vhi) 1/2 a measure (of rice) Miln 102, perhaps misread for ahha (ha =
22
Aha
Ati
Aha2 (adj.) [Sk. hya fr. ddha pp. of dh, dhnote & dhyate
(see ijjhati) to thrive cp. Gr. thrive, Lat. alo to nourish. Cp. also Vedic i refreshment & P. iddhi power. See
also hiya] rich, opulent, wealthy, well to do; usually
in combn. with mahaddhana & mahbhoga of great wealth
& resources (foll. by pahta jtarparajata pahta vittpakaraa etc.). Thus at D i.115, 134, 137; iii.163; Pug 52;
DhA i.3; VvA 322; PvA 3, 78 etc. In other combn. Vv 314
(kula); Nd2 615 (Sakka = aho mahaddhano dhanav); DA
i.281 (= issara); DhA ii.37 (kula); Sdhp 270 (sataskh), 312
(gu), 540 sq. (id.), 561.
Aha [Sk. ahna, day, see ahan] day, only as in apar, pubb,
majjh, sy, q. v.
Atakkaka (adj.) [a + takka2 ] not mixed with buttermilk J yi.21.
Ataccha (nt.) [a + taccha2 ] falsehood, untruth D i.3; J vi.207.
Ati (indecl.) [sk. ati = Gr. moreover, yet, and; Lat. et and,
Goth. ip; also connected with Gr. but, Lat. at but (=
over, outside) Goth. appan] adv. and prep. of direction (forward motion), in primary meaning "on, and further", then "up
to and beyond". I. in abstr. position adverbially (only as ttg.):
in excess, extremely, very (cp. ii.3) J vi.133 (ati uggata C. =
accuggata T.), 307 (ati ahita C. = acchita T.).
II. as prefix, meaning. 1. on to, up to, towards, until);
as far as: accanta up to the end; aticchati to go further, pass on;
atipta "falling on to"; attack slaying; atimpeti to put damage
on to, i. e. to destroy. 2. over, beyond, past, by, trans
; with verbs: (a.) trs. atikkamati to pass beyond, surpass;
atimaati to put one's "manas" over, to despise; atirocati to
surpass in splendour. (b.) intr. atikkanta passed by; atikkama
traversing; aticca transgressing; atta past, gone beyond.
Also with verbal derivations: accaya lapse, also sin, transgres-
23
Ati
Atighora
sion ("going over"); atireka remainder, left over; atisaya overflow, abundance; atisra stepping over, sin. 3. exceedingly,
in a high or excessive degree either very (much) or too (much);
in nominal compn. (a), rarely also in verbal compn. see (b).
(a) with nouns & adj.: sanna too near; uttama the very highest; udaka too much water; khippa too soon; dna excessive
alms giving; drua very cruel; dgha extremely long; dra
too near; deva a super god pago too early; blha too much;
bhra a too heavy load; manpa very lovely; manohara very
charming; mahant too great; vikla very inconvenient; vela
a very long time; sambdha too tight, etc. etc. (b.) with
verb: atibhujati to eat excessively.
III. A peculiar use of ati is its' function in reduplication compounds, expressing "and, adding further, and
so on, even more, etc." like that of the other comparing or contrasting prefixes a (), anu, ava, pai, vi (e.
g. khakhaa, sehnusehi, chiddvacchidda, angapaccanga, cuavicua). In this function it is however restricted
to comparatively few expressions and has not by far the wide
range of (q. v.), the only phrases being the foll. viz. cakkticakka mactimaca bandhati to heap carts upon carts,
couches upon couches (in order to see a procession) Vin iv.360
(Bdhgh); J ii.331; iv.81; DhA iv.61. -devtideva god upon
god, god and more than a god (see atideva); mntimna all
kinds of conceit; vanktivanka crooked all over J i.160.
IV. Semantically ati is closely related to abhi, so that in consequence of dialectical variation we frequently find ati in Pli,
where the corresp. expression in later Sk. shows abhi. See e.
g. the foll. cases for comparison: accuha ati jta, pita
brheti, vassati, vyati, veheti.
Note The contracted (assimilation ) form of ati before
vowels is acc- (q. v.). See also for adv. use atiriva, ativiya,
atva.
Atigacchati [ati + gacchati] to go over, i. e. to overcome, surmount, conquer, get the better of, only in pret. (aor.) 3rd
sg. accag (q. v. and see gacchati 3) Sn 1040; Dh 414 and
accagam (see gacchati 2) Vin ii.192; D i.85; S ii.205; DA
i.236 (= abhibhavitv pavatta). Also 3rd pl. accagu It 93,
95.
24
Atighora
Atipta
Atidrua (adj.) [Sk. atidrua, ati + drua] very cruel, extremely fierce Pv iii.73 .
Atidiv (adv.) [ati + div] late in the day, in the afternoon Vin
i.70 (+ atiklena); S i.200; A iii.117.
Atidgha (adj.) [ati + dgha] too long, extremely long J iv. 165;
Pv ii.102 ; VvA 103 (opp. atirassa).
Atidukkha [ati + dukkha] great evil, exceedingly painful excessive suffering PvA 65; Sdhp 95. In atidukkhavca PvA 15
ati belongs to the whole cpd., i. e. of very hurtful speech.
Aticitra (adj.) [ati + citra] very splendid, brilliant, quite exceptional Miln 28.
Atidra (adj.) [ati + dra] very or too far Vin i.46; J ii.154;
Pv ii.965 = DhA iii.220 (vv. ll. suvidre); PvA 42 (opp.
accsanna).
Aticca (grd.) [ger. of ati + eti, ati + i] 1. passing beyond, traversing, overcoming, surmounting Sn 519, 529, 531. Used adverbially = beyond, in access, more than usual, exceedingly Sn
373, 804 (= vassasata atikkamitv Nd1 120). 2. failing,
transgressing, sinning, esp. committing adultery J v,424; VvA
72,
Atideva [ati + deva] a super god, god above gods, usually Ep. of
the Buddha S i.141; Th 1, 489; Nd2 307 (cp. adhi); Miln 277.
atidevadeva id. Miln 203, 209. devtideva god over the gods
(of the Buddha) Nd2 307 a.
Aticchatta [ati + chatta] a "super" sunshade, a sunshade of extraordinary size & colours DhsA 2.
Atitta (adj.) [ati + jta, perhaps ati in sense of abhi, cp. abhijta]
well born, well behaved, gentlemanly It 14 (opp. avajta).
Atithi [Sk. atithi of at = at, see aati; orig. the wanderer, cp.
Vedic atithin wandering] a guest, stranger, newcomer D i.117
(= gantuka navaka phuaka DA i.288); A ii.68; iii.45,
260; J iv.31, 274; v.388; Kh viii.7 (= n atthi assa hiti yamhi
v tamhi v divase gacchat ti atithi KhA 222); VvA 24 (=
gantuka).
25
Atipta
Atirocati
Atimanda(ka) (adj.) [ati + manda] too slow, too weak Sdhp 204,
273, 488.
Atimamyati [ati + mamyati, cp. Sk. atmamyate in diff.
meaning = envy] to favour too much, to spoil or fondle J ii.316.
Atimahant (adj.) [ati + mahant] very or too great J i.221; PvA 75.
Atipita (adj.) [ati + pita] too much beloved, too dear, too
lovely DhA v.70.
Atibaddha [pp. of atibandhati; cp. Sk. anubaddha] tied to, coupled J i.192 = Vin iv.5.
Atipita [ati + pita, cp. Sk. abhipita] pressed against, oppressed, harassed, vexed J v.401 (= atighita).
Atippago (adv.) [cp. Sk. atiprage] too early, usually elliptical = it
is too early (with inf. caritu etc.) D i.178; M i.84; A iv.35.
Atibha (adj.) [ati + bha] very great or strong PvA 178; nt.
adv. too much D i.93, 95; M i.253.
Atiycaka (adj.) [ati + ycaka] one who asks too much Vin
iii.147.
Atiratti (adv.) [ati + ratti; cp. atidiv] late in the night, at midnight J i.436 (opp. atipabhte).
Atibhra [ati + bhra] too heavy a load Miln 277 (ena sakaassa
akkho bhijjati).
Atirassa (adj.) [ati + rassa] too short (opp. atidgha) Vin iv.7; J
vi.457; VvA 103.
Atirj [ati + rj] a higher king, the greatest king, more than a
king DhA ii.60; Miln 277.
Atiritta (adj.) [pp. of ati + rlc, see ritta] left over, only as neg.
an applied to food, i. e. food which is not the leavings of a
meal, fresh food Vin i.213 sq, 238; ii.301; iv.82 sq., 85.
Atimaati [Sk. atimanyate; ati + man] to despise, slighten, neglect Sn 148 (= KhA 247 atikkamitv maati); Dh 365, 366;
J ii.347; Pv i.76 (issa, v. l. asi = atikkamitv avamai
PvA 37); PvA 36; Sdhp 609.
Atimaan (f.) [abstr. to prec., cp. atimna] arrogance, contempt, neglect Miln 122.
26
Atirocati
Atihita
Ativankin (adj.) [ati + vankin] very crooked J i.160 (vanktivankin crooked all over; cp. ati iii.).
Ativela (adj.) [ati + vela] excessive (of time); nt. adv. a very
long time; excessively D i.19 (= atikla aticiran ti attho DA
i.113); M i.122; Sn 973 (see expln. at Nd1 504); J iii.103 = Nd1
504.
Atiloma (adj.) [ati + loma] too hairy, having too much hair J
vi.457 (opp. aloma).
Ativattar2 [Sk. *ativart, n. ag. to ati vattati] one who overcomes or is to be overcome Sn 785 (svtivatt = durativatt
duttar duppatar Nd1 76).
Ativasa (adj.) [ati + vasa fr. vas] being under somebody's rule,
dependent upon (c. gen.) Dh 74 (= vase vattati DhA ii.79).
Atisambdha (adj.) [ati + sambdha] too tight, crowded or narrow DhA i.310; iii.310 = VvA 68; cp. atincaka. f. abstr.
atisambdhat the state of being too narrow J i.7.
Ativkya (nt.) [ati + vac, cp. Sk. ativda, fr. ati + vad] abuse,
blame, reproach Dh 320, 321 (= aha anariyavohra
vasena pavatta vtikkama vacana DhA iv.3); J vi.508.
Atisaya [cp. Sk. atiaya, fr. ati + ] superiority, distinction, excellence, abundance VvA 135 (= visesa); PvA 86; Dvs ii.62.
Ativta [ati + vta] too much wind, a wind which is too strong, a
gale, storm Miln 277.
Ativyati [ati + vyati] to fill (excessively) with an odour or perfume, to satiate, permeate, pervade Miln 333 (+ vyati; cp.
abhivyati ibid 385).
Ativha [fr. ati + vah, cp. Sk. ativahati & abhivha] carrying,
carrying over; a conveyance; one who conveys, i. e. a conductor, guide Th 1, 616 (said of sla, good character); J v.433.
Cp. ativhika.
Atisya (adv.) [ati + sya] very late, late in the evening J v.94.
Atisra [fr. ati + s, see atisarati. Cp. Sk. atisra in diff. meaning
but BSk. atisra (stisra) in the same meaning) going too far,
overstepping the limit, trespassing, false step, slip, danger Vin
i.55 (stisra), 326 (id.); S i.74; M iii.237; Sn 889 (atisra
dihiyo = dihigatni Nd1 297; going beyond the proper limits
of the right faith), J v.221 (dhamm), 379; DhA i.182; DhsA
28. See also atisara.
Ativiya (adv.) [Sk. atva] = ati + iva, orig. "much like" like an
excess = excessive ly. There are three forms of this expression, viz. (1) ati + iva in contraction atva (q. v.); (2) ati
+ iva with epenthetic r: atiriva D ii.264 (v. l. SS. atva); Sn
679, 680, 683; SnA 486; (3) ati + viya (the doublet of iva)
= ativiya J i.61, 263; DhA ii.71 (a. upakra of great service);
PvA 22, 56, 139.
27
Atihita
Attan
28
Attan
Attha
29
Attha
Attha
Attha
Atthika
31
Atthika
Adda
kho pana and yet D i.139. atha ca pana on the other hand J
i.279. atha v or (after prec. ca), nor (after prec. na) Sn 134;
Dh 140, 271; Pv i.41 ; ii.14 . ath v pi Sn 917, 921.
Athabbaa [Vedic atharvan; as regards etym. see Walde, Lat.
Wtb. under ater] (1) the Atharva Veda DA i.247 = SnA 447
(veda). (2) one who is familiar with the (magic formulas
of the) Atharvaveda J vi.490 (sthabbaa=sahatthivejja, with
the elephant healer or doctor). See also thabbaa.
Atthit (f.) [f. abstr. fr. atthi cp. atthibhva] state of being, existence, being, reality M i.486; S ii.17 (a c eva natthita ca to
be and not to be); iii.135; J v.110 (kassaci atthita v natthita v jnhi see if there is anybody or not); DhsA 394.
Often in abl. atthitya by reason of, on account of, this being
so DhA iii.344 (idamatthitya under this condition) PvA 94,
97, 143.
Ada (adj.) () [to ad, see adeti, cp. ga, ha, da etc.] eating S
iv.195 (kihda eating corn); J ii.439 (vantda = vantakhdaka
C.).
Atra (adv.) [Sk. atra] here; atra atra here & there J i.414 = iv.5
(in expln. of atriccha).
Atraja (adj.) [Sk. *tma ja, corrupted form for attaja (see att)
through analogy with Sk. atra "here". This form occurs only
in J and similar sources, i. e. popular lore] born from oneself,
one's own, appl. to sons, of which there are 4 kinds enumd. ,
viz. atraja khettaja, dinnaka, antevsika p. Nd2 448. J
i.135; iii.103 = Nd1 504; J iii.181; v.465; vi.20; Mhvs 4, 12;
13, 4; 36, 57.
Adu (or du) (indecl.) [perhaps identical with adu, nt. of pron.
asu] part. of affirmation: even, yea, nay; always in emphatic
exclamations Vv 622 (= udhu VvA 258; v. l. SS. du) = Pv
iv.317 (du) = DhA i.31 (T. du, v. l. adu); Vv 631 (v. l. du);
J v.330 (T. du, C. adu; expld. on p. 331 fantastically as adu
ca adu ca kamma karoh ti). See also du.
Atha (indecl.) [Sk. atha, cp. atho] copulative & adversative part.
1. after positive clauses, in enumerations, in the beginning &
continuation of a story: and, and also, or; and then, now D
ii.2; iii.152, 199 (athpara etad avoca); M i.435; Sn 1006,
1007, 1017; Sn p. 126 (athpara etad avoca: and further,
something else); Dh 69, 119, 377; J ii.158; Pv ii.64 ; PvA 3,
8 (atha na and not), 70. 2. after negative clauses: but M
i.430; Sn 990, 1047; Dh 85, 136, 387; PvA 68. Often combd.
with other part., e. g. atha kho (pos. & neg.) now, and then;
but, rather, moreover Vin i.1; D i.141, 167, 174; A v.195; PvA
79, 221, 251. na atha kho na neither nor PvA 28. atha
Adeti [Sk. dayati, Caus. of atti, ad to eat, 1st sg. admi = Gr.
, Lat. edo; Goth. itan = Ohg. ezzan = E. eat] to eat. Pres.
ind. ademi etc. J v.31, 92, 197, 496; vi.106. pot. adeyya J
v.107, 392, 493.
Adda1 [cp. Sk. rdraka] ginger J i.244 (singivera).
Adda2 & Add 3rd sg. aor. of *dassati; see *dassati 2. a.
Adda3 (adj.) [Sk. rdra, from dati or ardati to melt, cp. Gr.
to moisten, dirt; see also alla] wet, moist, slippery J iv.353; vi.309; Miln 346.
-valepana "smeared with moisture", i. e. shiny, glitter-
32
Adda
Adhara
Addita (pp.) [see aita which is the more correct spelling] afflicted, smarted, oppressed J i.21; ii.407; iii.261; iv.295; v.53,
268; Th 1, 406; Mhvs 1, 25; PvA 260; Sdhp 37, 281.
Addha1 (num.) [= aha, q. v.] one half, half () D i.166
(msika); A ii.160 (msa); J i.59 (yojana); iii. 189 (msa).
Addha2 (adj.) [= adda3 , Sk. rdra] soiled, wet; fig. attached to,
intoxicated with (cp. sineha) M ii.223 (na anaddhabhta attna dukkhena addhabhveti he dirties the impure self with
ill); S iii.1 (addhabhto kyo impure body); J vi.548 (nakha
with dirty nails, C. ptinakha).
Addhan (in cpds. addha) [Vedic adhvan, orig. meaning "stretch,
length", both of space & time. Cases: nom. addh, gen.
dat. addhuno, instr. addhun, acc. addhna, loc. addhani;
pl. addh. See also addhna] 1. (of space) a path, road, also
journey (see cpds. & derivations); only in one ster. phrase J
iv.384 = v.137 (pathaddhuno paarase va cando, gen. for
loc. addhani, on his course, in his orbit; expld. at iv.384 by
ksa patha sankhtassa addhuno majjhe hito and at
v.137 by pathaddhagato addha pathe gaganamajjhe hito);
Pv iii.31 (pathaddhani paarase va cando; loc. same meaning as prec., expld. at PvA 188 by attano pathabhte addhani
gaganatala magge). This phrase (pathaddhan) however is
expld. by Kern (Toev. s. v. pathaddu) as "gone half way",
i. e. on full moon day. He rejects the expln. of C. 2.
(of time) a stretch of time, an interval of time, a period, also a
lifetime (see cpds.); only in two standard applications viz. (a)
as mode of time (past, present & future) in tayo addh three
divisions of time (atita, angata, paccuppanna) D iii.216; It 53,
70. (b) in phrase dgha addhna (acc.) a very long time
A ii.1, 10 (digha addhna sasra); Sn 740 (dgha
addhna sasra); Dh 207 (dgha addhna socati); J i.137.
gen. dghassa addhuno PvA 148 (gatatt because a long time
has elapsed), instr. dghena addhun S i.78; A ii.118; PvA 28.
-yu duration of life A ii.66 (dgha a long lifetime.
-gata one who has gone the road or traversed the space or span
of life, an old man [cp. BSk. adhvagata M Vastu ii.150], always combd. with vayo anuppatto, sometimes in ster. formula with jia & mahallaka Vin ii.188; D i.48 (cp. DA
i.143); M i.82; Sn pp. 50, 92; PvA 149. -g [Vedic adhvaga]
a wayfarer, traveller, journeyman Th 255 = S i.212 (but the
latter has panthagu, v. l. addhag); J iii.95 (v. l. patthagu =
panthagu); Dh 302.
33
Adhara
Adhikuan
Adhi [Vedic adhi; base of demonstr. pron. a + suffix dhi, corresponding in form to Gr. "on this" = here, cp.
where, in meaning equal to adv. of direction Gr. (toward)
= Ohg. zuo, E. to].
A. Prep. and pref. of direction & place: (a) as direction
denoting a movement towards a definite end or goal = up to,
over, toward, to, on (see C 1 a). (b) as place where (prep. c.
loc. or abs.) = on top of, above, over, in; in addition to. Often
simply deictic "here" (e. g.) ajjhatta = adhi + tman "this self
here" (see C 1 b).
B. adhi is freq. as modification pref., i. e. in loose compn.
with n. or v. and as first part of a double prefixcpd., like ajjh
(adhi + ), adhippa (adhi + pra), but never occurs as a fixed
base, i. e. as 2nd part of a pref. cpd., like in pacc (prati
+ ), pary (pari + ) or ava in paryava (pari + ava) or ud
in abhyud (abhi + ud), samud (sam + ud). As such (i. e.
modification) it is usually intensifying, meaning "over above,
in addition, quite, par excellence, super" (adhideva a super
god, cp. ati deva), but very often has lost this power
& become meaningless (like E. up in "shut up, fill up, join
up etc), esp. in double pref. cpds. (ajjhvasati "to dwell
here in" = vasati "to dwell in, to inhabit") (see C 2). In
the explns of P. Commentators adhi is often (sometimes far
fetchedly) interpreted by abhibh "overpowering" see e. g. C.
on adhihti & adhihita; and by virtue of this intens. meaning we find a close relationship between the prefixes ati, adhi
and abhi, all interchanging dialectically so that P. adhi often
represents Sk. ati or abhi; thus adhi > ati in adhikusala, kodhita, jeguccha, brahm; adhi > abhi in adhippatthita, ptcti,
ppya, ppeta, bdheti, bh, vha. Cp. also ati iv.
C. The main applications of adhi are the foll.: 1. primary meaning (in verbs & verb derivations): either direction
in which or place where, depending on the meaning of the verb
determinate, either lit. or fig. (a) where to: adhiyita (adhi
+ ita) "gone on to or into" = studied; ajjhesita (adhi + esita)
"wished for"; kata "put to" i. e. commissioned; kra commission; gacchati "to go on to & reach it" = obtain; gama
attainment; gahti to overtake = surpass, peta (adhi + pra +
ita) "gone in to" = meant, understood; pya sense meaning,
intention; bhsati to speak to = address; mutta intent upon;
vacana "saying in addition" = attribute, metaphor, cp. Fr. sur
nom; vsna assent, vseti to dwell in, give in = consent.
(b) where: tihati (hti) to stand by = look after, perform; hna place where; vasati to inhabit; sayana "lying
in", inhabiting. 2. secondary meaning (as emphatic modification): (a) with nouns or adjectives: adhi jeguccha very
detestable; matta "in an extreme measure", pa supreme lord;
pacca lordship; pa higher, additional wisdom; vara the
very best; sla thorough character or morality. (b) with
verbs (in double pref. cpds.); adhi + ava: ajjhogheti
plunge into; ajjhohapeti to bring down to (its destination);
otthata covered completely; oharati to swallow right down.
adhi + : ajjhappatta having reached (the end); ajjhapita
quite overwhelmed; vuttha inhabited; rhati grown up
over; saya desire, wish (cp. Ger. n. Anliegen & v. daranliegen). adhi + upa: ajjhupagacchati to reach, obtain; upeti
34
Adhikuan
Adhipa
by akraena) samuppanna arisen without a cause, spontaneous, unconditioned D i.28 = Ud 69; D iii.33, 138; S ii.22
23 (sukhadukkha); A iii.440 (id.); Ps i.155; DA i.118 (=
akraa).
Adhihyaka (adj.) () superintending, watching, looking after, in kamma Mhvs 5, 175; 30, 98; kammanta DhA i.393.
Adhihita (adj.) [pp. of adhihti] 1. standing on (c. loc.),
esp. with the idea of standing above, towering over Vv 6330
(hemarathe a. = sakala hna abhibhavitv hita VvA 269).
(a) looked after, managed, undertaken, governed Vin i.57;
S v.278 (sv dhihita); PvA 141 (kammanta). (b) undertaking, bent on (c. acc.) Sn 820 (ekacariya).
Adhipa
Adhimuccitar
Adhibhsati [adhi + bhsati] to address, to speak to; aor. ajjhabhsi Vin ii.195; S i.103; iv.117; Sn p. 87; PvA 56, 90.
Adhibh (adj.) () [fr. adhi + bh, cp. adhibhavati & Sk. adhibh] overpowering, having power over; master, conqueror,
lord S iv.186 (anadhibh not mastering. For adhibhta the v.
l. abhi is to be preferred as more usual in this connection, see
abhibh); Sn 684 (miga; v. l. abhi).
Adhimatta (adj.) [adhi + matta of m] extreme, exceeding, extraordinary; nt. adv. extremely M i.152, 243; S iv. 160;
A ii.150; iv.241; J i.92; Pug 15; Miln 146, 189, 274, 290; Pv
ii.36 (= adhikatara PvA 86); DhA ii.85; cp. PvA 281.
Adhimuccati [Pass. of adhi + muc] 1. to be drawn to, feel attached to or inclined towards, to indulge in (c. loc.) S iii.225;
iv.185; A iv.24, 145 sq., 460; v.17; Pug 63. 2. to become
settled, to make up one's mind as to (with loc.), to become clear
about Vin i.209 (aor. mucci); D i.106; S i.116 (pot. mucceyya); It 43; DA i.275. 3. to take courage, to have faith
Sn 559; Miln 234; DA i.214, 316; J iv.272; v.103; DhA i.196;
iii.258; iv.170. 4. of a spirit, to possess, to enter into a
body, with loc. of the body. A late idiom for the older anvvisati. J iv.172; v.103, 429; DhA i.196; iii.258; iv.170.
pp. adhimuccita and adhimutta. Caus. adhimoceti to incline to (trs.); to direct upon (with loc.) S v.409 (citta devesu
a.).
Adhimuccana (nt.) [fr. adhi + muc] making up one's mind, confidence DhsA 133, 190.
Adhimuccita & Adhimucchita (pp.) [either adhi + muc or
mrch; it would seem more probable to connect it with the
former (cp. adhimuccati) and consider all vv. ll. mucchita as
spurious; but in view of the credit of several passages we have
to assume a regular analogy form mucchita, cp. mucchati
and see also J.P.T.S. 1886, 109] drawn towards, attached to,
infatuated, indulging in (with loc.) M ii.223 (an); S i.113; Th
1, 732 (v. l. muccita), 923 (cch), 1175; J ii.437 (cch); iii.242;
v.255 (kmesu mucchita, v. l. muccita). Cp. ajjhomucchita.
Adhippeta [Sk. abhipreta, adhi + ppa + i, lit. gone into, gone for;
cp. adhippya] 1. desired, approved of, agreeable D i.120;
ii.236; VvA 312, 315. 2. meant, understood, intended as J
iii.263; PvA 9, 80, 120, 164.
Adhippetatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. adhippeta] the fact of being meant
or understood as, in abl. with reference to, as is to be understood of VvA 13; PvA 52.
Adhibdheti [adhi + bdheti, cp. Sk. abhibdhayati] to vex, op36
Adhimuccitar
Adho
Adhimokkha [fr. adhi + muc] firm resolve, determination, decision M iii.25 sq.; Vbh 165 sq., 425; DhsA 145, 264. See Dhs.
trsl. 5; Cpd. 17, 40, 95.
Adhisayita [pp. of adhiseti] sat on, addled (of eggs) Vin iii.3; S
iii.153.
Adhisla (nt.) [adhi + sla] higher morality, usually in threefold
set of adhicitta-sikkha, adhipa adhisla Vin i.70; D
i.174; iii.219; A iii.133; iv.25; DhA i.334; PvA 207. See also
adhicitta, sikkh & sla.
Adhiseti [adhi + seti] to lie on, sit on, live in, to follow, pursue
Dh 41; Sn 671 (= gacchati C.) pp. adhisayita.
Adhna (adj.) () [cp. Sk. adhna] subject, dependent D i.72
(atta & para); J iv.112; DA i.217; also written dhna J
v.350. See also under para.
Adhyati & adhiyati [Med. of adhi + i, 1st sg. adhye taken
as base in Pli] to study, lit. to approach (cp. adhigacchati); to learn by heart (the Vedas & other Sacred Books) Vin
i.270; S i.202 (dhammapadni); J iv.184 (adhyitv), 496 (adhyamna); vi.458; DhA iii.446 (adhyassu). ger. adhyitv J iv.75; adhiyna J v.450 (= sajjhyitv C.) & adhicca:
see adhicca 2; pp. adhiyita D i.96.
37
Adho
Anassana
down the throat PvA 104. -mukha head forward, face downward, bent over, upturned Vin ii.78; M i.132, 234: Vv 161
(= heh mukha VvA 78). -bhga the lower part (of the
body) M i.473; DhA i.148. -virecana action of a purgative
(opp. uddha of an emetic) D i.12; DA i.98 (= adho dosna
nharaa); DhsA 404. -skha (+ uddhamla) branches
down (& roots up, i. e. uprooted) DhA i.75. -sira (adj.)
head downward J iv.194. -sira (adv.) with bowed head
(cp. avasira) J vi.298 (= sira adhokatv hehmukho C.).
-ssa (adj.) head first, headlong J i.233; v.472 (ka).
huti] not obtaining, unable to get or keep up D i.101 (= asamppuanto avisahamno v DA i.268).
Anamatagga (adj.) [ana (= a neg.) + mata (fr. man) + agg
(pl.). So Dhammapla (avidit agga ThA 289); Nakitti
in k on DhsA 11; Trenckner, Notes 64; Oldenberg, Vin.
Texts ii.114. Childers takes it as an + amata + agga, and Jacobi
(Erzhl. 33 and 89) and Pischel (Gram. 251) as a + namat
(fr. nam) + agga. It is Sanskritized at Divy 197 by anavargra,
doubtless by some mistake. Weber, Ind. Str. iii.150 suggests
an + mrta, which does not suit the context at all]. Ep. of
Sasra "whose beginning and end are alike unthinkable", i.
e., without beginning or end. Found in two passages of the
Canon: S ii.178, 187 sq. = iii.149, 151 = v.226, 441 (quoted
Kvu 29, called Anamatagga pariyya at DhA ii.268) and
Th 2, 495, 6. Later references are Nd2 664; PvA 166; DhA
i.11; ii.13, 32; Sdhp 505. [Cp. anmata and amatagga, and cp.
the English idiom "world without end". The meaning can best
be seen, not from the derivation (which is uncertain), but from
the examples quoted above from the Sayutta. According to
the Yoga, on the contrary (see e. g., Woods, Yoga system of
Patajali, 119), it is a possible, and indeed a necessary quality
of the Yog, to understand the beginning and end of Sasra].
Anala (adj.) [an + ala] 1. not sufficient, not enough; unable, impossible, unmanageable M i.455; J ii.326 = iv. 471. 2.
dissatisfied, insatiate J v.63 (= atitta C.). 3. kata dissatisfied, satiated, S i.15 (kmesu).
Anavosita (adj.) [an + avosita; or ana + avosita = avusita?] unfulfilled, undone Th 1, 101.
Anasana (nt.) [an + asana, cp. Sk. an aana] not eating, fasting, hunger D iii.75 & in same context at Sn 311 (= khud SnA
324).
Anassana (nt.)
38
Sk.
naana] im-
Anassana
Anysa
Anassvin (adj.) [an + assvin; cp. assva + sava] not intoxicated, not enjoying or finding pleasure in Sn 853 (stiyesu a.
= stavatthusa kmaguesu tahasanthavavirahita SnA 549).
Andara [an + dara] (a) (m) disrespect PvA 257. (b.) (adj.)
disrespectful Sn 247 (= daravirahita SnA 290).
Anasssika (adj.) [an + asssa + ika; cp. Sk. vsana & BSk.
anvsika Divy 207] not consoling, discouraging, not comforting M i.514; S ii.191.
Angmin (adj. n.) [an + gmin] one who does not return,
a Never Returner, as tt. designating one who has attained
the 3rd stage out of four in the breaking of the bonds (Sayojanas) which keep a man back from Arahantship. So near is
the Angmin to the goal, that after death he will be reborn
in one of the highest heaven and there obtain Arahantship,
never returning to rebirth as a man. But in the oldest passages
referring to these 4 stages, the description of the third does
not use the word angmin (D i.156; ii.92; iii.107; M ii.146)
and angmin does not mean the breaking of bonds, but the
cultivation of certain specified good mental habits (S iii.168,
the anatta doctrine; S v.200 2, the five Indriyas; A i.64,
120, cultivation of good qualities, ii 160; v.86, 171 = S 149).
We have only two cases in the canon of any living persons
being called angmin. Those are at S v.177 and 178. The
word there means one who has broken the lower five of the
ten bonds, & the individuals named are laymen. At D ii.92
nine others, of whom eight are laymen, are declared after their
death to have reached the third stage (as above) during life, but
they are not called angmins. At It 96 there are only 3 stages,
the worldling, the Angmin, and the Arahant; and the Sayojanas are not referred to. It is probable that already in the
Nikya period the older, wider meaning was falling into disuse. The Abhidhamma books seem to refer only to the Sayojana explanation; the commentaries, so far as we know them,
ignore any other. See Ps ii.194; Kv. Tr. 74; Dhs. Tr. 302 n;
Cp. 69.
-phala fruition of the state of an Angmin; always in
combn. sotpatti sakadgmi angmi arahatta Vin i.293;
ii.240; iv.29; D i.229; ii.227, 255; S iii.168; v.411; A i.23, 44;
iii.272 sq.; iv.204, 276, 372 sq. -magga the path of one who
does not return (in rebirths) Nd2 569b.
39
Anysa
Antika
Th 1, 1008.
Anhiya & Anhika (adj.) [an + lhiya, Sk. hya, see also
addha2 ] not rich, poor, miserable, destitute, usually combd.
with daidda M i.450; ii.178 (v. l. BB. aniya); A iii.352
sq. (vv. ll. BB. anhika), 384; J v.96.
Anvaa () [an + vaa] not shut; in dvrat (f.) not closing the door againt another, accessibility, openhand edness D
iii.191.
Anvattin (adj. n.) [an + vattin] one who does not return,
almost syn. with angmin in phrase anvatti-dhamma, one
who is not destined to shift or return from one birth to another,
D i.156 (cp. DA i.313); iii.132; Pug 16 sq., 62.
Anvasra (adv.) [an + ava + sra = suriya, with ava lengthened to va in verse] as long as the sun does not set, before sun
down J v.56 (= anatthangata suriya C.) cp. Sk. utsra.
Anila [from an, cp. Sk. aniti to breathe, cp. Gr. wind;
Lat. animus breath, soul, mind] wind J iv.119 (patha air, sky);
Miln 181; VvA 237; Sdhp 594.
Anka (nt.) [Ved. anka face, front, army to Idg. *og&uarc; (see),
cp. Gr. eye, Lat. oculus, see also Sk. pratka and P.
akkhi] army, array, troops (orig. "front", i. e. of the battle
array) Vin iv.107 (where expld. in detail); Sn 623 (bala strong
in arms, with strong array i. e. of khanti, which precedes; cp.
SnA 467).
-agga a splendid army Sn 421 (= balakya senmukha
SnA 384).
-ha a sentinel, royal guard D iii.64, 148; J
v.100; vi.15 ("men on horseback", horseguard); Miln 234,
264. -dassana troop inspection D i.6 (aka at DA i.85,
q. v. interpretation); Vin iv.107 (senbyha +).
Antika (adj.) [fr. anti] free from injury or harm, healthy, secure
40
Antika
Anukaroti
41
Anukaroti
Anuggheti
Vin i.16, & anvag Mhvs 7, 10; 3rd pl. anvag Sn 586 (vasa
= vasa gata SnA 461). Pass. anugammati, ppr. anugammamna accompanied or followed by, surrounded, adorned
with J i.53; v.370. pp. anugata (q. v.).
Anukia [pp. of anu + kirati] strewn with, beset with, dotted all
over Pv iv.121 (bhamara gaa).
Anukubba (adj.) () [= Sk. anukurvat, ppr. of anu- karoti] "doing correspondingly" giving back, retaliating J ii.205 (kicca).
Anukkahati [an + ukkahati] not to be sorry or not to lack anything, in ppr. anto J v.10; and pp. ita without regret or in
plenty PvA 13.
Anugiddha [pp. of anugijjhati] greedy after, hankering after, desiring, coveting Sn 86 (annu), 144, 952; Th 1, 580.
Anuggaha1 [anu + grah] "taking up", compassion, love for, kindness, assistance, help, favour, benefit S ii.11; iii.109; iv.104;
v.162; A i.92, 114; ii.145; iv.167; v.70; It 12, 98; J i.151;
v.150; Pug 25; PvA 145; ThA 104.
Anukhuddaka (adj.) [anu + khuddaka] in cpd. khudda whatever there is of minor things, all less important items Vin ii.287
= D ii.154 = Miln 142; Miln 144.
Anuga () (adj. suff.) [fr. anu + gam] following or followed
by, going after, undergoing, being in or under, standing under
the influence of Sn 332 (vasa in the power of), 791 (ej =
abhibhta Sn 527), 1095 (Mra vasa = abhibhuyya viharanti Nd2 507); It 91 (ej); J iii.224 (vasa = vasavattin C.);
Mhvs 7, 3.
42
Anuggheti
Anutappati
Anujjhna (nt.) [anu + jhna] meditation, reflection, introspection Miln 352 (bahula).
Anuta (adj.) [pp. of anujnti] permitted, allowed; sanctioned, given leave, ordained D i.88; J i.92; ii.353, 416; Pv
i.123 (na a. = ananuta at id. p. Th 2, 129; expld. at PvA 64
by ananumata); Pug 28; DA i.247, 248, 267; PvA 12, 81.
Anujta (adj.) [anu + jta] "born after" i. e. after the image of,
resembling, taking after; esp. said of a son (putta), resembling
his father, a worthy son It 64 (atijta +, opp. avajta); Th 1, 827
(fig. following the example of), 1279; J vi.380; DhA i.129;
Dvs ii.66.
Anuahana (nt.) [fr. anuahati] conflagration, burning up, consumption J v.271; ThA 287 (d).
Anuata (adj.) [uata] not raised, not elated, not haughty,
humble Sn 702 (care = uddhacca npajjeyya SnA 492).
43
Anutappati
Anudhvin
dhamma).
5
Anutre (adv.) [anu + tre, loc. of tra] along side or near the bank
(of a river) Sn 18 (= tra sampe SnA 28). Cp. anu A b.
Anuttara (adj.) [an + uttara] "nothing higher", without a superior, incomparable, second to none, unsurpassed, excellent,
preeminent Sn 234 (= adhikassa kassaci abhvato KhA 193),
1003; Dh 23, 55 (= asadisa appaibhga DhA i.423); Pv iv.35 2
(dhamma); Dhs 1294; DA i.129; PvA 1, 5, 6, 18, etc.
Anuttariya (nt.) [abstr. fr. anuttara] preeminence, superiority, excellency; highest ideal, greatest good. They are mentioned as sets of 3 (viz. dassana, paipad, vimutti) at
D iii.219, or of 6 (viz. dassana, savana, lbha, sikkh,
pricariy, anussata) at D iii.250, 281; A i.22; iii.284, 325
sq., 452; Ps i.5. Cp. M i.235; A v.37. See also nuttariya.
Anuttna (adj.) [an + uttna] not (lying) open, not exposed; fig.
unexplained, unclear J vi.247.
Anuddhata (adj.) [an + uddhata] not puffed up, not proud, unconceited calm, subdued Sn 850 (= uddhacca virahita SnA
549, cp. anuata); It 30; Dh 363 (= nibbutacitta DhA iv.93);
Vv 648 ; Pug 59.
Anudhammat (f.) [abstr. to anudhamma) lawfulness, conformity to the Dhamma A ii.46; Ps i.35, 36.
Anudhvati [anu + dhvati] to run after, to chase, follow, persecute, pursue M i.474; S i.9; Dh 85; Th 1, 1174; Miln 253,
372.
Anudhvin (adj. n.) [fr. anudhvati] one who runs after S i.9,
44
Anudhvin
Anupadhika
117.
Anupatati [anu + patati] 1. to follow, go after, J vi.555 anupatiysi Subj.). 2. to fall upon, to befall, attack Vin iii.106
= M i.364; S i.23 (read patanti for patatanti) = Dh 221
(dukkh); Th 1, 41 = 1167 (of lightning). pp. anupatita
(q. v.). Cp. also anupta & anuptin.
Anupatti (anuppatti) (f.) [anu + patti] attainment, accomplishment, wish, desire (fulfilled), ideal S i.46, 52.
Anupadhreti [an + upadhr] to disregard, to heed not, to neglect DhA iv.197; VvA 260.
45
Anupadhika
Anupta
Anupavattaka (anuppa) (adj.) to anupavatteti] one who succeeds (another) King or Ruler in the ruling of an empire
(cakka) Miln 342, 362; SnA 454. See also anuvattaka.
Anupabandhati (anuppa) [anu + pa + bandhati] to follow immediately, to be incessant, to keep on (without stopping), to
continue Miln 132. Caus. peti ibid.
Anupavda [an + upavda] not blaming or finding fault, abstaining from grumbling or abuse Dh 185 (anpa in metre; expld
at DhA iii.238 as anupavdana c'eva anupavdpana ca "not
scolding as well as not inciting others to grumbling"); adj.
vdaka Pug 60, & vdin M i.360.
Anupabandhan (anuppa) (f.) [abstr. fr. anupabandhati] continuance, incessance, Pug 18 = Vbh 357 (in exegesis of upanha).
Anupabbajj (f.) [anu + pabbajj, cp. BSk. anupravrajati Divy
61] giving up worldly life in imitation of another S v.67 = It
107.
Anupavihat (f.) [abstr. to anupaviha] the fact of having entered Miln 257.
Anupavisati [anu + pa + visati] to go into, to enter Dh i.290; VvA
42 (= oghati). pp. paviha (q.v.) Caus. paveseti
(q.v.).
Anupasahapan (f.) [an + upasahapan] not stopping, incessance, continuance Pug 18 (but id. p. at Vbh 357 has anusansandan instead); cp. anupabandhan.
Anupassan (f.) [abstr. of anupassati, cf. Sk. anudarana] looking at, viewing, contemplating, consideration, realisation S
v.178 sq., Sn p. 140; Ps i.10, 20, 96; ii.37, 41 sq., 67 sq.;
Vbh 194. See anicca, anatta, dukkha.
Anuparisakkati [anu + pari + sakkati] to move round, to be occupied with, take an interest in (c. acc.) S iv.312 (v.l. vattati).
Anupassin () (adj.) [fr. anupassati] viewing, observing, realising S ii.84 sq., v.294 sq., 311 sq., 345, Dh 7, 253; Sn 255,
728; Ps i.191 sq.; Vbh 193 sq., 236; Sdhp 411.
Anupta
Anubandhana
(vda).
Anupubbata (nt.) [fr. anupubba] acting in turn, gradation, succession Vv 6414 (= anukla kiriy i. e. as it pleases VvA 280)
cp. nupubbat.
Anupubba (adj.) [anu + pubba] following in one's turn, successive, gradual, by and by, regular Vin ii.237 (mahsamuddo a
ninno etc.); D i.184; Sn 511; J v.155 (regularly formed,
of r). Cases adverbially: anupubbena (instr.) by and by,
in course of time, later, gradually Vin i.83; Dh 239 (= anupaipiy DhA iii.340); Pug 41, 64; J ii.2, 105; iii.127; Miln
22; PvA 19. anupubbaso (abl. cp. Sk. anuprvaa) in regular order Sn 1000. In compn. both anupubba & anupubbi
(q. v.).
-kraa gradual performance, graded practice M i.446.
-nirodha successive passing away, fading away in regular succession, i. e. in due course. The nine stages of this process are
the same as those mentioned under vihra, & are enumd. as
such at D iii.266, 290; A iv.409, 456; Ps i.35. -vihra a state
of gradually ascending stages, by means of which the highest
aim of meditation & trance is attained, viz. complete cessation of all consciousness. These are 9 stages, consisting of the
4 jhnas, the 4 yatanni & as the crowning phrase "sa
vedayitanirodha" (see jhna1 ). Enumd. as such in var. places,
esp. at the foll.: D ii.156; iii.265, 290; A iv.410; Nd2 under
jhna; Ps i.5; Miln 176. -sikkh regular instruction or study
47
Anubandhana
Anumajjati
Anubandhana (nt.) [fr. anubandhati] that which connects or follows, connection, consequence J vi.526 (dukkha).
Anubhavana (nt.) [fr. anubhavati] experiencing, suffering; sensation or physical sensibility (cf. Cpd. 229, 2321 ) Nett 28
(ihnih nubhavana lakkhan vedan "feeling is characterised by the experiencing of what is pleasant and unpleasant"); Miln 60 (vedayita lakkha vedan anubhavana
lakkha ca); PvA 152 (kamma vipka). Esp. in combn.
with dukkha suffering painful sensations, e.g. at J iv.3; Miln
181; DhA iv.75; PvA 52.
Anubodha [anu + budh] awakening; perception, recognition, understanding S i.126 (?) = A v.46 (anubodhi as aor. of
anubodhati?); Pug 21; Miln 233. Freq. in compn. ananubodha (adj.) not understanding, not knowing the truth S ii.92;
iii.261; v.431; A ii.1; iv.105; Dhs 390, 1061; VvA 321 (=
anavabodha) and duranubodha (adj.) hard to understand, difficult to know D i.12, 22; S i.136.
Anubodhati [anu + budh] to wake up, to realise, perceive, understand; aor. anubodhi A v.46 (?) = S i.126 (anubodha).
Caus. bodheti to awaken, fig. to make see to instruct J
vi.139 (ayamna) pp. anubuddha (q. v.).
Anubodhana (nt.) [fr. anubodhati] awakening, understanding,
recognition Ps i.18 (bodhana +).
Anubbajati [anu + vraj] to go along, wander, follow, tread (a
path) J iv.399 (magga = pabbajati C.).
Anubbata (adj.) [Vedic anuvrata, anu + vata] subject to the will
of another, obedient, faithful, devoted J iii.521; vi.557.
Anubbillvitatta see ubbill.
Anubyajana see anuvyajana.
Anubrhita [pp. of anubrheti] strengthened with (), full of
Ps i.167.
Anubrheti [brheti] to do very much or often, to practice, frequent, to be fond of (c. acc.), foster S i.178 (anubrhaye);
M iii.187 (id., so read for manu), Th 2, 163 (ehi); Cp.
iii.12 (savega anubrhayi aor.); J iii.191 (sugra).
Often in phrase viveka anubrheti to devote oneself to
detachment or solitude, e.g. J i.9 (inf. brhetu); iii.31
(brhessmi), Dh 75 (brhaye = brheyya vaheyya DhA
ii.103). pp. anubrhita (q.v.) Cp. also brhana.
Anubhvat (f.)
(mah).
Anubhaan (f.) [anu + bhaana] talking to, admonition, scolding Vin ii.88 (anuvadan +).
Anubhavati & Anubhoti [anu + bhavati] to come to or by, to undergo, suffer (feel), get, undertake, partake in, experience D
i.129; ii.12 (bhonti); M ii.204; A i.61 (attha bhoti to have
a good result); J vi.97 (bhoma); Pv i.1011 (bhomi vipka);
PvA 52 (issati = vedissati); Sdhf 290. Esp. freq. with
dukkha to suffer pain, e.g. PvA i.1110 (bhonti); PvA 43,
48
Anumajjati
Anuyogavant
Anuygin (adj) [fr. anu + yaj] offering after the example of another D i.142.
Anuyyin (adj.) [cp. Sk. anuyyin, anu + y] going after, following, subject to (gen.) Sn 1017 (annuyyin); J vi.309; Miln
284.
Anuyujan (f.) (& yujana nt.) [abstr. fr. anuyujati] application or devotion to () Miln 178; VvA 346 (anuyujjana
wrong spelling?)
Anuminti [cf. Sk. anumti, anu + minti from mi, Sk. minoti,
with confusion of roots m & mi] to observe, draw an inference M i.97; PvA 227 (anto + naya nento). See also
anumyati.
Anumyati [Sk. anumyate, Pass. of anu + m, measure, in sense
of Med.] to observe, conclude or infer from S iii.36. Cp. anuminti.
Anumodaka (adj.) [fr. anumodati] one who enjoys, one who is
glad of or thankful for (c. acc.) Vin v.172; PvA 122; Sdhf 512.
Anumodana (nt.) [fr. anumodati] "according to taste", i.e. satisfaction, thanks, esp. after a meal or after receiving gifts =
to say grace or benediction, blessing, thanksgiving. In latter sense with dadti (give thanks for = loc.), karoti (= Lat.
gratias agere) or vacati (say or tell thanks): datv PvA
89; katv J i.91; DhA iii.170, 172; VvA 118; PvA 17,
47; vatv VvA 40 (pnyadne for the gift of water), 295,
306 etc. karoti also "to do a favour" PvA 275. Cp.
further DhA i.198 (gth verses expressing thanks, benediction); ii.97 (Satthra ycisu asked his blessing); PvA
23 (attha in order to thank), 26 (id.), 121, 141 (katabhatta),
142; Sdhp 213, 218, 516.
49
Anuyogavant
Anuvceti
Anulometi [v. denom. fr. anuloma] to conform to, to be in accordance with Miln 372.
Anuratta (nt.) [abstr. fr. an + ura] smallness, littleness, insignificance VvA 24.
Anuravan (f.) [abstr. fr. anuravati] lingering of the sound, resounding Miln 63.
Anuraho (adv.) [anu + raho] in secret, face to face, private M
i.27.
Anuvattana (nt.) [abstr. fr. anuvattati] complying with, conformity with (), compliance, observance, obedience J i.367
(dhamma); v.78.
Anuruddha [pp. of anurujjhati] enggaged in, devoted to; compliant or complied with, pleased S iv.71, (annuruddha).
Anurodha [fr. anu + rudh] compliance, consideration satisfaction (opp. virodha) S i.111; iv.210; Sn 362; Dhs 1059; Vbh
145; DhsA 362.
Anuvassa (adv.) [anu + vassa] for one rainy season; every rainy
season or year, i. e. annually C. on Th 1, 24.
Anuvassika (adj.) [fr. anuvassa] one who has (just) passed one
rainy season Th 1, 24 ("scarce have the rains gone by" Mrs.
Rh. D.; see trsl. p. 29 n. 2).
50
Anuvceti
Anusayyati
Anuvicinteti [anu + vi + cinteti] to think or ponder over, to meditate D ii.203; S i 203 (yoniso cintaya, imper. "marshall thy
thoughts in ordered governance" Mrs. Rh. D.; v. l. anucintaya); Th 1, 747; Dh 364; It 82 (dhamma aya); J iii.396;
iv.227; v.223 (dhamma cintayanto).
51
Anusayyati
Anussana
Anusayyati [anu + sa + yyati] to traverse; to go up to, surround, visit (acc.) M i.209 (Bhagavanta itv), J iv.214 (v.l.
anuyyitv). See also anuyti and anusati.
Anusaceteti [anu + sa + ceteti] to set ones mind on, concentrate, think over, meditate Pug 12.
Anusati [either anu + sa + j (jnti) or (preferably) =
anusayti as short form of anusayyati, like anuyti >
anuyyati of anu + sa + y, cf. Sk. anusayti in same
meaning] to go to, to visit, inspect, control; ppr. med.
sayamna Vin iii.43 (kammante); inf. satu A
i.68. (janapade).
Anusaa [Sk. anusta, pp. of anu + s] sprinkled with (), bestrewn, scattered Vv 53 (paduma magga = vippakia VvA
36).
Anusatthar [n. ag. to anu + ss, cf. Sk. anusit & P. satthar]
instructor, adviser J iv.178 (cariya +). Cp. anussaka.
Anusahagata (adj.) having a residuum, accompanied by a minimum of.. S iii.130; Kvu 81, see au.
Anusatthi (f.) [Sk. anusti, anu + s, cp. anussana] admonition, rule, instruction J i.241; Miln 98, 172, 186 (dhamma),
225, 227, 347.
Anusandati [Vedic anusyandati, anu + syad] to stream along after, to follow, to be connected with. Thus to be read at Miln
63 for anusandahati (anuravati +; of sound), while at A iv.47
the reading is to be corrected to anusandahati.
Anusampavankat (f.) [anu + sa + pavankat; is reading correct?] disputing, quarrelling(?) Vin ii.88 (under anuvddhikaraa).
Anusaya [anu + , seti Sk. anuaya has a diff. meaning] (see
Kvu trsl. 234 n. 2 and Cpd. 172 n. 2). Bent, bias, proclivity, the persistance of a dormant or latent disposition, predisposition, tendency. Always in bad sense. In the oldest
texts the word usually occurs absolutely, without mention of
the cause or direction of the bias. So Sn. 14 = 369, 545;
M. iii.31; S. iii.130, iv.33, v.28 236; A. i.44; ii.157; iii.74,
Anussana (nt.) [Vedic anusana, fr. anu + s] advice, instruction, admonition D iii.107; A i.292 (pihriya, cp.
52
Anussana
Anussukita
Anusiha (Vedic anuia, pp. of anussati] instructed, admonished, advised; ordered, commanded M ii.96; J i.226; Pv ii.811 ;
Miln 284, 349.
Anussarati [Vedic anusmarati, anu + sm] to remember, recollect, have memory of (acc.), bear in mind; be aware of D ii.8,
53, 54 (jtito etc.); S iii.86 sq. (pubbenivsa); v.67 (dhamma a. anuvitakketi), 303 (kappasahassa); A i.25, 164 (pubbenivsa), 207 (Tathgata, Dhamma etc.); iii.285 (id.),
323 (nivsa), 418; v.34, 38, 132, 199, 336 (kalyamitte); It
82 (dhamma), 98 (pubbenivsa); J i.167; ii.111; Dh 364;
Pv i.59 ; Pug 60; Sdhp 580, 587; DA i.257; KhA 213; DhA
ii.84; iv.95; PvA 29, 53, 69, 79, 107. pp. anussarita (see
anussaritar). Caus anussarpeti to remind someone, to call
to mind J ii.147.
Sk.
Anussavika (adj.) [fr. anussava] "belonging to hearsay", traditional; one who is familiar with tradition or who learns from
hearsay M i.520; ii.211. Cp. anussutika.
Anussati (f.) [Sk. anusmti, fr. anu + sm, cp. sati] remembrance, recollection, thinking of, mindfulness. A late list of
53
Anussukita
Anopa
Anea (adj.) [an + ea = ena, see nea & cp. BSk. ea (mka);
Vedic anena] faultless, pure; only in foll. cpds.: gala free
from the dripping or oozing of impurity (thus expld. at DA
i.282, viz. elagalana virahita), but more likely in lit. meaning "having a pure or clear throat" or, of vc speech: "clearly
enunciated" (thus Mrs. Rh. D. at Kindred Sayings i.241) Vin
i.197 = D i.114 = S i.189; A ii.51, 97; iii.114, 195. Cp. also
M Vastu iii. 322. mga same as prec. "having a clear
throat", i. e. not dumb, fig. clever, skilled D iii.265; Sn 70 (=
allmukha SnA 124), cp. Nd2 259.
Anussuta2 [anu + suta, pp. of ru] heard of; only in cpd. ananussuta unheard of S ii.9; Pug 14.
Anussutika (adj.) [fr. anu + ru, cp. anussavika] according to
tradition or report, one who goes by or learns from hearsay
DA i.106, 107.
Anussuyyaka see anusuyyaka.
Anuhasati [anu + hasati] to laugh at, to ridicule DA i.256.
Anuhrati [for hariyati, anu + h] to be held up over, ppr.
anuhramna D ii.15 (vv. ll. v. l. anubhiram; glosses B.
K. anudhriyam, cp. Trenckner, Notes 79).
Anna (adj.) [Vedic anna, an + na] not lacking, entire, complete, without deficiency J vi 273; Dpvs v.52; Miln 226; DA
i.248 (+ paripra, expld by anavaya).
Anodaka (adj.) [an + udaka] without water, dry J i.307; DhA i.52;
Sdhp 443.
Anodissaka (adj.) [an + odissa + ka] unrestricted, without exception, general, universal; only in cpd. vasena universally,
thoroughly (with ref. to mett) J i.81; ii 146; VvA 97 (in general; opp. odissaka-vasena). See also Mrs. Rh. D. Psalms of
the Brethren p. 5 n. 1.
Anonamati [an + onamati] not to bend, to be inflexible, in foll. expressions: anonamaka (nt.) not stooping DhA ii.136; auonamanto (ppr.) not bending D ii.17 = iii. 143; anonami-daa
(for anonamiya) an inflexible stick Miln 238 (anoami T,
but anonami vv. ll., see Miln 427).
Aneja (adj.) [an + ej] free from desires or lust D ii.157; Sn 920,
1043, 1101, 1112; It 91 (opp. ejnuga Nd1 353 = Nd2 55; Dh
414 (= tahya abhvena DhA iv. 194), 422; Pv iv.135 (nit54
Anopa
Antara
Anoma (adj.) (only ) [an + oma] not inferior, superior, perfect, supreme, in foll. cpds.
-gua supreme virtue DA i.288. -dassika of superior
beauty Vv 207 , VvA 103 (both as v. l.; T. anuma); Vv 437 .
-dassin one who has supreme knowledge; of unexcelled wisdom (Name of a Buddha) J i.228. -nma of perfect name
S i.33 ("by name the Peerless" Mrs. Rh. D.), 235; Sn 153,
177 (cp. SnA 200). -nikkama of perfect energy Vv 6427
(= paripua viriyatya a. VvA 284). -paa of lofty
or supreme wisdom (Ep. of the Buddha) Sn 343, 352 (=
mahpaa SnA 347); Th 2, 522 (= paripua paa ThA
296), DhA i.31. -vaa of excellent colour Sn 686 J vi.202.
-viriya of supreme exertion or energy Sn 353.
Anomajjati [anu + ava + majjati, mj] to rub along over, to stroke,
only in phrase gattni pin a. to rub over one's limbs with
the hand M i.80, 509; S v.216.
Anorapra (adj.) [an + ora + pra] having (a shore) neither on
this side nor beyond Miln 319.
Anoramati [an + ava + ram] not to stop, to continue J iii.487;
DhA iii.9 (ger. itv continually).
Anovassa (nt.) [an + ovassa; cp. Sk. anavavarana] absence of
rain, drought J v.317 (v. l. BB for anvvassa T.; q. v.).
Anta3 (nt.) [Vedic ntra, contr. fr. antara inner = Lat. interus,
Gr. intestines] the lower intestine, bowels, mesentery
It 89; J i.66, 260 (vaddhi masa etc.); Vism 258; DhA
i.80.
-gahi twisting of the bowels, lit. "a knot in the intestines" Vin i.275 (bdha). -gua [see gua2 = gula1 ] the
intestinal tract, the bowels S ii.270; A iv.132; Kh iii. = Miln
26; Vism 42; KhA 57. -mukha the anus J iv.402. -vai =
gua Vism 258.
Antaka [Vedic antaka] being at the end, or making an end, Ep.
of Death or Mra Vin i.21; S i.72; Th 2, 59 (expld by ThA 65
as lmaka va Mra, thus taken = anta2 ); Dh 48 (= maraa
sankhto antako DhA ii.366), 288 (= maraa DhA iii.434).
Antamaso (adv.) [orig. abl. of antama, *Sk. antamaah; cp. BSk.
antaah as same formation fr. anta, in same meaning ("even")
Av. . i.314; Divy 161] even Vin iii. 260; iv.123; D i.168; M
iii.127; A v.195; J ii.129; DA i.170; SnA 35; VvA 155.
Antara (adj.) [Vedic antara, cp. Gr. = Sk. antra (see
anta3 ), Lat. interus fr. prep. inter. See also ante & anto]. Primary meanings are "inside" and "in between"; as adj. "inner";
in prep. use & in cpds. "inside, in between". Further development of meaning is with a view of contrasting the (two) sides
of the inside relation, i. e. having a space between, different
from; thus nt. antara difference.
55
Antara
Antar
termediary kappa (q. v.) D i 54. -kraa a cause of impediment, hindrance, obstacle Pug A 231 -cakka "the intermediate
round", i. e. in astrology all that belongs to the intermediate
points of the compass Miln 178. -cara one who goes in between or inside, i. e. a robber S iv.173. -bhira (adj.) inside
& outside J i.125. -bhogika one who has power (wealth, influence) inside the kings dominion or under the king, a subordinate chieftain (cp. antara raha) Vin iii.47 -raha an intermediate kingdom, rulership of a subordinate prince J v.135.
-vsa an interregnum Dpvs v.80. -vsaka "inner or intermediate garment", one of the 3 robes of a Buddhist bhikkhu (viz.
the sangh, uttarsanga & a.) Vin i.94, 289; ii.272. Cf. next.
-saka an inner or lower garment [cp. Sk. antarya id.], under
garment, i. e. the one between the outer one & the body VvA
166 (q. v.).
Antarasa [B.Sk. antarsa; antara + asa] "in between the
shoulders", i. e. the chest J v.173 = vi.171 (phrase lohitakkho
vihat antaraso).
Antarahaka (adj.) [antara + ahaka] only in phrases rattisu antarahaksu and antarahake hima-ptasamaye (in which
antara functions as prep. c. loc., according to antara II. b.) i.
e. in the nights (& in the time of the falling of snow) between
the eighths (i. e. the eighth day before & after the full moon:
see ahaka2 ). First phrase at Vin i.31, 288; iii 31; second at M
i.79 (cp. p. 536 where Trenckner divides anta rahaka);
A i.136 (in nom.); J i.390; Miln 396.
Antaradhna (nt.) [fr. antaradhyati] disappearance A i.58 (saddhammassa); ii.147; iii.176 sq.; Miln 133; Dhs 645, 738, 871.
Cp. dhyana.
Antaradhyati [antara + dhyati] to disappear Sn 449 (dhyatha
3rd sg. med.); Vv 8128 (id.); J i.119 = DhA i.248; DhA iv.191
(ppr. dhyamna & aor. dhyi) PvA 152, 217, (dhyi), 245;
VvA 48. ppr. antarahita (q. v.). Caus. antaradhpeti
to cause to disappear, to destroy J i.147; ii.415; PvA 123.
Antaradhyana (nt.) [fr. antaradhyati] disappearance DhA
iv.191. (v. l. adhna).
Antarayati [cp. denom. fr. antara] to go or step in between, ger.
antaritv (= antarayitv) J i.218.
Antarahita (adj.) [pp. of antaradhyati] 1. disappeared, gone, left
D i.222. M i.487. Miln 18. PvA 245. 2 in phrase anantarahitya bhmiy (loc) on the bare soil (lit. on the ground
with nothing put in between it & the person lying down, i. e.
on an uncovered or unobstructed ground) Vin i.47; ii.209; M
ii.57.
Antar (adv.) [abl. or adv. formation fr. antara; Vedic antar.]
prep. (c. gen. acc. or loc.), pref. () and adv. "in between" (of space & time), midway, inside; during, meanwhile,
between. On interpretation of term see DA i.34 sq. (1).
(prep.) c. acc. (of the two points compared as termini; cp.
B.Sk. antar ca Divy 94 etc.) D i.1 (antar ca Rjagaha
antar ca Nanda between R. and N.). c. gen. & loc.
Vin ii.161 (satthna between the thighs, where id. p. at J
i.218 has antara satthsu); A ii.245 (satthna. but v. l.
satthimhi). (2) (adv.) meanwhile Sn 291, 694; It 85; Dh
237. occasionally Miln 251. (3). (pref.) see cpds.
-kath "in between talk, talk for pastime, chance conver-
56
Antar
Anto
Antarpaa (nt.) [antar + paa "in between the shopping or trading"] place where the trading goes on, bazaar J i.55; vi.52;
Miln 1, 330; DhA i.181.
Antima (adj.) [Cp. superl. of anta] last, final (used almost exclusively with ref. to the last & final reincarnation; thus in
combn. with deha & sarra, the last body) D ii.15; Dh 351; It
50 (antima deha dhreti), 53 (id.); Vv 512 ; Sn 478 (sarra
antima dhreti) 502; Miln 122, 148; VvA 106 (sarr antima
dhrin); Sdhp 278.
-dehadhara one who wears his last body It 101 (dhra
T, dhara v. l.); VvA 163. -dhrin = prec. S i.14, 53 (+
khsava); ii.278; It 32, 40; Sn 471. -vatthu "the last thing",
i. e. the extreme, final or worst (sin) Vin i. 121, 135, 167,
320. -sarra the last body; (adj.) having ones last rebirth S
i.210 (Buddho a sarro); A ii.37; Sn 624; Dh 352, 400;
DhA iv.166 (= koiya hito attabhvo).
Antarya1 [antara + aya from i, lit. "coming in between"] obstacle, hindrance, impediment to (); prevention, bar; danger, accident to (). There are 10 dangers (to or from)
enumd. at Vin i.112, 169 etc., viz. rja, cora, aggi,
udaka, manussa, amanussa, va, sirisapa, jvita,
brahmacariya. In B.Sk. 7 at Divy 544, viz. rj caura
manuy amanuya vy agny udaka. D
i.3, 25, 26; A iii.243, 306; iv.320; Sn 691, 692; Dh 286 (=
jvit DhA iii.431); J i.62, 128; KhA 181; DhA ii 52; VvA 1
= PvA 1 (hat removing the obstacles) -antarya karoti to
keep away from, hinder, hold back, prevent, destroy Vin i.15;
J vi.171; Vism 120; PvA 20.
-kara one who causes impediments or bars the way, an
obstructor D i.227; S i.34; A i.161; Pv iv.322 .
Anto (indecl.) [Sk. anta; Av antar Lat. inter, Oir. etar between,
Ohg. untar; Idg. *entar, compar. of *en (in) = inner, inside]
prep. inside, either c. acc. denoting direction = into, or c. loc.
denoting place where = in. As prefix () in, within, inside,
inner (see cpds.) (1.) prep. c. acc. anto nivesana gata gone
into the house J i.158; anto jla pavisati go into the net DhA
iii.175; anto gma pavisati to go into the village DhA ii.273;
anto nagara pavisati DhA ii.89; PvA 47. (2) c. loc. anto
gabbhe J ii.182; gme DhA ii.52; gehe DhA ii.84; nadiya J
vi.278; nivesane J ii.323; vasse in the rainy season J iv.242;
vimnasmi Pv i.101 ; satthe inside of a week PvA 55.
-koisanthra "house of the Golden Pavement" J iv.113.
-gadha (gata? Kern Toev.) in phrase hetu, by inner reason or by reason of its intensity PvA 10; VvA 12. -jana
"the inside people", i. e. people belonging to the house, the
family (= Lat. familia) D iii.61 (opp. to servants); A i.152;
J vi.301; DA i.300. -jla the inside of the net, the net DhA
iv.41. -jlikata "in netted", gone into the net D i.45; DA
i.127. -nijjhna inner conflagration PvA 18. -nimugga altogether immersed D i.75; A iii.26. -parisoka inner grief Ps
i.38. -pura = antepura J i.262. -mano "turning ones mind
inside", thoughtful, melancholy Vin iii.19. -bhavika being
inside Miln 95. -rukkhat being among trees J i.7. -vasati
Antarika (adj.) [fr. antara] "being in between", i. e. - 1. intermediate, next, following: see an. 2. distant, lying in between
PvA 173 (aneka yojan hna). See also f. antarik. 3.
inside: see antarik. -anantarika with no interval, succeeding, immediately following, next Vin ii.165, 212 (n); iv.234.
Antarik (f.) [abstr. fr. antarika] "what lies in between or near",
i. e. 1. the inside of Vin iv.272 (bhjan). 2. the neighbourhood, region of (), sphere, compass Vin iii.39 (ur,
angul); J i.265 (yakkhassa sm inside the y sphere of influence). 3. interval, interstice Vin ii.116 (sutt in lace); A
i.124 (vijj the interval of lightning).
Antalikkha (nt.) [Vedic antarika = antari ka (ki), lit. situated in between sky and earth] the atmosphere or air D ii.15;
A iii.239; iv.199; Sn 222, 688; Dh 127 = Miln 150 = PvA 104;
Pv i.31 (= vehyasa saita a. PvA 14); KhA 166.
-ga going through the air A i.215. -cara walking through
the air Vin i.21; D i.17; S i.111; J v.267; DA i.110.
Antavant (dj.) [anta1 + vant] having an end, finite D i.22, 31,
187; Ps i.151 sq.; 157; Dhs 1099, 1117, 1175; Miln 145. anantavant endless, infinite A v.193 (loka). See also loka.
Anti (indecl.) [Vedic anti = Lat ante, Gr. , Goth. and; Ags.
57
Anto
Anvvassa
to inhabit, live within S iv.136. -vaajanaka (parijana) indoorpeople J v.118. -vassa the rainy season (lit. the interval
of the r. s.) VvA 66. -vihra the inside of the V. DhA i.50
(bhimukh turning towards etc.), -samorodha barricading
within Dhs 1157 (so read for anta, cp. Dhs. trsl. 311). -soka
inner grief Ps i.38.
Andu [cp. Sk. andu, and & anduka] a chain, fetter Vin i.108 =
iii.249 (ti); D i.245; J i.21 (ghara prisonhouse); DhA iv.54
(bandhana).
Anvadeva (adv.) [anva d eva with euphonic d.; like sammad eva corresponding to Sk. anvag eva] behind, after,
later D i.172; M iii.172; S v.1 (spelt anudeva); A i.11; v. 214;
It 34.
Andha (adj.) [Vedic andha, Lat. andabata (see Walde, Lat. Wtb.
s. v.), other etym. doubtful] 1. (lit.) blind, blinded, blindfolded J i.216 (dhm); Pv iv.148 ; PvA 3. dark, dull, blinding M iii.151 (andha adv. dulled); Sn 669 (Ep. of timisa,
like Vedic andha tama); DhA ii.49 (vana dark forest).
2. (fig.) mentally blinded, dull of mind, foolish, not seeing
D i.191 (+ acakkhuka), 239 (vei, reading & meaning uncertain); A i.128; Th 2, 394 (= bla ThA 258). See cpds. karaa,
kra, bla, bhta.
-kula blinded, foolish Vv 849 (= pacakkhuno abhvena VvA 337). -karaa blinding, making blind, causing
bewilderment (fig.), confusing It 82 (+ acakkhukaraa); Miln
113 (paha, + gambhra). -kra blindness (lit. & fig), darkness, dullness, bewilderment Vin i.16; D ii.12; A i.56; ii.54;
iii.233; J iii.188; Th 1, 1034; Dh 146; Sn 763; Vv 214 (= avijj
VvA 106); Pug 30; Dhs 617; DA i.228; VvA 51, 53, 116, 161;
PvA 6; Sdhp 14, 280. -tamo deep darkness (lit. & fig.) S
v.443; It 84 (v. l.; T. andha tama); J vi.247. -bla blinded
by folly, foolish, dull of mind, silly J i.246, 262; vi.337; DhA
ii.43, 89; iii.179; VvA 67; PvA 4, 264. -bhta blinded (fig.),
mentally blind, not knowing, ignorant S iv.21; A ii.72; J vi.139
(spelled bta); Dh 59, 174 (= pa cakkhuno abhvena
DhA iii.175). -vesa "blind form", disguise J iii.418.
Anvgata [pp. of anvgacchati] having pursued, attained; endowed with Th 1, 63; J iv.385; v.4.
Anna (nt.) [Vedic anna, orig. pp. of adati to eat] "eating", food,
esp. boiled rice, but includes all that is eaten as food, viz.
odana, kummsa, sattu, maccha, masa (rice, gruel, flour,
fish, meat) Nd1 372 = 495. Anna is spelt aa in combns apar
aa and pubb aa. Under dhaa (Nd2 314) are distinguished 2 kinds, viz. raw, natural cereals (pubb aa: sli,
vhi, yava, godhma, kangu, varaka, kudrsaka) and boiled,
prepared food (apar aa: speyya curry). SnA 378 (on
Sn 403) expls. anna by ygubhattdi. D i.7; A i.107, 132;
ii.70, 85, 203; Sn 82, 240, 403, 924; J iii.190; Pug 51; Sdhp
106, 214.
-pa food & water Sdhp 100. -da giving food Sn 297.
-pna food & water, eating & drinking, to eat & to drink Sn
485, 487; Pv i.52 , 82 ; KhA 207, 209; PvA 7, 8, 30, 31, 43.
58
Anvvassa
Apanga
Apakkamati [cp. Sk. apakramati, apa + kram] to go away, depart, go to one side J iii.27; Sdhp 294. aor. apakkami
Pv iv.75 ; ger. apakkamitv PvA 43, 124, & apakkamma Pv
ii.928 .
Apa [Vedic apa; Idg. *apo = Gr. , Av. apa, Lat. ab from
*ap (cp. aperio); Goth. af, Ger. ab, Ags. E. of. A compar.
form fr. apa is apara "further away"] Well-defined directional
prefix, meaning "away from, off". Usually as base prefix
(except with ), & very seldom in compn. with other modifying prefixes (like sam, abhi etc.). 1. apa = Vedic apa (Idg.
*apo): apeti to go away = Gr. , Lat. abeo, Goth. afiddja; apeta gone away, rid; kahati to draw away, remove;
kamati walk away; gacchati go away; nidhti put away (=
, abdo); nudati push away; neti lead away; vattati
turn away (= verto); sakkati step aside; harati take away.
2. apa = Vedic ava (Idg. *aue; see ava for details). There
exists a widespread confusion between the two preps. apa &
ava, favoured both by semantic (apa = away, ava = down, cp.
E. off) & phonetic affinity (p softened to b, esp. in BB Mss.,
& then to v, as b > v is frequent, e. g. bya > vya etc.). Thus
we find in Pli apa where Vedic and later literary Sk. have
ava in the foll. instances: apakanti, kassati, kirati, gata,
cra, jhyati, thaa, dna, dhreti, nata, nmeti, nta,
Apanga
Apanmeti
DA i.254.
Apaccakkha (adj.) [a + pai + akkha] unseen; in instr. f. apaccakkhya as adv. without being seen, not by direct evidence
Miln 46 sq.
Apacchapurima (adj.) [a + paccha + purima] "neither after nor
before", i. e. at the same time, simultaneous J iii.295.
Apacaya [fr. apa + ci] falling off, diminution (opp. caya gathering, heaping up), unmaking, esp. loss (of wordliness), decrease (of possibility of rebirth Vin ii.2 = iii.21 = iv.213; cp. J
iii.342; S ii.95 (kyassa cayo pi apacayo pi); A iv.280 = Vin
ii.259 (opp. caya); J iii.342 (sekho ena na tappati); Vbh 106,
319, 326, 330.
-gmin going towards decrease, "making for the undoing
of rebirth" (Dhs trsl. 82) A v.243, 277; Dhs 277, 339, 505,
1014; Vbh 12, 16 sq.; Nett 87 (cp. Kvu 156).
Apacyati [fr. apa ci, cp. cinti & cayati, with diff. meaning in
Sk.; better expld. perhaps as denom. fr. *apacya in meaning
of apacyana, cp. apacita] to honour, respect, pay reverence D
i.91 (pjeti +); J iii.82. Pot. apace (for apaceyya, may be
taken to apacinti 2) A iv.245; ThA 72 (here to apacinti 1).
pp. apacita (q. v.).
Apacyana (nt.) [abstr. fr. apa + cy, which is itself a der. fr. ci,
cinti] honouring, honour, worship, reverence J i.220; v.326;
DA i.256 (kamma); VvA 24 ( karoti = ajalika karoti);
PvA 104 (kara, adj.), 128 (+ paricariya).
Apacyin (adj.) [fr. *apacya; cp. apacyika] honouring, paying homage, revering Sn 325 (vaddha = vaddhna apaciti
karaena SnA 332) = Dh 109; J i.47, 132, 201; ii.299; v.325;
Miln 206; Sdhp 549.
Apacra [fr. apa + car, cp. Sk. apa & abhi carati] falling off,
fault, wrong doing J vi.375.
Apacita [pp. of apacayati or apacinti] honoured, wors-hipped,
esteemed Th 1, 186; J ii.169; iv.75; Vv 510 (= pjita VvA 39);
3511 (cp. VvA 164); Miln 21.
Apaciti (f.) [Vedic apaciti in diff. meaning, viz. expiation] honour, respect, esteem, reverence Th 1, 589; J i.220; ii.435;
iii.82; iv.308; vi.88; Miln 180, 234 ( karoti), 377 (pjana
+); SnA 332 (karaa). Cp. apacyana.
Apacca [Vedic apatya nt.; der. fr. apa] offspring, child D i.90
(bandhupda cp. muaka), 103 (id.); S i.69 (an) Sn 991;
60
Apanmeti
Apalyin
Aparajju (adv.) [Sk. apare dyus] on the foll. day Vin ii.167;
S i.186; Miln 48.
Apanuditar [n. ag. fr. apanudati, Sk. apanodit] remover, dispeller D iii.148.
Aparaa (nt.) [apara + aa = anna] "the other kind of cereal", prepared or cooked cereals, pulse etc. Opp. to pubbaa
the unprepared or raw corn (= makadhaa Vin iv.265; Vin
iii.151 (pubb +); iv.265, 267; A iv. 108, 112 (tila mugga
ms; opp. sli yavaka etc.); Nd2 314 (aparaa nma
speyya); J v.406 (j = hareuk, pea); Miln 106 (pubbaa). See also dhaa & harita.
Aparapaccaya (adj.) [a + para + paccaya] not dependent or relying on others Vin i.12 (vesrajja ppatta +); D i.110 (id.); M
ii 41; M i.491; S iii.83; DA i.278 (= nssa paro paccayo).
Apamrika (adj.) [cp. Sk. apasmrin] epileptic Vin iv.8, 10, 11.
Apayti [Sk. apayti, apa + y] to go away J vi.183 (apyti
metri causa; expld. by C. as apagacchati palyati). Caus.
apaypeti [Sk. apaypayati] to make go, drive away, dismiss
M iii.176; S ii.119.
Apardha [fr. apa + rdh] sin, fault, offence, guilt J i.264 (nir);
iii.394; iv.495; VvA 69; PvA 87, 116.
Apardhika (adj.) [fr. apardha, cp. Sk. apardhin] guilty,
offending, criminal J ii.117 (vja); Miln 149 (issara), 189
(apardhikat).
Apardhita [pp. of apardheti, Caus. of apa + rdh; cp. aparaddha] transgressed, sinned, failing J v.26 (so read for aparadh
ito).
Apara (adj.) [Vedic apara, der. fr. apa with compar. suffix ra
= Idg. *aporos "further away, second"; cp. Gr. farther, Lat. aprilis the second month (after March, i. e. April).
Goth. afar = after] another, i. e. additional, following, next,
second (with pron. inflexion, i. e. nom. pl. apare) D iii.190
(paj another, i. e. future generation); Sn 791, 1089 (n ); J
i.59 (apara divasa on some day following); iii.51 (apare
tayo sahy "other friends three", i. e. three friends, cp. similarly Fr. nous autres Francais); iv.3 (dpa); PvA 81 (divase
on another day), 226; with other part. like aparo pi D iii 128.
61
Apalyin
Apassaya
fearless Nd2 13 (abhru anutrsin apalyin as expln. of acchambhin and vra); J iv.296; v.4 (where C. gives variant
"apalpin ti pi pho", which latter has v. l. apalsin &
is expld. by C. as palpa rahite anavajjasarre p. 5). See
also apalsin.
Apalekhana (nt.) [apa + lekhana from likh in meaning of lih, corresponding to Sk. ava lehana] licking off, in cpd. hatthpalekhana "hand licking" (i. e. licking one's hand after a
meal, the practice of certain ascetics) M 177 (with v. l. hatthvalekhana M i.535; Trenckner compares BSk. hastapralehaka Lal. Vist. 312 & hastvalehaka ibid. 323), 412; Pug
55 (expld. at Pug A 231 as hatthe piamhe nihite jivhya
hattha apalekhati).
Apavyma [apa + vyma] disrespect, neglect, in phrase apayvmato (apaby) karoti to treat disrespectfully, to insult, defile S
i.226 (v. l. abymato; C. expls. apabymato karitv abymato
katv); Kvu 472 (vv. ll. asabykato, abyto, apabyto; Kvu
trsl. 270 n. 1 remarks: "B. trsl.: abysakato. The Burmese
scholar U. Pandi, suggests we should read apabykato, by
which he understands blasphemously"; it is here combd. with
nihubhati, as at DhA ii.36); DhA ii.36 ("want of forbearance" Ed.; doubtful reading; vv. ll. appabyyakamma &
apasma). For further detail see apasavya.
Apaloketi [BSk. ava lokayati] 1. to look ahead, to look before, to be cautious, to look after M i.557 (v. l. for apaciti,
where J v.339 C. has avaloketi); Miln 398. 2. to look up to,
to obtain permission from (acc.), to get leave, to give notice
of Vin iii.10, 11; iv.226 (anapaloketv = anpucch), 267 (+
pucchitv); M i.337; S iii.95 (bhikkhusangha anapaloketv
without informing the Sangha); J vi.298 (vjna); DhA i.67.
pp. apalokita (q. v.). See also apalokana & lokin.
Apavagga [Sk. apavarga] completion, end, final delivery, Nibbna; in phrase saggpavagga Dvs ii.62; iii.75.
Apassaya
Apra
Apasseti [Sk. aprayati, apa + + sri] to lean against, have a support in (acc.), to depend on. 1. (lit.) lean against Vin ii.175
(bhitti apassetabbo the wall to be used as a head rest).
2. (fig.) mostly in ger. apassya dependent upon, depending
on, trusting in (loc. or acc. or ) Vin iii.38; J i.214; PvA
189. pp. apassita (q. v.). See also avasseti.
Appata (adj.) [apa + + pata] falling down into (c. acc.) J iv.234
(aggi).
Appurana (nt.) [fr. appurati] a key (to a door) Vin i.80; iii.119;
M iii.127. See also avpuraa.
Appurati & Appuati [Sk. apvoti, apa + + v, but Vedic
only apa voti corresponding to Lat. aperio = *apa
erio. On form see Trenckner, Notes 63] to open (a door) Vin
i.5 (appur eta Amatassa dvra: imper.; where id. p. S
i.137 has avpur, T., but v. l. appur); Vv 6427 (appuranto Amatassa dvra, expld. at VvA 284 by vivaranto); It
80 (apvuanti A. dv. as T. conj., with v. l. apnuanti,
appurenti & appuranti). pp. apruta (q. v.). Pass.
appuryati [cp. BSk. apvuryati M Vastu ii.158] to be
opened M iii.184 (v. l. av); J i.63 (av); Th 2, 494
(appuitv). See also avpurati.
Apya [Sk. apya, fr. apa + i, cp. apeti] "going away" viz.
1. separation, loss Dh 211 (piya = viyoga DhA iii.276).
2. loss (of property) D iii.181, 182; A ii. 166; iv.283; J iii.387
(atth). 3. leakage, out flow (of water) D i.74; A ii.166;
iv.287. 4. lapse, falling away (in conduct) D i.100.
5. a transient state of loss and woe after death. Four such
states are specified purgatory (niraya), rebirth as an animal, or
as a ghost, or as a Titan (Asura). Analogous expressions are
vinipta & duggati. All combined at D i.82; iii.111; A i.55;
It 12, 73; Nd2 under kya; & freq. elsewhere. apyaduggativinipta as attr. of sasra S ii.92, 232; iv.158, 313; v.342;
opp. to khpya duggati vinipta of an Arahant A
iv.405; v.182 sq. See also foll. pass.: M iii.25 (anapya);
Sn 231; Th 2, 63; J iv.299; Pug 51; VvA 118 (opp. sugati);
PvA 103; Sdhp 43, 75 & cp. niraya, duggati, vinipta.
-gmin going to ruin or leading to a state of suffering
DhA iii.175; cp. gamanya id. Ps. i.94, gamanyat J
-mukha "facing ruin", leading to destruction (=
iv.499.
vinsa mukha DA i.268), usually as nt. "cause of ruin"
D i.101 (cattri apya mukhni); iii.181, 182 (cha bhogna
a mukhni, i. e. causes of the loss of one's possessions);
A ii.166; iv.283, 287. -samudda the ocean of distress DhA
iii 432. -sahya a spendthrift companion D iii.185.
Apra
Apuccha
Apruta [Sk. apvta, pp. of appurati] open (of a door) Vin i.7
= M i.169 (aprut tesa Amatassa dvr); D i.136 (= vivaa
dvra DA i.297); J i.264 (dvra).
Aplamba ["a Vedic term for the hinder part of a carriage" Morris
J P T S. 1886, 128; the "Vedic" unidentified] a mechanism to
stop a chariot, a safe guard "to prevent warriors from falling
out" (C.) S i.33 (Mrs Rh. D. trsl. "leaning board"); J vi.252
(v. l. up; Kern trsl. "remhout", i. e. brake).
Apilpana (nt.) [fr. api + lap] counting up, repetition [Kern, Toev,
s.v. gives der. fr. a + plvana] Nett 15, 28, 54; Miln 37.
Api (indecl.) [Sk. api & pi; Idg. *epi *pi *opi; cp. Gr. on to,
( behind, back = close at one's heels); Lat.
ob. in certain functions; Goth. iftuma. The assimil. form
before vowels is app (= Sk. apy). See further details under
pi.] both prep. & conj., orig. meaning "close by", then as prep.
"towards, to, on to, on" and as adv. "later, and, moreover".
1 (prep. & pref.) (a) prep. c. loc.: api ratte later on in the
night (q. v.) (b) pref.: apidhna putting on to; apiahati
bind on to, apihita (= Gr. , epithet) put on to, (q. v.).
2. (conj. & part.). (a) in affirmative sentences meaning
primarily "moreover, further, and then, even": () (single)
prothetic: api dibbesu kmesu even in heavenly joys Dh 187;
ko disv na pasdeyya api kahbhijtiko even an unfortunate
born Sn 563 api yojanni gacchma, even for leagues we
go Pv iv.107 (= anekni yojanni pi g. PvA 270. Epithetic
(more freq. in the form pi): muhuttam api even a little while
Dh 106, 107; aham api dahukmo I also wish to see Sn 685.
Out of prothetic use (= even = even if) develops the conditional meaning of "if", as in api sakkuemu (and then we may
= if we may) J v.24 (c. = api nma sakkueyyma; see further
under app eva nma). api-api in correlation corresponds
to Lat. et et Sk ca ca, meaning both... and, and... as
well as, & is esp. freq. in combn. app' ekacce... app' ekacce
(and) some... and others, i. e. some... others [not with Kern
Toev. s. v. to appa!], e. g. at D i.118; Th 2, 216; VvA 208,
etc. -app' ekad "morever once" = sometimes Vin iv.178; S
i.162; iv.111; J i.67; DhA iii.303, etc. () (in combn with
other emphatic or executive particles) api ca further, and also,
moreover D i.96; Miln 25, 47. -api ca kho moreover, and
yet, still, all the same It 89 (+ pana v. l.); Miln 20, 239. -api
ca kho pana all the same, never mind, nevertheless J i.253.
-api ssu so much so Vin ii.76. -app' eva nma (with pot.)
(either) surely, indeed, yes, I reckon, (or) I presume, it is likely
that, perhaps Vin i.16 (surely); ii.85 (id.); cp. pi D i.205 (sve pi
upasakameyyma tomorrow I shall surely come along), 226
(siy thus shall it be); M i.460 = It 89 (moreover, indeed); J
i.168 (surely) Vin ii.262 (perhaps) J v.421 (id., piyavca labheyyma). (b) in interrog. dubit. sentences as part. of
interrog. (w. indic. or pot.) corresponding to Lat. nonne, i e.
awaiting an affirmative answer ("not, not then"): api Yasa
64
Apuccha
Appa
Miln 316.
65
Appa
Appaihita
iii.12 (= au); PvA 262. -middha "little slothful", i. e. diligent, alert Miln 412. -rajakkha having little or no obtuseness
D ii.37; M i.169; Sdhp 519. -ssaka having little of one's own,
possessing little A i.261; ii.203. -sattha having few or no
companious, lonely, alone Dh 123. -sadda free from noise,
quiet M ii.2, 23, 30; A v.15; Sn 925 (= appanigghosa Nd1
377); Pug 35; Miln 371. -siddhika bringing little success
or welfare, dangerous J iv.4 (= mandasiddhi vinsabahula C.);
vi.34 (samuddo a. bahu antaryiko). -ssuta possessing
small knowledge, ignorant, uneducated D i.93 (opp. bahussuta); iii.252, 282; S iv.242; It 59; Dh 152; Pug 20, 62; Dhs
1327. -harita having little or no grass S i.169; Sn p. 15 (=
paritta harita tia SnA 154).
Appaibhga (adj) [a + paibhga] not having a counterpart, unequalled, incomparable DhA i.423 (= anuttara).
Appaibha (adj.) [a + paibha] not answering back, bewildered, cowed down Vin iii.162; A iii.57; karoti to intimidate, bewilder J v.238, 369.
Appaima (adj.) [a + paima fr. prep. pai but cp. Vedic apratimna fr. prati + m] matchless, incomparable, invaluable
Th 1, 614; Miln 239.
Appaivattiya (adj.) [a + pai + vattiya = vtya, grd. or vt] (a) not
to be rolled back Sn 554 (of dhammacakka, may however be
taken in meaning of b.). (b) irresistable J ii.245 (shanada).
Note. The spelling with is only found as v. l. at J ii.245;
otherwise as t.
Appaka (adj.) [appa + ka] little, small, trifling; pl. few. nt.
adv. a little D ii.4; A v.232 sq., 253 sq.; Sn 909 (opp. bahu);
Dh 85 (appak = thok na bah DhA ii. 160); Pv i.102 (=
paritta PvA 48); ii.939 ; Pug 62; PvA 6, 60 (= paritta). f. appik
J i.228. instr. appakena by little, i. e. easily DA i.256. anappaka not little, i. e. much, considerable, great; pl. many
S iv.46; Dh 144; Pv i.117 (= bah PvA 58); PvA 24, 25 (read
anappake pi for T. appakeci; so also KhA 208).
Appakra (adj.) [a + pakra] not of natural form, of bad appearance, ugly, deformed J v.69 (= sarrappakra rahita dussahna C.). Cp. apkatika.
Appakia [appa + kia, although in formation also = a + pakia] little or not crowded, not overheaped A v.15 (C. ankia).
Appagabbha (adj.) [a + pagabbha] unobtrusive, free from boldness, modest S ii.198 = Miln 389, Sn 144, 852 (cp. Nd1 228
& KhA 232); Dh 245.
66
Appaihita
Appeti
free from desire, usually as nt. aimlessness, combd. w. animitta Vin iii.92, 93 = iv.25; Dhs 351, 508, 556. See on term
Cpd. 67; Dhs trsl. 93, 143 & cp. paihita.
pad), 41 sq., 91, 135, 240, 250, 308, 350; A i.16, 50. (adhigata); iii.330, 364, 449; iv.28 (gravat) 120 ( garu
karoti); v.21, 126 (kusalesu dhammesu); Sn 184, 264, 334
(= sati avippavsa sankhta a. SnA 339); It 16 (
pasasanti puakiriysu pait), 74 (vihrin); Dh 57 (vihrin, cp. DhA i.434); 327 (rata = satiy avippavse abhirata
DhA iv.26); Dvs ii. 35; KhA 142.
Appavatt (f.) [a + pavatt] the state of not going on, the stop (to
all that), the non continuance (of all that) Th 1, 767; Miln
326.
Appadhasita (adj.) [pp. of a + padhaseti] not violated, unhurt, not offended Vin iv.229.
Appan (f.) [cp. Sk. arpaa, abstr. fr. appeti = arpayati from
of , to fix, turn, direct one's mind; see appeti] application (of
mind), ecstasy,fixing of thought on an object, conception (as
psychol. t. t.) J ii.61 (patta); Miln 62 (of vitakka); Dhs 7,
21, 298; Vism 144 (samdhi); DhsA 55, 142 (def. by Bdhg.
as "ekagga citta rammae appeti"), 214 (jhna). See on
term Cpd. pp. 56 sq., 68, 129, 215; Dhs trsl. xxviii, 10, 53,
82, 347.
Appamda [a + pamda] thoughtfulness, carefulness, conscientiousness, watchfulness, vigilance, earnestness, zeal D i.13
(: a. vuccati satiy avippavso DA i.104); iii.30, 104 sq.,
112, 244, 248, 272; M i.477 (phala); S i.25, 86, 158, 214;
ii.29, 132; iv.78 (vihrin), 97, 125, 252 sq.; v.30 sq. (sam-
67
Appeti
Abbuda
arma = E. arms (i. e. weapon), artus fixed, tight, also limb, ars
= art. For further connections see aava] 1. (*er) to move
forward, rush on, run into (of river) Vin ii.238; Miln 70.
2. (*ar) to fit in, fix, apply, insert, put on to (lit. & fig.) Vin
ii.136, 137; J iii.34 (nimba slasmi to impale, C. vuti);
vi.17 (T. slasmi acceti, vv. ll. abbeti = appeti & upeti, C.
vuati); Miln 62 (dru sandhismi); VvA 110 (saa).
Cp. Trenckner, Notes 64 n. 19, who defends reading abbeti at
T. passages.
Abandhana (adj.) [a + bandhana] without fetters or bonds, unfettered, untrammelled Sn 948, cp. Nd1 433.
Ababa [of uncertain origin, prob. onomatopoetic]. N. of a cert.
Purgatory, enumd. with many other similar names at A v.173
= Sn p. 126 (cp. aaa, abbuda & also Av. i.4, 10 & see for
further expln. of term SnA 476 sq.
Abala (adj.) [a + bala] not strong, weak, feeble Sn 1120 (= dubbala, appabala, appathma Nd2 73); Dh 29 (assa a weak horse
= dubbalassa DhA i.262; opp. sghassa a quick horse).
Abbahati (& abbuhati) [the first more freq. for pres., the second often in aor. forms; Sk. bhati, + bh1 , pp. bha (see
abbha)] to draw off, pull out (a sting or dart); imper. pres.
abbaha Th 1, 404; J ii.95 (v. l. BB appuha = abbuha; C. expls.
by uddharatha). aor. abbahi J v.198 (v. l. BB abbuhi), abbah (metri causa) J iii.390 (v. l. BB dhabbui = abbuhi) =
Pv i.86 (which reads T. abbha, but PvA 41 expls. nhari) =
DhA i.30 (vv. ll. sabbahi, sabbamhi; gloss K. B abbha) =
Vv 839 (T. abbuhi; v. l. BB abbuha, SS avyahi; VvA 327
expls. as uddhari), & abbuhi A iii.55 (v. l. abbahi, C. abbah
ti nhari), see also vv. ll. under abbahi. ger. abbuyha Sn
939 (= abbuhitv uddharitv Nd1 419; v.l. SS abbuyhitv; SnA
567 reads avyuyha & expls. by uddharitv); S i.121 (taha);
iii.26 (id.; but spelt abbhuyha). pp. abbuha (q. v.).
Caus. abbheti [Sk. barhayati] to pull out, drag out J iv.364
(sattha abbhayanti; v. l. abbh); DhA ii.249 (asi). ger.
abbhitv (= hetv) Vin ii 201 (bhisa mula) with v. l.
BB aggahetv, SS abbhitv, cp. Vin i.214 (vv. ll. aggahitv
& abbhitv). pp. abbhita (q. v.).
Appossukkat (f.) [abstr. fr. prec.] inaction, reluctance, carelessness, indifference Vin i.5; D ii.36; Miln 232; DhA ii.15.
Apphuta (& apphua) [Sk. * sphta for a sphrita pp. of
sphar, cp. phurati; phua & also phusati] untouched, unpervaded, not penetrated. D i.74 = M i.276 (ptisukhena).
Appho (f.) [fr. appoeti to blossom] N. of a kind of Jasmine J
vi.336.
Apphoita [pp. of apphoeti] having snapped one's fingers or
clapped one's hands J ii.311 (kle).
Abbhana (nt.) [abstr. fr. abbahati] pulling out (of a sting) DhA
iii.404 (sic. T.; v. l. abbhana; Fausbll aahana; glosses C.
ahangata & ahangika, K. nibbpana). See also abbuhana
and abbhhana.
68
Abbuda
Abbhantara
Abbhatta (nt.) [abstr. of abbha] pulling out, removal, destroying SnA 518.
Abbhita (& abbhitta at J iii.541) [pp. of abbheti Caus. of abbhati] pulled out, removed, destroyed Nd1 59 (abbhita
sallo + uddhaa etc. for abbha); J iii.541 (uncertain reading;
v. l. BB appahita, SS abyhita; C. expls. pupphaka hapita
appaggharaka kata; should we explain as + vi + h and
read abyhita?).
Abbhattha (nt.) [abhi + attha2 in acc. abhi + attha, abhi in function of "towards" = homeward, as under abhi i.1 a; cp. Vedic
abhi sadhastha to the seat R. V. ix. 21. 3] = attha2 , only
in phrase abbhattha gacchati "to go towards home", i. e.
setting; fig. to disappear, vanish, M i.115, 119; iii.25; A iv.32;
Miln 305; pp. abhhattangata "set", gone, disappeared Dhs
1038 (atthangata +); Kvu 576.
Abbha (nt.) [Vedic abhra nt. & later Sk. abhra m. "dark cloud";
Idg. *mbhro, cp. Gr. scum, froth, Lat. imber rain;
also Sk. ambha water, Gr. rain, Oir ambu water].
A (dense & dark) cloud, a cloudy mass A ii.53 = Vin ii.295
= Miln 273 in list of to things that obscure moon & sunshine, viz. abbha mahik (mahiy A) dhmarajo (megho
Miln), Rhu. This list is referred to at SnA 487 & VvA 134.
S i.101 (sama pabbata a mountain like a thunder cloud); J
vi.581 (abbha rajo acchdesi); Pv iv.39 (nl = nla megha
69
Abbhantara
Abbhuta
Abbhantarima (adj.) [superl. formation fr. abbhantara in contrasting function] internal, inner (opp. bhirima) Vin iii.149;
J v.38.
Abbhcikkhati [Intens. of abbhkkhti] to accuse, slander, calumniate D i.161; iii.248, 250; M i.130, 368, 482; iii.207; A
i.161.
Abbhna (nt.) [abhi + yana of + y (i)] coming back, rehabilitation of a bhikkhu who has undergone a penance for an
expiable offence Vin i.49 (raha), 53 (id.), 143, 327; ii.33,
40, 162; A i.99. Cp. abbheti.
Abbhuha (adj.) [ahhi + uha] (a) very hot DhA ii.87 (v. l. accuha). (b) quite hot, still warm (of milk) DhA ii.67.
Abbhuta1 (adj. nt.) [*Sk. adbhuta which appears to be constructed from the Pli & offers like its companion *carya
(acchariya abbhuta see below) serious difficulties as to etym.
The most probable solution is that P. abbhuta is a secondary
adj. formation from abbhu which in itself is nt. of abbha
= Vedic abhva (see etym. under abbhmatta and cp. abbhu,
abbhu & J.P.T.S. 1889, 201). In meaning abbhuta is identical with Vedic abhva contrary to what usually happens, i.
e. striking, abnormal, gruesome, horrible etc.; & that its significance as a + bh ("unreal?") is felt in the background is
also evident from the traditional etym. of the Pli Commentators (see below). See also acchariya] terrifying, astonishing;
strange, exceptional, puzzling, extraordinary, marvellous, supernormal. Described as a term of surprise & consternation
(vimhay vahass adhivacana DA i.43 & VvA 329) & expld.
as "something that is not" or "has not been before", viz. abhta ThA 233; abhta pubbatya abbhuta VvA 191, 329;
abhta pubba DA i.43. 1. (adj.) wonderful, marvellous etc. Sn 681 (ki , combd. with lomahasana); J iv.355
(id.); Th 2, 316 (abbhuta vata vca bhsasi = acchariya
ThA 233); Vv 449 (dassaneyya); Sdhp 345, 496. 2. (nt.)
the wonderful, a wonder, marvel S iv.371, also in dhamma
(see Cpd.). Very freq. in combn. with acchariya and a part.
70
Abbhuta
Abhi
of exclamation, viz, acchariya bho abbhuta bho wonderful indeed & beyond comprehension, strange & stupefying
D i.206; acch. vata bho abbh. vata bho D i.60; acch. bhante
abbh. A ii.50; aho acch. aho abbh. J i.88; acch. vata abbh.
vata Vv 8316 . Thus also in phrase acchariy abbhut
dhamm wonderful & extraordinary signs or things M iii.118,
125; A ii.130; iv.198; Miln 8; and in acchariya-abbhutacittajta dumbfounded & surprised J i.88; DhA iv.52; PvA 6, 50.
-dhamma mysterious phenomenon, something wonderful, supernormal; designation of one of the nine angas or divisions of the Buddhist Scriptures (see nava B 2) Vin iii.8; M
i.133; A ii.103; iii.86, 177; Pug 43; Miln 344; PvA 2, etc.
Abhabbat (f.) [abstr. fr. abhabba] an impossibility, unlikelihood Sn 232, cp. KhA 191.
71
Abhi
Abhikkhaa
72
Abhikkhaa
Abhijigisati
i.143.
Abhikkhipati [abhi + khipati] to throw Dvs iii.60; cp. abhinikkhipati ibid. 12.
Abhigajjati [abhi + gajjati from garj, sound root, cp. P. gaggara] (a) to roar, shout, thunder, to shout or roar at (c. acc.)
Sn 831 (shouting or railing = gajjanto uggajjanto Nd1 172);
ger. abhigajjiya thundering Cp. iii.108 . (b) hum, chatter,
twitter (of birds); see abhigajjin.
Abhijtit (f.) [abstr. fr. abhijti] the fact of being born, descendency VvA 216.
Abhijna (nt. or m?) [Sk. abhijna] recognition, remembrance,
recollection Miln 78. See also abhi.
Abhijnti [abhi + j, cp. jnti & abhi] to know by experience, to know fully or thoroughly, to recognise, know of
(c. acc.), to be conscious or aware of D i.143; S ii.58, 105,
219, 278; iii.59, 91; iv.50, 324, 399; v.52, 176, 282, 299; Sn
1117 (dihi Gotamassa na a.); J iv.142; Pv ii.710 = ii.103
(n bhijnmi bhutta v pta); Sdhp 550; etc. Pot. abhijneyya Nd2 78a , & abhija Sn 917, 1059 (= jneyysi
SnA 592); aor. abhasi Sn p. 16. ppr. abhijna
S iv.19, 89; Sn 788 (= jnanto C.), 1114 (= jnanto Nd2
78b ) abhijnitva DhA iv.233; abhiya S iv.16; v.392; Sn
534 (sabbadhamma), 743 (jtikkhaya), 1115, 1148; It 91
(dhamma); Dh 166 (atta d attha); freq. in phrase
saya abhiya from personal knowledge or self experience It 97 (v.l. abhi); Dh 353; and abhi [short form,
like d for dya, cp. upd] in phrase saya abhi D
i.31 (+ sacchikatv); S ii.217; It 97 (v.l. for abhiya), in
abhi-vosita perfected by highest knowledge S i.167 = 175
= Dh 423 ("master of supernormal lore" Mrs Rh. D. in kindred S. p. 208; cp. also DhA iv.233); It 47 = 61 = 81, and
perhaps also in phrase sabba abhiaparieyya S iv.29.
grd. abhieyya S iv.29; Sn 558 ( abhita known
is the knowable); Nd2 s.v.; DhA iv.233. pp. abhita (q.
v.).
Abhijigisati
Abhi
v.92 sq., 163, 286 sq.; It 90, 91; Pug 39, 40.
Abhijjhia v. l. at DhA iv.101 for ajjhiha.
Abhijvanika (adj.) [abhi + jvana + ika] belonging to one's livehood, forming one's living Vin i.187 (sippa).
Abhijhan (f.) [abhi + jhan of jeh to open ones mouth] strenuousness, exertion, strong endeavour J vi.373 (viriyakaraa C.).
Abhijjhitar [n. ag. fr. abhijjhita in med. function] one who covets M i.287 (T. abhijjhtar, v. l. itar) = A v.265 (T. itar, v. l.
tar).
Abhi
Abhidhvin
228, 470, 482. See also the discussion in the Cpd. 60 sp., 224
sq. For the phrase saya abhi sacchikatv and abhi
vosita see abhijnti. The late phrase yath abhia means
as you please, according to liking, as you like , J v.365 (=
yathdhippya yathruci C.). For abhi in the use of an
adj. (abhia) see abhia.
Abhiha (adv.) [contracted form of abhikkhaa] repeatedly, continuous, often M i.442 (pattika a habitual offender),
446 (kraa continuous practice); Sn 335 (savsa continuous living together); J i.190; Pug 32; DhA ii.239; VvA 116
(= abhikkhaa), 207, 332; PvA 107 (= abhikkhaa). Cp.
abhihaso.
Abhidosika belonging to last night (of gruel) Vin iii.15; Miln 291.
See bhi.
Abhitatta [pp. of abhi +tapati] scorched (by heat), dried up, exhausted, in phrases uha Vin ii.220; Miln 97, and ghamma
S ii.110, 118; Sn 1014; J ii.223; VvA 40; PvA 114.
Abhitpa [abhi + tpa] extreme heat, glow; adj. very hot Vin
iii.83 (ssa sunstroke); M i.507 (mah very hot); Miln 67
(mahbhitpatara much hotter); Pv iv.18 (mah, of niraya).
Abhitita [abhi + tita fr. teti] hammered to pieces, beaten,
struck Vism 231 (muggara).
Abhitihati [abhi + tihati] to stand out supreme, to excel, surpass D ii.261; J vi.474 (abhihya = abhibhavitv C.).
Abhitunna (tua) [not as Morris, J.P.T.S. 1886, 135, suggested
fr. abhi + tud, but acc. to Kern, Toev. p. 4 fr. abhi +
trv. (Cp. turati & tarati2 and Ved. turvati). Thus the correct spelling is tua = Sk. abhitra. The latter occurs as
v. l. under the disguise of (sok )hitua for abhitua
at M. Vastu iii.2]. Overwhelmed, overcome, overpowered S
ii.20; Ps i.129 (dukkha), 164; J i.407; 509 (tua); ii.399,
401; iii.23 (soka); iv.330; v.268; Sdhp 281.
Abhidhyin (adj.) [abhi + dhyin fr. dh]" putting on", designing, calling, meaning Pgdp 98.
Abhidhvin
Abhinibbijjati
ning J vi.559.
Abhinindriya [vv. ll. at all passages for ahnindriya] doubtful meaning. The other is expld by Bdhgh at DA i.120 as
paripu; and at 222 as avikal indriya not defective, perfect sense organ. He must have read ahn. Abhi n
indriya could only be expld as "with supersenseorgans", i. e.
with organs of supernormal thought or perception, thus coming near in meaning to *abhiindriya; We should read ahn
throughout D i.34, 77, 186, 195. ii.13; M ii.18; iii.121; Nd2
under pucch6 (only ahn).
Abhinata [pp. of abhi + namati] bent, (strained, fig. bent on pleasure M i.386 (+ apanata); S i.28 (id.; Mrs. Rh. D. "strained
forth", cp. Kindred S i.39). See also apanata.
Abhinadati [abhi + nadati] to resound, to be full of noise J vi.531.
Cp. abhindita.
Abhinandati [abhi + nandati] to rejoice at, find pleasure in (acc.),
approve of, be pleased or delighted with (acc.) D i.46 (bhsita), 55 (id.), 158, 223; M i.109, 458; S i.32 (anna), 57, 14,
(cakkhu, rpe etc.); A iv.411; Th 1, 606; Dh 75, 219; Sn
1054, 1057, 1111; Nd2 82; Miln 25; DA i.160; DhA iii.194
(aor. abhinandi, opp. paikkosi) VvA 65 (vacana). pp.
abhinandita (q. v.). Often in combn. with abhivadati (q.
v.).
Abhinippan (f.) [abstr. to abhinippeti, cp. nippana] pressing, squeezing, taking hold of Vin iii.121 (+ abhiniggahan).
Abhinippanna (& nipphanna) [abhi + nippanna, pp. of nippajjati] produced, effected, accomplished D ii.223 (siloka); J
vi.36 (so read for abhinippata); Miln 8 (pph.).
76
Abhinibbijjati
Abhipassati
Abhinla (adj.) [abhi + nla] very black, deep black, only with ref.
to the eyes, in phrase netta with deep black eyes D ii.18;
iii.144, 167 sq. [cp. Sp. Av. i.367 & 370 abhinla padma
netra]; Th 2, 257 (nett ahesu abbinla m yat).
Abhinhanati [abhi + nis + han, cp. Sk. nirhanti] to drive away,
put away, destroy, remove, avoid M i.119 (in phrase i a.
abhinharati abhinivajjeti).
Abhinhra [abhi + nhra, to abhinharati; cp. BSk. sarr bhinirhra taking (the body) out to burial, lit. meaning, see note
on abhinharati] being bent on ("downward force" Dhs trsl.
242), i. e. taking oneself out to, way of acting, (proper) behaviour, endeavour, resolve, aspiration S iii.267 sq. (kusala);
A ii.189; iii.311; iv.34 (kusala); J i.14 (Buddhabhvya a.
resolve to become a Buddha), 15 (Buddhattya); Ps i.61 sq.;
ii.121; Nett 26; Miln 216; DhA i.392; ii.82 (kata).
77
Abhipassati
Abhimatthati
Abhimangala (adj.) [abhi + mangala] (very) fortunate, lucky, anspicious, in sammat (of Viskh) "benedicted", blessed Vin
iii.187 = DhA i.409. Opp. avamangala.
Abhimaita (pp. ) [abhi + maita] adorned, embellished,
beautified Miln 361; Sdhp 17.
Abhimata (adj.) [BSk. abhimata, e. g. Jtm 211; pp. of abhimanyate] desired, wished for; agreeable, pleasant C. on Th 1,
91.
78
Abhimatthati
Abhirhati
Abhiratta (adj.) [abhi + ratta] very red J v.156; fig. very much
excited or affected with () Sn 891 (sandihirgena a.).
Abhiruci (f.) [Sk. abhiruci, fr. abhi + ruc] delight, longing, pleasure, satisfaction PvA 168 (= ajjhsaya).
Abhirpa (adj.) [abhi + rpa] of perfect form, (very), handsome, beautiful, lovely Sn 410 (= dassaniya angapaccanga
SnA 383); J i.207; Pug 52; DA i.281 (= aehi manussehi
adhikarpa); VvA 53; PvA 61 (= abhikkanta). Occurs
in the idiomatic phrase denoting the characteristics of true
beauty abhirpa dassanya psdika (+ paramya vaa
pokkharatya samanngata), e. g. Vin i.268; D i.47, 114, 120;
S ii.279; A ii.86, 203; Nd2 659; Pug 66; DhA i.281 (compar.);
PvA 46.
Abhiratatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. abhirata] the fact of being fond of,
delighting in () J v.254 (kma).
Abhirati (f.) [fr. abhi + ram] delight or pleasure in (loc. or
) S i.185; iv.260; A v.122; Dh 88. -an displeasure, discontent, distaste Vin ii.110; D i.17 (+ paritassan); S i.185; v.132;
A iii.259; iv.50; v.72 sq., 122; J iii.395; DA i.111; PvA 187.
Abhirhati
Abhivijayati
Abhivassaka (adj.) [fr. abhivassati] raining, fig. shedding, pouring ont, yielding VvA 38 (puppha).
Abhilpa [fr. abhi + lap] talk, phrasing, expression Sn 49 (vcbhilpa making phrases, talking, idle or objectionable speech =
tiracchanakath Nd2 561); It 89 (? reading abhilpya uncertain, vv. ll. abhipya abhippya, abhispya, abhisapya, atisappya. The corresp. passage S iii.93 reads
abhisapaya: curse, and C. on It 89 expls. abhilpo ti akkoso,
see Brethren 376 n. 1); Dhs 1306 = Nd2 34 (as exegesis or
paraphrase of adhivacana, combd. with vyajana & trsl. by
Mrs. Rh. D. as "a distinctive mark of discourse"); DA i.20,
23, 281; DhsA 51.
Abhivdeti [Caus. of abhivadati] to salute, greet, welcome, honour Vin ii.208 sq.; D i.61; A iii.223; iv.173; Vv 15 (abhivdayi aor. = abhivdana kresi vandi VvA 24); Miln
162. Often in combn with padakkhia karoti in sense of to
bid goodbye, to say adieu, farewell, e. g. D i.89, 125, 225; Sn
1010. Caus. II. abhivdpeti to cause some one to salute,
to make welcome Vin ii.208 (etabba).
Abhivyati [abhi + vyati; cp. Sk. abhivti] to blow through, to
pervade Miln 385.
Abhilsa [Sk. abhila, abhi + la] desire, wish, longing PvA 154.
Abhilekheti [Caus. of abhi + likh] to cause to be inscribed Dvs
v.67 (critta lekha lekhayi).
Abhivagga [abhi + vagga] great mass (?), superior force (?), only
in phrase ena omaddati to crush with sup. force or overpower M i.87 = Nd2 1996 .
80
Abhivijayati
Abhisahati
A i.201; Sn 984 (ger. itv: having got up this curse, cp. SnA
582); PvA 56 (iddh bhisakhra), 172 (id.), 212 (id.).
pp. abhisankhata (q. v.).
Abhisankhipati [abhi + sankhipati] to throw together, heap together, concentrate Vbh 1 sq., 82 sq., 216 sq., 400; Miln 46.
Abhivissattha [abhi + vissattha, pp. of abhivissasati, Sk. abhivivasta] confided in, taken into confidence M ii.52 (v. l.
visaha).
Abhivedeti [abhi + Caus. of vid] 1. to make known, to communicate Dvs v.2, 11. 2. to know J vi.175 (= jnti C.).
Abhisacinti (& cayati) [abhi + sacinti] to accumulate, collect (merit) Vv 476 (Pot. saceyya = sacineyya VvA
202).
Abhisaceteti [abhi + saceteti or cinteti] to bring to consciousness, think out, devise, plan S ii.82. pp. abhisacetayita
(q. v.).
Abhisankhata (adj.) [abhi + sankhata, pp. of abhisankharoti] prepared, fixed, made up, arranged, done M i.350; A ii.43; v.343;
J i.50; Nd1 186 (kappita +); PvA 7, 8.
Abhisankharoti (& khreti in Pot.) [abhi + sankharoti] to prepare, do, perform, work, get up Vin i.16 (iddh bhisankhra
khreyya); D i.184 (id.); S ii.40; iii.87, 92; iv.132, 290; v.449;
81
Abhisahati
Abhisampanna
full grasp of the Dhamma, quasi conversion [cp. dharm bhisamaya Divy 200] S ii.134; Miln 20, 350; VvA 219; PvA
9 etc. frequent; samm- mn bhisamaya full understanding of false pride in ster. phrase" acchecchi (for acchejji)
taha, vivattayi saojana sammmnbhisamay antam
aksi dukkhassa" at S iv.205, 207, 399; A iii.246, 444; It 47;
cp. mna S i.188 = Th 2, 20 (tato mnbhisamay upasanto
carissasi, trsl. by Mrs. Rh. D. in K. S. 239 "hath the mind mastered vain imaginings, then mayst thou go thy ways calm and
serene"); Sn 342 (expld. by mnassa abhisamayo khayo vayo
pahna SnA 344). Also in foll. passages: S ii.5 (paya),
104 (id.), 133 sq. (Abhisamaya Sayutta); Sn 737 (phassa,
expld. ad sensum but not at verbum by phassa nirodha SnA
509); Ps ii.215; Pug 41; Vv 1610 (= saccapaivedha VvA 85);
DA i.32; DhA i.109; VvA 73 (bhvana), 84 (sacchikiriya);
Dpvs i.31. -anabhisamaya not grasping correctly, insufficient understanding, taken up wrongly S iii.260; Pug 21; Dhs
390, 1061, 1162 (Mrs. Rh. D. trsls. "lack of coordination").
Abhisamgacchati [abhi + sam + gacchati, cp. in meaning adhigacchati] to come to (understand) completely, to grasp fully,
to master KhA 236 (for abhisamecca Sn 143).
Abhisamcrika (adj.) [abhi + samcrika, to samcra] belonging to the practice of the lesser ethics; to be practiced; belonging to or what is the least to be expected of good conduct,
proper. Of sikkh Vin v.181; A ii.243 sq.; of dhamma M
i.469; A iii.14 sq.; 422.
Abhisamikkhati (& ekkhati), [abhi + sam + ks, cp. samikkhati] to behold, see, regard, notice J. iv.19 (2nd sg. med.
samekkhase = olokesi C.). ger. samikkha & samekkha
[B.Sk. samkya, e.g. Jtm. p. 28, 30 etc.] J v.340
(samikkha, v. l. sacikkha = passitv C.); 393, 394 (= disv
C.).
Abhisanna (adj.) [pp. of abhisandati = abhi + syand, cp. Sk. abhisanna] overflowing, filled with (), full Vin i. 279 (kya
a body full of humours, cp. ii.119 & Miln 134); J i.17 (v.88;
ptiy); Miln 112 (duggandha).
Abhisapana (nt.) [fr. abhisapati] cursing, curse PvA 144 (so read
for abhisampanna).
Abhisamaya [abhi + samaya, from sam + i, cp. abhisameti &
sameti; BSk. abhisamaya, e. g. Divy 200, 654] "coming
by completely", insight into, comprehension, realization, clear
understanding, grasp, penetration. See on term Kvu trsl. 381
sq. Esp. in full phrases: attha grasp of what is proficient S i.87 = A iii.49 = It 17, cp. A ii.46; ariyasaccna a.
full understanding of the 4 noble truths S v.415, 440, 441 [cp.
Divy 654: anabhisamitn caturn ryasatyn a.]; Sn
758 (sacca = sacc vabodha SnA 509); Miln 214 (catusacc);
Sdhp 467 (catusacc), 525 (saccna); dhamm bhisamaya
82
Abhisampanna
Abhissara
Abhisambudhna (adj.) [formation of a ppr. med. fr. pp. abhsam + budh instead of abhisam + bujjh] awaking, realising,
knowing, understanding Dh 46 (= bujjhanto jnanto ti attho
DhA i.337).
Abhisambodhi (f.) [abhi + sambodhi] the highest enlightenment
J i.14 (parama). Cp. abhisambujjhana and (samm ) sambodhi.
Abhiseka [fr. abhi + sic, cp. Sk. abhieka] anointing, consecration, inauguration (as king) A i.107 (cp. abhisitta); ii.87 read
abhisek anabhisitto; J ii.104, 352; DhA i.350; PvA 74. Cp.
bhisekika.
Abhisambhava [fr. abhisambhavati] only in dur hard to overcome or get over, hard to obtain or reach, troublesome S v.454;
A v.202; Sn 429, 701; J v.269, vi.139, 439.
Abhisambhavati (bhoti) [abhi + sambhavati] "to come up to",
i. e. to be able to (get or stand or overcome); to attain, reach,
to bear A iv.241; Th 1, 436; Nd1 471, 485; J iii.140; v.150,
417; vi.292, 293, 507 (fut. med. sambhossa = sahissmi
adhivsessmi C.); Ps ii.193. ger. bhutv Th 1, 1057 &
bhavitv Sn 52 (cp. Nd2 85). aor. bhosi D ii.232. grd.
bhavanya D ii.210; Ps ii.193. See also abhisambhuti.
Abhisambhuti [considered to be a bastard form of abhisambhavati, but probably of diff. origin & etym.; also in Bh. Sk.
freq.] to be able (to get or reach); only in neg. ppr. an-
83
Abhissara
Amata
Amacca [Vedic amtya (only in meaning "companion"), adj. formation fr. am an adverbial loc. gen. of pron. 1st person,
Sk. aha = Idg. *emo (cp. Sk. m ama), meaning "(those)
of me or with me", i. e. those who are in my house] 1. friend,
companion, fellow worker, helper, esp. one who gives his
advice, a bosom friend It 73; J vi. 512 (sahajt amacc);
Pv ii.620 (a paricrik well-advising friends as company
or around him). Freq. in combn. with mitta as mitt macc,
friends & colleagues D iii.189 90; S 190 = A ii.67; PvA 29;
or with t (ti slohit intimate friends & near relations), mittmacc tislohit Vin ii.126; Sn p. 104 (= mitt
ca kammakar ca SnA 447); mitt v amacc v t v slohit v A i.222; PvA 28; amacc ti sangh ca A i.152.
2. Especially a king's intimate friend, king's favourite, confidant J i.262; PvA 73 (kula), 74 (amacc ca purohito ca), 81
(sabba kammika amacca), 93; and his special adviser or
privy councillor, as such distinguished from the official ministers (purohita, mahmatta, prisajja); usually combd. with
prisajj (pl.) viz. D i.136 (= piya sahyaka DA i.297, but
cp. the foll. expln. of prisajj as "ses atti kar"); Vin
i.348; D iii.64 (amacc prisajj gaakamahmatt); A i.142
(catunna mahrjna a. prisajj). See on the question of
ministers in general Fick, Sociale Gliederung p. 93, 164 &
Banerjea, Public Administration in Ancient India pp. 106
120.
84
Amata
Amba
Amanussa [a + manussa] a being which is not human, a fairy demon, ghost, god, spirit, yakkha Vin i.277; D i. 116; S i.91, J
i.99; Dhs 617; Miln 207; DhsA 319; DhA i.13 (pariggahta
haunted); PvA 216. Cp. amnusa.
Amutta (adj.) [a + mutta] not released, not free from (c. abl.) It
93 (mrabandhan).
Amutra (adv.) [pron. base amu + tra] in that place, there; in another state of existence D i.4, 14, 184; It 99.
Amha-vinaya "acquittal on the ground of restored sanity"
(Childers) Vin i.325 (ix.6, 2); ii.81 (iv.5), 99 (iv.14, 27);
iv.207, 351; M ii.248.
Amoha (adj.) [a + moha, cp. Sk. amogha] not dull. As n. absence of stupidity or delusion D iii.214; Pug 25. The form
amogha occurs at J vi.26 in the meaning of "efficacious, auspicious" (said of raty nights).
Amba [Derivation unknown. Not found in pre Buddhist literature. The Sk. is mra. Probably non Aryan], the Mango
tree, Mangifera Indica D i.46, 53, 235; J ii.105, 160; Vv 7910 ;
Pug 45; Miln 46; PvA 153, 187.
-ahi the kernel or stone of the m. fruit DhA iii.207,
208. -rma a garden of mangoes, mango grove Vv 795 ;
VvA 305. -kajika mango gruel Vv 3337 (= ambilakajika
VvA 147). -pakka a (ripe) mango fruit J ii.104, 394; DhA
85
Amba
Aya
Amm (f.) [onomat. from child language; Sk. amb, cp. Gr.
mother, Oisl. amma "granny", Ohg. amma "mammy",
nurse; also Lat. amita father's sister & amre to love] mother
J iii.392 (gen. ammya). Voc. amma (see sep.).
Amha & Amhan (nt.) [Sk. aman, see also asama2 ] a stone Sn
443 (instr. amhan, but SnA 392 reads asman = psena).
-maya made of stone, hard Dh 161 (= psa DhA
iii.151).
Aya (pron.) [Sk. aya etc., pron. base Idg. *i (cp. Sk. iha), f.
*. Cp. Gr. , ; Lat. is (f. ea, nt. id); Goth is, nt. ita; Ohg.
er (= he), nt. ez (= it); Lith. js (he), f. j (she).] demonstr.
pron. "this, he"; f. aya; nt. ida & ima "this, it" etc. This
pron. combines in its inflection two stems, viz. as (aya in
nom. m. & f.) & im (id in nom. nt.).
I. Forms. A. (sg.) nom. m. aya Sn 235; J i.168, 279;
f. aya [Sk. iya] Kh vii.12; J ii.128, 133; nt. ida Sn 224;
J iii.53; & ima Miln 46. acc. m. ima J ii.160; f. ima
[Sk. m] Sn 545, 1002; J i.280. gen. dat. m. imassa J
i.222, 279 & assa Sn 234, 1100; Kh vii.12 (dat.); J ii.158; f.
imiss J i.179 & ass [Sk. asy] J i.290; DhA iii.172. instr. m. nt. imin J i.279; PvA 80 & (peculiarly or perhaps
for amun) amin Sn 137; f. imya [Sk. anay] J i.267. The
instr. anena [Sk. anena] is not proved in Pli. abl. asm Sn
185; Dh 220; & imasm (not proved). loc. m. nt. imasmi
Kh iii.; J ii. 159 & asmi Sn 634; Dh 242; f. imiss PvA 79
(or imissa?) & imya (no ref.). B. (pl.) nom. m. ime J
i.221; Pv i.83 ; f. im [Sk. im] Sn 897 & imyo Sn 1122; nt.
imni [= Sk.] Vin i.84. acc. m. ime [Sk. imn] J i.266; ii.416;
f. im [Sk. im] Sn 429; J ii.160. gen. imesa J ii.160 &
esa [Sk. e] M ii.86, & esna M ii.154; iii.259; f. also
sa J i.302 (= etsa C.) & imsa. instr. m. nt imehi J
Ambila (adj.) [Sk. amla = Lat. amarus] sour, acid; one of the
6 rasas or tastes, viz. a., lavaa, tittaka, kauka, kasya, madhura (see under rasa): thus at Miln 56. Another enumeration at
Nd2 540 & Dhs 629. J i.242 (anambila), 505 (lo); ii.394
(lo); DA i.270 (ygu sour gruel); DhA ii.85 (ati ambila,
with accuha & atista).
Ambu (nt.) [Vedic ambu & ambhas = Gr. , Lat. imber
rain; cp. also Sk. abhra rain cloud & Gr. scum:
see P. abbha] water J v.6; Nd1 202 (a. vuccati udaka); Dvs
ii.16. Cp. ambha.
-crin "living in the water", a fish Sn 62 (= maccha Nd2
91). -sevla a water plant Th 1, 113.
Ambuja (m. & nt.) [ambu + ja of jan] "water born", i. e. 1.
(m.) a fish S i.52. 2. (nt.) a lotus Sn 845 (= paduma Nd1
202); Dvs v.46; Sdhp 360.
Ambuda [ambu + da fr. d] "water giver", a cloud Dvs v.32;
Sdhp 270, 275.
Ambha & Ambho (nt.) [see ambu] water, sea Dvs iv.54.
Ambhaka see ambaka.
Ambho (indecl.) [fr. ha + bho, see bho, orig. "hallo you there"]
86
Aya
Arakkhiya
Ayana (nt.) [Vedic ayana, fr. i] (a) "going", road. (b) going
to, goal S v.167 (ekyano maggo leading to one goal, a direct
way), 185 (id.); DA i.313; Dvs iv.40. See also eka.
Ayasa (nt.) [a + yasa, cp. Sk. ayaa] ill repute, disgrace Miln
139, 272; Dvs i.8.
Ayira (& Ayyira) (n. adj.) [Vedic rya, Metathesis for ariya as
diaeretic form of rya, of which the contracted (assimilation)
form is ayya. See also ariya] (n.) ariyan, nobleman, gentleman (opp. servant); (adj.) aryan, well-born, belonging to the
ruling race, noble, aristocratic, gentlemanly J v.257; Vv 396 .
f. ayir lady, mistress (of a servant) J ii.349 (v. l. oyyak);
voc. ayire my lady J v.138 (= ayye C.).
Ara [Vedic ara fr. , oti; see etym. under appeti & cp. more esp.
Lat. artus limb, Gr. chariot, also P. aava] the spoke
of a wheel D ii.17 (sahass ra adj. with thousand spokes), cp.
Miln 285; J iv.209; vi.261; Miln 238; DhA ii.142; VvA 106
(in allegorical etym. of arahant = sasra cakkassa arna
hatatt "breaker of the spokes of the wheel of transmigration")
= PvA 7 (has sasra vaassa); VvA 277.
87
Arakkhiya
Arahatta
Arai & (f.) [Vedic ara & arai fr. ] wood for kindling fire
by attrition, only in foll. cpds.: potaka small firewood, all
that is needed for producing fire, chiefly drill sticks Miln 53;
sahita (nt.) same Vin ii.217; J i. 212 (); v.46 (); DhA ii.246;
mathana rubbing of firewood J vi.209. Note. The reading at PvA 211 araiyehi devehi sadisa vaa is surely a
misreading (v. l. BB ariyehi).
Araja (adj.) [a + raja] free from dust or impurity S iv.218 (of the
wind); Vv 536 (= apagata raja VvA 236).
Araa (nt.) [Vedic araya; from araa, remote, + ya. In the Rig
V. araya still means remoteness (opp. to am, at home). In
the Ath V. it has come to mean wilderness or forest. Connected
with rd and re, remote, far from]. forest D i.71; M i.16;
iii.104; S i.4, 7, 29, 181, 203 (mah); A i.60 (vanapatthni);
ii.252; iii.135, 138; Sn 39, 53, 119; Dh 99, 329, 330; It 90; Vv
567 ; Ps i.176. [The commentators, give a wider meaning to the
word. Thus the O. C. (Vin iii.46, quoted Vism 72 & SnA 83)
says every place, except a village and the approach thereto, is
araa. See also Vin iii.51; DA i.209; PvA 73; VvA 249; J
i.149, 215; ii.138; v.70].
-yatana a forest haunt Vin ii.201; S ii.269; J i.173; VvA
301; PvA 54, 78, 141. -kuik a hut in the forest, a forest
lodge S i.61; iii.116; iv.116, 380; DhA iv.31 (as v. l.; T. has
kui). -gata gone into the forest (as loneliness) M i.323; A
iii.353; v.109 sq., 207, 323 sq. -hna a place in the forest
J i.253. -vsa a dwelling in the forest, a hermitage J i.90.
-vihra living in (the) loneliness (of the forest) A iii.343 sq.
Araaka (& raka) (adj.) [araa + ka] belonging to solitude or to the forest, living in the forest, fond of solitude, living
as hermits (bhikkh) M i.214 (), 469; iii.89; S ii.187, 202 (v.
l. ), 208 sq.; 281; A iii.343, 391; iv.291, 344, 435; v.10. See
also raaka.
Araakatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. araaka] the habit of one who lives
in the forest, indulgence in solitude & sequestration, a hermit's
practice, seclusion S ii.202, 208 sq. See also raakatta.
Araa1 (adj. n.) [Vedic araa fr. *ara , which as abl. r is
used as adv. far from, cp. P. rak. Orig. meaning "removed
from, remote, far". See also araa]. (adj.) living in solitude,
far from the madding crowd M iii.237 (vibhanga sutta); S
i.44, 45; J i.340 (tittha?).
Araa2 (nt.) [a + raa] quietude, peace Nett 55 (+ ta), 176 (or
as adj. = peaceful) ThA 134 (+ saraa); Vbh 19 sq. (opp.
saraa). See saraa2.
-vihrin (or ara vihrin) [to be most likely taken as
ara, abl. of araa in function of rak, i. e. adv. far from,
away; the spelling araa would refer it to araa2 . As regards
meaning the P. Commentators expln. it as opp. of raa fight,
88
Arahatta
Ariya
89
Ariya
Arpin
scarcely, if at all, present to their minds. Dhammapla especially was probably a non Aryan, and certainly lived in a
Dravidian environment. The then current similar popular etmologies of ariya and arahant (cp. next article) also assisted
the confusion in their minds. They sometimes therefore erroneously identify the two words and explain Aryans as meaning Arahants (DhA i.230; SnA 537; PvA 60). In other ways
also they misrepresented the old texts by ignoring the racial
force of the word. Thus at J v.48 the text, speaking of a hunter
belonging to one of the aboriginal tribes, calls him anariyarpa. The C. explains this as "shameless", but what the text
has, is simply that he looked like a non Aryan. (cp frank
in English).
Arhatatta in phrase "arhatta ariyo hoti" at A iv.145 is wrong
reading for arna hatatt. The whole phrase is inserted by
mistake from a gloss explaining arah in the foll. sentence
"rakatt kilesna arna hatatt... arah hoti", and is to be
deleted (omitted also by SS).
Aru (nt.) [Vedic aru, unknown etym.] a wound, a sore, only in
cpds.: kya a heap of sores M ii.64 = Dh 147 = Th 1, 769 (=
navanna vaamukhna vasena arubhta kya DhA iii.109
= VvA 77); gatta (adj.) with wounds in the body M i.506 (+
pakka gatta); Miln 357 (id); pakka decaying with sores S
iv.198 (ni gattni); bhta consisting of wounds, a mass of
wounds VvA 77 = DhA iii.109.
Aruka = aru; only in cpd. pamacitto (adj.) having a heart like
a sore (of a man in anger) A i.124 = Pug 30 (expld at Pug A
212 as pura vaa sadisa citto "an old wound" i. e.
continually breaking open).
Arua [Vedic arua (adj.) of the colour of fire, i. e. ruddy, nt.
the dawn; of Idg. *ereu as in Sk. arua reddish, Av. aurua
white, also Sk ravi sun; an enlarged from of Idg. *reu as in
Sk. rudhira, rohita red (bloody; see etym. under rohita), Gr.
, Lat. ruber.] the sun Vin ii.68; iv.245; J ii.154; v.403;
vi.330; Dpvs i.56; DA i.30. a. uggacchati the sun rises J
i.108; VvA 75, & see cpds.
-ugga sunrise Vin iv.272; S v.29, 78, 101, 442 (at
all Sayutta pass. the v.l. SS is aruagga); Vism 49.
-uggamana sunrise (opp. oggamanna). Vin iii.196, 204, 264;
iv.86, 166, 230, 244; DhA i.165; ii.6; PvA 109. -utu the occasion of the sun ( rise) DhA i.165. -vaa of the colour
of the sun, reddish, yellowish, golden Vism 123; DhA i 1.3 =
PvA 216. -sadisa (vaa) like the sun (in colour) PvA 211
(gloss for suriyavaa).
Arubheda the Rigveda ThA 206.
Arpa (adj.) [a + rpa] without form or body, incorporeal, D i.195
sq.; iii.240; Sn 755; It 62; Sdhp 228, 463, 480. See details under rpa.
-vacara the realm or world of Formlessness, Dhs 1281
1285; Ps i.83 sq., 101. -kyika belonging to the group
of formless beings Miln 317 (dev). -hyin standing in or
being founded on the Formless It 62. -tah "thirst" for the
Formless D iii.216. -dhtu the element or sphere of the Incoporeal (as one of the 3 dhtus rpa, arpa, nirodha; see
dhtu) D iii.215, 275; It 45. -bhava formless existence D
iii.216. -loka the world of the Formless, Sdhp 494. -sain
not having the idea of form D ii.110; iii.260; Exp. i.252.
90
Arpin
Alta
Ala2 (adj.) [ala adv. as adj.] enough, only in neg. anala insufficient, impossible M i.455; J ii.326 = iv.471.
91
Alta
Ava
16
Ara (adj.) [Is it the same as ura?] only used with ref. to the
eyelashes, & usually expld. by visla, i.e. extended, wide, but
also by bahala, i.e. thick. The meaning & etym. is as yet uncertain. Kern, (Toev. s.v.) transls. by "bent, crooked, arched".
akkhin with wide eyes (eyelashes?) J i.306 (= visla netta
C.); pamha with thick eye lashes Vv 357 (= bahala
sayata pakhuma C.; v.l. pamukha); bhamuka having
thick eyebrows or lashes J vi.503 (so read for pamukha; C.
expls by visl akkhigaa). Cp. ra.
92
Ava
Avakujja
Ava (adv.) [Vedic avk & av] the prep. ava in adv. use,
down, downward; in C. often expld. by adho. Rarely absolute, the only passage found so far being Sn 685 (ava sari
he went down, v. l. avasari, expld. by otari SnA 486). Opp.
uddha (above, up high). Freq. in cpd. avasira (adj.) head
downward (+ uddhapda feet up), a position characteristic
of beings in Niraya (Purgatory), e. g. S i.48; Sn 248 (patanti
satt niraya avasir = adhogata ss SnA 290); Vv 5225
(of Revat, + uddhapda); Pv iv.146 ; J i.233 (+ uddhapda);
Avakiriya [grd of avakirati] to be cast out or thrown away; rejectable, low, contemptible J v.143 (taken by C. as ger. =
avakiritv).
93
Avakujja
Avajja
Avakkanta () [pp. ofnext] entered by, beset with, overwhelmed by (instr.) S iii.69 (dukkha, sukha and an).
Avakkanti (f.) [fr. avakkamati] entry, appearance, coming down
into, opportunity for rebirth S ii.66 (nmarpassa); iii.46 (pacanna indriyna); Pug 13 (= okkanti nibbatti ptubhvo
PugA 184); Kvu 142 (nmarpassa); Miln 123 (gabbhassa).
Avakkama [fr. avakkamati] entering, appearance J v.330 (gabbhassa).
Avakkamati & okkamati [ava + kamati fr. kram] to approach.
to enter, go into or near to, to fall into, appear in, only in ger.
(poetically) avakamma J iii.480 (v.l. apa).
Avajaya [ava + jaya, cp. apajita] defeat DhA ii.228 (v.l. for T.
ajaya).
94
Avajja
Avapivati
Avattha1 [der. uncertain] aimless (of crik, a bhikkhu's wandering, going on tour) A iii.171 (C. avavatthika).
Avajjat (f.) [abstr. to prec.), only neg. an blamelessness, faultlessness Pug 25, 41; Dhs 1349.
Avattha2 [Sk. apsta, apa + sta, pp. of as2 ] thrown away J v.302
(= chaita C.).
Avattharaa (nt.) [fr. avattharati] setting in array, deploying (of
an army) J ii.104 (of a robber band), 336.
Ava (f.) [Sk. avaj, fr. ava + j] contempt, disregard, disrespect J i.257 (ya).
Avata (adj.) [pp. of avajnti] despised, treated with contempt PvA 135 (an); Sdhp 88, 90.
Avapivati
Avasussati
Avabodha [ava + bodha] perception, understanding, full knowledge Sn A 509 (sacca). Neg. an not awakened to the
truth Vv 826 (= ananubodha VvA 319).
Avalepana () (nt.) [fr. ava + lip] smearing, daubing, plastering M i.385 (pta); Sn 194 (kyo taca mas valepano
the body plastered with skin & flesh).
Avasaa & Osaa [Sk. apasta, cp. also samavasta, pp. of ava
+ s] withdrawn, gone away; one who has left a community
& gone over to another sect, a renegade Vin iv.216, 217 (=
titthyatana sakata).
Avasiha (sic & not osiha) [pp. of avasissati, Sk. avaia] left,
remaining, over S ii.133; J i.138; v.339; VvA 66, pl. avasih
all who are left, the others PvA 165 (jan).
Avasitta () [pp. of osicati] besprinkled, anointed, consecrated, only in phrase rj khattiyo muddhvasitto of a properly consecrated king (see also khattiya) D i. 69; ii.227; iii.64;
Pug 56; DA i.182 (T. muddhvassita, v. l. abhisitta); etc.
See also abhisitta.
Avasin (adj. n.) [a + vasin fr. va] not having control over
oneself, D ii.275.
Avasissati [Sk. avaiyate; Pass. of ava + is; but expld. by Kern,
Toev. s. v. as fut of avasdati] to be left over, to remain, in
phrase ya pama kata kamma na ta tatrvasissati
D i.251; A v.299 = S iv.322; J ii.61 (see expln. on p. 62).
Also in the phrases taco ca nahr ca ahi ca avasissatu
sarre upasussatu masa-lohita M i.481; A i.50; S ii.28,
and sarrni avasissanti S ii. 83. With the latter phrases cp.
avasussati.
Avas metri causa for avasi, a + vasi, aor. of vas4 to stop, stay,
rest J v.66 (m avas).
Avasussati [Sk. *ava suyati of u] to dry up, to wither; in
later quotations of the old kma taco ca nahru ca ahi
Avasussati
Avijj
262 (an); ii.240; iv.128, 201; Sn 63 (an); Pug 27, 36; Dpvs
ii.5 (T. reads avassita). Neg. anavassuta: 1. not leaking,
without a leak J iv.20 (nv = udaka pavesan bhvena a.
C.). 2. free from leakage, i. e. from lust or moral intoxication Dh 39 (citta); Sn 63 (see expld. in detail at Nd2 40); SnA
116 (= kilesa anvssava virahita).
Avasra [ava + sra; ava here in function of *avas see ava ii]
sundown, sunset, acc. as adv. at or with sundown J v 56
(anvasra metrically).
Avasesa [Sk. avaea, fr. ava + i, cp. avasissati] remainder, remaining part; only in cpds. an (adj.) without any remainder,
i. e. fully, completely M i.220 = A v.347 (dohin); A i.20 sq.,
88; Sn 146; Pug 17; Dhs 363, 553; SnA 417 (pharaa); PvA
71 (ato, adv. altogether, not leaving anything out); & svasesa leaving something over, having something left A i.20 sq.,
88; Pv iii.55 (jvita having still a little life left).
Avasesa2 (adj.) [see prec.] remaining, left Sn 694 (yu avaseso); J iii.19; Vbh 107 (tah ca avases ca kiles); PvA
19 (avases ca tak the rest of the relatives), 21 (avases
paris), 201 (ahi tacamatt vasesa sarra with a body
on which nothing but skin & bones were left), 206 (ahi
sanghtamatt vasesa sarra). nt. (as pred.) what is
left PvA 52 (app avasesa); KhA 245 (n atthi tesa avasesa).
Avasesaka (adj.) [fr. avasesa2 ] being left, overflowing, additional, more J i.400 (an); Dpvs iv.45.
Avassa (adj.) [a + va] against one's will, inevitable J i. 19
(bhvin); v.319 (gmit). Usually as nt. adv. inevitably
(cp. BSk. avaya Divy 347; Av. i.209 etc.) J iii.271; DA
i.263; Sdhp 293.
Avassava [ava + sava, Sk. srava fr. sru to flow] outflow, effect,
only neg. anassava no further effect Vin ii.89; M i.93; ii.246;
A iii.334 sp.
Avikopin (adj.) [a + vikopin; fr. vi + kup] not agitated, not moving, unshaken, undisturbed J vi.226 (acchejja +).
Avassvana (nt.) [fr. ava + Caus. of sru to flow] straining, filtering (?) J ii.288.
Avassuta (adj.) [Sk. *avasruta, pp. of ava + sru, cp. avas- sava]
1. (lit.) flowing out or down, oozing, leaking J iv. 20. 2.
(fig.) (cp. anvssava & sava) filled with desire, lustful (opp.
anavassuta, q. v.) Vin ii.236; S iv.70, 184 (an); A i.261,
Avijj (f.) [Sk. avidy; fr. a + vid] ignorance; the main root of
evil and of continual rebirth (see paicca samuppda, cp. S
ii.6, 9, 12; Sn p. 141 & many other passages). See on term
Cpd. 83 n. 3, 187 sq, 262 sq. & for further detail vijj. avi97
Avijj
Avecca
Avissaji at J vi.79 is with Kern, Toev. s. v. better to be read avassaji (see avassajati).
Avinibbhuja (adj.) [ppr. of a + vinibbhujati] unable to distinguish or to know J v.121 (= atrento C.).
Avinibbhoga (ad.) [a + vinibbhoga] not to be distinguished, indistinct J iii.428 (sadda).
Av in general see v.
Avci [B.Sk. avci a + vci (?) no intermission, or no pleasure (?),
unknown, but very likely popular etym.] 1. avciniraya, one
of the (great) hells (see niraya), described in vivid colours at
many passages of the Pli canon, e.g. at Vin ii.203 = It 86;
Nd1 18, 347, 405 = Nd2 304 iiid; Ps i.83; Dhs 1281; J i.71, 96;
iii.182; iv.159; DhA i.148; PvA 52; SnA 290; Sdhp 37, 194;
Pgdp 5 sq.; etc etc. 2. disintegration, decay Vism 449 (a.
jar nma).
Avecca (adv.) [Usually taken as ava + ger. of i (*itya), cp. adhicca & abhisamecca, but by P. grammarians as a + vecca.
The form is not sufficiently clear semantically; B.Sk. avetya,
Avivda [a + vivda] absence of contesting or disputing, agreement, harmony D iii.245; Sn 896 (bhma SnA 557 or
98
Avecca
Asahra
Avera (adj.) [a + vera] peaceable, mild, friendly Sn 150 (= veravirahita KhA 248); Sdhp 338. (nt.) friendliness, kindness
D i.247 (citta); Dh 5 (= khantimetta DhA i 51).
Avhna (nt.) [fr. avhayati, Sk. hvna in diff. meaning] - 1. begging, calling, asking Sn 710; Vism 68 (nabhinandan).
2. addressing, naming SnA 605 (= nma).
Avyagga (ad) [a + vyagga, Sc. vyagra] not bewildered, not confused S v.66. Cp. avisaggat.
Avhyana (nt.) [cp. Sk. hvayana] calling to, asking, invocation, imploration D i.11 (Sir avhyane, v. l. avhayana;
expld. at DA i.97 with reading Sirivhyana as "ehi Siri mayha sire patihh ti eva sire Siriy avhayana"), 244, 245
(v. l. avhna).
Avyatha (adj.) [a + vyatha, cp. Sk. vyath misfortune] not miserable, fortunate J iii.466 (= akilamna C.).
Avosita [reading uncertain, cp. avyosita] only in neg. an unfulfilled, undone Th 1, 101.
Asavsa (adj.) [a + savsa] deprived of co residence, expelled from the community Vin iv.213, 214.
Asavinda [ppr. a + savindati] not finding, not knowing Th
1, 717.
Asavuta (adj.) [pp. of a + savuti, cp. savata] not restrained Dhs 1345, 1347.
Asasaha (adj.) [a + sasaha] not mixed or mixing, not associating, not given to society M i.ai4; S i.63; Sn 628 = Dh 404
(= dassana savana samullpa paribhogakya sasaggna abhvena SnA 468 = DhA iv.173).
Avyyata (adj.) [a + vyyata of yam] at random, without discrimination, careless J i.496 (= avyatta C.).
Avyyika (adj.) [fr. avyaya] not liable to loss or change, imperishable J v.508 (= avigacchanaka C.).
Asahra (adj.) [= asahriya of sa + h] immovable, unconquerable, irrefutable Vin ii.96; S i.193; A iv.141; v.71; Sn
1149 (as Ep. of Nibbna, cp. Nd2 110); J i. 62; iv.283 (citta
99
Asahra
Asanthava
Asattha (n. adj.) [a + sattha] absence of a sword or knife, without a knife, usually combd. with adaa in var. phrases: see
under daa. Also at Th 1, 757 (+ avaa).
Asankheyya (adj.) [a + sankheyya, grd. of sa khy] incalculable, innumerable, nt. an immense period A ii.142; Miln
232 (cattri a.), 289 DhA i.5, 83, 104.
Asanga (adj.) [a + sanga] not sticking to anything, free from attachment, unattached Th 2, 396 (mnasa, = ansattacitta ThA
259); Miln 343. Cp. next.
Asana2 (nt.) [cp. Sk. aana of a, cp. asati] eating, food; adj.
eating J i.472 (ghatsana Ep. of the fire; v.64 (id.). Usually in
neg. form anasana fasting, famine, hunger Sn 311 (= khud
SnA 324); DA i.139. See also nirasana.
Asana3 (nt.) [Sk. asana] the tree Pentaptera Tomentosa J i.40 (as
Bodhi tree of Gotama); ii.91; v.420; vi.530.
Asani (f.) [Vedic aani in same meaning; with Sk. ari corner,
caturara four cornered (see assa), to Lat. cer pointed, sharp,
Gr. pointed, Ags. egl sting, Ohg. ekka corner, point.
Connected with this is Sk. aan (see asana1 ). Cp. also asa
& asama2 ] orig. a sharp stone as hurling weapon thence in
mythol. Indra's thunderbolt, thunder clap, lightning J i.71,
167; ii.154; iii.323; Miln 277; VvA 83.
-aggi the fire of thunder, i. e. lightning or fire caused
by lightning DhA iii.71. -pta the falling of the thunderbolt, thunderclap, lightning DA i.280 (or should we read asannipta?); PvA 45. -vicakka same as pta (?) S ii. 229 (=
lbha sakkra silokassa adhivacana); D iii.44, 47.
Asantsin (adj.) [a + santsin, cp. asantsa] fearless, not trembling, not afraid Sn 850; Dh 351; Nd2 109; DhA iv.70.
Asat (Asanto) [a + sat, ppr. of asti] not being, not being good,
i. e. bad, not genuine (cp. asa); freq., e. g. Sn 94, 131, 881,
950; Dh 73, 77, 367; It 69 (asanto niraya nenti). See also
asaddhamma.
Asantuhit (f.) [abstr. fr. asantuhita = asantuha] dissatisfaction, discontentment D iii.214 (so read for tutth) = A i.95.
100
Asanthava
Asi
seclusion Sn 207.
Asapatta (adj. n.) [a + sapatta = Sk. sapatna] (act.) without enmity, friendly (med.) having no enemy or foe, secure,
peaceful D ii.276; Sn 150 (= vigata paccatthika, mettavihrin KhA 249); Th 2, 512.
Asambdha (adj.) [a + sambdha] unobstructed Sn 150 (= sambdha virahita KhA 248); J i.80; ThA 293.
Asammodiya (nt.) [a + sammodiya] disagreement, dissension J
vi.517 (= asamaggiya C.).
Asabbha (adj.) [a + sabbha, i. e. *sabhya cp. sabh & in meaning court: courteous, hof: hoflich etc.] not belonging to the
assembly room, not consistent with good manners, impolite, vile, low, of base character J iii.527 (mtugma); Dh 77 =
J iii.367 = Th 1, 994; Miln 221; DhA i.256; ThA 246 (akkhi).
Cp. next. Note. Both sabbha and sabbhin occur only in the
negative form.
Asra (n. adj.) [a + sra] that which is not substance, worthlessness; adj. worthless, vain, idle Sn 937 (= asra nissra srpagata Nd1 409); Dh 11, 12 (cp. DhA i.114 for interpretation).
Asraka (adj.) [a + sraka] unessential, worthless, sapless, rotten
Th 1, 260; J ii.163 = DhA i.144.
Asamaggiya (nt.) [abstr. fr. a + samagga] lack of concord, disharmony J vi.516 (so read for asmaggiya).
Ashasa (nt.) [a + shasa] absence of violence, meekness, peaceableness D iii.147 (ashase rata fond of peace); acc. as adv.
ashasa without violence, not arbitrarily J iii.319; instr.
ashasena id. J vi.280; Dh 257 (= amusvdena DhA iii.382).
Asi [Vedic asi, Av. ah Lat. ensis] a sword, a large knife D i.77
(= DA i.222); M ii.99; A i.48 = (asin ssa chindante); iv.97
(asin hanti attna); J iv.118 (asi sunisito), 184; v.45 (here
meaning "sickle"), 475 (asi ca me maasi, probably faulty
for either "si ca me" or "sicam me"); Vism 201 (si
the sword of knowledge); PvA 253 (asin pahaa).
-camma sword & shield Vin ii.192; A iii.93; J vi.449.
-tharu the hilt of a sword DhA iv.66. -nakha having nails
like swords Pgdp 29. -patta having sword like leaves, with
swords (knives) for leaves (of the sword leaf wood in Ni-
101
Asi
Asekha
Asu (pron.) [Sk. asau (m.), adas (nt.); base amu in oblique cases
& derivation, e.g. adv. amutra (q.v.)] pron. dmonstr. "that",
that one, usually combd. with yo (ya), e. g. asu yo so puriso
M i.366; ya adu khetta S iv.315. nom. sg. m. asu S
iv.195; Miln 242; f. asu J v.396 (as metri caus); nt. adu
M i.364, 483; A i.250. Of oblique cases e. g. amun (instr.)
A i.250. Cp. also next.
Asuka (pron. adj.) [asn + ka] such a one, this or that, a certain
Vin iii.87; J i.148; PvA 29, 30, 35, 109, 122 ( gati gata).
102
Asekha
Assatara
Assa2 [for asa2 = Sk. ara point, corner, cp. Sk. ari, Gr.
& sharp, Lat. acer] corner, point; occurs only in cpd. caturassa four cornered, quadrangular, regular (of symmetrical form, Vin ii.316; J iv.46, 492; Pv ii.119 . Perhaps also at
Th 2, 229 (see under assa3 ). Occurs also in form caturasa
under catur).
Assaka1 () [assa3 + ka] with a horse, having a horse; an without a horse J vi.515 (+ arathaka).
Assaka2 (adj.) [a + saka; Sk. asvaka] not having one's own, poor,
destitute M i.450; ii.68; A iii.352; Ps i.126 (v. l. asaka).
Assatara [Vedic avatara, ava + compar. suffix tara in function
of "a kind of", thus lit. a kind of horse, cp. Lat. matertera
a kind of mother. i. e. aunt] a mule Dh 322 = DhA i.213;
DhA iv.4 (= vaavya gadrabhena jta); J iv.464 (kambojake
assatare sudante; imported from Cambodia); vi.342. f. assatar a she mule Vin ii.188; S i.154; ii.241; A ii.73; Miln
103
Assatara
Assu
Assattha2 [pp. of assasati; cp. BSk. svasta Av. i.210] encouraged, comforted A iv.184 (v. l. as gloss asssaka); Ps i.131
(loka an; v. l. assaka); J i.16 (v.79 cp. assattha1 ); vi.309 (=
laddhassasa C.), 566.
Asssa [Sk. vsa, + vas] 1. (lit.) breathing, esp. breathing out (so Vism 272), exhalation, opp. to passsa inhalation,
with which often combd. or contrasted; thus as cpd. asssapasssa meaning breathing (in & out), sign of life, process of
breathing, breath D ii.157 = S i.159 = Th 1, 905; D iii.266; M
i.243; S i.106; iv.293; v.330, 336; A iv.409; v.135; J ii.146;
vi.82; Miln 31, 85; Vism 116, 197. asssa in contrast with
passsa at Ps i.95, 164 sq., 182 sq. 2. (fig.) breathing easily, freely or quietly, relief, comfort, consolation, confidence
M i.64; S ii.50 (dhamma vinaye); iv.254 (param asssa
ppatta); A i.192; iii.297 sq. (dhamma vinaye); iv.185; J
vi.309 (see assattha2 ); Miln 354; PvA 104 (matta only a little
breathing space); Sdhp 299 (param), 313.
Assu1 (nt.) [Vedic aru, Av. asr, Lith aszar, with etym. not definitely clear: see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under lacrima] a tear Vin
Assir (adj.) [a + sir] without splendour, having lost its brightness, in assir viya khyati Nett 62 = Ud 79 (which latter has
sassar iva, cp. C. on passage l. c.).
104
Assu
Ahaha [onomat. after exclamation ahah: see aha1 ] 1. exclamation of woe J iii.450 (ahah in metre). 2. (nt.) N. of a
certain division of Purgatory (Niraya), lit. oh woe! A v.173 =
Sn p. 126.
Aha2 () & Aho () (nt.) [Vedic ahan & ahas] a day. (1) aha
only in foll. cpds. & cases: instr. ekhena in one day J vi.
366; loc. tadahe on that (same) day PvA 46; acc. katipha
(for) some or several days J i.152 etc. (kattpha); sattha
seven days, a week Vin i.1; D ii. 14; J iv.2, and freq.; anvaha daily Dvs iv.8. The initial a of aha (acc.) is elided
after i, which often appears lengthened: kati ha how many
days? S i.7; ekha dv ha one or two days J i.292; dvha
t han two or three days J ii.103; VvA 45; ekha dv
h accayena after the lapse of one or two days J i.253. A
doublet of aha is anha (through metathesis from ahan), which
only occurs in phrases pubbanho & syanha (q. v.); an adj.
der. fr. aha is ahika: see pachika (consisting of 5 days).
(2) aho in cpd. ahoratta (m. & nt.) [cp. BSk. ahortra Av. . i.209] & ahoratti (f.) day & night, occurring
mostly in oblique cases and adverbially in acc. ahoratta:
M i.417 (nusikkhin); Dh 226 (id.; expld. by div ca ratti ca
tisso sikkh sikkhamna DhA iii. 324); Th 1, 145 (ahoratt
accayanti); J iv.108 (na accaye); Pv ii.131 (); Miln 82
(ena). ahoratti Dh 387; J vi.313 (v. l. BB for T. aho va
ratti).
Aha (prom.) [Vedic aha = Av. azm; Gr. (); Lat. ego;
Goth. ik, Ags. ic, Ohg. ih etc.] pron. of 1st person "I".
nom. sg. aha S iii.235; A iv.53; Dh 222, 320; Sn 172, 192,
685, 989, 1054, 1143; J i.61; ii.159. In pregnant sense (my
ego, myself, I as the one & only, i. e. egotistically) in foll.
phrases: ya vadanti mama.. na te aha S i.116, 123; aha
asmi "I am" (cp. ahakra below) S i.129; iii.46, 128 sq.;
iv.203; A ii.212, 215 sq.; Vism 13; aha pure ti "I am the
first" Vv 8450 (= ahamahakr ti VvA 351). gen. dat.
Ahisaka (adj.) [fr. ahis] not injuring others, harmless, humane, S i.165; Th 1, 879; Dh 225; J iv.447.
Ahis (f.) [a + his] not hurting, humanity, kindness D iii.147;
A i.151; Dh 261, 270; J iv.71; Miln 402.
Ahita (adj. n.) [a + hita] not good or friendly, harmful, bad; unkindliness D iii.246; Dh 163; Sn 665, 692; Miln 199 (kma).
105
Aho (indecl.) [Sk. aho, for etym. see aha1 ] exclamation of surprise, astonishment or consternation: yea, indeed, well; I say!
for sure! VvA 103 (aho ti acchariy atthena nipto); J i.88 (aho
acchariya aho abbhuta), 140. Usually combd. with similar
emphatic particles, e. g. aho vata DhA ii.85; PvA 131 (= sdhu
vata); aho vata re D i. 107; Pv ii.94 5 . Cp. ahe.
Ahe (indecl.) [= aho, cp. aha1 ] exclamation of surprise or bewilderment: alas! woe etc., perhaps in cpd. ahevana a dense
forest (lit. oh! this forest, alas! the forest (i. e. how big it
is) J v.63 (uttamhevanandaho, if reading is correct, which is
106
kicaa
ksa1 [Sk. ka fr. + k, lit. shining forth, i. e. the illuminated space] air, sky, atmosphere; space. On the concept
see Cpd. 5, 16, 226. On a fanciful etym. of ksa (fr. +
kassati of k) at DhsA 325 see Dhs trsl. 178. D i.55 (
indriyni sankamanti the sense faculties pass into space);
iii.224, 253, 262, 265; S iii.207; iv.218; v.49, 264; J i.253;
ii.353; iii.52, 188; iv.154; vi.126; Sn 944, 1065; Nd1 428; Pv
ii.118 ; SnA 110, 152; PvA 93; Sdhp 42, 464. -ksena gacchati to go through the air PvA 75 (gacch), 103, 105, 162;
ena carati id. J ii.103; e gacchati id. PvA 65 (cando).
Formula "ananto kso" freq.; e. g. at D i.183; A ii.184; iv.
40, 410 sq.; v.345.
-anta "the end of the sky", the sky, the air (on anta see
anta1 4) J vi.89. -naca (or naca) the infinity ef space, in
cpd. yatana the sphere or plane of the infinity of space, the
"space infinity plane", the sphere of unbounded space.
The consciousness of this sphere forms the first one of the 4
(or 6) higher attainments or recognitions of the mind, standing
beyond the fourth jhna, viz. (1) ks, (2) vi nac
yatana (3) kica, (4) n eva sansa, (5) nirodha,
(6) phala. D i.34, 183; ii.70, 112, 156; iii.224, 262 sq.;
M i.41, 159.; iii. 27, 44; S v.119; Ps i.36; Dhs 205, 501,
579, 1418; Nett 26, 39; Vism 326, 340, 453; DA i.120 (see
Nd2 under ksa; Dhs 265 sq.; Dhs trsl. 71). As classed with
jhna see also Nd2 672 (sdhu vihrin). -kasia one of the
kasi yatanas (see under kasia) D iii.268; A i.41. -gang
N. of the celestial river J i.95; iii.344. -gamana going through
the air (as a trick of elephants) Miln 201. -crika walking
through the air J ii.103. -crin = crika VvA 6. -ha living
in the sky (of devat) Bu i.29; Miln 181, 285; KhA 120; SnA
476. -tala upper story, terrace on the top of a palace SnA
87. -dhtu the element of space D iii.247; M i.423; iii.31; A
i.176; iii.34; Dhs 638.
107
kicaa
gata
absence of (any) possessions; nothingness (the latter as philosophical t. t.; cp. below yatana & see Dhs trsl. 74). Sn
976, 1070, 1115 (sambhava, cp. Nd2 116); Th 2, 341 (= akicanabhva ThA 240; trsl. "cherish no wordly wishes whatsoer"); Nd2 115, see ksa; Miln 342.
-yatana realm or sphere of nothingness (cp. ksa) D
i.35, 184; ii.156; iii.224, 253, 262 sq.; M i.41, 165; ii.254, 263;
iii.28, 44, S iv.217; A i.268; iv.40, 401; Ps i.36; Nett 26, 39;
Vism 333. See also jhna & vimokkha.
kulaka (adj.) [fr. kula] entangled D ii.55 (tant for the usual
tantkula, as given under gu).
108
gata
ghteti
Pli form, e. g. Divy 95, 405 (with gen.); Av. i.85, 210 etc.;
M Vastu i.243, 313]. With reference to (c. acc.), owing to,
relating to; by means of, thanks to. In meaning nearly synonymous with rabbha, sandhya & paicca (see K. S. 318 s. v.)
D i.229; It 71; J i.50; vi.424; Kh viii.14 (= nissya KhA 229);
PvA 5, 21 etc.
graka & ika (adj. n.) () [cp. BSk. grika Divy 275, &
agrika] belonging to the house, viz. (1) having control over
the house, keeping, surveying, in cpds. koh possessor or
keeper of a storehouse Vin i.209; bandhan prison keeper
A ii.207; bha keeper of wares, treasurer PvA 2 (see also
bha). (2) being in the house, sharing (the house), companion S iii.190 (pasv playmate).
gilyati [ + gilyati; Sk. glyati, cp. gilna] to be wearied, exhausted or tired, to ache, to become weak or faint Vin ii.200;
D iii.209; M i.354; S iv.184; KhA 66 (hadava .). Cp.
yamati.
gama [fr. + gam] 1. coming, approach, result, D i.53 (gamana pavattat ti DA i.160; cp. Sdhp 249 dukkh). 2.
that which one goes by, resource, reference, source of reference, text, Scripture, Canon; thus a designation of(?) the Ptimokkha, Vin ii.95 = 249, or of the Four Nikyas, DA i.1, 2
(dgh). A def. at Vism 442 runs "antamaso opamma vagga
mattassa pi buddhavacanassa pariypuaa". See also
gata 2, for phrase gat gama, handed down in the Canon,
Vin loc. cit. Svgamo, versed in the doctrine, Pv iv.133 (sv =
suhu gat gamo, PvA 230); Miln 215. BSk. in same use and
meaning, e. g. Divy 17, 333, gamni = the Four Nikyas.
3. rule, practice, discipline, obedience, Sn 834 (gam parivitakka), cp. Davs v.22 (takk, discipline of right thought)
Sdhp 224 (gamato, in obedience to). 4. meaning, understanding, KhA 107 (va). 5. repayment (of a debt) J.
vi.245. 6. as gram. tt. "augment", a consonant or syllable
added or inserted SnA 23 (sa kr gama).
gamana (nt.) [fr. gacchati, Sk. same] oncoming, arrival, approach A iii.172; DA i.160; PvA 4, 81; Sdhp 224, 356. an
not coming or returning J i.203, 264.
gameti [caus of agacchati] to cause somebody or something to
come to one, i. e. (1) to wait, to stay Vin ii. 166, 182, 212; D
i.112, 113; S iv.291; PvA 4, 55. (2) to wait for, to welcome
Vin ii.128 (ppr. gamayamna); M i.161 (id.) J i.69 (id. +
kla).
ghteti
cita
camana (nt.) [ + camana of cam] rinsing, washing with water, used (a) for the mouth D i.12 (= udakena mukhasiddhi
karaa DA i.98); (b) after evacuation J iii 486.
-kumbh water pitcher used for rinsing Vin i.49, 52;
ii.142, 210, 222. -pduk slippers worn when rinsing Vin
i.190; ii.142, 222. -sarvaka a saucer for rinsing Vin ii.142,
221.
crin (adj. n.) [fr. cra] of good conduct, one who behaves
well A i.211 (ancr virat l. 4 fr. bottom is better read as
cr virato, in accordance with v. l.).
cikkhaka (adj. n.) [ + cikkha + ka of cikkhati] one who tells
or shows DhA i.71.
cikkhana (adj. nt.) [ + cikkhana of cikkhati] telling, announcing J iii.444; PvA 121.
cikkhita [pp. of acikkhati] shown, described, told PvA 154
(magga), 203 (an = anakkhta).
cikkhitar [n. ag. fr. cikkhati] one who tells or shows DhA
ii.107 (for pavattar).
cia [pp. of cinti? or is it distorted from cia?] accumulated; practised, performed Dh 121 (ppa = ppa cianto
karonto DhA iii.16). It may also be spelt cina.
cia [ + cia, pp. of carati] practiced, performed, (habitually) indulged in M i.372 (kamma, cp. Miln 226 and the expln.
of ciaka kamma as "chronic karma" at Cpd. 144); S iv.419;
A v.74 sq.; J i.81; DA i.91 (for avicia at D i.8), 275; Vism
269; DhA i.37 (samcia thoroughly fulfilled); VvA 108;
PvA 54; Sdhp 90.
-kappa ordinance or rule of right conduct or customary
practice (?) Vin i.79; ii.301; Dpvs iv.47; cp. v.18.
110
cita
jvaka (& ika) [jva + ka, orig. "one finding his living" (scil.
in a peculiar way); cp. BSk. jvika Divy 393, 427] an ascetic, one of the numerous sects of non buddhist ascetics.
On their austerities, practice & way of living see esp. DhA
ii.55 sq. and on the whole question A. L. Basham, Hist. &
Doctrines of the jvikas, 1951. (a) jvaka: Vin i.291;
ii.284; iv.74, 91; M i.31, 483: S i.217; A iii.276, 384; J i.81,
257, 390. (b) jvika: Vin i.8; Sn 381 (v. l. BB. aka).
-svaka a hearer or lay disciple of the jvaka ascetics Vin
ii 130, 165; A i.217.
jvika (nt.) (or jvik f.?) [fr. jva] sustenance of life, livelihood, living Vbh 379 (bhaya) Miln 196 (id.); PvA 274, and
in phrase jvik pakata being deprived of a livelihood, without a living M i.463 = S iii.93 (T. reads jvik pakat) = It 89
(reads jvik pakat) = Miln 279.
jniya (jnya) (adj. n.) [cp. BSk. jneya & Sk. jti birth,
good birth. Instead of its correct derivation from + jan (to
be born, i. e. well born) it is by Bdhgh. connected with
+ j (to learn, i. e. to be trained). See for these popular
etym. e. g. J i.181: srathissa cittarucita kraa jnana
sabhvo jao, and DhA iv.4: ya assadamma srathi
kraa kreti tassa khippa jnana samatth jniy.
The contracted form of the word is jaa] of good race or
breed; almost exclusively used to denote a thoroughbred horse
(cp. assjniya under assa3 ). (a) jniya (the more common & younger Pli form): Sn 462, 528, 532; J i.178, 194;
Dpvs iv.26; DhA i.402; iii.49; iv.4; VvA 78; PvA 216. (b)
jnya: M i.445; A v.323; Dh 322 = Nd2 475. (c) jaa
= (mostly in poetry): Sn 300 = 304; J i.181; Pv iv.154 ; purisjaa "a steed of man", i. e. a man of noble race) S iii.91 = Th
1, 1084 = Sn 544 = VvA 9; A v.325. -anjniya of inferior
birth M i.367.
-susu the young of a noble horse, a noble foal M i. 445
(pamo dhamma pariyyo).
peti [ + peti, Caus. of + jnti fr. j, cp. Sk. jpayati] to give an order, to enjoin, command (with acc. of person)
J iii.351; Miln 147; DhA ii.82; VvA 68 (dsiyo), 69; PvA 4,
39, 81.
i (Vedic i to au fine, thin, flexible, in formation an n enlargement of Idg. *olen, cp. Ohg. lun, Ger. lnse, Ags. lynes
= E. linch, further related to Lat. ulna elbow, Gr. , Ohg.
elina, Ags. eln = E. el bow. See Walde, Lt. Wtb. under
ulna & lacertus]. 1. the pin of a wheel axle, a linch
pin M i.119; S ii.266, 267; A ii.32; Sn 654; J vi.253, 432; SnA
243; KhA 45, 50. 2. a peg, pin, bolt, stop (at a door) M
111
dti (dadti)
titheyya (nt.) [fr. ati + theyya] great theft (?) A i.93; iv. 63 sq.
(v. l. ati which is perhaps to be prcferred).
tu [dialectical] father M i.449 (cp. Trenckner's note on p. 567:
the text no doubt purports to make the woman speak a sort of
patois).
tuman [Vedic tman, diaeretic form for the usual contracted attan; only found in poetry. Cp. also the shortened form tuman]
self. nom. sg. tumo Pv iv.52 (= sabhvo PvA 259), tum
Nd1 69 (tum vuccati att), 296 (id.), & tumno Nd1 351;
acc. tumna Sn 782 (= attna SnA 521), 888, 918; loc.
tume Pv ii.1311 (= attani C.).
tura (adj.) [Sk. tura, cp. BSk. tura, e. g. Jtm 3170 ] ill,
sick, diseased; miserable, affected S iii.1 (kya); A i. 250; Sn
331; Vv 8314 (rpa = abhitunna kya VvA 328); J i.197
(anna "food of the miserable", i. e. last meal of one going
to be killed; C. expls. as maraabhojana), 211 (citta); ii.420
(anna, as above); iii.201; v.90, 433; vi.248; Miln 139, 168;
DhA i.31 (rpa); PvA 160, 161; VvA 77; Sdhp 507. Used
by Commentators as syn. of ao, e. g. at J iv.293; SnA 489.
-antura healthy, well, in good condition S iii.1; Dh 198.
tappa (nt.) [Sk. *tpya, fr. tpa] ardour, zeal, exertion D i.13;
iii.30 sq., 104 sq., 238 sq.; M iii.210; S ii.132, 196 sq.; A i.153;
iii.249; iv.460 sq.; v.17 sq.; Sn 1062 (= ussha ussohi thma
etc. Nd2 122); J iii.447; Nd1 378; Vbh 194 (= vyma); DA
i.104.
tpa [ + tpa fr. tap; cp. tpeti] glow, heat; fig. ardour, keen
endeavour, or perhaps better "torturing, mortification" Miln
313 (cittassa tpo paritpo); PvA 98 (viriya). Cp. tappa &
tpana.
darat (f.) [abstr. fr. dara] = dara, in neg. an want of consideration J iv.229; Dhs 1325 = Vbh 359 (in expln. of dovacassat).
dariya (nt.) [abstr. fr. dara] showing respect of honour; neg.
an disregard, disrespect Vin ii.220; A v.146, 148; Pug 20;
Vbh 371; miln 266.
tpin (adj.) [fr. tpa, cp. BSk. tpin Av. i.233; ii. 194 =
Divy 37; 618] ardnt, zealous, strenuous, active D iii.58, 76
sq., 141 (+ sampajna), 221, 276; M i.22, 56, 116, 207, 349;
ii.11; iii.89, 128, 156; S 113, 117 sq., 140, 165; ii.21, 136
sq.; iii.73 sq.; iv.37, 48, 54, 218; v.165, 187, 213; A ii.13 sq.;
iii 38, 100 sq.; iv. 29, 177 sq., 266 sq., 300, 457 sq.; v.343
sq.; Sn 926; Nd1 378; It 41, 42; Vbh 193 sq.; Miln 34, 366;
Vism 3 (= viriyav); DhA i.120; SnA 157, 503. Freq. in
the formula of Arahantship "eko vpakaho appamatto tp
pahitatto": see arahant II. B. See also satipahna. Opp.
antpin S ii.195 sq.; A ii.13; It 27 (+ anottappin).
dahati1 [ + dahati1 ] to put down, put on, settle, fix Vism 289
(sama .=samdahati). Cp. sam and dhiyati.
dahati2 [ + dahati2 ] to set fire to, to burn J vi.201, 203.
d [ger. of dti from reduced base *da of dadti 1b ] taking up,
taking to oneself Vin iv.120 (= andiyitv C.; cp. the usual
form dya).
dti (dadti) [ + dadti of dadti base 1 d] to take up, accept, appropriate, grasp, seize; grd. dtabba Vin i.50; inf.
dtu D iii.133 (adinna theyyasankhta .). ger. d
dti (dadti)
diyati
& dya (see sep.); grd. deyya, Caus. dapeti (q. v.).
See also diyati & deti.
Vin iii.146; iv.100; Miln 59; Vism 241; DhsA 187. -kalya
in phrase dikalya majjhe kalya pariyosna kalya
of the Dhamma, "beautiful in the beginning, the middle & the
end" see references under dhamma C. 3 and cp. DA i.175 (=
dimhi kalya etc.); SnA 444; abstr. kalyat Vism 4.
-pubbangama original Dpvs iv.26. -brahmacariyaka belonging to the principles or fundaments of moral life D i.189;
iii.284; M i.431; ii.125, 211; iii. 192; S ii.75, 223; iv.91; v.417,
438; f. ik Vin i.64, 68; A i.231 sq. -majjhapariyosna beginning, middle & end Miln 10; cp. above dikalya.
dika (adj.) [di + ka] from the beginning, initial (see adhika);
instr. dikena in the beginning, at once, at the same time M
i.395, 479; ii.213; S ii.224; J vi.567. Cp. diya3 .
dicca [Vedic ditya] the sun S i.15, 47; ii.284; iii.156; v.44, 101;
A i.242; v.22, 263, 266 sq.; It 85; Sn 550, 569, 1097 ("dicco
vuccati suriyo" Nd2 125); DhA iv. 143; Sdhp 14, 17, 40.
-upahn sun worship D i.11 (= jvikatthya diccaparicariy DA i.97); J ii.72 (jtaka; dicca upatihati p. 73
= suriya namassamno tihati C.). -patha the path of the
sun, i. e. the sky, the heavens Dh 175 (= ksa DhA iii.177).
-bandhu "kinsman of the sun", Ep. of the Buddha Vin ii.296;
S i.186, 192; A ii.54; Sn 54, 915, 1128; Nd1 341; Nd2 125b ;
Vv 425 , 7810 ; VvA 116.
di [Sk. di, etym. uncertain] 1. (m.) starting point, beginning Sn 358 (acc. di = kraa SnA 351); Dh 375 (nom.
di); Miln 10 (dimhi); J vi.567 (abl. dito from the beginning). For use as nt. see below 2 b. 2. (adj. & adv.) (a)
() beginning, initially, first, principal, chief: see cpds.
(b) () beginning with, being the first (of a series which either is supposed to be familiar in its constituents to the reader
or hearer or is immediately intelligible from the context), i. e.
and so on, so forth (cp. adhika); e. g. rukkha gumb
dayo (acc. pl.) trees, jungle etc. J i.150; amba panas
dhi rukkehi sampanno (and similar kinds of fruit) J i.278;
amba labuj dna phalna anto J ii.159; asi satti
dhami dni vudhni (weapous, such as sword, knife, bow
& the like) J i.150; kasi gorakkh dni karonte manusse J
ii.128;... ti din nayena in this and similar ways J i.81; PvA
30. Absolute as nt. pl. din with ti (eva) (dni), closing
a quotation, meaning "this and such like", e. g. at J ii.128,
416 (ti dni viravitv). In phrase di katv meaning
"putting (him, her, it) first", i. e. heginning with, from... on,
from... down (c. acc.) e. g. DhA i.393 (rjna di K. from
the king down); PvA 20 (vihra dikatv), 21 (pacavaggiye
di K.).
-kammika [cp. BSk. dikarmaka Divy 544] a beginner
diya1 (adj.) grd. of admi, ad, Sk. dya] edible, eatable A iii.45
(bhojanni).
diya2 in mukha is uncertain reading at A iii.164 sq. (vv. ll.
deyya & dheyya), meaning perhaps "graspmouth", i. e.
gossip; thus equal to ger. of diyati1 . Perhaps to be taken
to diyati2 . The same phrase occurs at Pug 65 (T. dheyya,
C. has v. l. dheyya) where Pug A 248 explns. "dito dheyyamukho, pahama vacanasmi yeva hapita mukho ti
attho" (sticking to one's word?). See dheyya.
diya3 = dika, instr. diyena in the beginning J vi.567 (=
dikena C.).
diya4 ger. of diyati.
diyati1 [ + diyati, med. pass. base of dadti4 , viz. di & d; see
also dti & deti] to take up; take to oneself, seize on, grasp,
appropriate, fig. take notice of, take to heart, heed. pres.
diyati A iij.46; Sn 119, 156, 633, 785, Nd1 67; Nd2 123, 124;
J iii.296: v.367. pot. diye Sn 400; imper. diya M iii.133
(so read for dissa?). aor. diyi D iii.65; A iii.209, diysi
Pv iv.148 (saya daa . = acchinditv gahasi PvA 241),
113
diyati
dhraka
iii.79.
dpanya (adj.) [grd. of + dpeti] to be explained Miln 270.
dpita [pp. of dpeti, + caus. of dp, cp. dpeti] ablaze, in
flames S i.31 (loka; v. l. dittaka) 108; J v.366; DhA iii.32 (v.
l. ditta).
du (indecl.) [see also adu] emphatic (adversative) part. (1) of
affirmation & emphasis: but, indeed, rather J iii. 499 = vi.443;
v.180; vi.552. (2) as 2nd component of a disjunctive question, mostly in corresponsion udhu... du (= ki... udhu
SnA 350), viz. is it so... or" Th 1, 1274 = Sn 354; Pv iv.317
= DhA i.31; J v.384; vi.382; without udhu at J v.460 (adu).
The close connection with udhu suggests an expln. of du as
a somehow distorted abbreviation of udhu.
deti [a + deti, base2 of dadti (day & de), cp. also diyati] to
take, receive, get Sn 121 (= gahti SnA 179), 954 (= updiyati gahti Nd1 444); cp. i.43 ; J iii. 103, 296; v.366 (= gahti
C.; cp. diyati on p. 367); Miln 336.
disati [ + disati] (a) to announce, tell, point out, refer to. (b)
to dedicate (a gift, dakkhia or dna). pres. ind. disati
D i.213 = A i.170 (tell or read one's character); Sn 1112 (atta); Nd1 382 (nakkhatta set the horoscope); Miln 294 (dna); pot. diseyya Th 2, 307 (dakkhia); Pv iv.130 (id. =
uddiseyya PvA 228), & dise Vin i.229 = D ii.88 (dakkhia);
imper. disa PvA 49. fut. dissati Th 2, 308 (dakkhia)
PvA 88 (id.). aor. disi Pv ii.28 ; PvA 46 (dakkhia); pl.
disisu ibid. 53 (id.) & disu Pv i.106 (id.). ger. dissa
Vin iii.127; Sn 1018; Pv ii.16 (dna), & disitvna Th 2,
311. grd. dissa (adj.) to be told or shown M i.12.
diso (adv.) [orig. abl. of di, formed with sa] from the beginning, i. e. thoroughly, absolutely D i.180; M iii.208.
dissa at M iii.133 is an imper. pres. meaning "take", & should
probably better be read diya (in corresponsion with dna).
It is not grd. of disati, which its form might suggest.
114
dhraka
nupubba
naka [Sk. naka, cp. Morris J.P.T.S. 1893, 10] a kind of kettledrum, beaten only at one end S ii.266; J ii. 344; Dpvs xvi.14.
naca see ksa and via.
naja see nejja.
naya (nt.) [Sk. nya, so also BSk. e. g. Jtm 3118 ; from a
+ a, P. ia but also aa in composition, thus an aa as
base of naya] freedom from debt D i.73; A iii.354 (Ep. of
Nibbna, cp. anaa); Nd1 160; Vism 44; DA i.3.
nadati [ + nadati] to trumpet (of elephants) J iv.233.
nana (nt.) [Vedic na, later Sk. nana from an to breathe] the
mouth; adj. () having a mouth Sdhp 103; Pgdp 63 (vika).
nantarika (& ya) [fr. an + antara + ika] without an interval,
immediately following, successive Vin i.321; ii. 212; Pug 13;
Dhs 1291.
-kamma "conduct that finds retribution without delay"
(Kvu trsl. 275 n. 2) Vin ii.193; J i.45; Kvu 480; Miln 25
(cp. Dhs trsl. 267); Vism 177 (as prohibiting practice of kammahna).
nanda [Vedic nanda, fr. + nand, cp. BSk. nand joy Divy
37] joy, pleasure, bliss, delight D i.3; Sn 679, 687; J i.207
(maccha Leviathan); vi.589 (bheri festive drum); DA i 53
(= ptiy eta adhivacana).
115
nupubba
pattika
pa & po (nt.) [Vedic ap & p, f. sg. ap, pl. pa, later Sk.
also pa nt. Idg. *ap & *ab, primarily to Lith. p water,
Old Prussian ape river, Gr. * N. of the Peloponnesus;
further (as *ab) to Lat. amnis river, Sk. abda cloud, & perhaps ambu water] water; philosophically t. t. for cohesion,
representative of one of the 4 great elements (cp. mahbhta),
viz. pahav, po, tejo, vyo: see Cpd. 268 & Dhs trsl. 201,
also below dhtu. D ii.259; M i.327; S ii.103; iii.54, 207;
A iv.312, 375; Sn 307, 391 (), 392 (loc. pe), 437 (id.); J
iv.8 (pahavi pa teja); Dhs 652; Miln 363 (gen. passa,
with pahav etc.); Sdhp 100.
-kasia the water device, i. e. meditation by (the element of) water (cp. Mystic 75 n.) D iii.268; J i.313; Dhs 203;
Vism 170; DhA i 312; iii.214. -dhtu the fluid element, the
essential element in water, i. e element of cohesion (see Cpd.
155 n. 2; Mystic 9 n. 2; Dhs trsl. 201, 242) D iii.228, 247; M
i.187, 422: Dhs 652; Nett 74. See also dhtu. -rasa the taste
of water A i.32; SnA 6. -sama resembling water M i.423.
nupubbikath [for anupubbi representing its isolated composition form, cp. nubhva & see also anupubbi] regulated
exposition, graduated sermon D i.110; ii.41 sq.; M i.379; J i.8;
Miln 228; DA i.277, 308; DhA iv.199.
nubhva [the dissociated composition form of anubhva, q. v.
for details. Only in later language] greatness, magnificence,
majesty, splendour J i.69 (mahanto); ii.102 (of a jewel) v.491;
DhA ii.58.
nejja and naja [abstr. fr. an + *aja or *ejja = *ijja. The
Sanskritised equivalent would be *ijya or *igya of ing to
stir, move, with a peculiar substitution of *ang in Pli, referring it to a base with (probably Sk. j, jati) in analogy to a
form like Sk. a = Pli aa & ia, both a & i representing Sk.
. The form aja would thus correspond to a Sk. *ajya (*agya). The third P. form n-eja is a direct (later, and probably
re instituted) formation from Sk. ijya, which in an interesting way became in BSk. re sanskritised to ijya (which
on the other hand may represent ejja & thus give the latter
the feature of a later, but more specifically Pli form). The
editions of P. Texts show a great variance of spelling, based
on MSS. vacillation, in part also due to confusion of derivation] immovability, imperturbability, impassibility. The word
is n. but occurs as adj. at Vin iii. 109 (naja samdhi, with
which cp. BSk. nijy nti at Av. i.199. The term
usually occurs in cpd. nejja ppatta (adj.) immovable lit.
having attained impassibility, expld. by Bdhgh. at Vin iii.267
(on Pr. i.1, 6) as acala, niccala, i. e. motionless. This cpd.
is indicated below by (p.) after the reference. The various spellings of the word are as follows: 1. nejja D i.76
(v. l. naja p.) A ii.184 (p.); iii.93 (p.), 100 (p.), 377 sq.
(p.); Nd2 471 (v. l. aneja, naja) = Vbh 137 (neja); Nd2
569a (v. l. naja), 601 (v. l. anejja & aneja); Pug 60 (p.);
DA i.219 (v. l. BB neja). 2. naja Vin iii.4 (p.) (v.
l. naca, anaja, naja; Bdhgh. nejja p. 267), 109;
Ud 27 (samdhi, adj. v. l. naca); DhA iv.46. See also below cpd. kraa. A peculiarity of Trenckner a spelling is
aja at M ii.229 (v. l. aaja, aneja, neja), 253, 254.
3. neja S ii.82. (v. l. aje, or is it eja?); D iii.217
(bhisankhra of imperturbable character, remaining static,
cp. Kvu trsl. 358); Nd1 90 (id.), 206, 442; Ps ii.206; Vbh 135,
340; Vism 377 (p.), 386 (sixteen fold), 571; Nett 87, 99.
See also ijati.
-kraa trick of immovability, i. e. pretending to be dead
(done by an elephant, but see differently Morris J P T S. 1886,
154) J i.415; ii.325 (v. l. aja, neca, naca); iv.308;
v.273, 310.
pattika (adj.) [patti + ka, cp. BSk. pattika Divy 303] guilty
116
pattika
bdha
pad (f.) [Sk. pad, fr. + pad, cp. pajjati & BSk. pad,
e. g. in padgata Jtm 3133 ] accident, misfortune, distress, D
iii.190; A ii.68 (loc. pl. padsu), 187; iii. 45; iv.31; Th 1,
371; J iv.163 (padatth, a difficult form; vv. ll. T. aparatt,
padatv, C. aparatth; expld. by padya); v.340 (loc. pade),
368; PvA 130 (quot.); Sdhp 312, 554. Note. For the contracted
form in loc. pl. psu (= *patsu) see *p.
bdha [ + bdh to oppress, Vedic bdha oppression] affliction, illness, disease Vin iv.261; D i.72; ii.13; A i.121;
iii.94, 143; iv.333, 415 sq., 440; Dh 138; Pug 28; Vism
41 (udara vta) 95; VvA 351 (an safe & sound); SnA
476; Sdhp 85. A list of bdhas or illnesses, as classified on grounds of aetiology, runs as follows: pittasamuhn,
semha, vta, sanniptik, utu parimaj, visama parihraj, opakkamik, kammavipkaj (after Nd2 304i.c. , recurring with slight variations at S iv.230; A ii.87; iii.131; v.110;
Nd1 17, 47; Miln 112, cp. 135). Another list of illnesses
mentioned in tha Vinaya is given in Index to Vin ii., p. 351.
Five bdhas at Vin i. 71, viz. kuha gao kilso soso
pd (f.) [short for pdik] a nursing woman, in an not nursing, unmarried J iv.178.
pdi aor. of pajjati (q. v.).
pdeti [Caus. of pajjati] to produce, make out, bring, bring into
M i.78; iii.248; S iv.110 (addhna to live one's life, cp. addhna pdi J ii.293 = jvit addhna pdi yu vindi C.);
SnA 466. Cp. pari
pna (nt.) [fr. + p] drinking; drinking party, banquet; ban-
117
bdha
maha
bhuj (f.) [lit. the one that bends, prob. a poetic metaphor] N.
of a tree, the Bhrja or Bhojpatr J v.195 (= bhjapatta vana
C.), 405 (= bhjapatta C.).
bhata [pp. of + bharati from bh] brought (there or here), carried, conveyed, taken D i.142; S. i.65; A ii.71, 83; It 12, 14
with phrase yathbhata as he has been reared (cp. J v.330
eva kicch bhao); Pv iii.5 (ratt = rattiya . PvA 199);
DhA ii.57, 81; iv.89; VvA 65. Cp. yathbhata.
19
bhveti [ + bhveti] to cultivate, pursue Pv ii.13 (mettacitta; gloss & v. l. abhvetv; expld. as vahetv brhetv
PvA 168).
bhsa [Sk. bhsa, fr. + bhs] splendour, light, appearance M
iii.215.
bhicetasika (adj.) See abhicetasika. This spelling, with gua of
the first syllable, is probably more correct; but the short a is
the more frequent.
bhidosika (adj.) [abhidosa+ika] belonging to the evening before, of last night Vin iii.15 (of food; stale); M i.170 (klakata
died last night); Miln 291.
bhidhammika (adj.) [abhidhamma + ika] belonging to the specialised Dhamma, versed in or studying the Abhidhamma Miln
17, 341; Vism 93. As abhi atKhA 151; J iv.219.
118
maha
modeti
msaya [ma2 + saya, cp. Sk. maya & mraya] receptacle of undigested food, i. e. the stomach Vism 260; KhA 59.
Opp. pakksaya.
milka (nt.?) [etym.?] a woollen cover into which a floral pattern is woven DA i.87.
misa (nt.) [der. fr. ma raw, q. v. for etym. Vedic mis (m.);
later Sk. mia (nt.), both in lit. & fig. meaning] 1. originally raw meat; hence prevailing notion of "raw, unprepared,
uncultivated"; thus khra raw lye Vin i. 206. 2. "fleshy,
of the flesh" (as opposed to mind or spirit), hence material,
physical; generally in opposition to dhamma (see dhamma B
1. a. and also next no.), thus at M i.12 (dyda); It 101 (id.);
A i.91 = It 98 (dna material gifts opp. to spiritual ones); Dhs
1344 (paisanthra hospitality towards bodily needs, cp. Dhs
trsl. 350). 3. food, esp. palatable food (cp. E. sweetmeat);
food for enjoyment, dainties Vin ii.269 sq.; J ii.6; Miln 413
(lok); DA i.83 (sannidhi), 4. bait S i.67; iv.158; J iv.57,
219; vi.416; DA i.270. 5. gain, reward, money, douceur,
gratuity, "tip" PvA 36, 46; esp. in phrase kicikkha-hetu for
the sake of some (little) gain S ii.234; A i.128; v.265, 283 sq.,
293 sq.; Pug 29; Pv ii.83 (= kici misa patthento PvA 107);
Miln 93; VvA 241 (= bhogahetu). 6. enjoyment Pv ii.82
(= kmmise laggacitto PvA 107). 7. greed, desire, lust
Vin i.303 (antara out of greed, selfish, opp. mettacitto); A
iii.144 (id.), 184 (id.); i.73 (gar paris); J v.91 (cakkhu); Ps
ii.238 (mr). See also cpds. with nir and sa.
mutta [Sk. mukta, pp. of + muc, cp. also BSk. mukta jewel
Divy 2, 3 etc., a meaning which might also be seen in the later
Pli passages, e. g. at PvA 134. Semantically cp. bharaa]
having put on, clothed in, dressed with, adorned with (always
) D i.104 (mlbharaa); Vin ii.156 = Vv 208 (mai
kuala); S i.211; J iv.460; v. 155; vi.492; Vv 721 (=
paimukka); 802 (hatthbharaa); Pv ii.951 (maikuala);J
iv.183; VvA 182.
malaka [cp. Sk. malaka] emblic myrobalan, Phyllanthus Emblica Vin i.201, 278; ii.149 (vaika pthu); S i.150; A v.170;
Sn p. 125 (matti); J iv.363; v.380 (as v. l. for T. mala); Miln
11; DhA i.319; VvA 7.
meita (or meita) [Sk. mreita fram + mre, dialectical] (nt.) sympathy in karoti to show sympathy (? so
Morris J.P.T.S. 1887, 106) DA i.228 = SnA 155 (v. l. at DA
meita).
mo = ma D i.192, 3.
moda [Sk. moda, fr. + mud] that which pleases; fragrance,
perfume Dvs v.51.
119
modeti
yasmant
as regards connotation & application see Dhs trsl. introduction li sq. Cpd. 90 n. 2; 254 sq. Approximately covering
this meaning (3) is Bdhgh's definition of yatana at DA i.124
as sajti and as kraa (origin & cause, i. e. mutually occasioning & conditioning relations or adaptations). See also Nd2
under rpa for further classifications. For the above mentioned 12 yatanni see the foll. passages: D ii.302 sq.; iii.102,
243; A iii.400; v.52; Sn 373 (cp. SnA 366); Ps i.7, 22, 101,
137; ii. 181, 225, 230; Dhs 1335; Vbh 401 sq.; Nett 57, 82;
Vism 481; ThA 49, 285. Of these 6 are mentioned at S i.113,
ii.3; iv.100, 174 sq.; It 114; Vbh 135 sq., 294; Nett 13, 28, 30;
Vism 565 sq. Other sets of 10 at Nett 69; of 4 at D ii.112, 156;
of 2 at D ii.69. Here also belongs ks nac yatana,
kica etc. (see under ksa etc. and s. v.), e. g. at D
i.34 sq., 183; A iv.451 sq.; Vbh 172, 189, 262 sq.; Vism 324
sq. Unclassified passages: M i.61; ii.233; iii.32, 216, 273;
S i.196; ii.6, 8, 24, 72 sq.; iii.228; iv.98; v.426; A i.113, 163,
225; iii.17, 27, 82, 426; iv.146, 426; v.30, 321, 351, 359; Nd1
109, 133, 171, 340; J i.381 (paripua); Vbh 412 sq. (id.).
-uppda birth of the yatanas (see above 3) Vin i.185.
-kusala skilled in the . M iii.63. -kusalat skill in the
spheres (of sense) D iii.212; Dhs 1335. -ha founded in
the sense organs Ps i.132; ii.121.
yati (f.) [fr. + yam, cp. Sk. yati] "stretching forth", extension, length (of time), future. Only (?) in acc. yati (adv.)
in future Vin ii.89, 185; iii.3; Sn 49; It 115 (T. reads yati but
cp. p. 94 where T. yati, v. l. yati); J i.89; v.431; DA i
236.
yatana (nt.) [Sk. yatana, not found in the Vedas; but freq.
in BSk. From + yam, cp. yata. The pl. is yatan at S
iv.70. For full definition of term as seen by the Pli Commentators see Bdhgh's expln at DA i. 124, 125, with which
cp. the popular etym. at KhA 82: "yassa v tananato yatassa v sasradukkhassa nayanato yatanni" and at Vism
527 "ye tanoti yata ca nayat ti ."] 1. stretch, extent,
reach, compass, region; sphere, locus, place, spot; position,
occasion (corresponding to Bdhgh's definition at DA i.124 as
"samosaraa") D iii.241, 279 (vimutti); S ii.41, 269; iv.217;
v.119 sq., 318. sq.; A iii.141 (ariya); v.61 (abhibh, q. v.) Sn
406 (rajass "haunt of passion" = rgdi rajassa uppatti
deso SnA 381); J i.80 (raj). Freq. in phrase ara a lonely
spot, a spot in the forest J i.173; VvA 301; PvA 42, 54.
2. exertion, doing, working, practice, performance (comprising Bdhgh's definition at DA i.124 as paatti), usually ,
viz. kamm Nd1 505; Vbh 324, 353; kasi A v.46 sq., 60;
Ps i.28; titth A i.173, 175; Vbh 145, 367; sipp (art, craft)
D i.51; Nd2 505; Vbh 324, 353; cp. an non exertion, indolence, sluggishness J v.121. 3. sphere of perception or
sense in general, object of thought, sense organ & object;
relation, order. Cpd. p. 183 says rightly: "yatana cannot be rendered by a single English word to cover both sense
organs (the mind being regarded as 6th sense) and sense
objects". These yatanni (relations, functions, reciprocalities) are thus divided into two groups, inner (ajjhattikni)
and outer (bhirni), and comprise the foll.: (a) ajjhatt: 1.
cakkhu eye, 2. sota ear, 3. ghna nose, 4. jivh tongue, 5.
kya body, 6. mano mind; (b) bh: 1. rpa visible object, 2.
sadda sound, 3. gandha odour, 4. rasa taste, 5. phohabba
tangible object, 6. dhamma cognizable object. For details
120
yasmant
yhati
yasmant (adj.) [Sk. yumant, the P. form showing assimilation of u to a] lit. old, i. e. venerable; used, either as adj.
or absolute as a respectful appellation of a bhikkhu of some
standing (cp. the semantically identical thera). It occurs usually in nom. yasm and is expld. in Nd by typical formula
"piya vacana garu, sagrava sappaissdhivacana",
e. g. Nd1 140, 445; Nd2 130 on var. Sn loci (e. g. 814, 1032,
1040, 1061, 1096). Freq. in all texts, of later passages see
SnA 158; PvA 53, 54, 63, 78. See also vuso.
ycati [ + yc, cp. Buddh. Sk. ycate Divy 1.] 1. to request, beg, implore, pray to (acc.) Vin iii.127; D i.240; PvA
160. 2. to make a vow, to vow, promise A i. 88; J i.169 =
v.472; i.260; ii.117. pp. ycita (q. v.).
ycana (nt.) [fr. ycati] 1. asking, adhortation, addressing
(t. t. g. in expln. of imperative) SnA 43, 176, 412. 2. a
vow, prayer A i.88; iii.47; J i.169 = v.472.
ycita [pp. of ycati] vowed, promised J i.169 (bhatta-jtaka
N.).
yta [pp. of yt.; cp. BSk. yta in same meaning at Jtm 210]
gone to, undertaken Sdhp 407.
yuttaka (adj. n.) [yutta + ka] one who is devoted to or entrusted with, a trustee, agent, superintendent, overseer J i.230
(vesa); iv.492; DhA i.101, 103, 180.
yudha is the Vedic form of the common Pli form vudha
weapon, and occurs only spuriously at D i.9 (v. l. vudha).
yuvant (adj.) [fr. yu] advanced in years, old, of age Th 1, 234.
yusmant (adj.) [Sk. yumant; see also the regular P. form yasmant] having life or vitality PvA 63 (yusmvia feeling
or sense of vitality; is reading correct?).
121
yhati
yhana (adj. nt.) [fr. yhati] 1. endeavouring, striving, Ps i.10 sq., 32, 52; ii.218; Vism 103, 212, 462, 579. f.
yhan Dhs 1059 ("she who toils" trsl.) = Vbh 361 = Nd2
tah 1. (has yhan). 2. furtherance, pursuit DA i.64
(bhavassa).
raika (adj.) = raaka Vin iii.15; A i.24; Pug 69; Vism 61,
71 (where defined); Miln 341.
rata [Sk. rata, pp. of + ram, cp. rati] leaving off, keeping
away from, abstaining J iv.372 (= virata); Nd2 591 (+ virata
paivirata).
rakatta (nt.) [*rakt + tva] warding off, keeping away, holding aloof, being far from (c. gen.); occurring only in pop.
etym. of arahant at A iv.145; DhA iv.228; DA i.146 = VvA
105, 106 = PvA 7; cp. DhsA 349.
rak (adv.) [Sk. rt & rakt, abl. form. fr. *raka, see r2 ]
far off, far from, away from, also used as prep. c. abl. and
as adj. pl. keeping away from, removed, far Vin ii.239 = A
iv.202 (sanghamh); D i.99, 102 (adj.) 167; M i.280 (adj.) S
ii.99; iv.43 sq.; A i.281; It 91; J i.272; iii.525; v.451; Miln
243; VvA 72, 73 (adj. + virat).
ratta (nt.?) [Sk. cp. rakta, pp. of + raj] time, period (orig. affected, tinted with), only in cpd. vassratta the rainy season,
lent J iv.444; Dvs ii.74.
raddha (adj.) [pp. of + rabh] begun, started, bent on, undertaking, holding on to, resolved, firm A i.148 (raddha me
viriya It 30; PvA 73 (hapetu began to place), 212 (gantu). Cp. rdhaka 1.
-citta concentrated of mind, decided, settled D i.176; M
i.414; S ii.21; Sn p. 102; SnA 436. Cp. rdheti 1. -viriya
(adj.) strenuous, energetic, resolute Vin i.182; D iii.252, 268,
282, 285; A i.24; Sn 68, 344; It 71 (opp. hna viriya); Nd2
131; Ps i.171; ThA 95. Cp. viriyrambha; f. abstr. viriyat
M i.19.
rabhati1 [not with Morris J.P.T.S. 1889, 202 fr. rabh and identical with rabhati2 , but with Kern, Toev. s. v. identical with
Sk. labhate, + labh meaning to seize the sacrificial animal in order to kill it; cp. nirrambha] to kill, destroy M i.371
(pa).
rabhati2 & rabbhati [ + rabhati, Sk. rabhati & rambhati,
122
rma
+ rabh] to begin, start, undertake, attempt S i.156 (rabbhatha "bestir yourselves") = Miln 245 = Th 1, 256 (bh.); Pug
64 (bh.); viriya rabhati to make an effort, to exert oneself
(cp. rambha) A iv.334. aor. rabhi DhA ii.38 & rabbhi
PvA 35. ger. rabbha, see sep. pp. raddha (q. v.).
rambha [Sk. rambha in meaning "beginning", fr + rabh
(rambh) cp. rabhati] 1. attempt, effort, inception of energy (cp. Dhs trsl. 15 & K. S. p. 318 giving C. def. as kicca,
karaya, attha, i. e. 1. undertaking & duty, 2. object) S i.76
(mah); v.66, 104 sq. (dhtu); iii.338 (id.), 166 (ja; T. arabbhaja, v. l. rambhaja to be preferred) = Pug 64; Miln 244; Net
41; DhsA 145. -viriyrambha (cp. raddha viriya) zeal,
resolution, energy Vin ii.197; S iv.175; A i.12, 16. 2. support, ground, object, thing Nett 70 sq., 107; an unsupported,
independent Sn 743 (= nibbna SnA 507). Cp. also nirambha,
uprambha, srambha.
rdhaka (adj. n.) [fr. + rdh] 1. [perhaps for *raddhaka because of analogy to raddha of + rabh] successful,
accomplishing or accomplished, undertaking, eager Vin i.70
(an one who fails); M i.491; ii.197 = A i.69 = Miln 243; S
v.19; A v.329 (in correlation with raddhaviriya). 2. pleasing, propitiating Miln 227; VvA 220 (ik f.).
rammaa (nt.) [cp. Sk. lambana, lamb, but in meaning confounded with rambh (see rabhati)] primary meaning "foundation", from this applied in the foll. senses: (1) support, help,
footing, expedient, anything to be depended upon as a means
of achieving what is desired, i. e. basis of operation, chance
Sn 1069 (= lambana, nissaya, upanissaya Nd2 132); Pv i.41
(ya kic rammaa katv); rammaa labhati (+ otra
labhati) to get the chance S ii.268; iv.185. (2) condition,
ground, cause, means, esp. a cause of desire or clinging to life,
pl. causes of rebirth (interpreted by tah at Nd1 429), lust
Sn 474 (= paccay SnA 410), 945 (= Nd1 429); KhA 23; DhA
i.288 (sappy); PvA 279. (3) a basis for the working of
the mind & intellect; i. e. sense object, object of thought or
consciousness, the outward constituent in the relation of subject & object, object in general. In this meaning of "relation"
it is closely connected with yatana (see yatana3 ), so that it
sometimes takes its place, it is also similar to visaya. Cpd. 3
distinguishes a 5 fold object, viz. citta, cetasika, pasda &
sukhuma rpa, paatti, nibbna. See on term especially
Cpd. 3, 14; Dhs trsl. xli. & 209. A 1. sq.; iv.385; Sn 506;
Ps i.57 sq., 84 (four .); ii.97, 118, 143; Dhs 1 (dhamm object
of ideation), 180, 584, 1186 et passim; Vbh 12, 79, 92, 319,
332 (four); Nett 191 (six); Vism 87 sq., 375 (sankantika), 430
sq. (in var. sets with ref. to var. objects), 533; DhsA 48, 127;
VvA 11, 38. rprammaa lit. dependence on form, i. e.
object of sight, visible form, especially striking appearance,
visibility, sight D iii.228; S iii.53; A i.82; J i.304; ii.439, 442;
PvA 265. rammaa karoti to make it an object (of intellection or intention), to make it one's concern (cp. Pv i.41 ,
above 1). rammaa -kusala clever in the objects (of meditation) S iii.266; -paccayat relation of presentation (i. e.
of subj. & obj.) Nett 80. (4) () (adj.) being supported
by, depending on, centred in, concentrated upon PvA 8 (nissay), 98 (ek); VvA 119 (buddh pti rapture centred in the
Buddha).
rdhana (nt.) & (f.) (either fr. + rdh or + rabh, cp. rdhaka] satisfying, accomplishing; satisfaction, accomplishment
D ii.287 (opp. virdhan failure); M i.479; ii.199; A v.211 sq.;
J iv.427.
rdhanya (adj.) [grd. fr. rdheti] to be attained, to be won;
successful Vin i.70 (an); J ii.233 (dur).
rdhita [pp. of rdheti; Sk. rdhita, but BSk. rgita, e. g.
Divy 131, 233] pleased Sdhp 510.
rdheti [Caus. of + rdh, in meaning 2 confused with rabhati. In BSk. strangely distorted to rgayati; freq. in Divy
as well as Av. ] 1. to please, win favour, propitiate,
convince J i.337 (drake), 421, 452; ii.72 (manusse); iv.274
(for bhirdheti T.); Vism 73 (rdhayanto Nthassa vana
vsena mnasa); DhA ii.71; Dvs iii.93 (rdhayi sabbajana); Miln 352. In older literature only in phrase citta
rdheti to please one's heart, to gladden, win over, propitiate
D i.118 sq., 175 (but cp. raddha citta to rabhati); M i85,
341; S ii.107; v.109; J ii.372; Miln 25. 2. to attain, accomplish, fulfill, succeed S v.23 (magga), 82, 180, 294; It iii. (v.
l. rm); Sn 488 = 509. Cp. rdhaka 1. pp. rdhita (q.
v.). See also parbhetv.
rma [Sk. rma, + ram] 1. pleasure, fondness of (),
delight, always as adj. () delighting in, enjoying, finding
pleasure in (usually combd. with rata, e. g. dhammrma
dhammarata finding delight in the Dh.) S i.235; iv.389 sq.
(bhav, updn); A i.35, 37, 130; ii.28 (bhvan); It 82
(dhamm); Sn 327 (id.; expld. by SnA 333 as rati and "dhamme
rmo ass ti"); Pug 53 (samagg); Vbh 351. 2. a pleasure
ground, park, garden (lit. sport, sporting); classified at Vin
iii.49 as pupph and phal a park with flowers or with fruit (i. e.
orchard), def. at DhA iii.246 as Veuvana Jvak ambavan
dayo, i. e. the park of Veuvana, or the park belonging to
Jvaka or mango groves in general. Therefore: (a) (in general) a park, resort for pastime etc. Vin ii.109; D i. 106; Dh
188; Vv 795 (amb garden of mangoes); VvA 305 (id.); Pv
ii.78 (pl. rmni = rm pavanni PvA 102). (b) (in
special) a private park, given to the Buddha or the Sangha for
the benefit of the bhikkhus, where they meet & hold discussions about sacred & secular matters; a place of recreation and
meditation, a meeting place for religious gatherings. Amongst
the many rmas given to the bhikkhus the most renowned is
123
rma
lambati
rva [cp. Sk. rva, fr. + ru] cry, sound, noise Dvs iv.46.
raha (nt.) only in pl. gihna rahni, things proper to laymen, D iii.163.
riya in anriya at Sn 815 is metric for anariya (q. v.).
rua (nt.) [orig. pp of + rud] weeping, crying, lamenting
Miln 357.
ruppa (adj.) [fr. arpa as (= a2 ) *rpya] formless, incorporeal; nt. formless existence D iii.275; M i.410, cp. 472;
iii.163; S i.131 (hyin); ii.123; A iv.316; It 61; Sn 754; J
i.406; Dhs 1385 (cp. trsl. 57); Vism 338; DA i.224; SnA 488,
508; Sdhp 5, 10; the four: Vism iii, 326 sq.
ruhati [ + ruh] to climb, ascend, go up or on to Sn 1014 (aor.
ruha); Sdhp 188; ger. ruhitv Sn 321 & ruyha J vi.452;
Sn 139 (v. l. abhiruyha); It 71. Caus. ropeti (q. v.).
rgya see rogya.
lapana (nt.) & (f.) [fr. + lap] talking to, addressing, conversation Vin iii.73 (with ref. to exclam. "ambho"); J v.253
(); Vism 23 (); SnA 396; PvA 131 (re ti .).
lapanat (f.) [abstr. fr. lapana] speaking to, conversing with,
conversation M i.331) (an).
124
lambati
loka
lambara & ambara (nt.) [Sk. ambara] a drum Vin i.15 (l);
J ii.344 (); v.390 (l); Vv 5418 ().
lu (nt.) [Sk. lu & ka; cognate with Lat. lum & alium, see
Walde Lat. Wtb. under alium] a bulbous plant, Radix Globosa Esculenta or Amorphophallus (Kern), Arum Campanulatum (Hardy) J iv.371 = vi.578; iv.373.
laya (m. & nt.) [cp. Sk. laya, + l, lyate, cp. allna & allyati, also nirlaya] 1. orig. roosting place, perch, i. e. abode
settling place, house J i.10 (geh); Miln 213; DhA ii.162 (an
= anoka), 170 (= oka). 2. "hanging on", attachment, desire,
clinging, lust S i.136 = Vin i.4 (rma "devoted to the things to
which it clings" K. S.); Vin iii.20, 111; S iv.372 (an); v.421
sq. (id.); A ii. 34, 131 (rma); iii.35; It 88; Sn 177 (km
= kmesu tah dihi vasena duvidho layo SnA 216),
535 (+ savni), 635; Nett 121, 123 (samugghta); Vism 293
(id.), 497; Miln 203 (Buddh aksi?); DhA i.121; iv.186 (=
tah); SnA 468 (= anoka of Sn 366). 3. pretence, pretext,
feint [cp. BSk. laya M Vastu iii.314] J i.157 (giln), 438;
iii.533 (mat); iv.37 (gabbhin); vi 20, 262 (giln).
likhati [ + likhati] to draw, delineate, copy in writing or drawing J i.71; Miln 51.
loka
vaa
haka (m. & nt.) [Sk. haka, fr. *ha probably meaning
"grain"] a certain measure of capacity, originally for grain; in
older texts usually applied to a liquid measure (udaka). Its
size is given by Bdhgh. at SnA 476 as follows: "cattro patth
hakni doa etc." udakhaka S v.400; A ii.55 = iii.337;
VvA 155. In other connections at J i.419 (ah); iii.541
(mita hakena = dhaa mpaka kamma kata C.);
Miln 229 (patt); DhA iii.367 (ah).
-thlik a bowl of the capacity of an haka Vin i. 240; A
iii.369; DhA iii.370 (v. l. bhatta thlik).
hiya (& hika) (adj.) [fr. *ha, Sk. hya, orig. possessing
grain, rich in grain, i. e. wealth; semantically cp. dhaa2 ]
rich, happy, fortunate; only in neg. anhiya poor, unlucky,
miserable M i.450; ii.178 (+ daidda); A iii.352 sq. (so read
with v. l. BB. hika for T. ika; combd. with daidda; v. l.
SS. anaddhika); J v. 96, 97 (+ daidda; C. na hika).
loa [fr. + lu, cp. luati & loeti] confusion, uproar, agitation
DhA i.38.
vajjati [not with Senart M Vastu 377 = ava + dhy, but = Sk.
vakti + vj, with pres. act. vajjeti = Sk. varjayati] 1.
to reflect upon, notice, take in, advert to, catch (a sound), listen
J i.81; ii.423; v.3; Miln 106. 2. to remove, upset (a vessel), pour out Vin i.286 (kumbhi); J ii.102 (gloss sicati).
Caus. vajjeti (q. v.).
vajjana (nt.) [fr. vajjati, cp. BSk. varjana in diff. meaning] turning to, paying attention, apprehending; adverting the
mind. See discussion of term at Cpd. 85, 227 (the C. derive
vajjana fr. vaeti to turn towards, this confusion being due
to close resemblance of jj and in writing); also Kvu trsl. 221
n. 4 (on Kvu 380 which has vaan), 282 n. 2 (on Kvu 491
vaan). Ps ii.5, 120; J ii.243; Vbh 320; Miln 102 sq.;
Vism 432; DA i.271.
dvraka (adj.) at J v.81, 82 is corrupt & should with v. l. perhaps better be read advraka without doors. Cp. Kern, Toev.
29 (lraka?). J v.81 has raka only.
vajjitatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. vajjita] inclination of mind, observation, paying attention Ps ii.27 sq.
vajjeti [Caus. of vajjati] 1. to turn over, incline, bend M iii.96;
J iv.56 (so read for vijjhanto); DA i.10 (kya). 2. to
incline (the mind); observe, reflect, muse, think, heed, listen
for. According to Cpd. 227 often paraphrased in C. by parimeti. J i.69, 74, 81, 89, 108, 200; Miln 297; DhA ii.96;
PvA 181 (= manasikaroti). 3. to cause to yield A iii.27
(perhaps better va). pp. vajjita (q. v.).
hana (nt.) [fr. + ah or dah, see dahati] a place of cremation, cemetery D i.55; J i.287 (here meaning the funereal fire)
402; iii.505; Pv ii.122 ; Vism 76; Miln 350; DA i.166; DhA
126
vaa
vsa
vy.
vaati [= vattati] in phrase . vivaati to turn forward & backward Vism 504.
vaana (nt.) [fr. + vt, cp. vaa 2 and vaanin] turning,
twisting; enticement, snare, temptation J iii.494; DhA ii.153.
varaat (f.) [abstr. fr. varaa] keeping away from, withholding from A iii 436.
vaan (f.) [most likely for vajjana. q. v. & see also Kvu trsl.
221, 282] turning to (of the mind), adverting, apprehending
Kvu 380, 491.
varaya (adj.) [grd. fr. varati], M i.273; an not to be obstructed, impossible to obstruct M iii.3; Miln 157.
vaanin (adj.) [fr. vaana] turning (away or towards), changing, tempting, enticing M i.375, 381; A ii.190; J ii.330 =
iv.471; DA i.250. Cp. etymologically the same, but semantically diff. vattanin.
val (f.) [cp. Sk. val & see val] a row, range J v.69; DA i.140.
vatta1 (adj.) [pp. of vattati] gone away to, fallen back to, in
phrase hny vatta (see same phrase under vattati) M i.460;
S ii.50; J i.206.
vasatha [Sk. vasatha, fr. + vas] dwelling place, habitation; abode, house, dwelling Vin i 226 (gra restinghouse);
iv.304 (= kavabaddha); S i.94, 229; iv.329; Sn 287, 672; J
iv.396; vi.425; Pug 51; Miln 279.
vsa
vuso
(vsa limpeti: read vpa); PvA 13, 14, 36; VvA 113;
Sdhp 247. -anvsa (n. & adj.) uninhabited, without a home;
an uninhabited place A iv.345; J ii.77; Pv ii.333 ; PvA 80 (=
angra); VvA 46.
-kappa the practice of (holding Uposatha in different) residence (within the same boundary) Vin ii.294, 300, 306; Dpvs
iv.47, cp. v.18. -palibodha the obstruction of having a home
(in set of 10 Palibodhas) KhA 39; cp. Vism 90 sq. -sappyat
suitability of residence Vism 127.
vuta [pp. of vuti in meaning of Sk. vayati, the corresponding Sk. form being + uta = ota] 1. strung upon, tied on,
fixed on to D i.76 (sutta); ii.13 (id.); A i.286 (tantvuta
web); J iii.52 (valliy); vi.346 (suttakena); DA i.94 (sutta).
2. impaled, stuck on (sle on the pale) J i.430; iii.35; v.497;
vi.105; PvA 217, 220.
vuta2 = vaa (see vuti & vuta1 ) covered, obstructed, hindered It 8 (mohena); also in phrase vuta nivuta ophuta etc.
Nd1 24 () = Nd2 365 = DA i.59.
vuttha [pp. of vasati] inhabited D ii.50 (an); S i.33.
vudha (nt.) [Vedic yudha, fr. + yudh to fight] an instrument
to fight with, a weapon, stick etc. D iii 219; M ii.100; A iv.107,
110; Sn 1008; J i.150; ii.110; iii. 467; iv.160, 283, 437; Nd2
on Sn 72; Miln 8, 339; DhA ii.2; iv.207; SnA 225, 466 (jvika
= issattha). See also yudha.
vuyhamna ppr. of vuyhati (Pass. of vahati), being conveyed
or brought VvA 237 (reading uncertain).
vijjhana (so for vichana & vijana) (adj. n.) [fr. vijjhati,
lit. piercing through, i. e. revolving axis] 1. (= vijjhati 2)
swinging round, hanging loose, spinning in vijjhana-rajju a
128
vuso
sajja
vuso (voc. pl. m.) [a contracted form of yusmanto pl. of yusman, of which the regular Pli form is yasmant, with v for y
as frequently in Pli, e. g. vudha for yudha] friend, a form
of polite address "friend, brother, Sir", usually in conversation
between bhikkhus. The grammatical construction is with the
pl. of the verb, like bhava and bhavanto. Vin ii.302; D
i.151, 157; ii.8; SnA 227; DhA i.9; ii.93; PvA 12, 13, 38, 208.
sa4 archaic 3rd sg. perf. of atthi to be, only in cpd. itihsa = iti
ha sa "thus it has been".
sasa (adj.) [of *as, see next] hoping, expecting something, longing for A i.108 = Pug 27 (expld. by Pug A 208 as
"so hi arahatta sasati patthet ti saso"); SnA 321, 336.
Cp. nir.
veika (adj.) [fr. vei; cp. BSk. veika Av. i.14, 108;
Divy 2, 182, 268, 302] special, extraordinary, exceptional S
iv.239; A v.74 sq.; Vism 268; VvA 112 (bhva peculiarity,
specialty), KhA 23, 35.
sasuka (adj.) [fr. sas] full of expectation, longing, hankering after, Th 2, 273 (= sisanaka ThA 217; trsl. "cadging").
sakatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. saka] having food, feeding, in an fasting Sn 249 (= abhojana SnA 292).
vea (adj. & f.) [not with Mller P.Gr. 10, 30, 37 = Sk. pa,
but fr. + veh to wind or turn round, which in P. is represented by veheti as well as vijjhati; then standing for either
h (h) or dh (vedha, q. v.). There may have been an analogy
influence through vell to move to and fro, cp. veita. Mller
refers to ve rightly the late dial. (Prk.) mela] 1. turning round, swinging round; diffusion, radiation; protuberance,
with reference to the rays of the Buddha at J i.12, 95, 501.
2. (f.) a garland or other ornament slung round & worn over
the head Vv 362 (kacan; = vea pilandhana VuA 167).
See vein.
sankita (adj.) [pp. of sankati] suspected, in fear, afraid, apprehensive, doubtful (obj. & subj.) Miln 173, 372 (parisankita
full of apprehension and suspicion); DhA i.223; VvA 110.
Cp. ussankita & parisankita.
sankin () (adj.) [fr. sank] fearing, anxious, apprehensive
Sn 255 (bhed); J iii.192 (id.).
sanga [ + sanga fr. saj to hang on, cp. Sk. sanga & sakti]
1. adhering, clinging to, attachment, pursuit J iv.11.
2. that which hangs on (the body), clothing, garment, dress;
adj. dressed or clothed in (); usually in cpd. uttarsanga a
loose (hanging) outer robe e. g. Vin i.289; S iv.290; PvA 73;
Vv 33 (suddh), 51 (id.).
velita (?) [pp. of + vell, cp. vea & BSk. viddha curved,
crooked Av. i.87, Lal. V. 207] turned round, wound, curved
J vi.354 (singika with curved horns, v. l. vellita).
vein (adj.) [fr. ve] wearing garlands or other headornaments, usually in f. in J v.409 (= kalankrehi yutt
C.); Vv 302 (voc. velin, but at id. p. 482 veline), 323 ; VvA
125 (on Vv 302 expls. as ratana maya pupph veavat).
129
sajja
sava
Vism 69.
sandi (f.) [fr. + sad] an extra long chair, a deck chair Vin
i.192; ii.142, 163, 169, 170; D i.7 (= pamtikkant' sana
DA i.86), 55 = M i.515 = S iii.307 (used as a bier) A i.181; J
i.108. See note at Dial. i.11.
sandik (f.) fr. sandi] a small chair or tabouret Vin ii. 149;
KhA 44.
sanna (adj.) [pp. of + sad, see sdati] near (cp. sajja1 ), opp.
dra J ii.154; DhA ii 91; PvA 42, 243.
sappan (fr.) [fr. + sp] lit. "creeping on to", doubt, mistrust,
always combd. with parisappan Nd3 1; Dhs 1004 (trsl. "evasion", cp. Dhs trsl. p 116), 1118, 1235; DA i.69.
sati [from as] to sit DA i.208; h. sg. si S i.130. - pp. sna (q.
v.).
satta1 [pp. of + saj] (a) lit. hanging on, in phrase kahe
satto kuapo a corpse hanging round one's neck M i.120; J
i.5. (b) fig. attached to, clinging to J i. 377 (+ satta lagga);
ThA 259 (an).
samna (adj.) [ppr. of sasati or sisati, for the usual earlier sasna] wishing, desiring, hoping, expecting Vv 846 (ki
= ki paccsi santo VvA 336); Pv iv.124 (= sisamna
patthayamana PvA 226).
sayati [ + ; lit. "lie on", cp. Ger. anliegen & Sk. aya
= Ger. Angelegenheit] to wish, desire, hope, intend J iv.291
(grd. syana, gloss esamna). See saya.
sava [fr. + sru, would corresp. to a Sk. *srava, cp. Sk. srva. The BSk. rava is a (wrong) sankritisation of the Pli
sava, cp. Divy 391 & knrava] that which flows (out or on
to) outflow & influx. 1. spirit, the intoxicating extract or secretion of a tree or flower, O. C. in Vin iv.110 (four kinds); B.
on D iii.182 (five kinds) DhsA 48; KhA 26; J iv.222; vi.9.
2. discharge from a sore, A i.124, 127 = Pug 30. 3. in psychology, t.t. for certain specified ideas which intoxicate the
mind (bemuddle it, befoozle it, so that it cannot rise to higher
things). Freedom from the "savas" constitutes Arahantship,
sana2 (?) eating Vism 116 (visam, cp. visam sita Miln
302). See, however, msana.
sanaka (nt.) [sana + ka] a small seat Vv 15 .
sanika (adj.) [fr. sana] having a seat; in ek sitting by oneself
130
sava
*sita
& the fight for the extinction of these savas forms one of the
main duties of man. On the difficulty of translating the term
see Cpd. 227. See also discussion of term sava (= savant ti
sav) at DhsA 48 (cp. Expositor pp. 63 sq). See also Cpd.
227 sq., & especially Dhs trsl. 291 sq. The 4 savas are
km, bhav, dih, avijj, i. e. sensuality, rebirth (lust of
life), speculation and ignorance. They are mentioned as
such at D ii.81, 84, 91, 94, 98, 123, 126; A i.165 sq., 196;
ii.211; iii.93, 414; iv.79; Ps i.94, 117; Dhs 1099, 1448; Nd2
134; Nett 31, 114 sq. The set of 3, which is probably older
(kma, bhava, avijj) occurs at M i. 55; A i.165; iii.414; S
iv.256; v.56, 189; It 49; Vbh 364. For other connections see
Vin i.14 (anupdya savehi cittani vimuccisu), 17, 20, 182;
ii.202; iii.5 (samudaya, nirodha etc.); D i.83, 167; iii.78,
108, 130, 220, 223, 230, 240, 283; M i.7 sq., 23, 35, 76, 219,
279, 445 (hniya); ii.22; iii.72, 277; S ii.187 sq. (ehi citta
vimucci); iii.45 (id.); iv.107 (id.), 20; v.8, 28, 410; A i.85 sq.
(vahanti), 98, 165 (samudaya, nirodha etc.), 187; ii.154
(ehi citta vimutta), 196; iii.21, 93 (samudaya, nirodha
etc.), 245, 387 sq., 410, 414; iv.13, 146 (pariydna end of
the .), 161 (vighta pariha); v.70, 237; Th 2, 4, 99, 101
(pahsi save sabbe); Sn 162, 374, 535 (pl. savni), 546,
749, 915, 1100; Dh 93, 253, 292; Nd1 331 (pubb); Vbh 42,
64, 426; Pug 11, 13, 27, 30 sq.; Miln 419; DhsA 48; ThA 94,
173; KhA 26; DA i 224; Sdhp 1; Pgdp 65 (piysava sur,
meaning?).
Referring specially to the extinction (khaya) of the savas
& to Arahantship following as a result are the foll. passages:
(1) savna khaya D i.156; S ii.29, 214; iii 57, 96 sq, 152
sq; iv.105, 175; v.92, 203, 220, 271, 284; A i.107 sq., 123 sq.,
232 sq., 273, 291; ii.6, 36, 44 sq., 149 sq., 214; iii 69, 114, 131,
202, 306, 319 sq.; iv.83 sq., 119, 140 sq., 314 sq.; v.10 sq., 36,
69, 94 sq, 105, 132, 174 sq., 343 sq.; It 49; Pug 27, 62; Vbh
334, 344; Vism 9; DA i.224; cp. parikkhaya A v 343 sq. See
also arahatta formula C. (2) khsava (adj.) one whose
savas are destroyed (see kha) S i.13, 48, 53, 146; ii 83,
239; iii.199, 128, 178; iv.217; A i 77, 109, 241, 266; iv.120,
224, 370 sq.; v 40, 253 sq.; Ps ii 173; cp. parikkh sav A
iv.418, 434, 451 sq.; savakha Sn 370. (3) ansava (adj.)
one who is free from the savas, an Arahant Vin ii.148 = 164;
D iii.112; S i 130; ii.214, 222; iii.83; iv.128; A i.81, 107 sq.,
123 sq., 273, 291; ii.6, 36, 87, 146; iii.19, 29, 114, 166; iv.98,
140 sq., 314 sq., 400; A v.10 sq., 36, 242, 340; Sn 1105, 1133;
Dh 94, 126, 386; Th i.100; It 75; Nd2 44; Pv ii.615 ; Pug 27;
Vbh 426; Dhs 1101, 1451; VvA 9. Cp. nirsava ThA 148.
Opp. ssava S iii 47; v.232; A i.81 v.242; Dhs 990; Nett
10; Vism 13, 438.
sicati [ + sic, cp. abhisicati & avasicati] to sprinkle, besprinkle Vin i.44; ii.208; J iv.376; Vv 796 (= sicati VvA 307);
PvA 41 (udakena), 104, 213 (ger. itv). pp. sitta (q. v.).
Cp. vy.
siha [pp. of ssati, Sk. ia] wished or longed for PvA 104.
*sita
harati
ha [Vedic ha, orig. perfect of ah to speak, meaning "he began to speak", thus in meaning of pres. "he says"] a perfect in
meaning of pret. & pres. "he says or he said", he spoke, also
spoke to somebody (w. acc.), as at J i.197 (cullalohita ha).
Usually in 3rd person, very rarely used of 2nd person, as at Sn
839, 840 (= kathesi bhaasi Nd 188, 191). 3rd sg. ha Vin
ii.191; Sn 790 (= bhaati Nd1 87), 888; J i.280; iii.53 and freq.
passim; 3rd pl. hu Sn 87, 181; Dh 345; J i.59; SnA 377, and
hasu J i.222; iii.278 and freq.
haraaka [haraa + ka] one who has to take or bring, a messenger J ii.199; iii.328.
132
harati
hundarika
take away M i.429 (salla); S i 121; iii.123; J i.40 (ger. haritv "with"), 293 (te hatta); Nd2 540c (puttamasa, read
hreyya?); Pv ii.310 ; DA i.186, 188 2. to bring, bring
down, fetch D ii.245; J iv 159 (nva; v. l. hhitv); v.466;
VvA 63 (bhatta); PvA 75. 3. to get, acquire, bring upon
oneself J v.433 (padosa); DhA ii.89. 4. to bring on to, put
into (w. loc.); fig. & intrs. to hold on to, put oneself to, touch,
resort to M i.395 (kahala mukhe .; also inf. hattu); Th 1,
1156 (ppacitte .; Mrs. Rh. D. Brethren ver. 1156, not as "accost" p. 419, n.). 5. to assault, strike, offend (for phari?)
Th 1, 1173. 6. (fig.) to take up, fall or go back on (w. acc.),
recite, quote, repeat (usually with desana & dasseti of an instructive story or sermon or homily) J iii.383 (desana), 401;
v.462 (vatthu haritv dassesi told a story for example); SnA
376; PvA 38, 39 (atta), 42, 66, 99 (dhamma desana).
See also payirudharati. pp. haa (q. v.). Caus. II.
hrapeti to cause to be brought or fetched; to wish to take,
to call or ask for J iii.88, 342; v.466; PvA 215.
hiati [ + hi, cp. BSk. hiate Divy 165 etc.] to wander about, to roam, to be on an errand, to be engaged in (w.
acc.) Vin i.203 (sensana crika), 217; ii. 132 (na sakkoti
vin daena hiitu); iv.62; J i.48, 108, 239; Nd2 540b ; Pv
iii.229 (= vicarati PvA 185); Vism 38, 284 (aavi); VvA 238
(tattha tattha); PvA 143.
hita [pp. of + dh] put up, heaped; provided with fuel (of a
fire), blazing Sn 18 (gini = bhato jalito v SnA 28). See sam.
hu 3rd pl. of ha (q. v.).
huti (f.) [Vedic huti, + hu] oblation, sacrifice; veneration, adoration M iii 167; S i.141; Th 1, 566 (na paiggaho recipient of sacrificial gifts); J i.15; v.70 (id.); Vv 6433
(paramhuti gato deserving the highest adoration); Sn 249,
458; Kvu 530; SnA 175; VvA 285.
huna = huti, in huna phuna giving oblations and sacrificing VvA 155; by itself at Vism 219.
huneyya (adj.) [a grd. form. fr. + hu, cp. huti] sacrificial,
worthy of offerings or of sacrifice, venerable, adorable, worshipful D iii.5, 217 (aggi); A ii.56, 70 (shuneyyaka), 145 sq.
(id.); iv.13, 41 (aggi); It 88 (+ phuneyya); Vv 6433 (cp. VvA
285). See def. at Vism 219 where expld. by "havanya" and
"havana arahati" deserving of offerings.
hundarika (adj.) [doubtful or hu?] according to Morris
J.P.T.S. 1884, 73 "crowded up, blocked up, impassable" Vin
i.79; iv.297; Vism 413 ( andha tama).
133
Iha
I
Icch (f.) [fr. icchati, i2 ] wish, longing, desire D ii.243; iii.75; S
i.40 (dhpyito loko), 44 (nara parikassati); A ii.143; iv.293
sq.; 325 sq.; v.40, 42 sq.; Sn 773, 872; Dh 74, 264 (lobha
sampanna); Nd1 29, 30; Pug 19; Dhs 1059, 1136; Vbh 101,
357, 361, 370; Nett 18, 23, 24; Asl. 363; DhsA 250 (read icch for iss? See Dhs trsl. 100); SnA 108; PvA 65, 155; Sdhp
242, 320.
-vacara moving in desires M i.27 (ppaka); Nett 27.
-vatia affected with desire, overcome by covetousness Sn
306. -pakata same Vin i.97; A iii.119, 191, 219 sq.; Pug 69;
Miln 357; Vism 24 (where Bdhgh however takes it as "icchya
apakata" and puts apakata = upadduta). -vinaya discipline of
one's wishes D iii.252, A iv.15; v.165 sq.
Ijjhana (nt.) & (f.) [fr. ijjhati] success, carrying out successfully Ps i.17 sq., 74, 181; ii.125, 143 sq., 161, 174; Vbh 217
sq.; Vism 266, 383 (ahena iddhi); DhsA 91, 118, 237.
Ijati [Vedic jati (cp. P. ajjati). Also found as ingati (so Veda),
and as ang in Sk. anga = P. aja & ingha & Vedic pali angati
to turn about. See also nejja & ajati1 ] to shake, move, turn
about, stir D i.56; S i.107, 132, 181 (anijamna ppr. med.
"impassive"); iii.211; Th 1, 42; 2, 231; Nd2 s. v. (+ calati
vedhati); Vism 377; DA i.167. pp. ijita (q. v.).
Icchati1 [Sk. icchati, i, cp. Av. isaiti, Obulg. iskati, Ohg. eiscn, Ags. scian = E. ask; all of same meaning "seek, wish"]
to wish, desire, ask for (c. acc.), expect S i.210 (dhamma
sotu i.); Sn 127, 345, 512, 813, 836; Dh 162, 291; Nd1 3,
138, 164; Nd2 s. v.; Pv ii.63 ; Pug 19; Miln 269, 327; SnA 16,
23, 321; KhA 17; PvA 20, 71, 74; Pot. icche Dh 84; Sn 835
Pv ii.66 & iccheyya D ii.2, 10; Sn 35; Dh 73, 88; ppr. iccha
Sn 826, 831, 937; Dh 334 (phala) aor. icchi PvA 31. grd.
icchitabba PvA 8. pp. iha & icchita (q. v.). Note. In
prep. cpds. the root i2 (icchati) is confused with root i1
(iati, eati) with pp. both iha and iita. Thus ajjhesati, pp.
ajjhiha & ajjhesita; anvesati (Sk. anvicehati); pariyesati (Sk.
parcchati), pp. pariyiha & pariyesita.
Ijan (f.) & a (nt.) [fr. ij, see ijati] shaking, movement,
motion Sn 193 (= calan phandan SnA 245); Nett 88 (= phandan C.). an immobility, steadfastness Ps i.15; ii.118.
Ijita [pp. of ijati] shaken, moved Th 1, 386 (an). Usually as
nt. ijita shaking, turning about, movement, vacillation M
i.454; S i.109; iv.202; A ii.45; Sn 750, 1040 (pl. ijit), 1048
(see Nd2 140); Dh 255; Vbh 390. On the 7 ijitas see J.P.
T.S. 1884, 58.
Ijitatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. ijita nt.] state of vacillation, wavering,
motion S v.315 (kyassa).
Iha (adj.) [pp. of icchati] pleasing, welcome, agreeable, pleasant, often in the idiomatic group iha kanta manpa (of objects pleasing to the senses) D i.245; ii.192; M i.85; S iv.60,
158, 235 sq.; v.22, 60, 147; A ii.66 sq.; v.135 (dasa, dhamm
etc., ten objects affording pleasure); Sn 759; It. 15; Vbh 2,
100, 337. Alone as nt. meaning welfare, good state, pleasure, happiness at Sn 154 (+ aniha); Nett 28 (+ aniha); Vism
167 (id.); PvA 116 (= bhadra), 140. -aniha unpleasant,
134
Iha
Iti (ti)
disagreeable PvA 32, 52, 60, 116. See also pariy, in which
iha stands for eha.
Ihak (Itthak) (f.) [BSk. iak, e. g. Divy 221; from the
Idg. root *idh > *aidh to burn, cp. Sk. idhma firewood, inddhe to kindle (idh or indh), edha fuel; Gr. burn,
fire brand; Lat. aedes, aestas & aestus; more especially Av.
itya tile, brick] 1. a burnt brick, a tile Vin ii 121 (pkara
a brick wall, distinguished fr. silpakra & dru); J iii.435,
446 (pkr ihik read ahak); v.213 (rattihik); Vism
355 (drugomaya); PvA 4 (cua makkhita ssa the
head rubbed with brickpowder, i. e. plaster; a ceremony performed on one to be executed, cp. Mcchakaika x.5 pia
cn vakraca puruo ha pakta with striking equation iaka > pia). 2. pl. (as suvaa) gold or gilt tiles
used for covering a cetiya or tope DhA iii.29, 61; VvA 157.
Ihi in khagga dhra at J vi.223 should be read iddha.
Ia (nt.) [Sk. a, see also P. an aa] debt D i.71, 73; A
iii.352; v.324 (enumd. with baddha, jni & kali); Sn 120; J
i.307; ii.388, 423; iii.66; iv.184 (iagga for nagga?); 256;
v.253 (where enumd. as one of the 4 paribhogas, viz. theyya,
ia, dya, smi); vi.69, 193; Miln 375; PvA 273, 276, ia
gahti to borrow money or take up a loan Vism 556; SnA 289;
PvA 3. ia mucati to discharge a debt J iv.280; v.238;
sodheti same PvA 276; labhati same PvA 3.
-apagama absence of debt ThA 245. -ghaka a borrower Miln 364. -ghta stricken by debt Sn 246 (= ia
gahetva tassa appadnena iaghta). -ha (with iaa as v.
l. at all passages, see aa) fallen into or being in debt M i.463
= S iii.93 = It 89 = Miln 279. -paa promissory note J
i.230; iv.256. -mokkha release from debt J iv.280; v.239.
-sdhaka negotiator of a loan Miln 365.
Iyika [fr. ia] one connected with a debt, viz. (1) a creditor S
i.170; J iv.159, 256; vi.178; ThA 271 see also dhanika); PvA
3. (2) a debtor Vin i.76; Nd1 160.
Ita [pp. of eti, i] gone, only in cpd. dur-ita gone badly, as nt. evil,
wrong Davs i.61; otherwise in compn. with prep., as peta, vta
etc.
Itara1 (adj.) [Ved. itara = Lat. iterum a second time; compar. of
pron. base *i, as in aya, eta, iti etc.] other, second, next;
different Dh 85, 104, 222; J ii.3; iii.26; iv.4; PvA 13, 14, 42,
83, 117. In repetition cpd. itartara one or the other, whatsoever, any Sn 42; J v.425; Nd2 141; Miln 395; KhA 145, 147;
acc. itartara & instr. itartarena used as adv. of one kind
or another, in every way, anyhow [cp. BSk. itaretara M Vastu
iii. 348 and see Wackernagel Altind. Gram. II. 121 c.] J vi
448 (); Dh 331 (ena); Vv 841 (text reads itritarena, v. l.
itaritarena, expld. by itaritara VvA 333).
Itara2 (adj.) freq. spelling for ittara (q. v.).
Iti (ti) (indecl.) [Vedic iti, of pron. base *i, cp. Sk. ittha thus, itth here, there; Av. ipa so; Lat. ita & item thus. Cp. also P. ettha; lit. "here, there (now), then"] emphatic deictic particle
"thus". Occurs in both forms iti & ti, the former in higher style
(poetry), the latter more familiar in conversational prose. The
function of "iti" is expld. by the old Pli C. in a conventional
phrase, looking upon it more as a "filling" particle than trying
to define its meaning viz. it ti padasandhi padasasaggo
135
Iti (ti)
oral tradition, history; usually mentioned as a branch of brahmanic learning, in phrase itihsa paca mna padako
veyykarao etc. D i.88 = (see DA i.247); A i.163; iii.223; Sn
447, 1020. Cp. also M Vastu i.556. htiha [itiha + itiha]
"so & so" talk, gossip, oral tradition, belief by hearsay etc.
(cp. itikir & antiha. Nd2 spells tihtiha) M i.520; S i.154;
Sn 1084; Nd2 151.
Ito (indecl.) [Vedic ita, abl. adv. formation fr. pron. base
*i, cp. iti, aya etc.] adv. of succession or motion in space
& time "from here". "from now". (1) with ref. to space: (a)
from here, from this, often implying the present existence (in
opp. to the "other" world) It 77; Sn 271 (ja. nidna caused
or founded in or by this existence = attabhva sandhy' ha
SnA 303), 774 (cutse), 870 (nidna), 1062 (from this source,
i. e. from me), 1101; Pv i.57 (ito dinna what is given in this
world); i.62 (i. e. manussalokato PvA 33); i.123 (= idhalokato
PvA 64); Nett 93 (ito bahiddh); PvA 46 (ito dukkhato mutti).
(b) here (with implication of movement), in phrases ito c'
ito here and there PvA 4, 6; and ito v etto v here & there
DhA ii.80. (2) with ref. to time: from here, from now,
hence (in chronological records with num. ord. or card., with
ref. either to past or future). (a) referring to the past, since
D ii.2 (ito so ekanavuto kappo 91 kappas ago); Sn 570 (ito
ahame, scil. divase 8 days ago SnA 457; T. reads atthami);
VvA 319 (ito kira tisa kappa sahasse); PvA 19 (dv
navuti kappe 92 kappas ago), 21 (id.), 78 (pacamya jtiy in
the fifth previous re birth). (b) referring to the future, i.
e. henceforth, in future, from now e. g. ito sattame divase in
a week VvA 138; ito para further, after this SnA 160, 178,
412, 549; PvA 83; ito pathya from now on, henceforward J
i.63 (ito dni p.); PvA 41.
Ittara (sometimes spelt itara) (adj.) [Vedic itvara in meaning "going", going along, hence developed meaning "passing"; fr. i]
1. passing, changeable, short, temporary, brief, unstable
M i.318 (opp. dgharatta); A ii.187; J i.393; iii.83 (dassana
= khaika C.), iv.112 (vsa temporary abode); Pv i.1111 (=
na cira kla hyin anicca viparima dhamma PvA
60); DA i.195; PvA 60 (= paritta khaika). 2. small, inferior, poor, unreliable, mean M ii.47 (jacca of inferior birth);
A ii.34; Sn 757 (= paritta paccupahna SnA 509); Miln 93,
114 (paa of small wisdom). This meaning (2) also in BSk.
itvaa, e. g. Divy 317 (dna).
Ittarat (f.) [fr. ittara] changeableness Miln 93 (of a woman).
Ittha (indecl.) [the regular representative of Vedic ittha here,
there, but preserved only in cpds. while the Pli form is ettha]
here, in this world (or "thus, in such a way"), only in cpd.
bhv' aath-bhva such an (i. e. earthly) existence and
one of another kind, or existence here (in this life) and in another form" (cp. itibhva & itthatta) Sn 729, 740 = 752; It 9
(v. l. itthi for iti) = A ii.10 = Nd2 172a ; It 94 (v. l. ittha).
There is likely to have been a confusion between ittha = Sk.
itth & ittha = Sk. ittha (see next).
Ittha (indecl.) [adv. fr. pron. base i, as also iti in same meaning] thus, in this way D i.53, 213; Dvs iv.35; v.18.
-nma (itthan) having such as name, called thus, socalled
Vin i.56; iv.136; J i.297; Miln 115; DhA ii.98. -bhta being
thus, of this kind, modal, only in cpd. lakkhaa or khyna
136
Idha
Iddhika1 () (adj.) the compn. form of addhika in cpd. kapaiddhika tramps & wayfarers (see kapaa), e. g. at J i.6; iv.15;
PvA 78.
Iddhika2 () (adj.) [iddhi + ka] possessed of power, only in
cpd. mah-iddhika of great power, always combd. with mahnubhva, e. g. at Vin i.31; ii.193; iii.101; S ii. 155; M i.34;
Th 1, 429. As mahiddhiya at J v.149. See mahiddhika.
Iddhimant (adj.) [fr. iddhi] 1. (lit.) successful, proficient,
only in neg. an unfortunate, miserable, poor J vi.361. 2.
(fig.) possessing psychic powers Vin iii.67; iv.108; A i.23, 25;
ii.185; iii.340; iv.312; Sn 179; Nett 23; Sdhp 32, 472.
137
Idha
Indriya
Idha (indecl.) [Sk. iha, adv. of space fr. pron. base *i (cp. aya,
iti etc.), cp. Lat. ihi, Gr. , Av. ida] here, in this
place, in this connection, now; esp. in this world or present
existence Sn 1038, 1056, 1065; It 99 (idh' papanna reborn in
this existence); Dh 5, 15, 267, 343, 392; Nd1 40, 109, 156; Nd2
145, 146; SnA 147; PvA 45, 60, 71. -idhaloka this world,
the world of men Sn 1043 (= manussaloka Nd2 552c ); PvA 64;
in this religion, Vbh 245. On diff. meanings of idha see DhsA
348.
Idhuma [Sk. idhma, see etym. under ihak] fire wood - Tela
kaha gth, p. 53, J.P.T.S. 1884.
Inda [Vedic indra, most likely to same root as indu moon, viz.
*Idg. *eid to shine, cp. Lat. ds middle of month (after the
full moon), Oir. sce moon. Jacobi in K. Z. xxxi.316 sq. connects Indra with Lat. neriosus strong & Nero). 1. The
Vedic god Indra D i.244; ii.261, 274; Sn 310, 316, 679, 1024;
Nd1 177. 2. lord, chief, king. Sakko devna indo D
i.216, 217; ii.221, 275; S i.219. Vepcitti asurindo S i.221 ff.
manussinda, S i.69, manujinda, Sn 553, narinda, Sn 863, all
of the Buddha, chief of men ; cp. Vism 491. [Europeans
have found a strange difficulty in understanding the real relation of Sakka to Indra. The few references to Indra in the
Nikyas should be classed with the other fragments of Vedic
mythology to be found in them. Sakka belongs only to the
Buddhist mythology then being built up. He is not only quite
different from Indra, but is the direct contrary of that blustering, drunken, god of war. See the passages collected in Dial.
ii.294 298. The idiom sa-Ind dev, D ii.261, 274; A v.325,
means the gods about Indra, Indra's retinue , this being a
Vedic story. But Dev Tvatis sahindak means the T.
gods together with their leader (D ii.208 212; S iii.90; cp.
Vv 301 ) this being a Buddhist story].
-aggi (ind' aggi) Indra's fire, i. e. lightning PvA 56. gajjita (nt.) Indra's thunder Miln 22. -jla deception DA
i.85. -jlika a juggler, conjurer Miln 331. -dhanu the rainbow DA i.40. -bhavana the realm of Indra Nd1 448 (cp. Tvatisa bhavana). -linga the characteristic of Indra Vism
491. -sla N. of tree J iv.92.
Indaka [dimin. fr. inda] 1. Np. (see Dict. of names), e. g. at
Pv ii.957 ; PvA 136 sq. 2. () see inda 2.
Indakhla [inda + khla, cp. BSk. indrakla Divy 250, 365, 544;
Av. i.109, 223]. "Indra's post"; the post, stake or column of
Indra, at or before the city gate; also a large slab of stone let
into the ground at the entrance of a house D ii.254 ( hacca,
cp. DhA ii.181); Vin iv.160 (expld. ibid. as sayani gharassa ummro, i. e. threshold); S v.444 (ayokhlo +); Dh 95
(pama, cp. DhA ii.181); Th 1, 663; J i.89; Miln 364; Vism
72, 466; SnA 201; DA i.209 (nikkhamitv bahi ); DhA ii.180
(sadisa Sriputtassa citta), 181 (nagara dvre nikhata
).
Indag see hindag.
Indagopaka [inda + gopaka, cp. Vedic indragop having Indra as protector] a sort of insect ("cochineal, a red beetle",
Bhtlingk), observed to come out of the ground after rain Th
1, 13; Vin iii.42; J iv.258; v.168; DhA i.20; Brethren p. 18, n.
Indanla [inda + nla "Indra's blue"] a sapphire J i.80; Miln 118;
138
Indriya
Illiy
i.39, 42 sq., 297; ii.38 (sant), 149 sq.; iii.277, 282; Ps i.16,
21, 88, 180; ii.1 sq, 13, 84, 119, 132, 143, 145, 110, 223;
Nd1 45 (dhra), 171 (kusala), 341 (pucch); Dhs 58, 121,
528, 556 (dukkh), 560, 644. 736; Nett 18 (sotpannassa), 28
(vavahna), 162 (lok'uttara); Vism 350 (vekallat); Sdhp
280, 342, 364, 371, 449, 473.
E. As adj. () having one's senses, mind or heart as such
& such S i.138 (tikkh & mud); iii.93 (pkat); v.269 (id.);
A i.70 (id) & passim (id.); A i.70 (savut) 266 (id.), 236
(gutt); ii.6 (samhit); 8n 214 (susamhit his senses well
composed); PvA 70 (pit joyful or gladdened of heart).
F. Some compounds: -gutta one who restrains & watches
his senses S i.154; Dh 375.
-gutti keeping watch over
the senses, self restraint DhA iv.111. a paropariya, b
paropariyatta & c paropariyatti (a) (knowledge of)
what goes on in the senses and intentions of others a J i.78; b A
v.34, 38; b Ps i.121 sq., 133 sq.; ii.158, 175; b Vbh 340, 342; c
S v.205; c Nett 101. See remark under paropariya. -bhvan
cultivation of the (five, see above Cd ) moral qualities Vin i.294
(+ balabhvan); M iii.298. -savara restraint or subjugation of the senses D ii.281; M i.269, 346; S i.54; A iii.360;
iv.99; v.113 sq., 136, 206; Nd1 483; Nett 27, 121 sq; Vism 20
sq.
Indhana (nt.) [Vedic indhana, of idh or indh to kindle, cp.
iddha1 ] firewood, fuel J iv.27 (adj. an without fuel, aggi);
v.447; ThA 256; VvA 335; Sdhp 608. Cp. idhuma.
Ibbha (adj.) [Ved. ibhya belonging to the servants] menial;
a retainer, in the phrase muak samaak ibbh kah
(kih) bandhupdpacc D i.90 (v. l. SS imbha; T. kih,
v. l. kah), 91, 103; M i.334 (kih, v. l. kah). Also at J
vi.214. Expld. by Bdhgh. as gahapatika at DA i.254, (also at J
vi.215).
Iria (nt.) [Vedic iria, on etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under
rarus] barren soil, desert J vi.560 (= niroja C.). Cp. ria.
Iriyati [fr. r to set in motion, to stir, Sk. rte, but pres. formation
influenced by iriy & also by Sk. iyarti of (see acchati &
icchati2 ); cp. Caus. rayati (= P. reti), pp. ra & rita. See
also iss] to move, to wander about, stir; fig. to move, behave,
show a certain way of deportment M i.74, 75; S i.53 (dukkha
aticca iriyati); iv.71; A iii.451; v.41; Sn 947, 1063, 1097; Th
1,276; J iii.498 (= viharati); Nd1 431; Nd2 147 (= carati etc.);
Vism 16; DA i.70.
Iriyan (f.) [fr. iriyati] way of moving on, progress, Dhs 19, 82,
295, 380, 441, 716.
Iriy (f.) [cp. from iriyati, BSk. ry Divy 485] movement, posture, deportment M i.81; Sn 1038 (= cariy vatti vihro Nd2
148); It 31; Vism 145 (+ vutti plana yapana).
-patha way of deportment; mode of movement; good behaviour. There are 4 iriypathas or postures, viz. walking,
standing, sitting, lying down (see Ps ii.225 & DA i.183). Cp.
BSk. rypatha Divy 37. Vin i.39; ii.146 (sampanna); Vin
i.91 (chinn a cripple); S v.78 (cattro i.); Sn 385; Nd1 225,
226; Nd2 s. v.; J i.22 (of a lion), 66, 506; Miln 17; Vism 104,
128, 290, 396; DhA i.9; iv.17; VvA 6; PvA 141; Sdhp 604.
Irubbeda the Rig veda Dpvs v.62 (iruveda); Miln 178; DA
i.247; SnA 447.
139
Illiy
Iha
Illiy (f.) [fr. ill, cp. Sk. *lik] = ill J v.259; vi.50.
Isi [Vedic i fr. . Voc. ise Sn 1025; pl. npm. isayo, gen.
isina S ii.280 & isna S i.192; etc. inst. isibhi Th 1, 1065]
1. a holy man, one gifted with special powers of insight &
inspiration, an anchoret, a Seer, Sage, Saint, "Master" D i.96
(kaho isi ahosi); S i.33, 35, 65, 128, 191, 192, 226 sq., 236
(cro isna); ii.280 (dhammo isina dhajo); A ii.24, 51; Vin
iv.15 = 22 (bhsito dhammo); It 123; Sn 284, 458, 979, 689,
691, 1008, 1025, 1043, 1044, 1116 (dev divine Seer), 1126,
Nd2 149 (isi nmak ye keci isi pabbajja pabbajit
jvik nigah jail tpas); Dh 281; J i.17 (v.90: isayo n'
atthi me sam of Buddha); J v.140 (gaa), 266, 267 (isi Gotamo); Pv ii.614 (= yama niyam' dna esanatthena isayo
PvA 98); ii.133 (= jhn' dna guna esanatthena isi PvA
163); iv.73 (= asekkhna slakkhandh' dna esanatthena
isi PvA 265); Miln 19 (vta) 248 (bhattika); DA i.266 (gen.
isino); Sdhp 200, 384. See also mahesi. 2. (in brahmanic
tradition) the ten (divinely) inspired singers or composers of
the Vedic hymns (brhmana pubbak isayo mantna kattro pavattro), whose names are given at Vin i. 245; D i.104,
238; A iii.224, iv.61 as follows: Ahaka, Vmaka, Vmadeva,
Vessmitta, Yamataggi (Yamadaggi), Angirasa, Bhradvja,
Vseha, Kassapa, Bhagu.
-nisabha the first (lit. "bull") among Saints, Ep. of the
Buddha Sn 698; Vv 167 (cp. VvA 82). -pabbajj the (holy)
life of an anchoret Vism 123; DhA i.105; iv.55; PvA 162.
-vta the wind of a Saint Miln 19; Vism 18. -sattama the 7th
of the great Sages (i. e. Gotama Buddha, as 7th in the sequence
of Vipassin, Sikhin, Vessabhu, Kakusandha, Kogamana &
Kassapa Buddhas) M i.386; S i.192; Sn 356; Th 1, 1240 (=
Bhagav isi ca sattamo ca uttamahena SnA 351); Vv 211 (=
buddha isina Vipassi dna sattamo VvA 105).
Isik (isk) (f.) [Sk. ik] a reed D i.77, cp. DA i.222; J vi.67
(isik).
Isitta (nt.) [abstr. fr. isi] rishi ship D i.104 (= isi bhva DA
i.274).
Issattha (nt. m.) [cp. Sk. ivastra nt. bow, fr. iu (= P. usu) an
arrow + as to throw. Cp. P. isssa. Bdhgh. in a strange
way dissects it as "usu ca sattha c ti vutta hoti" (i. e. usu
140
gha
Ukkahat
gha (?) [doubtful as to origin & etym. since only found in cpd.
angha & abs. only in exegetical literature. If genuine, it
should belong to gh Sk. ghyati to tremble, rage etc. See
discussed under nigha1 ] confusion, rage, badness SnA 590 (in
expln of anigha). Usually as an (or anigha), e. g. J iii.343 (=
niddukkha C.); v.343.
ti & t (f.) [Sk. ti, of doubtful origin] ill, calamity, plague, distress, often combb. with & substituted for upaddava, cp. BSk.
tay' opadrava (attack of plague) Divy 119. Sn 51; J i.27
(v.189); v.401 = upaddava; Nd1 381; Nd2 48, 636 (+ upaddava = santpa); Miln 152, 274, 418. -anti sound condition,
health, safety A iv.238; Miln 323.
tika (adj.) [fr. ti] connected or affected with ill or harm, only in
neg. an.
tiha a doublet of itiha, only found in neg. an.
disa (adj.) [Sk. ds, + d, lit. so looking] such like, such
DhsA 400 (f. ); PvA 50, (id.) 51.
ria (nt.) [= iria, q. v. & cp. Sk. ria] barren soil, desert D
i.248; A v.156 sq.; J v.70 (= sukkha kantra C.); vi.560;
VvA 334.
hati [Vedic h, cp. Av. ardour, eagerness, zi greed] to endeavour, attempt, strive after Vin iii.268 (Bdhgh.) J vi.518 (cp.
Kern, Toev. p. 112); DA i.139; VvA 35.
U
U the sound or syllable u, expld. by Bdhgh at Vism 495 as expressing origin (= ud).
Ukkaha (adj.) [pp. of ukkasati] 1. exalted, high, prominent, glorious, excellent, most freq. opp. to hna, in phrase
hna m ukkaha majjhime Vin iv.7; J i.20 (v.129),
22 (v.143); iii.218 (= uttama C.). In other combn. at Vism 64
(u. majjhima mudu referring to the 3 grades of the Dhutangas);
SnA 160 (dvipad sabbasattna ukkah); VvA 105 (superl.
ukkahatama with ref. to Gotama as the most exalted of the 7
Rishis); Sdhp 506 (opp. lmaka). 2. large, comprehensive,
great, in ukkaho patto a bowl of great capacity (as diff. from
majjhima & omaka p.) Vin iii.243 (= uk. nma patto ahlhak' odana gahti catu bhga khdana v tadpiya
v byajana). 3. detailed, exhaustive, specialised Vism
37 (ati ukkaha desan); also in phrase vasena in detail SnA 181. 4. arrogant, insolent J v. 16. 5. used as
nom at J i.387 in meaning "battle, conflict". an Vism 64
(cvara).
-niddesa exhaustive exposition, special designation, term
par excellence DhsA 70; VvA 231; PvA 7. -pariccheda comprehensive connotation SnA 229, 231, 376.
Ukkasa [fr. ud + k see ukkassati] exaltation, excellence, superiority (opp. avakkasa) D i.54 (ukkas vakkasa =
hyana vahana DA i.165); M i.518; Vism 563 (id.); VvA
146 (gata excellent), 335 (instr. ukkasena par excellence,
exceedingly); PvA 228 (vasena, with ref. to devats; v. l. SS
okk).
Ukkasaka (adj.) [fr. ukkasa] raising, exalting (oneself), extolling M i.19 (att; opp. para vambhin); J ii.152. Cp.
smukkasika.
Ukkasati [ud + k, karati, lit. draw or up, raise] to exalt, praise
M i.498; J iv.108. pp. ukkaha. -ukkaseti in same
meaning M i.402 sq. (attna u. para vambheti); A ii.27;
Nd2 141.
Ukkasan (f.) [abstr. of ukkasati] raising, extolling, exaltation, in att self exaltation, self praise M i.402 (opp. para
vambhan); Nd2 505 (id.).
Ukkahat
Ukkujjana
Ukkcan (f.) [fr. ukkceti, ud + *kc, see ukkcita] enlightening, clearing up, instruction Vbh 352 (in def. of lapan, v. l.
kpan). Note Kern, Toev. s. v. compares Vism p. 115 & Sk.
uddpana in same sense. Def. at Vism 27 (= uddpan).
Ukkaa (adj.) [ud + kaa] having the ears erect (?) J vi.559.
Ukkra [fr. ud + k "do out"] dung, excrement J iv.485, otherwise only in cpd. ukkra-bhmi dung hill J i.5, 146 (so
read for ukkar), ii.40; iii.16, 75, 377; iv.72, 305; Vism 196
(pama kuapa); DhA iii.208. Cp. uccra.
Ukkantati [ud + kantati] to cut out, tear out, skin Vin i.217 (itva);
J i.164; iv.210 (v. l. for okk); v.10 (ger. ukkacca); Pv iii.94
(ukkantv, v. l. BB ukkacca); PvA 210 (v. l. SS ni), 211 (=
chinditv).
Ukkujjati (eti) [Denom. fr. ukkujja] to bend up, turn up, set
upright Vin i.181; ii.126 (patta), 269 (bhikkhu); mostly
in phrase nikkujjita ukkujjeyya "(like) one might raise up
one who has fallen" D i.85, 110; ii.132, 152; Sn p. 15 (=
uparimukha karoti DA i.228 = SnA 155).
Ukkujjana
Uggahti
Ukkusa [see ukkuhi & cp. BSk. utkroa watchman (?) Divy
453] an osprey J iv.291 (rja), 392.
Ukkla (adj.) [ud + kla] sloping up, steep, high (opp. vikkla) A
i.35 sq.; Vism 153 (nadi); SnA 42. Cp. utklanikla sama
Lal. V. 340.
Uklpa (ukkalpa) (adj.) [cp. Sk. ut kalpayati to let go] 1. deserted J ii.275 (ukkalpa T.; vv. ll. uklpa & ullpa).
2. dirtied, soiled Vin ii.154, 208, 222; Vism 128; DhA iii.168
(ukkalpa).
Ukkhali (l) (f.) [der. fr. Vedic ukha & ukh pot, boiler; related
to Lat. aulla (fr. *auxla); Goth. auhns oven] a pot in which to
boil rice (& other food) J i.68, 235; v. 389, 471; Pug 33; Vism
346 (mukhavai), 356 (kapla, in comp.); DhA i.136; ii.5;
iii.371; iv.130; Pug A 231; VvA 100. Cp. next.
Ukkhalik (f.) = ukkhali. Th 2, 23 (= bhatta pacana-bhjana
ThA 29); DhA iv.98 (kla); DhsA 376.
Ukkh(?) [can it be compared with Vedic ukan?] in ukkhasata dna, given at various times of the day (meaning =
?) S ii.264 (v. l. ukk). Or is it to be read ukhsata d. i. e. consisting of 100 pots (of rice = mah dana?).
S A: patabhojana bharitna mah ukkhalina sata
dna. Cp. ukh cooking vessel ThA 71 (Ap. v.38). Kern,
Toev. under ukkh trsl. "zeker muntstuck", i. e. kind of gift.
Uggahti [ud + gh, see gahti] to take up, acquire, learn [cp.
BSk. udghti in same sense, e. g. Divy 18, 77 etc.] Sn 912
Ukkhitta [pp. of ukkhipati] taken up, lifted up, t.t. of the canon
143
Uggahti
Ucca
& gilati] to vomit up ("swallow up") to spit out Ud 14 (uggiritvna); DA i.41 (uggra uggiranto). Cp. BSk. prodgra
cast out Divy 589.
Uggirati2 [cp. Sk. udgurate, ud + gur] to lift up, carry Vin iv.147
= DhA iii.50 (talasattika expld. by uccreti); J i.150 (vudhni); vi.460, 472. Cp. sam.
Uggilati = uggirati1 , i. e. to spit out (opp. ogilati) M i.393; S
iv.323; J iii.529; Miln 5; PvA 283.
Uggva (nt.) [ud + gva] a neckband to hold a basket hanging
down J vi.562 (uggva c pi asato = asake pacchi
lagganaka C.).
Uggahyati [poetic form of uggaheti (see uggahati), but according to Kern, Toev. s. v. representing Ved. udgbhyati] to
take hold of, to take up Sn 791 (= gahti Nd1 91). ger.
uggahya Sn 837.
Uggahita [pp. of uggahti] taken up, taken, acquired Vin i.212; J
iii.168 (sippa, adj.), 325; iv.220; vi 76; Vism 241. The metric
form is uggahta at Sn 795, 833, 1098; Nd1 175 = Nd2 152 (=
gahita parmaha).
Ugghta [ud + ghta] shaking, jolting; jolt, jerk Vin ii. 276 (yn);
J vi.253 (an); DhA iii.283 (yn).
Ugghti (f.) [fr. ud + ghta] 1. shaking, shock VvA 36.
2. striking, conquering; victory, combd. with nighti Sn 828;
Nd1 167; SnA 541; Nett 110 (T. reads ugghta).
Ucca (adj.) [For udya, adj. formation from prep. ud above, up]
high (opp. avaca low) D i.194; M ii.213; A v.82 (hniya
nce hne hapeti puts on a low place which ought to be placed
high); Pv iv.74 (ucca paggayha lifting high up = uccatara
katv PvA 265); Pug 52, 58; DA i.135; PvA 176.
144
Ucca
Uccaka (adj.) [fr. ucca] high Vin ii.149 (sandik a kind of high
chair).
Ucchindati [ud + chid, see chindati] to break up, destroy, annihilate S v.432 (bhavataha), A iv.17 (fut. ucchecchmi to be
read with v. l. for T. ucchejjissmi); Sn 2 (pret. udacchida),
208 (ger. ucchijja); J v.383; Dh 285. Pass. ucchijjati to
be destroyed or annihilated, to cease to exist S iv.309; J v.242,
467; Miln 192; PvA 63, 130 (= na pavattati), 253 (= natthi).
pp. ucchinna (q. v.).
Ucc () (adv.) [cp. Sk. ucc, instr. sg. of ucca, cp. pac
behind, as well as uccai instr. pl. In BSk. we find ucca
(uccakulna Av. iii.117) as well as ucca (uccagama Divy
476). It is in all cases restricted to cpds.] high (lit. & fig.),
raised, in foll. cpds.
-kaeruk a tall female elephant M i.178. -krik id.
M i.178 (v. l. karik to be preferred). -kula a high, noble
family Pv iii.116 (= ucc khattiya kul dino PvA 176).
-kulnat birth in a high class family, high rank M iii.37;
VvA 32. -sadda a loud noise D i.143, 178; A iii.30. -sayana
a high bed (+ mahsayana) Vin i. 192; D i.5, 7; cp. DA i.78.
Ucchu [Sk. cp. Vedic Np. Ikvku fr. iku] sugar cane Vin
iv.35; A iii.76; iv.279; Miln 46; DhA iv.199 (na yanta
sugar cane mill), PvA 257, 260; VvA 124.
-agga (ucch) top of s. c. Vism 172. -khaik a bit
of sugar cane Vv 3326 . -khdana eating s. c. Vism 70.
-khetta sugar cane field J i.339; VvA 256. -gahik a
kind of sugar cane, Batatas Paniculata J i.339; vi.114 (so
read for ghaika). -pla watchman of s. c. VvA 256.
-pana, cane pressing, Asl. 274. -pua sugar cane
basket J iv.363. -bja seed of s. c. A i.32; v.213. -yantra
a sugar mill J i.339. -rasa s. c. juice Vin i.246; Vism
489; VvA 180 -vta, Asl. 274. -sl, Asl. 274.
Uccheda [fr. ud + chid, chind, see ucchindati & cp. cheda] breaking up, disintegration, perishing (of the soul) Vin iii.2 (either
after this life, or after kmadeva life, or after brahmadeva life)
D i.34, 55; S iv.323; Nd1 324; Miln 413; Nett 95, 112, 160;
DA i.120.
-dihi the doctrine of the annihilation (of the soul), as
opp. to sassata or atta dihi (the continuance of the
soul after death) S ii.20; iii.99, 110 sq; Ps i.150, 158; Nd1 248
(opp. sassati); Dhs 1316; Nett 40, 127; SnA 523 (opp. atta).
-vda (adj.) one who professes the doctrine of annihilation
(ucchedadihi) Vin i.235; iii.2; D i.34, 55; S ii.18; iv.401; A
iv.174, 182 sq.; Nd1 282; Pug 38. -vdin = vda Nett 111; J
v.244.
Ucchdana (nt.) [ut + sd, Caus. of sad, sdati, cp. ussada] rubbing the limbs, anointing the body with perfumes
shampooing D i.7, 76; at the latter passage in combn. anicc-dhamma, of the body, meaning "erosion, decay", and
combd. with parimaddana abrasion (see about detail of meaning Dial. i.87); thus in same formula at M i. 500; S iv.83; J
i.146 & passim; A i.62; ii.70 (+ nahpana); iv.54, 386; It 111;
Th 2, 89 (nahpan); Miln 241 (parimaddana) 315 (+ nahpana); DA i.88.
Ucchepaka (nt.) [= ucchihaka in sense of ucchiha-bhatta] leavings of food M ii.7 (v. l. uccepaka with cc for cch as ucciha:
ucchiha). The passage is to be read ucchepake va te rat.
A diff. connotation would be implied by taking ucchepaka =
uch, as Neumann does (Majjhima trsl.2 ii.682).
Uju & Ujju (adj.) [Vedic ju, also jyati, irajyate to stretch out:
cp. Gr. to stretch; Lat. rego to govern; Goth. ufrakjan
to straighten up; Ohg. recchen = Ger. recken = E. reach; Oir.
rn span. See also P. ajjava] straight, direct; straightforward,
honest, upright D iii.150 T. ujja), 352 (do.) 422, 550; Vv 187
(= sabba jimha vanka kuilabhv pagama hetutya u. VvA 96); Pug 59; Vbh 244 (uju kya paidhya);
Vism 219 (uju avanka akuila); DA i.210 (id.), KhA 236; DhA
i.288 (citta uju akuila nibbisevana karoti); VvA 281
(koi vanka); PvA 123 (an).
Ucchdeti [fr. ut + sd, see ucchdana] to rub the body with perfumes J vi.298; Miln 241 (+ parimaddati nahpeti); DA i.88.
Ucchiha [pp. of ud + i] left, left over, rejected, thrown out; impure, vile Vin ii.115 (odaka); iv.266 (id.); J ii.83 (bhatta
ucchiha akatv), 126 (nad impure; also itthi outcast), 363;
iv.386 ( pia), 388; vi.508; Miln 315; DhA i.52; ii.85;
145
Uchati
-angin (ujjangin) having straight limbs, neg. an not having straight limbs, i. e. pliable, skilful, nimble, graceful J
v.40 (= kacana sannibha sarra C.); vi.500 (T. anuccangin = anindita agarahitangin C.). -gata walking straight,
of upright life M i.46; A iii.285 sq. (citta); v.290 sq.; Sn
350 (ujju), 477 (id.); Dh 108 (ujju, see DhA ii.234 for interpretation). -gmin, neg. an going crooked, a snake J
iv.330. -cittat straightness, unwieldiness of heart Vbh 350.
-dihit the fact of having a straightforward view or theory (of
life) Miln 257. -paipanna living uprightly D i.192; S iv.304;
v.343; Vism 219. -magga the straight road D i.235; Vin
v.149; It 104; J i.344; vi.252; DhA ii.192. -bhva straightness, uprightness SnA 292, 317; PvA 51. -bhta straight,
upright S i.100, 170; ii.279; v.384, 404; A ii.57; iv.292; J
i.94; v.293 (an); Vv 3423 (see VvA 155); Pv i.1010 (= citta
jimha vankaKutla bhva karna kilesna abhvena ujubhvappatta PvA 51). -vasa straight lineage,
direct descendency J v.251. -vta a soft wind Miln 283.
-vipaccanka in direct opposition D i.1; M i.402; DA i.38.
Ujuka & Ujjuka (adj.) [uju + ka] straight, direct, upright M i.124;
S i.33 (ujuko so maggo, the road to Nibbna), 260 (citta);
iv.298; v.143, 165; J i.163; v.297 (opp. khujja); DhA i.18
(magga); Sdhp 321.
-anujjuka crooked, not straight S
iv.299; J iii.318.
Ujjala (adj.) [ud + jval, see jalati] blazing, flashing; bright, beautiful J i.220; Dvs ii.63.
Ujjalati [ud + jalati, jval] to blaze up, shine forth Vin i.31; VvA
161 (+ jotati). Caus. ujjleti to make shine, to kindle Vin
i.31; Miln 259; Vism 428; ThA 69 (Ap. v.14, read dp
ujjlayi); VvA 51 (padpa).
Ucha & Uch (f.) [Sk. ucha & uchana, to uch. Neu-mann's
etym. uch = E. ounce, Ger. unze (Majjhima trsl.2 ii.682) is
incorrect, see Walde Lat. Wtb. under uncia] anything gathered for sustenance, gleaning S ii. 281; A i.36; iii.66 sq., 104;
Vin iii.87; Sn 977; Th 2, 329, 349; J iii.389; iv.23, 28, 434,
471 (ya, dat. = phalphal atthya C.); ThA 235, 242. Cp.
samuchaka.
-cariy wandering for, or on search for gleaning, J ii.272;
iii.37, 515; v.3; DA i.270; VvA 103; ThA 208. -crika
(adj.) going about after gleanings, one of 8 kinds of tpas
SnA 295 (cp. DA i.270, 271). -patta the gleaning bowl, in
phrase uchpattgate rato "fond of that which has come into
the gl. b." Th 1, 155 = Pv iv.73 (= uchena bhikkhcrena laddhe pattagate hre rato PvA 265; trsld. in Psalms of Brethren
"contented with whatever fills the bowl"). at, marked off
as discarded (goods) S ii.281, so S A.
Uchati
Ueti
Utabba (adj.) [grd. fr. ava + j (?)] to be despised, contemptible, only in stock phrase "daharo na utabbo na
paribhotabbo" S i.69; Sn p. 93; SnA 424 (= na avajnitabbo,
na nca katv jnitabbo ti). In same connection at J v.63 m
na daharo [ti] usi (v. l. masi) apucchitvna (v. l. ).
Uepeti in phrase kke u. "to scare crows away" (or to catch them
in snares?) at Vin i.79. Reading doubtful & should probably
be read uepeti (? Caus. of ueti = oeti, or of ueti to
make fly away). The vv. ll. given to this passage are ueceti,
upahpeti, uoyeti. See also uepaka.
Uhahati & Uhti [ud + sth see tihati & uttihati] to rise,
stand up, get up, to arise, to be produced, to rouse or exert
oneself, to be active, pres. uhahati Pug 51. pot. uhaheyya S i.217; as imper. uttihe Dh 168 (expld. by uttihitv
paresa gharadvre hatv DhA iii.165, cp. Vin Texts i.152).
imper. 2nd pl. uhahatha Sn 331; 2nd sg. uhehi Pv ii.61 ;
J iv.433. ppr. uhahanto M i.86; S i.217; J i.476.
aor. uhahi J i.117; PvA 75. ger. uhahitv PvA 4, 43,
55, 152, & uhya Sn 401. inf. uhtu J i.187.
Note. When uh follows a word ending in a vowel, and without a pause in the sense, a v is generally prefixed for euphony,
e. g. gabbho vuhsi an embryo was produced or arose Vin
ii.278; san vuhya arising from his seat, Vism 126. See
also under vuhahati. pp. uhita; Caus. uhpeti.
Cp. pariyuhti.
Uhna (nt.) [fr. ut + h] 1. rising, rise, getting up, standing (opp. sayana & nisdana lying or sitting down) D ii.134
(sha seyya kappesi uhna saa manasikaritv);
Dh 280 (kla); J i.392 (an seyy a bed from which one
cannot get up); Vism 73 (aru uhnavel time of sunrise)
DhA i.17. 2. rise, origin, occasion or oppertunity for; as
adj. () producing J i.47 (kapp); vi.459; Miln 326 (dha
khetta atthi). 3. "rousing", exertion, energy, zeal, activity, manly vigour, industry, often syn. with viriya M i.86; A
i.94; ii.135 (phala); iii.45 (viriya), 311; iv.281 (sampad);
It 66 (adhigata dhana earned by industry); Pv iv.324 ; Pug
51 (phala); Miln 344, 416; ThA 267 (viriya); PvA 129 (+
147
Ueti
Utun
Ueti2 [see discussion under ueti1 ] (a) to bind up, tie up to,
string up Vin ii.131 (so read for uitv, v. l. uhetv). (b)
to throw away, reject PvA 256 (+ chaaymi gloss). pp.
uita.
Uhsa [Sk. ua] a turban D i.7; ii.19 = iii.145 (ssa cp. Dial.
ii.16); J ii.88; Miln 330; DA i.89; DhsA 198.
Ut(t)aa see uddaa.
Utu (m. & nt.) [Vedic tu special or proper time, with adj. ta
straight, right, rite, ti manner to Lat. ars "art", Gr. (),
further Lat. rtus (rite), Ags. rm number; of *ar to fit in,
adjust etc. q. v. under appeti] 1. (lit.) (a) (good or
proper) time, season: arua utu occasion or time of the sun(
rise) DhA i.165; utu gahti to watch for the right time
(in horoscopic practice), to prognosticate ibid. sarra utu
gahpeti "to cause the body to take season", i. e. to refresh
the body by cool, sleep, washing etc. J iii.527; DA i.252.
(b) yearly change, time of the year, season Vism 128. There
are usually three seasons mentioned, viz. the hot, rainy and
wintry season or gimha, vassa & hemanta A iv.138; SnA
317. Six seasons (in connection with nakkhatta) at J v.330 &
vi.524. Often utu is to be understood, as in hemantikena (scil.
utun) in the wintry season S v.51. (c) the menses SnA 317;
J v.330 (utusintya read utusi nhtya; utusi loc., as expld.
by C. pupphe uppanne utumhi nahtya). 2. (applied in a
philosophical sense: one of the five fold cosmic order, physical change, physical law of causation (opp. kamma), physical
order: see Asl. 272 f.; Dialogues, II, 8, n.; Kvu trsln. 207; cp.
Mrs. Rh. D. Buddhism, p. 119 f., Cpd. 161, Dhs trsln. introd. xvii; & cp. cpds. So in connection with kamma at Vism
451, 614; J vi.105 (kamma paccayena utun samuhit Verara); perhaps also at Miln 410 (megha ututo samuhahitv).
-hra physical nutriment (cp. Dhs trsln. 174) PvA 148.
-pasevan seasonable activity, pursuit (of activities) according to the seasons, observance of the seasons Sn 249 (= gimhe
tapa hna sevan vasse rukkha mla sevan
hemante jalappavesa sevan SnA 291). -kla seasonable, favourable time (of the year) Vin i.299; ii.173. -ja
produced by the seasons or by physical change Miln 268
(kamma, hetu, utu); Vism 451. -nibbatta coming to existence through physical causes Miln 268. -pama measure
of the season, i. e. the exact season Vin i.95. -parima
change (adversity) of the season (as cause of disease) S iv.230;
A ii.87; iii.131; v.110; Miln 112, 304; Vism 31. -parissaya
danger or risk of the seasons A iii.388. -pubba festival on
the eve of each of the (6) seasons J vi.524. -vra time of the
season, vrena vrena according to the turn of the season J
i.58. -vikra change of season Vism 262. -veraman abstinence during the time of menstruaion Sn 291 (cp. SnA 317).
-savacchara the year or cycle of the seasons, pl. the seasons D iii.85 = A ii.75; S v.442. The phrase utusavaccharni
at Pv ii.955 is by Dhammapla taken as a bahuvrhi cpd., viz.
cycles of seasons & of years, i. e. vasanta gimh dike bah
ut ca citta savacchar adi bahni savaccharni ca PvA
135. Similarly at J v.330 (with Cy). -sappya suitable to the
season, seasonable DhA 327. -samaya time of the menses
SnA 317.
Uhatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. uha] hot state, heat Vism 171.
148
Utun
Uttarya
ating woman Vin iii.18; iv.303; S iv.239; A iii. 221, 229; Miln
127. an A iii.221, 226.
J i.364; DhA ii.60; iv.4. -oha the upper lip (opp. adhar) J
ii.420; iii.26; iv. 184. -chada a cover, coverlet, awning (sa a
carpet with awnings or canopy above it) D i.7; A i.181; iii.50.
-chadana = chada D ii.187; DhA i.87. -dvra the northern gate J vi.364. -dhamma the higher norm of the world
(lok), higher righteousness D ii.188 (paividdha lok uttara
dhammatya uttama bhva patta). -psaka the (upper) lintel (of a door) Vin ii.120 = 148. -pubba north
eastern J vi.518. -sse (v. l. suve) on the day after tomorrow
A i.240.
Utta [pp. of vac, Sk. ukta; for which the usual form is vutta only
as dur speaking badly or spoken of badly, i. e. of bad repute
A ii.117, 143; iii.163; Kh viii.2; KhA 218.
Uttala (adj.) [ud + taula] "grainy", i. e. having too many
rice grains (of rice gruel), too thick or solid (opp. atikilinna
too thin or liquid) J i.340; iii.383 (id.); iv.44 (id.).
Uttatta [ud + tatta1 , pp. of ud + tap, Sk. uttapta] heated; of metals: molten, refined; shining, splendid, pure J vi. 574 (hema
uttatta aggin); Vv 8417 ; Pv iii.32 (rpa, so read for uggata,
reading correct at PvA 188 sing); PvA 10 (kanaka, T. uggatta); Mhbv 25 (id.).
Uttaraa (nt.) [fr. uttarati] bringing or moving out, saving, delivery Th 1, 418; J i.195. In BSk. uttaraa only in sense of
crossing, overcoming, e. g. Jtm 31 8 (setu). Cp. uttara.
149
Uttarya
Ud
150
Ud
Udangaa
of w. S v.400; A ii.55 = iii.337; VvA 155. -pama resembling water, like water A iv.11 (puggala). -oghana plunging
into water J iii.235. -ogha a water flood VvA 48. -orohaka
descending into water, bathing; N. of a class of ascetics, lit.
"bather" M i.281; S iv.312; A v. 263. -orohaa plunging
into water, taking a bath, bathing D i.167; S i.182; A i.296;
ii.206; J iv.299; Pug 55. -kalaha the "water dispute" DhA
iii.256. -kka a water crow J ii.441. -kicca libation of
water, lit. water performance; cleansing, washing D ii.15.
-k sporting in the w. J vi.420. -gahaasaka bathing
gown J v.477. -ghaa a water pitcher PvA 66. -ci a water
jar DhA i.52. -hna a stand for water Vin ii.120. -tumba
a water vessel J ii.441; DA i.202; DhA ii.193. -telaka an oily
preparation mixed with water Vin ii.107. -dantapoa water
for rinsing the mouth & tooth cleaner Vin iii.51; iv.90, 92,
233; J iv.69. -daha a lake (of water) D i.45. -doik a
water tub or trough Vin ii.220. -dhr a shower of water
Ps i.125; J iv.351. -niddhamana a water spout or drain Vin
ii.120, 123; DhA ii.37. -nibbhana an aquaduct Miln 295.
-paiggaha receiving or accepting water Vin ii.213. -patta
a waterbowl Vin ii. 107; D i.80; S iii.105. -puchan a
towel Vin ii.122. -posita fed or nourished by water VvA 173.
-phusita a drop of water S ii.135. -bindu a drop of w. It
84 (v. l. for udabindu); PvA 99. -bubbula a w. bubble A
iv.137; Vism 109, 479 (in comp.). -bhasta devoid of water
ThA 212 (for anodaka Th 2, 265). -maika a water pot
Vin i.227; M i.354; A iii.27; Miln 28; DhA i.79. -mallaka a
cup for w. A i.250. -rakkhasa a water sprite DhA iii.74.
-rahada a lake (of w.) D i.74, 84; A i.9; ii.105; iii.25; Sn
467; Pug 47. -rha a water plant Vv 356 . -lekh writing
on w. A i.283 = Pug 32 (in simile pama like writing on w.;
cp. Pug A 215). -vra "waterturn", i. e. fetching water DhA
i.49. -vraka bucket S ii.118. -vha a flow of water, flowing
w. J vi.162. -vhaka rise or swelling (lit. carrying or pulling
along (of water), overflowing, flood A i.178. -vhana pulling
up water Vin ii.122 (rajju). -sadda sound of water Dhs 621.
-sarvaka a saucer for w. Vin ii.120. -saka = sik J
ii.13. -sik "water cloak", a bathing mantle Vin i.
292; ii.272; iv.279 (= yya nivatth nhyati C.); DhA ii.61 (T.
saka). -suddhika ablution with water (after passing urine)
Vin iv.262 (= mutta karaassa dhovan C.).
Uda1 (indecl.) [Sk. uta & u, with Lat. aut (or), Gr. (again),
(but, or), Goth. auk = Ger. auch to pron. base ava
yonder, cp. ava ii.] disjunctive part. "or"; either singly, as
at Sn 455, 955, 1090; J v.478 (v. l. udhu); Nd1 445 (expld.
as "padasandhi" with same formula as iti, q. v.); Pv ii.1216
(kyena uda cetas); or combd. with other synonymous particles, as uda v at Sn 193, 842, 1075; It 82 = 117 (cara v yadi
v tiha nisinno uda v saya walking or standing, sitting
or lying down); KhA 191. See also udhu.
Uda2 () [Vedic udan (nt.), also later uda (but only ), commonly udaka, q. v.] water, wave. In cpds. sometimes the
older form udan is preserved (like udajala, udaavant), but
generally it has been substituted by the later uda (see under udakaccha, udakanti, udakumbha, udapatta, udapna, udabindu).
Udangaa
Udyati
rd
Udariya (nt.) [fr. udara] the stomach Kh iii. (cp. KhA 57); Vism
258, 358. Cp sodariya.
Udapatta1 [da for ud, and patta, pp. of pat, for patita? Kern,
Toev. s. v. takes it as udak prpta, risen, flying up, sprung
up J iii.484 (= uppatita C.); v.71 (= uhita C.).
Udapna [uda + pna lit. "(place for) drinking water"; cp. opna,
which in the incorrect opinion of Pli Commentators represents a contracted udapna] a well, a cistern Vin i.139; ii.122;
M i.80; A iv.171; J iii.216; Ud 78; Pv ii.78 ; ii.925 ; Miln 411;
Vism 244 (in simile); DA i.298; VvA 40; PvA 78.
152
Udyati
Uddalom
Udita2 [pp. of vad, see vadati] spoken, proclaimed, uttered Vuttodaya 2 (quoted by Childers in Khuddaka ptha ed. 1869,
p. 22).
Udra (adj.) [Sk. udra, of which the usual P. form is ulra (q.
v.). Cp. BSk. audra & audrika.] raised, sublime, noble,
excellent Dvs iii.4 (samussit odra sittapatta); DA
i.50 (issariya); Sdhp 429, 591.
Udvatta [pp. of udvattate, ud + vattati] retired, desisting J
v.158 (= udvattitva nivattitva C).
Udu (adj.) [= *tu? cp. utu & uju] straight, upright, in mano
straight minded D iii.167, 168 (= uju in v. l. and expln. by
C.).
Udsna (adj.) [ud + sna, pp. of s to sit; lit. sit apart, be indifferent] indifferent, passive, neutral DhsA 129.
Udhaa [pp of udharati] uttered, spoken; called, quoted Pug 41.
Udi (or ud) is artificial adj. formn. fr. udeti, meaning "rising, excelling", in expln. of ekodi at Vism 156 (udayat ti udi uhapet
ti attho).
Udda1 [Vedic udra, to uda2 water, lit. living in water; Cp. Gr.
"hydra"; Ohg. ottar = Ags. otor = E. otter; Lith. dra
= Obulg. vydra otter] an aquatic animal, the otter (?) Childers
s. v. doubts the identity of this creature with the regular otter,
since it lives in the jungle. Is it a beaver Vin i.186 (camma
otter skin, used for sandals); Cp. i.102 (pota); J iii.51 sq.,
335. The names of two otters at J iii.333 are Gambhra crin
and Anutra crin.
Udikkhitar [n. ag. of udikkhati] one who looks for or after D iii
167.
Udicca (adj.) [apparently an adjectivised ger. of udeti but distorted from & in meaning = Sk. udac, f. udc northern, the
north] "rising", used in a geographical sense of the N. W. country, i. e. north westerly, of north western origin (cp.
Brethren 79, Miln trsln. ii.45 n. 1) J i.140, 324, 343, 373; Miln
236. See also uddiya.
153
Uddalom
Uddehaka
udcna?]. See udicca & cp. Morris in J.P.T.S. 1889, 202, and
last not least Lders in K. Z. 1920 (vol. 49), 233 sq. The word
is not sufficiently cleared up yet.
Uddesa [fr. uddisati] 1. pointing out, setting forth, proposition, exposition, indication, programme M iii.223 (u. uddiha), 239; S iv.299; SnA 422. 2. explanation S v.110 sq.;
sa-uddesa (adj.) with (the necessary) expln. , point by point,
in detail, D i.13, 81; iii.111; A iii.418; It 99; Nd2 6171 .
3. samauddesa one marked as a Samaa, a novice (cp. smaera) D i.151; M iii.128; A iv.343; uddesa bhatta special
or specified food Vin i.58 = 96, cp. ii.175, propounding, recitation, repetition Vin i.50 = ii.228 (uddesena paripucchya ovdena by recitation, questioning & advice); ii.219 ( dadti to
hold a recitation + paripuccha d); A iv.114 (+ paripucch);
v.50 sq. (paho, u. veyykaraa); Nd2 3852 (+ paripucch);
J i.116; Miln 257 (+paripucch). ek'uddesa a single repetition
Vin iii.47; A iii.67, 180; Miln 10, 18.
Uddleti [ud + dleti, Caus. of dal, see dalati] to tear out or off
Vin iv.170; S iv.178.
Uddesika (adj. nt.) [fr. uddesa] 1. indicating, referring to, respecting, defining; (nt.) indication, definition D ii. 100 (mam
bhikkhusangho); Miln 159 (id.); KhA 29. Esp. as
in phrase aha-vass' uddesika kla the time referring to
(or indicating) the 8th year, i. e. at the age of 8 PvA 67;
soasa-vass M i.88; J i.456; VvA 259. In the same application padesika (q. v.). 2. memorial J iv.228 (cetiya).
Uddehaka (adj.) [fr. ud + dih, see deha] "bubbling up", only adv.
154
Uddehaka
Uddhamma
Uddosita [Derivation uncertain. Cp. Mller P. Gr. 42] shed, stable (?) Vin i.140; ii.278; iii.200; iv.223.
155
Uddhamma
Unnangala
Uddhra (& ubbhra in Vin.; e. g. ii.255, cp. 256 where ubbhata unterchanges with uddhra) [fr. uddharati1 ] 1. taking
away, withdrawal, suspension, in kahin (q. v.) Vin i.255
sq.; iii.262; iv.287; v.177 sq. 2. a tax, levy, debt, in phrase
sodheti (so read for sdheti loc. cit.) to clear up a debt J
ii.341; iii.106; iv.45, 247. uddhra-sodhana (v. l. sdh) the
clearance of a debt J ii.341. 3. synopsis or abstract Dpvs
v.37 (atth of the meaning of the Vin.); SnA 237 (atth + pad).
Unnangala
Upakaakin
J i.228; ii.296, 367; iii. 129, 414; iv.355; vi.328; DhA iii.10.
Upakaha (adj.) [pp. of upa + kar to draw up or near to] approaehing, near J iv.213 (yva upakaha majjhantik till
nearly noon). Usually in foll. two phrases: upakahe kle
when the time was near, i. e. at the approach of meal time Vin
iv.175; VvA 6, 294; and upakahya vasspanyikya as
Lent was approaching Vin i.253; PvA 42; VvA 44. Cp. vpakaha. loc. upakahe as adv. or prep. "near, in the
neighbourhood of" Nd2 639 (= santike); Dvs v.41 (so read
for upakahe).
Upakaakin
Upakkhalati
Upakkama [fr. upa + kram] (1) lit. (a) going to, nearing, approach () VvA 72. (b) attack Vin ii.195; Miln 157; DA
i.69, 71. (2) applied (a) in general: doing, acting, undertaking, act S i.152 = Sn p. 126. (b) in special: ways, means,
i. e. either good of helpful means, expedient, remedy Sn 575;
Miln 151, 152; or bad or unfair means, treachery, plotting Th
1, 143; J iv.115 (punishment); Miln 135, 176.
Upakkamati [upa + kamati of kram] to go on to, i e. (1) to attack
M i.86 = Ud 71. (2) to undertake Vin iii.110, 111. (3) to
begin Vin iv.316; DA i.318.
Upakra [fr. upa + k, cp. upakaraa] service, help, benefit, obligation, favour D iii.187 sq.; VvA 68; PvA 8, 18 (ya hoti is
good for); Sdhp 283, 447, 530. bahpakra (adj.) of great
help, very serviceable or helpful S iv.295; PvA 114. upakra
karoti to do a favour, to oblige PvA 42, 88, 159 (kata); katpakra one to whom a service has been rendered PvA 116.
-vaha useful, serviceable, doing good PvA 86.
Upakkilesa [fr. upa + kli] anything that spoils or obstructs, a minor stain, impurity, defilement, depravity, Vin ii.295 (cp. SnA
487 & VvA 134 & see abbha); M i.36, 91; D iii.42 sq., 49 sq.,
201; S v.92 sq. (paca cittassa upakkiles), 108, 115; A i.10
(gantuka), 207 (cittassa), 253 (orika etc.); ii.53 (candima
suriyna samaa brhmana), 67; iii.16 (jtarpassa,
cittassa), 386 sq.; iv.177 (vigat); v.195; Ps i.164 (eighteen);
Pug 60; Dhs 1059, 1136; Nett 86 sq., 94, 114 sq.; Sdhp 216,
225 (as upaklesa). Ten stains at Vism 633.
Upakkhalati
Upaccag
A iii.101; J iii.433.
Upacaya [fr. upa + ci, cp. caya & caya] heaping up, gathering,
accumulation, heap. As t.t. with ref. to kamma "conservation", with ref. to body & form "integration". (See discussion
& defin. at Cpd. 253; Dhs trsl. 195). D i.76 (= odana
= kumms pacayo, see under kya); Dhs 582, 642 (rpassa
u. = yatanna cayo), 864; Vbh 147, 151 sq.; Kvu 520;
Nett 113; Vism 449; DA i.220; PvA 198 (but v. l. paccayassa
preferable).
Upacita [pp. of upacinti] 1. heaped up, accumulated, collected, produced (usually of pua merit, & kamma karma)
Sn 697; KhA 132; SnA 492; VvA 7, 271, 342; PvA 30, 150.
2. built up, conserved (of the body) Miln 232; DA i.220.
Upaccag [upa + ati + ag of gam] 3rd sg. pret. of up- tigacchati (q. v.) to escape, pass, go by; to overcome Sn 333 (m
Upaccag
Upahita
Upaccati (?) in phrase "akkhni upaccisu" at J vi.187 is probably faulty for apaciyisu aor. of apaciyyati, Pass. of apacinti
(cp. upaciyyati > upacinti) "the eyes failed", lost power, went
bad; cp. apacaya falling off, diminution. If not this reading we
should suggest upacchijjisu from upacchindati "were destroyed", which however is not quite the sense wanted.
Upacchindati [upa + chindati] to break up or off, to destroy, interrupt, to stop Sn 972 (pot. chinde); J iv. 127; Nd1 502; ThA
267; PvA 31 (kulavaso upacchijji aor. pass.); Vism 164, 676
(bhavanga).
Upahita
Upaheti [Caus. of upahahati] to make serve or attend; sakkacca u. (with acc.) to bestow respect (upon) Vin iv.275.
fut. essati Vin iv.291. to place, fix (parimukha sati upahapetv) Vibh. 244.
Upatihati [upa + sth, cp. upahahati, hti etc.] lit. "to stand
by", to look after, to worship Pv iii.118 ; J ii.73 (dicca =
namassamno tihati C.); Miln 231 (ger. tihitv); J v.173
(tihate). pp. upahita (q. v.).
Upatthambhaka (adj. nt.) [fr. upatthambha) holding up, supporting, sustaining DhsA 153.
Upanikkhipati
Upadhna (adj. nt.) [fr. upa + dh, cp. upadahati] "putting under", i. e. (1) a pillow, cushion D i.7; S ii.267 = Miln 366
(kaingar); S iii.145; A i.137, 181; iii.50, J iv.201; v.506
(tamb = ratt C.); (2) imposing, giving, causing Dh 291
dukkh).
Upanayana (nt.) [fr. upa + ni; cp. naya & nayana] tt. for the
minor premiss, subsumption (see Kvu trsl. 11) Miln 154; Nett
63; DhsA 329 (so read with v. l. for najana).
Upadhi [fr. upa + dh, cp. upadahati & BSk. upadhi Divy
50, 224, 534] 1. putting down or under, foundation, basis,
ground, substratum (of rebirth) S i.117, 124, 134, 186; A ii.24
(sankhaya); iii.382 (id.); iv.150 (kkhaya); It 21, 69; Sn 364,
728 (upadh nidn dukkha = vaa dukkha SnA 505),
789, 992; Nd1 27, 141; Nd2 157; Vbh 338; Nett 29; DhA iv.33.
(2) clinging to rebirth (as impeding spiritual progress), attachment (almost syn. with kilesa or tah, cp. nirupadhi &
anupadhi); S A. = pacakkhandh, S ii.108. At M i 162 (cp. Sn
33 = S i.6 = i.107) wife and children, flocks and herds, silver
and gold are called upadhayo. upadhi is the root of sorrow
ib. 454; S ii.108; Sn 728 = 1051 = Th i.152 and the rejection
of all upadhis is Nibbna D ii.36. (cp. S i.136; iii.133; v.226;
A i.80; M i.107 = ii.93; Vin i.5, 36 = J i.83 = Mvst ii.444;
It 46, 62); D iii.112 calls that which has upadhi ignoble (=
non Aryan). At S i.117 = Divy 224 upadhi is called a bond
(sago). Cp. opadhika. The upadhis were later systematized into a set of 10, which are given at Nd2 157 as follows:
5 tah upadhis (tah, dihi, kilesa, kamma, duccarita), hr
upadhi, paigh, catasso updinn dhtuyo u. (viz. kma,
dihi, slabbata, attavda; see D iii.230), cha ajjhattikni yatanni u., cha via ky u. Another modified classification see at Brethren p. 398.
Upadhika (Upadhka) (adj.) () [fr. upadhi] having a substratum, showing attachment to rebirth, only in cpds. an free
from clinging Vin i.36; Sn 1057, & nir id. S i.141.
Upadheyya (nt.) [cp.
upatheyya, q. v.).
162
Upanikkhipati
Upaneti
Upanikkhipana (nt.) [fr. nikkhipati] putting down (near somebody), putting in the way, trap Vin iii.77.
Upanikkhepa [fr. upa + nis + kip] "putting near", depositing;
1. appld. to the course of memory, association of ideas Miln
78, 80; cp. nikkhepana S ii.276. 2. deposit, pledge J
vi.192, 193 (= upajta).
Upanighasati [upa + ni + ghasati1 ] to rub up against, to crush
(close) up to DhA i.58.
Upanijjhna (nt.) [upa + nijjhna1 ] meditation, reflection, consideration only in two phrases: rammaa & lakkhaa, with
ref. to jhna J v.251; DhA i.230; iii.276; VvA 38, 213. Cp.
nijjhyana.
Upanisevita [pp. of upanisevati] gone on to, furnished with, sticking or clinging to, full of J v.302 (kakka).
Upanissaya [upa + ni] basis, reliance, support, foundation, assurance, certainty; esp. sufficing condition or qualification for
Arahantship (see long article in Childers s. v.); no 9 in the 24
paccayas, Tikapattha, Tikapahna i.1, a term only found
in the Pahna, the Jtaka & later exegetical literature J i.78,
508; iv.96; vi.70; Nett 80; Vism 19 (gocara), 535 (paccaya);
DhsA 315 (id.); DhA ii.33; VvA 98; PvA 38 (sotpatti phalassa), 55 (sampatti); Sdhp 265, 320.
Upanibandha [upa + ni + bandh] 1. close connection, dependence Vism 19 (gocara). 2. (adj. ) connected with,
dependent on Vism 235 (jvita asssa passsa etc).
Upanibandhati [upa + n) to tie close to, to bind on to, attach M
iii.132; Miln 254, 412. Pass. upanibajjhati to be attached
to Sn 218. pp. nibaddha (q. v.).
163
Upaneti
Upama
ppr. nyamna J i.200; PvA 5. 2. to be brought to conclusion, or to an end (of life) M ii.68; S i.2. 3. to be carried
along or away A i.155. pp. upanta (q. v.). ger. upanya
(q. v.).
Upapattika () (adj.) [fr. upapatti] belonging to a birth or rebirth; in peta born as a Peta PvA 119. Cp. upaptika.
Upabhunjaka (adj.) [fr. next] one who eats or enjoys Vism 555.
Upapanna [pp. of upapajjati] 1. () possessed of, having attained, being furnished with Sn 68 (thma bala), 212, 322,
1077 (a, cp. Nd2 266b and uppanna a). 2. reborn, come to existence in (with acc.) S i.35 (Aviha, expld.
by C. not quite to the point as "nipphattivasena upagata", i.
e. gone to A, on account of their perfection. Should we read
uppanna?) A v.68.
Upabhunjati [upa + bhuj] to enjoy J iii.495; v.350 (inf. bhottu) grd. upabhogga. pp. upabhattu (q. v.).
Upabhutta [pp. of upabhunjati] enjoyed Dvs iii.65.
Upabhoga [fr. upa + bhuj cp. upabhujati] enjoyment, profit Vin
iv.267; J ii.431; iv.219 (v. l. paribhoga); vi. 361; Miln 201,
403; PvA 49, 220 (paribhoga); DhA iv.7 (id.); Sdhp 268, 341,
547.
164
Upama
Uparujjhati
Upari (indecl.) [Vedic upari, der. fr. upa, Idg. *uper(i); Gr. ,
Lat. s uper; Goth. ufar, Ohg. ubir = Ger. ber E. over;
Oir. for] over, above (prep. & prefix) 1. (adv.) on top, above
(opp. adho below) Vin iv.46 (opp. heh); J vi.432; KhA
248 (= uddha; opp. adho); SnA 392 (abtimukho u. gacchati explaining paccuggacchati of Sn 442); PvA 11 (heh
manussa sahna upari skara s), 47 (upari chatta
dhriyamna), 145 (sabbattha upari upon everything). 2.
(prep. w. gen) with ref. either to space = on top of, on, upon,
as in kassa upari spo patissati on whom shall the curse fall?
DhA i 41; attano u. patati falls upon himself PvA 45; etiss
upari kodho anger on her, i. e. against her VvA 68; or to time
= on top of, after, later, as in catunna msna upari after
4 months PvA 52 (= uddha cathi msehi of Pv i.1012 ); sattanna vassa satna upari after 700 years PvA 144. 3.
(adv. in compn. , meaning "upper, higher, on the upper or top
side", or "on top of", if the phrase is in loc. case. See below.
-cara walking in the air, suspended, flying J iii.454.
-psda the upper story of a palace, loc. on the terrace D
i.112 (loc.); PvA 105, 279. -pihi top side, platform Vin
ii 207 (loc). -bhaddaka N. of a tree [either Sk. bhadraka Pinus Deodara, or bhadra Nauclea Cadamba, after Kern, Toev. s.
v.] J vi.269. -bhga the upper part; used in instr., loc or aor.
in sense of "above, over, beyond" J iv.232 (instr.). -bhva
higher state or condition M i.45 (opp. adh). -mukha face
upwards DA i. 228; Pug A 214. -vasana upper garment
PvA 49. -vta higher than the wind, loc. on the wind J
ii.11; or in passe (loc.) on the upper (wind ) side DhA
ii.17. -visla extended on top, i. e. of great width, very wide
J iii.207. -vehsa high in the air (), in ku a lofty or
open air chamber, or a room in the upper story of the Vihra
Vin iv.46 (what the C. means by expln. majjhimassa purisassa
assa gha "not knocking against the head of a middle
(sized) man" is not quite clear). -sacca higher truth PvA 66
(so read for upari sacca).
165
uparudhyate, Pass.
of uparundhati] to be
Uparujjhati
Upavsita
(= vijjhati C.).
Upalitta [pp. of upalimpati] smeared with (), stained, tainted
Th 2, 467 (cp. ThA 284; T. reads apalitta); Pug 56. Usually
neg. an free from taint, undefiled M i.319, 386; Miln 318;
metri causa anpalitta S i.141; ii.284; Sn 211, 392, 468, 790,
845; Dh 353 (cp. DhA iv.7).
Uparopa [upa + ropa, cp. upa 5] "little plant", sapling Vin ii.154.
See also next.
166
Upavsita
Upasammati
samerita).
Upasama [Sk. upaama, upa + am] calm, quiet, appeasement, allaying, assuagement, tranquillizing Vin i 10 = S iv.331 = v.421
(in freq. phrase upasamya abhiya sambodhya nibbnya
savattati; see nibbna iii.7); D i.50; iii.130 sq., 136 sq., 229
(as one of the 4 objects of adhihna, viz. pa sacca cga
upasama); M i. 67; iii.246; S i.30, 34 (slena), 46 citta v
pasama), 48, 55; ii.223, 277; iii.86 (sankhrna... v
pasamo) D ii. 157; S i.158 (see vpasama and sankhra);
(ariya magga dukkh gmina); iv.62, 331; v.65 (avpasama), 179, 234 (gmin), 378 sq.; A i.3 (avpasama), 30,
42; ii.14 (vitakk); iii.325 sq.; v.216, 238 sq.; Sn 257, 724,
735, 737; It 18 (dukkh) 83; Dh 205; Nd1 351; J i.97; Ps i.95;
Miln 170, 248; Vism 197 (nussati); Sdhp 587. Cp. vi (v).
Upasamati [upa + am in trs. meaning for usual sammati in intrs. meaning] to appease, calm, allay, assuage Sn 919; Th 1,
50 (pot. upasame = upasameyya nibbpeyya Nd1 352). pp.
upasanta q. v.).
Upasahra [fr. upa + sa + h] taking hold of, taking up, possession, in devat being seized or possessed by a god Miln
298.
Upasahita (adj.) [pp. of upa + sa + dh] accompanied by, furnished or connected with () D i.152; M i.37, 119 (chand);
S ii.220 (kusal); iv.60 (km), 79 (id.); Sn 341 (rg), 1132
(gira va = vaena upeta Nd2 ); Th 1, 970; J i.6; ii.134,
172; v.361.
Upasankamati [upa + sa + kram, cp. BSk. upasankra-mati Av.
S. i.209] 1. to go up to (with acc.), to approach, come near;
freq. in stock phrase "yena (Pokkharasdissa parivesan) ten
upasankami, upasankamitv paatte sane nisdi ', e. g. Vin
i.270; D i.109; ii.1, and passim. aor. sankami Pv. ii.210 ;
SnA 130, 140; KhA 116; PvA 88; ger. sankamitv SnA 140;
PvA 6, 12, 19, 20, 88; sankamma Sn 166, 418, 460, 980, 986;
inf. sankamitu PvA 79. . 2. to attend on (as a physician),
to treat Miln 169, 233, 353; DA i.7.
167
Upasammati
Uptipanna
J v.81.
Upahacca () [ger. of upahanti] 1. spoiling, impairing, defiling J v.267 (mana) 2. reducing, cutting short; only
in phrase upahacca-parinibbyin "coming to extinction after
reducing the time of rebirths (or after having almost reached
the destruction of life") S v.70, 201 sq.; A i.233 sq.; iv.380;
Pug 17 (upagantv klakiriya yukkhayassa sane hatv ti
attho Pug A 199); Nett 190. The term is not quite clear;
there seems to have existed very early confusion with upapacca > upapajja > uppajja, as indicated by BSk. upapadya
parinirvyin, and by remarks of C. on Kvu 268, as quoted
at Kvu trsln. 158, 159.
Upasavyna (nt.?) [?] "a robe worn over the left shoulder"
(Hardy, Index to ed.) VvA 166 (v. l. upavasavya).
Upasisaka (adj.). [fr. upa + sisati = as, cp. sisaka]
striving after, longing or wishing for Miln 393 (hr; Morris
J P T S. 1884, 75 proposes reading upasinghaka).
Upasinghaka (adj.) [fr. upa + singh] sniffing after J ii. 339;
iii.144; Miln 393 (? see upasisaka).
Upasinghati [upa + singh] 1. to sniff at S i.204 (pa-duma);
i.455; J ii.339, 408; vi.336. 2. to sniff up Vin i.279.
Caus. yati to touch gently KhA 136. Caus. II. apeti to touch
lightly, to stroke J iv.407.
Upasevan (f.) [abstr. fr. upasevati] serving, pursuing, following, service, honouring, pursuit S iii.53 = Nd1 25 = Nd2 570
(nand pleasure seeking); It 68 (bl & dhr); Sn 249 (utu
observance of the seasons); Miln 351.
Upassaya [fr. upa + ri, cp. assaya & missaya] abode, resting home, dwelling, asylum S i.32, 33; Vv 684 ; Miln 160.
Esp. freq. as bhikkhuni or bhikkhun a nunnery Vin ii.259;
iv.265, 292; S ii.215; J i.147, 428; Miln 124.
Upassuti (f.) [fr. upa + ru] listening to, attention S ii. 75; iv.91;
J v.100; Miln 92.
168
Uptipanna
Updiyati
Updi [the compn. from of updna, derived fr. upd in analogy to nouns in a & which change their a to i in compn. with
k & bh; otherwise a n. formation fr. d analogous to dhi
fr. dh in upadhi] = updna, but in more concrete meaning of
"stuff of life", substratum of being, khandha; only in combn.
with sesa (adj.) having some fuel of life (= khandhas or substratum) left, i. e. still dependent (on existence), not free, materially determined S v.129, 181; A iii.143; It 40; Vism 509.
More frequently neg. an-updi-sesa (nibbna, nibbnadhtu
or parinibbna, cp. similarly BSk. anupdi vimukti M
Vastu i.69) completely emancipated, free, without any (material) substratum Vin ii.239 (nibbna dhtu); D iii.135; M
i.148 (parinibbna); A ii.120; iv.75 sq., 202, 313; J i.28, 55;
Sn 876; It 39, 121 (nibbna dhtu); Ps. i.101; Vism 509;
DhA iv.108 (nibbna); VvA 164, 165. Opp. saupdisesa A
iv.75 sq., 378 sq.; Sn 354 (opp. nibbyi); Vism 509; Nett 92.
See further ref. under nibbna & parinibbna.
Updia [for dinna with substitution of for nn owing to
wrong derivation as pp. from diyati2 instead of diyati1 ]
grasped at, laid hold of; or "the issue of grasping", i. e. material, derived, secondary (cp. upd), see def. at Dhs trsln. 201,
324. Dhs 585, 877, 1211, 1534; Vbh 2 sq., 326, 433; Vism
349, 451; an Vin iii.113; Dhs 585, 991, 1212, 1535.
Updiaka (adj,) = updia DhsA 311, 315, 378; Vism 398.
Updiyati [upa + + d, see diyati1 ] to take hold of, to grasp,
cling to, show attachment (to the world), cp. updna D ii.292;
M i.56, 67; S ii.14; iii.73, 94, 135; iv. 168 (na kici loke u.
= parinibbyati); Sn 752, 1103, 1104; Nd1 444 (= deti); Nd2
164. ppr. updiya S iv. 24 = 65 (an); ppr. med. updiyamna S iii.73; SnA 409, & updiyna (diyno) Sn
169
Updiyati
Upya [fr. upa + i, cp. upaya] approach; fig. way, means, expedient, stratagem S iii.53 sq., 58; D iii.220 (kosalla); Sn 321
(); J i.256; Nd2 570 (for upaya); PvA 20, 31, 39, 45, 104,
161; Sdhp 10, 12. 350, 385. Cases adverbially; instr. upyena by artifice or means of a trick PvA 93; yena kenaci u.
PvA 113. abl. upyaso by some means, somehow J iii.443;
v.401 (= upyena C.). anupya wrong means J i.256; Sdhp
405; without going near, without having a propensity for S
i.181; M iii.25.
-kusala clever in resource J i.98; Nett 20; SnA 274.
Upyana (nt.) [fr. upa + i, cp. upya] going to (in special sense),
enterprise, offering, tribute, present J v.347; vi. 327; Miln 155,
171, 241; Sdhp 616, 619.
Upysa [upa + ysa, cp. BSk. upysa Divy 210, 314.] (a kind
of) trouble, turbulence, tribulation, unrest, disturbance, unsettled condition M i.8, 144, 363; iii.237; A i.144, 177, 203 (sa);
ii.123, 203; iii.3, 97, 429; Sn 542; It 89 = A i.147 = M i.460;
J ii.277 (bahula); iv 22 (id.); Pug 30, 36; Vbh 247; Nett 29;
Miln 69; Vism 504 (def.); DA i.121. anupysa peacefulness, composure, serenity, sincerity D iii.159; A iii.429; Ps i
11 sq.
Upraddha [pp. of uprambhati] blamed, reprimanded, reproved
A v 230.
Uprambhati [Sk. uplambhate, upa + + labh] to blame, reprimand, reproach M i.432, 433. pp. upraddha (q. v.).
170
Uppajjanaka
interestedness cp. Vin iii.4; Dhs 165 & Dhs trslnn. 50), 251;
ii.279 (twofold); iii.50, 78, 106, 224 sq., 239, 245 (six upavicras), 252, 282; M i.79, 364; iii 219; S iv.71, 114 sq., v.209
sq. (indriya); A i 42; 81 (sukha), 256 (nimitta); iii.185, 291
(cetovimutti); iv.47 sq., 70 sq., 300, 443; v.301, 360; Sn 67,
73, 972, 1107, (satisasuddha); Nd1 501 = Nd2 166; Ps i.8,
36, 60, 167, 177; Pug 59 (sati); Nett 25, 97 (dhtu), 121 sq.;
Vbh 12, 15 (indriya), 54 (id.), 69, 85 (dhtu), 228, 324, 326
(sambojjhanga), 381 (upavicra); Dhs 150, 153, 165, 262,
556, 1001, 1278, 1582; Vism 134 (sambojjhanga, 5 conditions of), 148 (nubrhan), 160 (def. & tenfold), 317 (bhvan), 319 (brahmavihra), 325 (vihrin), 461; SnA 128;
Sdhp 461.
204, 276; iii.164, 169; D iii. 60, 61, 145, 147; A i.205 sq.
(3 uposathas: goplaka, nigaha, ariya), 208 (dhamm),
211 (devat); iv.248 (ahanga samanngata), 258 sq. (id.),
276, 388 (navah angehi upavuttha); v.83; Sn 153 (pannaraso
u); Vbh 422; Vism 227 (sutta = A i.206 sq.); Sdhp 439; DA
i.139; SnA 199; VvA 71, 109; PvA 66, 201. The hall or
chapel in the monastery in which the Pimokkha is recited
is called uposathagga (Vin iii.66), or gra (Vin i.107;
DhA ii.49). The Up. service is called kamma (Vin i.102;
v.142; J i.232; iii.342, 444; DhA i.205). uposatha karoti to
hold the Up. service (Vin i.107, 175, 177; J i.425). Keeping
the Sabbath (by laymen) is called uposatha upavasati (A
i.142, 144, 205, 208; iv.248; see upavasati), or uposathavsa
vasati (J v.177). The ceremony of a layman taking upon himself the eight slas is called uposatha samdiyati (see sla
& samdiyati); uposatha sla observance of the Up. (VvA
71). The Up. day or Sabbath is also called uposatha divasa
(J iii.52).
Upocita [pp. of upa + ava + ci] heaped up, abounding, comfortable J iv.471.
Uposatha [Vedic upavasatha, the eve of the Soma sacrifice, day
of preparation]. At the time of the rise of Buddhism the word
had come to mean the day preceding four stages of the moon's
waxing and waning, viz. 1st , 8th , 15th , 23d nights of the lunar
month that is to say, a weekly sacred day, a Sabbath. These
days were utilized by the pre Buddhistic reforming communities for the expounding of their views, Vin i.101. The
Buddhists adopted this practice and on the 15th day of the
half month held a chapter of the Order to expound their
dhamma, ib. 102. They also utilized one or other of these
Up. days for the recitation of the Pimokkha (pimokkhuddesa), ibid. On Up. days laymen take upon themselves the
Up. vows, that is to say, the eight Slas, during the day. See
Sla. The day in the middle of the month is called ctudassiko
or paarasiko according as the month is shorter or longer.
The reckoning is not by the month (msa), but by the half
month (pakkha), so the twenty third day is simply aham,
the same as the eighth day. There is an accasional Up. called
smaggi uposatho, "reconciliation Up.", which is held
when a quarrel among the fraternity has been made up, the
gen. confession forming as it were a seal to the reconciliation
(Vin v.123; Mah. 42). Vin i.111, 112, 175, 177; ii.5, 32,
Uppajjanaka
Uppdana
Uppaan (f.) [abstr. fr. ut + pad or unknown etym.] ridiculing, mocking Miln 357; Vism 29; PugA 250 (kath).
Uppana (nt.) [fr. ud + pa] pulling out, uprooting, destroying, skinning J i.454; ii.283; vi.238; Miln 166; PvA 46 (kes);
Sdhp 140 (camm). Cp. sam.
Uppanaka (adj.) [fr. uppana] pulling up, tearing out, uprooting J i.303 (vta); iv.333 (id.).
Uppeti [Sk. utpayati, Caus. uf ud + pa to split, cp. also BSk.
utpayati nidhna to dig out a treasure Av. i.294] to split,
tear asunder; root out, remove, destroy Vin ii.151 (chavi to
skin); M ii.110 (attna); Th 2, 396 (ger. uppiy = petv
ThA 259); J i.281 (bjni); iv.162, 382; vi.109 (= lucati);
Miln 86; DhA iii.206. Caus. upppeti in pp. upppita
caused to be torn off DhA iii.208. See also upphleti.
Uppatati [ud + patati] to fly or rise up into the air; to spring upwards, jump up; 3rd sq. pret. udapatta [Sk. *udapaptat] J
iii.484 (so read for patto, & change si to pi); ger. uppatitv
J iii.484; iv.213; PvA 103, 215; and uppacca (q. v.). pp.
uppatita (q. v.).
Uppatita [pp. of uppatati] jumped up, arisen, come about Sn 1
(= uddhamukha patita gata SnA 4), 591; Dh 222 (= uppanna DhA iii.301); Th 1, 371.
Uppda1 [Sk. utpta, ud + pat] flying up, jump; a sudden & unusual event, portent, omen D i.9 (v. l. uppta) = Vism 30 (T.
uppta, v. l. uppda) Sn 360; J i.374; vi. 475; Miln 178.
Uppatti (f.) [Vedic utpatti, ud + pad] coming forth, product, genesis, origin, rebirth, occasion A ii.133 (pailbhikni sanyojanni); Vbh 137 (bhava), 411; cp. Compendium, 262 f.
(khaa); Miln 127 (divasa); Vism, 571 sq. (bhava, 9 fold:
kma etc.); SnA 46, 159, 241, 254, 312, 445; PvA 144, 215.
On uppatti deva see deva and upapatti. See also ahuppatti,
dnuppatti.
Uppda2 [Sk. utpda, ud + pad] coming into existence, appearance, birth Vin i.185; D i.185; S iii.39 (+ vaya); iv.14; v.30;
A i.152 (+ vaya), 286, 296; ii.248 (tah); iii.123 (citt state
of consciousness); iv.65 (id.); Dh 182, 194; J i.59, 107 (sat);
Vbh 303 (citt), 375 (tah); PvA 10; ThA 282. anuppda
either "not coming into existence" D iii.270, M i.60; A i.286,
296; ii.214, 249: iii.84 sq.; Ps i.59, 66; Dhs 1367; or "not ripe"
D i.12.
172
Uppdana
Ubbijjan
Ubbar (f.) [Sk. urvar, Av. urvara plant] fertile soil, sown field;
fig. woman, wife J vi 473 (= orodha C.).
Ubbasati see ubbisati.
Ubbaha (adj.) () [fr. ud + vh, i. e. to ubbahati1 ] only in
cpd. dur hard to pull out, difficult to remove Th 1, 124, 495
= 1053.
Ubbahati1 [ud + bh or vh, see also uddharati] to pull out, take
away, destroy Sn 583 (udabbahe pot. = ubbaheyya dhreyya
SnA 460); Th 1, 158; J ii.223 (udabbahe = udabbaheyya C.);
iv.462 (ubbahe); vi.587 (= hareyya C.).
173
Ubbijjan
Ubhayattha
Ubbhaita [pp. of ubbhaeti, ud + *bha, cp. bha] bundled up, fixed up, wrapped up, full Vin i.287.
n.
Ubbilvita (according to the very plausible expl given by Morris J P T S. 1887, 137 sq. for uppilpita, pp. of uppilpeti =
uplpeti < uplveti, as expld. under uppilavati, ud + plu; with
ll for l after cases like Sk. lyate > P. allyati, lpa > allpa
etc., and bb for pp as in vanibbaka = Sk. vanpaka (*vanipp)]
happy, elated, buoyant, ltt. frisky; only in cpds. atta rejoicing, exultancy, elation of mind D i.3, 37; J iii 466; Miln 183;
DA i.53, 122; and kra id. DhA i.237. At Vism 158 "cetaso
ubbilvita" stands for ubbilvitatta, with v. l. BB uppilvita. Cp. J v.114 (ubbilvita cittat).
Ubbhata [pp. of uddharati with bbh for ddh as in ubbha for uddha; cp. ubbahati and see also the doublet uddhaa] drawn
out, pulled out, brought out, thrown out or up, withdrawn Vin
i.256 (kahina, cp. uddhra & ubbhra); iii.196 (id.); D i.77 (cp
uddharati); M i.383 (ubbhatehi akkhihi); Dh 34 (okamokata u.
= *okamokata u.); J i.268; PvA 163.
Ubbhava [ud + bhava] birth, origination, production Pgdp 91 (dnassa phal). Cp. BSk. udbhvan Divy 184 (gu) 492 (id.).
Ubbhra = uddhra (suspension, withdrawal, removal) Vin i.255,
300; v.136, 175; cp. Vin Texts i.19; ii.157.
Ubbilla [either a secondary formation fr. ubbilvita, or representing uppilava (uppilva) for upplava, ud + plu, as discussed
under ubbilvita. The BSk. word udvilya Lal. V. 351, 357, or
audvilya Divy 82 is an artificial reconstruction from the Pli,
after the equation of Sk. dvdaa > dial. P. brasa, whereas
the original Sk. dv. is in regular P. represented by dd, as in
dvpa > dpa, *udvpa > uddpa. Mller's construction ubbilla
> *udvela rests on the same grounds, see P. Gr. 12.] elation,
elated state of mind M iii.159; bhva id. DA i.122; Sdhp
167. See next.
Ubhaya (adj.) [*ubha + ya, see ubho] both, twofold Sn 547, 628,
712, 1106, 1107, 801 (ante); Nd1 109 (ante); J i.52; PvA 11,
24, 35, 51. nt. as adv. in combn. with ca c'bhaya following after 2nd. part of comprehension) "and both" for both
and; and also, alike, as well Dh 404 (gahahehi angrehi
c'bhaya with householders and houseless alike); Pv i.69 .
Note. The form ubhayo at Pv ii.310 is to be regarded as fem.
pl. of ubho (= duve PvA 86).
-asa lit. both shoulders or both parts, i. e. completely,
thoroughly, all round () in bhvita thoroughly trained D
i.154 (cp. DA i.312 ubhaya kohsya bhvito).
Ubbedha [ud + vedha of vyadh] height, only as measure, contrasted with yma length, & vitthra width J i.29 (v.219;
asti hatth), 203 (yojana sahass); VvA 33 (yojana),
66 (asti hatth), 158 (hattha sat), 188 (soasa yojan), 221, 339; PvA 113. See also pabbedha.
Ubbedhati [ud + vedhati = Sk. vyathate] to be moved, to shake
(intrs.), quiver, quake J vi.437 (= kampati C.).
Ubbha (& Ubbha) (indecl.) [a doublet of uddha, see uddha
iii.] up, over, above, on top J v.269 (ubbha yojana uggata); in cpds. like ubbhakkhaka above the collar bone
Vin iv.213; ubbhajnumaala above the knee Vin iv.213;
174
Ubhayattha
Uyyutta
Ummi (& Umm) (f.) [for the usual mi, cp. similar double forms
of bhummi > bhmi] a wave Th 1, 681; Miln 346.
Umm (f.) [cp. Sk. um] flax, only in cpd. puppha the (azure)
flower of flax M ii.13 = A v.61 (v. l. damm, ummta); D
ii.260; Th 1, 1068; DhsA 13. Also (m.) N. of a gem Miln 118.
Ummda [ud + mda] madness, distraction, mental aberration S
i.126 ( ppueyya citta vikkhepa v); A ii.80; iii.119;
v.169; Pug 69; PvA 6 (patta frantic, out of mind), 94 (vta),
162 (patta).
175
Uyyutta
Ullulita
i.232.
Ulka [Sk. ulka; cp. Lat. ulucus & ulula owl, ululre to howl,
Ger. uhu; onomat. *ul, as in Gr. , Sk. ululi, Lith.
ulti] an owl Vin i.186 (camma, sandals of owl's skin); iii.34;
A v.289 sq.; J ii.208, 352 (as king of the birds); Miln 403; DhA
i.50 (kka crows & owls).
-pakkha owls' wings (used as dress) Vin i.305; D i.167.
-pakkhika dress of owls' wings, or owl feathers A i.241, 296;
ii.206; Pug 55 (= ulka pattni ganthetv kata nivsana
Pug A 233).
Ura (m. nt.) & Uro (nt.) [Sk. uras] 1. the breast, chest.
Cases after the nt. s. declension are instr. uras Th 1, 27;
Sn 609; & loc. urasi Sn 255; J iii.148; iv. 118, also urasi J
iii.386 (= urasmi C.). Other cases of nt. a stem, e. g. instr. urena J iii.90; PvA 75; loc. ure D i.135; J i.156, 433, 447;
PvA 62 (ure jta; cp. orasa). Vin ii.105 (contrasted with
pihi back); iv.129; J iv.3; v.159, 202; Nd2 659; Pv iv.108 ;
DhA iii.175; DA i.254; DhsA 321; PvA 62, 66. ura deti
(with loc.) to put oneself on to something with one's chest,
fig. to apply oneself to J i.367, 401, 408; iii.139, 455; iv.219;
v.118, 278. 2. (appld. ) the base of a carriage pole Vv 6328
(= smla VvA 269).
-ga going on the chest, creeping, i. e. a snake S i.69; Sn
1, 604; J i.7; iv.330; vi.208; Vv 808 ; Pv i.121 (= urena gacchati ti urago sappass eta adhivacana PvA 63); PvA 61,
67. -cakka an iron wheel (put on the chest), as an instrument
of torture in Niraya J i.363, 414. -cchada "breast cover",
breast plate (for ornament) Vin ii.10; J iv.3; v.215, 409; vi.480;
ThA 253. -tti beating one's breast (as a sign of mourning
& sorrow) M i.86, 136; A ii.188; iii.54, 416; iv.293; PvA 39.
-tthala the breast A ii.174.
Uru (adj.) [cp. Av. ravah space; Gr. wide; Lat. rs free
or wide space, field; Idg. *ru, *uer wide, to which also Goth.
rms space = Ags. rm, E. room, Ger. raum] wide, large; excellent, eminent J v.89; Miln 354; Sdhp 345, 592. pl. ur
sands, soil J v.303.
176
Ullulita
Ussankin
Usu (m. & f) Sk. iu] an arrow Vin iii.106 (loma); D i.9; M i.86;
iii.133; S i.127; A ii.117; iii.162; J iv.416; vi.79, 248, 454;
Miln 331, 339; SnA 466; PvA 155.
-kra an arrow maker, fletcher M ii.105; Dh 80, 145;
Th 1, 29; J ii.275; vi.66; DhA i.288.
Usum (f.) [the diaeretic form of Sk. uman, of which the direct
equivalent is P. usm (q. v.)] heat J i.31 (= uha iii.55), 243;
ii.433; Vism 172 (usuma vai sadisa); DA i.186; DhA
i.225; ii.20.
Usm (f.) [see usum] heat D ii.335, 338; M i.295; S ii. iii.143;
iv.215, 294; v.212; Dhs 964; DA i.310. In combn. with
kata it appears as usm, e. g. at M i 132, 258.
-gata heated, belonging to heat Dhs 964; as tt. one who
mortifies or chastises himself, an ascetic J v.209 (= samaateja
C.; cp. BSk. uagata & umagata Divy 166, 240, 271. 469,
& see Kern's mistakes at Toev. s. v.).
Ussa (adj.) [der. fr. ud = *ud s(y)a, in analogy to oma fr. ava;
but taken by Kern, Toev. s. v. as an abbreviated ussada] superior, higher (opp. oma inferior) A iii.359; Sn 860 (= Nd1 251
with spelling ossa), 954.
177
Ussankin
Ussreti
Ussaya in vdika Vin iv.224 is a variant of usuyya "using envious language, quarrelsome". Another ussaya [fr. ud +
ri, cp. Sk. ucchrita, P. ussita & usspeti] meaning "accumulation" is found in cpd. samussaya only.
Ussajjati [ud + sj, cp. BSk. protsjati Divy 587] to dismiss, set
free, take off, hurl A iv.191.
Ussada [most likely to ud + syad; see ussanna]: this word is beset with difficulties, the phrase satt ussada is applied in all
kinds of meanings, evidently the result of an original application & meaning having become obliterated. satt is taken
as *sapta (seven) as well as *sattva (being), ussada as prominence, protuberance, fulness, arrogance. The meanings may
be tabulated as follows: (1) prominence (cp. Sk. utsedha),
used in characterisation of the Nirayas, as "projecting, prominent hells", ussadaniray (but see also below 4) J i.174; iv.3,
422 (pallanka, v. l. caturassa, with four corners); v.266.
adj. prominent ThA 13 (tej ussadehi ariyamaggadhammehi, or as below 4?). 2. protuberance, bump, swelling
J iv.188; also in phrase sattussada having 7 protuberances, a
qualification of the Mahpurisa D iii.151 (viz. on both hands,
feet, shoulders, and on his back). 3. rubbing in, anointing,
ointment; adj. anointed with (), in candan J iii.139; iv.60;
Th 1, 267; Vv 537 ; DhA i.28; VvA 237. 4. a crowd adj.
full of () in phrase sattussada crowded with (human beings) D i.87 (cp. DA i.245: aneka satta samkia; but in
same sense BSk. sapt- otsada Divy 620, 621); Pv iv.18 (of Niraya = full of beings, expld. by sattehi ussanna uparpari nicita
PvA 221. 5. qualification, characteristic, mark, attribute, in
catussada "having the four qualifications (of a good village)"
J iv.309 (viz. plenty of people, corn, wood and water C.). The
phrase is evidently shaped after D i.87 (under 4). As "preponderant quality, characteristic" we find ussada used at Vism
103 (cf. Asl. 267) in combns. lobh, dos, moh, alobh etc.
(quoted from the "Ussadakittana"), and similarly at VvA 19 in
Dhammapla's definition of manussa (lobh dhi alobh dhi
sahitassa manassa ussannatya manuss), viz. satt manussa
jtik tesu lobh dayo alobh dayo ca ussad. 6.
(metaph.) self elevation, arrogance, conceit, haughtiness
Vin i.3; Sn 515, 624 (an = tah ussada abhvena SnA
467), 783 (expld. by Nd1 72 under formula sattussada; i. e.
showing 7 bad qualities, viz. rga, dosa, moha etc.), 855.
See also ussdana, ussdeti etc.
Ussava [Sk. utsava] feast, making merry, holiday Vin iii. 249; J
i.475; ii.13, 248; VvA 7, 109 (divasa).
Ussahati [ud + sah, cp. BSk. utsaha Jtm 215; utsahetavya Divy
494; utsahana Divy 490; ucchahate for utsahate Av. ii.21]
to be able, to be fit for, to dare, venture Vin i.47, 83; ii.208;
iii.17; D i.135; S iv.308, 310; Miln 242; VvA 100. Caus.
ussheti (see pp. usshita).
Ussda [fr. ussdeti] throwing up on DA i.122.
Ussdana (nt.) [to ussdeti, cp. ussdita] 1. overflowing, piling up, abundance M iii.230 (opp. apasdana). 2. (probably confused with ussraa) tumult, uproar, confusion A iii.91,
92 (v. l. ussraa) = Pug 66 (= hatthiassarathdna c eva
balakyassa ca uccsadda mahsaddo Pug A 249).
Ussdita [fr. ussdeti, BSk. ucchryita Divy 76, 77, 466]. [See
usspita & ussrita under usspeti & ussreti. There exists in
Pli as well as in BSk. a confusion of different roots to express the notion of raising, rising, lifting & unfolding, viz.
s, syad, ri, sad, chad. (See ussada, ucchdana, ussdeti,
usspeti, ussreti)].
Ussdiyati [Pass. med. of ussdeti, cp. ussada 4] to be in abundance, to be over Vin ii.167.
Ussdeti [denom. fr. ussada 1] 1. to dismiss D iii.128 [for
ussreti1 ] 2. to raise, cause to rise up on, haul up, pile
up M i.135; iii.230; A iv.198, 201; Miln 187, 250. Pass.
ussdiyati (q. v.). pp. ussdita (q. v.).
Usspana (nt.) [fr. usspeti] lifting up, raising, erecting, unfolding (of a flag or banner) A iv.41; Nd2 503 (dhamma dhajassa).
Usspita [pp. of usspeti, cp. ussdita] lifted, raised, unfurled
Miln 328 (dhamma dhaja); J ii.219.
Usspeti [Caus. of ud + ri, cp. BSk. ucchrpayati Av. S i.384,
386, 387; ii.2] to lift up, erect, raise, exalt Vin ii.195; A iv.43;
J ii.219; iv.16; v.95 (chatta); PvA 75 (id.); Miln 21; DhA i.3;
iii 118 (kahni). pp. usspita & ussita (q. v.). See also
usseti.
178
Ussreti
na
hand's breadth each time. Then the crease or fold will change
and not tend to wear through), 276; ii.237 (here the reading
ussdeti may be preferred); J i.419; iv.349; v.347. Caus.
II. ussrpeti J ii.290.
Ussva2 [fr. ud + sru] outflow, taint, stain (cp. sava) DhA iv.165
(tah; v. l. ussada, to ussada 6).
Ussha [Sk. utsha & utsaha, see ussahati] strength, power, energy; endeavour, good will M ii.174; S v.440; A i. 147;
ii.93, 195; iii.75, 307; iv.320; v.93 sq.; Miln 323, 329 (dhiti +)
Vism 330; Sdhp 49, 223, 535, 619; SnA 50; DhA iii.394; PvA
31, 106, 166; VvA 32, 48. In exegetical literature often
combd. with the qusi synonym ussohi e. g. at Nd2 s. v.; Dhs
13, 22, 289, 571.
Usshana (f.) [fr. ussahati cp. BSk. utsahana Divy 490] = ussha
Nett 8.
Ussra (adj) [ut + sra] "sun out", the sun being out; i. e. after sunrise or after noon, adverbially in bhatta eating after
mid day, unpunctual meals A iii.260, and seyy sleep after sunrise, sleeping late D iii.184; DhA ii.227. Besides as loc.
adv. ussre the sun having been up (for a long time), i. e. at
evening Vin i 293; iv.77; J ii.286, also in ati ussre too long
after sunrise VvA 65; DhA iii.305.
Ussicati [ud + sic] to bale out, exhaust J i.450, ii.70; iv.16; Miln
261.
Ussota (adj.) [ud + sota] nt. ussota as adv. "up stream" Miln
117.
Usssaka (nt.) [ud + ssa + ka] the head of a bed, a pillow for
the head J i.266; ii.410, 443; iv.154; v.99; vi.32, 37, 56; DhA
i.184 (passe, opp. pda passe).
Ussuka (adj.) [Sk. utsuka, also BSk. e. g. Jtm 3168 ] 1. endeavouring, zealous, eager, active S i.15 (an inactive); A iv.266;
Sn 298. 2. greedy, longing for Dh 199 (an).
na
Eka
hacca2 (indecl.) [ger. of hanati2 = hadati] soiling by defecation, defecating J ii.71 (= vacca katv C.).
haati [Pass. of hanati1 ] to be soiled; to be disturbed aor.
hai Vin i.48; M i.116; aor. also hani M i.243.
hata1 [pp. of ud + h or dh thus for uddhaa as well as uddhata]
1. lifted, risen, raised Vin iii.70; J v.403. 2. taken out,
pulled out, destroyed Th 1, 223 = Nd2 974 ; Th 1, 514; Dh 338
(= ucchinna DhA iv.48). 3. soiled with excrements Vin
ii.222.
hana (nt.) [fr. hanati?] reasoning, consideration, examination Miln 32 ("comprehension" trsl.; as characteristic of manasikra); Vism 142 = DhsA 114 ("prescinding" trsl.; as characteristic of vitakka).
m & mi (f.) [Sk. rmi, fr. Idg. *el (see nibbna i.2);
cp. Gr. io wind, wound; Lat. volvo to roll; Ags.
wylm wave; Ohg. wallan; also Sk. ulva, varutra, valaya, valli,
voti. See details in Walde, Lat. Wtb. under volvo] a wave
M i.460 (bhaya); S iv.157; v.123 (jta); A iii.232 sq. (id.);
Sn 920; J ii.216; iii.262; iv.141; Miln 260 (jta). Note. A
parallel form of m is umm.
E
Eka (adj. num.) [Vedic eka, i. e. e ka to Idg. *oi as in Av.
ava, Gr. one, alone; and also with diff. suffix in Lat.
nus, cp. Gr. (one on the dice), Goth. etc. ains = E.
one] one. Eka follows the pron. declension, i. e. nom. pl. is
eke (e. g. Sn 43, 294, 780 etc.) 1. "one" as number, either
with or without contrast to two or more; often also "single"
opp. to nn various, many (q. v.). Very frequent by itself as
well as with other numerals, ekangula one thumb Mhvs 29, 11;
DhA iii. 127; ekapasse in one quarter DhA ii.52; ekamaccha
a single fish J i.222. In enumeration: eka dve paca dasa DhA
i.24. With other numerals: eka tisa (31) D ii.2; sahi
(61) Vin i.20; navuti (91) DhA i.97; sata (101) DhA ii.14.
Cp. use of "one less" in ekna (see under cpds. & na).
2. (as predicative and adj.) one, by oneself, one only, alone,
180
Eka
Ekanta
Ekanta
Ettaka
Ehi (f.) [fr. eha, + i, cp. Sk. ei] desire, wish, in combn.
with gavehi pariyehi etc. Vbh 353 = Vism 23, 29 etc.
Etarahi (adv.) [Sk. etarhi, cp. tarahi & carahi] now, at present
D i.29, 151, 179, 200; ii.3; J i.215 (opp. tad); iii.82; vi.364
(instead of paccuppanna).
Etta (adv.) [= Sk. atra, see also ettha] there, here Pv i.56 (sic; cp.
KhA 254 note).
Ettaka (adj.) [etta + ka, contrasting comparative function, cp.
tattaka] so much, this much, according to context referring either to deficiency or abundance, thus developing 2 meanings,
viz. (1) just as much (& no more), only so little, all this, just
this, such a small number, a little; pl. so few, just so many D
i.117 (opp. aparima), 124; A iv.114; Nd2 304iii. (ettakena
na tussati is not satisfied with this much); Vv 7912 (cp. VvA
307); Miln 10, 18 (ala ettakena enough of this much); DhA
i.90 (enough, this much), 93, 399 (pl. ettak); ii.54 (only one),
174 sq.; VvA 233 (a little), 323. ettaka kla a short
time (but see also under 2) J i.34; DhA ii.20. (2) ever so
much (and not less), so much, pl. so many, ever so many, so
& so many, such a lot A iii.337; J i.207 (pl. ettak), 375 (nt.
ettaka); iii.80 (id.), 94 ( dhana such great wealth); Miln
37 (pl.); DhA i.392, 396 (pl. f. ettik), 397, 398; ii.14, 89 (pl.),
241 (pl. so many); VvA 65 (dhana). ettaka kla for
Ej (f.) [to ij, q. v. and see nejja. There is also a Sk. root ej to
stir, move] motion, turbulence, distraction, seduction, craving
S iv.64; Sn 791; It 91; Nd1 91, 353; Dhs 1059 (cp. Dhs trslu.
277); VvA 232. aneja (adj.) unmoved, undisturbed, calm,
passionless S i.27, 141, 159; iii.83; iv.64; A ii.15; Nd1 353;
VvA 107.
Eha [pp. of + i] see pariy; do. ehi.
182
Ettaka
Esika
some time, such a long time (see also above, under 1) DhA
ii.62, 81; iii.318; VvA 330.
Ettato (adv.) [with double suffix for *atra ta] from here,
therefore S i.185.
Eaka1 [?] a threshold (see Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 146) Vin ii.149
(pdaka ptha, why not "having feet resembling those of a
ram"? Cp. Vin Texts iii.165 "a chair raised on a pedestal"); D
i.166; A i.295; ii.206. The word & its meaning seems uncertain.
Eaka2 [Sk. eaka] a ram, a wild goat Sn 309; Vism 500 (in simile); J i.166; Pug A 233 (= urabbha). f. eak S ii.228, eak
Th 2, 438, eik J iii.481.
Eagala see anea.
Ettha (adv.) [= Sk. atra, cp. etta] here, in this place; also temporal
"now", & modal "in this case, in this matter" D ii.12; S v.375;
Dh 174; Sn 61, 171, 424, 441, 502, 1037, & freq. passim.
Edisa (adj.) [Sk. da] such like, such Vv 373 ; PvA 69, 243.
Eagal (f.) [dial.?] the plant Cassia Tora (cp. Sk. eagaja the
ringworm shrub, Cassia Alata, after Halyudha), J iii. 222
(= kamboj C.).
Eva (adv.) [Vedic eva] emphatic part "so, even, just"; very freq. in
all contexts & combns. 1. eva J i.61 (ajj eva this veryday),
278 (tath eva likewise); ii.113 (aha e. just I), 154 (ekam e.
just one), 160 (attano e. his very own). 2. eva often appears with prothetic (sandhi )y as yeva, most frequently
after i and e, but also after the other vowels and , cp. J i.293,
307; ii.110, 128, 129, 159; iv.3; vi.363. 3. After eva also
takes the form of eva, mostly with assimilation of to ,
viz. ta eva J i.223; tasmi eva J i.139; aha eva Miln 40.
4. After long vowels eva is often shortened to va (q. v.).
-rpa (1) such, like that Sn 279, 280; It 108; J ii. 352, etc.
(2) of such form, beauty or virtue J i.294; iii.128, etc.
Eva (adv.) [Vedic eva] so, thus, in this way, either referring to
what precedes or what follows, e. g. (1) thus (as mentioned,
expld. at Vism 528 as "niddiha nayanidassana") D i.193
(eva sante this being being so), 195 (id.); Vin ii.194 (eva
bhante, yes); J i.222; Pv ii.1312 eva eta, just so). (2) thus
(as follows) M i. 483 (eva me suta "thus have I heard").
Often combd. with similar emphatic part., as evam eva kho
"in just the same way" (in final conclusions) D i.104, 199, 228,
237, 239; in older form eva by kho (= evam iva kho) Vin
ii.26; iv.134 = DA i.27; evam eva "just so" D i.51; Sn 1115;
eva kho D i.113; evam pi Sn 1134; eva su D i.104; etc. etc.
-dihin holding such a view M i.484. -nma having that
name M i.429.
Esati [ + i1 with confusion of i1 and i2 , icchati, see also ajjhesati, anvesati, pariyesati] to seek, search, strive for Sn 592
(esno ppr. med.), 919; Dh 131.
Esan (f.) [fr. esati] desire, longing, wish D iii.216, 270; M i.79;
S v.54, 139; A i.93; ii.41; v.31; VvA 83; PvA 98, 163, 265.
See also anesan, isi & pariy.
183
Esika
Okassati
O
jahanti "they leave whatever shelter they have", expld. by laya
DhA ii.170).
-cara (f. carik J vi.416; crik M i.117) living in the
house (said of animals), i. e. tame (cp. same etym. of "tame"
= Lat. domus, domesticus). The passage M i. 117, 118 has
caused confusion by oka being taken as "water". But from the
context as well as from C. on J vi.416 it is clear that here a tame
animal is meant by means of which other wild ones are caught.
The passage at M i.117 runs "odaheyya okacara hapeyya
okacrika" i. e. he puts down a male decoy and places a female (to entice the others), opp. "haneyya o. nseyya o." i.
e. takes away the male & kills the female. -()jaha giving up
the house (and its comfort), renouncing (the world), giving up
attachment Sn 1101 (= layajaha SnA 598; cp. Nd2 176
with v. l. oghajaha). -anoka houseless, homeless, comfortless, renouncing, free from attachment: see separately.
184
Okassati
Okkala
ii.74 (T. okk); A iv.16 (T. okk, v.l. ok), 65 (id.); Miln 210.
Also in Caus. okasseti to pull out, draw out Th 2, 116 (vai
= dpavai kaheti ThA 117). [MSS. often spell okk].
Vism 74 (vlika).
Okilin see okiraa.
Okoimaka (adj.) [o + koi + mant + ka. Ava in BSk., in formula durvara durdarana avakoimaka Sp. Av. i. 280.
Kern (note on above passage) problematically refers it to Sk.
avakara = vairpya (Pini v.2, 30). The Commentary on S
i.237 explns. by mahodara (fat bellied) as well as lakuaka
(dwarf); Pug A 227 expls. by lakuaka only] lit. "having
the top lowered", with the head squashed in or down, i. e.
of compressed & bulging out stature; misshapen, deformed,
of ugly shape (Mrs. Rh. D. trsls hunchback at S i.94, pot
bellied at S i.237; Warren, Buddhism p. 426 trsls. decrepit). It occurs only in one stock phrase, viz. dubbaa
dud-das(s)ika okoimaka "of bad complexion, of ugly appearance and dwarfed" at Vin ii.90 = S i.94 = A i.107 = ii.85
= iii.285 sq. = Pug 51. The same also at M iii.169; S i.237;
ii.279; Ud 76.
Okkamana (nt.) [fr. okkamati] entering into, approaching, reaching M iii.6; A iii.108 (entering the path); also in phrase nibbnassa okkamanya A iv.111 sq., cp. 230 sq.
185
Okkala
Ogha
186
Ogha
Oi
Ojavantat (f.) [abstr. fr. ajavant] richness in sap, strength giving (nourishing) quality J i.68 (of milk).
Ojahti [o + jahati] to give up, leave, leave behind, renounce, ger.
ohya D i.115 (ti sangha & hiraa suvaa); M
ii.166 (id.); J v.340 (= chaetv C.); PvA 93 (ma). Pass.
avahyati & ohyati, pp. ohna (q. v.). See also ohanati.
Oj (f.) [Vedic ojas nt., also BSk. oja nt. Divy 105; fr. *aug to
increase, as in Lat. auges, augustus & auxilium, Goth. aukan
(augment), Ags. acian; cp. also Gr. , Sk. ukati &
vakana increase] strength, but only in meaning of strength
giving, nutritive essence (appld. to food) M i.245; S ii.87;
v.162 (dhamm ); A iii.396; J i.68; Dhs 646, 740, 875; Miln
156; DhA ii.154 (pahav). See also def. at Vism 450 (referring to kabalinkr hra. The compn. form is oja, e. g. ojadna
J v.243; ojahamaka (rpa) Vism 341.
Ojinti [Sk. avajayati, ava + ji] to conquer, vanquish, subdue J
vi.222 (ojinmase).
Ota [pp. o + jnti, see also avata] despised Miln 191, 229,
288.
Oha1 [Vedic oha, idg. * (u) s; Av. aosta lip; Lat. s mouth
= Sk. Ags. r margin] the lip A iv.131; Sn 608; J ii.264;
iii.26 (adhar & uttar lower & upper lip), 278; v.156; DhA
i.212; iii.163; iv.1; VvA 11; PvA 260. Cp. bimboha.
Oha2 [Vedic ura, f. ur, buffalo = Ohg. Ags. ur, Lat. urus
bison, aurochs. In cl. Sk. it means a camel]. It is mentioned in
two lists of domestic animals, Vin iii.52; Miln 32. At J iii.385
a story is told of an oh vydhi who fought gallantly in the
wars, and was afterwards used to drag a dung cart. Morris,
J.P.T.S. 1887, 150 suggests elephant.
Ocaraka [fr. ocarati] in special meaning of one who makes himself at home or familiar with, an investigator, informant, scout,
spy (ocarak ti carapuris C. on Ud 66). Thus also in BSk.
as avacaraka one who furnishes information Divy 127; an
adaptation from the Pli. Vin iii.47, 52; M i.129 = 189 (cor
ocarak, for car?); S i.79 (puris car (v. l. cor) ocarak
(okacar v. l. SS) janapada ocaritv etc.; cp. K. S. p. 106 n.
1) = Ud 66 (reads coi o.).
Oeti [for ueti (?). See further under ueti] to throw out (a
net), to lay snares A i.33 = J ii.37, 153; iii.184 and passim;
ThA 243. pp. oita (q. v.).
Oha [better spelling oha, pp. of + vah] carried away, appropriated, only in cpd. sah-oh cor thieves with their plunder
Vism 180 (cp. Sk. sahoha Manu ix.270).
Oata [pp. of oamati] bent down, low, inclined. Usually of social rank or grade, combd. with & opp. to uata, i. e. raised
& degraded, lofty and low A ii.86 = Pug 52 (= nca lmaka
Pug A 229); Pv iv.66 ; Miln 387; DA i.45; PvA 29.
Ojavant (adj.) [fr. oj; Vedic ojasvant in diff. meaning: powerful] possessing strengthening qualities, giving strength M
i.480; S i.212 (so read for ovaja; phrase ojava asecanaka
187
Oi
Otthaa
Otthaa
Odhunti
Odissaka (adj.) [fr. odissa] only in adv. expression odissakavasena definitely, in special, specifically (opp. to anodissaka
vasena in general, universally) J i.82; ii.146; VvA 97. See
also anodissaka & odhiso.
Odana (m. & nt.) [Sk. odana, to Idg. *ud, from which also
udaka, q. v. for full etym.] boiled (milk )rice, gruel Vin
ii.214 (m.); D i.76, 105; S i.82 (nik); DhA iv. 17 (id.); A
iii.49; iv.231; Sn 18; J iii.425 (til m.); Dhs 646, 740, 875; PvA
73; VvA 98; Sdhp 113. Combd. with kummsa (sour milk) in
phrase o k upa caya a heap of boiled rice and sour
milk, of the body (see kya I.); also at M i.247.
Odhi [from odahati, Sk. avadhi, fr. ava + dh] putting down,
fixing, i. e. boundary, limit, extent DhA ii.80 (jau mattena odhin to the extent of the knee, i. e. kneedeep); iv.204
(id.). odhiso (adv.) limited, specifically Vbh 246; Nett 12;
Vism 309. Opp. anodhi M iii. 219 (jina), also in anodhiso
(adv.) unlimited, universal, general Ps ii. 130, cp. anodissaka
(odissaka); also as anodhikatv without limit or distinction,
absolutely Kvu 208, and odhisodhiso "piecemeal" Kvu 103
(cp. Kvu trsln. 762 , 1271 ).
-sunka "extent of toll", stake J vi.279 (= sunkakohsa
C.).
Odhunti
Opta
Opadhika (adj.) [fr. upadhi. BSk. after the P., aupadhika Divy
542] forming a substratum for rebirth (always with ref. to
pua, merit). Not with Morris, J.P.T.S. 1885, 38 as "exceedingly great"; the correct interpretation is given by Dhpla at
VvA 154 as "atta bhva janaka paisandhi pavatti
vipka dyaka". S i.233 = A iv.292 = Vv 3421 ; It 20 (v.
l. osadhika), 78.
Onamati [o + namati] to bend down (instr.), stoop D ii. 17 (anonamanto ppr. not bending); iii.143 (id.); Vv 393 (onamitv ger.).
pp. oata.
Opaptika (adj.) [fr. upapatti; the BSk. form is a curious distortion of the P. form, viz. aupapduka Av. ii.89; Divy 300,
627, 649] arisen or reborn without visible cause (i. e. without
parents), spontaneous rebirth (Kvu trsl. 2832 ), apparitional rebirth (Cpd. 1654 , q. v.) D i.27, 55, 156; iii.132, 230 (yoni),
265; M i.34, 73, 287, 401 sq., 436 sq, 465 sq.; ii.52; iii.22, 80,
247; S iii.206, 240 sq., 246 sq.; iv.348; v.346, 357 sq., 406; A
i.232, 245, 269; ii.5, 89, 186; iv.12, 226, 399, 423 sq.; v. 265
sq., 286 sq., 343 sq.; Pug 16, 62, 63; Vbh 412 sq.; Miln 267;
Vism 552 sq., 559; DA i.165, 313. The C. on M i.34 explns. by
"sesa yoni paikkhepa vacana eta". See also Pug.
A 1, 40.
Onha [fr. ava + nah, cp. onaddha & onayhati] drawing over,
covering, shrouding D i.246 (spelt onaha); Miln 300; Dhs 1157
(= megho viya ksa kya onayhati).
Onta [in form = Sk. avanta, but semantically = apanta. Thus
also BSk. apanta, pp. of apa + n, see apaneti] only found in
one ster. phrase, viz. onta-patta-pi "having removed (or
removing) his hand from the bowl", a phrase causing constructional difficulties & sometimes taken in glosses as "onitta" (fr.
nij), i. e. having washed (bowl and hands after the meal). The
Cs. expln. as onto pattato pi yeva, i. e. "the hand is taken
away from the bowl". The spelling is frequently ota, probably through BB sources. See on term also Trenckner, Notes
6624 & cp. apa nta ptra at M Vastu iii.142. The expression is always combd. with bhuttvin "having eaten" and
occurs very frequently, e. g. at Vin ii.147: D i.109 (= DA i.
277, q. v. for the 2 explns. mentioned above M ii.50, 93; S
v.384; A ii.63; Sn p. 111 (= pattato ontapi, apantahattha
SnA 456); VvA 118; PvA 278.
Opaptin (adj.) = opaptika, in phrase opaptiy (for opaptiniy?) iddhiy at S v.282 (so read for T. opapti ha?) is
doubtful reading & perhaps best to be omitted altogether.
Opama at J i.89 & Sdhp 93 (anopama) stands for pama, which
metri caus for upama.
Opamma (nt.) [fr. upama; cp. Sk. aupamya] likeness, simile,
comparison, metaphor M i.378; Vin v.164; Miln 1, 70, 330;
Vism 117, 622; ThA 290.
Opakkhin (adj.) [o + pakkhin, adj. fr. pakkha wing, cp. similarly avapatta] "with wings off" i. e. having one's wings
clipped, powerless A i.188 ( karoti to deprive of one's wings
or strength; so read for T. opapakkhi karoti).
Opaguyha see opavayha.
Opatati [o + pat] to fall or fly down (on), to fall over (w. acc.)
J ii.228 (lokmisa anto); vi.561 (itv ger.); Miln 368, 396.
pp. opatita.
190
Opta
Obhsana
Opilpita [pp. of opilpeti] immersed into (loc.), gutted with water, drenched J i.212, 214.
Obhagga [o + bhagga, pp. of bhaj, Sk. avabhagna] broken down, broken up, broken S v.96 (vibhagga); A iv.435
(obhagg obhagga); DhA i.58 (id.); J i.55 (sarra).
Opuchana or Opujana (nt.) [fr. opujeti] heaping up, covering over; a heap, layer DhA iii.296.
191
Obhsana
Orodha
Oraka (adj.) [ora + ka] inferior, posterior Vin i.19; ii. 159; M
ii.47; Sn 692 (= paritta SnA 489; cp. omaka); J i.381.
Orata [o + rata, pp. of ramati] 1. delighted, satisfied, pleased
Miln 210 (cp. abhirata). 2. desisting, abstaining from, restraining oneself VvA 72 (= virato; cp. uparata).
Omaka (adj.) [oma + ka] lower in rank, inferior; low, insignificant Nd1 306 (appaka +); J ii.142; DhA i.203.
Orasa (adj.) [Fr. ura, uras breast Vedic aurasa] belonging to one's
own breast, self begotten, legitimate; innate, natural, own
M ii.84; iii.29; S ii.221 (Bhagavato putto o. mukhato jto);
iii.83; J iii.272; Vv 5022 ; ThA 236; KhA 248; PvA 62 (urejta
+).
Orodha
Ovadiya
Olokana (nt.) [see oloketi] looking, looking at, sight Sdhp 479
(mukhass ).
Olaggeti [Caus. of o + lag] to make stick to, to put on, hold fast,
restrain M ii.178; A iii.384 (vv. ll. oloketi, olabheti, oketi);
Th 1, 355.
Olokanaka (adj. n.) [fr. oloketi] window Vin ii.267 (olokanakena olokenti, adv.).
Olamba (adj.) [fr. ava + lamb] hanging down Vin iii.49; J iv.380
(vilamba).
Olambaka (adj. n.) [see olambati] 1. (adj.) hanging down
VvA 32 (dma). 2. (n.) (a) support, walking stick J iv.40
(hatth). (b) plumb line J vi.392.
Oumpika (adj.) [Deriv. unknown, BSk. olumpika and oumpika M Vastu iii.113, 443. In the vet Upan. we find the
form uupa a skiff.] Sen. Kacc 390 belonging to a skiff (no
ref. in Pli Canon?); cp. BSk. olumpika M Vastu iii. 113 &
oumpika ibid. 443.
Oligalla [of unknown etym.: prob. Non Aryan, cp. BSk. oigalla Saddh. P. chap. vi.] a dirty pool near a village M iii.168;
S v.361; A i.161; iii.389; Miln 220; Vism 343.
Oliyati [o + lyate from l] to stick, stick fast, adhere, cling to It
43; Nett 174. pp. olna (see avalna).
Olna [pp. of oliyate] adhering, sticking or clinging to (worldliness), infatuated M i.200 (vuttika); J vi.569 (anolna mnasa); Vbh 350 (vuttik); Miln 393 (an).
Olyan [fr. oliyati] adhering, infatuation Ps i.157; Dhs 1156,
1236.
Olugga [pp. of olujjati] breaking off, falling to pieces, rotting
away M i.80, 245 (olugga vilugga), 450 (id.); Vism 107
(id.).
193
Ovadiya
Ositta
Ovadiya (adj.) [grd. of ovadati] who or what can be advised, advisable Vin i.59 (+ anussiya); Vv 8436 (= ovda vasena
vattabba VvA 345).
Osadh (f.) [Vedic avaa + dh: bearer of balm, comfort, refreshment]. There is no difference in meaning between osadha and osadh; both mean equally any medicine, whether
of herbs or other ingredients. Cp. e. g. A iv.100 (bjagma
bhtagm.. osadhi tiavanappatayo) Pv ii.610 , with Sn
296 (gvo... ysu jyanti osadh); D i.12, cp. DA i.98; Pv
iii.53 ; PvA 86; J iv.31; vi.331 (? trsln. medicinal herb). Figuratively, balm of salvation (amatosadha) Miln 247. Osadhi
trak, star of healing. The only thing we know about this
star is its white brilliance, S i.65; It 20 = A v.62; Vv 92 ; Pv
ii.110 ; cp. PvA 71; Vism 412. Childers calls it Venus, but
gives no evidence; other translators render it morning star
. According to Hindu mythology the lord of medicine is the
moon (oadha), not any particular star.
Osappati [o + sp to creep] to draw back, give way J vi.190 (osappissati; gloss apyati).
Ovda [BSk. avavda in same sense as P.] advice, instruction, admonition, exhortation Vin i.50 = ii.228; ii.255 = iv.52; D i.137
(paikara, function of a king); J iii.256 (anovdakara one who
cannot be helped by advice, cp. ovadaka); Nett 91, 92; DhA
i.13, 398 (dasavidha o.); VvA 345. ovda deti to give
advice PvA 11, 12, 15,
Osaraa (nt.) [fr. avasarati] 1. return to, going into (acc.) visiting J i.154 (gmanta kle). 2. withdrawal, distraction,
drawing or moving away, heresy Sn 538 (= ogahanni titthni,
dihiyo ti attho SnA 434).
Osarati [o + s] to flow, to go away, to recede to, to visit M i.176
(gma etc.); ii.122. pp. osaa. See also avasarati.
See also
Osra (f.) [fr. osreti 3] 1. restoration, rehabilitation reinstatement (of a bhikkhu after exclusion from the Sangha) Vin
i.322; Miln 344. 2. procession (?) (perhaps reading should
be ussra) DhA ii.1 (T. oss).
Ositta
Ka
Caus. I. ohreti (see avahrati); Caus. II. oharpeti in meaning of oharati to take down, to cut or shave off (hair) J vi.52
(kesamassu); DhA ii.53 (cp. oropeti). pp. avahaa.
Osdati [fr. o + sad] to settle down, to sink, run aground (of ships)
S iv.314 (osda bho sappi tela); Miln 277 (nv osdati).
ger. osditv J ii.293. Caus. II. osdpeti J iv.139 (nva).
Ohreti [Caus. of oharati] 1. to give up, leave behind, renounce (cp. ojahti) Sn 64 (= oropeti Nd2 183). 2 to take
down (see oharati 1) Vin i.48; PvA 95. 3 to cut down, shave
off (hair; see oharpeti under oharati) It 75 (kesamassu hair
& beard, v. l. ohypetv); Pug 56 (id.).
Ossajjati [o + sj send off] to let loose, let go, send off, give up,
dismiss, release D ii.106 (aor. ossaji); Sn 270 = S i.207; Th 1,
321; J iv.260. pp. ossaha. See also avassajati.
Oharaa (nt.) [fr. oharati] lit. "taking away", leading astray, side
track, deviating path J vi.525 (C.: gamana magga). Cp.
avaharaa.
Oharati [o + h take] 1. to take away, take down, take off
S i.27 (ger. ohacca, v. l. hacca); Pv ii.66 (imper. ohara =
ohrehi PvA 95); DhA iv.56 (see ohrin). See also ava.
K
Ka (pron. interr.) [Sk. ka, Idg. *qo besides *qui (see ki &
ki) & *qu (see ku). Cp. Av. ka ; Gr. , , ,
etc.; Lat. qu; Oir. co te; Cymr. pa; Goth. hvas, Ags. hw
(=E. who), Ohg. hwr] who? m. ko, f. k (nt. ki, q.
v.); follows regular decl. of an atheme with some formations
fr. ki, which base is otherwise restricted to the nt. From
ka also nt. pl. kni (Sn 324, 961) & some adv. forms like
katha, kad, kaha, etc. 1. (a) ka: nom. m. ko Sn 173,
765, 1024; J i.279; Dh 146; f. k J vi.364; PvA 41; gen. sg.
kassa Miln 25; instr. kena; abl. kasm (nt.) as adv. "why"
Sn 883, 885; PvA 4, 13, 63, etc. (b) ki (m. & f.; nt. see
ki): gen. sg. kissa Dh 237; J ii.104. ko-nmo (of) what
name Miln 14; DhA ii.92, occurs besides kin-nmo Miln 15.
kvattho what (is the) use Vv 5010 stands for ko attho.
All cases are freq. emphasized by addition of the affirm. part.
nu & su. e. g. ko su'dha tarati ogha (who then or who
possibly) Sn 173; kena ssu nivuto loko "by what then is the
world obstructed?" Sn 1032; kasm nu saccni vadanti... Sn
885. 2. In indef. meaning combd with ci (Sk. cid: see
under ca 1 and ci): koci, kci, etc., whoever, some (usually
with neg. na koci, etc., equalling "not anybody"), nt. kici
(q. v.); e. g. m jtu koci lokasmi ppiccho It 85; no yti
koci loke Dh 179; n'ha bhatako 'smi kassaci Sn 25; na hi
nassati kassaci kamma "nobody's trace of action is lost" Sn
195
Ka
Kakkru
Kasa [cp. Sk. kasa; of uncertain etym., perhaps of Babylonian origin, cp. hiraa] 1. bronze Miln 2; magnified by late
commentators occasionally into silver or gold. Thus J vi.504
(silver) and J i.338; iv.107; vi.509 (gold), considered more
suitable to a fairy king. 2. a bronze gong Dh 134 (DhA
iii.58). 3. a bronze dish J i.336; pnya a bronze drinking
cup, goblet M. i.316. 4. a "bronze," i. e. a bronze coin
worth 4 kahpaas Vin iv.255, 256. See Rhys Davids, Coins
and Measures 12, 22. "Golden bronze" in a fairy tale at
Vv 54 is explained by Dhammapla VvA 36 as "bells." It is
doubtful whether brass was known in the Ganges valley when
the earlier books were composed; but kasa may have meant
metal as opposed to earthenware. See the compounds.
-upadahrana (n. a.) metal milk pail (?) in
phrase: dhenusahassni dukla sandanni (?) kaspadhram D ii.192; A iv.393; J vi.503 (expld at 504). Kern
(Toev. p. 142) proposes correction to kas'padohana (=Sk.
ksy'opodohana), i.e. giving milk to the extent of a metal
pailful. -kaaka metal thorns, bits of sharp metal, nails
J v.102 (cp. sakaaka) -kta cheating with false or spurious metal D i.5 (=DA i.79: selling brass plates for gold ones).
-tla bronze gong DhA i.389; DhsA 319 (ta); VvA 161 or
cymbals J vi.277. 411. -thla metal dish, as
distinguished from earthenware D i.74 (in simile of
dakkho nahpako=A iii.25) cp. DA i. 217; Vism 283
(in simile); DhA iii.57 (: a gong); DA i.217; DhA iv.67=J
iii.224; reading at Miln 62 to be tla (see J.P.T.S. 1886, 122).
-pattharika a dealer in bronze ware Vin ii.135. -pti & pt
a bronze bowl, usually for food: M i.25; A iv.393; Sn 14;
PvA 274. -pra full of metal J iv.107. -bhaa brass ware
Vin ii.135. -bhjana a bronze vessel Vism 142 (in simile).
-maya made of bronze Vin i.190; ii.112; -mallaka metal dish,
e. g. of gold J iii.21. -loha bronze Miln 267.
Kakka1 [cp. Sk. kalka, also kalanka & kalusa] a sediment deposited by oily substances, when ground; a paste Vin i.205
(tila), 255. Three kinds enumerated at J. vi.232: ssapa
(mustard paste), mattika (fragrant earth paste, cp.
Fuller's earth), tila (sesamum paste). At DA i.88, a fourth
paste is given as haliddi, used before the application of face
powder (poudre de riz, mukha cua). Cp. kakku.
Kakka2 [cp. Sk. karka) a kind of gem; a precious stone of yellowish colour VvA 111.
Kakkaa a large deer (?) J vi.538 (expld as mahmiga).
Kakkaaka [cp. Sk. karkaa, karkara "hard," kankata "mail"; cp.
Gr. & Lat. cancer; also B. Sk. kakkaaka hook] a
crab S i.123; M i.234; J i.222; Vv 546 (VvA 243, 245); DhA
iii.299 (mama... kakkaakassa viya akkhni nikkhamimsu, as
a sign of being in love). Cp. kakkhaa.
-nala a kind of sea reed of reddish colour, J iv.141; also
a name for coral, ibid. -magga fissures in canals; frequented
by crabs, DhsA 270. -yantaka a ladder with hooks at one end
for fastening it to a wall, Mhvs ix.17. -rasa a flavour made
from crabs, crab curry, VvA 243.
Kakkara [onomat, cp. Sk. kkavku cock, Gr. , ,
Lat. querquedula, partridge; sound root kr, see note on
gala] a jungle cock used as a decoy J ii.162, pura, ii.161;
cp. dpaka1 & see Kern, Toev. p. 118: K Jtaka, N 209.
Kakaca [onomat. to sound root kr, cp. note on gala; Sk. krakaca]
a saw Th 1, 445; J iv.30; v.52; vi.261; DA i.212; in simile
-pama ovda M i.129. Another simile of the saw (a man
sawing a tree) is found at Ps i.171, quoted & referred to at
Vism 280, 281.
-khaa fragment or bit of saw J i.321. -danta tooth of
a saw, DA i.37 (kakaca danta pantiya kamna).
Kakkru
Kacavara
Kakkreti [*ka kreti to make ka, see note on gala for sound
root kr & cp. khaakhaa] to make the sound kak, to half
choke J ii.105.
Kakku [cp. kakka=kalka] a powder for the face, slightly adhesive, used by ladies, J v.302 where 5 kinds are enumd : ssapa,
loa, mattika, tila, haliddi.
Kakkoaka (?) KhA 38, spelt takk at Vism 258.
Kaca [Sk. kaca, cp. kc and Latin cingo, cicatrix] the hair (of
the head), in kalpa a mass of hair, tresses Dvs iv.51.
Kacavara [to kaca?] 1. sweepings, dust, rubbish (usually in
combn with chaeti and sammajjati) J i.292; iii.163; iv.300;
Vism 70; DA i.7; DhA i.52; SnA 311. 2. rags, old clothes
SA 283 (=pilotik).
-chaana throwing out sweepings, in pacchi a dust bas197
Kacavara
Kacana
Kacch2 (f.) & kaccha (m. nt.) [Derivation unknown, cp. Sk.
kaka & kak, Lat. coxa, Ohg. hahsa]; the armpit Vin i.15
(addasa... kacche va... aiss kacche lambara); S
i.122=Sn 449 (sokaparetassa v kacch abhassatha); It 76
(kacchehi sed muccanti: sweat drops from their armpits); J
v.434=DhA iv.197 (thana dasseti k dass nbhi dass); J
v.435 (thanni k ni ca dassayant; expld on p. 437 by upakacchaka); vi.578. The phrase parha kaccha nakhaloma
means "with long grown finger nails and long hair in the
armpit," e. g. S i.78.
-loma (kaccha) hair growing in the armpit Miln 163
(should probably be read parha k. nakha l., as
above).
Kajjala [Sk. kajjala, dial. fr. kad+jala, from jalati, jval, orig.
burning badly or dimly, a dirty burn] lamp black or soot,
used as a collyrium Vin ii.50 (read k. for kapalla, cp. J.P.T.S.
1887, 167).
Kacaka a kind of tree (dsima) J vi.536 (expld as "dve rukkhajtiyo"). BB have kocaka.
198
Kacana
Kai
Kaa1 [Sk. kaa from katti: to do wicker work, roll up, plait;
*gert, cp. Gr. , Lat. cratis=E. crate, Goth. haurds,
E. hurdle] a mat: see cpds. & kaallaka.
-sara a reed: Saccharum Sara, used as medicine DhsA
78. -sra (DhA i.268) & sraka a mat for sitting or lying on,
made of the stalks of the screw pine, Pandanus Furcatus J
vi.474; v.97; DA i.137; DhA ii.183
199
Kai
Kaha
Kauka (adj.) [Sk. kau(ka), from *(s)qer to cut; cp. Sk. koti
(ktati), Lat. caro "cutlet." k. is almost exclusively poetical; usually expld in prose by aniha, tikhia, ghora (of niraya); often combd with khara, opp. madhura, e. g. PvA
119] sharp, bitter, acid, severe. 1. severe, sharp (fig.),
of dukkha, vedan, km, etc. M i.10=A ii.143; J vi.115; Th
2, 451 (=ThA 281); SA 56. painful, terrible, frightful (
appld to the fruits of evil actions and to the sufferings in
Niraya: see kammapphala & niraya) J iii.519; Pv i.102 , 111 ;
iv.18 , 76 . bitter, or perhaps pungent of taste DhS 291; Miln
65, 112; J iii.201. 2. (nt.) pungency, acidity, bitterness D
ii.349=J i.380; Th 2, 503 (paca); J vi.509. Note. Is k. to
be written instead of kadukkha at VvA 316, where it explains
maraa? Cp. J iii.201: tesa ta kauka si, maraa ten'
upgamu.
-udraya causing bitterness or pain J v.241, cp. dukkhudraya J v.119.
-odaka a bitter draught Sdhp 159.
-pabhedana (adj.) having a pungent juice exuding from the
temples, said of an elephant in rut Dh 324 (=tikhiamada DhA
iv.13). -pphala a kind of perfume made of the berry of an aromatic plant J ii.416=DhA iii.475 (kappra k dni), cp.
Sk. kakkolaka. (adj.) of bitter fruit J ii.106 (of the mango);
S i.57=J iii.291=Dh 66 (of kamma); Pv i.1110 (id.). -bhaa
(sg. & pl.) spices. There are 4 enumd at J iii.86: hingujraka,
singiveraka, marica, pipphali; 3 at VvA 186 (as tikauka, cp.
kaula): ajamoja, hingujraka, lasua; PvA 135; DhA ii.131.
-bhva stinginess DhsA 376. -rohi the black hellebore Vin
i.201 (as medicine). -vipka (adj.) having a bitter result (of
ppa) Miln 206; compar. tara S ii.128. -ssana a harsh
command J vi.498.
Cp.
200
Kaha
Kanikra
Kahaka1 (m. nt.) [to kaha3 ] a kind of reed Dh 164; DhA iii.156
(=velu sankhta kaha).
Kaa [Derivation uncertain, possibly connected with kana; positive of kanyn=small; Vedic kaa] the fine red powder between the husk and the grain of rice, huskpowder D i.9
(homa), expld at DA i.93 by kuaka. (adj.) made of
husk powder or of finely broken rice, of cakes J i.423 (k
pva=kuakena pakka pva). akaa (adj.) free
from the coating of red powder. characteristic of the best rice
Mhvs 5, 30; Anvs 27 (akaa karoti to whiten the rice). Cp.
kkaa.
-bhakkha eating husk powder, a practice of cert. ascetics D i.166=M i.78=A i.241.
Kahala [Sk. kahara (la, lla, lya: all found in Av. S and Divy),
to kti; cp. khi] gravel, pebble, potsherd J iii.225; v.417;
VvA 157; combd with sakkhara at D i.84=A i.9, and in simile
at A i.253. As f. combd with kaha at A i.124=Pug 30, 36; A
iii.6; as m. in same combn at Vism 261.
201
Kanikra
Kau
l. ).
-makula a k. bud J ii.83.
Kau
Kanha
Kaaka (& ika) (adj.) [fr. kaa] having corners or ears ();
f. ik Vin ii.137; J ii.185. ka-kaika see under ka.
Kaavant (adj.) [fr. kaa] having an (open) ear, i. e. clever,
sharp J ii.261 (=kaachidda pana na kassaci n'atthi C.).
Kaik (f.) [cp. kaaka & Sk. karik] 1. an ornament for the
ear, in lakkhaa: see below. 2. the pericarp of a lotus J
i.152, 183; v.416; Miln 361; Vism 124 (paduma); VvA 43.
3. the corner of the upper story of a palace or pagoda, house
top J i.201; iii.146, 318, 431, 472; DhA i.77 (kgra);
DA i.43; VvA 304; Bdhd 92. 4. a sheaf in the form of a
pinnacle DhA i.98. In cpds. kaika.
-baddha bound into a sheaf; fig. of objects of thoughts
DhA i.304. -maala part of the roof of a house J. iii.317;
DhA iii.66; vi.178. -rukkha a tree or log, used to form the
top of a house J i.201=DhA i.269. -lakkhaa the art of telling
fortune by marks on ornaments of the ear, or of the house
top D i.9 (=pilandhana k pi geha k pi vasena DA i.94).
Kaikra see kaikra.
Kanha (adj.) [cp. Vedic ka, Lith. krszas] dark, black, as
attr. of darkness, opposed to light, syn. with ka (q. v. for
etym.); opp. sukka. In general it is hard to separate the lit.
and fig. meanings, an ethical implication is to be found in
203
Kanha
Kata
nearly all cases (except 1.). The contrast with sukka (brightness) goes through all applications, with ref. to light as well
as quality. I. Of the sense of sight: k-sukka dark & bright
(about black & white see nla & seta), forming one system
of coloursensations (the colourless, as distinguished from the
red green and yellow blue systems). As such enumd in
connection with quasi definition of vision, together with nla,
pta, lohita, majeha at D ii.328=M i.509 sq. =ii.201 (see
also majeha). II. (objective). 1. of dark (black), poisonous snakes: kah (f.) J ii.215 (=ka sappa C); sappa
J i.336; iii.269, 347; v.446; Vism 664 (in simile); Miln 149;
PvA 62; ss with black heads A iii.241 (kim). 2. of (an
abundance of) smooth, dark (=shiny) hair (cp. in meaning E.
gloom: gloss=black: shiny), as Ep. of King Vasudeva Pv ii.61 ,
syn. with Kesav (the Hairy, cp. * * Samson, etc., see also siniddha , nla , kla kesa). sukaha
ssa with very dark hair J v.205, also as sukaha kaha
ssa J v.202 (cp. susuka). jai an ascetic with dark &
glossy hair J vi.507, cp. v.205 sukahajaila. ajana glossy
polish J v.155 (expld as sukhumakaha lom' citatt).
3. of the black trail of fire in vattanin (cp. Vedic ka
vartani agni R. V. viii.23, 19) S i.69=J iii.140 (cp. iii.9); J
v.63. 4. of the black (fertile) soil of Avanti "kah uttara"
black on the surface Vin i.195. III. (Applied). 1. pakkha
the dark (moonless) half of the month, during which the spirits
of the departed suffer and the powers of darkness prevail PvA
135, cp. Pv iii.64 , see also pakkha1 3. 2. attr. of all dark
powers and anything belonging to their sphere, e. g. of Mra
Sn 355, 439 (=Namuci); of demons, goblins (pisc) D i.93
with ref. to the "black born" ancestor of the Kahyanas
(cp. Dh i.263 ka vaa), cp. also ka in sunakha, the
Dog of Purgatory PvA 152. 3. of a dark, i. e. miserable, unfortunate birth, or social condition D iii.81 sq. (brhmano va sukko vao, kaho ao vao). abhijti a special species of men according to the doctrine of Gosla DA
i.162; A iii.383 sq. abhijtika "of black birth," of low social
grade D iii.251=A. iii.384; Sn 563; cp. Th 1, 833 and J.P.T.S.
1893, 11; in the sense of "evil disposition" at J v.87 (expld
as kaka sabhva). 4. of dark, evil actions or qualities: dhamma A v.232=Dh 87; D iii.82; Sn 967; Pug 30;
Miln 200, 337; paipad J i.105, and magga the evil way
A v.244, 278; bhvakara causing a low (re )birth J iv.9
(+ ppa kammni), and in same context as dhamma combd
with sukka at A iv. 33; Sn 526 (where kah for kaha):
Miln 37; kamma "black action" M i.39; vipka black result,
4 kinds of actions and 4 results, viz. kaha, sukka, kahasukka, akaha-asukka D iii.230=M i.389 sq.=A ii.230 sq.;
Nett 232. akaha 1. not dark, i. e. light, in netta with bright
eyes, Ep. of King Pingala netta J ii.242 in contrast with
Mra (although pingala cakkhu is also Ep. of Mra or his
representatives, cp. J v.42; Pv ii.41 ). 2. not evil, i. e. good
A ii.230, 231. atikaha very dark Vin iv.7; sukaha id.
see above ii.2.
204
Kata
Kata
Kata
Kattar
Kataka (nt.) [fr. kantati2 ] a scrubber, used after a bath Vin ii.129,
143; cp. Vin. Texts ii.318.
Katau (adj.) [cp. Sk. ktaja] lit. knowing, i. e. acknowledging what has been done (to one), i. e. grateful often in combn
with katavedin grateful and mindful of benefits S ii. 272; A
i.87=Pug 26; Vv 8127 ; Sdhp 509, 524. akatau 1. ungrateful S i.225; J iii.26 (=kata gua ajnanto C.), 474; iv.124;
PvA 116; Bdhd 81. 2. (separate akata u) knowing the
Uncreated, i. e. knowing Nibbna Dh 97, 383; DhA ii.188;
iv.139. akatau rpa (& sambhava) of ungrateful nature J iv.98, 99.
Katipaya (adj.) [cp. Sk. katipaya] some, several; a few (in cpds.
or in pl.) J i.230, 487; iii.280, 419; iv.125; v.162; Pv ii.920
(=appake only a few); DhA i.94 (very few); PvA 46. In sg.
little, insignificant Vv 5320 (=appik f.). vre a few times, a
few turns J v.132; vi.52; PvA 135; Mhbv 3.
Katatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. kata, cp. Sk. ktatva] the doing of, performance of, only in abl. katatt D ii.213; A i.56; J iii.128;
Dhs 431, 654; SnA 356; DhA iii.154; iv.142. Used adverbially
in meaning of "owing to, on account of" Miln 275; DhsA 262;
Mhvs 3, 40. -akatatt through non performance of, in
absence or in default of A. i.56; PvA 69, 154.
Katana (nt.) [fr. kata] a bad deed, injuring, doing evil (cp. kaana)
J iv.42 (yam me akkhsi... katana kata), cp. Morris in
J.P.T.S. 1893, 15.
Kate (adv.) [loc. of kata] for the sake of, on behalf of; with acc.
ma k. J iv.14; with gen. masassa k. J v.500.
Kattar [n. ag. fr. karoti, cp. Sk. kart] one who makes or creates, a maker, doer; in foll. construction. I. Dependent. Either
in verb function with acc., as n. agent to all phrases with
karoti e. g. paha karoti to put a question, paha katt one
who puts a question; or in n. function with gen., e. g. mantna kattro the authors of the Mantas, or in cpd. rja kattro makers of kings. II. Dependent. as n. katt the doer:
katt hoti no bhsit he is a man of action, and not of words.
206
Kattar
Kathali
Katha (adv.) [cp. Vedic katha & kath] dubit. interr. part.
1. how; with ind. pres. PvA 6 (k. puriso pailabhati), or with
fut. & cond. J i.222; ii.159 (k. tattha gamissmi); vi.500; PvA
54 (na dassmi) 2. why, for what reason? J iii.81; v.506.
Combined with -ca Vin i.114; ii.83. -carahi D ii.192. -nu
& -nu kho Vin ii.26, J iii.99; iv. 339; Nd2 189, see also eva
nu kho. -pana D ii.163. -su Nd2 189. -hi J iv.339; DhA
i.432. -hi nma Vin i.45; ii.105; iii.137; iv.300; all in the
same meaning; -ci (kathaci) scarcely, with difficulty Th 1,
456.
-kath "saying how? how?" i. e. doubt, uncertainty, unsettled mind (cp. kakh); expl. as vicikicch dukkhe kankh
Nd2 190; D ii.282; Sn 500, 866, 1063, 1088; DhA iv.194; as
adj. and at end of cpd. -katha, e. g. vigata (in phrase tia
vicikiccha... vesrajjappatta) D i.110=Vin i.12; tia (+
visalla) Sn 17, 86, 367. k k salla "the arrow of doubt"
D ii.283 (vicikicch +). -kathin having doubts, unsettled,
uncertain D ii.287; M i.8; Nd2 191; DhsA 352; a free from
doubt, Ep. of Arahant (expld DA i.211: "not saying how
and how is this?"); M i.108; It 49; Sn 534, 635, 868, 1064;
in phrases tia vicikiccho viharati akathankath kusalesu
dhammesu D i.71=Pug 59, jhy anejo a Dh 414 (: DhA
iv.194)=Sn 638. -kara (adj.) how acting, what doing? k.
aha no nirayam pateyya (" ") J
iv.339; Sn 376; J iv.75; v.148. -jvin leading what kind of
life? Sn 181. -dassin holding what views? Sn 848 (see
sla). -pakra of what kind Vin i.358; Sn 241 (:kathappakra). -paipanna going what way, i. e. how acting? D
ii.277, 279, 281. -bhvita how cultivated or practised? S
v.119. -bhta "how being," of what sort, what like D ii.139,
158; -rpa of what kind? M i.218; A i.249; iii.35; J iii.525.
-vaa of what appearance, what like? D ii.244. -vidha what
sort of? J v.95, 146; DhsA 305. -sameta how constituted? Sn
873. -sla of what character or conduct? how in his morality?
Sn 848 (kathadass kathaslo upasanto ti vuccati).
Kattari & (f.) [to kantati2 ] scissors, shears J iii.298, with ref. to
the "shears" of a crab, "as with scissors": cp. Vin. Texts iii.138
(see next).
Kattarik (f.) [fr. last] scissors, or a knife Vin ii.134; J. i.223.
Kattik (f.) (& kattika) [cp. Sk. kttik f. pl. the Pleiades &
BSk. karthika] N. of a month (Oct. Nov.), during which
the full moon is near the constellation of Pleiades. It is the
last month of the rainy season, terminating on the full moon
day of Kattik (kattika puam). This season is divided
into 5 months: sha, Svaa, Bhaddara (Pohapda), Assayuja, Kattik; the month Assayuja is also called pubbakattik, whereas the fifth, K., is also known as pacchimakattik; both are comprised in the term k. -dvemsika.
Bhikkhus retiring for the first 3 months of the Vassa (rainy
season) are kattika-temsik, if they include the 4th, they are
k. -ctumsik. The full moon of Assayuja is termed k. temsin; that of Kattika is k. -ctumsin. See Vinaya passages & cp. nakkhatta. Nett 143 (kattiko, v. l. kattik).
-ctumsin see above Vin iii.263.
-coraka a thief
who in the month of K., after the distribution of robes, attacks
bhikkhus Vin iii.262. -chaa a festival held at the end of Lent
on the full moon of pubba kattik, and coinciding with the
Pavra J i.433; ii.372; v.212 sq.; Mhvs 17, 17. -temsi (
puam) (the full moon) of pubbakattik Vin iii.261; Mhvs
17, 1 (puams). -msa the month K. J ii.372; Mhvs 12,
2 (kattike mse). -sukkapakkha the bright fortnight of K.
Mhvs 17, 64.
Kattu 1. base of inf. kattu (of karoti), in compds kamyat
willingness to do something Vbh 208; Vism 320, 385; DhA
iii.289; kma desirous to do Vin ii.226. kmat desire to
do or to perform Vism 466; VvA 43. 2. base of kattar in
compn .
Kattha (adv.) [der. fr. interr. base ka (kad2 ), whereas Sk. kutra
is der. fr. base ku, cp. kuttha] where? where to, whither? Vin
i.83, 107; ii.76; D i.223; Sn 487, 1036; J iii.76; Pv ii.916 ; DhA
i.3. k. nu kho where then, where I wonder? D i.215 sq.,
PvA 22 (with Pot.) -katthaci(d) (indef.) anywhere, at some
place or other J i.137; v.468; wherever, in whatever place Miln
366; PvA 284; KhA 247; J iii.229; iv.9, 45; as katthacid eva
J. iv. 92; PvA 173. Sometimes doubled katthaci katthaci in
207
Kathali
Kadariya
Kath (f.) [fr. kath to tell or talk, see katheti; nearest synonym
is lap, cp. vc' bhilpa & sallpa] 1. talk, talking, conversation A i.130; PvA 39. So in antar D i.179; Sn p. 107,
115; cp. sallpa. Also in tiracchna low, common speech,
comprising 28 kinds of conversational talk a bhikkhu should
not indulge in, enumd in full at D i.7=178=iii.36 & passim
(e. g. S v.419: corr. suddha to yuddha!; A v.128=Nd2
192); ref. to at A iii.256; v.185; J i.58; Pug 35. Similarly
in gma Sn 922; vigghik k. A iv.87; Sn 930. Ten good
themes of conversation (kath vatthni) are enumd at M
iii.113=A iii.117=iv.357=v.67; Miln 344; similarly dhamm
kath A ii.51; iv.307; v.192; Sn 325; pavattan k. A i.151;
yutta kathya Sn 826; sammodany k. in salutation formula s k sraya vtisretv D i.52, 108, etc.; A v.185;
Sn 419, pp. 86, 93, 107, 116. 2. speech, sermon, discourse,
lecture Vin i.203, 290 ( karoti to discuss); A iii.174; iv. 358.
Freq. in anupubbi a sermon in regular succession, graduated
sermon, discussing the 4 points of the ladder of "holiness," viz.
dnakath, sla, sagga, magga (see anupubba) Vin i.15; A
iii.184; iv.186, 209, 213; DhA i.6; VvA 66. 3. a (longer)
story, often with vitthra an account in detail, e. g. PvA 19.
bhira profane story KhA 48. 4. word, words, advice:
gahti to accept an advice J ii.173; iii.424. 5. explanation, exposition, in aha (q. v.), cp. gati Ps ii.72. 6.
discussion, in vatthu (see below) Mhvs 5, 138. -dukkath
harmful conversation or idle talk A iii. 181; opp. su A iii.182.
-katha vaheti "to increase the talk," to dispute sharply J
i.404; v.412. samuhpeti to start a conversation J i.119;
iv. 73. At the end of cpds. (as adj.) kath e. g. chinna
Sn 711; hita DA i.73; madhura J iii.342; vi.255.
-bhia recollection due to speech Miln 78, 79. -ojja
(k udya, to vad) a dispute, quarrel Sn 825, 828. -dhamma
a topic of conversation DA i.43. -nigghosa the sound of
praise, flattery J ii.350. -pavatti the course of a conversation J
i.119; DhA i.249; Mhbv 61. -pbhata subject of a conversation, story J i.252, 364. -bhulla abundance of talk, loquacity
A iv.87. -magga narrative, account, history J i.2. -rasa
the sweetness of (this) speech Miln 345. -vatthu 1. subject
of a discourse or discussion, argument M i.372; ii.127, 132.
There are 10 enumd at A iv.352, 357 (see kath) and at Vism
19 as qualities of a kalya mitta, referred to at A v.67, 129;
Vism 127; DhA iv.30. Three are given at D iii.220=A i.197.
kusala well up in the subjects of discussion VvA 354. 2.
N. of the fifth book of the Abhidhamma Piaka, the seven constituents of which are enumd at var. places (e. g. DA i.17;
Mhbv 94, where Kvu takes the 3rd place), see also J.P.T.S.
1882, 1888, 1896. -samuhna the arising of a discussion
Kathik (f.) [fr. last?] agreement Dpvs 19, 22; see katik.
Kathita [pp. of katheti, cp. Sk. kathita] said, spoken, related J
ii.310; iv.73; v.493. su well said or told J. iv.73. As nt. with
instr. J iv.72 (tena kathita the discourse (given) by him).
Kathin (adj.) () [cp. kathika] speaking; one who speaks, a
speaker, preacher J i.148 (dhamma kathikesu citrakath);
Miln 90, 348 (seha best of speakers). See also katha
kathin.
Katheti (v. den. fr. kath, cp. Sk. kathayate] aor. kathesi, inf.
kathetu & kathetave (Vin i.359); Pass. kathyati & katheti
(Miln 22, cp. Trenckner, Notes 122); ppr. Pass. kathyamna
& kacchamna (A. iii.181); grd. kathetabba, kathanya & kaccha, 1. to speak, say, tell, relate (in detail: vitthrato PvA
77). m kathesi (=m bhai) do not speak PvA 16. to tell
(a story): J. i.2; iv.137; PvA 12, 13. 2. to converse with J.
vi.413; PvA 86 (=mantayi). 3. to report, to inform J v.460.
4. to recite DhA i.166. 5. to expound, explain, preach J
i.30; Miln 131; DhA i.88; Nd2 s. v. 6. to speak about (with
acc.) Vin ii.168. 7. to refer to J i.307. 8. to answer or
solve (a question) J i.165; v.66. Caus ii. kathpeti to make
say Mhvs 24, 4 (aor. kathpayi); DhA ii.35; KhA 118.
Kad [old form of interr. pron. nt., equal to ki; cp. (Vedic) kad
in kadartha=kiartha to what purpose] orig. "what?" used
adverbially; then indef. "any kind of," as (na) kac( -cana)
"not at all"; kac-cid "any kind of; is it anything? what then?"
Mostly used in disparaging sense of showing inferiority, contempt, or defectiveness, and equal to k (in denoting badness
or smallness, e. g. kkaika, kpurisa, see also kantra &
kappaa), ki, ku. For relation of ku>ka cp. kutra> kattha
& kad.
-anna bad food Kacc 178.
-asana id. Kacc 178.
-dukkha (?) great evil (=death) VvA 316 (expld as maraa,
cp. kauka).
Kadamba (cp. Sk. kadamba] the kadamba tree, Nauclea cordifolia (with orange coloured, fragrant blossoms) J. vi.535,
539; Vism 206; DhA i.309 (puppha); Mhvs 25, 48 (id.).
Kadara (adj.) miserable J ii.136 (expld as lkha, kasira).
Kadariya (adj.) [cp. Sk. kadarya, kad + arya?] mean, miserly,
stingy, selfish; usually expld by thaddhamacchar (PvA 102;
DhA iii.189, 313), and mentioned with macchar, freq. also
208
Kadariya
Kanta
Kad (indecl.) [Vedic kad. Cp. tad, sad in Pali, and perhaps
Latin quando]. interr. adv. when? (very often foll. by fut.) Th
1, 1091 1106; J ii.212; vi. 46; DhA i.33; PvA 2. Combd
with ssu J v.103, 215; vi.49 sq. -ci [cid] indef. 1. at
some time A iv.101. 2. sometimes J i.98; PvA 271. 3.
once upon a time Dvs i.30. 4. perhaps, may be J i.297;
vi.364. + eva: kadcideva VvA 213; -kadci kadci from
time to time, every now and then J i.216; iv. 120; DhsA 238;
PvA 253. -kadci karahaci at some time or other, at times
A i.179; Miln 73; DhA iii.362. -na kadci at no time, never
S i.66; J v.434; vi.363; same with m k J vi.310; Mhvs 25,
113; cp. kudcana. kadc -uppattika (adj.) happening
only sometimes, occasional Miln 114.
Kaddama [Derivation unknown. Sk. kardama] mud, mire, filth
Nd2 374 (=panka); J i.100; iii.220 (written kadamo in verse
and kaddemo in gloss); vi.240, 390; PvA 189 (=panka), 215;
compared with moral impurities J iii.290 & Miln 35. a free
from mud or dirt, clean Vin ii.201, of a lake J iii.289; fig. pure
of character J iii.290. kaddamkata made muddy or dirty, defiled J vi.59 (kilesehi).
-odaka muddy water Vin ii.262; Vism 127. -parikh a
moat filled with mud, as a defence J vi. 390; -bahula (adj.)
muddy, full of mud DhA i.333;
209
Kanta
Kaplaka
pari.
Kantati [Sk. katti, *qert, cp. kata, & Lat. cratis, crassus, E.
crate] to plait, twist, spin, esp. sutta (thread) Vin iv.300; PvA
75; DhA iii.273; kappsa A iii.295. Cp. pari.
Kantita2 (adj.) Sk. ktta pp. of kantati2 ] cut off, severed, at Miln
240 better as kantita1 , i. e. spun.
Kapalla (nt.) [Sk kapla; orig. skull, bowl, cp. kapola & Lat.
caput, capula, capillus, Goth. haubi, E. head] 1. a bowl
in form of a skull, or the shell of reptiles; see kapla. 2.
an earthenware pan used to carry ashes J i.8; vi.66, 75; DhA
i.288. 3. a frying pan (see cpds. & cp. angra kapalla)
Sn 672. -kapalla is only a variant of kapla.
-pti an earthen pot, a pan J i.347=DhA i.371; -pva a
pancake J i.345; DhA i.367; VvA 123; Mhvs 35, 67.
210
Kaplaka
Kappaka
savaa savaahyi vivaa vivaahyi A ii.142; often abbreviated to savaa vivaa D i.14; It 15; freq. in
formula ekampijti, etc. Vin iii.4=D iii.51, 111= It 99. On
pubbanta & aparanta, past & future kappas see D i.12 sq.
pahama kappe at the beginning of the world, once upon a
time (cp. atte) J i.207. When kappa stands by itself, a Mah
kappa is understood: DA i.162. A whole, complete kappa is
designated by kevala Sn pp. 18=46 125; Sn 517; also dgha
S ii.181; Sdhp 257. For similes as to the enormous length of
a kappa see S ii.181 & DA i.164=PvA 254. acc. kappa
adv.: for a long time D ii.103=115= Ud 62, quot. at DA i.103;
Vin ii.198; It 17; Miln 108; mayi yukappa J i.119, cp. Miln
141. Cp. sankappa.
-tta one who has gone beyond time, an Arahant Sn 373.
-vasesa (acc.) for the rest of the kappa, in kappa v k
vasesa v D ii.117=A iv.309=Ud 62; Miln 140: -yuka
(one) whose life extends over a kappa Mhvs v.87; -uhna
arising at or belonging to the (end of a) kappa: aggi the fire
which destroys the Universe J ii.397; iii.185; iv.498; v.336;
vi.554; Vism 304; kla the time of the end of the world J
v.244; uhna (by itself) the end of the world J i.4=Vism
415; -kata on which a kappa, i. e. smudge, has been made,
ref. to the cvara of a bhikkhu (see above) Vin i.255; iv.227,
286; DA i.103; -()jaha (one) who has left time behind, free
from sasra, an Arahant Sn 1101 (but expld at Nd2 s. v., see
also DA i.103, as free from dve kapp: dihi taha). -jla
the consumption of the kappa by fire, the end of a kappa Dpvs
i.61. -ha staying there for a kappa, i. e. in purgatory in
pyiko nerayiko + atekiccho, said of Devadatta Vin ii.202,
206; A iii.402 iv.160; It 11 85. -hyin lasting a whole cycle, of a vimna Th 1, 1190. -hika enduring for an aeon:
kibbisa (of Devadatta) Vin ii.198=204; (cp. Vin. Texts iii.254)
slarukkha J v.416; see also hitakappi Pug 13. -hitika
id. DhA i.50 (vera); Miln 108 (kamma). ("sabbe pi magga
samangino puggal hita kappino.") -hiya- =prec. A
v.75; J i.172, 213; v.33; Miln 109, 214. rukkha the tree that
lasts for a kappa, ref. to the cittapal, the pied trumpet tree
in the abode of the Asuras J i.202; -nibbatta originated at the
beginning of the k. (appl. to the flames of purgatory) J v.272;
-parivaa the evolution of a k; the end of the world Dpvs i.59;
-pdapa=rukkha Mhbv 2; -rukkha a wishing tree, magical tree, fulfilling all wishes; sometimes fig. J vi.117, 594;
Vism 206; PvA 75, 176, 121; VvA 32 (where combd with cintmai); DhA iv.208; -lat a creeper like the kapparukkha
VvA 12; -vinsaka (scil. aggi): the fire consuming the world
at the end of a k. Vism 414 sq.; (mahmegho) DhA iii.362;
-samaa an ascetic acc. to precepts, an earnest ascetic J vi.60
(cp. samaa kappa); -halhala "the k uproar," the uproar near the end of a kalpa J i.47.
211
Kappaka
Kabara
Kappu (nt.)=kappa in the dialect used by Makkhali Gosla, presumably the dialect of Vesli, D i.54; DA i.164 (a Burmee
MS. reads kappi, and so do Pv iv.332 ; PvA 254).
Kappra (m. & nt.) [cp. Sk. karpra] camphor: (a) the plant J
vi.537. (b) the resinous exudation, the prepared odoriferant
substance (cp. kaukapphala) J ii.416=DhA iii.475; Miln 382;
Dvs v.50.
Kappeti [Der. from kappa, cp. Sk. kpa shape, form; *qrep
caus. from. fr. *qer=Sk. kr, karoti to shape, to make, cp.
karoti] to cause to fit, to create, build, construct, arrange, prepare, order.
I. lit. 1. in special sense: to prepare, get done, i. e. harness:
J i.62; plait DA i.274, an offering (yaa) Sn 1043; i. e. to
trim etc. M ii.155; J i.223; Mhvs 25, 64. 2, generally (to be
translated according to the meaning of accompanying noun),
to make, get up, carry on etc. (=Fr. passer), viz. iriypatha
to keep one's composure Th i.570; J v.262; Bdhd 33; jvita:
to lead one's life PvA 3, 4, 13; divvihra to take the noonday rest Mhvs 19, 79; nisajja to sit down Vin iii.191; vsa,
savsa to make one's abode D ii.88; Sn 283; PvA 36, 47;
savsa to have (sexual) intercourse with J iii.448; Mhvs
5, 212; PvA 6; seyya: to lie down, to make one's bed Pug
55 etc. (acelaka passage=D i.166).
II. fig. 1. in special sense: to construct or form an opinion, to conjecture, to think Sn 799; DA i.103; 2. generally: to ordain, prescribe, determine J v.238 (=say vidahati)
Caus. II. kapppeti to cause to be made in all senses of
kappeti; e. g. Vin ii.134 (massu k. to get one's beard done);
J v.262 (hatthiynni k. to harness the elephant cars); DA
i.147 (paca hatthinik satni k. harness the 500 elephants).
Pass. kappiyati in ppr. kappiyamna getting harnessed J i.62.
212
Kabara
Kambala
Kamati [kram, Dhtp. expld by padavikkhepe; ppr. med. kamamna S i.33; Sn 176; Intens. cankamati.] to walk. (I) lit. 1.
c. loc. to walk, travel, go through: dibbe pathe Sn 176; ariye
pathe S i.33; kse D i.212=M i.69=A iii.17; 2. c. acc. to
go or get to, to enter M ii.18; J vi.107; Pv i.12 (sagga) (II)
fig. 1. to succeed, have effect, to affect M i.186; J v.198; Miln
198; 2. to plunge into, to enter into A ii.144; 3. impers.
to come to (c. dat) S iv.283.
an emerald; both are prob. varieties of the cat's eye VvA 167,
304.
Kabala (m., nt.) [cp. Sk. kavala BSk. kavaa Divy 290 (+lopa),
298, 470] a small piece (=lopa PvA 70), a mouthful, always
appl. to food, either solid (i. e. as much as is made into a
ball with the fingers when eating), or liquid Vin ii.214; It 18=J
iii.409; iv.93; Dh 324; Miln 180, 400; Bdhd 69; DhA ii.65;
PvA 39; Mhvs 19, 74. Kabale kabale on every morsel J i.68;
Miln 231; -sakabala appl. to the mouth, with the mouth full
of food Vin ii.214; iv. 195; Sometimes written kabala.
-vacchedaka choosing portions of a mouthful, nibbling
at a morsel Vin ii.214; iv.196.
Kamalin (adj.) [fr. kamala] rich in lotus, covered with lotuses (of
a pond) in kamalin kmuka "the lover of lotuses," Ep. of
the Sun Mhbv. 3 (v. l. smika perhaps to be preferred).
Kama [fr. kram, cp. Vedic krama () step, in uru, BSk. krama
reprieve, Divy 505] 1. (nt.) going, proceeding, course,
step, way, manner, e. g. sabbatth'vihatakkama "having a
course on all sides unobstructed" Sdhp 425; vahana process of development Bdhd 96 pailoma (going) the opposite
way Bdhd 106; cp. also Bdhd 107, 111. a fivefold kama or
process (of development or division), succession, is given at
Vism 476 with uppattik, pahna, patipattik, bhmik, desank, where they are illustrated by examples. Threefold applied to updna at Vism 570 (viz. uppattik, pahnak, desank) 2. oblique cases (late and technical) "by way of
going," i. e. in order or in due course, in succession: kamato
Vism 476, 483, 497; Bdhd 70, 103; kamena by & by, gradually Mhvs 3, 33; 5, 136; 13, 6; Dvs i.30; SnA 455; Bdhd 88;
yathkkama Bdhd 96. 3. (adj.) () having a certain
way of going: catukkama walking on all fours (=catuppda)
Pv i.113 .
Kambala
Kamma
214
Kamma
Kamma
J. i.218, 219.
3. (Specialised) an "act" in an ecclesiastical sense; proceedings, ceremony, performed by a lawfully constituted
chapter of bhikkhus Vin i.49, 53, 144, 318; ii.70, 93; v.220
sq.; Khus J.P.T.S. 1883, 101. At these formal functions a motion is put before the assembly and the announcement of it is
called the atti Vin i.56, after which the bhikkhus are asked
whether they approve of the motion or not. If this question
is put once, it is a attidutiyakamma Vin ii.89; if put three
times, a atticatuttha Vin i.56 (cp. Vin. Texts i.169 n2 ). There
are 6 kinds of official acts the Sangha can perform: see Vin
i.317 sq.; for the rules about the validity of these ecclesiastical functions see Vin i.312 333 (cp. Vin T. ii.256 285).
The most important ecclesiastical acts are: apalokanakamma,
ukkhepanya uposatha tajjaniya tassappiyyasik nissaya, patikaraya, paipucchkaraya paisraiya
pabbjaniya, sammukhkaraya. In this sense: kamma karoti (w. gen.) to take proceedings against Vin i.49,
143, 317; ii.83, 260; kamma garahati to find fault with proceedings gone through Vin ii.5; kamma paippassambheti to
revoke official proceedings against a bhikkhu Vin iii.145.
4. In cpds.: -dhihyaka superintendent of work,
inspector Mhvs 5, 174; 30, 98; -dhipateyya one whose
supremacy is action Miln 288; -rambha commencement of
an undertaking Mhvs 28, 21; -raha (a) entitled to take part
in the performance of an "act" Vin iv.153; v.221; -rma (a)
delighting in activity D ii.77; A iv.22; It 71, 79; -rmat
taking pleasure in (worldly) activity D ii.78=A iv.22, cp. Vbh
381; A iii.116, 173, 293 sq., 330, 449; iv.22 sq., 331; v.163;
It 71; vadna a tale of heroic deeds J vi.295; -kara or
kra: used indiscriminately. 1. (adj.) doing work, or active, in puriso dso+pubbuhy "willing to work" D i.60 et
sim. (=DA i.168: analaso). A i.145; ii.67; Vv 754 ; 2. (n.)
a workman, a servant (a weaver?) usually in form ds ti v
pess ti v kammakar ti v Vin i.243; D i.141=Pug 56 (also
kr); A ii.208; iii.77, 172; Th 2, 340; J i.57. Also as ds
pess kkr A iii.37=iv.265, 393, and ds k kr Vin i.240,
272; ii.154; D iii.191; S i.92; a handyman J i.239; Miln
378; (f) - a female servant Vin ii.267; kra Vin iv.224, kr
Dhs A98=VvA 73 (appl. to a wife); -karaa 1. working,
labour, service J iii.219; PvA 120; DA i.168; 2. the effects of
karma J i.146; -karan and kra see below; -kma liking work, industrious; a lazy A iv.93=J ii.348; -kraka a
workman, a servant DA i.8; Mhvs 30, 42; Nd2 427; a sailor
J iv.139; -garu bent on work Miln 288; -ccheda the interruption of work J i.149; 246; iii.270; -jta sort of action J
v.24 (=kammam eva); -dhura (m. nt.) draught work J
i.196; -dheyya work to be performed, duty A iv.285=325; cp.
J vi.297; -dhoreyya "fit to bear the burden of action" Miln
288 (cp. Mil. trsl. ii.140); -niketav having action as one's
house or temple ibid.; -nipphdana accomplishing the business J vi.162; -ppatta entitled to take part in an eccles. act
Vin i.318; v.221; -bahula abounding in action (appl. to the
world of men) Miln 7; -mla the price of the transaction Miln
334; -rata delighting in business D ii.78; It 71; -vatthu objects, items of an act Vin v.116; -vc the text or word of
an official Act. These texts form some of the oldest literature
and are embodied in the Vinaya (cp. Vin i.317 sq.; iii.174, 176;
iv.153, etc.). The number of officially recognized k is eleven,
215
Kamma
Kamma
nr what (deed) has this woman done? Pv i.92 ; tass katakamma pucchi he asked what had been done by her PvA 37, 83,
etc. with ref. to the Future: k. ktabba hoti I have an
obligation, under 8 kustavatthni D iii.255=A iv.332; cattri
kammni katt hoti "he performs the 4 obligations" (of gahapati) A ii.67.
2. (Subjective) (a) doing in general, acting, action, deed;
var. kinds of doings enum. under micchjva D i.12 (santikamma, paidhi, etc.); tassa kammassa katatt through (the
performance of) that deed D iii.156; dukkara kamma
kubbata he who of those who act, acts badly S i.19; abhabbo ta kamma ktum incapable of doing that deed S
iii.225; sacetanika k. deed done intentionally M iii.207; A
v.292 sq.; pamakata k. D i.251=S iv.322. katara k
karonto aha niraya na gaccheyya? how (i. e. what doing) shall I not go to Niraya? J iv.340; ya kici sithila
k... na ta hoti mahapphala... S i.49=Dh 312=Th 1, 277;
kadariya a stingy action PvA 25; k. classed with sippa, vijj caraa D iii.156; kni kni samm niviha established slightly in what doings? Sn 324; (b) Repeated action
in general, constituting a person's habit of acting or character
(cp. kata ii.1. a.); action as reflecting on the agent or bearing his characteristics; disposition, character. Esp. in phrase
kammena samanngata "endowed with the quality of acting
in such and such a manner, being of such and such character": thi dhammehi samanngato niraye nikkhitto "endowed
with (these) three qualites a man will go to N." A i.292 sq.;
asucin kyakena sam asucimanuss "bad people are those
who are of bad ways (or character)" Nd2 112; anavajja kya
k sam A ii.69 (cp. A iv.364); kya kammavac kammena sam kusalena (pabbajita) "a bhikkhu of good character
in deed and speech" D i.63; kya... (etc.) ksam bla (and
opp. paita) A ii.252 (cp. A i.102, 104); visamena kya (etc.)
k sam A i.154=iii.129; svajjena kya (etc.) k sam A
ii.135 kamma vijj ca dhammo ca sla jvitam uttama,
etena macc sujjhanti, na gottena dhanena v S i.34=55; M
iii.262, quoted at Vism 3, where k. is grouped with vipassan,
jhna, sla, satipahna as main ideals of virtue; kamman by
character, as opp. to jacc or jtiy, by birth: Sn 136; 164;
599; nihna manuss (of bad, wretched character) Sn 661;
manpena bahula kya (etc.) kammena A ii.87=iii.33,
131; and esp. with mett, as enum. under aparihniy and
sry dhamm D ii.80; A iii.288; mettena kya (etc.)
kammena D ii.144; iii.191; A v.350 sq. (c) Particular actions,
as manifested in various ways, by various channels of activity (k dvr), expressions of personality, as by deed, word
and thought (kyena, vcya, manas). Kamma
means action by hand (body) in formula vacas manas kamman ca Sn 330, 365; later specified by kya kamma, for
which kya kammanta in some sense (q. v.), and complementing vac k mano k; so in foll. combns : citte
arakkhite kya k pi arakkhita hoti (vac mano) A i.261
sq.; ya nu kho aha ida kyena k kattukmo ida me
kya k attabydhya pi savatteyya... "whatever deed I
am going to do with my hands (I have to consider:) is this deed,
done by my hands, likely to bring me evil?" M i.415; kya
(vac etc.) kamma, which to perform & to leave (sevitabba and a) A i.110=iii.150; as anulomika A i.106; sabba
kya k (vac mano) Buddhassa nuparivattati "all
manifestation of deed (word & thought) are within the knowledge of Buddha" Nd2 235; ya lobhapakata kamma karoti
kyena v vcya v manas v tassa vipka anubhoti... Nett
37; kin nu kyena v m dukkaa kata what evil have you
done by body, word or thought? Pv ii.13 and freq.; ekna
tisa kyakammni Bdhd 49. (d) Deeds characterized as
evil (ppa kammni, ppni k, ppakni k; ppakamma
adj., cp. ppa kammanta adj.). ppakamma: n'atthi loke
raho nma p pakubbato "there is no hiding ( place) in this
world for him who does evil" A i.149; so p o dummedho
jna dukkaa attano... "he, afflicted with (the result of)
evil doing..." A iii.354; p pavahento ibid.; ya
p kata sabban ta idha vedanya "whatever wrong I
have done I have to suffer for" A v.301; pabbajitvna kyena
p vivajjay "avoid evil acting" Sn 407; nissasaya
p ... "undoubtedly there is some evil deed (the cause
of this) i. e. some evil karma Pv iv.161 . ppa kamma: appamattikam pi p k kata ta ena niraya upaneti "even a small sin brings man to N." A i.249, tay v'eta
p k kata tva eva etassa vipka paisavedissasi "you
yourself have done this sin you yourself shall feel its consequences" M iii.180= A i.139, na hi p kata k sajju khra va
muccati Dh 71=Nett 161; yassa p kata k kusalena pithyati so ima loka pabhseti "he will shine in this world who
covers an evil deed with a good one" M ii.104= Dh 173=Th
1, 872; p ssa k ssa samatikkamo "the overcoming of
evil karma" S iv.320; pssa kssa kiriyya "in the performance
of evil" M i.372; pni kni kara blo na bujjhati "he, like
a fool, awaketh not, doing sinful deeds" Dh 136=Th 1, 146;
pp pehi kehi niraya upapajjare "sinners by virtue of evil
deeds go to N." Dh 307; te ca pesu kesu abhiham upadissare Sn 140. -ppakni kammni: pna kna hetu
cora rjno ghetv vividh kammakra krenti "for his
evil deeds the kings seize the thief and have him punished"
A i.48; ye loke pni k karonti te vividh kamma kra
karyanti "those who do evil deeds in this world, are punished
with various punishments" M iii.186=A i.142; k karoti p
kyena vc uda cetas v Sn 232 (=kh 190); similarly Sn
127; karont p k ya hoti kaukapphala, "doing evil
which is of bitter fruit" Dh 66= S i.57=Nett 131; kehi pehi
Sn 215. In the same sense: na ta k kata sdhu ya
katv anutappati "not well done is that deed for which he feels
remorse" S i.57=Dh 67=Nett 132; veni kammni karonti
(with ref. to sangha bheda) A v.74; adhammikakammni
A i.74; asuci kni (as suggested by 5 and attributes: asuci,
duggandha, etc.) A iii.269; svajjakammni (as deserving Niraya) (opp. avajja > sagga) A ii.237; kammni nantarikni
deeds which have an immediate effect; there are five, enumd
at Vbh 378. (e) deeds characterized as good or meritorious (kusala, bhaddaka, etc.) ta k katv kusala sukhudraya D iii.157; pua kammo of meritorious (character)
S i.143; kusalehi kehi vippayutt carati viacariy Ps i.80;
kusalassa kssa katatt Vbh 173 sq.; 266 sq.; 297 sq.; kusala
k paccayni Bdhd 12; puakamma, merit, compd with
kapparukkha in its rewarding power VvA 32 (cp. punubhva nissandena "in consequence of their being affected
with merit" PvA 58) Cp. also cpds.: kamma kilesa, k
hna, k patha; klakkhaa k samdna.
3. (Interaction) A. in subjective relation; (a) character of
216
Kamma
Kamma
Kamma
Kamma
vimnni "created by the power of their result of good conduct" VvA 127 ; k nubhvena by the working of k. PvA
77; k -vega ukkhitt (same) PvA 284; yath kamm -paga
"undergoing the respective consequences (of former deeds) affected with respective karma: see cpds., and cp. yath kamma gato gone (into a new existence) according to his karma
J i.153 & freq.; see cpds.; k-sarikkhat "the karma likeness," the correspondence of cause and consequence: ta k
s vibhventa suvaamaya ahosi "this, manifesting
the karma correspondence, was golden" VvA 6; so also
k-sarikkhaka, in accordance with their deed, retributionary,
of kamma phala, the result of action: tassa kamma
sarikkhaka kammaphala hoti "for her the fruit of action
became like action," i. e. the consequence was according
to her deed. PvA 206; 284; 258; as nt.: k s pan'assa
udapdi "the retribution for him has come" DhA i.128; J
iii.203; cp. also Miln 40 sq.; 65 sq.; 108. (d) The working and exhaustion of karma, its building up by new karma
(nava) and its destruction by expiration of old karma (pura).
The final annihilation of all result (kkhaya) constitutes Arahantship. nava>pura kamma: as aparipakka, not ripe,
and paropakka, ripe D i.54=S iii.212; as paca kammuno
satni, etc. ibid.; kyo... pura k abhisankhata ("our
body is an accumulation of former karma") S ii.65=Nd2 680
D; see also A ii.197; Pv iv.71 ; PvA 1, 45; Nett 179; and
with simile of the snake stripping its slough (porassa kssa
parikkhatt... santo yath kamma gacchati) PvA 63.
k nirodha or kkhaya: so... na tva kla karoti yva na
ta ppakamma vyanti hoti "He does not die so long as the
evil karma is unexhausted" A i.141; nava purni kni
desissmi k nirodha k nirodha gmini ca paipada "the new and the old karma I shall demonstrate to you,
the destruction of k. and the way which leads to the destruction
of k." S iv.132 A iii.410;... navna kna akara setughta; iti k kkhay dukkhakkhayo... (end of misery through
the end of karma) A i.220=M ii.214; same Ps i.55 57; cp.
also A i.263; Nd2 411 (expl. as kamma paryaa vipka
p: "gone beyond karma and its results," i. e. having attained Nibbna). See also the foll. cpds.: k bhisankhsa,
varaa, kkhaya, nibandhana.
-dhikata ruled by karma, Miln 67, 68; ena by the influence of k. ibid. -dhiggahita gripped by karma Miln 188,
189; -nurpa (adj.) (of vipka) according to one's karma
J iii.160; DA i.37; -bhisankhra (3 B) accumulation of k.
Nd2 116, 283, 506. -bhisanda in ena in consequence of
k. Miln 276, cp. J.P.T.S. 1886, 146; -raha see I.; -yatana
1. work Vbh 324, cp. Miln 78; 2. action=kamma J iii.542;
cp. J iv.451, 452. -yhana the heaping up of k. Vism 530;
DhsA 267, 268; cp. k yhi Miln 214 and J.P.T.S. 1885, 58.
-varaa the obstruction caused by k. A iii.436= Pug 13=Vbh
341 (in defin. of satt abhabb: kammvaraena samanngat,
kiles, vipk..), Kvu 341; Miln 154, 155; Vism 177 (=nantariya kamma); -paga in yatha kamm page satte: the
beings as undergoing (the consequences of) their respective
kamma (3B) in form. cavamne upapajjamne hne pate suvae dubbae sugate duggate... pajnti (or passati) Vin
iii.5=D i.82=S ii.122 (214)= v.266=A iv.178=v.13 (35, 200,
340)=Vbh 344; abbreviated in M iii.178; Nett. 178; see also
similar Sn 587; Bdhd 111; -upacaya accumulation of k. Kvn
Kamma
Kammanta
own karma A iii.186; Dhs 1366; Vbh 324; ta as adj.; qualifying a, i. e. the knowledge of the individual, specific nature
of karma Dhs 1366, Vbh 328.
Kammaka (adj.) [fr. kamma] connected with, dependt on karma
Miln 137 (a).
Kammanya, iya & kammaa (adj.) "workable," fit for work,
dexterous, ready, wieldy. Often of citta "with active mind"
in formula vigatpakkilesa mudubhta k hita nejjappatta
D i.76, etc.=M i.22= Pug 68; S iii.232; v.92, 233; A i.9;
DhA i.289; Bdhd 101, expld at Vism 377 (iya). Further of
citta (mudu ca kammaa ca pabhassara ca) A i.257 (reads
iya)=Vism 247; of upekh and sati Nd2 661, cp. Bdhd 104;
of kya & citta Bdhd 121. Said of a lute=workable, ready
for playing A iii.375=Vin i.182. Of the body A iv.335.
a not ready, sluggish A iv.333; Vism 146. kammaabhva the state of being workable, readiness, of kya Dhs 46,
of vedan, etc., Dhs 326, of citta DhsA 130, see next; a unworkable condition DhsA 130.
Kammaat (f.) [abstr. fr. prec.] workableness, adaptability,
readiness, appl. to the wood of the sandal tree (in simile) A
i.9; said of kya and citta in connection with kammaatta
kbhvo kmudut: Dhs 46, 47=326=641=730; cp. Dhs 585;
similar Bdhd 16, 20, 71; DhsA 136, 151 (=kammasdut) a
unworkableness, inertness, unwieldiness, sluggishness Miln
300; Nett 86, 108, cp. Dhs 1156, 1236; DhsA 255; expld as
cittagelaa DhsA 377; as cetaso lnatta Vbh 373.
Kammanta [Sk. karmnta; kamma+anta, cp. anta 1 4.] 1. doing, acting, working; work, business, occupation, profession.
paicchanna of secret acting Sn 127= Vbh 357; as being punished in Niraya A i.60; S iv.180; as occupation esp. in pl. kammant: S v.45=135; DhA i.42 (kammant nappavattanti, no
business proceeds, all occupations are at a standstill); ankula
Sn 262=Kh v.5; abbhantar k u ti v, kapps ti v as
housework, falling to the share of the wife A iii.37=iv.365;
khetta occupation in the field A iii.77; see also D i.71; M iii.7;
S i.204; Miln 9, 33; and below; as place of occupation: Sn p.
13, PvA 62. Phrases: adhihti to look after the business
A i.115; PvA 141; jahati give up the occupation S iv.324; PvA
133; payojeti to do or carry on business D i.71; ii.175;
iii.66, 95; A iii.57; pavatteti to set a business on foot PvA
42 (and vicreti: PvA 93); savidahati to provide with
work A iv.269=272. Mhvs vi.16. 2. deed, action in ethical
sense= kamma, character, etc., Kh 136 (k=kamma); ppa
doing wrong Pv iv.81; iv.161; J vi.104 (opp. pua); as specified by kya vac mano A v.292 sq.; VvA 130 (in parisuddha kya kammantat); dhammik k M ii.191; kia
k (evam ) of such character S i.204; kurra k (adj.)
of cruel character A iii.383=Pug 56 (in def. of puggalo orabbhiko); samm of right doing, opp. micch, as constituting
one element of character as pertaining to "Magga" (: q. v.) D
ii.216; S ii.168; v.1; A iii.411; Bdhd 135; expl. as kya
kamma (=sla 1 3) at S v.9=Vbh 105; Vbh 235; as kya
duccaritehi rati virati... Vbh 106.
-dhihyika superintendent of work DhA i.393; hna: 1. the spot where the ceremonies of the Ploughing
Festival take place J i.57; 2. the common ground of a village, a village bazaar J iv.306; -dsa a farm servant J
219
Kammanta
Karaka
i.468; -bheri the drum announcing the (taking up of) business DhA iii.100; -vipatti "failure of action," evil doing A
i.270 opp. -sampad "perfection of action, right doing" A
i.271; -savidhna the providing of work D iii.191 (one of
the 5 duties of the gahapati).
Kamyat ( -) & kammat (Nd) [fr. km] wish, desire, longing for, striving after; with inf. or equivalent: kathetu VvA
18; mucitu (+paisankh) Ps i.60, 65; Bdhd 123; asotu,
adahu and adassana Vbh 372. Esp. in definitions, as
of chanda: kattu Vbh 208; Bdhd 20; of japp: pucikat
sdhu Vbh 351; 361=Dhs 1059; Nd2 s. v. tahii (: has the
better reading mucchaci kat asdhu; v. l. pucchaci; both
Vbh and Dhs have sdu in text which should be corrected to
asdhu; see detail under pucikat); of mna; ketu Nd2 505;
Dhs 1116=1233; Vbh 350 sq.; Bdhd 24; of lapan: pu (v.
l. cu) Vbh 246= 352. As abl. (=kamy) in dassana S
i.193=Th 1, 1241; Sn 121 (expl. as icchya SnA 179). Cp.
kammaat & kamma sdut.
220
Karaka
Karavka
Karayat (f.) [abstr. fr. prec.] the fact that something has to
be performed, an obligation Vin ii.89, 93; sa being left with
something to do Miln 140.
Karaa (m. nt.) [cp. Sk. karaa, ka, ik. The Dhtumajs expls k. by "bhjanatthe"] 1. a basket or box of
wicker work Mhvs 31, 98; Dvs v.60; DhA iii.18; 2.
the cast skin, slough of a serpent D i.77 (=DA i.222 ahi
kacuka) cp. Dial. i.88.
Karaaka [fr. last] a box, basket, casket, as dussa M i.215=S
v.71=A iv.230 (in simile); S iii.131; v.351 cp. Pug 34; J i 96;
iii.527; v.473 (here to be changed into koraaka); DA i.222
(vilva); SnA 11.
Karamanda [etym.?] a shrub Vism 183 (+kanavra).
Karati1 [cp. Sk. kntati] to cut, injure, hurt; in "karato krayato
chindato chedpayato..." D i.52=M i.516; S iii.208.
Karati2 (t) (f.) a superior kind of bean, the Dolichos catjang J
vi.536 (=rjamsa).
Karabha the trunk of an elephant; in karabhoru (k+ru) (a
woman) with beautiful thighs Mhbv 29.
Karamara see Kara.
Karaa (karala) a wisp of grass (tia) DhA iii.38; DhsA 272.
Karav [cp. Sk. kala kaha cuckoo, & kalavinka sparrow] the
Indian cuckoo J vi.539.
Karavka same J v.204, 416; Vv 364 ; Vism 112, 206; VvA 166,
219.
-bhin speaking like the cuckoo, i. e. with a clear
and melodious voice, one of the mahpurisa lakkhaas D
ii.20=iii.144=173=M ii.137, etc.; cp. Dial. ii.17 n. and BSk.
kalavika manoja bhin Sp. Av. i.371 (Index p. 225,
221
Karavka
Karoti
Karuyati [v. den. fr. karu; cp. BSk. karuyati Divy 105] to
feel pity for, to have compassion on Sn 1065 (yamna; expl.
by Nd2 as anuddayamno anurakkh anuggah anukamp);
Vbh 273; Vism 314. Der. yan compassionateness Vbh
87=273 (and yitatta ibid.).
Karu (f.) [cp. Vedic karua nt. (holy) action; Sk. karu, fr.
k. As adj. karua see under 3.] pity, compassion. Karu is
one of the 4 qualities of character significant of a human being
who has attained enfranchisement of heart (ceto vimutti) in
the 4 sentiments, viz. mett k. upekh mudit Freq. found in
this formula with sahagatena cetas. The first two qualities
are complementary, and SnA 128 (on Sn 73) explains k as
"ahita dukkh panaya kmat," the desire of removing bane and sorrow (from one's fellowmen), whilst mett is
expl. as "hita sukh panayakmat," the desire of bringing (to one's fellow men) that which is welfare and good.
Other definitions are "paradukkhe sati sdhna hadayakampana karot ti" Bdhd 21; "sattesu k karuyan karuyitatta karu cetovimutti" as expl. of avihisa dhtu Vbh 87;
paradukkhsahana ras Vism 318. K sahagatena cetas
denotes the exalted state of compassion for all beings (all that
is encompassed in the sphere of one's good influence: see ctuddisa "extending over the 4, i. e. all, directions): D i.251;
iii.78, 50, 224; S iv.296, 322, 351; v.115; A i.183, 196; ii.129,
184; iii.225; v.300, 345; J ii.129; Nd2 on Sn 73; Vbh 273, 280;
Dhs 1258. The def. of karu at Vism 318 runs "paradukkhe
sati sdhna hadaya kampana karoti." Frequently referred to as an ideal of contemplation (in conn. w. bhvan
& jhna), so in "karua cetovimutti bhveti" S v.119; A
i.38; v.360; in k cetovimutti bhvit bahul kat, etc. D
iii.248; A iii.291; iv.300; in k sahagata saddhindriya
A i.42; unspecified S v.131; A iii.185; Nett 121, 124; Ps i.8;
222
Karoti
Kalala
Kalala
Kalita
Kalpaka 1. a band, string (of pearls) Vin ii.315; Mhvs 30, 67.
2. a bundle, group J i.239.
Kalpin (adj.) [fr. kalpa] having a quiver J vi.49 (acc. pl. ine).
f. kalpin a bundle, sheaf (yava) S iv.201; ii.114 (naa).
Kalbuka (nt.) [cp. Sk. kalpaka] a girdle, made of several
strings or bands plaited together Vin ii.136, 144, 319;
Kalya a kind of pea, the chick pea M i.245 (kaya); S i.150; A
v.170; Sn p. 124; J ii.75 (=varaka, the bean Phaseolus trilobus,
and klarja msa); J iii.370; DhA i,319. Its size may be
gathered from its relation to other fruits in ascending scale at
A v.170=S i.150= Sn p. 124 (where the size of an ever
increasing boil is described). It is larger than a kidney bean
(mugga) and smaller than the kernel of the jujube (kolahi).
-matta of the size of a chick pea S i.150; A v.170; Sn
p. 124 (); J iii.370; DhA i.319.
224
Kalita
Kallaka
Kalusa [cp. Sk. kalua] muddy, dirty, impure; in bhva the state
of being turbid, impure, obscured (of the mind) DA i.275.
Kalevara see kaebara.
Kalya see kalla; -rpa pleased, glad Sn 680, 683; a not pleased
Sn 691.
Kalyat (f.) 1. the state of being sound, able, pliant J ii.12.
2. pleasantness, agreeableness, readiness, in a opp. (appld to
citta) Dhs 1156; DhsA 377 (=gilnabhva).
Kalya (& kalla) [Vedic kalya] 1. (adj.) beautiful, charming; auspicious, helpful, morally good. Syn. bhaddaka PvA 9,
116) and kusala (S ii.118; PvA 9, 122); opp. ppa (S i.83; M
i.43; PvA 101, 116 and under mitta). kata=katpakra PvA
116 Appld to dhamma in phrase di majjhe pariyosne D
i.62 and ; S v.152; Sn p. 103; VvA 87; Vism 213 sq. (in var.
applications); etc. As m. one who observes the slapada
(opp. ppa, who violates it) A ii.222, cp. k mitt=sldhi
adhik SnA 341. S iv.303; v.2, 29, 78; A iii.77; iv.361;
Vin ii.8, 95; J i.4; Miln 297; kata (opp. kata ppa) of
good, virtuous character, in phrase k katakusala, etc. It 25,
etc. (see kata ii.1 a). k of kitti ( sadda) D i.49 (=DA i.146
seha); S iv.374; v.352; of jhna (tividha) Bdhd 96, 98, 99;
of mitt, friends in general (see also cpd.) Dh 78 (na bhaje ppake mitte... bhajetha m kalye), 116, 375 (=suddhjvin);
Sn 338. 2. (nt.) (a) a good or useful thing, good things Vin
i.117; A iii.109; cp. bhadra. (b) goodness, virtue, merit,
meritorious action J v.49 (kaly here nt. nom. in sense of
pl.; cp. Vedic nt.), 492; karoti to perform good deeds S
i.72; A i.138 sq.; Vin i.73; PvA 122. (c) kindness, good service J i.378; iii.12 (=upakra), 68 ( karoti). (d) beauty,
attraction, perfection; enumd as 5 kalyni, viz. kesa,
masa, ahi, chavi, vaya i. e. beauty of hair, flesh, teeth,
skin, youth J i.394; DhA i.387.
-ajjhsaya the wish or intention to do good DhA i.9;
-dhimuttika disposed towards virtue, bent on goodness S
ii.154, 158; It 70, 78; Vbh 341; -kma desiring what is good
A iii.109; -krin (a) doing good, virtuous (opp. ppa) S
i.227, cp. J ii.202=iii.158; DhsA 390; (m.) who has rendered
a service J vi.182; -carita walking in goodness, practising
virtue Vbh 341; -jtika one whose nature is pleasantness,
agreeable J iii.82; -dassana looking nice, lovely, handsome
Sn 551=Th 1, 821 (+kacanasannibhattaca); -dhamma (1) of
virtuous character, of good conduct, virtuous Vin i.73; iii.133;
S v.352; Pug 26; It 96; Pv iv.135 ; Miln 129; DhA i.380; J
ii.65 (=sundara), PvA 230 (=sundara sla); slav+k (of
bhikkhu, etc.) M i.334; S iv.303; PvA 13. kena katara
perfectly good or virtuous A ii.224. (2) the Good Doctrine
DhA i.7. -t the state of having a virtuous character A ii.36;
-paa "wise in goodness" possessed of true wisdom Th 1,
506; It 97; -paipad the path of goodness or virtue, consisting of dna, uposathakamma & dasakusalakammapath J
iii.342; -paibha of happy retort, of good reply A iii.58,
cp. Miln 3; -ppaka good and bad J v.238; vi.225; Kvu 45;
(nt.) goodness and evil J v.493; -pti one who delights in
what is good Sn 969; -bhattika having good, nice food Vin
ii.77; iii.160 (of a householder); -mitta 1. a good companion, a virtuous friend, an honest, pure friend; at Pug 24 he
225
Kallaka
Kas
Kavandha (m. nt.) [cp. Sk. kavandha & kabandha] 1. the (headless) trunk of the body, endowed with the power of motion Vin
iii.107; cp. S ii.260 (assaka); Miln 292; DhA i.314. 2. a
headless dwarf, whose head has been crushed down into his
body J v.424, 427 (cp. the story of Dhanu, the Rkasa who
was punished by having his head and thighs forced into his
body, Raghuvasa xii.57).
Kava (m. nt.) 1. the panels of the door, the door proper, not
the aperture Vin ii.114, 120, 207, 208 (see Vin ii.148 for the
description of a door) iv.269, 304 (baddha =vasatha); J i.19;
Nd2 2351d ; Vism 28 (koa doorcorner). 2. dvra a door
post J i.63; ii.334; PvA 280. 3. a window Mhvs ix.17;
pameti to open the door Vin ii.114, 120, 207;
koeti to knock at the door D i.88 (=DA i.252); Vin ii.208.
akavaka (adj.) having no doors, doorless Vin ii.148, 154 (v.
l. for akkavta Text).
-piha the panels and posts of a door; the door and the
door posts Vin i.47, 48=ii.208, 218; -baddha "door
bound," closed, secure Vin iv.292 (see also above).
Karik (f.) [fr. last, lit. with protruding teeth] a kind of large
(female) elephant M 1. 178 (so read with v. l. for k). Cp.
kalra.
Kavi [Vedic kavi] a poet S i.38; ii.267; Dvs i.10; four classes
enumd at A ii.230 & DA i.95, viz. 1. cint an original p. 2.
suta one who puts into verse what he Las heard. 3. attha a
didactic p. 4. paibha an improvisor.
-kata composed by poets S ii.267; A i.72.
Kaingara=kalingara.
Kaimb(h)aka (cp. kaamba, kalamba) a mark used to keep the
interstices between the threads of the kahina even, when being
woven Vin ii.116, 317 (v. l. kaimpaka).
Kavya [cp. Vedic kavya wise; sacrificer] poetry; ballad, ode (cp.
kabba) J vi.213, 216.
-kra a poet J vi.216.
Kara the top sprout of a plant or tree, esp. of the bamboo and
cert. palm trees (e. g. coco nut tree) which is edible Sn
38 (vasa=veugumba Nd2 556 and p. 58); Th 1, 72; J i.74,
cp. iii.179; vi.26; Miln 201 (vasa); Vism 255 (vasa
cakkalaka, so read for kalira; KhA 50 at id. passage reads
kara daa).
-(c)chejja (nt.) "the cutting off of the sprout," a kind of
torture Miln 193, cp. Miln. trsl. i.270 and kadalccheda.
Kaviha [cp. kapittha] the elephant apple tree, Feronia elephantum J v.38 (vana).
Kasaka see kassaka.
Kasaa (metathesis of sakaa, cp. Trenckner, Miln p. 423) 1.
(adj.) bad, nasty; bitter, acrid; insipid, disgusting A i.72; J
ii.96; 159. 2. (m.) (a) fault, vice, defect M i.281; Ps ii.87.
(b) leavings, dregs VvA 288 (v. l. sakaa). (c) something bitter or nasty J ii.96; v.18. (d) bitter juice J ii.105
(nimba). sa faulty, wrong, bitter to eat, unpalatable Miln
119.
-daka insipid, tasteless water J ii.97.
Kaebara (: kale and kalevara) (m. & nt.) [cp. BSk. kaebara Av. . ii.26] 1. the body S i.62=A ii.48;=iv.429 =M
i.82; J ii.437, iii.96, 244; Vism 49, 230. 2. a dead body,
corpse, carcass; often in description of death: khandhna
bhedo kassa nikkhepo, D ii.355= M. i.49=Vbh 137; Th 2,
467; J iii.180, 511; v.459; Mhvs 2010 ; 3781 ; PvA 80. Cp.
kuapa. 3. the step in a flight of stairs M ii.92, cp. kalingara.
Kaop (=khaopi) f. 1. a vessel, basin, pot: see cpds. - 2. a basket, crate (=pacchi ThA 219; J v.252) M i.77, 342; S i.236=Th
2, 283 (where osenti is to be corr. to openti); J v.252. On
the form of the word (=karoi?) see Trenckner J.P.T.S. 1908,
109 and Davids, Dial. i.227. kaop (as khaop) is expld at
Pug A p. 231 as "ukkhal, pacchi v."
-mukha the brim of a pan or cooking vessel D i.166 =M
i.77=342=A i.295=ii.206 (kumbhi m+kaopim); -hattha
with a vessel or basket in his hand A iv.376.
Kas (f.) [Vedic ka] a whip Vin i.99 (in Uddna); M i.87, etc.;
226
Kas
Kahpaa
Kasya and Kasva [Derivation uncertain. The word first appears in the late Vedic form kaya, a decoction, distillation,
essence; used figy of evil. The old Pali form is kasva] 1. a
kind of paste or gum used in colouring walls Vin ii.151. 2.
an astringent decoction extracted from plants Vin i.201, 277;
J v.198. 3. (of taste), astringent DhS 629; Miln 65; DhA
ii.31. 4. (of colour) reddish yellow, orange coloured
Vin i.277. 5. (ethical) the fundamental faults (rga, dosa,
moha) A i.112; Dh 10; Vbh 368. -a faultless, flawless, in
akasvatta being without defect A i.112 (of a wheel, with
-sa ibid.); -sa faulty DhA i.82; -mah wicked J iv.387.
In cpds. both forms, viz. (kasya) -yoga an astringent remedy J v.198 (kasva ibid.); -rasa reddishyellow dye J ii.198;
(kasva) -daka an astringent decoction Vin i.205; -gandha
having a pungent smell Vin i.277; -rasa having an astringent
taste ibid.; -vaa of reddish yellow colour ibid.
Kassaka [fr.
kasati] a husbandman, cultivator, peasant,
farmer, ploughman D i.61 (k gahapatiko krakrako rsi
vahako); A i.241; A. i.229, 239 (the three duties of a
farmer); S i.172=Sn 76; iii.155 (v. l. for T. kasaka); iv. 314;
Vin iv.108; Bdhd 96; DA i.170; often in similes, e. g. Pv i.11 ;
ii.968 (likeness to the doer of good works); Vism 152, 284, 320.
-vaa (under) the disguise of a peasant S i.115 (of Mra).
Kassati [k] see ava, anu (aor. anvaksi), pari; otherwise
kasati; cp. also kissati.
Kassma fut. of karoti.
Kaha [cp. Vedic kuha; for a: u cp. kad.] interr. adv. where?
whither? Vin i.217; D i.151; Sn p. 106; J ii.7; iii.76; v.440.
k nu kho where then? D i.92; ii.143, 263.
Kahpaa [doubtful as regards etym.; the (later) Sk. krpaa
looks like an adaptation of a dial. form] 1. A square copper
coin M ii.163; A i.250; v.83 sq.; Vin ii.294; iii. 238; DhsA 280
(at this passage included under rajata, silver, together with
loha msaka, drumsaka and jatu msaka); S i.82; A
i.250; Vin ii.294; iv.249; J i.478, 483; ii.388; Mhvs 3014 . The
extant specimens in our museums weigh about 5/6 of a penny,
227
Kahpaa
Ktabba
Kca1 [Der. unknown. The word first occurs in the at Br. &
may well be non Aryan] a glass like substance made
of siliceous clay; crystal Vin i.190; ii.112 (cp. Divy 503, kcamai rock crystal). a not of glass or quartz, i. e.
pure, clear, flawless, appl. to precious stones D ii.244=J ii.418
(=akakkasa) Sn 476. In the same sense also MVastu i.164.
-ambha (nt.) red crystal J vi.268 (=rattamai); -maya
made of crystal, crystalline Vin i.190; ii.112.
Kka [onomat., cp. Sk. kka; for other onomat. relatives see
note on gala] the crow; freq. in similes: S i.124= Sn 448; J
i.164. Its thievish ways are described at DhA iii.352; said to
have ten bad qualities A v.149; J i.342; iii.126; kk v kulal v Vin iv.40. As bird (of the dead) frequenting places
of interment and cremation, often with other carcass eating animals (sigla, gijjha) Sn 201; PvA 198 (=dhanka); cp.
kkoa. In cpds. often used derisively. f. kk J ii.39,
150; iii.431.
-masaka "touching as much as a crow," attr. of a person
not enjoying his meals DhA iv.16; DhsA 404; -uepaka a
crow scarer, a boy under fifteen, employed as such in the
monastery grounds Vin i.79 cp. 371. -opam the simile of
the crow DhA ii.75. -orava "crow cawing," appld to angry
and confused words Vin i.239, cp. iv.82; -lka crows and
owls J ii.351; DhA i.50; Mhbv 15; -guyha (tall) enough to
hide a crow (of young corn, yava) J ii.174; cp. J. trsl. ii.122;
-na a crow's nest J ii.365; -pa "crow wisdom," i. e.
foolishness which leads to ruin through greed J v.255, 258;
cp. vi.358; -paanaka a deserted village, inhabited only by
crows J vi. 456; -pda crow's foot or footmark Vism 179 (as
pattern); -peyya "(so full) that a crow can easily drink of it,"
full to the brim, overflowing, of a pond: samatittika k "with
even banks and drinkable for crows" (i. e. with the water on
a level with the land) D i.244; S ii.134 (do.); D ii.89; M i.435;
A iii.27; J ii.174; Ud 90; cp. note to J. trsl. ii.122; PvA 202.
See also peyya. -bhatta "a crow's meal," i. e. remnants left
from a meal thrown out for the crows J ii.149; -vaa "crow
coloured" N. of a king Mhvs 2211 ; -vassa the cry of a crow
Vin ii.17; -ssa the head of a crow J ii.351; as adj.: having a
crow's head, appld to a fabulous flying horse D ii.174; cp. J
ii.129; -sra a "crow hero," appl. to a shameless, unconscientious fellow Dh 244; DhA iii.352; -ssaraka (having a
voice) sounding like a crow Vin i.115.
Kca2 [cp. Sk. kca & kja] a pingo, a yoke, a carrying-pole, usually made of bamboo, at both ends of which baskets are hung
(double pingo). Besides this there is a single pingo (ekato
kjo) with only one basket and "middle" p. (antar) with two
bearers and the basket suspended in the middle Vin ii.137; J
i.154; v.13, 293, 295 sq., 320, 345; PvA 168.
-daaka the pole of a pingo DA i.41.
Kcan (f.) [fr. kca2 ] balancing like carrying on a kca, fig.
deliberation, pondering Vbh 352=Vism 27.
Kcin (adj.) [fr. kca1 ], only neg. a free from quartz, free from
grit, flawless Vv 601 (=niddosa VvA 253).
Kja=kca2 , i. e. carrying pole M iii.148; J i.9; iii.325; v.200;
Dpvs xii.3; Mhvs 5, 24; DhA iv.232.
-koi the end of a carrying pole J i.9; v.200. -hraka
a pingo bearer DhA iv.128.
Ka-koacik [ka + koacik] a low term of abuse, "pudendum
virile & muliebre" Vin iv.7 (buddhagh iv.354: ktan ti purisa
nimitta); cp. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 89.
Ka (adj.) [cp. Sk. ka] blind, usually of one eye, occasionally
of both (see PugA 227) S i.94; Vin ii.90= A i.107=ii.85=Pug
51 (in expln of tamaparyaa purisa); Th 2, 438; J i.222 (one
eyed); vi.74 (of both eyes); DhA iii.71.
-kaccha Np. Sdhp 44; -kacchapa "the blind turtle" in
the well known parable of a man's chances of human rebirth after a state of punishment Th 2, 500 (=ThA 290); Miln
204; DhsA 60; cp. M iii.169=S v.455.
Ktabba (adj. n.) (grd. of karoti) that which ought to, can or
must be done (see karoti) J i.264, etc. Also as kattabba PvA
Kkacchati [derived by Fausbll fr. ks, to cough; by Trenckner fr. krath; by Childers & E. Mller fr. kath; should it not
228
Ktabba
Kma
30.
Kma
Kma
Kma
Kma
i.85; S i.74; -dhimutta, bent upon the enjoyment of sensual pleasures A iii.168; J vi.159; -nusrin pursuing worldly
pleasures J ii.117; -andha blinded by passion Ud 76=Th
1, 297; bhibh overcoming passions, Ep. of the Buddha D ii.274; -bhimukha bent upon lust, voluptuous PvA
3; -vacara "having its province in kma," belonging to the
realm of sensuous pleasures. This term applies to the eleven
grades of beings who are still under the influence of sensual
desires and pleasures, as well as to all thoughts and conditions
arising in this sphere of sensuous experience D i.34 (of the
soul, expld DA 120: cha k devapariypanna); J i.47; Dhs
1, 431; Ps 1, 84, 85, 101; Vbh 324; Vism 88, 372, 452 (rpa,
arpa, lokuttara), 493 (of indriyas), 574; PvA 138. kamma
an action causing rebirth in the six kma worlds Dhs 414,
418, 431; devat PvA 138 (+brahmdevat) and dev
the gods of the pleasure heavens J i.47; v.5; vi.99; Vism
392; or of the kmvacara devaloka J vi.586, bhmi
and loka the plane or world of kma Ps i.83; J vi.99; see
also avacara; -vacaraka belonging to the realm of kma J
vi.99; Sdhp 254 (ika); -assda the relish of sensual pleasures PvA 262; DA i.89, 311; -tura affected by passion,
love sick J iii.170; -rma pleasure loving A iv.438
(gih k bhog, rat, sammudit); -laya, the abode of
sensual pleasure (i. e. kma loka) S i.33=Sn 177; Sn 306;
-vaa the whirlpool of sensuality J ii.330; -sava the intoxication of passion, sensuality, lusts; def. as kmesu kma
chando, etc. (see above k chando) Vbh 364, 374; Dhs
1097; as the first of four impurities, viz. k, bhava, dihi,
avijj at Vin iii.5 (the detachment from which constitutes Arahantship); Vbh 373; Dhs 1096, 1448; as three (prec. without dihi) at It 49; Vbh 364; cp. D i.84; ii.81; iii.216; M
i.7; -itthi a pleasure woman, a concubine Vin i.36; J i.83;
v.490; vi.220; -upabhoga the enjoyment of pleasures VvA
79; -updna clinging to sensuality, arising from tah, as k
dihi slabbata, attavda D iii.230; M i.51; Vbh 136, 375;
Vism 569; -papatti existence or rebirth in the sensuous universe. These are three: (1) Paccupahita km (including
mankind, four lowest devalokas, Asuras, Petas and animals),
(2) Nimmna ratino dev, (3) Paranimmita vasavattino
dev D iii.218; It 94. -pasahita endowed with pleasantness: in formula rp (sadd, etc.) ih kant manp piyarp k rajaniy "forms (sounds, etc.=any object of sense),
desirable, lovely, agreeable, pleasant, endowed with pleasantness, prompting desires" D i.245=M i.85; 504; D ii.265; M
iii.267; VvA 127. -esan the craving for pleasure. There are
three esans: kma, bhava, brahmacariya D iii.216 270; A
ii.42; Vbh 366; It 48; S v.54; -ogha the flood of sensual desires A iii.69; D iii.230, 276; Vbh 375; Vism 141; DhsA 166;
Nd2 178 (viz. km, bhav, dih, avijj). -kaaka the sting
of lust Ud 27; -kara the fulfilment of one's desires J v.370
(=kmakiriy) -karaya in yath ppimato the puppet of
the wicked (lit. one with whom one can do as one likes) M
i.173; It 56; -kalala the mud of passions J iii.293; -kra
the fulfilment of desires Sn 351=Th 1, 1271; -krin acting
according to one's own inclination Th 1. 971; or acting willingly DA i.71; -kohsa a constituent of sensual pleasure
(=kmagua) J iii.382; v.149; DA i.121; PvA 205; -kopa the
fury of passion Th 1, 671; -gavesin, pleasure seeking Dh
99=Th 1, 992. -gijjha J i.210 and -giddha greedy for plea-
Kma
Kmaka
Kmaka
Kya
Kya
Kya
and this is born out of the joy accompanying complete satisfaction (pamudit) in attaining the desired end. The formula is
pamuditassa pti jyati ptimanassa kyo passambhati, passaddhakyo sukha vedeti, sukhino citta samdhiyati D iii.241,
288; S iv.351; M i.37; A iii.21, 285; iv.176; v.3, 333; Vbh 227.
Similarly: pamuditya pti jyati, ptimanya kyo p, passadhaky sukha ved Vin i.294 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.224: "all
my frame will be at peace," or "individuality"; see note) passaddhakya sankhra mentioned at A v.29 sq. is one of the
ten ariya vs, the noblest conditions. A quasi analogy
between kya and kma is apparent from a number of other
passages: kya chando sneho anvayat pahyati M
i.500; ajjhatta ca bahiddha ca kye chanda virjaye Sn 203;
kye avigata rgo hoti (kme, rpe) D iii.238=A iii.249;
madhurakajto viya kyo S iii.106; A iii.69.
III. (Ethical). Kya is one of the three channels by
which a man's personality is connected with his environment
& by which his character is judged, viz. action, the three being
kya, vac (vca) and manas. These three kammantas, activities or agents, form the three subdivisions of the sla, the rules
of conduct. Kya is the first and most conspicuous agent, or
the principle of action , character in its pregnant
sense.
Kya as one of a triad. Its usual combination is in
the formula mentioned, and as such found in the whole of the
Pli Canon. But there is also another combination, found only
in the older texts, viz. kayen vcya uda cetas: ya ca
karoti kyena vcya uda cetas ta hi tassa saka hoti ta
ca dya gacchati S i.93 yo dhammacr kyena vcya uda
cetas idh eva nam pasasanti pacca sagge pamodati S i.102.
So also at A i.63; Sn 232. Besides in formula arakkhitena
kyena a vcya a cittena S ii.231=271; iv.112. With
su- and duccarita the combn is extremely frequent, e. g. S
i.71, 72; M i.22, etc., etc. In other comb. we have kya
(v., m.) kamma, moneyya, soceyya, etc. k. v. m.
hisati S i.165; sasappati A v.289 sq.; kye (v. m.) sati
kya sacetan hetu uppajjati S ii.39 sq.; The variations of k in the ethics of the Dhamma under this view of
k. v. m. are manifold, all based on the fundamental distinctions between good and bad, all being the raison d'tre of
kamma: ya... etarahi kamma karoti kyena v. m. ida
vuccati navakamma S iv.132. Passages with reference
to good works are e. g. D iii.245; A i.151; v.302 sq.; (see
also Kamma ii.2 b. c.). With reference to evil: S iii.241,
247; A i.201; kin nu kyena vcya manas dukkaa kata
Pv ii.13 and passim. Assutav puthujjano thi hnehi micch
paipajjati kyena v. m. S ii.151; ppa na kayir vacas
manas kyena v kicana sabbaloke S i.12=31; yassa kyena
vcya manas n'atthi dukkaa savuta thi hnehi, tam
aha brmi brhmaa Dh 391=Nett 183. Kyena savaro
sdhu sdhu vcya savaro manas savaro sdhu sdhu
sabbattha savaro Dh 361=S i.73= Miln 399; ye ca kyena v.
m. ca susavut na te Mravasnug, na te Mrassa paccag
S i.104; vcnurakkh manas susavuto kyena ca akusala
na kayir Dh 281=Nett 183.
Kya as one of a dyad: vc and kya: S i.172 (gutta) M
i.461 (rakkhita and a); Pv i.22 (saat and opp.); Vism 28
(k vac kamma); PvA 98.
Kya alone as a collective expression for the three: A i.54;
234
Kya
Kya
body"=this miserable body Th 2, 458, 501; ThA 282, 291; kasva bodily impurity or depravity A i.112; -gata "relating
to the body," always combined with sati in the same sense as
anupassin (see above) S i.188; M. iii.92; A i.44; Sn 340 (cp.
SnA 343); Th 1, 468, 1225; J i.394; Dh 293= Nett 39; Dh 299;
Miln 248, 336, 393; Vism 111, 197, 240 sq. -gantha bodily tie or fetter (binding one to sasra), of which there are
four: abhijjh, bypda, slabbata parmsa, ida saccbhinivesa D iii.230= S v.59=Dhs 1135=Vbh 374; cp. Mrs.
Rh. D., Dhs. trsl. p. 304; gandha spelling for gantha at Nett 115 119; -gutta one who guards his body, i.
e. controls his action (+vacgutta) S i.172=Sn 74; -gutti the
care or protection of the body Vin i.295; J ii.162; -citta body
and mind: bdha physical and mental disease J iv.166; see
other combns above; -ha fever Vin i.214; -tapana chastisement of body, curbing one's material desires, asceticism
PvA 98. -thma physical strength J iii.114; -daratha bodily distress J v.397; vi.295; -daha bodily vigour Vin ii.76,
313; -dukkha bodily pain (+ceto) M iii.288; -duccarita
misconduct by the body, evil deeds done through the instrumentality of the body (cp. kamma) D iii.52, 96, 111, 214;
A i.48; Dh 231; It 54, 58; Dhs 300, 1305; Bdhd 16, 20;
-duhulla unchastity Th 1, 114; -dvra the channel or outlet of bodily senses J i.276; iv.14; VvA 73; DhA iv.85; Bdhd
69; -dhtu the "element" of body, i. e. the faculty of touch,
sensibility Dhs 613; Kvu 12; -pakopa blameworthy conduct,
misbehaviour (+vac, mano) Dh 231=DhA 330; -paclaka
(nt.) shaking or swaying the body, "swaggering" Vin ii.213;
-paibaddha 1. adj. (of the breath), dependent on, or connected with the body S iv.293; attached or bound to the body
J iii.377; v.254; 2. m. an article of dress worn on the body
Vin iii.123, iv.214; -payoga the instrumentality or use of the
body DA i.72=DhsA 98; -pariyantika limited by the body,
said of vedan, sensation S v.320=A ii.198; -parihrika tending or protecting the body D i.71=A ii.209=Pug 58; Vism 65
(cvara); DA i.207; -pasda clearness of the sense of touch
or sense in general DhsA 306; Bdhd 62, 66, 74; cp. Dhs.
trsl. p. 173n , 198n ; -passaddhi serenity or quietude of the
senses S iv.125 (cp. iv.351 and above); v.66, 104; Dhs 40, 277,
320; DhsA 130; Bdhd 16, 19, 29; -pgabbhiya "body forwardness" immodesty, lasciviousness, gener. said of women
J ii.32; v.449; -pgabbhiniya same J i.288; -pguat
good condition of the mental faculties, fitness of sense, opp.
kyagelaa, apathy Dhs 46, 277, 326; Vism 466; Bdhd 16,
20, 157; -phandita (nt.) bodily activity J iii.25; -baddha
fastened to the body, appl. to robes DA i.207; -bandhana a
girdle or waistband Vin i.46, 51; ii.118, 135, 177, 213, 266; M
i.237; -bala physical strength PvA 30; -bhvan meditation
or training with regard to action D iii.219; M i.237; cp. Miln
85; -macchera "body selfishness," pampering the body Th
1, 1033; -mudut pliability of sense=kammaat Dhs 44,
277, 324; Bdhd 16, 20, 157; -muni a sage with regard to action It 56; -moneyya the true wisdom regarding the use of the
body as an instrument of action It 56; 67; D iii.220; A i.273;
Nd2 514; -ratha the "carriagelike" body J vi.253; -lahut
buoyancy of sense= muduta, same loci; -vanka crookedness
of action A i.112; -vikra change of position of the body J
iii.354; -vijambhana alertness DhA iv.113; -viatti intimation by body, i. e. merely by one's appearance, appl. chiefly to
235
Kya
Kraa
the begging bhikkhu Dhs 585, 636, 654, 844; DhsA 82, 301;
Miln 229, 230; Vism 448; Bdhd 69, 70; -via consciousness by means of touch, sensory consciousness D iii.243; Dhs
556, 585, 651, 685, 790; Miln 59; Vbh 180; dhtu element of
touch consciousness Dhs 560; Vbh 88; Kvu 12; -vieyya
to be perceived by the sense of touch (+phohabba, see above)
D i.245; ii.281; iii.234; M i.85, 144; Dhs 589, 967, 1095; Vbh
14; Kvu 210; Miln 270; -vipphandana throbbing of the body,
bodily suffusion, appld to vinnatti Bdhd 69, 70; DhsA 323;
-viveka seclusion of the body, hermitism J i.289; DhsA 165;
-vpaksa= viveka D iii.285 (+citta "singleness" of heart);
-veyyvacca menial duties J i.12; kara a servant J ii.334;
-veyyvaika same J vi.418; Sn p. 104; DhA i.27; kamma
id. J v.317 (=veyyvacca) DhsA 160; -sasagga bodily contact, sexual intercourse Vin iii.121, 190; J vi.566; -sakkhin
he who has realized and gained the final truth concerning the
body (cp. anupassin) D iii.105, 254; M i.478=Pug 14, 29; M
ii.113; iii.45; A i.74; 118; iv.10, 451; v.23; Ps ii.52, 62; Nett
190; Kvu 58; Vism 93, 387. -sankhra the material aggregate, substratum of body Vin iii.71; S ii.40; iii.125; iv.293; A
i.122; ii.158, 231; Ps i.184, 186; Vism 530. -sangaha control
of body (+citta) Nett 91; -sacetan ( hetu) ground (for
the rise of), material, i. e. impure thoughts A ii.157; Vism 530
(+vac, mano). -samcra (good) conduct as regards one's
actions D ii.279 (+vac) M i.272 sq.; ii.113; iii.45; S v.354;
A iii.186 sq. -samplana crushing the body (of dukkha) Nett
29; -samphassa the sense of touch (see yatana) D iii.243;
S v.351; Dhs 585, 616, 651, 684; ja arisen through touch or
sensibility D iii.244; Dhs 445, 558; -sucarita good conduct in
action, as one of the three kammni (vac, mano) D iii.52,
96, 111, 169, 215; It 55, 59, 99, Dhs 1306; -suci purity of
body, i. e. of action (+vac, ceto) A i.273; It 55; -soceyya
purification of body (+vac, mano) D iii.219; A i.271; v 264,
266; It 55.
236
Kraa
Kla
cp. Lat. clgo mist, fog, darkness. (b) see below, under
note. Hence. 2. the morning mist, or darkness preceding light, daybreak, morning (cp. E. morning=Goth. margins twilight, Sk. marka eclipse, darkness; and also gloaming= gleaming=twilight), then: time in general, esp. a fixed
time, a point from or to which to reckon, i. e. term or terminus (a quo or ad quem). Note. The definition of colour
expressions is extremely difficult. To a primitive colour
sense the principal difference worthy of notation is that between dark and light, or dull and bright, which in their expressions, however, are represented as complements for which the
same word may be used in either sense of the complementary
part (dark for light and vice versa, cp. E. gleam > gloom). All
we can say is that kla belongs to the group of expressions
for dark which may be represented simultaneously by black,
blue, or brown. That on the other hand, black, when polished
or smooth, supplies also the notion of "shining" is evidenced
by ka and kaha as well, as e. g. by *skei in Sk. chy=Gr.
shadow as against Ags. hven "blue" (E. heaven) and
Ohg. sknan, E. to shine and sky. The psychological value of
a colour depends on its light reflecting (or light-absorbing)
quality. A bright black appears lighter (reflects more light)
than a dull grey, therefore a polished (ajana) black (=suka)
may readily be called "brilliant." In the same way kla, combined with other colour words of black connotation does not
need to mean "black," but may mean simply a kind of black,
i. e. brown. This depends on the semasiological contrast or
equation of the passage in question. Cp. Sk. yma (dark
grey) and yva (brown) under ksya. That the notion of the
speckled or variegated colour belongs to the sphere of black, is
psychologically simple (: dark specks against a light ground,
cp. kammsa), and is also shown by the second etymology of
kla=Sk. ra, mottled, speckled=Lat. caerulus, black blue
and perhaps caelum "the blue" (cp. heaven)=Gr. the
blue ice bird. (On k > s cp. kaa > ga, kilamati > ramati, kilissati > lis, etc.) The usual spelling of kla as ka
indicates a connection of the with the r of ra. The definition of ka as jhm' angrasadisa is conventional and is used
both by Bdhgh. and Dhpla: DhsA 317 and PvA 90.
1. Ka, dark, black, etc., in enumn of colours Vv 221 (see
VvA 111). na ko samao Gotamo, na pi smo: mangura
cchavi samano G. "The ascetic Gotamo is neither black nor
brown: he is of a golden skin" M i.246; similarly as k v
sm v manguracchav v of a kaly, a beautiful woman
at D I.193= M. ii.40; ka sma at Vin iv.120 is to be
taken as dark grey. Of the dark half of the month: see
pakkha, or as the new moon: game ke "on the next new
moon day" Vin i.176. of Petas: Pv ii.41 (k f.); PvA 561
(rpa); of the dog of Yama (sunakha) PvA 151. In other
connn : kavaa bhmi darkbrown (i. e. fertile) soil Vin
i.48=ii.209.
-ajana black collyrium Vini.203; -nusr black, (polished?) Anusri ("a kind of dark, fragrant sandal wood" Vin.
Texts ii.51) Vin i.203; S iii.156=v.44= A v.22; -ayasa black
(dark) iron (to distinguish it from bronze, Rh. D., Miln trsl.
ii.364; cp. blacksmith > silversmith) Miln 414, 415; -kajaka
a kind of Asuras, Titans D iii.7; J v.187; PvA 272; -ka
"black cared," as an unlucky quality. Cp. iii.611 ; J i.239;
iv.189; v.134, 211; vi.347; DhA i.307; ii.26; the vision of the
237
Kla
Kla
Kla
Ki
-vipassin considering the right moment, taking the opportunity It 41. -sata (sahassa, etc.) a hundred (thousand,
etc.) times Vism 243.
Ksu [cp. Sk. kar, fr. k] a hole; only in cpd. angra- ksu a
cinderhole, a fire pit, usually understood as a pit of glowing
cinders J i.232. Mostly found in similes, e. g. S iv.56, 188;
Sn 396; Sdhp. 208; and in km angraks' pam metaphor
A iv.224=v.175; see also kma.
Ka see kla 1.
Kaka (adj.) [fr. ka] black, stained; in enumeration of colours
at Dhs 617 (of rpa) with nla, ptaka, lohitaka, odta, k, majeha; of a robe A ii.241; f. kik VvA 103; (nt.) a black
spot, a stain, also a black grain in the rice, in apagata without
a speck or stain (of a clean robe) D i.110=A iv.186=210=213;
vicita (of rice) "with the black grains removed" D i.105; A
iv.231; Miln 16; vigata (same) A iii.49. A black spot (of
hair) J v.197 (=kaha r iva). Fig. of character DhA
iv.172.
Ki
Kiccha
what then do you think=do you not think then, that?... J i.171;
kim anga how much more or less, i. e. far more, or far less
Miln 274 as kim anga pana why then? M iii.181; Miln 23;
Vism 233; kin ti how then? D ii.74; kin ti te suta have you
not heard? D i.104; kintikaro= kathankaro q. v.; kica (cp.
kicpi under kici)= num que, nonne; is it not that, rather
J i.135 (expld in c. by garahatte ca anuggahatthe nipto).
kici in comb. with ya or yad: whatever; in other combn
positive: some, neg.: na kici nothing; yad atthi kici whatever there is of... Sn 231; n'atthi kici there is nothing: see
under atthi and kicana; kici n'atthi loke there is nothing in
this world... Sn 1122. kicpi whatever, however much:
kicpi te tattha yat caranti "however much they endeavour in
this" Sn 1080; J i.147; It 114; KhA 187, 190. Same as disjunctive conjunction with foll. pana: (=Lat. quamvis) kicpi hi...
pana although... yet DhA i.391; kicpi with pot.... atha kho
although yet; it may be that but S i.72. 3. In composition () often implying doubt, uncertainty ("what is it, that
is so & so?"), or expressing strangeness (: doubtful likeness),
e. g. kinnara a kind of man (but not sure about it), a half
man; kimpakka odd looking or doubtful (poisonous) fruit;
kimpurisa a strange man (doubtful whether man or beast); cp.
kisuka.
-akkhyin preaching what? in conn. with ki vdin saying what? i. e. holding what views? A i.62; -attha for what
purpose J i.279. -atthiya to what purpose J iv.239; Miln 19;
VvA 230; to any purpose, of any use S v.171; -abhia having what name? J vi.126. -kara doing whatever (his duty),
a servant, in k patissvin an obedient servant D i.60 (cp.
expln at DA i.168) A iii.37; iv.265 sq.; ThA 252; -karaya
business, occupation A iii.113, 116, 258; v.24, 90, 338; kra (abl. of kraa) by reason of what, i. e. why? PvA 25;
-kusalagavesin striving after that which is good M i.163=240;
-jacca of what caste? Sn p. 80; -nma of what name? Miln
15, 17; DhA iii.397 (both konma and kinma). -pakka
strange or unknown (doubtful) fruit, in rukkha a tree with odd
fruit (i. e. poisonous fruit, cp. Rm. ii.66, 6; Kern, Toev. s.
v. takes it to be Strychnos nux vomica) J i.368. -purisa 1.
a wild man of the woods J iv.254; vi.272, 497. 2. =kinnara (q. v.) A i.77; J v.42, 416. f. kimpuris J v.215, 216.
-phala=pakka, in rukkha a tree with unknown (poisonous)
fruit J i.271. -rukkha what kind of tree J v.203. -vdin
holding what view? A i.62; -samcra (a) of what conduct,
in comb. with; -sla of what character Sn 324 (=SnA 331).
Kiccayat (f.) [abstr. fr. last] duty Vin ii.89 (k karayat); Miln
42.
Kik [onomat. to sound root k (see note on gala), cp. Sk. kka
vku cock, after the cry of the bird] 1. (m.) the blue jay (J
ii.350 k. sakuo). 2. (f.) a hen (or the female of the jay?),
in simile fr. the Apadna of a hen watching her egg Vism 36
(aa anurakkhamn); J iii.375 (rakkhati); cp. SnA 317
240
Kiccha
Kittvat
difficult to obtain, hard, troublesome Dh 182 (kiccho manussapailbho, DhA 235=dullabho). 2. (nt.) distress, misery, pain, suffering: kiccha panno loko D ii.30; S ii.5;
v so nigacchati "he gets into difficulties (i. e. becomes
poor)" J v.330 (=dukkha nigacchati); Vism 314; DhA i.80.
Oblique cases used adverbially: instr. kicchena with difficulty J i.147, 191 (paijaggita); v.331 (id.) abl. kicch id. J
v.330. akiccha () without difficulty, easily, in phrase
akiccha lbhin taking or sharing willingly (+kasira lbhin) M i.33, 354=S ii.278 =A ii.23, 36; A iii.31, 114.
-patta fallen into misery Pv iii.54 (=PvA 199 dukkhappatta) -vuttin living in misery, poor Pv ii.914 (=dukkhajvita).
Kicchati [v. denom. fr. kiccha, cp. Sk. kcchryate] to be troubled, to be wearied, to suffer Th 1, 962 (w. acc. of obj.); usually with kilamati: k kyo kilamati Th 1, 1073. Used in a play
of words with vicikicchati by Bdhgh at DhsA 354 as "rammaa nicchetu asakkonto kicchati kilamati" and at Bdhd.
25 (on vicikicch) as sabhva vicinanto etya kicchati kilamati.
Kiakiyati [=kinkiyati, denom. fr. kinkii, small bell] to tinkle; also spelt kiikiyati J iii.315. See also kilikilyati and
cp. Sk. kiikiyati to grind (one's teeth) & Prk. kiikiiya
(chattering) Weber, Bhagavat p. 289; also BSk. kaakayati
Tal. Vist. 251. See taataayati & note on gala.
Kiti [kr Vedic kriti] to buy Vism 318; pot. kie J v.375; ger.
kiitv M i.384; J i.92, 94; inf. kiitu J iii.282.
Kii (indecl.) a part., expressing the sound of a small bell: "tink"
DhA i.339 (v. l. kiri; see also kili and note on gala).
Kia1 [cp. Sk. kiva] ferment, yeast; Vin ii.116; VvA 73.
Kia2 [pp. of kirati] strewn, scattered, covered; only in compn
with profixes: , o, ud, upa, pari, sa; see also appa.
Kiha (adj.) [see kaha; DA i.254 kih ti kah, kak ti attho]
black; in the stock phrase muak samaak ibbh k bandhupdpacc D i.90=116; S iv.117; M i.334; ii.177; in a moral
sense=bad, wicked, with nlam ariy dhamm D i.163.
Kita [pp. of k, with i for a, cp. kiraa for karaa. The Dhtp.
expld by nivsane] 1. adorned: ml adorned with garlands
Vin iii.249. 2. soiled, only in cpds. kaa said of a wall,
also of the ground at Vin i.48= ii.209; and pasu, soiled with
dust Vin ii.121, 174.
Kitava & kitav [=kaav? cp. kaa] one who plays false; a cheat;
adj. deceitful S i.24; J v.116; 117 (a); kitav at Dh 252
(=DhA iii.375) in combn with saha also at J vi.228, where the
connection with kaa is evident: kaa Ato gahti kiav
sikkhito yath= like one who is skilled in having the kaa, the
lucky die. Expld at DhA iii.375 as taken from fowling: kitavya attabhva paicchdeti "he hides himself by means of
a pretence" (behind sham branches).
Kittaka (pron. interr.) [fr. kva, cp. ettaka & BSk. kettaka
(MVastu i.50); see Trenckner, Notes p. 134] how much? how
great? nt. as adv.: to what extent? pl.: how many? Vin i.297;
k antovassa avasiha "how much of the rainy season is
left?" VvA 66; kittak pana vo bhante parivra bhikkh?
"How many bhikkhus are in your retinue?" J i.32. As indef.: a little; kittaka jvissmi, J v.505; kittaka addhna
a short time VvA 117 (=kiva cira).
Kittana (nt.) [f. kitteti] praise PvA 31, 107.
241
Kittvat
Kiriyati
Kitti & Kitt f. [Vedic krti, *qer: cp. Gr. , Ohg. hruod,
hruom=Ger. ruhm; *qr: cp. Sk. kru poet; Gr. herald, Lat. carmen hymn of praise. The explns of Dhtp (579)
& Dhtm (812) are sasadde & sasaddane] fame, renown,
glory, honour, yaso ca kitt ca S i.25; kitti ca sukha ca S
i.187; yaso kitti sukha ca A ii.32 yaso kitt ca "fame and
renown" Sn 817 (=Nd1 147, where appl. to the religious perfection attained by a samaa); Sn 185 (in the same sense);
VvA 68 (bhira bhva becoming known outside); yaso
kitti Sdhp 234.
-sadda the sound of fame, praise, renown (thutighosa DA
i.146) esp. appld to the Buddha, whose fame is heralded before him: Bhagavanta Gotama eva kalyo k saddo
abbhuggato "the high reputation went forth over the world,
concerning the Venerable Gotama": (such is this Exalted One,
Arahant, etc.) D i.49, 87, 115, 116, 236; S iv.323, 374; v.352;
A i.57, 180; iii.30, 39, 58, 253, 267; iv.80; etc. The same with
reference to others: Miln 284. Appld to the good reputation
of a man (of a kalyamitta) at Pug 37; the opposite is ppako
kittisaddo, bad reputation: A i.126; iii.269; Pug 36; -vaa
praise, in hara receiving or deserving praise D iii.191; cp.
bhat Nd1 147.
Kipillik (f.) & Kipillaka (nt.) [Cp. Sk. piplik, see Trenckner,
Notes, p. 108] an ant Sn 602 (kuntha); DhA i.360; J iv.142
(kuntha); v.39 (tamba ni); Miln 272. kipillaka J
i.487 (v. l. BB. for pillaka); iv.375 (tamba pua); DhA
iv.134 (v. l. SS. for T. pillaka). Cp. kuntha & piplik.
Kiriyati
Kiliha
318.
Kiriya, Kiriy & Kriy [abstr. fr. karoti] 1. (n.) (a) () action, performance, deed; the doing=fulfilment; cp. karaa,
anta, making an end of, putting a stop to (dukkhassa) S
iii.149; iv.93; Sn 454, 725; kla "fulfilment of one's time"
i. e. death S iii.122; Pv i.1012 ; Sn 694; Pug 17; kusala performance of good actions S i.101; v.456; dna the bestowing
of gifts PvA 123; ppa commission of sin Pug 19=23; pua
the performance of good works S i.87=89=A iii.48; a PvA 54
mangala celebration of a festival PvA 86; massu kiriy the
dressing of the beard J iii.314 (cp. m karaa and kappan);
sacchi realization, see s. v. -akiriy the non performance of, omission, abstaining from (a akaraa=verama)
J iii.530; Vbh 285. (b) an act in a special sense=promise,
vow, dedication, intention, pledge: PvA 18; justice: Miln 171;
kiriya bhindati to break one's vow Miln 206. (c) philosophically: action ineffective as to result, non causative,
an action which ends in itself (Mrs. Rh. D. in Dhs. trsl.
xciii.), inoperative (see Cpd. 19). In this sense it is grouped
with kamma (cp. for relation kamma: kiriy= Ger. sache:
ursache). Thus is the theory of Makkhali: n'atthi kamma,
n'atthi kiriya n'atthi viriyan ti= there is no karma, no after
effect and no vigour in this world A i.286 (different at D
i.53); n'atthi kiriy it does not matter M i.405. 2. (adj.)
(a) making no difference, indefinite; of no result, as def. of
avykat dhamm Vbh 106, 182=302=Dhs 566 and 989 (manodhtu kiriy neva kusal nkusal na ca kammavipk: indifferent, neither good nor bad and having no fruit of kamma),
same of jhna Vbh 268=281; DhsA 388. (b) indecisive,
in akiriya vykaroti to give an indecisive answer, to reply
evasively D i.53 and
-pada (ttg.) the verb (i. e. that which supplies the action) VvA 315; -vda (adj.) promulgating the (view of a)
consequence of action, believing in merit and demerit, usually
combd with kammavda (q. v.) also vdin: D i.115 (of Gotama) A i.62; Vin i.71; a denying the difference between
merit & demerit A iv.174=Vin i.234; 242, Vin iii.2; A iv.180
sq.; S iii.73. (+natthikavda); -vdin adj. to prec. A i.62;
-hetu being a cause of discrimination Dhs 1424 sq.
Kiriyat (f.) [abstr. fr. last] the performance of (), state of,
etc. See sakkacca, sacchi, stacca.
Kirin (adj.) enveloped, adorned Pv iii.91 (=vehitassa).
Kila see kili (the sound click).
Kilaj (f.) a mat of fibre or rushes, matting Vism 327; also a
screen, a fascine, hurdle, faggots; a crate, crating: tassa gandhabba kilaj kavana viya hutv... J ii.249; "his
music was like the scraping of a mat"; suvaa kilaj a
gilt mat J iv.212. As a fascine, used in making a road: DhA
i.442. as a screen (combd with chatta, fan) PvA 127; as faggots: J i.158; Miln 287; as a crate or basket, used by distillers:
M i.228= 374 (soik kilaj) (cp. the trsln under soa
in J.P.T.S. 1909); to which is likened the hood of a snake: S
i.106 (snake=mra).
Kiliha
Kanaka
Kilinna [pp. of kilijjati] 1. wet, usually with saliva and perspiration Vin iii.37; J i.61 (ll), 164 (khea); DA i.284 (assu);
VvA 67 (seda). 2. The other meaning of kilid (to get
inflamed) is to be found in kilinna sarra (adj.) with an inflamed body (i. e. suffering from a skin disease), which is
Bdhgh's expln of okilin: see under okiraa.
Kilissati [Sk. kliyati=kli or li to adhere, cp. P. khea and silesuma or semha, Sk. lema, slime. Same root as Gr.
snail; Ags. slm slime. Another, specifically Pali, meaning is
that of going bad, being vexed, with ref. to a heated state. This
lies at the bottom of the Dhtp. (445) & Dhtm. (686) expln by
upatpe.] 1. to get wet, soiled or stained, to dirty oneself, be
impure It 76 (of clothes, in the passing away of a deva); Th 1,
954 (kilisissanti, for kilissanti); Ps i.130. Kilisseyya Dh 158
(expld as ninda labhati) to do wrong. Cp. pari.
Kisa (adj.) [Sk. ka, perhaps to Lat. gracilis, slim] lean, haggard,
emaciated, opp. thla fat (VvA 103). As Ep. of ascetics Sn
165, Dh 395=Th 1, 243; esp. as Ep. of petas: Pv ii.113 ; Sn
426, 585; Sdhp 101; Miln 303. For phrase kisa dhamani
santhata see the latter.
Kilesa (and klesa) [from kilissati] 1. stain, soil, impurity, fig. affliction; in a moral sense, depravity, lust. Its occurrence in the
Piakas is rare; in later works, very frequent, where it is approx. tantamount to our terms lower, or unregenerate nature,
sinful desires, vices, passions.
1. Kilesa as obstacle (see varaa, sampayutta,
vippayutta, pahna) Ps i.33; Sdhp 455; bhikkhu bhinnakileso
"one whose passions are broken up" Vh 246, PvA 51; upasanta kileso "one whose passions are calmed" PvA 230; no ce
pi jtu puriso kilese vto yath abbhaghana vihne Sn 348;
pariyodapeyya attna cittaklesehi paito S v.24=A v.232,
253=Dh 88. 2. Occurs in such combinations as kiles ca
khandh ca abhisankhr ca Nd2 487; kilesa+khandha: Ps
i.69 72; ii.36, 140; cp. Vbh 44, 68; kilesa+sasra PvA
7; kamma kiles hetu sasrassa Nett 113, cp. 191.
3. kilesa also occurs in a series explanatory of tah, in the
stereotype combn of t., dihi, kilesa "clinging to existence,
false ideas and lust" (see Nd2 s. v. tah v.). 4. In the
same function it stands with rga, viz. rga dosa moha kilesa,
i. e. sensuality, bewilderment and lust (see Nd2 s. v. rga
ii.), cp. Dhs 982, 1006. The grouping as dasa kilesa
vatthni is: lobha dosa moha mna dihi vicikicch thna
uddhacca ahirika anottappa Dhs 1548=Vbh 341; Vism
683; mentioned at Ps i.130. These with the exception of
the last two, are also grouped as aha k vatthni at Vbh
385. As three kilesas (past, present and future) at Ps ii.217.
5. The giving up of kilesa is one of the four essentials of
perfection: the recognition of evil, the removal of its source
(which is kilesa), the meditation on the Path, and the realization of the extinction of evil (see Nd2 s. v. dukkha ii.). Kilesa
in this connection interchanges with samudaya, as denoting
the origin of evil; cp. samudayo kiles Nett 191.
-varaa the obstacle of lust Vbh 342 Pug 13; Vism 177;
varaat id. A iii.436; -kkhaya the destruction of lust Bdhd
81; -paripantha danger of lust J vi.57; -pahna the giving
up of worldly lust Vin iii.92 sq., iv.25; Bdhd 129, 131; -puja
the heap of lusts; consisting of ten qualities, viz. the four hr
244
Kanaka
Kukkua
pi kala SnA 277); Dh 5, 210; Bdhd 125; gamanena na pattabbo lokass' anto k "by walking, the end of the world can
never be reached" S i.62.
3. Kuva, kva, where? Sn 970 (kuva & kuva) indef.
kvaci anywhere; with na: nowhere; yassa n'atthi upam kvaci
"of whom (i. e. of Gotama) there is no likeness anywhere" Sn
1137; cp. 218, 395; expld by Nd2 like kuhici. kuva at D
iii.183.
4. Kutha (kudha) where? J v.485 (=kuhi).
5. Kuhi (=kuha, cp. Sk. kuha) where? whither? Often with fut.: k bhikkhu gamissati Sn 411; ko gacchasi where
are you going? Pv ii.81 ; tva ettaka divasa k gat where
have you been all these days? PvA 6; 13; 42; indef. kuhici,
anywhere, with na k: nowhere, or: not in anything, in: n'atthi
tah k loke "he has no desire for anything in this world" Sn
496, 783, 1048 see Nd on 783 & 1048=kimhici; Dh 180.
Kan (f.) [fr. same) playing, sport, amusement Nett 18; PvA
67; DhA iii.461 (nakkhatta celebration).
K f. [fr. kr, cp. Sk. kr] play, sport, enjoyment;
udakaka kant enjoying herself on the water PvA 189.
uyyna amusement in the park DhA i.220; iv. 3; nakkhatta
ka kati to celebrate a festival (i. e. the full moon when
standing in a certain Nakkhatta) VvA 109, ThA 137; sla
k sport in the sla woods J v.38; kdhippyena in play, for
fun PvA 215; Cp. kik.
-goa a ball to play with Vism 254.
-goaka id.
Vism 256 (cp. KhA 53); ThA 255; -pasuta bent on play
J i.58; -bhaaka (nt.) toy Miln 229 (=kpanaka M
i.266); -maala play circle, children's games, playground
J vi.332; DhA iii.146; -sl playhouse J vi.332.
Kita [pp. of kati] played or having played, playing, sporting; celebrated (of a festival) A iv.55 (hasitalapita); PvA 76
(sdhu). (nt.) amusement, sport, celebration M i.229
(kita jta kati). Cp. sahapasu; see also kei &
khi.
Kukkucca [kud kicca] 1. bad doing, misconduct, bad character. Def. kucchita kata kukata tassa bhvo kukkucca
Vism 470 & Bdhd 24; Various explanations in Nd2 on Sn
1106=Dhs 1160, in its literal sense it is bad behaviour with
hands and feet (hattha pada) J i.119=DA i.42 (in combn
with ukksita & khipitasadda); hattha alone J ii.142. 2.
remorse, scruple, worry. In this sense often with vippaissra;
and in conn. w. uddhacca it is the fourth of the five nvaraas
(q. v.) Vin i.49; iv.70; D i.246; S i.99; M i.437; A i.134=Sn
1106; A i.282; Sn 925; Nd2 379; DhA iii.483; iv.88; Sdhp 459;
Bdhd 96. na kici k na koci vippaissreti "has nobody
any remorse?" S iii.120=iv.46. The dispelling of scrupulousness is one of the duties and virtues of a muni: k vinodetu
A v.72; k. pahya D i.71=A ii.210=Pug 59; chinnakukkucca
(adj.) free from remorse M i.108; khsava k vpasanta S
i.167=Sn 82. akukkucca (adj.) free from worry, having no
remorse Sn 850. Kukkucca kurute (c. gen.) to be scrupulous
about J i.377; karisu DhA iv.88; cp. kukkucca pajjati
(expl. by sankati) J iii.66.
Kvant & Kva (interr. adj. and adv.) [Sk. kiyant and kvant;
formed fr. interr. stem ki] how great? how much? how many?
and in later language how? (cp. rel. yva). As indef.: Kvanto tattha bherav "however great the terrors" Sn 959.
Kva kauka how painful? PvA 226; k cira how long?
Pj and Sn 1004; k dgha same Sn p. 126; k dre how
far? Miln 16; DhA i.386; k mahanta how big? DhA
i.29; VvA 325; k bahu how much? DhA iv.193.
Kvatika (interr. adj.) [fr. last] of number: how much? how
many? Kvatik bhikkh how many Bhikkhus? Vin i.117.
Ku (kud and kum ) 3rd stem of interrog. pron. ka (on
form and meaning cp. kad;=Lat.* qu in (q)ubi, like katara
< (q)uter; cp. also Vedic k how? Sk. kutra, kuta, kuha,
kva) where? when? whither? whence? As adv. in cpds. in
disparaging sense of "what of"? i. e. nothing of, bad, wrong,
little, e. g. kum magga wrong path; kuk kucca=kud
kicca doing wrong, troubling about little=worry. ku at
PvA 57 (in expl. of kujara) is interpreted as pahavi.
1. Kuto where from? whence? Dh 62; kbhaya whence
i. e. why fear? Dh 212 sq.; Sn 270, 862; Pv ii.69 ; how? J
vi.330; with nu whence or why then? Sn 1049 (=kacci ssu
Nd2 s. v.). kut ettha=kuto ettha J. i.53. na kuto from
nowhere Sn 35, 919; a kuto id. in akutobhaya "with nothing to fear from anywhere" i. e. with no reason for fear S
i.192; Th 1, 510; Th 11, 333; Sn 561 (modmi akutobhayo);
Pv ii.121 (id.); kuto-ja arisen from where? Sn 270; nidna
having its foundation or origin in what? Sn 270, 864 sq.
2. Kud at what time, when? (cp. kad) Pug 27; indef.
kudcana: at any time, na k never Sn 221 (expl. by soasim
245
Kukkua
Kuila
Kuca (nt.) [kruc, cp. Sk. kroati, Pali koca, Lat. crocio,
cornix, corvus; Gr. , ; all of crowing noise;
from sound root k&rcircle;, see note on gala] a crowing or
trumpeting noise (in compounds only). kra cackling (of
a hen) ThA 255; -nda trumpeting (of an elephant) J iii.114.
Kukkusa 1. the red powder of rice husks Vin ii.280 (see Bdgh
ii.328: kukkusa mattika=kuaka c'eva mattika ca).
2. (adj.) variegated, spotted J vi.539 (=kaakabara 540; v. l.
B. ukkusa).
Kunkuma (nt.) [cp. Sk. kunkuma] saffron Miln 382; Vism 241.
Kujara (m.) [Deriv. unknown. The sound is not unlike an elephant's trumpeting & need not be Aryan, which has hasti. The
Sk. of the epics & fables uses both h and k] an elephant Vin
ii.195; M i.229, 375; S i.157; Dh 322, 324, 327; J v.336; Vv
51 ; Pv i.113 ; DhA iv.4; ThA 252; Miln 245. deva chief of
the gods, Ep. of Sakka Vv 477 ; J v.158.
-vara a state elephant VvA 181. -sl an elephant's stable
DhA iv.203.
Kuaja a kind of root (Wrightia antidysenterica or Nericum antidysentericum), used as a medicine Vin i.201 (cp. Vin. Texts
ii.45).
Kuati see pai and cp. ka1 , koeti & in diff. sense kua1 .
Kuik (f.) from ku [B. Sk. kuik Av.. ii.156] a little hut, usually made of sticks, grass and clay, poetical of an abode of a
bhikkhu Vin iii.35, 41, 42=VvA 10; PvA 42, 81; DhA ii.23.
Cp. also tia, dru; araa a hut in the woods S i.61; iii.116;
iv.380. Often fig. for body (see kya). Th 1, 1. As adj.
, e. g. ahakuiko gmo a village of 8 huts Dh i.313.
Kuila (adj.) bent, crooked (cp. kuj and kuc, Morris J.P.T.S.
246
Kuila
Kuaka
Kua2 [of doubtful origin & form, cp. var. BSk. forms koa
rj, koa & koa, e. g. MVastu i.231] only found in cpds.
drni sticks in a wattle & daub wall Vism 354, and in kua
rj subordinate prince, possibly kua a wattle and daub
prince S iii.156 (v. l. kua); =v.44 (v. l. kujja); cp. kua
J v.102 sq., where expl. ppa rj, with vv. ll. kua and
ka. See also khujja and khuddaka rj.
Kuha1 (nt.) (cp. kus; Sk. kuh f.) leprosy J v.69, 72, 89;
vi.196, 383; Vism 35 (+gaa); DA i.260, 261, 272. The disease described at DhA 161 sq. is probably leprosy. Cp. kilsa.
On var. kinds of leprosy see J v.69, iv.196.
Kuha [cp. kua and kua] 1. bent, lame; blunt (of a sword)
DhA i.311 (kuddla); Pug A i.34 (of asi, opp. tikkhina); tia
a kind of grass Vism 353. 2. a cripple J ii.117.
Kuaka
Kupita
D i.7=A i.181=Vin i.192=ii.163. 2. adj. "made up," pretending, in samaa k a sham ascetic Vin iii.68 71.
Kuttama in ksi kuttama J vi.49 should be read as ksik'- uttama.
Kutti (f.) [cp. kutta] arrangement, fitting, trapping, harnessing Vin ii.108 (sara: accuracy in sound, harmony); J iii.314
(massu beard dressing, expld by massu kiriy. Here
corresponding to Sk *kpti!); iv.352 (hattha, elephant trappings, cp. kappan); v.215 (=karaa, cp. Sk. kalpa).
Kupita
Kumma
Kumbha [for etym. s. kpa and cp. Low Ger. kump or kumme,
a round pot] 1. a round jar, waterpot (=kullabhjana earthenware DhA i.317), frequent in similes, either as illustrating
fragility or emptiness and fullness: A i.130, 131=Pug 32; A
v.337; S ii.83; Miln 414. As uda waterpot Dh 121; J i.20; Pv
i.129 . 2. one of the frontal globes of an elephant Vin ii.195
(hatthissa); VvA 182 (lankr ornaments for these).
-pama resembling a jar, of kya Dh 40 (=DhA i.317); of
var. kinds of puggal A ii.104=Pug 45. -kra 1. a potter; enumerated with other occupations and trades at D i.51=Miln 331.
Vin iv.7. In similes, generally referring to his skill D i.78=M
ii.18; Vism 142, 376; Sn 577; DhA i.39 (sl). rja the king's
potter J i.121. 2. a bird (Phasianus gallus? Hardy) VvA
163. Cpds.: antevsin the potter's apprentice D i.78=M
ii.18; nivesana the dwelling of a potter Vin i.342, 344; S
iii.119; pka the potter's oven S ii.83; A iv.102; putta son
of a potter (cp. Dial. i.100), a potter Vin iii.41 sq.; -krik
a large earthen vessel (used as a hut to live in, Bdhgh) Vin
ii.143, cp. Vin. Texts iii.156; -hnakath gossip at the well
D i.8=D iii.36=A v.128= S v.419, expld . at DA i.90 by udaka
hnakath, with variant udakatittha kath ti pi vuccati
kumbha dsikath v; -tha a sort of drum D i.6 (expl. at
DA i.84: caturassara ammaakata kumbhasaddan ti pi
eke); D iii.183; J v.506 (pissara+). ika one who plays
that kind of drum Vin iv.285=302; -tthenaka of cora, a thief,
"who steals by means of a pot" (i. e. lights his candle under
a pot (?) Bdhgh on Vin ii.256, cp. Vin. Texts iii.325 "robber
burglars") only in simile Vin ii.256=S ii.264=A iv.278; -ds
a slave girl who brings the water from the well D i.168; Miln
331; DhA i.401 (udakatitthato k viya nt). -dhana milking into the pitchers, giving a pail of milk (of gvo, cows) Sn
309. Cp. kui. -bhramatta as much as a pot can hold J
v.46; -matta of the size of a pot, in kumbhamattarahassang
mahodar yakkh, expln . of kumbha J iii.147.
Kumbh (f.) a large round pot (often combd with kaop,) Vin
i.49, 52, 286; ii.142, 210; Th 2, 283. loha a copper (also as
lohamaya k Sn 670), in pakkhepana, one of the ordeals in
Niraya PvA 221. Also a name for one of the Nirayas (see lohakumbh). Cp. nidhi.
-mukha the rim of a pot (always with kaopi mukha)
D i.166 and(see kaop); Vism 328.
249
Kumma
Kulanka
250
Kulanka
Kusala
Kusala
Ka
Kusalat [fem. abstr. fr. kusala] (only ) skill, cleverness, accomplishment; good quality. lakkhaa skill in interpreting
special signs VvA 138; aparicita neglect in acquiring good
qualities PvA 67. For foll. cp. Mrs. Rh. D. Dhs. trsl. pp. 345
348; patti skill as to what is an offence; sampatti in the
Attainments; dhtu in the Elements; manasikra proficiency
in attention; yatana skill in the spheres; paiccasamuppda
skill in conditioned Genesis; hna and ahna skill in affirming (negating) causal conjuncture: all at D iii.212 and Dhs
1329 1338; cp. A i.84, 94.
Kusi (nt.) one of the four cross seams of the robe of a bhikkhu Vin
i.287; ii.177; and aha intermediate cross seam ibid. See
Bdhgh's note in Vin. Texts ii.208.
Kustat (f.) [abstr. fr. kusta] in a alertness, brightness, keenness VvA 138.
Ka2 (m. nt.) [Vedic ka horn, bone of the forehead, prominence, point, *qele to jut forth, be prominent; cp. Lat. celsus,
collis, columen; Gr. ; Ags. holm, E. hill]
(a) prominence, top (cp. koi), in abbha ridge of the cloud
Vv i.1 (=sikhara); asa shoulder, clavicle, VvA 121, 123
pabbata mountain peak Vin ii.193; J i.73. Cp. koa. (b)
the top of a house, roof, pinnacle A i.261; Vv 784 (=kaik
VvA 304); gaha Dh 154; PvA 55. Cp. also kgra. (c) a
Kusuma (nt.) any flower J iii.394 (dma); v.37; PvA 157 (=puppha); VvA 42; Dpvs i.4; Sdhp 246, 595; Dvs v.51 (agghika),
fig. vimutti the flower of emancipation Th 1, 100; Miln 399.
Kusumita (adj.) in flower, blooming VvA 160, 162.
Kusumbha (nt.) the safflower, Carthamus tinctorius, used for dying red J v.211 (rattavattha); vi.264 (do); Khus iv.2.
Kussubbha and kussobbha (nt.) [Sk. kuvabhra] a small pond,
252
Ka
Kebuka
Kpa (m.) [Vedic kpa, orig. curvature viz. (a) interior= cavity, cp. Lat. cupa, Gr. cup; also Gr. , Sk.
kumbha; (b) exterior=heap, cp. Ags. hap, Ohg. heap, Sk.
kpa mast]. 1. a pit, a cavity: akkhi the socket of the eye M
i.80, 245; DhsA 306; gtha a cesspool D ii.324; Sn 279; Pv
ii.316 ; Pug 36; miha a pit for evacuations Pgdp 23, 24; loma
the root of the hair, a pore of the skin DA i.57; Vism 262, 360;
also in na loma kpamatta pi not even a hairroot J i.31;
iii.55; vacca=gtha Vin ii.141, 222. As a tank or a well: J
vi.213; VvA 305. 2. the mast of a boat J iii.126; Miln 363,
378. See next.
-khaa one who digs a pit J vi.213. -tala the floor of a
253
Kebuka
Kesa
ii.132; iv.41; PvA 178 (gma, in which to be reborn, is punishment, fishermen being considered outcast); cp. J vi.399 N.
of a brahmin minister, also D i.411 N. of Kevaha (?).
-dvra N. of one of the gates of Benares, and a village
near by Vv 197 ; VvA 97.
Kevalin (adj.) [fr. kevala] one who is fully accomplished, an Arahant; often with mahesi and uttamapurisa. Defn sabbagua
paripua sabba yoga visayutta Sn A 153. ye
suvimutt te kevalino ye kevalino vaa tesa natthi papanya S iii.59 sq., i. e. "those who are thoroughly emancipated, these are the accomplished..."; kevalna mahesi
kh' sava Sn 82=S i.167; k. vusitav uttamapuriso Nd2
on tia=A v.16. with gen.: brahmacariyassa k. "perfected
in morality" A ii.23. As Ep. of "brhmaa" Sn 519=Nd2 s.
v.; of dhammacakka A ii.9; see also Sn 490, 595. akevalin
not accomplished, not perfected Sn 878, 891.
Keyana (nt.) [fr. keyati, cp. kelan & kei] playfulness, unsettledness Vism 134 (opp. majjhatta), 317.
Keyita [pp. of keyati] desired, fondled, made much of J iv.198
(expld with the ster. phrase kelyati mamyati pattheti piheti
icchat ti attho).
Kesa (cp. Sk. kailsa] N. of a mountain Bdhd 138.
254
Kesa
Koika
-nivsin covered only with hair of Petas (: keseh' eva paicchdita kopn) Pv iii.16 . massu hair and beard; kappita
k m (adj.) with h. and b. dressed D i.104; A iv.94; J
vi.268. Esp. freq. in form kesa massu ohretv ksyni
vatthni acchdetv agrasm anagriya pabbajati "to shave
off hair & beard, dress in yellow robes and leave the home for
the homeless state," i. e. renounce the world and take up the
life of a Wanderer D i.60, 115; iii.60, 64, 76; A i.107; iii.386;
It 75; Pug 57; similarly A ii.207=Pug 56. -sobha the splendour or beauty of the hair PvA 46. -hattha a tuft of hair PvA
157; VvA 167.
PvA 157.
Koca1 [cp. Sk. krauca & kruc] the heron, often in combn with
mayra (peacock): Th 1, 1113; Vv 111 , 358 ; J v.304; vi.272;
or with hasa Pv ii.123 . Expld as srasa VvA 57; jia
an old heron Dh 155.
Koca2 =abbr. of koca nda, trumpeting, in koca karoti to
trumpet (of elephants) Vin iii.109; J vi.497.
-nda the trumpeting of an elephant ("the heron's cry")
[not with Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 163 sq. to kruc. (meaning
to bend, cp. Lat. crux, E. ridge), but prob. a contamination of
kroa, fr. krus to crow, and kuja=kujara, elephant (q. v.).
Partly suggested at Divy 251; see also expln at VvA 35, where
this connection is quite evident.] J i.50; Miln 76 (in etymol.
play with koca); VvA 35. -rva=prec. DhA iv.70. -vdik
a kind of bird J vi.538.
Koi (f.) [cp. Sk. koi & ka2 ] the end (a) of space: the extreme part, top, summit, point (cp. anta to which it is opposed
at J vi.371): dhanu koi nissya "through the (curved)
end of my bow," i. e. by means of hunting J ii.200; ahi
koi the tip of the bone J iii.26; cpa a bow VvA 261;
vema the part of a loom that is moved DhA iii.175; khetta
the top (end) of the field SnA 150; cankamana the far end
of the cloister J iv.30; PvA 79. (b) of time: a division of
time, with reference either to the past or the future, in pubba
the past (cp. pubbanta), also as purima; and pacchima the
future (cp. aparanta). These expressions are used only of
sasra: sasrassa purim koi na payati "the first end,
i. e. the beginning of S. is not known" Nd2 664; DhsA 11;
of pacchim koi ibid. anamatagg' ya sasro, pubba
na payati S's end and beginning are unthinkable, its starting point is not known (to beings obstructed by ignorance)
S ii.178=iii.149= Nd2 664=Kvu 29=PvA 166; cp. Bdhd 118
(p.k. na yati). koiya hito bhvo "my existence in the
past" J i.167. (c) of number: the "end" of the scale, i. e. extremely high, as numeral representing approximately the figure a hundred thousand (cp. Kirfel, Kosmographie. p. 336).
It follows on satasahassni Nd2 664, and is often increased by
sata or sahassa, esp. in records of wealth (dhana) Sn 677; J
i.227, 230, 345=DhA i.367 (asti vibhavo); J i.478; PvA
3, 96; cp. also koisat arahanto Miln 6, 18. kahpaa
koi santhrena "for the price (lit. by the spreading out) of
10 million kahpaas" Vin ii.159= J i.94 (ref. to the buying of
Jetavana by Anthapiika).
-gata "gone to the end," having reached the end, i. e. perfection, nibbna. Nd2 436; -ppatta=prec. Nd2 436; as "extreme" J i.67. -simbal N. of a tree (in Avci) Sdhp 194.
Kesava [fr. last] of rich hair, of beautiful hair. Ep. of King Vsudeva (cp. kaha) Pv ii.62 .
Kesika (adj.) [fr. kesa] hairy, of mangoes Miln 334.
Ko see ka.
Koka1 [not=Sk. koka, cuckoo] a wolf J vi.525; Nd1 13= Nd2 420;
Miln 267=J v.416. vighsa remainder of a wolf's meal Vin
iii.58.
Koka2 [cp. Sk. koka] N. of a tree, Phoenix sylvestris: see keka.
Kokanada (nt.) [cp. Sk. kokanada] the (red) lotus A iii.239=J
i.116.
Koksika the red lotus in jta "like the red lotus," said of the
flower of the Pricchattaka tree A iv.118.
Kokila [cp. Sk. koka a kind of goose, also cuckoo, with derivation kokila cuckoo; cp. Gr. , Lat. cuculus, E. cuckoo]
the Indian cuckoo. Two kinds mentioned at VvA 57: ka
and phussa black and speckled k. As citra at J v.416.
Vv 111 , 588 ; VvA 132, 163.
Koca [fr. kuc] see sa.
Koci see ka.
Koccha1 (nt.) some kind of seat or settee, made of bark, grass or
rushes Vin ii.149; iv.40 (where the foll. def. is given: koccha nma vka maya v usra maya v mujamaya v babbaja maya v anto savehetv baddha
hoti. Cp. Vin. Texts i.34; iii.165); J v.407. Also in list of 16
obstructions (palibodh) at Miln 11.
Koccha2 (nt.) a comb (for hair dressing) Vin ii.107; Vv 8446
(=VvA 349); Th 2, 254, 411 (=ThA 267).
-kra a comb maker Miln 331 (not in corresp. list of
vocations at D i.51).
Koika
Kodha
M i.393 sq.
Koin (adj.) [fr. koi] aiming for an end or goal J vi.254 (cp.
koana2 ).
Koilla (nt.) [fr. kuila] crookedness Dhtm 526; Abhp 859. As
koilya at Dhtp 472.
Koumbara (nt.) [cp. BSk. kauumba Divy 559] a kind of cloth J
vi.47 (coming from the kingdom of k.), 500 (spelt kodumb).
-ka k. stuffs Miln 2.
Koa (?) breaking, asi k note on Vin iv.363 (for asikoha Vin
iv.171?); ahi at Vism 254 read koh.
Koana [fr. koeti] 1. grinding, crushing, pounding (grains) J
i.475; pacan' di pounding and cooking, etc. DhA ii.261.
2. hammering or cutting (?) in dru J ii.18; vi.86 (masa,
here "beating," T. spells h). Cp. adhikuan.
Koita (pp. of kotteti] beaten down, made even Vism 254, 255.
Koha1 (m. nt.) [Sk. koha abdomen, any cavity for holding
food, cp. kua groin, and also Gr. cavity, pudendum muliebre, bladder = E. cyst, chest; Lat. cunnus
pudendum, Ger. hode testicle] anything hollow and closed in
(Cp. gabbha for both meanings) as 1. the stomach or abdomen Miln 265, Vism 357; Sdhp 257. 2. a closet, a monk's
cell, a storeroom, M i.332; Th 2, 283 (?)=ThA, 219; J ii.168.
3. a sheath, in asi Vin iv.171.
-ahi a stomach bone or bone of the abdomen Vism 254,
255. -abbhantara the intestinal canal Miln 67; -gra (nt.)
storehouse, granary, treasury: in conn. with kosa (q. v.) in
formula paripua kosa kohgra (adj.) D i.134, expld
at DA i.295 as threefold, viz. dhana dhaa vattha, treasury, granary, warehouse; PvA 126, 133; -grika a storehouse keeper, one who hoards up wealth Vin i.209; DhA
i.101; -sa [=koha +asa] share, division, part; kohsa
(adj.) divided into, consisting of. K. is a prose word only and
in all Com. passages is used to explain bhga: J i.254; 266;
vi.368; Miln 324; DhA iv.; 108 (=pada), 154; PvA 58, 111,
205 (kma=kmagu); VvA 62; anekena k ena infinitely
PvA 221.
Kohaka1 (nt.) "a kind of koha," the stronghold over a gateway, used as a store room for various things, a chamber,
treasury, granary Vin ii.153, 210; for the purpose of keeping
water in it Vin ii.121=142; 220; treasury J i.230; ii.168;
256
Kodha
Kolaa
As pair k. and upanha A i.91, 95; in sequence kodha upanha makkha pasa, etc. Nd2 rga 1.; Vbh 357 sq.; Vism 53,
107, 306; in formula abhijjh bypda k. upanha M i.36; A
i.299=iv.148; cp. A iv.456=v.209; v.39, 49 sq., 310, 361. As
equivalent of ghta Dhs 1060=Nd2 576, cp. Pug 18. In other
combn : with mada and thambha Sn 245; kadariya Sn 362;
pesuniya Sn 928; mosavajja Sn 866, 868 (cp. S i.169). Other
passages, e. g. A i.283; S i.240; Sn 537, (lobha); Pv ii.37 ;
Dh i.52 (anattha janano kodho); PvA 55, 222. kodha is
one of the obstacles to Arahantship, and freedom from kodha
is one of the fundamental virtues of a well-balanced mind.
m vo kodho ajjhabhavi "let not anger get the better of
you" S i.240; mno hi te brhmaa khribhro kodho dhmo
bhasmani mosavajja, etc. "anger is the smoke (smouldering) in the ashes" S i.169=Nd2 576. kodha chetv cutting off anger S i.41=47=161=237; kodha jahe vippajaheyya
mna "give up anger, renounce conceit" J i.23 25=Dh 221;
kodha pajahanti vipassino: "the wise give up anger" It 2=7;
panua kodha (adj.) one who has driven out anger Sn
469; akkodhena jine kodha conquer anger by meekness Dh
223=J ii.4=VvA 69. Yo ye uppatita kodha ratha bhanta
va dhraye tam aha srathi brmi "He who restrains rising anger as he would a drifting cart, him I call a waggoner"
Dh 222, cp. Sn 1. akkodha freedom from anger, meekness, conciliation M i.44; S i.240 (with avihis tenderness,
kindness); A i.95; Dh 223=J ii.4=VvA 69.
-timna anger and conceit Sn 968. -upysa companionship or association with anger, the state of being pervaded with anger (opp. akkodh) M i.360, 363; often compared with phenomena of nature suggesting swelling up, viz.
"uddhumyika" kodhupysassa adhivacana M i.144; "sa
umm" It 114; "sobbho papto" S iii.109; -garu "having respect for" i. e. pursuing anger (opp. saddhammagaru) A ii.46
sq., 84; -paa (adj.) knowing the true nature of anger Sn
96 (cp. SnA 170); -bhakkha feeding on, i. e. fostering anger,
Ep. of a Yakkha S i.238; -vinaya the discipline or control of
anger A i.91; v.165, 167 (combd. with upanha vinaya).
Kolankola [der. fr. kula] going from kula to kula (clan to clan) in
sasra: A i.233=Pug 16; S v.205; Nett 189, cp. A iv.381; A
v.120.
Kolaa (adj.) [fr. kula] born of (good) family (cp. ku-laja); as
257
Kolaa
Koseyya
Kosa1 (m. nt.) [cp. Sk. koa and koa, cavity, box vessel, cp.
Goth. hs, E. house; related also kuki=P. kucchi] any cavity or enclosure containing anything, viz. 1. a store room
or storehouse, treasury or granary A iv.95 (rja); Sn 525; J
iv.409 (=wealth, stores); J vi.81 (ahakosa only half a house)
in cpd. kohgra, expld at DA i.295 as koso vuccati bhagra. Four kinds are mentioned: hatth, ass,
rath, raha. 2. a sheath, in khura Vism 251, paa
KhA 46. 3. a vessel or bowl for food: see kosaka. 4.
a cocoon, see kraka; 5. the membranous cover of the
male sexual organ, the praeputium J v.197. The Com. expls
by sarra sakhta k. See cpd. kosohita. Cp. also kos.
-rakkha the keeper of the king's treasury (or granary)
A iii.57; -ohita ensheathed, in phrase kosohita vatthaguyha
"having the pudendum in a bag." Only in the brahmin cosmogonic myth of the superman (mah purisa) D iii.143,
161. Applied as to this item, to the Buddha D i.106 (in the
Cy DA i.275, correct the misprint kesa into kosa) D ii.17; Sn
1022 pp. 106, 107; Miln 167. For the myth see Dial iii.132
136. -kraka the "cocoon maker," i. e. the silk worm,
Vin iii.224; Vism 251. -kohgra "treasury and granary"
usually in phrase paripua k k (adj.) "with stores of
treasures and other wealth" Vin i.342; D i.134; S i.89; Miln 2;
& passim.
Koliya (adj.) [fr. kola] of the fruit of the jujube tree J iii.22, but
wrongly expld as kula dattika ph.=given by a man of (good)
family.
Kovira [cp. Sk. kovidra] Bauhinia variegata; a tree in the devaloka (pricchattaka kovira: k blossom, called p. VvA
258
Koseyya
Khaa
Kh
jjanya pariyya, quoted Vism 479). ppr. khajjamna
Pv ii.15 (consumed by hunger & thirst).
Khacita [pp. of khac as root expld at Dhtm. 518 by "bandhana"] inlaid, adorned with, usually with jewels e. g. VvA 14,
277; mai muttdi khacit gha "bells inlaid with jewels, pearls, etc." VvA 36; of a fan inlaid with ivory (danta
khacita) Vin iii.287 (Sam. Ps.). Suvaa khacita
gajak' atthara "elephants' trappings interwoven with gold"
VvA 104; of a chair, inlaid with pearls J i.41; of a canopy embroidered with golden stars J i.57.
Khajja (adj. nt.) [grd. of khajjati] to be eaten or chewed, eatable, solid food, usually in cpd. -bhojja solid and other food,
divided into 4 kinds, viz. asita, pta, khyita, syita Pv i.52
(=PvA 25) J i.58; Miln 2. -bhjaka a distributor of food (an
office falling to the lot of a senior bhikkhu) Vin ii.176 (=v.204);
iv. 38, 155.
Khajjaka (adj.) [fr. last] eatable, i. e. solid food (as bhojjanni opposed to ygu PvA 23); (nt.) J i.186 (of 18 kinds,
opp. ygu); i.235 (id.); Miln 294. bhjaka= prec.
Khajjati (=khdiyati, Pass. of khdati; Dhtm 93 bhak-khaa) 1.
to be eaten, chewed, eaten up, as by animals: upacikhi Vin
ii.113; suakhehi Pv iii.78 ; puavehi J iii.177; cp. Pv iv.52
(cut in two) 2. to be itchy, to be irritated by itch (cp. E.
"itch"=Intens. of "eat") J v.198 (kh kanduvyati); Pv ii.39
(kacchuy kh) 3. to be devoured (fig.), to be consumed, to
be a victim of: kmatahhi M. i.504; rpena S iii.87, 88 (kha-
259
Khaa
Khattiya
kao=chinnakao).
Khaik (f.) [fr. khaa] a broken bit, a stick, in ucchu Vv
3326 (=ucchu yahi DhA iii.315).
Khaicca (nt.) the state of being broken (of teeth), having broken teeth, in phrase kh plicca, etc., as signs of old age (see
above) M i.49=D ii.305; A iii.196; Dhs 644=736=869; DhA
iii.123; in similar connection Vism 449.
Khaeti [v. denom. fr. khaa] to renounce, to remit, in vetana etv J iii.188.
Khata1 [pp. of khanati] 1. dug up, uprooted, fig. one whose foundation (of salvation) has been cut off; in combn with upahata
D i.86 (=DA i.237); khata upahata attna pariharati "he
keeps himself uprooted and half dead" i. e. he continues to
lead a life of false ideas A i.105=ii.4; opp. akkhata anupahata, etc. A i.89.
Khatta (nt.) [Sk. katra, to ki, cp. Gr. , , possession] rule, power, possession; only in cpds.:
-dhamma the law of ruling, political science J v.490 (is
it khattu=khatt?)
-vijj polity D i.9, condemned as a
practice of heretics. Bdhgh at DA i.93 explains it as nti
sattha, political science (=dhamma), See Rh. D. Dialogues
i.18. -vijjavdin a person who inculcates Macchiavellian
tricks J v.228 (paraphrased: mtpitaro pi mretv attano va
attho kmetabbo ti "even at the expense of killing father and
mother is wealth to be desired for oneself"), so also J v.240;
-vijjcariya one who practises kh vijj ibid.; -vida (so
read for vidha)=vijja (adj.) a tricky person, ibid. (v. l. vijja, better). Cp. Sk. ktra vidya.
260
Khattiya
Khandha
ruci, in def. of idha (Vbh 245), tattha (Nd2 ), dihi (Nd2 ), cp.
Nd2 151 and Vbh 325 sq. akkhanti intolerance Vin iv.241
(=kopa); Vbh 360 (in def as opp. of khanti Dhs 1341. q. v.
above), 378.
-bala (nt.) the force of forbearance; (adj.) one whose
strength is patience:... aduho yo titikkhati khantbala
balnka tam aha brmi brhmaa Dh 399=Sn 623;
DhA iv.164; Ps ii.171, 176; -mett forbearing love, in phrase
kh mettnuddayasampanna (adj.) one whose character
is compassion and loving forbearance J i.151, 262; PvA 66
(+yuttakra); VvA 71 (in expln of akodhana); -sua (nt.)
the void of khanti Ps ii.183; -soracca (nt.) gentleness and forbearance S i.100, 222; A ii.68; J iii.487; DhA i.56; e niviha
"established in forbearance and meekness" A iii.46=D iii.61.
261
Khandha
Khandha
tial" factors of existence, birth & death depend on the khandhas. They appear in every new conjuncture of individuality
concerning their function in this paisandhi kkhae; see
Ps ii.72 76. Thus the var. phases of life in transmigration are defined as (jti:) ya tesa tesa sattna tamhi
tamhi satta nikye jti sajti okkanti abhinibbatti khandhna ptubhvo yatanna pailbho Nd2 on Sn 1052; cp.
jti dvhi khandhehi sangahit ti VvA 29; khandhna ptubhvo jti S ii.3; Nett 29; khandhna nibbatti jti Vism
199. (maraa:) y tesa tesa sattna... cuti cavanat
bhedo antaradhna maccu maraa klakiriy khandhna
bhedo kalevarassa nikkhepo M i.49=Vbh 137=S ii.3, 42.
vivaa kkhandha (adj.) one whose khandhas have revolved
(passed away), i. e. dead S i.121=iii.123. khana udaya
vyaya (or udayabbaya) the rising and passing of the kh.,
transmigration Dh 374=Th 1, 23, 379=It 120=KhA 82; Ps i.54
sq. (b) Their relation to attachment and craving (kma):
sattislpam km khandhna adhikuan S i.128=Th 2,
58, 141 (ThA 65: natthi tesa adhik?); craving is their cause
& soil: hetupaicca sambht kh. S i.134; the 4 arpino kh.
are based on lobha, dosa, moha Vbh 208. (c) their annihilation: the kh. remain as long as the knowledge of their true
character is not attained, i. e. of their cause & removal: ya
rpa, etc.... n' eta mama n' eso 'ha asmi na m' eso att ti;
eva eta yathbhta sammappaya passati; eva kho
jnato passato... ahankramamankra mnnusay na hont
ti S iii.103; paca kkhandhe pariya S iii.83; paca
kkhandh parit tihanti chinnamlak Th 2, 106. See
also S i.134. (d) their relation to dhtu (the physical elements) and yatana (the elements of sense perception)
is close, since they are all dependent on sensory experience.
The 5 khandhas are frequently mentioned with the 18 dhtuyo & the 12 yatanni: khandh ca dh cha ca yatan ime
hetu paicca sambht hetubhang nirujjhare S i.134; kh
dh yatana sankhata jtimla Th 2, 472; dhamma adesesi khandh' yatana dhtuyo Th 2, 43 (cp. ThA
49). Enumerated under sabba dhamm Ps i.101=ii.230; under dhamm (states) Dhs 121, as lokuttara kkhandh, etc.
Dhs 358, 528, 552. khandhna khandhaho abhieyyo,
dhtna dhtuho, etc. Ps i.17; cp. i.132; ii.121, 157. In def.
of kmvacar bhmi Ps i.83. In def. of dukkha and its recognition Nett 57. In def. of arahanto khsav Nd2 on sankhta
dhamm ("kh. sankht," etc.), on tia ("khandha (etc.)
pariyante thit"), & passim. (e) their valuation & their bearing on the "soul" conception is described in the terms of na
mama (na tumhka), anatt, anicca and dukkha (cp. updnakkh infra and rpa) rpa (etc.)... anicca, dukkha,
n' eso 'ham asmi, n 'eso me att "material qualities (etc. kh. 2
5) are evanescent, bad, I am not this body, this body is not
my soul" Vin i.14=S iv.382. n' eso 'ham asmi na m' eso att
S i.112; iii.103, 130 & passim; cp. kyo na tumhka (anatt
rpa) S ii.65; Nd2 680; and rpa na tumhka S iii.33 M
i.140=Nd2 680. rpa, etc. as anatt: Vin i.13; S iii.78,
132 134; A i.284= ii.171; 202; cp. S iii.101; Vin i.14. as
anicca: S iii.41, 52, 102, 122, 132 sq., 181 sq., 195 sq., 202
224, 227; A iv.147 (aniccnupass dukkhnupass); anicca
dukkha roga, etc., Ps ii.238 sq.; Vbh 324. 2. Specified as
panc' updna-kkhandh the factors of the fivefold clinging to existence. Defined & discussed in detail (rppadna
262
Khandha
Khambha
Khambha
Khaop
as large as...).
Khalanka in -pda at J vi.3 should probably be read kalanka (q.
v.).
Khaya [Sk. kaya to ki, kioti & kiti; cp. Lat. situs withering, Gr. , , wasting. See also khepeti under
khipati] waste, destruction, consumption; decay, ruin, loss; of
the passing away of night VvA 52; mostly in applied meaning with ref. to the extinction of passions & such elements as
condition, life, & rebirth, e. g. savna kh. It 103 sq., esp.
in formula savna khay ansava cetovimutti upasampajja A i.107= 221=D iii.78, 108, 132=It 100 and passim.
rgassa, dosassa, mohassa kh. M i.5; A i.299, cp. rga, dosa,
moha, A i.159; dosa S iii.160, 191; iv.250. tahna kh.
Dh 154; sankhrna kh. Dh. 383; sabbamaitna, etc. M
i.486; yu, pua Vism 502. yo dukkhassa pajnti idh'
eva khaya attano Sn 626=Dh 402; khaya virga amata
pata Sn 225. In exegesis of rpassa aniccat: rpassa
khayo vayo bhedo Dhs 645=738=872. See also kha and
the foll. cpds. s. v.: yu, upadhi, updna, jti, jvita,
taha, dukkha, pua, bhava, loka, sayojana, sabbadhamma, samudda.
-tta (a) gone beyond, recovered from the waning period
(of chanda, the moon=the new moon) Sn 598; -nupassin
(a) realizing the fact of decay A iv.146 sq.= v.359 (+vaynupassin); -a knowledge of the fact of decay M ii.38=Pug
60; in the same sense khaye a Nett 15, 54, 59, 127, 191,
cp. kvu 230 sq.; -dhamma the law of decay A iii.54; Ps i.53,
76, 78.
Khala [cp. Sk. khala] 1. corn ready for threshing, the threshing
floor Nd2 587; Vism 120; DA i.203 (khala sodheti). 2.
threshing, mash, in ekamasa khala karoti "to reduce to
one mash of flesh" D i.52=M i.377 (+masa puja; DA
i.160=masa rsi).
-agga the best corn for threshing DhA i.98; iv.98; -kla
the time for threshing DhA iv.98; -bha'agga the best agricultural implement for threshing DhA i.98; iv.98; -bhaakla the time for the application of the latter DhA iv.98;
-maala a threshing floor Vism 123; DhA i.266 (matta,
Khaop
Khi
Khdita (adj.) [pp. med. & pass. of khdati] eaten, or having eaten, eaten up, consumed J i.223; ii.154; PvA 5. A
twin form of khdita is khyita, formed prob. on analogy of
syita, with which freq. combined (cp., however, Trenckner
P.M. 57), e. g. Pug 59; Vism 258; PvA 25. Used as the poetical form Pv i.1211 (expl. PvA 158=khdita). Der. khditatta (nt.) the fact of being eaten J i.176.
hna the eating place, place of feeding J v.447.
Khraka (adj.) [fr. khra] sharp or dry, said of the buds of the
Pricchattaka A iv.117 sq.
Khr (f.) [and khri ] a certain measure of capacity (esp. of
grain, see below khrika). It is used of the eight requisites of
an ascetic, and often in conn. with his yoke (kja): "a khr
load."
-kja Vin i.33 (cp. Vin Texts i.132); J v.204. -bhaa
DhA iii.243 (:kaha te kh bh ko pabbajita parikkhro);
-bhra a shoulder yoke S i.169; J iii.83; -vidha=kja S
i.78=Ud 65; D i.101. At Ud and D passages it is read vividha,
but DA i.269 makes it clear: khr ti arai kamaalu
scdayo tpasa parikkhr; vidho ti kco, tasm khribharita kcam dy ti attho. As Kern (Toev. s. v.) points
out, vidha is a distortion of vivadha, which is synonymous
with kja.
Khdana (nt.) the act of eating (or being eaten) PvA 158. adj.
f. khdan the eater Dpvs 238; khdana at J ii.405 is to be read
as ni (q. v.). Cp. vi.
Khi [Vedic kr, cp. kati] play, amusement, pleasure usually combd with rati, enjoyment. Var. degrees of pleasures
(bla, etc.) mentioned at A v.203; var. kinds of amusement enumerated at Nd2 219; as expounded at D i.6 under jta
pamdahna. Generally divided into kyik & vcasik
khi (Nd2 ; SnA 86). Expl. as kan SnA 86, as hassdhippya (means of mirth) PvA 226; sahyakdhi kei PvA 265.
Cp. Sn 926; Pv iv.121 .
-dasaka "the decad of play," i. e. the second 10 years of
Khdpana [fr. khdpeti] causing to be eaten (kind of punishment) Miln 197 (sunakhehi).
Khdpeti (Caus. ii. of khdati] to make eat J iii.370; vi.335.
Khdika=khdaka, in aamaa S v.456.
265
Khi
Khyati
Khila (m. nt.) [cp. Sk. khila] waste or fallow land A iii.248;
fig. barrenness of mind, mental obstruction. There are five
ceto-khil enumd in detail at M i.101=A iv.460= D iii.238
(see under ceto); mentioned A v.17; SnA 262. As three khil,
viz. rga, dosa, moha at S v.57; also with other qualities at
Nd2 9. In combn with paligha S i.27 (chetv kh ); khila pabhindati to break up the fallowness (of one's heart)
S i.193; iii.134; Sn 973. akhila (adj.) not fallow, unobstructed, open hearted: citta susamhita... akhila sabbabhtesu Dii.261; S iv.118; in combn with ansava Sn 212;
with akankha Sn 477, 1059; with vivattacchada Sn 1147; cp.
vigatakhila Sn 19.
Khia [cp. Sk. kia] hard skin, callosity J v.204 (v. l. kia).
Kha [pp. of khyati, Pass. to khayati] destroyed, exhausted,
removed, wasted, gone; in cpds. often to be translated
"without." It is mostly applied to the destruction of the passions (sav) & demerit (kamma). Kh jti "destroyed is the
possibility of rebirth," in freq. occurring formula "kh. j. vusita brahmacariya kata karaya npara itthattya," denoting the attainment of Arahantship. (See arahant ii, formula
A) Vin i. 35; D i.84, 177, 203; M ii.39; Sn p. 16; Pug 61 etc.
See expln at DA i.225= SnA 138. kha mayha kamma J iv.3, similarly kha pura nava natthi sambhava Sn 235 (kha=samucchinna KhA 194); ppakamme
khe PvA 105. savakha one whose cravings are destroyed
Sn 370, cp. 162.
-sava (adj.) whose mind is free from the four mental
obsessions, Ep. of an Arahant Vin i.183; M i. 145; ii.43;
iii.30; D iii.97, 133, 235; It 95; Sn 82, 471, 539, 644; Dh 89,
420; PvA 7 (=arahanto); cp. BSk krava Divy 542.
The seven powers of a kh. (khsava balni) discussed
at D iii.283; Ps i.35; ten powers at Ps ii.173, 176; cp. Vism
144 (where a kh. walks through the air). -punabbhava one
in whom the conditions of another existence have been destroyed (=khsava) Sn 514, 656; -bja one who is without
the seed (of renewed existence) (=prec.) Sn 235 (=ucchinna
bja KhA 194); -maccha without fish (of a lake) Dh 155;
-vyappatha without the way of (evil) speech (vyapp=vcya
patho; expl. SnA 204 as na pharusavco) Sn 158; -sota with
the stream gone, i. e. without water, in macche appodake kh
Sn 777.
Khatta (nt.) DA i.225 & khat (f.) DhA iv.228, the fact of
being destroyed.
Khya [cp. khyati2 ] in -dhamma pajjati to fall into a state of
mental depression Vin iv.151, 154; A iii.269; iv.374. See also
remarks by Kern, Toev. s. v.
266
Khyati
Khura
Khudda (adj.) [Vedic kudra] small, inferior, low; trifling, insignificant; na khudda samcare kici "he shall not pursue
anything trifling" Sn 145 (=lmaka KhA 243); kh ca bla
Sn 318. Opp. to strong Vv 3210 (of mig= balavasena nihn
VvA 136).
-nukhuddaka, in ni sikkhpadni the minor observances of discipline, the lesser & minor precepts Vin ii.287=D
ii. 154; Vin iv.143; A i.233; cp. Divy 465; -vaksa in
akhuddvakso dassanya not appearing inferior, one of the
attributes of a well bred brahmin (with brahmava) D
i.114, 120, etc. -desa, in issara ruler of a small district Sdhp
348.
Khlaka (adj.) having sticks or stumps (as obstacles), in a unobstructed J v.203 (=akca nikkaaka 206).
Khana [der. fr. kheti] scorn Miln 357.
Kheti [to k or to khila?] to scorn, deride, only in combn hita
khita garahita (pp.) Miln 229, 288; cp. khana.
Khubhati see sa & khobha. The root is given at Dhtp 206 &
435 as "khubha=sacalane."
267
Khura
Khepaka
Khepaka
Gacchati
ing one by this name Vin ii.189; DhA 140. Cp. paka.? spittle
dribbler; "wind bag."
kho; tpi kho; api ca kho; eva bhante ti kho; eva by kho
Vin iv.134; Dh i.27, etc. In interr. sentences it often follows nu: kin nu kho J i.279; atthi nu kho J iii.52; kahan nu kho
J i.255.
G
Ga [fr. gam] adj., only as ending: going. See e. g. atiga, anuga,
antalikkha, ura, pra, majjha, sampa, hattha. It also appears as gu, e. g. in addha, anta, paha, pra, veda.
dugga (m. & nt.) a difficult road Dh 327=Miln 379; Pv ii.78
(=duggamana hna PvA 102); ii.925 ; J ii.385.
269
Gacchati
Gaaka
270
Gaaka
Gaik1 (f.) "one who belongs to the crowd," a harlot, a courtesan (cp. gaak) Vin i.231 (Ambapl) 268, (do.); ii.277
(Ahaks); Ud 71; Miln 122; DhA iii.104; VvA 75 (Sirim); PvA 195, 199. Customs of a gaik J iv.249; v.134.
Cp. sa.
Gaamba N. of the tree, under which Gotama Buddha performed the double miracle; with ref. to this freq. in phrase
gaamba-rukkha-mle yamakapihriya katv J i.77;
iv.263 sq.; DA i.57; PvA 137; Miln 349; Dvs v.54. Also
at DhA iii.207 in play of words with amba rukkha.
Gaik (f.) [a n. formation from gaa or gaha, see also
gahik] 1. a stalk, a shaft (cp. ga) J i.474; DhsA 319
(of the branches of trees: g koana sadda). 2. a
lump, a block of wood (more freq. spelling gahik, q. v.).
3. N. of a plant Vv 354 (=bandhujvaka VvA 161).
-dhna the putting on of a shaft or stem, as a bolt or bar
Vin ii.172; cp. Vin. Texts iii.213 and ga; also ghaik2 .
Gati
ganhpeti & ghpeti. 2. gahe- (Sk. gh ): Fut. gahessati. Aor. aggahesi (Sn 847; J i.52). Inf. gahetu (J i.190,
222). Ger. gahetv & gahetvna (poet.) (Sn 309; Pv ii.3).
3. gah- (Sk. gh ): Aor. aggahi. Ger. gayha & gahya (Sn
791). Pass. gayhati. Pp. gahita & gahta. Cp. gaha, gahaa,
gha.
Meanings: to take, take up; take hold of; grasp, seize; assume; e. g. ovda g. to take advice J i.159; khagga to seize
the sword J i.254 255; gocara to take food J iii.275; jane
to seize people J i.253; dhana to grasp the treasure J i.255;
nagara to occupy the city J i.202; pde gha gahetv holding her feet tight J i.255; macche to catch fish J iii.52; manta
to use a charm J iii.280; rajja to seize the kingdom J i.263;
ii.102; skha to take hold of a branch Sn 791; J i.52. Very
often as a phrase to be translated by a single word, as: nmato
g. to enumerate PvA 18; paisandhi g. to be born J i.149;
maraa g. to die J i.151; mlena g. to buy J iii.126; vacana g. to obey J iii.276 (in neg.). The ger. gahetv is very
often simply to be translated as "with," e. g. tidaa gahetv
caranto J ii.317; satta bhikkh gahetv agamsi VvA 149.
Caus. gahpeti to cause to be seized, to procure, to have
taken: phalni J ii.105; rjna J i.264. Cp. ghpeti.
272
Gati
Gantha
body: Vin i.47; S i.169=183 (analla with pure bodies; anallna at 169, but v. l. analla); A i.138; Sn 673 (samacchida
with bodies cut up); Pv i.112 (bhinna pabhinna, id.); PvA
56 (=sarra); 68. As limbs: S iv.198 (arupakkni festering
with sores); M i.506 (id.); M i.80=246; J i.61 (llkilinna);
Sn 1001 (honti gattesu mahpurisalakkha), 1017, 1019; Pv
iii.91 (=sarrvayav PvA 211); Miln 357 (arupakkni).
Gathita (adj.) [pp. of ganthati to tie, cp. gantha, knot; Sk.
grathita] tied, bound, fettered; enslaved, bound to, greedy for,
intoxicated with (c. loc.). When abs. always in combn w.
paribhujati and w. ref. to some object of desire (bhoga,
lbha, kmague). Usually in standing phrase gathita mucchita ajjhpanna (ajjhopanna) "full of greed & blind desire." In
this connection it is frequently (by B MSS.) spelt gadhita and
the editors of S, A, & Miln have put that in the text throughout. With mucchita & ajjhpanna: D i.245; iii.43; M i.162,
173; S ii.270; iv.332; A v.178, 181 Nd2 on nissita C. c.
loc.: J iv.371 (gharesu); DA i.59 (kmaguesu). In other connections: dnagantha gathita visajja Sn 794 (cp. Nd1 98);
yni loke gathitni na tesu pasuto siy Sn 940. J iv.5 (=giddha); v.274 (gedhita for pagiddha); PvA 262 (gadhita as expln
of giddha) agathita (agadhita) not fettered (by desire) without desire, free from the ties of craving (+m, a) S ii.194, 269;
A v.181; Miln 401 (trsl. Rh.D. ii.339: "without craving, without faintness, without sinking").
Gada speech, sentence Dh i.66, DA i.66 f.; and on D iii.135 (
28); gada at S ii.230 (v. l.) in phrase dihagadena sallena is
to be read diddhagadena s.
Gaddula (and gaddla) a leather strap S iii.150; J ii.246; iii.204;
fig, in tah gaddla "the leash of thirst," Nd2 on japp
(tah)=Dhs 1059=Vbh 361, cp. DhsA 367.
Gaddhana (nt.) [Derivation unknown; Sk. dadrghna] a small
measure of space & time M iii.127; S ii.264 (mattam pi, SA
"pulling just once the cow's teat"); A iv.395; Miln 110. See
Trenckner P.M. 59, 60; Rh. D. J.R.A.S. 1903, 375.
Gaddha [Vedic gdha; see gijjha] a vulture; in gaddhabdhipubbo, of the bhikkhu Ariha, who had been a vulture
trainer in a former life Vin ii.25=iv.218= M i.130; see also Vin.
Texts ii.377.
Gatika (adj.) 1. going to, staying with, in bhikkhu a person living with the bhikkhus Vin i.148. 2. leading to: ya what
they lead to (of the 5 indriyas) S v.230. 3. having a certain gati, leading to one of the four kinds of rebirth: eva
D i.16 (w. ref. to one of the first 3 gatis: DA i.108); niyata
whose destiny is certain (w. ref. to sugati) and aniyata whose
destiny is uncertain (w. ref. to a duggati) DhA iii.173.
Gantar [n. agent of gacchati in the sense of a periphrastic future] "goer" in gant hoti he will go, he is in the habit of going, combd w. sot hant khant, of the king's elephant A
ii.116=iii.161; v. l. for gat at M ii.155.
Gantha (in BB often misspelt gandha) [fr. ganthati] 1. a bond,
fetter, trammel; always fig. and usually referring to and enumd
as the four bodily ties, or knots (kya, see under kya): S
v.59=Dhs 1135; D iii.230; Nd1 98; DhA iii.276; 4 kyaganth, viz., abhijjh, bypda, slabbataparmasa, idasaccbhinivesa; thus Nd1 98; Vism 683. In other conn. Sn 347, 798,
273
Gantha
Gandhabba
274
Gandhabba
Gamana
Gandhina in kule antimagandhina J iv.34 (expl. by sabbapacchimaka) and gandhana in kula gandhana It 64 see under kula.
Gama 1. adj. going, able to go; going to, leading to; in vihangama going in the air Sn 221, 606; Th i.1108: J i.216 (cp.
gamana); aghasi id. Vv 161 (=vehsa VvA 78); nabhasi
going on clouds Sn 687; nibbna leading to N. S v.11; dra
going far, hadaya going to one's heart, q. v. 2. m.
course, going to; in attha going home, going to rest, etc.,
q. v.
Gamana 1. (nt.) the fact or the state of going, movement, journey, walk; () striving for, the leading of, pursuit A ii.48 sq.
(gamanena na pattabbo lokass' anto=one cannot walk to the
end of the world); Dh 178 (saggassa going to heaven); Sn 40,
691, cp. vra; J i.62; 216 (in expl. of vihagama: (kse)
gamanato pakkh viha gam ti vuccanti); 295; PvA 57.
pahia going on messages D i.5, etc.; agati wrong pursuit,
gacchati to pursue a wrong walk of life A ii.18; PvA 161;
magga tramping, being on the road PvA 43; saraa finding
shelter (in the Dhamma) PvA 49. 2. (adj.) () going or
leading to, conducive to: nibbna maggo the Path leading to
Nibbna S i.186; Dh 289; duggati magga the road to misery
Th 2, 355; duggamana hn (pl.) inaccessible places PvA
102 (in expl. of dugg).
-antarya an obstacle to one's departure J i.62; -gamana
going & coming, rise and set Vv 836 (=ogamanuggamana VvA
326); DhA i.80 (kle); sampanna sensana a dwelling or
lodging fit for going and coming, i. e. easily accessible A
v.15; J i.85; karoti to go to and fro VvA 139. -kamma
going away DhA ii.81. -kraa a reason for or a means to
going, in karoti to try to go J i.2; -bhva the state of hav-
275
Gamana
Garuka
Gameti [caus. of gacchati] to make go, to send, to set into motion, to cause to go It 115 (anabhva to destroy), see under
gacchati.
Garu [Vedic guru; Gr. , Lat. gravis & brutus, Goth. kaurus] 1. adj. (a) lit. heavy, opp. lahu light, appld to bhra, a
load S iii.26; J i.196 (=bhrika); vi.420; DhA i.48; Sdhp 494
(rpagarubhra the heavy load of "form"). Compar. garutara
(as against Sk. garya) PvA 191. (b) fig. important, to
be esteemed, valued or valuable A iii.110 sq. (piya manpa
g. bhavanya); c. gen. or bent on (often in sequence
garu, ninna, poa, etc., e. g. Vism 135); pursuing, paying homage to, reverent; (or) esteemed by, honoured, venerated: Satthugaru esteeming the Lord; Dhamma, Sanghe g.
A iii.331=iv.28 sq.; dosa S i.24; kodha, saddhamma (pursuing, fostering) A ii.46 sq.=84 sq.; Sdhp 1 (sabba loka
worshipped by all the world); Dpvs iv.12. agaru (c. gen.)
irreverent towards Sn p. 51 (Gotamassa). Cp. garuka, grava;
also agaru & agalu. 2. N. a venerable person, a teacher:
garuna dassanya & saksa Sn 325, 326 (v. l. garna
to be preferred, so also SnA 332, 333); garna dr It 36.
garukaroti (for garu k) to esteem, respect, honour; usually in series sakkaroti g mneti pjeti Vin ii.162; M i.31; D
i.91; A iii.76; iv.276; Nd2 334 (on namati), 530 (on yasassin);
PvA 54. Expl. at DA i.256 by grava karoti. garuktabba
worthy of esteem PvA 9. garukra (sakkra g. mnana vandana) esteem, honour, regard Pug 19=Dhs 1121. See also
guru.
-upanissita (adj.) depending on a teacher, one being
taught Ps ii.202; -hniya one who takes the place of a
teacher A iii.21, 393; Nett 8; Vism 344. -dhamma a rule
to be observed. There are 8 chief rules enum. at Vin ii.255=A
iv.276, 280; see also Vin iv.51, 315; v.136. Taken in the sense
of a violation of these rules Vin i.49=ii.226; i.52, 143, 144;
ii.279; -nissaya in gahti to take up dependency on a
teacher, i. e. to consider oneself a pupil Vin ii.303; -savasa
association with a teacher Nd2 235 4; Miln 408.
Garuka
Gaagayati
heavy motion: roll, thud, thunder). Sometimes with elimination of the sound element appld to swelling & fullness, as
in "bulge" or Gr. (be full).
These three categories are not always kept clearly separate, so that often a palatal group shifts into the sphere of a
guttural one & vice versa. The formation of kl gI roots
is by no means an extinct process, nor is it restricted to any
special branch of a linguistic family, as examples show. The
main roots of Idg. origin are the foll. which are all represented
in Pli (the categories are marked acc. to the foregoing
scheme 1, 2A, 2B, 3): kal (2A): , clango, Goth. hlahjan laugh; kr (2 A): , Sk. kru (cp. P. kitti), crmen;
kel (2 A): , calo (cp. P. kandati), Ohg. hellan; ker (2
Aa ): , =querquedula=kakkara (partridge);
kol (2 B): cuculus, kokila (a); kolhala and halhala (b); kor (2
Ba ): cornix (cp. P. kka), corvus=crow=raven; Sk. kroati; P.
koca. gel (1) Lat. gula, glutio, ; ger: (1) ,
, Lat. voro, Sk. girati, Ohg. querka; (3)
(whirlpool) Sk. gargara: gel (1) Sk. gilati, Ohg. kela gal
(2 A): gallus (a) gloria (b); gar (2 Ab ): , garrulus, Ohg.
kara: gel (2 A): (a) hirrio (to whine), Ohg. gellan (b):
ger: (1) (gargle) Sk. gharghara (gurgling). (2 Aa )
= crane, Ger. krhen, Lat. gracillo (cackle); (2 Ba )
Ohg. kerran (grunt), Sk. gti (sing); (2 Ab ) Sk. jarate (rustle); gur (2 Ba ): =grundio= grunt; Lat. gurgulio; Sk.
ghurghura.
With special reference to Pli formations the foll. list
shows a few sound roots which are further discussed in the
Dictionary s. v. Closely connected with Idg. kl gI is the
Pli cerebral , t, , , so that roots with these sounds have
to be classed in a mutual relation with the liquids. In most
cases graphic representation varies between both (cp. gala &
gaa) kil (ki) (2 Ab ): kik (cp. Sk. kka), kilikilyati &
kinkiyati (tinkle), kili (click), kinkaika (bell); kur (2 B):
kurati to hawk, to be hoarse; kha (1) khaakhaa (hawking),
kkacchati (snore); (2 Aa ) kukkua (cock); gal (1) gala (throat)
uggilati (vomit); (2 Ab ) galati (trickle): (2 Ba ) Pk. galagajjiya (roar) & guluguliya (bellow); (2 Bb ) gaagayati (roar);
gar (2 A); gaggara (roar & cackle, cp. Sk. gargara to 3); (2
B); gaggaryati (roar); (3) gaggaraka (whirlpool); ghar (1) Sk.
gharghara (gurgling); (2 Ab ) gharati (trickle), Sk. ghargharik
(bell); (2 Bb ) ghurughuryati (grunt). See also kakaca,
kanka, kankaa, cakora (cankora), cakkavaka, jagghati, ciiciyati, taataayati, timingala, papphsa.
Gaagayati
Gahapati
Gaha (f.) the "seizer," a supposed organ of the body dealing with digestion and gestation. Sama vepkiniy g iy
samanngata "endowed with good digestion" D ii.177=iii.166.
Same phrase at Av i.168, 172. Cp. Vedic graha. B. Psy. 59,
67.
Gahaika in phrase sasuddha -gahaika coming from
a clean womb, of pure descent, in the enum. of the indispensable good qualities of a brahmin or a noble D i.113, 115, 137
(gaha expl. as kucchi DA i.281); A i.163, iii.154, 223; Sn
p. 115. J i.2; duha gahaika having a bad digestion Vin
i.206.
Gahana [Sk. gahana, cp. also ghana] 1. adj. deep, thick, impervious, only in a clear, unobstructed, free from obstacles Vv
187 (akanataka+); Miln 160 (gahana a kata the thicket
is cleared). 2. nt. an impenetrable place, a thicket jungle, tangle. (a) 18 gahanni at J v.46; usually appl. to
grass: tia A i.153=iii.128 (+rukkha); Miln 369; adj. tiagahan obstructed with grass (of vihr) Vin ii.138; S i.199
(rukkhamla); J i.7, 158; PvA 5 (pabbata), 43; VvA 230
(vana). (b) fig. imperviousness, entanglement, obstruction, appl. to dihi, the jungle of wrong views or heresy (usually combd w. dihi kantra, the wilderness of d., see dihi)
M i.8, 485; Pug 22; DA i.108. Of rga, moha, etc., and
kilesa Nd2 630 (in expl. of Satth; rgagahana treti); DhA
iv.156 (on Dh 394); VvA 96. manussa M i.340.
-hna a lair in the jungle J i.150, 253.
Gavesati [gava+esati. Vedic gaveate. Origin. to search after cows. Dhtp 298=maggana tracking] to seek, to search
for, to wish for, strive after Dh 146 (gavessatha), 153; Th
1, 183; Nd2 2, 70, 427; J i.4, 61; Miln 326; PvA 187, 202
(aor. gavesi=vicini); Bdhd 53. In Nd2 always in combn esati
gavesati pariyesati.
Gavesana search for PvA 185.
Gavesin (adj.) seeking, looking for, striving after (usually )
D i.95 (ta, etc.); Dh 99 (kma), 245 (suci), 355 (pra);
Nd2 503 (in expl. of mahesi, with esin & pariyesin); Bdhd 59.
Gassetu at DhsA 324 is to be corrected into dassetu.
Gaha1 [see under gahti] a house, usually in cpds. (see below).
J iii.396 (=the layman's life; Com. geha).
-kraka a house builder, metaph. of tah (cp. kya
as geha) Dh 153, 154=Th 1, 183, 184; DhA iii.128; -ka
the peak of a house, the ridge pole, metaph. of ignorance
Dh 154 (=kaika maala DhA 128), replacing thir
(pillar) at Th 1, 184 in corresp. passage (= kaik Com.); ha a householder, one who leads the life of a layman (opp.
anagra, pabbajita or paribbjaka) Vin i.115 (sagahah paris
an assembly in which laymen were present); S i.201; A iii.114,
116, 258; It. 112 (ghara esino gahah) Dh 404=Sn 628; Sn
43 (ghara vasanto, see Nd2 226 for explanation), 90, 134
278
Gahapati
Gma
279
Gma
Grava
distinguished from nigama, a market town. It is the smallest in the list of settlements making up a "state" (raha). See
definition & description at Vin iii.46, 200. It is the source of
support for the bhikkhus, and the phrase gma piya carati
"to visit the parish for alms" is extremely frequent. 1. a village as such: Vin i.46; rmika, Pilinda Vin i.28, 29 (as
rmikagmaka & Pilinda gmaka at Vin iii.249); Sakyna gme janapade Lumbineyye Sn 683; Uruvela Pv ii.1318 ;
gmo ntiklena pavisitabbo M i.469; raha ca bhujati
Sn 619, 711; gme tisa kulni honti J i.199; Sn 386, 929,
978; J ii.153; vi.366; Dh 47, 49; Dhs 697 (suo g.); PvA 73
(gme amaccakula); 67 (gmassa dvrasampena). gm
gma from hamlet to hamlet M ii.20; Sn 180 (with nag naga; expl. SnA 216 as devagm devagma), 192 (with
pur pura); Pv ii.1318 . In the same sense gmena gma
Nd2 177 (with nigamena n, nagarena n., rahena r., janapadena j.). 2. grouped with nigama, a market town:
gmanigamo sevitabbo or asevitabbo A iv.365 sq., cp. v.101
(w. janapadapadeso); Vin iii.25, 184 ( v nigama v
upanissya); iv.93 (piya pavisati); gmassa v nigamassa
v avidre D i.237; M i.488; gme v nigame v Pug 66.
3. as a geographical political unit in the constitution of a
kingdom, enumd in two sets: (a) gma nigamarjadhniyo
Vin iii.89; A iii.108; Nd2 271iii ; Pv ii.1318 ; DhA i.90. (b)
gma nigama nagara raha janapada Nd2 177,
304iii (bandhana), 305 (kath); with the foll. variations: g.
nigama nagara M ii.33 40; g. nigama janapada Sn 995;
Vism 152; gmni nigamni ca Sn 118 (expld by SnA 178: ettha ca saddena nagarni ti pi vattabba). See also dvra;
paccanta; bja; bhta; mtu.
-anta the neighbourhood of a village, its border, the village itself, in nyaka leading to the village A iii.189; vihrin
(=raaka) living near a v. M i.31, 473; A iii.391 (w. nemantanika and gahapati cvara dhara); Sn 710; -antara
the (interior of the) village, only in t. t. gmantara gacchati
to go into the v. Vin ii.300, & in kappa the "village trip
licence" (Vin. Texts iii.398) ib. 294, 300; cp. iv.64, 65; v.210;
-pacra the outskirts of a v. Vin i.109, 110; defined at Vin
iii.46, 200; -kath village talk, gossip about v. affairs. Included in the list of foolish talks (+nigama, nagara,
janapada) D i.7 (see expln at DA i.90); Sn 922. See kath;
-kamma that which is to be done to, or in a village, in
karoti to make a place habitable J i.199; -ka "the village
fraud," a sycophant S ii.258; J iv.177 (=kavedin); -go
(pl.) the village cattle J i.194; -ghta those who sack villages, a marauder, dacoit (of cor thieves) D i.135; S ii.188;
-ghtaka (cor) =ghta S iv.173; Miln 20; Vism 484; nt. village plundering J i.200. -jana the people of the v. Miln 47;
hna in pura a ruined village J ii.102; -drak (pl.)
the youngsters of the v. J iii.275; f. -drik the girls of the
v. PvA 67; -dvaya, in vsika living in (these) two vs. PvA
77; -dvra the v. gates, the entrance to the v. Vin iii.52; J
ii.110, 301; cp. PvA 67; dhamma doings with women
folk (cp. mtugma), vile conduct D i.4(+methuna) A i.211;
J ii.180 (=vasaladhamma); VvA 11; DA i.72 (=gma vsna dhamma?); -poddava (v. l. kmapudava) a shampooer
(? Vin. Texts iii.66; Bdhgh explains: kmapudav ti chavi
rga maannuyutt ngarikamanuss; gma podav ti
pi pdho es' ev' attho, Vin ii.315) Vin ii.105; -bhojaka the vil-
Grava
Giddhin
Gha (adj.) [cp. Sk. gha] 1. [cp. gdha1 ] strong, tight, close;
thick. In phrase pacchbha g bandbana bandhati to pinion the arms tightly D i.245; A ii.241; J i.264; PvA 4. Of
an illness (ghena rogtankena phuha) A ii.174 sq.; appld
to poison smeared on an arrow M i.429. glha & glhaka (adv.) tightly J i.265, 291. agha (? prob. to be
read gha) (of vacana, speech, combd with pharusa) strong
(?) Pug 32 (expl by Com. atigha thaddha), cp. 2. and gaita.
2. [cp. gdha1 deep J i.155 (vedhin, piercing); Miln 370
(oghati). Cp. ajjhogha, atigha, ogha, nighita, pagha.
Gv (f.) [see go] gen. sg. gviy (Pug 56=A ii.207); nom. pl.
gviyo (SnA 323; VvA 308); gen. pl. gvna DhA i.396;
SnA 323; VvA 308). A cow Vin i.193; A iv.418; J i.50; Ud
8, 49; Vism 525 (in simile); DhA ii.35; VvA 200.
Gvuta (nt.) [cp. Vedic gavyti pasture land, district] a linear
measure, a quarter of a yojana=80 usabhas, a little less than
two miles, a league J i.57, 59; ii.209; Vism 118; DhA i.396.
281
Giddhin
Gihin
Hindi vraja "a cow pen"; the Vedic giribhraj (RV. x.68.
1) "aus Bergen hervorbrechend" (Roth) suggests relation to
bhraj, to break=bhaj=Lat. frango]=guh, a mountain cave
or gorge, serving as shelter & hiding place J iii.479 (trsl. by
Morris loc. cit. a hill run, a cattle run on the hills); v.260
(shassa, a lion's abode) expld as kacanaguh ibid. (for kandara guh? cp. Kern, Toev. p. 130). S ii.185. Also N. for
Rjagaha Sn 408; Dpvs v.5; in its Sk. form Girivraja, which
Beal, Buddh. Records ii.149 expls as "the hill surrounded,"
cp. ib. ii.158 (=Chin. Shan Shing), 161; see also Cunningham, Ancient Geogr. 462. It does not occur in the Avadnas;
-rj king of the mountains, of Mount Sineru Miln 21, 224;
-sikhara mountain top, peak VvA 4; (kacana, shining).
282
Gihin
Gutta
Gta [pp. of gyati] 1. (pp.) sung, recited, solemnly proclaimed, enunciated: mantapada gta pavutta D i.104
(cp. gira). 2. (nt.) singing, a song; grouped under vcasik khi, musical pastimes at Nd2 219; SnA 86. Usually
combd with nacca, dancing: A i.261; Vv8110 as naca gtdi J
i.61; VvA 131; referring to nacca gta vdita, dancing
with singing & instrumental accompaniment D iii.183 (under
samajja, kinds of festivities); Vv 324 . Same with viskadassana, pantomimic show at D i.5(cp. DA i.77; KhA 36).
-rava sound of song Mhvs vii.30; -sadda id. J iv.3; Dhs
621; DhA i.15; -ssara id. Vin ii.108; A iii.251; J iii.188.
Guheti [cp. Sk. guhayati Dhtp (563) & Dhtm (793) give both
roots guh & gu as syn. of veh] to cover, to veil, to hide;
pp. guhita in pasu covered with dust Pv ii.35 (in Hardy's
conjecture for kuhita, q. v.). Also in cpd. paliguhita obstructed, entangled Sn 131 (mohena) where v. l. BB kuhita.
Cp. o.
283
Gutta
Gtha
Guika (adj.) [to gua3 =gua, cp. also guaka] like a chain, or
having a chain, (nt. & f.) a cluster, a chain in mai a string of
jewels, a pearl necklace J iii.184 (v. l. BB for gua); iv.256;
Vism 285 (+mutt guik).
Guik (f.) [to gua1 ; cp. Sk. guik pill, guik tumour] a little
ball S v.462 (satta kolahi mattiyo guik, pl.); Th 2,
498 (kolahimatta g balls of the size of a jujube), cp. ThA
289.
Gumbiya (adj.) [fr. gumba] one of the troop (of soldiers) Vin
i.345.
Guh (f.) [Vedic guh, guh, ghati to hide (q. v.) Dhtp 337:
savaraa] a hiding place, a cave, cavern (cp. kandara & see
giriguh); fig. the heart (in saya). According to Bdhgh. (on
Vin i.58, see Vin. Texts i.174) "a hut of bricks, or in a rock,
or of wood." Vin i.58, 96, 107, 239, 284; ii.146; iii.155; iv.48
(cp. sattapai guh); Sn 772, 958; J ii.418; vi.574; Vv
5016 .
-saya hiding in the heart; or the shelter of the heart A
iv.98 (maccupso+); J v.367 (id.); Dh 37 (citta; see DhA
i.304).
Guru (adj. n.) [a younger form of garu (q. v.); Sk. guru] venerable, reverend, a teacher VvA 229, 230 (dakkhi a teacher's
fee); PvA 3 (jan venerable persons); Sdhp 227 (padesa),
417.
Gua1 [Sk. gua and gul ball, guik pill, guik tumour; to *gleu
to make into a ball, to conglomerate. Cp. Sk. glau ball; Gr.
; Ohg. chliuwa; Ger. kugel, kloss; E. clot, cleat; also
*gel with same meaning: Sk. gulma tumour, gilyu glandular
swelling; cp. Lat. glomus, globus; Ger. klamm; E. clamp,
clump. A root gu is given by Dhtp 576,77 in meaning of
"mokkha"] a ball, in cpds. sutta a ball of string (=Ohg. chliuwa) D i.54=; M iii.95; PvA 145; ayo an iron globe Dh 308;
DA i.84; loha of copper Dh 371; sela a rockball, i. e. a heavy
Gtha
Go
g.). Often combn with mutta (urine): Pv i.91 ; PvA 45, 78; DA
i.198.
-kaha an iron pot for defecation Vin iv.265. -kalala
dung & mire J iii.393; -kana playing with excrements Vism
531. -kpa a privy (cp. karsa) M i.74; Sn 279; Pv ii.316 ;
Pug 36; J vi.370; Vism 54. -khdaka living on faeces J
ii.211 (paka) PvA 266; -gata having turned to dung It
90; -gandhin smelling of excrements Pv ii.315 ; -hna a
place for excrementation Th 1, 1153; -naraka=foll. Vism
501; -niraya the mirepurgatory VvA 226; Sdhp 194; -pa
an insect living on excrement (=khdakapa) J ii.209, 212;
-bhakkha feeding on stercus M iii.168; PvA 192; DhA ii.61;
-bhnin of foul speech A i.128; Pug 29 (Kern, Toev. s. v.
corrects into ka?).
Go (m. f.) [Vedic go, Lat. bos, Gr. , Ohg. chuo, Ags.
c=E. cow] a cow, an ox, bull, pl. cattle. For f. cp. gv;
see also gava for cpds. Sg. nom. go (Sn 580, also in
composition, cp. aja go mahisdi PvA 80=pas); gen.
gavassa (M i.429); instr. gavena, gvena; acc. gava, gvan;
abl. gavamh, gav (D i.201=A ii.95= Pug 69); loc. gavamhi,
gvimhi (SnA 323), gave (Sn 310). Pl. nom. gvo (D
i.141; M i.225; A i.205; ii.42 sq.; Sn 20, 296, 307; J i.295);
gen. gona A ii.75 (cp. Vedic gonm), gava (J iv.172, cp.
gava pati), gunna (A i.229, ii.75; v.271; J i.194; iii.112;
iv.223); instr. gohi (Sn 33); acc. gvo (M i.225; A i.205; Sn
304; Dh 19, 135); abl. gohi; loc. gosu, gavesu. See also
gava, gavesati, goa.
-kaaka the hoof of an ox, in ha bhmi, trampled
by the feet of cattle Vin i.195; A i.136 (cp. Vin. Texts
ii.34); -kaa a large species of deer J v.406 (=gain),
416 (khagga+); DhsA 331 (gavaya+); cp. next; -k (f.)
=gokaa D iii.38=53; -kula (nt.) a cow pen, a station of cattle S iv.289; -gaa a herd of cattle M i.220; A i.229; J ii.127;
DhA i.175; VvA 311; -ghasik a cow hide (?). Vin
ii.117 (cp. Vin. Texts iii.98); -ghtaka one who kills cows, a
butcher D ii.294 (in simile); M i.58, 244, 364 (sn, slaughter house); S ii.255; iv.56; A iii.302, 380; J v.270; Vism
348 (in simile). -cara I. Lit. A. (noun m.) pasture, lit. "a
cow's grazing," search after food; fodder, food, subsistence (a)
of animals: J i.221; iii.26; Dh 135 (daena goplo gvo pceti
gocara: with a stick the cowherd drives the cattle to pasture).
Sho gocarya pakkamati "the lion goes forth for his huut" A
ii.33= iii.121; gocarya gacchati to go feeding, to graze Sn
39; J i.243; gocare carati to go feeding, to feed J i.242. (b)
metaph. of persons, esp. the bhikkhu: pucchitabba gocara
Go
Gotta
(and agocara) "enquiries have to be made concerning the fitness or otherwise of his pasturage (i. e. the houses in which he
begs for food)" Vin ii.208; samao gocarato nivatto an ascetic
returned from his "grazing" Pv iv.142 : Similarly at Vism 127,
where a suitable g. gama ranks as one of the 7 desiderata
for one intent on meditation. B. (adj.) () feeding on or
in, living in; metaph. dealing with, mixing with. vana living in the woods Pv ii.65 ; vri (in water) Sn 605; jala (id.)
J ii.158 (opp. thala). Vesiy (etc.) associating with v. Vin
i.70. II. Applied. A. (noun m. or nt.) a "field" (of sense
perception, etc.), sphere, object; food for, an object of (a)
psychologically indriyna nngocarni various spheres of
sense perception S v.218; sense object (=rammaa)
Ps i.180; ii.97; 150 sq.; DhsA 314, 315 (sampatta physical
contact with an object, gandha smell contact, i. e. sensation); indriya Sdhp 365. (b) ethically: ariyna gocare
rat "finding delight in the pasture of the good," walking in
the ways of the good Dh 22; vimokho yesa gocaro "whose
pasture is liberty" Dh 92=Th 1, 92. Esp. in phrase cra gocara sampanna "pasturing in the field of good conduct" D
i.63=It 118; M i.33; S v.187; It. 96; analysed as Dvandva cpd.
at Vbh 246, 247, but cp. ppcra gocara Sn 280, 282. This
phrase (cra gocara) is also discussed in detail at Vism 19,
where 3 kinds of gocar are distinguished, viz. upanissaya,
rakkha, upanibandha. So also in contrast w. agocara, an
unfit pasture, or an unfit, i. e. bad, sphere of life, in gocare &
agocare carati to move in a congenial or uncongenial sphere A
iii.389; iv.345 sq.; D iii.58=77; S v.147; Vbh 246, 247 (expl.
w. vesiy etc., cp. above=having bad associations). B.
(adj.) : belonging to, dependent on, falling to the share of:
eta dependent on this M i.319; sattasaddhamma, moving in
the sphere of the seven golden rules S iii.83; rpa to be perceived by sight J i.396; Nibbna belonging to N. Sdhp 467.
kusala (adj.) skilled in (finding proper) food; clever in
right living behaving properly in, exercising properly M
i.220=A v.347 (of a cowherd driving out his cattle); S iii.266
sq. (samdhi); A iii.311 (do.) v.352 sq. (w. ref. to cattro
satipahn); gahaa the taking of food, feeding J i.242;
gma a village for the supply of food (for the bhikkhus)
PvA 12, 42; hna pasturage J iii.52; pasuta intent on
feeding J iii.26; bhmi pasturage, a common DhA iii.60;
visaya (the sphere of) an object of sense S v.218; Vbh 319;
-caraa pasturing J vi.335; -ha (nt.) [Sk. goha to sth to
stand; cp. Lat. stabulum, stable; super stes; Goth. awistr] a cow stable, cow pen M i.79; J iv.223; -pa [Sk.
gopa, cp. gopati] a cowherd, herdsman Sn 18; Dh 19; J iv.364
(a robber); Vism 166 (in simile); DhA 157, f. gop Sn 22,
32; -pakhuma (adj.) having eyelashes like a heifer D ii.18;
iii.144, 167 sq.; VvA 162, 279 (=rapamha); -pada a cow's
footprint, a puddle A iii.188; iv.102; Miln 287; also padaka
A iii.188 v. l.; DA i.283; -pariyaka leader of the cows, Ep.
of a bull (gopit+) M i.220, 225; -pla a cowherd (usually as
ka) Dh 135; -plaka=prec. Vin i.152, 243 sq.; M i.79, 115
sq., 220=A v.347; M i.333; S iv.181; A i.205 ( uposatha);
Miln 18, 48; Vism 279 (in comparison); DhA iii.59; -pit
"father (protector) of the cows"=gava pati, Ep. of a bull M
i.220 (+pariyaka); -p f. of gopa, q. v.; -pura (nt.) [Sk.
gopura] the gate of a city J vi.433; Miln 1, 67, 330; Bdhd 138;
-balivadda in nayena; in the expression gobalivadda (black
286
Gotta
Ghasana
Gh
Gha (adj. suffix to ghan) killing, destroying, see hanati.
iagha at Sn 246 is v. l. SS for iaghta. Cp. pai & see also
ghana2 & ghta.
287
Ghasana
Ghamma
Ghaa (adj. n.) [fr. Sk. ghana to han, cp. ghnya & hatya]
killing, destroying () see atta.
Ghaana (nt.) [Sk. ghaana, to granth, cp. gantha] 1. combining, putting together, combination, composition, J i.220; PA.
312, etc. 2. striking, fig. insulting (ghaana=sajjana)
VvA 55. To meaning "strike" cp. saghaana.
Ghaeti [Sk. ghaayati] to strike, beat, knock against, touch; fig.
to offend, mock, object to. (a) lit. M ii.4 (jannukena; text reads
ghatteti, v. l. ghaeti); Sn 48 (=sa Nd2 233); J i.218; Pv
iv.109 (=paihasati PvA 271); DA i.256 (=khuseti); DhA
i.251. (b) fig. A iii.343; Sn 847 (cp. Nd1 208); Vism 18.
pp. ghaita Pug 30, 36; psychologically ghaayati=ruppati. B
or S iii.86. Pass. ghayati (q.v.). Cp. sajja and uggheti.
Ghaa2 (m. & f.) [Sk. gha; conn. with ganthati to bind together]
multitude, heap, crowd, dense mass, i. e. thicket, cluster. itthi a crowd of women J iv.316; maccha a swarm of fish J
ii.227; vana dense forest J ii.385; iv.56; v.502; vi.11, 519,
564; brahma company of brahmins J vi.99.
Ghaaka [Dem. of prec.] 1. a small jar (?) Vin ii.129, 130 (combd
w. kataka & sammajjan); cp. Vin. Texts iii.130. 2. the capital of a pillar J i.32 (cp. kumbha).
Gha (f.) a small bell (cp. kinkanik) J iv.215; VvA 36, 37,
279 (khuddaka). As gha at Vism 181.
Ghata (nt.) [Vedic ghta, gh to sprinkle, moisten] clarified butter VvA 326; Miln 41; Sdhp 201 ( bindu). With ref. to the
sacrificial fire (fire as eating ghee, or being sprinkled w. ghee)
ghatsana; J i.472; v.64, 446; Pv i.85 (ghatasitta).
Ghana1 [Vedic ghana, cp. Gr. ?] (a) (adj.) solid, compact, massive; dense, thick; in eka of one solid mass (of sela,
rock) Vin i.185=Dh 81=Th 1, 643= Miln 386; A iii.378, cp.
ghanasela pabbata DhA i.74. gh. pasu J i.264, pahav
(solid ground) J i.74; PvA 75; palsa (foliage) PvA 113; buddharasmiyo J i.12; masa solid, pure flesh DhA i.80; saka
(thick cloth) J i.292; sachanna (thickly covered) PvA 258;
suvaakoima DhA iv.135; abbha a thick cloud Sn 348 (cp.
SnA 348). (b) (m.) the foetus at a certain stage (the last before birth & the 4th in the enum. of the foll. stages: kalala,
abbuda, pes, gh.) S i.206; J iv.496; Miln 40; Vism 236. The
latter meaning is semantically to be explained as "swelling" &
to be compared with Gr. to swell and =embryo
(the gravid uterus).
288
Ghamma
Ghurughuru
Ghara1 (nt.; pl. Dh 241, 302) [cp. gaha & geha] a house A
ii.68; Sn 43 (gahah ghara vasant), 337 (abl. ghar), 889
(id. gharamh); J i.290 (id. gharato); iv.2, 364, 492 (ayo);
Pug 57; Miln 47. Combd with vatthu PvA 3, 17. scighara
a needle case VvA 251.
-jira house yard Vism 144 (where Dhs A 116 in
id. passage reads gharadvra).
-vsa the household
life (as contrasted with the life of a mendicant) Vin ii.180
(gharvsattha); A ii.208; M i.179, 240, 267, 344; Sn 406
(cp. S v.350); J i.61; PvA 61; -kapoa [Sk. ghakapota] the
house pigeon Miln 364, 403; -golik house or domestic
lizard J ii.147. -ds a female house slave Pv ii.321 ; -dvra
a house door J iv.142; Dhs A 116; PvA 93; -bandhana the
bonds of the house, i. e. the establishing of marriage DhA i.4;
-mukha an opening in the house, the front of the house Nd2
177; -mesin one who looks after the house, a pater familias,
householder Sn 188; It 112 (gahaha+); J vi.575; -sandhi a
cleft or crevice in the house PvA 24; -skara a tame, domestic
pig DhA iv.16.
Ghara2 [a drink (cp. gala) & garala poison] (); in -dinnakbdha sickness in consequence of a poisonous drink (expl.
as suffering fr. the results of sorcery) Vin i.206 (cp. Vin. Texts
ii.60); -visa poison Pug 48; DhA ii.38; -sappa a poisonous
snake DhA ii.256.
Ghara (f.) [fr. ghara1 ] a house wife Vin i.271; S i.201; Pv
iii.19 (=ghara smin PvA 174); DhA iii.209.
Ghurughuru
Cakka
698; Dhs 637, 720 (+ghosa kamma). 2. shouting, howling, wailing (of Petas) Pv iii.34 ; iv.36 , 338 .
-pama to be measured (or judged) by one's reputation
A ii.71=Pug 53; also as pamika DhA iii.114 (in same context).
C
Ca (indef. enchtic particle) [Vedic ca adv. to rel. pron. *qo,
idg. *que=Cr. , Lat. que, Goth. h. Cp. ka, ki, ku] 1.
Indefinite (after demonstr. pron. in the sense of ki=what
about? or how is it? cp. ki)=ever, whoever, what ever,
etc. [Sk. kaca, Gr. , Lat: quisque, Goth. hvazuh] so
ca whoever (see below 3), ta ca pan' amhka ruccati tena c'
amh attaman M i.93; ya ca kho... ceteti ya ca pakappeti...
whatever he thinks, whatever he intends... S ii.65. As a rule
the Pali form corresp. to Sk. kaca is *kascid=koci, & ci (cid)
is the regular P. representative of the indefinite ca (cp. cana &
api). 2. Copulative or disjunctive according to the general
context being positive or negative. (a) copulative: and, then,
now: tad ca now then, and then (in historical exposition) J
iii.188. Most frequent in connecting two or three words, usually placed after the second, but also after the third: attha
anattha ca Dh 256; pubbparni ca Dh 352; ala etehi ambehi jambhi panasehi ca J ii.160. In the same sense added
to each link of the chain as ca ca (cp. Sk. ca ca, Gr.
, Lat. que que; also mixed with constituents of similar pairs
as api ca, cp. ): tuyha ca tass ca to you and her
(orig. this or whatever to you, whatever to her)=to you as well
as to her J i.151. Often with the first member emphasized by
eva: c' eva, as well as: hasi c' eva rodi ca he laughed as well
as cried J i.167; masena c' eva phalphalena ca with flesh
as well as with all kinds of fruit J iii.127; subhaddako c' eva
supesalo ca J iii.82; c' eva apace padse pi ca waste and even
defile ThA 72 (Ap v.40). (b) disjunctive: but (esp. after
a negation): yo ca but who Th 1, 401; yad ca but when (cp.
tad ca) J iii.128. In conditional clauses (cp. 3) combd with
Cakka
Cakkhu
Cakkhu
Cajati
292
Cajati
Catur
Caula (adj.) [Sk. catura] clever, skilled Mhbv 148. See catura.
Caa (adj.) [Sk. caa] fierce, violent; quick tempered,
uncontrolled, passionate Vin ii.194 (hatth); D. i.90 (=ma
nissita kopa yutta DA i.256); S i.176; ii.242; A
ii.109=Pug 47 (sakagava); J i.450; ii.210, 349; Vism 343, 279
(sota, fierce current), (hatthi); DhA iv.9 (goa) 104; Sdhp
41, 590, 598. f. ca M i.126; J ii.443; iii.259; Pv ii.34
(=kodhan PvA 83). Compar. caatara S ii.242. In
cpds. cai, see caikata & caitta.
Caaka (adj.)=caa; f. caik Pv ii.35 , & caiy J iii.259
(=kodha).
Cala1 [Vedic cala] a man of a certain low tribe, one of the
low classes, an outcaste; grouped with others under nc kul
(low born clans) as cal nesd ve rathakr pukkus
at A i.107=ii.85=Pug 51. As cala-pukkus with the four
recognized grades of society (see jti & khattiya) at A i.162.
Vin iv.6; M ii.152; S v.168 sq. (vasa); A iii.214, 228 (brhmaa); iv.376; J iv.303; PvA 175; Miln 200. f. cal A
iii.226; Pv iii.113 ; DhA ii.25. See also pukkusa.
Cala2 (nt.) a kind of amusement or trick D i.6(=ayo-gulak
play with an iron ball DA i.84).
Caikata (adj.) [cp. caa] angry Vin iv.310.
Caikka (nt.) [*caikya, of caika > caaka] ferocity anger,
churlishness Nd2 313, 576, Dhs 418, 1060, 1115, 1231; Vbh
357; DhA ii.227. Cp. caitta.
Caitta (nt.) anger Dhs 418; Pug 18=22. Cp. caikka.
Catukka1 (nt.) [fr. catu=*catuka > *catukya] 1. a tetrad, a set
of four, consisting of four parts: pacakajjhn (pl.) the fourfold & the fivefold system of meditation DhsA 168; see cpds.
2. a place where four roads meet J vi.389; Miln 330 (see
also below); esp. in phrase catukke catukke kashi teti (or
is it "in sets of four"? See Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 79) J i.326;
ii.123; DhA iv.52. 3. a square (in a village) Miln 1, 365; J
ii.194; v.459; DhA 317.
-bhatta a meal for four bhikkhus Vin ii.77; iii.160;
-magga the 4 fold path Nett 113; -yaa (usually sabba
catukka) a sacrifice consisting of (all) the four parts J iii.44,
45; PvA 280; cp. J i.335. (Or is it the "cross road sacrifice"?)
Catukka2 [origin. "consisting only of one quarter"?] empty, shallow, little Nd2 415 (paa, with omakapaa, lmaka p);
J iv.441 (nad=tuccha Com.).
Catuttha (num. ord.) [Vedic caturtha, Idg. *queturto=Gr.
, Lat. quartus, Ohg. fiordo] the fourth Sn 97, 99,
450; J iii.55; vi.367; (adv.) for the fourth time DhA iii.174.
f. catutth Sn 436; Vism 338. See also (s.v. Aha)
ahuha.
-bhatta food eaten only every fourth day J v.424.
293
Catur
Capala
Cattatta (nt.) [fr. catta] the fact of giving up, abandonment, resignation Vbh 254 sq.; DhsA 381.
Cattrsa (& cattlsa) [Sk. catvriat] forty S ii.85; Sn p. 87;
It 99. Usually cattsa J i.58; v.433; DhA i.41; ii.9. 93.
-danta having 40 teeth (one of the characteristics of a
Mahpurisa) D ii 18; iii.144, 172.
Cattrsaka (adj.) having forty M iii.77.
Cadika at Miln 197 (mikavankacadika) prob. for madika.
Cana () [Vedic cana fr. rel. pron. *qo+demonstr. pron. *no,
cp. an, nn; Gr. ; Lat. ne in quandone=P. kudcana.
cana=Goth. hun, Ohg. gin, Ger. ir gen d. Cp. ci] indef.
particle "like, as if," added to rel. or interrog. pronouns, as
294
Capala
Carati
Capala (adj.) [Sk. capala cp. cpa bow; from *qep to shake or
quiver, see Walde Lat. Wtb. under caperro] moving to & fro,
wavering, trembling, unsteady, fickle S i.204; v.269; M i.470
(and a steady); A iii.199, 355, 391; Dh 33; Pug 35; J i.295;
ii.360. At J vi.548 it means one who lets the saliva flow out of
his mouth (expld by paggharita lla "trickle spit").
Campa=campaka J vi.151.
Campaka the Champaka tree (Michelia champaka) having fragrant white & yellow flowers J v.420; vi.269; Miln 338; DA
i.280; Vism 514 (rukkha, in simile); DhA i.384; VvA 194.
Camma (nt.) [Vedic carman, cp. Lat. corium hide or leather, cortex bark, scortum hide; Ohg. herdo; Ags. heora=E. hide; also
Sk. ktti; Ohg. scirm (shield); E. skin; from *sqer to cut, skin
(cp. kau)=the cut off hide, cp. Gr. : (] 1. skin,
hide, leather Vin i.192 (sha vyaggha dpi), 196 (elaka aja
miga); A iv.393 (sha dpi); PvA 157 (kadalimiga as rug);
J ii.110 (sha); iii.82, 184; Miln 53; Sdhp 140. It is supposed
to be subcutaneous (under chavi as tegument), & next to the
bone: chavi chindetv camma chindati S ii.238=A iv.129;
freq. in expr. like ahi cammanahru matta (skin &
bones) PvA 68, see under nahru; camma masa nahru
PvA 80. 2. a shield Vin ii.192 (asi sword & shield); M
Carati [Vedic carati, *qel to move, turn, turn round (cp. kaha
& kula)=Lat. colo (incolo), Gr. , (also
goat herd & cowherd=gocara); also P. cakka, q.
v. A doublet of car is cal, see calati Dhtp 243 expld car by
"gati bhakkhanesu"] to move about, to "live and move,"
to behave, to be. Imper. act. cara (J i.152), car (metri
causa, J iii.393); imper. med. carassu (Sn 696), pl. carmase (=exhortative, Sn 32); ppr. caranto (J i.152; PvA 14)
& cara (Sn 151; Dh 61, 305; It 117); med. caramna (Vin
i.83; Pv i.1010 ; PvA 160); pot. careyya (Sn 45, 386, 1065;
Dh 142, 328) & care (Sn 35; Dh 49, 168, 329; It 120); fut.
295
Carati
Calita
good, right, proper or (nt.) good action, right conduct & the
opposite; e. g. sucarita Dh 168, 231; PvA 12, 71, 120; duccarita A i.146; ii.85, 141; iii.267, 352; D iii.111. 214; Dh 169,
Sn 665; Pv i.94 ( caritv), etc. See also kya vac mano
under kya.
Caritaka (nt.) conduct (=carita2 ) Th 1, 36.
Caritar [n. agent to creti, cp. carita] walking, performing (c.
acc.) M i.77.
Carima (adj.) [Vedic carama, Gr. end, a long time
(ago)] subsequent, last (opp. pubba) Th 1, 202; It 18; J v.120.
acarima not later (apubba ac simultaneously) D i.185; M
iii.65; Pug. 13.
-bhava the last rebirth (in Sasra, with ref. to Arahantship) ThA 260, cp. caramabhavika in Divy (freq.) & next.
Carimaka (adj.) last (=carima) M i.426; Nd2 569b (vi-assa
nirodha, the destruction of the last conscious state, of the death
of an Arahant); Vism 291.
Cariya (nt.) & cariy (f.) [from car, carati] (mostly ) conduct, behaviour, state of, life of. Three cariys at Ps i.79; six
at Vism 101; eight at Ps ii.19 sq., 225 & four sets of eight in
detail at Nd2 237b . Very freq. in dhamma & brahma, a good
walk of life, proper conduct, chastity eka living alone Sn
820; unch begging J ii.272; iii.37; bhikkh a life of begging
Sn 700; nagga nakedness Dh 141. See also carati 2b . In
cpds. cariy.
-piaka the last book in the Khuddaka nikya;
-manussa a spy, an outpost J iii.361 (v. l. crika).
Cala (adj.) [see calati] moving, quivering; unsteady, fickle, transient S iv.68 (dhamm cal c' eva vyay ca anicc, etc.); J
ii.299; iii.381; v.345; Miln 93, 418; Sdhp 430, 494.
acala steadfast, immovable S i.232; J i.71 (hna); Vv 514
(hna=Ep. of Nibbna); acala sukha (=Nibbna) Th 2,
350; cp. niccala motionless DhA iii.38.
-cala [intens. redupl.] moving to & fro, in constant motion, unsteady J iv.494, 498 (=cacala); Miln 92; (cp. Divy
180, 281); -kkaku having a quivering hump J iii.380 iv.330
(=calamnakakudha or calakakudha).
Calaka1 (m.) a camp marshal, adjutant D i.51(in list of various
occupations); A iv.107 sq.
Calaka2 (nt.) [perhaps from carv to chew; but Sk. car-vana,
chewing, is not found in the specific sense of P. calaka. Cp.
ucchiha and cua] a piece of meat thrown away after having been chewed Vin ii.115; iv.266 (=vighsa); VvA 222
(ahikni meat remnants & bones).
Carahi (adv.) [Sk. tarhi; with change t > c due to analogy with
ci (cid) in combn with interr.] then, therefore, now, esp. after interr. pron.: ko carahi jnti who then knows? Sn 990;
katha carahi jnemu how then shall we know? Sn 999; ki c.
A v.194. Vin i.36; ii.292; Sn 988; J iii.312; Miln 25; DA
i.289.
296
Calita
Cra
Cavati [Vedic cyavate from cyu=Gr. ; cp. Lat. cieo, cio, sollicitus, Gr. , , Goth. haitan=Ohg, heizan] to move,
get into motion, shift, to fall away, decease, esp. to pass from
one state of existence into another D i.14 (sasaranti c upapajjanti, cp. DA i.105); Kh viii.4 (=KhA 220: apeti vigacchati
acetano pi samno puakkhaya vasena aa thna gacchati); It 99= Nd2 2352 (satte cavamne upapajjamne); It 77
(devo deva ky c. "the god falls from the assembly of
gods"), Sn 1073 for bhavetha (=Nd2 238;) PvA 10. Caus.
cveti: inf. cvetu S i.128 sq., 134 (kma.) pp. cuta
(q. v.), see also cuti.
Cvati [fr. ci] to honour, only in cpd. -apacyati (q. v.). The
Dhtp (237) defines the root cy by pj.
Cra [fr. car carati to move about] motion, walking, going; doing, behaviour, action, process Miln 162 (+vihra); Dhs 8=85
(=vicra); DhsA 167. Usually (n. & adj.): kma going
at will J iv.261; pamda a slothful life J i.9; pia alms
begging Sn 414, 708; sabbaratti wandering all night S i.201;
samavattha A iii.257. See also carati ib .
297
Cra
Cittaka
kadci at some time or any time, etc. (q. v.), see also ca, cana,
ce.
Crin (only ) (adj.) walking, living, experiencing; behaving, acting, practising. (a) lit. asanga S i.199; akla Sn 386;
ambu Sn 62; vihangapatha Sdhp 241; sapadna M i.30; Sn
65; pariyanta Sn 904. (b) fig. anudhamma Sn 69; gu A
ii.240; A iii.163; dhamma Miln 19; brahma Sn 695; manpa
Vv 314 ; yata Sn 971; sama Miln 19. See all s. v. & cp. cau.
Cic (f.) [Sk. cic & tintiik] the tamarind tree J v.38 (vana);
SnA 78.
Creti [Denom. fr. cara; cp. carati] to set going, to pasture, feed,
preserve: indriyni c. to feast one's senses (cp. Ger. "augenweide") PvA 58; khanti c. to feed meekness DA i.277;
olambaka crento drooping J i.174; Pass. ppr. criyamna
being handed round J iv.2 (not v) pp. carita. Cp. vi.
Cla [From calati] shaking, a shock, only in bhmi earthquake.
Clan (f.) [to clana of calaka2 ] a pestle, a mortar Vin i.202 (in
cua & dussa, cp. saha).
Ciatta (nt.) [Der. fr. cia] custom, habit Miln 57, 105.
Cita [pp. of cinti] heaped; lined or faced with (cp. citaka2 )
pokkharaiyo ihakhi cit D ii.178, cp. Vin ii.123.
-antarasa "one whose shoulder hole is heaped
up," one who has the shoulders well filled out (Ep. of a
Mahpurisa) D ii.18; iii.144, 164.
Citaka & Citak (f.) [from ci, cinti to heap up]. 1. a heap,
a pile, esp. a funeral pile; a tumulus D ii.163; cp, ii.1014 . J
i.255; v.488; vi.559, 576; DA i.6; DhA i.69; ii.240; VvA 234;
PvA 39. 2. (adj.) inlaid: suvaa, with gold J vi.218
(=khacita).
Ci (cid in Sandhi) [Vedic cid nom. nt. to interr. base *qi (as in
Gr. , Lat. quis, Goth. hvi leiks, see ki, cp. ka, ku),
= Gr. , Lat. quid & quid(d)em, Av. ci (cp. tad, yad, kad
beside ta, ya, ki)] indef. interr. particle (always ), in
koci (= Sk. kacid) whoever, kici (kincid eva) whatever,
Citi (f.) [From ci, cinti, to heap up] a heap, made of bricks J
vi.204 (city avayata pihik). See also cetiya.
Cittaka (nt.) [to citta1 ] a sectarian mark on the forehead in
298
Cittaka
Citta
Citta1 & Citra (adj.) [to cetati; *(s)qait to shine, to be bright, cp.
Sk. citra, Sk. P. ketu, Av. cipr, Lat. caelum, Ags. hador,
Ohg. heitar, see also citta2 ] variegated, manifold, beautiful;
tasty, sweet, spiced (of cakes), J iv.30 (geuka); Dh 171 (rjaratha); Vv 479 ; Pv ii.112 (aneka); iv.313 (pv=madhur
PvA 251). Citta (nt.) painting Th 1, 674. Sn 50
(km=Nd2 240 nnva), 251 (gth); J v.196 (geuka),
241 vi.218. sucitta gaily coloured or dressed S i.226 (b);
Dh 151 (rjaratha); Pv i.109 (vimna).
-akkhara (adj.) with beautiful vowels S ii.267 (Cp.
vyajana); -attharaka a variegated carpet DA i.256; -gra
a painted house, i. e. furnished with pictures; a picture
gallery Vin iv.298; -uphana a gaily coloured sandal D i.7;
-kata adorned, dressed up M ii.64= Dh 147=Th 1, 769; DhA
iii.109 (=vicitta); -katha (adj.) =next S i.199 (+bahussuta);
-kathin a brilliant speaker, a wise speaker, an orator, preacher.
Freq. combd w. bahussuta (of wide knowledge, learned), e.
g. paita... medhvin kalyapaibhna S iv.375, samaa
bahussuta c. ura Vv 8426 . A iii.58; J i.148; Miln 1,
21; -kathika=kathin A i.24; Th 2, 449 (+bahussuta), expld
at ThA 281 by cittadhammakatha; -kamma decoration, ornamentation, painting J iv.408; vi.333; Miln 278; Vism 306;
PvA 147; DhsA 334; (m.) a painter J vi.481; -kra a painter,
a decorator (cp. rajaka) S ii.101=iii.152; Th 2, 256; J vi.333;
-chatta at J vi.540 to be changed into patta; -patta (adj.) having variegated wings J vi.540, 590; -pal (f.) N. of a plant
(the "pied" trumpet flower) in the world of Asuras J i.202;
DhA i.280; -pekhuna having coloured wings J i.207; vi.539;
-bimba ( mukhi) (a woman whose face is) like a painted
image J v.452 (cp cittakata); -miga the spotted antelope J
vi.538; -rpa (nt.) a wonder, something wonderful J vi.512;
as adv. (to citta2 ?) easily Vin ii.78=iii.161; iv.177, 232;
-lat the plant Rubia Munjista J vi.278; vana the R.M. grove,
one of Indra's gardens [Sk. caitraratha] J i.52, 104; ii.188;
vi.590, etc.; -vitna a bright canopy DhA iv.14; -vyajana
(adj.) with beautiful consonants (cp. akkhara) S ii.267=A
i.73=iii.107; -s variegated cloth J ii.290; DhA iv.14; -sl
a painted room or picture gallery DA i.253; -sibbana with
fine sewing; a cover of various embroidery Sn 304= J iv.395;
J vi.218.
Citta2 (nt.) [Sk. citta, orig. pp. of cinteti, cit, cp. yutta> yujati,
mutta>mucati. On etym. from cit. see cinteti].
I. Meaning: the heart (psychologically), i. e. the centre
& focus of man's emotional nature as well as that intellectual
element which inheres in & accompanies its manifestations;
i. e. thought. In this wise citta denotes both the agent & that
which is enacted (see kamma II. introd.), for in Indian Psychology citta is the seat & organ of thought (cetas cinteti; cp.
Gr. , although on the whole it corresponds more to the
Homeric ). As in the verb (cinteti) there are two stems
closely allied and almost inseparable in meaning (see III.),
viz. cit & cet (citta & cetas); cp. ye should restrain, curb, subdue citta by ceto, M i.120, 242 (cp. attan coday' attna Dhp
379 f.); cetas citta samannesati S i.194 (cp. cetas citta
samannesati S i.194). In their general use there is no distinction to be made between the two (see III.). The meaning
299
Citta
Citta
Citta
Cittat
(cp. ky); -vila disturbance of mind Nd2 576 (karaa); ujjukat rectitude of mind Dhs 51, 277, etc.; -uppda the
rise of a thought, i. e. intention, desire as theyya uppdesi
he had the intention to steal (a thought of theft) Vin iii.56;
M i.43; iii.45; J ii.374; -ekaggat "one pointedness of
mind," concentration Nett 15, 16; Vism 84, 137, 158; DhA
iii.425; ThA 75; cp. ekagga citto A iii.175; -kali a witch
of a heart, a witch like heart Th 1, 356; -kallat readiness
of heart, preparedness of mind VvA 330; -kilesa stain of h.
Dh 88 (DhA ii.162=paca nvara); -kelis pastime of the
mind Th 1, 1010; -kkhepa derangement of the mind, madness Vin v.189=193 (ummda+); A iii.219 (ummda+); DhA
iii.70 (=ummda); PvA 39; Dh 138; cp. vikkhepa; -cetasika
belonging to heart & thought, i. e. mental state, thought, mind
D i.213; Dhs 1022 ( dhamm, Mrs. Rh. D.: emotional,
perceptual & synthetic states as well as those of intellect applied to sense impressions), 1282; Ps i.84; Miln 87; Vism
61, 84, 129, 337; -dubbhaka a rogue of a heart, a rogue
like heart Th 1, 214; -pakopana shaking or upsetting the
mind It 84 (dosa); -pamaddin crushing the h. Th 2, 357
(=ThA 243; v. l. pamthin & pamdin); -pariyya the
ways (i. e. behaviour) of the h. A v.160 (cp. ceto paricca);
-passaddhi calm of h., serenity of mind (cp. kya) S v.66;
Dhs 62; -bhvan cultivation of the h. M iii.149; -mala
stain of h. PvA 17; -mudut plasticity of mind (or thought)
Dhs 62, 277, 325; -rucita after the heart's liking J i.207; rpa according to intention, as much as expected Vin i.222;
ii.78; iii.161; iv.177, 232; -lahut buoyancy of thought Dhs
62, 323, 1283; Vism 465; -vikkhepa (cp. kkhepa) madness
S i.126 (+ummda); Nett 27; Vism 34; -vippayutta disconnected with thought Dhs 1192, 1515; -visasaha detached
fr. thought Dhs 1194, 1517; -vpasama allayment of one's
h. S i.46; -sankilesa (adj.) with impure heart (opp. c.
vodna) S iii.151; -saatti conviction Miln 256; -santpa
"heart burn," sorrow PvA 18 (=soka); -samdhi (cp. ceto
samdhi) concentration of mind, collectedness of thought,
self possession S iv.350; v.269; Vbh 218; -samodhna
adjustment, calming of thoughts ThA 45; -sampana (adj.)
h. crushing (cp. pamaddin & pakopana) Nett 29 (domanassa). -sahabh arising together with thought Dhs 670,
769, 1520. -hetuka (adj.) caused by thought Dhs 667, 767.
phrase chanda janeti vyamati viriya rabbhati c paggahti padahati D iii.221; A ii.15=iv.462; S v.269; Nd2 97;
Nett 18. In the same ense pa-ni-dahati (in paidhi, paihita
bent down on) (cp. ceto paidhi) S i.133 (tattha) iv.309
(dup); v.157; Dh 42=Ud 39; Dh 43 (samm).
(e) An evil heart ("out of heart proceed evil thoughts" Mk.
7, 21) () paduha c (cp. ceto padosa) D i.20=
iii.32; A i.8 (opp. pasanna c); iv.92; It 12, 13; Pv A 33,
43, etc. () vypanna c: citte vypanne kyakammam
pi vypanna hoti A i.262. Opp. a: S iv.322; A ii.220.
() samoha c (+sarga, etc.) D i.79; ii.299; iii.281; Vism
410, & passim.
(f) "blessed are the pure in heart," a pure, clean, purified (cp. Ger. gelutert), emancipated, free, detached heart.
() mutta c, vimutta c, etc. (cp. cetaso vimokkho,
ceto vimutti, muttena cetas), savehi cittni muccisu S
iii.132, etc.; vi Sn p. 149. vimutta: S i.28 (+subhvita), 29,
46=52; iii.45 (+viratta), 90; iv.236 (rg); Sn 23 (+sudanta);
Nd2 587. suvimutta: S i.126, 141, 233; iv.164; A iii.245;
v.29; Sn 975 (+satim). () citta parisodheti M i.347; A
ii.211; S iv.104. () alna c. (unstained) S i.159; A v.149;
Sn 68; 717; Nd2 97 (cp. cetaso lnatta).
(g) good will, a loving thought, kindliness, tenderheartedness, love ("love the Lord with all your heart"). () metta
c usually in phrase mettacitta bhveti "to nourish the
heart with loving thought," to produce good will D i.167; S
ii.264; A i.10; v.81; Sn 507 (cp. mett sahagatena cetas).
() bhvita c "keep thy heart with all diligence" (Prov.
4, 23) S i.188 (+susamhita); iv.294; v.369 (saddh paribhvita); A i.6 (+bahulkata, etc.); Sn 134 (=S i.188); Dh 89=S
v.29; PvA 139.
(h) a heart calmed, allayed, passionless (santa
upasanta) D.iii.49; S i.141; Sn 746.
(i) a wieldy heart, a heart ready & prepared for truth, an
open & receptive mind: kalla, mudu, udagga, pasanna
A iv.186; kalla PvA 38 (sanctified); lahu S i.201; udagga
Sn 689, 1028; S i.190 (+mudita); mudu PvA 54.
(k) Various phrases. Abbhuta cittajt "while wonder
filled their hearts" S i.178; evacitto "in this state of mind" S
ii.199; Sn 985; cittam me Gotamo jnti (G. knows my heart)
S i.178; theyya citto intending to steal Vin iii.58; raddha citto of determined mind M i.414; S ii.21, cp. 107;
Sn p. 102; acitta upahpeti S ii.267; nn of varying
mind J i.295; nihnacitto low minded PvA 107; nikaha
A ii.137; hata A iv.460=v.18; supahata S i.238 (cp. Miln
26); visankhragata Dh 154; sampanna Sn 164; vibbhanta
S i.61=A i.70=ii.30=iii.391.
(2) thought: m ppaka akusala citta cinteyytha (do
not think any evil thought) S v.418; na cittamattam pi (not even
one thought) PvA 3; mama citta bhaveyya (I should think)
PvA 40. For further instances see Dhs & Vbh Indexes & cp.
cpds. See also remarks above (under I.). Citta likened to a
monkey Vism 425.
-dhipati the influence of thought (adj. pateyya) Nett
16; Dhs 269, 359; DhsA 213. Commentators define c. here as
javanacittuppda, our "thought" in its specialized sense, Compendium of Phil. 177, n. 2. -nuparivattin consecutive
to thought Dhs 671, 772, 1522; -nupassan the critique of
heart, adj. nupassin D ii.299; iii.221, 281; M i.59 & passim
Citta2 [cp. Sk. caitra, the first month of the year: March-April,
orig. N. of the star Spica (in Virgo); see E. Plunket, Ancient
Calendars, etc., pp. 134 sq., 171 sq.] N. of the month Chaitra
PvA 135. Cp. Citra msa KhA 192.
Cittaka(a ) & Citraka(b ) 1. (adj.)(a ) coloured J iv.464. - 2. (m.)(b )
the spotted antelope J vi.538. 3. (nt.) a (coloured) mark (on
the forehead) Miln 408 (dharakumma). f. cittak a counterpane of many colours (DA i.86 cittik: vna [read nna]
citra u may' attharaa) Vin i.192; ii.163, 169; D
i.7; A i.181.
Cittaka2 : see acittaka.
Cittatara, compar. of citta1 , more various, more varied. S iii.151
sq. a punning passage, thus: by the procedure (caraa) of
mind (in the past) the present mind (citta) is still more varied.
Cp. SA in loco: Asl. 66; Expositor 88.
Cittat. [f. abstr. to citta1 ] SA on S iii. 151 sq. (bhmicittatya
301
Cittat
Cimilik
Cipia (adj.) [pp. to cip (?) see next: cp. Sk. cipia grain flattened
after boiling] pressed flat, flattened VvA 222. To be read also
at J vi.185 for vippita.
Cippiyamna [ppr. Pass. of cip, see cipia] crushed flat (Rh. D.;
cp. also Kern Toev.) Miln 261.
302
Cimilik
Cvara
Cimilik (f.) see cilimik Vin ii.150; iv.40; Cp. Vin. Texts iii.167;
J.P.T.S. 1885, 39.
Criik (f.) [cp. Sk. cr & jhillik a cricket, crilli a sort of large
fish] a cricket A iii.397 (v. l. crik). Cp. on word formation pipiik & Mod. Gr. cricket.
303
Cvara
Canik
Cumbaaka (nt.) cumbaa, viz. (a) a pillow DhA i.139; VvA 33,
165. (b) a wreath J iv.231 (puppha); SnA 137; DhA i.72
(ml).
Cumbati [Sk. cumbati. Dhtp 197 defines as "vadana-sayoge"]
to kiss J ii.193; v.328; vi.291, 344; VvA 260. Cp. pari.
Culla & ca (adj.) [Sk. kulla=kudra (P. khudda, see
khuddaka), with c: k=cua: kud] small, minor (opp. mah
great, major), often in conn. with names & titles of books, e.
g. c Anthapiika=A jr. J ii.287, cp. Anglo Indian chota
sahb the younger gentleman (Hind. chhota=culla); or Culla
vagga, the minor section (Vin ii.) as subordinate to Mah
vagga (Vin i.), Culla niddesa the minor exposition (following upon Mah niddesa); culla sla the siple precepts
of ethics (opp. mah the detailed sla) D i.5, etc. Otherwise
only in cpds.:
-angul little finger DhA ii.86. -pahka a "lesser"
follower, i. e. a personal attendant (of a thera) J i.108 (cl);
ii.325 (cull; DhA i.135; ii.260; c); -pit an uncle ("lesser"
father=sort of father, cp. Lat. matertera, patruus, Ger. Vetter=father jun.) J ii.5; iii.456 (v. l. petteyya); PvA 107; DhA
i.221 (ca).
Cullsti [=catursti] eighty four J vi.226 (mahkappe as duration of Sasra); PvA 254 (id.). Also as csti q. v.
Clik (f.) [Sk. clik, cp. c]=ca; kaa the root of the ear
J ii.276; Vism 249, 255; DhA iv.13 (of an elephant). baddha
S ii.182; KS ii.122. See also c.
Ca [Sk. ca & clik] 1. swelling, protuberance; root, knot,
crest. As kaa ca the root of an elephant's ear J vi.488.
aha-ca a measure (see aha). See also clik. 2.
(adj.) see culla.
Cueti [Denom. of cua] to grind to powder, to crush; to powder or paint w. chunam Vin ii.107 (mukha); J iv.457. ppr.
pass cuiyamna being ground J vi.185.
Cuta [pp. of cavati; Sk. cyuta] 1. (adj.) shifted, disappeared, deceased, passed from one existence to another Vin iv.216; Sn
774, 899; It 19, 99; J i.139, 205; Pug 17. -accuta permanent. not under the sway of Death, Ep. of Nibbna Dh 225.
304
Canik
Cetiya
Cecca=cicca (equal to sacicca), ger. of cinteti, corresp. to either *cetya [cet] or *cintya [cint]; only in ster. def. jnanto
sajnanto cecca abhivitaritv Vin ii.91; iii.73, 112; iv.290.
Cetaso gen. sg. of ceto, functioning as gen. to citta (see citta &
ceto).
Cetpana (nt.) [see cetpeti; cp. BSk. cetanika] barter Vin
iii.216, see also Vin. Texts i.22 & Kacc. 322.
Cetpeti [Caus. of *cetati to ci, collect; see also Kern, Toev. s.
v.] to get in exchange, to barter, buy Vin iii.216 (expld by
parivatteti), 237; iv.250.
Cetiya (nt.) [cp. from ci, to heap up, cp. citi, cinti] 1. a tumulus, sepulchral monument, cairn, M i.20; Dh 188; J i.237;
vi.173; SnA 194 (dhtu ghara katv cetiya patihpesu); KhA 221; DhA iii.29 (dhtu); iv. 64; VvA 142; Sdhp
428, 430. Pre Buddhistic cetiyas mentioned by name are
Aggava Vin ii.172; S i.185; Sn p. 59; DhA iii.170; nanda
305
Cetiya
Cokkha
D ii.123, 126; Udena D ii.102, 118; iii.9; DhA iii.246; Gotama (ka) ibid.; Cpla D ii.102, 118; S v.250; Ma kuabandhana D ii.160; Bahuputta D ii.102, 118; iii.10; S ii.220;
A iv.16; Sattambaka D ii.102, 118; Srandada D ii.118, 175;
A iii.167; Supatiha Vin i.35.
-angaa the open space round a Cetiya Miln 366; Vism
144, 188, 392; DA i.191, 197; VvA 254. -vandan Cetiya
worship Vism 299.
Cela (nt.) [Derivation unknown. Cp. Sk. cela] cloth, esp. clothes
worn, garment, dress A i.206; Pv ii.127 (kacan for kacana); iii.93 (for vea); dhti baby's napkin J iii.539. In simile
of one whose clothes are on fire (ditta+dittassa) S v.440; A
ii.93; iii.307; iv.320. acela a naked ascetic D i.161, 165;
J v.75; vi.222.
-aaka (v. l. auka) a loincloth M i.150; -ukkhepa
waving of garments (as sign of applause), usually with sdhukra J i.54; ii.253; iii.285; v.67; DhA ii.43; SnA ii.225; VvA
132, 140; -paik (not pattika) a bandage of cloth, a turban Vin ii.128 (Bdhgh. celasandhara); M ii.93; DhA iii.136;
-vitna an awning J i.178; ii.289; iv.378; Mhbv 122; Vism
108.
Celaka 1. one who is clothed; acelaka without clothes D i.166; M
i.77. 2. a standard bearer [cp. Sk. ceaka P. cea & in
meaning E. knight > Ger. knecht; knave > knabe, knappe] D
i.51; DA i.156; A iv. 107, 110; Miln 331.
Celakedu=cetakedu J vi.538.
Celpaka=celvaka J v.418.
Celvaka [cp. Sk. chilla?] a kind of bird J vi.538 (Com.
celabaka; is it cel bak?); J v.416. See also celpaka.
306
Cokkha
Cokkha (adj.) [Cp. Sk. coka] clean J iii.21; bhva cleanliness M i.39 (=visuddhibhva; to be read for T mokkha? See
Trenckner's note on p. 530).
Coraka [cp. Sk. coraka] a plant used for the preparation of perfume J vi.537.
Corik f. thieving, theft Vin i.208; J iii.508; Miln 158; PvA 4, 86,
192; VvA 72 (=theyy).
Codetar [n. ag. to codeti] one who reproves, one who exacts
blame, etc. Vin v.184.
Cor (f.) a female thief Vin iv.276; J ii.363; (adj.) thievish, deceitful J i.295. draka a female kidnapper J vi.337.
Copana (nt.) [cup, copati to stir, rel. to kup, see kuppati] moving,
stirring DhA iv.85; DhsA 92, 240, 323.
Ch
Cha & Cha (cha in composition effects gemination of consonant, e. g. chabbsati=cha+vsati, chabbaa= cha+vaa,
cha only before vowels in compn : chaanga, cha abhi)
[Vedic a & a (a=cha), Gr. , Lat. sex, Goth, saihs] the
number six.
Cases: nom. cha, gen. channa, instr. chahi (&
chambh (?) J iv.310, which should be chambhi & prob.
chabbhi=abhi; see also chambh), loc. chasu (& chassu),
num. ord. chaha the sixth. Cp. also sahi (60) soasa (16).
Six is applied whenever a "major set" is concerned (see 2), as
in the foll.: 6 munis are distinguished at Nd2 514 (in pairs of
3: see muni); 6 bhikkhus as a "clique" (see chabaggiya, cp.
the Vestal virgins in Rome, 6 in number); 6 are the sciences of
the Veda (see chaanga); there are 6 buddha dhamm (Nd2
466); 6 viaky (see upadhi); 6 senses & sense organs (see yatana) cha dnasl J i.282; ora chahi msehi
klakiriy bhavissati (l shall die in 6 months, i. e. not just yet,
but very soon, after the "next" moon) Pv iv.335 . Six bodily
faults J i.394 (viz. too long, too short, too thin, too fat, too
black, too white). Six thousand Gandhabbas J ii.334.
307
Chanda
Chatta2 [cp. Sk. chtra, one who carries his master's sunshade] a
pupil, a student J ii.428.
Chakka (nt.) [fr. cha) set of six Vism 242 (meda & mutta).
Chaha the sixth Sn 171, 437; DhA iii.200: SnA 364. Also as
chahama Sn 101, 103; J iii.280.
Chaaka (adj.) throwing away, removing, in puppha a flower
rubbish remover (see pukkusa) Th 1, 620; Vism 194; f.
chaik see kacavara.
Chaana (nt.) throwing away, rejecting J i.290; Dhtp 571.
(f.) a shovel, dust pan DhA iii.7. See kacavara.
Chadana (nt.) [Vedic chad]=chada, viz. lit. 1. a cover, covering J i.376; v.241. 2. a thatch, a roof Vin ii.154 (various
kinds), 195; J ii.281; DhA ii.65 (piha); iv.104 (assa udaka
patana hna), 178; PvA 55. 3. a leaf, foliage J
i.87; Th 1, 527. 4. hair J v.202. fig. pretence, camouflage, counterfeiting Sn 89 (=pairpa katv SnA 164); Dhs
1059=Vbh 361= Nd2 271ii . Dhs reads chandana & Vbh chdana.
-ihik a tile DhA iv.203.
Chaita [pp. of chaddeti] thrown out. vomited; cast away, rejected, left behind S iii.143; J i.91, 478; Pv ii.23 (=ucchiha
vantan ti attho PvA 80); VvA 100; PvA 78, 185.
Chaeti [Vedic chardayati & chatti to vomit; cp. also avaskara
excrements & karsa dung. From *sqer to eliminate, separate,
throw out (Gr. , Lat. ex (s)cerno), cp. Gr. ,
Lat. mus(s)cerda, Ags. scearn] to spit out, to vomit, throw
away; abandon, leave, reject Vin 214 sq.; iv.265; M i.207; S
i.169 (chaehi wrongly for chaehi)=Sn p. 15; J i.61, 254,
265, 292; v.427; Pug 33; DhA i.95 (uha lohita ch. to
kill oneself); ii.101; iii.171; VvA 126; PvA 43, 63, 174, 211;
255; Miln 15. ger. chana Th 2, 469 (=chaetv ThA
284); grd. chaetabba Vin i.48; J ii.2; chaanya Miln 252;
chaiya (to be set aside) M i.12 sq. Pass. chayati PvA
174. Caus. chapeti to cause to be vomited, to cast off,
to evacuate, to cause to be deserted Vin iv.265; J i.137; iv.139;
vi.185, 534; Vism 182. pp. chaita (q. v.). See also
kacavara
Chadda (nt.) [Dhtp 590 & Dhtm 820 expln a root chadd
by "vamane," thus evidently taking it as an equivalent of
cha]=chada, only in phrase vivattacchadda (or vivaa) D
i.89; Sn 372, 378, 1003, 1147; DA i.251. Nd2 however & DA
read chada expl. by vivaa rgadosamoha chadana SnA
365.
Chaddh [Sk. aa] sixfold Miln 2.
Chanda [cp. Vedic and Sk. chanda, and skandh to jump]. 1.
impulse, excitement; intention, resolution, will; desire for,
wish for, delight in (c. loc.). Expld at Vism 466 as "kattu
kmaty" adhivacana; by Dhtp 587 & Dhtm 821 as
chand=icchya. A. As virtue: dhammapadesu ch. striving after righteousness S i.202; tibba ardent desire, zeal A
i.229; iv.15; kusaladhamma A iii.441. Often combd with
other good qualities, e. g. ch. vyma ussha ussohi A
iv.320; ch. viriya citta vmas in set of samdhis (cp. iddhipda) D iii.77 (see below), & in cpd. dhipateyya.
kusalna dhammna uppdya chanda janeti vyamati
308
Chanda
Chambhin
to adj.
chandavant, chanda+
Chandaka a voluntary collection (of alms for the Sangha), usually as saharati to make a vol. coll. Vin iv.250; J i.422;
ii.45, 85 (saharitv v. l. BB; text sankahitv), 196, 248;
iii.288 (nava, a new kind of donation); Cp. BSk. chandaka
Chambhin
Chindati
here with ref. to one who is bound (stiff) with ropes (psasatehi
chambh) which is however taken by com. as instr. of cha &
expld by chasu hnesu, viz. on 4 limbs, body & neck; cp.
cha). acchambhin firm, steady, undismayed S i.220; Sn
42; J i.71. See chambheti & chambhita.
Chdiya (nt.) covering (of a house or hut), thatch, straw, hay (for
eating) J vi.354 (=gehacchdana tia).
Chdeti1 [Caus. of chad, Sk. chdayati] (a) to cover, to conceal
Vin ii.211 (Pass. chdyati); Sn 1022 (mukha jivhya ch.);
Dh 252; Pv iii.43 . (b) (of sound) to penetrate, to fill J ii.253;
vi.195. pp. channa1 (q. v.).
Challi [Sk. challi] bark, bast DhA ii.165; Bdhgh on MV. viii.29.
Chava [Derivation doubtful. Vedic ava] 1. a corpse Vin ii.115
(ssassa patta a bowl made out of a skull). See cpds. 2.
(adj.) vile, low, miserable, wretched Vin ii.112, 188; S i.66;
M i.374; A ii.57; J iv.263.
-ahika bones of a corpes, a skeleton C iii.15, 1 (?);
-lta a torch from a pyre S iii.93=A ii.95=It 90= J i.482;
Vism 54, 299 (pama). -kuik a charnelhouse, morgue,
Vin i.152; -dhaka one who (officially) burns the dead, an
"undertaker" Vin i.152; DhA i.68 (f. ik); Vism 230; Miln
331. -dussa a miserable garment D i.166A i.240; ii.206.
-sarra a corpse Vism 178 sq. -sitta a water pot (see above
1) Th 1, 127.
Chta (adj.) [cp. Sk. psta from bhas (*bhs), Gr. ; see
Walde, Lat. Wtb. under sabulum & cp. bhasman, probably
Non Aryan] hungry J i.338; ii.301; v.69; Pv ii.113 (=bubhukkhita, khudya abhibhta PvA 72) ii.936 (jighacchita PvA
126); PvA 62; VvA 76; Miln 253; Mhvs vii.24. Cp. pari.
-ajjhatta with hungry insides J i.345; ii.203; v.338, 359;
DhA i.125; DhA i.367 (chtak'); iii.33, 40. -kla time of
being hungry.
Chtaka [fr. prec.] 1. adj. hungry J i.245, 266. 2. (nt.)
hunger, famine J i.266; ii.124, 149, 367; vi.487; DhA i.170.
Chtat [f. abstr. fr. chta] hunger (lit. hungriness) DhA i.170.
Chdan (f.) [fr. chdeti] covering, concealment Pug 19, 23. Cp.
pari.
Chdi (f.) [chdeti1 ] shade J iv.351.
310
Chindati
Chepp
Cheda [see chindati] cutting, destruction, loss Sn 367 (bandhana); J i.419; 485; ssa decapitation DhA ii.204; PvA 5;
aa castration J iv.364; bhatta karoti to put on short
rations J i.156. pada separation of words SnA 150. -gmin
(adj.) liable to break, fragile A ii.81; J v.453. Cp. vi.
Chedaka (adj.) [fr. cheda] cutting; in aa one who castrates J
iv.366.
Chedana (nt.) [see chindati] cutting, severing, destroying D i.5;
(=DA i.80 hattha di); iii.176; Vin ii.133; A ii.209; v.206;
S iv.169 (nakha); v.473; Miln 86; Vism 102 (vadha bandana, etc.).
Chedanaka 1. (adj.) one who tears or cuts off PvA 7. - 2. (nt.) the
process of getting cut (a cert. penance for offences: in combn
with pattiyo & pcittiya) Vin ii.307; iv.168, 170, 171, 279;
v.133, 146 (cha ch. pattiyo).
Chinnaka (adj.) [fr. chinna] cut; a uncut (of cloth) Vin i.297.
Chinnik (f.) deceitful, fraudulent, sly, only in combn w. dhutt
(dhuttik) & only appld to women Vin iii.128; iv.61; J ii.114;
Miln 122.
311
Ja
Jana
J
Ja () [adj. suffix from jan, see janati; cp. ga; gacchati]
born, produced, sprung or arisen from. Freq. in cpds.: atta,
ito, eka, kuto, khandha, jala, daratha, dru, di, puthuj,
pubba, yoni, vri, saha, sineha.
544, 596.
Jacc instr. of jti.
Jajjara [From intensive of jarati] withered, feeble with age Th 2,
270; J i.5, 59 (jar); ThA 212; PvA 63 (bhva, state of being
old) a not fading (cp. amata & ajarmara), of Nibbna S
iv.369.
Jagat (nt.) [Vedic jagat, intens. of gam, see gacchati] the world,
the earth A ii.15, 17 (jagato gati); S i.186 (jagatogadha plunged
into the world).
Jaa (adj.) [=janya, cp. jtya; see kula & koleyyaka] of (good)
birth, excellent, noble, charming, beautiful M i.30 (jaajaa, cp. p. 528); J ii.417 (=manpa sdhu). a J ii.436.
Ja (f.) [B.Sk. jat] tangle, braid, plaiting, esp. (a) the matted
hair as worn by ascetics (see jatila) Sn 249; Dh 241, 393; J i.12
(ajina+); ii.272. (b) the tangled branches of trees J i.64.
(c) (fig.) (the tangle of) desire, lust S i.13=165.
-auva (=andu?) a chain of braided hair, a matted topknot S i.117; -jina braided hair & an antelope's hide (worn
by ascetics) Sn 1010 (dhara), cp. above J i.12; -dharaa the
wearing of matted hair M i.282.
Jaita [pp. of ja, to which also ja; Dhtp 95: sanghte] entangled S i.13; Miln 102, 390; Vism 1 (etym.).
Jain one who wears a ja, an ascetic Sn 689; f. -in J vi.555.
Jacca (adj.) [jti+tya] of birth, by birth (usually ) M ii.47 (ittara. of inferior birth); Sn p. 80 (ki of what birth, i. e. of
what social standing); J i.342 (hna of low birth): Sdhp 416
(id.) J v.257 (nihna); Miln 189 (sama of equal rank).
-andha (adj.) blind from birth Ud 62 sq. (Jaccandhavagga vi.4); J i.45, 76; iv.192; Vbh 412 sq.; in similes at Vism
312
Jana
Jappati
gens, to which also similar in meaning] a creature, living being: (a) sg. an individual, a creature, person, man Sn 121, 676,
807, 1023 (sabba everybody). Usually collectively: people,
they, one (=Fr. on), with pl. of verb Dh 249 (dadanti); often as mahjana the people, the crowd S i.115; J i.167, 294;
PvA 6; lokamahjana=loka DhA iii.175; or as bahu(j)jana
many people, the many A i.68; Dh 320; DhA iii.175. See also
puthujjana. (b) pl. men, persons, people, beings: nn
various living beings Sn 1102 (expld at Nd2 248 as khattiy
brhma vess sudd gahah pabbajit dev manuss.) dve
jan J i.151; ii.105; tayo j. J i.63; iii.52; keci jan some people
PvA 20. See also Sn 243, 598, 1077, 1121.
-dhipa a king of men J ii.369; -inda=prec. J iii.280,
294; -esabha the leader of men, the best of all people Dh
255; -kya a body or group of people J i.28; DhA i.33 (dve j.:
micch & samm dihik); Dpvs i.40; -pada country see
sep.; -majjhe (loc.) before (all) the people J i.294; Th 2, 394;
-vda people's talk, gossip Sn 973.
Janti at DA i.296 in jantiy (for D i.135 jniy)=hni, abandonment, giving up, payment, fine [prob.=jahanti, to jahti]. But
see jni.
Jantu1 [Vedic jantu, see janati] a creature, living being, man, person S i.48; A iv.227; Sn 586, 773 sq., 808, 1103; Nd2 249
(=satta, nara, puggala); Dh 105, 176, 341, 395; J i.202; ii.415;
v.495; Pv ii.949 (=sattanikya, people, a crowd PvA 134).
Jantu2 a grass Vin i.196.
Jannu [cp. jau(ka) & jnu] the knee DhA i.394.
-ka D
ii.17(in marks of a Mahpurisa, v. l. ); J iv.165; DhA
i.48.
Japa (& jappa vv. ll.) [fr. japati] 1. muttering, mumbling. recitation A iii.56=J iii.205 (+manta); Sn 328 (jappa) (=niratthaka
kath SnA 334). 2. studying J iii.114 (=ajjhena).
313
Jappati
Jalati
Jar (f.) & (older) jaras (nt.) [of the latter only the instr. jaras
in use: Sn 804, 1123 (=jarya Nd2 249). Sk. jar & jara to
*ger: see jarati; cp. Gr. , , old age, etc.
See also jraa(t)] decay, decrepitude, old age Vin i.10, 34;
A i.51, 138 (as Death's messenger); v.144 sq. (bhabbo jara
pahtu); Sn 311 (cp. D iii.75); J i.59; Th 2, 252 sq.; Vism
502 (def. as twofold & discussed in its valuation as dukkha).
Defined as "y tesa sattna tamhi tamhi sattanikye jar
jraat khaicca plicca valittacat yuno sahni indriyna paripko" D ii.305=M i.49= S ii.2=Nd2 252=Dhs
644, cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 195. Frequently combd with maraa
(maccu, etc.) "decay & death" (see under jti as to formulas):
maraa, D ii.31 sq.; M i.49; Sn 575; maccu Sn 581, 1092,
1094. ajarmara not subject to decay & death (cp. ajajjara)
Th II, 512; Pv ii.611 ; Vv 6311 ; J iii.515.
-ghara the house of age (adj.) like a decayed house Th
2, 270 (=jiagharasadisa ThA 213). -jajjara feeble with
age J i.59; -jia decrepit with age PvA 148; -dhamma subject to growing old A i.138, 145; ii.172, 247; iii.54 sq., 71 sq.;
-patta old J iii.394; iv.403; -bhaya fear of old age A i.179;
ii.121; -vata the wind of age DhA iv.25. -sutta the Suttanta
on old age, N. of Sutta Nipta iv.6 (p. 157 sq.; beginning with
"appa vata jvita ida"), quoted at DhA iii.320.
Jala (nt.) [Sk. jala, conn. with gala drop (?), prob. dialectical; cp.
udaka] water Sn 845; J i.222; iii.188; iv.137.
-gocara living in the water J ii.158. -ja born or sprung
from w. J iv.333; v.445; VvA 42; -da "giving water," rain
cloud Dvs v.32; -dhara [cp. jalandhara rain cloud] the
sea Miln 117; -dhi=prec. Dvs v.38.
Jalati [Sk. jvalati, with jvarati to be hot or feverish, to jval to burn
314
Jalati
Jta
Jalbu [Sk. jaryu, slough & placenta, to jar see jarati, originally
that which decays (=decidua); cp. Gr. slough. As to
meanings cp. gabbha] 1. the womb S iii.240. 2. the embryo
J iv.38. 3. the placenta J ii.38.
-ja born from a womb, viviparous M i.73; D iii.230; J
ii.53=v.85.
Jaha (adj.) () [to jahati] leaving behind, giving up, see atta,
oka, kappa, raa, sabba, etc (S i.52; It 58; Sn 790,
1101, etc.); duj hard to give up Th 1, 495.
Jahati & jahti [Vedic root h. Cp. *gh(i) & gh to be devoid
(of), Gr. void of, widow, open space (cp.
Sk. vihya=ksa), separate; Lat. her es; Sk. jihte to go forth=Ohg. gn, gn, Ags. gan=go; also Sk. hni
want=Goth. gaidw, cp. Gr. ] to leave, abandon, lose;
give up, renounce, forsake. Ster. expln at Nd2 255 (and passim): pajahati vinodeti byantikaroti anabhva gameti. Lit.
as well as fig.; esp. w. ref. to kma, dosa & other evil qualities. Pres. jahti Sn 1, 506 (dosa), 589; Dh 91; imper.
jahassu Sn 1121 (rpa); pot. jahe It 34; Dh 221; J iv.58,
& jaheyya Sn 362; It 115; J i.153; iv.58. Fut. jahissmi
J iii.279; iv.420; v.465; in verse: hassmi J iv.420; v.465.
Ger. hitv (very frequent) Sn 284, 328; Dh 29, 88, etc.;
hitvna (Sn 60), jahitv & jahetv (Sn 500). Inf. jahitu J
i.138. Pp. jahita Sn 231; Kh 9; Miln 261. Pass. hyati
S ii.224; Sn 817; Miln 297, hyate J v.488 & hyati J ii.65;
Sn 944 (hyamna), cp. hyare J ii.327; pp. hna (q. v.).
Caus. hpeti (q. v.). See also hni, hyin, jaha.
Jahitik (f.) [See jahati] (a woman) who has been jilted, or rejected, or repudiated J i.148.
315
Jta
Jti
Jta [pp. of janati (janeti), cp. Lat. (g)ntus, Goth. kunds; also
Gr. ( ) , Ohg. knabo] 1. As adj. noun:
(a) born, grown, arisen, produced (=nibbatta ptubhta Nd2
256) Sn 576 (jtna maccna nicca maraato bhaya);
jtena maccena kattabba kusala bahu Dh 53=Miln 333;
yakkhin jtsi (born a G.) J vi.337; rukkho j. J i.222; lat jt
Dh 340; gmanissandhena jtni speyya pani Vism
250. (n.) he who or that which is born: jtassa maraa
hoti Sn 742; jtassa jar payissati J i.59; jta+bhta
(opp. ajta abhta) It 37. (b) "genuine," i.e. natural, true, good, sound (cp. kata, bhta, taccha & opp. ajta
like akata, abhta): see cpds. 2. As predicate, often in
sense of a finite verb (cp. gata): born, grown (or was born,
grew); become; occurred, happened Sn 683 (Bodhisatto hitasukhatya jto); bhaya jta (arose) Sn 207; vivd jt Sn
828; ekadivase j. (were born on the same day) J iii.391; aphsuka jta (has occurred J i.291. So in loc. abs. jte
(jtamhi) "when... has arisen, when there is...," e. g. atthamhi
Vin i.350=M iii.154=Dh 331; vdamhi Sn 832; oghe Sn 1092;
kahpaesu jtesu J i.121. 3. jta (nt.) characteristic;
pada pedal character S i.86; anga the sexual organ Vin i.191;
as adj. having become... (=bhta); being like or behaving as,
of the kind of..., sometimes to be rendered by an adj. or a pp.
implied in the noun: cuakajtni ahikni (=cuayitni)
M iii.92; jlakajta in bud A iv.117; chandajta=chandika Sn
767; sujta Sn 548 (well born, i. e. auspicious, blessed,
happy); ptisomanassa joyful & glad Sn p. 94; J i.60, etc.;
gandhajta a kind of perfume (see gandha). Often untranslatable: lbhappatto jto J iii.126; vinsa ppaccayo jto J
i.256. 4. a Jtaka or Buddhist birth story DhA i.34.
-maa the (wild) castor oil plant VvA 10; -ovaraka
the inner chamber where he was born VvA 158; J i.391 (so
read for jto varake). -kamma the (soothsaying) ceremony
connected w. birth, in karoti to set the horoscope PvA 198
(=nakkhatta yoga uggahti); -divasa the day of birth,
birthday J iii.391; iv.38; -mangala birth festival, i. e. the feast
held on the birth of a child DhA ii.86; -rpa "sterling," pure
metal, i. e. gold (in its natural state, before worked, cp. jambonada). In its relation to suvaa (worked gold) it is stated
to be suvaavao (i. e. the brightcoloured metal: VvA 9;
DhA iv.32: suvao jtarpo); at DA i.78 it is expld by suvaa only & at Vin iii.238 it is said to be the colour of the
Buddha: j. Satthu vaa. At A i.253 it is represented as the
material for the suvaakra (the "white" smith as opp. to
"black" smith). Combd w. hiraa Pv ii.75 ; very freq.
w. rajata (silver), in the prohibition of accepting gold & silver
(D i.5) as well as in other connections, e. g. Vin i.245; ii.294
sq.; S i.71, 95; iv.326 (the moral dangers of "money": yassa jtarpa rajata kappati paca pi tassa kmagu kappanti);
v.353, 407; Dhs 617. Other passages illustr. the use & valuation of j. are S ii.234 (paripra); v.92 (upakkiles); A i.210
(id.); iii.16 (id.); S i.93, 117; M i.38; A i.215; iii.38; iv.199,
281; v.290; J ii.296; iv.102; -veda [cp. Vedic jtaveda=Agni]
fire S i.168; Sn 462 (kah jyati j.) Ud 93; J i.214; ii.326=
iv.471; v.326; vi.204, 578; Vism 171; DA i.226; DhA i.44
(nirindhana, without fuel); -ssara a natural pond or lake Vin
i.111; J i.470; ii.57.
316
Jti
Jnti
chetv It 42; Sn 1052, 1060; Dh 238, 348; cp. jti din nihna PvA 198. Other phrases & applications: Various rebirths are seen by one who has perfect insight into all happening & remembers his former existences (D i.81; iii.50; A i.164;
M ii.20). Arahantship implies the impossibility of a future rebirth: see formula kh jti (M i.139; Sn p. 16, etc.) and
arahant ii.A: jtiy parimuccati S i.88; jti bhabbo pahtu
A v.144 sq. antim jti the last rebirth D ii.15 (cp. carima);
purim j. a former existence PvA 1; attajtiya in a former
life (=pure) PvA 10. On jti as dukkha see Vism 498 501.
2. descent, race, rank, genealogy (cp. , genus), often
combd w. gotta. Two grades of descent are enumd at Vin iv.6
as hn jti (low birth), consisting of Canda, Vea, Nesda,
Rathakra & Pukkusa; and ukkah j. (superior birth), comprising Khattiyas & Brhmaas. The var. meanings of
jti are given by Bdhgh at Vism 498, 499 in the foll. classification (with examples) bhava, nikya, sankhata lakkhaa,
paisandhi, pasti, kula, ariya sla. Ki hi jti karissati?
What difference makes his parentage? D i.121; jti rjno
kings of birth, genuine kings J i.338; na na jti nivresi brahmalok' papattiy Sn 139; jti akkhhi tell me the rank of his
father & mother Sn 421, 1004; cp. 462; na jacc vasalo hoti
Sn 136; 142; id. w. brhmao Sn 650; with nma & gotta in
the description of a man jtiy nmena gottena, etc. Vin iv.6;
jtito nmato gottato by descent, personal & family name D
ii.8; cp. jti gotta kula J ii.3. See also j. vda. 3. a
sort of, kind of (cp. jta 3): catujtigandha four kinds of scent
J i.265; ii.291. 4. (jti) by (mere) birth or nature, natural
(opp. artificial); or genuine, pure, excellent (opp. adulterated,
inferior), cp. jta 1 (b): in cpds., like mai, v, etc.
-kkhaya the destruction of the chance of being reborn S
v.168; A i.167; Sn 209, 517, 743; Dh 423. -khetta the realm
of rebirth PvA 138 (=dasa cakkavasahassni); -thaddha
conceited, proud of birth Sn 104 (+dhanatthaddha, gotta:
proud of wealth & name); -thera a Th. by rank D iii.218;
-nirodha the extermination of (the cause of) rebirth Vin i.1;
-pabhava the origin or root of existence Sn 728; -puppha
nutmeg J vi.367; -bhaya the fear of rebirth A ii.121; -bhmi
natural ground, in bhmaka, bhmika, bhmiya living on
nat. gr. (vassa vasati) M i.145; A iii.366; -mai a genuine precious stone J ii.417; -maya constituting birth, being like birth ThA 285; -vda reputation of birth, character
of descent, parentage. The 1st of the 5 characteristics constituting a "well bred" brahmin: yva sattam pitmahyug
akkhitto anupakkuho jtivdena "of unblemished parentage
back to the 7th generation" D i.120, etc. (=DA i.281); A i.166;
iii.152, 223; Sn 315, 596. Cp. gotta vda (e. g. D i.99);
-vibhanga a characteristic of birth, a distinction in descent
Sn 600; -v a first class lute J ii.249; -sampanna endowed with (pure) birth (in phrase khattiyo muddhvasitto j.)
A iii.152; -sambhava the origin of birth A i.142; iii.311; J
i.168; -sambheda difference of rank DhA i.166; -sasra
the cycle of transmigration, the sasra of rebirths (see above
1 d. f.): pahna left behind, overcome (by an Arahant) M i.139;
A iii.84, 86; khepetv id. Th 2, 168; vitio j. n' atthi tassa
punabbhavo Sn 746; -sindhava a well bred horse J ii.97;
-ssara the remembrance of (former) births (a) J i.167;
iv.29; DhA ii.27; iv.51; cp. cutpapta a); -hingulaka
(& hingulik) natural vermilion J v.67; VvA 4, 168, 324.
Jtika () (adj.) 1. being like, being of, having, etc. (see jta 3):
duppaa & sappaa M i.225; dabba A i.254; mukhara
Sn 275; vi Sn 294; mna J i.88. 2. descended from,
being of rank, belonging to the class of: maana M ii.19;
avihehaka Miln 219; samna (of equal rank) DhA i.390;
vea (belonging to the bamboo workers) PvA 175.
Jtimant (adj.) [jti+mant] of good birth, having natural or genuine qualities, noble, excellent Sn 420 (varohena sampanno jtim viya khattiyo); J i.342 (jtimanta kulaputt).
Of a precious stone: mai veuriyo subho j. D i.76=M ii.17;
DA i.221; Miln 215. Sometimes in this spelling for jutimant
Sn 1136= Nd2 259 (expld by paita paav). ajtima
not of good birth J vi.356 (opp. sujtimant ibid.).
Jtu (indeel.) [Vedic jtu, particle of affirmation. Perhaps for
jntu one would know, cp. Gr. , Lat. credo, P. mae.
But BR. and Fausbll make it a contraction of jyatu "it might
happen." Neither of these derivations is satisfactory] surely,
undoubtedly (ekasavacana SnA 348) usually in negative
(& interrog.) sentences as na jtu, not at all, never (cp. also
sdhu); m jtu Vin ii.203; Sn 152, 348 (no ce hi jtu); J i.293,
374; iv.261; v.503. Na jtucca at J vi.60 is apparently for na
jtu ca.
Jna (adj.) [to j, see jnti] knowing or knowable, understandable J iii.24 (=jnamna). dujjna difficult to understand D
i.170, 187; M i.487; ii.43. su recognizable, intelligible Pv
iv.135 (=suvieyya PvA 230). Cp. jna.
Jnana (nt.) [fr. j] knowledge, cognizance, recognition; intelligence, learning, skill J i.145 (attna klato pahya
from the time of self recognition), 200 ( manta knowledge of a spell, a spell known by: tumhka) ii.221; SnA 330;
DhA ii.73 (sabhva= atta); DA i.86 (akkhara); Vism 391
(atthya in order to know), 436 (=pajnana). Cp. jnana.
ajnana not knowing () J v.199; vi.177; not known J i.32
(sippa).
Jnanaka (adj.) [Sk. *jnaka, cp. jnana & Sk. jnaka (c. gen.)
expert Av ii.119, 120, as n. ib. i.216] knowing DhsA 394.
Jnanat (f.) [abstr. fr. jnana] the fact of knowing, knowledge
KhA 144.
Jnapada (adj. n.) [fr. janapada] belonging to the country,
living in the c.; pl. country folk (opp. negam townsfolk)
D i.136, 142; M ii.74; J ii.287, 388; DA i.297 (=janapada
vsin).
Jnti [Vedic ja, jnti *gen & *gn, cp. Gr. ,
, ; Lat. nosco, notus, (i)gnarus (cp. E. i gnorant); Goth. kunnan; Ohg. kennan, Ags. cnwan=E. know] to
know.
I. Forms: The 2 Vedic roots jn & j are represented
in P. by jn & (a) 1. jn: pres. jnti; pot. jneyya (Sn
781) & ja (A iv.366; Sn 116, 775; Dh 157, 352; J ii.346;
iv.478) 2nd sg. jneyysi (M. i.487; J i.288), 1st pl. jniyma
(Sn 873) & (archaic) jnemu (Sn 76, 599; Vv 8311 ); imper.
jnhi (Sn 596, 1026; Pv ii.912 ), 3rd. sg. jntu (It 28);
ppr. jnanto & jna (D i.192; A i.128; Sn 722), ppr. med.
jnamna (J i.168); fut. jnissati (J ii.342; vi.364); aor.
ajni (Sn 536) & jni (J i.125, 269), 3rd pl. jnisu (J ii.105;
VvA 113); ger. jnitv (J i.293; iii.276); inf. jnitu (J
317
Jnti
Jla
i.125). Caus. jnpeti (see below iv.2). 2. : fut. assati (D i.165); aor. asi (J i.271) & nsi (Sn 471), 3rd
pl. aasu (Vv 224 ). ger. atv (freq.); grd. eyya A
ii.135 (see below) & tabba (PvA 133); inf. tu (freq.)
pp. ta (q. v.). Pass. yati to be called or named
(Miln 25).
II. Cognate Forms: Nd2 s. v. explains jnti by passati
dakkhati adhigacchati vindati pailabhati, & atv (No. 267)
by jnitv tulayitv tirayitva vibhvayitv vibhta katv
(very freq.) The 1st expln is also applied to abhijnti, & the
2nd to passitv, vidita katv, abhiya & disv. The use
of the emphatic phrase jnti passati is very frequent. Ya
tva na jnsi na passasi ta tva icchasi kmesi? Whom
you know not neither have seen, is it she that you love and long
for? D i.193; Bhagav jna jnti passa passati cakkhubhto abhto M i.111; similarly A iv.153 sq. See further
D i.2, 40, 84, 157 sq, 165, 192 sq., 238 sq.; A i.128; iii.338;
v.226; Sn 908; Nd2 35, 413, 517; Vism 200.
III. Meaning: (1) Intrs. to know, to have or gain knowledge, to be experienced, to be aware, to find out: mayam
pi kho na jnma surely, even we do not know D i.216; te
kho eva jneyya they ought to know ib.; jnant nma
n' hesu "nobody knew" J iii.188; jnhi find out J i.184;
klantarena jnissatha you will see in time PvA 13; ajnanto
unawares, unsuspecting i.223; ajnamna id. Pv ii.314 . 2.
Trs. to know recognize, be familiar with (usually c. acc., but
also with gen.: J i.337; ii.243), to have knowledge of, experience, find; to infer, conclude, distinguish, state, define: ya
aha jnmi ta tva jnsi D i.88; aham p' eta na jnmi
Sn 989; jnanti ta yakkhabht Pv iv.135 ; paccakkhato atv
finding out personally J i.262; iii.168; cittam me Gotamo
jnti S i.178; jnti ma Bhagav S i.116; katha jnemu
ta maya? How shall we know (or identify) him? Vv 8311 ;
yath jnemu brhmaa so that we may know what a b. is Sn
599; yath' ha jneyya vasala Sn p. 21; ajnanto ignorant PvA 4; annapna ajanto (being without bread & water) PvA 169; ittara ittarato atv inferring the trifling from
the trifle Pv i.1111 ; ingha me uh' odaka jnhi find me some
hot water S i.174; seyya jnhi Vin iv.16; phala ppassa jnamna (having experienced) J i.168; manta j. (to be in possession of a charm) J i.253; magga na j. Sn 441; pama
ajnitv (knowing no measure) PvA 130. 3. With double
acc.: to recognize as, to see in, take for, identify as, etc. (cp.
Caus.): peta ma jnhi "see in me a Peta" Pv ii.912 (=upadhrehi PvA 119); bhadd' itthiy ti ma aasu (they knew
me as=they called me) Vv 224 .
IV. Various: 1. Grd. eyya as nt.=knowledge (cp. a):
yvataka eyya tvataka a (knowledge coincides
with the knowable, or: his knowledge is in proportion to the
k., i. e. he knows all) Nd2 2352m ; a atikkamitv eyyapatho n' atthi "beyond knowledge there is no way of knowledge" ib.; eyyasgara the ocean of knowledge PvA 1. 2.
Caus. jnpeti to make known, to inform, or (with attna)
to identify, to reveal oneself J i.107 (att. ajnpetv); vi.363;
Vism 92 (att.); PvA 149 (att.); DhA ii.62.
Jni1 (f.) [from jahati, confused in meaning with jayati. See jahati
& cp. janti] deprivation, loss, confiscation of property; plundering, robbery; using force, ill treatment D i.135=A i.201
318
Jla
Jivh
Jla2 [Sk. jvla, from jalati] glow, blaze J v.326; PvA 52 (=tejas),
154 (rasi); Miln 357; Vism 419 (kappavinsaka).
-roruva N. of one of the two Roruva hells ("blazes") J
v.271; -sikh a glowing crest i. e. a flame Nd2 11 (=acc).
Jlaka (nt.) [jla1 +ka] 1. a net J vi.536; Dvs v.51. - 2. a bud A
iv.117 sq. (jta in bud). f. jlik chain armour Miln 199.
Jimha (adj.) [Vedic jihma] crooked, oblique, slant, fig. dishonest, false (cp. vanka, opp. uju | M i.31 (+vanka); A v.289,
290; J i.290 (spelled jima); iii.111=v.222; vi.66; Vism 219
(ajimha=uju); PvA 51 (citta vanka...; opp. uju). Cp. kuila.
Jiy (f.) [Vedic jy=Gr. bow, cp. also Lat. filum thread] a
bow string M i.429 (five kinds); J ii.88; iii.323; Vism 150; DA
i.207. -kra bowstring maker Miln 331.
Jivh (f.) [Vedic jihv, cp. Lat. lingua (older dingua); Goth.
tuggo; Ohg. zunga; E. tongue] the tongue. (a) physically:
Vin i.34; A iv.131; Sn 673, 716; Dh 65, 360; J ii.306; PvA 99
(of Petas: visukkha kanthaha j.), 152. Of the tongue
of the mahpurusha which could touch his ears & cover his
forehead: Sn 1022; p. 108; & pahta jivhat the characteristic of possessing a prominent tongue (as the 27th of the
32 Mahpurisa lakkhani) D i.106=Sn p. 107; D ii.18. dujjivha (adj.) having a bad tongue (of a poisonous snake) A
iii.260. (b) psychologically: the sense of taste. It follows
after ghna (smell) as the 4th sense in the enumn of sense organs (jivhya rasa syati Nd2 under rpa; jivh vieyya
rasa D i.245; ii.281; M ii.42) Vin i.34; D iii.102, 226; M i.191;
319
Jivh
Jvin
Vism 444.
-agga the tip of the tongue A iii.109; iv.137; DhA ii.33.
-yatana the organ of taste D iii.243, 280, 290; Dhs 585, 609,
653; -indriya the sense of taste D iii.239; Dhs 585, 609, 972;
-nittaddana (corr. to -nitthaddhana) tying the tongue by
means of a spell D i.11 (cp. DA i.96); -via the cognition
of taste M i.112; D iii.243; Dhs 556, 612, 632; -samphassa
contact with the sense of taste S i.115; D iii.243; Dhs 585, 632,
787.
Jraka1 [Vedic jra, lively, alert, cp. jvati & Gr. , Lat.
viridis] digestion, in ajrakena by want or lack of digestion J
ii.181. See ajraka.
Jvita (nt.) [Vedic jvita, orig. pp. of jvati "that which is lived,"
cp. same formation in Lat. vta=*vvita; Gr. living,
sustenace, & , "diet"] (individual) life, lifetime, span of
life; living, livelihood (cp. jvik) Vin ii.191; S i.42; iv.169,
213; M ii.73 (appa); A i.155, 255; iii.72; iv.136 (appaka
paritta); Sn 181, 440, 574, 577, 931, 1077; Dh 110, 111, 130;
J i.222; Pv i.1111 (ittara); ii.67 (vijahati); Dhs 19, 295; Vism
235, 236; Ps ii.245; PvA 40. jvit voropeti to deprive of
life, to kill Vin iii.73; D iii.235; M ii.99; A iii.146, 436; iv.370
sq.; PvA 67.
-s the desire for life A i.86; -indriya the faculty of
life, vitality Vin iii.73; S v.204; Kvu 8, 10; Miln 56; Dhs 19;
Vism 32, 230 (upaccheda destruction of life), 447 (def.); DhA
ii.356 ( upacchindati to destroy life); VvA 72; -kkhaya the
dissolution of life, i. e. death J i.222; PvA 95, 111; -dna "the
gift of life," saving or sparing life J i.167; ii.154; -nikanti
desire for life A iv.48; -parikkhr (pl.) the requisites of
life M i.104 sq.; A iii.120; v.211; -pariydna the cessation
or consummation of life D i.46 (=DA i.128); S ii.83; A iv.13;
-pariyosna the end of life, i. e. death J i.256; PvA 73; -mada
the pride of life, enumd under the 3 mad; viz. rogya, yobbana, j.: of health, youth, life D iii.220; A i.146; iii.72; -rpa
(adj.) living (lifelike) J ii.190; -sankhaya=khaya Sn 74; Dh
331; Nd2 262 (=pariyosna); -hetu (adv.) on the ground of
life, for the sake of life A iv.201, 270
Jvin
Joteti
Jutimant (adj.) [fr. juti] brilliant, bright; usually fig. as prominent in wisdom: "bright." distinguished, a great light (in this
sense often as v. l. to jtimant) D ii.256 (); S v.24; Dh 89
(=DhA ii.163 ajutiy jotetv); Sn 508; Pv iv.135 (=PvA
230 ajutiy jutim).
Joti (m. nt.) [Sk. jyotis (cp. dyuti) nt. to dyotate, see jotati] 1.
light, splendour, radiance S i.93; A ii.85; Vv 162 . 2. a star:
see cpds. 3. fire S i.169; Th 1, 415; J iv.206; sajotibhta
set on fire S ii.260; A iii.407 sq.; J i.232.
-paryaa (adj.) attaining to light or glory S i.93; A ii.85;
D iii.233; Pug 51; -pvaka a brilliant fire Vv 162 (expl. VvA
79: candima suriya nakkhatta traka rpna sdhraa nma); -psa a burning glass made of a crystal DhA iv.209; -mlik a certain torture (setting the body
on fire: making a fiery garland) M i.87=A i.47=ii.122=Nd1
154=Nd2 604=Miln 197; -rasa a certain jewel (wishing stone)
VvA 111, 339; DhA i.198; Miln 118; -sattha the science
of the stars, astronomy: one of the 6 Vedic disciplines: see
chaanga, cp. jotis.
Jotimant (adj.) [joti+mant, cp. also P. jutimant] luminous, endowed with light or splendour, bright, excellent (in knowledge) Sn 348 (=pajoti sampanna SnA 348).
321
Jhatta
Jhyati
Jh
Jhatta [pp. of jhpeti; cp. atta>*jpayati] set on fire, consumed, dried up (w. hunger or thirst: parched) combd w. chta
J ii.83; vi.347.
322
Jhyati
pp. jhyita.
Jhyin (adj.) [see jhyati1 & jhna] pondering over (c. acc.) intent on: meditative, self concentrated, engaged in jhna
practice Vin ii.75; S i.46=52; ii.284; M i.334; A i.24; iii.355;
iv.426; v.156, 325 sq.; Sn 85 (magga), 638, 719, 1009, 1105;
It 71, 74, 112; J iv.7; Dh 23, 110, 387 (reminding of jhyati2 ,
cp. DhA iv.144); Nd2 264; Vv 58 ; Pv iv.132 ; Vbh 342. Nd1
226= Nd2 3422 =Vism 26 (pdaka).
character of a: . as faculty of understanding is included in pa (cp. wisdom=perfected knowledge). The latter signifies the spiritual wisdom which embraces the fundamental truths of morality & conviction (such as anicca anatt
dukkha: Miln 42); whereas . is relative to common experience (see Nd2 2353 under cakkhum, & on rel. of p. &
. Ps i.59 sq.; 118 sq.; ii.189 sq.). Perception (sa) is
necessary to the forming of a, it precedes it (D i.185); as
sure knowledge . is preferable to saddh (S iv.298); at Vin
iii.91 the definition of . is given with tisso vijj (3 kinds
of knowledge); they are specified at Nd2 266 as ahasampatti a (consisting in the 8 attainments, viz. jhna &
its 4 succeeding developments), pac' abhi (the 5 higher
knowledges, see pa & abhi), micch (false k. or heresy).
Three degrees of k. are distinguished at DA i.100, viz. svaka
pram a, paccekabuddha, sabbauta (highest k.
of a relig. student, k. of a wise man, & omniscience). Four
objects of k. (as objects of truth or sammdihi) are enumd
as dhamme a, anvaye ., paricchede ., sammuti . at
D iii.226, 277; other four as dukkhe . (dukkha ) samudaye ., nirodhe ., magge . (i. e. the knowledge of the
paicca samuppda) at D iii.227; Ps i.118; Vbh 235 (=sammdihi). Right knowledge (or truth) is contrasted with false
k. (micch a=micchdihi): S v.384; M ii.29; A ii.222;
v.327; Vbh 392. 3. a in application: (a) Vin i.35; D
ii.155 (opp. pasda); S i.129 (cittamhi susamhite amhi
vuttamnamhi); ii.60 (jtipaccay jarmaraan ti .: see
vatthu); A i.219 (on precedence of either samdhi or .); Sn
378, 789, 987 (muddhani a tassa na vijjati), 1078 (dihi,
suti, .: doctrine, revelation, personal knowledge, i. e. intelligence; differently expl. at Nd2 266), 1113; Pv iii.51 (Sugatassa . is asdhraa) Ps i.194 sq.; ii.244; Vbh 306 sq. (
vibhanga), 328 sq. (kammassakata .); Nett 15 sq.; 161
(+eyya), 191 (id.). (b) a hoti or uppajjati knowledge comes to (him) i. e. to reason, to arrive at a conclusion
(with iti=that...) S ii.124=iii.28 (uppajjati); D iii.278 (id.); A
ii.211; iv.75; v.195; S iii.154. See also arahant ii.D. (c)
Var. attributes of .: anuttariya A v.37; aparapaccay (k. of the
non effect of causation through lack of cause) S ii.17, 78;
iii.135; v.179, 422 sq. (=sammdihi), same as ahetu a
S v.126; asdhraa (incomparable, uncommon k.) A iii.441;
324
an
hna
h
ha (ha) (adj. suffix) [from tihati] standing, as opposed to
either lying down or moving; located, being based on, founded
on (e. g. appa based on little D i.143): see kappa (lasting a k.), ka (immovable), gaha (founding a house, householder), dhamma, nava, vehsa (=vihan ga). (n.) a
stand i. e. a place for: goha a stable.
hapana (nt.) 1. setting up, placing, founding; establishment, arrangement, position Vin v.114; J i.99 (aggha fixing prices); Miln 352 (pda); DA i.294; (=vidhrite); PvA
5 (kulavasa). 2. letting alone, omission, suspension, in
pimokkha Vin ii.241.
hapan (f.) 1. arrangement DA i.294. 2. application of
mind, attention Pug 18, Vism 278 (=appan).
hapita [pp. of hapeti] 1. placed, put down; set up, arranged, often simply pleonastic for finite verb (=being): saharitv h.
being folded up J i.265 (cp. similar use of gahetv c. ger.):
mukkhe h. J vi.366; sankra (dustheap) PvA 82; pariccajane h. appointed for the distribution of gifts PvA 124. 2.
suspended, left over, set aside Vin ii.242 (pimokkha).
hapeti [Caus. of tihati] to place, set up, fix, arrange, establish; appoint to (c. loc.); to place aside, save, put by, leave
out Vin ii.32 (pavraa), 191 (ucce & nce hne to place
high or low), 276 (pavraa); v.193 (uposatha), 196 (give
advice); D i.120 (leaving out, discarding); Dh 40 (citta h.
make firm) J i.62, 138, 223, 293 (except); ii.132 (puttahne
h. as daughter); J ii.159; vi.365 (putting by); VvA 63 (kasi
hapetv except ploughing); PvA 4, 20 (vara hapetv denying a wish), 39, 114 (setting up); Miln 13 (hapetv setting
aside, leaving till later). inf. hapetu Vin ii.194; PvA 73
(saharitv h. to fold up: cp. hapita); grd. hapetabba J
ii.352 (rjahne); PvA 97; & hapaniya (in paha h. a question to be left standing over, i. e. not to be asked) D iii.229.
ger. hapetv (leaving out, setting aside, excepting) also used
as prep. c. acc. (before or after the noun): with the omission
of, besides, except D i.105 (h. dve); J i.179 (ma but for me),
294 (tumhe h.); ii.154 (eka vaddha h.); iv.142 (h. ma);
VvA 100 (h. eka itthi); PvA 93 (h. ma). Cp. BSk.
sthpayitv "except" Av ii.111. Caus. happeti to cause
to be set up; to have erected, to put up J i.266; DhA ii.191.
hna (hna) (nt.) [Vedic sthna, sth, see tihati; cp. Sk. sthman Gr. , Lat. stamen] I. Connotation. As one of
the 4 iriypath (behaviours) 1. contrasted (a) as standing position with sitting or reclining; (b) as rest with motion; 2. by
itself without particular characterization as location.
II. Meanings (1) Literal: place, region, locality, abode,
325
hna
hiti
326
hiti
Ta
massa (prolongation of) S ii. 225; A i.59; ii.148; iii.177 (always with asammosa & anantaradhna), cp. M ii.26 sq.;
dhammahitia (state or condition of) S ii.124; Ps i.50
sq. n' atthi dhuva hiti: the duration is not for long M
ii.64 =Dh 147=Th 1, 769=VvA 77, cp. Th 2, 343 (=ThA
241); Sn 1114 (via) PvA 198 (position, constellation),
199 (jvita as remainder of life, cp. hitakappin); Dhs 11(cittassa), 19(+yu=subsistence).
-bhgiya connected with duration, enduring, lasting, per-
asa [see asati] a yellow fly, gadfly (orig. "the bite") Nd2 268
(=pingala makkhika, same at J iii.263 & SnA 101); usually
in combn with other biting or stinging sensations, as sirisapa
Sn 52, & freq. in cpd. asa-makasa-vt' tapa-sirisapasamphassa M i.10= A ii.117, 143=iii.163; A iii.388; v.15; Vin
i.3; Nd2 s. v. (enumd under var. kinds of dukkh); Vism 31
(here expld as asana makkhik or andha makkhik).
Dh 31, 71, 140; Miln 45, 112 (cauterize). Pp. daha Pass.
ayhati S i.188 (kmargena ayhmi cittam me pariayhati);
ib. (mahrga: m ayhittho punappuna) M ii.73; S iii.150
(mahpahav ayhati vinassati na bhavati) esp. in ppr. ayhamna consumed with or by, burning, glowing Dh 371; It
23 (ena kyena & cetas Pv i.1110 , 122 ; ii.23 ) (of a corpse
being cremated); PvA 63, 152 (vippaisrena: consumed by
remorse). See also similes J.P.T.S. 1907, 90. Cp. u.
ka (m. nt.) [Sk. ska (nt.) on > cp. Sk. skin> dkin] green
food, eatable herbs, vegetable Vin i.246 (rasa), 248; Th 2, 1;
Vv 206 (v. l. ska); VvA 99 (=tauleyyakdi skavyajana).
asati (& asati) [cp. Sk. da ati & daati, Gr. , Ohg.
zanga, Ags. tonge, E. tong] to bite (esp. of flies, snakes,
scorpions, etc.), pres. asati M i.519; pot. aseyya M i.133;
A iii.101=iv.320 (where as) & aseyya A iii.306; ppr.
asamna J i.265 (gvya); fut. asayissmi J vi.193 (v. l.
ass); aor. aasi Vv 808 (=Sk. adnkt), asi PvA 62 &
asi J i.502; DhA ii.258; inf. asitu J i.265; ger. asitv J
i.222; ii.102; iii.52, 538; DhA i.358. Pp. daha; cp. also
dh & sasa.
ha [Sk. dha, see ahati] burning, glow, heat D i.10 (dis sky
glow=zodiacal light?); M i.244; PvA 62; Miln 325. Sometimes spelt dha, e. g. A i.178 (aggi); Sdhp 201 (id.);
dava a jungle fire Vin ii.138; J i.461.
eti [Sk. *ayate=dyati; ayana flying. The Dhtp gives the root
as or with def. of "ksa gamana"] to fly; only in simile "seyyath pakkh sakuo yena yen' eva eti..." D i.71=M
i.180, 269=A ii.209= Pug 58; J v.417. Cp. dayati & dyati,
also ueti.
ahati (& dahati) [Sk. dahati, pp. dagdha, cp. dha, nidgha
(summer heat); Gr. ashes, Lat. favilla (glowing) cinders, Goth. dags, Ger. tag. E. day=hot time] to burn (trs.)
consume, torment M i.365; ii.73;
A v.110; J ii.44 (aor. 3 sg. med. adaha=Sk. adagdha);
T
1138; (J iii.26) & tato (usually as adv.) (Sn 390); loc. tasmi (J i.278), tamhi (Dh 117); tahi (adv.) (Pv i.57 ) & taha
(adv.) (J i.384; VvA 36); pl. nom. m. te (J ii.129), f. t (J
ii.127), nt. tni (Sn 669, 845); gen. tesa, f. tsa (Sn 916);
instr. tehi, f. thi (J ii.128); loc. tesu, f. tsu (Sn 670).
In composition (Sandhi) both tad & ta are used with
consecutive phonetic changes (assimilation), viz. (a) tad: ()
in subst. function: tadagge henceforth D i.93 taduhya DhA
iii.344; tadpiya (cp. Trenckner, Notes 77, 78=tadopya (see
discussion under opeti), but cp. Sk. tadrpa Divy
543 & tatrupya. It is simply tad upa ka, the adj.
positive of upa, of which the compar. superlative is upama,
-T- as composition consonant (see Mller pp. 62, 63, on euphonic cons.) especially with agge (after, from), in ajja t
agge, tama t agge, dahara t agge A v.300; cp.
deva ta t uttari for tad uttari A iii.287, 314, 316.
Ta [Vedic tad, etc.; Gr. ; Lat. is te, tlis, etc.; Lith.
ts t; Goth. pata; Ohg. etc. daz; E. that] base of demonstr. pron. for nt., in oblique cases of m. & f., & in demonstr.
adv. of place & time (see also sa). 1. Cases: nom. sg.
nt. tad (older) Vin i.83; Sn 1052; Dh 326; Miln 25 & ta (cp.
ya, ki) Sn 1037, 1050; J iii.26; acc. m. ta J ii.158, f.
ta J vi.368; gen. tassa, f. tass (Sn 22, 110; J i.151); instr.
tena, f. tya (J iii. 188); abl. tasm (J i.167); tamh Sn 291,
327
Ta
Takka
328
Takka
Tajja
Taccarita (adj.) in combn with tabbahula taggaruka tanninna tappoa tappabhra freq. as formula, expressing: converging to
this end, bent thereon, striving towards this (aim): Nd2 under
tad. The same combn with Nibbna ninna, N. poa, N.
pabhra freq. (see Nibbna).
Takkin (adj. n.) [fr. takka ] thinking, reasoning, esp. sceptically; a sceptic D i.16(takk vmas); M i.520; DA i.106
(=takketv vitakketv dihi ghino eta adhivacana), cp.
pp. 114, 115 (takki vda).
Taccha1 [Vedic takan, cp. ta, to takati (see taccheti), Lat. textor, Gr. carpenter (cp. architect), art] a carpenter, usually as ka: otherwise only in cpd. skara the carpenter pig (=a boar, so called from felling trees), title & hero
of Jtaka No. 492 (iv.342 sq.). Cp. vahakin.
Taca (& taco nt.) [Vedic tvak (f.), gen. tvaca] 1. bark. - 2.
skin, hide (similar to camma, denoting the thick, outer skin,
as contrasted with chavi, thin skin, see chavi & cp. J i.146).
1. bark: M i.198, 434, 488; A v.5. 2. skin: often
used together with nahru & ahi (tendons & bones), to denote the outer appearance (framework) of the body, or that
which is most conspicuous in emaciation: A i.50=Sdhp. 46;
tacamasvalepana (+ah nahrusayutta) Sn 194= J i.146
(where vilepana); SnA 247; ahi taca mattvasesasarra
"nothing but skin & bones" PvA 201. Of the cast off
skin of a snake: urago va jia taca jahti Sn 1, same simile Pv i.121 (=nimmoka PvA 63). kacanasannibha taca
(adj.) of golden coloured skin (a sign of beauty) Sn 551;
Vv 302 =323 ; Miln 75; VvA 9. valita tacat a condition
of wrinkled skin (as sign of age) Nd2 252; Kh iii.; KhA 45;
Sdhp 102.
329
Tajja
Tah
330
Tah
Tatta
331
Tatta
Tathgata
Tatta2 (nt.) [tad+tva] truth; abl. tattato according to truth; accurately J ii.125 (atv); iii.276 (ajnitv not knowing exactly).
Tattaka1 [tatta pp. of tappati2 +ka] pleasing, agreeable, pleasant
Miln 238 (bhojana).
Tattaka2 (adj.) (=tvataka) of such size, so large Vism 184 (corresponding with yattaka); tattaka kla so long, just that
time, i. e. the specified time (may be long or short=only so
long) DhA i.103 (v. l. ettaka); ii.16 (=ettaka).
Tattha [Sk. tatra adv. of place, cp. Goth. papro & also Sk. atra,
yatra] A. 1. of place: (a) place where= there, in that place Sn
1071, 1085; Dh 58; J i.278; Pv i.1015 ; often with eva: tatth' eva
right there, on the (very same) spot S i.116; J ii.154; PvA 27. In
this sense as introduction to a comment on a passage: in this,
here, in this connection (see also tatra) Dhs 584; DhA i.21;
PvA 7, etc. (b) direction: there, to this place J ii.159 (gantv);
vi.368; PvA 16 (tatthagamanasla able to go here & there, i. e.
wherever you like, of a Yakkha). 2. as (loc.) case of pron.
base ta= in this, for or about that, etc. Sn 1115 (etam abhiya tato tattha vipassati: SnA tatra); tattha yo manku hoti
Dh 249 (=tasmi dne m. DhA iii.359); tattha k paridevan
Pv i.123 ("why sorrow for this?"). 3. of time: then, for the
time being, interim (=ettha, cp. tattaka2 ) in phrase tattha
parinibbyin, where corresp. phrases have antar parinibbyin (A ii.238 e. g.i.134; see under parinibbyin) D i.156;
A i.232; ii.5; iv.12; S v.357; M ii.52, etc. The meaning of
this phrase may however be taken in the sense of tatra A 3
(see next). B. Repeated: tattha tattha here and there, in
various places, all over; also corresponding with yattha yattha
wherever... there It 115; Nett 96 (gmini paipad); VvA
297; PvA 1, 2, 33, 77, etc. See tatra.
Tathatta (nt.) [*tathtva] "the state of being so," the truth, Nibbna; only in foll. phrases: (a) tathattya paipajjati to be on
the road to (i. e. attain) Nibbna D i.175, similarly S ii.199; S
ii.209 (paipajjitabba being conducive to N.); Miln 255; Vism
214. (b) tathattya upaneti (of a citta bhvita) id. S
iv.294=M i. 301; S v.90, 213 sq. (c) tathattya citta upasaharati id. M i.468. abl. tathatt in truth, really Sn
520 sq. (cp. M Vastu iii.397).
Tath (adv.) [Sk. tath, cp. also katha] so, thus (and not otherwise, opp. aath), in this way, likewise Sn 1052 (v. l.
yath); J i.137, etc. Often with eva: tath' eva just so, still the
same, not different D iii.135 (ta tath' eva hoti no aath); J
i.263, 278; Pv i.83 ; PvA 55. Corresponding with yath: tath
yath so that Dh 282; PvA 23 (tath aksi yath he made
that..., cp. Lat. ut consecutive); yath tath asso also Sn
504; J i.223; Pv i.123 (yath' gato tath gato as he has come so
he has gone). In cpds. tath' before vowels.
-pama such like (in comparisons, following upon a preceding yath or seyyath) Sn 229 (=tathvidha KhA 185), 233;
It 33, 90; -krin acting so (corresp. w. yathvdin: acting so
as he speaks, cp. tthvdin) Sn 357; It 122; -gata see sep.;
-bhva "the being so," such a condition J i.279; -rpa such a,
like this or that, esp. so great, such Vin i.16; Sn p. 107; It 107;
DA i.104; PvA 5, 56. nt. adv. thus PvA 14. Cp. evarpa;
-vdin speaking so (cp. krin) Sn 430; It 122 (of the Tathgata); -vidha such like, so (=tathrpa) Sn 772, 818, 1073,
1113; Nd2 277 (=tdisa tasahita tappakra).
Tatha (adj.) [an adjectivized tath out of combn tath ti "so it is,"
332
Tathgata
Tapassin
Tanti (f.) [Vedic tantr, see tanta] 1. the string or cord of a lute,
etc.; thread made of tendon Vin i.182; Th 2, 390 (cp. ThA
257); J iv.389; DhA i.163; PvA 151. 2. line, lineage
(+pavei custom, tradition) J vi.380; DhA i.284. -dhara
bearer of tradition Vism 99 (+vasnurakkhake & paveipolake). 3. a sacred text; a passage in the Scriptures Vism
351 (bahu peyyla); avimutta tanti magga DA i.2;
MA i.2.
-ssara string music Vin i.182; J iii.178.
Tantu [Vedic tantu, cp. tanta] a string, cord, wire (of a lute) J
v.196.
Tad (adv.) [Vedic; cp. kad] then, as that time (either past or
future) D ii.157; J ii.113, 158; Pv i.105 ; PvA 42. Also used
like an adj.: te tad mtpitaro etarahi m ahesu "the then
mother & father" J i.215 (cp. Lat. quondam); tad sotpanna upsaka J ii.113.
Tandita (adj.) [pp. of tandeti=Sk. tandrayate & tandate to relax. From *ten, see tanoti] weary, lazy, giving way Miln 238
(kata). Usually a active, keen, industrious, sedulous Dh 305,
366, 375; Vv 3322 ; Miln 390; VvA 142. Cp. next.
Tapa & Tapo [from tapati, cp. Lat. tepor, heat] 1. torment, punishment, penance, esp. religious austerity, selfchastisement,
ascetic practice. This was condemned by the Buddha: Gotamo sabba tapa garahati tapassi lkhajvi upavadati D
i.161=S iv.330; anattha sahita atv ya kici apara
tapa S i.103; J iv.306 (tattatapa: see tatta). 2. mental
devotion, self control, abstinence, practice of morality (often= brahmacariy & savara); in this sense held up as an
ideal by the Buddha. D iii.42 sq., 232 (attan & paran), 239;
S i.38, 43; iv.118, 180; M ii.155, 199; D ii.49= Dh 184 (parama tapo), 194 (tapo sukho); Sn 77= S i.172 (saddh bja
tapo vuhi); Sn 267 (t. ca brahmacariy ca), 655 (id.), 901; Pv
i.32 (instr. tapas= brahmacariyena PvA 15); J i.293; Nett 121
(+indriyasavara); KhA 151 (ppake dhamme tapat ti tapo):
VvA 114 (instr. tapas); PvA 98.
-kamma ascetic practice S i.103;
-jigucch disgust for asceticism D i.174; iii.40, 42 sq., 48 sq.; A
ii.200; -pakkama=kamma D i.165 sq. (should it be
tapopakkama=tapa+upakkama, or tapo kamma?). -vana
the ascetic's forest Vism 58, 79, 342.
Tanu [Vedic tanu, f. tanv; also n. tanu & tan (f.) body *ten
(see tanoti)=Gr. , Lat. tenuis, Ohg. dunni, E. thin]
1. (adj.) thin, tender, small, slender Vv 162 (vara graceful=uttamarpa dhara VvA 79; perhaps to 2); PvA 46 (of
hair: fine+mudhu). 2. (n. nt.) body (orig. slender part of
the body=waist) Vv 537 (kacana); Pv i.121 ; Vism 79 (uju+).
Cp. tanutara.
-karaa making thinner, reducing, diminishing Vin ii.316
(Bdhgh on CV. v.9, 2); -bhva decrease Pug 17; -bhta decreased, diminished Pug 17; esp. in phrase soka with diminished grief, having one's grief allayed DhA iii.176; PvA 38.
Tanuka (adj.)=tanu; little, small Dh 174 (=DhA 175); Sn 994
(soka).
Tanutara the waist (lit. smaller part of body, cp. body and bodice)
Vin iv.345 (sundaro tanutaro "her waist is beautiful").
Tanutta (nt.) [n. abstr. of tanu] diminution, reduction, vanishing, gradual disappearance A i.160 (manussna khayo hoti
tanutta payati); ii.144 (rga, dosa, moha); esp. in
phrase (characterizing a sakadgmin) "rga d. mohna tanutt sakadgm hoti" D i.156; S v.357 sq., 376, 406;
A ii.238; Pug 16.
Tapana (adj. n.) [to tapati & tapa] burning, heat; fig. torment,
torture, austerity. 1. (as nt.) PvA 98 (kya sankhto tapo).
2. (as f.) tapan J v.201 (in metaphorical play of word with
aggi & brahmacrin; Com. visvana aggiha sankht
tapan).
Tapassin
Tarati
who exercises self control & attains mastery over his senses
Vin i.234=A iv.184 (tapass samao Gotamo); D iii.40, 42 sq.,
49; S i.29; iv.330, 337 sq.; M i.77; Sn 284 (isayo pubbak
su saatatt tapassino); Vv 2210 ; Pv i.32 (rpa, under the
appearance of a "holy" man: samaa patirpaka PvA 15);
ii.614 (=savraka PvA 98; tapo etesa atth ti ibid.).
Taya (nt.) [Sk. traya triad, cp. tray; see also tvatisa] a triad,
in ratana-ttaya the triad of gems (the Buddha, the Norm. &
the Community) see ratana; e. g. PvA 1, 49, 141. piakattaya the triad of the Piakas SnA 328.
Tayo [f. tisso, nt. ti; Vedic traya, tr & tri; Gr. , ;
Lat. trs, tria; Goth. preis, prija; Ohg. dr; E. three, etc.] num.
card. three.
nom. acc. m. tayo (Sn 311), & tayas (tayas su dhamm
Sn 231, see KhA 188) f. tisso (D i.143; A v.210; It 99) nt. ti
(A i.138, etc.), also used as absolute form (eka dve ti) Kh iii.
(cp. KhA 79 & ti lakkha for lakkhani Sn 1019); gen.
m. nt. tia (J iii.52, 111, etc.), f. tissanna; instr. thi
(hnehi Dh 224, vijjhi It 101); loc. tsu (janesu J i.307; vidhsu Sn 842). In composition & derivation: ti in numerical
cpds.: tidasa (30) q. v.; tisata (300) Sn 566 (brhma tisat);
573 (bhikkhavo tisat); tisahassa (3000) Pv ii.951 (jan );
in numerical derivations: tisa (30), tika (triad), tikkhattu
(thrice); tidh (threefold). In nominal cpds.: see ti te (a) in
numerical cpds.: terasa (SnA 489; DhsA 333; VvA 72: teras
the 13th day) & teasa (S i.192 Sn pp. 102, 103) (13) [Sk.
trayodaa, Lat. tredecim]; tevsa (23) VvA 5; tettisa (33) J
i.273; DhA i.267; tesahi (63) PvA 111 (Jambudpe tesahiy
nagarasahassesu). (b) in nominal cpds.: see te.
Tarati1 [Vedic tarati, *ter (t) to get to the other side, cp. Lat.
termen, terminus, Gr. , ; also Lat. trans=Goth.
pairh=Ags. purh=E. through] (lit.) to go or get through, to
cross (a river), pass over, traverse; (fig.) to get beyond, i. e.
to surmount, overcome, esp. ogha (the great flood of life,
desire, ignorance, etc.) S i.53, 208, 214; v.168, 186; Sn 173,
273, 771, 1069; sanga Sn 791; visattika Sn 333, 857; ubhaya (both worlds, here & beyond) Pv iv.131 (=atikkameti
PvA 278); Nd2 282 ppr. taranto Vin i.191 (Aciravati); grd.
taritabba Vin iv.65 (nad); aor. atari J iii.189 (samudda) &
atri Sn 355, 1047 (jti maraa), pl. atru Sn 1045.
See also treti (Caus.), ta, tyate, tiro, tiriya, tra, treti.
Tamba (nt.) [Sk. tmra, orig. adj.=dark coloured, leaden; cp. Sk.
adj. tasra id., to tama] copper ("the dark metal"); usually
Tarati2 [tvarate, pp. tvarita; also turati, turayati from *ter to turn
round, move quickly, perhaps identical with the *ter of tarati1 ;
334
Tarati
Tdin
tasit (tasi?) tah appahn, etc., & ye te santsa pajjanti. S i.141; iv.117, 351; v.393; Sn 146, 629; Dh 405, Th
1, 876; J v.221; Nd2 479; DhA iv.175.
Tasati1 [Sk. tyati=Gr. to dry up, Lat. torreo (=E. torrid, toast), Goth. gapairsan & gaparsnan, Ohg. derren; see
also tah & tahyati] to be thirsty, fig. to crave for S ii.13;
Miln 254. pp. tasita1 . Cp. pari.
Tarahi (adv.) [Vedic tarhi, cp. carahi & etarahi] then, at that time
Vin ii.189.
Tasara (nt.) [Vedic tasara, cp. tanta, etc.] a shuttle Sn 215, 464,
497; DhA i.424; iii.172. Cp. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1886, 160.
Tasi (f.) [Diaeretic form of tah, cp. dosi > juh, kasia
> ktsa, etc.] thirst; fig. craving (see tah) S v.54, 58; Nd2
479 (to be read for tasit?); Dh 342, 343.
Tasita1 [pp. of tasati1 ] dried up, parched, thirsty S ii.110, 118;
Sn 980, 1014 (not with Fausbll=tasita2 ); J iv.20; Pv ii.936
(chta+), 103 (=pipsita PvA 143); iii.65 (=pipsita PvA 127,
202); Miln 318 (kilanta+).
Tasita2 [pp. of tasati2 ] frightened, full of fear J i.26 (bhta+). 342,
iv.141 (id.): Nd2 479 (or=tasi?). atasita fearless S iii.57.
Tala (nt.) [Derivation uncertain. Cp. Sk. tala m. & nt.; cp. Gr.
(dice board), Lat. tellus (earth), tabula (=table). Oir.
talam (earth), Ags. pel (=deal), Ohg. dili=Ger. diele] (a) flat
surface (w. ref. to either top or bottom: cp. Ger. boden), level,
ground, base J i.60, 62 (psda flat roof); iii.60 (id.); pahav
(level ground) J ii.111, cp. bhmi PvA 176; dsa surface of
a mirror Vism 450, 456, 489; salila (surface of pond) PvA
157; VvA 160; hehima (the lowest level) J i.202; PvA 281;
J i.233 (base); 266 (khagga the flat of the sword); ii.102
(bheri). (b) the palm of the hand or the sole of the foot J
ii.223; Vism 250; & cpds. See also taa, tla, tlu.
-ghtaka a slap with the palm of the hand Vin iv.260,
261; -sattika in uggirati to lift up the palm of the hand
Vin iv.147; DhA iii.50; cp. Vin. Texts i.51.
Talika (adj.) [from tala] having a sole, in eka uphan a sandal with one sole J ii.277; iii.80, 81 (v. l. BB. pailika); cp.
Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 165.
Talua=tarua DhsA 333 (cp. Burnouf, Lotus 573).
Taka (nt.) [Derivation uncertain. Perhaps from taa. The Sk.
forms are taaka, taka, taga] a pond, pool, reservoir Vin
ii.256; J i.4, 239; PvA 202; DA i.273; Miln 1, 66=81, 246,
296, 359.
Tdin
Ta
Tlsa (nt.) (also tlissa J iv.286, tlsaka Miln 338) [cp. Sk. tl,
tla & tal] the shrub Flacourtia cataphracta & a powder or
ointment obtained from it Vin i.203 (+tagara); J iv.286 (id.);
Miln 338.
Tyitar [n. ag. from tyati] one who protects, shelters or guards
J i.412 (in expl. of ta, q. v.).
Tr (f.) [Sk. tr=Gr. , (=Lat. astrum, in E. disaster), Lat. stella, Goth. starn, Ohg. sterro (:E. star), perhaps
loan word from Semitic sources] a star, a planet Sn 687 (trsabha the lord, lit. "the bull" of the stars, i. e. the Moon).
-gaa (tra) the host of stars Pv ii.967 (cando va t. gae
atirocati). -maivitna "star jewel awning"; canopy of
Tlsa2 (No. 40) is short for cattlsa, e.g. Ap. 103, 234 and
passim.
Tlu [Sk. tlu, see tala] the palate Sn 716; J i.419; Vism 264
(matthaka top of p.); PvA 260.
336
Ta
Tsa
Ta1 [ta, cp. Sk. tla a blow, or musical time; tlyaka cymbal]
beating, striking, the thing beaten or struck, i. e. a musical instrument which is beaten, an instr. of percussion, as a cymbal,
gong, or tambourine (for ta= gong cp. thla): (a) gong, etc.
J i.3; vi.60; Th 1, 893; DA i.85; DhsA 319 (kasa). (b)
music in general DhA iv.67.
-vacara musical time or measure, music, a musician D
ii.159 (v. l. tla); J i.60 (l); iv.41; VvA 257 (parivuta, of an
angel).
Ta2 (nt.) [Sk. tlaka=ta Av ii.56, taka Divy 577] a key
(orig. a "knocker"?) Vin ii.148 (3 kinds: loha, kaha,
visa); Bdhd 1.
-cchiggala a key hole S iv.290; v.453; Vism 500. cchidda id. Vin ii.120, 148, 153 (all tla); iii.118; DhA iii.8
(l).
T (f.) a strike, a blow, in uratti karoti to strike one's chest
(as a sign of grief) PvA 39, etc. (see ura).
Teti [Sk. tayati, ta perhaps=tud] to strike a blow, flog, beat,
esp. freq. in phrase kashi teti to flog with whips, etc. (in
list of punishments, see kas) M i.87; A ii.122; Nd2 604; PvA
4, etc. ppr. pass. taamna (for *tyamna) J vi.60 (so
read for taddamna; Com pohyamna). pp. tita J vi.60
(turiya); Vv 621 (id.); Sdhp 80. Cp. abhi.
Tvataka (adj.) [der. fr. tva] just so much or just so long (viz. as
the situation requires), with (or ellipt. without) a corresp. yvataka Vin i.83 (yvatake t. as many as): D ii.18 (yvatakv'
assa kyo tvatakv' assa vymo as tall as is his body so far can
he stretch his arms: the 19th sign of a Mahpurisa); instr. as
adv. tvatakena after a little time Miln 107; DhA iii.61.
See also tattaka (contracted of tvataka).
337
Tsa
Tihati
Tika (adj. n.) [Vedic trika] consisting of 3, a triad S ii. 218 (t.
bhojana); DhA iv.89 ( nipta, the book of the triads, a
division of the Jtaka), 108 (t. catukka jhna the 3 & the
4 jhnas); Miln 12 (tika duka paimait dhammasangan); Vism 13 sq.; DhsA 39 ( duka triad & pair).
338
Tihati
Tittha
Tia (nt.) [Vedic ta, from *ter (cp. tarati) to pierce, orig.
"point" (=blade); Goth. parnus, Ags. porn=E. thorn, Ger.
dorn] grass, herb; weed; straw; thatch; hay, litter S iii.137
(tia, kas, kusa, babbaja, braa); satiakahodaka full of
grass, wood & water (of an estate) D i.87, 111, etc.; sta
v uha v rajo v tia v ussvo v (dust & weeds) D
ii.19; A i.145; t.+paa (grass & leaves1 ) A i.183; VvA 5.
J i.108 (dabba), 295; iii.53; Pv i.81 (harita t.); iv.148 ; Vism
353 (kuha); DA i.77 (alla fresh grass); PvA 7 (weed), 62
(grass), 112; DhA iv.121; Miln 47 (thatch), 224 (id.).
-aupaka a roll of grass Vin i.208=iii.249; -gra a
thatched cottage A i.101 (+nagra); -ukk a firebrand of
dry grass or hay S ii.152; iii.185; J i.212, 296; Vism 428; DhA
i.126; ThA 287; Bdhd 107; -karala a wisp of grass DhA
iii.38; -kjaka a load of g. DhA iv.121; -gahana a thicket
of g., a jungle A i.153; -cua crushed & powdered (dry)
grass or herbs Vin i.203; VvA 100 ( rajnukia); -jti
grass creeper VvA 162; -dya a grass jungle S ii.152;
-dosa damaged by weeds (khetta) Dh 356; PvA 7; -pupphaka
( roga) sickness caused by the flowering of grass, hay
fever Miln 216; -purisaka a straw man, a scarecrow Miln
352; Vism 462; DhsA 111; -bhakkha eating grass; of animals
M iii.167; of ascetics D i.166; Pug 55; A i.241, 295; -bhusa
chaff, litter, dry grass VvA 47; -rukkha a shrub; -vatthraka
one of the seven Adhikaraasamathas (ways in which litigation may be settled). In case mutual complaints of breach of
the rules have been brought before a chapter, then the chapter
may decline to go into the details and, with the consent of the
litigants, declare all the charges settled. See Vin. Texts, iii.30
34. This is the "covering over as if with grass" Vin ii.87 (in
detail, cp. also tassappiyyasik); D iii.254; A i.99; M ii.250;
-santhraka a mat of grass Vin i.286; ii.113, 116; J i.360.
Tittaka (adj.) [cp. Sk. tiktaka from tij] sharp, bitter (of taste) M
i.80 (albu), 315 (id.); PvA 47 (id.; so read for tintaka lbu)
Dhs 629=Nd2 540 (tittika; enumd between lavaa & kauka);
DhsA 320.
Tittakatta (nt.) [abstr. to tittaka] bitterness, enumd with lavaatta & kaukatta at Miln 56=63 (cp. Nd2 540).
Titti (f.) [from tappati2 ] satisfaction (in=loc.) Dh 186 =ThA 287
(na kahpaavassena t. kmesu vijjati); n' atthi t. kmna
Th 2, 487; J v.486 (dhammesu); VvA 11; PvA 32 ( gacchati find s.) 55 (pailabhati), 127.
Tittika in sama at D i.244, Vin i.230, brimful, of a river. Derivation & meaning doubtful. See the note at Buddhist Suttas, 178,
9.
Tittimant (adj.) [titti+mant] satisfied, contented, so read at J iii.70
& vi.508 for kittimant.
Tittira [Onomat. cp. Vedic tittira & tittiri, Gr. pheasant,
Lit. teterva heath cock; Lat. tetrinnio to cackle] partridge J
i.218; iii.538. -pattik a kind of boot Vin i.186.
Tittiriya (adj.) [fr. tittira] belonging to a partridge, like a partridge
J i.219 (brahmacariya).
Tittha (nt.) [Vedic trtha, from *ter, tarate, to pass through, orig.
passage (through a river), ford] 1. a fording place, landing
place, which made a convenient bathing place D ii.89=Vin
i.230 (Gotama the G. ford); J i.339, 340 (titthraa); ii.111;
iii.228 (nvika ferryman); 230 (nv a ferry); iv.379; Pv
ii.120 ; iii.64 ; iv.122 (su); Dvs. v.59 (harbour). Tittha jnti
to know a "fording place," i. e. a means or a person to help
over a difficulty or doubt M i.223=A v.349 (neg.) 2. a sect
(always with bad connotation. Promising to lead its votaries
over into salvation, it only leads them into error).
-yatana the sphere or fold of a sect (cp. titthiya) Vin i.60,
69; ii.279; M i.483; A i.173; Pug 22; Dhs 381, 1003 (cp. Dhs.
trsl. p. 101n ); DA i.118; Ledi Sadaw in J.P.T.S. 1913, 117
118; -kara a "ford maker," founder of a sect D i.47, 116;
339
Tittha
Tiracchna
i.526)] piercing, sharp, acute, fierce; always & only with ref.
to pains, esp. pains suffered in Niraya. In full combns sarrik
vedan dukkh tipp khar M i.10; A ii.116, 143, 153; ekantadukkh t. kauk ved. M i.74; bhaynaka ekantatippa Niraya
Pv iv.19 (=tikhiadukkha PvA 221); nerayik satt dukkh t.
kauk ved vediyamn Miln 148.
Titthiya [from tittha 2, cp. Divy 817 ; Av i.48; ii.20. An adherent of another sect (often as aa), an heretic Vin i.54, 84,
136, 159 (samdna), 306 (dhaja), 320; S i.65; iv.37, 394;
D iii.44, 46; Sn 381, 891; Nd2 38; Ps i.160; Pug 49; Vbh 247.
aa e. g. Vin i.101; D i.175 sq.; iii.130 sq.; J ii.415, 417.
-svaka a follower of an heretic teacher Vin i.172; J i.95; Vism
17.
Tithi [Sk. tithi] a lunar day DhA i.174; PvA 198.
Tidasa (num.) [Vedic tridaa] thirty (cp. tisa), esp. the thirty
deities (pl.) or belonging to them (adj.). It is the round figure
for 33, and is used as equivalent to tvatisa. Nandana ramma tidasna mahvana Pv iii.119 =Vv 1813 ; dev tidas
sahindak Vv 301 ; Sdhp 420.
-dhipati the Lord of the 30 (viz. Sakka) Vv 478 ; -inda
ruler of the 30 Sdhp 411, 478; -gaa the company of the 30
Sn 679 (Com. tettisa); Vv 416 ; -gatin going to the 30 (as
one of the gatis) Vv 3512 (=tidasabhavana gata Tvatisadevanikya uppanna VvA 164); -pura the city of the 30, i. e.
Heaven Miln 291; -bhavana the state of the 30, i. e. heavenly
existence VvA 164 (=Tvatisabhavana).
Timira (adj.) [Sk. timira fr. tim=tam (as in tamas), to which also
belong tibba 2 & tintiti. This is to be distinguished from tim
in temeti to (be or) make wet. See tama] dark; nt. darkness Vv
323 (t. tamba); J iii.189 (t. rukkha); vanatimira a flower
J iv.285; v.182.
Tintia (nt.) greed, desire; (adj.) greedy. Ep. of a ppabhikkhu A v.149 (Com. tintia vuccati tah, tya samanngato sankbahulo v); Vbh 351 (tintia tintiyan,
etc.=loluppa).
Tintiti & Tintiyati [either=Sk. timirayati to be obscured,
from tim in timira, or from stim (Sk. *tistimyati>*stistim
after tihati>*stihati;=P. titiyati) to become stiff, cp. timi,
thna and in meaning mucchati. The root tam occurs in same
meaning in cpd. nitammati (q. v.=Sk. nitmyati) at J iv.284,
expld by atikilamati] to become sick, to swoon, to (stiffen out
in a) faint J i.243 (tintianto corresp. with mucchita); vi.347
(tintiyamna, v. l. tiy).
Tipu [cp. Sk. trapu, non Aryan?] lead, tin Vin i.190 (maya);
S v.92; J ii.296; Miln 331 (kra a worker in lead, tinsmith);
Vism 174 (maala); DhA iv.104 (parikh).
Timiryittata (nt.) [abstr. to timiryita, pp. of timirayati to obscure, denom. to timira] gloom, darkness S iii.124 (=Mra).
Timisa (nt.) [Vedic tamisr=tamas] darkness J iii.433 (andhakra
timissya); Pug 30 (andh timisya); Miln 283
Timsik (f.) [timisa+ka] darkness, a very dark night Vv 96 ; J
iv.98.
Timbarukkha=timbarsaka J vi.529.
340
Tiracchna
Tunga
Tiracchna [for gata=Sk. tiracna (gata)=tiraca; "going horizontally," i. e. not erect. Cp. tiraccha, tiriya, tiro] an animal
It 92 (tiracchna ca yoniyo for tiracchna yoniyo); Vbh
339 (gmin paipad leading to rebirth among beasts); VvA
23 (manussatiracchna an animal man, wild man, "werwolf").
-kath "animal talk"; wrong or childish talk in general
Vin i.188; D i.7, 178; iii.54; Vism 127; expld at DA i.89 by
anynikatt sagga mokkha maggna tiraccha bht
kath; -gata an animal, a beast Vin iv.7; S iii.152=DA i.23;
(t. p) M iii.167 (t. p tiabhakkh); Nd2 on Sn 72 (t.
p); J i.459 (=vanagocara); Vbh 412 sq.; -yoni the realm
of the brute creation, the animals. Among the 5 gatis (niraya
t. manuss dev pettivisaya) it counts as an apyagati, a state
of misery D i.228; iii.234; S i.34; iii.225 sq.; iv. 168, 307;
A i.60; ii.127, 129; Pv iv.111 ; Vism 103, 427; PvA 27, 166;
-yonika (& yoniya A i.37) belonging to the realm of the animals S v.356; -vijj a low art, a pseudo science Vin ii.139;
D i.9 sq.
Tila (m. nt.) [Vedic tila m.] the sesame plant & its seed (usually
the latter, out of which oil is prepared: see tela), Sesamum
Indicum. Often combd with taula, e. g. A i.130=Pug 32;
J i.67; iii.53. Vin i.212 (navtil); A iv.108; Sn p. 126;
J i.392; ii.352; Vism 489 (ucchu); DhA i.79; PvA 47 (tilni
petv telavaijja karoti).
-odana rice with sesame J iii.425; -kakka sesame paste
Vin i.205; -tela ses. oil VvA 54 ( ptukma); DhA iii.29;
Bdhd 105; -pika tila seed cake, oilcake VvA 142;
-piha sesamum grinding, crushed s. seed Vin iv.341.
-muhi a handful of ses. J ii.278; -rsi a heap of t. seeds
VvA 54; -vha a cartload of t. seeds A v.173=Sn p. 126;
-sangulik a ses. cake DhA ii.75.
Tilaka [tila+ka, from its resemblance to a sesame seed] 1. a spot,
stain, mole, freckle M i.88; S i.170; VvA 253; DhA iv.172 (
v klaka v adisv). 2. a kind of tree Vv 67 (=bandhu
jvaka puppha sadisa pupph ek rukkha jti).
Tilachaka at J. iv.364 acc. to Kern (Toev. ii.91) to be read as
nilachaka.
Tiriya (adv.) [Vedic tiryac (tiryak) to tiras, see tiro & cp. perhaps Ger. quer=E. thwart, all to *ter in tarati] transversely,
obliquely, horizontally (as opp. to uddha vertically, above,
& adho beneath), slanting, across. In combn uddha adho
tiriya sabbadhi "in all directions whatever" D i.251=A
ii.129; similarly uddha adho t. vpi majjhe Sn 1055; with
uddha & adho D i.23, 153; Vism 176 (where expld ). A
ii.48; Sn 150, 537; J i.96; It 120; DhA i.40 (dvra majjhe t.
across the doorway), 47 (sideways); DA i.312; KhA 248.
-taraa ferrying across, adj. nv, a vessel crossing
over, a traject Vin iv.65.
Triya (adj.) [from tra] dwelling on the banks of... Vin ii.287.
Tiro (prep. & adv.) (always ) [Vedic tiras across, crossways, from *ter of tarati=to go through; cp. Av. tar, Lat.
trans, Cymr. tra] across, beyond, over, outside, afar. See also
tiraccha & tiriya.
-kara (f.) a curtain, a veil (lit. "drawing across") Vin
i.276; ii.152; -kucchigata having left the womb D ii.13;
-kua outside the fence or wall, over the wall Vin iv.265
(kue uccra chaeti); D i.78= A iii.280 (in phrase tirobhva t. kua t. pkra t. pabbata asajjamno gacchati to denote power of transplacement); Pv i.51 (kuesu
tihanti: the Tirokua Sutta, Khp VII.); Vism 176, 394;
DhA i.104; PvA 23, 31; -gma a distant village Vin iii.135;
-chada "outside the veil," conspicuous J vi.60; -janapada a
distant or foreign country D i.116; -pkra beyond or over
a fence (pkra or pkre) Vin iv.266; see also kua;
-bhva () beyond existence, out of existence, magic power
of going to a far away place or concealment Vism 393 sq. (=a
pkaa pihriya), see also under kua. -raha a
foreign kingdom D i.161 (=pararaha DA i.286).
Tunga
Turiya
Tutta (nt.) [Sk tottra, from tudati to prick, push] a pike for guiding
elephants, a goad for driving cattle (cp. tomara & patoda) D
ii.266 (tomara); J iv.310; v.268; Cp. iii.5, 2 (t. vegahata).
Tudati [Vedic tudati; *steud, enlarged fr. *steu, cp. Lat. tundo,
tudes (hammer); Goth. stautan, Ohg. stozan (to push), E. stutter, Nhg. stutzen; Ags. styntan=E. stunt] to strike with an
instrument; to prick, peck, pierce; to incite, instigate J iii.189
(=vijjhati). Pass. tujjati to be struck Th 1, 780; Vism 503
(cp. vitujjati); Sdhp 279. pp. tunna. See also tua
(beak=pecker), tutta (goad), tomara (lance=striker) & thpa
(point).
Tudampat (dual) husband & wife [tu=dial. for du, Sk. dve;
342
Turiya
Te
Tur a hen Th 2, 381 (=mig ThA 254) (v. l. kor, cp. Tamil ki
hen).
Tula (adj.) [see tuleti] only in negative atula incomparable,
not to be measured, beyond compare or description Vv 304
(=anupama VvA 126); Pv ii.89 (=appama PvA 110); iii.32
(=asadisarpa PvA 188); Miln 343.
Tulan (f.) [see tuleti] weighing, rating; consideration, deliberation M i.480; ii.174; Nett 8, 41.
Tulasi [Derivation unknown] basil (common or sweet) J v.46 (gahana a thicket of b.; v. l. tlasi); vi.536 (tuasi=tuasigaccha).
Tulya & Tuliya (also tulla J iv.102) (adj.) [orig. grd. of tuleti] to
be weighed, estimated, measured; matched, equal, comparable
Sn 377; J iii.324; PvA 87 (=samaka). Mostly in the negative
atulya incomparable, not having its equal Sn 83, 683; J iv.102
(atulla); Miln 249 (atuliy gu), 343 (id.) See also tula.
Tuva & Tva [Sk. tva & (Ved.) tua, cp. also part. tu;
Gr. , ; Lat. tu; Goth. pu; E. thou, etc.; Oir. t] pron.
of 2nd pers. in foll. forms & applications: 1. Full forms:
1. sg.: (a) tv, tu, tuyh: nom. tva (in prose & verse) Sn
179, 241, 1029, 1058; J i.279; ii.159; Pv i.84 . Also for nom.
pl. at J i.391, 395; vi.576; tuva (in verse) Sn 1064, 1102,
1121; J iii.278, 394; Pv i.33 ; ii.32 ; also for acc. Sn 377; Pv
ii.81 ; tuyha (gen. & dat.) [Sk. tubhya] Sn 983, 1030; J
i.279; PvA 3, 60, 73, etc. (b) ta, tay, ta (acc.) M i.487;
Sn 31, 241, 1043, 1049; J i.222; ii.159; Pv i.101 ; ii.16 ; tay
(instr.) Sn 335, 344; J i.222; Pv ii.36 (=bhotiy PvA 86): PvA
71; tayi (loc.) Sn 382; J i.207; tava (gen.) Sn 1102, 1110; J
ii.153; PvA 106. 2. pl.: tumh [Sk. yum]: tumhe (nom.
& acc.) It 31; J i.221 (acc.); Pv i.112 . Also as pl. majesticus in
addressing one person J ii.102; iv.138; tumha (gen.) PvA
58 (for sg.), 78; tumhka (gen. dat.) S ii.65; It 32; J i.150;
ii.102; tumhesu (loc.) J i.292 (for sg.); tumhehi (instr.) J
ii.154; Pv i.512 . II. Enclitic forms (in function of an ethical
343
Te
Tva
Tekiccha (adj.) [der. fr. tikiccha] curable; fig. one who can be
helped or pardoned. Only in cpds. a incurable, unpardonable
VvA 322 (of a sick person); DhA i.25 (id.); Miln 322; of Devadatta w. ref. to his rebirth in Niraya Vin ii.202=It 85; M
i.393; & sa pardonable Miln 192, 221, 344.
Teja & Tejo [Vedic tejas (nt.) from tij to be sharp or to pierce=a
(piercing) flame. See tejate; semantically (sharp>light) cp.
Ger. strahl (ray of light)=Ags. strael (arrow). The nt. tejo
is the usual form; instr. tejas (Dh 387; Sn 1097) & tejena (J
iii.53), cp. tapa & tapo] "sharpness," heat, flame, fire, light; radiance, effulgence, splendour, glory, energy, strength, power
D ii.259 (personified as deva, among the 4 Elements pahav,
po, t., vyo; cp. tejo dhtu); S iv.215; M i.327; Sn 1097
(glory of the sun compd with that of the Buddha); Dh 387
(sabba ahoratti Buddho tapati tejas); J iii.53 (sla); i.93
(pua the power of merit); Vbh 426 (id.); Ps i.103; Vism
350 (def.); VvA 116.
-kasia fire contemplation for the purpose of kammahna practice (see kasia) D iii.268; Dhs 203; Vism 171;
DhA ii.49; iii.214; Bdhd 106; -dhtu the element of flame (or
fire), the 3rd of the 6 Elements, viz. pahav po t. vyo ksa
via (cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 242) D iii.27, 228, 247; M i.188,
422; A i.176; ii.165; Dhs 588, 648, 964; Nett 74; Vism 363.
Telaka (nt.)=tela Vin i.204 ("a small quantity of oil"); ii.107 (sittha t. oil of beeswax).
Teliya (adj.) oily J iii.522.
Tevijja see Vijj.
Tomara (m. nt.) [Sk. tomara from tud, see tudati] a pike, spear,
lance, esp. the lance of an elephant driver D ii.266 (tutta
t. a driving lance); M iii.133 (t. hattha); Vism 235; DA i.147.
Tejate [Vedic tejate from tij (*stij)=Lat. in stgo (to spur), Gr.
, , Ohg. stehhan, Nhg. stecken, E. stick] to be
sharp or to make sharp, to prick, to incite, etc. See tikkha,
tikhia, tiha, titikkhati, tittaka, teja, etc.
Toya (nt.) [Vedic toya from *t&uarc; to melt away; Lat. tabeo,
tabes (consumption); Ags. pwan=E. dew, Oir. tm= tabes;
also Gr. , etc.] water (poetical for udaka); only in simile:
puarka (or paduma) toyena na upalippati A ii.39=Sn
547; Sn 71=213; Th 1, 700; Nd2 287 (t. vuccati udaka);
Bdhd 67, 93.
Tva
Tharu
Th
Thakana (nt.) [see next] covering, lid; closing up DhA iv.85
(savara+).
Thapati [Vedic sthapati, to sth+pati] 1. a builder, master carpenter M i.396=S iv.223; M iii.144, 2. officer, overseer S
v.348.
Thabbha is to be read for tthambha in para J iv.313.
Thambha [see etym. under thaddha; occasionally spelt thamba,
viz. A i.100; M i.324; PvA 186, 187] 1. a pillar, a post
Vin i.276; D i.50 (majjhima nissya); ii.85 (id.); Sn
214; Vv 782 (veuriya, of the pillars of a Vimna); Pv iii.31
(id.); DhA iv.203; VvA 188 (+tul gopnas); PvA 186.
2. (fig.) in all meanings of thaddha, applied to selfishness, obduracy, hypocrisy & deceit; viz. immobility, hardness, stupor, obstinacy (cp. Ger. "verstockt"): thambho ti
thaddha bhvo SnA 288, 333; th. thambhan thambhitta kakkhaliya phruliya ujucittat (an?) amudut Vbh
350. Often combd w. mna (=arrogance), freq. in set
sheyya th. srambho mno, etc. A i.100, 299=Nd2 under rga=Miln 289; cp. M i.15. A iii.430 (+mna); iv.350,
465 (+sheyya); Sn 245 (+mada), 326, 437 (as one of Mra's
combatants: makkho th. te ahamo); J i.202. 3. a clump
of grass M i.324; cp. thambhaka.
Tharu
Th
Thla (nt.) [from thala orig. a flat dish] a plate, dish, vessel D
i.74; J i.69; Miln 282. Kasa a gong Miln 62; Vism 283 (in
simile). See also thl.
Thlaka (nt.) [thla+ka] a small bowl, beaker Pv ii.18 (thlakassa
pnya), 119 (id.); Nett 79 (for holding oil: dpakapallika
Com.).
Thala1 (nt.) [Vedic sthala, to sth, orig. standing place; cp. Gr.
, ; Ags. steall (place); also P. thaila] dry
ground, viz. high, raised (opp. low) or solid, firm (opp. water)
S iv.179. As plateau opp. to ninna (low lying place) at Sn 30
(SnA 42=ukkla); Dh 98; It 66=S i.100 (megho thala ninna
ca preti); PvA 29 (=unnatapadesa). As dry land, terra firma
opp. to jala at Dh 34; J i.107, 222; Pv iv.121 ; PvA 260. As
firm, even ground or safe place at D i.234; Sn 946. Cp. J
iii.53; iv.142; Vism 185.
-gocara living on land J ii.159; -ja sprung from land (opp.
vrija Dh 34 or udakarha Vv 356 =water plant); referring
to plants A i.35; J i.51; Vv 356 (=yodhikdik VvA 162); Miln
281; -ha standing on firm ground A ii.241; -patha a road
by land (opp. jala by water) J i.121; iii.188.
Thvara2 (nt.) [from thavira=thera, old] old age PvA 149 (thvari jia in expl. of ther, otherwise jar jia. Should
we read thvira jia?).
Thvariya (nt.) [fr. thvara] immobility, firmness, security, solidity, an undisturbed state; always in janapada an appeased
country, as one of the blessings of the reign of a Cakkavattin.
Expld at DA i.250 as "janapadesu dhuvabhva thvarabhva v patto na sakk kenaci cletu." D i.88; ii.16, 146, 169;
S i.100; Sn p. 106; It 15.
Thirat (f.) [fr. thira] steadfastness, stability DhA iv.176 (thiratya thavar; so read for hira).
Th (f.) [Vedic str, on which see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under sero.
This form th is the normal correspondent to Vedic str; the
346
Th
Theyya
Thpa [Vedic stpa, crown of the head, top, gable; cp. Gr.
(handle, stalk). Oicel. stfr (stump), to *steud as in
tudati] a stupa or tope, a bell shaped pile of earth, a mound,
tumulus, cairn; dome, esp. a monument erected over the ashes
of an Arahant (otherwise called dhtugabbha=dgaba), or on
spots consecrated as scenes of his acts. In general as tomb:
Vin iv.308; J iii.156 (mattika)=Pv i.84 ; in special as tope: D
ii.142, 161, 164 sq.; A i.77; M ii.244; J v.39 (rajata); VvA 156
(Kassapassa bhagavato dvdasayojanika kanaka); Ud 8; Pv
iii.105 . Four people are thprah, worthy of a tope, viz. a
Tathgata, a Tathgatasvaka, a Paccekabuddha, a Cakkavattin D ii.143= A ii.245. At Dpvs vi.65 th. is to be corrected
into dhpa.
Thena [Vedic stena & styu, besides which tyu, the latter prob.
original, cp. Gr. to deprive; Oir. tid thief, to a root
meaning "conceal"] a thief adj. stealing: athenena not stealing, not stealthily, openly D i.4; DA i.72. f. athen A iii.38.
Cp. kumbhatthena Vin ii.256 (see k.).
Thenaka [=prec.] a thief J vi.115.
Theneti [Denom. fr. thena] to steal, to conceal J iv.114; DhA
i.80.
Theyya (nt.)
347
Theyya
Daka
Ther & Therik (f.) [see thera] 1. an old woman (cp. sthavirik
M Vastu iii.283) Pv ii.116 (=thvariji PvA 149). 2. a
female thera (see cpds.), as therik at Th 2, 1; Dpvs xviii. 11.
-gth hymns of the thers, following on the Theragth
(q. v.).
Theva (m.?) [see etym. under thna, with which cp. in meaning from same root Gr. & Lat. stria, both= drop.
Cp. also thika. Not with Trenckner (Notes p. 70) fr. stip]
a drop; stagnant water. In Vin. only in phrase: cvara...
na acchinne theve pakkamitabba Vin i.50, 53=ii.227, 230; J
vi.530 (madhu ttheva a drop of honey).
Thevati [fr. theva; orig. "to be congealed or thick"] to shine, glitter, shimmer (like a drop) J vi.529 (=virocati p. 530).
Thoka (adj.) [for etymology see under thna] little, small, short,
insignificant; nt. a trifle. A iv.10; J vi.366; PvA 12 (kla): nt.
thoka as adv.=a little J i.220; ii.103, 159; v.198; PvA 13,
38, 43. thoka thoka a little each time, gradually, little
by little Dh 121, 239; Miln 9; SnA 18; PvA 168.
Thokaka (adj.)=thoka; fem. thokik Dh 310.
Thoma [Vedic stoma a hymn of praise] praise.
Thomana (nt.) & thoman (f.) [see thavati] praising, praise, laudation J i.220 (=pasasa); Pug 53; PvA 27.
Thometi [denom. fr. thoma; cp. thavati] to praise, extol, celebrate (often with vaeti) D i.240; Sn 679, 1046; Nd2 291;
J vi.337; SnA 272 (=thutu); VvA 102; PvA 196. pp.
thomita J i.9.
D
Sn 234; kma J vi.498; Pv ii.138 ; ambu giving water, i. e.
a cloud Dvs v.32; amatamagga Sdhp 1; uraphala ib. 26;
masa Pgdp 49, etc.
-Da (adj.) [Suffix of d, see dadti] giving, bestowing, presenting, only -, as anna, bala, vaa, sukha, Sn 297; vara
348
Daka
Daa
prec.]
349
Daa
Dadti
350
Dadti
Danta
Danta
Dameti
water for rinsing the teeth Vin iii.51; iv.90, 233; J iv.69; Miln
15; SnA 272. The C. on Prj. ii.4, 17, (Vin iii.51) gives 2
kinds of dantapoa, viz. chinna & acchinna. -mla the root
of a tooth; the gums J v.172; -vakkalika a kind of ascetics
(peeling the bark of trees with their teeth?) DA i.271; -vaa
ivory coloured, ivory white Vv 4510 ; -valaya an iv.
bangle DhA i.226; -vikati a vessel of iv. D i.78; M ii.18; J
i.320; Vism 336. -vikhdana biting with teeth, i. e. chewing
Dhs 646, 740, 875; -vidasaka (either=vidassaka or to be
read ghasaka) showing one's teeth (or chattering?) A i.261
(of hasita, laughter); -sampatti splendour of teeth DhA i.390.
(cp. Sk. ptrabhta); Vism 196. -sahra collecting something substantial PvA 114 (should prob. be read sambhra).
-sambhra the collection of something substantial or worth
collecting,; a gift worth giving J iv.311; v.48; vi.427; DhA
i.321; ii.114.
Dabba2 (adj. n.) [Sk. dravya, of dru wood, see dru] treelike,
wooden; a tree, shrub, wood J i.108 (d. tiagaccha a jungle
of wood & grass); v.46 (d. gahana a thicket of shrubs &
trees); Vism 353 (tia).
Dabb (f.) [Sk. darv=*dru made of wood, see dru] a
(wooden) spoon, a ladle; (met.) the hood of a snake (dabbimatt, phaapuak DhA iv.132). Dh 64; gen. & instr,
davy J iii.218; Miln 365. In cpds. dabbi.
-kaa the tip of the ladle DhA i.371; -gha holding a
spoon, viz. for the purposes of offering M ii.157 (of a priest);
Pv ii.953 (=kaacchu ghika PvA 135); -mukha a kind of
bird J vi.540 (=a); -homa a spoonoblation D i.9.
Damana (adj. nt.) taming, subduing, mastery PvA 251 (arna d sla=arindama).
Damaya (adj.) [Sk. damya, see damma] to be tamed: duddamaya difficult to tame Th 1, 5 (better to be read damiya).
Damita [Sk. damyita=danta3 ; cp. Gr. ; Lat. domitus]
subdued, tamed J v.36; PvA 265.
Dameti
Davya
Dampati [Sk. dampati master of the house; dual: husband & wife;
cp. also patir dan, *dam, as in Gr. , & in
=dampati, short base of *dama house =Ved. dama,
Gr. , Lat. domus to *dem (as also in dameti to domesticate) to build, cp. Gr. & ; Goth. timrjan;
Ohg. zimbar; E. timber] master of the house, householder, see
tudampati & cp. gahapati.
Dalati [Sk. dalati, del to split off, tear; Gr. , Lat. dolare
& delere. See dala & dara] to burst, split, break. Caus.
dleti Sn 29 (dalayitv=chinditv SnA 40); Miln 398. Pass.
dyati (Sk. dryate) see uddyati.
Dalidda & Daidda (adj. n.) [Sk. daridra, to daridrti, Intens.
to drti run (see dava), in meaning cp. addhika wayfarer=poor]
vagrant, strolling, poor, needy, wretched; a vagabond, beggar
(l:) Vin ii.159; S i.96 (opp. aha); A ii.57, 203; iii.351;
iv.219; v.43; Pug 51; VvA 299 (:) M ii.73; S v.100, 384, 404;
Vv201 (=duggata VvA 101); DA i.298; PvA 227; Sdhp 89,
528.
Damma (adj.) [Sk. damya, grd. of dmyati see dameti & cp.
damaya (damiya)] to be tamed or restrained; esp. with ref. to
a young bullock M i.225 (balagv dammagv the bulls &
the young steers); It 80; also of other animals: assadamma
srathi a horse trainer A ii.112; & fig. of unconverted men
likened to refractory bullocks in phrase purisa damma
srathi (Ep. of the Buddha) "the trainer of the human steer"
D i.62 (misprint dhamma)=ii.93=iii.5; M ii.38; A ii.112; Vv
1713 (nara vara d. srathi cp. VvA 86.
Dava1 [Sk. dava, to dunoti (q. v.); cp. Gr. fire brand] fire,
heat J iii.260. See also dva & dya.
-ha (=Sk. davgni) conflagration of a forest, a jungle
fire Vin ii.138; M i.306; J i.641; Cp. iii.93 ; Miln 189; Vism
36.
Dar (f.) [Sk. dar to dti to cleave, split, tear, rend, caus. darayati *der=Gr. to skin, , skin); Lith. dir (id.)
Goth. ga taran=Ags. teran (tear) =Ohg. zeran (Ger. zerren). To this the variant (r:l) *del in dalati, dala, etc. See also
daddara, daddu, dara, avadyati, dia, uddyati, purindada
(=pura dara)] a cleavage, cleft; a hole, cave, cavern J i.18
(v. 106), 462 (msik mouse hole); ii.418 (=maiguh);
SnA 500 (=padara).
-cara a cave dweller (of a monkey) J v.70; -mukha entrance of a cave Vism 110. -saya a lair in a cleft Cp. iii.71 .
Dava2 [Sk. drava to dravati to run, flow, etc. *dreu besides *dr
(see dalidda) & *dram (=Gr. ); cp. abhiddavati, also
dabba=dravya] running, course, flight; quickness, sporting,
exercise, play Vin ii.13; M i.273; iii.2; A i.114; ii.40, 145;
iv.167; Pug 21, 25. dav (abl.) in sport, in fun Vin ii.101;
davya (dat.) id. Nd2 540; Miln 367; Dhs 1347, cp. DhsA
402. dava karoti to sport, to play J ii.359, 363.
-atthya in joke, for fun Vin ii.113; -kamyat fondness
for joking, Vin iv.11, 354; M i.565.
Davya [for *dravya]=dabba1 , in sarra fitness of body, a beauti-
Dala (nt.) [Sk. dala, *del (var. of *der, see dara) in dalati (q. v.)
353
Davya
*Dassati
(see lokadhtu).
Dasa2 () [Sk. da; cp. dassa] seeing, to be seen, to be perceived or understood D i.18 (aadatthu sureseeing, all
perceiving=sabba passm ti attho DA i.111); Sn 653 (paiccasamuppda), 733 (sammad); J i.506 (yugamatta; v. l.
dassa). duddasa difficult to be seen or understood D i.12
(dhamm gambhr d.; see gambhra); M i.167, 487; Sn 938;
Dh 252; also as sududdasa Dh 36.
Dasaka (nt.) 1. a decad, decade, a decennial J iv.397; DhsA 316.
khi the decad of play Vism 619; cakkhu etc. sense
decads Vism. 553; Comp. 164, 250; kya, Vism. 588.
Dasana [Sk. daana to asati] a tooth Dvs v.3 (d.- dhtu, the
tooth relic of the Buddha).
Das (f.) & dasa (nt.) [Sk. da] unwoven thread of a web of
cloth, fringe, edge or border of a garment D i.7 (dgha long
fringed, of vatthni); J v.187; DhA i.180; iv.106 (dasni).
sadasa (nt.) a kind of seat, a rug (lit. with a fringe) Vin
iv.171 (=nisdana); opp. adasaka (adj.) without a fringe or
border Vin ii.301=307 (nisdana). -anta edge of the border
of a garment J i.467; DhA i.180 sq., 391.
Dasika1 (adj.) () [Sk. dika, cp. dassin] to be seen, to behold,
being of appearance, only in dud or frightful app., fierce, ugly
Si.94 & id. p. (q. v. under okoimaka); J i.504 (kodha, anger);
PvA 24, 90 (of Petas). Note. The spelling is sometimes
dassika: A ii.85; Pug 51; PvA 90.
Dasika2 (adj.) [fr. das] belonging to a fringe, in dasika -sutta
an unwoven or loose thread Vin iii.241; DhA iv.206 (mattam
pi not even a thread, i. e. nothing at all, cp. Lat. nihlum=ne
flum not a thread=nothing). See also dasaka under das.
Dassa () [Sk. dara; cp. dasa2 ] to see or to be seen, perceiving, perceived Sn 1134 (appa of small sight, not seeing
far, knowing little=paritta dassa thoka dassa Nd2 69).
Cp. akkha a judge Miln 114. -su easily perceived (opp.
duddasa) Dh 252.
*Dassati1 [Sk. *dar in dadara pref. to d; caus. dara-yati.
Cp. Gr. to see; Oir. derc eye; Ags. torht; Goth.
ga tarhjan to make conspicuous. The regular Pli Pres. is
dakkhiti (younger dakkhati), a new formation from the aor.
addakkhi=Sk. adrkt. The Sk. Fut. draksyati would correspond formally to dakkhati, but the older dakkhiti points
toward derivation from addakkhi. This new Pres. takes the
function of the Fut.; whereas the Caus. dasseti implies a hypothetical Pres. *dassati. On dakkhati, etc. see also Kuhn,
Beitr. p. 116; Trenckner, Notes pp. 57, 61; Pischel, Prk. Gr.
554] to see, to perceive.
1. (pres.) base dakkh [Sk. drak]: pres. (a) dakkhati Nd2
428 (=passati), 1st dakkhmi ibid. (=passmi), 2nd dakkhasi
S i.116; Pv ii.113 (v. l. BB adakkhi); imper. dakkha Nd2 428
(=passa). (b) dakkhiti Sn 909 (v. l. BB dakkhati), 3rd pl.
dakkhinti Vin i.16Sn p. 15 (v. l. BB dakkhanti); D i.46.
aor. addakkhi (Sk. adrakt) Vin ii.195; S i.117; Sn 208 (=addasa SnA 257), 841, 1131; It 47; J iii.189; & dakkhi It 47; 1st
sg. addakkhi Sn 938. Spelling also adakkhi (v. l. BB at Pv
ii.113 ) & adakkhi (Nd2 423). inf. dakkhitu Vin i.179.
Caus. p.p. dakkhpita (shown, exhibited) Miln 119.
Der. dakkhin (q. v.).
354
*Dassati
Dassvin
2. (pret.) base dass (Sk. dar & dra): aor. (a) addasa
(Sk. adarat) Sn 358, 679, 1016; J i.222; iv.2; Pv ii.323 (m
addasa=addakkhi PvA 88); DhA i.26; PvA 73, & (older, cp.
agam) addas Vin ii.192, 195; D i.112; ii.16; Sn 409 (v. l.
BB addasa), 910 (id.); Miln 24, 1st sg. addasa S i.101; Nd2
423 & addasa Sn 837 (=adakkhi Nd1 185), 1st pl. addasma Sn 31, 178, 459, 3rd pl. (m) addasu Pv ii.76 (=m
passisu PvA 102). (b) addassi, 1st sg. addassi Sn
937, 1145; Vv 3552 (v. l. addasmi), 3rd pl. addassu Vin
ii.195; D ii.16; M i.153. (c) shortened forms of aor. are:
adda Th 1, 986; add J vi.125, 126. inf. dahu Sn 685
(dahukma); J i.290; Pv iv.13 (=passitu PvA 219); PvA 48,
79; VvA 75. ger. dahu (=Sk. dv) Sn 424 (in phrase
nekkhamma dahu khemato)=1098; 681. Expl. at Nd2 292
with expl. of disv=passitv, etc. grd. dahabba (to be regarded as) D ii.154; PvA 8, 9, 10, etc., Vism 464; & dassanya
(see sep.). Also in Caus. (see below) & in dahar (q. v.).
3. (med. pass.) base diss (Sk. d): pres. pass. dissati
(to be seen, to appear) Vin i.16; Sn 194, 441, 688 (dissare),
956; J i.138; Dh 304; Pv i.84 ; PvA 61 (dissasi you look, intrs.);
ppr. dissamna (visible) PvA 71, 6 (rpa), 162 (id.); VvA 78
(kya); Mhvs. vii.35, & der. dissamnatta (nt.) (visibility)
PvA 103. ger. disv Sn 48, 409, 687 sq. It 76; PvA 67,
68, etc., & disvna Vin i.15; ii.195; Sn 299, 415, 1017; Pv
ii.87 , etc., also a ger. form dih, q. v. under adih. pp.
diha (q. v.).
4. Caus. (of base 2) dasseti (Sk. darayati), aor. dassesi &
(exceptional) dassayi, only in dassayi tuma showed himself
at Pv iii.24 (=attna uddisayi PvA 181) & iii.216 (=attna
dassayi dassesi pkao ahosi PvA 185). 3rd pl. dassesu; ger.
dassetv; inf. dassetu to point out, exhibit, explain, intimate Dh 83; J i.84, 200, 263, 266; ii.128, 159; iii.53, 82; PvA
4, 8, 16 (ovda d. give advice), 24, 45, 73 etc. to point
to (acc.) PvA 151 (sunakha), 257 (draka). to make
manifest, to make appear, to show or prove oneself; also intr.
to appear J ii.154 (dubbalo viya hutv attna dassesi: appeared weak); vi.116; Pv iii.23 (=sammukhbhva gacchanti
PvA 181); PvA 13 (mitto viya attna dassetv: acting like a
friend), Miln 271. Esp. in phrase attna dasseti to come into
appearance (of Petas): PvA 32, 47, 68, 79, etc. (cp. above
dassayi). pp. dassita.
355
Dassvin
Dna
464, 483.
Dh (f.) [Sk. dar to asati (q. v.), cp. also daha] a large
tooth, fang, tusk; as adj. () having tusks or fangs D ii.18
(susukkha); J i.505 (uddhaa dho viya sappo); iv.245
(nikkhanta); DhA i.215; PvA 152 (kahina); Sdhp 286.
-vudha [Sk. daryudha] using a tusk as his weapon
J v.172; -danta a canine tooth KhA 44; -balin one whose
strength lies in his teeth (of a lion) Sn 72.
Dtta (nt.) [Sk. dtra, to d, Sk. dti, dyati to cut, divide, deal out;
cp. Gr. , & see dna, dpeti, dyati] sickle,
scythe Miln 33.
Dassu [Sk. dasyu, cp. dsa] enemy, foe; robber, in dassu- khla
robber plague D i.135, 136 (=corakhla DA i.296).
Dna
Dyda
Vin i.236; D i.53 (+dama & sayama; cp. It 15; PvA 276);
ii.356 sq. (sakkacca & a); A iv.392 sq. (id.); D iii.147
sq., 190 sq., 232; S i.98 (dna dtabba yattha citta pasdati); A i.91=It 98 (misa and dhamma, material & spiritual
gifts); A i.161; iii.41 (dne nisas); iv.60; 237 sq. (mahapphala), 392 sq. (ssa vipka); v.269 (petna upakappati); J
i.8 (aggaa); ii.112 (dinna), iii.52 (id.); Sn 263, 713 (appa
dna samaabrhmana) PvA 54 (gantuka gift for the
newcomer); Sdhp 211 213. adna withholding a gift,
neglect of liberality, stinginess Pv ii.945 ; Miln 279; PvA 25;
cp. sla under cpds.: atidna excessive almsgiving Pv ii.945
(cp. PvA 129); Miln 277.
-agga [Sk. dngara, cp. bhattagga, salkagga; see
Trenckner, Notes p. 56] a house where alms or donations
are given, a store house of gifts, fig. a source or giver of
gifts, a horn of plenty J vi.487; DhA i.152, 189; Miln 2; PvA
121, 124, 127, 141. A possible connection w. agga=gra is
suggested by combn dnni mahdnni aggani A iv.246;
-dhikra supervision or charge of alms distributing. PvA
124 (cp. Pv ii.927 ); -nisasa praise of generosity PvA 9;
cp. A iii.41; -upakaraa means or materials for a gift PvA
105; -upapatti (read uppatti at D iii.258) an object suitable for gifts, of which 8 or 10 are mentioned (see above c)
A iv.239=D iii.258; -kath talk or conversation about (the
merit & demerit of) almsgiving, one of the anupubbi kath
Vin i.15, 18; -dhamma the duty or meritorious act of bestowing gifts of mercy (cp. deyyadhamma) PvA 9; -pati "lord
of alms," master in liberality, a liberal donor (def. by Bdhgh
as: ya dna deti tassa pati hutv deti na dso na sahyo
DA i.298) D i.137 (+saddho & dyako, as one of the qualifications of a good king); A iii.39; iv.79 sq. (+saddho); Sn
487; Pv i.114 (+amaccharin); J i.199; Miln 279 sq.; Sdhp 275,
303; -pua the religious merit of almsgiving or liberality
(see above a) PvA 73; -phala the fruit of munificence (as accruing to the donor) A iii.39; iv.79; Pv ii.83 ( hoti paramhi
loke: is rewarded in the life to come, cp. It 19); PvA 8 (cp.
Pv i.1); -maya consisting in giving alms or being liberal (see
above a) D iii.218 (puakiriya vatthu); Vbh 135 (kusala
cetan), 325 (paa); PvA 8 (pua), 60 (id.), 9 (kusala
kamma), 51, etc.; -vaa alms J vi.333; -vatthu that which
constitutes a meritorious gift; almsgiving, beneficence, offering, donation D iii.258= A iv.236; PvA 20 (=annapndika
dasavidha dtabbavatthu PvA 7); -veyyvaika services rendered at the distribution of gifts DhA iii.19; -savibhga
liberal spending of alms D iii.145, 169; A i.150, 226; iii.53,
313; v.331; It 19; Vism 306; freq. with rata fond of giving
alms S v.351, 392; A iv.6 (vigatamalamaccherena cetas), 266
(id.); -sal a hall, built for the distribution of alms & donations
to the bhikkhus & wanderers J i.231, 262; iv.402 (six); v.383
(id.); -sla liberal disposition PvA 89; usually as adna-sla
(adj.) of miserly character, neglecting the duty of giving alms
Sn 244; Pv ii.83 ( na saddahati dnaphala hoti paramhi
loke); PvA 45 (=adyaka), 59 (+maccharin), 68 (id.).
Dpeti1 [Sk. dpayati, dap fr. d (see dadti & dayati) =deal out,
spend, etc., cp. Gr. , (expenditure),
(meal); Lat. daps (id.), damnum (expense fr. *dapnom). See
also dtta & dna] to induce somebody to give, to order to be
given, to deal out, send, grant, dedicate J vi.485; PvA 46; aor.
dpesi J iv.138; DhA i.226, 393 (sent); PvA 5 (id.), 31; fut.
dpessati J ii.3; DhA 371. Cp. ava.
Dpeti2 [Sk. drvayati & drapayati, Caus. to dru, see davati] to
cause to run J ii.404.
Dma (nt.) [Sk. dman to dyati to bind (Gr. ), *d, as in Gr.
(rope), (diadem), (sandal)] a bond,
fetter, rope; chain, wreath, garland S iv.163 (read dmena for
damena), 282, (id.); A iii.393 (dmena baddho); Sn 28 (=vacchakna bandhanatthya kat ganthit nandhipasayutt rajjubandhanavises); Vism 108. Usually , viz. anoja
puppha J i.9; vi.227; olambaka VvA 32; kusuma J iii.394;
gandha J i.178; VvA 173, 198; puppha J i.397; VvA 198;
ml J ii.104; rajata J i.50; iii.184; iv.91; rattapuppha J
iii.30; sumana J iv.455.
Dya1 [Sk. dva, conflagration of a forest; wood=easily inflammable substance; to dunoti (to burn) caus. dvayati, cp.
Gr. (to burn) & P. dava1 ] wood; jungle, forest; a grove
Vin i.10 (miga), 15, 350; ii.138; S ii.152 (tia); iv.189
(bahukaaka d.=jungle); A v.337 (tia); J iii.274; vi.278.
See also dva.
-pla a grove keeper Vin i.350; M i.205.
Dya2 [Sk. dya, to dadti, etc.] a gift, donation; share, fee D
i.87(in phrase rjadya brahmadeyya, a king's grant, cp. rjadattiya); J iv.138; v.363; vi.346. Cp. dyda & brahmadeyya.
Dyaka [Sk. dyaka, d as in dadti & dna] (adj.) giving, bestowing, distributing, providing (usually ); (n.) a donor,
benefactor; a munificent person M i.236 sq.; A i.26, 161; ii.64,
80; iii.32, 336; iv.81; Sn p. 87; It 19 (ito cut manussatt sagga gacchanti dyak); J v.129 (kaa); Pv i.11 sq.; 12 ; 42 ;
55 ; DA i.298; PvA 113 (=dada); Miln 258 (na dakkhi);
Sdhp 276. f. dyik Vin ii.216 (bhikkh), 289 (khrassa).
adyaka a stingy person, one who neglects almsgiving (cp.
adnasla) Pv i.119 ; f. ik Pv i.93 .
Dyajja (nt.) [Sk. dydya; see dyda] inheritance Vin i.82; D
iii.189; A iii.43; J i.91; Vism 43 sq.; dowry J iii.8. (adj.)
one who inherits Vin iii.66 (pituno of the father).
-upasampad, lit. the Upasampad by way of inh., a
particular form of ordination conferred on Sumana & Sopka,
both novices seven yrs. old DhA iv.137.
Dyati [Sk. dti & dyti (d) to cut, divide, etc.; cp. dayati, dtta,
dna] to cut, mow, reap, caus. dypeti to cause to be cut or
mowed DhA iii.285.
Dyana (nt.) [see dayati] cutting; agga the first of what has been
cut (on fields) DhA i.98; attha for the purpose of mowing
DhA iii.285.
Dyda [Sk.
dyda=dya+ da receiving the (son's)
portion, same formation on ground of same idea as Lat.
heres=*ghero+ do receiver of what is left: see Brugmann,
Dni (adv.) [shortened form for idni, q. v.] now, Vin i.180;
ii.154; S i.200, 202; ii.123; iv.202; J ii.246; Miln 11, etc.
Dpana: see vo.
357
Dyda
Dsiy
Dsaka=dsa in putta a slave, of the sons of the slaves, mentioned as one of the sipp' yatanas at D i.51 (expl. by Bdhgh as balavasineh gharadsa yodh DA i.157).
sadsaka with slaves, followed by slaves Vv 324 . f. dsik
a female slave (=ds) M i.126; J vi.554.
Dsabyat (f.)=dsavya Sdhp 498.
Dsavya & Dsabya (nt.) [cp. Sk. dsya] the condition of a
slave, slavery, serfdom D i.73; M i.275 (b); J i.226; DA i.168
(b), 213; DhA iii.35; PvA 112, 152.
Dsitta (nt.) [Sk. dstva] the status of a (female) slave Miln 158.
Dsima a species of tree J vi.536.
358
Dsiy
Dihi
Ds (f.) [Sk. ds, cp. dsa. Nom. pl. dasso for dsiyo J iv.53;
in cpds. dsi] a female servant, a handmaiden, a slave girl
Vin i.217, 269, 291; ii.10 (kula), 78= iii.161; M i.125; ii.62
(ti); Pv ii.321 (ghara); PvA 46, 61, 65. Cp. kumbha.
-gaa a troop of slave girls J ii.127; -ds (pl.) maid& man servants DhA i.187; freq. to cpd. d d paiggahaa slave trading D i.5(cp. DA i.78); -puttâle; the
son of a slave, an abusive term (gharadsiy va putto Dh i.257;
cp. Sk. dssuta) D i.93 (vda); -bhoga the possessions of a
slave Vin iii.136.
Dha see ha.
Di secondary base of numeral "2," contracted fr. dvi: see under
dvi B i.4.
Dikkhita [Sk. dkita "having commenced the preparatory rites
for sacrifice"] initiated, consecrated, cira initiated long since
S i.226=J v.138, 139 (where dakkhita, q. v.; Com. cira
pabbjita).
Digucch (f.)
(asuci).
[=jigucch; Sk.
Dihi (f.) [Sk. di; cp. dassana] view, belief, dogma, theory,
speculation, esp. false theory, groundless or unfounded opinion. (a) The latter is rejected by the Buddha as ppa (A
iv.172) and ppik d. (opp. bhaddik: A v.212 sq.; It 26):
Vin i.98, 323; Dh 164; Pv iv.354 ; whereas the right, the true,
the best doctrine is as samm d. the first condition to be complied with by anyone entering the Path. As such the samm
d. is opposed to micch d. wrong views or heresy (see b).
Equivalent with micch d. is kudihi (late) Dvs ii.58.
(b) Characterized more especially as: (a) samm dihi right
doctrine, right philosophy Vin i.10; S ii.17; v.11, 14, 30 sq.,
458 sq., M i.315; ii.12, 29, 87; iii.72; Nd2 485; Vbh 104 sq.
See magga. ujuk d. S v.143, 165; ujugat d. M i.46 sq.
() micch d. wrong theory, false doctrine S i.145; ii.153
(caused by avijj); M iii.71; Dh 167, 316; Nd2 271iiib ; Vbh
361, 389. The foll. theories are to be considered as varieties
of micch d., viz. (in limited enumn ) akiriyavda S iii.208;
iv.349; aa aena S iii.211; antagghik A i.154; ii.240;
iii.130; antnantik D i.22 sq. S iii.214, 258 sq.; assda A
iii.447; ahetukavd S iii.210; ucchedavd D i.34; S ii.20;
iii.99; 110 sq.; bhava S iii.93; M i.65; A i.83; sakkya A
iii.438; v.144; Sn 231 (cp. KhA 188); Nd2 271iiib (20 fold, as
dihilepa); sassatavd D i.13; S ii.20; iii.98, 213 sq., 258 sq.
(c) Various theories & doctrines are mentioned & discussed
359
Dihi
Dinna
at: Vin i.115; S i.133; ii.61 sq., 75 sq., 222; iii.215 sq., 258 sq.;
iv.286; v.448 (=D i.31); D iii.13 sq., 45, 246, 267; M i.40; A
i.32; ii.252 sq.; iii.132, 289, 349; Th 2, 184; Ps i.135 sq.; Pug
22; Dhs 392, 1003 (cp. Dhs. trsl. pp. 257 sq., 293, 325); Vbh
145, 245, 341, 393 sq.; Sdhp 13, 333. (d) Miscellaneous:
4 dihiyo at Vbh 376; also at Vism 511 (sakkya, uccheda,
sassata, akiriya); 5 Vbh 378; 6 at M i.8; Vbh 382; 7 at Vbh
383; 20 see under sakkya; 62 under dihigata. In series
dihi khanti ruci laddhi characterizing "dihadhamma" at
Nd2 299 & passim. Dihiy sutiy ena in def. of a theory
of cognition at Nd2 300 as complementing tah: see tah
B 3. Coupled with vc & citta in formula (ta) vca appahya citta appahya dihi appainissajjitv... (nikkhitto
eva niraye) at S iv.319= D iii.13, 15; combd with (& opposed
to) sla (as ppaka & bhaddaka) at It 26, 27. dihi sevati
to hold a view M i.323; bhindati to give up a view J i.273;
Dvs ii.58.
-nugati a sign of speculation Vin ii.108; S ii.203; Pug
33. -nusaya inclination to speculation D iii.254, 282; S
v.60; A iv.9; -sava the intoxicant of speculation, the 3rd
of four sav, viz. kma, bhava, d., avijj Vin iii.5; Nd2
134; Dhs 1099, 1448; Vbh 373; cp. ogha; -upadn taking up or adhering to false doctrines, the 2nd of the four updnni or attachments, viz. kma, d., slabbata, attavda
D iii.230; Dhs 1215, 1536; -ogha the flood of false doctrine,
in set of four ogha's as under sava D iii.230, 276; Nd2 178;
-kantra the wilderness of groundless speculation Dhs 381,
1003, 1099, etc.; see gata; -gahi the web or tangle of sophisticism VvA 297; cp. sangha; -gata (nt.) "resorting
to views," theory, groundless opinion, false doctrine, often
followed by series of characterizing epithets: d. gahana,
kantra, viska, vipphandita, saojana, e. g. M i.8; Nd2
271iiib . Of these sophistical speculations 2 are mentioned at
It 43, Ps i.129; 6 at Ps i.130; 62 (the usual number, expressing "great and small" sets, cp. dvi A ii.) at D i.12 39 (in
detail); S iv.286; Ps i.130; Nd2 271iiib ; Nett 96, 112, 160.
Vin i.49; D i.162, 224, 226; S i.135, 142; ii.230; iii.109, 258
sq. (anekavihitni); iv.286 (id.); M i.8, 176, 256 sq. (ppaka),
326 (id.), 426 sq.; A iv.68; v.72 sq., 194 (ppaka); Sn 649,
834, 913; Pug 15; Dhs 277, 339, 392, 505; Vism 454. adj.
gatika adhering to (false) doctrine Dpvs vi.25; -gahana the
thicket of speculation Dhs 381, 1003; see gata; -jla the net
of sophistry D i.46; DA i.129; -hna a tenet of speculative
philosophy D i.16; M i.136; A v.198; Ps i.138 (eight); Miln
332; DA i.107; -nijjhnakkhanti forbearance with wrong
views S ii.115; iv.139; A i.189 sq.; ii.191; Nd2 151; -nipta
a glance VvA 279; -nissaya the foundation of speculation
M i.137; D ii.137 sq.; -pakkha the side or party of sophists
Nett 53, 88, 160; -pailbha the attainment of speculation
M iii.46; -paivedha=prec. D iii.253; -patta one who has
formed (a right or wrong) view D iii.105, 254; M i.439; A
i.74; 118, iv.10; v.23; -parmasa perversion by false doctrine Dhs 1498; -maala the circle of speculative dogmatics
DhsA 109; -vipatti failure in theory, the 3rd of the four vipattiyo viz. sla, cra, d., jva; opp. sampad Vin v.98; D
iii.213; A i.95, 268; Pug 21; Dhs 1362; Vbh 361; -vipallsa
contortion of views A ii.52; -visayoga disconnection with
false doctrine D iii.230, 276; -visuddhi beauty of right theory
A i.95; M i.147 sq.; D iii.214, 288; -viska (nt.) the dis-
360
Dinna
Disati
munificent D iii.191.
one day long A iii.304= iv.317; J i.279; ii.2; DhA iii.173 (ta
d. that day); eka one day J i.58; iii.26; PvA 33, 67. gen.
divasassa (day) by day S ii.95 (rattiy ca d. ca); J v.162; DA
i.133. instr. divas day by day J iv.310; divasena (eka)
on the same day J i.59; sudivasena on a lucky day J iv.210.
loc. divase on a day: eka J iii.391; jta on his birth day
J iii.391; iv.138; dutiya the next day PvA 12, 13, 17, 31, 80
etc.; puna id. J i.278; PvA 19, 38; sattame d. on the 7th day
Sn 983; Miln 15; PvA 6; ussava on the festive d. VvA 109;
apara on another day PvA 81. Also repeated divase divase
day after day, every day J i.87; PvA 3. abl. divasato from
the day () J i.50; DA i.140.
-kara the "day maker," i. e. the sun (cp. divkara) VvA
169, 271; -bhga the day part (opp. ratti the night part),
day time Miln 18 (ena); PvA 152 (), 206 (e=div);
-santatta heated the livelong day S i.169; M i.453; A iv.70,
cp. Vin i.225; Miln 325; cp. diva
Div (adv.) [Ved. div, cp. diva] by day S i.183; M i.125; Dh 387;
DA i.251; PvA 43, 142, 206 (=divasa bhge). Often combd
& contrasted with ratti (or ratto) by night; e. g. divratti
by day & by night S i.47; div c' eva ratti ca D ii.20; rattim
pi div pi J ii.133; div ca ratto ca S i.33; Sn 223; Dh 296;
Vv 314 ; VvA 128. divtara (compar. adv.) later on in
the day M i.125; J iii.48, 498. atidiv too late S i.200; A
iii.117.
-kara (=diva kara) the day maker, the sun ThA 70
(=Ap. v.16); PvA 155; -divassa (adv.) early in the day, at
sunrise, at an early hour Vin ii.190; S i.89, 91, 97; A v.185;
M ii.100, 112; J ii.1; vi.31; DhA ii.8; VvA 239, 242; -vihra
the day rest, i. e. rest during the heat of the day Vin i.28, S
i.129, 132, 146, 193=Th 1, 1241; Sn 679; -sa consciousness by day, daily c. D iii.223=A ii.45; -seyy=vihra D
i.112.
Divi an abstraction fr. divya constructed for etym. expln of
dibba as divi-bhava (bhva) of divine existence or character,
a divine being, in "divi bhavni divyni ettha atth ti divy"
SnA 219; "divi bhavatt dibb ti" KhA 227; "divibhva
devattabhvapariypanno ti dibbo" PvA 14.
Dibbati [Sk. dvyati, pp. dyta see jta] to sport, to amuse oneself
VvA 18 (in expl. of dev); to play at dice M ii.106 (akkhehi).
Dirasau (adj.) [Sk. dara saja? See Kern, Toev. p. 118]
one who has little common sense J vi.206, 207, 213, 214.
Com. expls wrongly on p. 209 with "one who possesses two
tongues" (of Agni), but has equivalent nippaa on p. 217
(text 214: appapaa+).
Disa [Sk. dviant & dvia (); dvei & dviati to hate; cp. Gr.
(corynthic v, hom. v) fearful; Lat. drus=E.
dire] an enemy Dh 42, 162; J iii.357; iv.217; v.453; Th i.874
6; cp. Pss. Breth., 323, n. i.
Disat1 (f.) [Sk. diat, see dis] direction, quarter, region, part
of the world J iv.359; Pv ii.921 (ki disata gato "where in
the world has he gone?"); Vv ii.32 (sdisat the circle of the 6
directions, cp. VvA 102).
Disat2 (f.) [Sk. *dviat, see disa] state of being an enemy, a host
of enemies J iv.295 (=disasamha, v. l. as gloss: verasamoha).
361
Disati
Dpa
Dis (f.) [Ved. di & di, to diati "pointing out," point; cp.
Gr. =di] point of the compass, region, quarter, direction,
bearings. The 4 principal points usualy enumd are puratthim
(E) pacchim (W) dakkhi (S) uttar (N), in changing order. Thus at S i.101, 145; ii.103; iii.84; iv.185, 296; Nd2
302; Pv ii.126 (caturo d.); PvA 52 (catsu dissu nirayo cathi
dvrehi yutto), and passim. To these are often added the two
locations "above & below" as uparim & hehim dis (also
as uddha adho S iii.124 e. g.; also called paidis D iii.176),
making in all 6 directions: D iii.188 sq. As a rule, however,
the circle is completed by the 4 anudis (intermediate points;
sometimes as vidis: S i.224; iii.239; D iii.176 etc.), making a
round of 10 (dasa dis) to denote completeness, wide range &
all pervading comprehensiveness of states, activities or other
happening: Sn 719, 1122 (dis catasso vidis catasso uddha
adho: dasa dis imyo); Th 2, 487; Ps ii.131; Nd2 239 (see
also ctuddisa in this sense); Pv i.111 ; ii.110 ; Vism 408. sabb
(all) is often substituted for 10: S i.75; D ii.15; Pv i.21 ; VvA
184; PvA 71. anudis (sg.) is often used collectively for
the 4 points in the sense of "in between," so that the circle always implies the 10 points. Thus at S i.122; iii.124. In other
combinations as 6 abbreviated for 10; four dis plus uddha &
anudisa at D i.222=A iii.368; four d.+uddha adho & anudisa at S i.122; iii.124; A iv.167. In phrase "mettsahagatena
cetas eka disa pharitv viharati" (etc. up to 4th) the allcomprehending range of universal goodwill is further denoted
by uddha adho tiriya etc., e. g. D i.250; Vbh 272; see
mett. As a set of 4 or 8 dis is also used allegorically ("set,
circle") for var. combinations, viz. the 8 states of jhna at M
iii.222; the 4 satipahn etc. at Nett 121; the 4 hr etc. at
Nett 117. See also in other applications Vin i.50 (in meaning of "foreign country"); ii.217; S i.33 (abhay), 234 (puthu);
iii.106; v.216; D iii.197 sq.; It 103; Th 1, 874; Vv 416 (dissu
vissut). disa kurute to run away J v.340. diso disa
(often spelt disodisa) in all directions (lit. from region to region) D iii.200; J iii.491; Th 1, 615; Bu ii.50; Pv iii.16 ; Miln
398. But at Dh 42 to disa (enemy), cp. DhA i.324=coro cora.
See also J.P.T.S. 1884, 82 on abl. diso=diatah. Cp. vidis.
-kka a compass crow, i. e. a crow kept on board
ship in order to search for land (cp. Fick, Soc. Gl. p. 173; E.
Hardy, Buddha p. 18) J iii.126, 267; -kusala one who knows
the directions Vin ii.217; -cakkhuka "seeing" (i. e. wise)
in all directions J iii.344; -ha "sky glow," unusual redness of the horizon as if on fire, polar light (?) or zodiacal
light (?) D i.10; J i.374: vi.476; Miln 178; DA i.95; cp. BSk.
diodha Av ii.198; -pati (disampati) a king S i.86; J vi.45;
-pmokkha world famed J i.166; -bhga [Sk. digbhga]
direction, quarter Vin ii.217; -mha [Sk. dimha] one who
has lost his bearings Dpvs ix.15; -vsika living in a foreign
country DhA iii.176. -vsin=vsika DhA iv.27.
Dpa
Dukkha
Du3 () (adj. suff.) [Sk. druha, druh, see duhana & duhitika] hurting, injuring, acting perfidiously, betraying, only in
mitta deceiving one's friends S i.225; Sn 244 expl. as mitta
dbhaka SnA 287, v. l. B mittadussaka; cp. mitta dubbhika
& mitta dubbhin.
460.
Dpa3 [cp. Sk. dvpa tiger's skin] a car covered with a panther's
skin J i.259; v.259=vi.48.
Dpaka1 (=dpa1 ) (a) f. dpik a lamp, in daa a torch DhA
i.220, 399, (b) () an image of, having the appearance
of, sham etc.; in -kakkara a decoy partridge J ii.161; -tittira
same J iii.358; -pakkhin a decoy bird J v.376; -miga a d.
antelope J v.376.
Duka (nt.) [see dvi B ii] a dyad DhsA 36, 343, 347, 406; Vism 11
sq. & in titles of books "in pairs, on pairs," e. g. Dukapahna;
or chapters, e. g. J ii.1 (nipta).
Dukla [Sk. dukla] a certain (jute?) plant; (nt.) [cp. Sk.
dukla woven silk] very fine cloth, made of the fibre of the
d. plant S iii.145; A iv.393; J ii.21; iv.219; v.400; vi.72; Vism
257, 262; VvA 165; DA i.140; Dvs v. 27.
363
Dukkha
Dukkha
d. at D ii.306 (cp. the distinction between arra & mnasa dukkha in Snkhya philosophy) M i.302; S v.209 (in
def. of dukkhindriya); A ii.143 (sarrik vedan dukkh); Nett
12 (duvidha d.: kyika=dukkha; cetasika= domanassa); Vism 165 (twofold), 496 (dukkh aa na bdhaka),
499 (seven divisions), 503 (kyika); SnA 119 (sukha v
dukkha v Sn 67=kyika ststa). Bdhgh. usually
paraphrases d. with vaadukkha, e. g. at SnA 44, 212,
377, 505. (b) Thus to be understood as physical pain in
combn dukkha+ domanassa "pain & grief," where d. can
also be taken as the gen. term & dom as specification, e.
g. in cetasika dukkha domanassa paisavedeti A i.157,
216; iv.406; S ii.69; rgajan d dom paisavedeti A
ii.149; kmpasahita d dom A iii.207; d dom
paisavediyati S iv.343. Also as cpd. dukkhadomanassna
atthangamya A iii.326, & freq. in formula soka parideva
d domanass upys (grief & sorrow, afflictions
of pain & misery, i. e. all kinds of misery) D i.36 (arising
fr. km); M ii.64; A v.216 sq.; It 89 etc. (see above B I.
4). Cp. also the combn dukkh dummano "miserable and dejected" S ii.282. (c) dukkha as "feeling of pain" forms one
of the three dukkhat or painful states, viz. d. dukkhat
(painful sensation caused by bodily pain), sankhra id. having its origin in the sankhr, viparima, being caused by
change S iv.259; v.56; D iii.216; Nett 12. (d) Closely related
in meaning is ahita "that which is not good or profitable,"
usually opposed to sukha & hita. It is freq. in the ster. expression "hoti dgharatta ahitya dukkhya" for a long time
it is a source of discomfort & pain A i.194 sq.; M i.332 D
iii.157; Pug 33. Also in phrases anatthya ahitya dukkhya
D iii.246 & akusala... ahitya dukkhya savattati A i.58.
(e) Under vedan as sensation are grouped the 3: sukha
(or sukh ved.) pleasure (pleasant sensation), dukkha pain
(painful sens.), adukkham-asukha indifference (indifferent sens.), the last of which is the ideal state of the emotional habitus to be gained by the Arahant (cp. upekh & nibbid). Their rle is clearly indicated in the 4th jhna: sukhassa
pahn dukkhassa pahn pubbe va somanassadomanassna
atthangam adukkham asukha upekh parisuddhi catuttha jhna upasampajja viharati (see jhna). As contents of vedan: sukha vediyati dukkha v. adukkham
asukha v. tasm vedan ti S iii.86, 87; cp. S ii.82 (vedayati). tisso vedan: sukha, d, adukkham asukh D iii.275;
S ii.53; iv.114 sq., 207, 223 sq., cp. M i.396; A i.173; iv.442;
It 46, 47. ya kic' ya purisa puggalo paisavedeti
sukha v d v a v sabban ta pubbe katahet ti=one's
whole life experience is caused by one's former kamma A
i.173=M ii.217. The combn (as complementary pair) of
sukha+dukkha is very freq. for expressing the varying fortunes of life & personal experience as pleasure & pain, e. g. n'
lam aamaassa sukhya v dukkhya v sukhadukkhya
v D i.56=S iii.211. Thus under the 8 "fortunes of the world"
(loka dhamm) with lbha (& a), yasa (a), pasas (nind),
sukha (dukkha) at D iii.260; Nd2 55. Regarded as a thing to
be avoided in life: puriso jvitukmo... sukhakmo dukkha
paikklo S iv.172, 188. In similar contexts: D i.81; iii.51,
109, 187; S ii.22, 39; iv.123 sq.; A ii.158 etc. (cp. sukha).
2. As complex state (suffering) & its valuation in the
light of the Doctrine: (a) any worldly sensation, pleasure
364
Dukkha
Dukkhita
365
Dukkhita
Dubha
Dukkhin (adj. n.) [Sk. dukhin] 1. afflicted, grieved, miserable S i.103 sq., 129 sq., ii.282 (+dummano); iv.78; A iii.57.
2. a loser in the game J ii.160.
Dudrabhi [another form of dundubhi, cp. duddabha & dundubhya] a kettle drum, in Amata the drum of Nibbna Vin
i.8=M i.171 (dundubhi at the latter passage); PvA 189 (v. l.
for dundubhi).
Dundubhi (m. & f.) [Sk. dundubhi, onomat.; cp. other forms under daddabha, dudrabhi] a kettle drum, the noise of a drum,
a heavy thud, thunder (usually as deva in the latter meaning)
Pv iii.34 ; J vi.465; PvA 40, 189 (v. l. dudrabhi). Amata the drum of Nibbna M i.171=Vin i.8 (: dudrabhi); deva
thunder D ii.156; A iv.311.
Duha (adj. n.) [Sk. duha, pp. of dussati, q. v.] spoilt, corrupt; bad, malignant, wicked Vin iii.118; S ii.259, 262; iv.339;
A i.124 (ruka), 127 (id.), 157 sq.; It 68 (saro d., perhaps
should be read as diddho); J i.187, 254 (brhmaa); iv.391
(cala); PvA 4 (cor: rogues of thieves); Sdhp 86, 367,
434. aduha not evil, good Sn 623; It 86; DhA iv.164.
Cp. pa.
-gahaika suffering from indigestion Vin i.206; -citta
evil minded Vin ii.192; M iii.65.
Duhu (adv.) [Sk. duhu, cp. suhu] badly, wrong DhsA 384;
SnA 396; VvA 337.
Duhulla (adj.) wicked, lewd Vin iv.128; S i.187 (bhin
"whose speech is never lewd," cp. Th 1, 1217 padulla
ghin, expld as duhullaghin Psalms of Brethren 399 n. 3);
M i.435; iii.159; Vism 313. (nt.) wicked ness Vin iii.21;
kya unchastity M iii.151; Th 1, 114; Vism 151.
-duhulla that which is wicked & that which is not Vin
v.130; -patti a grave transgression of the Rules of the Order,
viz. the 4 Prjika & the 13 Sanghdisesa Vin iv.31 (opp. a
Vin iv.32).
Dubbhaka (adj.) [Sk. dambhaka] perfidious, insidious, treacherous Th 1, 214 (citta). Cp. dubbhaya & dbhaka.
Dubbhati (& dbhati) [Sk. dabhnoti cp. J.P.T.S. 1889, 204: dabh
(dambh), pp. dabdha; idg. *dhebh, cp. Gr. to deceive. Cp. also Sk druh (so Kern, Toev. p. 11, s. v. padubbhati). See also dahara & dbha, dbhaka, dbhi] to injure, hurt,
deceive; to be hostile to, plot or sin against (either w. dat. J
v.245; vi.491, or w. loc. J i.267; iii.212) S i.85 (ppr. adubbhanto), 225; It 86 (dubbhe=dusseyya Com.)=Vin ii.203 (where
dubbho); Th 1, 1129; J ii.125; iv.261; v.487, 503. ppr. also
dbhato J iv.261; ger. dubbhitv J iv.79; grd. dubbheyya (v.
l. dbheyya) to be punished J v.71. Cp. pa.
Dubbhana (nt.) [Sk. *dambhana] hurtfulness, treachery, injury
against somebody (c. loc.) PvA 114 (=anattha).
Dubbhaya=dubbhaka, S i.107.
Dubbhika=dubbhaka, Pv iii.113 (=mittadubbhika, mittna bdhaka PvA 175).
Dutiyaka (adj. n.) [Dimin. of dutiya] (a) the second, following, next J i.504 (cittavre); a 2nd time M i.83. (b) a
companion; only in f. dutiyik a wife or female compn Vin
iv.230, 270 (a bhikkhun as compn of another one); Freq. as
pura-dutiyik one's former wife Vin i.96; iii.16; S i.200;
M ii.63; J i.210; v.152; DhA i.77. Cp. M Vastu ii.134 dvity
in the same sense.
366
Dubha
Dra
Duhitika (adj.) [cp. Sk. druha, fr. druhyati] infested with robbers, beset with dangers S iv.195 (magga). Note. This interpretation may have to be abandoned in favour of duhitika
being another spelling of dvhitika= hard to get through (q.
v.), to be compared are the vv. ll. of the latter at S iv.323 (S.S.
dhitika & dhtika).
Dta1 [Ved. dta, prob. to dra (q. v.) as "one who is sent
(far) away," also perhaps Gr. slave. See Walde, Lat.
Wtb. under dudum] a messenger, envoy Vin i.16; ii.32, 277; D
i.150; S iv.194; Sn 411 (rja), 417. deva Yama's envoy,
Death's messenger A i.138, 142; M ii.75 sq.; J i.138.
pheti to send a messenger Miln 18, PvA 133.
Dussa1 (nt.) [Sk. dra & dya] woven material, cloth, turban
cloth; (upper) garment, clothes Vin i.290; ii.128, 174; iv.159.
D i.103; S v.71; M i.215; ii.92; A v.347; Sn 679; Pv i.103
(=uttarya saka PvA 49); ii.314 ; Pug 55; PvA 73, 75.
cvara, q. v.; chava a miserable garment D i.166; A i.295;
ii.206; M i.78, 308.
-karaaka a clothes chest S v.71=M i.215; A iv.230;
-kohagra a store room for cloth or clothes DhA i.220,
393; -gahaa ( mangala) (the ceremony of) putting on
a garment DhA ii.87; -clan a cloth sieve Vin i.202; -paa
turban cloth Vin ii.266 (=setavattha paa Bdhgh.); S ii.102;
-phala having clothes as fruit (of magic trees, cp. kapparukkha) Vv 462 (cp. VvA 199); -maya consisting in clothes
Vv 467 (cp. VvA 199); -yuga a suit of garments Vin i.278; M
i.215=S v.71; Miln 31 (cp. M Vastu i.61); DhA iv.11; -ratana
"a pearl of a garment," a fine garment Miln 262. -vai fringed
cotton cloth Vin ii.266. -vei plaited cotton cloth Vin ii.266.
Dta2 (nt.) [Sk. dyta, see jta] play, gaming, gambling J iv.248.
Dteyya (nt.) [Sk. dtya, but varying in meaning] errand, commission, messages A iv.196; J iii.134; DA i.78. gacchati
to go on an errand Vin ii.202; harati to obtain a commission
Vin iii.87; iv.23.
-kamma doing a messenger's duty Vin i.359;
pahiagamana sending & going on messages D i.5=M iii.34;
A ii.209; M i.180.
Dbha (adj.) deceiving, see dubbha.
Dbhaka1 (adj.) [Sk. dambhaka] deceiving, treacherous, harmful
SnA 287 (mitta); f. ik J ii.297.
Dbhin (adj.) dubbhin J ii.180 (vv. ll. dbha & dubbhi), 327;
iv.257; DhA ii.23.
Dussan (f.) & Dussana (nt.) [Sk. dana, cp. dussati] defilement, guilt A ii.225; Pug 18, 22; Dhs 418, 1060; DA i.195
(rajjana d. muyhana).
Dussanya (adj.) [cp. Sk. dveanya, because of doa= dvea
taken to dus] able to give offence, hateful, evil (always combd
with rajanya, cp. rga dosa moha) A iii.110 (dusanye dussati,
where It 84 has dosaneyye); J vi.9; Miln 386.
Dussassa see sassa.
Dussika a cloth merchant J vi.276; Miln 262, 331 sq.
Dussitatta (nt.) [Sk. *ditatva]=dussan, Pug 18, 22.
Duha (adj. .) [Sk. duh & duha; see dohati] milking; yielding,
granting, bestowing: kma giving pleasures J iv.20; v.33.
Duhati (to milk) see dohati.
Duhana (adj. n.) [Sk. *druhana, to druh, druhyati to hurt, cp.
Oir. droch; Ohg. triogan to deceive, traum= dream; also Sk.
dhvarati. For further connections see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under
367
Dra
Deva
368
Deva
Devata
nu devo v Brahm v Indo vpi Sujampati); Dh 105 (+gandhabba, Mra, Brahm); A ii.91, 92 (puggalo devo hoti devaparivro etc.); PvA 16 (yakkho v devo v). (b) pl. dev
gods. These inhabit the 26 devalokas one of which is under
the rule of Sakka, as is implied by his appellation S. devna indo (his opponent is Vepacitti Asur indo S i.222) S
i.216 sq.; iv.101, 269; A i.144; Sn 346; PvA 22 etc. Var.
kinds are e. g. appam' bh (opp. paritt' bh) M iii.147;
bhassar D i.17; Dh 200; khipadosik D i.19; gandhabba
kyik S iii.250 sq.; cattro mahrjik S v.409, 423; Jat
i.48; Pv iv.111 ; PvA 17, 272; naradev tidas S i.5; bhumm
PvA 5; manpa kyik A iv.265 sq.; mano padosik D
i.20; valhaka kyik S iii.254. Var. attributes of the
Devas are e. g. yuppam A i.267; ii.126 sq.; iv.252 sq.;
dghyuk S iii.86; A ii.33; rpino manomay M i.410, etc.
etc. See further in general: D i.54 (satta dev); ii.14, 157,
208; S v.475=A i.37; Sn 258 (+manuss), 310 (id.); 404, 679;
Dh 30, 56, 94, 230, 366; Ps i.83 sq.; ii.149; Vbh 86, 395, 412
sq.; Nett 23; Sdhp 240. (c) deva=Yama see deva dta
(expld at J i.139: devo ti maccu). atideva a pre eminent
god, god above gods (Ep. of the Buddha) Nd2 307; DhsA 2
etc.; see under cpds. 2. the sky, but only in its rainy aspect,
i. e. rain cloud, rainy sky, rain god (cp. Jupiter Pluvius; K.S. i.40, n. 2 on Pajjunna, a Catumahrjika), usually
in phrase deve vassante (when it rains etc.), or devo vassati
(it rains) D i.74 (: devo ti megho DA i.218); S i.65, 154 (cp.
It 66 megha); Sn 18, 30; J v.201; DhA ii.58, 82; PvA 139.
devo ekam ekam phusyati the cloud rains drop by drop, i. e.
lightly S i.104 sq., 154, 184; iv.289. thulla phusitake
deve vassante when the sky was shedding big drops of rain S
iii.141; v.396; A i.243; ii.140; v.114; Vism 259. vigata
valhake deve when the rain clouds have passed S i.65; M
ii.34, 42. 3. king, usually in voc. deva, king! Vin i.272;
iii.43; A ii.57; J i.150, 307; PvA 4, 74 etc.
dev (f.) 1. goddess, of Pets, Yakkhis etc.; see etym.
expl. at VvA 18. Pv ii.112 ; Vv 13 etc. 2. queen Vin
i.82 (Rahulamt), 272; D ii.14; A ii.57, 202 (Mallik) J i.50
(My); iii.188; PvA 19, 75.
-acchar a divine Apsar, a heavenly joy maiden Vism
531; PvA 46, 279; -aatara, in phrase devo v d. v, a god
or one of the retinue of a god S iv.180= A iv.461; PvA 16;
-tideva god of gods, i. e. divine beyond all divinities, a super deva, of Buddha Nd2 307 & on Sn 1134; J iv.158=DhA
i.147; Vv 6427 ; VvA 18; Miln 241, 258, 368, 384 & passim;
cp. M Vastu i.106, 257, 283, 291; -attabhva a divine condition, state of a god PvA 14; -nubhva divine majesty or
power D ii.12; M iii.120; J i.59; -sana a seat in heaven It
76; -surasangma the fight between the Gods & the Titans
D ii.285; S i.222; iv.201; v.447; M i.253; A iv:432 (at all passages in identical phrase); -iddhi divine power Vv 313 ; VvA
7; -isi a divine Seer Sn 1116; Nd2 310; -papatti rebirth
among the gods PvA 6; -orohaa descent of the gods DhA
iii.443; -ka a celestial maiden, a nymph S i.200; J i.61;
VvA 37, 78; -kya a particular group of gods S i.200; It 77;
Th 2, 31; -kujara "elephant of the gods," of Indra J v.158;
-kumra son of a god (cp. putta) J iii.391; -gaa a troop of
gods J i.203; DhA iii.441; -gaha a temple, chapel Vin iii.43;
-crik a visit to the gods, journeying in the devaloka VvA 3,
7, 165 etc.; -hna heavenly seat J iii.55; a temple, sacred
place Miln 91, 330; -dattika given or granted by a god, extraordinary PvA 145; -dattiya=dattika J iii.37; DhA i.278;
-druka a species of pine J v.420; -dundubhi the celestial
drum, i. e. thunder D i.10; Miln 178; DA i.95; -dta the god's
(i. e. Yama's see above 1) messenger A i.138, 142; M ii.75;
iii.179; J i.138; DhA i.85 (tayo d.); Mhbv. 122 (suttanta); deva "the god of gods," Ep. of the Buddha (cp. devtideva) Th
1, 533, 1278 (of Kappyana); DhsA 1; PvA 140; -dhamma
that which is divine or a god A iii.277 (ika); DhA iii.74; dht a female deva or angel (cp. devaputta), lit. daughter of a
god J ii.57; VvA 137, 153 (with ref. to Vimnapets); -nagara
the city of the Devas, heaven J i.168, 202; DhA i.280; -nikya
a class, community or group of gods, celestial state or condition D ii.261 (sixty enumd ); S iv.180; M i.102 sq.; A i.63 sq.;
ii.185; iii.249 sq.; iv.55; v.18; -paha questioning a god, using an oracle D i.11 (=DA i.97: devadsiy sarre devata
otretv paha pucchana); -parivra a retinue of gods
A ii.91; -paris the assembly of gods A ii.185; Tikp 241.
-putta "son of a god," a demi god, a ministering god (cp.
f. deva dht), usually of Yakkhas, but also appld to the
4 archangels having charge of the higher world of the Ym
dev (viz. Suyma devaputta); the Tusit d. (Santusita d.); the
Nimmnarat d. (Sunimmita d.); & the Paranimmitavasavatt
d. (Vasavatt d.) D i.217 sq.; cp. J i.48. D ii.12, 14; S
i.46 sq.; 216 sq.; iv.280; A i.278; It 76; J i.59 (jar jajjara);
iv.100 (Dhamma d.); vi.239 (Java d.); PvA 6, 9, 55, 92, 113
(Yakkho ti devaputto); Miln 23; -pura the city of the gods,
heaven S iv.202; Vv 6430 (=Sudassana mahnagara VvA
285); J iv.143; -bhava celestial existence PvA 167; -bhoga
the wealth of the gods PvA 97; -manuss (pl.) gods & men D
i.46, 62, 99 (mnuse); M ii.38, 55; Sn 14 (sa), 236 (pjita),
521; It 80 (seh); Kh viii.10; KhA 196; PvA 17, 31, 117;
loka the world of gods and men. It comprises (1) the world
of gods proper (Devas, i. e. Sakka, Mra & Brahm; corresp.
to sammuti dev, see above); (2) samaas & brhmaas
(cp. visuddhi dev); (3) gods & men under the human aspect (gati, cp. upapatti dev): Sn 1047, 1063; expl. at
Nd2 309 & (with diff. interpretations) DA i.174 sq.; -yna
leading to the (world of) the gods, i. e. the road to heaven
Sn 139, also in yniya (magga) D i.215; -rj king of the
devas, viz. Sakka Nd1 177; J iii.392 (=devinda); DhA iii.441;
PvA 62; -rpa divine appearance or form PvA 92; -loka the
particular sphere of any devas, the seat of the devas, heaven;
there exist 26 such spheres or heavens (see loka); when 2 are
mentioned it refers to Sakka's & Brahma's heavens. A seat in
a devaloka is in sasra attained by extraordinary merit: Dh
177; J i.202, 203; iv.273; ThA 74; KhA 228; PvA 5, 9, 21,
66, 81, 89; Vism 415, etc.; -vimna the palace of a deva J
i.58; VvA 173; -sankhalik a magic chain J ii.128; v.92, 94;
-sadda heavenly sound or talk among the devas It 75 (three
such sounds).
Devaka (adj.) () [deva+ka] belonging or peculiar to the devas;
only in sa-loka the world including the gods in general D
i.62; Nd2 309; Sn 86 377, 443, 760 etc.; Miln 234. See also
devamanussa loka.
Devata (adj.) () having such & such a god as one's special
divinity, worshipping, a worshipper of, devotee of Miln 234
(Brahma+Brahma (garuka). f. devat in pati "worship-
369
Devata
Doa
Devat (f.) [deva+t, qualitative abstr. suffix, like Lat. juventa, senecta, Goth. hauhipa, Ohg. fullida cp. Sk. prat,
bandhut etc.] "condition or state of a deva," divinity; divine being, deity, fairy. The term comprises all beings which
are otherwise styled devas, & a list of them given at Nd2
308 & based on the principle that any being who is worshipped (or to whom an offering is made or a gift given: de
vat=yesa deti, as is expressed in the conclusion "ye yesa
dakkhieyy te tesa devat") is a devat, comprises 5 groups
of 5 kinds each, viz. (1) ascetics; (2) domestic animals (elephants, horses, cows, cocks, crows); (3) physical forces & elements (fire, stone etc.); (4) lower gods (: bhumma dev) (ng,
suva, yakkh, asur, gandhabb); (5) higher gods (: inhabitants of the devaloka proper) Mahrj, Canda, Suriya, Inda,
Brahm), to which are added the 2 aspects of the sky god as
devadevat & dis devat). Another definition at VvA
21 simply states: devat ti devaputto pi Brahm pi devadht
pi vuccati. Among the var. deities the foll. are frequently
mentioned: rukkha tree gods or dryads M i.306; J i.221;
PvA 5; vatthu earth gods (the four kings) Pv 41 ; PvA 17;
vana wood nymphs M i.306; samudda water sprites
J ii.112 etc. etc. D i.180 (mahiddhik, pl.), 192; ii.8, 87,
139, 158; S i. sq.; iv.302; M i.245; ii.37; A i.64, 210, 211;
ii.70 (sapubba); iii.77 (bali paigghik), 287 (saddhya
samanngat); 309; iv.302 sq., 390 (vippaisriniyo); v.331;
Sn 45, 316, 458, 995, 1043; Dh 99; J i.59, 72, 223, 256; iv.17,
474; Vv 163 ; Pv ii.110 ; KhA 113, 117; PvA 44.
-nubhva divine power or majesty J i.168; -nussati
"remembrance of the gods," one of the 6 nussatihnni, or
subjects to be kept in mind D iii.250, 280, cp. A i.211; Vism
197.
-uposatha a day of devotion to the gods A i.211;
-paribhoga fit to be enjoyed by gods J ii.104; -bali an offering
to the gods A ii.68; -bhva at PvA 110 read as devattabhva
(opp. petattabhva).
Devati [div] to lament, etc.; see pari. Cp. also parideva etc.
Devatta (nt.) [deva+tta] the state of being a deva, divinity ThA
70; PvA 110 (bhva as Yakkha, opp. petatta bhva; so read
for devat bhva).
370
Doa
Dosa
Don1 (f.) [Sk. dro, see doa] 1. a (wooden) trough, a vat, tub S
ii.259; A i.253; v.323; J i.450; Miln 56. tela an oil vat A
iii.58 (yas made of iron & used as a sarcophagus). 2. a
trough shaped canoe (cp. Marthi on "a long flat bottomed boat made of uni wood," & Kanarese oni "a canoe
hallowed from a log"] J iv.163 (=gambhr mahnv p. 164);
PvA 189. 3. a hollow, dug in the ground Miln 397. 4.
the body of a lute, the sounding board (?)] i.450; Miln 53;
VvA 281.
Do2 (f.) [Sk. droi?] an oil giving plant (?) (or is it= don1
meaning a cake made in a tub, but wrongly interpreted by
Dhammapla?) only in -nimmijana oil cake Pv i.1010 ;
as nimmijjani at Vv 3338 ; expld by telamijaka at PvA 51 &
by tilapika at VvA 147.
Dobbhagga (nt.) [Sk. daurbhgya fr. du+bhga] ill luck, misfortune Vin iv.277; DhA 281 (text: dobhagga).
Dosa2 [Sk. dvea, but very often not distinct in meaning from
dosa1 . On dvea see under disa] anger, ill will, evil intention, wickedness, corruption, malice, hatred. In most freq.
combn of either rga (lust) d. & moha (delusion), or lobha
(greed) d. moha (see rga & lobha), to denote the 3 main
blemishes of character. For defn see Vism 295 & 470. Interpreted at Nd2 313 as "cittassa ghto paighto paigho...
kopo... kodho... vypatti." The distinction between dosa
& paigha is made at DA i.116 as: dosa=dubbalakodha;
paigha=balavakodha. In combn lobha d. moha e. g. S
i.98; M i.47, 489; A i.134, 201; ii.191; iii.338; It 45 (ti
akusalamlni). With rga & moha: Dh 20; It 2=6; with rga
& avijj; It 57; rga & mna Sn 270, 631 etc. See for ref.:
Vin i.183; D iii.146, 159, 182, 214, 270; S i.13, 15, 70; v.34
sq.; M i.15, 96 sq., 250 sq., 305; A i.187; ii.172, 203; iii.181;
Sn 506; It 2 (dosena duhse satt gacchanti duggati); Ps
i.80 sq., 102; Pug 16, 18; Dhs 418, 982, 1060; Vbh 86, 167,
208, 362; Nett 13, 90; Sdhp 33, 43. Variously characterised
as: 8 purisa dos Vbh 387; khila, ngha, mala S v.57; agati
(4 agati gamanni: chanda, d. moha, bhaya) D iii.228,
cp. 133, 182; ajjhatta A iii.357 sq.; its relation to kamma
A i.134; iii.338; v.262; to ariyamagga S v.5, 8. sadosa
corrupted, depraved, wicked D i.80; A i.112; adosa absence
of ill-will, adj. kind, friendly, sympathetic A i.135, 195, 203;
ii.192; Vbh 169, 210; Dhs 33 (cp. Dhs. trsl. 21, 99); VvA 14
(+alobha amoha).
-aggi the fire of anger or ill will D iii.217; S iv.19 sq.;
It 92 (+rgaggi moh); J i.61; -antara (adj.) bearing anger,
intending evil in one's heart Vin ii.249; D iii.237; M i.123; A
i.59; iii.196 sq.; v.81 (opp. metta citta); perhaps at PvA
78 (for des); -kkhaya the fading away, dying out of anger
371
Dosa
Dvi
Dosaniya, Dosanya & Dosaneyya (adj.) [grd. formation either to dosa1 or dosa2 , but more likely=Sk. *danya=dya
(see dussa2 & dussati) influenced by dveaya] corruptible;
polluting, defiling; hateful, sinful S iv.307; A ii.120; It 84
(where A iii.110 has dussanya in same context).
Dos (f.) [Sk. do & doas, cp. Gr. , to set (of the
sun)] evening, dusk. Only in acc. as adv. dosa (=do) at
night J vi.386.
Dosin (adj.) [to dosa2 ] angry J v.452, 454.
Dosin (f.) [Sk. jyotsn, cp. P. juh) a clear night, moonlight;
only in phrase ramay vata bho dosin ratti. "lovely is
the moonlight night" D i.47J i.509; J v.262; Miln 5, 19 etc.
Expld in popular fashion by Bdhgh. as "dospagat" ratti DA
i.141.
-puams a clear, full moon night Th 1, 306, 1119;
-mukha the face of a clear night J vi.223.
Doha1 [Sk. doha & dogha] milking, milk J v.63, 433.
Doha2 (adj.) [Sk. droha] injuring () DA i.296.
Dohaka [Sk. doha] a milk pail J v.105.
Dohati [Sk. dogdhi, to which prob. duhit daughter: see under
dht & cp. dhenu] to milk. pres. 1 pl. dohma & duhma
J v.105; pret. 1 pl. duhmase ibid.; pot. duhe Jvi.211; ger.
duhitv SnA 27; pp. duddha (q. v.) Pass. duyhati S
i.174 (so read for duhanti); J v.307; ppr. duyhamna Miln 41.
See also dhana, doha1 , dohin.
Dohaa [Sk. dohada & daurhda, of du+hd, sick longing, sickness, see hadaya. Lders Gttinger GelehrteNachrichten
1898, 1 derives it as dvi+hd] (a) the longing of a pregnant
woman J iii.28, 333; DhA i.350; ii.139. (b) intense longing, strong desire, craving in general J ii.159, 433; v.40, 41;
vi.263, 308; DhA ii.86 (dhammika d.).
Dohayati [Denom. fr. dohaa] to have cravings (of a woman in
pregnancy) J vi.263.
Dohain (adj. f.) a woman in pregnancy having cravings; a
pregnant woman in general J ii.395, 435; iii.27; iv.334; v.330
(=gabbhin); vi.270, 326, 484; DhA iii.95.
Dohin (adj. n.) one who milks, milking M i.220 sq.=A v.347 sq.
(anavasesa milking out fully).
Drbha incorrect spelling for dubbha (q. v.) in adrbhya Vin
i.347.
Dvi [Sk. dvi, dva etc. Bases: I. dvi=Sk. dvi in dvipad =Lat.
bips (fr. dips), Ags. twifte; dvidant=bidens. Reduced to
di (see B I.4 ) as in Gr. (=dipad), Lat. diennium &
pref. dis (cp. Goth. twis asunder, Ogh. zwisk between).
II. du (=dvi in reduced grade, cp. Lat. du plex, dubius
etc.). III. dv (& dva)=Sk. dvu, dv, f. nt. dve (declined
as dual, but the P. (plural) inflexion from base I. see B I.1 ); Gr.
, Lat. duo; Oir. du, d, f. d; Goth. twai, f. tws; Ags.
tw (=E. two); Ohg. zwne, zw zwei. Also in cpd. num. dva
daa twelve=Gr. (*)=Lat. duodecim. ] number
Dvi
Dvi
two.
A. Meanings I. Two as unit: 1. with objective foundation: (a) denoting a combn (pair, couple) or a repetition
(twice). In this conn. frequent both objective & impersonal
in mentioning natural pairs as well as psychologically contrasted notions. E. g. dvipad (biped), ngassa dve dant (elephants' tusks), cakkhni (eyes); dvija (bird), duvija (tooth), dijivha (snake). See also dutiya & dvaya. dve: km, khi,
gatiyo (Sn 1001), dnni (It 98), piy, phalni (Sn 896; It 39),
mitt, sineh etc. See Nd2 under dve, cp. A i.47 100; D
iii.212 214. (b) denoting a separation (in two, twofold
etc.): see dvidh & cpds. 2. with symbolic, sentimental
meaning: (a) only two (i. e. next to one or "next to nothing"), cp. the two mites of the widow (Mark xii. 42), two
sons of Rachel (Gen. 30): dumsika not more than 2 months
(Vin ii.107); dvemsiko gabbho (Pv i.67 ); dvevcika; duvangula (see below). (b) a few more than one, some, a couple (often intermediate between 1 & 3, denoting more than
once, or a comparatively long, rather long, but not like 3 a
very long time): msadvaya a couple of months; dvisahassa
dp 2000 islands (=a large number); diyahasata 150=very
long etc.; dvhatha (2 or 3= a couple of days) q. v.; dvirattatiratta (id. of nights); dvsu tsu manussesu to some people (PvA
47); dvatikkhattu soveral times; cp. dvikkhattu (more than
once), dutiya (for the 2nd time).
II. Two as unit in connection with its own & other decimals
means a complex plus a pair, which amounts to the same as a
large & a small unit, or so to speak "a year & a day." E. g. 12
(sometimes, but rarely= 10+2, see sep.); 32: rests usually
on 4 X 8, but as No. of the Mahpurisa lakkhani it denotes 30+2= the great circle plus the decisive (invisible) pair;
62: views of heresy: see dihi; also as a year of eternity=
60 kappas+2; 92: as measure of eternity=90+2 kappas=a
year & a day.
III. Number twelve. 1. Based on natural phenomena it denotes the solar year (dvdasamsako savaccharo VvA 247).
2. Connected with the solar cult it is used with human arrangements to raise them to the level of heavenly ones and to
impart to them a superior significance. Thus: (a) as denoting
a set (cp. 12 months = companions of the Sun) it is the No.
of a respectful, holy, venerable group (cp. 12 sons of Jacob
Gen. 35, 22; cakes as shewbread Lev. 25, 5; stones erected
Josh. 4, 8; apostles Math. 10, 2; patriarchs Acts 7, 8; companions of Odysseus Hom. Od. 9, 195; Knights of Arthur etc.):
of theras, accompd by 12 bhikkhus PvA 67, 141. 179 etc.;
dvdasa koisatni Sn 677; five groups of 12 musicians VvA
96 (cp. 5 X 12 cromlechs in the outer circle of Stonehenge).
(b) as measure of distance in space & time it implies vast
extent, great importance, a climax, divine symmetry etc. 12
yojanas wide extends the radiance VvA 16; 12 y. as respectful distance PvA 137 (cp. 2000 cubits in same sense at Josh. 3,
4); 12 y. in extent (height, breadth & length) are the heavenly
palaces of the Vimna petas or Yakkhas Vv 551 ; J vi.116;
VvA 6, 217, 244, 291, 298 etc. In the same connection we
freq. find the No. 16: solasa yojanika kanaka vimna Vv 671 ; VvA 188, 289 etc. Of years: J iii.80; VvA
157 (dvdasa vassik; in this sense also 16 instead of 12:
soasa vassuddesika VvA 259 etc. See soasa).
B. Bases & Forms I. dvi; main base for numeral & nom-
Dvi
Dhaja
Dvedhpatha [cp. dvidh & dvi B I.5] (a) a double, i. e. a branching road; a cross road DhA ii.192; Miln 17. (b) doubt
Dh 282; Dhs 1004, 1161 Vism 313.
Dvehaka (nt.) [Sk. *dvaidhaka fr. adv. dvidh, cp. dvi B I. 5]
doubt Vin iii.309; Dhs 1004, 1161; DA i.68; DhsA 259; citta
uncertain PvA 13; jta in doubt Vin iii.309; D iii.117 sq.;
210. advehaka (adj.) sure, certain, without doubt Nd2 30
(+advejjha).
Dvha (adv.) [Sk. dvis ahnah; see dvi B I.2b ] two days; dvhena
in 2 days S ii.192; dvha mata 2 days dead M i.88; iii.91.
-tha 2 or 3 days ( adv.) (on meaning cp. dvi A I.2b )
D i.190 (assa accayena after a few days); J ii.316; DhA iii.21
Dh
Dhasati [Ved. dhvasati to fall to dust, sink down, perish; Idg.
dhees to fly like dust, cp. Sk. dhsara "dusky"; Ags. dust;
Ger. dust & dunst; E. dusk & dust; prob. also Lat. furo]
to fall from, to be deprived of (c. abl.), to be gone D iii.184
(with abl. asm lok dh.) A ii.67; v.76, 77; It 11; Th 1, 225,
610; J iii.260, 318, 441, 457; iv.611; v.218, 375. Caus.
dhaseti [Sk. dhvasayati, but more likely=Sk. dharayati
(to infest, molest= Lat. infestare. On similar sound change
P. dhas> Sk. dhar cp. P. daseti>Sk. darayati). Caus.
of dhoti to be daring, to assault cp. Gr. audacious,
bold, Lat. festus, Goth. gadars=E. dare; Ohg. gitar] to deprive
of, to destroy, assault, importune D i.211; S iii.123; Sn 591; J
iii.353; Miln 227; Sdhp 357, 434. Cp. pa, pari.
Dhaja
Dhamani
phrase pahta) it may be taken as Tatpurua "rich in treasures," otherwise "possessing money & money's worth" cp.
pahtadhanadhaav J i.3. As n. Pv i.1111 ; iii.104 ; PvA
60; Miln 2, 280; as adj. freq. "pahtadhana dhaa" Vv
6313 =Pv ii.611 : PvA 97. Thus in ster. formula of aha mahaddhana etc. D iii.163 sq.; S i.71; A ii.86; -parjaya loss
of money, as adj. appl. to kali: the dice marking loss in game
Sn 659; -lobha "greed of gold" J iv.1; -lola=lobha J ii.212;
-viriya wealth & power Sn 422; -hetu for the sake of wealth
Sn 122.
Dhaa2 (adj.) [Sk. dhnya, adj. to dhana or dhnya. Semantically cp. hiya] "rich in corn," rich (see dhana); happy, fortunate, lucky. Often in combn dhanadhaa. DhA i.171;
iii.464 (dhadika one who is rich in grains etc., i. e. lucky);
DhsA 116. dhaapua lakkhaa a sign of future good
fortune & merit PvA 161; as adj. endowed with the mark of...
J vi.3. See also dhniya.
Dhata [Sk. dhta, pp. of dharati; cp. dhara & dhreti] 1. firm,
prepared, ready, resolved A iii.114; Dvs v.52. 2. kept in
mind, understood, known by heart Vin ii.95; A i.36.
375
Dhamani
Dhamma
-santhata strewn with veins, with veins showing, i. e. emaciated (: nimmasa lohitatya sirjlehi vitthatagatta PvA
68) Vin iii.110; J iv.371; v.69; Dh 395=Th 1, 243=Pv ii.113 ;
Pv iv.101 ; DhA i.299, 367; iv.157; ThA 80. So also in Jain
Pk. "kisa dhamaisatata": Weber, Bhagavat p. 289; cp.
Lal. Vist. 226. Also as santhatagatta (adj.) having veins
showing all over the body for lack of flesh Vin i.55; iii.146; M
ii.121; J i.346, ii.283; ThA 80.
Dhamma1 (m. & rarely nt.) [Ved. dharma & dharman, the latter a formation like karman (see kamma for expln of subj.
& obj. meanings); dh (see dhreti) to hold, support: that
which forms a foundation and upholds= constitution. Cp.
Gr. , Lat. firmus & fretus; Lith. derme (treaty), cp.
also Sk. dhariman form, constitution, perhaps=Lat. forma,
E. form] constitution etc. A. Definitions by Commentators:
Bdhgh gives a fourfold meaning of the word dhamma (at DA
i.99= DhA i.22), viz. (1) gue (saddo), applied to good conduct; (2) desanya, to preaching & moral instruction; (3)
pariyattiya, to the 9 fold collection of the Buddh. Scriptures
(see navanga); (4) nissatte ( nijjvate), to cosmic (non
animistic) law. No. 1 is referred to freq. in expls of the
term, e. g. dhammiko ti yena samena pavattat ti DA i.249;
dhamman ti kraa ya PvA 211; as paipatti dhamma
at VvA 84; No. 3 e. g. also at PvA 2. Another and more
adequate fourfold definition by Bdhgh is given in DhsA 38,
viz. (1) pariyatti, or doctrine as formulated, (2) hetu, or condition, causal antecedent, (3) gua, or moral quality or action,
(4) nissatta nijvat, or "the phenomenal" as opposed to "the
substantial," "the noumenal," "animistic entity." Here (2) is illustrated by hetumhi a dhammapaisambhid: "analytic
knowledge in dhamma's means insight into condition, causal
antecedent" Vibh 293, and see Niyama (dhamma). Since, in
the former fourfold definition (2) and (3) really constitute but
one main implication considered under the two aspects of Doctrine as taught and Doctrine as formulated, we may interpret
Dhamma by the fourfold connotation: doctrine, right, or
righteousness, condition, phenomenon. For other exegetic
definitions see the Coms & the Niddesa, e. g. Nd1 94; for
modern expls & analyses see e. g. Rhys Davids, Buddh. India pp. 292 4; Mrs. Rh. Davids, Buddhism (1912) pp. 32
sq., 107 sq., 235 sq.; Dhs. trsl. xxxiii. sq.; and most recently
the exhaustive monograph by M. & W. Geiger, Pli Dhamma.
Abhandlungen der Bayer. Akademie xxxi. 1; Mnchen 1920;
which reached the editors too late to be made use of for the
Dictionary.
B. Applications and Meaning. 1. Psychologically;
"mentality" as the constitutive element of cognition & of its
substratum, the world of phenomena. It is that which is presented as "object" to the imagination & as such has an effect
of its own: a presentation (Vorstellung), or idea, idea, or
purely mental phenomenon as distinguished from a psycho
physical phenomenon, or sensation (re action of sense
organ to sensestimulus). The mind deals with ideas as the eye
deals with forms: it is the abstraction formed by mano, or mind
proper, from the objects of sense presented by the sense organ when reacting to external objects. Thus cakkhu "faculty
of sight" corresponds to rpa "relation of form" & mano "faculty of thought" (citta & ceto its organ or instrument or locali-
376
Dhamma
Dhamma
dhamm hetuppabhav tesa hetu Tathgato ha "of all phenomena sprung from a cause the Buddha the cause hath told"
Vin i.40 (cp. Is Upanishad 14). lokadhamm things of
this world (viz. gain, fame, happiness etc., see under lbha)
D iii.260; Nd2 55. uttari-manussa-dh transcendental,
supernormal phenomena D i.211, cp. D iii.4; abbhuta dh
wonderful signs, portents Miln 8 (tayo acchariy a. dh. pturahesu); PvA 2: hassa khih rati dh. sampanna
endowed with the qualities or things of mirth, play & enjoyment D i.19; iii.31; gma things or doings of the village D i.4
(cp. DA i.72).
2. Ratio ethically (a) objective: "rationality," anything that is as it should be according to its reason & logicality
(as expressed under No. 1 a), i. e. right property, sound condition, norm, propriety, constitution as conforming to No. 1
in universal application i. e. Natural or Cosmic Law: yattha
nma ca rpa ca asesam uparujjhati, ta te dhamma idhya acchidu bhavabandhana (recognising this law) S
i.35 cittacetasik dh a term for the four mental khandhas,
and gradually superseding them Dhs 1022 (cf. Compendium
of Philosophy, 1); dasadhamma vid Vin i.38 (see dasa);
with attha, nirutti and paibhna: one of the 4 Paisambhids (branches of analytic knowledge A ii.160; Ps i.84, 88
etc.; Vibh. 293 f., Points of Controversy, p. 380. In this
sense freq. as adj.: being constituted, having the inherent
quality (as based on Natural Law or the rational constitution
of the Universe), destined to be..., of the (natural) property
of..., like (cp. Gr. or E. able, as in change
able=liable to change, also E. hood, ly & P. gata,
hita), e. g. khaya dhamma liable to decay (+vaya,
virga, nirodha), with ref. to the Sankhras S iv.216 sq.; in
the Paiccasamuppda S ii.60; akkhaya imperishable Pv iv.152
(dna a dh. atthu). cavana destined to shift to another
state of existence D i.18; iii.31; It 76; VvA 54. jti jar
maraa under the law of birth, age, & death D iii.57; A
i.147; iii.54; PvA 41 (sabbe satt...); bhedana fragile (of
kya) D i.76; S i.71; PvA 41 (bhijjana of sankhr). viparima changeable A i.258; iv.157; PvA 60 (+anicca). a unchanging D iii.31 sq. samudaya & nirodha, in formula ya
kici s dh sabban tan n dh "anything that is destined to come into existence must also cease to exist" D i.110,
180; S iv.47 & passim. Cp. further: anvatti avinipta D
i.156; iii.107, 132; A i.232; ii.89, 238; iv.12; anuppda D
iii.270. (b) subjective: "morality," right behaviour, righteousness, practice, duty; maxim (cp. hna), constitution of
character as conforming to No. 1 in social application, i. e.
Moral Law. Often in pl.: tenets, convictions, moral habits;
& as adj. that which is proper, that which forms the right idea;
good, righteous, true; opp. adhamma false, unjust etc.; evil
practice (a) Righteousness etc.: S i.86 (eko dh. one principle of conduct; ii.280 (dh. isina dhajo: righteousness is the
banner of the Wise); kusala dh. D i.224; dhamme hita righteous Vv 168 ; ti duty against relatives PvA 30; deyya=
dna PvA 9, 70; sad faith (q. v.) opp. adhamma unrighteousness, sin A ii.19; v.73 sq.; D iii.70 (rga+ visama
lobha & micch dhamma); Pv iii.96 ( anuvattisa I
practised wrong conduct). In the same sense: dh. asuddho
Vin i.5=S i.137 (pturahosi Magadhesu pubbe dh. a.); ppa
(adj.) of evil conduct Vin i.3; ahita unrighteous D iii.133;
Dhamma
Dhamma
329; Nett 11, 15, 31, 83, 112; & cp. cpds. 4. Dhamma and
anudhamma. Childers interprets anudhamma with "lesser or
inferior dhamma," but the general purport of the Nikya passages seems to be something like "in conformity with, in logical sequence to the dhamma" i. e. lawfulness, righteousness,
reasonableness, truth (see KS ii.202; Geiger, Pli Dhamma pp.
115 118). It occurs (always with Dh.) in the foll. contexts:
dhammassa c' nudh vykaroti "to explain according to the
truth of the Dhamma" D i.161; iii.115; Ud 50; dhammassa hoti
anudhammacrin "walking in perfect conformity to the Dh."
A ii.8; dh. anudh caranti id. D iii.154; dh. anudh
paipanna "one who has reached the complete righteousness of
the Dh." D ii.224; iii.119; S iii.40 sq.; It 81; A iii.176 (where
it forms the highest stage of the Dhammaknowledge, viz. (1)
dh suti; (2) pariyputi; (3) dhreti; (4) attha upaparikkhati; (5) dh anudh paipajjati). Further in series
bahussuta, dhammadhara, dh anudh paipanna D ii.104;
S v.261; A ii.8; Ud 63; also in dhamma kathika, dh
anudh pai panna, diha dhamma nibbna patta
S ii.18=114= iii.163; & in attha aya, dhamma aya,
dhanudh paipanna A i.36; ii.97.
-akkhna discussing or preaching of the Dhamma Nd1
91; -atthadesan interpretation of the Dh. Miln 21;
-dhikaraa a point in the Dh. S iv.63=v.346; -dhipa Lord
of righteousness (+anudhamma crin) A i.150; cp. ssmi;
nt. abstr. dhipateyya the dominating influence of the Dh.
A i.147 sq.; D iii.220; Miln 94; Vism 14. -nudhamma see
above C 4; -anuvattin acting in conformity with the moral
law Dh 86, cp. DhA ii.161; -nusrin of righteous living D
iii.105, 254 (+saddh); M i.226, 479; A i.74; iv.215; iv.23; S
v.200; Pug 15; Nett 112, 189; -anvaya main drift of the faith,
general conclusions of the Dh., D ii.83= iii.100; M ii.120;
-abhisamaya understanding of the Truth, conversion to the
Dhamma [cp. dharmbhisamaya Divy 200] S ii.134 (+dh.
cakkhu pailbha): Pug 41; Miln 20; DhA i.27; iv.64; PvA
31 etc.; -mata the nectar of righteousness or the Dh. Miln
22 (meghena loka abhitappayanto), 346; -dsa the mirror of the Dhamma D ii.93 (name of an aphorism) S v.357
(id.); Th 1, 395; ThA 179; -yatana the field of objects of
ideation S ii.72; Dhs 58, 66, 147, 397, 572, 594; Vbh 70, 72
sq.; -rammaa: dh. as an object of ideation Dhs 146, 157,
365; cp. Dhs. trsl. 2; -rma "one who has the Dh. as his
pleasure ground," one who rejoices in the Dh. A iii.431; It
82 (+dh rata); Sn 327; Dh 364, cp. DhA iv.95; -lapana
using the proper address, a fit mode of addressing a person
as followed by the right custom. See Dial. i.193 196; J
v.418; -sana "the Dh seat," i. e. flat piece of stone or a
mat on which a priest sat while preaching J i.53; DhA ii.31;
-posatha the fast day prescribed by the Dh. A i.208; -okk
the torch of Righteousness J i.34; -oja the essence or sap of
the Dh. S v.162; DhA iv.169; -osadha the medicine of the
Dh. Miln 110, 335. -kath ethical discussion, fit utterance,
conversation about the Dh., advice D iii.151; J i.217; VvA 6;
PvA 50, 66; -kathika (adj.) one who converses about ethical
problems, one who recites or preaches the Dh., one who speaks
fitly or properly. Often in combn. with Vinaya dhara "one
who masters (knows by heart) the Vinaya," & bahussuta "one
who has a wide knowledge of tradition": Vin iv.10, 13, 141;
A iii.78; DhA ii.30; also with suttantika "one who is versed
pariyatta), 304; iii.19, 90; D i.8, 176, 229; ii.124 (aya Dh.
aya V. ida Satthu ssana); iii.9, 12, 28, 118 sq.; S i.9,
119, 157; ii.21, 50, (dh vinaye asssa); A iii.297 (id.); S
ii.120; iii.91; iv.43 sq., 260; A i.34, 121, 185, 266; ii.2, 26,
117, 168; iii.8, 168 sq.; iv.36, 200 sq.; v.144, 163, 192; It 112;
Sn p. 102; Ud 50. 2. Dhamma, Buddha, Sangha. On
the principle expld in Note on B 1 a rests the separation of
the personality of the teacher from that which he taught (the
"Doctrine," the "Word," the Wisdom or Truth, cp. Dhamma
kyo Tathgatassa adhivacana D iii.84). A person becoming
a follower of the B. would conform to his teaching (Dh.) &
to the community ("Church"; Sangha) by whom his teaching
was handed down. The formula of Initiation or membership is
therefore threefold, viz. Buddha saraa upemi (gacchmi),
Dh ..., Sangha... i. e. I put myself into the shelter of the
B., the Dh. & the S. (see further ref. under Sangha) S i.34
(Buddhe pasann Dhamme ca Sanghe tibbagrav: ete sagge
paksenti yattha te upapajjare, i. e. those who adore the B. &
his Church will shine in Heaven); D ii.152 sq., 202 sq., 352;
S iv.270 sq. (saraagamana); DhA i.206; PvA 1 (vande ta
uttama Dh , B , S ). Cp. Satthari, Dhamme, Sanghe
kankhati, as 3 of the ceto khil A iii.248. 3. Character
of the Dhamma in var. attributes, general phraseology. The
praise of the Dh. is expressed in many phrases, of which only
a few of the more frequent can be mentioned here. Among the
most famous is that of "dhamma deseti di kalya majjhe k, pariyosna k, etc. "beautiful in the beginning,
beautiful in the middle & beautiful in the end," e. g. D i.62; S
i.105; iv.315; A ii.147, 208; iii.113 sq., 135, 262; D iii.96, 267;
Nd2 316; It 79; VvA 87. It is welcome as a friend, beautifully
told, & its blessings are immediate: sv' akkhta, sandihika,
aklika, ehipassika etc. D ii.93; iii.5, 39, 45, 102; S i.9, 117;
ii.199; iv.271; A iii.285 etc. It is mah dh. S iv.128; ariya
S i.30; A v.241, 274; Sn 783; samm S i.129. It is likened
to a splendid palace on a mountain top Vin i.5=It 33, or to
a quiet lake with sla as its banks S i.169=183; and it is above
age & decay: satan ca dhammo na jaram upeti S i.71. Whoever worships the Dh. finds in this worship the highest gratification: diyo loke sako putto piyo loke sako pati, tato piyatar...
dhammassa maggan S i.210; ye keci ariyadhamme khantiy
upet... devakya paripressanti S i.30. Dh garukaroti
D iii.84. Opp. Dhamme agrava A iii.247, 340; iv.84: the
slanderers of the Dh. receive the worst punishment after death
S i.30 (upenti Roruva ghora). Var. phrases: to find
the truth (i. e. to realize intuitively the Dh.)=dh anubodhati D ii.113; S i.137, or vindati D i.110, 148. To expound the
Dh., teach the truth, talk about problems of ethics & philosophy: dh deseti Vin iv.134; S i.210 etc.; katheti PvA 41;
bhsati Vin i.101; bhaati Vin i.169; pakseti S ii.28; iv.121.
To hear the Dh., to listen to such an exposition: dh suti
S i.114, 137, 196, 210; A i.36; iii.163; DhA iii.81, 113. To
attain full knowledge of it: dh pariyputi A ii.103, 185;
iii.86, cp. 177 & pariyatti. To remember the Dh.: dhreti A
iii.176 (for details of the 5 stages of the Dh. accomplishment); to ponder over the Dh., to study it: dh viciti S
i.34=55, 214; A iv.3 sq. To enter a relation of discipleship
with the Dh.: dh saraa gacchati (see above 2) Pv iv.348 ;
dhamma saraattha upehi Vv 532 (cp. VvA 232). See
further Ps i.34, 78, 131; ii.159 sq.; Pug 58, 66; Vbh 293 sq.,
378
Dhamma
Dhamma
Dhamma
Dhava
Dharaa (adj.) bearing, holding, comprising VvA 104 (suvaassa pacadasa nikkha holding, i. e. worth or equal to
15 parts of gold). f. - bearing, i. e. pregnant with Sn 26
(of cows: godharaiyo paveniyo=gabbhiniyo SnA 39). As
n. the Earth J v.311; vi.526; Miln 34; dhara-ruha N. of a
tree J vi.482, 497; Miln 376.
Dharati [Sk. dharati, dh as in Gr. ; Lat. firmus & fretus.
See also daha, dhata, dhamma, dhiti, dhuva] to hold, bear,
carry, wear; to hold up, support; to bear in mind, know by
heart; to hold out, endure, last, continue, live Sn 385 (take
to heart, remember); DhA ii.68; ppr. dharama living, lasting J i.75 (dhe yeva suriye while the sun was still
up); ii.6; Miln 240, 291 (Bhagavato dh kle); grd.
dhareyya, in dhdivasa the day when a young girl is to be
carried (into the house of her husband) ThA, 25; cp. dhreyya
Th 2, 472=vivha ThA 285. pp. dhata (q. v.) Caus.
dhreti (q. v.).
Dhava
Dhraka
far weakened in meaning, that it simply corresponds to E. abstr. suffix hood or ity (cp. hood=origin. "form": see
ketu), so perhaps in Nibbna=Nibbna dom. Cp. dhtuka.
(b) elements in sense consciousness: referring to the 6
ajjhattikni & 6 bhirni yatanni S ii.140 sq. Of these sep.
sota D i.79; iii.38; Vbh 334; dibbasota S ii.121, 212; v.265,
304; A i.255; iii.17, 280; v.199; cakkhu Vbh 71 sq.; mano
Vbh 175, 182, 301; mano via Vbh 87, 89, 175, 182
sq. (c) various: aneka A i.22; iii.325; v.33; akusala Vbh
363; avijj S ii.132; bh S ii.150; rambha S v.66, 104
sq.; A i.4; ii.338; hiti S ii.175; iii.231; A iii.338; dhamma S
ii.56; nekkhamma S ii.151; A iii.447; nissraiy dhtuyo (5)
D iii.239; A iii.245, 290. See further S i.134, 196; ii.153, 248
(anicc); iii.231 (nirodha); iv.67; A i.176; ii.164; iv.385; Dhs
58, 67, 121; Nett 57, 64 sq.; ThA 20, 49, 285, (d) Different
sets and enumerations: as 3 under kma, rpa, arpa A i.223;
iii.447; Ps i.137; Vbh 86, 363, 404 sq.; under rpa, arpa,
nirodha It 45. as 6 (pathav etc.+ksa & via): D
iii.247; A i.175 sq.; M iii.31, 62, 240; Ps i.136; Vbh 82 sq.
as 7 (bh subha etc.): S ii.150. 18: Ps i.101, 137; ii.230,
Dhs 1333; Vbh 87 sq., 401 sq.; Vism 484 sq. 3. a humour or affection of the body DA i.253 (dhtusamat). 4.
the remains of the body after cremation PvA 76; a relic VvA
165 (sarra, bodily relic); Dvs v.3 (dasana the toothrelic).
abl. dhtuso according to one's nature S ii.154 sq. (satt
sattehi saddhi sasandanti etc.); It 70 (id.); S iii.65.
-kath N. of 3rd book of the Abhidhamma Vism 96.
-kucchi womb Miln 176; -kusala skilled in the elements M
iii.62; kusalat proficiency in the (18) elements D iii.212; Dhs
1333; -ghara "house for a relic," a dagoba SnA 194. -cetiya
a shrine over a relic DhA iii.29; -nnatta diversity of specific experience D iii.289; S ii.143; iv.113 sq., 284; -vibhga
distribution of relics VvA 297; PvA 212.
Dhtuka (adj.) (only ) having the nature, by nature, affected with, like (cp. dhamma B 2a ); often simply= first
part of cpd. (cp. E. friend like=friendly=friend) J i.438
(kiliha miserable), ii.31 (sama), 63 (badhira deaf), 102
(pauroga having jaundice), 114 (dhuttika); iv.137 (vmanaka deformed), 391 (muddh); v.197 (va); DhA i.89
(anattamana).
Dhtura (adj. ) [=*dhtuya] in cha consisting of six elements
(purisa) M iii.239 (where podhtu omitted by mistake). See
dhtu 2 c.
Dhna (adj. n.) [Sk. dhna, to dadhti; cp. dhtu] (adj.)
holding, containing () M i.11 (ahi kaaka; cp. dhna
& kaaka). (n.) nt. a receptacle Dh 58 (sankra dust
heap=hna DhA i.445). f. dhn a seat (=hna), in rja "the
king's seat," a royal town. Often in comb with gma & nigama
(see gma 3 a): Vin iii.89; J vi.397; Pv ii.1318 .
Dhniya (adj.) [Sk. dhnya, cp. dhaa2 ] wealthy, rich, abundant in () J iii.367 (pahtadhana; v. l. BB dhrita);
(nt.) riches, wealth J v.99, 100.
Dhra (adj.) () [Sk. dhra to dhreti; cp. dhara] bearing, holding, having D i.74 (udaka rahado stavri); M i.281 (ubhato) Sn 336 (ukk); It 101 (antimadeha), 108 (ukk). See
also dhrin.
Dhraka (adj. n.) 1. bearing, one who holds or possesses
381
Dhraka
Dhra
Dhr2 (f.) [Sk. dhr, from dhvati 2.] the edge of a weapon
J i.455; vi.449; DhA 317; DA i.37. (adj.) () having a
(sharp) edge J i.414 (khura) Miln 105 (sukhuma); ekato
ubhato single & double edged J i.73 (asi); iv.12 (sattha).
Dhrin (adj. ) [Sk. dhrin, see dhreti & cp. dhara, dhra]
holding, wearing, keeping; often in phrase antimadeha "wearing the last body" (of an Arahant) S i.14; Sn 471; It 32, 40. J
i.47 (virpa vesa); Dvs v.15. f. in Pv i.108 (ksikuttama).
Dhiti (f.) [Sk. dhti to dh, see dharati] energy, courage, steadfastness, firm character, resolution. S i.122, 215 =Sn 188 (cp.
SnA 237); J i.266, 280; iii.239; vi.373; Vbh 211; Dhs 13
(+thma), 22, 289, 571; Miln 23, 329; Sdhp 574. Equivalent
to "wisdom" (cp. juti & jutimant & Sk. dhti) in expl. of dhra
as "dhitisampanna" Nd1 44(see dhi2 ); PvA 131.
382
Dhra
Dhura
Dhuta (& Dhta) [cp. Sk. dhuta & dhta, pp. of dhunti] 1.
shaken, moved Dvs v.49 (vta). 2. lit. "shaken off," but
always expld in the commentaries as "one who shakes off" either cvil dispositions (kilese), or obstacles to spiritual progress
(vra, nvaraa). The word is rare. In one constantly repeated
passage (Vin i.45=305=ii.2=iii.21=iv.213) it is an adj. opposed to kosajja lazy, remiss; and means either scrupulous
or punctilious. At D i.5 it is used of a pain. At Sn 385 we
are told of a dhutadhamma, meaning a scrupulous way of
life, first for a bhikkhu, then for a layman. This poem omits
all higher doctrine and confines itself to scrupulousness as regards minor, elementary matters. Cp. Vism 61 for a defn of
dhuta.
-anga a set of practices leading to the state of or appropriate to a dhuta, that is to a scrupulous person First occurs in
a title suffixed to a passage in the Parivra deprecating such
practices. The passage occurs twice (Vin v.131, 193), but the
title, probably later than the text, is added only to the 2nd of
the two. The passage gives a list of 13 such practices, each
of them an ascetic practice not enjoined in the Vinaya. The 13
are also discussed at Vism 59 sq. The Milinda devotes a whole
book (chap. vi.) to the glorification of these 13 dhutangas, but
there is no evidence that they were ever widely adopted. Some
are deprecated at M i.282, & examples of one or other of them
are given at Vin iii.15; Bu i.59; J iii.342; iv.8; Miln 133, 348,
351; Vism 59 (kath), 65 (cora), 72 (id.), 80 (defn ); SnA
494; DhA i.68; ii.32 (dhtanga); iv.30. Nd1 188 says that 8 of
them are desirable. -dhara mindful of punctiliousness Miln
342 (raaka dh. jhyin). -vata the vow to perform the
dhutangas DhA vi.165. -vda one who inculcates punctiliousness S ii.156; A i.23; Miln 380; Vism 80; ThA 69; DhA
ii.30. -vdin= vda J i.130.
Dhura
Dhopana
Dhopana (nt.) [a variant of dhovana, q. v.] 1. ceremonial washing of the bones of the dead D i. 6; ahi-dhovana Bdhgh at
DA i.84; A v.216 (see Commentary at 364). 2. Surgical
384
Dhopana
Nakkhatta
washing of a wound J ii.117. 3. In vasadhopana, apparently a feat by acrobats J iv.390. It is possible that the passage
at D i. 6 really belongs here. See the note at Dial. i.9.
Dhorayha [for *dhor vayha=Sk. *dhaurvahya, abstr. fr. dhurvaha; may also directly correspond to the latter] "carrying a
yoke," a beast of burden S i.28; D iii.113 (purisa); A i.162.
-vata (nt.) the practice of carrying a burden, the state of a
beast of burden, drudgery S i.28; -sla accustomed to the yoke,
enduring; patient Dh 208 (=dhuravahana slatya dh. DhA
iii.272); -slin= sla J ii.97 (=dhura vahanaka crena
sampanna Com.).
N
Na1 [Sk. na (in cana) & n (in nn, vi n) Idg. pron. base *no,
cp. Gr. , ; Lat. n, nae surely, also encl. in ego ne
& in question utrune, nam; fuller form *eno, as in Sk. an
(adv.) anena, anay (instr. pron. 3rd); Gr. "that day";
Lat. enim] expletive emphatic particle, often used in comparative indefinite sense: just so, like this, as if, as (see cana
& cana) J v.339 (Com. cttha na kro upamne). Also as
na (cp. cana> cana) Vin ii.81, 186 (katha na=katha
nu); J ii.416; v.302; vi.213 (Com. p. 216: ettha eko na karo
pucchanattho hoti); Th 1, 1204; Miln 177. Perhaps at Sn 148
(kattha ci na, v. l. BB na; but Com. KhA 247= eta). To
this na belongs na3 ; see also nu & nanu.
out of a sentence negation or where a negated verb was substantified, e. g. (a) nacira (=acira) short, napparpa abundant,
napusaka neuter, neka (=aneka) several; (b) natthi, natthika
etc. (q. v.).
Na3 [identical with na1 ] base of demonstr. pron. 3rd pers. (=ta),
only in foll. cases: acc. sg. na (mostly enclitic), fuller form
ena him, her, that one etc. Sn 139, 201, 385, 418, 980, 1076;
It 32; Dh 42, 230; J i.152, 172, 222; iii.281; KhA 220; DhA
i.181; iii.173; PvA 3, 68, 73.
acc. pl. ne them It 110 (v. l. te); Sn 223 (=te manusse
KhA 169); J ii.417; iii.204; v.458; DhA i.8, 13, 61, 101, 390;
VvA 299. gen. dat. pl. nesa D i.175, 191; It 63; J i.153;
DhA iv.41; VvA 37, 136.; PvA 54, 201, 207. See also cna; cp.
nava2 .
Nakkhatta
Nanguha
Nakha [Ved. nakha, cp. Sk. anghri foot; Gr. (claw, nail),
Lat. unguis=Oir. inga; Ohg. nagal=E. nail] a nail of finger
or toe, a claw Vin ii.133; Sn 610 (na angulhi nakhehi v); J
v.489 (pacanakh satt five nailed or toed beings); Kh
ii.=Miln 26, cp. taca (pacatacaka); KhA 43; VvA 7 (dasa
nakhasamodhna putting the 10 fingers together); PvA 152,
192; Sdhp 104.
Naga [Sk. naga tree & mountain, referred by Fausbll & Uhlenbeck to na+gacchati, i. e. immovable (=sthvara), more
probably however with Lidn (see Walde under nvis) to Ohg.
nahho, Ags. naca "boat=tree"; semantically mountain=trees,
Nanguha
Nanda
480 (panther); iv.256 (of a deer); DhA i.275 (of a fish); ii.64.
(+micchdihika).
Nangula (nt.) [Sk. lngla to langa & lagati (q. v.). cp. Gr.
, Lat. langueo] a tail Th 1, 113=601 (go).
Natthit (f.) [Sk. nstit, fr. n' atthi] nihilism S ii.17; J v.110.
Natthu [cp. Sk. nas f. & nasta, see etym. under ns] 1. the
nose J v.166 (=ns Com.). 2.=kamma, medical treatment
through the nose Vin iii.83 (deti).
-kamma nose treatment, consisting in the application
of hot oil (DA i.98: tela yojetv n karaa) D i.12; Vin
i.204; M i.511; DhA i.12; -kara a pockethandkerchief Vin
i.204.
Naccaka [Sk. *ntyaka, distinguished from but ultimately identical with naaka, q. v.] a dancer, (pantomimic) actor Miln 191,
331, 359 (naa). f. naccak Vin ii.12.
Nadana (nt.) [cp. Sk. nadanu] roaring J i.19 (shanda the sound
of a lion's roar).
Naccati [Ved. ntyati nt, cp. nacca & naati] to dance, play Vin
ii.10; J i.292; Vv 501 (=naati VvA 210); 6421 . pp. naccento D i.135; fut. naccissati Vin ii.12; aor. nacci J iii.127;
inf. naccitu J i.207. Caus. naccpeti to make play Vism
305 (so read for nacch).
Nadita (nt.) [cp. Sk. ndita, pp. of caus. nadayati] roar, noise J
ii.110.
Nad (f.) [Ved. nad, from nadati="the roaring," cp. also nandati]
a river; often characterised as mah in opp. to kun rivulet; pl.
nadiyo also collect. "the waters." D i.244 (Aciravat nad);
S ii.32, 118, 135; v.390; A i.33, 136, 243 (mah); ii.55, 140
(mah); iii.52; iv.101 (m), 137; Sn 425, 433, 568, 720; Dh
251; J i.296; ii.102; iii.51; iii.91 (Kebuk); v.269 (Vetara);
vi.518 (Ketumat); Pv iv.354 ; Vism 468 (sghasot); PvA 256
(m); Sdhp 21, 194, 574. gen. sg. nadiy J i.278; It 113;
instr. nadiy J i.278; PvA 46; pl. nom. nadiyo Miln 114 (na
t n. dhuva salil), najjo PvA 29 (mah); & najjyo J
vi.278; gen nadna Vin i.246=Sn 569 (n. sgaro mukha).
kunnad a small river S i.109; ii.32, 118; v.47, 63; A ii.140;
iv.100; V.114 sq. On n. in similes see J.P.T.S. 1906, 100.
-kuja a river glen DA i.209; -kla the bank of a river
Cp. iii.71 ; -tra=kla J i.278; -dugga a difficult ford in a
river S ii.198; -vidugga=dugga A i.35; iii.128.
Naddha [Sk. naddha pp. of nah, see nayhati] tied, bound, fastened, put on J i.175 (rathavaratta); Bu i.31 (camma, of a
drum); Mhvs vii.16 (pacyudha); Miln 117 (yuga); DhsA
131. Cp. onaddha, vi, san.
Nata [Sk. nata, pp. of namati, q. v.] bent (on) S i.186 (a); Sn
1143; Nd2 327.
Nanandar (f.) [Sk. nannd & nannd, to nan "mother"] husband's sister J v.269 (=smikassa bhagin p. 275).
Natta (nt.) [Sk. nakta, see nakkhatta] night, acc. natta by night,
in nattam-aha by day & by night Sn 1070 (v. l. BB and Nd2
rattamaha).
Natthika (adj. n.) [Sk. nstika] one who professes the motto
of "natthi," a sceptic, nihilist S i.96; usually in cpds.
-dihi scepticism, nihilistic view, heresy Sn 243 (=micchditthi Com.); VvA 342; PvA 244; -vda one who professes a nihilistic doctrine S iii.73; M i.403; A ii.31; PvA 215
387
Nanda
Naya
sex; lit. Vism 548, 553; ThA 260; Vbh 417; in gram. of the
neuter gender Kacc. 50; PvA 266 (is reading correct?)
Nabha (nt.) & Nabhas (in oblique cases) [Sk. nabhas; Gr.
& , Lat. nebula, Oir. nl, Ags. nifol (darkness), Ohg.
nebul. See also abbha] mist, vapour, clouds, sky A i.242; ii.50
(nabh), iii.240, Sn 687 (nabhasi gama, of the moon); Vv
323 , 352 (=ksa VvA 161), 534 (id. 236), 6327 (id. 268); PvA
65; Mhvs vii.9 (nabhas instr.).
Namati [Ved. namati, Idg. *nem to bend; also to share out, cp.
Gr. , Goth. niman=Ger. nehmen. See cognates in Walde
loc. cit. under nemus] to bend, bend down (trs. & instr.) direct, apply S i.137 (citta); Sn 806; J i.61 (aor. nami, citta).
Caus. nameti (not nmeti, Fsb. to Sn 1143 nmenti, which
is to be corrected to n' penti) to bend, to wield Dh 80=145
(namayati). As nmeti at J vi.349. pp. namita (q. v.).
Nandi1 & (freq.) Nand (f.) [Sk. nandi, but cp. BSk. nand Divy
37] 1. joy, enjoyment, pleasure, delight in (c. loc.) S i.16,
39, 54; ii.101 sq. (hre); iii.14 (=updna); iv.36 sq.; A ii.10
(kma, bhava, dihi), iii.246; iv.423 sq. (dhamma); Sn
1055 (+nivesana); Nd2 330 (=tah); Pug 57; Dhs 1059(in
def. of tah); Vbh 145, 356, 361; DhsA 363; ThA 65, 167.
For nand at Miln 289 read tand. 2. a musical instrument: joy drum [Sk. nand] Vin iii.108 (=vijayabheri). Cp.
.
-(y)vatta "turning auspiciously" (i. e. turning to the
right: see dakkhivatta), auspicious, good Nett 2, 4, 7, 113
(always attr. of naya); -pasecana (rgasalla) sprinkled over
with joy, having joy as its sauce Nett 116, 117; cp. maspasecana (odana) J iii.144=vi.24; -kkhaya the destruction of
(finding) delight S iii.51; -()jaha giving up or abandoning
joy Sn 1101 (+okajaha & kappajaha); Nd2 331; -bhava existence of joy, being full of joy, in parikkha one in whom
joy is extinct (i. e. an Arahant), expld however by Com.
as one who has rid himself of the craving for rebirth (tsu
bhavesu parikkhnataha DhA iv.192=SnA 469) S i.2, 53; Sn
175, 637=Dh 413; -mukh (adj. f.) "joyfaced," showing
a merry face, Ep. of the night (esp. the eve of the uposatha)
Vin i.288 (ratti); ii.236 (id.); -rga pleasure & lust, passionate delight S ii.227; iii.51; iv.142, 174, 180; M i.145; Dhs
1059, 1136; esp. as attr. of tah in phrase n r sahagata tah (cp. M Vastu iii.332: nandrgasahagat tr)
Vin i.10; S iii.158; v.425 sq.; Ps ii.137; Nett 72; -sayojana
the fetter of finding delight in anything Sn 1109, 1115; Nd2
332; -samudaya the rise or origin of delight M iii.267.
Namo (nt.) & Nama (nt.) [Ved. namas, cp. Av. nmo prayer;
Gr. , Lat. nemus (see namati)] nomage, veneration,
esp. used as an exclamation of adoration at the beginning of a
book (namo tassa Bhagavato Arahato Sammsambuddhassa)
Sn 540, 544; PvA 1, 67.
Nandhati [for nayhati, der. fr. naddha after analogy of baddha>bandhati] meaning not so much "to bind" as "to cover":
see apiandhati, upanandhati, onandhati, pariyonandhati.
Naya (adj. n.) [from nayati, to lead, see neti] "leading"; usually m: way (fig.), method, plan, manner; inference; sense,
meaning (in grammar); behaviour, conduct A ii.193=Nd2 151
(hetu through inference); Nett 2 (method), 4 (id.), 7, 113;
Miln 316 (nayena=nayahetu); KhA 74; VvA 112 (sense, context, sentence); PvA 1 (ways or conduct), 117 (meaning), 126
(id.), 136, 280. naya neti to draw a conclusion, apply an
inference, judge, behave S ii.58=Vbh 329; J iv.241 (anaya
Nandi2 =nandhi.
388
Naya
Nava
nayati dummedho: draws a wrong conclusion); PvA 227 (+anuminti). With di N. has the function of continuing or
completing the context= "and similarly," e. g. dinaya
pavatta dealing with this & the following VvA 2;... ti din
nayena thus & similarly, & so forth J i.81; PvA 30. Instr.
nayena () as adv. in the way of, as, according(ly): gata
according to what has been shown or said in... J i.59; VvA
3; PvA 280; purima as before J i.59; iv.140; vutta as said
(above) (cp. vutta niymena) PvA 13, 29, 36, 71, 92 etc.
sunaya a sound judgment J iv.241; dunnaya a wrong principle, method or judgment, or as adj.: wrongly inferred, hard
to be understood, unintelligible A iii.178=Nett 21; J iv.241.
ii.228 (nagra); -aggi a fire of reeds J vi.100 (vaa pabbata); -kalp a bundle of r. S ii.114; -kra a worker in
reeds, basket maker; D i.51 (+pesakra & kumbhakra); J
v.291; ThA 28; PvA 175 (+vilvakra); DhA i.177; -daaka
a shaft of r. J i.170; -maya made of r. Vin ii.115; -vana a
thicket of reeds J iv.140; Miln 342; -sannibha reedcoloured
J vi.537 (Com.: naa puppha vaa rukkhasunakha);
-setu a bridge of reeds Sn 4.
Naapin a water animal J vi.537.
Nala (nt.) [Ved. lala=rara; on n>l cp. nangala] the forehead S i.118; J iii.393; iv.417 (nalena maccu dya: by his
forelock); Vism 185; DhA i.253.
-anta the side of the forehead J vi.331; -maala the
round of the f. D i.106; Sn p. 108.
Nayhati [Ved. nahyati, Idg. *nedh as in Lat. nodus & Ved. nahu]
to tie, bind; only in comp. with prep. as upanayhati (cp. uphan sandal), pilandhati etc. pp. naddha (q. v.). See also
nandhi, nha; onayhati, unnahan, piayhati.
Nava1 (num.) [Ved. navan, Idg. *nen, cp. Lat. novem (*noven),
Gr. , Goth. niun, Oir. nin, E. nine. Connection with
nava2 likely because in counting by tetrads (octo=8 is a dual!)
a new series begins with No. 9] number nine. gen. dat.
navanna (Sn p. 87); instr. abl. navahi (VvA 76), loc.
navasu.
Meaning and Application: The primitive Aryan importance of the "mystic" nine is not found in Buddhism and can
only be traced in Pali in folkloristic undercurrents (as fairy
tales) & stereotype traditions in which 9 appears as a number implying a higher trinity=32 . 1. navabhmaka psda
(a palace 9 stories high more freq. satta, 7) J i.58; nava
hiraakohi (w. 9 kois of gold) VvA 188; nava yojana
DhA ii.65. 2. navangabuddhassana "the 9 fold teaching of Buddha," i. e. the 9 divisions of the Buddh. Scriptures according to their form or style, viz. sutta geyya
veyykaraa gth udna itivuttaka jtaka abbhutadhamma vedalla M i.133; A ii.103, 178; iii.86 sq., 177 sq.;
Pug 43; Miln 344; Dpvs iv.15; PvA 2. Cp. chaanga. nava
sattvs "9 abodes of beings" Kh iv. (in exemplifying No.
9), viz. (see D iii.263=KhA 86, 87 cp. also A iv.39 sq.) (1)
manuss, dev, viniptik; (2) Brahmakyik dev; (3) bhassar; (4) Subhakih; (5) Asaasatt; (6) ksanacyatana
upag; (7) Vianacyatana; (8) kicayatana;
(9) Nevasasayatana. nava sot (Sn 197) or nava
dvr (VvA 76; v. l. mukh) 9 openings of the body, viz.
(SnA 248) 2 eyes, ears, nostrils, mouth, anus & urethra (cp.
S.B.E. 39, 180; 40, 259 sq.). nava vitakk 9 thoughts Nd2
269 (q. v.). 3. a trace of the week of 9 days is to be found
in the expression "navuti vassasatasahass yuk" giving
the age of a divinity as 9 million years (=a divine week) VvA
345. Cp. navuti.
Nava2 (adj.) [Ved. nava, Idg. *nen (cp. nava1 )=Lat. novus,
Gr. (*v), Lith. navas; Goth. niujis etc.=E. new; also
Sk. navya=Gr. , Lat. Novius. May be related to na3 ]
1. new, fresh; unsoiled, clean; of late, lately acquired or practised (opp. pubba & pura). Often syn. with tarua. Sn 28,
235 (opp. pura), 944 (id.), 913 (opp. pubba); Pv i.92 (of
clothes=costly); J iv.201 (opp. pura); Miln 132 (salila fresh
water). 2. young, unexperienced, newly initiated; a novice
Nala & Naa [Ved. naa & Sk. naa, with dial. () for *narda,
cp. Gr. ] a species of reed; reed in general Vin iv.35; A
ii.73; Dh 337; Nd2 680ii ; J i.223; iv.141, 396 (n. va chinno);
Pv i.116 (id.); DhA iii.156; iv.43. See also na, n & nik.
-gra a house built of reeds S i.156; iv.185 (+tigra);
A i.101 (+tigra); Nd2 40d (id.), Miln 245; cp. Av Index
389
Nava
Nga
Vin i.47 (nav bhikkh the younger bhs., opp. ther); S i.9
(+acira pabbajita); ii.218; Sn p. 93 (Gotamo navo pabbajjya "a novice in the Wanderer's life"); DhA i.92 (bhikkhu).
-kamma building new, making repairs, "doing up," mending Vin ii.119, 159; iii.81; J i.92; iv.378; Nd2 385; -kammika
an expert in making repairs or in building, a builder (cp.
vahaki) Vin ii.15; iv.211; -ghata fresh ghee J ii.433 (v. l.
sappi).
Nahru & Nhru [Sk. snyu, Idg. *sn to sew, cp. Gr. ,
, (thread); Ohg. njan; also Gr. (=Lat.
nervus); Ags. sinu (=sinew); Ohg. senawa; Goth. nepla=Ags.
ndl (=needle); Oir. sntha (thread); Ohg. snuor (cord)=Ags.
snd] sinew, tendon, muscle. In the anatomy of the body n.
occupies the place between masa (flesh, soft flesh) & ahi
(bone), as is seen from ster. sequence chavi, camma, masa,
nahru, ahi, ahi mija (e. g. at Vin i.25; J iii.84). See
also defn in detail at SnA 246 sq. & KhA 47. Vin i.25
(nh); M i.429 (used for bow strings); A i.50; iii.324; iv.47 sq.
(daddula), 129; Kh 111.; Sn 194 (ahi) Nd2 97 (nh); DhA
iii.118; ThA 257 (nh); PvA 68 (ahi camma), 80 (camma
masa); Sdhp 46, 103.
Nahna (nt.) [Sk. snna] bathing, a bath Vin i.47, 51= ii.224;
i.196 (dhuva constant bathing), 197; S i.183; v.390 (fig.); J
i.265; PvA 50; Vism 27.
-kla bathing time PvA 46; -kohaka bath room DhA
iii.88; -garuka fond of bathing Vin i.196; -cua bath powder (cp. nahniya) DhA i.398; -tittha a shallow place for
bathing DhA i.3; iii.79.
390
Nga
Nma
of nalo va chinno).
Nnatta (nt. m.) [Sk. nnatva; abstr. fr. nn] diversity, variety, manifoldness, multiformity, distraction; all sorts of (opp.
ekatta, cp. M i.364: "the multiformity of sensuous impressions," M.A.). Enumn of diversity as nnatt, viz. dhtu
phassa vedan sa sankappa chanda pariha pariyesan lbha D iii.289; S ii.140 sq., cp. iv.113 sq., 284 sq.; Ps
i.87. A iv.385; Ps i.63 sq., 88 sq.; S ii.115 (vedan); Ps i.91
(sampatti & vihra); J ii.265. In composition, substituted
sometimes for nna. Cp. Dialogues i.14, n. 2.
-kath desultory talk, gossip D i.8; (=niratthakakath DA
i.90); S v.420; -kya (adj.) having a variety of bodies or bodily states (combd with or opp. to ekatta, nnatta sain, &
ekatta sain), appl. to manuss, dev, viniptik (cp. nava
sattvs) A iv.39 sq.=Nd2 5702 ; D iii.253, 263, 282; -sa
consciousness of diversity (Rh. D.: "idea of multiformity,"
Dial. ii.119; Mrs. Rh. D. "consciousness of the manifold") M
i.3; S iv.113 sq.; D iii.224, 262 sq., 282; A i.41, 267; ii.184;
iii.306; Ps ii.172; Dhs 265 (cp. trsl. p. 72); Vbh 342, 369;
-sain having a varying consciousness (cp. kya), D i.31
(cp. DA i.119) 183; iii.263.
Nnattat (f.) [2nd abstr. to nn]=nnatta, diversity (of states
of mind). Seven sorts at Vbh 425: rammaa manasikra
chanda paidha adhimokkha abhinhra pa.
Nn (adv.) [Ved. nn, a redupl. n (emphatic particle, see na1 )
"so and so," i. e. various, of all kinds] variously, differently.
1. (abs.) A i.138 (on different sides, viz. right
1 285), 884 sq. 2. more frequently in cpds., as first
part of adj. or n. where it may be trsld as "different, divers, all
kinds of" etc. Before a double cons. the final is shortened:
nnagga (for nn+agga), nnappakra etc. see below.
-agga ( rasa) all the choicest delicacies J i.266
(bhojana, of food); vi.366; PvA 155 (dibbabhojana); dhimuttikat diversity of dispositions DA i.44; Nett 98; vudh (pl.) various weapons J i.150; -karaa difference,
diversity Vin i.339 (sangha); M ii.128; cp. Divy 222; -gotta
of all kinds of descent Pv ii.916 ; -citta of varying mind J i.295
(itthiyo); -jana all kinds of folk Sn 1102; Nd1 308 (puthu);
-titthiya of var. sects D iii.16 sq.; -pakkra various, manifold J i.52 (saku), 127, 278 (phalni); DAi. 148 (vudh);
PvA 50, 123, 135; -ratta multi coloured Sn 287; J vi.230;
-ras (pl.) all kinds of dainties Pv ii.911 ; -vda difference
of opinion D i.236; -vidha divers, various, motley PvA 53,
96, 113, and passim; -savsaka living in a different part, or
living apart Vin i.134 sq. (opp. samna), 321; ii.162.
Nbhi & Nbh (f.) [Vedic nbhi, nbh; Av. nab; Gr.
(navel); Lat. umbo & umbilicus; Oir. imbliu (navel); Ags.
nafu; Ohg. naba (nave), Ger. nabel=E. nave & navel] 1. the
navel A iii.240; J i.238; DA i.254 (where it is said that the
Vess (Vaiyas) have sprung from the navel of Brahm). 2.
the nave of a wheel Vv 644 (pl. nabhyo & nabbho SS=nbhiyo
VvA 276); J i.64; iv.277; Miln 115.
Nda [Sk. nda, see nadati] loud sound, roaring, roar J i.19
(sha), 50 (koca), 150 (mah). Cp. pa.
391
Nma
Nv
Nv
Nikanti
bits long); Dvs iv.42; PvA 47, 53; Sdhp 321. In simile Vism
690.
-tittha a ferry J iii.230; -sacaraa (a place for) the traffic of boats, a port Miln 359.
Nvyika [Sk. nvja=Gr. , cp. Lat. navigo] a mariner,
sailor, skipper Miln 365.
Nvika [Sk. nvika] 1. a sailor, mariner J ii.103; iv.142; Miln
359; Dvs iv.43 (captain). 2. a ferryman J ii.111; iii.230
(Avariya pit.).
Nvutika (adj.) [fr. navuti] 90 years old J iii.395 ( itthi); SnA
172.
Nsa [Sk. na, see nassati] destruction, ruin, death J i.5, 256;
Sdhp 58, 319. Usually vi, also adj. vinsaka. Cp. panassati.
Nsana (nt.) [Sk. nana] destruction, abandoning, expulsion, in
antika (adj.) a bhikkhu who is under the penalty of expulsion
Vin i.255.
Ns (f.) [Vedic ns (du.); Lat. nris, Ohg. nasa, Ags. nasu] 1.
the nose, Sn 198, 608. 2. the trunk (of an elephant) J v.297
(nga uru); Sdhp 153.
-pua "nose cup"; the outside of the nose, the nostril J
vi.74; Vism 195 (nsa), 264 (nsa, but KhA 67 ns), 283
(nsa). -vta wind, i. e. breath from the nostrils J iii.276.
Nsika (adj.) [cp. Sk. nsikya] belonging to the nose, nasal, in
sota the nostril or nose (orig. "sense of smell") D i.106; Sn
p. 108.
Nsitaka (adj.) [see nsa & nseti] one who is ejected Vin iv.140
(of a bhikkhu).
Nseti [Sk. nayati, Caus. of nassati, q. v.] 1. to destroy, spoil,
ruin; to kill J i.59; ii.105, 150; iii.279, 418. 2. to atone for
a fault (with abl.) Vin i.85, 86, 173 etc. Cp. vi.
Nha (nt.) [cp. nayhati, naddha] armour J i.358 (sabba- sannaddha). Cp. onha.
393
Nikanti
Nikkamati
DA i.160 (nikk).
Niksin (adj.) [cp. Sk. nikin; fr. ni+ksati] "shining," resembling, like J iii.320 (aggi niksin suriyena).
Nikiita (adj.) [Sk. *nikrita, pp. of nikrayati, ni+ kati] engrossed in play J vi.313.
Nikujja see nikkujja, q. v. also for nikujjita which is more correctly spelt k than kk (cp. Trenckner, Preface to Majjhima
Nikya & see ni A 1).
394
Nikkamati
Nikkhipati
Nikkmin (adj.)
[nis+kmin]=nikkma Sn 228 (=katanikkhamana KhA 184).
Nikkra (abl.=adv.) [Sk. nikra, nis+kraa] without reason, without cause or purpose Sn 75 (=akra ahetu Nd2 341).
Nikksa is Bdhgh's reading for ikksa (q. v.) Vin ii.151, with C.
on p. 321.
Nikkiati [Sk. nikriti, nis+kiti] to buy back, to redeem J
vi.576, 585; Miln 284.
Nikkia (adj.) [Sk. nikra, nis+kia, see kiraa] spread out,
spread before, ready (for eating) J vi.182 (=hapita Com.).
Nikkilesa [nis+kilesa] freedom fr. moral blemish Nd1 340=Nd2
under pucch Nd2 185; as adj. pure, unstained DhA
iv.192=SnA 469 (=anvila).
Nikkujja (adj.) [ni+kubja, better spelling is nikujja see nikkujjati]
bent down, i. e. head forward, lying on one's face; upset,
thrown over A i.130; S v.48; Pv iv.77 (k); Pug 31. Opp. ukkujja.
Nikkhamana [BSk. nikramaa, to nikkhamati] going out, departing J ii.153; VvA 71 (opp. pavesana); fig. renunciation
KhA 184 (kata as adj.=nikkmin). See also abhi.
Nikkujjati [for nikujjati (q. v.) through analogy with opp. ukkujjati. Etym. perhaps to kujja humpback, Sk. kubja, but better
with Kern, Toev. 1. p. 175= Sk. nyubjati, influenced by kubja
with regard to k.] to turn upside down, to upset Vin ii.113; A
iv.344 (patta). pp. nikkujjita.
Nikkujjita (adj.) [pp. of nikkujjati; often (rightly) spelt nikujjita, q. v.] lying face downward, overturned, upset, fallen
over, stumbled Vin i.16; D i.85, 110; 147, M i.24 (k.); A i.173;
iii.238; Th 2, 28, 30 (k.); J iii.277; SnA 155 (=adhomukha
hapita); DA i.228.
395
Nikkhipati
Niggamana
Nikkhipati [Sk. nikipati, ni+khipati] 1. to lay down (carefully), to put down, to lay (an egg) Vin ii.114; It 13, 14 (Pot.
nikkhipeyya); Pug 34; J i.49 (aaka). 2. to lay aside, to
put away Vin i.46 (patta cvara); A i.206 (daa to discard the weapon; see daa); Mhvs 14, 10 (dhanu sara).
3. to eliminate, get rid of, give up Pv ii.615 (deha to get rid
of the body); DhsA 344 (vitthra desana). 4. to give
in charge, to deposit, entrust, save Pug 26; VvA 33 (sahassathavika). aor. nikkhipi D ii.161 (Bhagavato sarra) J
ii.104, 111, 416; fut. issati D ii.157 (samussaya); ger. itv
M iii.156 (citta); J ii.416; vi.366; grd. itabba Vin i.46.
pp. nikkhitta (q. v.). Caus. nikkhippeti to cause to be
laid down, to order to be put down etc. PvA 215 (gossahi).
Cp. abhi.
putta, the head of that Order, cp. D i.57; also Sho senpati n
svako); S i.78, 82 (bhikkh); A i.205 sq. (uposatha), cp.
220; ii.196 (svaka); iii.276, 383; v.150 (dasahi asaddhammehi samanngata); Sn 381; Ud 65 (jail, n., acel, ekast,
paribbjak); J ii.262 (object to eating flesh); DA i.162; DhA
i.440; iii.489; VvA 29 (n. nma samaajti). f. nigah
D i.54 (nigahi gabbha).
Nigati (f.) [ni+gati, q. v.] destiny, condition, behaviour J vi.238.
See also niyati & cp. niggatika.
Nigama [Sk. nigama, fr. nigacchati=a meeting place or market, cp. E. moot hall=market hall] a small town, market
town (opp. janapada); often combd with gma (see gma 2)
Vin i.110 (sma), 188 (kath), 197 (Setakaika); D i.7
(kath), 101 (smanta), 193, 237; M i.429, 488; Pv ii.1318 ; J
vi.330; PvA 111 (Asitajana, v. l. BB nagara). Cp. negama.
Nigamana (nt.) [Sk. nigamana] quotation, explanation, illustration Vism 427 (vacana quotation); PvA 255 (perhaps we
should read niyamana); conclusion, e. g. Pah.A 366; VbhA
523.
Nigaa [Sk. nigaa, ni+gaa, cp. gala3 ] an (iron) chain for the feet
J i.394; ii.153; vi.64 (here as "bracelet").
Nighika (better v. l. nighita) [Sk. nighita; ni+ ghita, see
gha2 ] sunk down into, immersed in Th 1, 568 (gthakpe).
Nighana (nt.) [Sk. nighana, see nighati] covering, concealing, hiding VvA 71.
Nikhta [pp. of nikhaati] 1. dug, dug out (of a hole), buried (of
a body) SnA 519. 2. dug in, erected (of a post) Sn 28; DhA
ii.181 (nagara dvre n. indakhla). See also a.
Nikhdana (nt.) [Sk. *nikhdana, ni+khdati, cp. khdana] "eating down," a sharp instrument, a spade or (acc. to Morris,
J.P.T.S. 1884, 83) a chisel Vin iii.149; iv.211; J ii.405 (so read
for khdana); iv.344; v.45.
Nikhila (adj.) [Sk. nikhila cp. khila] all, entire, whole Dvs v.40
(loka v. l. sakala).
Nikha (adj.) [nis+kha] having or being lost J vi.499 (patta
without wings, deprived of its wings).
Niga in gavaya gokaa nig dna DhsA 331 is misprint for miga.
Nigacchati [Sk. nigacchati, ni+gacchati] to go down to, to "undergo," incur, enter, come to; to suffer esp. with dukkha
& similar expressions of affliction or punishment S iv.70
(dukkha); M i.337 sq. (id.); A i.251 (bandhana); Dh
69 (dukkha=vindati, pailabhati DhA ii.50), 137; Nd2 1994
(maraa+maraamattam pi dukkha) Pv iv.77 (pret. nigacchiha=ppui PvA 266).
Nigaha [BSk. nirgrantha (Divy 143, 262 etc.) "freed from all
ties," nis+gahi. This is the customary (correct?) etym. Prk.
niggantha, cp. Weber, Bhagavat p. 165] a member of the Jain
order (see M i.370 375, 380 & cp. jaila) Vin i.233 (Nta-
Niggamana
Nicca
Niggayha-vdin (adj.) [see niggahti] one who speaks rebukingly, censuring, reproving, resenting Dh 76 (see expln in detail at DhA ii.107 & cp. M iii.118).
Niggayhati [Sk. nighyate, ni+gayhati, Pass. of niggahti] to be
seized by (?), to be blamed for DhA i.295 (citta dukkhena
n., in expln of dunniggaha).
Niggaha [Sk. nigraha, ni+gaha2 ; see niggahti] 1. restraint, control, rebuke, censure, blame Vin ii.196; A i.98, 174; v.70; J
v.116 (opp. paggaha); vi.371 (id.); Miln 28, 45, 224. dun
hard to control (citta) Dh 35 (cp. expl. at DhA i.295). 2.
(log.) refutation Kvu 3.
Niggahaat (f.) [abstr. fr. ni+gh, cp. next] restraint Vism 134
(cittassa). Opp. pagg.
Nighta [Sk. nighta, ni+ghta] striking down, suppressing, destroying, killing M i.430; Nett 189. Cp. nighti.
Nighti [ni+ghti] "slaying or being slain," defeat, loss (opp. ugghti) Sn 828. Cp. nighta.
Nicaya [Sk. nicaya, ni+caya, cp. nicita] heaping up, accumulation; wealth, provisions S i.93, 97; Vin v.172 (sannidhi). See
also necayika.
Nicita (adj.) [Sk. nicita, ni+cita, of nicinti] heaped up, full, thick,
massed, dense Th 2, 480 (of hair); PvA 221 (ussanna uparpari
nicita, of Niraya).
Nigrodha [Sk. nyagrodha; Non Aryan?] the banyan or Indian fig tree, Ficus Indica, usually as cpd. rukkha Vin
iv.35; D ii.4; Sn 272; J iii.188 (r.) DhA ii.14 (r.); PvA 5 (r.)
112, 244; Sdhp 270; -pakka the fruit of the fig tree Vism
409. -parimaala the round or circumference of the banyan
D ii.18; iii.144, 162.
Nigha1 (ngha) (adj. n.) is invented by Com. & scholiasts to
explain the combn anigha (angha sporadic, e. g. S v.57). But
this should be divided an-gha instead of a-ngha. (m.)
rage, trembling, confusion, only in formula rgo n. doso n.
moho n. explaining the adj. angha. Thus at S iv.292=Nd2
397
Nicca
Nijjareti
Nija (adj.) [Sk. nija, wth dial. j. for nitya=P. nicca] own Dvs
ii.68. Cp. niya.
Nijana (nt.) [fr. nij] washing, cleansing Vism 342 (v. l. nijj).
Nicchaya [Sk. nicaya, nis+caya of cinti] discrimination, conviction, certainty; resolution, determination J i.441 (mitta a
firm friend); DhsA 133 (adhimokkha=its paccupahna); SnA
60 (daha adj. of firm resolution). See vi.
Niccharaa (nt.) [fr. niccharati] emanation, sending out, expansion, efflux Vism 303.
Nijigisitar (n. adj.) [n. ag. fr. prec.] one who desires ardently,
covetous, rapacious D i.8 (lbha) A iii.111 (id.).
Nijjareti [Sk. nir jarayati; nis+jarati1 ] to destroy, annihilate, cause to cease or exist M i.93; Th 2, 431 (nijja-
398
Nijjareti
Nihta
Nih2 (f.) [Vedic nih (nih), nis+h from ha] end, conclusion; perfection, height, summit; object, aim Vin i.255;
S ii.186; A i.279 (object); Ps i.161. niha gacchati to
come to an end; fig. to reach perfection, be completed in the
faith M i.176; J i.201; Miln 310; freq. in pp. niha gata
(nihangata) one who has attained perfection (=pabbajitna
arahatta patta) DhA iv.70; S iii.99 (a); A ii.175; iii.450;
v.119 sq.; Dh 351; Ps i.81, 161.
Nihna (nt.) [abstr. of nihti] being finished, carrying out, execution, performance D i.141; ThA 19 (=avasya). Cp. san.
Nihpita (& nihapita) [pp. of nihpeti] accomplished, performed, carried out J i.86, 172 (ha), 201.
Nijjhna1 (nt.) [*Sk. nidhyna, ni+jhna1 ] understanding, insight, perception, comprehension; favour, indulgence (=nijjhpana), pleasure, delight J vi.207. Often as khamati:
to be pleased with, to find pleasure in: S iii.225, 228; M i.133,
480; Vv 8417 . Thus also dihinijjhna kkhanti delighting
in speculation A i.189 sq.; ii.191. Cp. upa.
Nijjhpaya (adj.) [Sk. *ni dhypya, to nijjhpeti] to be discriminated or understood, in dun hard to... Miln 141 (paha).
Nijjhpeti [Sk. nidhyayati, ni+jhpeti, Caus. to jhyati1 ; cp. Sk.
nididhysate] to make favourably disposed, to win somebody's
affection, or favour, to gain over Vin ii.96; M i.321; J iv.108;
414, 495; vi.516; Miln 264; VvA 265 (nijjhpita=nijjhatta).
Nihuriya (nt.) [cp. Sk. nihuratva] hardness, harshness, roughness Nd1 440; Nd2 484 (in exegesis of makkha)= Vbh 357.
Niha (adj.) [Sk. niha, ni+tha; cp. nih ] dependent on, resting on, intent upon S iii.13 (accanta); Nd1 263 (rpa).
Nih (f.) [Sk. nih; ni+h, abstr. of adj. suff. ha] basis,
foundation, familiarity with Sn 864 (expl. SnA 551 by samid-
399
Nihta
Nidd
Nidassana (nt.) [Sk. nidarana, ni+dassana] "pointing at" evidence, example, comparison, apposition, attribute, characteristic; sign, term D i.223 (a with no attribute); iii.217 (id.); S
iv.370 (id.); A iv.305 sq. (nla, pta etc.); Sn 137; Vbh 13,
64, 70 sq. (sa, a); VvA 12, 13; PvA 26, 121 (pucchankra)
226 (paccakkhabhta n. "sign, token").
Nidasseti [Sk. nidarayati, ni+dasseti] to point out ("down"), explain, show, define VvA 12, 13 (etabbavacana the word to be
compared or defined, correl. to nidassana vacana). pp.
nidassita (q. v.).
Nidahati [Sk. nidadhti, ni+dahati1 ] to lay down or aside, deposit; accumulate, hoard, bury (a treasure) Vin i.46 (cvara);
Miln 271; ger. nidahitv PvA 97 (dhanadhaa) & nidhya
Dh 142, 405; Sn 35 (daa), 394, 629; Nd2 348; pres.
also nidheti KhA 217, 219; fut. nidhessati PvA 132. Pass.
nidhyati KhA 217. Caus. nidhpeti PvA 130 (bhoge). See
also nidhaka, nidhna & nidhi; also upanidhya.
Nidhaka (adj.) [fr. nidahati] one who puts away, one who has
the office of keeper or warder (of robes: cvara) Vin i.284.
l.
niddh=nidd; cp.
400
Nidd
Nidhi
meanings of niddhvati (dhvati1 & 2 ): see niddhpeti, niddhamana, & niddhovati] to blow away, blow off; to clean,
cleanse, purify; to throw out, eject, remove Sn 281=Miln 414
(kraava); Sn 282 (itv ppicche), 962 (mala=pajahati
(Nd1 478); Dh 239 (id.); Miln 43. pp. niddhanta).
Nidd (f.) [Vedic nidr, ni+dr in Sk. drti, dryate, Idg. *dor;
cp. Gr. (hom.) , Lat. dormio] sleep A ii.48, 50;
iii.251; Sn 926 (opp. jgariy), 942 (see expln at Nd1 423);
J i.61, 192; ii.128. nidda okkamati to fall asleep Vin
i.15 (nidd?); J iii.538; iv.1; DhA i.9; VvA 65; PvA 47;
upagacchati id. PvA 43, 105, 128.
-rma fond of sleep, slothful, sluggish It 72 (+kammarma, bhassarata); -rmat fondness of sleep, laziness,
sluggishness A iii.116, 293 sq., 309 sq.; iv.25 (+kamm,
bhass); v.164; -slin of drowsy habits, slothful, sleepy Sn
96.
Niddesa [Sk. nirdea, fr. niddisati, cp. desa, desaka etc.] 1. description, attribute, distinction PvA 7 (ukkaha); vatthu object of distinction or praise D iii.253= A iv.15 (where reading
is niddasa, which also as v. l. at D iii.253 & Ps i.5). 2.
descriptive exposition, analytic explanation by way of question & answer, interpretation, exegesis Vin v.114 (sa); Nett
4, 8 38 sq.; Vism 26; DhsA 54; VvA 78; PvA 71, 147.
3. N. of an old commentary (ascribed to Sriputta) on parts of
the Sutta Nipta (Ahaka vagga, interpreted in the Mah
Niddesa; Pryana vagga and, as a sort of appendix, the
Khaggavisa sutta, interpreted in the Culla Niddesa);
as one of the canonical texts included in the Khuddaka Nikya;
editions in P.T.S. Quoted often in the Visuddhimagga, e. g. p.
140, 208 sq. etc.
Nidhi
Nipalvita
sure A v.346.
Ninnta (adj.) [pp. of ninneti] lead down, lead away; drained, purified, free from () A i.254 (ninnta kasva of gold: free
fr. dross).
Ninna (adj. n.) [Vedic nimna, der. fr. ni down, prob. combd
with na of nam to bend, thus meaning "bent down," cp.
unna & panna] 1. (adj.) bent down (cp. ninnata), low
lying, deep, low, sunken J ii.3 (magga); PvA 29 (bhmibhga), 132 (ha); esp. freq. as : bent on, inclining
to, leading to, aiming at, flowing into etc. Often combd with
similar expressions in chain taccarita tabbahula taggaruka
tanninna tappoa tappabbhra taddhimutta (with variation nibbna, viveka etc. for tad): Nd2 under tad; J ii.15;
Ps ii.197; Vin ii.237=A iv.198 (samuddo anupubba etc.);
A iv.224 (viveka); v.175 (id.); M i.493 (Nibbna). Similarly: samudda Gang M i.493; nekkhamma J i.45 (v.258);
samdhi Miln 38. 2. (acc. as adv.) downward: ninna pavattati to flow downward M i.117; Pv i.57 ; ninnagata running
down Miln 259 (udaka); ninnaga Dvs iv.28. 3. (nt.) low
land, low ground, plain (opp. thala elevation, plateau): usually with ref. to a raincloud flooding the low country Sn 30
(mahamegho prayato); SnA 42 (=pallala); It 66 (megho
preti); Pv ii.945 (megho pariprayanto).
-unnata low lying & elevated Miln 349 (desabhga).
402
Nipalvita
Nipphanna
i.326.
Niptin (adj.) [to nipatati] 1. falling or flying down, chancing upon Dh 35, 36 (yatthakma citta=yattha yattha icchati
tattha tatth' eva nipatati DhA i.295). 2. going to bed D i.60
(pacch going to bed late). Cp. abhi.
Nipteti [ni+Caus. of patati] to let fall, throw down into (c. loc.);
bring to fall, injure; fig. cast upon, charge with D i.91; M
i.453 (ayokahe); J iii.359; SnA 272; PvA 152 (bhmiya).
pp. niptita corrupt, evil, wicked Vin ii.182 (caa+; text nipptita, v. l. nipphtita).
Nipptika (adj.) [nis+pti+ka] 1. free from (feelings of) enjoyment (characteristic of 3rd jhna, q. v.) D i.75; A i.81. 2.
being unloved, a foster child etc. (?) see nippitika.
Nippana (nt.) [nis+pana] squeezing, pressing; a blow J iii.160.
Cp. abhinippan.
Nippothana (nt.) [nis+pothana of puth to crush] crushing, beating, destroying SnA 390.
Nipphajjati see nippajjati.
Nipphajjana (nt.) (or n f.?) [n. abstr. fr. nipp(h)ajjati] resulting, procedure, achievement, plot J iv.83.
&
Nipphanna
Nibbti
Nipphditar [n. ag. to nipphdeti, cp. nipphdar] one who produces or accomplishes PvA 8 (read "so nipphdit" for s nipphdik). Cp. nipphdita and nipphdaka.
Nipphdeti [Caus. of nippajjati] to bring forth, produce; accomplish, perform J i.185 (lbhasakkra); v.81; Miln 299; VvA
32, 72 (grd. nipphdetabba, n. of ablative case); Sdhp 319,
426. pp. nipphdita. Cp. abhinipphdeti.
Nibandhati [ni+bandhati] 1. to bind Miln 79. 2. to mix, apply, prepare Vin ii.151 (anibandhanya unable to be applied,
not binding); J i.201 (ygubhatta). 3. to press, urge, importune J iii.277.
404
Nibbti
Nibbna
405
Nibbna
Nibbna
gat Vv 5324 . vana sabba sayojan' atta van nibbna gata A iii.346; nikkhanta vnato ti nibbna KhA
151; tah sankhta vnbhvato nibbna SnA 253.
2. Aims: khema (tranquillity). tp bhikkhu nibbnya
bhabbo anuttarassa yogakkhemassa adhigamya It 27; ajara
amara khema pariyessmi nibbuti J i.3; acala (immovable, not to be disturbed). patto acalahna Vv 514 ; accuta
(stable) patthaya accuta pada S iii.143; chandarga
vinodana nibbnapada accuta Sn 1086. nekkhamma
(renunciation, dispassionateness). van nibbna gata
kmehi nekkhammarata A iii.346. prag (victor).
prag sabbadhammna anupdya nibbuto A i.162 (cp. A
iv.290 with tio pragato). santipada (calm, composure).
sant ti nibbuti atv Sn 933; santimagga eva brhaya
nibbna sugatena desita Dh 285; s.=acala VvA 219.
samatha (allayment, quietude). sabbasankhrasamatho nibbna S i.136. sotthi (welfare). saccena suvatthi hotu
nibbna Sn 235.
3. The Heart: (a) att (heart, self). abhinibbut atto Sn
456; thiatto frequent, e. g. parinibbuto h Sn 359; danto
parinib h Sn 370. (b) citta (heart). apariayhamnacitto SnA 347 (for abhinibbutatto Sn 343). (c) hadaya
(heart) nibbna hadayasmi opiya S i.199; mtuhadaya nibbyate J i.61; nibbpehi me hadaya-pariha
(quench the fever of my heart) Miln 318. (d) mano (mind).
mano nibbyi tvade J i.27; disv mano me pasdi Vv 5014 .
4. The Path: dhra. lokapariyya aya nibbut dhr
ti etc. S i.24; nibbanti dhr... Sn 235 sabbbhibh
dhro sabbagantha ppamocano It 122 Recognition of
anicca (transitoriness, see nicca). aniccasa... bhikkhu
pputi dih' eva dhamme nibbna A iv.353. pa.
nibbna ev' ajjhagamu sapa S i.22; n' abhirato pa S
i.38. paita & nipaka. anupubbena n adhigacchanti
pait A i.162; nipak asesa parinibbanti It 93. vijj.
bhikkhu paihitena cittena avijja bhecchati vijja uppdessati n sacchikarissati the bhikkhu with devout heart
will destroy ignorance, gain right cognition & realise Nibbna
A i.8; idh' aya parinibbti ansavo A iii.41; sabb' save
pariya parinibbanti ansav Vbh 426.
5. The Obstacles: gantha (fetter). nibbna adhigantabba sabba g pamocana S i.210; It 104; similarly It 122 (see above). gabbhaseyy (rebirth). na te punam
upenti gabbhaseyya, parinibbnagat hi stibht Vv 5324
nvaraa (obstacles). paca n. anibbna-savattanik
S v.97. punabbhava (rebirth). nibbpehi mahrga
m ayhittho punappuna S i.188; vibhava ca bhava ca
vippahya vusitav khapunabbhavo sa bhikkhu Sn 514;
bhava nirodha nibbna S ii.117. sankhr (elements of life). sabbasankhra-samatho nibbna S i.136;
N.=sabbasankhr khayissanti A iii.443. sayojanni
(fetters). sabbas tta van Nibbna gata A iii.346;
s. pahya n sacchikarissati A iii.423; sayojanna
parikkhay antar-parinibby hoti S v.69.
III. Nibbna: its ethical importance and general characterisation. 1. Assurance of N. (nibbnass' eva santike, near
N., sure of N.): S i.33 (yassa etdisa yna... sa etena ynena n. e. s.: with the chariot of the Dhamma sure of reaching
N.); iv.75; A ii.39 (abhabbo parihnya n. e. s. impossible to fail in the assurance of final release, of one "catuhi
Nibbna
Nibbna
940, cp. 1061. 4. Some Epithets of Nibbna: akutobhaya A ii.24=It 122; accuta pada (careyya ditta sso
va patthaya a. p.) S iii.143; Sn 1086; patt te acalahna
yattha gantv na socare Vv 514 ; amata A ii.247; M iii.224
(Bhagav atthassa ninnet a assa dt); Miln 319; Vv 6427
(appuranto a assa dvra); VvA 85 (a rasa); Vv 5020 (amatogadha magga=nibb gmin paipad); amosadhamma
Sn 758; khema appaibhaya S iv.175; S i.189=Sn 454; Th
2, 350 (hne vimutt te patta te acala sukha); M i.508
(+amatagmina); A ii.247 (yogakkhema anuttara); same
at A iii.294; It 27; Dh 23. tahakkhaya Vv 735 ; hna
dud- dasa S i.136 (=sabba sankhra samatho); dhuva (q. v.); nicca Kvu 121; nekkhamma A i.147 (
dahu khemato... nibbna abhipassanto); Vv 8442 . sabbagantha-pamocana (deliverance from all ties) S i.210; ii.278
(sabbadukkha); It 222=A ii.24; yathbhta vacana S
iv.195; yathsukha (the Auspicious) A iv.415 sq.; (chanda
) rga vinodana Sn 1086; rgakkhayo (dosa, moha)
S v.8; rgavinayo (dosa, moha) ibid., santi (calm, peace)
Vv 5021 =Sn 204 (chandarga viratto bhikkhu paav
ajjhag amata santi nibbnapada accuta); VvA 219
(=acala); santimagga eva brhaya n Sugatena desita
Dh 285=Nett 36; sandihika aklika etc.; A i.158; samo
bhmibhgo ramayo S iii.109; sassata Kvu 34; suvatthi
Sn 235. 5. N. is realisable in this world, i. e. in this life
if it is mature (dihe va dhamme): S ii.18=115=iii.163=iv.141
(diha dh npatta); M ii.228; A iv.353=358, cp. 454.
6. Definitions with regard to the destruction of the causes
or substrata of life (cp. above I.): tahya vippahnena n
iti vuccati S i.39=Sn 1109; as sabba sankhrasamatho
(calming down of all vital elements) Vin i.5; S i.136; A
ii.118=iii.164; iv.423; v.8, 110, 320, 354; akicana andna eta dpa anpara n iti nam brmi jarmaccu
parikkhaya Sn 1094; bhavanirodho n ti S ii.117; A v.9;
rga-kkhayo (dosa, moha) S iv.251=261; virgo nirodho
n in typical & very freq. exposition at Nd2 =S i.136. See
also vana & cp. the foll.: tah sankhta vnbhvato
n SnA 253; nikkhanta vnato ti n KhA 151; kilesa
n ass' pi anupd parinibbnass' pi santike yeva DhA i.286
(on Dh 32). 7. N. as perfect wisdom and what is conducive
to such a state (savattati). The foll. phrase is one of the
oldest stereotype phrases in the Canon & very freq.; it is used
of all the highest means & attainments of conduct & meditation & may be said to mark the goal of perfect understanding & a perfect philosophy of life. It is given in 2 variations,
viz. in a simple form as "upasamya abhiya sambodhya nibbnya savattati," with ref. to majjhim paipad
at Vin i.10=S iv.331=v.421; of satta bojjhang at S v.80; and
in a fuller form as "ekanta-nibbidya virgya nirodhya
upasamya etc. as above" at D i.189 (negative); ii.251 (of
brahmacariya), 285; iii.130 (sukhalliknuyog, neg.) 136
(avykata, neg.); S ii.223 (brahmacariya); v.82 (satta bojjhang), 179 (satipahn), 255 (iddhipd), 361 (ariyamagga), 438 A iii.83, 326 sq.; etc. Cp. n savattanika S
v.97 (upekhsambojjhanga); Nd2 281 (neg. of tamo). 8. N.
as the opposite of rga (passion, lust). Freq. is the combn of
virga nirodha nibbna, almost used as three synonyms, thus
at S ii.18; Vin iii.20=111; A ii.118=iii.164=iv.423=v.8=Nd2
under Nibbna; A ii.34=It 88 (dhammna agga akkhy-
dhammehi samanngato, viz. sla, indriyaguttadvrat, bhojanamattaut. jgariy"); iii.331 (id. with appamdagaru:
ever active & keen); ii.40=It 40 (id. with appamda rato);
Sn 822. 2. Steps and Means to N.: nibbna-sacchikiriy,
attainment of N., is mangala uttama & to be achieved by
means of tapo, brahmacariy and ariyasaccna-dassana
Sn 267. brahmacariya (a saintly life) is n. paryan
(leading to N.) S iii.189, cp. v.218; also called n. ogadh
(with similar states of mind, as nibbid, virgo, vimutti) ibid.;
A ii.26=It 28, cp. It 29 (nibbn' ogadha gmina b).
The stages of sanctification are also discussed under the formula "nibbid virgo vimutti... vimuttasmi vimutta iti
a hoti: kh jti etc." (i. e. no more possibility of
birth) S ii.124=iv.86. dhamma: Buddha's teaching as the
way to N.: "dhammavara adesayi n. gmi parama
hitya" Sn 233; aha svakna dhamma desemi sattna
visuddhiy... nassa sacchikiriyya A v.194, cp. 141; pubbe
dh. hiti a pacch nibbne an ti S ii.124.
magga: Those practices of a moral & good life embraced in
the 8 fold Noble Path (ariyamagga). Sace atthi akammena
koci kvaci na jyati nibbnassa hi so maggo S i.217; ekyano
aya maggo sattna visuddhiy... Nassa sacchikiriyya D
ii.290; S v.167, 185; bhvayitv sucimagga n ogadha
gmina... Vbh 426; dimhi sla dasseyya, majjhe magga vibhvaye, pariyosnamhi nibbna... DA i.176.
N. -gamana magga: tattha me nirato mano "my heart rejoices in the path to Nibbna" S i.186; N. -gmin paipad A
iv.83 (the path to salvation). Cp. 4 & 7. 3. The Search
for N. or the goal of earnest endeavour. rogya-param lbh
nibbna parama sukha, ahangiko ca maggna khema amata gmina "N. is a higher bliss than acquisition
of perfect health, the eightfold Path (alone) of all leads to perfect peace, to ambrosia" M i.508, cp. Dh 204 ("the fullest gain
is for health etc.; N. is the highest happiness" DhA iii.267).
Similarly: khant parama tapo titikkh, n parama
vadanti buddh D ii.49=Dh 184; n parama sukha:
Dh 204=Sn 257=J iii.195; id.: Dh 203; jhna upasampajja...
okkamanya n.assa A iv.111 sq.; cp. 230 sq.; kauviyakato
bhikkhu... rak hoti N A i.281; n ajjhagamu sapa
S i.22; devaloka ca te yanti... anupubbena n adhigacchanti pait A i.162; n abhikankhati S i.198; abhipassati
A i.147; tiakathankatho visallo n. -bhirato Sn 86; bhikkhu
bhabbo anuttara stibhva sacchiktu... patdhimutto
hoti -bhirato ca A iii.435; n. -bhirato... sabbadukkh
pamuccati S i.38; n. -ogadha brahmacariya vussati n. paryaa n. -pariyosna S iii.189=v.218; n gavesanto
carmi (Bodhisat, J i.61). All means of conduct & all ideals of
reason & intellect lead to one end only: Nibbna. This is frequently expressed by var. similes in the phrase n. -ninna,
poa, pabbhra, e. g. S v.75=134=137=190; v.244; A
v.75, 134, 190, 244= 291; Vv 8442 . Saddahno arahata
dhamma n. pattiy susss labhate paa appamatto
S i.214= Sn 186, cp. S i.48; Gotamo n. -paisayuttya
dhammiy kathya bhikkh sandasseti S i.214=192=210; Ud
80; n pariyesati A ii.247; n. -pariyosn sabbe dhamm
A v.107; n. poa me mnasa bhavissati, sayojan
paha gacchanti A iii.443; odhunitv mala sabba patv
n. -sampada muccati sabba dukkhehi: s hoti sabbasampad A iv.239; nibbijjha sabbaso kme sikkhe n attano Sn
407
Nibbna
Nibbiddha
Nibbpana (nt.) [abstr. fr. nibbpeti] means of extinguishing, extinction, quenching S i.188 (citta pariayhati: nibbpana brhi=allayment of the glow); A iv.320 (celassa nya
chanda karoti: try to put out the burning cloth); Miln 302
(jhyamno n alabhamno), 318 (pariha).
Nibbpita (adj.) [pp. of nibbpeti] extinguished, put out,
quenched J iii.99 (=nicchuddha).
408
Nibbiddha
Nibbeheti
Nibbiddha [pp. of nibbijjhati] 1. in phrase pingala (with) disgustingly red (eyes) (perhaps=nibbia?) J v.42 (of a giant).
2. with ref. to a road: broken up, i. e. much frequented,
busy street J vi.276 (of vthi, bazaar, in contrast with a nibbiddha raccha carriage road, which is not a thoroughfare. The reading patatthiyo at J vi.276, for which nibbiddha
vthiyo is the C. expln is to be corrected into pathaddhiyo).
Nibbuti (f.) [Sk. nirvti, abstr. to nibbuta] allayment, refreshment, cooling, peace, happiness J i.3 (khema pariyessmi
n); Sn 228 (nikkmino n bhujamn), 917, 933
(sant ti n atv); Nd1 399; Pv i.74 (n n' dhigacchmi=quenching of hunger & thirst); KhA 185 (=paippassaddha kilesa daratha).
Nibbisevana (adj.) [nis+visevana] not self indulgent, selfdenying, meek, tame, gentle J ii.210 (dametv nibbisevana
katv), 351; v.34, 381, 456; vi.255; DhA i.288 (citta uju
akuila n. karoti), 295; VvA 284 (bhava =jitindriya).
Nibbuyhati [Sk. niruhyate, nis+vuyhati, Pass. of vahati, cp. nibbhati] to be led out to (c. acc.): susna Th 2, 468 (=upanyati ThA 284); to be led out of=to be saved S i.1, cp. RV i.117,
14; vi.62, 6.
Nibbisesa (adj.) [nis+visesa] showing no difference, without distinction, equal, similar J ii.32; vi.355; Miln 249.
Nibbusitatt (nibbusitattan?) [Sk. *nir vasit tman or *nirvasitatva (nt. abstr.), to nis vasati, cp. nirvsana =nibbisaya] a dislocated or disconcerted mind, unrest, uneasiness
D i.17.
Nibbisanka (adj.) [nis+visanka, Sk. viank] fearless, not hesitating, undaunted SnA 61.
Nibbeheti
Nimisati
q. v.
Nibbedha [nis+vedha, to vyadh] penetration, insight; adj.: penetrating, piercing, scrutinising, sharp. Freq. in phrase
nibbedha-bhgiya (sharing the quality of penetration), with
ref. to samdhi, sa etc. [cp. BSk. nirvedha Divy 50;
but also nirbheda Av ii.181, of kusalamlni; expld as lobhakkhandhassa (etc.) nibbijjhanni at Nett 274] D iii.251, 277;
A iii.427; Vbh 330; Nett 21, 48, 143 sq., 153 sq.; Vism 15, 88;
DhsA 162. Also in nibbedha gmin (pa) It 35; &
dunnibbedha (hard to penetrate, difficult to solve Miln 155,
233 (paha); spelt dunniveha at Miln 90).
Nibbedhaka (adj.) [nis+vedhaka, to vyadh] piercing, sharp, penetrating, discriminating; only in f. nibbedhik (cp. vedhik),
appld to pa (wisdom) D iii.237, 268; S v.197, 199; M
i.356; A i.45; ii.167; iii.152; 410 sq., 416; v.15; Ps ii.201;
Nd2 235, 3a (+tikkha pa), 415, 689; J ii.9, 297; iv.267.
Nibbematika (adj.) [nis+vimati+ka] not disagreeing, of one accord, unanimous Vin ii.65; DhA i.34.
Nibbhacceti [Sk. nirbhartsayati, nis+bhaccheti] to threaten, revile, scorn J iii.338.
Nibbhaya (adj.) [nis+bhaya] free from fear or danger, fearless,
unafraid J i.274; iii.80; v.287; Vism 512.
Nibbhujati [Sk. ni or nirbhujati, nis+bhujati] to twist round,
bend, wind, contort oneself Miln 253. Cp. vi.
Nibbhoga (adj.) [Sk. nirbhoga, nis+bhoga1 ] deprived of enjoyment; deserted, being of no avail, useless J vi.556; Pv i.12.
Cp. vi.
Nibbhoga [ni+bhoga2 ] bending, contortion J ii.264 (oha).
Nibyaggha see nivyaggha.
Nibha (adj.) [Sk. nibha, to bhti] shining; like, equal to,
resembling () J v.372; Vv 401 ; Pv iv.312 ; VvA 122
(vaa=vaa); Nd2 608.
Nibhat (f.) [abstr. to nibha] likeness, appearance VvA 27.
Nibh (f.) [to nibha] shine, lustre, splendour VvA 179 (nibhti
dippat ti nibh).
Nibhti [ni+bhti] to shine VvA 179 (=dippati).
Nimajjhima (adj.) the middle one J v.371.
Nimantaka (adj. n.) one who invites Miln 205.
Nimantana (nt.) [to nimanteti] invitation Vin i.58= ii.175; D
i.166; M i.77; A i.295; J i.116 (), 412; Pug 55.
Nimantanika (adj.) inviting; (nt.) N. of a Suttanta M i.331;
quoted at Vism 393.
Niminti [Sk. niminoti in diff. meaning, the P. meaning being influenced by m; ni+minti, mi to fix, measure cp. Sk. nimaya
barter, change] to turn round, change; to barter, exchange for
(c. instr.): pres. imper. nimin J v.343 (=parivattehi Com.);
pres. 1st pl. nimimhase J ii.369, pot. nimineyya J iii.63; fut.
nimissati J v.271, 453 (devathi niraya); aor. nimmini J
iii.63; ger. niminitv Milo 279.
Nimisa [cp. Vedic nimi f. & nimia nt.] winking, shutting the
eyes; animisa not winking Dvs v.26. See also nimesa.
Nimitta (nt.) [cp. Sk. nimitta, to m, although etym. uncertain] 1. sign, omen, portent, prognostication D i.9 (study of
omens=n. sattha DA i.92, q. v. for detailed expln ); J i.11
410
Nimisati
Niyata
Nimugga (adj.) [cp. Sk, nimagna, pp. of nimujjati] plunged, immersed in, sunk down or fallen into () (c. loc.) Vin iii.106
(gthakpe sassaka n.); D i.75; J i.4; iii.393 (gthakalale),
415; Nd1 26; Pug 71; Miln 262; Sdhp 573.
Nimmdeti [either=Sk. nirmdayati (md) or *nirmdayati to nirmada. free from pride=nirmna] to crush, subdue, humiliate;
insult D i.92 (v. l. maddeti;=DA i.257 nimmadati nimmne
karoti), 93, 96.
Nimmna1 (nt.) [Sk. nirma, see nimminti] measuring; production, creation, work; issara n hetu caused by God M
ii.122; A i.173; Vbh 367. N. -rat dev a class of devas, e. g.
at D i.218; It 94; Vism 225; DA i.114; ThA 169; VvA 149.
Cp. (para ) nimmita.
Nimmna2 (adj.) [Sk. nirmna, nis+mna] free from pride, humble DA i.257.
Niya (adj.) [Sk. nija, q. v.] one's own Sn 149 (putta= orasaputta KhA 248); niyassakamma at A i.99 & Pv iv.113 (v. l.
Minayeff tiyassa) is to be read as nissayakamma (q. v.).
Nimmadana (nt.) [to nimmdeti] touching, touch, crushing, subduing A ii.34 (mada nimmadana, crushing out pride; may,
however, be taken as nis+mada of mad= "de priding," lit.
disintoxication); Bu i.81; Vism 293.
Niyaka (adj.) [=niya] one's own Th 2, 469; ThA 284; DhsA 169,
337; DA i.183; Vbh 2; Vism 349.
411
Niyata
Niraggala
hiy); Pug 13, 16, 63; Kvu 609 sq.; Dhs 1028 sq. (micchatta
etc.; cp. Dhs. trsl. 266, 267), 1414, 1595; Vbh 17, 24, 63,
319, 324; Miln 193; Tikp 168 (micchdihi); DhA iii.170;
PvA 211. Discussed in Pts. of Contr. (see Index). aniyata
see separately.
abl.
niyog
Niyati (f.) [cp. Sk. niyati, ni+yam] necessity, fate, destiny D i.53;
DA i.161; VvA 341; PvA 254.
Niyamana (nt.) [Sk. niyamana, to niyameti] fixing, settling, definition, explanation in detail Miln 352 (lakkha n aiming at
the target); VvA 22 (visesattha); 231, PvA 255 (so read for
nigamana?).
Niyameti [cp. Sk. niyamayati, ni+yamati] to tie down, to fix;
explain in detail, exemplify PvA 265; Vism 666. pp.
niyamita see a.
Nirankaroti (& nirkaroti) [Sk. nirkaroti, nis+ k] to think little of, despise, neglect, disregard, repudiate; throw away, ruin,
destroy Th 1, 478; It 83 (nirkare); J iii.280=v.498; iv.302;
Pv iii.96 (=chaeti pajahati PvA 211); VvA 109. pp.
(a)nirkata It 39.
412
Niraggala
Nirmisa
Niravasesa (adj.) [nis+avasesa] without remainder, complete, inclusive Nett 14, 15, cp. Miln 91, 182.
Niraya [BSk. niraya, nis+aya of i=to go asunder, to go to destruction, to die, cp. in meaning Vedic nirti. The popular
etym. given by Dhammapla at PvA 53 is "n' atthi ettha ayo
sukhan ti"=there is no good; that given by Bdhgh at Vism 427
"n' atthi ettha assdasaito ayo" (no refreshment)] purgatory,
hell, a place of punishment & torture, where sin is atoned (i. e.
kamma ripens=paccati, is literally boiled) by terrible ordeals
(krani) similar to & partly identical with those of Hades &
Tartarus. There are a great number of hells, of which the most
fearful is the Avcimahniraya (see Avci). Names of other
purgatories occur frequently in the Jtaka collection, e. g.
Kkola vi.247; Khuradhra v.269 sq.; Dhma roruva v.271;
Patpana v.266, 271, 453; Paduma iv.245; Roruva iii.299;
v.266; vi.237; Sanghta v.266; Sajva ibid.; Sataporisa v.269;
Sattisla v.143. As the principal one n. is often mentioned
with the other apyas (states of suffering), viz. tiracchnayoni
413
Nirmisa
Nirodha
235; v.68, 332; A iii.412; D iii.278; Vbh 195; Vism 71; Sdhp
475, 477.
Nirrambha (adj.) [nis+rambha] without objects (for the purpose of sacrificing), i. e. without the killing of animals (of
yaa) S i.76; A ii.42 sq.
Niruddha (pp.) [pp. of nirundhati, cp. nirujjhati] expelled, destroyed; vanished, ceased S iii.112; Dhs 1038.
Nirundhati see nirujjhati, niruddha, nirodha & nirodheti. Cp.
parirundhati.
Nirsa (adj.) [nis+s] not hungry, not longing for anything, desireless S i.12, 23, 141; A i.107 sq.; Sn 1048 (anigha+), 1078
(id.); Nd2 360; Pug 27; Pv iv.133 (=nittaha PvA 230). See
also amama.
Nirsasa (adj.) [nis+sasa, as] without wishes, expectations or desires, desireless Sn 1090 (Nd2 reading for nirsaya);
Nd2 361 (cp. DhA iv.185 nirssa= *nirsasa, v. l. for
nirsaya).
Nirsanka (adj.) [nis+sank] without apprehension, unsuspicious, not doubting J i.264; Vism 180.
Nirumbhati [Sk.? Trenckner, Notes p. 59 ni+rudh (?)] to suppress, hush, silence J i.62 (text nirumhitv, v. l. SS nirumbhitv, cp. san nirumhitv VvA 217).
Nirijana (adj.) [nis+ijan, fr. ijati] not moving, stable, unshaken Vism 377 (=acala, neja).
Nirussukka (adj.) [nis+ussukka], careless, unconcerned, indifferent to (c. loc.) ThA 282.
Nirodha [BSk. nirodha, to nirundhati, cp. nirujjhati & niruddha] oppression, suppression; destruction, cessation, annihilation (of senses, consciousness, feeling & being in general:
sankhr). Bdhgh's expln of the word is: "ni saddo abhva, rodha saddo ca craka dpeti Vism 495. N.
in many cases is synonymous with nibbna & parinibbna; it
may be said to be even a stronger expression as far as the active destruction of the causes of life is concerned. Therefore
frequently combd with nibbna in formula "sabbasankhra
samatho... virgo nirodho nibbna," e. g. S i.136; It 88. Nd2
s. nibbna (see nibbna iii.6). Also in combn with nibbid, e.
g. S iii.48, 223; iii.163 sq.; v.438. The opposite of nirodha
is samudaya, cp. formula "ya kici samudaya dhamma
sabban ta nirodha dhamma" e. g. Nd2 under sankhr
& passim. (a) Vin i.1, 10; D ii.33, 41, 57 sq., 112; iii.130 sq.,
Nirujjhati [Pass. of nirundhati (nirodhati) ni+rundhati] to be broken up, to be dissolved, to be destroyed, to cease, die Vin i.1;
D i.180 sq., 215; ii.157; S iii.93 (aparisesa); iv.36 sq., 60,
98, 184 sq.; 294, 402; v.213 sq.; A iii.165 sq. (aparisesa);
v.139 sq.; J i.180; Pug 64; Sdhp 606. pp. niruddha. Cp.
nirodha.
Niruttara (adj.) [nis+uttara] making no reply PvA 117.
Nirutti (f.) [Sk. nirukti, nis+vac] one of the Vedngas (see
chaanga), expln of words, grammatical analysis, etymological interpretation; pronunciation, dialect, way of speaking,
expression Vin ii.139 (pabbajit... sakya niruttiy Buddhavacana dsenti); D i.202 (loka, expression); M iii.237 (janapada); S iii.71 (tayo n path); A ii.160 (paisambhid);
414
Nirodha
Nivta
136 sq., 226 sq.; J i.133; ii.9 sq., 223; iii.59 sq., 163; v.438;
M i.140, 263, 410; A i.299; iv.456 (=savna parikkhaya);
Th 2, 6 (=kilesanirodha ThA 13), 158; It 46=Sn 755 (nirodhe
ye vimuccanti te jan maccuhyino); It 62=Sn 754; Sn 731,
1037; Ps i.192; ii.44 sq., 221; Pug 68; Vbh 99 sq., 229; Nett
14, 16 sq.; Vism 372; VvA 63; PvA 220 (jvitassa). (b) (as
): anupubba D iii.266; A iv.409, 456; abhisa D i.180;
asesavirga S ii.4, 12; iv.86; v.421 sq.; A i.177; ii.158, 161;
updna S iii.14; kma A iii.410 sq.; jti S iv.86; tah
D iii.216; dukkha D iii.136; S iii.32, 60; iv.4 sq., 14, 384;
A i.177; nandi S iii.14; iv.36; bhava (=nibbna) S ii.117;
iii.14; A v.9; Ps i.159; sakkya D iii.240; S v.410; A ii.165
sq.; iii.246, 325 sq.; v.238 sq.; savedayita D iii.262, 266;
S iv.217, 293 sq.; v. 213 sq.; A i.41; iii.192; iv.306; v.209.
-dhamma subject to destruction, able to be destroyed, destructible (usually in formula of samudaya dhamma, see
above) Vin i.11; D i.110; S iv.47, 107, 214; M iii.280; A v.143
sq.; -dhammat liability to destruction S iv.217; -dhtu the
element or condition of annihilation, one of the 3 dhtus, viz.
rpa, arpa n. D iii.215; It 45; Nett 97; -sa perception
or consciousness of annihilation D iii.251 sq., 283; A iii.334;
-sampatti attainment of annihilation Ps i.97, 100; Miln 300;
Vism 702.
Nilyana (nt.) [abstr. fr. nilyati, cp. Sk. nilayana] hiding J v.103
(hna hiding place).
Nivatti (f.) [fr. ni+vt] returning, return PvA 189 (gati going &
coming).
Nilenaka (nt.) [cp. Sk. nilayana, fr. ni+l] settling place, hiding place, refuge J v.102 (so read for nillenaka; expld by
nilyanahna p. 103).
Ni(l)lachaka (adj. n.) [cp. Sk. nirlchana, of nirlchayati=nis+laccheti] one who marks cattle, i. e. one who castrates or deprives of virility J iv.364 (spelt tilachaka in text,
but right in v. l.), expld as "tisldi ankakaraena lachak
ca lakkhaakrak ti attho" (p. 366). cp. nillacchita.
Nivta1 (adj.) [Sk. nivta, ni+vta "wind down"] with the wind
gone down, i. e. without wind, sheltered from the wind, protected, safe, secure Vin i.57, 72; M i.76= A i.137 (kgra);
A i.101 (id.); It 92 (rahada); Th 1, 1 (kuik); 2, 376 (psda).
415
Nivta
Nivesana
Nivsin (adj. n.) [to nivasati] dwelling, staying; (n.) an inhabitant Dvs v.45.
Nivseti [Caus. of nivasati1 ] to dress oneself, to put on (the undergarment), to get clothed or dressed. Freq. in ster. phrase
"pubbahasamaya nivsetv patta-cvaram dya...," describing the setting out on his round of the bhikkhu; e. g.
D i.109, 178, 205, 226. Vin i.46; ii.137, 194; D ii.127;
J i.265; Pug 56; Pv i.103 ; PvA 49, 61, 75, 127 (nivsessati+prupissati), 147 (=prupmi). Caus. II. nivspeti
to cause or order to be dressed (with 2 acc.) J i.50; iv.142;
DhA i.223.
Nivtaka [fr. nivta1 ] a sheltered place, a place of escape, opportunity (for hiding) J i.289=v.435; cp. Miln 205 (where reading
is nimantaka, with v. l. nivtaka, see note on p. 426). See
Com. on this stanza at J v.437.
Nivpa [cp. Sk. nivpa, ni+vap, cp. nivapati] food thrown
(for feeding), fodder, bait; gift, portion, ration M i.151 sq.
(Nivpa sutta); J i.150; iii.271; DhA i.233 (share); iii.303;
VvA 63 (digua pacitv cooking a double portion). Cp.
nevpika.
-tia grass to eat J i.150; -puha fed on grains Dh
325 (=kuakdin skara bhattena puho DhA iv.16=Nett
129=Th 1, 17; -bhojana a meal on food given, a feeding M
i.156).
Nivraa (nt. & adj.) [fr. nivreti] warding off, keeping back,
preventing; refusal Sn 1034, 1035, 1106 (=Nd2 363 vraa
rakkhaa gopana); DhsA 259; PvA 102, 278; Sdhp 396.
Nivretar [n. agent to nivreti] one who holds back or refuses (entrance) (opp. pavesetar) D ii.83=S iv.194= A v.194 (dovriko
atna nivret tnam paveset).
Nivsana (adj. nt.) [fr. nivseti] dressed, clothed; dressing, clothing, undergarment (opp. prupana) Vin i.46; ii.228;
J i.182 (manpa), 421; iii.82; PvA 50, 74, 76, 173 (pilotikakkhaa dressed in rags).
Nivesana (nt.) [Vedic niveana, fr. nivesati, cp. niviha] 1. entering, entrance, settling; settlement, abode, house, home D
i.205, 226; ii.127; J i.294; ii.160 (hna); PvA 22, 81, 112.
Nivsika (adj.) [fr. nivsa] staying, living, dwelling J ii.435 (=nibaddha vasanaka C.).
416
Nivesana
Nisedheti
2. (fig.) (also nivesan f.: Nd2 366) settling on, attachment, clinging to (in dihi clinging to a view=dogmatism cp.
nivissa vdin) Sn 1055 (nandi+; =tah Nd2 366); Dh 40
(dihi); Nd1 76, 110. See also nivesa.
Nismaka (adj.) [cp. Sk. nimana] observant, listening to, attending to, careful of A v.166, 168 (dhammna).
Nismeti [ni+smeti] to attend to, listen to, observe, be careful
of, mind J iv.29 (anismetv by not being careful); v.486;
DhA i.239 (+upadhneti); PvA 1 (imper. nismayatha). Cp.
nisanti, nisamma.
Nisagga (& Nissagga) [ni or nis+sj] giving forth, bestowing; natural state, nature S i.54 (ss). Cp. nisaha.
Nisankhiti (f.) [Sk. ni saskti, ni+sa+k] deposit (of merit
or demerit), accumulation, effect (of kamma) Sn 953 (=Nd1
442 abhisankhr).
Nisada & Nisad (f.) [Sk. dad f.; for n: d cp. P. nijjuha= Sk.
dtyha etc.] a grindstone, esp. the understone of a millstone
Vin i.201; (pota id.); Miln 149; Vism 252 (pota, where KhA
at id. p. reads putta). Cp. .
Nisanti (f.) [Sk. *ninti, ni+am] careful attention or observation A ii.97; iii.201; iv.15 (dhamma), 36 (id.), 296; v.166
(dhamma); Dpvs i.53 (kra). Cp. nisamma & nismeti.
Nisabha [Sk. n+abha, cp. usabha. On relation of usabha:
vasabha: nisabha see SnA 40] "bull among men," i. e. prince,
leader; "princeps," best of men; Ep. of the Buddha S i.28, 48,
91; M i.386; J v.70; vi.526; Vv 167 (isi), cp. VvA 83 for
expln ; Vv 637 (isi=jnya VvA 262).
Nisedha (adj. n.) [fr. ni+sedh] holding back, restraining; prevention, prohibition Dh 389; DhA iv.148; hir restrained by
shame S i.168=Sn 462; Dh 143.
Nisedhanat (f.) [abstr. to nisedheti] refusing, refusal, prohibition Miln 180 (a).
417
Nisedheti
Nissya
that on which anything depends, support, help, protection; endowment, resource, requisite, supply; foundation, reliance on
(acc. or ) Vin i.58 (the four resources of bhikkhu, viz.
piiylopa bhojana, pasukla cvara, rukkhamla
sensana, ptimuttabhesajja); ii.274, 278; D iii.137,
141; A i.117; iii.271; iv.353; v.73; Sn 753, 877; Nd1 108 (two
n.: tah & dihi), 190, cp. Nd2 s. v.; Nd2 397A (the requisites of a bhikkhu in diff. enumeration); Ps ii.49 sq., 58 sq.,
73 sq.; ii.220; Nett 7, 65; Vism 12, 535. nissaya karoti to
rely on, to be founded on to take one's stand in Sn 800. Cp.
nissya & nissita.
-kamma giving assistance or help, an (ecclesiastical) act
of help or protection Vin i.49, 143, 325; ii.226; A i.99; Pv
iv.11 (so to be read at the 2 latter passages for niyassa).
-sampanna finding one's strength in A iv.353.
Nissayat (f.) [abstr. to nissaya] dependence, requirement, resource Sn 856; Nd1 245.
Nissanga (adj.) [nis+sanga] unattached, unobstructed, disinterested, unselfish Sdhp 371, 398, 411 etc.; Tikp 10; f. abstr. t
disinterestedness J i.46.
Nissajjati [nis+sajjati, sj. See also nisajjeti] to let loose, give
up, hand over, give, pour out Vin ii.188; ger. nissajja [Sk.
nisjya] Sn 839 (v. l. nisajja); Nd1 189 (id.); SnA 545. pp.
nisaha & nissaha (q. v.). Cp. nissaggiya & pai.
Nissaa (adj.) [pp. of nis+sarati, s] flown or come out from,
appeared; let loose, free, escaped from S iii.31; iv.11 sq.; A
i.260; iv.430 (a); v.151 sq.; J iii.530; vi.269; Nd2 under nissita; Ps ii.10 sq.; Miln 95, 225 (bhava). See also nissaraa.
Cp. abhi.
Nissantpa (adj.)
[nis+santpa] without grief or selfmortification PvA 62.
Nissanda [Sk. nisyanda & niyanda, ni+syand (syad), see
sandati] flowing or trickling down; discharge, dropping, issue; result, outcome, esp. effect of Kamma A iii.32; J i.31,
205, 426 (sarra); DhA i.395; ii.36, 86; VvA 14 (pua
kammassa n phala); PvA 47 (puakammassa), 58 (id.);
Miln 20. 117; Pgdp 102.
418
Nissya
Nyati
for the sake of J i.203 (amhe), 255 (dhana), 263 (ma); PvA
17 (ki), 67 (nama), 130 (ta). Cp. nissaya, nissita.
Nihna (adj.) [Sk. nihna, pp. of nihyati or nihyati] lost; degraded, low, vile, base; inferior, little, insignificant S i.12; Sn
890; Nd1 105, 194; PvA 198 (jti low born); Sdhp 86.
Opp. to seyya J vi.356 sq.
-attha one who has lost his fortune, poor Pv iv.15 ;
-kamma of low action Sn 661=It 43; Dh 306; J ii.417; -citta
low minded PvA 107 (=dna); -jtika of inferior birth or
caste PvA 175; -paa of inferior wisdom Sn 890 (=paritta
paa Nd1 299); -sevin of vile pursuit A i.126.
Nissirka (adj.) [nis+sir] having lost his (or its) splendour or prosperity J vi.225 (jvika), 456 (rjabhavana).
Nca (adj.) [Vedic nca, adj. formation fr. adv. ni, cp. Sk.
nyac downward] low, inferior, humble (opp. ucca high, fr.
adv. ud) Vin i.46, 47; ii.194; D i.109, 179, 194; A v.82; SnA
424 (nca karoti to degrade); & passim.
-kula of low clan J i.106; Sn 411; () kulna belonging to low caste Sn 462; -cittat being humble hearted Dhs
1340; DhsA 395; -phaka a low stool DhA iv.177; -mano
humble Sn 252 (=ncacitto SnA 293); -seyy a low bed A
i.212 (opp. uccsayana).
Nissma (adj.) [cp. Sk. nisman with diff. meanings ("boundless"), nis+sma] outside the boundary Vin i.255 (ha), 298
( gantu); ii.167 (e hito).
Nissuta (adj.) [fr. nis+sru, see savati] flown out or away, vanished, disappeared M i.280.
Nissei (f.) [fr. nis+ri, orig. that which leans against, or leads to
something, cp. Sk. re a row] a ladder, a flight of stairs D
i.194, 198; J i.53; ii.315; iii.505; Miln 263; Vism 244, 340 (in
simile); DhA i.259.
Nti (f.) [Sk. nti, fr. nta] guidance, practice, conduct, esp. right
conduct, propriety; statesmanship, polity PvA 114 (mangala
commonsense), 129 (sattha science of statecraft, or of prudent behaviour), 130 (cintaka a lawgiver), 131 (naya polity
& law), 132 (kusala versed in the wisdom of life); Miln 3
(here meaning the Nyyaphilosophy, cp. Trenckner, Notes p.
58).
419
Nyati
Ntana
223 (=yyati, vuyhati), 395. In the sense of a Med. in imper. nymase (let us take) Pv ii.91 (=nayissma PvA 113).
101, 234, 278; S ii.23; iii.149; v.60, 84 sq., 93 sq., 145, 160,
226, 327, 439; M i.60, 144, 276; iii.4, 295; A i.3, 161; iii.16,
63, 230 sq.; 386; iv.457; v.16, 195, 322; Sn 17; Nd1 13; Nd2
379; Ps i.31, 129, 163; Pug 68; Dhs 1059, 1136, 1495; Vbh
199, 244, 378; Nett 11, 13, 94; Vism 146, 189; DA i.213; Sdhp
459, 493 and passim. Other enumns are occasionally found
e. g. 10 at S v.110; 8 at M i.360 sq.; 6 at Dhs 1152.
Nvaraiya (adj.) [fr. nvaraa] belonging to an obstacle, forming a hindrance, obstructing Dhs 584, 1164, 1488; Vbh 12, 30,
66, 130 etc.
Nudati [Vedic nudati; Idg. *(s)neu to push, cp. Sk. navate, Gr.
& , Lat. nuo; Ags. neosian, Low Ger. nucken] to
push, impel; expel, drive away, reject Dh 28; J iv.443; DhA
i.259. aor. nudi Nd2 281. Cp. apa, pa, vi. pp. nunna
(nua).
Nunna (nua) [pp. of nudati] thrust, pushed, driven away, removed Nd2 220 ()=khitta, cp. panua A ii.41.
Ntana (adj.) [Vedic ntana, adj. formation fr. adv. n, cp.
nna. In formation cp. Sk. vastana (of to morrow), Lat.
420
Ntana
Netthar
Npura [Sk. npura; Non Aryan. Cp. Prk. eura & ndhura
(nyura)] an ornament for the feet, an anklet Th 2, 268; DA
i.50.
Netta2 (nt.) [Sk. netra] guidance, anything that guides, a conductor, fig. the eye. S i.26 (srath nettni gahetv =the reins);
Vin i.204 (dhma for smoke); J iv.363 (id.); D i.12 (tappana, set t. & cp. DA i.98); Sn 550 (pasanna), 1120; Nd2
371 (=cakkhu), 669; J vi.290 (tamba with red eyes); Pv i.83
(eyes=nayanni Com.); Dhs 597; Vbh 71 sq.
Netti (f.) [Vedic netr, f. to net] a guide, conductor; support (=nettika2 ) It 37 (hra pabhava), 38 (bhava), 94
(netticchinna bhikkhu=Arahant). Cp. nettika2 & dhamma,
bhava.
Nettisa [cp. Sk. nistria, Halyudha 2, 317; very doubtful,
whether nis+tria (thirty), prob. a dial. distortion] a sword
J ii.77 (vara dhrin; C. nettis vuccanti khagg); iv.118
(C. gives it as adj.=nikkarua, merciless; & says "khaggassa
nma"); vi.188 (varadhrin).
Nettika (adj. n.) [netta+ika] 1. having as guide or forerunner, in Bhagava' dhamma M i.310; A i.199; iv.158, 351;
v.355. 2. a conduit for irrigation; one who makes conduits
for watering Dh 80 (=udaka nenti nettik), 145; fig. that
which supplies with food or water, in bhava ("the roots of
existence, clinging to existence") D i.46 (ucchinna with the
roots of existence cut); sanettika clinging to existence, a bad
man A ii.54. Cp. netti.
Netthar [see nittharati; does any connection exist with Vedic
ne?] only in phrase netthra vattati to behave in such
a way as to get rid of blame or fault Vin ii.5; iii.183; M i.442.
Bdhgh on Vin ii.5 (p. 309) explains: nittharantna etan
ti netthra yena sakk nissra nittharitu ta ahrasa
421
Netthar
Nhru
Nesajjika (adj.) [fr. nisajj] being & remaining in a sitting position (as an ascetic practice) A iii.220; Th 1, 904, 1120; Nd2
587; J iv.8; Pug 69; Vism 79; Miln 20, 342. The n-anga is
one of the dhtanga precepts, enjoining the sitting posture
also for sleeping, see Vin v.193, Vism 61, & dhtanga.
Nemittaka & Nemittika [Sk. naimittika, fr. nimitta] an astrologer, fortune teller, soothsayer D i.8 (i)=DA i.91; A
iii.111; J iv.124; Miln 19 (i), 229; Vism 210 (i); DhA ii.241
(a).
Nesda [fr. nisda; cp. Sk. nida & naida=one who lies in
wait] a hunter; also a low caste Vin iv.7 (+vea & rathakra); S
i.93 (kula); A i.107; ii.85; J ii.36; iii.330; iv.397, 413; v.110,
337; vi.71; Pug 51 (kula); Miln 311; DhA iii.24; PvA 176.
No2 (indecl.) [Sk. no=na+u, a stronger na; cp. na2 ) negative &
adversative particle=neither, nor, but not, surely not, indeed
not. (a) in neg. sentences: Sn 852, 855, 1040; It 103 (but
not); Pv ii.313 (but not). as answer: no hi eta "indeed not,
no indeed" Vin i.17; D i.3; no hi ida D i.105. no ca kho
"but surely not" D i.34, 36; A v.195. Often emphasized by
na, as no na not at all J i.64; na no Sn 224 (="avadhrae"
KhA 170); disjunctively na hi... no neither nor Sn 813; na
no... na neither nor (notnor) Sn 455. (b) in disjunctive
questions: "or not," as eva hoti v... no v (is it so or not)
D i.61, 227; kacci... no (is it so or not; Lat. ne annon)
D i.107; nu kho... no udhu (is it that or not; or rather) D
i.152. (c) noce (no ce=Sk. no ced) if not (opp. sace) Sn
348, 691, 840; J i.222; vi.365; VvA 69. Also in sense of "I
hope not" J v.378.
Nerayika (adj.) [fr. niraya, cp. BSk. nairayika Divy 165] belonging to niraya or purgatory, hellish; one doomed to suffering
in purgatory (n. satta=inhabitant of n.) Vin ii.205 (pyiko n.
kappaho); iv.7; D iii.6, 9, 12; A i.265; ii.231 (vedana vediyati... seyyath pi satt nerayik); iii.402 sq.; Sn 664; Nd1 97
(gati); Vv 521 , J iv.3 (satt); Pug 51; Vbh 412 sq.; Vism 415
(satt), 424; Miln 148 (satt); PvA 27 (id.), 52 (bhva), 255;
VvA 23; Sdhp 193, 198.
Nerutta (adj. n.) [fr. nirutti] based on etymology; an etymologist or philologist ThA 153; Nett 8, 9, 32, 33.
Nea (& Nela) (adj.) [na+ea=Sk. anenas, of enas fault, sin. The
other negated form, also in meaning "pure, clean," is anea
(& aneaka), q. v. On : n. cp. lngala; nangala; tul: ta
etc.] 1. without fault or sin, blameless, faultless; not hurting,
humane, gentle, merciful, innocuous D i.4 (Bdhgh explains:
ela vuccati doso; n' ass (i. e. vcya) elan ti nel; niddos
ti attho. "Nelango setapacchdo" ti ettha vuttanela viya; DA
No3 [Sk. na] enclitic form, gen. dat. acc. pl. of pron. 1st
(we)=amhka, see vaya; cp. na3 .
Nodeti [fr. nud] see vi.
Nonta see navanta.
Nhru see nahru. Found e. g. at Vin i.25.
422
Pa
Pakampati
P
Pa (indecl.) [Ved. pra, Idg. *pro, cp. Gr. , Lat. pro, Goth.
fra, Lith. pra, pr, Oir. ro ] directional prefix of forward
motion, in applied sense often emphasising the action as carried on in a marked degree or even beyond its mark (cp. Ger.
ver in its function of Goth. fra & Ger. vor). Thus the sphere
of pa may be characterised in foll. applications: 1. forth,
forward, out: papatati fall forward, i. e. down; neti bring
forth (to); gahti hold out; tharati spread forth; dhvati
run out; bajati go forth; sreti stretch out; etc. 2. (intensive) in a marked degree, more than ordinarily (cp. E. up in cut
up, heap up, fill up; thus often to be trsld by "up," or "out," or
"about"): pakopeti up set; chindati cut up; bhajati break
up; cinati heap up; kiaka scattered about; nda shouting
out; bhti shine forth; bhavati grow up, prevail; dseti spoil
entirely; jahati give up entirely; tapeti make shine exceedingly (C. ativiya dpeti); jalati blaze up; jnti know well.
In this meaning often with adjectives like patanu very thin;
thaddha quite stiff; dakkhia right in pre eminence; bala
very strong. 3. "onward":
pahya from... onward; pavattati move on; fig. "further,
later": paputta a later (secondary) son, i. e. grandson. 4.
"in front of," "before": padvra, before the door. 5. Sometimes in trs. (reflexive) use, like pakjin singing out to (each
other, cp Ger. besingen, an rufen). The most frequent
combination with other (modifying) prefixes is sam ppa;
its closest relatives (in meaning 2 especially) are and pari.
The double (assimilation) p is restored after short vowels, like
appadhasiya (a+pa).
Pasu [cp. Ved. psu] dust, dirt, soil S v.459; A i.253; Pv ii.3 .
pasvgrak playmates S iii.190; saha pasukit id.
(lit. playing together with mud, making mud pies) A ii.186; J
i.364; PvA 30. Cp. BSk. sahapukrita MVastu iii.450.
-kla rags from a dust heap (cp. Vin. Texts ii.156) Vin
i.58; M i.78; S ii.202; A i.240, 295; ii.206; iv.230; It 102=A
ii.26; Dh 395; Pug 69; PvA 141, 144. A qusi definition
of p. k. is to be found at Vism 60. -klika one who
wears clothes made of rags taken from a dust heap M i.30;
S ii.187; A iii.187, 219, 371 sq.; Vin iii.15; iv.360; Ud 42;
Pug 55; DhA iv.157; attan (nt. abstr.) the habit of wearing rags M i.214; iii.41; A i.38; iii.108. -guhita (vv. ll.
kuita, kuhita) covered with dust or dirt S i.197; J vi.559;
Pv ii.35 . piscaka a mud sprite (some sort of demon) J
iii.147; iv.380; DhA ii.26. -muhi a handful of soil J vi.
405. -vappa sowing on light soil (opp. kalalavappa sowing
on heavy soil or mud) SnA 137.
Pakampati [pa+kampati.
423
Cp.
BSk.
Pakampati
Pakkahita (pakkuthita)
Pakaraa (nt.) [fr. pa+k] 1. performance, undertaking paragraph (of the law) D i.98 ("offence"? see Dial. i.120); S iii.91;
Miln 189. 2. occasion Vin i.44; ii.75; iii.20. 3. exposition, arrangement, literary work, composition, book; usually
in titles only, viz. Abhidhamma J i.312; Dpvs v.37; Kathvatthu Pahna Miln 12; Netti one of the Canonical books
(see netti).
424
Pakkahita (pakkuthita)
Pakkhika
pak-
Pakkhika
a womb" (a+pa+*garbha)
Pagabbhat (f.) [abstr. fr. pagabbha, cp. Sk. pragalbhat] resoluteness, boldness, decision J vi.273. See also pgabbhiya.
Pagabbhin (adj.) [=pagabbha] bold J vi.238.
Pagama [fr. pra+gam] going forth from () DhsA 329.
Pagha [pp. of paghati] sunk into, immersed in (loc.) Sn 441,
772 (=ogha ajjhogha nimugga Nd1 26).
Pagiddha (adj.) [pa+giddha] greedy after, clinging to, finding delight in (loc.) J v.269 (=gadhita mucchita C. on p. 274).
Pagua (adj.) [pa+gua cp. Sk. pragua straight, der. "kind"]
learned, full of knowledge, clever, well-acquainted, familiar
D iii.170; Vv 532 (=nipua VvA 232); J ii.243; iv.130; v.399;
Vism 95 (Majjhimo me paguo: I am well versed in the M.),
242 (dve tayo niky pagu); DA i.95; SnA 195; KhA 73.
pagua karoti, to make oneself familiar with, to learn
by heart, to master thoroughly J ii.166; iii.537 (tayo vede);
Miln 12 (Abhidhamma piaka).
-bhva familiarity with, acquaintance, efficient state,
cleverness in, experience. knowledge (cp. pgua) J iii.537;
Dhs 48, 49.
Pakkhepa (m.) & na (nt.) [fr. pa+kip] throwing, hurling; being thrown into (loc.) PvA 221 (lohakumbhi in passage of
ordeals in Niraya); DhA i.357 (nadiya visa pakkhepana).
426
Pacca
Pagghika (adj.) [paggha+ika] belonging to, receiving (or trading?) in cpd. sl a shop Vin ii.291 (cp. Vin. Texts iii.383:
"would he set up as a hawker in cloth, or would he open a
shop").
Paggharaa (adj. n.) [fr. paggharati] trickling, oozing, dripping J i.146; vi.187 (a); f. D i.74 (=bindubindu udaka
paggharati DA i.218); the mark of liquid DhsA 332.
Panka [cp. Epic Sk. panka, with k suffix to root *pene for *pele,
as in Lat. palus; cp. Goth. fani mire, excrements, Ohg, fenna
"fen," bog; also Ital. fango mud, Ohg. fht wet. See Walde
Lat. Wtb. under palus. BSk. panka, e. g. Jtm 215 panka
nimagna] mud, mire; defilement, impurity S i.35, 60; iii.118;
A iii.311; iv.289; Sn 970 (danta rajassira with dirt between
their teeth and dust on their heads, from travelling); iii.236
(id.); iv.362 (id.); Sn 535, 845, 945, 1145 (Nd2 374: kma
panko kma kaddamo etc.); Dh 141, 327; Nd1 203; Pv
iii.33 ; iv.32 ; Miln 346; Dhs 1059, 1136.
Pacua is doubtful reading at DA i.164 (with vv. ll. pamua, pamuca, papua) for D i.54, T. pauva (vv. ll. pamua, samudda)
and is expld by gahika, i. e. block or knot. The whole passage is corrupt; see discussed under pavu.
Pacura (adj.) [cp. late Sk. pracura] general, various, any; abundant, many J v.40 (=bahu salabha C.); Miln 408 (jana) Dvs
iv.11, 50; VvA 213 (jano for ydisakdiso Vv 5011 ). See also
pasura.
427
Pacca
Paccanta
Paccana (nt.) [fr. paccati, cp. pacana] being boiled, boiling. torture, torment J v.270; SnA 476 (oksa).
Paccaggha (adj.) [pai+aggha, cp. Sk. pratyagra of diff. derivation] recent, new, beautiful, quite costly Vin i.4; J i.80; ii.435;
Pv ii.316 (=abhinava mahaggha v PvA 87); iii.105 (=abhinava
PvA 214); Dvs v.25; PvA 44.
Paccanga (nt.) [pai+anga] lit. "by limb," small limb, only in
compd angapaccangni limbs great and small, all limbs: see
anga.
Paccanusiha
ii.209=225.
[pai+anusiha]
advised,
admonished
Paccanta (adj. n.) [pai+anta, cp. Sk. pratyanta] adj. adjoining, bordering on, neighbouring, adjacent Dh 315; J i.11 (v.47,
desa), 377 (vsika); PvA 201 (nagara); DhA iii.488 (id.);
Sdhp 11 (visaya). (m.) the border, outskirts, neighbourhood Vin i.73; J i.126 (vihra); ii.37; Miln 314 (e kupite
in a border disturbance); DhA i.101 (id.); PvA 20 (id.).
Paccanta
Paccharati
Paccaya [fr. pai+i, cp. Ved. pratyaya & P. pacceti, paicca] lit.
resting on, falling back on, foundation; cause, motive etc. See
on term as t.t. of philosophy Tikapahna I, foreword; J.P.T.S.
1916, 21 f.; Cpd. 42 sq. & esp. 259 sq. 1. (lit.) support,
requisite, means, stay. Usually with ref. to the 4 necessaries
of the bhikkhu's daily life, viz. cvara, piapta, sensana,
(gilnapaccaya ) bhesajja, i. e. clothing, food as alms, a
dwelling place, medicine: see under cvara. Sn 339 (paccaya=gilna paccaya SnA 342); Miln 336; Mhvs 3, 15.
2. (appld ) reason, cause, ground, motive, means, condition
M i.259 (ya yad eva paccaya paicca by whatever cause
or by whichever means); S ii.65; Nett 78 sq.; DA i.125; PvA
104. The fourfold cause (catubbidho paccayo) of rpa (material form) consists of kamma, citta, utu, hra: Vism 600.
Var. paccayas discussed at VbhA 166 sq. (twofold, with ref.
to paisandhi), 183 (eightfold), 202, 205 sq. 254 (4). sappaccaya founded, having a reason or cause S v.213 sq.; A i.82;
Nd2 mla; Dhs 1084, 1437. yath paccaya karoti do as
he likes Nd2 p. 280=S iii. 33. Often coupled with hetu, e. g.
at S iv.68 sq.; A. i.66; iv.151 sq.; D iii.284; Nd2 under mla;
Ps ii.116 sq., paccaya came to be distinguished from hetu as
the genus of which hetu was the typical, chief species. I. e.
paccaya became synonymous with our "relation," understood
in a causal sense, hetu meaning condition, causal antecedent,
and 23 other relations being added as special modes of causality. Later still these 24 were held reducible to 4 Tikp 1 f. (and
foreword); Cpd. 197. Cp. Pahna. Abl. paccay as
adv. by means of, through, by reason of, caused by D i.45
(vedan tah etc., see paicca samuppda); M i.261 (jtippaccay jarmaraa); Pv i.52 (kamma); iv.150 (tap); PvA
147 (kamma). 3. ground for, belief, confidence, trust, reliance J i.118, 169; apara without relying on anyone else S
iii.83, 135; A iv.186, 210; PvA 226.
-kra the mode of causes, i. e. the Paiccasamuppda
DhsA 2, 3; VbhA 130 sq. (cp. Vism 522 sq.).
Paccayat (f.) [abstr. fr. paccaya] the fact of having a cause, causation, causal relation, in phrase idappaccayat (adv.) from
an ascertained cause, by way of cause Vin i.5; D i.185; S i.136;
ii.25.
429
Paccharati
Paccoroha
iii.140; J iv.304.
Paccupeti [pati+upeti] to go up or near to, to approach, serve, beset J iii.214. fut. upessati J iv.362 (gloss upasevati).
Paccuhapan (f.) [pai+ud+Caus. of sth] putting against, resistance, opposition Sn 245 (=paccanka hapan SnA 228).
Paccsa [pai+Ved. uas f.; later Sk. pratya nt.] "the time towards dawn," morning, dawn; always. in compn with either
kle (loc.) at morning DhA iv.61; DA i.168; or velya
(loc.) id. VvA 105, 118, 165; PvA 61; or samaye (loc.) id.
S i.107; J i.81, 217; SnA 80; PvA 38.
Paccha [cp. late Sk. pratyha, prati+vah] an impediment, obstacle S i.201 (bah hi sadd pacch, trsl. "Ay there is busy
to and fro of words." C. expls by pailoma sadd); J
vi.571.
Paccuttarati [pai+uttarati, but cp. BSk. pratyavatarati to disembark Divy 229] to go out again, to withdraw S i.8; A iii.190.
Cp. paccupadissati.
Paccudvattati [pai+ud++vattati] to return again to (acc.) S
i.224; ii.104; A v.337.
Pacceka (adj.) [pai+eka, cp. BSk. pratyeka Divy 335, 336] each
one, single, by oneself, separate, various, several D i.49 (itthi); ii.261 (vasavattin, of the 10 issaras); S i.26 (gth a
stanza each), 146 (brahma an independent Brahma); A ii.41
(sacca); v.29 (id.); Sn 824 (id.), 1009 (gaino each one having followers= visu visu gaavanto SnA 583); J iv.114
(bodhia); Nd1 58 (muni); DA i.148 (paccek itthiyo);
SnA 52 (bodhisatta one destined to become a Paccekabuddha), 67 (id.), 73 (sambodhi), 476 (niraya a separate or special
purgatory); PvA 251 (id.), Sdhp 589 (bodhi). pacceka
(adv.) singly, individually, to each one VvA 282. See also
pekka.
-buddha one enlightened by himself, i. e. one who has
attained to the supreme and perfect insight, but dies without
proclaiming the truth to the world. M iii.68; S i.92 ("Silent
Buddha" trsln ); J iii.470; iv.114; Ud 50 (P. Tagarasikhi); Nett
190; KhA 178, 199; SnA 47, 58, 63; DhA i.80, 171, 224, 230;
iv.201; PvA 144, 263, 265 (=isi), 272, 283.
Pacceti [pai+i] to come on to, come back to, fig. fall back on,
realise, find one's hold in D i.186 ("take for granted," cp. note
Dial. i.252); M i.309 (ka hetu), 445 (id.); S i.182 ("believe
in," C. icchati pattheti); Sn 662, 788, 800, 803, 840=908; Dh
125 (=paieti DhA iii.34); Nd1 85, 108 (=paccgacchati), 114;
Pv ii.320 (=avagacchati PvA 87); Nett 93; Miln 125, 313; PvA
116 (bla), 241 (agree to=paijnti). ger. paicca (q. v.).
Cp. paccgacchati pp. pata (q. v.).
[pai+upalakkha] differentiation S
430
Paccoroha
Pajahati
(BR.).
431
Pajahati
Paca
1058; Ps i.63; ii.244. ppr. pajaha S iii.27; fut. pahssa (cp. Geiger, P.Gr. 1511 ) M ii.100. aor. pajahi
& pahsi Vin i.36; S i.12=23 (sankha); Sn 1057. ger.
pahya S i.12 (kme), 23 (vicikiccha), 188 (nvarani), Sn
17, 209, 520 & passim; Nd2 430; PvA 16, 122 (=hitv), 211;
pahatvna Sn 639, and pajahitv. fut. pajahissati S ii.226.
grd. pahtabba M i.7; Sn 558; VvA 73, & pajahitabba
pp. pahna (q. v.). Pass. pahyati (q. v.).
Pajjunna [Ved. parjanya, for etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under
quercus & spargo] rain cloud J i.332 (p. vuccati megho);
iv.253. Otherwise only as Np. of the Rain God D ii.260; S
i.29; J i.331.
Pajjota [cp. Ved. pradyota, pra+dyut] light, lustre, splendour, a
lamp S i.15, 47; A ii.140; Sn 349; Pug 25; Sdhp 590. telapajjota an oil lamp Vin i.16=D i.85= A i.56 ; Sn p. 15.
dhammapajjota the lamp of the Dhamma Miln 21. pa
pajjota the torch of knowledge Dhs 16, 20, 292, 555; VbhA
115. pajjotassa nibbna the extinguishing of the lamp D
ii.157; S i.159; A iv.3.
Pajnan (f.) [fr. pajnti] knowledge, understanding, discernment; used in exegetical literature as syn. of pa Nd2
380=Dhs 16, 20, 555; Pug 25; Nett 28, 54. As nt. a at Vism
436.
Pajpati () 1. (adj.) together with his wife Vin i.23, 342; iv.62;
J i.345; PvA 20. (m.) [Ved. prajpati, praj+pati Lord of all
created beings, Lord of Creation] Prajpati (Np.), the supreme
Lord of men, only mentioned in one formula together with
Inda & Brahm, viz. dev saindak sabrahmak sapajpatik
in sense of foll. Also at VbhA 497 with Brahm. 2. prajpati (f.) [of Ved. prajvant, adj. n. fr. praj "having (or
rich in) progeny," with p for v, as pointed out by Trenckner
Notes 6216 ] "one who has offspring," a chief wife of a man
of the higher class (like a king, in which case="chief queen")
or a gahapati, in which case simply "wife"; cp. BSk. prajpat "lady" Divy 2, 98. Vin i.23; iii.25; iv.18, 258; S
ii.243; A i.137 (catasso iyo); iv.210, 214; Vv 416 (=one of
the 16,000 chief queens of Sakka VvA 183); DhA i.73; PvA
21, 31. sapajpatika (adj.) together with his wife Vin i.23,
342; iv.62; J i.345; PvA 20.
Pajyati [pa+jyati] to be born or produced J v.386; vi.14.
Pajyana (nt.) [fr. pa+jan] being born Vism 223.
Pajja1 [cp. Sk. padya] a path, road Sn 514; DA i.262.
Pajja2 (nt.) [cp. Sk. padya & pdya belonging to the feet, Lat.
acupedius swift footed; Gr. foot soldier, see also
pattika1 ] foot oil, foot salve Vin i.205; D ii.240; J iii.120;
iv.396; v.376 (=pdabbhajana C.).
Pajjati [pad, Vedic padyate only in meaning "to come to fall,"
later Sk. also "to go to"] to go, go to; usually not in simplex,
432
Paca
Paca
Paca
Pacama
dati, e. g. SnA 78, 267) J v.502; SnA 267, 271, 293, 328, 436;
VvA 6; DhA i.197; iv.178, etc. bandhana either 5 ways of
binding or pinioning or 5 fold bondage J iv.3 (as "ure pacangika bandhana" cp. kahe pacamehi bandhanehi
bandhitv S iv.201); Nda 304iii.b2 (rj bandhpeti andhu
bandhanena v rajju, sankhalika, lat, parikkhepa), with
which cp. iksamucc. 165: rj pacapakena bandhanena baddha. There is a diff. kind of bandhana which
has nothing to do with binding, but which is the 5 fold ordeal
(obligation: pacavidhabandhana kraa) in Niraya, and
consists of the piercing of a red hot iron stake through both
hands, both feet and the chest; it is a sort of crucifixion. We
may conjecture that this "bandhana" is a corruption of "vaddhana" (of vyadh, or viddhana?), and that the expression originally was pacaviddhana kraa (instead of paca vidha
bandhana k). See passages under bandhana & cp. M
iii.182; A i.141; Kvu 597; SnA 479. balni 5 forces: saddh viriya sati samdhi pa D ii.120; M ii.12; S iii.96;
A iii.12 (see also bala). bhojanni 5 kinds of food: odna,
kummsa, sattu, maccha, masa Vin iv.176. macchariyni
5 kinds of selfishness: vsa kula lbha vaa dhamma.
rajni defilements: rpa, sadda etc. (of the 5 senses) Nd1
505; SnA 574. va 5 colours (see ref. for colours under
pta and others), viz. nla, ptaka, lohitaka, kaha, odta (of
B's eye) Nd2 235I.a ; others with ref. to paduma puarka
VvA 41; to paduma DhA iii.443; to kusumni DA i.140; DhA
iv.203. vaa in another meaning (fivefold) in connection
with pti (q. v.). sayojanni fetters (q. v.). sang impurities, viz. rga, dosa, moha, mna, dihi (cp. tah) DhA
iv.109. sla the 5 moral precepts, as sub division of the 10
(see dasasla and Nd2 under sla on p. 277).
4. Other (not detailed) passages with 5: Sn 660
(abbudni), 677 (nahutni koiyo paca); Th 2, 503
(kauka=pacakmagua rasa ThA 291); DhA ii.25
(mahnidhi); SnA 39 (pakra gomaala puabhva). Cp. further: gu Miln 249; pani Vin i.201
(nimba, kuaja, paola, sulasi, kappsika); Pau-rjaputt J v.426; pabbagahiyo Miln 103; pucch DhsA 55;
mah -pariccg DhA iii.441; mah -vilokanni DhA i.84;
vatthni Vin ii.196 sq.; vhanni (of King Pajjota) DhA
i.196; suddhvs Dhs A 14. In general see Vin v.128
133 (var. sets of 5).
-anga five (bad) qualities (see anga 3 and above 3), in
phrase vippahna free from the 5 sins D iii.269; Nd2 284 C;
cp. BSk. pacnga viprahna. Ep. of the Buddha Divy
95, 264 & samanngata endowed with the 5 good qualities A v.15 (of sensana, expld at Vism 122): see also above.
-angika consisting of 5 parts, fivefold, in foll. combns : jhna
(viz. vitakka, vicra, pti, sukha, cittass' ekaggat) Dhs 83;
turiya orchestra S i.131; Th 1, 398; 2, 139; Vv 364 ; DhA
-angula=angulika J
i.274, 394; bandhana bond J iv.3.
iv.153 (gandha); SnA 39 (usabha nahpetv bhojetv
datv mla bandhitv). -angulika (also aka) the 5 finger
mark, palm mark, the magic mark of the spread hand
with the fingers extended (made after the hand & 5 fingers
have been immersed in some liquid, preferably a solution of
sandal wood, gandha; but also blood). See Vogel, the 5 finger
token in Pli Literature, Amsterdam Akademie 1919 (with
plates showing ornaments on Bharhut Tope), cp. also J.P.T,S.
434
Pacama
Pa
Pa
Pai
Pata [pp. of pajnti] known, renowned DA i.143; ap unknown, defamed Vin iv.231; S iv.46; A iii.134 (where also
der. appatika).
Paala (nt.) [connected with paa, cp. Sk. paala in meaning "section" Vedic, in all other meanings later Sk.] 1. a covering,
membrane, lining, envelope, skin, film Vism 257 (masa of
the liver, where KhA 54 reads masa pia), 359 (phaa);
DhsA 307 (7 akkhi membranes of the eye); KhA 21 (samuppaana), 55 (udara mucous membrane of the stomach), 61
(id.); DhsA 330 (id.); SnA 248 (id.); PvA 186 (eka uphan,
singlelined, cp. paalika & palsika & see Morris J.P.T.S.
1887, 165); Vism 446 (kappsa film of cotton seed); Bdhd 66
(id.). 2. roof, ceiling PvA 52 (ayo of iron). 3. a heap,
mass (esp. of clouds) J i.73 (megha); DhsA 239 (abbha).
madhu honey comb J i.262; DhA i.59; iii.323. 4. cataract
of the eye Dvs v.27.
Paka (nt.) [cp. Sk. paka, connected with paa] a flag M i.379;
Miln 87; Vism 469; ThA 70.
Pai at Vin iv.46 (pai dinn hoti) is not clear, it is expld by
Bdhgh as "macapidhna (for phna) pdasikhsu i
dinno hoti." At DA i.77 we find the foll.. "viska pani
(sic.) bhta dassanan ti viskadassana, " and at DhsA
436
Pai
Paikrika
437
Paikrika
Paigandhiya
Paikiha inferior, low, vile A i.286=Dh i.144; in meaning "miserable" at DhA ii.3 is perhaps better to be read with v. l. as
pakkiliha, or should it be paikuha?
Paikibbisa (nt.) [pai+kibbisa] wrong doing in return, retaliation
J iii.135.
Paikkantaka [fr. last] one who has come or is coming back DhA
i.307.
Paikkama [fr.
pai+kram] going back Pv iv.12 (abhikkama+"going forward and backward"; cp. PvA 219).
Paikkamati [pai+kram] to step backwards, to return (opp.
abhi) Vin ii.110, 208; M i.78; S i.200, 226; ii.282; Sn 388
(ger. kkamma=nivattitv SnA 374); SnA 53. Caus.
paikkampeti to cause to retreat J i.214 Miln 121. pp.
paikkanta (q. v.).
Paikkla (adj.) [pai+kla] lit. against the slope; averse, objectionable, contrary, disagreeable Vin i.58 (kla); D iii.112,
113; M i.341 (dukkha); S iv.172 (id.); J i.393; VvA 92 (K.);
PvA 77; VbhA 250 sq. app without objection, pleasant,
agreeable Vv 532 (K.); Vism 70 (k). nt. loathsomeness,
impurity VvA 232. See also abstr. pikklyat (pai).
-ghit as neg. a "refraining from contradiction" (Dhs
trsln ) Pug 24 (k.); Dhs 1327 (k.). -manasikra realisation
of the impurity of the body DhA ii.87 (kkula); VbhA 251.
-sa (hre) the consciousness of the impurity of material
food D iii.289, 291; S v.132; A iv.49; adj. sain S i.227;
v.119, 317; A iii.169.
Paikubbara [pai+kubbara] the part of the carriage pole nearest to the horse(?) A iv.191.
Paikulyat (f.) [fr. paikla, perhaps better to write patikkulyat] reluctance, loathsomeness M i.30; A v.64. Other
forms are paiklat, pikklyat, & pikuly (q. v.).
Paigandhiya
Paiccasamuppda
Paicaya & (paiccaya) [pai+caya] adding to, heaping up, accumulation, increase Vin ii.74; iii.158 (pati); S iii.169; A iii.376
sq. (v. l. pati); iv.355; v.336 sq.; Th 1, 642; Ud 35 (pati);
Miln 138.
Paiggahita [pp. of paigganhti] received, got, accepted, appropriated, taken Vin i.206, 214; J vi.231. As appaiggahitaka
(nt.) "that which is not received" at Vin iv.90.
Paigha (m. & nt.) [pai+gha, adj. suffix of ghan=han, lit. striking against] 1. (ethically) repulsion, repugnance, anger D i.25,
34; iii.254, 282; S i.13; iv.71, 195, 205, 208 sq.; v.315; A i.3,
87, 200; Sn 371, 536; Dhs 1060; Miln 44; DA i.22. 2. (psychologically) sensory reaction D iii.224, 253, 262; S i.165,
186; A i.41, 267; ii.184; Dhs 265, 501, 513, 579; VbhA 19.
See on term Dhs trsln 72, 204, 276 and passim. appaigha
see separately s. v. Note. How shall we read paighaha
nnighaso at DhsA 308? (paigha hna nighaso,
or paighaana nighaso?)
Paighavant (adj.) [fr. paigha] full of repugnance, showing
anger S iv.208, 209.
Paighta [pai+ghta, of same root as paigha] 1. (lit.) warding
439
Paiccasamuppda
Paia
doctrine of evolution, the respective stages of which are conditioned by a preceding cause & constitute themselves the cause
of resulting effect, as working out the next state of the evolving (shall we say) "individual" or "being," in short the bearer
of evolution. The respective links in this chain which to study
& learn is the first condition for a "Buddhist" to an understanding of life, and the cause of life, and which to know forward
and backward (anuloma pailoma manas' ksi Vin i.1) is
indispensable for the student, are as follows. The root of all,
primary cause of all existence, is avijj ignorance; this produces sankhr: karma, dimly conscious elements, capacity
of impression or predisposition (will, action, Cpd.; synergies
Mrs. Rh. D.), which in their turn give rise to via thinking
substance (consciousness, Cpd.; cognition Mrs. Rh. D.), then
follow in succession the foll. stages: nmarpa individuality
(mind & body, animated organism Cpd.; name & form Mrs.
Rh. D.), sayatana the senses (6 organs of sense Cpd.; the
sixfold sphere Mrs. Rh. D.), phassa contact, vedan feeling,
tah thirst for life (craving), updna clinging to existence
or attachment (dominant idea Cpd.; grasping Mrs. Rh. D.),
bhava (action or character Cpd.; renewed existence Mrs. Rh.
D.), jti birth (rebirth conception Cpd.), jarmaraa (+soka
parideva dukkhadomanass' pays) old age & death
(+tribulation, grief, sorrow, distress & despair). The BSk.
form is prattya samutpda, e. g. at Divy 300, 547.
The Paicca samuppda is also called the Nidna ("basis," or "ground," i. e. cause) doctrine, or the Paccay' kra
("related condition"), and is referred to in the Suttas as
Ariya-ya ("the noble method or system"). The term paccay'
kra is late and occurs only in Abhidhamma literature.
The oldest account is found in the Mahpadna Suttanta of
the Dgha Nikya (D ii.30 sq.; cp. Dial. ii.24 sq.), where 10
items form the constituents of the chain, and are given in backward order, reasoning from the appearance of dukkha in this
world of old age and death towards the original cause of it in
via. The same chain occurs again at S ii.104 sq. A
later development shows 12 links, viz. avijj and sankhr
added to precede via (as above). Thus at S ii.5 sq. A
detailed exposition of the P. s. in Abhidhamma literature
is the exegesis given by Bdhgh at Vism xvii. (pp. 517 586,
under the title of Pa bhmi niddesa), and at VbhA
130 213 under the title of Paccaykra vibhanga.
Some passages selected for ref.: Vin i.1 sq.; M i.190, 257; S
i.136; ii.1 sq., 26 sq., 42 sq., 70, 92 sq., 113 sq.; Ai.177; v.184;
Sn. 653; Ud 1 sq.; Ps i.50 sq.; 144; Nett 22, 24, 32, 64 sq.; DA
i.125, 126.
-kusala skilled in the (knowledge of the) chain of causation M iii.63; Nd1 171; f. abstr. kusalat D iii.212.
Paia
Paipatha
i.100, 299; iv.148, 350; Ps i.194 (two p., viz. pariccga and
pakkhandana); Pug 19, 21, 22. dna S v.24; A v.233,
253 sq.; upadhi It 46, 62; sabbpadhi S i.136; iii.133; v.226;
A i.49; v.8, 110, 320 sq.; nupassan Ps ii.44 sq.; nupassin
M iii.83; S iv.211; v.329; A iv.88, 146 sq.; v.112, 359.
Pai (f.) [fr. pai+j; cp. later Sk. pratij] acknowledgment, agreement, promise, vow, consent, permission D
iii.254; J i.153; Pv iv.112 , 144 ; Miln 7; DhA ii.93: PvA 76,
123; SnA 397, 539. patia moceti to keep one's promise
DhA i.93.
Paidukkhpanat (f.) [pai+abstr. of dukkhpeti, Caus. Denom. fr. dukkha] the fact of being afflicted again with sffering Miln 180.
Paideseti [pai+deseti] to confess Vin ii.102.
pidesaniya.
See also
441
Paipatha
Paippassaddhi
Vism 411 (khandha); usually in abl. paipiy adv. successively, in succession, alongside of, in order Vism 343 = J
v.253 (ghara from house to house); ThA 80 (magga); DhA
i.156; ii.89; iii.361; SnA 23, 506; PvA 54; VvA 76, 137.
Paipad (f.) [fr. pai+pad] means of reaching a goal or destination, path, way, means, method, mode of progress (cp.
Dhs. trsln 53, 82, 92, 143), course, practice (cp. BSk. pratipad in meaning of pratipatti "line of conduct" Av ii.140 with
note) D i.54 (dvatti p.), 249 (way to); S ii.81 (nirodhasruppa
gmin p.); iv.251 (bhaddik), 330 (majjhim) v.304 (sabbattha gmin), 361 (udaya gmin sotpatti), 421; D
iii.288 (adassana visuddhi); A i.113, 168 (pua)
ii.76, 79, 152 (akkham); Vbh 99, 104 sq., 211 sq., 229 sq.,
331 sq. In pregnant sense The path (of the Buddha), leading
to the destruction of all ill & to the bliss of Nibbna (see specified under magga, ariyamagga, sacca), thus a qusi synonym
of magga with which freq. combd (e.g. D i.156) Vin i.10; D
i.157; iii.219 (anuttariya); M ii.11; iii.251, 284; S i.24 (dah
yya dhr pamuccanti); A i.295 sq. (glh nijjhm majjhim); Sn 714 (cp. SnA 497), 921; Ps ii.147 (majjhim); Nett
95 sq.; Pug 15, 68; VvA 84 (sankhta ariyamagga). Specified
in various ways as follows: sava nirodha gmin p. D
i.84; dukkha nirodha g. D i.84, 189; iii.136; S v.426
sq.; A i.177; Ps i.86, 119; Dhs 1057; lokanirodha g A
ii.23; It 121; with the epithets samm anuloma apaccanka
anvattha dhammnudhamma Nd1 32, 143, 365; Nd2 384 etc.
(see detail under samm). There are several groups of 4
paipad mentioned, viz. (a) dukkh dandhbhi, sukh &
khippbhi dandh & khipp, i. e. painful practice resulting in knowledge slowly acquired & quickly acquired, pleasant practice resulting in the same way D iii.106; A ii.149 sq.,
154; v.63; SnA 497; (b) akkham, kham, dam & sam p. i.
e. want of endurance, endurance, self control, equanimity.
Paipannaka (adj. n.) [fr. paipanna] one who has entered upon
the Path (ariyamagga) Pug 13 (=maggahaka, phalatthya
paipannatt p. nma PugA 186); Miln 342, 344; Nett 50;
DhsA 164. See also Miln trsl. ii.231, 237.
Paippassaddhi (f.) [fr. paippassaddha] subsidence, calming, allaying, quieting down, repose, complete ease Vin i.331 (kammassa suppression of an act); Ps ii.3, 71, 180; Nett 89; Dhs 40,
41, 320; SnA 9. Esp. frequent in the Niddesas in stock phrase
expressing the complete calm attained to in emancipation, viz.
442
Paippassaddhi
Paimasati
Vv 5024 .
Paippassambhati [pai+ppa+sambhati of rambh. Note however that the BSk. is prarambhyati as well as srambhyati,
e. g. MVastu i.253, 254; Divy 68, 138, 494, 549, 568] to
subside, to be eased, calmed, or abated, to pass away, to be allayed S i.211; v.51; aor. ssambhi DhA ii.86 (dohao); iv.133
(bdho). pp. paippassaddha (q. v.). Caus. paippassambheti to quiet down, hush up, suppress, bring to a standstill, put to rest, appease Vin i.49 (kamma), 144 (id.), 331
(id.); ii.5 (id.), 226 (id.); M i.76; J iii.28 (dohaa).
Paibaddha (adj.) [pai+baddha, pp. of bandh] bound to, in fetters or bonds, attracted to or by, dependent on D i.76; Vin
iv.302 (kya); A v.87 (para); Dh 284; Miln 102 (vajjana);
PvA 134 (jvika dependent on him for a living). Freq. in
cpd. citta affected, enamoured, one's heart bound in love Vin
iii.128; iv.18; Sn 37 (see Nd2 385), 65; PvA 46, 145 (t f.
abstr.), 151, 159 (rao with the king).
Paibandha (adj.) [pai+bandha] bound to, connected with, referring to Ps i.172, 184.
Paibandhati [pai+bandhati] to hold back, refuse J iv.134 (vetana na p.=aparihpetv dadti).
Paibandhu [pai+bandhu] a connection, a relation, relative Dhs
1059, 1136, 1230; DhsA 365.
Paibhneyyaka (adj.) [ger. formation+ka fr. paibhna] =paibhnavant Vin i.249 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.140); A i.25.
Paimanteti [pai+manteti] to discuss in argument, to reply to, answer, refute; as pati at Vin ii.1; D i.93 (vacane), 94; Dh i.263;
J vi.82, 294.
Paimasati
Paileeti
Pairpa (adj.) [pai+rpa] fit, proper, suitable, befitting, seeming D i.91; Vin ii.166 (seyy); M i.123; S i.214; ii.194 (ap);
Th 2, 341; Pv ii.1215 ; J v.99; Pug 27; DhA iii.142; PvA 26,
122 (=yutta), 124. -desavsa living in a suitable region D
iii.276=A ii.32; Nett 29, 50. Spelt pati at Dh 158; Sn 89,
187, 667; SnA 390. Cp. pirpika.
Paimukha (adj.) [pai+mukha] facing, opposite; nt. adv. opposite SnA 399 (gacchati).
Pailbha [fr. pai+labh] obtaining, receiving, taking up, acquisition, assumption, attainment D i.195; M i.50; A ii.93, 143;
Ps ii.182, 189; Nd1 262; Dh 333; Pug 57; VvA 113; PvA 50,
73, 74. attabhva obtaining a reincarnation, coming into
existence S ii.256; iii.144; A ii.159, 188; iii.122 sq. See
also paribhoga.
Paiydita [pp. of paiydeti] given, prepared, arranged, dedicated Miln 9; DhA ii.75.
Paiydeti [for *paiyteti=Sk. pratiytayati, Caus. of pai+yat,
like P. niyydeti=Sk. nirytayati] to prepare, arrange, give,
dedicate SnA 447. pp. paiydita (q. v.). Caus.II.
paiydpeti to cause to be presented or got ready, to assign,
advise, give over Vin i.249 (ygu); Sn p. 110 (bhojaniya);
P.vA 22, 141.
444
Paileeti
Paivisiha
Paileeti [Sec. dern fr. pp. pailna in sense of Caus.; cp. Sk.
lpayati of l] to withdraw, to make keep away, not to touch
S ii.265 (pati, as at Miln 297 patilyati).
Paivinodana (nt.) [fr. paivinodeti] removal, driving out, explusion A ii.48, 50; Miln 320.
Paivta (adv.) [pai+vta, acc. cp. Sk. prativta & prativta] against the wind (opp. anuvta) Vin ii.218; S i.13; Sn
622; Dh 54, 125; PvA 116; Sdhp 425.
Paiviruddha [pp. of paivirujjhati, cp. BSk. prativiruddha rebellious Divy 445] obstructed or obstructing, an adversary, opponent J vi.12; DA i.51 ( satta=pare); Miln 203, 403.
Paivijjha (adj.) [grd. of paivijjhati] in cpd. dup hard to penetrate (lit. & fig.) S v.454.
445
Paivisiha
Paisandhi
Paisankhti [pai+sa+khy] to be careful, to think over, reflect, discriminate, consider; only in ger. paisankh (as adv.)
carefully, intently, with discrimination Vin i.213; M i.273;
iii.2; J i.304; Nd2 540; Pug 25; cp. paisankh (+yoniso); also
ger. paisankhya Sddp 394. Opp. appaisankh inconsiderately, in phrase sahas app rashly & without a thought
M i.94; S ii.110, 219. Cp. paisacikkhati.
pacca-
Paisankhrika & ya (adj.) [fr. paisankharoti] serving for repair Vin iii.43 (drni); PvA 141 (id.; ya).
Paisayutta [pp. of paisayujati] connected with, coupled, belonging to Vin iv.6; S i.210 (nibbna dhammikath); Th 1,
598; It 73; VvA 6, 87; PvA 12.
Paisavedin (adj.) [fr. paisavedeti; BSk. pratisavedin Divy 567] experiencing, feeling, enjoying or suffering M i.56; S i.196; ii.122; iv.41; v.310 sq.; A i.164
(sukhadukkha); iv.303 (id.); v.35 (id.); It 99; Ps i.95, 114
(evasukhadukkha), 184, 186 sq.; Pug 57, 58.
Paisantharati [pai+sa+tharati of st] to receive kindly, to welcome, Miln 409; DhsA 397. ger. santhya J vi.351. pp.
paisanthata (q. v.).
Paisanthra [fr. pai+sa+st] lit. spreading before, i. e.
friendly welcome, kind reception, honour, goodwill, favour,
friendship D iii.213, 244; A i.93; iii.303 sq.; iv.28, 120; v.166,
168 (aka adj. one who welcomes); J ii.57; Dh 376 (expld as
misa and dhamma at DhA iv.111, see also DhsA 397 sq. &
Dhs trsl. 350); Dhs 1344; Vbh 360; Miln 409. paisanthra
karoti to make friends, to receive friendly PvA 12, 44, 141,
187.
Paisavedeti [pai+sa+vedeti, Caus. of vid] to feel, experience, undergo, perceive D i.43, 45; A i.157 (domanassa);
iv.406 (id.); Pug 59; PvA 192 (mahdukkha). There is also
a by form, viz. paisavediyati S ii.18, 75, 256 (attabhva
pailbha); It 38 (sukkha dukkha; v. l. vedeti).
Paisaharaa (nt.) [fr. paisaharati] removing Nett 27, 41.
Paisaharati [pai+sa+h, cp. BSk. pratisaharati MVastu
i.82] to draw back, withdraw, remove, take away, give up Vin
ii.185 (sakavaa); D i.96; S v.156; PvA 92 (devarpa).
Paisandhi
Paisedhitar
Paisaraa (nt.) [pai+saraa ] refuge in (), shelter, help, protection M i.295 (mano as p. of the other 5 senses); iii.9; S
iv.221; v.218; A i.199 (Bhagava); ii.148 (sa able to be restored); iii.186 (kamma); iv.158, 351; v.355; J i.213; vi.398.
appaisaraa (adj.) without shelter, unprotected Vin ii.153
(so read for appaiss). Note. In meaning "restoration" the
derivation is prob. fr pai+s to move (Sk. saraa and not
saraa protection). Cp. paisraiya.
Paiseha (adj.) [pai+seha] having a superior; neg. app incomparable, unsurpassed Miln 357 (appaibhga+).
Paisedha [fr. pai+sidh1 , sedhati drive off] warding off, prohibition Miln 314 ("resubjugation"); SnA 402 (with ref. to part
"na"); KhA 170 (id.); PvA 11 (nipta="m"); VvA 224.
Paisedhaka (adj. n.) [fr. paisedha] warding off, one who prevents or puts a stop to S i.221; Miln 344.
Paisedhati & (Caus.) sedheti [pai+sedhati] to ward off, prohibit, prevent, refuse S iv.341; PvA 11.
Paisedhana (nt.) [cp. paisedha] warding off, refusal, prohibition, stopping S i.221, 223; PvA 11, 25; Sdhp 397.
Paisedhitar
Paha
Paiseneti [pai+seneti, see usseneti] to repel, push away, be inimical towards, retaliate (opp. usseneti) A ii.215 (paisseneti);
Sn 390 (seniyati).
Pau (adj.) [cp. Epic. Sk. pau] sharp, pungent; fig. keen, wise,
clever, skilful Vism 337 (sakicca), 338. Cp. paddha1 &
pava.
Paissata [pai+sata, pp. of sm] recollecting, thoughtful, mindful, minding Sn 283=Miln 411; Dh 144 (t); Vv 2110 ; and with
spelling pati at S iii.143; iv.74, 322, 351; A iii.24; It 10, 21,
81; Sn 283, 413.
Paissati (f.) [pai+sati of sm] mindfulness, remembrance, memory M i.36 sq.; Dhs 23; Pug 25. app lapse of memory Dhs
1349.
Pattana (nt.) [*Sk. paana] a place, city, port J i.121; iv.16, 137,
v.75; PvA 53. ka a sort of village J vi.456.
Paha
Pameti
Paa [in this meaning unknown in Sk; only in one faulty var. lect.
as "house"; see BR s. v. paa. Usual meaning "wager"] a shop
J iv.488 [v. l. pana].
Paaka see paaka. -paaka (comb) see phaaka.
Paati [cp. Sk. paati] to sell, barter, bargain, risk, bet J v.24
(=voharati attna vikkiati C.). See also paitaka &
paiya.
449
Pameti
Pau
high aspirations), 30, 60; Dhs 269, 1027, 1411; PvA 12, 35
(hra), 42 (id.); DhA ii.154 (bhojana). Compar. patatara,
often combd with abhikkantatara, e. g. D i.62, 74, 216; S i.80;
A i.119, 171; v.37, 140, 203 sq.
Pataka [perhaps=Sk. paita, or pa (see paa), as P. formation it may be taken as pa+nta+ka, viz. that which has been
produced] a gambler's stake J vi.192. See paitaka.
Paudati, Paunna see panudati etc.
Paeti [pa+n] to lead on to, bring out, adduce, apply, fig. decree
(a fine or punishment), only used in phrase daa paeti
to give a punishment D ii.339=Miln 110; M ii.88; Dh 310; J
ii.207; iii.441; iv.192; Miln 29; DhA iii.482. pp. pata
(q. v.).
Paiya (adj.) [ger. formation fr. pa, see paati & cp. BSk.
paya in tara paya fare Av i.148] to be sold or bought,
vendible, nt. article of trade, ware A ii.199; Vv 847 (=bhaa
VvA 337); J iv.363 (=bhaa C. 366).
Paihita [pp. of paidahati] applied, directed, intent, bent on,
well directed, controlled S iv.309 (dup); A i.8; v.87; Dh
43; (samm citta); Sn 154 (su mano= suhu hapito
acalo SnA 200); Ps ii.41 (vimokkha); Miln 204, 333; 413.
appaihita in connection with samdhi & vimokkha seems to
mean "free from all longings," see Vin iii.93=iv.25; S iv.295,
309, 360; Ps ii.43 sq., 100; Miln 337.
Pau (adj.) [cp. Ved. pu, palita, pala (pale red); Gr.
, , (grey); Lat. palleo (to be pale),
pullus (grey); Lith. patvas (pale yellow), pilkas (grey);
Ohg. falo (pale, yellowish, withered); E. pale] pale red
or yellow, reddish, light yellow, grey; only at Th 2, 79 (kis
pau viva), where pau represents the usual up-pa'
-uppauka-jt: "thin, pale and colourless" see ThA 80).
Otherwise only in cpds., e. g.
-kambala a light red blanket, orange coloured cloth S
i.64 (=ratta kambala C.); A i.181; Sn 689 (=ratta SnA 487);
also a kind of ornamental stone, Sakka's throne (p. k.
sil) is made of it J i.330; ii.93; ii.53, (silsana); v.92 (id.); Pv
ii.960 (sil=p. k nmaka slsana PvA 138); VvA 110
(id.); KhA 122 (varsana); DhA i.17 (silsana). -palsa a
withered leaf Vin i.96=iii.47; iv.217; Dh 233, VbhA 244; KhA
62; on palsika (DA i.270) see J.P.T.S. 1893, 37. -mattik
yellow loam, clay soil KhA. 59. -roga jaundice Vin i.206
450
Pau
Patk
(bdha) 276 (id.); J i.431; ii.102; DhA i.25. -rogin suffering from jaundice J ii.285; iii.401. -v yellow flute (of
Pacasikha): see beluva. -sha yellow lion, one of the 4 kinds
SnA 125 (cp. Manor. pr. on A ii.33). -sutta orange
coloured string D i.76.
Patk
Patodaka
123.
8
Patpavant (adj.) [fr. patpa] splendid, majestic Sn 550 (=jutimantatya p. SnA 453); Th 1, 820.
Pati2 (indecl.) [Vedic prati etc.) a doublet of pai; both often found
side by side; pati alone always as prep. (with acc.) and as prefix with sth (paihti, patihita etc.). All cases are referred
to the form with pai, except in the case of patih. The more
frequent cases are the foll.: patikra, kuati, caya, dissati,
nandati, manteti, mneti, ruddha, rpa, lna, sallna,
etc. sibbati, sevati, ssata, ssaya, ssava.
Patita [pp. of patati] fallen Dh 68, 320; J i.167; Miln 187; PvA
31 (read ptita), 56.
Patitaka (adj.) [fr. last] thrown or fallen into (loc.), dropped Vism
62.
Patitihati [pai+titthati] to stand up again Th 1, 173.
Patittha [pa+tittha] a bank of a river or lake, su (adj.) with beautiful banks S i.90; Pv ii.120 (=sundaratittha PvA 77).
Patih (f.) [fr. pati+sth. Cp. Ved. pratih support, foundation] support, resting place, stay, ground, help, also (spiritual)
helper, support for salvation S i.1 (ap); ii.65; iii.53; Sn 173;
Dh 332; J i.149; iv.20; Miln 302; DhsA 261; VvA 138; PvA
53, 60 (=dpa), 87 (=dpa), 141 (su), 174 (su=dpa).
Patoda [fr. pa+tud cp. Ved. pratoda] a goad, driving stick, prick,
spur M i.124; iii.97; S iv.176; A ii.114; iii.28; iv.91; v.324; Th
1, 210; J i.57, 192; Dhs 16, 20, 292; Pug 25; SnA 147; ThA
174; Sdhp 367.
-lahi a driver's stick, goad stick [cp. BSk. pratodayai Divy 7, 76, 463, 465] D i.105, 126; J vi.249; Miln 27;
DhA i.302; ii.38; iv.216; VvA 64. As yahi at Dpvs xi.30.
452
Patodaka
Patti
Patta2 (m. & nt.) [Ved. ptra, fr. Idg. *ptlom=Lat. pocu-lum
beaker, Oir. l. See pna & pibati] a bowl, esp. the alms
bowl of a bhikkhu Vin i.46, 50, 51, 61, 224 (patte presu);
ii.111, 126, 224, 269; S i.112; A iv.344; Sn 413, 443; J i.52,
55 (patta thavikya pakkhipati), 69; iii.535 (pua deti
to give a full bowl, i. e. plenty); v.389 (pl. pattni); Vism 108
(igahik' hato ayopatto); DhA iv.220 ( preti); PvA 35,
61, 76, 88, 141. Two kinds of bowls are mentioned at Vin
iii.243, viz. ayo of iron & mattik of clay, dru a wooden
bowl Vin ii.112, 143. uda a bowl of water or a water bowl
M i.100; S v.121; A iii.230 sq. cp. odapattakin. pattassa
mukhavai J v.38. fut. pt (q. v.).
-dhraka bowl support, bowl hold Vin ii.113.
-kaolik a wicker work stand for a bowl Vin ii.114 (cp.
Vin. Texts iii.86). -gata gone into the bowl, alms given Th 1,
155; Pv iv.73 . -ghpaka one who is going to take a bowl, a
receiver of a b. Vin ii.177 (+siya etc.); A iii.275. -cvara
bowl and robe (see note in Dial ii.162) Vin i.46; ii.78, 194; S
i.76; J iii.379; Pv ii.1316 ; DA i.45, 186; PvA 61. -tthavik a
bag to carry a bowl in Vin ii.114; J iii.364; VvA 40, 63; KhA
45. -dhovana "bowl washing," (the water used for) washing the bowl Vin ii.214. -pin hand on bowl, bowl in hand
Sn 713; It 89=S iii.93; onta removing the hand from the
bowl: see onta. -piika "eating from one vessel only" A
iii.220. -maala a circular artificial bottom of a bowl Vin
ii.112. -maka a raised parapet (?) on which to put the bowl
Vin ii.114 (cp. Vin. Texts iii.86). -mla the bottom of the
bowl Vin ii.269. -vai the brim of a bowl S iv.168. -sain
paying attention to one's bowl Vin ii.214.
Patti
Patha
Patti3 (f.) [for patta1 ?] leaf, leafy part of a plant Vin i.201 (taka,
taka patti, taka pai).
Pattika1 [fr. patti1 cp. pajja2 ] on foot, a pedestrian or soldier on
foot, D i.50, 89, 106, 108; ii.73; A ii.117 (hatth' ruha, assruha, rathika, p.); J vi.145; Vism 396 (manuss pattik gacchanti); Sn 418; a form pattikrika is found, e. g. at J iv.
134; v.100; vi.15, 463; Ap. 316.
Patha [of path, Ved. pathi with the 3 bases pathi, path and
panth, of which only the last two have formed independent
nouns, viz. patha and pantha (q. v.)] 1. path, road, way D
i.63; Sn 176 (loc. pathe), 385, 540, 868; Nd2 485 B (+pantha, in expln of magga); J i.308 (loc. pathe); ii.39; vi.525 (abl.
path); Th 1, 64; Pug 22, 57; Mhvs 21, 24 (pathe); 36, 93 (loc.
pathi, see Geiger, Gr. 89); Sdhp 241. 2. Very frequent
as , where it is sometimes pleonastic, and acts in the function of an abstract formation in t or tta (cp. similar use
of anta: see anta1 5; and pada: see pada 3), e. g. anila (air) J
iv.119; anupariyya A iv.107; dicca (path of the sun, sky)
DhA iii.177; ummagga S i.193; kamma DhA i.36; gaana
(range of) calculation Miln 20; cakkhu J iv.403 (=cakkhna eta nma C.); catummah A iii.28, 42, 394; dve Vv
5317 ; nakkhatta Dh 208; yaa (=yaa) Nd2 524; yogga A
iii.122; raj S ii.219; rga (sensuality) S iv.70; vacana (way
of saying, speech) Vv 6317 (=vacana VvA 262), etc. See also
cakkhu, eyya, dveh, manussa, yaa, vda, sagga,
hattha; der. ptheyya. See also byappatha. apatha
where there is no way or road, wrong way J ii.287; ThA 255;
VvA 337.
-addhan "the journey or stretch of the path": see under ad-
454
Patha
Padakkhia
Padaka1 (adj.) [fr. pada4 ] one who knows the padas (words or
lines), versed in the padapha of the Veda (Ep. of an educated
Brahmin) D i.88=Sn p. 105 (where Av ii.19 in id. p. has
padao=P. padaso word by word, but Divy 620 reads padako;
ajjheti vedeti c ti padako); M i.386; A i.163, 166; Sn 595;
Miln 10, 236.
Padaka2 (nt.)=pada 3, viz. basis, principle or pada 4, viz. stanza,
line J v.116 (=kraa padni C.).
Padaka2 (nt.) [fr. pada1 ] in cpd. aha an "eight foot," i. e. a
small inset square (cp. aha pada chess board), a patch
(?) Vin i.297. See also padika.
Padakkhia (adj.) [pa+dakkhia] 1. "to the right," in phrase
padakkhia karoti (with acc. of object) to hold (a person,
etc.) to one's right side, i. e. to go round so as to keep the
right side turned to a person, a mode of reverential salutation
Vin i.17; S i.138; A i.294; ii.21, 182; iii.198; Sn 1010; J i.50,
60; iii.392. 2. "(prominent) with the right," i. e. skilful,
455
Padakkhia
Paduma
Paduma
Paddhagu
Paduma (nt.) [cp. Epic Sk. padma, not in RV.] the lotus
Nelumbium speciosum. It is usually mentioned in two varieties, viz. ratta and seta, i. e. red and white lotus, so at
J v.37; SnA 125; as ratta at VvA 191; PvA 157. The latter seems to be the more prominent variety; but paduma also
includes the 3 other colours (blue, yellow, pink?), since it frequently has the designation of pacavaa-paduma (the 5
colours however are nowhere specified), e. g. at J i.222;
v.337; vi.341; VvA 41. It is further classified as satapatta
and sahassapatta- p., viz. lotus with 100 & with 1,000 leaves:
VvA 191. Compared with other species at J v.37, where 7
kinds are enumd as uppala (blue, red & white), paduma (red
& white), kumuda (white) and kallahra. See further kamala
and kuvalaya. (1) the lotus or lotus flower M iii.93; S i.138,
204; A i.145; ii.86 sq.; iii.26, 239; Sn 71, 213; J i.51 (daa
N. of a plant, cp. Sk. daotphala), 76 (khandha, lat,
daaka, olambaka); iv.3; vi.564; Dh 458; Nd1 135; Vv 354
(=puarka VvA 161); 4412 (nn paduma sachanna);
Pv ii.120 (id.); ii.122 (id.); Pug 63; Vism 256 (ratta); DA i.219;
KhA 53; SnA 97; Sdhp 359. (2) N. of a purgatory (niraya)
S i.151 152; Sn 677; p. 126; SnA 475 sq.
-acchara (heavenly) lotus maiden SnA 469. uttara
N. of Buddha SnA 341, 455 etc. -kaik a peak in the
shape of a lotus VvA 181. -kalpa a bunch of lotuses VvA
191. -gabbha the calyx of a l. ThA 68 (vaa). -patta a l.
leaf Nd1 135 (=pokkhara); DhA iv.166 (=pokkhara patta).
-puja a l. cluster J iii.55. -puppha a lotus flower Nd2 393;
SnA 78. -rga "lotus hued," a ruby VvA 276. -vyha one
of the 3 kinds of fighting, viz. p.; cakka, sakaa J ii.406=
iv.343 (cp. Sk. p. vyha samdhi a kind of concentration, & see J trsln ii.275). -sara a lotus pond J i.221; v.337;
SnA 141.
Padseti & Padoseti [Caus. of padussati, but the latter probably Denom. fr. padosa2 ] to defile, pollute, spoil, make bad or
corrupt [cp. BSk. pradyati citta Divy 197, 286] D i.20;
M i.129; It 86; DA i.211 (see padosa1 ); ThA 72 (Ap. v. 40;
457
Paddhagu
Panigghosa
Padhna (nt.) [fr. pa+dh, cp. padahati] exertion, energetic effort, striving, concentration of mind D iii.30, 77, 104, 108,
214, 238; M ii.174, 218; S i.47; ii.268; iv.360; v.244 sq.;
A iii.65 67 (5 samay and 5 asamay for padhna), 249;
iv.355; v.17 sq.; Sn 424, 428; It 30; Dh 141; J i.90; Nd2 394
(=viriya); Vbh 218 (citta samdhi p etc.); Nett 16; DA
i.104; DhA i.85 (mah padhna padahitv); ThA 174;
PvA 134. Padhna is fourfold, viz. savara, pahna, bhvana, anurakkha or exertion consisting in the restraint of
one's senses, the abandonment of sinful thoughts, practice of
meditation & guarding one's character. These 4 are mentioned
at D iii.225; A ii.16; Ps i.84; ii.14 sq., 56, 86, 166, 174; Ud 34;
Nd1 45, 340; Sdhp 594. Very frequently termed sammappadhna [cp. BSk. samyak pradhna MVastu iii.120;
but also samyakpraha, e. g. Divy 208] or "right exertion,"
thus at Vin i.22; S i.105; iii.96 (the four); A ii.15 (id.); iii.12;
iv.125; Nd1 14; Ps i.21, 85, 90, 161; SnA 124; PvA 98. As
padahana at Ps i.17, 21, 181.
Panigghosa
Papa
(as a sacrifice) to the goddess presiding over the roads, propitiation; it is here to be understood as a human sacrifice J vi.527
(vv. ll. pattha & bandha).
459
Papa
Papphsa
Papada (or Papad?) [pa+pada] tip of the foot. toes; but in diff.
meaning (for papa or papta to pat) "falling down, abyss,
pit" at Sn 665 (gloss for papaa; expld at SnA 479 by "mahniraya").
Papacita [pp. of papaceti] obsessed, illusioned SnA 495 (a gihipapa cena). nt. obsession, vain imagination, illusion
S iv.203Vbh 390.
Papaik (f.) [cp. Sk. prapik (lexic. & gram.) young shoot,
sprout; and parpharka (RV.) one who tears to pieces; also Sk.
parpaa N. of a plant] 1. a splinter, piece, fragment, chip Vin
ii.193 (read tato pap.); A iv.70 sq. (of ayophla); J v.333
(same as Vin passage); Miln 179. 2. the outer dry bark or
crust of a tree, falling off in shreads; also shoots, sprouts M
i.78, 192 sq., 488; A i.152; iii.19 sq., 44, 200, 360; iv.99, 336;
v.4 sq., 314 sq.; J iii.491. Cp. pheggu.
Pappoti [the contracted form of pputi, Sk. prpnoti] to obtain, get, gain, receive, attain D iii.159, 165; Sn 185, 187,
584; Dh 27; DhA i.395. Pot. 1st pl. pappomu J v.57
(=ppueyyma C.). ger. pappuyya S i.48; Sn 482 (or
pot?), 593, 829 (=ppuitv Nd1 170). For further ref. see
pputi.
Papphsa (nt.) [fr. sound root* phu, not corresponding directly to Sk. pupphusa (cp. Geiger, P.Gr. 34), to which it
stands in a similar relation as *ghur (P.) to *ghar (Sk.) or
phurati>pharati. From same root Gr. to blow and Lat.
pustula bubble, blister; see Walde under pustula] the lungs D
460
Papphsa
Pabbata
Pabala (adj.) [cp. Sk. prabala] very strong, mighty Sdhp 75.
Pabha1 [pp. of pabhati] pulled out, drawn forth D i.77 (T. reads
pavha). See pavha.
Pabha2 (adj.) [pa+bha] strong, sharp (of pain) D ii.128; J
v.422, Miln 174.
Pabhati [pa+bh to pull, see abbahati] to pull out, draw forth D
i.77 (T. reads pavhati, v. l. pabbhati, evidently fr. pabha);
cp. atapatha brhmaa iv.3, 3, 16. pp. pabha1 (q.
v.).
Pabujjhati [pa+bujjhati] to wake up (intrs.), awake S i.4, 209; Dh
296 sq.; It 41 (sutt p.); J i.61; ii.103; iv.431 (opp. niddyati);
DA i.140. pp. pabuddha (q. v.).
Pabbajj (f.) [fr. pa+vraj, cp. pabbajati, Epic & BSk. pravrajy] leaving the world, adopting the ascetic life; state of being
a Buddhist friar, taking the (yellow) robe, ordination. (1)
ordination or admission into the Buddha's Order in particular:
Vin iii.13; S i.161 etc. smanera ordination of a Novice,
described in full at Vin i.82. pabbajja ycati to beg admission Vin iv.129; labhati to gain admission to the Order Vin
i.12, 17, 32; D i.176; S iv.181. (2) ascetic or homeless
life in general D iii.147 sq.; M iii.33 (abbhokso p.); S v.350
(id.; read pabbajj); A v.204 (id.); S ii.128 (read jj for j);
iv.260; A i.151, 168; iv.274 sq.; Sn 405, 406, 567; It 75 (pabbajjya ceteti); Miln 19 (dhamma cariya samacariy' atth
p.); DhA i.6; SnA 49, 327, 423; ThA 251. pabbajja upagata gone into the homeless state PvA 167 (for pabbajita);
agrasm anagriya p. the going forth from home into the
homeless state Vin ii.253; M ii.56; pabbajja pabbajati to undertake or go into the ascetic life, in foll. varieties: isi of a
Saint or Sage J i.298, 303; DhA iv.55; PvA 162 (of the Buddha); tpasa of a Hermit J iii.119; DA i.270 (described in detail); DhA iv.29; PvA 21; samaa of a Wanderer PvA 76.
Note. The ceremony of admission to the priesthood is called
pabbajj (or pabbajana), if viewed as the act of the candidate
of orders, and pabbjana (q. v.), if viewed as the act of the
priest conferring orders; the latter term however does not occur in this meaning in the Canon.
Pabbata [Vedic parvata, fr. parvan, orig. knotty, rugged, massive] (1) a mountain ( range), hill, rock S i.101, 102, 127,
137; ii.32, 185, 190; A i.243; ii.140; iv.102 (dhpyati); Sn
413, 417, 543, 958, 1014; Nd1 466; Dh 8, 127 (na vivaro)=PvA 104; Dh 188 (n. pl. ni), 304; DA i.209; Miln 346
(dhamma); PvA 221 (angra) Sdhp 352, 545, 574. The 7
mountains round Veuvana are enumd at J v.38. Names of
some (real or fictitious) mountains, as found in the Jtaka literature: Cakkava J vi.282; Caoraa J iv.90; Canda J iv.283;
v.38, 162; Daaka hiraa J ii.33; Daddara J ii.8; iii.16;
Nemindhara J vi.125; Neru J iii.247; v.425; Paava Sn 417;
SnA 382 sq.; Mahneru J iv.462; Mahindhara Vv 3210 (cp.
VvA 136); Meru J i.25; iv.498; Yugandhara PvA 137; Rajata J
i.50; Vipula J vi.518; Sineru S ii.139; J i.48 & passim; Suvaa
J i.50; vi.514 (giritla). (2) [cp. Sk. prvata mountainous]
a mountaineer Miln 191.
-utu the time (aspect) of the mountain (in prognostications
Pabbata
Pabh
Pabbateyya (adj.) [fr. pabbata] belonging to mountains, mountain born (of a river) A iii.64 (nad p sghasot hrahrin);
iv.137 (id.); Vism 231 (id.), 285 (nad).
Pabhasana (adj. nt.) [fr. pa+bhra, cp. nva prabhraana Npl. A.V.] causing to fall or disappear, depriving,
taking away, theft, in mai jewel theft J vi.383. (Rh. D.
"polishing"?) Kern in Toev. s. v. takes pabhasana as a der.
fr. pa+bhrs to shine, i. e. making bright, polishing (as Rh.
D.).
Pabbaniya (adj.) [fr. pabba] forming a division or section, consisting of, belonging to KhA 114 (khaya) (?).
Pabhagga [pp. of pabhajati, cp. Sk prabhagna] broken up, destroyed, defeated Vin iii.108.
Pabbjaniya (adj.) [fr. pabbjana] belonging to banishment, deserving to be exiled Miln 186; also in cpd. kamma excommunication, one of the 5 ecclesiastical acts enumd at Vin i.49,
143. See also A i.79; DhA ii.109.
Pabhava (m. & nt.) [fr. pa+bhu, cp. Ved. prabhava] production,
origin, source, cause M i.67; S i.181; ii.12; It 37 (hra
netti); Sn 728, 1050; Nd2 under mla (with syn. of sambhava
& samuhna etc.); J iii.402= vi.518.
Pabhavati see pahoti.
Pabhassati [pa+bhra; cp. Sk. prabhrayate] to fall down or
off, drop, disappear Vin ii.135 (pret. pabhassittha); iv.159
(id.). Cp. pabhasana.
Pabbhra [cp. BSk. prg bhra Divy 80 etc.] 1. (m.) a decline, incline, slope J i.348; adj. (usually ) bending, inclining, sloping; fig. tending or leading to (cp. E. "bearing on")
M i.493 (samudda); S i.110 (id.); v.38, 216, 219; A iv.198
(anupubba), 224 (viveka); Miln 38 (samdhi). Very frequent in combn with similar expressions, e. g. ninna, poa (cp.
PvA ninnapoa pabbhra citta): see further ref. under
ninna; with adhimutta & garuka at Vism 117 (Nibbna).
Pabh (f.) [fr. pa+bh, cp. Epic Sk. prabh] light, radiance, shine
A ii.139; v.22; It 19, 20; PvA 56 (sarra), 137 (id.), 71, 176;
Sdhp 250. canda ppabh moonshine It 20; DhsA 14.
462
Pabh
Pamaddati
Pabhta [pp. of pabhti] become clear or light, shining, dawning Sn 178 (sup); esp. in phrase pabhtya rattiy when night
had become light, i.e. given way to dawn, at daybreak J i.81,
500. (nt.) daybreak, morning S i.211; SnA 519 (pabhte);
atipabhte in broad daylight J i.436.
Pabhti [pa+bh] to shine forth, to become light, gleam, glitter J
v.199 (said of a river; =pavattati C.). pp. pabhta.
Pabhva [fr. pa+bh] might, power, strength, majesty, dignity J
v.36; vi.449.
Pamajjan (f.) & itatta (nt.) are abstr. formations fr. pa+mad,
in the sense of pamda carelessness etc., & occur as philological synonyms in exegesis of pamda at Vbh 350=Nd1 423;
Nd2 405. Also at DhA i.228 (bhva=pamda).
a
it
i.
l.
Pamatta [pp. of pamajjati] slothful, indolent, indifferent, careless, negligent D iii.190; S i.61=204; A i.11, 139; iv.319;
v.146; Sn 57, 70, 329 sq., 399, 1121; Dh 19, 21, 29, 292,
309 (=sati vossaggena samanngata DhA iii.482), 371; Nd2
404; PvA 276 (quot. ativattati). appamatta diligent, careful, eager, mindful S i.4, 140, 157; A v.148; Th 1, 1245;
Pv iv.138 ; PvA 66 (dna detha etc.), 219, 278. See also
appamatta2 .
-crin acting carelessly Dh 334 (=sati vossagga
lakkhaena pamdena p. c. DhA iv.43). -bandhu friend
of the careless (Ep. of Mra) S i.123, 128; Sn 430; Nd2 507.
463
Pamaddati
Pamuha
pahaa).
Pamaddana (adj. nt.) [fr. pamaddati] crushing, defeating,
overcoming D i.89 (parasena); Sn p. 106 (id.=madditu
samattho SnA 450); Sn 561 (Mrasena); DA i.250.
Pamuha
Payuta
Cp. parimuha.
Pamutta [pp. of pamucati] 1. let loose, hurled J vi.360 (paptasmi). 2. liberated, set free S i.154; Sn 465, 524 sq.
Pamuyhati [pa+muyhati of muh] to become bewildered or infatuated J vi.73. pp. pamha (q. v.).
Pamokkha [fr. pa+muc, see pamucati] 1. discharging, launching, letting loose, gushing out; in phrases itivda pouring out
gossip M i.133; S v.73; A ii.26; DA i.21; and caravda id. S
iii.12; v.419. 2. release, deliverance S i.2; PvA 103 (pamutti+); abl. pamokkh for the release of, i. e. instead of
(gen.) J v.30 (pituno p.=pamokkha hetu C.).
Pamocana (adj. n.) [fr. pa+muc] loosening, setting free; deliverance, emancipation S i.172=Sn 78; A ii.24, 37, 49 sq.; Sn 166
(maccups, abl.=from), 1064 (pamocanya dat.=pamocetu
Nd2 ); It 104 (Nibbna sabbagantha ). At Dh 274 we
should read pamohana for pamocana.
465
Payuta
Para
i.256; Sn 818, instr. parehi Sn 240, 255; PvA 17. Meanings: (a) beyond, i. e. "higher" in space (like Ved. para as
opp. to avara lower), as well as "further" in time (i. e. future,
to come, or also remote, past: see loc. pare under c.), freq.
in phrase paro loko the world beyond, the world (i. e. life)
to come, the beyond or future life (opp. aya loko) Sn 185
(asm lok para loka na socati), 634 (asmi loke paramhi
ca); Dh 168 (paramhi loke); Pv ii.83 (id.=paraloke PvA 107);
but also in other combn , like santi para (adj.) higher than
calm Dh 202. Cp. paraloka, para and paro. (b) another,
other, adj. as well as n., pl. others Sn 396 (parassa dra
ntikkameyya), 818 (paresa, cp. Nd1 150); Dh 160 (ko paro
who else), 257 (pare others); Pv ii.919 (parassa dna); ii.943
(pare, loc.= paramhi parassa PvA 130); DhA iv.182 (gen. pl.);
PvA 15, 60 (paresa dat.), 103, 116, 253 (parassa purisassa &
para purisa). Often contrasted with and opposed to attano
(one's own, oneself), e. g. at M i.200 (para vambheti attna
ukkaseti); Sn 132 (attna samukkase para avajnti); J
i.256 (paresa, opp. attan); Nd2 26 (att attha opp. par
attha, see cpds. ajjhsaya & attha). paro... paro "the
one... the other" D i.224 (ki hi paro parassa karissati); paro
para one another Sn 148 (paro para nikubbetha). In a
special sense we find pare pl. in the meaning of "the others,"
i. e. outsiders, aliens (to the religion of the Buddha), enemies, opponents (like Vedic pare) D i.2 (=paiviruddh satt
DA i.51); Vin i.349; Dh 6. (c) some oblique cases in special
meaning and used as adv.: para acc. sg. m. see under cpds.,
like parantapa; as nt. adv. see sep. In phrase puna ca para
would be better read puna c' apara (see apara). parena
(instr.) later on, afterwards J iii.395 (=aparena samayena C.).
pare (loc.); cp. Gr. at; Lat. prae before; Goth.
fara=E, for, old dat. of *per) in the past, before, yet earlier
J ii.279 (where it continues ajja and hiyyo, i. e. to day
and yesterday, and refers to the day before yesterday. Similarly at Vin iv.63 pare is contrasted with ajja & hiyyo and
may mean "in future," or "the day before yesterday." It is of
interest to notice the Ved. use of pare as "in the future" opp.
to adya & vas); J iii.423 (the day before yesterday). At DhA
i.253 (sve v pare v) and iv.170 in the sense of "on the day after tomorrow." par (only apparently abl., in reality either
para+a which represents the vocalic beginning of the second
part of the cpd., or para+ which is the directional prefix ,
emphasizing para. The latter expln is more in the spirit of the
Pali language): see separately. -paro (old abl. as adv.=Sk.
paras) beyond further: see sep. parato (abl.) in a variety
of expressions and shades of meaning, viz. (1) from another,
as regards others A iii.337 (attano parato ca); Nett 8 (ghosa),
50 (id.). (2) from the point of view of "otherness," i. e. as
strange or something alien, as an enemy M i.435 (in "anicca"
passage); A iv.423; Nd2 214ii ; Ps ii.238; Kvu 400; Miln
418 and passim; in phrase parato disv "seen as not myself"
Th 1, 1160; 2, 101; S i.188 (sankhre parato passa, dukkhato
m ca attato). (3) on the other side of, away from, beyond
J ii.128; PvA 24 (kuna). (4) further, afterwards, later
on S i.34; J i.255; iv.139; SnA 119, 482. Note. The compounds with para are combinations either with para 1 (adv.
prep.), or para 2 (adj. n.). Those containing para in form par
and in meaning "further on to" see separately under par. See
also pra, prima etc.
Para
Para
467
Para
Parmaha
Parada (adj.) [for uparada (?)=uparata, pp. of upa+ ram] finding pleasure in, fond of, only in two (doubtful) cpds. viz.
vutta [unexpld , perhaps v for y, as daya> dava through influence of d in parada; thus=parata+ yutta?] "fond of being
prepared," adapted, apt, active, alert; only in one stock phrase
(which points to this form as being archaic and probably popular etymology, thus distorting its real derivation), viz. appossukka pannaloma +Vin ii.184 (Vin. Texts iii.232 trsl. "secure,"
cp. Vin ii.363); M i.450; ii.121 (v. l. BB paradatta), and
samcra living a good (active) life M i.469.
Parama (adj.) [Vedic parama; superl. formation of para, lit. "farthest," cp. similarly, although fr. diff. base, Lat. prmus]
highest, most excellent, superior, best; paraphrased by agga
seha visiha at Nd2 502 A= Nd1 84, 102 (the latter reading
viseha for visiha); by uttama at DhA iii.237; VvA 78.
D i.124 (ettaka); M ii.120 (nipacca); S i.166; ii.277; v.230;
A v.64 (diha dhamma nibbna); Sn 138 (yasa parama patto), 296 ( mitt), 788 (suddha aroga), 1071
(savimokhe e vimutto); Dh 184 (nibbna vadanti
Buddh). 203, 243; Vv 161 (alankata= parama ativiya visesato VvA 78) Pv ii.910 (iddhi); Pug 15, 16, 66; SnA 453
(issara); PvA 12 (nipacca). 15 (duggandha), 46. At the
end of a cpd. () "at the outmost, at the highest, at most;
as a minimum, at least" Vin iv.263 (dvangula pabba); esp.
freq. in phrase sattakkhattu one who will be reborn seven
times at the outmost, i. e. at the end of the 7 rebirthinterval
S ii.185 (sa); v.205; A i.233; iv.381; v.120; It 18; Kvu 469.
See pram & pramit.
-attha [cp. class. Sk. paramrtha] the highest good, ideal;
truth in the ultimate sense, philosophical truth (cp. Kvu trsl.
180; J.P.T.S. 1914, 129 sq.; Cpd. 6, 81); Arahantship Sn 68
(=vuccati Amata Nibbna etc. Nd2 409), 219 (dassin);
Nd2 26; Miln 19, 31; dpan Exposition of the Highest Truth,
N. of the Commentary on Th, Vv and Pv; mentioned e. g. at
PvA 71; jotik id., N. of the C. on Kh and Sn, mentioned e.
g. at KhA 11. As , in instr. and abl. used adverbially
in meaning of "in the highest sense, absolutely, ,
primarily, ideally, in an absolute sense," like pram Bu i.77
visuddhi A v.64; saita Th 2, 210; sua Ps ii.184; suddhi SnA 528; abl. paramatthato Miln 28; VvA 24 (manusso),
30 (bhikkhu), 72 (jvitindriya); PvA 146 (pabbajito, corresponding to anavasesato), 253 (na koci kici hanati=not at all);
instr. paramatthena Miln 71 (vedag), 268 (sattpaladdhi).
-gati the highest or best course of life or future exsitence Vv
3512 (=anupdisesa nibbna VvA 164).
468
Parmaha
Parikath
iii.386.
Pari (indecl.) [Idg. *peri to verbal root *per, denoting completion of a forward movement (as in Sk. p2 , piparti. to bring
across, promote; cp. Vedic pc to satisfy, pti to fill, fulfill. See also P. para). Cp. Vedic pari, Av. pairi, Gr. ,
Lat. per (also in adj. per magnus very great); Obulg. pariy
round about, Lith. per through, Oir er (intensifying prefix), Goth. far, Ohg. fir, far=Ger. ver ] prefix, signifying (lit.) around, round about; (fig.) all round, i. e. completely, altogether. The use as prep. (with acc.=against, w.
abl.=from) has entirely disappeared in Pli (but see below 1a).
As adv. "all round" it is only found at J vi.198 (par metri
causa; combd with samantato). The composition form before vowels is pariy, which in combn with ud and upa undergoes metathesis, scil. payir. Frequent combns with other
preps. are pari + (pariy) and pari+ava (pariyo); sampari. Close affinities of p. are the preps. adhi (cp. ajjhesati> pariyesati, ajjhoghati>pariyoghati) and abhi (cp. abhirdheti>paritoseti, abhitpa>paritpa, abhipita>pari, abhipreti>pari, abhirakkhati>pari), cp. also its relation to
in var. combns . Meanings. 1. (lit.) (a) away from, off
(cp. Vedic pari as prep. c. abl.:) kahati to draw over, seduce, cheda cutting off, restriction, puchati wipe off.
(b) all round, round (expld by samantato, e. g. at Vism 271
in pallanka): anta surrounded, esati search round, kia
covered all round (i. e. completely, cp. expln as "samantato kia"), carati move round, jana surrounding people,
dhvati run about, dhovati wash all round, paleti watch all
round, fig. guard carefully, bhamati roam about, maala
circular (round), s assembly (lit. sitting round, of sad).
2. (fig.) (a) quite, completely, very much, :
dna consummation, panna gone completely into, odta
very pure, osna complete end, ghati to hide well, toseti
satisfy very much, preti fulfil, bhutta thoroughly enjoyed,
yaa supreme sacrifice, suddha extremely clean. (b) too
much, excessively (cp. ati and adhi): tpeti torment excessively, pakka over ripe. A derivation (adv.) from pari
is parito (q. v.). On its relation to Sk. pari see parikkhra.
A frequently occurring dialectical variant of pari is pali (q.
v.). Note. The expln of P. Commentators as regards pari
is "pariggahaho" Ps i.176; "paricca" SnA 88; "parito" VvA
316; PvA 33.
469
Parikath
Parikkhaa
Parikia [pp. of parikirati] scattered or strewn about, surrounded J iv.400; vi.89, 559; Pv i.61 (makkhik= samantato
kia PvA 32); Miln 168, 285; DA i.45 (spelt parikkhia).
Cp. sampari.
Parikilamati [pari+kilamati] to get tired out, fatigued or exhausted J v.417, 421. pp. parikilanta (q. v.).
Parikilissati [pari+kilissati] to get stained or soiled; fig. get into
trouble or misery (?) see parikissati. pp. parikiliha see
parikkiliha.
Parikkhaa
Parikh
Parikkha [pp. of parikkhyati] exhausted, wasted, decayed, extinct Vin iv.258; M iii.80; S i.92; ii.24; v.145, 461; D iii.97,
133 (bhava sayojana); It 79 (id.); A iv.418, 434 (sav);
Sn 175, 639, 640; Dh 93; Pug 11, 14; Miln 23 (yuka); PvA
112 (tiodak' hra).
Parikkhatta (nt.) [abstr. of parikkha] the fact of being exhausted, exhaustion, extinction, destruction DA i.128 (jvitassa); PvA 63 (kammassa), 148 (id.).
Parikkhyati [pari+khyati of ki2 ] to go to ruin, to be wasted or
exhausted Th 2, 347 (=parikkhaya gacchati ThA 242).
pp. parikkha (q. v.).
Parikkhepa [fr. pari+kip] 1. closing round, surrounding, neighbourhood, enclosure Vin iv.304; J i.338; iv.266; SnA 29 (dru
etc.). 2. circumference J i.89; v.37; Vism 205; KhA 133;
SnA 194. 3. "closing in on," i. e. fight, quarrel It 11, 12.
Pariklesa [pari+klesa] hardship, misery, calamity S i.132 =Th 2,
191; Th 2, 345 (=parikilesa ThA 241).
Parikh (f.) [fr. pari+khan, cp. Epic Sk. parikh] a ditch,
trench, moat Vin ii.154; D i.105 (ukkia parikha adj. with
trenches dug deep, combd with okkhittapaligha; expld by khta
parikha hapita paligha at DA i.274); M i.139 (sankia
adj. with trenches filled, Ep. of an Arahant, combd with
ukkhittapaligha)=A iii.84 sq.= Nd2 284 C (spelt kkh); A iv.106
(nagara); J i.240, 490; iv.106 (ukki' antaraparikha); vi.276,
471
Parikh
Paricia
Paricra fr. [paricreti] serving, attendance; (m.) servant, attendant Th 1, 632 (C. on this stanza for paddhag).
Paricraka (adj. n.) [fr. paricreti] attending, serving honouring; (m.) attendant, worshipper, follower (cp. BSk. paricraka attendant Av i.170; ii.167] D i.101; ii.200; Th 1, 475;
Sn p. 218 (Nd2 reads crika); J i.84; iv.362; Pv iv.87 (not
vraka); DA i.137, 269. See also paricrika.
Paricra (f.) [fr. paricreti] care, attention, looking after; pleasure, feasting, satisfaction Pv ii.12 (gloss for crika); PvA
219.
472
Paricia
Parijjan
(q. v.).
Paricita [pp. of pari+ci, cinoti, P. cinti] gathered, accumulated, collected, increased, augmented M iii.97; S i.116; ii.264;
iv.200; A ii.67 sq., 185; iii.45, 152; iv.282, 300; v.23; Th 1,
647; Ps i.172 (expld ); PvA 67; Sdhp 409.
Pariccajana (nt.) & n (f.) [fr. pariccajati] 1. giving up, rejection, leaving It 11, 12. 2. giving out, bestowing, giving a
donation PvA 124.
Parijnti [pari+jnti] to know accurately or for certain, to comprehend, to recognise, find out M i.293; S i.11, 24; ii.45, 99,
iii.26, 40, 159; iv.50; v.52, 422; A iii.400 sq.; Sn 202, 254,
943; Nd1 426; J iv.174; Th 1, 226; Miln 69; DhA iv.233
jnitv). ppr. parijna S iii.27; iv.89; It 3 sq. pp.
parita (q. v.). ger. pariya see under pari1 .
Parijia [pp. of pari+jar, i. e. decayed; Kern Toev. s. v. proposes reading jna of ji, i. e. wasted, see parijyati] worn
out, gone down, decayed, reduced J i.111 (sehi kula p.);
v.99, 100 (bhoga); vi.364; Dh 148; DhA ii.272 (kula).
Parijita [pp. of pari+ji, jayati; Kern, Toev. s. v. proposes reading parijta, Sk. form of P. parijna, pp. of pari+ jyati, but
hardly necessary, see also Vin. Texts iii.75] overpowered, injured, damaged Vin ii.109 (so read for paricita).
Parijjan
Paritassati (tasati)
jan); meaning?.
Paria () [the adj. form of pari, cp. abhia] knowing, recognising, understanding It 44 (bhta so, or should we
read bhtapariya?); also in cpd. pariacrin (to be expd
as shortened gr. pari?) Sn 537 (=paya paricchinditv
caranto living in full knowledge, i. e. rightly determining);
also (abstr.) pariattha at It 29 (abhiattha+), cp. S
iv.253.
Pari1 (f.) [cp. Epic Sk. parijna; the form parij given by
BR only with the one ref. Vyutp. 160; fr. pari+j] accurate or exact knowledge, comprehension, full understanding
M i.66, 84; S iii.26 (yo rgakkhayo dos moha aya vuccati
p.), 159 sq., 191; iv.16, 51, 138, 206, 253 sq.; v.21, 55 sq.,
145, 236, 251, 292; A i.277 (kmna rpna vedanna),
299; v.64; Pug 37; Nett 19, 20, 31; KhA 87; SnA 251.
In exegetical literature three paris are distinguished, viz.
ta, traa pahna, which are differently interpreted & applied according to the various contexts. See e. g. the detailed
interpretation at Nd1 52 sq.; Nd2 413; J vi.259 (where a
for ta); DhA ii.172 (in ref. to food); mentioned at SnA 517.
adj. paria. The form pariya is an apparent instr., but in reality (in form & meaning) the ger. of parijnti
(like abhiya>abhijnitv) for the usual parijnitv. It is
freq. found in poetry & in formulas (like yathbhta p.); its
meaning is "knowing well in right knowledge": S v.182; Sn
455, 737, 778 (=parijnitv Nd1 51 sq.), 1082 (corresp. with
pahya, cp. similar phrase pahya parijnitv DhA iv.232); It
62; J vi.259.
Paritvin (adj.) [fr. parita] one who has correct knowledge S iii.159 sq., 191 (puggala).
Parieyya (adj.) [grd. of parijnti] knowable, perceivable, to
be known (accurately) M i.4; S iii.26; iv.29; DhA iv.233 (cp.
Nd2 under abhieyya).
474
Paritassati (tasati)
Parideva
Parittyaka (adj.) [fr. pari+tyati] safeguarding against, sheltering against, keeping away from Vism 376 (angra vassa
p. thero).
Parito (adv.) [fr. pari, cp. Sk. parita] round about, around,
on every side, everywhere, wholly Vin ii.194; SnA 393; VvA
316; PvA 33.
Paritta2 (nt.) & Paritt (f.) [fr. pari+tr, cp. ta, tyati &
also parittna] protection, safeguard; (protective) charm, palliative, amulet Vin ii.110 (atta f. personal protection) iv.305
(gutt' atthya pariyputi); A ii.73 (rakkh+paritt); J
i.200 (manto+paritta+ vahi), 396 (paccekabuddhehi
475
Parideva
Parinibbyati
592, 811, 923, 969; J i.146; vi,188, 498; Nd1 128, 134, 370,
492; Ps i.11 sq., 38, 59, 65; Vbh 100, 137; Nett 29. It is exegetically paraphrased at D ii.306=Nd2 416 (under pariddava) with
synonyms deva p. devan paridevan devitatta paridevitatta; often combd with soka grief, e. g. at D i.36; Sn 862;
It 89; PvA 39, 61. Bdhgh at DA i.121 explns it as "soka
nissita llappana lakkhao p."
Paridevati [pari+devati, div] to wail, lament D ii.158 (m socittha m paridevittha); Sn 582, 774=Nd1 38 (as devayati), 166;
J vi.188, 498; PvA 18 (socati+); ger. devamna S i.199, 208;
J v.106; PvA 38, & devayamna Sn 583. grd. devaniya
Nd1 492; SnA 573, & devaneyya Sn 970 (=devaneyya Nd1
493). pp. paridevita (q. v.).
Paridevan (f.)=parideva, Sn 585; Nd2 416 (see under parideva)
Pv i.43 (=vc vippalpa PvA 18); i.123 ; PvA 41.
Paridevita (nt.) [pp. of paridevati] lamentation, wailing Sn 590;
Pv i.123 (=rudita PvA 63); Miln 148 (kanditap. llappita
mukha).
Paridevitatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. paridevita] lamentation etc.; only
exegetical construction in expln of parideva at D ii.306=Nd2
416.
Pariddava [according to Trenckner M i.532 (on M i.56, where
SS read p., whereas BB have parideva) the metrical substitute
for parideva; therefore not=Sk. paridrava, which is only a late
re translation of the P. word]=parideva M i.56 (soka); A
i.221; Th 2, 345 (soka); Sn 1052, cp. Nd2 416 (see parideva).
476
Parinibbyati
Paripteti
(of a horse).
Parinimmita at Dhs 1280 read para.
Paripanthika (adj.) [fr. paripantha] forming or causing an obstacle A i.161. The usual form is pri (q. v.).
Paripanna see palipanna.
Paripka [fr. pari+pac] 1. ripeness, maturity, development,
perfection D i.9 (cp. DA i.94); Ud 36 (paca dhamm
paripkya savattanti); J i.142, 148; vi.236; Miln 288; Vism
116 (bodhi), 199; DhA i.89 (gatatta nt. state of perfection);
ThA 79; PvA 276. 2. overripeness, decay, collapse, only
in phrase "indriyna p.," i. e. decay of the (mental) faculties,
in formula defining jar (old age) at D ii.305; M i.49; S ii.2,
42 sq.; A v.203; Nd2 252; Dhs 644; cp. BSk. indriyaparipka
Av ii.110.
Paripcana (nt.) [pari+pcana1 ] ripening, maturing, digestion
Vims 351, 363, 365.
Paripcaniya (adj.) [fr. paripcana] bringing to maturity, leading to perfection, accomplishing, only in phrase vimuttiparipcaniy dhamm (5) things achieving emancipation (see Ud 36)
S iv.105=DA i.50; ThA 273.
Paripceti [pari+pceti, Caus. of pacati] to bring to maturity,
to cause to ripen, to develop, prepare J vi.373 (attha p.
cayitv=vahetv C.); Miln 232, 285, 288, 296. pp.
paripcita Vism 365.
Pariptita [pp. of paripteti] attacked, pursued, brought into difficulty VvA 336.
477
Paripteti
Paribhira
Paripteti (or peti) [Caus. of paripatati. Cp. BSk. paripayati to destroy Divy 417] to cause to fall down, to bring to
ruin, to attack, pursue Vin iv.115; J ii.208; iii.380; Miln 279,
367; KhA 73 (see App. II. p. 353 n. 9). pp. pariptita (q.
v.).
Paripothita [pp.
(laguehi).
Paripuochaka (adj.) [fr. pari+prch] asking a question, enquiring Nd1 234=Nd2 386; Sdhp 90. f. abstr. paripucchakat
questioning Vism 132 (one of the 7 constituents of dhamma
vicaya sambojjhanga).
Paripucchati [pari+pucchati] to ask a question, to interrogate, inquire Vin i.47=224; ii.125; S i.98; A v.16; Sn 380, 696 (iyna
ger.), 1025; Pug 41; Miln 257, 408; SnA 111.
Paribhira
Paribhinna
i.482; Th 1, p. 12n .
i.30.
Paribbajati [pari+vraj] to wander about (as a religious mendicant) Sn 74, 639; It 109; Dh 346, 415; J iv.452.
Paribbaya [pari+vaya, i. e. *vyaya] 1. earned money, earnings, wages J i.156 ( datv), 296 (id.), 433; iv.170; DhA
iv.196. 2, expense, expenditure J ii.213, (nivsa expense
for a lodging), 249, 368; iii.287 ( karoti to invest); vi.383;
VvA 75; PvA 3 (sahassa sahassa karoti), 97 (nicca);
Dvs v.66.
Paribrhana (nt.) [fr. paribrhati, cp. upabrhana] augmentation, increase Nett 79.
Paribrhita [pp. of paribrheti] increased, furthered, strengthened ThA 245.
Paribhinna
Parimuha
Paribhedaka (adj.) [fr. paribheda in sense of paribhindati] breaking; a disturber of peace, breedbate J ii.173; iii.168; v.245;
vi.437.
Paribhoga [fr. pari+bhuj] 1. material for enjoyment, food, feeding J i.243; ii.432; Miln 156, 403; DhA ii.66; SnA 342.
2. enjoyment, use Vin iv.267; S i.90; Nd1 262; Vism 33 (with
pariyesana & paiggahana); DhA i.60; PvA 25, 26, 220.
Four paribhogas are distinguished at J v.253 and at Vism 43,
viz. theyya, ia, dyajja, smi. Paribhoga discussed in
relation to pailbha at Vism 43.
-cetiya a tree, shrine etc., used by the Buddha, & consequently sacred KhA 222. -dhtu a relic consisting of something used by the dead Saint (opp. sarradhtu, remains of the
body) Mhvs 15, 163. (cp. pribhogika dhtu); SnA 579.
Pariminti [pari+m] to measure, mete out, estimate, limit, restrict; inf. metu Miln 192; ThA 26; and minitu Miln
316; grd. meyya (q. v.). pp. parimita (q. v.).
480
Parimuha
Pariydti
Parimuha [pari+muha, pp. of mussati, cp. pamuha] forgetful, bewildered Vin i.349=J iii.488 (=muhassati C.); cp. Vin.
Texts ii.307.
leaving the learning aside); Miln 115, 215, 345, 411 (gama).
abl. pariyattito through learning by heart SnA 195 (opp.
to atthato according to the meaning).
-dhamma that which belongs to the holy study, part or
contents of the Scriptures, the Tipiaka comprising the nine divisions (see navanga Buddha ssana) KhA 191, 193; SnA
328; PvA 2; cp. ssana. -dhara knowing the Scriptures
by heart Miln 21. -dhura (=ganthadhura): see vsadhura.
-paibhnavant possessed of intelligence as regards learning
the Scriptures SnA 111. -parima extent of study SnA 1,
608. -bahula clever in the study of the Dhamma A iii.86.
-bahussuta versed in the Scriptures SnA 110. -ssana object, instruction of the Scriptures, code of the holy Texts (cp.
dhamma) Nd1 143; DhA iv.39.
Pariyanta [pari+anta, cp. Sk. paryanta] 1. limit, end, climax, border S i.80 (manpa "limit point in enjoyment"; cp. C. nipphattika koika K.S. 320); J i.149 (hattha pda hoofs),
221 (udaka), 223 (sara); ii.200 (angana); Pv ii.1312 ; DhA
iii.172 (parisa). 2. limit, boundary, restriction, limitation Vin ii.59, 60 (patti); Nd1 483 (distinguishes between
4 pariyant with ref. to one's character, viz. slasavara
indriyasavara, bhojane mattaut, jgariynuyoga).
3. (adj. ) bounded by, limited by, surrounded, ending
in Vin iv.31; M iii.90; S ii.122 (yu); A i.164 (id.); Sn 577
(bhedana); Pv i.1013 (parikkhitta PvA 52). apariyanta
(adj.) boundless, limitless PvA 58, 166.
-kata restricted, limited, bounded Nd2 tahiii (with smakata & odhikata; v. l. pariyanti, cp. BSk. paryantkta
"finished" Divy 97, 236).
-crin living in selfrestriction
Sn 964 (cp. Nd1 483). -dassvin seeing the limit A v.50.
-rahita without limits DhA iii.252.
Pariya [either short form of pariyya, or ger. of pari+ substantivised (for the regular form paricca) representing an ending
ya instead of tya. Bdhgh at Vism 409 takes pariya
as nt., but seems to mix it with the idea of a ppr. by defining
it as "pariyt ti pariya, paricchindat ti attho"] encompassing, fathoming, comprehending (as ger.); penetration, understanding (as n.). Only in phrase ceto-pariya-a knowledge
encompassing heart or mind (cp. phrase cetas ceto paricca)
D ii.82 sq. (v. l. ya); iii.100 (v. l. ye); DA i.223 (corresp. with pubbe nivsa a); with which alternates
the phrase indriya-paro-pariya-a in same meaning (see
indriya cpds. & remark on paropariya) J i.78. See also
pariyatta1 pariyatti, pariyya 3, and cpds. of ceto.
Pariyaa [pari+yaa] supreme or extraordinary offering or sacrifice SnA 321, 322.
Pariyatta1 (nt.) [abstr. fr. pariya (pari+i) but confused with
pariyatta2 & pariyatti fr. pari+p] learning, understanding,
comprehension, only in phrase indriyaparo pariyatta (
a) (knowledge of) what goes on in the intentions of others A v.34, 38; Ps i.121 sq.; Vbh 340.
Pariydti
Pariyhata
sense, form & formless) Dhs 1268; Vbh 12, 15, 19 & passim;
DhsA 50. Opp. apariypann (dhamm) the Unincluded
(viz. all that is exempt from this cycle) Ps i.101; Dhs 583 (cp.
Dhs trsln 165, 254, 329, 332), 992, 1242; Kvu 507.
Pariydna (nt.) [pari+dna, opp. updna] "taking up completely," i. e. using up, consummation, consumption, finishing, end M i.487 (kaha, opp. to updna); S i.152; iii.16
sq. (cetaso p., cp. pariydya & dinna); iv.33 (sabb' updna) A ii.139; J v.186. Cp. BSk. parydna Divy 4, 55,
100. Esp. in foll. phrases: sava & jvita D i.46 (jvita
pariydn abl., expld at Dh i.128 as "jvitassa sabbaso
pariydinnatt parikkhatt puna appaisandhika bhv ti
attho"); S ii.83=A ii.198; S iii.126; iv.213; A iv.13, 146; Pug
13; Miln 397; and combd with parikkhaya in gacchati to
be exhausted or consummated A v.173= Sn p. 126; Miln 102;
PvA 147, cp. BSk. parikaya parydna gacchati Divy
567; Av i.48; ii.193.
- pp.
Pariypadna (nt.) [pari+apadna, the latter for ava, and metrical lengthening of a] good advice, application, trick, artfulness, artifice J v.361, 369. (C. explns as parisuddha after v. l.
pariyodta which was prob. misread for pariyodna), 370.
Pariypanna [pari+panna, cp. adhipanna] 1. "gone completely
into," included in, belonging to, got into Vin i.46 (patta that
which has been put into the bowl); D i.45 (=baddha DA
i.127); SnA 397 (milakkhabhsa etc.); KhA 136 (vinaya),
191 (sangha); DhA i.158 (idhaloka paraloka); PvA 14,
33, 59, 129 (devaloka), 150. 2. accomplished (i. e. gone
into the matter), thorough, mastering (said of vc) S ii.280
=A ii.51. 3. ( dhamm) the Included, viz. all that is contained in the threefold cycle of existence (i. e. the worlds of
482
Pariyhata
Pariyodpaka
Pariyesan (f.) & na (nt.) [fr. pariyesati] search, quest, inquiry (a) (n) D ii.58, 61, 280 (twofold, viz. sevitabb and
asevitabb); iii.289; M i.161 (twofold, viz. ariy & anariy);
A ii.247 (id.); S i.143; ii.144, 171; iii.29; iv.8 sq. (assda
& dnava); A i.68 (kma), 93. (b) (na) Nd1 262
(chanda,+pailbha & paribhoga); DhA iii.256 (kmague
ussukka). With paiggahaa & paribhoga at DhA i.75.
Pariyoghana (nt.) & (f.) [pari+oghana] plunging into, penetration Ps i.106, 112; ii.183; Dhs 390 (a), 425 (a); Pug 21
(a); DhsA 260.
Pariyottharati [pari+ottharati] to spread all over (intrs.) Miln
197.
Pariyodapana (nt.) & (f.) [fr. pariyodapeti], cleansing, purification A i.207 (cittassa); Dh 183 (=vodpana DhA iii.237);
Nett 44. In BSk. distorted to parydapana MVastu iii.12
(=Dh 183).
Pariyena [fr. pari+i, cp. Sk. *paryayana] going round, walking round; of a ship: sailing round, tour, voyage S v.51
(pariyenya, v. l. pariydya)=A iv.127 (reads pariydya v.
l. pariyya). Reading is doubtful.
Pariyesati [pari+esati, cp. BSk. paryeate to investigate Av
i.339. The P. word shows confusion between esati & icchati,
as shown by double forms ihu etc. See also anvesati] to
483
Pariyodpaka
Parivatteti
(C. on Th 1, 49).
Parivaccha (nt.) [formation from ger. of pari+vrt, corresp. to
*parivtya (?)] being active, preparation, outfit J v.46; vi.21
(gamana); DhA i.207 (gloss & v. l. gamana parisajja),
395 (v. l. parisajja).
Note. According to Kern, Toev. s. v. parivaccha is wrong
spelling for parivacca which is abstr. from pariyatta (*pariyatya), with va for ya as in pavacchati, pavecchati=Sk. prayacchati.
Pariyonha [pari+onha] enveloping, covering D i.246 (=nvaraa); Dhs 1157 (cp. Dhs trsl. 311); Miln 300.
Pariyosna (nt.) [pari+osna of ava+s] 1. end, finish, conclusion J i.106 (sacca=desan); PvA 9 (desan and passim),
136 (yha), 162 (id.), 281 (=anta). Often contracted with
di beginning & majjha middle (see e. g. SnA 327), esp.
in phrase di kalya majjhe kalya kalya with reference to the Dhamma (expld as "ekagth pi hi samanta
bhaddakatt dhammassa pahamapadena dik dutiyatatiya
padehi majjhe k pacchima padena pariyosnak" etc. at
SnA 444), e. g. D i.62; It 111 & passim. 2. end, i. e.
perfection, ideal, Arahantship (see on these fig. meanings and
its appln to Nibbna DA i.175, 176) D i.203 (brahmacariya +);
ii.283 (cp. Dial. ii.316); iii.55 (brahmacariya+); S v.230; A
iii.363 (nibbna), 376 (brahmacariya); Vism 5.
Parivauma (?) (adj.) [doubtful spelling & expln ; perhaps "parivain?] forming a circle, circular D i.22 (trsld "a path could
be traced round it" Dial. i.36). Can it be misspelling for
pariyanta? Kern, Toev. s. v. equals it to Sk. parivartman,
and adds reference kata "bounded" (syn. paricchinna) Miln
132.
Parivaa [fr. pari+vt, cp. parivattana] round, circle, succession,
mainly in two phrases, viz. catu fourfold circle M iii.67; S
iii.59 (pacupdna kkhandhe, cp. aha parivaa adhideva adassana A iv.304); and ti circle of relatives
D i.61 (=ti DA i.170; cp. expln bandhan' atthena ti yeva
ti parivao DA i.181=PugA 236); ii.241; M iii.33; Pug
57; ThA 68; VvA 87. See further at DA i.143 (rja), 283
(id., but spelt vatta); SnA 210.
Parirakkhati [pari+rak, cp. abhirakkhati] to guard, protect; preserve, maintain Sn 678 (pot. rakkhe); Miln 410; Sdhp 413,
553 (sla).
Parirajita [pari+rajita] dyed, coloured; fig. marked or distinguished by (instr.) Miln 75.
Parillaka [cp. Sk. piril, pirill Bh. Sah. 86, 44] N. of a bird
Parivattana (nt.) [fr. parivattati] setting going, keeping up, propounding J i.200 (manta adj. one who knows a charm); Nett
1 sq., 106.
Parivattita [pp. of parivatteti] 1. turned round, twisted J iv.384.
2. recited Vism 96.
484
Parivatteti
Parivisati
Parivreti [Caus.
of pari+v] to cover, encompass, surround J i.181 (nagara ayisu); ii.102 (fut. essati);
iii.371 (rukkha); iv.405 (for parikaroti); vi.179. ger.
parivretv used as prep. "round" J i.172 (pokkharai).
In meaning "to serve, attend upon," also "to attend upon oneself, to amuse oneself," parivreti is often erroneously read
for paricreti, e. g. at D ii.13; Pv iv.129 (v. l. creti); PvA
228; in ppr. med. vriyamna (with v. l. criyamna) at D
ii.21; A i.145; J i.58; VvA 92. See also anuparivreti.
pp. parivrita (q. v.).
Parivisati
Paris
Parisanku in patha the region round the path of stakes & sticks,
N. of a path leading up to Gijjha pabbata (see expln at J
iii.485) J iii.484.
Parisanghpeti [pari+Caus. of sangahti] to induce someone
to mention or relate something J vi.328.
Parivmasati [pari+vmasati, Desid. of pari+man, cp. vmas for mms] to think over, consider thoroughly, examine, search S ii.80 sq.; It 42=Sn 975 (ppr. dhamma vmasamna, cp. Nd1 508); DA i.134; DhA iv.117 (attna).
Parivuha & vuttha [pp. of parivasati] staying (a period), living (for a time), spending (or having spent) one's probation
(cp. BSk. paryuita parivsa Av i.259) Vin iii.186 (tth); S
ii.21 (h).
Paris (f.) [cp. Vedic pariad; in R. V. also pariad as adj. surrounding, lit. "sitting round," fr. pari+sad. In Pli the cons.
stem has passed into a vocalic stem, with the only preservation of cons. loc. sg. parisati Vin iv.285; A ii.180 ();
J v.61; DA i.141 and parisati M i.68; A ii.180 (v. l.); J
v.332, besides the regular forms parisya (loc. sg.) Vin
ii.296; A v.70; and parissu (loc. pl.) S ii.27; It 64] surrounding people, group, collection, company, assembly, association, multitude. Var. typical sets of assemblies are found
in the Canon, viz, eight assemblies (khattiya, brhmaa,
gahapati, samaa, Ctummahrjika, Tvatisa, Mra,
Brahma, or the assemblies of nobles, brahmins, householders, wanderers, of the angel hosts of the Guardian Kings, of
the Great Thirty Three, of the Mras, and of the Brahms)
D ii.109; iii.260; M i.72; A iv.307. four assemblies (the
first four of the above) at D iii.236; Nd1 163; other four, representing the Buddha's Order (bhikkhu, bhikkhun, upsaka,
upsik, or the ass. of bhikkhus, nuns, laymen and female
devotees; cp. same enumn at Divy 299) S ii.218; A v.10; cp.
J i.40 (catu parisa majjhe), 85 (id.), 148 (id.). two
assemblies (viz. Brahma, Mra) at D iii.260; allegorically
two groups of people (viz. sratta ratt & asratta ratt)
M ii.160=A i.70 sq. For var. uses of the word see the
Paris
Parihaa
J v.97.
Parisedita [pp. of pari+Caus. of svid, Sk. parisvedita in slightly
diff. use] heated, hatched, made ripe M i.104 (bjni); S
iii.153; Vin iii.3; Aiv. 125 (ani), 176.
Parisesa [pari+sesa] remnant, remainder, rest; only neg. aparisesa (adj.) without remainder, complete, entire M i.92, 110; A
iii.166=Pug 64; A iv.428 (adassana).
Parisoka [pari+soka] great grief, severe mourning Ps i.38 (anto
in def. of soka).
Parisodhana (nt.) [fr. parisodheti] cleansing, purification Miln
215.
Parisodhita [pp. of parisodheti] cleaned, cleansed, purified Miln
415; Sdhp 414.
Parisodheti [pari+Caus. of udh] to cleanse, clean, purify M iii.3,
35 (aor. sodhesi); Sn 407 (aor. sodhayi); DhA ii.162 (vodapeti+). Freq. in phrase citta p. to cleanse one's heart
(from=abl.) D iii.49; S iv.104; A ii.211; iii.92; Nd1 484; Pug
68. pp. parisodhita (q. v.).
Parisosa [fr. pari+u] becoming dried up, dryness, withering
away S i.91.
Parisosita [pp. of parisoseti] dried up, withered away Sdhp 9.
Parisukkhita [pp. of pari+uk. Intens. of u] dried up, withered Miln 303 (hadaya).
Parissaya (m. & nt.) [fr. pari+ri? Etym. doubtful, cp. Weber, Ind. Streifen iii.395 and Andersen, Pli Reader ii.167,
168] danger, risk, trouble M i.10 (utu); A iii.388 (id.); Sn 42,
45, 770, 921, 960 sq.; Dh 328 (ayni= sha vyaggh'
dayo pkaa parissaye, rga bhaya dosabhay' dayo
paicchanna parissaye DhA iv.29); Nd1 12=Nd2 420 (where
same division into pkaa & paicchanna); Nd1 360, 365; J
i.418; ii.405; v.315, 441 (antarmagga p. cp. paripantha in
same use); Vism 34 (utu); SnA 88 (expld as paricca sayant ti
p.); DhA iii.199 (mocana); PvA 216, DhsA 330.
Parihaa
Parha
Parihaa (hata) [pp. of pariharati] surrounded by () encircled; only in phrase sukha-parihaa (+sukhe hita) steeped
in good fortune Vin iii.13 (corr. sukhedhita accordingly!); J
ii.190 (pariharaka v. l. BB); vi.219 (=sukhe hita).
Parihnaka (adj.) [parihna+ka] one who has fallen short of, neglected in, done out of (abl. or instr.) D i.103.
488
Parha
Palpin
Parokkha (adj.) [paro+akkha=Vedic paroka (para+ aka)] beyond the eye, out of sight, invisible, imperceptible, Miln 291.
abl. parokkh (adv.) behind one's back, in the absence of
J iii.89 (parammukh C.; opp. sammukh).
Parovara (adj. n.) [para+avara, sometimes through substitution of apa for ava also paropara. We should expect a
form *parora as result of contraction: see Nd2 p. 13] high
& low, far & near; pl. in sense of "all kinds" (cp. uccvaca).
The word is found only in the Sutta Nipta, viz. Sn 353 (v.
l. BB varvara, varovara; expld as "lokuttara lokiya
vasena sundar' sundara dre santika v" SnA 350),
475 ( dhamm; v. l. BB paropar; expld as "parvar sundar' sundar, par v bhir apar ajjhattik" SnA 410), 704
(kme parovare; v. l. BB paropare; expld as sundare ca asundare ca paca kmague" SnA 493), 1048 (reading paroparni
Nd2 ; see expln Nd2 422b ; expld as "parni ca orni ca, par' attabhva sak' attabhv' dni parni ca orni ca" SnA 590),
1148 (paropara Nd2 ; see Nd2 422a ; expld as "hna ppata" SnA 607). Note. Already in RV. we find para contrasted with avara or upara; para denoting the farther, higher
or heavenly sphere, avara or upara the lower or earthly sphere:
489
Palpin
Paligha
Palsata [so read for palasata & palasada; cp. Vedic parasvant
given by BR. in meaning "a certain large animal, perhaps the
wild ass"] a rhinoceros J v.206, 408; vi.277.
Palsin (pasin) (adj.) [fr. palsa2 ] spiteful, unmerciful, malicious M i.43 sq., 96; A iii.111; combd with makkhin at
Vin ii.89 (cp. Vin Texts iii.38); J iii.259. apasin D iii.47
(amakkhin+); M i.43; A iii.111; Pug 22; see also separately.
Pali [a variant of pari, to be referred to the Mgadh dialect in
which it is found most frequently, esp. in the older language,
see Pischel, Prk. Gr. 257; Geiger, P.Gr. 44] round, around
(=pari) only as prefix in cpds. (q. v.). Often we find both pari
& pali in the same word.
Palikujjati [pali+kujjati] to bend oneself over, to go crooked M
i.387.
Palikuhita [a var. of paliguhita, q. v. & cp. Geiger, P.Gr.
391 ] covered, enveloped, smeared with J ii.92 (lohita).
Palyana (nt.) [fr. paly] running away DhA i.164. See also
plana.
Paligedha [pali+gedha but acc. to Geiger, P.Gr. 10= parigddha] greed, conceit, selfishness A i.66; Nd2 tah ii (gedha+);
Dhs 1059, 1136.
Paligedhin (adj.) [fr. paligedha, but Geiger, P.Gr. 10 takes
it as *parigddhin, cp. giddhin] conceited, greedy, selfish A
iii.265.
Paligha [pari+gha of (g)han, cp. P. & Sk. parigha] 1. a cross
bar Vin ii.154; Th 2, 263 (vaa=parighadaa ThA 211);
J ii.95; vi.276. 2. an obstacle, hindrance D ii.254=S i.27.
(adj) () in two phrases: okkhitta with cross bars
erected or put up D i.105 (=hapita DA i.274), opp. ukkhitta
with cross bars (i. e. obstacles) withdrawn or removed
M i.139=A iii.84=Nd2 284 C.; Sn 622 (=avijj palighassa
ukkhittatt SnA 467); cp. parikh.
-parivattika turning round of the bar the "Bar Turn," a
490
Paligha
Palobha
Palibhajana (nt.) [pari+bhajana] breaking up Nd2 576 (sambhajana+; v. l. pari). See also sam. The spelling phali
occurs at ThA 288.
Palivehana (adj. nt.) [fr. pari+ve] wrapping, surrounding, encircling, encumbrance J iv.436; Pug 34; Vism 353 (camma);
DhsA 366.
Palipatha [for paripatha=pantha (q. v.), the bases path & panth
frequently interchanging. Trenckner (Notes 80) derives it fr.
pa+lip] danger, obstacle (or is it "mud, mire"=palipa?) A
iv.290; Sn 34=638 (= rga SnA 469)=Dh 414 (=rga DhA
iv.194).
Palivehita [pp. of paliveheti] wrapped round, entwined, encircled, fettered Nd2 107 (veh, combd with laggita & palibuddha); J iv.436; vi.89. Cp. sam.
Palissajati [pari+svaj] to embrace D ii.266; J v.158 (aor. palissaji=lingi C). 204, 215; vi.325.
Palobha
Pavattita
Pavati1 [pa+v] to blow forth, to yield a scent Th 1, 528 (=gandha vissajjati C.). See pavti.
Pavati2 [of plu, cp. Vedic plavate to swim & Epic Sk. pravate
to jump] to hurry on, to rush VvA 42 (but better read with v.
l. patati as syn. of gacchati).
Pavatta (adj.) [pp. of pavattati] 1. (adj.) happening, going on,
procedure, resulting Th 2, 220 (assu ca pavatta, taken by
Mrs. Rh. D. as "tears shed"); ThA 179; PvA 35, 83 (gthyo),
120, esp. with ref. to natural products as "that which comes,"
i. e. normal, natural, raw; phala ready or natural, wild fruit
(gained without exertion of picking), in cpds. phalika SnA
295 sq.; bhojana (adj.) J i.6; iii.365; Vism 422, and, bhojin
one who lives on wild fruit (a certain class of ascetics, tpas)
D i.101; M i.78, 343; A i.241; ii.206; cp. DA i.269 sq. &
SnA 295, 296. masa fresh or raw meat (flesh) Vin i.217
(cp. Vin. Texts ii.81). 2. (nt.) "that which goes on," i. e.
the circle or whirl of existence Miln 197, 326 (cp. Miln trsln
ii.200 "starting afresh in innumerable births," quot. fr. C.),
opp. appavatta freedom from Sasra, i. e. Nibbna ibid.
3. founded on, dealing with, relating to, being in S iv.115
(kuraraghare p. pabbata); DA i.92 (dinaya), 217 (pti
sukha being in a state of happiness).
Pavattati [pa+vattati, vt] (intrs.) 1. to move on, go forward, proceed Pv i.57 ; PvA 8, 131; of water: to flow S ii.31; J ii.104;
PvA 143, 154, 198. 2. to exist, to be, continue in existence
J i.64; PvA 130 (opp. ucchijjati). 3. to result, to go on
PvA 45 (phala), 60 (vippaisr' aggi). pp. pavatta; Caus.
pavatteti (q. v.).
Palloma [a contraction of pannaloma, see J.P.T.S. 1889, 206] security, confidence D i.96; M i.17; cp. DA i.266 "loma
hasa mattam pi 'ssa na bhavissati."
Pavattar [n. ag. of either pa+vac or pa+vt, the latter more probable considering similar use of parivatteti. The P. commentators take it as either] one who keeps up or keeps going, one
who hands on (the tradition), an expounder, teacher D i.104
(mantna p.=pavattayitar DA i.273); S iv.94; Dh 76 (nidhna p.=cikkhitar DhA ii.107).
Pavajjati [Pass. of pavadati] to sound forth to be played (of music) J i.64 (pavajjayisu, 3rd pl. aor.); VvA 96 (pavajjamna
ppr. med.).
Pavajjana (nt.) [fr. pavajjati, Pass. of pavadati] sounding, playing of music VvA 210.
492
Pavattita
Pavsin
Pavattin (adj.) [fr. pa+vt] 1. advancing, moving forward, proceeding, effective, beneficial; only in phrase dhamm pavattino A i.279; DA i.4=PvA 2; and in suppavattin (good
flowing, i. e. well recited?) A iv.140 (of ptimokkha; trsld
as "thoroughly mastered" J.P.T.S. 1909, 199, v.71 (id.). 2.
going on, procedure (in f. in) Vin ii.271 sq., 277.
Pavdaka (adj.) [fr. pavda] 1. belonging to a discussion, intended for disputation D i.178 (samaya "debating hall").
2. fond of discussing Miln 4 (bhassa "fond of wordy disputation"). Cp. pavdiya.
Pavdiya (adj.) [fr. pavda, cp. pavdaka] belonging to a disputation, disputing, arguing, talking Sn 885 (n. pl. se, taken
by Nd1 293 as pavadanti, by SnA 555 as vdino).
Pavyati [pa+v] to blow forth, to permeate (of a scent), to diffuse J i.18 (dibba gandho p.); Vism 58 (dasa dis sla
gandho p.). Cp. pavti.
Pavra (f.) [pa+v, cp. BSk. pravra Divy 91, 93; whereas
Epic Sk. pravraa, nt., only in sense of "satisfaction"] 1. the
Pavra, a ceremony at the termination of the Vassa Vin i.155,
160 (where 2 kinds: ctuddasik & pannarasik), ii.32. 167;
D ii.220; S i.190. pavraa hapeti to fix or determine
the (date of) P. Vin ii.32, 276. Later two kinds of this ceremony (festival) are distinguished, viz. mah the great P.
and sangaha, an abridged P. (see DA i.241) J i.29, 82, 193
(mah); Vism 391 (id.); SnA 57 (id.); VvA 67 (id.); PvA 140
(id.); 2. satisfaction Vism 71.
Pavana2 (nt.) [cp. Vedic pravaa; not with Mller, P.Gr. 24=upavana; perhaps=Lat. pronus "prone"] side of a mountain, declivity D ii.254; M i.117; S i.26; ii.95, 105; Th 1, 1092; J i.28;
ii.180; vi.513; Cp. i.15 , 101 ; iii.131 ; Miln 91, 198 sq., 364,
408; Vism 345. Cp. Pavananagara SnA 583 (v. l. BB for
Tumbavanagara=Vanasavhaya). Note. Kern, Toev. s. v. defends Mller's (after Subhti) interpretation as "wood, woodland," and compares BSk. pavana MVastu ii.272, 382.
Pavla & Pava (m. & nt.) [cp. Class Sk. prabla, pra-va
& pravla] 1. coral J i.394 (ratta kambala); ii.88; iv.142;
Miln 267 (with other jewels), 380 (id.); SnA 117; VvA 112
(ratana). 2. a sprout, young branch, shoot J iii.389, 395
(ka valli); v.207; Nett 14 (ankura); SnA 91 (id.).
Pavsa [fr. pa+vas, cp. Vedic pravsa in same meaning] sojourning abroad, being away from home J ii.123; v.434; vi.150;
Miln 314. Cp. vi.
493
Pavsin
Pavsita
Pava (adj.) [cp. Class. Sk. prava] clever, skilful Dvs v.33;
VvA 168 (v. l. kusala).
Pavnati [pa+v to seek, Sk. veti, but with diff. formation in P. cp.
Trenckner, Notes 78 (who derives it fr. ve) & apaviti. The
form is doubtful; probably we should read pacinti] to look
up to, respect, honour J iii.387 (T. reading sure, but v. l. C.
pavrati).
Pavijjhana (nt.) [fr. pavijjhati] hurling, throwing J v.67 (Devadattassa sil, cp. Vin ii.193); J i.173; v.333.
494
Pavsita
Pasajati
Pavedana (nt.) [fr. pa+vid] making known, telling, proclamation, announcement only in stanza "nisd' ambavane ramme
yva klappavedan," until the announcement of the time (of
death) Th 1, 563 (trsln "until the hour should be revealed")=J
i.118=Vism 389=DhA i.248.
Pavedeti [Caus. of pa+vid] to make known, to declare, communicate, relate S i.24; iv.348; Dh 151; Sn p. 103 (=bodheti peti
SnA 444); PvA 33, 58, 68 (attna make oneself known), 120.
pp. pavedita (q. v.).
Pasasiya (adj.) [grd. of pasasati, cp. Vedic praasia] laudable, praiseworthy S i.149; iii.83; A ii.19; Sn 658; J i.202;
Sdhp 563. Cp. pasas.
Pavedhati [pa+vyath, cp. pavyatheti] to be afflicted, to be frightened, to be agitated, quiver, tremble, fear Sn 928 (=tasati etc.
Nd1 384); Vism 180 (reads pavedheti) ThA 203 (allavattha
allakesa pavedhanto, misreading for pavesento); DhA
ii.249. Freq in ppr. med. pavedhamna trembling M
i.88; Pv iii.55 (=pakampamna PvA 199); J i.58; iii.395.
pp. pavedhita & pavyadhita (q. v.).
Pavellita [pp. of pavellati] shaken about, moving to & fro, swinging, trembling J vi.456.
495
Pasajati
Pasraa
Pasaa [pp. of pa+s] let out, produced D iii.167; SnA 109 (conj.
for pasava in expln of pasuta).
Pasata1 (adj.) [Vedic pant, f. pat] spotted, only in cpd. miga
spotted antelope J v.418 (v. l. pasada). The more freq. P.
form is pasada, e. g. S ii.279 (gloss pasata); J v.24, 416;
vi.537; SnA 82.
Pasata2 (nt.) [etym.? Late Sk. pat or pad a drop; cp. phusita1
rain drop=pata; BR. under pant= pasata1 , but probably
dialectical & Non Aryan] a small measure of capacity, a
handful (seems to be applied to water only) J i.101 (matta
udaka); iv.201 (udaka); v.382 (matta pnya). Often
redupl. pasata pasata "by handfuls" M i.245, J v.164. At
DA i.298 it is closely connected with sarva (cup), as denoting the amount of a small gift.
Pasda [fr. pa+sad, cp. Vedic prasda] 1. clearness, brightness, purity; referring to the colours ("visibility") of the eye
J i.319 (akkhni maigua sadisni payamna paca
ppasdni ahesu); SnA 453 (pasanna netto i. e. paca
vaa ppasda sampattiy). In this sense also, in
Abhidhamma, with ref. to the eye in function of "sentient organ, sense agency" sensitive surface (so Mrs Rh. D. in Dhs.
tsrl. 174) at DhsA 306, 307. 2. joy, satisfaction, happy or
good mind, virtue, faith M i.64 (Satthari); S i.202; A i.98, 222
(Buddhe etc.); ii.84; iii.270 (puggala); iv.346; SnA 155, PvA
5, 35. 3. repose, composure, allayment, serenity Nett 28,
50; Vism 107, 135; ThA 258. Note. pasda at Th 2, 411 is
to be read psaka (see J.P.T.S. 1893 pp. 45, 46). Cp. abhi.
Pasattha (& Pasaha) [pp. of pasasati] praised, extolled, commended S i.169; J iii.234; Vv 4421 ; Miln 212, 361. As
pasaha at Pv ii.973 (so to be read for paseha); iv.152
(=vaita PvA 241); DhsA 124.
Pasada. See pasata1 .
Pasanna1 (adj) [pp. of pasdati] 1. clear, bright Sn 550 (netta);
KhA 64 & 65 (tilatelavaa, where Vism 262 reads vippasanna); Vism 409 (id.). 2. happy, gladdened, reconciled, pleased J i.151, 307; Vism 129 (muddha). 3. pleased
in one's conscience, reconciled, believing, trusting in (loc.), pious, good, virtuous A iii.35 (Satthari, dhamme sanghe); S i.34
(Buddhe); v.374; Vv 59 ; Sn 698; Dh 368 (Buddha ssane); J
ii.111; DhA i.60 (Satthari). Often combd with saddha (having
faith) Vin ii.190; PvA 20, 42 (a), and in cpd. citta devotion
in one's heart Vin i.16; A vi.209; Sn 316, 403, 690; Pv ii.16 ;
SnA 490; PvA 129; or mnasa Sn 402; VvA 39; PvA 67; cp.
pasannena manas S i.206; Dh 2. See also abhippasanna &
vippasanna.
Pasraa
Passambhati
Passa1 [cp. Sk. paya, fr. passati] seeing, one who sees Th 1, 61
(see Morris, in J.P.T.S. 1885, 48).
Passa2 (m. & nt.) [Vedic prva to paru & pi rib, perhaps also
connected with pri side of leg, see under pahi] 1. side,
flank M i.102; iii.3; A v.18; Sn 422; J i.264; iii.26. Pleonastic
in pihi (cp. E. backside) the back, loc. behind J i.292; PvA
55. 2. (mountain ) slope, in Himavanta J i.218; v.396
(loc. pasmani=passe C.).
Passati [Vedic payati & *spaati (aor. aspaa, Caus. spayati etc.); cp. Av. spasyeiti, Gr. , (E. "scepsis");
Lat. species etc.; Ohg. spehon=Ger. sphen (E. spy). The
paradigm pass, which in literary Sk. is restricted to the pres.
stem (pa) interchanges with the paradigm dakkh & dass
(d): see dassati1 ] 1. to see Pres. passati Vin i.322; S
i.69, 132, 198; ii.29; Sn 313, 647, 953, 1063, 1142 (cp. Nd2
428); Pv i.23 ; Miln 218; PvA 11, 102; 1st pl. passma Sn 76,
153, 164; Pv i.101 (as future); imper. sg. passa Sn 435, 580,
588, 756; J i.223; ii.159; Pv ii.116 , 119 ; PvA 38; pl. passatha
S ii.25; Sn 176 sq., 777, & passavho (cp. Sk. payadhva)
Sn 998. ppr. passa (see Geiger, P.Gr. 972 ) M ii.9; Sn
739, 837, 909; & passanto J iii.52; PvA 5, 6; f. passant S
i.199. grd. passitabba J iv.390 (a). fut. passissati Pv
ii.46 ; PvA 6. aor. passi J ii.103, 111; iii.278, 341. 2.
to recognise, realise, know: only in combn with jnti (pres.
jnti passati; ppr. jna passa): see jnti 11. 3. to find
Sn 1118 (=vindati pailabhati Nd2 428b ); J iii.55; Pv ii.99 .
Cp. vi.
497
Passambhati
Pahra
Pahaa [pp. of paharati] assailed, struck, beaten (of musical instruments) J ii.102, 182; vi.189; VvA 161 (so for pahata);
PvA 253. Of a ball: driven, impelled Vism 143 (citra
geuka)=DhsA 116 (so read for pahaha citta
bheuka and correct Expositor 153 accordingly). The reading pahaa at PvA 4 is to be corrected to paaha.
Paharaa (nt.) [fr. paharati] striking, beating SnA 224; PvA 285.
Paharaaka (adj.) [fr. paharaa] striking, hitting J i.418.
Paharati [pa+h] to strike, hit, beat J iii.26, 347; vi.376; VvA 65;
PvA 4; freq. in phrase acchara p. to snap one's finger, e. g.
J ii.447; see acchar1 . aor. pahsi (cp. pariyudhsi) Vv 292
(=pahari VvA 123). pp. pahaa (q. v.). Caus. paharpeti.
1. to cause to be assailed J iv.150. 2. to put on or join
on to J vi.32 (hrpesi).
Paha1 (nt.) [?] flight of steps from which to step down into the
water, a ghat (=tittha Bdhgh) D i.223. The meaning is uncertain, it is trsld as "accessible" at Dial. i.283 (q. v. for further
detail). Neumann (Majjhima trsln i.513) trsls "ganz und gar
erloschen" (pabh?). It is not at all improbable to take paha
as ppr. of pajahati (as contracted fr. pajaha like pahatvna
for pajahitvna at Sn 639), thus meaning "giving up entirely."
The same form in the latter meaning occurs at ThA 69 (Ap.
v.3).
Pahra
Pkata
Nd2 615.
Pahsi is 3rd sg. aor. of paharati; found at Vv 298 (musalena=pahari VvA 113); and also 3rd sg. aor of pajahati, e.
g. at Sn 1057 (=pajahi Nd2 under jahati)
Pahia (adj. n.) [fr. pa+hi] sending; being sent; a messenger, in gamaa going as messenger, doing messages D i.5;
M i.345; J ii.82; Miln 370; DA i.78. See also pahana.
Pahiaka (nt.) [fr. pahiati?] a sweetmeat A iii.76 (v. l. pahenaka). See also paheaka. The (late) Sk. form is prahelaka.
Pahiati [pa+hi, Sk. hinoti] to send; Pres. pahiati. Vin iii.140
sq.; iv.18; DhA ii.243; aor. pahii J i,60 (ssana); v.458
(pani); VvA 67; DhA i.72; ii.56, 243; ger. pahiitva VvA
65. pp. pahita2 (q. v.). There is another aor.phesi (Sk.
prhait) in analogy to which a new pres. pheti has been
formed, so that phesi is now felt to be a der. fr. pheti & accordingly is grouped with the latter. All other forms with he
(pahetu e. g.) are to be found under pheti.
Pkata
Pidesanya
1 inclines to etym. prya+cittaka] requiring expiation, expiatory Vin i.172, 176; ii.242, 306 sq.; iv.1 sq., 258 sq.; A ii.242
(dhamma); Vism 22. It is also the name of one of the books
of the Vinaya (ed. Oldenberg, vol. iv.). See on term Vin. Texts
i.18, 32, 245.
Pcna (adj.) [Vedic prcna, fr. adv. prc bent forward] eastern i. e. facing the (rising) sun (opp. pacch) J i.50 (ssaka,
of Mydev's couch), 212 (lokadhtu); Miln 6; DA i.311
(mukha facing east); DhA iii.155 (id.); VvA 190; PvA 74,
256. The opposite apcna (e. g. S iii.84) is only apparently
a neg. pcna, in reality a der. fr. apa (apa+ac), as pcna is a
der. fr. pra+ac. See apcna.
Pkatika (adj.) [fr. pakati, cp. BSk. prktaka (loka) Bodhicaryvatra v. 3, ed. Poussin] natural, in its original or natural state
J v.274; Miln 218 (mairatana); DhA i.20; VvA 288; PvA 66
(where id. p. J iii.167 reads paipkatika), 206; pkatika
karoti to restore to its former condition, to repair, rebuild J
i.354, also fig. to restore a dismissed officer, to reinstate J
v.134.
Pceti2 [for pjeti, with c. for j (see Geiger, P.Gr. 393 ); pra+aj:
see aja] to drive, urge on Dh 135 (yu p. goplako viya...
peseti DhA iii.60).
Pala (adj.) [cp. Class. Sk. pala, to same root as palita &
pu: see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under palleo & cp. pau] pale
red, pink J iv.114.
Pgabbhiya (nt.) [fr. pagabbha] boldness, impudence, forwardness Sn 930; Nd1 228 sq. (3 kinds, viz. kyika, vcasika,
cetasika), 390 sq.; J ii.32; v.449 (pagabbhiya); SnA 165; KhA
242; DhA iii.354 (pa); VvA 121.
Pal (f.) [cp. Class. Sk. pal, to pala] the trumpet flower,
Bignonia Suaveolens D ii.4 (Vipass paliy mle abhisambuddho); Vv 359 ; J i.41 (rukkha as the Bodhi tree); ii.162
(pali bhaddaka sic. v. l. for phlibhaddaka); iv.440;
v.189; vi.537; Miln 338; VvA 42, 164; ThA 211, 226.
Pguat (f.) [abstr. of pgua, which is der. fr. paguna] being familiar with, experience Dhs 48, 49; Vism 463 sq., 466.
Pava (nt.) [cp. late Sk. pava, fr. pau] skill KhA 156.
Pcaka (adj. n.) [fr. pac, cp. pceti] one who cooks, a cook;
f. ik J i.318.
Pikankhin () (adj. n.) [fr. pai+knka, cp. patikankhin] hoping for, one who expects or desires D i.4; M iii.33;
A ii.209; J iii.409.
Pik (f.) [etym. unknown; with piya cp. Sk. pya?] half
moon stone, the semicircular slab under the staircase Vin i.180
(cp. Vin. Texts ii.3). As piya at J vi.278 (=pihi psa
C.).
Pcana2 (nt.) [for pjana, cp. pceti2 & SnA 147] a goad, stick S
i.172; Sn p. 13; v.77; J iii.281; iv.310.
-yahi driving stick, goad stick S i.115.
Pcariya () [pa+cariya] only as 2nd part of a (redupl.) compound cariya-pcariya in the nature of combns mentioned
under a1 3 b: "teacher upon teacher" (expld by Cs as "teacher
of teachers") D i.90 (cp. DA i.254); ii.237, etc. (see cariya).
500
Pidesanya
Phna
Phaka () [fr. pha] reciter; one who knows, expert Nd1 382
(nakkhatta); J i.455 (asi lakkhaa); ii.21 (angavijj), 250
(id.); v.211 (lakkhaa fortune teller, wise man).
Phna [cp. Sk. phna Manu 5, 16; Halyudha 3, 36] the fish
501
Phna
Ptur
Pa [fr. pa+an, cp. Vedic pra breath of life; P. apna, etc.] living being, life, creature D iii.48, 63, 133; S i.209, 224; v.43,
227, 441 (mah samudde); A i.161; ii.73, 176, 192; Sn 117,
247, 394, 704; Dh 246; DA i.69, 161; KhA 26; ThA 253; PvA
9, 28, 35; VvA 72; DhA ii.19. pl. also pni, e. g. Sn
117; Dh 270. Bdhgh's defn of pa is "panatya p;
asssapasss' yatta vuttity ti attho" Vism 310.
-tipta destruction of life, murder Vin i.83 (in "dasa
sikkhpadni," see also sla), 85, 193; D iii.68, 70, 149, 182,
235; M i.361; iii.23; Sn 242; It 63; J iii.181; Pug 39 sq.; Nett
27; VbhA 383 (var. degrees of murder); DhA ii.19; iii.355;
DA i.69; PvA 27. -tiptin one who takes the life of a living being, destroying life D iii.82; M iii.22; S ii.167; It 92;
DhA ii.19. -upeta possessed or endowed with life, alive [cp.
BSk. propeta Divy 72, 462 etc.] S i.173; Sn 157; DA i.236.
-ghta slaying life, killing, murder DA i.69; -ghtin= tiptin
DhA ii.19. -bhu a living being J iv.494. -bhta=bhu M
iii.5; A ii.210; iii.92; iv.249 sq.; J iv.498. -vadha=tipta DA
i.69. -sama equal to or as dear as life J ii.343; Dpvs xi.26;
DhA i.5. -hara taking away life, destructive M i.10=iii.97; S
iv.206; A ii.116, 143, 153; iii.163.
Ptar (adv.) [Vedic prtar, der. fr. *pr, *pr, cp. Lat. prandium
(fr. prm edi
om=ptar sa); Gr. early; Ohg.
fruo=Ger. frh] early in the morning, in foll. forms: (1) ptar
(before vowels), only in cpd. sa morning meal, breakfast
[cp. BSk. prtar aana Divy 631] D iii.94; Sn 387; J i.232;
VvA 294, 308; SnA 374 (pto asitabbo ti ptar so pia
ptass' eta nma). kataptarsa (adj.) after breakfast J i.227; vi.349 (bhetta); Vism 391. (2) pto (abs.)
D iii.94; DhA ii.60; PvA 54, 126, 128; pto va right early J
i.226; vi.180. (3) pta S i.183; ii.242; Th 2, 407.
Note. Should pia-pta belong here, as suggested by Bdhgh
at SnA 374 (see above)? See detail under pia.
Ptavyat (f.) [fr. pt, see pteti] downfall, bringing to fall,
felling M i.305; A i.266; Vin iv.34 (by); VbhA 499.
Ptpeti [Caus. II. of pteti] to cause to fall, to cause an abortus
Vin ii.108; DA i.134.
Ptla [cp. Epic Sk. ptla an underground cave] proclivity, cliff,
abyss S i.32, 127, 197; iv.206; Th 1, 1104 (see Brethren 418
for fuller expln ); J iii.530 (here expld as a cliff in the ocean).
Pti [Vedic pti of p, cp. Gr. herd, shepherd, Lat.
psco to tend sheep] to watch, keep watch, keep J iii.95 (to
keep the eyes open, C. ummisati; opp. nimisati); Vism 16
(=rakkhati in def. of pimokkha).
Paka (adj. n.) (usually ) [fr. pa] a living being, endowed with (the breath of) life S iv.198 (chap); DhA i.20 (v.
l. BB mata); sap with life, containing living creatures J i.198
(udaka); ap without living beings, lifeless Vin ii.216; M i.13,
243; S i.169; Sn p. 15 (udaka); J i.67 (jhna).
Pana (nt.) [fr. pa] breathing Vism 310 (see pa); Dhtupha 273 ("baa" pane).
Pik (f.) [fr. pi; Sk. *pik] a sort of spoon Vin ii.151. Cp.
puthu pik (piy?) Vin ii.106.
Pin (adj. n.) [fr. pa] having life, a living being S i.210,
226, Sn 220 (acc. pl. pine, cp. Geiger, P.Gr. 952 ), 587
(id.), 201, 575; PvA 287; DhA ii.19.
Pta () [fr. pat] 1. fall DA i.95 (ukk); PvA 45 (asani).
The reading "anatthato ptato rakkhito" at PvA 61 is faulty
we should prefer to read apagato (apyato?) rakkhito. 2.
throwing, a throw Sn 987 (muddha); PvA 57 (akkhi). See
also pia.
Ptana (nt.) [fr. pteti] bringing to fall, destroying, killing, only
502
Ptur
Ppa
v.197, 376; PvA 44, 78; anointing the feet VvA 44 (tla), 295
(id.). -mla the sole of the foot, the foot J iv.131. Cp. mla.
-mlika "one who sits at one's feet," a foot servant, lackey
J i.122, 438; ii.300 sq. (Gmaicaa); iii.417; v.128; vi.30.
-lola loafing about, one who lingers after a thing, a greedy person Sn 63, 972; Nd1 374; Nd2 433; abstr. f. lolat SnA 36,
& loliya Nd2 433. -visa "a horn on the foot," i. e. an
impossibility J vi.340. -sambhana massaging the feet DhA
i.38.
Pdaka (adj. n.) [fr. pda] 1. having a foot or basis Vin ii.110
(a); Sn 205; ThA 78. 2. fundamental; pdaka karoti to
take as a base or foundation Vism 667. 3. (nt.) basis, foundation, base PvA 167. pdaka-jjhna meditation forming
a basis (for further introspective development) Vism 390, 397,
412 sq., 428, 667. Cp. hacca.
Pdsi is aor. of padti.
Ptheyya (nt.) [grd. form. fr. patha] "what is necessary for the
road," provisions for a journey, viaticum Vin i.244; S i.44; Dh
235, 237; J v.46, 241; DA i.288; DhA i.180; iii.335; PvA 5,
154.
Pna [Vedic pna, fr. p, pibati=Lat. bibo, pp. pta, Idg. *po[i],
cp. Gr. to drink, drink; Obulg. piti to drink, pivo
drink; Lith. penas milk; Lat. potus drink, poculum drinking
vessel (=Sk. ptra, P. patta)] drink, including water as well as
any other liquid. Often combd with anna (food), e. g. Sn
485, 487; Pv i.52 ; and bhojana (id.) e. g. Dh 249; J i.204.
Two sets of 8 drinks are given in detail at Nd1 372. Vin
i.245, 249 (ygu); S v.375 (majja); Sn 82, 398, 924; J i.202
(dibba); Pug 51; PvA 7, 8, 50.
-gra a drinking booth, a tavern Vin ii.267; iii.151; J
i.302 (=sur geha C.); Vbh 247; VbhA 339.
Pnaka (nt.) [fr. pna] a drink J ii.285; iv.30; Dvs v.2; DhA
iii.207 (amba); VvA 99, 291. Der. pnakatta (abstr. nt.)
being provided with drink J v.243 (a).
Pnada in cpd. pnad' pama at J ii.223 is faulty. The meaning
is "a badly made sandal," and the reading should probably be
(with v. l. & C.) "duphan' pama," i. e. du()+uphan. The
C. expls as "dukkatuphan' pama."
Pnya (adj. nt.) [Vedic pnya, fr. pna] 1. drinkable S ii.111.
2. drink, be erage, usually water for drinking Vin ii.207;
iv.263; J i.198, 450; iii.491; v.106, 382; Pv i.107 ; ii.119 , 710 ;
PvA 4, 5. A reduced form pniya (cp. Geiger, P.Gr. 23) is
also found, e. g. Vin ii.153; D i.148; Pv ii.102 .
-ghata a pot for drinking water Vin ii.216; J vi.76, 85.
-cika drinking vessel DhA iv.129. -c id. J i.302. hlika drinking cup Vin ii.214; iv.263. -bhjana id. Vin
ii.153. -maapa water reservoir (BSk. id. e. g. Av
ii.86) Vin ii.153. -maka (?) J vi.85 (Hardy: Flacourtia
cataphracta). -sl a hall where drinking water is given Vin
ii.153; PvA 102; cp. pap.
Pnudi see panudati.
Ppa (adj. nt.) [Vedic ppa, cp. Lat. patiorE. passion etc.; Gr.
suffering, evil; suffering evil] 1. (adj.) evil,
503
Ppa
Pysa
Ppaka (adj.) [fr. ppa] bad, wicked, wretched, sinful Vin i.8; S
i.149, 207; v.418 (p. akusala citta); Sn 127, 215, 664; Dh 66,
78, 211, 242; J i.128; Pv ii.716 (=lmaka C.); ii.93 ; Pug 19; Dhs
30, 101; Miln 204 (opp. kalya); Vism 268 (=lmaka), 312
(of dreams, opp. bhaddaka). f. ppik Dh 164, 310; a
without sin, innocent, of a young maiden (dahar) Th 2, 370;
Vv 314 ; 326 (so expld by VvA, but ThA explns as faultless, i.
e. beautiful).
Pmujja (nt.) [grd. form. tr. pa+mud, see similar forms under
pmokkha] delight, joy, happiness; often combd with pti.
D i.72, 196; S iii.134; iv.78=351; v.156, 398; A iii.21; v.1 sq.,
311 sq., 339, 349; Sn 256; Nett 29; DA i.217; Sdhp 167. See
also pmojja.
Pya [fr. pa++y] setting out, starting S ii.218 (nava newly setting out); instr. pyena (adv.) for the most part, commonly,
usually J v.490; DA i.275 (so read for phena).
504
Pysa
Pribhogika
Pysa [cp. Class. Sk. pysa] rice boiled in milk, milk rice,
rice porridge S i.166; Sn p. 15; J i.50, 68; iv.391; v.211; Vism
41; SnA 151; DhA i.171; ii.88; VvA 32.
Prima (adj.) [superl. form. fr. pra] yonder, farther, only combd
with tra the farther shore D i.244; M i.134, 135; S iv.174;
Miln 269; DhA ii.100. Cp. BSk. prima tra Av i.148.
Pribhaya (nt.) (& der.) [fr. pari+bh] "petting (or spoiling) the
children" (Miln trsl. ii.287) but perhaps more likely "fondness of being petted" or "nurture" (as Vism trsl. 32) (being
carried about like on the lap or the back of a nurse, as expln at
Vism 28=VbhA 483). The readings are different, thus we find
bhayat at Vbh 240; VbhA 338, 483; bhatyat at Vism
17, 23, 27 (vv. ll. bhaat & bbhaat); bhaakat at
Miln 370; bhaat at Vbh 352; KhA 236; Nd2 39. The more
det. expln at VbhA 338 is "alankra kara' dhi draka
kpana eta adhivacana." See stock phrase under
mugga-spyat.
Pram (f.) [abstr. fr. parama, cp. BSk. mantr prami gata Divy 637] completeness, perfection, highest state
Sn 1018, 1020; Pug 70; DhA i.5; VvA 2 (svakaa); PvA
139; Sdhp 328. In later literature there is mentioned a group
of 10 perfections (dasa pramiyo) as the perfect exercise of
the 10 principal virtues by a Bodhisatta, viz. dna, sla,
nekkhamma, pa, viriya, khanti, sacca, adhihna,
mett, upekh J i.73; DhA i.84.
-ppatta (prami) having attained perfection M iii.28;
Nd2 435; Miln 21 22; cp. Miln trsl. i.34.
505
Pribhogika
Pvassi
Plan (f.) [fr. pleti cp. Ep. Sk. plana nt.] guarding, keeping J
i.158; Dhs 19, 82,295.
Privsika=pari (a probationer), Vin i.136; ii.31 sq., where distinguished from a pakatatta bhikkhu, a regular, ordained bh.
to whom a privsika is inferior in rank.
Prevata [the Prk. form (cp. Mgadhi prevaya) of the Sk. prpata, which appears also as such in P.] 1. a dove, pigeon A
i.162 (dove coloured); Vv 363 (akkhi= prpat' akkhi VvA
167); J vi.456. 2. a species of tree, Diospyros embryopteris
J vi.529, 539.
Proha [fr. pra+ruh, cp. Sk. *prroha] 1. a small (side) branch,
new twig (of a Nigrodha tree) J v.8, 38, 472; vi.199; SnA 304;
PvA 113. 2. a shoot, sprout (from the root of a tree, tillering) S i.69 (see C. expln at K.S. 320); J vi.15; DhA ii.70; VbhA
475; 476.
Pla () [fr. p, see pleti] a guard, keeper, guardian, protector S i.185 (vihra); J v.222 (dhamma); VvA 288 (rma);
Sdhp 285. See also go, loka.
Pvaka (adj. n.) [fr. pu, Vedic pvaka] 1. (adj.) pure, bright,
clear, shining J v.419. 2. (m.) the fire S i.69; A iv.97; Dh
71, 140; J iv.26; v.63 (=kaha vattanin) vi.236 (=aggi C.);
Pv i.85 ; Vism 170 (=aggi).
Pvassi
Pisati
Psuka [for the usual phsuka] a rib Vin ii.266. (loop? Rh.D.).
Psua [for phsuka] a rib Vin iii.105.
Psa1 [Vedic pa] a sling, snare, tie, fetter S i.105, 111; A ii.182;
iv.197; Vin iv.153 (? hattha); Sn 166; It 36 (Mra); J iii.184;
iv.414; PvA 206. On its frequent use in similes see J.P.T.S.
1907, 111.
Phueyya (adj.) [fr. phuna, see also huneyya] worthy of hospitality, deserving to be a guest D iii.5; S i.220; ii.70; A ii.56;
iii.36, 134, 248, 387; iv.13 sq.; v.67, 198; It 88; Vism 220.
Psasa (adj.) [grd. fr. pasasati with p for pa as in similar formations (see pmokkha)] to be praised; praiseworthy M i.15,
404; ii.227 (dasa hnni); A v.129 (id.); J iii.493; Pv iv.713 ;
Nett 52.
Phuneyyaka=phueyya J iii.440.
Pheti [secondary form. after aor. phesi fr. pahiati] to send J
i.447; Miln 8; PvA 133.
Psaka1 [fr. psa1 ] a bow, for the dress Vin ii.136; for the hair Th
2, 411 (if Morris, J.P.T.S. 1893, 45, 46, is right to be corr. fr.
pasda).
Pisati
Piha
Piaka [cp. Epic Sk. piaka, etym. not clear. See also P. pe &
peik] 1. basket Vin i 225 (ghaa p. ucchanga), 240 (catudoika p.); Pv iv.333 ; Vism 28 (piake nikkhitta loa
maccha phla sadisa phaa); dhaa a grain
basket DhA iii.370; vhi a rice basket DhA iii.374. Usually
in combn kudda-piaka "hoe and basket," wherever the act
of digging is referred to, e. g. Vin iii.47; D i.101; M i.127;
S ii.88; v.53; A i.204; ii.199; J i.225, 336; DA i.269. 2.
(fig.) t.t. for the 3 main divisions of the Pli Canon "the three
baskets (basket as container of tradition Winternitz, Ind. Lit.
ii.8; cp. pe 2) of oral tradition," viz. Vinaya, Suttanta,
Abhidhamma; thus mentioned by name at PvA 2; referred
to as "tayo piak" at J i.118; Vism 96 (paca nikya
maale ti piakni parivatteti), 384 (tia Vedna uggahaa, tia Piakna uggahaa); SnA 110, 403; DhA
iii.262; iv.38; cp. Divy 18, 253, 488. With ref. to the Vinaya
mentioned at Vin v.3. Piaka is a later collective appellation of the Scriptures; the first division of the Canon (based
on oral tradition entirely) being into Sutta and Vinaya (i. e.
the stock paragraphs learnt by heart, and the rules of the Order). Thus described at D ii.124; cp. the expression bhikkhu
suttantika vinayadhara Vin ii.75 (earlier than tepiaka or
piakadhara). Independently of this division we find the designation "Dhamma" applied to the doctrinal portions; and out
of this developed the 3rd Piaka, the Abhidhammap. See also
Dhamma C. 1. The Canon as we have it comes very near
in language and contents to the canon as established at the 3rd
Council in the time of King Asoka. The latter was in Mgadh.
The knowledge of the 3 Piakas as an accomplishment of
the bhikkhu is stated in the term tepaka "one who is familiar
with the 3 P." (thus at Miln 18; Dvs v.22; KhA 41 with v. l.
ti; SnA 306 id.; DhA iii.385). tipetak (Vin v.3 Khemanma
t.), tipeaka (Miln 90), and tipiaka-dhara KhA 91. See also
below ttaya. In BSk. we find the term trepiaka in early
inscriptions (1st century a.d., see e. g. Vogel, Epigraphical
discoveries at Srnth, Epigraphia Indica viii. p. 173, 196;
Bloch, J. As. Soc. Bengal 1898, 274, 280); the term tripiaka
in literary documents (e. g. Divy 54), as also tripia (e. g.
Av i.334; Divy 261, 505). On the Piakas in general &
the origin of the P. Canon see Oldenberg, in ed. of Vin 1; and
Winternitz, Gesch. d. Ind. Litt. 1913, ii.1 sq.; iii.606, 635.
Cp. peaka.
-ttaya the triad of the Piakas or holy Scriptures SnA 328.
-dhara one who knows (either one or two or all three) the
Piaka by heart, as eka, dvi, ti at Vism 62, 99. -sampadya
according to the P. tradition or on the ground of the authority
of the P. M i.520 (itihtiha etc.); ii.169 (id.); and in exegesis of
itikir (hearsay tradition) at A i.189=ii.191=Nd2 151.
Pijita (adj.) [fr. pisati1 , cp. Sk. pijana] tinged, dyed Miln
508
Piha
Pia
Pihara (m. & nt.) [cp. Epic Sk. pihara] a pot, a pan Miln 107
(spelt pthara). As piharaka [cp. BSk. piharik Divy 496;
so read for T. piparik] at KhA 54 to be read for T. pivaraka
according to App. SnA 869.
Pihi & Pih (f.) [=piha3 , of which it has taken over the main
function as noun. On relation piha> pihi cp. Trenckner,
Notes 55; Franke, Bezzenberger's Beitrge xx.287. Cp. also
the Prk. forms piha, pih & pi, all representing Sk. pra:
Pischel, Prk. Gram. 53] 1. the back Vin ii.200 (pih); M
i.354; J i.207; ii.159, 279. pihi (paccmittassa) passati
to see the (enemy's) back, i. e. to see the last of somebody
J i.296, 488; iv.208. pihi as opposed to ura (breast) at Vin
ii.105; Sn 609; as opposed to tala (palm) with ref. to hand &
foot: hattha (or pada ) tala & pihi: J iv.188; Vism 361.
abl. pihito as adv. (from) behind, at the back of Sn 412
(+anubandhati to follow closely); VvA 256; PvA 78 (geha).
pihito karoti to leave behind, to turn one's back on J i.71
(cp. phato mukha Divy 333). pihito pihito right on
one's heels, very closely Vin i.47; D i.1, 226. 2. top, upper
side (in which meaning usually piha3 ), only in cpd. psa
and loc. pihiya as adv. on top of J v.297 (ammaa) pihi
at VvA 101 is evidently faulty reading.
-cariya teacher's understudy, pupil teacher, tutor J
ii.100; v.458, 473, 501. -kaaka spina dorsi, backbone M
i.58, 80, 89; iii.92; Vism 271; VbhA 243; KhA 49 sq.; Sdhp
102. -kohaka an upper room (bath room?) DhA ii.19,
20. -gata following behind, foll. one's example Vism 47.
-paasl a leaf hut at the back J vi.545. -parikamma
treating one's back (by rubbing) Vin ii.106. -passe (loc.) at
the back of, behind J i.292; PvA 55, 83, 106. -pda the
back of the foot, lit. foot back, i. e. the heel Vism 251;
KhA 51, (ahika); DA i.254. -psa a flat stone or rock,
plateau, ridge J i.278; ii.352; vi.279; DhA ii.58; VbhA 5, 266.
-bha the back of the arm, i. e. elbow (cp. pda) KhA 49,
50 (ahi): -masa the flesh of the back PvA 210; SnA 287.
-masika backbiting, one who talks behind a person's back
Sn 244 (=masakhdaka C.); J ii.186 (of an unfair judge);
v.1; Pv iii.97 (BB; T. aka). As masiya at J v.10.
masikat backbiting Nd2 39. -roga back ache SnA 111.
-vasa back bone, a certain beam in a building DhA i.52.
Pihika (adj.) () [fr. pihi] having a back, in dgha with a
509
Pia
Pidalaka
Pitika () (adj.) [fr. pit] one who has a father, having a father
VvA 68 (sa together with the f.); PvA 38 (mata whose f. was
dead): cp. dve with 2 fathers J v.424.
Pitucch (f.) [pitu+svas, cp. Sk. pit vas] father's sister,
aunt; decl. similarly to pit & mt DhA i.37; acc. sg. pitucchasa [Sk. *svasa instead of *svasra] J iv.184.
-dht aunt's daughter, i. e. (girl) cousin DhA i.85.
-putta aunt's son, i. e. (boy) cousin S ii.282 (Tisso Bhagavato p.); iii.106 (id.); J ii.119, 324.
Pitta (nt.) [cp. Vedic pitta] 1. the bile, gall; the bile also as
seat of the bilious temperament, excitement or anger. Two
kinds are distinguished at KhA 60= Vism 260, viz. baddha
& abaddha, bile as organ & bile as fluid. See also in detail Vism 359; VbhA 65, 243. In enumerations of the parts
or affections of the body pitta is as a rule combd with semha
(cp. Vin ii.137; Kh 111; Vism 260, 344; Miln 298). Vin
ii.137; M iii.90; S iv.230, 231 (+semha); A ii.87; iii.101, 131;
Sn 198 (+semha), 434 (id., expld as the two kinds at SnA 388);
Nd1 370; J i.146 (+semha); ii.114 (pittan te kupita your bile
is upset or out of order, i. e. you are in a bad mood); Miln
112 (vta pittasemha...), 304 (roga,+semha), 382 (+semha);
DhsA 190 (as blue green); DhA iii.15 (citta n' atthi pitta n' atthi has no heart and no bile, i. e. does not feel & get
excited; vv. ll. vitta & nimitta). 2. [according to Morris,
J.P.T.S. 1893, 4 for *phitta=phta, Sk. sphta] swelling, a gathering Vin ii.188 (Vin. Texts iii.237 "a burst gall, i. e. bladder");
S ii.242. The passage is not clear, in C. on Ud i.7 we read citta, see Morris loc. cit. May the meaning be "muzzle"?
-kosaka gall bladder KhA 61; Vism 263; VbhA 246.
Pittika (adj.) [fr. pitta] one who has bile or a bilious humoui,
bilious Miln 298 (+semhika).
Pittivisaya [Sporadic reading for the usual petti] the realm of the
departed spirits M i.73; J i.51; Nd1 489.
Pittivisayika (adj.) [fr. pittivisaya] belonging to the realm of the
departed Nd1 97 (gati; v. l. petti).
Pithyat (pithiyyati) [Pass. of pidahati, cp. api dahati, Sk.
apidhyate] to be covered, obscured or obstructed; to close,
shut M ii.104; iii.184; Sn 1034, 1035; Nd2 442 (BB pidhiyyati; expld by pacchijjati); Th 1, 872; Dh 173; J i.279 (akkhni
pithyisu the eyes shut); ii.158 (=paticchdiyati); vi.432.
The spelling of the BB manuscripts is pidhyati (cp. Trenckner, Notes 62).
Pidalaka [etym.? Kern, Toev. s. v. suggests diminutiveformation fr. Sk. bidala split bamboo] a small stick, skewer
Vin ii.116, cp. Bdhgh on p. 317: "daakathina ppamena
510
Pidalaka
Pire
Piya1 (adj.) [Vedic priya, pr, cp. Gr. ; Goth. frijn to love, frijonds loving=E. friend; Ger. frei, freund; Ohg.
Fra=Sk. priy, E. Friday, etc.] dear, in two applications (as
stated Nd1 133=Nd2 444, viz. dve piy: satt v piy sankhr
v piy, with ref. to living beings, to sensations): 1. dear,
beloved (as father, mother, husband, etc.) S i.210 (also compar. tara); Dh 130, 157, 220; Vism 296, 314 sq.; often combd
with manpa (pleasing, also in 2), e. g. D ii.19; iii.167; J
ii.155; iv.132. 2. pleasant, agreeable, liked Sn 452, 863:
Dh 77, 211; often combd (contrasted) with appiya, e. g. Sn
363, 450 (see also below). nt. piya a pleasant thing, pleasantry, pleasure S i.189; Sn 450, 811; DhA iii.275. appiya
unpleasant M i.86; Kh viii.5. appiyat unpleasantness J iv.32.
See also pti & pema.
-pya separation from what is dear to one, absence of
the beloved A iii.57; Dh 211. -ppiya pleasant & unpleasant
D ii.277 (origin of it); Dh 211. -kamya friendly disposition
Vin iv.12. -gghin grasping after pleasure Dh 209, cp. DhA
iii.275. -cakkhu a loving eye D iii.167. -dassana lovely
to behold, goodlooking D iii.167. -bhin speaking pleasantly, flattering J v.348. -manpat belovedness M i.66.
-rpa pleasant form, an enticing object of sight D i.152 (cp.
DA i.311); S ii.109 sq.; A ii.54; It 95, 114; Sn 337, 1086 (cp.
Nd2 445); Vbh 103; Nett 27. -vacana term of endearment
or esteem, used with ref. to yasm Nd2 130; SnA 536, etc.;
or mrisa SnA 536. -vc pleasant speech S i.189; Sn 452.
-vdin speaking pleasantly, affable D i.60 (manpacrin+); A
iii.37; iv.265 sq. -vippayoga separation from the beloved
object Sn 41 (cp. Nd2 444); PvA 161 (here with ref. to the
husband); syn. with appiya sampayoga, e. g. at Vism 504
sq.
Pippala [for the usual P. pipphal, Sk. pippal] pepper Vin i.201,
cp. Vin. Texts ii.46.
Pipphala [cp. Epic Sk. pippala, on ph for p see pipphal] the fruit
of Ficus religiosa, the holy fig tree J vi.518 (Kern's reading,
Toev. s. v. for T. maddhu vipphala, C. reads madhuvipphala & explns by madhuraphala).
Piyla [cp. Class. Sk. priyla] the Piyal tree, Buchanania latifolia
J v.415. (nt.) the fruit of this tree, used as food J iv.344;
v.324.
Pire at Vin iv.139 is to be separated (cara pi re get away with you),
511
Pire
Pisla
Pilaka [cp. Class. Sk. piak] a boil Sn p. 124 (piaka, v. l. pilaka); Vism 35 (paka); DhA i.319 (v. l. piaka). See also
piak.
Pilakkha [cp. Vedic plaka] the wave leaved fig tree, Ficus infectoria Vin iv.35; DA i.81. As pilakkhu [cp. Prk. pilakkhu
Pischel, Prk. Gr. 105] at S v.96; J iii.24, 398.
Pivati & Pibati [Vedic pti & pibati, redupl. pres. to root Idg.
*poi & p, cp. Lat. bibo (for * pibo); Gr. to drink,
drink; Obulg. piti to drink, also Lat. ptus drink, pculum
beaker (=ptra, P. patta). See also pyeti to give drink, pna,
pnya drink, pta having drunk] to drink. pres. pivati D
i.166; iii.184; J iv.380; v.106; PvA 55. 1st pl. pivma
Pv i.118 ; 2nd pl. pivatha PvA 78 & pivtha Pv i.112 ; 3rd pl.
med. piyyare J iv.380. imper. piva PvA 39, & pivatu Vin
iv.109. ppr. piva Sn 257; Dh 205, & pivanto SnA 39.
fut. pivissati J vi.365; PvA 5, 59; pissmi J iii.432; pssati
J iv.527. aor. pivi J i.198; apivi Mhvs 6, 21; pivsi Ud
42; apyiha J i.362 (or siha?); apasu A i.205. ger.
pivitv J i.419; iii.491; vi.518; PvA 5, 23; ptv Sn 257; Dh
205; J i.297; ptvna J ii.71; pitv Pv i.118 . grd. ptabba
Vin ii.208; peyya; see kka. inf. ptu J ii.210; Pv i.64 .
pp. pta (q. v.). Of forms with p for v we mention the
foll.: pipati M i.32; DhsA 403 (as v. l.); imper. pipa J i.459;
ppr. pipa M i.316, 317. Caus. pyeti & pypeti (q. v.).
Pilpanat (f.) [fr. plu, see pilavati] superficiality Dhs 1349, cp.
DhsA 405.
Piscin (adj. n.) [fr. pisca, lit. having a demon] only f. piscin
a witch (=pisc) Th 1, 1151.
Piscillik (f.) [fr. pisca] a tree goblin Vin i.152; ii.115, 134;
SnA 357; cp. Vin. Texts i.318.
Piak (f.) [cp. Class. Sk. piak] 1. a small boil, pustule, pimple
Vin i.202; S i.150; J v.207, 303; Nd1 370; Miln 298; DA i.138.
2. knob (of a sword) J vi.218. Cp. pilaka.
Pista [pp. of pisati] crushed, ground Vism 260 (=piha KhA id.
p.); VbhA 243.
Pisyati Pass. of pisati (q. v.).
512
Pisla
Pti
Phik (f.) [fr. pha] a bench, stool Vin ii.149 ("cushioned chair"
Bdhgh; see Vin. Texts iii.165); J iv.349; DA i.41; VvA 8.
Pana (nt.) [fr. pr, cp. pti] 1. gladdening, thrill, satisfaction Vism 143=DhsA 115. 2. embellishment Vism 32
(=maana).
Pisua (adj.) [Vedic piua, see etym. under pisca] backbiting, calumnious, malicious M iii.33, 49; J i.297; Pug 57; PvA
15, 16. Usually combd with vc malicious speech, slander,
pisuavc and pisuvc D i.4, 138; iii.70 sq., 171, 232,
269; M i.362; iii.23; adj. pisuvca & M iii.22, 48; S ii.167;
Pug 39. Cp. pesuna.
Peti [cp. Vedic prti, pr, see piya. The meaning in Pli however has been partly confused with p, pinvati (see pna), as
suggested by Bdhgh in DA i.157: "pent ti pita thmabal' peta karonti"] to gladden, please, satisfy, cheer; to
invigorate, make strong, often in phrase (attna) sukheti
peti "makes happy and pleases" D i.51; iii.130 sq.; S i.90;
iv.331; PvA 283: cp. DhsA 403 (sarra p.). It also occurs
in def. of pti (payat ti pti) at Vism 143=DhsA 115. pp.
pita.
Pihaka (nt.) [cp. Sk. plihaaka & plhan (also Vedic pli?), Av.
spran; Gr. , entrails; Lat. lien spleen]
the spleen M iii.90; Sn 195; J v.49. In detail at Vism 257;
VbhA 240.
Pihana (nt.) & (f.) [fr. piheti] envying Dhs 1059; SnA 459
(sla).
Pihayati & Piheti [cp. Vedic sphayati, sph] 1. to desire, long
for (with acc.) Vin ii.187; S ii.242 (pihyittha 2nd pl. aor.);
J i.401; iv.198 (pattheti+); Th 2, 454; Vv 8445 (=piyyati
VvA 349). 2. to envy (with gen. of person & object),
covet M i.504; S i.202, 236; Th 1, 62; Sn 823, 947; It 36;
Dh 94 (=pattheti DhA 177), 181 (id. iii.227), 365 (ppr. pihaya=labha patthento DhA iv.97); J i.197 (aor. m pihayi);
Miln 336. pp. pihayita.
Pta2 (adj.) [Epic Sk. pta, etym. unclear] yellow, goldencoloured Vin i.217 (virecana); D i.76 (nla p. lohita odta);
iii.268 (kasia); M i.281 (pta nisita, belonging here or under pta1 ?), cp. 385 (below); A iii.239; iv.263, 305, 349; v.61;
J vi.185 (nla p. lohita odta majehaka), 449 (alankra,
vasana uttara, cp. 503); Dhs 203 (kasia), 246, 247 (nla
p. lohitaka, odta); Vism 173 (kasia). pta is prominent (in the sense of golden) in the description of Vimnas
or other heavenly abodes. A typical example is Vv 47 (Ptavimna v.1 & 2), where everything is characterised as pta,
viz. vattha, dhaja, alankra, candana, uppala, psda, sana,
bhojana, chatta, ratha, assa, bjan; the C. expln of pta at this
passage is "suvaa"; cp. Vv 361 (=parisuddha, hemamaya
VvA 166); 784 (=suvaamaya C. 304).
-antara a yellow dress or mantle Vv 36 (=ptava uttary C. 166). -arua yellowish red Th 2, 479. -valepana
"golden daubed" M i.385.
Pih (f.) [fr. sph, cp. Sk. sph] envy, desire M i.304; J
i.197; Vism 392 (Bhagavanta disv Buddha bhvya piha anuppdetv thita satto nma n' atthi). adj. apiha
without desire S i.181.
Pihyan (f.)=pihan Nett 18.
Pihlu (adj.) [cp. Sk. sphlu, fr. sph, but perhaps=Ved. piyru
malevolent. On y>h cp. P. pahayati for pahahati] covetous,
only neg. a S i.187=Th 1, 1218; Sn 852; Nd1 227.
Pihita [pp. of pidahati] covered, closed, shut, obstructed (opp. vivaa) M i.118; iii.61; S i.40; A ii.104; Nd1 149; J i.266; Miln
102 (dvra), 161; Vism 185; DA i.182 (dvra).
Pha (nt.) [cp. Fpic Sk. pha] a seat, chair, stool, bench.
4. kinds are given at Vin iv.40=168, viz. masraka,
bundikbaddha, kuirapdaka, haccapdaka (same categories as given under maca). Vin i.47, 180; ii.114, 149,
225; A iii.51 (maca, Dvandva); iv.133 (ayo); Ps i.176; Vv
11 (see discussed in detail at VvA 8); VvA 295 (maca).
pda footstool J iv.378; VvA 291; bhadda state chair,
throne J iii.410.
-sappin "one who crawls by means of a chair or bench,"
i. e. one who walks on a sort of crutch or support, a cripple
(pha here in sense of "hatthena gahana yogga" VvA 8;
exlpd by Bdhgh as "chinn' iriypatha" Vin. Texts i.225) J i.76,
418; v.426 (khujja+) vi.4, 10; Miln 205, 245, 276; Vism 596
(& jaccandha, in simile); DhA i.194; ii.69; PugA 227; PvA
282.
Phaka [fr. pha] a chair, stool VvA 8, 124. See also palla.
513
Pti
Puggala
Vism 145 (& sukha in contrasted relation), 212, 287 (in detail); DA i.53 (characterised by nanda); DhA i.32; Sdhp 247,
461. On relation to jhna see the latter. In series pti passaddhi samdhi upekkh under sambojjhanga (with eleven
means of cultivation: see Vism 132 & VbhA 282). Phrase
ptiy sarra pharati "to pervade or thrill the body with joy"
(aor. phari), at J i.33; v.494; DhA ii.118; iv.102; all passages
refer to pti as the fivefold pti, pacava pti, or joy of the
5 grades (see Dhs. trsl. 11, 12, and Cpd. 56), viz. khuddik
(slight sense of interest), khaik (momentary joy), okkantik
(oscillating interest, flood of joy), ubbeg (ecstasy, thrilling
emotion), and phara pti (interest amounting to rapture, suffusing joy). Thus given at DhsA 115 & Vism 143, referred to
at DhsA 166. pti as nirmisa (pure) and smisa (material)
at M iii.85; S iv.235.
-gamanya pleasant or enjoyable to walk M i.117.
-pmojja joy and gladness A iii.181. 307 (pmujja); Dh 374;
DhA iv.110; KhA 82. -pharaat state of being pervaded
with joy, joyous rapture, ecstasy D iii.277; Ps i.48; Vbh 334;
Nett 89. -bhakkha feeding on joy (Ep. of the bhassara
Devas) D i.17; iii.28, 84, 90; A v.60; Dh 200; A i.110; DhA
iii.258; Sdhp 255. -mana joyful hearted, exhilarated, glad
of heart or mind M i.37; iii.86; S i.181; A iii.21; v.3; Sn 766;
Nd1 3; J iii.411; Vbh 227. -rasa taste or emotion of joy VvA
86. -sambojjhanga the joy constituent of enlightenment
M iii.86; D iii.106, 226, 252, 282. Eleven results of such a
state are enumd at DhsA 75, viz. the 6 anussatis, upam' nussati, lkhapuggalaparivajjanat, siniddha pug. sevanat,
pasdanyasuttanta paccavekkhaat, tadadhimuttat (cp.
Vism 132 & VbhA 282). -sahagata followed or accompanied by joy, bringing joy Dhs 1578 (dhamm, various things
or states); Vism 86 (samdhi). -sukha zest and happiness,
intrinsic joy (cp. Cpd. 56, 243) S i.203; D iii.131, 222; Dhs
160; Vism 158; ThA 160. According to DhsA 166 "rapture
and bliss," cp. Expositor 222. -somanassa joy and satisfaction J v.371; Sn 512; PvA 6, 27, 132.
514
Puggala
Pujaka
Pucch (f.) [cp. Class. Sk. pcch=Ohg. forsca question] a question Sn 1023; SnA 46, 200, 230. A system of questions ("questionnaire") is given in the Niddesa (and Commentaries), consisting of 12 groups of three questions each. In full at Nd1 339,
340=Nd2 under pucch (p. 208). The first group comprises the
three adiha jotan pucch, diha sasandan p., vimaticchedan p. These three with addition of anumati p. and kathetu kamyat p. also at DA i.68=DhsA 55. The complete
list is referred to at SnA 159. apuccha (adj.) that which is
not a question, i. e. that which should not be asked Miln 316.
puccha-vissajjan question and answer PvA 2. At Nett
18 p. occurs as qusi synonym of icch and patthan.
Puggalika (adj.) [fr. puggala] belonging to a single person, individual, separate Vin i.250; ii.270. The BSk. paudgalika at
Divy 342 is used in a sense similar to the Vin passages. Divy
Index gives, not quite correctly, "selfish."
Pucchita [pp. of pucchati] asked Sn 76, 126, 383, 988, 1005; Nd1
211; KhA 125 (kath); PvA 2, 13, 51. Cp. puha.
Pucchitar [n. ag. to pucchita] one who asks, a questioner M i.472;
S iii.6 sq.; Sn p. 140.
[fr.
Puchana (adj. nt.) [fr. proch] wiping Vin i.297 (mukha- colaka); ii.208 (uphana colaka), 210. Cp. puchan.
Puchan (f.) [see puchana] a cloth for wiping, a towel Vin
ii.122; Th 1, 560 (pda napkin for the feet). See Vin. Texts
iii.114.
Puja (usually ) [cp. Epic Sk. puja] a heap, pile, mass, multitude Vin ii.211; J i.146 (sabba rogna). As in foll.
cpds.: ahi It 17 (+ahikandala); kaha A iii.408; iv.72; J
ii.327; gtha J ii.211; tia A iii.408; palla D i.71; M iii.3;
A i.241; ii.210; masa D i.52; vlika J vi.560; sankhra
S i.135.
-kata (& kita) for pujikata; cf. Sk. pujkta, with i
for a in compn with k & bh heaped up, heaped together Vin
ii.208 (pujakita); M i.58, 89 (id. but id. p. M iii.92 pujakajta); A iii.324 (pujakata; v. l. pujakita & pujanika); J
ii.408 (pujakata, v. l. pancalikata); vi.111 (id., v. l. puca).
Pujaka
Pua
Puavant (adj.) [fr. pua] possessing merit, meritorious, virtuous Ps ii.213; Vism 382; DhA i.340; PvA 75.
Pua [etym. unknown, prob. dialectical, as shown by N. of
Paliputta, where putta=pua since unfamiliar in origin] orig.
meaning "tube," container, hollow, pocket. 1. a container,
usually made of leaves (cp. J iv.436; v.441; vi.236), to carry
fruit or other viands, a pocket, basket: ucchu basket for sugar
J iv.363; paa leaf basket PvA 168; phala fruit basket
J iv.436=vi.236; phnita(ssa) basket of molasses, sugar
basket S i.175 (KS.: jar); J iv.366; DhA iv.232; ml basket
for garlands or flowers DhA iii.212 (baddha made, lit. bound).
In pua baddha kummsa VvA 308 perhaps meaning
"cup." 2. a bag or sack, usually referring to food carried
for a journey, thus "knapsack" (or directly "provisions," taking the container for what it contains DA i.288 puts puasa=
ptheyya), in bhatta bag with provisions J ii.82 (with bandhati), 203; iii.200; DA i.270. Also at J iv.375 "bag" (tamba
kipillaka). See below asa & bhatta. 3. a tube,
hollow, in ns (nsa) nostril J vi.74; Vism 195, 263, 362;
KhA 65; hattha the hollow of the hand Miln 87; vatthi bladder( bag) Vism 264; sippi- pua oyster shell J v.197, 206.
pua karoti to form a hollow VbhA 34. 4. box, container, see bheda & bhedana, in pali pua seed box for
the P. flower.
-asa "bag shoulder" (for "shoulder bag," cp. asapua (assapua) & Ger. rucksack=knapsack. Rightly expld by
Bdhgh at DA i.288), a bag carrying provisions on journeys,
hence "provision," in phrase puasena with provisions (v.
l. at all places puosena) D i.117; M iii.80; A ii.183; cp. Dialogues i.150; see also muto. -pka something cooked in
a bag (like a meal pudding) Vism 500. -baddha kind of
moccasins Vin i.186, see Vin. Texts ii.15. Spelt pua bandha
at Vism 251=VbhA 234. -bhatta "bag food," viaticum,
provisions for journey J ii.423; KhA 46. -bheda the breaking
of the container (i. e. seed boxes of the Sirsa plant) VvA 344
(in vatthu where Sirsa refers to Paliputta, cp. Vv 8452, 53 ).
-bhedana breaking of the (seed ) boxes of the Pali plant,
referring primarily to the N. of Pali putta, where putta
represents a secondary Plisation of Sk. putra which again
represents P. (or Non Aryan) pua (see Pischel, Prk. Gr.
238 & 292). Through popular etym. a wrong conception of the
expression arose, which took pua in the sense of "wares, pro-
516
Pua
Puna
Puthu (adj.) [both Vedic pthak & pthu, lit. spread out, far &
wide, flat, of Idg. *plt broad, Sk. prath to expand, ptha
palm of hand Av. frapah breadth, cp. Gr. broad,
plane tree, Lith. plats broad, Lat. planta sole
of foot, Ohg. flado pancake, Ags. flet ground, E. flat] 1.
(=pthak) separated, individual, adv. separated, individual,
adv. separately, each (also given as puthag eva Kacc. 29)
S i.75 (puthu att individual self); Th 1, 86; J iv.346 (=visu
visu C.); Miln 4. See further under cpds. 2. (=pthu).
The forms (pl.) are both puthu & puth, both as adj. &
n.; puth more freq. found in metre. numerous, various, several, more, many, most D i.185 (puthu saagg; opp.
eka); S i.181 (puth), 207 (id.); Sn 769 (puth kme=bah
Nd1 11); 1043, 1044 (puth= bahuk Nd2 449b ); Th 2, 344
(puthu=puthu satt ThA 241); J vi.205 (puth). nt. adv. puthu
& puthu greatly, much, in many ways Sn 580 (=aneka
ppakra SnA 460); Vv 624 (=mahanta VvA 258).
-gumba experienced in many crafts J vi.448 (=aneka
sippa u C.). -jja (puthu 1, but see remarks on puthujjana)
common, ordinary Sn 897, 911 (=puthujjanehi janita Nd1 308).
-titthakara a common sectarian D i.116 (thus to puthu 1, but
DA i.287= bah t.) -ddis (puthu 1) each separate quarter "all
the diverse quarters" S i.234. -paa (adj.) of wide wisdom
(p. 2) A i.130; ii.67 (v. l. hsa). -paat wide wisdom A
i.45. -piya ordinary (p. 1) mode of shampooing with the
hand Vin ii.106 (Bdhgh on p. 316 explns pudhu pikan ti
hattha parikamma vuccati "manual performance," thus not
identical with pik on p. 151). -bhta (p. 2) widely spread
S ii.107; but cp. BSk phag bhavati to be peculiar to Divy 58,
100. -mati wide understanding S i.236. -loma "flat fin," N
of a fish "the finny carp" (Mrs. Rh. D.) Vv 4411 (=dibba
maccha VvA 191); Th 2, 508 (=so called fish ThA 292); J
iv.466. -vacana "speaking in many (bad) ways," or "people
of various speech" (so expld Nd1 397) Sn 932 (prob. better
"speaking ordinary talk"=puthu 1). -satt (pl.)=puthujjan,
common people, the masses S i.44; Pv iii.73 .
Puthujjanat (f.) [abstr. fr. puthujjana] common place character S i.187=Th 1, 1217.
Puthujjanika (adj.) [fr. puthujjana] common, ordinary J i.360
(of iddhi).
Puthutta (Puthatta) (nt.) [fr. puthu, cp. Sk. *pthutva; not with
Kern, Toev. s. v.=Sk. pthaktva, speciality, peculiarity] being
at variance, diversity S ii.77 (opp. ekatta; v. l. SS puthatta).
At A iv.97 we have to read puth' attna for puthuttna
which has nothing to do with puthutta, but is puthu+attna
as borne out by v. l. puthujj' attna, and by AA: puthu
nnkraehi attna hanti.
Puthula (adj.) [fr. puthu] broad, large, flat J iii.16 (ssa flat
headed); vi.171 (antarasa flat chested); Miln 121 (of a
river); VvA 301 (gambhra). abl. puthulato (as adv.)
across DhA i.396.
Puthuso (adv.) [abl. of puthu] broadly, i. e. diversely, at variance
Sn 891, 892 (=puthu dihi gata Nd1 301).
Pudava (poddava?) see gma (Vin ii.105 with Bdhgh note on
p. 315).
Puna (indecl.) [cp. Vedic punar, puna, to base *p (related
to *apo: see apa), as in puccha tail, Lat. puppis, poop, Gr.
the last; orig. meaning "behind"] again. There are
several forms of this adv., but puna has to be considered as
the orig. Pali form. The form puno is doubtful; if authentic, a Sanskritisation; only found at ThA 71 (Ap. v. 38; v. l.
puna) & 72 (Ap. v. 41, v. l. puna). The sandhi r is preserved
only in metre and in compn. . That it is out of fashion even in
metre is shown by a form pun where is the regular metrical lengthening instead of ar (J iii.437: na hi dni pun atthi;
v. l. puna). Besides this the r is apparent in the doubling of
the first consonants of cpds. (punappuna, punabbhava); it
is quite lost in the enclitic form pana. We find r in punar
gami Sn 339; punar gato J i.403 (=puna gato J i.403 (=puna
gato, ra kro sandhivasena vutto C.); in cpds.: punar
abhiseka see J.P.T.S. 1885, 49; a punar -vattit the fact
of not turning back Miln 276 (cp. Prk. apuar avatti Pischel, 343). Otherwise r stands on the same level as other
sandhi (euphonic) consonants (like m. & d., see below), as
in puna-r-eva Dh 338; Pv ii.87 ; ii.116 . We have m in puna
Puthuka [fr. puthu, cp. (late) Vedic pthuka "flat corn," also
"young of an animal," with which cp. perhaps Gr. :
see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under virgo] rice in the ear DhA i.98
(agga as first gift of the field).
Puthujjana [*prthag jana, thus puthu 1+jana, but from the
point of Pali identical in form and meaning with puthu 2, as
shown by use of puthu in similar cpds. and by C. explns . One
may even say that puthu 1=pthak is not felt at all in the P.
word. Trenckner (Notes 76) already hinted at this by saying "puthujjana, partly confounded with puthu"; a connection
which also underlies its expln as "one of the many
folk" at Kvu trsln 807 & 2913 . It is felt to belong to puthu 2 in
the same sense as Ger. "die breite Masse," or Gr. .
The expln at Nd1 308=328 is puthu nn jan. A long and
detailed etym. speculation expln of the term is found at DA
i.59, trsld at Dhs trsln 258. The BSk. form is pthagjana Divy
518
Puna
Pubba
Punti [cp. Vedic pavate, punti, p to cleanse, as in Lat. purus clean, purgo, Ohg. fowen to sift also Gr. (cp. P.
pvaka)=Ohg. fir=E. fire, Armen. hur, lit. "cleansing," see
also pua] 1. to clean, cleanse VvA 19 (+visodheti, in def. of
pua). 2. to sift J vi.108 (angra p.=attano sse angre p.
okirati C.; so read with v. l. for phunati T.); DA i.268 (bhusa
pumanto viya like sifting the chaff, winnowing). Cp. puneti.
Pubba2 (adj.) [Vedic prva, to Idg. *per, see pari & cp. Goth.
fram=from; Gr. first, Goth. fruma=As. formo first,
Av. pourv, also Sk. prvya=Goth. frauja =Ohg. fr Lord,
frouwa=Ger. frau. See also Lat. prandium, provincia] previous, former, before. The adj. never occurs in abs. forms by
itself (for which see pubbaka), it is found either as or
or in cases as adv. The phrase pubbam antam anissita Sn
849 is poetical for pubbantam. 1. () having been before J iii.200; na diha not seen before Nd1 445; mtabhta
formerly (been) his mother PvA 79; vuttha (gma) formerly
inhabited DhA i.15; as adv. bhtapubba before any beings
(existed) Vin i.342; DhA i.102 and passim (see bhta). 2.
(neg.) apubba (nt.) what has not been before, something new
519
Pubba
Pubbe
Pubbe
Purisa
katv C.); PvA 21, 141. purakkhata pp. (q. v.). See also
purekkhra.
Purattha (adv.) [for Vedic purastt, fr. pura, see *pura] 1. before S i.141 (na pacch na purattha=no after, no before).
2. east D i.50 (bhimukha looking eastward.)
Puratthato (adv.) [fr. purattha, cp. BSk. purastata MVastu
ii.198] in front, coram Sn 416 (sic, v. l. BB purakkhato); J
vi.242.
Puratthima (adj.) [fr. *pura, cp. Prk. (AMg.) puratthima, acc.
to Pischel, Gr. 602 a der. fr. purastt (=P. purattha) as
*purastima, like *pratyastima (=paccatthima) fr. *pratyasta]
eastern D i.153; S i.144; J i.71 (bhimukha: Gotama facing
E. under the Bo tree).
Pur (indecl.) [Vedic pur; to Idg. *per, cp. Goth. far= Ags.
for=E. (be ) fore; also Lat. prae=Gr. =Sk. pare] prep.
c. abl. "before" (only temporal) Vin iv.17 (purru=pur
aru before dawn); Sn 849 (pur bhed before dissolution (of
the body), after which the Suttanta is named Purbhedasutta,
cp. Nd1 210 sq.; expld by sarra bhed pubba at SnA 549).
Puman (Pum) [see pus] a male, a man, nom sg. pumo D n.273;
Cp. ii.62 ; instr. pumun J vi.550. nom. pl. pum D iii.85 (itthi
pum men & women; v. l. K. puris); J iii.459; acc. sg.
puma J v.154 (gata, cp. purisantara gata). On decl.
cp. Mller, P.Gr. p. 79; Greiger, P.Gr. 935 .
*Pura [on etym. see pur, pura, pure] base of adv. & prep. denoting "before"; abl. purato (adv. & prep.) in front of (with
gen.), before (only local) Vin i.179; ii.32; D ii.14 (mtu); S
i.137; Pv i.111 , 113 (opp. pacch); ii.86 (jandhipassa); DA
i.152; PvA 5 (purisassa), 22, 39 (tassa). Often repeated (distributively) purato purato each time in front, or in front of
each, or continuously in front Vin ii.213; Vism 18; cp. pacchato pacchato. Otherwise *pura occurs only in foll. der.:
(1) adverbial: *pura in purakkharoti, purekkhra, purohita;
pur, pure, purattha, puratthato. (2) adjectival: pura,
puratthima, purima.
Pura (nt.) [Vedic pur. f., later Sk. pura nt. & pur f.] 1. a town,
fortress, city Vin i.8=M i.171 (Ksina pura); J i.196, 215;
Sn 976, 991, 1012 (uttama),1013; J vi.276 (=nagara C); Mhvs
14, 29. avapure below the fortress M i.68. devapura
city of the Gods S iv.202; Vv 6430 (=Sudassana mah
nagara VvA 285). See also purindada. 2. dwelling, house
or (divided) part of a house (=antepura), a meaning restricted
to the Jtakas, e. g. v.65 (=nivesana C.); vi.251, 492 (=antepura). Cp. thpura lady's room, harem, also "lady" J v.296,
and antepura. 3. the body [cp. Sk. pura body as given by
Halyudha 2, 355, see Aufrecht p. 273] Th 1, 279 1150 (so
read for pra, cp. Kern, Toev. s. v. & under sarradeha).
Cp. porin.
Purimaka (adj.) [fr. purima] previous, first Vin ii.167 (opp. pacchimaka). f. ika Vin i.153.
521
Purisa
Pure
522
Pure
Pti
Purekkhra [for purakkhra, pura+k, see pure] deference, devotion, honour; usually (adj.) devoted to, honouring D
i.115; Vin iii.130; iv.2, 277; Nd1 73, 214; Dh 73 (=parivra
DhA ii.77); Vv 3414 (attha= hitesin VvA 152); VbhA 466
(mada); VvA 72.
Purekkhrat (f.) [abstr. fr. purekkhra] deference to () DhA
iv.181 (attha).
Pga3 [Class. Sk. pga] the betel palm, betel nut tree J v.37
(rukkha ppama ucchu vana).
Pulaka [cp. Sk. pulka, Halyudha 5, 43; not Sk. pulaka, as Kern,
Toev. s. v. for which see also Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. pilus]
shrivelled grain Miln 232 (sukka yava of dried barley);
DhA ii.154 (SS; T. reads mlaka, which is expld by Bdhgh
as "nitthusa katv ussedetv gahita yava taula vuccanti" ibid). Here belongs pulasa-patta of J iii.478. (vv. ll.
pul, ml, mul; expld by C. as "sahi pulasa gaccha pani," thus taking pulasa as a kind of shrub, prob.
because the word was not properly understood).
Pj (f.) [fr. pj, see pjeti] honour, worship, devotional attention A i.93 (misa, dhamma); v.347 sq.; Sn 906; Dh 73, 104;
Pv i.55 ; i.512 ; Dpvs vii.12 (cetiya); SnA 350; PvA 8; Sdhp
213, 230, 542, 551.
-raha worthy of veneration, deserving attention Dh 194;
DhA iii.251. -karaa doing service, paying homage PvA 30.
-kra=karaa DhA ii.44.
Pjita [pp. of pjeti] honoured, revered, done a service S i.175,
178; ii.119; Th 1, 186; Sn 316; Ud 73 (sakkata mnita p.
apacita); Pv i.42 (=paimnita C.); ii.810 .
Puava [etym.? dial; cp. Class. Sk. pulaka erection of the hairs of
the body, also given by lexicographers (Hemachandra 1202)
in meaning "vermin"] a worm, maggot M iii.168; Sn 672; J
iii.177; vi.73; Miln 331, 357; Vism 179 (=kimi) DhA iii.106,
411. See next.
523
Pti
Peta
Ppa [cp. Epic Sk. ppa; "a rich cake of wheaten flour"
Halyudha, 2, 164; and BSk. ppalik Av. ii.116] a special
kind of cake, baked or boiled in a bag J v.46 (pasibbaka cake
bag); DhA i.319 (jla net cake; v. l. pva). See also
pva.
Pra (adj.) [cp. Class. Sk. pra; fr. p, see preti] full; full of
(with gen.) D i.244 (nad); M i.215; iii.90, 96; A iv.230; Sn
195, 721; Ud 90 (nad); J i.146; Pv iv.313 (=pnyena pua
PvA 251); Pug 45, 46; PvA 29. dup difficult to fill J v.425.
pra () nt. as adv. in kucchi-pra to his belly's fill
J iii.268; Vism 108 (udara pra matta).
Praa (adj. n.) [fr. preti] 1. (adj.) filling Sn 312 (? better read
pura with SnA 324); PvA 70 (eka thlaka), 77 (id.). As
Np. in Praa Kassapa, which however seems to be distorted
from Pura K. (D i.47; Sn p. 92, cp. KhA 126, 175; SnA 200,
237, 372). The expln (popular etym.) of the name at DA i.142
refers it to preti ("kulassa ekna dsa sata prayamno
jto" i. e. making the hundred of servants full). 2. (nt.) an
expletive particle (pada "verse filler"), so in C. style of "a"
SnA 590; "kho" ib. 139; "kho pana" ib. 137; "ta" KhA 219;
"tato" SnA 378; "pi" ib. 536; "su" ib. 230; "ha" ib. 416; "hi"
ib. 377. See pada.
Pratta (nt.) [abstr. fr. pra] getting or being full, fulness Vin
ii.239 (opp. unatta).
Prasa [cp. Vedic puroa] sacrificial cake (brahmanic), oblation Sn 459 (=caruka ca pva ca SnA 405), 467, 479
(=havyasesa C.), 486.
Pecca [ger. of pa+i, cp. BSk. pretya Jtm 3154 ] "after having gone
past," i. e. after death, having departed S i.182; iii.98; A ii.174
sq.; iii.34, 46, 78; Sn 185, 188, 248, 598, 661; It 111; Dh 15,
131 (=paraloke DhA hi.51); J i.169; v.489, Pv i.119 ; iii.75 (v.
l. pacca). The form pecca under influence of Prk. (AMg.)
pecc (see Pischel, Prk. Gr. 587) at J vi.360.
Pva [cp. Sk. ppa; with v for p] a cake, baked in a pan (kapalla)
A iii.76; J i.345 (kapalla pan cake), 347; iii.10 (pakka);
Vv 136 ; 296 (=kapalla pva VvA 123); Pv iv.313 (=khajjaka
PvA 251); Vism 108 (jla net cake, cp. jla ppa), 359
524
Peta
Peyyla
Peta [pp of pa+, lit. gone past, gone before] dead, departed,
the departed spirit. The Buddhistic peta represents the
Vedic pitara (manes, cp. pityaja), as well as the Brhmaic preta. The first are souls of the "fathers," the second ghosts, leading usually a miserable existence as the result (kammaphala) or punishment of some former misdeed
(usually avarice). They may be raised in this existence by
means of the dakkhi (sacrificial gift) to a higher category of
mahiddhik pet (alias yakkhas), or after their period of expiation shift into another form of existence (manussa, deva,
tiracchna). The punishment in the Nirayas is included in
the peta existence. Modes of suffering are given S ii.255;
cp K.S. ii, 170 p. On the whole subject see Stede, Die
Gespenstergeschichten des Peta Vatthu, Leipzig 1914; in the
Peta Vatthu the unhappy ghosts are represented, whereas the
Vimna Vatthu deals with the happy ones. 1. (souls of the
departed, manes) D iii.189 (petna klakatna dakkhia
anupadassati); A iii.43 (id.); i.155 sq.; v.132 (p. tisalohita);
M i.33; S i.61=204; Sn 585, 590, 807 (pet klakat=mat
Nd1 126); J v.7 (=mata C.); Pv i.57 ; i.121 ; ii.610 . As pubbapeta ("deceased before") at A ii.68; iii.45; iv.244; J ii.360.
2. (unhappy ghosts) S ii.255 sq.; Vin iv.269 (contrasted
with purisa, yakkha & tiracchna gata); A v.269 (dna
petna upakappati); J iv.495 sq. (yakkh pisc pet, cp.
preta picayo MBhr. 13, 732); Vbh 412 sq.; Sdhp 96
sq. manussapeta a ghost in human form J iii.72; v.68; VvA
23. The later tradition on Petas in their var. classes and states
is reflected in Miln 294 (4 classes: vantsik, khuppips, nijjhma tahik, paradatt' pajvino) & 357 (appearance and
fate); Vism 501=VbhA 97 (as state of suffering, with narak,
tiracch, asur); VbhA 455 (as nijjhmatahik, khuppipsik,
paradatt' upajvino). 3. (happy ghosts) mahiddhik pet Pv
i.101 ; yakkha mahiddhika Pv iv.154 ; Vimnapeta mahiddhika
PvA 145; peta mahiddhika PvA 217. [Cp. BSk. pretamahardhika Divy 14]. f. pet Vin iv.20; J i.240; Pv i.62 ; PvA 67
and passim. Vimnapet PvA 47, 50, 53 and in Vimna
vatthu passim.
-upapattika born as a peta PvA 119. -katha (pubba)
tales (or talk) about the dead (not considered orthodox) D i.8,
cp. DA i.90; A v.128. -kicca duty towards the deceased
(i. e. death rites) J ii.5; DhA i.328. -rj king of the
Petas (i. e. Yama) J v.453 (visaya na mucati "does not
leave behind the realm of the Petaking"); C. expls by petayoni and divides the realm into petavisaya and klakajakaasura-visaya. -yoni the peta realm PvA 9, 35, 55, 68, 103
and passim. -loka the peta world Sdhp 96. -vatthu a peta or
ghost story; N. of one (perhaps the latest) of the canonical
books belonging to the Suttanta Piaka KhA 12; DA i.178
(Ankura).
525
Peyyla
Pehi
often find pa for pe, e. g. A v.242, 270, 338, 339, 355; sometimes pa+pe combd , e. g. S v.466. As pe is the first syllable of peyyla so la is the last and is used in the same sense;
the variance is according to predilection of certain MSS.; la
is found e. g. S v.448, 267 sq.; or as v. l. of pe: A v.242,
243, 354; or la+pe combd : S v.464, 466. On syllable pe
Trenckner, Notes 66, says: "The sign of abridgment. pe, or
as it is written in Burmese copies, pa, means peyyla which is
not an imperative insert, fill up the gap, but a substantive,
peyylo or peyyla, signifying a phrase to be repeated over
& over again. I consider it a popular corruption of the synonymous pariyya, passing through *payyya, with eyy for
ayy , like seyy, Sk. ayy." See also Vin. Texts i.291;
Oldenberg, K.Z. 35, 324.
Pesi (pes) (f.) [cp. Epic Sk. pe] 1. a lump, usually a mass of
flesh J iii.223=DhA iv.67 (pesi=masapesi C.). Thus masapesi, muscle Vin ii.25 (masapes' pam km); iii.105;
M i.143, 364; S ii.256; iv.193 (in characteristic of lohitaka);
Vism 356; PvA 199. 2. the foetus in the third stage after conception (between abbuda & ghana) S i.206; J iv.496;
Nd1 120; Miln 40; Vism 236. 3. a piece, bit (for pesik),
in veu J iv.205.
Pesik (f.) () [cp. Sk. *peik] rind, shell (of fruit) only in
cpds. amba Vin ii.109; vasa J i.352; veu (a bit of bamboo) D ii.324; J ii.267, 279; iii.276; iv.382.
Pesita [pp. of peseti] 1. sent out or forth Sn 412 (rja-dta p.)
Vv 217 (=uyyojita VvA 108); DhA iii.191. pesit-atta is the
C. expln at S i.53 (as given at K.S. 320) of pahit-atta (trsln
"puts forth all his strength"); Bdhgh incorrectly taking pahita
as pp. of pahiati to send whereas it is pp. of padahati. 2.
ordered, what has been ordered, in pesit-pesita order and
prohibition Vin ii.177.
Pea [a Prk. form for pia, cp. Pischel, Prk. Gr. 122 pehla]
a lump, only in yaka the liver ( lump) Sn 195 (=yakana
pia SnA 247)=J i.146.
Pessa [grd. formn fr. peseti, Vedic preya, f. prey. This is the
contracted form, whilst the diaeretic form is pesiya, for which
also pesika] a messenger, a servant, often in combn ds ti
v pess ti v kammakar ti v, e. g. D i.141; S i.76, 93
(slightly diff. in verse); A ii.208 (spelt pes); iv.45; DhA ii.7.
See also A iii.37; iv.266, 270; J v.351; Pug 56; DA i.300. At
Sn 615 pessa is used in the sense of an abstr. n.= pessit service (=veyyavacca SnA 466). So also in cpds.
-kamma service J vi.374; -kra a servant J vi.356.
Pesana (nt.) [fr. pa+i, see peseti] sending out, message; service
J iv.362 (pesanni gacchanti); v.17 (pesane pesiyanto.)
-kraka a servant J vi.448; VvA 349. -krik (a girl)
doing service, a messenger, servant J iii 414; DhA i.227.
Pesanaka (adj.) [fr. pesana] "message sender," employing for
service, in cor robbers making (others) servants J i.253.
Pesanika (iya) (adj.) [fr. pesana] connected with messages, going messages, only in phrase jangha messenger on foot Vin
iii.185; J ii.82; Miln 370 (iya).
Pessit (f.) [abstr. fr. pessa, Sk. *preyat] being a servant, doing
service J vi.208 (para to someone else).
Pessiya & ka [see pessa] servant; m. either pessiya Vv 8446
(spelt pesiya, expld by pesana kraka, veyyvaccakara VvA
349); J vi.448 (=pesana kraka C.), or pessika Sn 615, 651;
J vi.552; f. either pessiy (para) Vv 185 (spelt pesiy, but
v. l. SS pessiy, expld as pesaniy paresa veyyvacca
kr VvA 94); J iii.413 (=parehi pesitabb pesana krik C.
414), or pessik J vi.65.
Pesala (adj.) [cp. Epic Sk. peala; Bdhgh's pop. etym. at SnA
475 is "piya sla"] lovable, pleasant, well behaved, amiable S i.149; ii.387; A iv.22; v.170; Sn 678; Sn p. 124; Miln
373; Sdhp 621. Often as Ep. of a good bhikkhu, e. g. at S
i.187; Vin i.170; ii.241; J iv.70; VvA 206; PvA 13, 268.
Pesca is reading at D i.54 for pisca (so v. l.).
526
Pehi
Pottha
Pehi is imper. 2nd sg. of pa+i, "go on," said to a horse A iv.190
sq., cp. S i.123.
Pokkhara (nt.) [cp. Vedic pukara, fr. pus, though a certain relation to pupa seems to exist, cp. Sk. pupapattra a kind of
arrow (lit. lotus leaf) Halyudha 2, 314, and P. pokkhara
patta] 1. a lotus plant, primarily the leaf of it, figuring in
poetry and metaphor as not being able to be wetted by water
Sn 392, 812 (vuccati paduma patta Nd1 135); Dh 336;
It 84. 2. the skin of a drum (from its resemblance to the
lotus leaf) S ii.267; Miln 261 (bheri). As Np. of an angel
(Gandhabba) "Drum" at Vv 189 . 3. a species of waterbird
(crane): see cpd. sataka.
-ha standing in water (?) Vin i.215 (vanaha+), 238
(id.). -patta a lotus leaf Sn 625; Dh 401 (=paduma patta
DhA iv.166); Miln 250. -madhu the honey sap of Costus
speciosus (a lotus) J v.39, 466. -vassa "lotus leaf rain,"
a portentous shower of rain, serving as special kind of test
shower in which certain objects are wetted, but those showing a disinclination towards moisture are left untouched, like
a lotus leaf J i.88; vi.586; KhA 164; DhA iii.163. -staka
a species of crane, Ardea Siberica J vi.539 (koha+); SnA 359.
Cp. Np. Pokkharasti Sn 594; Sn p. 115; SnA 372.
Pota1 [cp. Epic Sk. pota, see putta for etym.] the young of an
animal J ii.406 (skara); Cp. i.102 (udda); SnA 125 (sha).
Pota2 [Epic Sk. pota; dial. form for plota (?), of plu] a boat Dvs
v.58; VvA 42.
Poa [fr. sphu] a bubble J iv.457 (v. l. poha). See also phoa.
Pottha1 [?] poor, indigent, miserable J ii.432 (=potthakapilotikya nivatthat pottho C.; v. l. poha). See also *ponti,
with which ultimately identical.
Pottha
Posathika
Pottha2 [later Sk. pusta, etym. uncertain; loan word?] modelling, only in cpd. kamma plastering (i. e. using a mixture of earth, lime, cowdung & water as mortar) J vi.459;
carving DhsA 334; and kara a modeller in clay J i.71. Cp.
potthaka1 .
Potthaka1 [cp. Class. Sk. pustaka] 1. a book J i.2 (aya ledger);
iii.235, 292; iv.299, 487; VvA 117. 2. anything made or
modelled in clay (or wood etc.), in rpa a modelled figure J
vi.342; ThA 257; DA i.198; Sdhp 363, 383. Cp. pottha2 .
Porisat (f.) [abstr. fr. porisa], only in neg. a inhuman or superhuman state, or: not served by any men (or servants) VvA
275. The reading is uncertain.
Potthan (f.) [fr. puth?] a butcher's knife J vi.86 (masakohana), 111 (id.).
Pothujjanika (adj.) [fr. puthujjana] belonging to ordinary man,
common, ordinary, in 2 combns viz. (1) phrase hna gamma p.
anariya Vin i.10; S iv.330; A v.216; (2) with ref. to iddhi Vin
ii.183; J i.360; Vism 97. Cp. Vin. Texts iii.230. The BSk.
forms are either prthag janika Lal. Vist 540, or prthug
janika MVastu iii.331.
Porin (adj.) [fr. pora=Epic Sk. paura citizen, see pura. Semantically cp. urbane>urbanus>urbs; polite= . For
pop. etym. see DA i.73 & 282] belonging to a citizen, i. e.
citizenlike, urbane, polite, usually in phrase por vc polite
speech D i.4, 114; S i.189; ii.280=A ii.51; A iii.114; Pug 57;
Dhs 1344; DA i.75, 282; DhsA 397. Cp. BSk. paur vc
MVastu iii.322.
Porisa1 (adj. n.) [abstr. fr. purisa, for *paurua or *puruya)] 1. (adj.) human, fit for a man Sn 256 (porisa dhura),
cp. porisiya & poroseyya. 2. (m.)=purisa, esp. in sense
Posat (f.) [abstr. fr. posa2 ] only , in su & dup easy &
difficult support Vin ii.2.
528
Posathika
Posathika=uposathika J iv.329.
vahamsa.
Pharati
Cp.
Positu at Vin ii.151 stands for phusitu "to sprinkle," cp. Vin.
Texts iii.169. See phusati2 .
Pospeti & Posveti [Caus. II. fr. poseti] to have brought up, to
give into the care of, to cause to be nourished Vin i.269 (pp.
pospita) DA i.133 (posvita, v. l. posp).
Poseti [pu] to nourish, support, look after, bring up, take care of,
feed, keep Vin i.269; S i.181; A i.117; J i.134; iii.467; Nd2 36;
Vism 305; VvA 138, 299. pp. posita. Caus. pospeti.
Ph
Phaggu [in for=Vedic phalgu (small, feeble), but in meaning
different] a special period of fasting M i.39= DA i.139. See
also pheggu.
(matt "by his throbbings only"); pl. phanditni "vapourings," imaginings Vbh 390 (where VbhA 513 only says "phandanato phandita") cp. Brethren 344.
Pharaat (f.) [abstr. fr. pharaa] suffusion, state of being pervaded (with), only in set of 4 fold suffusion, viz. pti
of rapture, sukha of restful bliss, ceto of [telepathic] consciousnss, loka of light, D iii.277; Ps i.48; Vbh 334; Nett
89.
Pharati
Phalamaya
Pharasu [cp. Vedic parau=Gr. ; on p>ph cp. Prk. pharasu & parasu, Pischel Gr. 208; Geiger, Gr. 40] hatchet,
axe A iii.162; J i.199, 399; ii.409; v.500; DhA ii.204; PvA
277. The spelling parasu occurs at S v.441 & J iii.179.
Pharita [pp. of pharati] 1. being pervaded or permeated (by) VvA
68 (mettya). 2. spread (out) J vi.284 (kittisaddo sakala
loke ph.). Cp. phuha & phlita.
Pharusa (adj.) [cp. Vedic parua, on ph.>p see pharasu, on attempt at etym. cp. Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. fario] 1. (lit.) rough
Pv ii.41 . 2. (fig.) harsh, unkind, rough (of speech) Vin
ii.290 (caa+); Pv ii.34 ; iii.57 ; J v.296; Kvu 619. In combn
with vc we find both pharusa- vc and pharus- vc D
i.4, 138; iii.69 sq., 173, 232; M i.42 (on this and the same uncertainty as regards pisu vc see Trenckner, at M i.530).
pharusa vacana rough speech PvA 15, 55, 83. 3. cruel Pv
iv.76 (kamma=darua PvA 265).
Phala1 (nt.) [cp. Vedic phala, to phal [sphal] to burst, thus lit.
"bursting," i. e. ripe fruit; see phalati] 1. (lit.) fruit (of trees
etc.) Vv 8414 (dum nicca phal' papann, not to phalu,
as Kern, Toev. s. v. phalu); Vism 120. amba mango
fruit PvA 273 sq.; dussa (adj.) having clothes as their
fruit (of magic trees) Vv 462 (cp. VvA 199); patta leaves
& fruits, vegetables Sn 239; PvA 86 pavatta wild fruit D
i.101; puppha flower & fruit J iii.40. rukkha-pama Th
1, 490 (in simile of km, taken fr. M i.130) lit. "like the
fruit of trees" is expld by ThA 288 as "anga paccangna
p(h)alibhajan' ahena, and trsld according to this interpretation by Mrs. Rh. D. as "fruit that brings the climber to a
fall." Seven kinds of medicinal fruits are given at Vin i.201
scil. vilanga, pippala, marica, hartaka, vibhtaka, malaka,
gohaphala. At Miln 333 a set of 7 fruits is used metaphorically in simile of the Buddha's fruit shop, viz. sotpatti, sakadgmi, angmi, arahatta, suata sampatti
(cp. Cpd. 70), animitta sampatti, appaihita sampatti.
2. a testicle J iii.124 (dantehi chindati=purisabhva
nseti to castrate); vi.237 (uddhita pphalo, adj.,=uddhaa
bjo C.), 238 (dantehi phalni uppeti, like above). 3.
(fig.) fruit, result, consequence, fruition, blessing. As t.t. with
ref. to the Path and the progressive attainment (enjoyment,
fruition) of Arahantship it is used to denote the realization of
having attained each stage of the sotpatti, sakadgmi etc.
(see the Miln quot. under 1 and cp. Cpd. 45, 116). So freq. in
exegetical literature magga, phala, nibbna, e. g. Tikp 155,
158; VbhA 43 & passim. In general it immediately precedes Nibbna (see Nd2 no 645b and under satipahna), and
as agga-phala it is almost identical with Arahantship. Frequently it is combd with vipka to denote the stringent conception of "consequence," e. g. at D i.27, 58; iii.160. Almost synonymous in the sense of "fruition, benefit, profit" is
nisas D iii.132; phala at Pv i.125 =nisasa PvA 64 Vin
i.293 (angmi); ii.240 (id.); iii.73 (arahatta); D i.51, 57 sq.
530
Phalamaya
Phruka
Phassati stands for phusati at Vism 527 in def. of phassa ("phassat ti phasso").
Phassan (f.) [abstr. fr. phassa] touch, contact with DhsA 167
(jhnassa lbho... patti... phassan sacchikiriy).
Phassita (adj.) [pp. of phasseti=Sk. sparayati to bring into
contact] made to touch, brought into contact, only in cpd.
suphassita of pleasant contact, beautiful to the touch, pleasant, perfect, symmetrical J i.220 (cvara), 394 (dant); iv.188
(dant' varaa); v.197 (of the membrum muliebre), 206 (read
phassita for phussita), 216 (cheka karaa); VvA 275 (as
expln of atva sangata Vv 642 ). Note. Another (doubtful)
phassita is found at J v.252 (dhammo phassito; touched, attained) where vv. ll. give passita & phussita.
Phasseti [Caus. of phusati1 ] to touch, attain J v.251 (rj dhamma phassaya=C. phassayanto; vv. ll. pa & phu); Miln
338 (amata, cp. phusati), 340 (phassayeyya Pot.). Pass.
phassyati Vin ii.148 (kav na ph.; v. l. phussiy). pp.
phassita & phussita3 .
Phita (nt.) [cp. Epic Sk. phita] 1. juice of the sugar cane,
raw sugar, molasses (ucchu rasa gahetv kataphita
VvA 180) Vin ii.177; D i.141; Vv 3525 ; 404 ; J i.33, 120, 227;
Miln 107; DhA ii.57. phitassa pua a basket of sugar S
i.175; J iv.366; DhA iv.232. 2. (by confusion or rightly?)
salt J iii.409 (in expln of aloika=phita virahita).
-odaka sugar water J iii.372, -pua sugar basket J iv.363.
Phti (f.) [cp. Sk. sphti, fr. sphy, sphyate to swell, increase (Idg. *sp(i), as in Lat. spatium, Ohg. spuot, Ags.
spd=E. speed; see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. spatium), pp.
sphta=P. phta] swelling, increase J ii.426 (=vahi); Vism
271 (vuddhi+). Usually combd with k, as phti-kamma increase, profit, advantage Vin ii.174; VbhA 334 & phti-karoti
to make fat, to increase, to use to advantage M i.220=A v.347;
A iii.432.
531
Phruka
Phua
Phsu at Miln 146 (cp. p. 425) "bhagg phs" is un certain reading, it is not phsuka; it may represent a psa snare, sling. The
likeness with phsuk bhagg (lit.) of J i.493 is only accidental.
Phsuka (adj.) [fr. phsu. Cp. Prk. phsuya; acc. to Pischel, Prk.
Gr. 208 Jain Sk. prsuka is a distortion of P. phsuka. Perhaps phsu is abstracted from phsuka] pleasant, convenient,
comfortable J iii.343; iv.30; DhA ii.92; PvA 42. aphsuka
unpleasant, uncomfortable, not well J ii.275, 395; DhA i.28;
ii.21. Note. It seems probable that phsuka represents a Sk.
*sparuka (cp. Pischel 62), which would be a der. fr. sp
in same meaning as phassa2 ("lovely"). This would confirm
the suggestion of phsu being a secondary formation.
Phsuk (f.) [cp. Sk *pruk & Ved. prva, see passa2 ] a rib,
only in pl. phsuk Vin i.74 (upaha bhajitabb), in phrase
sabb te phsuk bhagg J i.493 (lit.), which is fig. applied at
Dh 154 (expld as "sabb avasesa kilesa phsuk bhagg"
at DhA iii.128), with which cp. bhagg phs at Miln 146;
both the latter phrases prob. of diff. origin. (adj.) () in
phrase mahpassa the flank (lit. the side of the great ribs) J
i.164, 179; iii.273; abs. mah with great ribs J v.42; uggata
with prominent ribs PvA 68 (for upphsulika adj. Pv ii.11 ).
in cpds. as phsuka, e. g. ahni the rib bones (of which
there are 24) Vism 254 (v. l. psuka); VbhA 237; dvaya pair
of ribs Vism 252; VbhA 235. See also psuka, psua &
the foll.
Phlibhaddaka is spurious spelling for pli at J ii.162 (v. l. ptali bhaddaka). Cp. Prk. phlihadda (=pribhadra Pischel,
Gr. 208).
Phua
Phussa
ptiy ph.); DhA ii.118 (ptiy phua sarro); SnA 107 (referring to the nerves of taste). 2. (cp. pharati2 ) expanded,
spread out, spread with (instr.) Vin i.182 (lohitena); J v.266 (in
nirayapassage T. reads bhmi yojana sata phu tihanti,
i. e. the beings fill or are spread out over such a space; C. 272
explns by "ettaka hna anupharitv tihanti." The id. p.
at Nd1 405=Nd2 304iii d reads bh. yojana sata pharitv
(intrs.: expanding, wide) tihati, which is the more correct
reading). See also ophua & cp. phuta3 .
533
Phussa
Badar
Pheggut (f.) [abstr. fr. pheggu] state of dry wood; lack of substance, worthlessness Pug A 229.
Phea [cp. Vedic phena, with *ph fr. sp, connected with Lat.
spma, scum, Ags. fm=Ger. feim=E. foam] scum, foam,
froth, only in cpds. viz.:
-uddehaka (adv.) (paccamna, boiling) with scum on
top, throwing up foam M iii.167; A i.141; Nd2 304iii c ; J iii.46;
Miln 357.
-paala a film of scum Vism 359; VbhA 65.
-pia a lump or heap of foam S iii.140 sq.=Vism 479 (in
simile of rpa); Nd2 680 Aii ; Vism 40 (in comp); VbhA 32
sq. bubbuaka a bubble of scum Vism 171, 259, 345; VbhA
Phosita [pp. of phoseti, cp. Sk. pruita] sprinkled J vi.47 (candana, v. l. pusita).
Phoseti [Caus. of phusati2 , cp. Sk. pruyati=P. phusa-yati] to
sprinkle (over) Vin ii.205 (inf. phositu). pp. phosita.
Cp. pari.
B
Ba (indecl.) the sound (& letter) b, often substituted for or replaced by p (& ph): so is e. g. in Bdhgh's view pahuta the word
bahuta, with p for b (KhA 207), cp. bakkula, badara, badlat,
baddhacara, bandhuka 2, bala, balyati, bahuka, bahta, billa,
bella; also paribandha for paripantha; phla2 . Also substituted
for v, cp. bajjayitv v.l. vajjetv DAI, 4, and see under Nibb
.
terrify the Buddha Ud 5 (see also kul, where pkula is proposed for bakkula).
Bajjha see bandhati.
Bajjhati Pass. of bandhati (q. v.).
Battisa (num. card.) [for dvat tisa] thirty two J iii.207.
Badara (m. & nt.) [cp. Ved. badara & badar] the fruit of the jujube tree (Zizyphus jujuba), not unlike a crabapple in appearance & taste, very astringent, used for medicine A i.130=Pug
32; A iii.76; Vin iv.76; J iii.21; DhsA 320 (cited among examples of acrid flavours); VvA 186. Spelling padara for b at J
iv.363; vi.529.
-ahi kernel of the j. SnA 247. -pau light yellow
(fresh) jujube fruit A i.181 (so read for bhadara). -missa
mixture or addition of the juice of jujube fruits Vin iv.76.
-ysa juice of the j. fruit VvA 185.
Baka [cp. Epic Sk. baka] 1. a crane, heron Cp. iii.102 ; J i.205
(suik), 221, 476; ii.234; iii.252. 2. N. of a dweller in
the Brahma world M i.326; S i.142.
Bakula [cp. Class. Sk. bakula, N. of the tree Mimusops elengi,
and its (fragrant) flower] in milta-puppha is v. l. KhA 60
(see App. p. 870 Pj.) for kuli, which latter is also read at
Vism 260.
Bakkula [=vykula? Morris, J.P.T.S. 1886, 94] a demon, uttering
horrible cries, a form assumed by the Yakkha Ajakalpaka, to
534
Badar
Bandhu
Baddha2 (nt.) [fr. bandhati] a leather strap, a thong Vin i.287 (T.
bandha perhaps right, cp. bandhana 3); PvA 127.
Baddhacara see paddhacara.
Badhira (adj.) [cp. Vedic badhira, on etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb.
s. v. fatuus, comparing Goth. baups and M. Irish bodar] deaf
Vin i.91, 322; Th 1, 501= Miln 367; J i.76 (jti); v.387; vi.7;
DhA i.312. See also mga.
-dhtuka deaf by nature J ii.63; iv.146; DhA i.346.
Bandha (adj.) [cp. Vedic bandha, fr. bandh] 1. bond, fetter It
56 (abandho Mrassa, not a victim of M.); Nd1 328 (tah,
dihi); ThA 241. 2. one who binds or ties together, in
assa horsekeeper, groom J ii.98; v.441, 449; DhA i.392.
3. a sort of binding: maala with a circular b. (parasol) Vin
iv.338, salka with a notched b. ibid. 4. a halter, tether
Dpvs i.76. Cp. vinibandha.
Bandhaka as v. l. of vaaka see asa.
Bandhak (f.) [fr. bandhaka, cp. Epic Sp. bandhuk a low
woman=puk & svairin Haly 2, 341] an unchaste woman
(lit. binder) Vin iv.224 (pl. bandhakiniyo), 265 (id.); J v.425,
431 (va).
Bandhati [Vedic badhnti, later Sk. bandhati, Idg. *bhendh, cp.
Lat. offendimentum i. e. band; Goth. bindan=Ohg, bintan, E. bind; Sk. bandhu relation; Gr. father-inlaw, bond, etc.] to bind etc. 1. Forms: Imper.
bandha D ii.350; pl. bandhantu J i.153. Pot. bandheyya
S iv.198; Vin iii.45; Fut. bandhayissati Mhvs 24. 6; Aor.
abandhi J iii.232, & bandhi J i.292; DhA i.182. Ger. bandhitv Vin i.46; S iv.200; J i.253, 428, & bandhiya Th 2, 81.
Inf. bandhitu Th 2, 299. Caus. bandheti (see above Fut.)
& bandhpeti (see below). II. Meanings 1. to bind S
iv.200 (rajjuy). fig. combine, unite DhA ii.189 (gharvsena
b. to give in marriage). 2. to tie on, bind or put on to
(loc.) DhA i.182 (dasante). fig. to apply to, put to, settle on
DhA ii.12 (mnasa paradre). 3. to fix, prepare, get up,
put together J iv.290 (ukk); also in phrase cakk' ticakka
Bandhu
Bala
Bandhu [Vedic bandhu, see bandhati & cp. bandhava] 1. a relation, relative, kinsman; pl. bandh J iv.301; PvA 86 (=t)
& bandhavo Nd2 455 (where Nd1 11 in id. p. reads bandh).
-dicca kinsman of the Sun, an Ep. of the Buddha Vin ii.296;
A ii.17; Sn 54, 915, 1128, cp. Nd2 152b ; Vv 2413 ; 7810 , cp.
VvA 116. Four kinds of relations enumd at Nd1 11. viz.
ti, gotta, manta (where Nd2 455 reads mitta), sippa.
2. Ep. of Brahm, as ancestor of the brahmins DA i.254: see
below pda. 3. () connected with, related to, dealing
with [cp. Vedic amta bandhu RV x.725 ] S i.123 (pamatta);
128; Sn 241, 315, 430, 911; J iv.525; Miln 65 (kamma); SnA
192 (veda.). f. bandhun J vi.47 (said of the town of
Mithil (rja); expld by C. as "rja takeh'eva pu").
-pda the foot of Brahma, from which the dras are said
to have originated (cp. Sk. pdaja), in cpd. bandhupd'apacca
"offering from the foot of our kinsman," applied as contemptuous epithet to the Samaas by a Brahmin D i.90; M i.334; S
iv.117.
Bala
Balya
the svaka are distinct from those of the Tathgatha: Kvu 228
sq. There are seven balni D iii.253, and seven khsava
balni 283 i. e. saddhbala, viriya, sati, samdhi,
pa, hiri and ottappa. The same group is repeated in
the Abhidhamma; Dhs 58, 95, 102; DhsA 126. The Ps. also
enumerates seven khsavabalni i.35; and sixty eight
balni ii.168 sq.
-agga front of an army, troops in array D i.6; Vin iv.107,
cp. DA i.85. -nka (adj.) with strong array Sn 623; Dh
399 (cp. DhA iv.164). -kya a body of troops, an army cp.
Fick, Sociale Gliederung p. 52 note; (also in BSk. e. g. Divy
63, 315) A i.109; iv.107, 110; S i.58; J i.437 ( saharati to
draw up troops); ii.76; iii.319; v.124; vi.224, 451; DhA i.393;
PugA 249. -kohaka fortress, camp J i.179; Mhvs 25, 29.
-(k)kra application of force, violence J i.476; ii.421; iii.447;
instr. ena by force PvA 68, 113. -gumba a serried troop
J ii.406. -cakka wheel of power, of sovereignty Dpvs vi.2.
-ha a military official, palace guard, royal messenger Miln
234, 241, 264, 314; Mhvs 34, 17. -da strength giving S
i.32; Sn 297. -dyin id. A ii.64. -deva "God of strength" N.
of the elder brother of Kaha J iv.82; Nd1 89, 92 (Vsudeva+);
Vism 233 (id).
-(p)patta grown strong DhsA 118 (v.
l. phala). -vhana troops, an army J ii.319, iv.170, 433;
vi.391, 458. -vra a hero in strength Vv 531 , cp. VvA 231.
-sata for palsata, q. v. (cp. J.P.T.S. 1908, 108 note).
Balika (adj.) [fr. bala] strong; only in der. balikatara (compar.) adv. in a stronger degree, more intensely, more Miln 84;
& dubbalika weak ThA 211. Cp. balaka.
Balatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. bala, cp. balat] strength, only in cpd.
dubbalatta weakness J ii.154.
Balisa & Baisa (m. & nt.) [cp. Sk. baia] a fish-hook S
ii.226=iv.158 (misa gata b.); Nd2 374 (kma, v. l. palisa); J i.482 sq.; iii.283; iv.195; v.273 sq., 389; vi.416; Miln
412; SnA 114 (in expln of gaa Sn 61); ThA 280, 292; VbhA
196 (in comparison); Sdhp 610. On use in similes cp. J.P.T.S.
1907, 115.
-masik (f.) "flesh-hooking," a kind of torture M i.87;
iii.164; A i.47; ii.122; Nd1 154; Nd2 604; Miln 197. -yahi
angling rod DhA iii.397.
Balya
Bahu
538
Bahu
Bla
i.90; PvA 50, 155, 274. -mya full of deceit, full of tricks
J v.357 (cp. manta). -vacana (tt.g.) the plural number
J iv.173; PvA 163.
-vraka the tree Cordia myxa Abhp
558. -vighta fraught with great pain Th 2, 450. -vidha
various, multiform Cp. xv.7; Pgdp 37. -sacca see bhu.
-(s)suta having great knowledge, very learned, well-taught D
i.93, 137; iii.252, 282; J i.199; iv.244; A i.24; ii.22, 147, 170,
178; iii.114; Sn 58 (see Nd2 457); It 60, 80; Th 1, 1026; Dh
208; Vin ii.95; J i.93; Miln 19; ThA 274, 281; SnA 109, 110.
-(s)sutaka of great knowledge (ironical) D i.107 (see Dial.
i.132).
539
Bla
Bhirima
young, new; newly risen (of the sun): tpa the morning sun
DA i.287; DhA i.164; Mhbv 25; vasanta "early spring" (=Citramsa), N. of the first one of the 4 summer months (gimha
ms) KhA 192; -suriya the newly risen sun J v.284; PvA
137, 211. 3. a child; in wider application meaning a youth
under 16 years of age (cp. Abhp 251) DA i.134. Cp. blaka.
-nakkhatta N. of a certain "feast of fools," i. e. carnival
DhA i.256. -sangatacrin one who keeps company with a
fool Dh 207.
Bla2 [for vla] the hair of the head PvA 285 (koi-matta not even
one tip of the hair; gloss BB vlagga).
Bhiya (adj.) [fr. bahi, cp. bhira and Vedic bhya] foreign J
i.421; iii.432.
Blaka [fr. bla] 1. boy, child, youth S i.176; ThA 146 (Ap. v.44:
spelt akka); Sdhp 351. f. blik young girl ThA 54 (Ap.
v.1). 2. fool DhsA 51 (rata fond of fools).
Bhira (adj.) [fr. bahi, as Sk. bhya fr. bahis, cp. also bhiya] 1.
external, outside (opp. abbhantara inside), outer, foreign D
ii.75; A iv.16; Dh 394 (fig. in meaning of 2); J i.125 (antara
inside & outside); 337 (out of office, out of favour, of ministers); vi.384 (bhira karoti to turn out, turn inside out); Pv
iv.11 (nagarassa b.); Miln 281 (abbhantara dhana); VvA 68
(kittibhva fact of becoming known outside). santara
(adj.) [=sa antara] including the inward & outward parts
D i.74; A iii.25; Th 1, 172; J i.125. 2. external to the
individual, objective (opp. ajjhattika subjective) M iii.274
(cha yatan); J iv.402 (vatthu aycitv ajjhattikassa nma gahti); Dhs 674 (cp. trsl. p. 207); Vbh 13; Miln 215;
Vism 450. 3. heretical, outsider in religious sense, non
Buddhist, freq. applied to the Brahmanic religion & their practice (samaya) Kvu 251 (+puthujjana pakkhe hita); DhA
iii.378 (=mana, i. e. Bhagavato ssanato bahiddh). Cases
as adv. bhirato from outside, from a foreign country J i.121;
bhire outside (the Buddhist order) Dh 254.
-assda finding his enjoyment in outward things A i.280
(Kern, Toev. s. v. suggests "inclined towards heretic views").
-sa one whose wishes are directed outwards, whose desires
are turned to things external Th 1, 634. -kath non religious discourse, profane story Miln 24 (applied to the introductory chapter, thus "outside story" may be translated).
-tittha doctrine of outsiders J iii.473. -dna gift of externals, gift of property as opposed to gift of the person J iv.401;
vi.486; Dvs iii.33. -pabbajj the ascetic life outside the
community of the Buddha; Brahmanic saintly life (thus equal
to isi pabbajj. cp. bhiraka). J iii.352; iv.305. -bhaa
property, material things, objects J iv.401. -mant ritualistic
texts (or charms) of religions other than the Buddha's J iii.27.
-rakkh protection of external means S i.73. -lomi with the
fleece outside (of a rug) Vin ii.108. -samaya doctrine of the
outsiders, i. e. Brahmins DhA iii.392.
Bhirima
Bila
Bhulya (nt.) [fr. bahula, the Sk. form for P. bhulla] abundance
Sdhp 77.
Bhulla (nt.) [fr. bahula] 1. abundance, superfluity, great quantity M i.171; A iv.87 (kath) A iv.87; Ps i.197; J i.81. 2.
luxurious living, swaggering, puffed up frame of mind Vin i.9,
59, 209; ii.197; iii.251. See also bhulya & bhullika.
Bhullika (adj.) [fr. bhulla] living in abundance, swaggering,
luxurious, spendthrift Vin i.9 (+padhna vib-bhanto, as also
J i.68, with which Kern, Toev. s. v. compares MVastu ii.241
& iii.329); ii.197; iii.250; M i.14; iii.6; A i.71; iii.108, 179 sq.;
J i.68; iii.363. The reading is often bhulika.
Bhusacca (nt.) [fr. bahu+sacca, which latter corresponds to a
Sk. rautya fr. ru, thus b. is the abstract to bahussuta. See
on expln of word Kern, Toev. s. v.] great learning, profound
knowledge M i.445; A i.38 (so read for bahu); ii.218; Vin
iii.10; Dh 271; Vv 639 .
Bheti1 [Caus. of bahati3 or Denom. fr. bahi] to keep away, to
keep outside, to ward off; only with ref. to ppa (ppaka) to
keep away (from) sin S i.141 (bhetv ppni); Sn 519=Nd2
464a (bhetv ppakni); Dh 267; a popular etymology of
brhmaa (ppa bahenti) D iii.94 (bhitv, better bhetv,
expld by panuditv DhA iii.393; v. l. K vh). pp. bhita
(q. v.). See also nib, pari.
Bila1 (nt.) [Vedic bila, perhaps fr. bhid to break, cp. K.Z. 12,
123. Thus already expld by Dhtp 489: bila bhedane] a hole,
den, cave A ii.33=S iii.85; Th 1, 189; Nd1 362; J i.480; ii.53;
vi.574 (=guh C.); Miln 151; Sdhp 23. kaa orifice of
the ear Vism 195; vammka ant's nest J iv.30; sota=kaa
DhsA 310.
-saya (adj.) living in holes, a cave dweller, one of the
four classes of animals (bil, dak, van, rukkh) S iii.85=A
ii.33; Nd1 362; Bu ii.97; J i.18.
Bila2 (nt.) [identical with bila1 ] a part, bit J vi.153 (sata 100
pieces); abl. bilaso (adv.) bit by bit M i.58=iii.91 (v. l. vi-
541
Bila
Bujjhati
Bira [etym. uncertain, prob. a loan word; cp. late Sk. bila
& see also P. bila. The Prk. forms are birla & virla, f.
birl] a cat D ii.83; M i.128, 334; S ii.270; A iii.122 (vira);
v.202, 289; Th 1, 1138; J i.461 (as representing deceit), 480;
v.406, 416, 418; Miln 118; DhA ii.152; PugA 225. On bira
in similes cp. J.P.T.S. 1907, 116.
-nissakkana ( matta) (large enough) for a cat to creep
through A v.195. -bhast (a bag of) catskin M i.128 (expld
by Bdhgh as "bira camma pasibbako"); Th 1, 1138. At
both passages in similes.
Bbhaccha (adj.) [cp. Epic Sk. bbhatsa, bbhatsate to feel disgust. Not a des. fr. bdhate: see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.
fastidium] disgusting, awful, horrible, dreadful J ii.276; iv.71
(vaa), Sdhp 603. dassana a disgusting sight, horrible to
behold J i.171; PvA 32, 56, 68, 99 (: all with ref. to Petas).
The spelling bhbhaccha (after bh) is sometimes found, e. g.
at J i.61; iv.491; v.42.
Braa [cp. Sk. vraa & vra mla=ura Halyudha 2, 467]
a fragrant grass, Andropogon muricatum S iii.137; (here represented as larger than the kusa & babbaja grasses, smaller than
a tree).
542
Bujjhati
Buddha
of the meaning is "kilesa santna niddya uhahati cattri v ariyasaccni paivijjhati Nibbnam eva v sacchikaroti"
DhsA 217, cp. trsln at Expos. 294 "to rise from the slumber of
the continuum of the lower nature, or a penetrating the Ariyan
Truths, or a realizing Nibbna"] to be awake, to be enlightened in (acc.), to perceive, to know, recognise, understand D
ii.249; S i.74, 198; Dh 136, 286; Th 1, 146; J iii.331; iv.49,
425; Miln 165, 348 (pot. bujjheyya); Dpvs i.14 (with gen.)
KhA 219 (so attho sukha b.). 3rd pl. bujjhare Th 2, 453;
Bu ii.183. imper. bujjhassu Bu ii.183. fut. bujjhissati Bu
ii.65; aor. abujjhi Bu ii.211, and bujjhi J iv.425; Vism 209;
pret. 3rd sg. abujjhatha Bu vii.22. ppr. bujjhamna Sn
395; Bu vii.22; DhA i.93. pp. buddha (q. v.). Caus. I.
bodheti (q. v.). Caus. II. bujjhpeti to lead to knowledge
or recognition J i.407. Two infinitives formed fr. bodh, but
belonging to budh are bodhu J v.341, and boddhu Th 1,
167.
Buddha
Bundika
544
Bundika
Bodhi
the 37 constituents of Arahantship, viz. the 30 above mentioned qualities (counting magga as one), with addition of
slesu pariprikrit, indriyesu gutta dvrat, bhojane mattaut, jgariy' nuyoga, sati sampajaa (see e. g. Nd1
14; Nd2 s. v. satipahna & sla); cp. Th 1, 161, 162; Th 2, 21
(magg nibbna pattiy); DhsA 217 (bodhya savattant
ti bojjhang etc.; also def. as "bodhissa ango ti pi bojjhango
sen' angarath' ang' dayo viya). They are also called the paribhoga bhani or "insignia" of the Buddha Miln 330.
-kosalla proficiency in the constituents of wisdom Vism
248.
Bubbua (& Bubbula) [cp. Epic Sk. budbuda] a bubble. On similes cp. J.P.T.S. 1907, 117. Usually of a waterbubble udaka
S iii.141; A iv.137; J v.216; Miln 117; Vism 109; DhA iii.209;
VbhA 33 (as unsubstantial to which vedan are likened). In
other connection at J i.68 (of cooking gruel).
Bubbuaka=bubbua, viz. 1. a bubble DhA iii.166; Miln 118.
2. the iris of the eye Th 2, 395 (cp. Morris, in J.P.T.S. 1884,
89, but according to ThA 259 the reading pubbahaka is to be
preferred.)
Bella (m. & nt.) [=beluva, q. v.] the fruit of the Vilva tree (a
kind of citron?) J iii.77 (C. beluva); vi.578. Also in doubtful
passage at J iii.319 (v. l. mella, phella).
Bojjha (nt.) [orig. grd. of bujjhati or bodheti] a matter to be
known or understood, subject of knowledge or understanding
Nett 20.
Bojjhanga [bodhi+anga; cp. BSk. bodhyanga, e. g. Lal. Vist.
37, where the 7 are given at Divy 208] a factor or constituent
of knowledge or wisdom. There are 7 bojjhangas usually referred to or understood from the context. There are enumd at
several places, e. g. at D iii.106, where they are mentioned
in a list of qualities (dhamm) which contribute to the greatest
happiness of gods and man, viz. the 4 satipahn, 4 sammapadhn, 4 iddhipd, 5 indriyni, 5 balni & the 7 bojjhangas
and ariya ahangika magga, 37 in all. The same list we find at
Divy 208. The 7 b. (frequently also called sambojjhang)
are sati, dhamma-vicaya, viriya, pti, passaddhi, samdhi,
upekh or mindfulness, investigation of the Law, energy, rapture, repose, concentration and equanimity (DhsA 217, cp. Expositor ii.294). D ii.79, 83, 120, 303; iii.101, 128, 284; M
i.11, 61; ii.12; iii.85, 275; S i.54; v.82, 110; A i.14; iv.23;
Nd1 14, 45, 171 (kusala), 341; Kvu i.158; Dhs 358, 528,
1354; Vbh 199 sq., 227 sq.; Vism 160; Miln 340; DhA i.230;
VbhA 120, 310; ThA 27, 50, 160. They are counted among
545
Bodhi
Byasana
"throne"), on which the Buddha was seated at the time of attaining highest enlightenment. The term is only found in very
late canonical and post canonical literature. Bu ii.65, 183;
Vism 203; J iv.228, 232; Mhbv 79; SnA 2, 30, 225, 258, 281,
340, 391, 441; DhA i.86; ii.69; iv.72; ThA 2. Cp. BSk. bodhimaa Divy 392. -maha feast in honour of the Bo tree J
iv.229. -mla the root or foot of the Bo tree SnA 32, 391; cp.
Bodhiy mle Nd1 172, 458=Ps i.174. -rukkha the Bodhi
tree Vin i.1.
Bodhetar [n. ag. fr. bodheti] awakener, enlightener Nd1 457; Ps
i.174; Vism 209.
Bodheti [Caus. of bujjhati] 1. to awaken to the truth, to enlighten
S i.170; Bu ii.195. aor. bodhesi Vism 209, abodhayi Bu
ii.196 & bodhayi Bu v.31; xxv.6 inf. bodhu: see bujjhati,
& bodhetu J iv.393. grd. bodhabba D ii.246; A iv.136.
2. to make aware (of), to make known J vi.412; SnA 444.
Bondi [etym. doubtful, one proposed by Morris, J.P.T.S. 1889,
207 derives it fr. bandh=bundh to bind, which is an erroneous
comparison; on his hint "probably cognate with E. body" cp.
Walde, Lat. Wtb. under fidelia. The orig. meaning may have
been, as Morris suggests, "trunk." It certainly is a dial. word]
body Pv iv.332 ; J i.503; ii.160; iii.117; PvA 254.
Bya etc. (by, byu) words not found under these initials are to
be looked up under vya etc.
Byag 3rd sg. aor. of vi+gam, to depart, to be lost, perish Th 1,
170.
Byaggha [cp. Sk. vyghra] a tiger J ii.110; Sdhp 388. f. byagghin Miln 67.
Byajana (nt.) [cp. Sk. vyajana] 1. sign, mark: see vyajana.
2. the letter, as compared with attha, the spirit or meaning;
thus in phrase atthato byajanato ca according to the meaning & the letter Miln 18, 345; Nett 23. As vyajana is the
more usual (& classical) form, other refs. will be found under
vyajana.
Byatta (adj.) [cp. P. vyatta; Sk. vyakta] experienced, learned
Miln 21.
Byattat (f.) [fr. byatta] experience, learning Miln 349. See also
pari.
Byanti in bhavati, bhva etc. see vyanti.
Byapagata [=vy apa gata] departed, dispelled Miln 225.
Bodhi2 [=bodhi1 ] the tree of wisdom, the sacred Bo tree, the fig
tree (Assattha, Ficus religiosa) under which Gotama Buddha
arrived at perfect knowledge. The tree is near the spot where
Buddhagya is now, about 60 miles fr. Patna. It is regarded by
pilgrims as the centre of the world (cp. pathav nbhi mah
bodhimao Mbvs 79). It is also spoken of as Mahbodhi
(e. g. J iv.228; Vism 403). Vism 72, 299, 342; DhA i.105;
ThA 62; VbhA 473.
-angaa the courtyard in which the Bo tree stands DA
i.191; Vism 188 (vatta); VbhA 349. -tala "Bodhifoundation," i. e. the place or ground of the B. tree, otherwise bodhi
maa J i.105; Mhbv 9; DhA i.117. -pakka fruit of the Bo
tree J iv.229. -pdapa the Bodhi tree Mbhv 1. -pj veneration of, or offerings to the Bo tree Mhbv 81. -maa (for
maala) the ground under the Bodhi tree, hence the spot (or
546
Byasana
Brahma & Brahm [fr. bh, see brahant. Perhaps less with regard to the greatness of the divine principle, than with ref. to
the greatness or power of prayer or the ecstatic mind (i. e.
holy enthusiasm). On etym. see Osthoff, "Bezzenberger's
Beitrge" xxiv.142 sq. (=Mir. bricht charm, spell: Oicel.
bragr poetry)] I. Brahman (nt.) [cp. Vedic brhman nt.
prayer; nom. sg. brhma] 1. the supreme good; as a buddhistic term used in a sense different from the brahmanic (save in
controversy with Brahmans); a state like that of Brahm (or
Brahman) A ii.184 (brahmappatta). In cpds. brahma. 2.
Vedic text, mystic formula, prayer DA i.244 (brahma aat
ti brhmao).
II. Brahm [cp. Vedic brahmn, m., one who prays or
chants hymns, nom. sg. Brahm] 1. the god Brahm chief
of the gods, often represented as the creator of the Universe
(vasavatt issaro katt nimmt) D i.18; iii.30, also called
Mahbrahm (D i.235 sq., 244 sq.; iii.30; It 15; Vism 578;
DhA ii.60); and Sahampati (Vin i.5; D ii.157; S i.136 sq.;
Vism 201; KhA 171; SnA 56) and Sanakumra (D ii.226;
iii.97). The duration of his life is given as being 1 kalpa (see
Kvu 207, 208). nom. Brahm Vin i.5; D ii.46; J vi.486;
Miln 224; Vism 2 (brahmna atibrahm, Ep. of Buddha Bhagav); SnA 229 (B. mahnubhvo); gen. abl. Brahmano D
ii.209; Vism 205; SnA 177; instr. Brahman D i.252; ii.239;
Dh 105, 230; Vism 48, 405; DhA ii.60; acc. Brahmna D
ii.37; voc. Brahme S i.138. 2. a brahma god, a happy &
blameless celestial being, an inhabitant of the higher heavens
(brahma loka; in which to be reborn is a reward of great
merit); nom. sg. brahm S i.142 (Baka br.); M i.327 (id.); A
iv.83; PvA 138 (devat for brahma?); gen. abl. brahmuno
S i.142, 155; instr. brahmun D iii.147, 150 & brahman
Brhmaa
sq., 160; VbA 68; PvA 76; VbhA 167, 433, 437, 510. See
also Cpd. 57, 141 sq.; Kirfel, Kosmographie 26, 191, 197,
207, and cp. in BSk. literature Lal. Vist. 171. The Br.
l. is said to be the one place where there are no women: DhA
i.270. yva Brahmalok pi even unto Br.'s heaven, expression like "as far as the end of the world" M i.34; S v.265, 288.
paga attaining to the highest heaven D ii.196; A v.342;
Sn 139; J ii.61; Kvu 114. papatti rebirth in Heaven Sn
139. paryana the Br. loka as ultimate goal J ii.61;
iii.396. sahavyat the company of the Br. gods A iv.135
sq. -yna the best vehicle S v.5 (+dhammayna). -vaccasin
with a body like that of Mahbrahm, combd with -vain of
most excellent complexion, in ster. passage at D i.114, 115;
M ii.167, cp. DA i.282: vaccas ti Mahbrahmuo sarra
sadisena sarrena samanngato; va ti sehava. -vda
most excellent speech Vin i.3. -vimna a palace of Brahm
in the highest heaven D iii.28, 29; It 15; Vism 108. -vihra
sublime or divine state of mind, blissful meditation (exercises
on a, altruistic concepts; b, equanimity; see on these meditations Dial i.298). There are 4 such "divine states," viz. mett,
karu, mudit, upekkh (see Vism 111; DhsA 192; and cp.
Expositor 258; Dhs trsl. 65; BSk. same, e. g. Divy 224); D
ii.196; iii.220 (one of the 3 vihra's: dibba, brahma, ariya);
Th 1, 649; J i.139 (vihre bhvetv... brahmalok' paga),
ii.61; Dhs 262; Vism 295 sq. (niddesa), 319. -vehana the
head dress of a brahmin SnA 138 (one of the rare passages
where brahma=brahma III. 1). -sama like Brahm Sn 508;
SnA 318, 325; DhsA 195. -ssara "heavenly sound," a divine
voice, a beautiful and deep voice (with 8 fine qualities: see
enumd under bindu) D ii.211=227; J i.96; v.336.
Brahmaka (adj.) only in cpd. sa with Brahm (or the Br. world).
q. v.
549
Brhmaa
Bhagandala
kattro "the ten inspired Seers of old times, who composed the
Vedic hymns"; their names are Ahaka, Vmaka, Vmadeva,
Vessmitta, Yamataggi, Angirasa, Bhradvja, Vseha, Kassapa, Bhagu Vin i.245; D i.104; A iii.224; iv.61; cp. VvA 265.
f. brhma (n. or adj.) the wife of a brhmaa D i.193;
J v.127 (of a purohita or high priest); DhA i.33; iv.176; PvA
55, 61, 64. Freq. in combn brhma paj this generation of
brhmaas, e. g. D i.249; A i.260; ii.23 (see paj).
-ibbh Brahmins & Vaiyas J vi.228 sq. -kumrik a
brahmin young girl J iii.93. -kula a br. clan or family J ii.85,
394, 411; iii.147, 352; PvA 21, 61. -gahapatik priests &
laymen ("clerk & yeoman" Rh. D. in S.B.E. xi.258) D ii.178;
iii.148, 153, 170 sq.; S i.59, 184; A i.110; Vin i.35; J i.83.
-gma a br. village Vin i.197; D i.87, 127; S i.111; J ii.368;
iii.293; iv.276. -dhamma duty of a br.; see on contrast between Brahmaic & Buddhist view J iv.301 sq., cp. also SnA
312 325 (br. dhammika suta) & Fick, l. c. 124.
-putta son of a br. PvA 62. -bhojana giving food (alms)
to brahmans Vin i.44. -mava a young brahmin J iv.391.
-rpa (in) form of a br. PvA 63. -vahak a br. carpenter
J iv.207. -vain having the appearance of a brahmin Cp.
x.10. -vcanaka a br. disputation, some sort of elocution
show J i.318; iv.391. -vaka circle of brahmins DhA iv.177
(v. l. vdaka). -vija a br. merchant PvA 113. -sacca
a brahmanic (i. e. standard, holy) truth A ii.176 (where the
Buddha sets forth 4 such br. saccni, diff. from the usual 4
ariyasaccni).
Brhmaa2 (nt.) [for brahmaa] state of a true brahman, "holiness supreme" Th 1, 631.
Brti [br, Sk. bravti, Med. brte; cp. Geiger, P.Gr. 1412 .
Expld by Dhtp 366 as "vacane," by Dhtm 593 as "vcya,
Bh
Bha (indecl.) the letter or sound (syllable) bh; figuring in Bdhgh's
exegesis of the N. Bhagav as representing bhava, whereas
ga stands for gamana, va for vanta KhA 109. Like ba
we often find bha mixed up with pa; see e. g. bhaa
bhaati; bh represents b. in bhasta=Sk. basta, bhisa=Sk.
bisa, bhusa=Sk. bua. bha-kra the sound (or ending)
bha, which at Vin iv.7 is given as implying contempt or
abuse, among other low terms (hn akkos). This refers also
to the sound (ending) ya (see ya kra). The expln for
this probably is that bha is abstracted from words ending
thus, where the word itself meant something inferior or contemptible, and this shade of meaning was regarded as inhering
in the ending, not in the root of the word, as e. g. in ibbha
(menial).
Bhakui (f.) [cp. Epic Sk. bhrakui from older bhkuti, bhrukui
or bhrkui] superciliousness Sn 485. J iii.99; Vism 26
(karaa); SnA 412. Der. bhkuika (q. v.). See also
bhkui.
Bhaga [Vedic bhaga, bhaj, see bhagavant etc.] luck, lot, fortune,
only in cpd. dub (adj.) unhappy, unpleasant, uncomfortable It 90; DA i.96 (karaa). bhaga (in verse "bhagehi ca
vibhattav" in exegesis of word "Bhagava") at DA i.34 read
bhava, as read at id. p. Vism 210.
550
Bhagandala
Bhajanin
insight into disruption), quoted & expld at Vism 640 sq.; VbhA
27 (khaa); Sdhp 48, 78 (s). Cp. vi.
Bhacca (adj.) [grd. fr. bh, cp. Sk. bhtya] to be carried, kept or
sustained A iii.46 (=a dependant) J iv.301 (C. bharitabba). As
Kern. Toev. s. v. bhacca points out this gth "bhacc mt
pit bandh, yena jto sa yeva so" is a distortion of MBh i.74,
110, where it runs "bhastr mt, pitu putro, yena jto sa eva
sa" (or is it bhrast?).
Bhajati [bhaj to divide, partake etc.: see Caus. bhjeti & cp.
vi] to associate with (acc.), keep companionship with, follow, resort to; to be attached to (acc.), to love. Freq. syn.
of sevati. The Dhtp & Dhtm mark the fig. meaning (bhaj2 )
by sevya (Dhtp 61), sevputhakkare (Dhtm 523) & sasevane (ib. 76), whilst the lit. (bhaj1 ) is expressed by vibhjane. Sn 958 (bhajato ritta sana; gen. sq. ppr.=sevato
etc. Nd1 466); Dh 76, 303; Pug 26, 33; J i.216=iii.510 (dis
bh.) vi.358; Sdhp 275. Pot. bhaje Dh 76, 78, and bhajetha Dh 78 (=payirupsetha), 208 in sense of imper.; hence
2nd sg. formed like Caus. as bhajehi J iii.148 (C. bhajeyysi;
cp. Geiger, P.Gr. 1392 ). grd. bhajitabba Nd2 s. v.
kmagu B (sevitabba, bh., bhvetabba).
Bhagin (f.) [Epic Sk. bhagin] a sister J vi.32. The popular etym.
of bh. as given at VbhA 108 is the same as that for bhtar, viz.
"bhagat ti bh." Cpd. bhagini-mla a "sister garland" (?)
N. of a tree J vi.270 (=upari bhaddaka).
Bhagga1 [pp. of bhaj, Sk. bhagna] broken, in phrases "sabb
te phsuk bhagg" J i.493, which is applied metaphorically
at Dh 154 (phsuk=ppak?), expld DhA iii.128 (artificially)
by "avasesa kilesa phsuk bhagg"; further "bhagg ppak dhamm" Vism 211; bhagg kiles Miln 44; and bhagga
-rga, dosa etc. (in def. of Bhagav) at Nd1 142=Nd2 466 B,
quoted at Vism 211.
Bhajan (f.) [fer. bhaj] resorting to, familiarity with Pug 20=Dhs
1326, cp. sam & Dhs trsl. 345.
Bhagga2 (nt.) [fr. bhaga; cp. Sk. & P. bhgya] fortune, good
luck, welfare, happiness Vism 210 (aksi ti gar ti Bhgyav etc.).
Bhanga2 (nt.) [cp. Class. Sk. bhanga, fr. bhaj: see bhajati]
1. (lit.) breaking, breaking off, in skh a layer of broken
off branches J iii.407. 2. (fig.) breaking up, dissolution,
disruption (see on form Cpd. 25, 66) Ps i.57 sq. (nupassan
551
Bhajanin
Bhatta
Bhaa [cp. Epic & Class. Sk. bhaa, fr, dial. bha to hire; originally the same as bhtya fr. bhta & bhti of bh Dhtp 94,
Dhtm 114. bhaa=bhatya i. e. bhtya] servant, hireling,
soldier Miln 240; VvA 305 (bhattavetana). As to suggestion
of bhaa occurring in phrase yath bhaa (Kern. Toev. s.
v. yathbhaa) see discussion under yath bhata.
-patha service, employment, salary Vin iv.265; SnA 542.
Bhaati [bha; cp. Sk. bhaati; Ohg. ban=E. ban etc. "proclamation." See connections in Walde, Lat. Wtb. under fabula. Expld by Dhtp 111 as "bhaana." by Dhtm 162 as
"bhsana"] to speak, tell, proclaim (the nearest synonym is
katheti: see Nd2 s. v. katheti) Dh 264; Pug 33, 56; DhA ii.95.
ppr. bhaanto Sn 397. Pot. bhae Sn 1131 (=bhaeyya
Nd2 469); Dh 224 (sacca; =dpeyya vohareyya DhA iii.316).
Also bhaeyya Sn 397. An old subjunctive form is bhamase S i.209 (cp. Geiger, P.Gr. 126). Prohib. m bhi. A
Caus. form is bhaye (Pot.) Sn 397.
Bhati (f.) [cp. Vedic bhti, fr. bh] wages, fee, pay J i.475; iii.325,
446; DhA i.21, 70; Dhtp 94 (in expln of root bha, see bhaa).
Bhae (indecl.) [orig. 1st sg. pres. Med. of bhaati] "I say,"
used as an interjection of emphasis, like "to be sure," "look
here." It is a familiar term of address, often used by a king to
his subjects Vin i.240 (amhka kira bhae vijite Bhaddiya
nagare), 241 (gaccha bhae jnhi...) Miln 21 (atthi bhae
ao koci paito...).
Bhatta
Bhabba
august, of good omen, reverend (in address to people of esteem), good, happy, fortunate D ii.95(a) ; S i.117(b) ; Dh 143
sq.(b) (of a good, well trained horse), 380(b) (id.); J vi.281(b)
(24 bhadr psak or lucky throws of the dice); DhA i.33(a)
(voc. bhadde=ayye). bhadra (nt.) something bringing
luck, a good state, welfare; a good deed (=kalya) Dh 120
(=bhadra kamma, viz. kyasucarita etc. DhA iii.14); PvA
116 (=iha). Also as form of address "hail to thee," bhadda
vo J v.260. 2. a kind of arrow (cp. Sk. bhalla) J ii.275 (v. l.
bhadra; so Kern, Toev. s. v.; but C. takes it as bhadda lucky, in
neg. sense "unlucky, sinister," & expls by bbhaccha=awful).
3. bull (cp. Sk. bhadra, Halyudha 5, 21) Th 1, 16, 173,
659.
-mukha one whose face brings blessings, a complimentary address, like "my noble &c friend!" [cp. BSk. bhadramukha; Divy frequent: see Index], M ii.53; S i.74 (cp. K.S.
i.100n ) J ii.261 (v. l. bhadda); Vism 92 (v. l. SS bhadda).
-muttaka [cp. Sk. bhadramusta] a kind of fragrant grass
(Cyperus rotundus) DA i.81; Abhp 599. -yuga a noble pair
DhA i.95 (Kolita & Upatissa), -vhana the auspicious (royal)
vehicle (or carriage) Miln 4.
Bhaddaka(a) & Bhadraka(b) [fr. bhadda] 1. good, of good quality (opp. ppaka) A iv.169(a) . 2. honoured, of high repute J iii.269(a) (=sambhvita C.). 3. (m. nt.) a good
thing, lucky or auspicious possession, a valuable. Appld to
the 8 requisites (parikkhr) of a Samaa at J v.254(b) . On
upari-bhaddaka (N. of a tree J vi.269; C.=bhagini ml)
see upari. At A iv.255 bhaddaka is given as one of the
eight ingredients of the sun & moon; it may be gold (? cp.
Kirfel, Kosmographie 190), or simply a term for a very valuable quality.
Bhattika (adj.) () [fr. bhatta] in dhuva being in constant supply of food, being a regular attendant (servant) or adviser Vin
ii.15. Also at ThA 267 in meaning "being a servant, working
for food" in expln of bhattikat (=kata smi bhattik),
said of a toiling housewife.
Bhanta [pp. of bham] swerving, swaying, staggering, deviating; always used of an uncontrolled car (ratha or yna) Dh 222
(ratha=ativegena dhvanta DhA iii.301); (yna=adanta akrita
avita Nd1 145); DhsA 260 (yna). Cp. vi.
Bhattimant (adj.) [from bhatti] 1. devoted? 2. discerning, analytical, perspicacious? Th 1, 370; Com. has: yathnusiha
paipattiy tattha bhattim nma.
Bhantatta (nt.) [fr. bhanta] turmoil, confusion Dhs 429 (=vibhanti bhva DhsA 260, so read for vibhatti); cp. Dhs trsl.
120.
Bhante [would correspond either to Sk. *bhavanta (with ending e as Mgadhism for a)=bhavn, or to P. bhadanta. In
both cases we have a contraction. The expln bhante=bhadante
(bhadanta) is advocated by Pischel, Prk. Gr. 165, 366b ,
intimated also by Weber, Bhagavat 156 n. 3 (unable to
explain e); the expln bhante=bhavantah (see bhava) by
Geiger, P.Gr. 983 ; hinted at by Weber loc. cit. (bhavanta=bhagavanta)] voc. of polite address: Sir, venerable Sir,
used like bhadante. Either abs. as voc.: Vin i.76; D ii.154,
283; J ii.111; iii.46; Miln 19; or with another voc.: Miln 25;
or with other oblique cases, as with nom. D i.179; DhA i.62.
with gen. D i.179.
Bhabba
Bhava
Bhara-bhara, a word imitating a confused sound M i.128; otherwise contracted to babbhara (q. v.).
Bhara (adj.) () [fr. bh] "bearing" in act. & pass. meaning, i.
e. supporting or being supported; only in cpd. dubbhara hard
to support A v.159, 161 (v. l. dubhara), and subhara easy to
support Th 1, 926 (trsl. "of frugal ways").
Bhabbat (f.) [abstr. fr. bhabba] possibility; neg. a impossibility Sn 232; KhA 191; VvA 208.
Bhamati [bhram; on etym. see K.Z. iv.443; vi.152. Expld at Dhtp
219 by "anavahne," i. e. unsettledness] to spin (of a wheel),
to whirl about, to roam Dh 371 (m te kmague bhamassu citta); J i.414; iii.206= iv.4 (cakka matthake); iv.6 (kumbha
kra cakka iva bh.); v.478. pp. bhanta. Caus.
bhameti to make whirl Vism 142 (cakka).
Bhamara [cp. Epic & Class. Sk. bhramara; either to bhram (semantically quick, unsteady motion=confused noise), cp. Gr.
zither; or perhaps for *bramara to Ohg. bremo=Ger.
bremse gadfly, bremen=brummen to hum; Gr. thunder, Lat. fremo to growl, roar: see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.
fremo] 1. a bee J v.205 (vaa bee coloured, i. e. of black
colour, in expln of kaha); Th 2, 252. Usually in similes, e. g.
at Dh 49 (cp. DhA i.374 sq.); Vism 142, 152; SnA 139.
2. in bhamara-tanti "the string that sounds," one of the seven
strings of the lute J ii.253, cp. VvA 140.
Bharati [bh, cp. Lat. fero, Gr. , Av. baraiti, Oir. berim,
Goth. bairan=to bear, Ger. gebren. Dhtm expls simply by
"bharena"] to bear, support, feed, maintain J v.260 (mama
bharatha, aha bhatt bhavmi vo; C. explns as "ma icchatha"). pp. bhata. See also bhaa, bhara, bharita, and Der.
fr. bhr. A curious Passive form is anu-bhramna (ppr.)
M iii.123 (chatta: a parasol being spread out), on which see
Geiger, P.Gr. 52, 5; 175 n. 3, 191.
Bharita (adj.) [lit. made to bear, i. e. heavy with etc. Cp.
formations bhr, fr. bharati] filled with () J i.2 (suvaa
rajata gabbha); iv.489 (udaka); v.275 (kimi); SnA 494
(vta); ThA 283 (kuapa).
Bhariy (f.) [fr. bh, Vedic bhry] a wife (lit. one who is supported) D iii.190; It 36; J iii.511; DhA i.329.
Bharu [a dial. (inscription) word, cp. Kern, Toev. s. v.] sea, in
two names for a town and a kingdom viz. Bharukaccha Nd1
155; J ii.188; iv.137, and Bharu-raha J ii.169 sq., a kingdom
which is said to have been swallowed up by the sea. Also
in N. of the King of that country Bharu rj J ii.171 (v. l.
Kuru). Der. Bhrukacchaka an inhabitant of Bharukaccha DhsA 305 (so read at Expos. ii.401).
Bhaya (nt.) [fr. bh, cp. Vedic bhaya, P. bhyati] fear, fright,
dread A ii.15 (jti maraa); D iii.148, 182; Dh 39, 123,
212 sq., 283; Nd1 371, 409; Pug 56; Vism 512; KhA 108;
SnA 155; DhA iii.23. There are some lengthy enumns of objects causing fear (sometimes under term mahabbhaya, mah
bhaya), e. g. one of 17 at Miln 196, one of 16 (four times
four) at A ii.121 sq., the same in essence, but in different order at Nd2 470, and at VbhA 502; one of 16 (with remark
"di," and so on) at Vism 645. Shorter combns are to be found
at Sn 964 (5, viz. as, adhipt, sirisap, manussaphass,
catuppd); Vbh 379 (5, viz. jvika, asiloka, parisa srajja, maraa, duggati, expld at VbhA 505 sq.), 376 (4: jti,
jar, vydhi, maraa) 367 (3: jti, jar, mara); Nd1 402
(2: diha dhammika & samparyika bh.). abhaya
absence of fear, safety Vin i.75 (abhay vara for abhaya
vara?); Dh 317; J i.150; DhA iii.491.
-a insight into what is to be feared: see Cpd. 66.
-dassvin seeing or realising an object of fear, i. e. danger
Vbh 244, 247 and passim. -dassin id. Dh 31, 317. -bherava
fear & dismay M i.17 (=citt' uttrasassa ca bhaynak' rammaassa adhivacana MA 113), N. of Suttanta No. 4 in Majjhima (pp. 16 sq.), quoted at Vism 202; SnA 206.
554
Bhava
Bhavatta
Sdhp 33, 333, 335. On itibhav' bhava see iti, and add
ref. Vbh 375. A remarkable use of bhava as nt. (obstr.)
to bh (in cpd.) is to be noted in the def. given by Bdhgh. of
divya=divi bhava (for divi bh) KhA 227; SnA 199; and
mnasa=manasi bhava (for manasi bh) KhA 248, cp.
Pini iv.3, 53. Similarly roga bhava health DhA i.328 for
bhava. Cp. anu, vi, sam.
-agga the best (state of) existence, the highest point of existence (among the gods) J iii.84; Vbh 426; Miln 132; KhA
179, 249; SnA 17, 41, 507; often as highest "heaven" as opposed to Avci, the lowest hell; thus at J iv.182; vi.354; Miln
336. -anga constituent of becoming, function of being, functional state of subconsciousness, i. e. subliminal consciousness or subconscious life continuum, the vital continuum in
the absence of any process [of mind, or attention] (thus Mrs.
Rh. D. in Expos. 185 n.), subconscious individual life. See
on term Cpd. 26 sq., 265 267; & cp. Dhs trsl. 134. J
vi.82; Miln 299 sq.; Vism 164, 676; DhsA 72, 140, 269; DhA
i.23; VbhA 81, 156 sq., 406. -antaga "gone to the ends of
existence," past existence, Ep. of the Bhagavan Buddha Vism
210. -antara an existence interval, i. e. transition fr. one
life to another, a previous or subsequent life Vism 553 sq. bhava this or that life, any form of existence some sort of
existence Sn 1060, 1068; Nd1 48, 109, 284; Nd2 472, 664 A;
Th 1, 784 (ThA mahantmahanta bh.) ThA 71 (Ap. v. 30);
VbhA 501. -sava the intoxicant of existence D iii.216; Vbh
364, 373. -uppatti coming into (a new) ex. Four such
bh. uppattis lead to rebirth among the foll. gods: the paritt'
bh dev, the appam'bh d., the sankilih' bh d.,
the parisuddh' bh d. M iii.147. -esan longing for rebirth D iii.216, 270. -ogha the flood of rebirth (see ogha)
Nd1 57, 159; Vism 480. -cakka the wheel or round of rebirth, equivalent to the Paicca samuppda Vism 529, 576
sq.; in the same context at VbhA 138, 194 sq. -carimak the
last rebirth Vism 291. -tah craving for rebirth D iii.212,
216, 274; S v.432; Sn 746; Vbh 101, 358, 365; Th 2, 458;
ThA 282; VbhA iii.133. -netti [cp. BSk. bhava netr
M. Vastu ii.307; netrika iii.337] leader to renewed ex., guide
to ex. Vin i.231; It 38; Dhs 1059 (cp. DhsA 364=bhava
rajju). -sayojana the fetter of rebirth: see arahant II.
C. -salla the sting or dart of rebirth Dh 351 (=sabbni bhavagmni sallni DhA iv.70). -sta (pl. stni) the pleasures
of ex., variously enumd in sets of from one to six at Nd1 30.
-ssita at J v.371 read with v. l. as ghaa ssita.
Bhavati [bh to become, cp. Sk. bhmi earth; Gr. nature (physical), to grow; Lat. fui I have been, futurus=future; Oir. buith to be; Ags. ban=Goth. bauan to live,
Ger. bauen, also Ags. byldan=to build; Lith. bti to be, btas
house Dhtp 1: bh sattya] to become, to be, exist, behave
etc. (cp. Nd2 474= sambhavati jyati nibbattati ptu bhavati). I. Forms. There are two bases used side by side,
viz. bhav and (contracted) ho, the latter especially in the
(later) Gth style and poetry in general, also as archaic in
prose, whereas bhav forms are older. On compounds with
prepositions, as regards inflection, see Geiger, P.Gr. 1312 ,
1513 ; and cp. anubhavati, abhibhavati, abhisa, pa (also
pahoti, pahta), pari, vi, sa. 1. Pres. ind. bhavmi
Sn 511 & homi J iii.260; 2nd bhavasi & hos M iii.140; Vv
555
Bhavatta
Bhga
Bhavatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. bh] the fact of being, state, condition
KhA 227.
Bhassa (nt.) [cp. Class. Sk. bhya, of bh] speech, conversation, way of talking, disputation Sn 328 (v. l. for hassa); It 71;
Miln 90; Vism 127 (grouped into fit talk, as the 10 kath
vatthus, and unfit talk or gossip, as the 32 tiracchna kath).
-kraka one who makes talk, i. e. invites disputation,
or one who gossips Vin i.1; Nd1 142; f. krik Vin iv.230.
-pavdaka one who proposes disputation, one who is fond
of debate & discussions M i.161, 227 (ika); Miln 4.
pavedin one experienced in debating Miln 90. -samcra
(good) conduct in speech, proficiency in disputation D iii.106.
-samussaya grandiloquence, proud talk Sn 245 (cp. SnA
288=att'ukkasanat ti vutta hoti).
Bhavant [cp. Sk. (& Vedic) bhavant, used as pron. of the 2nd ;
but constructed with 3rd person of the verb. Probably a contraction fr. bhagavant, see Whitney, Altind. Gr. 456] pron.
of polite address "Sir, Lord," or "venerable, honourable," or
simply "you." Cases as follows (after Geiger, P.Gr. 983 ):
sg. nom. bhava Sn 486; D i.249; M i.484. nt. bhava M
iii.172. acc. bhavanta Sn 597; D ii.231; instr. bhot D i.93,
110; S iv.120. gen. bhoto Sn 565; M i.486; voc. bhava D
i.93 & bho D i.93; M i.484; J ii.26. See bho also sep. pl.
nom. bhavanto Sn p. 107 (only as v. l.; T. bhagavanto), &
bhonto ibid.; M ii.2; Miln 25; acc. bhavante M ii.3; instr.
bhavantehi M iii.13; gen. bhavata M ii.3; voc. bhonto Th
1, 832; M ii.2; f. bhot: sg. nom. bhot Sn 988; J iii.95;
acc. bhoti J vi.523; loc. bhotiy ibid. voc. bhoti ibid.; D
ii.249. On form bhante see this.
Bhaveyya [cp. Class. Sk. bhavya] a sort of tree, perhaps Averrhoa carambola J vi.529.
Bhasati [cp. Epic Sk. bhaate] to bark (of dogs) J iv.182 (aor.
bhasi; so read for T. bhusi). pp. bhasita (as n.) bark
ibid. (mah bhasita bhasi, read for bhusita). See also
bhusati.
Bhga [cp. Vedic bhga, fr. bhaj, bhajati] 1. part, portion, fraction, share Vin i.285; Sn 427 (sahassa bhgo
maraassa=sahassa bhgna ass ti SnA 387; a thousand
times a share of death, i. e. very near death, almost quite
dead), 702 (v. l. SnA 492 for Sn samna bhva, evenness, proportionate ness); Vv 146 (=kummsa kohsa
VvA 62); Pv i.115 (ahi one half); Vin iv.264. Cp. vi.
-bhgaso (abl. adv.) in parts, by parts, by portions, esp. in
even portions, i. e. evenly, in proportion S i.193 (according to
each one's share; cp. Th 1, 1242); M iii.183; Vv 72 ; Miln 330,
415 (aneka hundredfold or more). bhgaso mita (of cities
or dwelling places etc.) evenly planned, well laid out, i.
556
Bhga
Bhti
(bhatta); Miln 107; VvA 40, 292 (v. l. bhojana); PvA 104,
145, 251; Sdhp 571.
-vikati a special bowl J v.292 (so read for T. bhojana);
Vism 376.
Bhjana2 (nt.) [fr. bhj] division, dividing up, in pada dividing of words, treating of words separately DhsA 343; similarly
bhjaniya that which should be classed or divided DhsA 2,
also in pada division of a phrase DhsA 54.
Bhjita [pp. of bhjeti] divided, distributed; nt. that which has
been dealt out or allotted, in cpd. bhjit-bhjita A iii.275.
Bhjeti [Caus. of bhajati, but to be taken as root by itself; cp.
Dhtm 777 bhja=puthakkare] to divide, distribute, deal out Vin
iv.223 (ppr. bhjiyamna); J i.265; DhsA 4 (fut. bhjessati)
grd. bhjetabba Vin i.285. pp. bhjita.
Bha [fr. bhaati] reciting or preaching, in pada reciting the
verses of the Scriptures DhA ii.95 (v. l. paibhna); iii.345;
iv.18.
-vra a section of the Scriptures, divided into such for
purposes of recitation, "a recital" Vin i.14; ii.247; DA 13; MA
2 (concerning the Bh. of Majjhima Nikya); SnA 2 (of Sutta
Nipta), 608 (id.); DhsA 6 (of Dhammasanga, cp. Expos. 8
n. 3), and frequently in other Commentaries & Expositionary
Works.
Bhgavant (adj.) [fr. bhga, equal to bhgin] sharing in, partaking of (gen.) Dh 19, 20 (smaassa).
Bhgin (adj.) [fr. bhga. Cp. Vedic bhgin] sharing in, partaking of (with gen.), endowed with; getting, receiving A ii.80;
iii.42 (yussa vaassa etc.); J i.87 (rasna); Miln 18 (smaassa); Vism 150 (lbhassa); DhA ii.90; VbhA 418 sq.
(pa as hna bhgin, hiti, visesa & nibbedha).
Also in def. of term Bhagav at Nd1 142=Nd2 466=Vism 210.
pl. bhgino Pv iii.112 (dukkhassa); PvA 18 (dnaphalassa),
175. Cp. bhgavant, bhgimant, bhgiya.
Bhaka1 (adj. n.) [fr. bhaati] speaking; (n.) a reciter, repeater, preacher (of sections of the Scriptures), like Anguttara Vism 74 sq.; Dgha DA i.15, 131; J i.59; Vism 36, 266;
Jtaka etc. Miln 341 sq.; Majjhima Vism 95 (Revatthera),
275, 286, 431; Sayutta Vism 313 (Ca Sivatthera).
Unspecified at SnA 70 (Kalyavihravsi bhaka
dahara bhikkhu; reading doubtful). f. bhik Vin
iv.285 (Thullanand bahussut bhik); also in cpd. majubhik sweet voiced, uttering sweet words J vi.422.
Bhgiya (adj.) () [fr. bhga, cp. bhgin] connected with, conducive to, procuring; in foll. philos. terms: kusala A i.11;
hna, visesa D iii.274 sq.; hna, hiti, visesa, nibbedha
Vism 15 (in verse), 88=Ps i.35. Cp. BSk. moka bhgya,
nirvedha Divy 50; moka ibid. 363.
Bhgya (nt.) [cp. Epic & Class. Sk. bhgya; fr. bhaga, see also
contracted form bhagga2 ] good luck, fortune J v.484.
Bhgyavant (adj.) [same as bhaggavant, only differentiated as being the Sk. form and thus distinguished as sep. word by Commentators] having good luck, auspicious, fortunate, in def. of
term "Bhagav" at DA i.34=Vism 210; also at VvA 231, where
the abstr. bhgyavantat is formed as expln of the term. bhgyavat (f.) at Vism 211.
Bheti Caus. of bhaati (q. v.) with 3rd praet. bhi & pot.
bhaye.
Bhtar [cp. Vedic bhrtar=Av. bratar, Gr. , Lat. frater,
Goth. brpar=Ohg. bruoder, E. brother] brother, nom. sg.
bht Sn 296; J i.307; PvA 54, 64; gen. sg. bhtuno ThA
71 (Ap. v.36), & bhtussa Mhvs 8, 9; instr. bhtar J i.308;
acc. bhtara Sn 125; J i.307; loc. bhtari J iii.56. nom.
pl. bhtaro J i.307, & bhtuno Th 2, 408; acc. bhte Dpvs
vi.21. In cpds. both bhti (. bhtisadisa like a brother J
v.263), and bhtu (: bhtu jy brother's wife, sister-inlaw J v.288; Vism 95). Cp. bhtika & bhtuka. On pop.
etym. see bhagin.
Bhti [bh Dhtp 367, Dhtm 594: dittiya; Idg. *bh, cp. Sk.
bh nt. splendour, radiance, bhsati to shine forth; Gr.
557
Bhti
Bhva
Bhraka () [fr. bhra] a load, only in cpd. gadrabha a donkey load (of goods) J ii.109; DhA i.123.
Bhyati [cp. Sk. bhayate, bh, pres. redupl. bibheti; Idg. *bhei,
cp. Av. bayente they frighten; Lith. bijotis to be afraid; Ohg.
bibn=Ger. beben. Nearest synonym is tras] to be afraid.
Pres, Ind. 1st sg. bhymi Th 1, 21; Sn p. 48; 2nd sg. bhyasi
Th 2, 248; 1st pl. bhyma J ii.21; 3rd pl. bhyanto Dh 129;
Imper. 2nd pl. bhyatha Ud 51; J iii.4; Pot. 3rd sg. bhye
Sn 964 & bhyeyya Miln 208; 3rd pl. bhyeyyu Miln 208.
Aor. 1st sg. bhyi DhA iii.187; 2nd sg. bhyi Th 1, 764;
DhA iii.187; & usually in Prohib. m bhyi do not be afraid
S v.369; J i.222; DhA i.253. grd. bhyitabba Nd2 s.v. kmagu B; DhA iii.23. Caus. I. bhyayate to frighten J
iii.99 (C.: utraseti); Caus. II. bhypeti J iii.99, 210. pp.
bhta.
558
Bhva
Bhsita
Bhsati2 [bhs Dhtm 467: dittiya] to shine, shine forth, fill with
splendour Sn 719 (2nd sg. fut. bhsihi=bhsissasi paksessasi
SnA 499). Usually with prep. prefix pa (so read at Pv i.109
for ca bh.). Cp. o, vi.
Bhsana (nt.) [fr. bh] speaking, speech Dhtm 162; Sdhp 68.
Bhs (f.) [cp. Epic Sk. bh] speech, language, esp. vernacular, dialect J iv.279 (manussa human speech), 392 (cala);
KhA 101 (saka saka anurpa); SnA 397 (Milakkha);
DA i.176 (Kirt Yavandi Millakkhna bhs); MA
i.1 (Shaa); VbhA 388 (18 dialects, of which 5 are mentioned; besides the Mgadhabhs).
559
Bhsita
Bhikkhun
Bhsitar [n. ag. fr. bh] one who speaks, utters; a speaker S
i.156; Pug 56; SnA 549.
Bhsin (adj.) () [cp. Epic Sk. bhin] speaking A i.102 (dubbhsita bhsin).
Bhsura (adj.) [cp. Epic Sk. bhsura fr. bhas] bright, shining,
resplendent ThA 139, 212; VvA 12.
Bhisa (adj.) [=Vedic bhma, of which there are 4 P. forms, viz.
the metathetic bhisa, the shortened bhisma, the lengthened
bhesma, and the contracted bhsa (see bhsana). Cp. also Sk.
P. bhma; all of bh] terrible; only in cpd. rpa (nt. &
adj.) an awful sight; (of) terrific appearance, terrible, awful J
iii.242, 339; iv.271, 494.
Bhisana & ka (adj.) [the form with ka is the canonic
form, whereas bhisana is younger. See bhisa on connections] horrible, dreadful, awe inspiring, causing fear. (a)
bhisanaka (usually combd with lomahasa) D ii.106=A
iv.311; D ii.157; Vin iii.8; PvA 22; ThA 242 (sabhva=bhmarpa); J v.43. (b) bhisana Pv iv.35 (+lomahasa).
Bhis (f.) [fr. bhisa] terror, fright; mah-bhisa (adj.) inspiring great terror D ii.259. Cp. bhism.
Bhisik (f.) [fr. bhisa] frightful thing, terror, terrifying omen
Mhvs 12, 12 (vividh bhisik kari he brought divers terrors
to pass).
Bhikkhaka [fr. bhikkhu, Cp. Epic Sk. bhikuka & f. bhikuk] a
beggar, mendicant S i.182 (bh. brhmaa); J vi.59 (v. l. BB.
uka); VbhA 327.
Bhikkhati [cp. Vedic bhikate, old desid. to bhaj; def. Dhtp
13 "ycane"] to beg alms, to beg, to ask for S i.176, 182 (so
read for T. bhikkhavo); Dh 266; VbhA 327. ppr. med.
bhikkhamna Th 2, 123.
Bhikkh (f.) [cp. Epic & Class. Sk. bhaika of bhik, adj. & nt.]
begged food, alms, alms begging; food Vin iv.94; Cp i.14 ;
Vv 704 (ekh bh. food for one day); Miln 16; PvA 3, 75, 131
(kaacchu); bhikkhya carati to go out begging food [cp.
Sk. bhaika carati] J iii.82; v.75; PvA 51 & passim. subhikkha (nt.) abundance of food D i.11. dubbhikkha (nt.) (&
f.) scantiness of alms, famine, scarcity of food, adj. famine
stricken (cp. Sk. durbhika) Vin ii.175; iii.87 (adj.); iv.23
(adj.); S iv.323, 324 (dvhitika); A i.160; iii.41; J ii.149, 367;
v.193; vi.487; Cp i.33 (adj.); Vism 415 (pita), 512 (f. in simile); KhA 218; DhA i.169; ii.153 (f.); iii.437 (bhaya).
-hra food received by a mendicant J i.237 (=bhikkhu
hra?). -cariy going about for alms, begging round Sn
700; PvA 146. -cra=cariy Mhbv 28. -paatti declaration of alms, announcement that food is to be given to the
Sangha, a dedication of food Vin i.309.
560
Bhikkhun
Bhisakka
nun D iii.123 sq., 148, 168 sq., 264; Vin iv.224 sq., 258 sq.
(sangha); S i.128; ii.215 sq., iv.159 sq.; A i.88, 113, 279;
ii.132 (paris), 144; iii.109; iv.75; Miln 28; VbhA 498 (dahara, story of); VvA 77.
Bhinka [cp. Vedic bhnga large bee] the young of an animal, esp.
of an elephant, in its property of being dirty (cp. pigs) Vin
ii.201=S ii.269 (bhinka cchpa); J v.418 (with ref. to young
cats: "mah bir nelamaala vuccati taru bhinka
cchpa maala," T. cchca, vv. ll. bhijaka cchca;
tarua bhiga cchpa; bhinga cchja).
Bhinkra (& gra) [cp. late Sk. bhngra] a water jar, a (nearly
always golden) vase, ceremonial vessel (in donations) Vin i.39
(sovaa maya); D ii.172; A iv.210=214 (T. gra, v. l.
kra); Cp. i.35 ; J i.85, 93; ii.371; iii.10 (suvaa); Dpvs
xi.32; PvA 75; KhA 175 (suvaa; v. l. BB gra), Sdhp 513
(soa).
Bhitti (f.) [fr. bhid, cp. *Sk. bhitta fragment, & Class. Sk. bhitti
wall] a wall Vin i.48; D ii.85; S ii.103; iv.183; v.218; J i.491;
Vism 354=VbhA 58 (in comparison); ThA 258; VvA 42, 160,
271, 302; PvA 24.
-khla a pin (peg) in the wall Vin ii.114, 152. -pda the
support or lower part of a wall J iv.318.
Bhittika (adj.) [fr. bhitti] having a wall or walls J iv.318 (naa
paasl); vi.10 (catu with 4 walls).
Bhidura (adj.) [fr. bhid] fragile, perishable, transitory Th 2, 35
(=bhijjana sabhva ThA 43).
Bhindati [bhid, Sk. bhinatti; cp. Lat. findo to split, Goth. beitan=Ger. beissen. Def. at Dhtp 381, 405 by "vidrae" i. e.
splitting] to split, break, sever, destroy, ruin. In two bases:
*bhid (with der. *bhed) & *bhind. (a) *bhid: aor. 3rd
sg. abhida (=Sk. abhidat) D ii.107; J iii.29 (see also under
abhida); abbhid J i.247; ii.163, 164. fut. bhecchati (Sk.
bhetsyati) A i.8. ger. bhetv (Sk. bhittv) Th 1, 753; Sn
62 (v. l. BB bhitv). grd. bhejja: only neg. abhejja (q.
v.). See also der. bheda, bhedana. pp. bhinna & Pass.
bhijjati. (b) *bhind: pres. bhindati Nd1 503; DhA i.125
(katha bh. to break a promise); Sdhp 47. ppr. bhin-
Bhisa (nt.) [cp. Vedic bisa, with bh for b: see Geiger, P.Gr. 40
1a] the sprout (fr. the root) of a lotus, the lotus fibres, lotus
plant S i.204; ii.268; J i.100; iv.308.
-puppha the lotus flower Sn 2 (=paduma puppha SnA
16). -mula fibres & stalk of the lotus J v.39; Vism 361.
Bhisakka [cp. Vedic bhiaj physician, P. bhesajja medicine & see
561
Bhisakka
Bhujati
Bhisi1 (f.) [cp. Epic Sk. b & bs, with bh for b, as in Prk. bhis,
cp. Pischel, Prk. Gr. 209] a bolster, cushion, pad, roll Vin
i.287 sq. (cvara a robe rolled up); ii.150, 170; iii.90; iv.279.
Five kinds are allowed in a Vihra, viz. ua bhisi, cola,
vka, tiu, paa, i. e. bolsters stuffed with wool, cotton
cloth, bark, grass, or talipot leaves, Vin ii.150=VbhA 365
(tia).
-bimbohana bolster & pillow Vin i.47; ii.208; DhA i.416;
VbhA 365.
Bhuja1 (m. & nt.) [cp. Epic & Class. Sk. bhuja m. & bhuj;
bhuj, bhujate to bend, lit. "the bender"; the root is expld by
koilya (koilla) at Dhtp 470 (Dhtm 521). See also bhuja3 .
Idg. *bheng, fr. which also Lat. fugio to flee=Gr. ,
Lat. fuga flight=Sk. bhoga ring, Ohg. bouc; Goth. biugan
to bend=Ger. beugen & biegen; Ohg. bogo=E. bow. Semantically cp. Lat. lacertus the arm, i. e. the bend, fr. *leq to
bend, to which P. lagua a club (q. v. for etym.), with which
cp. Lat. lacerta=lizard, similar in connotation to P. bhujaga
snake] the arm Sn 48 (expld by Nd2 478 as hattha, hand); 682
(pl. bhujni); J v.91, 309; vi.64; Bu i.36; Vv 6418 .
Bhuja2 [fr. bhujati2 ] clean, pure, bright, beautiful J vi.88 (dassana beautiful to look at; C. explns by kalya dassana).
Bhru (adj. n.) [fr. bh; cp. Vedic bhru] 1. fearful, i. e. having
fear, timid, afraid, shy, cowardly Sdhp 207 (dukkha); usually
in neg. abhru not afraid, without fear, combd with anutrsin:
see utrsin. 2. fearful, i. e. causing fear, awful, dreadful,
terrible Pv ii.41 (dassana terrible to look at). 3. (m.) fear,
cowardice Sn 437 (=utrsa SnA 390).
-tta refuge for the fearful, adj. one who protects, those
who are in fear A ii.174; It 25; Sdhp 300.
562
Bhujati
Bhkui
Bhuttar [n. ag. fr. bhuj, cp. Sk. bhokt already Vedic & Epic]
one who eats or has eaten, or enjoys (cp. bhutta 2) J v.465
(aha bhutt bhakkha ras' uttama).
Bhumma (adj. n.) [fr. bhmi, Vedic bhmya] 1. belonging to the earth, earthly, terrestrial; nt. soil, ground, floor
Sn 222 (bhtni bhummni earthly creatures, contrasted with
creatures in the air, antalikkhe), 236 (id.); Sdhp 420 (sabba
bhumm khattiy). pl. bhumm the earthly ones, i. e. the
gods inhabiting the earth, esp. tree gods (Yakkhas) Vv 842
(=bhumma deva VvA 334). nt. ground: Pv ii.102 (yva
bhumm down to the ground); v. l. BB bhm(i). 2. the
locative case KhA 106, 111, 224; SnA 140, 210, 321, 433;
PvA 33.
-attharaa "earth spread," a ground covering, mat, car-
Bh1 [fr. bh] (adj.) being, (n.) creature, living being in pabh a living being (a breathing being) J v.79 (=pa bhta
C.).
Bh2 (f.) [fr. bh, otherwise bhmi] the earth; loc. bhuvi according to Kaccyana; otherwise bhuvi is aor. 3rd sg.; of bh:
see Pischel, Prk. Gr. 516; Geiger, Pali Gr. 865 .
Bhkui (f.) [a different spelling of bhakui, q. v. Cp. Sk.
bhkuti & bhrukui] frown, anger, superciliousness M i.125
563
Bhkui
Bhmi
Bhja [cp. late Sk. bhrja, with which related Lat. fraxinus ash,
Ags. beorc=E. birch, Ger. birke] the Bhrja tree, i. e. a kind
of willow J v.195, 405 (in both places=bhuj), 420.
Bhta [pp. of bhavati, Vedic etc. bhta] grown, become; born,
produced; nature as the result of becoming. The (exegetical) definition by Bdhgh of the word bhta is interesting. He
(at MA i.31) distinguishes the foll. 7 meanings of the term:
(1) animate Nature as principle, or the vital aggregates (the 5
Khandhas), with ref. M i.260; (2) ghosts (amanuss) Sn 222;
(3) inanimate Nature as principle, or the Elements (the 4 dhtus) S iii.101 (mahbht); (4) all that exists, physical existence in general (vijjamna) Vin iv.25 (bhta); (5) what we
should call a simple predicative use, is exemplified by a typical dogmatic example, viz. "klaghaso bhto," where bhta
is given as meaning khsava (Arahant) J ii.260; (6) all beings or specified existence, animal kingdom (satt) D ii.157;
(7) the vegetable kingdom, plants, vegetation (rukkh' dayo)
Vin iv.34 (as bhta gma). Meanings: 1. bht &
bhtni (pl.) beings, living beings, animate Nature Sn 35
(expld at Nd2 479 as 2 kinds, viz. tas & thvar, movable
& immovable; S. ii.47 (K.S. ii.36) mind and body as come
to be; Dh 131 (bhtni), 405; M i.2 sq. (pahav, po etc.,
bht, dev, Pajpat etc.), 4; MA i.32. The pl. nt. bhtni
is used as pl. to meaning 2; viz. inanimate Nature, elements,
usually enumd under term mah bhtni. 2. (nt.) nature, creation, world M i.2 (bhte bhtato sajnti recognises
the beings from nature, i. e. from the fact of being nature);
DhsA 312 (pasda lakkhaa, see Expos. 409). See cpds.
gma, pubba (?). 3. (nt. adj.) that which is, i. e. natural, genuine, true; nt. truth; neg. abhta falsehood, lie Sn
397; PvA 34. See cpds. bhva, vacana, vda. 4. a supernatural being, ghost, demon, Yakkha; pl. bht guardian
genii (of a city) J iv.245. See cpds. vijja, vejja. 5. ()
pp. in predicative use (cp. on this meaning Bdhgh's meaning
No. 5, above): (a) what has been or happened; viz. mtu
bht having been his mother PvA 78; abhtapubba bhta
what has never happened before happened (now) DA i.43 (in
expln of abbhuta); (b) having become such & such, being
like, acting as, being, qusi (as it were), consisting of, e. g.
andha blind, as it were J vi.139; aru consisting of wounds
DhA iii.109; udapna being a well, a well so to speak PvA
78; opna acting as a spring A iv.185; hetu as reason, being the reason PvA 58; cp. cakkhu having become an eye
of wisdom. Sometimes bhta in this use hardly needs to be
translated at all.
-kya body of truth DhA i.11. gma vegetation, as
trees, plants, grass, etc. Under bhtagma Bdhgh understands
the 5 bja jtni (5 groups of plants springing from a germinative power: see bja), viz. mla bja, khandha, phala,
agga, bja. Thus in C. on Vin iv.34 (the so called bhtagma sikkhpada, quoted at DhA iii.302 & SnA 3); cp.
M iii.34; J v.46; Miln 3, 244. -gha possession by a demon Miln 168 (cp. Divy 235). -hna place of a ghost KhA
170. -pati (a) lord of beings J v.113 (of Inda); vi.362 (id.); Vv
641 (id.). (b) lord of ghosts, or Yakkhas J vi.269 (of Kuvera).
-pubba (a) as adj. () having formerly been so & so, as mt
bhtapubbo satto, pit etc., in untraced quotation at Vism 305;
Bhtatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. bhta] the fact of having grown, become
or being created (i. e. being creatures or part of creation) Vism
310 (in def. of bht); MA i.32 (id.).
Bhtanaka [cp. *Sk. bhtna] a fragrant grass; Andropogon
schoenanthus J vi.36 (=phanijjaka); Vism 543 (so v. l. for
T. bhtinaka).
Bhtika (adj.) () in cpd. ctummah belongs to the whole
expression, viz. composed of the 4 great elements M i.515.
Bhnaha [difficult to expln ; is it an old misspelling for
bhta+gha? The latter of han?] a destroyer of beings Sn 664
(voc. bhnahu, expld by SnA 479 as "bhti hanaka vuddhi nsaka"; vv. ll. bhnahaa, bhnahoa, bhhata, all
showing the difficulty of the archaic word); J v.266 (pl. bhnahuno, expld by C. 272 as "isna ativattro attano vahiy
hatatt bh."). Cp. M i.502 ("puritanical" suggested by Lord
Chalmers).
Bhma () [=bhmi] 1. (lit.) ground, country, district S iii.5
(pacch the western district). 2. (fig.) ground, reason for,
occasion; stage, step Sn 896 (avivda ground of harmony;
according to SnA 557 Ep. of Nibbna).
Bhmaka (& ika) (adj.) (only ) [from bhma, or bhmi]
1. having floors or stories (of buildings) as dve psda DhA
i.414; paca psda a palace with 5 stories J i.58, 89; satta
with 7 stories (psda) DhA ii.1, 260. The form ika at DhA
i.182 (dve geha). 2. belonging to a place or district, as
jti from the land of (their) birth M i.147; pacch from the
western country S iv.312 (brhma). 3. being on a certain
plane or in a certain state, as paritta & mah Vbh 340 te
in 3 planes SnA 4 (of the 5 Khandhas), 510 (vaa); DhA i.36
(kusala), 305 (vaa); iv.69 (tebhmaka vaa sankhta Mra bandhana), 72 (dhamm); catu in 4 planes
DhsA 296 (kusala); DhA i.35 (citta). The form ika at DhA
i.288 (with ref. to citta).
Bhmi (f.) [cp. Vedic bhmi, Av. bmi soil, ground, to bh, as
in bhavati, cp. Gr. etc. See bhavati] 1. (lit.) ground,
soil, earth Vin ii.175; Sn 418 (yna carriage road); Pv i.1014 ;
SnA 353 (heh bhmiya under the earth); DhA i.414
(id., opp. upari bhmiya). 2. place, quarter, district,
region M i.145 (jti district of one's birth); Sn 830 (vighta);
Nd2 475 (danta); DhA i.213 (pna); PvA 80 (susna).
uyyna garden ( place or locality) Vv 6419 ; Pv ii.129 ; J
i.58. 3. (fig.) ground, plane, stage, level; state of consciousness, Vin. i.17; Vbh 322 sq.; Vism 126, 442 (with ref.
564
Bhmi
Bheda
Bhri1 (f.) [cp. late Sk. bhr] the earth; given as name for the
earth (pahavi) at Ps ii.197; see also def. at DhsA 147. Besides
these only in 2 doubtful cpds., both resting on demonology,
viz. bhrikamma D i.12, expld as "practices to be observed
by one living in a bhrighara or earth house" (?) DA i.97,
but cp. Vedic bhri karman "much effecting"; and bhrivijj D i.9, expld as "knowledge of charms to be pronounced by
one living in an earth house" (?) DA i.93. See Dial. i.18,
25. The meaning of the terms is obscure; there may have been
(as Kern rightly suggests: see Toev. s. v.) quite a diff. popular
practice behind them, which was unknown to the later Commentator. Kern suggests that bhri-vijj might be a secret science to find gold (digging for it: science of hidden treasures),
and kamma might be "making gold" (alchemistic science).
Perhaps the term bhumma-jla is to be connected with these
two.
Bheda
Bhogiya
Bho (indecl.) [voc. of bhavant, cp. Sk. bho which is the shortened voc. bhago of Vedic bhagavant; cp. as to form P.
vuso>Sk. yuma of yumant] a familiar term of address
(in speaking to equals or inferiors): sir, friend, you, my dear;
pl. sirs D i.88, 90, 93, 111; M i.484; Sn 427, 457, 487; with
voc. of noun: bho purisa my dear man J i.423; bho brahma oh ye brahmans J ii.369. Double bho bho DhA iv.158.
-vdika=vdin Nd1 249. -vdin a brahman, i. e. one
who addresses others with the word "bho," implying some superiority of the speaker; name given to the brahman, as proud
of his birth, in contrast to brhmaa, the true brahman Sn 620;
Dh 396; J vi.211, 214; DhA iv.158.
Bheraaka [cp. *Sk. bherua] a jackal J v.270; the nom. probably formed after the acc. in phrase bheraaka nadati to
cry after the fashion of, or like a jackal A i.187.
Bherava (adj.) [fr. bhru, cp. Epic Sk. bhairava] fearful, terrible,
frightful Th 1, 189; Sn 959, 965, 984; Nd1 370, 467; J vi.520;
Dpvs 17, 100; Pgdp 26, 31. bahu very terrible A iii.52;
stricken with terror J vi.587. (n) terror, combd with bhaya
fear & dismay M i.17; A iv.291; v.132; Th 1, 367, 1059.
pahna-bhayabherava having left behind (i. e. free from)
fear & terror S iii.83.
-rva cry of terror Miln 254.
Bhoga1 [fr. bhuj: see bhujati] 1. enjoyment A iv.392 (kmaguesu bh.). 2. possession, wealth D iii.77; Sn 301,
421; Dh 139, 355; Pug 30, 57; Sdhp 86, 228, 264. appa
little or no possession Sn 114.
-khandha a mass of wealth, great possessions D ii.86 (one
of the 5 profits accruing from virtue). -gma "village of revenue," a tributary village, i. e. a village which has to pay tribute or contributions (in food etc.) to the owner of its ground.
The latter is called gmabhojaka or gmapati "landlord" J
ii.135. Cp. Fick, Sociale Gliederung 71, 112. -cgin giving
riches, liberal A iii.128.. -prijua loss of property or possessions VvA 101. -mada pride or conceit of wealth VbhA
466. -vsin, as f. vsin "living in property," i. e. to be
enjoyed or made use of occasionally, one of the 10 kinds of
wives: a kept woman Vin iii.139, 140; cp. M i.286.
Bheri (f.) [cp. Epic Sk. bher] a kettle drum (of large size;
DhsA 319 distinguishes 2 kinds: mah & paaha) D i.79; A
ii.185; Vv 8110 ; J vi.465; DhA i.396; Sdhp 429. issara the
drum of the ruler or lord J i.283; paaha kettle drum Dpvs
16, 14; DhsA 319; PvA 4; yma ( velya) (at the time)
when the drum sounds the watch J v.459. bheri vdeti to
sound the drum J i.283. bheriyo vdent (pl.) beating (lit.
making sound) the drums J ii.110. bheri carpeti to make
the drum go round, i. e. to proclaim by beat of drum J v.41;
vi.10.
-caraa the carrying round of the drum (in proclamations), in cpds. magga the proclamation road DhA ii.43; &
vthi id. DhA ii.45. -tala the head of the drum Vism 489 (in
comparison); VbhA 80 (id.). -paava drum & tabor (in battle) A ii.117. -vda drum sound, fig. for a loud voice PvA
89 (bherivdena akkosati rails like drum). -vdaka a drummer J i.283. -sa sign of the drum DhA i.396. -sadda
sound of the drum J i.283.
Bhoga2 [fr. bhuj to bend, cp. bhuja3 & Sk. bhoga id. Hla-yudha
3, 20] the coil of a snake J iii.58. See also nib.
Bhogat () (f.) [abstr. fr. bhoga] condition of prosperity, having wealth or riches, in ura being very rich, M iii.38.
Bhogavant (adj.) [fr. bhoga] one who has possessions or supplies, wealthy J v.399; Mhvs 10, 20; Sdhp 511.
[cp.
566
Bhogiya
Bhobhukka
Bhojana (nt.) [fr. bhujati] food, meal, nourishment in general J ii.218; iv.103, 173; J i.178; iv.223; Sn 102, 128, 242,
366, 667; Dh 7, 70; Pug 21, 55; Miln 370; Vism 69, 106;
Sdhp 52, 388, 407. Some similes with bhojana see J.P.T.S.
1907, 119. tika food allowed for a triad (of reasons)
Vin ii.196. dub having little or bad food J ii.368; DhA iv.8.
pata choice & plentiful meals Vin iv.88. sabhojane kule
Bhottabba & Bhottu are grd. & inf. of bhujati (q. v.);
bhottabba to be eaten J v.252, 253; bhottu to eat J ii.14.
Bhobhukka [intens redupl. of bhukk=bukk, to bark: see
bhukka & cp. Sk. bukkati, bukkana] one making a barking
sound, barker, i. e. dog J vi.345 (=bhunkaraa C.).
567
Makkhik
M
-M- euphonic consonant inserted between two vowels to avoid
hiatus, as agga-m-agga the best of all Vin iv.232; anga-mangni limb by limb Vin iii.119; Vv 382 , etc. See also S
iii.254 (yena m idh' ekacco); Dh 34 (oka mokata ubbhato); Sn 765 (aatra m ariyehi); Nd1 269 (dvaye
m eva); J i.29 (asti hattha m ubbedha, for hatth'
ubbedha); iii.387 (katattho m anubujjhati); v.72 (orena
m gama); vi.266 (pacch m anutappati); SnA
309 (rg' di m anekappakra). On wrong syllable
division through Sandhi m , and thus origin of specific
Pali forms see msati.
Masi (f.) [cp. Sk. ms] a certain plant Nardostychus jatamansi J vi.535.
Makka (f.) [of makkaa] a female monkey Vin iii.33, 34; J i.385;
DhA i.119.
568
Makkhik
Maggana
Sn 429, 441, 724 sq., 1130; Dh 57, 273 sq., It 106; VbhA
53, 73. As the first condition & initial stage to the attainment
of Arahantship (Nibbna) it is often found in sequence of either magga-phala-nirodha (e. g. Vism 217, cp. Nd2 under
dukkha II. p. 168), or magga, phala, nibbna (e. g. Tikp.
155 sq., 158; VbhA 43, 316, 488). magga as entrance to
Arahantship is the final stage in the recognition (a, pari, pa) of the truth of the causal chain, which realises the
origin of "ill," the possibility of its removal & the "way" to the
removal. These stages are described as dukkhe a, samudaye a nirodhe a and magge a at D iii.227,
Ps i.118. At the latter passage the foll. chapter (i.49) gives
dukkha-nirodha gmin paipad as identical with magga.
Note. On the term see Cpd. 41 sq., 66 sq., 175, 186; Dhs
trsl.2 58, 299 sq., 362 sq.; Expos. 216, 354n . On passages with
ahangika magga & others where magga is used in similes
see Mrs. Rh. D. in J.P.T.S. 1907, pp. 119, 120. 3. Stage of
righteousness, with ref. to the var. conditions of Arahantship
divided into 4 stages, viz. sotpatti- magga, sakadgmi,
angmi, arahatta, or the stage of entering the stream (of
salvation), that of returning once, that of the never returner,
that of Arahantship. At DhA i.110 magga-phala "the fruit
of the Path" (i. e. the attainment of the foundation or first step
of Arahantship) is identical with sotpattiphala on p. 113 (a)
in general: arahatta S i.78; A iii.391; DA i.224. (b) in
particular as the 4 paths: Nd2 612 A; Vbh 322 sq., 328, 335;
Vism 453, 672 678; DhA iv.30; VbhA 301. 4. In the
Tikapahna (under magga paccaya niddesa p. 52) 12
constituents of magga are enumd ; viz. pa, vitakka, sammvc, s kammanta, s jva, viriya, sati, samdhi, micch dihi, micch vc, m kammanta, m jva.
-angni the constituents of the Ariyan Path VbhA 120.
-magga which is the (right) road and which is not M i.147;
Vism ch. xx (ssa kovida)=Sn 627; S iii.108 (id.); DhA iv.169
(id.); A v.47 (ssa adassana); Dh 403. -udaka water found
on the road Vism 338 (simile). -kilanta wearied by the road
J i.129. -kusala one who is clever as regards the road, one
who knows the road well S iii.108; Nd1 171; VbhA 332 (in
simile); KhA 70, 126. -kovida=kusala Nd1 446. -kkhyin
(should be akkhyin) one who tells the (right) way M iii.5;
Nd1 33. -jina Conqueror of the paths Sn 84 sq. -jvin who
lives in the right path Sn 88. -jjhyin reflecting over the Path
Sn 85. -a knowledge of the Path VbhA 416. - knows
the Path Nd1 446. -hna one who stands in the Path, attains
the P. see Cpd. 23, 50. -ttaya the triad of the paths (i. e.
the first 3 of the 4 Paths as given above under 3) DhA iv.109.
-dsin highway robber Sn 84. -desaka one who points out
the way, a guide Sn 84; J iv.257; as desika at DhA ii.246.
-desin=desaka Sn 87. -dhamma the rule of the Path, i. e.
righteous living Sn 763. -dhra wise as regards the Path Nd1
45. -paipanna 1. one on the road, i. e. wandering,
tramping DhA i.233. 2. one who has entered the Path Pv
iv.349 . -parissaya danger of the road VvA 200. -bhvan
cultivation of the Path (i. e. righteousness) Nd1 323. -mha
one who has lost the way VvA 332. -vaa praise of the Path
DhA i.115. -vid one who knows the Path Nd1 446. -sacca
the truth concerning the Path VbhA 114, 124. -sira N. of a
month DA i.241.
Maggana
Maccu
Maggana (nt.) & maggan (f.) [fr. magg] tracking, search for,
covetousness Vism 29 (syn. for nijigisanat & gavehi);
Dhtp 298 (& gavesana).
570
Maccu
Majjha
Majjati1 [majj to immerse, submerge, cp. Lat. mergo] is represented in Pali by mujjati, as found esp. in cpds. ummujjati &
nimujjati.
Majjati2 [mj to clean, polish; connected with either Lat. mergo
(cp. Gr. ) or Lat. mulgeo to wipe, stroke, milk (cp.
Gr. , Mir. mlich=milk etc.) Dhtp 71 gives root
majj with meaning "sasuddhiya"] to wipe, polish, clean
VvA 165. Cp. sam. pp. majjita & maha.
Majjati3 [mad, Sk. mdyati; Vedic madati; see mada for etym.]
to be intoxicated; to be exultant, to be immensely enjoyed or
elated S i.73, 203; A iv.294; Sn 366 (Pot. majje=majjeyya
SnA 364), 676 (id., T. reads na ca majje, SnA 482 reads na pamajje); J ii.97; iii.87 (majjeyya). aor. majji in cpd. pamajji
Mhvs 17, 15. pp. matta.
Macchara (adj.) [Vedic matsara & matsarin enjoyable; later period also "envious," cp. maccharin] niggardly, envious, selfish
Pgdp ii.49. macchara (nt.) avarice, envy A iv.285; Sn
811, 862, 954 (vta macchara, adj.).
Maccharyati [Demon. fr. macchariya] to be selfish, greedy or
envious J vi.334; DhA ii.45, 89.
Maccharin (adj.) [cp. Vedic matsarin, fr. mat+s, i. e. "reflecting to me"] selfish, envious, greedy (cp. Dhs trsl.2 p. 320);
A ii.82; iii.139, 258, 265; D iii.45, 246; Dh 263; Sn 136, 663;
Nd1 36; J i.345; v.391; Vv 5226 ; Pug 20; DhsA 394; DhA ii.89;
Sdhp 89, 97. a unselfish D iii.47; A iv.2; Sn 852, 860; It
102.
Majjha
Maati
Majjhattat (f.) [abstr. from prec.] impartiality, indifference, balance of mind Nd2 166 (in expln of upekkh, with
syn. passaddhat); Vbh 230; Vism 134; VbhA 285 (satta &
sankhra), 317 (def.); DhsA 133.
Majjhantika [majjha+anta+ika] midday, noon; used either absolutely Vin iv.273; S iv.240; J v.213 (yva upakaha
majjhantik); v.291 (read majjhantik' tikamm' gami); Vism
236; Miln 3; or as apposition with kla & samaya S i.7 (kla);
Pv iv.32 (id.); Nd2 977 (samaya); DA i.251 (id.).
Majs (f.) [cp. Epic Sk. maj] a casket; used for keeping important documents in J ii.36 (suvaapaa majsya
nikkhippesi); iv.335 (suvaapaa sra majsya
hapetv klam aksi).
Majjhima (adj.)
[Vedic madhyama, with sound change
ama>ima after Geiger, P.Gr. 191 , or after analogy with
pacchima, with which often contrasted] 1. middle, medium,
mediocre, secondary, moderate. Applied almost exclusively in contrast pairs with terms of more or less, in triplets
like "small medium big," or "first middle last"
(cp. majjha 3b); viz. (a) of degree: hna- m -pata D iii.215
(tisso dhtuyo); Dhs 1205 1027 (dhamm); Vism 11 (sla);
h. m. ukkaha Vism 308; omaka m. ukkaha Vin iv.243;
khuddaka m. mah Vism 100; lmaka m. pata (i. e.
lokuttara) DhsA 45 (dhamm); paritta m ura Sdhp
260. (b) of time: pahame yme majjhima pacchima J
i.75; id. with vaye PvA 5. 2. (nt.) majjhima the waist,
in cpd. su majjhim (f.) a woman with beautiful waist J
v.4.
572
Maati
Mak
Maan (f.) [fr. man] conceit Nd1 124 (tah, dihi, mna,
kilesa etc.); Dhs 1116 1233; Nett 24; Vism 265 (for macan?).
Maita (nt.) [pp. of maati] illusion, imagination M i.486.
Nine maitni (the same list is applied to the phanditni, the
papacitni & sankhatni) at Vbh 390: asmi, ayam aham asmi,
bhavissa, na bhavissa, rp bhavissa, arp bh., sa bh.,
asa bh., nevasa nsa bh.
Maitatta (nt.) [fr. maita] self conceit, pride Dhs 1116;
DhsA 372.
Maaja (nt.) [doubtful] a certain weapon M i.281 ( nma vudhajta; Neumann trsls "Mordwaffe").
Mahaka (adj.) [doubtful spelling & meaning] short (?) Vin
ii.138 (ati=atikhuddaka C.).
Maa & Maha [pp. of mj, see majjati2 ] wiped, polished, clean, pure. (a) maa: D ii.133 (yuga maa
dhraya: "pair of robes of burnished cloth of gold and
ready for wear" trsl.); Vism 258 (v. l. maha). Cp. sam.
(b) maha: Vv 8417 (su); Miln 248; DhA i.25 (kual
having burnished earrings); VvA 6 (vattha). Cp. vi.
-saka a tunic of fine cloth J i.304; ii.274; iii.498; Vism
284 (h).
Mai [cp. Vedic mai. The connection with Lat. monile (pendant), proposed by Fick & Grassmann, is doubted by Walde,
Lat. Wtb. s. v. monile, where see other suggestions. For further characterisation of mai cp. Zimmer, Altindisches Leben
pp. 53, 263] 1. a gem, jewel. At several places one may in-
573
Mak
Matta
3.).
Maa [later Sk. maa, perhaps dial. from *mranda, cp. Sk. vi
mradati to soften. Attempts at etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb.
s. v. mollis. Cp. also mattik] the top part, best part of milk
or butter, etc. i. e. cream, scum; fig. essence of, the pick of,
finest part of anything. paris the cream of a gathering, the
pick of the congregation, excellent congregation A i.72 (or for
maala?); bodhi essence of enlightenment, highest state of
enlightenment; in later literature objectively "the best place of
enlightenment, the Throne of Enlightenment or of the Buddha" (does it stand for maala in this meaning?) J iv.233
(cp. puthavi maa ibid. & puthavi maala Sn 990);
DhA i.86; ii.69; iv.72. sappi "cream of butter," the finest
ghee (cp. Av i.1513 sarpimaa) D i.201; A ii.95; Pug 70;
Miln 322. maa karoti to put into the best condition,
to make pleasant SnA 81. manda at DhsA 100 is to be read
baddha (v. l. BB). Cp. Expos. 132n .
-khetta best soil, fertile ground Miln 255. -peyya to be
drunk like cream, i. e. of the finest quality, first class S
ii.20 ( ida brahmacariya).
Mati (f.) [Vedic mati, fr. man: cp. Av. maiti, Lat. mens,
mentem (cp. E. mental); Goth. ga munds, gaminpi, Ohg.
gi munt, E. mind] mind, opinion, thought; thinking of, hankering after, love or wish for Vin iii.138 (purisa thought of
a man); Mhvs 3, 42 (padpa lamp of knowledge); 15, 214
(amala pure minded); PvA 151 (kma+). su (adj.)
wise, clever Mhvs 15, 214; opp. du (adj.) foolish J iii.83
(=duppaa C.); Pv i.82 (=nippaa PvA 40); Sdhp 292.
Matikata (adj.) [cp. Sk. mat kta, fr. matya, nt., harrow =Lat.
mateola, Ohg. medela plough] in su well-harrowed (field) A
i.229, 239 (khetta).
Matimant (adj.) [mati+mant] sensible, intelligent, wise, metri
caus as matm (fr. matimanto, pl.) at Sn 881 (=matim
pait Nd1 289).
Matta1 () (adj.) [i. e. matt used as adj.] "by measure," measured, as far as the measure goes, i. e. (1) consisting of,
574
Matta
Mathati
Mattatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. matta] (the fact of) consisting of, or
being only... PvA 199 (masa pesi).
Matt (f.) [Vedic mtr, of m] measure, quantity, right measure, moderation Sn 971 (matta so ja); Dh i.35 (matt
ti pama vuccati). Abl. mattaso in krin doing in
moderation, doing moderately Pug 37 (=pamnena padesa
mattam eva karont ti). In cpds. shortened to matta.
-ahiya (mattahiya=atthika) desirous of moderation,
moderate Th 1, 922. -u knowing the right measure, moderate, temperate (bhojane or bhojanamhi in eating) A ii.40; Sn
338; Pug 25; Dh 8. Cp. jgariy. -ut moderation (in
eating) D iii.213; Nd1 483; Dh 185; Pug 25; Vbh 249, 360;
Dhs 1348; DhA ii.238. -sukha (metri caus: matt sukha)
measured happiness, i. e. small happiness Dh 290 (cp. DhA
iii.449).
Mathati [Vedic math, manth to twirl, shake about, stir etc.; cp.
Lat. mamphur part of the lathe=Ger. mandel ("mangle"), E.
mandrel; Lith. mentris churning stick, Gr. tumult
shaft of rudder. The Dhtp (126) gives both roots
(math & manth) and expls by "violana," as does Dhtm (183)
by "vioana"] to churn, to shake, disturb, upset. Only in Caus.
matheti to agitate, crush, harass, upset (citta) S iv.210; Sn 50
(=tseti hpeti Nd2 492); Pv iv.71 (kammna vipko math-
575
Mathati
Madhu
Maddana (nt.) [cp. Epic Sk. mardana, fr. md] 1. crushing, grinding, destroying J iv.26; Miln 21 (adj.,+mathana);
Sdhp 449; Dhtp 156. 2. threshing Miln 360. See also
nimmaddana, pamaddana, parimaddana.
Maddar (f.) [?] a species of bird, in cpd. ambaka A i.188.
Maddava (adj. nt.) [fr. mdu, cp. Epic Sk. mrdava] 1. mild,
gentle, soft, suave Dhs 1340; Vbh 359; Miln 229 (citta
muduka m. siniddha), 313 (mudu), 361 (among the 30
best virtues, with siniddha & mudu). 2. (fr. madda) as Np.
name of a king, reigning in Sgala, the capital of Madda.
3. withered Dh 377 (=milta DhA iv.112). nt. maddava
mildness, softness, gentleness Sn 250 (ajjava+), 292 (id.); J
iii.274 (as one of the 10 rja dhamm); v.347 (=mettacitta); DhsA 151. See also skara.
Maddavat (f.) [abstr. fr. maddava] gentleness, softness, suavity
Dhs 44, 1340; DhsA 151.
Maddlaka [etym.?] a kind of bird J vi.538.
Maddita [pp. of maddeti, see maddati] 1. kneaded, mixed, in su
Vism 124. 2. crushed, defeated, in su Miln 284. Cp.
pa, pari.
Maddin (adj.) [fr. md, cp. Sk. mardin=mardana] crushing, destroying Sdhp 218. Cp. pamaddin.
Maddhita [of mdh] see pari.
Madhu [cp. Vedic madhu, Gr. wine, Lith. meds honey,
mids wine, Ohg. metu=Ger. met wine. Most likely to root
*med to be full of juice: see under madati] honey J i.157 sq.;
iv.117; Dh 69 (madh v read as madhuv); Mhvs 5, 53; DhsA
330; DhA ii.197 (alla fresh honey). pl. madhni Mhvs
5, 31. The Abhp (533) also gives "wine from the blossom
of Bassia latifolia" as meaning. On madhu in similes see
J.P.T.S. 1907, 121.
-atthika (madh) at J iii.493 is with v. l. to be read
madhu-tthika (q. v. below). The proposal of Kern's (Toev.
s. v.) to read madh' ahika "with sweet kernels" cannot
be accepted. The C. explns rightly by "madhura phalesu
pakkhitta madhu viya, madhura phalo hutv." -atthika
(madhu) desirous of honey, seeking honey J iv.205; Mhvs
5, 50. -paa (madhv) honey shop Mhvs 5, 52. -sava
(madhv) honey extract, wine from the flower of Bassia latifolia VvA 73 (as one of the 5 kinds of intoxicating liquors).
-kara "honey maker," bee J iv.265; Vism 136 (in simile);
DhA i.374. -gaa honey comb Mhvs 22, 42; 34, 52. -
576
Madhu
Manussa
Mana (adv.) [cp. Class. Sk. mank, "a little (of something)"
prob. derived from Vedic man f. a. gold weight =Gr. ]
"by a certain weight," i. e. a little, somewhat, almost, well
nigh, nearly. Combd with vata in exclamation: M ii.123
(m. v. bho anassma); DhA iii.147 (m. v. ther nsit). Often
in phrase man' amhi (with pp.). "I nearly was so & so," e.
g. Vin i.109 (vuho); J i.405 (upakito); iii.435 (mat), 531
(mrpito). Cp. BSk. mansmi khdit MVastu ii.450.
Manat (f.) [abstr. fr. mano] mentality DhsA 143 (in expln of
attamanat).
Manasa (adj.) [the form of mano, an enlarged form, for which
usually either mana or mnasa] having a mind, with such
& such a mind Sn 942 (nibbna "a nibbna mind," one who
is intent upon N., cp. expln at SnA 567); Pv i.66 (paduha
manas f., maybe mnas; but PvA 34 explns "paduha
citt paduhena v manas). See also adhimanasa under
adhimana.
Madhuka (adj. n.) [fr. madhu] connected with honey. 1. (n.) the
tree Bassia latifolia (lit. honey tree) Vin i.246; J v.324, 405;
vi.529; Miln 165. 2. the fruit of that tree J iv.434. 3.
(adj.) () full of honey J vi.529 (madhu containing honey).
4. connected with an intoxicating drink, given to the drink
of () J iv.117 (sur meraya).
-ahika the kernel (of the fruit) of Bassia latifolia Vism
353=KhA 43 (which latter reads madhukaphal' ahi; in the description of the finger nails). -puppha the flower of Bassia
latifolia from which honey is extracted for liquor Vin i.246
(rasa liquorice juice); J i.430.
Manussa
sides are an inseparable unity: the mind fits the world as the
eye fits the light, or in other words: mano is the counterpart
of dhamm, the subjective dh. Dhamma in this sense is the
rationality or lawfulness of the Universe (see dhamma B. 1),
Cosmic Order, Natural Law. It may even be taken quite generally as the "empirical. world" (as Geiger, e. g. interprets it in
his Pali Dhamma p. 80 82, pointing out the substitution of
vatthu for dhamma at Kvu 126 sq. i. e. the material world), as
the world of "things," of phenomena in general without specification as regards sound, sight, smell, etc. Dhamma as
counterpart of mano is rather an abstract (pluralistic) representation of the world, i. e. the phenomena as such with a
certain inherent rationality; manas is the receiver of these phenomena in their abstract meaning, it is the abstract sense, so to
speak. Of course, to explain manas and its function one has to
resort to terms of materiality, and thus it happens that the term
vijnti, used of manas, is also used of the 5th sense, that of
touch (to which mano is closely related, cp. our E. expressions
of touch as denoting rational, abstract processes: warm & cold
used figuratively; to grasp anything; terror stricken; deeply
moved feeling>Lat. palpare to palpitate, etc.). We might say
of the mind "sensing," that manas "senses" (as a refined sense
of touch) the "sensibility" (dhamma) of the objects, or as Cpd.
183 expresses it "cognizable objects." See also kya II.; and
phassa. 2. In Buddhist Psychological Logic the concept
mano is often more definitely circumscribed by the addition
of the terms (man )yatana, (man )indriya and (mano
)dhtu, which are practically all the same as mano (and its
objective correspondent dhamm). Cp. also below No. 3. The
additional terms try to give it the rank of a category of thought.
On mano dhtu and m yatana see also the discourse by
S. Z. Aung. Cpd. 256 59, with Mrs. Rh. D.'s apt remarks
on p. 259. The position of manas among the 6 yatanas (or
indriyas) is one of control over the other 5 (pure and simple
senses). This is expressed e. g. at M i.295 (commented on at
DhsA 72) and S v.217 (mano nesa gocara visaya paccanubhoti: mano enjoys the function spheres of the other
senses; cp. Geiger, Dhamma 81; as in the Snkhya: Garbe,
Snkhya Philosophie 252 sq.). Cp. Vin i.36; "ettha ca te mano
na ramittha rpesu saddesu atho rasesu." 3. As regards the
relation of manas to citta, it may be stated, that citta is more
substantial (as indicated by translation "heart"), more elemental as the seat of emotion, whereas manas is the finer element,
a subtler feeling or thinking as such. See also citta2 I., and
on rel. to via & citta see citta2 IV. 2b . In the more popular opinion and general phraseology however manas is almost
synonymous with citta as opposed to body, citta iti pi mano
iti pi S ii.94. So in the triad "thought (i. e. intention) speech
and action" manas interchanges with citta: see kya III. The
formula runs kyena vcya manas, e. g. M iii.178 (sucarita caritv); Dh 391 (natthi dukkaa), cp. Dh 96; santa
tassa mana, sant vc ca kamma ca. Besides with citta:
kyena vcya uda cetas S i.93, 102; A i.63. rakkhitena k.
vcya cittena S ii.231; iv.112. It is further combd with
citta in the scholastic (popular) definition of manas, found in
identical words at all Cy. passages: "mano" is "citta mano
mnasa hadaya, paara, man yatana... mano
vina dhtu" (mind sensibility). Thus e. g. at Nd1 3
(for mano), 176 (id.); Nd2 494 (which however leaves out cit-
578
Mantar
Mantar
Maminkra
Mantin (adj. n.) [fr. manta] 1. (adj.) giving or observing counsel S i.236. 2. (n.) counsellor, minister J vi.437
(paita m.).
Manteti [cp. Vedic mantrayati; mant is given at Dhtp in meaning of gutta bhsana, i. e. "secret talk"] to pronounce in an
important (because secret) manner (like a mantra), i. e. 1. to
take counsel (with=instr. or saddhi) D i.94, 104 (mantana
manteyya to discuss) 122 (2nd pl. imper. mantavho, as compared with mantayavho J ii.107 besides mantavho ibid. Cp.
Geiger, P.Gr. 126); ii.87, 239; Vin iv.308 (mantesu aor.;
perhaps "plotted"); Sn p. 107 (=talk privately to); Sn 379; J
i.144; vi.525 (mantayitvna ger.); DA i.263 (imper. mantayatha); PvA 74 (aor. mantayisu). 2. to consider, to think
over, to be of opinion A i.199 (Pot. mantaye); Miln 91 (grd.
mantayitabba & inf. mantayitu). 3. to announce, advise; pronounce, advise Sn 126; Pv iv.120 (=kathemi kittaymi
PvA 225); SnA 169. pp. mantita. Cp. .
Mamankra [mama (=mama)+kra, cp. aha+kra] selfish attachment, self interest, selfishness PvA 230. In canonic
books only in combn with ahankra & mn' nusaya (belief
in an ego and bias of conceit), e. g. at M iii.18, 32; S iii.80,
103, 136, 169; iv.41, 197, 202; A i.132 sq.; iii.444. See also
maminkra.
Manda (adj.) [cp. late Vedic & Epic manda] 1. slow, lazy,
indolent; mostly with ref. to the intellectual faculties, therefore: dull, stupid, slow of grasp, ignorant, foolish M i.520
(+momuha); Sn 666, 820 (=momha Nd1 153), 1051 (=moh
avidv etc. Nd2 498); Dh 325 (=amanasikr manda paa
DhA iv.17); J iv.221; Pug 65, 69; KhA 53, 54. 2. slow,
yielding little result, unprofitable (of udaka, water, with respect to fish; and gocara, feeding on fishes) J i.221. 3.
[in this meaning probably=Vedic mandra "pleasant, pleasing,"
although Halyudha gives mandka as "bashful"] soft, tender (with ref. to eyes), lovely, in cpds. akkhin having
lovely (soft) eyes J iii.190; and locana id. Th 2, 375 (kinnari manda=manda puthu vilocana ThA 253); Pv
i.115 (miga manda=mig viya mand' akkh PvA 57); Vv
6411 (miga m=miga cchpikna viya mudu siniddha
dihi nipta). 4. In cpd. picu (or puci) manda the
Nimb tree, it means "tree" (?) see picu manda & puci
manda. 5. In composition with bh it assumes the form
mand, e. g. mandbhta slowed down, enfeebled, diminished J i.228; VbhA 157.
-valhak a class of fairies or demi gods D ii.259
("fragile spirits of the clouds" trsl.).
581
Maminkra
Mariyd
Mamma (nt.) [Vedic marman, fr. md] soft spot of the body, a
vital spot (in the Vedas chiefly between the ribs near the heart),
joint. A popular etym. and expln of the word is given at Expos.
132n3 (on DhsA 100). J ii.228; iii.209; DhsA 396.
-ghaana hitting a vital spot (of speech, i. e. backbiting.
Cp. pihi masika) DhA iv.182. -chedaka breaking the
joints (or ribs), violent (fig. of hard speech) DhA i.75; DhsA
100.
Mammana (adj.) [onomat. cp. babbhara. With Sk. marmara
rustling to Lat. fremo to roar=Gr. to thud,
thunder, Ger. brummen. Cp. also Sk. murmura=P. mummura & muramur, Lat. murmur] stammering, stuttering Vin
ii.90 (one of the properties of bad or faulty speech, combd with
dubbaca & eagalavca).
Maya (adj.) ( only) [Vedic maya] made of, consisting of.
An interesting analysis (interesting for judging the views and
sense of etymology of an ancient commentator) of maya is
given by Dhammapla at VvA 10, where he distinguishes 6
meanings of the word, viz. 1. asma d atthe, i. e. "myself" (as representing maya!). 2. paatti "regulation"
(same as 1. according to example given, but constructed syntectically quite diff. by Dhp.). 3. nibbatti "origin" (arising
from, with example mano maya "produced by mind").
4. manomaya "spiritually" (same as 3). 5. vikr' atthe
"alteration" (? more like product, consistency, substance),
with example "sabbe maikmaya kuik." 6. padapraa matte to make up a foot of the verse (or add a syllable
for the sake of completeness, with example "dnamaya, slamaya" (=dana; sla). 1. made of: ahi of bone Vin ii.115;
ayo of iron Sn 669; Pv i.104 ; J iv.492; udum- bara of Ud.
wood Mhvs 23, 87; dru of wood, VvA 8; loha of copper
Sn 670; veuriya of jewels Vv 21 . 2. consisting in: dna
giving alms PvA 8, 9; dussa clothes Vv 467 ; dhamma righteousness S i.137. 3. (more as apposition, in the sense as
given by Dhp. above under 6) something like, a likeness of, i.
e. ingredient, substance, stuff; in hra food stuff, food
J iii.523; utu something like a (change in) season Vism 395;
sla character, having sla as substance (or simply consisting of) It 51 (dna, sla, bhvan).
Maya [1st pl. of aha, for vaya after may etc. See aha] we
Vin ii.270; Sn 31, 91, 167; Dh 6; KhA 210.
Maykha [Vedic maykha in diff. meaning, viz. a peg for fastening a weft etc., Zimmer Altind. Leben 254] a ray of light
Abhp. 64; Dhp. A 426 (old citation, unverified).
Mayra [Vedic mayra] a peacock D iii.201; S ii.279; Th 1, 1113;
J ii.144, 150 (gva)=DhA i.144; J iv.211 (nacca); v.304;
vi.172, 272, 483; Vv 111 , 358 (=sikhain VvA 163); VvA
27 (gva vaa); Sdhp 92. The form mayra occurs
nearly always in the Gths and is the older form of the two
m. and mora. The latter contracted form is found in Prose
only and is often used to explain the old form, e, g. at VvA 57.
See also mora.
Marica (nt.) [cp. scientific Sk. marica] black pepper Vin i.201
(allowed as medicine to the bhikkhus); Miln 63.
-gaccha the M. shrub J v.12. -cua powdered pepper, fine pepper J i.455.
Mariyd (f.) [cp. Vedic maryd; perhaps related to Lat. mare
sea; s. Walde, Lat. Wtb. under mare] 1. boundary, limit,
shore, embankment Vin iii.50; A iii.227 (brhmana); D
iii.92=Vism 419; J v.325; vi.536 (tra); Mhvs 34, 70; 36, 59
(vpi); Miln 416. 2. strictly defined relation, rule, control
Mara (adj.) [fr. m] dying; only neg. amara not dying, immor-
582
Mariyd
Masragalla
J ii.215; Vism 15. adj. keeping to the lines (or boundaries), observing strict rules A iii.227 (quoted SnA 318, 325).
bandha keeping in control Vin i.287. Cp. vimariydi.
Marci (f.) [Vedic marci; cp. Gr. to shimmer, glitter, dog star, sparkle; Lat. merus clear, pure;
perhaps also mariyd to be taken here] 1. a ray of light VvA
166. 2. a mirage J vi.209; Vism 496; VbhA 34, 85; often
combd with my (q. v.), e. g. Nd2 680 Aii ; J ii.330.
-kammahna the "mirage" station of exercise DhA
iii.165. -dhamma like a mirage, unsubstantial J vi.206; Dh
46; DhA i.337.
Marcik (f.)=marci 2; S iii.141; Vism 479 (in comp.); Dh 170
(=my DhA iii.166).
Mallaka [cp. Sk. mallaka & mallika] 1. a bowl, a vessel (?) used
in bathing Vin ii.106 (mallakena nahyati; or is it a kind of
scrubber? Bdhgh's expln of this passage (CV v. i.4) on p. 315
is not quite clear; mallaka nma makara dantike chinditv
mllakamla sahnena kata mallaka vuccati; akata
danta achinditv kata). It may bear some ref. to malla on p.
105 (see malla) & to mallika makula (see below mallik).
2. a cup, drinking vessel A i.250 (udaka). 3. a bowl
J iii.21 (kasa=taaka). 4. in khea a spittoon Vin i.48;
ii.175. Note. W. Printz in "Bhsa's Prkrit." p. 45, compares aurasen maaa, Hind ma(a) "cup," maliy "a small
vessel (of wood or cocoanut shell) for holding the oil used
in unction," ml "cocoanut shell," and adds: probably a
Dravidian word.
Maruv (f.) [cp. Sk. mrv, perhaps connected with Lat. malva]
a species of hemp (Sanseveria roxburghiana) M i.429. At J
ii.115 we find reading mardv & marucavka (C.), of uncertain meaning?
Mala (nt.) [Vedic mala, see etym. under malina. The Dhtm (395)
only knows of one root mal or mall in meaning "dhraa" supporting, thus thinking of maka] anything impure, stain (lit.
& fig.), dirt. In the Canon mostly fig. of impurities. On mala
in similes see J.P.T.S., 1907, 122. S i.38 (itthi mala brahmacariyassa), 43 (id.); A i.105 (iss); Sn 378, 469, 962, 1132
(=rgo mala etc. Nd2 500); Nd1 15, 478 sq.; Dh 239 sq.;
Vbh 368 (ti malni), 389 (nava purisa malni); Pv ii.334
(macchera); PvA 45 (id.), 80 (id.), 17 (citta); Sdhp 220.
Compar. malatara a greater stain A iv.195=Dh 243. See
also mla.
-bhibh overcoming one's sordidness S i.18; J iv.64. majjana "dirt wiper," a barber Vin iv.308 (kasvaa m. nihnajacca); J iii.452; iv.365.
Masragalla (m. & nt.) [cp. Sk. masra emerald+galva crystal &
musragalva] a precious stone, cat's eye; also called kabaramai (e. g. VvA 304). It occurs in stereotyped enumn of gems
at Vin ii.238 (where it is said to be found in the Ocean)=Miln
267; and at Miln 118, where it always stands next to lohitanka.
583
Masragalla
Mahant
than aava; mah' bhisakka, where abhisakka does not occur by itself; cp. mahnubhva, mahiddhika, mahaggha; or
is obscured in its derivation through constant use with mah,
like mahes [mah+es, or s], mahesakkha [mah+esakkha];
mahallaka [mah+*ariyaka]; mahmatta. Cp. E. great coat,
Gr. in =Ger. arzt. Only a limited selection
of cpd. words is given, consisting of more frequent or idiomatic terms. Practically any word may be enlarged & emphasized in meaning by prefixing mah. Sometimes a mah
lends to special events a standard (historical) significance, so
changing the common word into a noun proper, e. g. Mah
bhinikkhammana, Mahpavraa. B. Mah occurs in
cpds. in (a) an elided form mah before a & i; (b) shortened to
maha before g, d, p, b with doubling of these consonants; (c)
in the regular form mah: usually before consonants, sometimes before vowels. This form is contracted with foll. i to e
and foll. u to o. In the foll. list of cpds. we have arranged the
material according to these bases.
mah: -aggha very costly, precious Pug 34; Mhvs 27,
35; PvA 77, 87; Sdhp 18. -agghat costliness, great value
Pug 34, Sdhp 26. -aava the (great) ocean Mhvs 19, 17.
-atthiya (for atthika) of great importance or use, very useful,
profitable J iii.368. -andhakra deep darkness Vism 417.
-asssin fully refreshed, very comfortable S i.81.
maha: -ggata "become great," enlarged, extensive, fig.
lofty, very great M i.263; ii.122; A ii.63, 184; iii.18; VvA
155; J v.113; Dhs 1020 (trsln : "having a wider scope") Vbh
16, 24, 62, 74, 126, 270, 326; Tikp. 45; Vism 410, 430 sq.
(rammaa); VbhA 154 (id.), 159 (citta); DhsA 44. See on
term Cpd. 4, 12, 55, 1014 ; [cp. BSk. mahadgata Divy 227].
-gghasa eating much, greedy, gluttonous A iv.92; P iii.111
(=bahubhojana PvA 175); Miln 288; Dh 325 (cp. DhA iv.16).
-ddhana having great riches (often combd with mahbhoga)
Dh 123; J iv.15, 22. -pphala much fruit; adj. bearing much
fruit, rich in result A iv.60, 237 sq.; Sn 191, 486; Dh 312, 356
sq. -bbala (a) a strong force, a great army Mhvs 10, 68 (v. l.,
T. has mah bala); (b) of great strength, mighty, powerful J
iii.114; Mhvs 23, 92; 25, 9. -bbhaya great fear, terror S i.37;
Sn 753, 1032, 1092, ep. Nd2 501.
mah: -anas kitchen Mhvs 5, 27 (spurious stanza). anasa kitchen J ii.361; iii.314; v.368; vi.349; DhA iii.309;
ThA 5. -anila a gale Mhvs 3, 42. -nisasa deserving great
praise (see s. v.), [cp. BSk. mahnuasa MVastu iii.221].
-nubhva majesty, adj. wonderful, splendid J i.194; J vi.331;
Pv iii.31 ; PvA 117, 136, 145, 272. -apardhika very guilty
J i.114. -abhinikkhamaa the great renunciation DhA i.85.
-abhisakka [abhi+ak] very powerful Th 1, 1111. -amacca
chief minister Mhvs 19, 12. -araha costly Mhvs 3, 21; 5, 75;
27, 39; PvA 77, 141, 160.
mah: -alasa great sloth DhA iii.410. -avci the great
Purgatory Avci, freq. -isi in poetry for mahesi at J v.321.
-upahna great state room (of a king) SnA 84. -upsik
a great female follower (of the Buddha) VvA 5. -karu
great compassion DhA i.106, 367. -kya a great body Miln
16. -gaa a great crowd or community DhA i.154. -gaa
a large tumour VbhA 104. -gedha great greed Sn 819; Nd1
151. -cga great liberality, adj. munificent Mhvs 27, 47. As
paricga at SnA 295 (=mahdna). -jana a great crowd, collectively for "the people," a multitude PvA 6, 19, 78; Mhvs 3,
Masi. [cp. Class. Sk. mai & masi] 1. the fine particles of ashes,
in angara charcoal dust VvA 67=DhA iii.309; (aggin)
masi karoti to reduce to powder (by fire), to burn to ashes,
turn to dust S ii.88=iv.197=A i.204= ii.199. 2. soot J i.483
(ukkhali soot on a pot).
Masraka [connected with masraka] a bolster J iv.87; vi.185.
Massu [Vedic maru] the beard D ii.42; Pug 55; J iv.159.
parha with long grown beard DA i.263; bahala thick
bearded J v.42.
-kamma beard dressing J iii.114; DhA i.253. -karaa
shaving DhA i.253; DA i.137. -kutti [m.+ *kpti] beard
trimming J iii.314 (C.=kiriy).
Massuka (adj.) [fr. massu] bearded; a beardless (of a woman) J
ii.185.
Maha (m. & nt.) [fr. mah, see mahati & cp. Vedic nt. mahas]
1. worthiness, venerableness Miln 357. 2. a (religious)
festival (in honour of a Saint, as an act of worship) Mhvs 33,
26 (vihrassa mahamhi, loc.); VvA 170 (thpe ca mahe kate),
200 (id.). mah a great festival Mhvs 5, 94. bodhi festival
of the Bo tree J iv.229. vihra festival held on the building
of a monastery J i.94; VvA 188. hatthi a festival called the
elephant f. J iv.95.
Mahati [mah; expld by Dhtp 331 as "pjya"] to honour, revere Vv 4711 (pot. med. 1 pl. mahemase, cp. Geiger, P.Gr.
129; expld as "mahmase pjmase" at VvA 203). Caus.
mahyati in same sense: ger. mahyitvna (poetical) J iv.236.
Pass. mahyati Vv 621 (=pjyati VvA 258); 6422 (ppr.
mahyamna= pjiyamna VvA 282). pp. mahita.
Mahatta (nt.) [fr. mahat cp. Sk. mahattva] greatness J v.331
(=sehatta C.); Vism 132, 232 sq.; VbhA 278 (Satthu, jti,
sabrahmacr); DA i.35; VvA 191.
Mahant (adj.) [Vedic mahant, which by Grassmann is taken as
ppr. to mah, but in all probability the n is an original suffix. cp. Av. mazant, Sk. compar. mahyn; Gr.
(compar. ), Lat. magnus, Goth. mikils=Ohg. mihhil=E. much] great, extensive, big; important, venerable.
nom. mah Sn 1008; Mhvs 22, 27. Shortened to maha in cpd.
pitmaha (following a decl.) (paternal) grandfather PvA
41; & mtmaha (maternal) grandfather (q. v.). instr. mahat Sn 1027. pl. nom. mahant Sn 578 (opp. dahar).
loc. mahati Miln 254. f. mah 1. one of the 5 great
rivers (Np.). 2. the earth. See separately. nt. mahanta used as adv., meaning "very much, greatly" J v.170; DhA
iv.232. Also in cpd. mahantabhva greatness, loftiness, sublimity DhsA 44. Compar. mahantatara DhA ii.63, and
with dimin. suffix ka J iii.237. The regular paraphrase
of mah in the Niddesa is "agga, seha, visiha, pmokkha,
uttama, pavara," see Nd2 502.
Note on mah & cpds. A. In certain cpds. the combn
with mah (mah) has become so established & customary (often through politeness in using mah for the simple term), that
the cpd. is felt as an inseparable unity and a sort of "antique"
word, in which the 2nd part either does not occur any more by
itself or only very rarely, as mah' aava, which is more freq.
584
Mahant
Mahallaka
Vism 403; SnA 30, 371; PvA 47. -sara a great lake; usually as satta-mahsar the 7 great lakes of the Himavant (see
sara), enumd e. g. at Vism 416. -sra (of) great sap, i. e.
great wealth, adj. very rich J i.463 (kula, perhaps to be read
mahsla kula). -sla (adj.) having great halls, Ep. of rich
people (especially brhmaas) D i.136, 235; iii.16, 20; J ii.272
(kula); iv.237 (id.), 325 (id.); v.227 (id.); Pug 56; VbhA 519;
DhA iii.193. -svaka [cp. BSk. mahrvaka Divy 489] a
great disciple Vism 98 (asti ); DhA ii.93. -senagutta title of a high official (Chancellor of the Exchequer?) J v.115;
vi.2. -hatthi a large elephant M i.184 (pada elephant's foot,
as the largest of all animal feet), referred to as simile (opama)
at Vism 243, 347, 348.
mahi [mah' i]: -iccha full of desire, lustful, greedy
A iv.229; Th 1, 898; It 91; J i.8; ii.441.
-icchat arrogance, ostentatiousness A iv.280; VbhA 472.
-iddhika
[mah+iddhi+ka] of great power, always combd with mahnubhva to denote great influence, high position & majesty
Vin i.31; ii.193; iii.101; D i.78, 180 (devat), 213; S i.145
sq.; ii.155, 274 sq., 284 sq.; iv.323; v.265, 271 sq., 288 sq.; A
v.129; J vi.483 (said of the Ocean); PvA 6, 136, 145. -inda
(ghosa) lit. the roar of the Great Indra, Indra here to be taken in
his function as sky (rain) god, thus: the thunder of the rain
god Th 1, 1108. [Cp. BSk. mhendra in bhavana "the abode
of the Great Indra," and vaa "the rain of the Gr. I." (here as
rain god), both at Av i.210]. -isssa [Sk. mahevsa]
great in the art of the bow, a great archer S i.185; DhA i.358.
mahe [mah+i]: -esakkha [mah+sa+khya; fr. ]
possessing great power or authority A ii.204; iii.244; Nd2
5032 ; Vism 419; Sdhp 511. The BSk. form is mahekhya
evidently differing in its etymology. The P. etym. rests on
the same grounds as esitatta in mahesi DhA iv.232.
-esi
[mah+isi; Sk. mahari] a great Sage A ii.26; Sn 208, 481,
646, 915, 1057, 1061; Th 1, 1132; 2, 149; Dh 422 (expld at
DhA iv.232 as "mahanta sla kkhandh' dna esitatt
m." cp. the similar expln at Nd2 503); Nd1 343; Vism 505;
VbhA 110; PvA 1. -esiy=mahes J vi.483. -es [in P. to
be taken as mah+i, as f. to sa, but in Sk. (Vedic) as f. of
mahia, buffalo] chief queen, king's first wife, king's consort;
also the wife of a great personage J ii.410; v.45; vi.425; Pug
56; Mhvs 2, 22 (pl. mahesiyo); VvA 184 (sixteen). Usually
as agga-mahes, e. g. J i.262; iii.187, 393; v.88. -esitta state
of chief consort, queenship J v.443; Pv ii.1310 ; ThA 37; VvA
102. -eseyya=esitta J v.91.
-maho [mah+u, or+o]: -ogha the great flood (see ogha)
Sn 4, 945; Dh 47, 287; DhA iii.433. -odadhi the (great)
ocean, the sea Sn 720, 1134; Miln 224; Mhvs 18, 8. -odara
big belly J vi.358 (addressing a king's minister). -odika full
of water, having much water; deep, full (of a river) Sn 319; J
ii.159; Miln 346. -oraga [m+uraga] a great snake J v.165.
Mahantat (f.) [fr. mahant] greatness DhA ii.62. At M iii.24 the
spelling is mahattat (tt misread for nt?), at M i.184 however
mahantatta (nt.).
Mahallaka (adj. n.) [a distorted mah ariyaka> ayyaka> allaka;
cp. ayyaka] old, venerable, of great age; an old man D i.90
(opp. tarua), 94, 114, 247; Sn 313, 603; Nd2 261 (vuha m.
andhagata etc.) J iv.482 (opp. dahara young); Vv 461 (=mahanto VvA 199); DhA i.7, 278; ii.4, 55, 91; SnA 313. Compar.
585
Mahallaka
Mtar
207.
Mghta (nt.) [lit. m ghta "kill not"] the injunction not to kill,
non killing order (with ref. to the killing of animals J iii.428
(bheri, the drum announcing this order); iv.115; vi.346 (uposatha).
Mahik (f.) [cp. *Sk. mahik] fog, frost, cold (=hima DhsA
317) Vin ii.295=Miln 273; Sn 669; Miln 299; VvA 134 (fog).
As mahiy at A ii.53.
Mah (f.) [f. of mah, base of mahant, Vedic mah] the earth (lit.
Great One) Mhvs 5, 266; Sdhp 424, 472; loc. mahiy Miln
128; mahiya DhsA 62. Note. As mah is only found in
very late P. literature, it must have been re introduced from
Sk. sources, and is note a direct correspondent of Vedic mah.
-tala the ground (of the earth) Mhvs 5, 54. -dhara mountain Miln 343; Mhvs 14, 3; 28, 22 (v. l. mahin). -pa king
(of the earth) Mhvs 14, 22. -pati king Mhvs 5, 48; 33, 32.
-pla king Mhvs 4, 38; 5, 265. -ruha tree ("growing out of
the earth") Mhvs 14, 18, 18, 19.
M (indecl.) [cp. Vedic m, Gr. ] prohibition particle: not,
do not, let us hope not, I wish that... not [cp. Lat. utinam &
ne]. Constructed with various tenses, e. g. 1. with aor. (prohibitive tense): m eva akattha do not thus DhA i.7; m
abhai speak not Pv i.33 ; m cintayittha do not worry DhA
i.12; m parihyi I hope he will not go short (or be deprived)
of... M i.444; m bhyi fear not J ii.159; m marisu I hope
they will not die J iii.55; m (te) rucci may it not please (you),
i. e. please do not Vin ii.198; m eva ruccittha id. DhA i.13.
2. with imper.: m gaccha J i.152; m detha J iii.275. m
ghta do not kill: see mghta. 3. with pot.: m anuyujetha Dh 27; m bhujetha let him not eat Mhvs 25, 113; m
vadetha J vi.364. 4. with indic. pres.: m pailabhati A
v.194. A peculiar use is found in phrase nemi m nemi
shall I bring it or not? J vi.334. 5. m=na (simple negation)
in msakkhimh we could not Vin iii.23.
-M [the short form of msa, direct dern fr. m: see minti] see
pua-m.
Mgadha [fr. Magadha] scent seller, (lit. "from Magadha")
Pv ii.937 (=gandhin PvA 127).
Mgadhaka (nt.) [mgadha+ka, lit. "from Magadha"] garlic Vin
iv.259 (lasua nma mgadhaka vuccati).
Mgavika [gua form to *mga=P. miga; Sk. mrga-vika] a
deerstalker, huntsman A ii.207; Pug 56; Miln 364, 412; PvA
586
Mtar
Mnasa
Mnana (nt.) & Mnan (f.) [fr. mna1 ] paying honour or respect; reverence, respect S i.66; J ii.138; Pug 19, 22; Miln 377
(with sakkra, vandana, pjana & apaciti); Dhs 1121; DhsA
373. Cp. vi, sam.
Mna [late Vedic & Epic Sk. mna, fr. man, orig. meaning perhaps "high opinions" (i. e. No. 2); hence "pride" (No. 1). Def.
of root see partly under mneti, partly under minti] 1. pride,
conceit, arrogance (cittassa uati Nd1 80; Vbh 350). Mna is
one of the Saojanas. It is one of the principal obstacles to
Arahantship. A detailed analysis of mna in tenfold aspect is
Mnasa
Mra
Myvin (adj.) [fr. my, cp. Vedic myvin] deceitful, hypocritical D iii.45, 246; Sn 89, 116, 357; Pug 19, 23; PvA 13.
See also amyvin.
Mneti [Caus. of man, cp. Sk. mnayati, Lat. moneo to admonish. Ger. mahnen, Ags. manian. The Dhtp 593 gives root as
mn in meaning "pj"] to honour, revere, think highly of PvA
54 (aor. mnesu,+garukarisu+pjesu). pp. mnita.
588
Mra
Mlin
malaka"). The word is peculiar to the late (Jtaka ) literature, & is not found in the older texts. J i.449 (vikkama);
iv.306; v.49 (visla), 138 (id., spelling maaka); Mhvs 15, 36
(Mah mucala); 16, 15; 32, 58 (sanghassa kamma, encl.
for ceremonial acts of the S., cp. 15, 29); DhA iv.115 (sm);
Vism 342 (vitakka).
Mlat (f.) [fr. ml] the great flowered jasmine Abhp 576.
Cp. mlik.
Ml (f.) [cp. Epic Sk. ml] garland, wreath, chaplet; collectively=flowers; fig. row, line Sn 401; Pug 56; Vism 265 (in
simile); Pv ii.316 (gandha, m., vilepana, as a "lady's" toilet outfit); ii.49 (as one of the 8 or 10 standard gifts to a bhikkhu: see
dna, deyyadhamma & yaa); PvA 4=J iii.59 (ratta- kaavera a wreath of red K. flowers on his head: apparel of a criminal to be executed. Cp. ratta mla dhara wearing a red
garland J iii.179, an ensign of the executioner); PvA 51, 62.
asi kamma the sword garland torture (so correct under asi!) J iii.178; Dvs iii.35; dpa festoons of lamps Mhvs
5, 181; 34, 77 (samujjota); nakkhatta the garland of stars
VvA 167; puppha a garland or wreath of flowers Mhvs 5,
181. On ml in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 123. In compn
mla sometimes stands for ml.
-kamma garland work, garlands, festoons VvA 188.
-kra garland maker, florist, gardener (cp. Fick, Sociale
Gleiderung 38, 182) J v.292; Miln 331; DhA i.208, 334; VvA
170, 253 (vthi). -kita adorned with garlands, wreathed Vin
i.208. -gua "garland string," garlands, a cluster of garlands Dh 53 (=ml nikai "makeup" garlands DhA i.419;
i. e. a whole line of garlands made as "ekato vaika
ml" and "ubhato v. m.," one & two stalked g., cp. Vin
iii.180). ml guaparikkhitt one adorned with a string of gs.,
i. e. a marriageable woman or a courtesan M i.286=A v.264.
-gua a cluster of gs., a bouquet Vin iii.139; SnA 224; VvA
32, 111 (v. l. gua). -cumbaaka a cushion of garlands,
a chaplet of flowers DhA i.72. -dma a wreath of flowers
J ii.104. -dhara wearing a wreath J iii.179 (ratta, see also
above). -dhrin wearing a garland or wreath (on the head)
Pv iii.11 (kusuma; v. l. BB bhrin); PvA 169 (v. l. bhrin);
f. dhrin Vv 323 (uppala, of a Pet. See also bhrin). -pua
a basket for flowers DhA iii.212. -bhrin wearing a wreath
(chaplet) [the reading changes between bhrin & dhrin; the
BSk. prefers dhrin, e. g. MVastu i.124 & dhra at Divy
218] J iv.60, 82; v.45; PvA 211 (v. l. dhrin); f. bhrin J
iii.530; VvA 12; & bhr Th 1, 459 (as v. l.; T. reads dhr).
Cp. dhrin. -vaccha [vaccha here= va] a small flowering
tree or plant, an ornamental plant Vin ii.12; iii.179; Vism 172
(v. l. gaccha); DhA ii.109 (q. v. for expln : taruarukkha
puppha).
Mlaka (Maka) [fr. mla or ma] a circular (consecrated) enclosure, round, yard (cp. Geiger, Mhvs. trsl. 99: "m. is a
space marked off and usually terraced, within which sacred
functions were carried out. In the Mahvihra (Tiss' rma)
at Anurdhapura there were 32 mlakas; Dpvs xiv.78; Mhvs
15, 192. The sacred Bodhi tree e. g. was surrounded by a
Mlin (adj.) [fr. ml] 1. wearing a garland (or row) of flowers (etc.) Pv iii.91 (=mlbhrin PvA 211); f. mlin Vv 362
(nn ratana); Mhvs 18, 30 (vividhadhaja mahbodhi).
2. (perhaps to mla) bearing a stain of, muddy, in phea
with a surface (or is it garland? ) of scum Miln 260. 3.
what does it mean in paca, said at J vi.497 of a wild ani589
Mlin
Mscita
Maka [a Non Aryan word, although the Dhtm 395 gives roots
mal & mall in meaning "dhraa" (see under mala). Cp. malorika] a stand, viz. for alms bowl (patta) Vin ii.114, or for
drinking vessel (pnya) J vi.85.
Msa1 [cp. Vedic msa, & ms; Gr. (Ionic ); Av. mh
(moon & month); Lat. mensis; Oir. m; Goth. mna=moon;
Ohg. mno, mnt month. Fr. *m to measure: see minti] a
month, as the 12th part of the year. The 12 months are (beginning with what chronologically corresponds to our middle of March): Citta (Citra), Veskha, Jeha, sha, Svaa,
Pohapda, Assayuja, Kattika, Mgasira, Phussa, Mgha,
Phagguna. As to the names cp. nakkhatta. Usually in acc.,
used adverbially; nom. rare, e. g. aha mso half
month VvA 66; shi msa VvA 307 (=gimhna pacchima msa); pl. dve ms PvA 34 (read mse); cattro
gimhna ms KhA 192 (of which the 1st is Citra, otherwise called Pahama gimha "1st summer" and Bla vasanta "premature spring"). Instr. pl. cathi msehi Miln.
82; PvA i.1012 . acc. pl. as adv.: dasamse 10 months J
i.52; bahu mse PvA 135; also nt. chammsni 6 months
S iii.155. Freq. acc. sg. collectively: a period of..., e. g.
temsa 3 months DhsA 15; PvA 20; catu DA i.83; PvA 96;
satta PvA 20; dasa PvA 63; aha a fortnight Vin iv.117.
On msa (& f. ms), as well as shortened form ma see
pua.
-puat fullness or completion of the month DA i.140;
-matta (adv.) for the duration of a month PvA 19.
Mscita
Mitta
510) shows, that the reading of Vbh 386 is a very old one. Bdhgh takes msa in the sense of msa2 & expls mscita as "wet
bean" (tinta mso), thus omitting expln of cita. The passage at
VbhA 510 runs: "ettha pana mscita nma tintamso, yath
tintamso garuko hoti, eva garuko ti adhippyo."
Mija (nt.) & mij (f.) [Vedic majjan (fr. majj?); on form see
Geiger. P.Gr. 91 , & cp. Pischel, Prk. Gr. 74, 101] marrow, pith, kernel Vin i.25 (in sequence chavi, camma, masa,
nahru, ahi, mij); Vism 235 (id.); Kh iii. (ahi, f. cp.
KhA 52, nt.); J iv.402 (tla pith of the palm); Mhvs 28. 28
(panasa, f., kernels of the seeds of the jak fruit).
-rsi heap of marrow Vism 260 (=matthalunga).
Mijaka=mija, only in tela inner kernels of tila seed, made
into a cake PvA 51. See do2 .
Mita [Vedic mita, pp. of m, minti, to measure; also in meaning "moderate, measured," cp. in same sense Gr. ]
measured, in measure D i.54 (doa a doa measure full); Sn
300 (bhgaso m. measured in harmonious proportions, i. e.
stately); Pv i.1013 (id.); J iii.541. amita unlimited, without
measure, boundless, in Ep. amit bha of boundless lustre
Sdhp 255. Also N. of a Buddha.
-hra measured, i. e. limited food Sn 707. -bhin
speaking measuredly, i. e. in moderation Dh 227; J iv.252.
Migav (f.) [=Sk. mgay, cp. Geiger, P.Gr. 461 ] hunt, hunting,
deer stalking PvA 154 (padesa). Usually in devasika
migava gacchati to go out for a day's hunting J iv.267; or
as pp. ekadivasa migava gata VvA 260; ekha m. g.
Mhvs 5, 154.
Mig (f.) [f. of miga, cp. Epic Sk. mg] a doe Th 1, 109; J v.215;
vi.549; DhA i.48.
Mitta (m. nt.) [cp. Vedic mitra, m. & nt., friend; Av. mipro,
friend] friend. Usually m., although nt. occurs in meaning
"friend," in sg. (Nett 164) & pl. (Sn 185, 187); in meaning
"friendship" at J vi.375 (=mittabhva C.). The half scientific, half popular etym. of mitta, as given at VbhA 108, is
"mettyant ti mitt, minant ti v m.; sabba guyhesu anto
pakkhipant ti attho" (the latter: "they enclose in all that is hidden"). Two kinds of friends are distinguished at Nd2 510 (in
exegesis of Sn 37 & 75), viz. grika (a house or lay
friend) and angrika (a homeless or clericalfriend). The
former is possessed of all ordinary qualities of kindness and
love, the latter of special virtues of mind & heart. A friend
who acts as a sort of Mentor, or spiritual adviser, is called a
kalya-mitta (see under kalya). Mitta is often combd
with similar terms, devoting relationship or friendship, e. g.
with amacc colleagues and ti-slohita blood relations,
in ster. phrase at Vin ii.126; A i.222; Sn p. 104; PvA 28; cp.
ti-mitt relatives & friends Pv i.59 ; suhada ("dear heart")
591
Mitta
Milyati
Mittat (f.) () [abstr. fr. mitta] state of being a friend, friendship, in kalya being a good friend, friendship as a helper
(see kalya) D iii.274; Vism 107.
Mitti (f.) [a by form of metti] friendship J i.468 (=metti C.).
Mithu (adv.) [cp. Vedic mith & P. micch; mith, cp. mitha alternately, Av. mi wrongly; Goth. misso one another, missa
leiks different; Ger. E. prefix mis i. e. wrongly: Ger.
missetat wrong doing=misdeed; Lat. mto to change, mutuus reciprocal; Goth. maipms present=Ags. mapum; mith in
Vedic Sk. is "to be opposed to each other," whereas in Vedic
mithuna the notion of "pair" prevails. See also methuna] opposite, reciprocally, contrary Sn 825, 882 (taken by Nd1 163
& 290, on both passages identically, as n. pl. of adj. instead
of adv., & expld by "dve jan dve kalaha kraka" etc.).
-bheda [evidently in meaning of mitta bheda "break of
friendship," although mithu means "adversary," thus perhaps
"breaking, so as to cause opposition"] breaking of alliance, enmity D ii.76; J iv.184 (here with v. l. mitta); Kvu 314.
Milakkha [cp. Ved. Sk. mleccha barbarian, root mlecch, onomat. after the strange sounds of a foreign tongue, cp. babbhara & mammana] a barbarian, foreigner, outcaste, hillman
S v.466; J vi.207; DA i.176; SnA 236 (mahtissa thera
Np.), 397 (bhs foreign dialect). The word occurs also in
form milakkhu (q. v.).
Milakkhu [the Prk. form (A Mgadh, cp. Pischel, Prk. Gr.
105, 233) for P. milakkha] a non Aryan D iii.264; Th 1,
965 (rajana "of foreign dye" trsl.; Kern, Toev. s. v. translates
"vermiljoen kleurig"). As milakkhuka at Vin iii.28, where
Bdhgh expls by "Andha Damil' di."
Milca [by form to milakkha, vi *milaccha>*milacca>
milca: Geiger, P.Gr. 622 ; Kern, Toev. s. v.] a wild man
of the woods, non Aryan, barbarian J iv.291 (not with
C.=janapad), cp. ludd m. ibid., and milca putt J v.165
(where C. also expls by bhojaputta, i. e. son of a villager).
592
Milyati
Mukha
Millik at PvA 144 in passage pasukla dhovitv bhisicimillika ca katv adsi is to be read either as "abhisici
cimillika ca k." or "abhisicitv muduka ca k."
Missa (adj.) [orig. pp. of mi, cp. Vedic mira. Sk. mirayati, mekayati; Gr. & ; Lat. misceo, mixtus;
Ags. miscian=mix; Ohg. miskan. Dhtp 631 "sammissa"]
1. mixed (with: ); various Vin i.33 (kesa, jat etc.=a
mixture of, various); Th 1, 143; J iii.95, 144 (udaka paa
ygu); Pv i.92 (miss kiak). nt. missa as adv. "in a mixed
way" Vism 552=VbhA 161 (+dvidh). 2. accompanied by
(), having company or a retinue, a title of honour in names,
also as polite address [cp. Sk. mira & raya mira] J v.153
(voc. f. misse), 154 (f. miss). 3. missa is changed
to miss in compn with k and bh (like Sk.), thus in missbhva (sexual) intercourse, lit. mixed state, union J ii.330;
iv.471; v.86; VbhA 107; and miss-bhta mixed, coupled,
united J v.86 (=hatthena hattha gahetv kya missbhva upagata C.). Cp. sam.
-kes (f.) "mixed hair," Ep. of a heavenly maiden or Apsaras Vv 6014 (expld at VvA 280 as "ratta mldhi missita
kesava"). The m. missa-kesa occurs as a term for ascetics (with mua) at Vism 389.
Missaka (adj. n.) [fr. missa] 1. mixed, combined J ii.8 (phalika rajata pabbata mountain of silver mixed with crystal); VbhA 16 (lokiya lokuttara); usually , like hra
mixed food DhA ii.101; uppda mixed portents, a main
chapter of the art of prognosticating (cp. Bhat Sahit
ch. 86: mirak' dhyya) Miln 178; bhatta=hra SnA 97;
Mhbv 27. 2. (m.) an attendant, follower; f. missik DhA
i.211 (Smvati). 3. (nt.) N. of a pleasure grove in heaven
(lit. the grove of bodily union), one of the 3: Nandana, M.,
Phrusaka J vi.278; Vism 424. 4. (pl. missak) a group of
devas, mentioned at D ii.260 in list of popular gods (cp. missa
2 and missakes).
Mukha (nt.) [Vedic mukha, fr. Idg. *mu, onomat., cp. Lat.
mu facere, Gr. , Mhg. mgen, Lat. mgio to moo
(of cows), to make the sound "moo"; Ohg. mwen to cry,
muckazzen to talk softly; also Gr. word, "myth"; Ohg.
mla=Ger. maul; Ags. mule snout, etc. Vedic mka silent,
dumb=Lat. mutus=E. mute] 1. the mouth Sn 608, 1022 (with
ref. to the long tongue, pahta jivha, of the Buddha or
Mahpurisa); J ii.7; DA i.287 (uttna clear mouthed, i. e.
easy to understand, cp. D i.116); PvA 11, 12 (pti), 264
(mukhena). 2. the face J vi.218 (uaja m.); PvA 74, 75,
77; karoti to make a face (i. e. grimace) Vism 343.
adho face downward Vin ii.78; opp. upari (q. v.); assu
with tearful face Dh 67; PvA 39; see assu. dum (adj.)
sad or unfriendly looking J ii.393; vi.343; scurrilous J v.78;
bhadra brightfaced PvA 149; ruda crying Pv i.112 . 3.
entrance, mouth (of a river) Mhvs 8, 12; ya entrance (lit.
opening), i. e. cause or means of income DA i.218; ukk
the opening of a furnace, a goldsmith's smelting pot A i.257;
Sn 686; J vi.217; 574. ubhato-mukha having 2 openings M
i.57. sandhi opening of the cleft PvA 4. Hence: 4. cause,
ways, means, reason, by way of J iii.55 by way of a gift (dnamukhe); iv.266 (bahhi mukhehi). apya cause of ruin
or loss A ii.166; iv.283. 5. front part, front, top, in s
of the carriage pole S i.224=J i.203. Hence: 6. the top
of anything, front, head, best part; adj. topmost, foremost Sn
568 (aggihutta mukh ya), 569 (nakkhattna mukha
cando; cp. Vin i.246); VbhA 332 (=uttama, mukha bhta v). Der. adj. mokkha & pmokkha (q. v.). Note. A
poetical instr. sg. mukhas is found at Pv i.23 & i.32 , as if the
nom. were mukho (s stem). The abl. mukh is used as
Missakatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. missaka] mixing, mixture, combination with () Tikp 291.
Missana (nt.) [fr. misseti] mixing Dhtp 338.
Missita [pp. of misseti] mixed, intermingled Sn 243; J v.460;
PvA 198 (dhaa ssapa tela); VvA 280 (see under missa
kes).
Misseti [Caus. of mi, Vedic mirayati] 1. to mix Miln 126
(maya missayissma); PvA 191 (palse slhi saddhi).
2. to bring together in cohabitation, to couple J v.154 (C.: kilesana misseti). pp. missita.
Mihati is given as root mih in 2 meanings at Dhtp, viz. (1) sa
hasana (No. 328), i. e. a kind of laugh, for smi, as in mihita.
(2) secana (No. 342).
Mihita (nt.) [pp. of smi; this is the inverted diaeretic (Pli)
form (smita>*hmita>*mhita>mihita) for the other (Sk.) form
smita (q. v.). The Dhtp (328) puts root down as mih] a smile J
iii.419; v.452; vi.504. mihita-pubba with smiles Th 1, 460
593
Mukha
Mucchacikat
adv. "in front of, before," in cpd. sam & param, e. g. PvA
13. See each sep.
-dhna (1) the bit of a bridle M i.446; (2) setting of the
mouth, i. e. mouth enclosure, rim of the m.; in m. siliha a well connected, well defined mouth contour DhsA 15 (not with trsl. "opens lightly," but better with
note "is well adjusted," see Expos. 19, where write dhna
for dna). -siya (? cp. sita1 ) to be eaten by the mouth
DhsA 330 (mukhena asitabba). -ullokana looking into a person's face, i. e. cheerful, bright, perhaps also flattering DhA
ii.193 (as olokana). -ullokika flattering (cp. above) Nd1 249
(puthu Satthrna m. puthujjana); PvA 219. -odaka water
for rinsing the mouth Nd2 391 =Miln 370; VvA 65; DhA ii.19;
iv.28. -ja born in (or from) the mouth, i. e. a tooth J vi.219.
-tua a beak VvA 227 [cp. BSk. mukhatuaka Divy 387].
-dugga one whose mouth is a difficult road, i. e. one who uses
his mouth (speech) badly Sn 664 (v. l. dukkha). -dsi blemishes of the face, a rash on the face DA i.223 (m. dosa ibid.).
-dvra mouth opening PvA 180. -dhovana-hna place for
rinsing the mouth, "lavatory" DhA ii.184. -puchana wiping
one's mouth Vin i.297. -pra filling the mouth, a mouthful,
i. e. as much as to fill the mouth J vi.350. -praka mouth
filling Vism 106. -bheri a musical instrument, "mouth
drum," mouthorgan (?) Nd2 219 B; SnA 86. -makkaika
a grimace (like that of a monkey) of the face J ii.70, 448 (T.
makkaiya). -vai "opening circumference," i. e. brim,
edge, rim DhA ii.5 (of the Lohakumbhi purgatory, cp. J iii.43
lohakumbha mukhavai); DhA iii.58 (of a gong). -vaa
the features PvA 122, 124. -vikra contortion of the mouth
J ii.448. -vika (=vikra) grimace SnA 30. -sankocana
distortion or contraction of the mouth, as a sign of displeasure
DhA ii.270; cp. mukha sankoca Vism 26. -saata controlling one's mouth (i. e. speech) Dh 363, cp. DhA iv.93.
Mucchacikat
Mua
ing interpreted by Bdhgh as "wavering" (cal) is chambhitatta "paralysis," expld as "sakalasarra calana" at DA i.50.
The expression mucchacikat reminds us of the term
kaukacukat.
Mucch [fr. mrch] 1. fainting, swoon PvA 174. 2. infatuation A ii.10 (kma). Sn 328; Dhs 1059.
Mucchita [pp. of mucchati] 1. fainted, swooning, in a faint J
i.243; DhA ii.112; PvA 62, 174, 258. 2. distraught, infatuated S i.61, 204; A i.274; D iii.46 (a); It 92; J iii.432; v.274
(C. for pagiddha & gadhita). Cp. pa.
595
Mua
Mutta
Mutta
Muddika
Muttaka (adj.) [mutta1 +ka] only in cpd. antar one who is released in the meantime Vin ii.167.
Muttak (f.)=mutt; maya made of pearls Mhvs 27, 33.
Muttat (f.) [abstr. fr. mutta1 ] state of being liberated, freedom
J v.480.
Mutt (f.) [cp. Sk. mukt] a pearl Vv 377 (cita); Pv ii.75
(+veuriya); Mhvs 30, 66. Eight sorts of pearls are enumd at
Mhvs. 11, 14, viz. haya gaja rath' malak valay'anguli
vehak kakudha phala pkatik, i.e. horse , elephant , waggon , myrobalan , bracelet , ring ,
kakudha fruit , and common pearls.
-hra a string or necklace of pearls J i.383; vi.489; DhA
i.85; SnA 78 (simile); Vism 312. -jla a string (net) of pearls
J iv.120; Mhvs 27, 31; VvA 198. -dma garland or wreath of
p. Mhvs 30, 67 (so T. for v. l. maya). -vali string of pearls
VvA 169. -sikk string of pearls VvA 244.
Mutti (f.) [fr. muc, cp. Sk. mukti] release, freedom, emancipation Sn 344 (muty apekho); Nd1 88, 89 (+vimutti &
parimutti); PvA 35, 46; Sdhp 492. Cp. vi.
Muttika [fr. mutt] a pearl vendor, dealer in pearls Miln 262.
Muddika (adj. n.) [fr. mudd] one who practises mudd (i. e.
597
Muddika
Muyhati
Muddik1 (f.) [fr. mudd] a seal ring, signet ring, fingerring J i.134; iii.416; iv.439; DhA i.394; ii.4 (a ring given by
the king to the keeper of the city gates as a sign of authority, and withdrawn when the gates are closed at night); iv.222.
anguli finger ring, signetring Vin ii.106; J iv.498; v.467.
Similarly as at DhA ii.4 (muddika harpeti) muddik is
fig. used in meaning of "authority," command; in phrase muddika deti to give the order, to command Miln 379 (with ref.
to the captain of a ship).
Muni [cp. Vedic muni, originally one who has made the vow of
silence. Cp. Chh. Up. viii.5, 2; Pss. of the Br. 132 note. Connected with mka: see under mukha. This etym. preferred
by Aufrecht: Halyudha p. 311. Another, as favoured by
Pischel (see under munti) is "inspired, moved by the spirit."
Pli explns (popular etym.) are given by Dhammapla at VvA
114 & 231: see munana] a holy man, a sage, wise man. I.
The term which was specialised in Brahmanism has acquired
a general meaning in Buddhism & is applied by the Buddha
to any man attaining perfection in self restraint and insight. So the word is capable of many sided application
and occurs frequently in the oldest poetic anthologies, e. g.
Sn 207 221 (the famous Muni sutta, mentioned Divy
20, 35; SnA 518; expld SnA 254 277), 414, 462, 523 sq.,
708 sq., 811 sq., 838, 844 sq., 912 sq., 946, 1074 & passim
(see Pj. Index p. 749); Dh 49, 225, 268 sq., 423. Cp.
general passages & explns at Pv ii.113 ; ii.133 (expld at PvA
163 by "attahita ca parahita ca munti jnt ti muni"); Miln
90 (munibhva "munihood," meditation, self denial, abrogation); DhA iii.521 (munayo=moneyya paipadya maggaphala patt asekha munayo), 395 (here expld with ref.
to orig. meaning tuhbhva "state of silence" =mona).
II. The Com. & Abhidhamma literature have produced several schedules of muni qualities, esp. based on the 3 fold
division of character as revealed in action, speech & thought
(kya, vac, mano). Just as these 3 are in general exhibited in good or bad ways of living (sucarita & duccarita), they are applied to a deeper quality of saintship in kya
moneyya, vacmoneyya, mano moneyya; or Muni
hood in action, speech & thought; and the muni himself is
characterised as a kya muni, vac & mano. Thus runs
the long exegesis of muni at Nd2 514a =Nd1 57. Besides this
the same chapter (514b ) gives a division of 6 munis, viz.
agra- muni, anagra (the bhikkhus), sekha, asekha (the
Arahants), pacceka (the Paccekabuddhas), muni (the Tathgatas). The parallel passage to Nd2 514a at A i.273 gives a
muni as kya muni, vc & ceto (under the 3 moneyyni).
Mummura [*Sk. murmura, lit. crackling, rustling; cp. Lat. murmur=E. murmur, Gr. to rustle, Ohg. murmurn &
murmuln=Ger. murmeln; all to Idg. *mrem, to which Sk.
marmara: see P. mammara & cp. murumur] crackling fire,
hot ashes, burning chaff J ii.134.
Muyhati
Mla
as rga, dosa & moha form a set, so do the verbs rajjati, dussati, muyhati, e. g. Miln 386 (rajjasi rajjanyesu, dussanyesu
dussasi, muyhase mohaniyesu). Otherwise rare as finite verb;
only DhsA 254 (in defn of moha) & Sdhp 282, 605 (so read
for mayhate). pp. mha & muddha1 .
Muyhana (nt.) [fr. muyhati] bewilderment, stupefaction, infatuation DA i.195 (rajjana dussana m.).
Muhutta (m. & nt.) [Vedic muhrta, fr. muhur suddenly] a moment, a very short period of time, an inkling, as we should
say "a second." Its duration may be seen from descending
series of time connotations at PvA 198 (under jtakamma,
prophesy by astrologers at the birth of a child): rsi, nakkhatta,
tithi, m.; and from defn at Nd2 516 by "khaa, laya, vassa, attha." Usually in oblique cases: muhuttena in a
short time, in a twinkling of an eye PvA 55; muhutta (acc.)
a moment, even a second Sn 1138 (m. api); Dh 65 (id.), 106;
PvA 43.
Muraja [cp. Epic. & Class. Sk. muraja, Prk. murava: Pischel,
Prk. Gr. 254] 1. a small drum, tambourine J v.390; Vv 353
(=bheri VvA 161); 8418 (=mudinga VvA 340); SnA 370.
2. a kind of girdle Vin ii.136.
Murumur (indecl.) [onomat. to sound root m, see mammara
& mummura] the grinding, crackling sound of the teeth when
biting bones, "crack"; in phrase m. ti khdati to eat or bite up
to bits J i.342; v.21 (of a Yakkhin, eating a baby).
Murumurpeti=murumuryati J ii.127; iii.134; v.196 (etv khdati).
Muhuttika (adj.) [fr. muhutta] only for a moment; (f.) a temporary wife, in enumn of several kinds of wives at Vin iii.139
& VvA 73. Syn. tan khaik.
Mula & Mul (f.) [cp. Vedic mullin. Zimmer, Altind Leben
70 mentions Bisa, luka & Mullin as edible roots of lotus
kinds. Geiger, P.Gr. 12 & 43 puts mula =Sk. mla] the
stalk of the lotus: mul Vin i.215 (bhisa+); muli J vi.530
(=mulaka C.); mulik Vin i.215 (bhisa+); bhisa-mula
(nt.) (collective cpd.) fibre & stalks Vin ii.201=S ii.269; iv.94;
v.39; Vism 361; VbhA 66. muli-puppha a lotus Th 1,
1089.
Musati [in this connection=m in an active sense, as qusi Denom. fr. mus. Not to mu to steal, which is given at Dhtp
491 with "theyya"] to betray, beguile, bewilder, dazzle, in
cakkhni m. D ii.183 (but trsln "destructive to the eyes");
musati 'va nayana Vv 353 (cp. VvA 161).
Musala (m. nt.) [cp. Vedic musala. The etym. is probably to be connected with md (see maddati)] 1. a pestle
(whilst udukkhala is "mortar," cp. J ii.428 & see udukkhala)
D i.166=Pug 55; DhA ii.131 (+suppa). 2. a club A ii.241;
VvA 121. 3. a crowbar J i.199; PvA 258 (daa).
Musalaka (nt.) [fr. musala] a little pestle, a toy for little girls
DhsA 321.
Musalika only in cpd. danta (an ascetic) who uses his teeth as a
pestle J iv.8 (an aggi pakka khdati, eats food uncooked,
only crushed by his teeth).
Mus (adv.) [Vedic m, fr. m, lit. "neglectfully"] falsely,
wrongly; uually with verbs vadati, bhanati, bhsati & brti
to speak falsely, to tell a lie. A i.149 (opp. sacca); Sn 122,
158, 397, 400, 757, 883, 967, 1131; Nd1 291; Pv i.33 ; VvA 72
(=abhta ataccha); SnA 19; PvA 16, 152.
-vda lying, a falsehood, a lie D i.4, 25; iii.68 sq.; 92 sq.,
106, 170, 195, 232, 269; M i.414; Sn 129, 242 (cp. D ii.174);
Dh 246; Pug 57; Nd1 268; Vv 158 ; Pv i.68 ; VbhA 383 (var.
degrees); PvA 16; Sdhp 65; explicitly at Nd1 152, 394; Nd2
515. Cp. mosavajja. -vdin speaking falsely, lying D i.138;
iii.15, 82; Dh 176; Pug 29, 38.
Mussati [=m, myati; to which mus "wrongly," quite diff. in
origin fr. micch: m>mithy. Dhtm 437 defines by "sam599
Mla
Mett
Mecaka (adj.) [cp. Vedic mecaka] black, dark blue DhsA 13.
Mejjati [cp. Vedic midyati, to mid, see meda Dhtp 160, 413 &
Dhtm 641 give mid with meaning "snehane"] to be fat, to be
full of fat; fig. to be in love with or attracted by, to feel affection (this meaning only as a "petitio principii" to explain
mett) DhsA 192 (v. l. mijjati; =siniyhati).
Mlika (adj. n.) [fr. mla] 1. (m.) root vendor Miln 331.
2. (adj. ) belonging to the feet (pda), a footman, lackey
J i.122, 438; ii.300 sq. (N. of the king of Janasandha, Gmai
caa); iii.417; v.128; vi.30. 3. in rukkha one who
lives at the foot of a tree: see under rukkha, where also mlikatta.
Metta (adj. nt.) [cp. Vedic maitra "belonging to Mitra"; Epic Sk.
maitra "friendly," fr. mitra] friendly, benevolent, kind as adj.
at D iii.191 (mettena kya kammena etc.), 245 ( vac
kamma); as nt. for mett in cpds. of mett (cp. mettasa)
and by itself at D i.227 (metta+citta), perhaps also at Sn
507.
Mett (f.) [abstr. fr. mitra=mitta, cp. Vedic maitra. According to Asl. 192 (cp. Expos. 258) derived fr. mid to love, to
be fat: "mejjati mett siniyhat ti attho"] love, amity, sympathy, friendliness, active interest in others. There are var. defns
& explns of mett: the stereotype "metti mettyan mettyitatta mett cetovimutti" Vbh 86=272; occurring as "metti
mettyan mettyitatta anud anudyana anudyitatta
hitesit anukamp abypdo... kusalamla" at Nd1 488 &
Dhs 1056 (where T. metta for metti, but see Dhs trsl.2 253).
By Bdhgh at SnA 128 expld in distinction fr. karu (which
Mett
Merita
puts it beyond doubt, that meda is the correct reading for the
v. l. megha at all places.
Medaka [meda+ka] in go a precious stone of light red (or
golden) colour (cp. meda vaa psa) VvA 111.
Medin (f.) [of adj. medin, fr. meda fat, but cp. Vedic medin an
associate or companion fr. mid in meaning to be friendly] the
earth (also later Sk.) Mhvs 5, 185; 15, 47; Vism 125.
Medeti [Denom. fr. meda] to become fat M i.238.
Medha [Vedic medha, in ava, go, purua etc.] sacrifice only in
assa horse sacrifice & purisa human s. (q. v.). e.g. at A
iv.151; Sn 303. Cp. mejjha.
Medhaga (& ka) [cp. Sk. methana abusive speech; Vedic
methati fr. mith to scold] quarrel, strife Vin ii.88 (ka); Th
2, 344; Sn 893, 894 (=kalaha, bhaana, viggaha, vivda Nd1
302, 303), 935 (T. ka; Nd1 402 & 406 ga. with v. l. SS
ka); Dh 6; J iii.334 (ka; C.=kalaha), 488 (ga; C. ka expln
kalaha); DhA i.65.
Medhasa (adj.) [=Vedic medhas, as a- base] having wisdom or
intelligence, wise, only in cpds. bhri of great wisdom Sn
1131; & su [Ved. sumedhas] very wise Vv 222 (=sundara
paa VvA 111); Pv iii.77 (both combd as bhri su
medhasa, hardly correct; v. l. M. bhrimedhasa PvA 205).
Metti & Mett (f.) [cp. Epic Sk. maitr] love, friendship J iii.79;
v.208; VbhA 75. See also defn of mett.
Methuna (adj. nt.) [fr. Vedic mithuna pair, der. fr. mithu. Cp.
micch] 1. (adj.) relating to sexual intercourse, sexual, usually with dhamma, sex intercourse, in phrase dhamma
paisevati to cohabit Vin i.96; D ii.133; Sn 291, 704; Nd1 139;
Vism 418; SnA 536. (m.) an associate J vi.294 (na rj hoti
methuno). 2. (nt.) sexual intercourse [Vedic maithuna] D
i.4; iii.9, 88 sq., 133; Sn 400, 609, 814, 835=DhA i.202; Nd1
139, 145; Pug 67; Vism 51.
Medhi (f.) [Vedic meth pillar, post (to bind cattle to); BSk. medhi
Divy 244; Prk. mehi Pischel Gr. 221. See for etym. Walde,
Lat. Wtb. s. v. meta] pillar, part of a stpa [not in the Canon?].
Medhin (adj. n.)=medha in adj. use; only in cpd. dummedhin (=dum medha) foolish, ignorant Dh 26 (bl
dummedhino jan;=nippa DhA i.257).
Meda [Vedic medas (nt.) fr. mid, see etym. under mada] fat S
i.124; Sn 196; J iii.484 (ajakara meda=ajakara meda
C.); Kh iii. (expld at Vism 262 as "thnasineha" thick or coagulated fluid or gelatine); Vism 361; VbhA 66, 225, 245, 249.
-kathlika a cooking pot or saucepan for frying fat A
iv.377 (in simile with kya); DhA ii.179 (similar); Vism 195
(in compar.). -gahi (as medo gahi, Sk. influence!) an
abscess of fat, fatty knot or tumour, mentioned as a disease at
Miln 149. -vaa fatcoloured; in cpd. psna a stone of
the (golden) colour of fat found in the Himlaya mountains Sn
447 (=medapia sadisa SnA 393); Mhvs 1, 39; 30, 57 sq.,
96; 31, 121; see Geiger's note Mhvs (P.T.S. ed.) p. 355, who
601
Merita
Modara
Moca1 [cp. *Sk. moca & moc] the plantain or banana tree' Musa,
sapientum Vin i.246 (pna drink made fr. M. s.; one of the 8
permitted drinks); J iv.181; v.405, 465.
Moca2 [root noun of moc, Caus. of muc] delivery, setting free
Dhtm 631, 751, where Dhtp in same context reads mocana.
Mocana (nt.) [fr. moceti] 1. setting free, delivering DhA iii.199
(parissay); Dhtp 376, 539; Dhtm 609. Cp. moca2 . 2. letting loose, discharging, in assu shedding tears PvA 18. Cp.
vi.
Mocaya (adj.) [qusi grd. formation fr. moceti] to be freed, able
to escape, in dum difficult to obtain freedom J vi.234.
Mokkha2 (adj.) [fr. mukha 6; Vddhi form=*maukhya] the headmost, first, foremost, in series aggo seho m. uttamo A ii.95,
where the customary tradition reads pmokkha (see under
mah & cp. Nd2 502A).
Mocetar [M. ag. fr. moceti] one who sets free, a deliverer Nd1
32.
Moa [BSk. moa, Prk. mra: Pischel 166, 238] see muto.
Motar [n. ag. fr. munti, more likely direct der. fr. muta, pp.
of man, q. v.] one who feels (or senses) that which can be
felt (or sensed), in phrase "muta na maati motabba (so
read) na maati motra" he does not identify what is sensed
with that which is not sensed, nor with what is to be sensed
(motabba) nor with him who senses A ii.25; where motar &
motabba correspond to sotar & sotabba & dahar & dahabba.
The word does not occur in the similar passage M i.3.
Modaka [cp. Epic. Sk. modaka in meaning 1] 1. a sort of sweetmeat S i.148; A i.130; iii.76; Pug 32; PvA 4. 2. receptacle
for a letter, an envelope, wrapper or such like J vi.385 (paa
assa anto pakkhipitv). May, however, be same as 1.
Modati [mud, cp. Vedic moda joy Dhtp 146: tose] to rejoice, to
enjoy oneself, to be happy A iii.40; Sn 561; Pv i.54 ; ii.121 .
pp. mudita (q. v.). For mohayamna at DhA i.275 the better
reading is modayamna rejoicing, a ppr. med.
Modana (nt.) [fr. mud] satisfaction, rejoicing Sdhp 229. Cp.
sam.
Modan (f.) [fr. mud] blending (?); Cy. expln at DhsA 143 of
term modan.
Mogha (adj.) [the Vedic mogha for the later Sk. moha, which is
the P. noun moha; fr. muh. BSk. mohapurua e. g. at Av
ii.177; MVastu iii.440] empty, vain, useless, stupid, foolish D
i.187 (opp. to sacca), 199; Sn 354; Dh 260 (jia grown old
602
Modara
Moheti
obhsento," i. e. shining.
Moha [fr. muh, see muyhati; cp. Sk. moha & Vedic mogha]
stupidity, dullness of mind & soul, delusion, bewilderment,
infatuation D iii.146, 175, 182, 214, 270; Vin iv.144, 145;
Sn 56, 74, 160, 638, 847; Vbh 208, 341, 391, 402; Pug 16;
Tikp 108, 122, 259. Defd as "dukkhe aa etc., moha
pamoha, sammoha, avijj' ogha etc.," by Nd2 99 & Vbh 362;
as "muyhanti tena, saya v muyhati, muyhana matta
eva v tan ti moho" and "cittassa andha bhva lakkhao,
aalakkhao v" at Vism 468. Often coupled with rga
& dosa as one of the 3 cardinal affects of citta, making a man
unable to grasp the higher truths and to enter the Path: see under rga (& Nd2 p. 237, s. v. rga where the wide range of
application of this set is to be seen). Cp. the 3 fires: rg
aggi, dos aggi, moh aggi It 92; D iii.217 also rga
kkhaya, dosa, moha VbhA 31 sq. On combn with rga,
lobha & dosa see dosa2 and lobha. On term see also Dhs
trsl. 33, 362, 441; Cpd 16, 18, 41, 113, 146. See further
D i.80 (samoha citta); Nd1 15, 16 (with lobha & dosa);
VvA 14; PvA 3. amoha absence of bewilderment Vbh 210
(+alobha, adosa; as the 3 kusala mlni: cp. mla 3), 402
(id., as kusala hetu). Cp. pa, sam.
-antara (personal) quality of bewilderment (lit. having
m. inside) Sn 478 (taken by C. as "cause of m.," i. e. kraa,
paccaya SnA 411; cp. antara=kraa under antara I 2 b.).
-ussada quality of dullness Nd1 72, 413. -kkhaya destruction of infatuation Vbh 73; VbhA 51. -carita one whose habit
is infatuation Nett 90 (+rgacarita & dosacarita). -tama the
darkness of bewilderment MA 1. -dhamma anything that is
bewildering or infatuating Sn 276. -pruta covered or obstructed by delusion Pv iv.334 . -magga being on the road of
infatuation Sn 347. -salla the sting of bewilderment Nd1 59.
Moragu [cp. (scientific) Sk. mayraka] a tender grass (Achyranthes aspera) Vin i.196.
Morin (f.) [fr. mora] a peahen Miln 67.
Mohanaka (adj.) [fr. mohana] leading astray, bewildering, leading into error Vin iv.144.
Moli (m. & f.) [cp. Epic Sk. mauli, fr. mla] a chignon; crest,
turban J i.64; v.431; Mhvs 11, 28; DA i.136 (v. l. moi).
Also found (as molin, adj.?) in Np. Yama moli: see under yakkha 5.
-galla (?) fat Vin i.85 (expld by thla sarra; vv. ll.
moi & mukalla). -baddha one who has his hair tied into a
top knot 128, 243, 348.
Mosa () (adj. nt.) [the gua (compn ) form of mus] belonging to or untruth, false ; only in cpds. -dhamma of a
deceitful nature, false, A v.84 (kma); Sn 739, 757; & -vajja
[fr. mus vda] false speaking, lie, untruth S i.169; Sn
819, 866, 943; Nd1 152, 265; Nd2 515; Vv 126 .
Mosalla (adj.) [fr. musala] worthy of being slain (with clubs),
punishable A ii.241.
603
Ya
Y
-Y- combn consonant (sandhi), inserted (euphonically) between 2
vowels for the avoidance of hiatus. It has arisen purely phonetically from i as a sort of "gliding" or semi vowel within a
word, where the syllable division was in regular speech more
openly felt than in the written language, e. g. pari y
panna (Pli) corresponds to Sk. pary panna, similarly
pari y osna=Sk. paryosna. Thus inserted after a before i or e: chay im dis D iii.188; ta y ida Sn
1077; Pv i.33 ; tava y ida Sn 352; na y ida S
ii.278; mama y ida Sn 806; na y idha Sn 790;
m y idha Vin i.54; yassay etdis paj D ii.267 (v.
l. ss for T yassa s etdis); satiy y eta adhivacana M ii.260; na y imassa Pv iv.12 . After i before
a: pvisi y assama J v.405; khai y asmani J
iii.433; y y aa J i.429 (where C. expls : ya kro
paisandhi karo). Cp. yeva for eva. Note. At J vi.106
ya y ime jane is to be taken as ye ime jane; the spelling
ay for e being found elsewhere as well. Cp. the following ta
y ime jane.
Ya [pron. rel. base; Vedic ya=Gr. who; cp. Goth. jabai if,
ei rel. part. An amplification of the dem. pron. base *i ,
*ei (cp. aya). See on detail Brugmann, "Die indogerm.
Pronomina" in Ber. d. schs. Ges. LX. 41 sq.] I. Forms.
(See inflection also at Geiger, P.Gr. 110.) The decl. is similar to that of ta; among the more rarely found forms we only
mention
the foll.: sg. nom. m. yo with by form (in hiatus) yv-, as
yv'ya=yo aya M i.258; yv'ssa=yo assa M i.137. Notice
the lengthening of the subsequent vowel. An unsettled ya is
to be found at J v.424 (Fausbll remarks "for yass"?; perhaps
to be combd with preceding pacapatik; C. on p. 427 expls
ya kro niptamatto) abl. yasm in adv. use; yamh
Dh 392. loc. yamhi Dh 261, 372, 393. f. loc. yassa
A iii.151 (see below). See further adv. use of cases (below
ii.5). At Pv ii.16 yhi is doubtful (perhaps imper.=yajahi,
of yajati; C. leaves it unexpld ).
Special mention must be made of the nt. n. acc. sg.,
where both ya and yad are found. The (Vedic) form yad
(Ved. yat) has been felt more like ya+expletive (Sandhi
) d, and is principally found in adv. use and certain archaic
phrases, whereas ya represents the usual (Pali) form (like
tad and ta). See more under II. A Mgadhized form is
ye (after se=ta), found at D ii.278 (see Geiger 1052 & 1102 .
Cp. Trenckner, Notes 75.). The expression ye-bhuyyena may
belong under this category, if we explain it as yad+bhuyyena
(bhuyyena equivalent to bhiyyoso). It would then correspond
to seyyath (=sad+yath, cp. sayath, sace, tayath). See
refs. under yebhuyyena. The expression yevpanaka is an
adj. formn from the phrase ye-v-pana (=ya v pana "whatever else there is"), i. e. belonging to something of the same
kind, i. e. corresponding, reciprocal, as far as concerned, respective. (See s. v.) In adv. use it often corresponds to E.
as; see e. g. yad icchaka, yad ida (under ii.2 b; ii.4
b.).
604
Ya
Yakkha
605
Yakkha
Yakkha
thus: a being to whom a sacrifice (of expiation or propitiation) is given. See e. g. VvA 224: yajanti tattha bali upaharant ti yakkh; or VvA 333: pjanya bhavato yakkho
ti vuccati. The term yaka as attendants of Kubera occurs
already in the Upanishads.] 1. name of certain non human beings, as spirits, ogres, dryads, ghosts, spooks. Their
usual epithet and category of being is amanussa, i. e. not a
human being (but not a sublime god either); a being half deified and of great power as regards influencing people (partly
helping, partly hurting). They range in appearance immediately above the Petas; many "successful" or happy Petas are in
fact Yakkhas (see also below). They correspond to our "genii"
or fairies of the fairy tales and show all their qualities. In
many respects they correspond to the Vedic Picas, though
different in many others, and of diff. origin. Historically they
are remnants of an ancient demonology and of considerable
folkloristic interest, as in them old animistic beliefs are incorporated and as they represent creatures of the wilds and forests,
some of them based on ethnological features. See on term e.
g. Dial. iii.188; on their history and identity Stede, Gespenstergeschichten des Peta Vatthu chap. v.; pp. 39 44.
They are sometimes called devat: S i.205; or devaputt:
PvA 113, 139. A female Yakkha is called yakkhin (q. v.).
2. Their usual capacity is one of kindness to men (cp. Ger.
Rbezahl). They are also interested in the spiritual welfare
of those humans with whom they come into contact, and are
something like "tutelary genii" or even "angels" (i. e. messengers from another world) who will save prospective sinners
from doing evil (cp. Pv iv.1). They also act as guides in the
"inferno": Pv iv.11, cp. iv.3. A somewhat dangerous "Mentor" is represented at D i.95, where the y. Vajirap threatens
to slay Ambaha with an iron hammer, if he does not answer
the Bhagav. He is represented as hovering in the air; Bdhgh.
(DA i.264) says on this: na yo v so v yakkho, Sakko devarj ti veditabbo: it is to be understood not as this or that y.,
but as Sakka the king of devas. Whole cities stand under the
protection of, or are inhabited by yakkhas; D ii.147 (kia
yakkha full of y.; thus akamand may here mean all kinds
of supra mundane beings), cp. Lank (Ceylon) as inhabited by y.: Mhvs 7, 33. Often, however, they are cruel and
dangerous. The female yakkhas seem on the whole more fearful and evil-natured than the male (see under yakkhin). They
eat flesh and blood: J iv.549; devour even men: D ii.346; J
ii.15 17, or corpses: J i.265; mentioned under the 5 dnav (dangers) at A iii.256. A yakkha wants to kill Sriputta:
Ud 4.
3. Var. classes of y. are enumd at D ii.256, 257; in a progressive order they rank between manussa and gandhabba at
A ii.38; they are mentioned with devas, rakkhasas, dnavas,
gandhabbas, kinnaras and mah'oragas at J v.420. According
to VvA 333 Sakka, the 4 great kings (lokapl), the followers
of Vessavaa (alias Yama, the yakkhas proper) and men (see
below 7) go by the name of yakkha. Sakka, the king of the
devas, is often named yakkha: J iv.4; DA i.264. Some are spirits of trees (rukkha devat): J iii.309 345; Pv i.9; ii.9; PvA
5; are also called bhumma-dev (earthly deities) PvA 45, 55.
Their cult seems to originate primarily from the woods (thus
in trees: Pv ii.9; iv.3), and secondarily from the legends of sea
faring merchants (cp. the story of the flyingDutchman). To
Yakkha
Yajati
607
Yajati
Yahi
Yajana (nt.) [late formation fr. yaj, yajati, for the earlier yaa]
the act of sacrificing J iii.518; vi.133; Cp. I. 72 ; Vism 224;
PvA 135.
Yajanaka (adj.) [fr. yajana] one who sacrifices J vi.133.
Yajpeti [Caus. II. of yajati] to cause a sacrifice to be held A i.168
(yajati+).
Yajita [pp. of yajati] sacrificed Miln 219; J iv.19.
Yajubbeda [fr. Vedic yajus the sacrificial formula,+veda] the Yajurveda, the 2nd of the Vedas, dealing with sacrifice Miln 178;
DA i.247; SnA 447. As yajuveda at Dpvs v.62, where the 3
Vedas are enumd as iruveda, yaju and sma.
Yaa [Vedic yaja, fr. yaj: see yajati. The metric reading in
the Veda is sometimes yajana, which we are inclined to look
upon as not being the source of the P. yajana] 1. a brahmanic
sacrifice. 2. almsgiving, charity, a gift to the Sangha or a
bhikkhu. The brahmanic ritual of Vedic times has been given
a changed and deeper meaning. Buddhism has discarded the
outward and cruel form and has widened its sphere by changing its participant, its object as well as the means and ways of
"offering," so that the yaa now consists entirely in a worthy
application of a worthy gift to a worthy applicant. Thus the
direct and as it were self understood definition of yaa is
at Nd2 523 given with "yao vuccati deyyadhammo," and
as this the 14 constituents of the latter are enumd ; consisting of the 4 paccayas, and of anna, pna, vattha, yna, ml,
gandh, vilepana, seyya, avasatha, padpeyya. Cp. Nd1 373.
The term parikkhra, which refers to the requisites of the
bhikkhu as well (see DA i.204 207), is also used in the
meaning of "accessory instrument" concerning the brahmanic
sacrifice: see D i.129 sq., 137 sq. They are there given as 16
parikkhras, as follows: (4) cattro anumati pakkh viz. the
4 groups khattiyas, ministers, brahmans and householders, as
colleagues by consent; (8) ahangni of a king sacrificer;
(4) cattr' angni of a purohita. The term mahyaa refers
to the brahmanic ritual (so at M ii.204; DhsA 145, cp. Expositor 193); its equivalent in Buddhist literature is mahdna, for
which yaa is also used at Pv ii.950 (cp. PvA 134). The
Jtakas are full of passages referring to the ineffectiveness and
cruelty of the Brahmanic sacrifice, e. g. J iii.518 sq.; vi.211
sq., & cp. Fick, Sociale Gliederung, p. 146 sq. One special
kind of sacrifice is the sabba-catukkayaa or the sacrifice of
tetrads, where four of each kind of gifts, as elephants, horses,
bulls, and even men were offered: J i.335; iii.44, 45; PvA 280.
The number 4 here has the meaning of evenness, completeness, or harmony, as we find it freq., in the notion of the square
with ref. to Vimnas & lotus ponds (in J., Vv & Pv etc.); often
also implying awfulness & magic, as attached e. g. to cross
roads. Cp. the Ep. of niraya (Purgatory) "catu dvra"
(esp. at Pv i.10). See cpds. of catur. It may also refer to
the 4 quarters of the sky, as belonging to the 4 Guardians of
the World (lokapl) who were specially worth offering to, as
608
Yahi
Yath
Yattha (adv.) [the regular P. form of Ved. yatra. See also P. yatra] rel. adv. of place "where," at which spot; occasionally
"at which time," when; with verbs of motion="whereto."
D i.240 (whither); Sn 79, 170 (here closely resembling yatra
in meaning="so that"), 191, 313, 445, 995, 1037; Dh 87, 127
(yattha hita, cp. PvA 104) 150, 171, 193, PvA 27. yattha
v tattha v wherever (or whenever) DhA iv.162; similarly
yattha yattha wherever (he likes) A ii.64. yattha kma
(cp. yathkma in same meaning) where to one's liking, i.
e. wherever Dh 35 (=yattha katthaci or yattha yattha icchati
DhA i.295, 299), 326. Similarly we find yatth-icchaka, almost identical (originally variant?) with yadicchaka and
yvadicchaka at Vism 154.
Yatati [unidentified, perhaps as expl of yati?] is given in meaning of "lead out" (?) at Dhtp 580 ("niyytane") and Dhtm 813
(id.).
Yatana (nt.) [fr. yat, cp. Epic Sk. yatna] endeavour, undertaking
J v.346 (C. expls samosaraa hna?); Dhtp 121 (in expln
of yatati1 ).
Yati [fr. yat, cp. Vedic yati leader, guide] a Buddhist monk Mhvs
5, 37 (racchgata yati); 25, 4; 30, 26 (mattik dyaka
yati); 32, 32 (khsavassa yatino); Dvs iv.33 (yat); Vism
79 (vikampeti Mrassa hadaya yat); PvA 287 (instr. muni
vara yatin).
Yath (adv.) [fr. ya; Vedic yath; cp. kath, tath] as, like, in
relation to, after (the manner of). As prep. (with acc.): according (to some condition, norm or rule): yath kma (already Vedic) according to his desire, after his liking PvA 113,
136; y. kla in time, timely PvA 78; mati to his own mind
or intention Pv iv.167 ; ruci to his satisfaction, amply, satisfactorily PvA 88, 126, 242; vibhava acc. to their wealth,
i. e. plentifully PvA 53; sukha as they liked or pleased
PvA 133. Sometimes with loc.: yath padese "according to
place," in the right place J iii.391. Or instr.: y. sattiy as
much as you can DhA i.92; y. manena from his heart, sincerely, voluntarily DhA i.42. Also with ger. yath haritv
according to his taking (or reward: see under cpd. bhata) It
14 (y. h. nikkhipeyya, which Seidenstcker, not doing justice
to context translates "so wie man etwas nimmt und dann wegwirft"). With foll. adj. expressing something like "as it were"
and often untranslateable (see cpds.) As conjunction: "as
if," or "so that": yath mata like dead Dh 21; yath na "in order that not": Vism 31 (y. sarre bdha na uppdeti, eva
tassa vinodan' attha); DhA i.311 (y. assa patitathna na
passmi, tath na chaessmi: so that I shall not see..., thus
shall I throw him). As adv. just, as, so, even; in combn
with other particles: yath katha pana how so then, how
is it then that S ii.283 (cp. yath tatha under cpds.); yath
ki viya somewhat like this Miln 91; yath pana like as DhA
i.158; yatha-r-iva (for yath iva) just as D i.90; yath pi...
eva just as... so Dh 51 52. yatha yida (for yath
ida) positive: "as just this," "so that," "e. g.," "like," "i.
Yato (adv.) [the abl. case of ya, used as conjunction, Cp. Vedic
yata wherefrom, by which, out of which] 1. (local) from
where D i.240 (uggacchanti candima suriy; opp. yattha
where). 2. (temporal) whence, since, when, from which
time VvA 344 (yato pahya). 3. (modal) from which,
out of what cause, because, in as far as D i.36 sq. (yato...
ettvat because... therefore); Sn p. 113 (id.) Dh 374, 390
(doubled=from whichever source). Freq. in two combns :
yatvdhi-karaa (yato+adhikaraa) because (lit. by reason of which; cp. kim dhikaraa, see adhik.) D i.70;
D i.113; M i.269; Dhs 1346; cp. similarly BSk. yato adhikaraa MVastu iii.52; and yato-nidna on account of
which, from which (or what) reason, because M i.109; Sn 273,
869; Pv iv.161 (cp. PvA 242). Note. yaticchita at PvA 265
is to be read yadicchita.
Yatta [pp. of yatati1 ] strenuous, making an effort, watchful Nd2
525 (+paiyatta, in exegesis of yata); J iv.222 (+paiyatta);
vi.294 (Kern's reading for yata; vv. ll. sayata & sata, thus
warranting yata); Miln 373 (payatta), 378 (id.=in keen effort).
Note. Kern, Toev. s. v. would like to equal yatta=Sk. yatna
effort.
Yattaka (adj.) [fr. yvant, a late formation; cp. Trenckner, Notes,
80] however much, whatever, as many (in correlation with
ta or tattaka) J v.74 (=yvant); Vism 184 (yattaka hna
gahti... tattaka...), 293 (yattak=yvat); DA i.118 (yattaka... tattaka as long as); DhA ii.50 ( kla as long), 128;
609
Yath
Yath
Yath
Yanta
haritv) as unbefitting. The suspicion of yathbhata being a veiled (corrupted) yathbhta has presented itself to
us before (see vol. I. under bhata). The meaning may suggest
something like the latter, in as far as "in truth," "surely" is not
far off the point. Anyhow we shall have to settle on a meaning like "according to merit," without being able to elucidate
the phrase in all its details. There is another yathbhata
in passage... ussavo hoti, yathbhata lasua parikkhaya
agamsi "the garlic diminished as soon as it was brought" Vin
iv.258. Here bhata stands in rel. to harpeti (to have it
fetched & brought) and is clearly pp. of bharati. -bhucca
as is the case, i. e. as one might expect, evident, real, in conformity with the truth D i.12; ii.222; Miln 183, 351; Th 2, 159
(=yathbhta ThA 142); PvA 30, 31 (gu). -bhutta see
bhutta. -bhta() in reality, in truth, really, definitely, absolutely; as ought to be, truthfully, in its real essence. Very
freq. in var. combnns which see collected & classified as
regards Sayutta & Anguttara Nikyas in Index vols to
these texts. E. g. S iv.195 (vacana, Ep. of Nibbna); v.440
(abhisamaya); Sn 194, 202, 653; Dh 203; PvA 215 (gua).
yathbhta pajnti he knows as an absolute truth or in reality D i.83, 162; S iv.188; v.304 & passim; ditto yathbhta
jnti passati Ps ii.62. Similarly with noun: yathbhta
a absolute knowledge S v.144; Ps ii.63=Vism 605 (+sammdassana); Vism 438, 629, 695; VbhA 459 (=maggaa);
also as a dassana in same meaning: A iii.19, 200;
iv.99, 336; v.2 sq., 311 sq.; Ps i.33, 43 sq.; ii.11 sq.; Nett
29. -mano according to (his) mind Sn 829; Nd1 170 (expld
as nom.=yathcitto, yathsankappo, yathvio). -ruci
according to pleasure or liking Mhvs 4, 43 (ruci T.; ruci v. l.;
thus generally in Mhvs.); 5, 230 (ruci); 22, 58 (ruci). -vdin
as speaking, as he speaks (followed by tath krin so doing) D ii.224, 229; Sn 357; It 122. -vidhi() duly, fitly
Mhvs 10, 79. -vihita as appointed or arranged Mhvs 10,
93. -vuha according to seniority Vin ii.221; Mhbv 90
(T. reads buha). -vutta() as is said, i. e. as mentioned, aforesaid, of this kind Mhvs 34, 57; PvA 45, 116 (o
puggalo). -saka() each his own, according to his (or her)
own, respective(ly) Vism 525; SnA 8, 9; VvA 7; Mhvs 5, 230
(here simply "their own"). -sata saintly (?), mindful Th 1,
981 (cp. yath crin & Brethren p. 342). -satti() according to one's power S iv.348 (+yathbala); DhA i.107 (v. l.
for bala); Sdhp 97. -sattha according to the precepts,
as law ordains M iii.10 (perhaps an error for yathsaddha? ).
-saddha acc. to faith, as is one's faith Dh 249. -santhatika
accepting whatever seat is offered D i.167; A iii.220; Pug 69;
Th 1, 855 anga one of the 13 dhutangas Miln 342, 359;
Vism 61, 78. -sukha according to ease, at ease, at will Th
1, 77; Dh 326.
611
Yanta
Yasassin
349 (hriya); Mhvs 17, 44, 50; 30, 82; 31, 99; Dvs i.50
(hra); DhA iii.213 (id.); SnA 36; Vism 390; PvA 137.
-sl the pair of Sal willows in between of which the Buddha passed away VvA 165; PvA 212. 2. (adj. or m.) a
twin, twin child Mhvs 6, 9 (yamake duve putta ca dhtara
janesi), 37 (soasakkhattu yamake duve duve putte janayi);
DhA i.353 (same, with vijyi). 3. (nt.) a pair, couple, N. of
one of the Abhidhamma canonical books, also called Yamaka
ppakaraa; Tikp 8. The Yamakasutta refers to the conversion of the bhikkhu Yamaka and is given at S iii.109 sq.;
mentioned at Vism 479 & VbhA 32. The phrase yamakato
sammasana at Vism 626 may mean "in pairs" (like kalpato
"in a bundle" ibid.), or may refer to the Yamaka sutta with
its discussion of anicca, dukkha, anatta.
Yantaka (nt.) [fr. yanta] a bolt Vin ii.148 (vihr agutt honti...
anujnmi yantaka scikan ti), cp. Vin. Texts iii.162; DA
i.200 (kucik+); DhA i.220 (yantaka deti to put the bolt to,
to lock up).
Yanti is 3rd pl. pres. of y: see yti. Note. At D ii.269 we
should combine yanti with preceding visam & sambdh,
thus forming denom. verbs: visamyanti "become uneven"
and sambdhyanti "become oppressed or tight." The trsln
Dial ii.305 gives just the opposite by reading incorrectly.
Yantita [pp. of yanteti] made to go, set into motion, impelled Th 1,
574: evya vattati kyo kamma yantena yantito "impelled
by the machinery of Karma"; trsln Brethren 261 not quite to the
point "carried about on Karma's car." Kern, Toev. s, v. quite
out of place with "fettered, held, restrained," in analogy to his
trsln of yanta id. loc. with "fetter." He may have been misled
by Dhtm defn of yant as "sankocana" (see yanteti).
Yanteti [denom. fr. yanta. Dhtm 809 gives a root yant in meaning of "sankocane," i. e. contraction] to set into motion, to
make go, impel, hurl J i.418 (sakkhara anguliy yantetv);
pp. yantita.
Yannna see ya 2.
Yapana see ypana.
Yapeti see ypeti.
Yabhati [one passage in Atharva Veda; cp. Gr. "futuo,"
Lat. ibex (see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.)] to cohabit, futuere,
only given as root yabh with defn "methune" at Dhtp 215 &
Dhtm 308.
Yama1 [fr. yam] restraint PvA 98 (+niyama).
Yama2 [Vedic Yama] the ruler of the kingdom of the dead. See
details in Dicty. of Names. In cpds. often in general sense of
"death" or "manes," or "pet"; e. g.
-dta Death's messenger Sdhp 287; cp. Yamassa dt Vv
522 (see VvA 224), or deva dta A i.138 (see under dta),
alias niraya pla A i.138 and passim. -purisa (a)=dta Dh
235 (cp. DhA iii.335); VvA 223; (b) puris Yama people,
i. e. Petas Pv iv.38 (cp. PvA 251). -loka the yama world or
world of the Petas Dh 44, 45; PvA 107 & freq. -visaya=loka
Pv ii.82 & passim. -sdana Y's kingdom, or the realm of the
dead J vi.267, 304; vi.457, 505.
612
Yasassin
Ycati
Yasassimant (adj.) [double adj. ending; yasas+vin+ mant] splendid, glorious, full of splendour J v.63 (pvako yasassim=teja
sampattiy yassassinhi acchi yutto C.).
Yaso & Yasa (nt.) [Vedic yaa (nt.). The word follows the a declension, but preserves & favours the instr. yasas after the s
decl. (like mano, ceto etc,), e. g. at J i.134. In the nom. &
acc. sg. both forms yaso & yasa() occur; in cpds. the form
yasa is the usual; yaso as masc. is found at Sn 438] glory,
fame, repute, success, high position. On term as used with
ref. to the brahmin see Fick, Sociale Gliederung 128, 129
The prevailing idea of Dhammapla is that yaso consists of a
great retinue, & company of servants, followers etc. This idea
is already to be found at D i.118=126 where y. is founded on
paris (cp. DA i.143 on D i.48; DA i.298: yasas ti hapana samatthatya). See e. g. VvA 122 (yaso=parivra);
PvA 137 (yasas= mahati parivra sampattiy); cp. J i.134
(rj mahantena yasena uppana gacchati). D i.137 (as
quality of a king); iii.260, 286; J iv.275 sq. (dibba y. as one of
the 10 qualities of greatness, viz. divine duration of life, complexion, happiness, fame, power, and the 5 sense objects
rpa, sadda, gandha, rasa, phohabba. The same 10 are found
at Pv ii.958, 59 ); A i.15; ii.32, 66, 188; iii.31, 47 sq.; iv.95, 195
sq.; Dh 24, 303 (+bhoga); Th 1, 554; Nd1 147; Pv iii.35 (=dev'
iddhi PvA 189); Vv 291 ; J i.134; vi.468; Miln 291 (bhoga+);
Vism 393; Sdhp 306, 518. yasa deti to give credit J i.180.
mah-yaso great fame J i.46 (v. 266), cp. yas-agga the highest (of) fame J i.51, where coupled with lbh-agga the greatest gain. The latter combn is stereotype in the Niddesa (see e.
g. Nd2 55), where the 4 worldly ideals are given in sequence
lbha, yaso, pasas, sukha. With kitti we find yaso at
Sn 817 (see defn & exegesis at Nd1 147). Opp. ayasa D
iii.260, 286; A ii.188; iv.157 sq.
-dyika giving (or a giver of) repute J vi.285. -mada
pride of fame VbhA 467. -mahatta greatness of fame Vism
233. -lbha the gain of fame J iii.516 (+dhanalbha).
Yca (nt.) [fr. yc] anything asked for, donation, alms, begging J
iii.353; v.233, 234.
-yoga (y.+*yogga; perhaps yja the original. The variant
yjayoga is old & well established: cp. Vism 224) accessible to begging, one ready to comply with another's request,
devoted to liberality, open handed. Freq. in ster. phrase
mutta cga payata p vossaggarata yca yoga dna
savibhga rata to denote great love of liberality, e.
g. at A i.226; ii.66; iii.313. See also A iii.53, 313=Vism 223,
224 (where expld as follows: ya ya pare ycanti tassa tassa
dnato ycanayogo ti attho; yjayogo ti pi pho; yjana
sankhtena yjena yutto ti attho); A iv.6, 266 sq., 271, 284;
v.331, 336; Sn p. 87 (cp. expln SnA 414: "ycitu yutto, yo hi
ycake disv bhakui katv pharusavacan' dni bhanati, so
na ycayogo hoti" etc.); Sn 487, 488, 489, 509; J iii.307 (expld
in C. as "ya ya gantuk ycanti tassa tassa yutto anucchaviko bhavitv, sabba tehi ycita ycita dadamno ti
attho"); iv.274 ("ycitabba yuttaka" C.); vi.98 (=ycana
yuttaka or yaa yuttaka; "ubhayath' pi dyakass' ev' eta
nma" C.); Miln 215, 225. The form yjayoga at Sn 1046
(expld at Nd2 531 as "yje yutta"); and mentioned at Vism 224
(see above). On diff. meaning of ycayoga see Kern, Toev.
s. v. with unidentified ref. Cp. also Mvyut. 140, 4.
Yahi (adv.) [after kuhi] where, wherever Mhvs 15, 209 (corresp. to yattha in v. 210).
Yga [fr. yaj, *Sk. yga, cp. yaa & yaja] 1. a (brahmanic) sacrifice, known otherwise as mahyga (or pl. yg), and consisting of the 4: assamedha, purisamedha, sammpsa, vja
peyya. Thus mentioned at S i.76 & Sn 303. 2. In Buddhistic sense: gift, alms-giving, charity; expense or expenditure
of giving (almost syn. with cga) A i.91 (here given in line
with dna & cga, with distinction of misa & dhamma,
i. e. the material sacrifice, as under 1, and the spiritual sacrifice or help); with the same contrast of & dh. at D iii.155;
It 98, 102; J v.57, 65; DhA i.27. J iv.66 (sahassena yga yajanto); Miln 21 (dhamma); VvA 155; PvA 135 (mah
saita yaa), 136 (mah). suyiha yga sampad
"well given is the perfection of charity" ThA 40 (Ap. v.
7)=230 (id.).
-pia the sacrificial oblation consisting in a ball of meat
Ycaka (adj. n.) [fr. yca, cp. Epic & later Sk. ycaka] requesting, one who begs, a recipient of alms, a beggar J iii.353;
Pv ii.938 ; PvA 78, 102 (=ycanaka); Sdhp 324, 331. Freq.
in combn with similar terms of wayfaring people in phrase
samaa brhmaa kapa' iddhika vaibbaka ycak e. g. at D i.137; It 64. See single terms. ycaka at Sn
618 (as Fick, Soc.Gliederung 144 quotes ycaka) is to be read
yjaka.
Ycati [Vedic ycati; yc, with which cp. Lat. jocus (dial. juca
"prayer"); Ohg. jehan to confess, etc.: see Walde, Lat. Wtb.
s. v. jocus. Dhtp (38) only expls yca= ycane] to beg, ask
for, entreat Vin iv.129 (pabbajja); Sn 566, 980, 983; J iii.49,
613
Ycati
Ydicchaka
353; v.233, 404. aor. 3rd pl. ycisu PvA 13, 20, 42; aycisu Mhvs 33, 76 (v. l. aycayu). inf. ycitu PvA
29, 120. ger. yciya Sn 295; ycitv M i.365; ycitvna
Mhvs 17, 58. pp. ycita.
Ycana (dt.) [fr. yc] begging, asking, entreaty J iii.353; SnA 161
(ingh ti ycan' atthe nipto) 551 (id.); PvA 113 (=sdhuka).
-jvna living by begging J iii.353.
Ycanaka [cp. BSk. ycanaka Divy 470, 585]=ycaka A iii.136
(ati); Pv ii.76 ; 916 ; 946 ; J iii.49; DA i.298.
Ycan (f.)=ycana; J iii.354=Miln 230; J v.233, 404.
Ycita [pp. of ycati] begged, entreated, asked (for) A iii.33; Dh
224; J iii.307; PvA 39. Cp. ycitaka.
Ycitaka (adj.)
[ycita+diminutive (disparaging) ending
ka] asked, begged, borrowed M i.365 ( bhoga); J
iv.358=vi.127 ( yna and dhana, alluding to M
i.365 366), with expln J iv.358: "ya parena dinnatt
labbhati ta ycita sadisam eva hoti." (nt.) anything
borrowed, borrowed goods: ycitak' pam km (in app'
assd km passage) "the pleasures of the senses are like borrowed goods" Vin ii.25=M i.130= A iii.97=Th 2, 490=Nd2 71
(correct ycitan'); expld in detail at M i.365. See also DhA
i.403 (ye y. gahetv na paidenti); ThA 288 (km=ycitaka
bhaasadis tvaklik' ahena).
Yja [fr. yaj; cp. yja & yjeti] sacrificing, giving alms, liberality (felt as synonymous with cga, thus influenced by tyaj,
cp. Sk. tyjana): see ycayoga; Nd2 531 (yye yutta); Vism
224.
Yjaka (adj.) [fr. yaj in its Caus. form yjeti] sacrificing, one
who sacrifices, a priest Sn 312, 313 (=yanna yjino jan
SnA 324), 618 (of a purohita; v. l. BB ycaka).
Yjana (nt)=yja; Vism 224: see ycayoga.
Yjin (adj.) [fr. yja] sacrificing SnA 324 (yaa).
Yjetar [n. ag. to yjeti] one who superintends a sacrifice or
causes it to be performed D i.143.
Yjeti [Caus. I. of yajati] to cause to sacrifice, to make a priest
give an offering (to the gods or otherwise) J vi.211, 215; ppr.
yjento M i.404; Pot. 2nd sg. yjeyya J iii.515; 3rd pl. yjeyyu J vi.215 (aa brhmaa); also yjayeyyu J
vi.211. ger. yjetv D i.143.
614
Ydicchaka
Ypeti
pna vattha yna sannidhi Nd1 372). -sukha pleasures of riding and driving Kvu 209; cp. Kvu trsl. 127.
Ynaka (nt.) [fr. yna] a (small) cart, carriage, waggon, vehicle J iii.49 ( pretv, or a hunter's cart); iv.45; DhA i.325
(sukha), 391 (pakati, an ordinary waggon). - pjeti to
drive a cart J ii.112, 143; iii.51.
-upatthambha(na) waggon prop KhA 44 (ni v. l.,
see Appendix to Index Pj.); VbhA 234 (nika; illustrating the
shape of the teeth).
Ynika & Yniya (adj.) () [fr. yna] 1. (lit.) leading to,
conducive to, as yniya in deva magga D i.215, & Brahma
magga the way leading to the Brahma world D i.220. 2.
(in appld meaning, cp. ynikata) ynika one who has become
used to, whose habit it is..., in vipassan & samatha at Vism
588.
Ydisaka=ydisa; in correlation (generalising sense) ydisakatdisaka whatsoever... such, any whatsoever A iv.308; S v.96.
Yna (nt.) [fr. y, as in yti. Cp. Vedic yna and Lat. Janus]
1. going, proceeding J vi.415 (+ayna, opposed to hna).
2. means of motion, carriage, vehicle. Different kinds of carriages are enumd at Nd1 145 (on Sn 816) with hatthi (elephant ), go (cow ), aja (goat ), meaka (ram
), oha (camel ?), khara (donkey ). Cp. Miln 276.
yna is one of the requisites (carriage or other means of locomotion) of the bhikkhu & as such included in the deyya
dhamma or 14 gifts (see yaa & deyya dh.). Thus mentioned with anna pna vattha etc. at S i.94; A ii.85; Pug 51.
Cp. the defn & application of the term yna as given below
under yna sannidhi. See e. g. the foll. passages: Vin
i.191 (bhikkh ynena yyanti... na bhikkhave ynena yyitabba; yo yyeyya etc.: here a "carriage" is expressly forbidden to the bhikkhu!), 231 (Ambapl bhadrni bhadrni
ynni yojpetv bhadra yna abhirhitv...), 242 (same
phrase with Meaka gahapati); D i.7, 89, 106; M i.366 (yna poroseyya pavara mai kuala, where vv. ll.
on p. 561 read voropeyya and oropeyya, which Neumann
(unwarrantedly) adopts in his trsln : Mittl. Sammlung2 1921,
ii.666; the C. accepts reading poroseyya with expln "puris
anucchavika yna"); Dh 323 (=hatthiyndni DhA iv.6); J
iii.525 sq.; v.59; vi.223 (=ratha); Kvu 599 (Ervao hatthingo
sahassa yutta dibba yna; trsld as "the wondrous elephant E., the thousand wise yoked celestial mount." trsl. p.
347 (lit. vehicle) Pv iii.228 (=ratha or vayha etc. PvA 186);
PvA 113. iddhi-yna carriage of magic power Miln 276;
deva godly carriage Miln 276; applied to the 8 fold Aryan
Path at Sn 139 (=devaloka ypetu samatthat... aha
sampatti yna SnA 184). Similarly of the Path: magg'
ahangika yna ( yyin) Th 2, 389 (=ahangika
magga sankhta ariya yna ThA 257); and brahmayna dhamma-yna "the very best & excellent carriage" as
Ep. of magga S v.5, cp. J iv.100. Cp. the later terms mah
and hna- yna. See also ynikata.
-ugghata shaking or jolting of the carriage Vin ii.276;
DhA iii.283. -gata having ascended the carriage D i.126. puos (puo) provision bag on a carriage (provision for the
journey?) Vism 328 (so read for paoli). -bhmi carriage
ground, i. e. the road as far as accessible to a carriage D i.89;
Sn 418. -sannidhi storing up of carriages or means of locomotion D i.6 (with expln at DA i.82 as follows: yna nma
vayha ratho sakaa sandamnik patank ti. Na pan' eta
pabbajitassa yna, uphan yna pana); Sn 924 (=anna
615
Ypeti
Yva
phrase defining carati "to go," "to be" (or viharati) with synonyms iriyati vattati pleti yapeti ypeti at Nd2 237; Vbh
252; DhsA 167. Besides singly (yapeti) at DhsA 149. (b)
to cause to go, to make someone go (to), to bring to, lead to
(acc.) J vi.458 (sasenvhana ypesi); SnA 184 (devaloka
ypetu samattha fit to bring one to the d world). (c)
to get on, move, to be active DhA i.10 (sarre ypente); iv.17
(iriypathena). 2. (fig.) to keep going (both trs. & intrs.),
to keep up, esp. to keep oneself going or alive, to live by (instr.) [cp. BSk. ypayati Divy 93, 150, 196, 292, 293, 471, 488,
Av i.209] D i.166 (ekiss dattiy on only one alms); Pug 56;
J ii.204; iii.67; iv.125; vi.532 (uchena); Pv i.57 (ito dinnena
ypenti pet); i.117 ; iii.28 (tava dinnena ypessanti kurrino);
PvA 27, 29 (=attabhva ypeti=upajvati).
Ypya (adj.) [shortened grd. formation for ypanya. *Sk.
ypya in slightly diff. meaning] 1. (lit.) fit for movement or
locomotion: in yna sedan chair, palanquin Abhp. 373.
2. (fig.) concerning the preservation of life, vital, in rogin
one who suffers from a vital disease, lit. a disease concerning
the upkeep of the body Vism 33 (trsln Path of Purity 39: "patient of long suffering," from a different point of view, viz.
of time only, like Bdhgh.).
Yma [fr. yam in both meanings of yamati & yama3 ] 1. restraint, only as cpd. ctu-yma 4 fold restraint D i.57;
iii.48; S i.66; M i.377; Vism 416. Cp. Dial. i.751 . 2. a
watch of the night. There are 3 watches, given as pahama,
majjhima & pacchima (first, middle & last) Nd1 377 sq.; or
purima, m. & pacchima Nd2 631 (under sad). A i.114;
iv.168; Dh 157 (one of the 3; interpreted as the 3 vayas at
DhA iii.138); J i.243 (tsu ymesu ekasmi yme); Mhvs 21,
33; PvA 217, 280. 3. (usually pl. Ym dev) one who
belongs to Yama or the ruler of the Underworld; a subject of
Yama; the realm of Yama; pl. inhabitants of Yamaloka A
i.210 (ym dev); SnA 244 (bhavana the abode of the Y.);
KhA 166 (Ymato yva Akaniha from the Underworld to
the Highest Heaven); Vism 225 (Ym); VbhA 519 (Ym);
VvA 246 (id.); ThA 169 (Y. dev).
-klika of a restricted time, for a (relatively) short period
(lit.) only for one watch of the night, but longer than yvaklika temporary. It is one of the three regulation terms
for specified food, viz. y. -k., satthaklika & yvajvika,
or short period, of a week's duration, and life long food Vin
iv.83, 86, 176, 311; to which is added yva-klika, temporary
at Vin i.251 (where mutual relations of the 4 are discussed).
-gaika() koeti to beat the block of restraint (?), i. e. exercise self control (?) (or does it belong to yma 3?) KhA
233.
Yyati see yti.
Yyin (adj.) () [fr. y, see yti] going, going on to; in ynayyin (f.) Th 2, 389 (maggahangika having ascended the
carriage of the 8 fold Path; expld by "ariya yyena nibbna pura yyin upagat" ThA 257).
Yva (adv.) [Vedic yvat as nt. of yvant used as adv. in meanings 1 & 2. The final t is lost in Pli, but restored as d in certain
combinations: see below 2. Cp. tva & kva]. 1 (as prep.)
up to (a point), as far as, how far, so far that (cp. tva I), both
temporal and local, used either with absolute form of noun or
616
Yva
Yvant
Yvant
Yujjhati
It 91, 92 (passa yva ca rak & santike: see how far and
near). yva c' ida stands for yad-ida (see ya 4) in peculiar use of restriction at M. III.169; S ii.178; A iii.34. 3. The
nt. form yvat further occurs in foll. cpds.: yuka (better
as yvat than yvat) as long as life lasts, for a lifetime Mhvs
3, 41; VvA 196 (as adj. yuk dibba sampatti); PvA 66,
73, 133; icchaka as much as is desired, according to one's
wishes Pug 12, 25; Vism 154 (here spelt yvad icchaka);
iha see under yva (cpds.) instr. yavat: see sep.
618
Yujjhati
Ythik
82 (fut. yujjhissma, with instr.: Damiehi); 25, 23 (aor. ayujjhi); 25, 58 (ppr. yujjhamna); 33, 41 (aor. yujjhi). To which
add DhA ii.154 (mallayuddha yujjhanto); iii.259 (Ajtasattun saddhi yujjhanto). pp. yuddha. Caus. yodheti
(q. v.).
Yutti [cp. Vedic yukti connection, fr. yuj] "fitting," i. e. 1. application, use Miln 3 (opamma). 2. fitness, vda, KVA 37;
in instr. yuttiy in accordance with Mhvs 10, 66 (vacana);
Sdhp 340 (sutti); and abl. yuttito Sdhp 505. 3. (logical)
fitness, right construction, correctness of meaning; one of the
16 categories (hr), appld to the exposition of texts, enumd in
the 1st section of the Netti; e. g. at Nett 1 3, 103; KhA
18; SnA 551, 552. Thus abl. yuttito by way of correctness
or fitness (contrasted to suttato) VbhA 173=Vism 562; and
yutti-vasena by means of correctness (of meaning) SnA 103
(contrasted to anussava). 4. trick, device, practice J vi.215.
-kata combined with; (nt.) union, alloy VvA 13.
Yuddha (nt.) [orig. pp. of yujjhati; cp. Vedic yuddha (pp.) and
yudh (f.) the fight] war, battle, fight D i.6 (daa fighting
with sticks or weapons); J iii.541 (id.); Sn 442 (dat. yuddhya); J vi.222; Miln 245 (kilesa, as pp.: one who fights
sin); Mhvs 10, 45 (attha for the sake of fighting); 10, 69
(yuddhya in order to fight); 25, 52 (yuddhy' gata); 32, 12
(yuddha yujjhati); 32, 13 (maccu fight with death); 33, 42;
DhA ii.154 (malla fist fight). The form yudhya at Sn
831 is to be taken as (archaic) dat. of Vedic yudh (f.), used
in sense of an inf. & equal to yuddhya. Nd1 172 expls as
"yuddh' atthya."
-kla time for the battle Mhvs 10, 63. -ha engaged in
war S i.100 (so read for ttha). -maala fightingring, arena
J iv.81; Vism 190; VbhA 356 (in comparison).
Yuta [pp. of yu, yauti to fasten but Dhtp 338: "missane"] fastened to (loc.), attracted by, bent on, engaged in D. i.57 (sabba
vr); Sn 842 (pesueyye; Nd1 233 reads yutta in exegesis, do. at p. 234, with further expln yutta, payutta etc.),
853 (atimne); Dvs v.18 (dhiti). Note. yuta is doubtful in phrase tejas-yuta in Niraya passage at A i.142=M
iii.183=Nd1 405=Nd2 304iii =J v.266. The more likely reading is either tejas' yuta (so BSk. M.Vastu 9), or tejas yutta
(so Nd2 & PvA 52), i. e. endowed with, furnished with, full
of heat. We find a similar confusion between uyyuta &
uyyutta.
Ythik
Yoga
and relation between eva & yeva cp. Geiger, P.Gr. 66, 1. See
also eva 2. The same form in Prkrit: Pischel, Prk. Gr.
336] emphatic particle, meaning "even, just, also"; occurring
most frequently (for eva) after palatal sounds, as : Sn 580
(pekkhata yeva), 822 (viveka); DhA ii.20 (saddhi); PvA
3 (tasmi), 4 (imasmi), 13 (tumhka); further after o:
PvA 39 (apanto yeva); after : Sn 1004 (manas yeva);
after i: S ii.206 (vuddhi yeva); PvA 11 (ahosi); after e:
J i.82 (vihre yeva; pubbahe y.); VbhA 135 (na kevala ete
yeva, ae pi "not only these, but also others"). Cp. Mhvs 22,
56; VvA 222; PvA 47.
(for yodhi) & 422 (yodhik & yudhik). See also yodhik.
Ypa [Vedic ypa] 1. a sacrificial post D i.141; A iv.41; J iv.302;
vi.211; Miln 21 (dhamma); SnA 321, 322; DA i.294. 2. a
psda, or palace Th 1, 163=J ii.334.
-usspana the erection of the sacr. post DhsA 145 (cp.
Miln 21).
Ysa [Vedic yan, later Sk. ya; fr. base Idg. *i
s, cp.
Lat. js soup, Gr. yeast, ferment, soup; Obulg.
jucha=Ger. jauche manure; Swedish st cheese; an enlargement of base *i
eu to mix, as in Sk. yu to mix: see yuta, to
which further *i
e e, as in yujati] 1. juice Vin i.206 (akaa
natural juice); Mhvs 28, 26; VvA 185 (badara of the jujube);
Vism 195 (seda sweaty fluid). 2. soup, broth. Four
kinds of broths are enumd at M i.245, viz. mugga bean soup,
kulattha of vetch (also at Vism 256), kaya (chick )
pea soup, hareuka pea soup; Miln 63 (rao sdo ysa
v rasa v kareyya).
Yevpana(ka) (adj.) [not connected with yeva, but an adj. formation from phrase ye v pana; ye here standing (as Mgadhism)
for ya: cp. yebhuyya] corresponding, reciprocal, respective,
in corresponding proportion, as far as concerned; lit. "whatever else." The expression is peculiar to exegetical (logical)
literature on the Abhidhamma. See e. g. DhsA 152 (yevpan, pl. and k); Vism 468, 271 sq.; VbhA 63, 70 sq.; cp.
Dhs. trsl.1 p. 5 and introd. p. 56. Note. The expression
occurring as phrase shows ye as nom. pl., e. g. Dhs 1, 58, 151
161 & passim: ye v pana tasmi samaye ae pi dhamm;
but cp. in 1: ya ya v pan' rabbha, in same sense.
Yoga [Vedic yoga, see etym. under yuga & yujati. Usually m.; pl.
nt. yogni occurs at D ii.274 in meaning "bonds"] lit. "yoking,
or being yoked," i. e. connection, bond, means; fig. application, endeavour, device. 1. yoke, yoking (rare?) J vi.206
(meant here the yoke of the churning sticks; cp. J vi.209).
2. connection with (), application to; (natural) relation
(i. e. body, living connection), association; also conjunction
(of stars). mnusaka yoga the relation to the world of men
(the human body), opp. dibba yoga: S i.35=60; Sn 641; Dh
417; expld at DhA iv.225 as "kya." association with: D
iii.176; application: Vism 520 (+uppda). yogato (abl.) from
being connected with, by association with PvA 40 (blya),
98 (sammappadhna). pubba connection with a former
body, one's former action or life history J v.476; vi.480;
Miln 2. See pubbe1 . ahayoga a "half connected"
building, i. e. a half roofed monastery Vin i.239; Vism 34.
nakkhatta a conjunction of planets, peculiar constellation
(in astrology) J i.82, 253 (dhana vasspanaka suitable for
a shower of wealth); iii.98; DhA i.174; DhsA 232 (in simile). 3. (fig.) bond, tie; attachment (to the world and its
lusts), or what yokes to rebirth (Cpd. 1712 ). There are 4 yogas, which are identical with the 4 oghas viz. kma, bhava,
dihi, avijj, or the bonds of craving, existence, false views,
and ignorance; enumd in detail at A ii.10; D iii.230, 276; J
i.374; cp. Ps i.129 (cathi yogehi yutto lokasannivso catu
yoga yojito); VbhA 35. Mentioned or referred to at S v.59;
Dhs 1059 (ogha+, in defn of tah), cp, Dhs trsln 308; Nett 31
(with ogha), 114 (id.); as sabba- (or sabbe) yog at Th 2, 4; 76;
S i.213; DhA iii.233; severally at It 95 (bhava yoga yutta
gm hoti, +kma); ogha+yoga: Pug 21 (avijj); Vism 211,
684; cp. also D ii.274 (ppima yogni the ties of the Evil
one); It 80 (yog pamocenti bahujana). 4. application,
endeavour, undertaking, effort DhA iii.233, 234 (=samma
ppadhna). yoga karoti to make an effort, to strive after
(dat.) S ii.131; A ii.93 (savna khayya y. karaya); Miln
35. yoga pajjati to show (earnest) endeavour, to be active
620
Yoga
Yojeti
S iii.11 sq.; Vbh 356 (attan). dhamma one who is devoted to the Dhamma A iii.355; yutta (bent on, i. e.) earnest
in endeavour J i.65; yca given to making offerings: see yca.
5. pondering (over), concentration, devotion M i.472; Dh
209 (=yoniso manasikra DhA iii.275), 282 (same expln at
DhA iii.421); Miln 3; Vbh 324 (yoga vihitesu kamm' &
sipp' yatanesu; VbhA 410 expls : y. vuccati pa;
perhaps better to above 4?). 6. (magic) power, influence,
device, scheme J vi.212 (yoga yogena practice of spells
etc. =tya tya yuttiy C.); PvA 117 (combd with manta, ascribed to devas). 7. means, instrument, remedy J i.380
(vamana an emetic); vi.74 (eka yoga datv; but we better
read bhesajja tassa datv for vatv, and eka yoga vatv
for datv; taking yoga in meaning of "charm, incantation");
Miln 109 (yena yogena sattna gua vahi... tena hita
upadahati).
-tiga one who has conquered the yoke, i. e. bond of
the body or rebirth It 61 (muni), 81 (id.). -tigmin= tiga;
A ii.12 (same as sabba yoga visayutta). -vacara
"one at home in endeavour," or in spiritual (esp. jhna )
exercises; one who practises "yoga"; an earnest student. The
term is peculiar to the Abhidhamma literature. J i.303, 394,
400; iii.241 (sasrasgara taranto y.); Ps ii.26; KvuA 32;
Miln 33 sq., 43, 366, 378 sq.; Vism 245 (as hunter) 246 (as
begging bhikkhu), 375 (iddhi study), 587, 637, 666, 708;
DhA ii.12 (padhna padahanto y.); iii.241 (bhikkhu); DhsA
187 (dhikammika), 246 (kulayutta); VbhA 115, 220, 228 (as
bhikkhu on alms round), 229 (as hunter), 258, 331; KhA 74;
SnA 20, 374. -kkhema [already Vedic yoga kema exertion & rest, acquisition & possession] rest from work or exertion, or fig. in scholastic interpretation "peace from bondage,"
i. e. perfect peace or "uttermost safety" (K.S. ii.132); a freq.
epithet of nibbna [same in BSk.: yogakema, e. g. Divy
98, 123, 303, 498] M i.117 (kma), 349, 357, (anuttara);
S i.173 (adhivhana); ii.195 (anuttara), 226; iii.112 (kma,
neg.); iv.125; v.130 sq.; A i.50 (anuttara); ii.40, 52 (a), 87,
247; iii.21, 294 sq., 353; D iii.123, 125, 164 (kma); Vin
ii.205=It 11 (ato dhasati, whereas Vin padhasati); It 9,
27 (abhabbo ssa adhigamya); Th 2, 6; Sn 79 (adhivhana),
425; Dh 23 (anuttara, cp. DhA i.231); Ps i.39; ii.81; Vbh 247
(kulni y kh kmni, which VbhA 341 expls : cathi yogehi khema nibbhaya icchanti); ThA 13. kkhemin finding one's rest, peace, or salvation; emancipated, free, an Arahant S iii.13 (accanta); iv.85; A ii.12; iv.310 (patta); v.326
(accanta); DhA iii.233, 234 (=sabba yoga visayutta);
neg. a not finding one's salvation A ii.52 (in verse)=Ps ii.80;
It 50. u knowing the (right) means Miln 169 sq. -bahula
strong in exertion A iii.432. -yutta (Mrassa) one who is tied
in the bonds (of Mra) A ii.52 (so read for gutta; the verse
also at Ps ii.80, 81, and It 50). -vibhga dividing (division)
of the relation (in grammar: to yoga 2) SnA 266.
Yojita [pp. of yojeti] yoked, tied, bound Ps i.129 (catu-yoga fettered by the four bonds); SnA 137 (yottehi y.).
Yojeti
Yobbana (nf.) [cp. late Vedic & Epic Sk. yauvana, fr. yuvan]
youth D i.115; A i.68; iii.5, 66, 103; Dh 155, 156; Sn 98, 110,
218; Pv i.76 ; DhA iii.409; PvA 3.
-mada pride of youth D iii.220; A i.146; iii.72; VbhA 466.
R
-R- the letter (or sound) r, used as euphonic consonant to avoid
hiatus. The sandhi r originates from the final r of
nouns in ir & ur of the Vedic period. In Pali it is felt as
euphonic consonant only, like other sandhi consonants (y for
instance) which in the older language were part of the noun
itself. Thus r even where it is legitimate in a word may interchange with other sandhi consonants in the same word,
as we find punam eva and puna d eva besides the
original puna r eva (=Vedic punar eva). At J i.403 we
read "punar gata," where the C. expls "puna gata, ra kro
sandhivasena vutto." Similarly: Sn 81 (vutti r es), 214
622
Rajakkha
Rasika (adj.) [rasi+ka] having rays, radiant, in sahassa having 1000 rays Vv 645 (=suriya maala viya VvA 277).
Rasimant (adj.) [fr. rasi] having rays, radiant; n.
rasim the sun Vv 812 (=suriya VvA 314).
sg.
Rakkhaka (adj. n.) [fr. rakkha] 1. guarding, protecting, watching, taking care PvA 7; f. ik (ds) DhA iv.103 (a servant
watching the house). 2. observing, keeping J i.205 (sla).
3. a cultivator J ii.110. 4. a sentry J i.332.
Rakkhati [Vedic raksati, rak to Idg. *ark (cp. Lat. arceo etc.)
in enlarged form *aleq=Gr. to protect (Alexander!);
strength; Ags. ealgian to protect, Goth. alhs=Ags. ealh
temple. Cp. also base *areq in P. aggala. The Dhtp 18 expls
rakkh by "plana"] 1. to protect, shelter, save, preserve Sn
220; J iv.255 (ma rakkheyytha); vi.589 (=pleti); Pv ii.943
(dhana); Miln 166 (rukkha), 280 (attna rakkheyya save
himself); PvA 7. grd. rakkhiya to be protected Mhvs
33, 45. Neg. arakkhiya & arakkheyya (in meaning 3) see
separately. Pass. ppr. rakkhiyamna J i.140. 2.
to observe, guard, take care of, control (with ref. to citta
the heart, and sla good character or morals) It 67 (sla);
DhA i.295 (citta rakkha, equivalent with citta dama), 397
(cra); J iv.255 (vca); VvA 59 (slni rakkhi); PvA 66
(sla rakkhatha, uposatha karotha). 3. to keep (a) secret, to put away, to guard against (i. e. to keep away from)
Sn 702 (mano padosa rakkheyya); Miln 170 (vacduccarita rakkheyya). pp. rakkhita. See also parpleti &
parirakkhati.
623
Rajakkha
Rajo
i.121; ii.33, 195; Nd1 358; Nd2 235 No. 3 p2 ; Vbh 341; Miln
263; Vism 205; VbhA 458.
Rajakkhat (f.) [abstr. fr. rajakkha] is Kern's (problematic) proposed reading (Toev. s. v.) for rjakhda at Sn 831 (rjakhdya phuho), which is however unjustified, as the original reading is well attested and expld in the Niddesa as
such. The term as proposed would not occur by itself either
(like rajakkha, only ).
Rajata (nt.) [Vedic rajata; see etym. under rajati] silver D i.5
(expld at DA i.78 as a general name for all coins except gold:
kahpaas etc.); S i.92; Sn 962 (in simile; expld at Nd1 478 as
jtarpa), J v.50; 416 (hema gold & silver); Vv 351 (hema
jla); DhA ii.42 (paa silver tablet or salver); iv.105 (gabbha
silver money box or cabinet for silver, alongside of kahpaa
gabbha and suvaa); VbhA 64 (expld as "kahpaa");
PvA 95 (for rpiya).
Rajati [raj & raj to shine, to be coloured or light ( red);
to Idg. *areg to be bright, as in Lat. argus, Gr. &
light; Sk. arjuna (see ajjuna); to which also rajati silver=Lat. argentum, Gr. ; Gallic Argento ratum
(N. of Strassburg); Oir argat.] usually intrs. rajjati (q.v.). As
rajitabba (grd.) in meaning "to be bleached" (dhovitabba+)
only in meaning "bleach" (as compared with dhovati clean,
& vijaeti to disentangle, smoothe) Vin iii.235 (ppr. fr. pl.
dhovantiyo rajantiyo etc.); J i.8 (rajitabba, grd.; dhovitabba+).
Somehow it is difficult to distinguish between the meanings "bleach" and "dye" (cp. rajaka), in some combns with
dhovati it clearly means "dye," as at Vin i.50 (forms: rajati,
rajitabba, rajiyetha 3 sg. Pot. Med.); Vism 65 (forms: rajitv,
rajitabba, rajitu). Another grd. rajanya in diff. meaning (see sep.). Caus. rajeti to paint, colour Th 1, 1155 (inf.
rajetave: (see Geiger, P.Gr. 204, 1. a). Caus. also rajeti (see under rajati). Med. Pass. rajjati (q. v.). Caus.
II. rajpeti to cause to be bleached Vin iii.206 (dhovpeyya
rajpeyya kopeyya), 235 (dhovapeti r. vijapeti); J ii.197
(ovaika sibbpetv rajpetv).
Rajo (rajas) & Raja (nt.) [raj, see rajati & rajati. Vedic raja meaning: (a) space, as region of mist & cloud, similar to
antarksa, (b) a kind of (shiny) metal (cp. rajata); see Zimmer, Altind. Leben 55]. A Forms. Both rajo & raja occur
as noun & acc. sg., e. g. rajo at D ii.19; Sn 207, 334; Dhs
617; raja at Sn 275; It 83; once (in verse) rajo occurs as
m, viz. Sn 662. The other cases are formed from the a
stem only, e. g. rajassa Sn 406; pl. rajni Sn 517, 974. In
compn we find both forms, viz. (1) rajas either in visarga form
rajah, as (a) rajo-, (b) raja- and (c) raj- (stressed), or in s
form (d) rajas-; (2) raja-, appearing apostrophied as (e)
raj-. B Meanings. (1) (lit.) dust, dirt; usually wet, staining
dust D ii.19 (tia+); Sn 662=PvA 116 (sukhumo rajo paivta khitto); It 83; Dhs 617 (dhmo+). adj. rja: in sa & a
vta Vin ii.209; Vism 31. The meaning "pollen" [Sk. raja, m.]
may be seen in "raja missaka rasa" at DhA i.375. 2.
(fig.) stain, dirt, defilement, impurity. Thus taken conventionally by the P. commentators as the 3 fold blemish of man's
character: rga, dosa, moha, e. g. Nd1 505; SnA 255; DhA
iii.485; or as kilesa-raja at SnA 479. Sn 207 (niket jyate rajo), 334, 665 (raja kirasi, metaph.), 974 (paca rajni
loke, viz. the excitement caused by the 5 bhirni yatanni
Nd1 505. Also in stanza rgo rajo na ca pana reu vuccati (with
dosa & moha the same) Nd1 505=Nd2 590 (slightly diff.)=J
i.117=Vism 388, cp. Divy 491 with interesting variation.
adj. raja in two phrases apagata VvA 236 & vigata Nd1
505 free from defilement. On raja in similes see J.P.T.S.
1907, 126. Cp. vi. C. Compounds. (a) rajo-: jalla dust
and (wet) dirt, muddy dirt D ii.18; Vin iii.70; J iv.322; v.241;
Miln 133, 195, 258, 410; SnA 248, 291. -jallika living in
dirty mud, designation of a class of ascetics M i.281; J i.390.
-dhtu "dust element" (doubtful trsln ) D i.54, which DA
i.163 explns as "raja okia hnni," i. e. dusty places.
Dial. trsl. "places where dust accumulates," Franke, Dgha p.
57 as "Staubiges" but rightly sees a deeper, speculative meaning in the expression (Snkhya doctrine of rajas?). -mala dust
& dirt J i.24. -vajalla [this expression is difficult to explain.
It may simply be a condensed phrase rajo 'va jalla, or a redupl.
cpd. rajo+avajalla, which was spelt raj ovajalla for ava
because of rajo, or represents a contamination of raj-avajalla
Rajo
Raa
Rajana (nt.) [fr. rajati] delighting, finding pleasure, excitement DhsA 363 (rajan' ahena rgo; v. l. rajano; perhaps
better to be read rajjana).
Rajita [pp. of rajeti] coloured, soiled, in raja affected with
stain, defiled J i.117. See also anu & pari.
Raati [ra; Dhtp 86: "paribhsane"] to yell, cry; shout (at), scold,
revile: not found in the texts.
Raha (nt.) [Vedic rra] reign, kingdom, empire; country,
realm Sn 46 (expld at Nd2 536 as "raha ca janapada ca
kohgra ca... nagara ca"), 287, 444, 619; J iv 389 (
araha karoti); PvA 19 ( kreti to reign, govern). Pabbata mountain kingdom SnA 26; Magadha the kingdom
of Magadha PvA 67.
-pia the country's alms food ( bhujati) Dh 308
(saddhya dinna); A i.10; S ii.221; M iii.127; Th 2, 110; It
43, 90. -vsin inhabitant of the realm, subject DhA iii.481
Rajja (nt.) [Sk. rjya, fr. rj] kingship, royalty, kingdom, empire; reign, throne; (fig.) sovereignty A iii.300 ( kreti);
Sn 114, 553 ( kreti to reign); J i.57; 64 (ekarattena
ti rajjni atikkamma; 3 kingdoms); iii.170 ( amaccna
niyydetv), 199 (dukkhaseyya api rajja pi kraye); iv.96,
105, 393 (nava rajja new kingship, newly (or lately) crowned
king); vi.4 (rajjato me sussitv maraam eva seyyo: death by
withering is better than kingship); VvA 314 (=J i.64 as above);
PvA 73 sq.; Mhvs 10, 52 (rj rajja akrayi). cakkavatti
rule of a universal king DhA iii.191; deva reign amongst
gods KhA 227; padesa local sovereignty It 15; Kh viii.12
(cp. KhA 227).
-siri-dyik (devat) (goddess) giving success to the empire DhA ii.17. -sma border of the empire Vism 121.
Rajjati [cp. Sk. rajyati, raj or raj, Med. of rajati] to be excited, attached to (loc.), to find pleasure in S iv.74 (na so rajjati rpesu; =viratta citta); Sn 160, 813 (contrasted with
virajjati); Ps i.58, 77 sq., 130, 178; Nd1 138; Miln 386 (rajjasi rajanyesu etc.: in combn with dosa & moha or derivations, representing rga or lobha, cp. lobhanya); VbhA 11.
ppr. rajjamna PvA 3; Pot. rajjeyya Miln 280 (kampeyya+);
grd. rajjitabba Miln 386 (rajanyesu r.; with dussanyesu and
muyhanyesu; followed by kampitabba); fut. rajjissati DhsA
194; aor. araji Vin i.36=J i.83 (na yihe na hute araji).
pp. ratta.
Rajjana (nt.) [fr. rajjati] defilement DA i.195. Cp. muyhana.
Rajju (f.) [Vedic rajju, cp. Lat. restis rope, Lith. rgis
wicker, basket] a cord, line, rope S ii.128; Vin ii.120, 148
(vichana); Nd2 304; J i.464, 483 (fisherman's line); v.173;
Mhvs 10, 61; DhA iv.54; VbhA 163; KhA 57; VvA 207; Sdhp
148, 153.
-kra rope maker Miln 331.
-ghaka "rope
holder," (king's) land surveyor J ii.367=DhA iv.88 (see
Fick, Sociale Gliederung 97).
Rajjuka [rajju+ka] 1. a rope, line J i.164 (bandhana); ThA 257.
2.=rajjughaka, king's land surveyor J ii.367.
Rajati [raj=raj: see rajati & rajjati Dhtp 66 & 398 defines
raja=rge] 1. to colour, dye J i.220. 2. (=rajjati) to find
delight in, to be excited Sn 424 (ettha me r. mano; v. l. BB
rajjati). Caus. rajeti to delight or make glad D iii.93 (in
etym. of rj (q. v.). pp rajita. Caus. II. rajpeti to
cause to be coloured or dyed DhA iv.106 (v. l. raj).
625
Raa
Ratta
Rata [pp. of ramati] delighting in (loc. or ), intent on, devoted to S iv.117 (dhamme jhne), 389 sq. (bhava etc.); Sn
54 (sangaika) 212, 250, 327, 330 (dhamme), 461 (yae),
737 (upasame); Mhvs. 1, 44 (mahkruiko Satth sabba
loka hite rato); 32, 84 (rato pue); PvA 3, 12, 19 (mnasa).
Ratana1 (nt.) [cp. Vedic ratna, gift; the BSk. form is ratna
(Divy 26) as well as ratana (Av ii.199)] 1. (lit.) a gem, jewel
VvA 321 (not=ratana2 , as Hardy in Index); PvA 53 (nnvidhni). The 7 ratanas are enumd under veuriya (Miln 267).
They are (the precious minerals) suvaa, rajata, mutt, mai,
veuriya, vajira, pava. (So at Abhp 490.) These 7 are said to
be used in the outfit of a ship to give it more splendour: J ii.112.
The 7 (unspecified) are mentioned at Th 2, 487 (satta ratanni
vasseyya vuhim "all seven kinds of gems"); and at DhA
i.274, where it is said of a ratana maapa that in it there
were raised flags "sattaratana may." On ratana in similes see J.P.T.S. 1909, 127. 2. (fig.) treasure, gem of ()
Sn 836 (etdisa r.=dibb' itthi ratana SnA 544); Miln 262
(dussa a very fine garment). Usually as a set of 7 valuables,
belonging to the throne (the empire) of a (world ) king.
Thus at D ii.16 sq.; of Mah Sudassana D ii.172 sq. They
are enumd singly as follows: the wheel (cakka) D ii.172 sq.,
the elephant (hatthi, called Uposatha) D ii.174, 187, 197; the
horse (assa, Valhaka) ibid.; the gem (mai) D ii.175, 187; the
woman (itthi) ibid.; the treasurer (gahapati) D ii.176, 188; the
adviser (pariyaka) ibid. The same 7 are enumd at D i.89; Sn
p. 106; DA i.250; also at J iv.232, where their origins (homes)
are given as: cakka out of Cakkadaha; hatthi from the Uposatha race; assa from the clan of Valhassarja, mai
from Vepulla, and the last 3 without specification. See also remarks on gahapati. Kern, Toev. s. v. ratana suspects the latter
to be originally "major domus" (cp. his attributes as "wealthy"
at MVastu i.108). As to the exact meaning of pariyaka he
is doubtful, which mythical tradition has obscured. The
7 (moral) ratanas at S ii.217 & iii.83 are probably the same
as are given in detail at Miln 336, viz. the 5: sla, samdhi,
pa, vimutti, vimutti adassana (also given under the
collective name sla kkhandha or dhamma kkhandha),
to which are added the 2: paisambhid & bojjhanga. These
7 are probably meant at PvA 66, where it is said that Sakka
"endowed their house with the 7 jewels" (sattar. bharita
626
Ratta
Ratha
rajati and rajana. It may also be taken as "bleached" in rattakambala. In ratta-phalika (crystal) it approaches the meaning of "white," as also in expln of puarka at J v.216 with
ratta-paduma "white lotus." It is most commonly found in
foll. combns at foll. passages: Miln 191 (lohita candana);
Vism 172 (kambala), 174 (koraaka), 191 (pak); J i.394
(pavla ratta kambala); iii.30 (puppha dma); v.37
(slivana), 216 (paduma); 372 (suvaa); DhA i.393 (id.),
248 (kambala); iv.189 (candanarukkha red sandal tree);
SnA 125 (where paduma is given as "ratta set' divasena");
VvA 4 (dupaa), 65 (suvaa), 177 (phalika); PvA 4 (virala ml; garland of red flowers for the convict to be executed, cp. Fick, Sociale Gliederung 104), 157 (paduma), 191
(sli); Mhvs 30, 36 (kambala); 36, 82 (rattni akkhni bloodshot eyes). With the latter cp. cpd. rattakkha "with red eyes"
(fr. crying) at PvA 39 (v. l. BB.), and Np. rattakkhin "Red
eye" (Ep. of a Yakkha). 3. (fig.) excited, infatuated,
impassioned S iv.339; Sn 795 (virga); It 92 (macc ratt);
Miln 220. Also in combn ratta duha mha: see Nd2 s. v.
chanda; cp. bhava rga ratta.
Ratta2 (nt.) & (poet.) ratt (f.) [Epic Sk. rtra; Vedic rtra
only in cpd. aho rtra. Semantically an abstr. formation in collect. meaning "the space of a night's time," hence
"interval of time" in general. Otherwise rtri: see under ratti]
(rarely) night; (usually) time in general. Occurs only ,
with expressions giving a definite time. Independently (besides cpds. mentioned below) only at one (doubtful) passage,
viz. Sn 1071, where BB MSS. read rattam-ah for ratta aho,
which corresponds to the Vedic phrase aho rtra (=P. ahoratta). The P.T.S. ed. reads natta; SnA 593 reads natta,
but expls as rattin diva, whereas Nd2 538 reads ratta &
expls : "ratta vuccati ratti, ah (sic lege!) ti divaso, ratti ca
diva ca." Otherwise only in foll. adv. expressions (meaning either "time" or "night"): instr. eka rattena in one night
J i.64; satta after one week (lit. a seven night) Sn 570.
acc. sg. cira ratta a long time Sn 665; dgha id. [cp. BSk.
drgha rtra freq.] Sn 22; M i.445; aha at "halfnight,"
i. e. midnight A iii.407; pubba ratt' pararatta one night
after the other (lit. the last one and the next) DhA iv.129.
acc. pl. cira rattni a long time J v.268. loc. in var. forms,
viz. vassa ratte in the rainy season J v.38 (Kern, Toev. s.
v. gives wrongly iii.37, 143; aha ratte at midnight PvA
152; aha rattya at midnight Vv 8116 (=aharattiya
VvA 315); div ca ratto ca day & night Vv 315 (=rattiya
VvA 130); cira rattya a long time J v.267; Pv i.94 .
-andhakra the dark of night, nightly darkness Vin iv.268
(oggate suriye); M i.448. -parata abstaining from food at
night D i.5 (cp. DA i.77). -u of long standing, recognised D i.48 (in phrase: r. cira pabbajito addhagato etc.;
expld at DA i.143 as "pabbajjato pahya atikkant bah rattiyo jnt ti r."); A ii.27 (here the pl. ratta, as if fr. sg.
ratta a); Sn p. 92 (ther r. cira pabbajit; the expln
at SnA 423 is rather fanciful with the choice of either=ratana
u, i. e. knowing the gem of Nibbna, or=bahu ratti
vid, i. e. knowing many nights); ThA 141. A f. abstr.
ut "recognition" is found at M i.445 (spelt ratat, but
v. l. ut). -samaye (loc., adv.) at the time of (night) J i.63
(aha ratta at midnight), 264 (id.); iv.74 (vassa in the
Ratha1 [Vedic ratha, Av. rapa, Lat. rota wheel, rotundus ("rotund" & round), Oir. roth=Ohg rad wheel, Lith. ratas id.] a
two wheeled carriage, chariot (for riding, driving or fighting S i.33 (ethically); A iv.191 (horse & cart; diff. parts of a
ratha); M i.396; Sn 300, 654; Vism 593 (in its compn of akkha,
cakka, pajara, s etc.); J iii.239 (passaddha carriage slowing up); Th 2, 229 (caturassa ratha, i. e. a Vimna); Mhvs
35, 42 (go rathe yutt); VvA 78 (500), 104, 267 (=Vimna),
PvA 74. assatar a chariot drawn by a she mule Vv
208 =438 ; Pv i.111 ; J vi.355. Phussa-ratha state carriage
J iii.238; vi.30 sq. See under ph. On ratha in similes see
J.P.T.S. 1907, 127.
-atthara (rathatthara) a rug for a chariot D i.7; Vin i.192;
ii.163. -anka array of chariots Vin iv.108. -s carriage
pole A iv.191. -patthara chariot or carriage cover D i.103;
DA i.273. -esabha (ratha+ abha, Sk. rathrabha) lord of
charioteers. Ratha here in meaning of "charioteer"; Childers
627
Ratha
Raya
sees rathin in this cpd.; Trenckner, Notes 59, suggests distortion from rathe ubha. Dhpla at PvA 163 clearly understands it as ratha =charioteer explaining "rathesu usabha
sadiso mah ratho ti attho"; as does Bdhgh. at SnA 321
(on Sn 303): "mah rathesu khattiyesu akampiy' ahena
usabha sadiso." Sn 303 308, 552; Pv ii.131 ; Mhvs
5, 246; 15, 11; 29, 12. -kra carriagebuilder, chariot
maker, considered as a class of very low social standing, rebirth in which is a punishment (cp. Fick, Sociale Gliederung
56, 207, 209 sq.) S i.93; Vin iv.9 (as term of abuse, enumd
with other low grades: cala vea nesda r. pukkusa), 12
(jti); M ii.152, 183 f.; as krin at Pv iii.113 (expld as cammakrin PvA 175). As Npl. name of one of the 7 Great Lakes
in the Himlaya (Rathakradaha), e. g. at Vism 416; SnA 407.
-cakka wheel of a chariot or carriage Vism 238 (in simile, concerning its circumference); PvA 65. -pajara the body (lit.
"cage" or "frame") of a carriage Vv 831 (=rath' pattha VvA
326); J ii.172; iv.60; DhA i.28. -yuga a chariot yoke J vi.42.
-reu "chariot dust," a very minute quantity (as a measure),
a mite. Childers compares Sk. trasareu a mote of dust, atom.
It is said to consist of 36 tajjri's, and 36 ratha reu's are
equal to one likkh: VbhA 343. -vinta "led by a chariot," a
chariot drive (Neumann, "Eilpost"), name of the 24th Suttanta of Majjhima (M i.145 sq.), quoted at Vism 93, 671 and
SnA 446. -sl chariot shed DhA iii.121.
Ratha2 [fr. ram, cp. Sk. ratha] pleasure, joy, delight: see mano.
Rathaka1 (nt.) [fr. ratha, cp. Sk. rathaka m.] a little carriage,
a toy cart D i.6 (cp. DA i.86: khuddakaratha); Vin ii.10;
iii.180; M i.226; Miln 229.
Rambati (& lambati) [lamb] to hang down. Both forms are given
with meaning "avasasane" at Dhtp 198 and Dhtm 283.
628
Raya
Rasa
kasva; sdu, asdu, sta, uha, or sour, sweet, bitter, pungent, salt, alkaline, sour, astringent; pleasant, unpleasant, cold
& hot. Miln 56 has the foll.: ambila, lavaa, tittaka, kauka,
kasya, madhura. 1. juice [as applied in the Veda to the
Soma juice], e.g. in the foll. combns : ucchu of sugar cane,
extract of sugar, cane syrup Vin i.246; VvA 180; patta &
puppha of leaf & flower Vin i.246; madhura of honey
PvA 119. 2. taste as (objective) quality, the sense object of taste (cp. above defns ). In the list of the yatanas,
or senses with their complementary sense objects (sentient and sensed) rasa occupies the 4th place, following upon
gandha. It is stated that one tastes (or "senses") taste with the
tongue (no reference to palate): jivhya rasa syitv (or
vieyya). See also yatana 3 and rpa. M iii.55 (jivh
vieyya r.), 267; D iii.244, 250; Sn 387; Dhs 609; PvA 50
(vaagandha rasa sampanna bhojana: see below 5).
3. sense of taste, as quality & personal accomplishment. Thus
in the list of senses marking superiority (the 10 dhipateyyas or
has), similar to rasa as special distinction of the Mahpurisa
(see cpd. ras agga) S iv.275 =Pv ii.958 ; A iv.242. 4. object or act of enjoyment, sensual stimulus, material enjoyment,
pleasure (usually in pl.) Sn 65 (rasesu gedha, see materialistic
exegesis at Nd2 540), 854 (rase na anugijjhati; perhaps better
rasesu, as SnA); A iii.237 (puriso agga parititto: perhaps
to No. 2). 5. flavour and its substance (or substratum), e.
g. soup VvA 243 (kakkaaka crabsoup), cp. S v.149, where
8 soup flavours are given (ambila, tittaka, kauka, madhura,
khrika, akhrika, loika, aloika); Pv ii.115 (aneka rasa
vyajana "with exceptionally flavoured sauce"); J v.459,
465. gorasa "flavour of cow, i. e. produce of cow: see under
go. Also metaphorically: "flavour, relish, pleasure": Sn 257
(pariveka, dhamma pi, cp. SnA 299 "assd' ahena" i.
e. tastiness); PvA 287 (vimutti relish of salvation). So also
as attha, dhamma, vimutti Ps ii.89. 6. (in grammar
& style) essential property, elegance, brightness; in dramatic
art "sentiment" (flavour) (see Childers s. v. naya rasa)
Miln 340 (with opamma and lakkhaa: perhaps to No. 7);
PvA 122 (rasa as ending in Np. Angrasa, expld as jutiy
adhivacana, " i. e. brightness, excellency). 7. at t. t.
in philosophy "essential property" (Expos. 84), combd with
lakkhaa etc. (cp. Cpd. 13, 213), either kicca function or
sampatti property DhsA 63, 249; Vism 8, 448; Miln 148.
8. fine substance, semi solid semiliquid substance, extract,
delicacy, fineness, dust. Thus in pahav "essence of earth,"
humus S i.134 (trsln "taste of earth," rather abstract); or rasapahav earth as dust or in great fineness, "primitive earth"
(before taking solid shape) D iii.86 sq. (trsl. "savoury earth,"
not quite clear), opp. to bhmipappaaka; Vism 418; pabbatarasa mountain extract, rock substance J iii.55; suvaa
gold dust J i.93. 9. (adj. ) tasting Vv 1611 (Amataras
f.=nibbnarasvin VvA 85).
-agga finest quality (of taste), only in further compn with
aggita (ras agga s aggita) most delicate sense trsln
Dial.) D iii.167, and aggin (ras agga s aggin, cp.
MVastu ii.306: rasa ras' grin) of the best quality (of taste,
cp. above 2), said of the Mahpurisa D ii.18= iii.144 (cp. trsln
Dial. ii.15 "his taste is supremely acute"). The phrase & its
wording are still a little doubtful. Childers gives etym. of
rasaggas aggin as rasa ggas aggin, ggas represent-
629
Rasa
Rga
Rahas & Raho (nt.) [Vedic rahas. The Pli word is restricted to
the forms raho and rah (=*raha); a loc. rahasi is mentioned by Childers, but not found in the Canon. To rahati] lonely place, solitude, loneliness; secrecy, privacy.
1. raho: occurring only as adv. "secretly, lonely, in secret," either absolutely, e. g. S i.46; Sn 388; Pv ii.716 (opp.
vi openly); iv.140 (raho nisinna); Vism 201 (na raho karoti
ppni: araha tena vuccati); or in cpds. e. g. gata being in private, being alone D i.134 (+paisallna); Sn p. 60.
See also under paisallna; gama "secret convention, secret
intercourse," fig. a secret adviser J vi.369 (after Kern, not
found!); vda secret talk M iii.230. See also anu. 2.
rah, only in cpd. rah-bhva secrecy, in defn of arahant at
DA i.146=Vism 201 (rahbhvena ten' esa arahan ti). See also
der. rha-seyyaka. Note. Hardy's reading yath raha at Pv
ii.923 & PvA 78 is not correct, it should be yath' raha (cp.
similarly pj raha). In the same sense we would preferably read agg' san' di arahna "of those who merit the
first seat etc." at J i.217, although all MSS. have aggsandi
rahna, thus postulating a form raha=araha.
Rahassa (adj. nt.) [Sk. rahasya] secret, private; nt. secrecy, secret Mhvs 35, 64 (vatv rahassa); instr. rahassena (as adv.)
secretly Mhvs 36, 80; acc. rahassa id. Pv iv. 165 .
-kath secret speech, whispered words J i.411; ii.6.
Rasaka [fr. rasa, cp. Classic Sk. rasaka] a cook J v.460, 461, 507.
Rasati [ras] to shout, howl J ii.407 (vv. ll. rayati, vasati; C. expls
as "nadati")=iv.346 (v. l. sarati).
Rga [cp. Sk. rga, fr. raj: see rajati] 1. colour, hue; colouring,
dye Vin ii.107 (anga "rougeing" the body: bhikkh angarga karonti); ThA 78; SnA 315 (nnvidha). 2 (as t. t.
in philosophy & ethics) excitement, passion; seldom by itself,
mostly in combn with dosa, & moha, as the three fundamental blemishes of character: passion or lust (uncontrolled excitement), ill will (anger) and infatuation (bewilderment):
see dosa2 & moha; cp. sarga. These three again appear in
manifold combns with similar terms, all giving var. shades of
the "craving for existence" or "lust of life" (tah etc.), or all
that which is an obstacle to nibbna. Therefore the giving up
of rga is one of the steps towards attaining the desired goal
of emancipation (vimutti). Some of the combns are e. g.
the 3 (r. d. m.)+kilesa; +kodha; very often fourfold r. d. m.
with mna, these again with dihi: see in full Nd2 s. v. rga
(p. 237), cp. below ussada. Of the many passages illustrating the contrast rga>nibbna the foll. may be mentioned:
chandarga vinodana nibbnapada accuta Sn 1086; yo
rgakkhayo (etc.): ida vuccati amata S v.8; yo rgakkhayo
(etc.): ida vuccati nibbna S iv.251; ye 'dha pajahanti kmarga bhavararganu saya ca pahya... parinibbna
gat Vv 5324 ; kusalo jahati ppaka... rga dosa mohakkhay parinibbuto Ud 85. Personified, Rga (v. l.
Rga
Rj (Rjan)
Rj (Rjan)
Rj (Rjan)
Rj (Rjan)
Rj (Rjan)
DA i.246. -dta king's messenger Sn 411, 412; in meaning of "message," i. e. calling somebody to court, summons
at J ii.101, 305. -dhamma "king's rule," i. e. rule of governing, norm of kingship; usually given as a set of 10, which
are enumd at J iii.274 as "dna, sla, pariccga, ajjava, maddava, tapo, akkodha, avihis, khanti, avirodhana," i. e. alms
giving, morality, liberality, straightness, gentleness, self
restriction, non anger, non hurtfulness, forbearance non
opposition. These are referred to as dasa rjadhamm at J
i.260, 399; ii.400; iii.320; v.119, 378; usually in phrase "dasa
rja dhamme akopetv dhammena rajjan kresi": he ruled
in righteousness, not shaking the tenfold code of the king. Another set of 3 are mentioned at J v.112, viz. "vitatha kodha
hsa nivraye" (expld as giving up musvda, kodha & adhamma hsa). -dhn a royal city (usually combd with
gma & nigama) A i.159; ii.33; iii.108; Vin iii.89; J v.453;
Pv 1318 . -dht king's daughter, princess J i.207; PvA 74.
-nivesana the king's abode, i. e. palace DhA iv.92. -paris
royal assembly Vin ii.296. -pla (?) DhA i.323. -putta lit.
"king's son," prince, one belonging to the royal clan (cp. similarly kulaputta), one of royal descent, Rjput Sn 455; Miln
331; VbhA 312, 319 (in simile); PvA 20. f. putt princess J
iv.108; v.94. -purisa "king's man," only in pl. puris the
men of the king, those in the king's service (as soldiers, body
guard, policeman etc.) J iii.34; VbhA 80 (nubandha
cor), 109. -porisa (m. & nt.) servant of the king, collectively: king's service, those who devote themselves to Govt.
service D i.135; M i.85=Nd2 199; A iv.281, 286. See also
porisa. -bali royal tax J i.354. -bhaa king's hireling or
soldier Vin i.74, 88; SnA 38 (in simile) -bhaya fear of the
king('s punishment) Vism 121. -bhga the king's share J
ii.378. -bhogga 1. royal, in the service of the king, in foll.
phrases: rja bhogga ra dinna rja dya brahma
deyya D i.87, of a flourishing place. Dial. i.108 trsls
"with power over it as if he were king," and expls with: "where
the king has proprietary rights." The C. rather unmeaningly
expls as "rja laddha" (DA i.245). The BSk. has a curious
version of this phrase: "rj agni- dattena brahmadeyya
datta" (given by the king in the place of agni?) Divy 620.
Further at Vin iii.221 in sequence rj r bhogga, brhmaa, gahapatika, where the C. expls (on p. 222) as "yo koci
rao bhatta vetan' hro." (We should be inclined to take
this as No. 2.) Thirdly, in stock phrase "rjraha rjabhogga rao angan t' eva sankha gacchati," i. e. worthy of
a king, imperial, he justifies the royal qualification, said of
a thoroughbred horse at A i.244= ii.113; of a soldier (yodh'
jva) at A i.284; of an elephant at J ii.370 (where it is expld
as "rja paribhoga"). Also as "royal possessions" in general
at DhA i.312. 13. Fick, Soc. Gl. 99 does not help much,
he takes it as "king's official." 2. royal, of royal power,
one entitled to the throne. Either as bhogga, bhogiya (SnA
453) or (khattiy) bhoja-rjno (Sn 553). Thus at Vin iii.221,
where it takes the place of the usual khattiya "royal noble" &
Sn 553, where it is combd (as bhoja rjano) with khattiy. See
also bhoja & cp. (antara) bhogika and rjaa. -mahmatta
king's prime minister (see above 4 b, to which add:) D iii.44;
A i.154, 252, 279; iii.128; VbhA 312 (simile of 2), 340. mlakra royal gardener J v.292. -mudd the royal seal
DhA i.21. -muddik id. SnA 577. -ratha the king's char633
Rj (Rjan)
Ritta
Rji1 [cp. Sk. rji] a streak, line, row Sn p. 107 (nla vana
=dark line of trees, expld as nla vana rukkha panti SnA
451); Vv 644 (nabhyo sata rji cittita "coloured with 100
streaks"; VvA=lekh); 646 (veuriya); pabbata a mountain
range J ii.417; dgha (adj.) of long lineage PvA 68; dvangula a band 2 inches broad Dvs v.49; roma a row of hair
(on the body) J v.430.
Rji2 [fr. rga?] dissension, quarrel, in phrase sangha (+sanghabheda) Vin ii.203 (quoted at VbhA 428); iv.217.
Rjik (f.) [cp. Sk. rjik] a certain (gold) weight (a seed-corn
of Sinapis ramosa) Th 1, 97=862 (kasa sata 100 mustard
seeds in weight, i. e. very costly); J vi.510 (kase sovae
satarjike).
Rjita: see vi.
Rjin (adj.) [fr. rji] having streaks or stripes, in uddhagga having prominent stripes (of a lion) J iv.345.
Rhaseyyaka (adj.)
[rahas+seyya+ka or rha (for
rah)+seyyaka] "having one's bed in loneliness," living in
seclusion or secrecy, in manussa "fit to lie undisturbed by
men" Vin i.39 (+paisallna sruppa); M ii.118.
Ricati [ric, in Vedic & Sk. rinakti; cp. Av. irinaxti to leave; Gr.
id., left; Lat. linquo id.; Goth. leihwan=Ohg.
lhan to lend; Ags ln=loan, cp. E. leave etc. The defn
of the root at Dhtp is given in two forms, viz. ric as "virecane" (No. 396; cp. Dhtm 517 "kharae," i. e. flowing; 610
"recane"), and ric as "ricane" (No. 44)] to leave, abandon,
leave behind, give up, neglect Vin i.190 (also fut. ricissati);
M i.155 (ricissati), 403; S iv.206; A iii.86 sq., 108 sq., 343
sq., 366 sq., 437; Th 1, 1052; Sn 156; Miln 419; J v.403.
ppr. med. with neg.: aricamna Sn 69; ger. ricitv (for
Sk. riktv) Th 2, 93. pp. ritta. Pass. riccati [Sk. ricyate] to be left: see ati.
Rva [fr. ravati, cp. rava] crying, howling; shout, noise J i.162
(baddha the cry of one who is caught); iv.415 (id.); vi.475 (of
the cries of animals, known to an expert); Miln 254 (bherava
rva abhiravati); Mhvs 10, 69 (mah rva arvi).
Ritta [pp. of ricati; cp. atireka] devoid, empty, free, rid (of) M
i.207 (+tuccha), 414; Vin i.157=ii.216; Sn 823 (emancipated:
ritto muni=vivitta etc. Nd1 158), 844 (opp. to aritta); Th 2,
265 (see rindi); J i.29 (v. 222); iii.492; Miln 383.
-assda finding one's taste in empty things A i.280 (+bhir
assda. Kern, Toev. s. v. reads rittsa and trsls "impure
(of food)," not according to the sense at all). -sana an empty
seat Sn 963 (expld at Nd1 481 as "opportunity for sitting down
which is free from unbefitting sights"). -pesua free fr. slander Sn 941 (expld at Nd1 422: "yassa pesua pahna"
etc.). -muhi an empty fist (sadisa: comparing someone
as regards ignorance) SnA 306=DhA iv.38. -hattha (adj.)
634
Ritta
Ruci
Ruca ( rukkha) & Ruc (f.) [fr. ruc] N. of a plant, or tree, alias
"mukkhaka" (read mokkhaka) "principal" J i.441, 443 (gloss
mangala rukkha).
Rucaka (nt.) [cp. Sk. rucaka a golden ornament] (gold) sand Vv
351 ; VvA 160 (=suvaa vlik).
Ruci (f.) [fr. ruc, cp. Vedic ruc (f.) light, Classic Sk. ruci in
meaning "pleasure"] 1. splendour, light, brightness Sn 548
(su very splendid; SnA 453=sundara sarrappabha). 2.
inclination, liking, pleasure PvA 59 ( uppdeti to find pleasure, to be satisfied). aruci aversion, dislike Th 2, 472.
ruci object of pleasure J v.371. ruciy (abl.) in the
pleasure (of), by the liking (of) (cp. No. 3), in phrases attano ruciy (attano citta ruciy: so read for ruciya!); as
one pleases, by one's own free will, ad lib. J i.106; iv.281;
PvA 59; parassa r. pavattati to live by the pleasure (grati)
635
Ruci
Rucira (adj.) [fr. ruc, cp. Sk. rucira] brilliant, beautiful, pleasant, agreeable Pv i.109 (=ramaya dassanya PvA 51); J i.207;
v.299; Vv 402 (so read for rurira); Mhvs 11, 11; 18, 68; Dvs
iv.29; Miln 2, 398; DhA i.383 (=sobhana); VvA 12; PvA 156
(=vaggu).
Rua & Roa [pp. of rudati for Sk. rudita, after analogy of
other roots in d, as tud>tunna, pad>panna, nud> nunna.
The BSk. forms are both rua (MVastu ii.218, 224) and
rua (MVastu iii.116); Prk. rua (Pischel 566). See rudati
& cp. rua] 1. (pp.) crying, in combn rua-mukha with
tearful face J vi.525 (C. rudam); Miln 148. 2. (nt.) weeping, crying, lamentation Th 1, 554; A i.261; Sn 584 (+soka);
Pv i.43 ; Milo 357. As roa at A iv.197, 223; Th 1, 555; J
iii.166.
Ruccati [*rucyati Med. of ruc: see rocati. Same in Prk. Originally Caus. formation like Epic Sk. rocyate for rocayate] to
find delight or pleasure in (loc.), to please, to indulge in, set
one's mind on Sn 565 (eta ce r. bhoto buddha ssana);
with khamati to be pleased and to approve of, M ii.132; often
used by Bdhgh in C. style: yath r. tath pahitabba KhA
78; "ya r. ta gahetabba SnA 23, 43, 136, 378" "to take,
whichever one pleases" (in giving the choice of 2 readings or
interpretations). ger. ruccitv VvA 282 (r. presi "to find
thorough delight in," expln for abhirocesi). pret. 1st pl.
ruccdimhase Pv i.118 (=ruccma ruci uppdema, ta attano ruciy pivissm ti attho PvA 59). Prohibitive m
rucci (pl. m rucittha) as an entreaty not to pursue an aim
(=please do not do that, please don't) Vin ii.198 (ala Devadatta m te rucci sangha bhedo); DhA i.13 (m vo vuso
eva ruccittha).
Ruta (nt.) [pp. of ravati: see rava & ravati] noise, sound- (ing);
cry, singing Th 1, 1103; J i.207 (T. reading ruda is expld in
C. as ruta with da for ta: ta krassa dakro kato); iii.276
(sabba ruta jnana manta: spell of knowing all animal
sounds; T. reads rta; cp. sabbarva jnana J iii.415);
vi.475 (rudau=ruta ja C.; same meaning); Miln 178
(sakua ruta ravita); VvA (karavka).
Rutta in du & su at DhsA 396 is to be read as dur- and su(r)-utta
(see utta).
Ruda stands for ruta (cry) at 2 Jtaka passages, viz. J i.207;
vi.475 (ruda u knowing the cries of all animals, expld
as "ruta ja, sabba rva jnti" C.).
Ruccana (& f.) (nt.) [fr. ruccati] choice, pleasure DhA i.387
(tava hne according to your own liking); DA i.106 ().
Ruccanaka (adj.) [fr. ruccana, cp. Sk. rucya] pleasing, satisfying; nt. satisfaction J i.211 (maccha the fish you like);
ii.182 (tava karosi you do whatever you like). a unpleasant, distasteful DhA i.251 (attano aruccanaka kici kamma
adisv).
Rudati & Rodati [rud, the usual Sk. pres. being rodati, but forms
fr. base rud are Vedic and are later found also in Prk. (cp.
Pischel Prk. Gr. 495): ruyai besides royai & rodasi. The
Idg. root is *reud, being an enlargement of *reu, as in ravati
(q. v.). Cp. cognates Lat. rudo to cry, shout, bray; Lith. raud
wailing; Ohg. riozan= Ags. reotan. The Dhtp expls rud by
"rodane" (144), the Dhtm by "assu vimocane" (206)] to cry,
lament, weep, wail. Forms I. rud (the older form): pres.
rudati (not yet found); ppr. rudanto D i.115; Sn 675, 691;
rudamna M i.341; A ii.95; Pug 62; Miln 275; Sdhp 281;
and ruda Pv i.84 ; also in cpd. rudam-mukha with weeping
636
Rusita
to break, raf (theft)= Ger. raub, rauben, and many other cognates (see Walde s. v. rumpo). The root rup is defd at
Dhtm by ns, i. e. to destroy; another rup is given at Dhtm
837 in meaning "ropana"] to be vexed, oppressed, hurt, molested (always with ref. to an illness or pain) Sn 767 (salla
viddho va r.) 1121; Nd1 5 (=kuppati, ghaiyati, piyati);
Nd2 543 (=kuppati payati ghaayati). ppr. gen. ruppato
S i.198 (salla viddhassa r.; expld at K.S. 320 by "ghaan
atthena")= Sn 331 (reads salla viddhna ruppata, i.
e. pl. instead of sg.); Th 1, 967 (salla viddhassa ruppato (C. sarravikra pajjato, Brethren, 338); J ii.437 (C.
ghaiyamna piyamna)=Vism 49 (dukkhitassa r.); J iii.169
(salla viddhassa r.=ghaiyamna C.). ruppati to Pli
exegesis with its fondness of allegorical ("orthodox") interpretation, is the etym. base of rpa, thus at S iii.86: "ruppat
ti tasm rpan ti vuccati kena r.? stena, uhena etc. (all kinds
of material dukkha: dukkha ii.3b ) ruppati." Or at Sn 1121
(ruppanti rpena), & at other passages given under rpa (A).
See also ruppana.
Rumbhati [so read for rumhati (Trenckner, Notes 599 ; the root
is another form of rudh (as in Prk.): see rundhati. The Dhtm
(547) defines by "uppana"] to obstruct, surround, besiege
(=rundhati 3) J vi.391 (where spelling rumhati; in phrase nagara r.). See also ni, sanni. pp. rha.
Rumma (adj.) [put down (rightly) by Geiger, P.Gr. 53 as different fr. Sk. rukma (shining); Morris, J.P.T.S. 1893, 12 tried
the etym. rumma=Sk. rumra "tawny," o rukma (rukmin)
shiny. It is still an unsolved problem. It may not be far off to
trace a relation (by miswriting, dissimilation or false analogy)
to ruppa in sense of ruppati, or to ruj, or even rudda. The C.
expln of all the rumma & rummin passages is anajita, i.
e. unkempt] miserable, dirty, poorly, in cpds. rpin J iv.387
(=lkhavesa C.), with v. l. duma; and vsin poorly dressed
J iv.380.
637
Rusita
Rpa
traka the (shapes of the) stars Dhs 617; deva as a deva PvA
92. Pleonastically e. g. in: anupatta attaining Pv iv.166 ;
taramna quickly Pv ii.62 ; yutta fit PvA 157; sucitta variegated Pv i.109 . Cases ad verbially: citta -rpa according to intention Vin iii.161; iv.177; cetabba rpa fit to be
thought upon J iv.157. (=yuttaka C.). atta -rpena on
my own account S iv.97; godha rpena as an iguana Mhvs
28, 9. D. (as philos. t. t.) principle of (material) form, materiality, visibility. There are var. groups of psychological
and metaphysical systematizations, in which rpa functions as
the material, gross factor, by the side of other, more subtle
factors. In all these representations of rpa we find that an
element of moral psychology overshadows the purely philosophical & speculative aspect. A detailed (Abhidhammatic)
discussion of rpa in var. aspects is to be found at Dhs 585
980. 1. rpa as yatana or sense object. It is the object of the activity or sphere of the organ of sight (cakkhu).
As such it heads the list of the 6 bhirni yatanni (see e.
g. Nd2 p. 238 A E & yatana3 ) with "cakkhun rpa
disv" (the others: sota>sadda, ghna>gandha, jivh>rasa,
kya>phohabba, mano>dhamma), cp. cakkhu vieyy
rp ih kant etc. D i.245; M i.266; cakkhun rpa passati iha rpa kanta rpa etc. S iv.126; see further: Vin i.34 (sabba ditta: cakkhu ditta, rpa ditt
etc. with sequence of other yatanas); D ii.308 sq., 336 sq.;
M iii.18 (ya kho rpa paicca uppajjati sukha somanassa, aya rpe assdo; cp. Ps ii.109 sq.), 291 (ye te cakkhu
vieyyesu rpesu avta rg etc.); Ps i.79; ii.38 (rp
rpni passat ti vimokkho); Dhs 617, 653, 878; Tikp 28.
2. (metaphysically) as the representative of sensory or material existence: (a) universally as forming the corporeal stratum
in the world of appearance or form (rpa-bhava) as compared
with the incorporeal (arpa bhava), being itself above, and
yet including the kma- bhava. (The kmabhava is a subdivision of rpabhava, which has got raised into a third main
division.) This triad is also found in combns with loka or
dhtu (see dhtu 2 a & d), or avacara. See e. g. D i.17;
iii.215 (dhtu), 216 (bhava); Kvu 370 sq. (dhtu); Dhs 499
(vacara), 585 (dhtu); Vbh 17 (vacara), 25 (as garu
parima & dandha nirodha compd with arpa). A similar
sequence rpa arpa & nirodha (i. e. nibbna) in old verses
at Sn 755; It 45, 62 (rpehi arp santatar, arpehi nirodho
santataro). On indriya rpa "faculty as form" see indriya
B. (b) individually in the sphere of sasra as one (i. e.
the material quality) of the substrata of sensory individual existence or the khandhas. They are the 5: rpa kkhandha,
vedan, sa, sankhr, via; otherwise called rp'
pdna-kkhandha etc. (e. g. D iii.223, 278; Vism 443).
See khandha ii. B. In this property rpa consists of 28 subdivisions, viz. the 4 (great) dhts (mahbhtni or else bhta
rpa primary matter) and 24 updrpni (i. e. derivative
forms or accidentals). These are given in extenso in the rpakkhandha section of the Vism (pp. 443 450), also at Dhs
585; the 24 consist of: cakkhu, sota, ghna, jivh, kya, rpa,
sadda, gandha, rasa, itthindriya, purisindriya, jvitindriya, hadaya vatthu, kya viatti, vac viatti, ksa
dhtu, (rpassa) lahut mudut kammaat, upacaya santati
jarat aniccat, kabainkr' hra; cp. defn at Nett 73:
ctu mahbhtika rpa catunna ca mahbhtna
Rpa
Rha
Rha
Rocati
Rogin (adj.) [fr roga] having a disease, suffering from (); one
who has a disease Vism 194 (ussanna vydhi dukkhassa);
Sdhp 86. pau one who has the jaundice J ii.285; iii.401.
Rekh (f.) [fr. rikh, for which the Pli form is likh, cp. Sk. rekh,
Lat. rma, Ohg. rga row] line, streak Abhp 539. See lekh.
Recana (nt.) [fr. ric] letting loose, emission Dhtm 610. Cp. vi.
Reu [cp. Vedic reu] 1. dust; pl. re particles of dust. Vin
i.32 (hat bhmi); Vism 338=Nd1 505=J i.117 (rgo rajo na ca
pana reu vuccati); J iv.362 (oki raja rehi; C. expls
by "pashi"); Miln 274 (pl.); SnA 132 (reu vpasmeti
allays). 2. pollen (in this meaning found only in the so
called Jtaka style) J i.233 (mah tumba matta),
349 (pupphato reu gahti); iii.320; v.39 (puppha); vi.530
(padumakinjakkha); DhA iv.203 (vahi).
Reruka [etym.? Probably dialectical] "elephant's tooth," ivory J
ii.230 (=hatthi danta C.).
Roga [Vedic roga: ruj (see rujati), cp. Sk. ruj breakage, illness] illness, disease. The defn of roga at J ii.437 is "roga
rujana sabhvatta." There are many diff. enumerations
640
Rocati
Rohita
Roma (nt.) [Vedic roman; the usual P. form is loma (q. v.)] the
hair of the body J v.430 (where in roma rjiy maita
udar as expln of loma sundar); Sdhp 119 (kpa),
Romaka (adj.) [fr. roma] feathered (?) J ii.383 (C. wrong!).
Romaca (?) [fr. roma, cp. Vedic romaa] hairy (?) Dvs v.14
(kancuka).
Rodana (nt.) [fr. rud] crying, weeping DhA i.28; PvA 63, 64;
Dhtp 144.
Romanthati & Romantheti [to romantha; cp. Lat. rumen & ruminare=E. ruminate] to chew the cud, to ruminate Vin ii.132
(ati); J iv.392 (eti).
Rosaka (adj.) [fr. rosa; cp. BSk. roaka Divy 38] angry, wrathful
S i.85, 96; Sn 133; Vv 528 (=paresa ros' uppdanena r. VvA
226); J ii.270.
Ropana (nt.) & ropan (f.) [fr. ropeti1 ] 1. planting PvA 151
(rma); Mhvs 15, 41. 2. healing S iv.177 (vaa). 3.
furthering, making grow Ps ii.115 (buddhi). 4. (f.) accusation Vin iv.36.
Rosan (f.) [abstr. fr. rosati] making angry, causing anger, being
angry Vbh 86 (hisan+), expld at VbhA 75 by ghaan. Cp.
BSk. roa Av i.178.
Rosita [pp. of rus, to smear: Sk. rita; given as root rus at Dhtm
442 with meaning "lepa"] smeared (with), anointed J iv.440
(=vilitta C.).
Ropima (nt.) [fr. ropeti1 ] 1. what has been planted Vin iv.267.
2. a kind of arrow M i.429 (contrasted with kaccha; Neumann
trsls ropima by "aus Binsen"). 3. (adj.) at Vv 4413 aropima
("not planted"?) is an attribute of trees. It is not expld in VvA.
Rohaa (adj.) [fr. roha=rohita] red J v.259 (roha pungav'sabh; C. expls by ratta va). Kern. Toev. s. v. proposes rohio=*rohiyah, (cp. pokkhara for i) red cows.
Ropeti1 [Caus. of rhati1 ] 1. to plant or sow J i.150 (nivpatia); Mhvs 15, 42 (amb' ahika); 19, 56; DhA ii.109.
2. to put up, fix J i.143 (slni). 3. to further, increase,
make grow Sn 208 (Pot. ropayeyya). 4. (fig.) to fix, direct
towards, bring up against: see ropeti2 2. pp. ropita. Caus.
II. roppeti to cause to be planted D ii.179; J vi.333; Mhvs
34, 40; DhA ii.109. Cp. abhi, abhini, .
Rohati: for the Sk. rohati of ruh to grow we find the regular P.
correspondent rhati: see rhati1 . The Caus. of this verb is
ropeti (to make grow): see ropeti! Another root, restricted
to the Pli, is seen in rhati2 (with pp. rha) and is equal to
rundh (rudh, rumbh) to break. The Caus. of this root (ropeti2 )
is either an indirect formation from it or (more likely) a direct
representative of rup=lup as in P. lumpati. To the latter belong the prep. cpds. oropeti & voropeti.
Rohicca [fr. rohita, perhaps directly fr. Vedic rohita ewe, lit. the
red one] a kind of deer J vi.537 (sarabh mig).
Rohi (f.) [cp. Vedic rohi red cow or mare] 1. a red cow A
i.162=iii.214. 2. N. of a nakkhatta or constellation ("red
cow") SnA 456; Mhvs 19, 47. 3. N. of a river SnA 357.
Rohita (adj.) [Vedic rohita; cp. the usual P. word lohita red &
blood. See also rudhira & ruhira] red, as attribute of fishes at
J v.405 (i. e. a special kind of fish), and of deer at J v.406 in
same passage (i. e. a special kind of deer). Otherwise only
in standing term rohita-maccha the "red fish," viz. Cyprinus
641
Rohita
Lakkhaa
L
La syllable of abbreviation, corresponding to our "etc.": see
peyyla.
642
Lakkhaa
Langhamay
Laghima (langhima) in phrase aima-laghim' dika is doubtful in reading & meaning at KhA 108=Vism 211 (spelt langh
here).
Lankra see lakra.
Lang (f.) [fr. lag] bolt, bar, barrier, obstruction, only metaphorically with ref. to avijj M i.142, 144; Pug 21; Dhs 390; VbhA
141.
Langula (nt.) [cp. Sk. lngula & lngla; also the ordinary P.
forms nangula & nanguha, to lag] the tail of an animal Mhvs
6, 6 (lento langula; v. l. nangula). See also nangula &
(concerning l>n) landhati (=nandhati); nala (for lata).
Lagana & Laggana (nt.) [fr. lag] 1. adhering J i.46 (g.; v.281);
with gg: J iii.202 (=sanga); Nd2 p. 188 (s. v. nissita, in sequence l., bandhana, palibodha); Miln 105; DhA iii.433. 2.
slinging round, making fast VvA 212.
Lagua [cp. Sk. lagua, Marth lka, Hind lakua stick. The
word is really a dialect word (Prk.) and as such taken into Sk.
643
Langhamay
Lahik
Lajaka [see lacaka] in dpa stands as equivalent of dpavasa thus "story of the island" Dpvs 18, 2. Oldenberg
(trsln p. 204) translates "the island of Lank."
644
Lahik
Labhati
188 & 599 defines lap with "vacana"] to talk, prattle, mutter
Sn 776; It 122; Pv i.81 ; ii.63 . Cp. ullapati, palapati, samullapati. Caus. lapeti (and lpeti, metri caus) to talk to, to
accost, beg S i.31 (here meaning "declare"); Sn 929 (jana na
lpayeyya=na lapayeyya lapana pajaheyya Nd1 389); DhA
ii.157. Infin. lapetave (only in Gth language cp. Geiger,
P.Gr. 204) Ud 21. pp. lapita. Caus. II. lappeti DhA
ii.157.
Laa (nt.) [cp. Sk. laa (dial.). The Dhtm under No. 155
gives a root la in meaning "jigucchana," i. e. disgust] excrement, dung of animals, dirt; mostly used with ref. to elephants
(hahi), e. g. at J ii.19; DhA i.163, 192; iv.156 (here also as
assa horse dung.) Cp. laik.
Laik (f.) [fr. laa], only in aja goat's dirt, pellet of goat's
dung J i.419; PvA 283.
Lat (f.) [cp. Sk. lat, connected with Lat. lentus flexible; Ohg.
lindi soft, E. lithe; also Ohg. lintea lime tree; Gr.
fir tree] 1. a slender tree, a creeping plant, creeper A i.202
(mluv); Vv 355 (=vall VvA 162); 474 (kostak l.); J i.464
(rukkha, here perhaps better "branch"); DhA i.392 (pasdhana: see under mah); Miln 253, 351; VvA 12 (kappa);
PvA 51, 121; Vism 183 (where the foll. kinds are given: lbu,
kumbha, sm, kavall, ptilat). nga the iron wood
tree: see under nga; pti a sort of creeper (q. v.). On lat in
similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 130. 2. (fig.) an epithet of tah
(greed), as much as it strangles its victim Dhs 1059, 1136; Nett
24, 121. 3. (fig.) streak, flash, in vijjul lat flash of
lightning J i.103.
-kamma creeper work (combd with ml kamma)
Vin ii.117, 152.
Laddh is ger. and 3rd sg. aor.; laddhna ger. of labhati (q. v.).
Laddhi (f.) [fr. labh] religious belief, view, theory, esp. heretical
view; a later term for the earlier dihi (cp. Kvu trsl. introd.
p. 47) J i.142 (Devadattassa), 425; iii.487; v.411; Dvs ii.86
(dulladdhi wrong view); DA i.117; PvA 254; Sdhp 65. Cp.
upa.
Laddhika () [fr. laddhi] having a (wrong) view or belief,
schismatic J i.373 (eva); Dpvs vii.35 (puthu).
Landhati see nandhati & pilandhana.
langula.
Lapa (adj. n.) [fr. lap: see lapati] talkative, talking, prattling;
a talker, tattler, prattler, chatterer A ii.26; Th 1, 959=It 112;
Vism 26 (doubled: lapa lapa)= Nd1 226 (as lapaka lapaka).
Lapaka [fr. lap] one who mutters, a droner out (of holy words for
pay) D i.8 (cp. Dial. i.15); A iii.111; J iii.349; Miln 228; DA
i.91.
Lapati [lap, cp. Russ. lpet talk, Cymr. llf voice. The Dhtp
645
Labhati
Lahu
Lamba (adj.) () [fr. lamb] hanging down, drooping, pendulous S iv.341, 342 (cak bhaa hirelings with large or
drooping top knots); J ii.185 (tthana with hanging breasts);
iii.265 (cla vihangama); Dvs ii.61. alamba not
drooping, thick, short J v.302; vi.3 (tthaniyo). Cp. ,
vi & lambana.
Lasik (f.) [cp. Sk. *lasik] the fluid which lubricates the joints,
synovic fluid Vin i.202; D ii.293; M iii.90; S iv.111; Sn 196; J
i.146; Miln 382. In detail at Vism 264, 362; VbhA 247.
Las (f.) [etym.?] brains J i.493 (=matthalunga C.)= DhA i.145.
Lasua & Lasuna (nt.) [cp. Sk. launa] garlic Vin ii.140; iv.258;
J i.474; Vv 436 ; VvA 186.
Lahu (adj.) [Sk. laghu & raghu: see etym. under langhati]
light, quick A i.10, 45. lahu karoti to make light, to
be frivolous J ii.451. nt. lahu (adv.) quickly Pv iv.160 ;
Dpvs i.53; Mhvs 4, 17. Usually as lahuka (q. v.).
-citta light minded S i.201; J iii.73. -hna lightness
Lambila (adj.) [reading not quite certain, cp. ambila] sour, acrid,
astringent (of taste) Nd1 240; Nd2 540; Dhs 629; DhsA 320
646
Lahu
Lyati
Lbha [fr. labh] receiving, getting, acquisition, gain, possession; pl. possessions D i.8; ii.58, 61; M i.508 (rogya
param lbh); iii.39; A i.74; iv.157 sq., 160 (lbhena abhibhto pariydinnacitto Devadatto, cp. J i.185 sq.); Sn 31, 438,
828, 854, 1014, 1046 (cp. Nd2 548); It 67 (vitta); J iii.516
(yasa, dhana); Vism 93, 136 ( labhati), 150 (assa bhgin getting riches); PvA 113, 280. A dat. sg. lbh (for
lbhya) is used adverbially with foll. genitive in meaning of
"for my (our) gain," "it is profitable," "good for me that" etc.;
e. g. Miln 17 (lbh no tta, suladdha no tta), 232 (lbh
vata tsa devatna); A iii.313 (lbh vata me suladdha
vata me), expld at Vism 223; DhA i.98 (lbh vata me, elliptically); ii.95 (l. vata no ye maya... upahahimha).
-agga highest gain J iii.125; Miln 21. -s desire for
gain A i.86. -kamy (abl. out of desire for gain Sn 854,
929 (=lbha hetu Nd1 389). -tah craving for possession DhA iv.38. -macchariya selfishness in acquisitions A
iii.273; D iii.234; Pug 19, 23; Dhs 1122. -mada pride of gain
VbhA 466. -sakkra gain and honour, usually combd with
siloka fame; the two first e. g. at Vin ii.196; It 73; J i.185,
186; v.75; the three combd e. g. at M i.192; S ii.227, 237; A
ii.73; iii.343 sq., 377; Vbh 352 sq.; lbha siloka alone at
Vism 67.
Lahut (f.) [fr. lahu] lightness, buoyancy Dhs 42, 322, 585; Vism
448.
Lahusa (adj.) [fr. lahu] easily offended, touchy D i.90; expld by
DA i.256 as follows: "lahus ti lahuk, appaken' eva tussanti
v russanti v udaka pihe lbukaha viya appakena pi
uppilavanti." Cp. rabhasa.
Lahuso (adv.) [orig. abl. of lahu] quickly A iv.247 (sabba);
Vism 238.
Lkh (f.) [cp. Sk. dk] lac; lac dye; enumd with other
colourings at M i.127=S ii.101=A iii.230. SnA 577; Vism
261 (as colour of blood).
-cariya expert in lac dyeing SnA 577. -guaka a
ball of lac SnA 80. -goaka id. SnA 577. -tamba copper
coloured with lac Th 2, 440 (=lkh rasarattehi viya tambehi lomehi samanngata ThA 270). -rasa essence of lac,
used for dyeing; lac colouring J v.215 (ratta succhavi);
vi.269 (id.); KhA 62, 63; ThA 270.
Lja & Lj (f.) [cp. Vedic lja: Zimmer, Altind. Leben 269] 1.
fried grain, parched corn: occurring only in combn madhulja fried grain with honey, sweet corn J iii.538; iv.214, 281.
2. the flower of Dalbergia arborea, used for scattering
in bunches (with other flowers making 5 kinds or colours)
as a sign of welcome & greeting, usually in phrase ljapacamni pupphni ("a cluster of flowers with lja as the
fifth") DhA i.112; VvA 31; J i.55 (pacamakni p.); cp. J
ii.240 (vippakia lja kusuma maita tal);
vi.42 (vippakia lja kusuma vsa dhp' andhakra); DhA i.140 (vippakia valika pacavaa
kusuma lja puaghaa paimaita).
Lbhaka (adj. nt.) [fr. lbha] one who receives; reception; a not
getting, non receiving Vin iii.77.
Lbh see under lbha.
Lbhin (adj.) () [fr. labha] receiving, getting, having, possessed of M iii.39 (as n. "a receiver, recipient"); A i.24; ii.85;
iv.400; Pug 51; Vbh 332 (nikma); J i.140. 2. one who has
intuition either in reasoning (or logical argument) or psychically, and who may therefore take certain premises for granted
(opp. albhin a denier) DA i.106, 120.
Lmaka (adj.) [seems to be a specific Pli word. It is essentially a C. word & probably of dialectical origin. Has it
anything to do with omaka?] insignificant, poor, inferior,
bad, sinful. The usual syn. is ppa. Vin ii.76; Vism
268 (=ppaka); DhsA 45; KhA 243 (=khudda); PugA 229
(nca lmaka=oata); KhA 150 (desan, cp. ukkaha); DhA
ii.77; iv.44 (bhva); VvA 116; PvA 15 (for ppa); 103 (=ppaka), 125 (purisa=kpurisa); Sdhp 28, 253, 426, 526 (opp.
ukkaha). f. lmik J i.285; ii.346 (for itar); DhA ii.61
(ppik l. dihi). Cp. Dhs. trsl.2 1025.
Ljeti [fr. lja] to fry or have fried J vi.341 (v. l. lac, laj),
385 (lachetv; v. l. laci, laje).
Lpa1 [fr. lap] talk: see cpds. abhi, pa, sal.
Lpa2 [also fr. lap, lit. "talker," cp. similar semantics of E.
quail>Ger. quaken, quicken; E. quack. The P. form rests on
pop. etym., as in Sk. we find corresponding name as lba]
a sort of quail, Perdix chinensis S v.146=J ii.59. As lpakasakua also at J ii.59. Another name for quail is vaaka.
Lpana (nt.) [fr. lpeti, Caus. of lap] muttering, utterance,
speech It 98; A i.165 (lapita). Perhaps also to be read at Th
2, 73. Cp. upa.
Lmajjaka (lmajaka) (nt.) [cp. Sk. lmajjaka] the root of Andropogon muricatus Vv 436 (v. l. ac); VvA 186, (aj)
187.
Lpu (f.) [short for alpu or lbu, cp. Geiger, P.Gr. 396 ] a
kind of cucumber J i.336, 341. See also lbuka.
-lat the cucumber creeper or plant Miln 374.
Lyati. [for. *lvati, l, for which the ordinary form is lunti (q.
v.), y for v as freq. in Pli: see Geiger, P.Gr. 462 . The
Dhtp. has a root l in meaning "dna" (No. 370)] to cut (off),
647
Lyati
Lihati
Likhana (nt.) [cp. late Sk. likhana; fr. likh] scratching, cutting,
writing J v.59 (a golden tablet for writing on). Cp. ullikhana.
Lyana (nt.) [fr. lyati] cutting J v.45 (tia lyana asi, sickle);
DhA iii.285 (v. l. for dyana).
Lla (adj.) [fr. lal, see laati] talking without sense, silly, foolish
J vi.360, 417 (). Cp. all.
Llaka [lala+ka] a wag, silly person, fool J i.205; iv.210.
Llapati & Llappati [Intens. of lapati] to talk much, to talk silly,
to lament, wail Sn 580; Pv iv.52 (=vilapati PvA 260); J iii.217;
Miln 148, 275; Mhvs 32, 68. pp. llappita.
Llappa [fr. llappati] talking much, excited or empty talk, wailing Vbh 100, 138; Ps i.38; Nett 29; VbhA 104 (=punappuna
lapana).
Linga (nt.) [fr. ling; late Vedic & (pre eminently) Class. Sk.
linga] 1. characteristic, sign, attribute, mark, feature M i.360;
S v.278; Sn 601 sq. (=sahna SnA 464); Vin iv.7 (two: hna
& ukkaha); J i.18; iv.114 (gihi), 130; Miln 133 (ssana),
162 (dve samaassa lingni), 405 (lingato ca nimittato ca etc.);
Vism 184; DhsA 64 (=sahna Tk: Expos. 86). 2.
mark of sex, sexual characteristic, pudendum (male as well
as female, as neither m. nor f.) Vin iii.35 (purisa); J v.197
(sahna); KhA 110 (itthi); SnA 48 (sampatti), 51 (id.),
300 (itthi); DhsA 321 sq. (itthi). 3. (in grammar) mark
of sex, (characteristic) ending, gender SnA 397. vipallsa
change or substitution of gender PvA 7, 33, 58, 87, 157.
Lla(p)pana (nt.) & (f.)=llappa, together with lla(p)- pitatta (nt.) in exegesis of parideva at Nd2 416; Vbh 100, 138;
VbhA 104; DA i.121.
Llappita [pp. of llappati] 1. talking much, wailing Miln 148
(paridevita l. mukha). 2. (nt.) much talk, excited
talk, talking J vi.498.
Ll (f.) [cp. laati] saliva J i.61, 248; vi.357; Vism 259; DhA
i.307 (mukhato ll galati).
Lana (nt.) [fr. lal] swaying, dalliance, sport DA i.197; Sdhp
387; as lan at ThA 243.
Lingla [cp. Sk. linglik a kind of mouse] antelope (?) Pgdp 10.
Lingika (adj.) [fr. linga] having or being a characteristic Vism
210 (of nma); KhA 107 (id.).
Lvati & Lveti [the latter the usual form, as Caus. of lunti.
lvati is the simple Pli formation fr. l. Another Caus. II.
is lavpati (q. v.). See also lyati] to cut, to mow PvA 40
(lvitv), Mhvs 10, 30 (lvayati).
Lipi [fr. lip; late Sk. lipi] the alphabet; a letter of the alphabet;
writing Miln 79.
Limpati [lip, cp. repa stain, lepa ointment, stain; Gr.
grease, fat, fat, to anoint; Lat. lippus; Lith.
limp to stick, Goth. bi leiban, Ohg. bilban to stay behind, to stay, E. leave & live, Ger. leben. The Dhtp (385)
simply expls by "limpana"] to smear, plaster, stain; usually in
pass. (or med.) sense "to get soiled, to dirty oneself" Th 2,
388; PvA 215. Doubtful in Sn passages, where both limpati
& lippati are found as readings, e. g. Sn 778 in Text lippati,
but Niddesa reading limpati (Nd1 55); Sn 811 lipp, Nd1 133
limp; Sn 1040, 1042 lipp, Nd2 549 limp. Pass. lippati to
be soiled (by), to get stained (in character) Sn 250, 547, 625,
778, 913, 1040; cp. Sn 71 (alippamna ppr.). pp. litta:
see ava, ul, vi. Cp. also limpeti, palimpeti, vilimpati.
Caus. I. lepeti to cause to be plastered J vi.432. Caus.
II. limppeti to cause to be plastered or anointed Mhvs 34, 42
(cetiya petvna).
Lihati
Lubbhati
Lna [pp. of lyati] clinging, sticking; slow, sluggish; shy, reserved, dull, A i.3; Vism 125. Definitions at Vbh 352, 373;
Dhs 1156, 1236; S v.277, 279 (ati). Often combd with
uddhata as "sluggish or shy" and "unbalanced," e. g. at S
v.112; Vism 136; VbhA 310. alna active, open, sincere Sn
68 (citta), 717 (id.); J i.22 (v. 148; viriya sha).
Lnat (f.) [abstr. formation fr. lna instead of ly]= lyan Vism
469. alnat open mindedness, sincerity J i.366; SnA 122.
Luhati [cp. later Sk. luhati to plunder, which is one of the dial.
variants luh, lunh, loh of lul to shake. The Dhtp (474) &
Dhtm (136) both give ruh & luh with meaning "upaghte"]
to rob, plunder.
Lyana (nt.) [fr. lyati] sticking to, adhering, resting Sdhp 190
(hna resting place).
Lutta [cp. Epic Sk. lupta; pp. of lumpati] broken, cut off; as t. t.
in grammar "elided" VvA 13 (of ca), 111 (of iti), 122 (id.).
Lunana (nt.) [for lna(na), cp. lavana] cutting, severing SnA 148
(niddnan ti chedana lunana uppana).
Lunti [l, given as lu at Dhtp 504 ("chedana") & Dhtm 728
("paccheda"). For etym. cp. Gr. to loosen, Lat. luo to
pay a fine, Goth. fraliusan to lose; Ger. los, E. lose & loose] to
cut, cut off, mow, reap Miln 33 (yavalvak yava lunanti);
DhsA 39. pp. lna (& luta). Caus I. lvayati Mhvs 10,
30; Caus. II. lavpeti to cause to mow Vin ii.180. A Pass.
lyati [fr. lu] is found at D i.141 (aor. lyisu) and at corresponding passage Pug 56 (imper. lyantu, where dubb is to
be corrected to dabbh). See lava, lavaka, lavana, lyati,
lavati.
Lujjana (nt.) [fr. lujjati; a word peculiar to Pali dogmatics] breaking up, crumbling away, dissolution DhsA 47 (in etym. of
loka=lujjana palujjan' ahena vaa), 308 (id.); Vism 427
(id.).
649
Lubbhati
Leuka
Lubbhati [Vedic lubhyate, lubh, cp. Lat. lubet & libet it pleases,
libido longing; Goth. liufs=Ger. lieb & lob; E. love, etc.
Dhtp 434: lobhe] to be lustful or greedy, to covet, long for,
desire It 84 (lobhaneyye na lubbhati); Vism 465, 468. ger.
lubbha (?) in olubbha is to be referred to lamb rather than
lubh. A grd. formation in lobhaneyya or lobhanya (q. v.).
pp. luddha.
Lubbhana (nt.) [fr. lubh] being greedy, greediness, a scholastic word, only found in exegesis of word lobha, e. g. at Dhs
32 (where also the enlarged abstr. formation lubbhitatta) &
Vism 465, 468 (lubbhana matta lobha).
Lumpati [lup, Epic Sk. lumpati, found also as rup in Pali: see
ruppati. Connected with Lat. lugeo to be sorry (cp. rujati,
roga; Gr. sorrow) and rumpo to break. Defns at Dhtp
386 & 433 (chedana) and at Dhtm 618 & 669 (cheda, vinsa)]
to break, harm, injure; to attack, plunder; with a strong touch
of affection (sympathy or desire) lubh in it [cp. lup: Gr. ;
ruj: roga], which is still more evident in Intens. loluppa (q.
v.). DhsA 365 (in expln of loluppa). pp. lutta. Cp.
ullumpana, ullopa, lopa, vilumpati, vilopa.
Luati & Luati [cp. Ep. Sk. loh to move & dial. lu, loayati, to stir, agitate, which is a by form of lul, lolati to
move, Caus. lolayati to set in motion. Etym. connected with
Slavonic ljuljati to rock, Ags. ll a (flexible) rod, rood; root
due to onomat. formation. Another form is luhati. The
Dhtm (117) expls lu by "loane" (cp. viloana & viloana),
and lu (510) by "manthane"] to stir, shake, agitate, upset; intrs. to be in motion, to be stirred Miln 259 (calati khubbhati l.
vilati). pp. luita.
Lekha (f.) [fr. likh; cp. Epic Sk. lekha stencil Mbh 1, 78] an
instrument for scratching lines or writing, a stencil, pencil A
ii.200; J i.230.
Lekhana (nt.) [fr. likh] scratching, drawing, writing Dhtp 467.
Lekh (f.) [fr. likh; Vedic lekh. See also rekh & lekha] 1.
streak, line VvA 277 (=rji); canda crescent moon [cp. Epic
candralekh Mbh 3, 1831] Vism 168; DhsA 151. 2. a
scratch, line A i.283; Pug 32; J vi.56 (lekha kahati).
3. writing, inscription, letter Vin iii.76 ( chindati destroy
the letter); J i.451 (on a phalaka); Miln 349 (cariya teacher
of writing); PvA 20 (paa, letter so read for likh). 4.
the art of writing or drawing [=lipi Hemacandra], writing as an
art. It is classed as a respectable (ukkaha) profession (sippa)
Vin iv.7; and mentioned by the side of mudd and gaan
Vin iv.7, 128=i.77; cp. Vin iv.305.
650
Leuka
Loka
sive sense of "universe." Sometimes the term is applied collectively to the creatures inhabiting this or var. other worlds,
thus, "man, mankind, people, beings." Loka is not a fixed
& def. term. It comprises immateriality as well as materiality
and emphasizes either one or the other meaning according to
the view applied to the object or category in question. Thus
a trsln of "sphere, plane, division, order" interchanges with
"world." Whenever the spatial element prevails we speak of
its "regional" meaning as contrasted with "applied" meaning.
The fundamental notion however is that of substantiality, to
which is closely related the specific Buddhist notion of impermanence (loka=lujjati). 1. Universe: the distinctions
between the universe (cp. cakkava) as a larger whole and
the world as a smaller unit are fluctuating & not definite. A
somewhat wider sphere is perhaps indicated by sabba-loka
(e. g. S i.12; iv.127, 312; v.132; It 122; Mhvs 1, 44; cp.
sabbvanta loka D i.251; iii.224), otherwise even the smaller
loka comprises var. realms of creation. Another larger division is that of loka as sadevaka, samraka, sabrahmaka,
or the world with its devas, its Mra and its Brahm, e. g.
S i.160, 168, 207; ii.170; iii.28, 59; iv.158; v.204; A i.259
sq.; ii.24 sq.; iii.341; iv.56, 173; v.50; It 121; Nd1 447 (on Sn
956), to which is usually added sassamaa-brhma paj
(e. g. D i.250, see loci s. v. paj). With this cp. Dh
45, where the divisions are pahav, Yamaloka, sadevaka
(loka), which are expld at DhA i.334 by pahav=attabhva;
Yamaloka=catubbidha apyaloka; sadevaka=manussaloka devalokena saddhi. The universe has its evolutional periods: savaati and vivaati D ii.109 sq. The Buddha has
mastered it by his enlightenment: loko Tathgatena abhisambuddho It 121. On loka, lokadhtu (=cosmos) and cakkava
cp. Kirfel, Kosmographie p. 180, 181. 2. Regional meaning. (a) in general. Referring to this world, the character of evanescence is inherent in it; referring to the universe
in a wider sense, it implies infinity, though not in definite
terms. There is mention of the different metaphysical theories as regards cosmogony at many places of the Canon. The
antnantik (contending for the finitude or otherwise of the
world) are mentioned as a sect at D i.22 sq. Discussions as
to whether loka is sassata or antav are found e. g. at M
i.426, 484; ii.233; S iii.182, 204; iv.286 sq.; A ii.41; v.31, 186
sq.; Ps i.123, 151 sq.; Vbh 340; Dhs 1117. Views on consistency of the world (eternal or finite; created or evolved etc.)
at D iii.137; cp. S ii.19 sq. Cp. also the long and interesting
discussion of loka as sua at S iv.54 sq.; Ps ii.177 sq.; Nd2
680; as well as M ii.68 (upanyati loko addhuvo, and "atto loko, assakoloko" etc.); "lokassa anto" is lit. unattainable:
A ii.50=S i.62; iv.93; but the Arahant is "lok'antag," cp. A
iv.430. As regards their order in space (or "plane") there are
var. groupings of var. worlds, the evidently popular one being
that the world of the devas is above and the nirayas below the
world of man (which is "tiriya vpi majjhe"): Nd2 550. The
world of men is as aya loko contrasted with the beyond, or
paro loko: D iii.181; S iv.348 sq.; A i.269; iv.226; Sn 779
(n'sisati loka ima para ca); or as idhaloka D iii.105.
The defn of aya loko at Nd1 60 is given as: sak'attabhva,
saka rpa vedan etc., ajjhatt' yatanni, manussa
loka, kmadhtu; with which is contrasted paro loko as: parattabhva, para rpavedan, bhir'yatanni, devaloka, rpa
Lea (& lena) (nt.) [*Sk. layana, fr. l in meaning "to hide," cp.
Prk. lea] 1. a cave (in a rock), a mountain cave, used by ascetics (or bhikkhus) as a hermitage or place of shelter, a rock
cell. Often enumd with kui & guh, e. g. Vin iv.48; Miln
151; Vbh 251 (n.). At Vin ii.146 it is given as collective name
for 5 kinds of hermitages, viz. vihra, ahayoga, psda,
hammiya, guh. The expln of lea at VbhA 366 runs as follows: "pabbata khaitv v pabbhrassa appahonakahne
kua uhpetv v katasensana," i. e. opportunity for
sitting & lying made by digging (a cave) in a mountain or by
erecting a wall where the cave is insufficient (so as to make
the rest of it habitable). Cp. Vin i.206=iii.248 (pabbhra
sodhpeti lea kattukmo) Mhvs 16, 12; 28, 31 sq. (n); Miln
200 (mah). 2. refuge, shelter, (fig.) salvation (sometimes
in sense of nibbna). In this meaning often combd with ta
& saraa, e. g. at D i.95; S iv.315 (ma lea refuge with
me;+mata); iv.372 (=nibbna); A i.155 sq. (n); J ii.253;
DA i.232. Cp. Vin iii.155. le'attha for refuge Vin ii.164
(n); J i.94. alea without a refuge Ps i.127; ii.238; Pv ii.25
(=asaraa PvA 80).
-gavesin seeking shelter or refuge J ii.407=iv.346. -guh
a mountain cave J iii.511. -dvra the door of the (rock) hermitage Vism 38; DhA iii.39. -pabbhra "cave slope,"
cave in a mountain DhA iv.170.
Lepa [fr. lip, see limpati; cp. Classic Sk. lepa stain, dirt] 1.
smearing, plastering, coating over Vin iv.303 (bhira); J ii.25
(mattik). 2. (fig.) plaster, i. e. that which sticks, affection, attachment, etc., in tah the stain of craving, & dihi
of speculation Nd1 55; Nd2 271iii . Note. lasagata at A
ii.165 read with v. l. as lepa-gata, i. e. sticky. Cp. , pa
Lepana (nt.) [fr. lip] smearing, plastering, anointing Vin ii.172
(kua); A iv.107 (vsana), 111 (id.); J ii.117. Cp. abhi, ,
pa
Lepeti see limpati.
Leyya (adj. nt.) [grd. of lih: see lihati] to be licked or sipped;
nt. mucilaginous food (opp. peyya liquid) A iv.394 (+peyya);
Miln 2 (id.).
Lesa [cp. Sk. lea particle; as Kern, Toev. s. v. points out, it
occurs in Sk. also in the P. meaning at Mbh v.33, 5 although
this is not given in BR. As "particle" only at Dhtp 444 in
defn of lisati] sham, pretext, trick Vin iii.169 (where ten lesas
are enumd , viz. jti, nma, gotta, linga, patti, patta,
cvara, upajjhya, cariya, sensana); J ii.11; vi.402.
lesa-kappa pretext Vin ii.166; Vv 8443 (=kappiya lesa VvA
348); Th 1, 941; DA i.103.
Lehati see lihati.
Loka [cp. Vedic loka in its oldest meaning "space, open space."
For etym. see rocati. To the etym. feeling of the Pli hearer
loka is closely related in quality to ruppati (as in pop. etym. of
rpa) and rujati. As regards the latter the etym. runs "lujjati
kho loko ti vuccati" S iv.52, cp. Nd2 550, and loka=lujjana
DhsA 47, 308: see lujjana. The Dhtp 531 gives root lok
(loc) in sense of dassana] world, primarily "visible world,"
then in general as "space or sphere of creation," with var. degrees of substantiality. Often (unspecified) in the comprehen-
651
Loka
Loka
& arpadhtu. The rise and decay of this world is referred to as samudaya and atthangama at S ii.73; iii.135;
iv.86; A v.107. Cp. D iii.33 (att ca loko ca); Mhvs 1,
5 (loka dukkh pamocetu); 28, 4 (loko 'ya pito); PvA 1
(vijj caraa sampanna yena nyanti lokato). Other
divisions of var. kinds of "planes" are e. g. deva A i.115,
153; iii.414 sq.; Brahma Vbh 421; Mhvs 19, 45; Yama Dh
44; S i.34; nara Mhvs 5, 282. See also each sep. head
word, also peta & manussa. The division at Nd1 550 is
as follows: niraya, tiracchna, pittivisaya, manussa, deva
(=material); upon which follow khandha, dhtu, yatana
(=immaterial). Similarly at Nd1 29, where apya takes the
place of niraya, tiracchna, pittivisaya. Another threefold division is sankhra, satta, oksa at Vism 204, with
explns : "sabbe satt hra hitik" ti= sankhraloka; "sassato loko ti v asassato loko" ti= sattaloka; "yvat candima
suriy pariharanti dis 'bhanti virocamn" etc. (=M i.328;
A i.227; cp. J i.132) =oksaloka. The same expln in detail at
SnA 442. Another as kma, rpa, arpa: see under
rpa; another as kilesa, bhava, indriya at Nett 11, 19. Cp.
sankhra loka VbhA 456; dasa lokadhtuyo (see below) S
i.26. 3. Ordinary & applied meaning. (a) division of
the world, worldly things S i.1, 24 (loke visattik attachment
to this world; opp. sabba loke anabhirati S v.132). loke
in this world, among men, here D iii.196 (ye nibbut loke); It
78 (loke uppajjati); DA i.173 (id.); Vbh 101 (ya loke piya
rpa etc.); Pv ii.113 (=ida C.); KhA 15, 215. See also the
diff. defns of loke at Nd2 552. loka collectively "one, man":
kiccha loko panno jyati ca jyati ca, etc. D ii.30. Also
"people": Lanka loka people of Ceylon Mhvs 19, 85; cp.
jana in similar meaning. Derived from this meaning is the use
in cpds. () as "usual, every day, popular, common": see e.
g. yata, vajja, vohra. (b) "thing of the world," material
element, physical or worldly quality, sphere or category (of
"materiality"). This category of loka is referred to at Vbh 193,
which is expld at VbhA 220 as follows: "ettha yo aya ajjhatt'
di bhedo kyo pariggahto, so eva idha loko nma." In this
sense 13 groups are classified according to the number of constituents in each group (1 12 and No. 18); they are given
at Nd2 551 (under lokantag Sn 1133) as follows: (1) bhavaloka; (2) sampatti bhavaloka, vipatti bhavaloka; (3) vedan;
(4) hr; (5) updna kkhandh; (6) ajjhattikni yatanni
(their rise & decay as "lokassa samudaya & atthangama" at S
iv.87); (7) viahitiyo; (8) loka dhamm; (9) satt'vs;
(10) upakkiles; (11) kmabhav; (12) yatanni; (18) dhtuyo. They are repeated at Ps i.122=174, with (1) as "sabbe
satt hra hitik; (2) nma ca rpa ca; and the remainder the same. Also at Vism 205 and at SnA 442 as at
Ps i.122. Cp. the similar view at S iv.95: one perceives the
world ("materiality": loka sain and loka mnin, proud
of the world) with the six senses. This is called the "loka" in
the logic (vinaya) of the ariy. A few similes with loka see
J.P.T.S. 1907, 131.
-akkhyik (f., scil. kath) talk or speculation about
(origin etc. of) the world, popular philosophy (see lokyata and cp. Dialogues i.14) Vin i.188; D i.8; M i.513; Miln
316; DA i.90. -agga chief of the world. Ep. of the Buddha
ThA 69 (Ap. v.11). -anta the end (spatial) of the world A
ii.49 (na ca appatv lokanta dukkh atthi pamocana). -
antag one who has reached the end of the world (and of all
things worldly), Ep. of an Arahant A ii.6, 49 sq.; It 115, Sn
1133; Nd2 551. -antara the space between the single worlds
J i.44 (v.253: Avcimhi na uppajjanti, tath lokantaresu ca).
-antarika (scil. Niraya) a group of Nirayas or Purgatories situated in the lokantara (i. e. cakkavl, antaresu J i.76), 8,000
yojanas in extent, pitch dark, which were filled with light
when Gotama became the Buddha J i.76; VbhA 4; Vism 207
(lokantariya); SnA 59 (vsa life in the l. niraya); cp. BSk.
lokntarik Divy 204 (andhs tamaso 'ndhakra tamisr).
-dhipa lord or ruler of the world A i.150. -dhipateyya
"rule of the world," dependence on public opinion, influence
of material things on man, one of the 3 dhipateyyas (atta,
loka, dhamma) D iii.220; Vism 14. -nukamp sympathy with the world of men [cp. BSk. loknugraha Divy 124
sq.] D iii.211; It 79. -misa worldly gain, bait of the flesh
M i.156; ii.253; Th 2, 356. -yata what pertains to the ordinary view (of the world), common or popular philosophy,
or as Rhys Davids (Dial. i.171) puts it: "name of a branch
of Brahman learning, probably Nature lore"; later worked
into a qusi system of "casuistry, sophistry." Franke, Dgha
trsln 19, trsls as "logisch beweisende Naturerklrung" (see the
long note on this page, and cp. Dial. i.166 172 for detail of
lokyata). It is much the same as lok-akkhy(ika) or popular
philosophy. D i.11, 88; Vin ii.139; Sn p. 105 (=vitaa
vdasattha SnA 447, as at DA i.247); Miln 4, 10, 178; A
i.163, 166; iii.223. Cp. BSk. lokyata Divy 630, 633, and
lokyatika ibid. 619. See also Kern's remarks at Toev. s.
v. -yatika (brhmaa) one who holds the view of lokyata
or popular philosophy S ii.77 (trsln K.S. 53: a Brahmin "wise
in world lore"); Miln 178; J vi.486 (na seve lokyatika;
expld as "anatthanissita... vitaa sallpa lokyatika
vda na seveyya," thus more like "sophistry" or casuistry).
-issara lord of the world Sdhp 348. -uttara see under lokiya.
-cint thinking about the world, worldphilosophy or speculation S v.447; A ii.80 (as one of the 4 acinteyyni or thoughts
not to be thought out: buddha visaya, jhna visaya,
kamma vipka, l c.). Cp. BSk. laukika citta Divy 63, 77
etc. -dhamm (pl.) common practice, things of the world,
worldly conditions S iii.139 sq.; Sn 268 (expln loke dhamm;
yva lokappavatti tva anivattik dhamm ti vutta hoti
KhA 153, cp. J iii.468); Miln 146. Usually comprising a
set of eight, viz. lbha, albha, yaso, ayaso, nind, pasas,
sukha, dukkha D iii.260; A iv.156 sq.; v.53; Nd2 55; Ps
i.22, 122; Vbh 387; Nett 162; DhA ii.157. -dhtu constituent
or unit of the Universe, "world element"; a world, sphere;
another name for cakkavla. Dasa sahassi lokadhtu the
system of the 10,000 worlds Vin i.12; A i.227. D iii.114;
Pv ii.961 ; Kvu 476; Vism 206 sq.; Vbh 336; Nd1 356 (with
the stages from one to fifty lokadhtu's, upon which follow:
sahass canik l dh.; dvisahass majjhimik; tisahass;
mahsahass); J i.63, 212; Miln 237; VbhA 430, 436. See also
canik. -ntha saviour of the world, Ep. of the Buddha Sn
995; Vism 201, 234; VvA 165; PvA 42, 287. -nyaka guide
or leader of the world (said of the Buddha) Sn 991; Ap 20;
Mhvs 7, 1; Miln 222. -nirodha destruction of the world It
121 (opp. samudaya). -pla (devat) guardian (governor)
of the world, which are usually sepcified as four, viz. Kuvera (=Vessavaa), Dhataraha, Virpakkha, Virhaka, alias
652
Loka
Loma
Lokiya (& lokika) (adj.) [fr. loka; cp. Vedic laukika in meaning
"worldly, usual"] 1. (ordinarily) "belonging to the world," i.
e. (a) world wide, covering the whole world, famed,
widely known Th 1, 554; J vi.198. (b) () belonging to
the world of, an inhabitant of (as lokika) Pv i.62 (Yama).
(c) common, general, worldly Vism 89 (samdhi); DhA iv.3
(mahjana) PvA 131 (parikkhaka), 207 (sukha), 220 (sabhva). See also below 3. 2. (special meaning) worldly,
mundane, when opposed to lokuttara. The term lokuttara
has two meanings viz. (a) in ordinary sense: the highest
of the world, best, sublime (like lokagga, etc.), often applied
to Arahantship, e. g. lokuttaradyajja inheritance of Arahantship J i.91; DhA i.117; ideal: lokuttara dhamma (like
parama dhamma) the ideal state, viz. Nibbna M ii.181; pl.
l. dhamm M iii.115. (b) (in later canonical literature)
beyond these worlds, supra mundane, transcendental, spiritual. In this meaning it is applied to the group of nava lokuttar dhamm (viz. the 4 stages of the Path: sotpatti etc., with
the 4 phala's, and the addition of nibbna), e. g. Dhs 1094.
Mrs. Rh. D. tries to compromise between the two meanings
by giving lokuttara the trsln "engaged upon the higher ideal"
(Dhs. tsrl. Introd. p. 98), since meaning (b) has too much of
a one sided philosophical appearance. On term cp. Cpd.
913 . 3. lokiya (in meaning "mundane") is contrasted with
lokuttara ("transcendental") at many passages of the Abhidhamma, e. g. at Ps ii.166; Dhs. 505, 1093, 1446; Vbh 17 sq.,
93, 106, 128, 229 sq., 271, 322; Kvu 222, 515, 602; Pug 62;
Tikp 41 sq., 52 sq., 275; Dukp 304, 324; Nett 10, 54, 67, 77,
111, 161 sq., 189 sq.; Miln 236, 294 (lokika), 390; Vism 10,
85, 438; DA i.331; DhsA 47 sq., 213; VbhA 128, 373; DhA
i.76 (lokika); ii.150; iii.272; iv.35.
Loika & Loiya (adj.) [fr. loa] salty, alkaline Dhs 629.
loiya-teliya prepared with salt & oil J iii.522; iv.71.
aloika unsalted 426 (aka); VvA 184; J i.228; iii.409.
Lodda [cp. *Sk. rodhra; on sound changes see Geiger, P.Gr. 44,
622 ] N. of a tree J v.405; vi.497.
Lopa [fr. lup: see lumpati] taking away, cutting off; as tt. g.
apocope, elision (of the final letter) VbhA 164 (sabba loka
vohra); SnA 12, 303, 508; VvA 79; often in anunsika
dropping of (final) SnA 410; VvA 154, 275. At S v.342
read piiy 'lopena for piiy lopena. Cp. lopa, nillopa,
vilopa, vilopiya.
Lobha [cp. Vedic & Epic Sk. lobha; fr. lubh: see lubbhati]
covetousness, greed. Defined at Vism 468 as "lubbhanti tena,
saya v lubbhati, lubbhana mattam eva v ta," with several comparisons following. Often found in triad of lobha,
dosa, moha (greed, anger, bewilderment, forming the three
principles of demerit: see kusala mla), e. g. at A iv.96;
It 83, 84; Vism 116; Dukp 9, 18 sq. See dosa & moha.
D iii.214, 275; S i.16, 43, 63, 123 (bhava); v.88; A i.64
(kkhaya), 160 (visama), cp. D iii.70 sq.; ii.67; Sn 367, 371,
537 (kodha), 663, 706, 864, 941 (ppa); Nd1 15, 16, 261; J
iv.11 (kodha, dosa, l.); Dhs 982, 1059; Vbh 208, 341, 381,
402; Nett 13, 27; Vism 103; VbhA 18; PvA 7, 13, 17, 89
(+dosa), 102; VvA 14; Sdhp 52 (moha), 266. alobha disinterestedness D iii.214; Dhs 32.
-dhamm (pl.) affection of greed, things belonging to
greed; (adj.) (of) greedy character M i.91; iii.37; D i.224, 230;
S iv.111; A iii.350; J iv.11. -mla the root of greed Vism 454
(eightfold; with dosa mla & moha mla).
Locaka (adj.) [fr. loc. Caus. of luc; cp. Sk. lucaka] one who
pulls out D i.167 (kesa massu, habit of cert. ascetics); M
i.308 (id.).
Locana1 [fr. loc or lok to see; Dhtp 532 & Dhtm 766: loc= dassana] the eye; adj. () having eyes. (of...) Pv i.115 (miga
manda); PvA 57, 90 (pingala).
Locana2 (nt.) [fr. loc. Caus. of lucati] pulling, tearing out D
i.167 (kesa massu); A i.296; Pug 55.
Lobhaniya (ya, eyya) (adj.) [grd. formation fr. lobha] 1. belonging to greed "of the nature of greed" causing greed It 84
(eyya). See rajaniya. 2. desirable Miln 361 (paduma).
Loa (nt.) [cp. Sk. lavaa, for which see also lavaa. The
653
Loma
Lohita
Loma (nt.) [cp. Vedic roman. The (restituted) late P. form roma
only at J v.430; Abhp 175, 259; Sdhp 119] the hair of the body
(whereas kesa is the hair of the head only) D ii.18 (ekeka, uddhagga, in characteristics of a Mahpurisa); S ii.257 (asi,
usu, satti etc.); A ii.114; Vin iii.106 (usu etc.); Sn 385;
J i.273 (khaggo lomesu allyi); VbhA 57; DhA i.126; ii.17
(gaan); ThA 199; VvA 324 (skara); PvA 152, 157; Sdhp
104. A detailed description of loma as one of the 32 kras of
the body (Kh iii.; pl. lom) is found at Vism 250, 353; VbhA
233; KhA 42, 43. aloma hairless J vi.457; puthu having
broad hair or fins, name of a fish J iv.466; Vv 4411 . haha
with hairs erect, excited Mhvs 15, 33. On loma in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 131. loma pteti to let one's hair
drop, as a sign of subduedness or modesty, opp. to horripilation [pteti formed fr. pat after wrong etym. of panna in
panna loma "with drooping hairs," which was taken as a by
form of patita: see panna loma]: Vin ii.5 (=pannalomo
hoti C.); iii.183; M i.442. Cp. anu, pai, vi.
-kpa a pore of the skin J i.67; KhA 51, 63; SnA 155
(where given as 99,000) Vism 195 (id.). -padmaka a kind of
plant J vi.497 (reading uncertain; v. l. lodda). -sundar (f.)
beautiful with hairs (on her body) J v.424 (Kurangav l.; expld
on p. 430 as "roma rjiy maita udar"). -hasa horripilation, excitement with fear or wonder, thrill D i.49; A iv.311
sq. (sa); Sn 270; Vbh 367; Miln 22; Vism 143; DA i.150.
-hasana causing horripilation, astounding, stupendous Sn
681; J iv.355 (abbhuta+); Pv iii.93 ; iv.35 ; Miln 1; Mhvs 17, 55
(abbhuta+). -haha having the hair standing on end, horrified, thunderstruck, astounded D i.95; S v.270; Sn p. 15; Miln
23; SnA 155; cp. haha loma above.
Lohat (f.) [abstr. fr. loha] being a metal, in (suvaassa) aggalohat the fact of gold being the best metal VvA 13.
Lohita (adj. nt.) [cp. Vedic lohita & rohita; see also P. rohita "red"] 1. (adj.) red: rarely by itself (e. g. M ii.17),
usually in cpds. e. g. abhijti the red species (q. v.) A
654
Lohita
Vasa
gamana."
V
108 (yiha va huta va), 138 (bdha va cittakkhepa va
ppue).
Va1 the syllable "va" KhA 109 (with ref. to ending v in Bhagav, which Bdhgh expls as "va kra dgha katv," i. e.
a lengthening of va); SnA 76 (see below va3 ).
Va2 (indecl.) [the enclitic, shortened form of iva after long vowels. Already to be found for iva in RV metri caus] like, like as,
as if; only in poetry (as already pointed out by Trenckner, Miln
422): It 84 (tlapakka va bandhan), 90 (chavlta va nassati); Dh 28; Sn 38 (vaso vislo va: see C. expln under va3 );
Pv i.81 (ummatta rpo va; =viya PvA 39); i.116 (nao va
chinno); Miln 72 (chy va anapyin); J iii.189 (kusamuddo
va ghosav); iv.139 (aggva suriyo va); DhA iii.175.
Va3 (indecl.) [for eva, after long vowels] even, just (so), only; for
sure, certainly Dh 136 (aggi daho va tappati); J i.138,
149 (so pi suvaa vao va ahosi), 207; SnA 76 (vakro
avadhra' attho eva kro v aya, sandhi vasen' ettha
e kro naho: wrong at this passage Sn 38 for va2 =iva!);
PvA 3 (eko va putto), 4 (tamatt va).
Va4 is (metrically) shortened form of v, as found e. g. Dh 195
(yadi va for yadi v); or in correlation va-va either or: Dh
655
Vasa
Vanka
Vaggatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. vagga2 ] distraction, dissension, secession, sectarianism Vin i.316 (opp. samaggatta).
Vakka2 (nt.) [Vedic vkka] the kidney Sn 195; Kh iii.; Miln 26;
DhsA 140. In detail described as one of the 32 kras at Vism
255, 356; VbhA 60, 239, 356.
-pacaka the series of five (constituents of the body) beginning with the kidney. These are vakka, hadaya, yakana,
kilomaka, pihaka: VbhA 249.
Vagguli & (m. & f.) [cp. Sk. valgul, of valg to flutter] a bat
Vin ii.148; Miln 364, 404; Vism 663 (in simile); DhA iii.223.
-rukkha a tree on which bats live Vism 74. -vata "bat
practice," a certain practice of ascetics J i.493; iii.235; iv.299.
Vanka (adj. n.) [cp. Vedic vanka & vakra bending; also
Ved. vanku moving, fluttering, walking slant; vacati to waver, walk crooked. Cp. Lat. con vexus "convex," Ags.
wh "wrong," Goth. whs; Ohg. wanga cheek, and others.
The Dhtp 5 gives "koilya" as meaning of vank. Another
Pli form is vakka (q. v.). The Prk. forms are both vakka &
vanka: Pischel, Prk. Gr. 74], I. (adj.). 1. crooked, bent,
656
Vanka
Vaco
At SnA 397 (combd with linga and other terms) it refers to the
"number," i. e. singular & plural.
-attha word analysis or meaning of words Vism 364;
SnA 24.
-kara one who does one's bidding, obedient;
a servant Vv 165 ; 8421 ; J ii.129; iv.41 (vacana kara);
v.98; PvA 134. -khama gentle in words S ii.282; A iv.32.
-paivacana speech and counterspeech (i. e. reply), conversation DhA ii.35; PvA 83, 92, 117.
-patha way of saying, speech M i.126 (five ways, by which a person is judged:
klena v aklena v, bhtena & a, sahena & pharusena,
attha sahitena & an, mettacitt & dosantar); A ii.117,
153; iii.163; iv.277, cp. D iii.236; Vv 6317 (=vacana VvA
262); SnA 159, 375. -bheda variance in expression, different
words, kind of speech SnA 169, cp. vacanamatte bhedo SnA
471. -vyattaya distinction or specification of expression SnA
509. -sampaiggaha "taking up together," summing up (what
has been said), rsum KhA 100. -sesa the rest of the words
PvA 14, 18, 103.
Vaco (& vaca) (nt.) [Vedic vacas, of vac] speech, words, saying; nom. & acc. vaco Sn 54, 356, 988, 994, 1006, 1057,
1110, 1147; J i.188; Nd1 553 (=vacana bypatha desan anusandhi); Pv i.1112 . instr. vacas Vin ii.95 (dhamm bahussut
honti dhat v. paricit); iii.189; S i.12 (+manas); Sn 365,
663, 890 (=vacanena Nd1 299); Vism 241; Mhvs 19, 42.
As adj. () vaca in combn with du as dubbaca having bad
speech, using bad language, foul mouthed M i.95; S ii.204;
A ii.147; iii.178; v.152 sq.; J i.159; Pug 20; Sdhp 95, 197.
Opp. suvaca of nice speech M i.126; A v.24 sq.; Pv iv.133
657
Vaco
Vajjha
Vaccasin (adj.) [cp. Sk. varcasvin & Ved. varcin, having splendour, might or energy, fr. Vedic varcas] energetic, imposing D
i.114 (brahma; Dial. i.146 "fine in presence," cp. DA i.282).
See also under brahma. Note. The P. root vacc is given at
Dhtm 59 in meaning of "ditti," i. e. splendour.
Vaccita [pp. of vacceti, Denom. of vacca] wanting to ease oneself, oppressed with vacca Vin ii.212, 221.
Vaccha1 [Vedic vatsa, lit. "one year old, a yearling"; cp. Gr.
year, Sk. vatsara id., Lat vetus old, vitulus calf; Goth. wiprus a
year old lamb=Ohg. widar=E. wether] a calf Dh 284; J v.101;
Vism 163 (in simile), 269 (id.; ka a maimed calf); DhsA
62 (with popular etym. "vadat ti vaccho"); VvA 100, 200
(tarua). On vaccha in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 131.
-giddhin longing for her calf S iv.181. -goplaka a cow
herd Vism 28. -danta "calf tooth," a kind of arrow or
javelin M i.429; J vi.448. -plaka cow herd Vv 512 .
Vajja2 (adj. nt.) [cp. Sk. vdya, grd. of vad] 1. "to be said,"
i. e. speaking D i.53 (sacca=sacca vacana DA i.160). See
also mosa vajja. 2. "to be sounded," i. e. musical instrument J i.500 (bheri).
Vajati [Vedic vraj, cp. Ved. vraja (=P. vaja) & vjana enclosure=Av. vrna , with which cp. Gr. to enclose, , Lat. vergo to turn; Gaelic fraigh hurdle; Ags.
wringan=E. wring=Ger. ringen, E. wrinkle =Ger. renken, and
many others, see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. vergo. The Dhtp
(59) defines vaj (together with aj) by "gamana"] to go, proceed, get to (acc.), lit. to turn to (cp. vj, vakti, pp. vkta,
658
Vajjha
Vaa
Vaaka [cp. *Sk. vaaka, fr. vaa rope] a small ball or thickening,
bulb, tuber; in mula the (edible) tuber of the lotus J vi.563
(C. kaaka).
Vakara [probably distorted by metathesis from Sk. varak.
Fr. vaa rope. On etym. of the latter see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s.
v. volvo] a rope, cable J iii.478 (nv sa vakar).
Vauma (nt.) [cp. Vedic vartman, fr. vt] a road, path D ii.8; S
iv.52 (chinna); J iii.412; Vism 123 (sa & a). Cp. ubbauma
& parivauma.
Vajjheti [Denom. fr. vajjha] to destroy, kill J vi.527 (siro vajjhayitvna). Kern, Toev. s. v. vaddh proposes reading vaddhayitvna (of a root vardh to cut), cutting off is perhaps better.
The expression is hapax legomenon.
Vacati [vac: see etym. under vanka. The Dhtp distinguishes
two roots vac, viz. "gamane" (46) and "palambhane" (543),
thus giving the lit. & the fig. meanings] 1. to walk about J
i.214 (inf. itu=pdacra gamanena gantu C.). 2.
Caus. vaceti to cheat, deceive, delude, elude D i.50; Sn 100,
129, 356; J iii.420 (aor. avaci=vacesi C.); vi.403 (etu
kma); Pv iii.42 ; Miln 396; Mhvs 25, 69 (tomara avacayi).
pp. vacita.
Vacana (nt.) [fr. vac, cp. Epic Sk. vacana] deception, delusion, cheating, fraud, illusion D i.5; iii.176; A ii.209; Sn 242;
Pv iii.95 ; Pug 19; J iv.435; DhsA 363 (for my Dhs 1059);
DA i.79; DhA iii.403; PvA 193. vacana in lit. meaning of
vacati 1 is found in avacana not tottering J i.214.
Vacanika (adj.) [fr. vacana] deceiving; a cheat D iii.183; Th 1,
940; Miln 290.
Vacaniya (adj.) [grd. formation fr. vacana, cp. MVastu ii.145:
vacanya] deceiving, deluding Th 2, 490.
Vacita [pp. of vaceti] deceived, cheated J i.287 (vacit'
ammi=vacit amhi).
Vajula see vajua.
Vajha (adj.) [cp. Epic & later Sk. bandhya] barren, sterile D
i.14, 56; M i.271; S ii.29 (a); iv.169; v.202 (a); Pv iii.45
(a=anipphala C.); J ii.406 (skariyo: so read for vajjha);
Miln 95; Vism 508 (bhva); DhA i.45 (itthi); DA i.105; PvA
31, 82; VvA 149; Sdhp 345 (a).
Vaa [cp. Epic Sk. vaa. A root va, not connected with this vaa
is given at Dhtm 106 in meaning "vehana": see vaasa] the
Indian fig tree J i.259 (rukkha); iii.325; Mhvs 6, 16; DhA
i.167 (rukkha); PvA 113.
Vaa at Pug 45, 46 (tuccho pi hito pro pi vao) read ti pihito pro
vivao. See vivaa.
Vaasa [for avaasa: see Geiger, P.Gr. 661 ; cp. Sk.
avatasa with t; Prk. vaasa] a kind of head ornament, perhaps ear ring or garland worn round the forehead Mhvs
11, 28 (C. expls as "kaapilandhana vaasakan ti vutta
hoti"). Usually as vaasaka Vin ii.10; iii.180; Th 1, 523;
659
Vaa
Vahati
little ball").
Vai (f.) [represents both Epic Sk. varti and vtti, differentiated derivations from vt, combining the meanings of
"turning, rolling" and "encircling, round"] 1. a wick S
ii.86=iii.126=iv.213; J i.243 (dpa); DhA 393; ThA 72 (Ap.
v.45: nom. pl. vani); Mhvs 32, 37; 34, 35. 2. enclosure, lining, film, skin Vism 258 (anta entrails), 262 (udara);
J i.260 (anta, so read for vaddhi). 3. edge, rim, brim,
cireumference Vin ii.120 (aggala of the door), 148 (id.); S
iii.141 (patta of a vase or bowl); iv.168 (id.); DhA ii.124
(nemi). Often as mukha-vai outer rim, border, lining, e.
g. cakkava J i.64, 72; DhA i.319; iii.209; patt J v.38;
psda DhsA 107. 4. strip, fringe Vin ii.266 (dussa);
J v.73 (camma); Mhvs 11, 15. 5. a sheath, bag, pod J
iii.366 (tia); Mhvs 26, 17 (marica red pepper pod); DhA
iv.203 (reu). 6. a lump, ball DhA iii.117 (pubba, of
matter). 7. rolling forth or along, a gush (of water), pour J
i.109 (or to v?).
Vaak (f.) (& vaaka) [cp. Sk. vartak & Ved. vartik] the
quail M iii.159 sq.; J i.172, 208 (vaaka luddaka); iii.312;
DhA iii.175 (loc. pl. vaakesu). The Vaaka-jtaka at J
i.208 sq. (cp. J v.414).
Vaula (adj.) [fr. vt, cp. late Sk. vartula] circular Abhp 707.
Vaha [pp. of vassati, for the usual vuha] rained, in nava newly
rained upon DhA i.19 (bhmi).
Vahara (adj.) [cp. BSk. vahara MVastu ii.65. A root vah is
given at Dhtm 133 in meaning "thlattane bhave" i. e. bulkiness] bulky, gross Abhp 701.
Vaha (nt.) [fr. vdh] wealth, riches J iii.131 (vaha
vahata, imper.). Or should we read vaa? Vaha
is used as Np. at KhA 119, perhaps in meaning "prosperous."
Vahaka [fr. vaheti] 1. augmenting, increasing, i. e. looking
after the welfare of somebody or something, one who superintends J i.2 (rsi the steward of an estate). 2. a maker of,
in special sense (cvara robecutter, perhaps fr. vardh to cut:
see vaddheti) a tailor J i.220.
Vaana (nt.) [fr. vt, vaati] turning round Dhtp 89 (in defn of
vaati). Cp. vaana.
Vaan (f.) [fr. vt] in val is a line or chain of balls ("rounds,"
i. e. rings or spindles). Reading somewhat doubtful. It occurs
at M i.80, 81 (seyyath v. eva me pihi kaako unnat'
vanato hoti; Neumann trsls "wie eine Kugelkette wurde mein
Rckgrat mit den hervor und zurcktretenden Wirbeln")
and at J v.69 (spelt "vahan vali sanks pihi te ninnat' unnat," with C. expln "pihika hne vuitv hpit
vahan vali sadis"). The J trsln by Dutoit gives
"einer Reihe von Spinnwirteln dein Rcken gleicht im Auf und
Nieder"; the E. tsrln has "Thy back like spindles in a row, a
long unequal curve doth show."
Vahaki (& ) [cp. Epic & Class. Sk. vardhaki & vardha- kin;
perhaps from vardh to cut: see vaddheti] a carpenter, builder,
architect, mason. On their craft and guilds see Fick, Sociale
Gliederung 181 sq.; Mrs. Rh. D. Cambridge Hist. Ind. i.206.
The word is specially characteristic of the Jtakas and other
popular (later) literature J i.32, 201, 247; ii.170; vi.332 sq.,
432; Ap. 51; DhA i.269; iv.207; Vism 94; PvA 141; Mhbv
154. iha a stonemason Mhvs 35, 102; nagara the city
architect Miln 331, 345; brhmaa a brahmin carpenter J
iv.207; mah chief carpenter, master builder Vism 463. In
metaphor tah the artificer lust DhA iii.128.
-gma a carpenter village J ii.18, 405; iv.159.
660
Vahati
Vaibbaka
increase" (trs. & intrs.); hence: to keep on, to prosper, to multiply, to grow S i.15 (read vah for va); ii.206 (vaena);
iv.73, 250; A v.249 (paya); Sn 329 (pa ca suta ca); J
iii.131 (pora vaha vahata, imper. med. 3rd sg.);
v.66 (sad so vahate rj sukka pakkhe va candim); Pv
i.12 (dt puena v.); Pug 71; Miln 9; Mhvs 7, 68 (putta
dhthi vahitv having numerous sons & daughters); 22, 73
(ubho vahisu drak, grew up); SnA 319; PvA 94.
ppr. vahamna (1) thriving KhA 119 (read as Vah,
Np.); (2) increasing J i.199 (putta dhthi); Mhvs 23, 34
(chyya as the shadows increased). See also pari.
pp. vaha, vaddha, vuha, vuddha, buha. Caus.
I. vaheti, in many shades of meaning, all based upon the
notion of progressive motion. Thus to be translated in any of
the foll. senses: to increase, to make move on (cp. vv. ll.
vaeti), to bring on to, to further; to take an interest in, to indulge in, practise; to be busy with, cause to prosper; to arrange;
to make for; and in a general sense "to make" (cp. derivation
vahaka "maker," i. e. tailor; vahaki id., i. e. carpenter;
vahana, etc.). The latter development into "make" is late.
1. to increase, to raise Sn 275 (raja); DA i.115; Mhvs 29,
66 (mangala to raise the chant); PvA 168 (+brheti). 2.
to cultivate (vipassana insight) J i.117 (aor. esi); PvA 14.
3. to rear, to bring up Mhvs 35, 103 (aor. vahesi). 4.
(with ref. to food) to get ready, arrange, serve in (loc.) J iii.445
(ptiy on the dish); iv.67 (karoiya), 391. 5. to exalt J
i.338 (akulne vahessati). 6. to participate in, to practise,
attend to, to serve (acc.) S ii.109 (tanha); A ii.54 (kaasi
to serve the cemetery, i. e. to die again and again: see refs.
under kaasi); Vism 111 (kasia), 152. 7. to make move
on, to set into motion (for vaeti?), in tasara v. SnA 265,
266. 8. to take up Mhvs 26, 10 (kunta). pp. vahita.
Caus. II. vahpeti: 1. to cause to be enlarged Mhvs 35,
119. 2. to cause to be brought up or reared J i.455. 3.
to have attended to Vin ii.134 (massu). 4. to cause to be
made up (of food) J iv.68.
Vahana (nt. & adj.) [fr. vaheti; see also vaddhana] 1. increasing, augmenting, fostering; increase, enlargement, prolongation M i.518 (hyana decrease & increase); J iii.422
(kula, spelling ddh); Mhvs 35, 73 (yussa); DhsA 406; PvA
31; Miln 320 (bala strengthincreasing); Dhtp 109; Sdhp 361.
2. indulgence in, attachment; serving, practising Sn 1084
(takka); J i.146 (kaasi, q. v. & cp. vaheti 6); Vism
111 (vahana), 152, 320. Here belong the phrases raja &
loka. 3. arrangement J vi.11 (pahavi vahanaka
kamma the act of attending to, i. e. smoothing the ground).
4. serving for, enhancing, favouring Pv iii.36 (rati
nandi). 5. potsherd [connected with vardh? See vaddheti]
J iii.226 (C. kahalika; uncertain). 6. a kind of garment, as
pua (full of costliness? but perhaps not connected with
vah at all) Mhvs 23, 33 & 37 (where C. expls : anagghni
evanmikni vattha yugni). Cp. vahamna.
Vai (f.) [fr. van to desire] wish, request Ud 53; J iv.404 (=ycana
C.); cp. J.P.T.S. 1891, 18 See vana2 & cp. vaeti.
Vaijj (f.) [Vedic vaijy, fr. vaij (vaik) merchant, cp. vija
& vaibbaka] trade, trading M ii.198; Sn 404 (payojaye dhammika so vaijja); A ii.81 sq.; Pv i.56 (no trade among the
Petas); J i.169; PvA 47 (tela); Sdhp 332, 390. Five trades
must not be carried on by lay followers of the Buddha, viz.
sattha trade in swords, satta in living beings, masa in
meat, majja in intoxicants, visa in poisons A iii.208, quoted
at DA i.235 and SnA 379.
Vaita [pp. of *vaeti, Denom. fr. vaa] wounded, bruised Pv
ii.24 ; J i.150; Sdhp 395.
Vaippattha [vaik+patha, in meaning patha 2] trading, trade Vin
i.229=D ii.87=Ud 88 (with ref. to Paliputta).
Vaibbaka
Vaat
662
Vaat
Vattati
Vaan (f.) [fr. vaeti] 1. explanation, commentary, exposition KhA 11, 145, 227; SnA 65 (pada); PvA 2. pi explanation of the text (as regards meaning of words), purely textual
analysis (opp. vinicchayakath) VbhA 291. 2. praise DhA
ii.100 (vana).
Vatavant (adj.) [vata2 +vant] observant of religious duties, devout Sn 624 (=dhuta vatena samanngata SnA 467); Dh
400 (with same expln at DhA iv.165 as as SnA 467).
Vati1 (f.) [later Sk. vti, fr. v] a fence J i.153; iii.272; v.472;
Vism 186 (vat, v. l. vati); SnA 98 (v. l. for gutti), 148 (v. l.
for vatik).
Vaavant (adj.) [fr. vaa] beautiful A iv.240 (ctummahrjik dev dgh'yuk vaavanto; v. l. vant); Pug
34; Pv iii.212 (=rpasampanna PvA 184); DhA i.383.
Vati2 (f.) [fr. v, cp. Sk. vti] a choice, boon DhA i.190 (pubbe
Sm nma vatiy pana kritatt Smvat nma jt).
Vatika (adj.) () [vata2 +ika] having the habit (of), acting like
M i.387 (kukkura).
Vatik (f.) [fr. vati1 ] a fence SnA 148 (kaaka & rukkha).
Vain () (adj.) [fr. vaa] 1. having colour Th 1, 1190 (acchar nnattavaiyo "in divers hues"). 2. belonging to a
caste, in ctu (suddhi) (purity of) the fourfold castes M ii.132.
3. having beauty Sn 551 (uttama). 4. having the appearance of A ii.106= Pug 44 (ma, pakka); J v.322 (vijju).
Vatta1 (nt.) [orig. pp. of vattati] 1. that which is done, which goes
on or is customary, i. e. duty, service, custom, function Vin
ii.31; Sn 294, 393 (gahaha); Vism 188 (cetiy' angaa etc.);
DhA i.92 (cariya); VbhA 354 (gata paccgata); VvA 47
(gma). 2. (for vata2 ) observance, vow, virtue D iii.9 (the
7 vattapadni, diff. from those enumd under vata pada);
Nd1 66 (sla ca vatta ca), 92 (hatthi etc.: see vata2 2), 104
(suddhi), 106 (id.), 188 (giving 8 dhutangas as vattas).
-paivatta all kinds of practices or duties J i.67; ii.103;
iii.339; iv.298; Miln 416 (sucarita); DhA i.13 sq.; ii.277;
iv.28. -bbata the usual custom DhA iv.44; C on S i.36
2 and on S ii.18 4 sq. -sampanna one who keeps all observances VbhA 297 (where the foll. vattni are enumd : 82
khuddaka vattni. 14 mah, cetiyangaa, bodhiyangaa,
pnyama, uposathgra, gantuka, gamika).
Vatta2 (nt.) [cp. Sk. vaktra & P. vattar] the mouth (lit. "speaker")
Pgdp 55 (sci vatto mah'odaro peto).
Vata1 (indecl.) [Vedic bata, post Vedic vata] part of exclamation: surely, certainly, indeed, alas! Vin iii.39 (puris' usabho
vat' ya "for sure he is a human bull"); Th 2, 316 (abbhuta
vata vca bhsasi); Sn 178, 191, 358; Vv 4713 ; Pv i.85 ; J
iv.355; PvA 13, 61, 75, 121. Often combd with other emphatic
particles, like aho vata Pv ii.945 (=sdhu vata PvA 131); lbh
vata no it is surely a gain that Sn 31; DhA ii.95; vata bho J i.81.
Vata2 (m. & nt.) [cp. Vedic vrata vow. fr. vt, meaning later
"milk" (see Macdonell & Keith, Vedic Index ii.341)] 1. a religious duty, observance, rite, practice, custom S i.143, 201;
iv.180; A iv.461 (sla, vata, tapas, brahmacariya); v.18; Sn
792, 898; Vv 8424 ; J iii.75; VvA 9; PvA 60. subbata of
good practice Vv 346 . Cp. patibbata, slabbata. 2. manner
of (behaving like) a certain animal (as a practice of ascetics),
e. g. aja like a goat J iv.318; go like a cow M i.387; J iv.318;
vagguli bat practice J i.493; iii.235; iv.299; hatthi elephant
behaviour Nd1 92 (here as vatta; see under vatta1 ).
-pada an item of good practice, virtue (otherwise called
gua at Miln 90) J i.202 (where 7 are enumd , viz. devotion to one's mother & father, reverence towards elder people, speaking the truth, gentle speech, open speech, unselfish-
663
Vattati
Vatthu
vattaya pursuing this); freq. in phrases vasa vatteti to exercise power, e. g. PvA 89; and cakka vatteti to wield royal
power, to govern (cp. expression cakkavattin & see pavatteti)
Sn 554, 684 (vattessati), 693 (dhamma cakka); J iii.412.
grd. vattitabba to be practised Vin ii.32. pp. vattita.
Vattana (nt.) [fr. vattati] moving on, upkeep, existence, continuance Sn 698 (cakka continuance of royal power); Mhvs 3,
38.
Vattan (& i) (f.) [cp. Sk. vartan, fr. vt] a track, a road J i.196,
395, 429; iii.200. kaha leaving a black trail, Ep. of the
fire J iii.140.
Vattamna (adj. nt.) [ppr. med. of vattati] being in existence,
going on, happening at the time; nt. process, progress, (as
) in progress SnA 4 (uppanna); PvA 55. -vacana the
present tense SnA 16, 23.
Vattamnaka (adj.) [fr. last] going on, being, existing; bhave
in the present existence or period Miln 291.
Vattar [n. ag. of vatti, vac] one who speaks, a sayer, speaker M
i.470; S i.63; ii.182; vi.94, 198; D i.139; A iv.32; v.79 sq., 226
sq.; Th 1, 334 (read ariya vatt for vat); J i.134; SnA
272; PvA 15.
Vatti [Vedic vakti, vac] to speak, say, call; pres. not found (for
which vadati); fut. 1st sg. vakkhmi J i.346; 3rd vakkhati
S i.142; J i.356; ii.40; vi.352; VbhA 51; 1st pl. vakkhma
S iv.72; M iii.207; Vism 170, 446; 3rd vakkhanti Vin ii.1;
pte. fut. vakkhamna PvA 18. aor. 1st sg. avaca J
iii.280; DhA iii.194, & avoca Th 2, 124; Vv 797 ; S i.10;
DhA iii.285; 2nd avaca Th 2, 415, avoca Dh 133, & avacsi
Vv 357 ; 539 ; 3rd avaca J i.294; Pv ii.319 ; PvA 65 (m a.); avoca Th 2, 494; S i.150; Sn p. 78; J ii.160; PvA 6, 31, 49,
& avacsi J vi.525; 1st pl. avacumha & avocumha M ii.91;
iii.15; 2nd avacuttha Vin i.75 (m a.); ii.297; J ii.48; DhA i.73;
iv.228, & avocuttha J i.176; Miln 9; 3rd pl. avacu J v.260,
& avocu M ii.147. inf. vattu Sn 431; J vi.351; Vism
522=VbhA 130 (vattukma); SnA 414; DA i.109; DhA i.329;
ii.5. ger. vatv SnA 398; PvA 68, 73, & vatvna Sn p.
78. grd. vattabba Miln 276 (ki vattabba what is there
to be said about it? i. e. it goes without saying); SnA 123,
174, 178; PvA 12, 27, 92. ppr. med. vuccamna Vin i.60;
iii.221; PvA 13. Pass. vuccati D i.168, 245; Dh 63; Mhvs
9, 9; 34, 81 (vuccate, v. l. uccate); J i.129 (vuccare, 3rd pl.);
PvA 24, 34, 63, 76; pp. vutta (q. v.). Caus. vceti to
make speak, i. e. to read out; to cause to read; also to teach, to
instruct Sn 1018, 1020; J i.452 (read); PvA 97. pp. vcita
(q. v.). Desid. vavakkhati (see Geiger, P.Gr. 184=Sk.
vivakati) to wish to call D ii.256.
664
Vatthu
Vaddhava
Vatthu2 [Vedic vstu; fr. vas] site, ground, field, plot Vin iii.50
(rma & vihra), 90 (id.); Sn 209, 473 (sakhetta, cp.
vatthu1 4), 769 (khetta+), 858 (id.); Th 1, 957 (khetta+vatthu,
cp. Brethren p. 3371 & Vin. Texts iii.389 sq.); Miln 279
(khetta a plot of arable land); DA i.78 (contrasted with khetta,
see khetta 1 and cp. vatthu1 1); PvA 88 (gehassa the back yard
of the house); haunted by fairies (parigahanti) D ii.87.
-kamma "act concerning sites," i. e. preparing the
ground for building D i.12 (trsln : fixing on lucky sites for
dwellings), cp. DA i.98: akaa vatthumhi gehapatihpana. -devat the gods protecting the grounds, field
gods, house gods Pv i.41 (=ghara vatthu adhivatth devat PvA 17). -parikiraa offerings over the site of a house
("consecrating sites" trsln ) D i.12 (cp. DA i.98=balikamma
karaa). -vijj the science of (building ) sites, the art of
determining a suitable (i. e. lucky) site for a house D i.9 (see
expln at DA i.93); S iii.239; Nd1 372; Vism 269 (in comparison); KhA 237. See also Dial ii.92 & Fick, Sociale Gliederung
152.
Vaddhana (nt.) [fr. vdh; see the usual vahana] increase, furthering J iii.422 (kula); Sdhp 247 (pti), 307 (id.).
665
Vaddhava
Vaddhavya (nt.) [fr. vaddha1 1] (old) age J ii.137 (=vuddhabhva, mahallakat C.).
Vaddhi in anta at J i.260 is to be read as vai.
Vaddheti [fr. vardh to cut, cp. vahaka & vahak] to cut off,
is Kern's proposed reading (see Toev. s. v.) at J vi.527 (siro
vaddhayitvna) for vajjheti (T. reading vajjhayitvna).
Vadha [fr. vadh] striking, killing; slaughter, destruction, execution D iii.176; A ii.113; Pug 58; J ii.347; Miln 419 (kata);
DhA i.69 (pa+pa ghta), 80, 296; DhA ii.39; VbhA
382. vadha dadti to flog J iv.382. atta self destruction S ii.241; piti parricide DA i.153; miga hunting J
i.149.
-bandhana flogging and binding (imprisoning). In this
connection vadh is given as a separate root at Dhtp 172 & 384
in meaning "bandhana." See A ii.209; v.206; Sn 242 (vadha
cheda bandhana; v. is expld at SnA 285 as "sattna
da' dhi koanan" i. e. beating) 623 (=pohana SnA 467);
J i.435; iv.11; VbhA 97.
Vadhaka [fr. vadh] slaying, killing; murderous; a murderer S
iii.112 (in simile); iv.173 (id.); A iv.92 (id.); Th 2, 347; D iii.72
(citta); KhA 27; VvA 72 (cetan murderous intention); Vism
230, 231 (in sim.); Sdhp 58. f. vadhik J v.425 (pl. yo).
Vadhati [Vedic vadh; the root is given at Dhtp 169 in meaning of
"his"] to strike, punish; kill, slaughter, slay; imper. 2nd pl.
vadhetha Vism 314; ger. vadhitv M i.159; D i.98; J i.12;
iv.67; SnA 257 (hisitv+); fut. vadhissati Mhvs 25, 62; aor.
vadhi J i.18 (cp. ud abbadhi); cond. 1st sg. vadhissa
Miln 221. grd. vajjha: see a. Caus. vadheti J i.168;
Miln 109. pp. vadhita.
Vadhita [pp. of vadheti] smitten Th 1, 783=M ii.73 (not with
Kern, Toev. s. v.=vyathita).
Vadhuk (f.) [fr. vadh] a daughter-in-law, a young wife A ii.78;
DhA iii.260.
Vadh (f.) [Ved. vadh; to Lith. ved to lead into one's house] a
daughter-in-law VvA 123.
Vana1 (nt.) [Ved. vana. The P. (edifying) etymology clearly
takes vana as belonging to van, and, dogmatically, equals it
with vana2 as an allegorical expression ("jungle") to tah
(e. g. DhsA 364 on Dhs 1059; DhA iii.424 on Dh 283).
The Dhtp (174) & Dhtm (254) define it "sambhattiya," i. e.
as meaning companionship] the forest; wood; as a place of
pleasure & sport ("wood"), as well as of danger & frightfulness ("jungle"), also as resort of ascetics, noted for its loneliness ("forest"). Of (fanciful) defns of vana may be mentioned: SnA 24 (vanute vanot ti vana); KhA 111 (vanayat
ti vana); DhsA 364 (ta ta rammaa vanati bhajati allyat ti vana, ycati v ti vana [i. e. vana2 ]. vanatho ti
vyajanena pada vahita... balava tahy'eta nma);
DhA iii.424 (mahant rukkh vana nma, khuddak tasmi vane hitatt vanath nma etc., with further distinguishing detail, concerning the allegorical meanings). D
ii.256 (bhikkha samiti vana); A i.35, 37; Dh 283 (also
as vana2 ); Sn 272, 562 (sho nadati vane), 1015 (id.), 684
Vambhanya
vana2 , vai, vaeti] to desire, love, wish, aim at, ask for SnA
24 (vanute & vanoti); DhsA 364 (vanati, bhajati, allyati).
Caus. vanayati KhA 111.
Vanatha [vana+tha; same in BSk. e. g. MVastu i.204] underwood, brushwood, thicket. Does not occur in lit. meaning,
except in exegesis of Dh 283 at DhA iii.424; q. v. under
vana1 . Another defn is given at SnA 24: "tah pariyuhna
vasena vana tanot ti vanatho, tah' nusayass' eta adhivacana." The fig. meaning is "lust, desire," see e. g.
S i.186; Th 1, 338; Dh 344; Sn 16 (ja); Dhs 1059 (as epithet of tah); J ii.205 (vanatha na kayir); Nett 81, 82.
nibbanatha free from desire S i.180; DhsA 364.
Vanditar [n. ag. fr. vandita] one who venerates or adores, a worshipper J vi.207 (vandit' assa=vandit bhaveyya C.).
Vapakassati see vavakassati.
Vapati1 [vap, Vedic vapate. Defn at Dhtp 192; bja-nikkhepe] to
sow Sn p. 13 (kasati+); J i.150 (nivpa vapitv); PvA 139.
Pass. vappate S i.227 (ydisa v. bja tdisa harate
phala), and vuppati [Vedic upyate] Th 1, 530. pp. vutta.
Caus. I. vpeti: see pp. vpita1 . Caus. II. vappeti to
cause to be sown Vin iii.131 (khetta); J iv.276 (sli).
Vanin (adj. n.) [either fr. Sk. vani (=P. vai) in meaning
"begging," or poetical abbreviation of vaibbin] poor, begging; one who asks (for alms) or begs, a mendicant J vi.232
(=vanibbaka C.).
Vapana (nt.) [fr. vap] sowing SnA 137; DhA iii.220 (kassaka);
PvA 8.
Vapayti [vi+apa+y] to go away, to disappear, only at Vin.
i.2=Kvu 186 (kankh vapayanti sabb; cp. id. p. MVastu
ii.416 vyapananti, to be read as vyapayanti).
Vappa2 [cp. Epic. & Class. Sk. bpa] a tear, tears Vin i.345
(vappa puchitv wiping the tears).
Vabbhcita is a at M i.172; read perhaps better as vambhayita: see p. 545. Neumann trsls only "thus
spoken" (i. e. bhsitam eta).
Vamati [vam, Idg. *emo, cp. Lat. vomo, vomitus=vamathu; Gr.
(E. emetic); Oicel. vaema seasickness. The defn at
Dhtp 221 & Dhtm 315 is "uggiraa"] to vomit, eject, throw out,
discharge Sn 198=J i.146; J v.255 (fut. vamissati); Pv iv.354
(=uayati chaayati PvA 256). Caus. vameti Miln 169.
pp. vanta.
Vandana (nt.) & Vandan (f.) [fr. vand, cp. Vedic vandana]
salutation, respect, paying homage; veneration, adoration A
i.294 (); ii.203 (+pj); J i.88; Pug 19, 24; Mhvs 15, 18; Miln
377; PvA i.53; SnA 492; ThA 256; Sdhp 221, 540.
667
Vambhanya
Varaka
Vambheti (& Vamheti) [Caus. of vambh, a root of uncertain origin (connected with vam?). There is a form vambha given by
Sk. lexicographers as a dial. word for vaa. Could it be a
contraction fr. vyambheti=vi+Denom. fr. ambho 2, part. of
contempt? The Dhtp (602) defines vambh as "garahya"]
to treat with contempt, despise, revile, scold; usually either
combd with khuseti or opposed to ukkaseti, e. g. Vin
ii.18; iv.4; M i.200 (=Sn 132 avajnti), 402 sq.; D i.90; A
ii.27 sq.; Th 1, 621; DA i.256 (=heti); DhA iv.38; VvA 348.
pp. vambhayita. -vamheti is found at J i.191, 356; cp.
vamhana. Note. The spelling bh interchanges with that of
h (vamheti), as ambho shows var. amho. Trenckner (introd.
to M 1. p. 1) gives vambheti (as BB reading) the preference
over vamheti (as SS reading). Morris' note on vambheti in
J.P.T.S. 1884, 96 does not throw any light on its etymology.
Vaya is the Sk. form of the nom. pl. of pers. pron. aha,
represented in Pli by maya (q. v.). The form vaya only
in grammarians, mentioned also by Mller, P.Gr. p. 87 as occurring in Dh (?). The enclitic form for acc. gen. & dat. is
no, found e. g. at Pv i.53 (gloss for vo; C. amhka); J ii.153,
352; DhA i.101; PvA 20, 73.
Vayassa [cp. Sk. vayasya] a friend J ii.31; iii.140; v.157.
Vayha (nt.) & Vayh (f.) [grd. formation fr. vah; cp. Sk.
vahya (nt.)] a vehicle, portable bed, litter Vin iv.339 (enumd
under yna together with ratha sakaa sandamnik sivik &
pank); J vi.500 (f.), with sivik & ratha.
Vammita [pp. of vammeti, cp. Sk. varmita] armoured, clad in armour J i.179 (assa); ii.315 (hatthi); iii.8; v.301, 322; DA i.40.
Vammin (adj.) [fr. vamma; Vedic varmin] wearing armour, armoured J iv.353 (=keaka phalaka hattha C.); v.259, 373;
vi.25; Miln 331.
Vammka & vammika (m. & nt.) [cp. Vedic valmka; Idg.
*orm(i); cp. Av. maoiris, Sk. vamra, Gr. , Lat.
formica, Cymr. mor; all of same origin & meaning] ant
hill: (a) ika: M i.142 sq.; J iii.85; iv.30 (bila the ant's hole);
v.163. (b) ika: J i.432; iv.30; Vism 183 (described), 304
(muddani), 446; DhA ii.51; iii.208; iv.154.
Vammeti [Denom. fr. vamma] to dress in armour, to armour J
i.180; ii.94 (mangala hatthi). pp. vammita.
Vamha [for vambha: see vambheti] bragging, boasting, despising
J i.319 (vacana).
Vaya1 (& vayo) (nt.) [Vedic vayas vitality, age; to be distinguished from another vayas meaning "fowl." The latter
is probably meant at Dhtp 232 (& Dhtm 332) with defn
"gamane." The etym. of vayo (age) is connected with Sk.
vra=Lat. vir. man, hero, vs strength; Gr. sinew,
strong; Sk. vayati to make fast, also veati; whereas vayas
(fowl) corresponds with Sk. vayasa (bird) & vi to Gr.
eagle, bird of prey, Lat. avis bird] age, especially
young age, prime, youth; meaning "old age" when characterized as such or contrasted to youth (the ord. term for old
age being jar). Three "ages" or "periods of life" are usually
distinguished, viz. pahama youth, majjhima middle age,
pacchima old age, e. g. at J i.79; Vism 619; DhA iii.133.
vayo anuppatta one who has attained old age, old D i.48
(=pacchima vaya anuppatta DA i.143); Sn pp. 50, 92.
Cp. Dh 260; J i.138 (vayo har kes); Vism 619 (the 3 vayas
with subdivisions into dasakas or decades of life); Mhvs 2, 26
Vara2 (m. & nt.) [fr. v to wish] wish, boon, favour Miln 110,
139. Usually in phrases ilke vara dadti to grant a wish or a
boon J iv.10; VvA 260; PvA 20. vara gahti to take a wish
or a vow J v.382; vara vuti (varati) id. J iii.493 (vara
varassu, imper.); Pv ii.940, 42 ; Miln 227. vara ycati to
ask a favour J iii.315 (varni ycmi).
Varaka1 [cp. *Sk. varaka] the bean Phaseolus trilobus J ii.75
(where equal to kalya); Miln 267; DhA i.311.
668
Varaka
Vallabha
Valhassa [valha+assa] cloud horse J ii.129 (the Valhassajtaka, pp. 127 sq.); cp. BSk. Blh'va ( rj) Divy
120 sq. (see Index Divy).
Vali & Val (f.) [cp. Epic Sk. vali; fr val. Spelling occasionally with ] a line, fold, wrinkle, a streak, row; Vin ii.112 (read
valiyo for vali?); Th 2, 256; J iv.109; Shhp 104. muttvali a string of pearls VvA 169. For vaan-val see vaan.
See also vali.
Valika (adj.) [fr. vali] having folds J i.499.
Valita [pp. of val: see valeti] wrinkled A i.138 (acc. khaadanta palita kesa vilna khalita siro valita
tilak'hata gatta: cp. valin with passage M i.88= iii.180,
one of the two evidehtly misread); PvA 56, 153. In compn
with taca contracted to valittaca (for valitattaca) "with wrinkled skin" DhA ii.190 (phalitakesa+); with abstr. valittacat
the fact of having a wrinkled skin M i.49 (plicca+; cp. MA
215); A ii.196 (khaicca plicca+).
Valaya (m. & nt.) [Epic Sk. valaya, fr. Idg. *el to turn; see
Sk. roots v to enclose, and val to turn, to which belong the
foll.: varutra upper robe, rmi wave, fold, valita bent, vlayati to make roll, valli creeper, vaa rope, va cane. Cp. also
Vallabha [cp. Epic & Class. Sk. vallabha & BSk. valla-bhaka a
sea monster Divy 231] a favourite J iv.404; vi.38, 371; rja a
king's favourite, an overseer J i.342; Mhvs 37, 10; VbhA 501.
669
Vallabha
Vasa
santi vavakassanti); A iii.145 (bhikkhu n' la sanghamh 'vapaksitu: read vavaksitu or kassitu), 393 (vapakassat'
eva Satthr, vapakassati garuhniyehi). See also apaksati,
avakassati, avapaksati. pp. vavakaha.
Vallik (f.) [cp. Sk. vlik?] 1. an ornament for the ear Vin ii.106
(cp. Bdhgh's expln on p. 316). 2. a jungle rope Vin ii.122.
Vallibha [cp. late Sk. valibha wrinkled] the plant kumbhaa i.
e. a kind of gourd Abhp 597 (no other ref.?).
Vall (f.) [cp. Sk. vall; for etym. see valaya] 1. a climbing
plant, a creeper Vin iii.144; J v.37; vi.536; VvA 147, 335
(here as a root?). santnaka a long, spreading creeper
VvA 94, 162. 2. a reed or rush used as a string or rope
for binding or tying (esp. in building), bast (?) M i.190 (Neumann, "Binse"); J iii.52 (satta rohita macche uddharitv valliy
vuitv netv etc.), 333 (in similar connection); DhA iii.118.
3. in kaa the lobe of the ear Mhvs 25, 94. The compn
form of vall is valli.
-ko the tips of a creeper J vi.548. -pakka the fruit
of a creeper Vv 3330 . -phala=pakka J iv.445. -santna
spreadings or shoots of a creeper KhA 48. -hraka carrying
a (garland of) creeper Vism 523=VbhA 131 (in comparison
illustrating the paicca samuppda).
Vallura (nt.) [cp. Class. Sk. vallra] dried flesh S ii.98; J ii.245.
Vaa at Vism 312 is to be read va (snake), in phrase vehi upadduta "molested by snakes."
Vaabh [=vaav?] is not clear; it occurs only in the expression (is it found in the Canon?) vaabh-mukha a submarine
fire or a purgatory Abhp 889. The Epic Sk. form is vaavmukha (Halyudha i.70; iii.1).
670
Vasa
Vasu
Vasati1 [vas1 ; to Idg. *es, cp. Gr. to clothe, Sk. vasman cover, Goth. wasjan clothe, wasti dress; Lat. vestis=E.
vest etc.; Dhtp 628 (& Dhtm 870): acchdane] to clothe. pp.
vuttha1 . Caus. vseti: see ni. See also vsana1 & vsana1 .
Vasati2 [vas2 ; Idg. *es to stay, abide; cp. Av. varhaiti; Lat.
Vesta the goddess of the hearth=Gr. hearth; Goth. wisan
to stay, remain, be (=Ohg. wesan, E. was, were); Oicel. vist to
stay, Oir. foss rest. Dhtm 470: kanti nivsesu] to live,
dwell, stay, abide; to spend time (esp. with vassa the rainy
season); trs. to keep, observe, live, practise Sn 469 sq., 1088
(=savasati vasati parivasati Nd2 558); PvA 3, 12, 78 (imper.
vasatha). uposatha vasa (ppr.) keeping the Sunday J
vi.232; brahmacariya v. to live a chaste life M i.515 (cp.
same expression Ait. Br. 5, 13; at. Br. 12, 2, 2; 13, 8. 22).
ppr. vasanto PvA 75, 76; ppr. med. vasamna J i.21, 236,
291; PvA 117; Pot. vaseyya M i.515; Pv ii.97 (ghare), & vase
Miln 372. aor. vasi Sn 977; J iv.317 (piya savsa);
PvA 111; Mhvs 1, 13 (vas vasi); 5, 229. ger. vasitv J
i.278; iv.317; PvA 13; grd. vasitabba Sn 678; PvA 42; &
vatthabba Mhvs 3, 12; inf. vatthu Th 2, 414, & vasitu
PvA 12, 112. Fut. vasissati [=Sk. vasiyati] Mhvs 14, 26;
PvA 12; and (older) vacchati [=Sk. vatsyati] Vin i.60; Th 2,
294; J iv.217; 1st sg. vacchmi J v.467 (na te v. santike);
vi.523, 524, & vaccha Th 2, 414. Pass. vussati [Sk.
uyate] M i.147 (brahmacariya v.). pp. vasita, vusita
[=vi+uita], vuttha [perhaps=vi+ua], q. v. Caus. I. vseti
to cause to live, stay or dwell; to make live; to preserve (opp.
nseti at S iv.248) Vin iii.140; S iv.248; Miln 211; PvA 160
(inf. vsetu); see also vseti2 . Caus. II. vaspeti (cp. adhivspeti) to make live or spend, to cause to dwell, to detain
J i.290; ii.27; PvA 20 (vassa). pp. vsita. See also
adhi, , ni, pari.
Vasati3 (f.) [fr. vas2 , cp. Vedic vasati] a dwelling, abode, residence J vi.292 (rja=rja paricariy C.); Miln 372 (rjavasati vase); Dvs iv.27 (saka).
Vasana1 (nt.) [fr. vasati1 ] clothing, clothes Sn 971; Th 2, 374;
D iii.118 (odta), 124 (id.); Nd1 495 (the six cvarni); PvA
49. vasanni clothing Mhvs 22, 30. vasana () as
adj. "clothed," e. g. odta wearing white robes Vin i.187;
ksya clad in yellow robes Mhvs 18, 10; pilotika in rags J
iv.380; suci in bright garments Sn 679; Pv i.108 .
Vasu (nt.) [Vedic vasu good, cp. Gr. good, Oir. fu worthy,
Goth. iusiza better] wealth; only in cpds. deva the god of
671
Vasu
Vahati
Vahati
Vc
Vahana (adj. nt.) [fr. vah] 1. carrying VvA 316; DhA iii.472
(dhura). 2. a current J iv.260.
Vahanaka (adj.) () [vahana+ka] carrying, bearing J ii.97
(dhura).
V (indecl.) [Ved. v, Av. v, Gr. , Lat. ve] part. of disjunction: "or"; always enclitic Kh viii. (itthiy purisassa v;
mtari pitari v pi). Usually repeated v-v (is it so ) or,
either or, e. g. Sn 1024 (Brahm v Indo v pi); Dh 1
(bhsati v karoti v); PvA 74 (putto v dht v natthi?).
with negation in second place: whether or not, or not, e.
g. hoti v no v is there or is there not D i.61; ta patthehi
v m v VvA 226. Combined with other emphatic particles: (na) v pana not even Pv ii.69 (manussena amanussena
v pana); v pi or even Sn 382 (ye v pi ca); Pv ii.614 (isayo
v pi ye sant etc.); iti v Nd2 420; atha v Dh 83 (sukhena
atha v dukhena); uda... v Sn 232 (kyena vc uda cetas
v). In verse v is sometimes shortened to va, e. g. devo
va Brahm v Sn 1024: see va4 .
Vcan (f.) [fr. vceti] recitation, reading; magga way of recitation, help for reading, division of text (into chapters or paragraphs) Tikp 239; KhA 12, 14, 24.
Vcapeyya (1) amiable speech (vc+peyya=piya) J vi.575
(=piyavacana C.). (2) spelling for vjapeyya (q. v.).
Vcasika (adj.) [fr. vc] connected with speech, verbal (contrasted with kyika & cetasika) Vin iv.2; Pug 21; Miln 91;
Vism 18; DhsA 324. As nt. noun at Miln 352 in meaning
"behaviour in speech."
Vc (f.) [vac, vakti & vivakti; cp. vaca (P. vaco); Vedic vk
(vc) voice, word, vkya; Av. vacah & vaxs word; Gr.
word, voice, Lat. vox=voice, voco to call; Ohg. gi
wahan to mention etc. The P. form vc is a remodelling of
the nom. vc after the oblique cases, thus transforming it from
the cons. decl. to a vowel () decl. Of the old inflexion we
only find the instr. vc Sn 130, 232. The compn forms are
both vc and vac] word, saying, speech; also as adj. ()
vaca speaking, of such a speech (e. g. duha Pv i.32 , so to be
read for dukkha). D iii.69 sq., 96 sq., 171 sq.; S iv.132 (in
triad kyena vcya manas: see kya iii., and mano ii.3); Sn
232 (kyena vc uda cetas v), 397, 451 sq., 660, 973, 1061
(=vacana Nd2 560); Nd1 504; DhsA 324 (vuccat ti vc).
In sequence vc gir byappatha vacbheda vcasik viatti,
as a defn of speech Vin iv.2, expld at DhsA 324: see byappatha.
vca bhindati: (1) to modify the speech or expression
SnA 216 (cp. vkya bheda DhsA 324). (2) to use a
word, so say something Vin i.157; M i.207 (Neumann, "das
Schweigen brechen"); Miln 231 (i. e. to break silence? So
Rh. D. trsln ). Cp. the English expression "to break the news."
vc is mostly applied with some moral characterization, as
the foll., frequently found: atthasahit A iii.244; kalya
A iii.195, 261; iv.296; v.155; pisu & pharus A i.128, 174,
268 sq.; iii.433; iv.247 sq.; DA i.74, 75; Nd1 220, and passim;
rakkhita S iv.112; vikia S i.61, 204; A i.70; iii.199, 391
sq.; sacca A ii.141, 228; sah A ii.141, 228; iii.244; iv.172;
Vc
Vta
see also vac sucarita; samm Vbh 105, 106, 235; VbhA
119; see also magga; hn etc. S ii.54.
-nurakkhin guarding one's speech Dh 281 (cp. vcya
savara DhA iv.86). -bhilpa "speechjabbering," forbidden talk Sn 49 (i. e. the 32 tiracchnakath Nd2 561). -uggata
with well intoned speech Miln 10. -yata restrained in speech
Sn 850 (=yatta gutta rakkhita Nd1 221). -vikkhepa confusion
of speech, equivocation D i.24 sq.; DA i.115.
Vcetar [n. ag. fr. vceti] one who teaches or instructs D i.123.
Vceti [Caus. of vac] to make speak or recite, to teach: see vatti.
pp. vcita.
Vja [cp. Vedic vja strength; Idg. *eĝ, cp. vjeti, vajra
(P. vajira); Lat. vegeo to be alert ["vegetation"], vigeo to be
strong ["vigour"]; Av. vara; Oicel. wakr=Ags. wacor=Ger.
wacker; E. wake, etc.] 1. strength, a strength giving drink,
Soma SnA 322. 2. the feather of an arrow J iv.260; v.130.
Vjapeyya [cp. Vedic vjapeya; see Macdonell, Vedic Mythology
pp. 131 sq., 155, quoting Weber, Vjapeya; Banerjea, Public
Administration etc. 92] the vjapeya sacrifice, a soma offering. Spelling often vca (mostly as v. l.); see S i.76; A ii.42;
iv.151; Sn 303; It 21; Miln 219; J iii.518. Cp. peyya2 .
Vjita (adj.) [pp. of vjeti: see vja] feathered (of an arrow) M
i.429.
Vjin (adj. n.) [fr. vja] possessed of strength or swiftness;
a horse, stallion Dvs i.31; v.35 (sita), 53 (sasi paara);
VvA 278.
Va [cp. Class. Sk. va; on etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.
vallus] enclosure, enclosed place Vin ii.154. See also yaa.
Vaka () [fr. va] enclosure, circle, ring; in gala the throat
circle, i. e. the bottom of the throat Vism 258; DhsA 316;
DhA i.394; cala circle of Calas J vi.156; brhmaa
of Brahmins DhA iv.177.
Vija [fr. vaij (vaik): see vaijj; lit. son of a merchant; Vedic
vija] a merchant, trader Vin iii.6 (assa); Sn 614, 651, 1014;
J v.156 (so read for va); Pv i.106 ; Dvs i.58; KhA 224; SnA
251; PvA 47, 48, 100, 191, 215, 271. On similes with v. see
J.P.T.S. 1907, 134.
Vijaka=vij S ii.215 (sci); J iii.540.
Vijj (f.) [fr. vija, cp. vaijj] trade, trading Vin iv.6 (as one
of the exalted professions); PvA 111, 201, 273, 277.
Vta [Vedic vta, of v; cp. Sk. vti & vyati to blow, vyu
wind; Lat. ventus, Goth. winds=wind; Ohg. wjan to blow,
Oir. feth air; Gr. to blow, wind, Lith. udra storm
etc.] wind. There exists a common distinction of winds into
2 groups: "internal" and "external" winds, or the ajjhattik
vyo dhtu (wind category), and the bhir. They are discussed at Vbh 84, quoted at MA 30, 31, and expld in detail at
VbhA 70 sq.; Vism 350. The bhir also at Nd2 562, and in
poetical form at S iv.218. The internal winds (see below 2)
comprise the foll.: uddhangam vt, adhogam, kucchisay,
kohsasay, angam ang' nusrino, satthak, khurak,
uppalak, assso, passso, i. e. all kinds of winds (air) or
drawing pains (rheumatic?) in the body, from hiccup, stitch
and stomach ache up to breathing. Their complement are
the external winds (see below 1), viz. puratthim vt, pac674
Vta
Vma
sectarian, schismatic Vin iii.175 (anu vattaka+); vdakasammuti doctrinal (sectarian) statement A iv. 347.
Vtika (adj.) [fr. vta 2, cp. *Sk. vtakin Halyudha ii.451] connected with the winds (humours) of the body, having bad circulation, suffering from internal trouble, rheumatic (?) Miln
135, 298.
Vtingaa [cp. *Sk. vtingaa] the egg plant, Solanum melongena J v.131; DhsA 320.
Vdin (adj.) () [fr. vda] speaking (of), saying, asserting, talking; professing, holding a view or doctrine; arguing. Abs. only
at A ii.138 (cattro vd four kinds of disputants); Sn 382 (ye
v pi c'ae vdino professing their view). Otherwise , e.
g. in agga "teacher of things supreme" Th 1, 1142; uccheda
professing the doctrine of annihilation Nett 111 (see uccheda);
kla, bhta attha etc. speaking in time, the truth & good
etc. D i.4, 165; A i.202; V. 205, 265, 328; cala uttering
the word C. Mhvs 5, 60; tath speaking thus, consistent or
true speaker D iii.135; Sn 430; dhamma professing the true
doctrine S iii.138; in combn with vinaya vdin as much as
"orthodox" Vin iii.175; mah a great doctrinaire or scholar
SnA 540; yatha cp. tath ; sacca speaking the truth A
ii.212; the Buddha so called Th ii.252 f.; vaa singing
the praises (of) Vin ii.197.
Vda [fr. vad: see vadati; Vedic vda (not in RV!), in meaning of "theory, disputation" only in Class. Sk. The relation of roots vac: vad is like E. speak: say; but vda as
t. t. has developed quite distinctly the specified meaning of
an emphatic or formulated speech= assertion or doctrine] 1.
speaking, speech, talk, nearly always , e. g. iti hearsay,
general talk M. i.133; S v.73; A ii.26; kumraka child
talk or childish talk, i. e. in the manner of talking to a child S
ii.218 sq.; cori deceitful talk PvA 89 (so read with v. l. for T.
bheri); dhammika righteous speech A v.230; mus telling
lies, false speech A i.129; ii.141; iv.401; PvA 15. See under
mus. adj. () speaking up for, proclaiming, advertising D i.174 (sla, pa etc.); Sn 913 (nivissa dogmatist);
A i.287 (kamma, kiriya, viriya). vda bhindati to refute a speech, to make a view discrepant (cp. bhinna vda
under 4!) SnA 45 (Mravda bh.). 2. what is said, reputation, attribute, characteristic Sn 859 (but SnA 550=nind
vacana); J i.2 (jti genealogy, cp. D i.137). See also cpd.
patha. 3. discussion, disputation, argument, controversy,
dispute Sn 390, 827 (also as adj. hna); DhA iii.390= Vin
iv.1; Mhvs 4, 42 (sutv ubhinna vda). 4. doctrine,
theory put forth, creed, belief, school, sect SnA 539 sq.; in
cpds.: cariya traditional teaching Miln 148; also "heterodoxy" Mhbv 96, cp. Dpvs v.30; uccheda annihilistic doctrine Nd1 282: see under uccheda; thera the tradition of the
Theras, i. e. the orthodox doctrine or word of Gotama Buddha Mhvs 5, 2; 33, 97 sq.; Dpvs v.10, 14 (theravdo aggavdo
ti vuccati), 51 (17 heretical sects, one orthodox, altogether
18 schools); dhuta (adj.) expounding punctiliousness Vism
81 (=ae dhutangena ovadati anussati). See under dhuta;
bhinna heretical sect (lit. discrepant talk or view) Dpvs v.39,
51 (opp. abhinnaka vda); sassata an eternalist Ps i.155.
-nuvda the trsln of this phrase (used as adj.) at S iii.6
(see K.S. iii.7) is "one who is of his way of thinking." all kinds
of sectarian doctrines or doctrinal theses D i.161; iii.115; S
iii.6; iv.51, 340, 381; v.7; A iii.4; Nett 52. -kma desirous of
disputation Sn 825. -khitta upset in disputation, thrown out
of his belief Vin iv.1=DhA iii.390. -patha "way of speech,"
i. e. signs of recognition, attribute, definition Sn 1076 (expld
dogmatically at Nd2 563); A ii.9. -sattha the science of disputation, true doctrine SnA 540. -sla having the habit of, or
used, to disputes Sn 381.
Vma
Vreti
the turn of the seasons), 150; vi.294; Vism 431 (santati interval); DA i.36; DhA i.47 (dve vre twice); DhsA 215; VvA
47 (tatiyavra for the 3rd & last time); PvA 109, 135. 2.
In pada "track occasion," i. e. foot track, walk(ing),
step J i.62, 213 (vrena) by walking (here spelt pda), 506
(pdavre pdavre at every step). 3. In udaka v. stands
for vraka (i. e. bucket), the phrase udakavra gacchati
means "to go for water," to fetch water (in a bucket) J iv.492;
DhA i.49. Dutoit (J. trsln iv.594) trsls "Wunsch nach Wasser."
4. bha "turn for recitation," i. e. a portion for recital, a
chapter SnA 194. See bha.
Vraka [cp. Sk. vra & vraka] a pot, jar Vin ii.122 (three
kinds: loha, dru and cammakhaa); J i.349; ii.70; iii.52
(dadhi); Miln 260; DhsA 377 (phnita).
Vyati2 [Vedic vti & vyati. See etym. under vta] 1. to blow
(only as vyati) Vin i.48; D ii.107 (mahvt vyanti); S iv.218
(vt kse v.); J i.18; vi.530; Mhvs 12, 12. aor. vyi S
iv.290; J i.51. Cp. abhi, upa, pa. 2. to breathe forth, to
emit an odour, to smell Pv i.61 ; PvA 14; as vti (2nd sg. vsi)
at J ii.11 (=vyasi C.). pp. vta only as noun "wind" (q.
v.).
Vraa1 (nt.) [fr. v to obstruct] warding off, obstruction, resistance VbhA 194, 195 (=nivraa). tapa sunshade Dvs
i.28; v.35.
Vyasa [cp. Vedic vyasa a large bird, Epic Sk. vyasa crow] a
crow D i.9 (vijj: see DA i.93); S i.124; Sn 447, 675; J i.500;
ii.440; Miln 373; DhA iii.206; VvA 27.
Vri (nt.) [Vedic vri, cp. Av. vr rain, vairi sea; Lat.
rna=urine; Ags. waer sea; Oicel. r spray, etc.] water D
ii.266; M iii.300; A iii.26 (in lotus simile); Th 1, 1273; Sn
353, 591, 625, 811; Vv 7910 ; J iv.19; Nd1 135, 203 (=udaka);
Miln 121; PvA 77.
-gocara living or life (lit. feeding) in water Sn 605. -ja
"water born," i. e. (1) a lotus Sn 845, cp. Nd1 203; (2) a
fish Dh 34 (=maccha DhA i.289); J v.464 (=nanda maccha C.), 507. -da "water giver," i. e. cloud Dvs iii.40.
-dhara water holder, water jug J v.4. -bindu a drop of water Sn 392. -vha "watercarrier," i. e. cloud A ii.56; iii.53; S
v.400; J vi.26, 543, 569; Kh vii.8. vrita, yuta, dhuta,
phua (Jain practice) D i.57; M i.377.
Vreti
Vsi
iii.243, 445; VvA 31, 177; Sdhp 244. See also vlika.
Va1 [cp. late Sk. vya, see Geiger, P.Gr. 546 ] 1. a snake
Vism 312 (so read for vaa). 2. a beast of prey A iii.102
(amanussa); J i.295; iii.345 (macch predaceous fishes); Miln
23 (vana forest of wild beasts).
-miga a beast of prey, predaceous animal, like tiger, leopard, etc. J vi.569; DhA i.171 (hna); iii.348 (rocan); Vism
180, 239.
Vla1 [Vedic vla; connected with Lat. adlre (ad+ lre) to flatter (lit. wag the tail, like a dog), cp. E. adulation; Lith. vala
horse hair] 1. the hair of the tail, horse hair, tail Vin ii.195=J
v.335 (pahaha kaavla with bristling ears & tail, of an
elephant); J v.274 (so read for phla, cp. p. 268, v. 113);
PvA 285 (koi, so read for bla); Sdhp 139. pallankassa
vle bhinditv destroying the hair ( stuffing) of a couch Vin
ii.170=DA i.88; cp. Vin iv.299: pallanko harimehi vlehi
kato. On v. in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 136. 2. a hair
sieve [also Vedic] M i.229.
-agga the tip of a hair A iii.403; Miln 250 (vedha hitting
the tip of a hair, of an archer); DA i.66. -aupaka a cert.
material, head dress (?) A i.209 (so read for vlanduka); Vism
142; DhsA 115 (reads lepaka). kambala a blanket made
of horse tails D i.167; A i.240, 296; Pug 55. -koi the tip
of the hair PvA 285. -rajju a cord made of hair S ii.238; A
iv.129; J ii.161. -vjan a fan made of a Yak's tail, a chowrie
D i.7. -vedhin (an archer) who can hit a hair J i.58 (akkhaa
vedhin+); Vism 150; Mhvs 23, 86 (sadda vedhin vijju vedhin+). The abstr. vedh hitting a hair, at Vism
150. fig. an acute arguer, a hair splitter; in standing
phrase pait nipu kata-para-ppavd vlavedhi-rp
at D i.26; M i.176; ii.122; see expln at DA i.117.
Vlatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. vla2 ] trouble, difficulty Vin ii.86 (in same
context as vla2 ); A i.54.
Vlik (f.) [a by form of vluk] sand (often sprinkled in connection with festivities to make the place look neat) A i.253;
J i.210; iii.52, 407; vi.64; Vism 420; DhA i.3, 111; VvA 160,
305; PvA 189. paritta sand (on the head) as an amulet J
i.396, 399. In cpds. usually vlika. Cp. vluk.
-puja a heap of sand J vi.560. -pulina sand bed or bank
J ii.366; iii.389. -vassa a shower of sand SnA 224.
Vlin (adj.) [fr. vla1 ] having a hairy tail Vv 647 , cp. VvA 277.
Vlukantra at VvA 332 probably for vluka-kantra, i. e.
sandy desert. See vau.
Vsara [cp. Vedic vsara matutinal, vasa early] day (opp. night),
a day Dvs i.55; v.66.
Vluk (f.) [cp. Vedic & Epic Sk. vluk] sand. In comp usually vluka. S iv.376; Vv 391 ; 441 ; Ap. 23; Nd2 p. 72
(Gangya v.); J ii.258; iv.16; Pv ii.121 ; Mhvs 23, 86; DhA
Vsi (f.) [cp. Sk. v] 1. a sharp knife, axe, hatchet, adze (often combd with pharasu) J i.32, 199; ii.274; iii.281; iv.344;
677
Vsi
Vi
Vsitaka (adj.) [fr. vsita] scented, perfumed Vin iv.341 (vsitakena pikena nhyeyya: should bathe with perfumed soap).
f. vsitik (scil. mattik) scented clay Vin ii.280 (id.).
Vsin1 (adj.) () [fr. vas1 ] clothed in, clad Sn 456 (san-ghi),
487 (ksya); Pv iii.16 (shunda); J iii.22 (nantaka); iv.380
(rumma); f. vsin Vin iii.139 (chanda, paa etc.)= VvA 73.
Vsin2 (adj.) () [fr. vas2 ] liking, dwelling (in) Sn 682 (Mern
muddha), 754 (ruppa); PvA 1 (Mahvihra), 22 (Anga
Magadha), 47 (Svatthi), 73 (Brasi)
Vseti1 : Caus. of vasati2 (q. v.).
Vseti2 [Denom. fr. vsa perfume] to perfume, to clean or preserve by means of perfumes, to disinfect (?) Vin i.211 (here
in the sense of "preserve, cure," probably as vseti of vasati2 );
ii.120; J iv.52 (ahni, for the sake of preservation); v.33 (saso
avsesi sake sarre, expld as "sake sarre attano sarra dtu
avsesi vspes ti attho, sarra c' assa bhakkh' atthya adsi."
In this passage vseti is by Kern, Toev. s. v. taken as Caus.
of vas to eat, thus "he made eat, feasted, entertained by or on
his own body"), 321 (kusumehi vsetv: perfume). See also
vasati2 (Caus.). pp. vsita. Caus. II. vspeti J v.33.
Vha (adj. n.) [fr. vah] 1. carrying, leading; a leader, as in
sattha a caravan leader, merchant J i.271; Vv 847 ; 8420 ; VvA
337. 2. a cart, vehicle; also cartload Sn p. 126 (tila=tila
sakaa SnA 476); J iv.236 (sahisahassni 60,000 cartloads);
Miln 80 (sata).
Vhaka [fr. vheti] that which carries (or causes to carry) away, i.
e. a current, torrent, flow; only in combn with udaka a flood
of water A i.178; Vin i.32; Miln 176.
Vhana [fr. vheti] 1. (adj.) carrying, pulling, drawing Vin ii.122
(udaka rajju); J i.136 (kaha gathering fire wood);
PvA 127 (ratha yuga). 2. (nt.) conveyance, beast
of burden, monture Vin i.277 (gra stable, garage); Sn 442
(Mra sa with his elephant); Pv ii.926 ; DhA i.192 (hatthi,
elephant mount; cp. p. 196, where five. vhanni, belonging to King Pajjota, are enumd , viz. kaeru, dsa, dve ass,
hatthi). bala army & elephants, i. e. army in general,
forces J i.262.
Vhanaka=vha 1; VvA 337.
Vhas (indecl.) [an instr. of vha, formed after the manner of
balas, thmas, used adverbially] owing to, by dint of, on account of, through Vin iv.158; Th 1, 218, 1127; Miln 379; VvA
100.
678
Vi
Vikalaka
3. denoting the reverse of the simple verb, or loss, difference, opposite, reverse, as expressed by un or dis , e. g.
asana mis fortune, kaika unclean, kappa change round,
kra per turbation, dis tortion, kla wrong time, tatha
un truth, dhma smoke less, patti corruption, parta
dubious, ppaipanna on the wrong track, bhava non existence (or as 4 "more" bhava, i. e. wealth), mati doubt, mnana dis respect, yoga separation, raja fault less, rata
abs taining, rpa un sightly, vaa unveiled, vaeti
defame, vda dis pute, sama uneven, ssandati overflow,
ssarita for gotten, siha distinguished, sesa difference,
distinction. 4. in intensifying sense (developed fr. 1 &
2), mostly with terms expressing per se one or the other of
shades of meanings given under 1 3; to be trsld by "away,"
out, all over, "up," or similarly (completely), e. g. kula
quite confused, katta cut up, kopeti shake up, garahati
scold intensely, chindati cut off, jita conquered altogether,
jjotita resplendent, tarati come quite through, niyoga close
connection, nivatteti turn off completely, parima intense
change, ppamutta quite released, ppasanna quite purified,
pphalita crumpled up, bandhana (close) fetter, ramati cease
altogether, sahati have sufficient strength, sukkha dried up,
suddha very bright, ssamati rest fully (Ger. aus ruhen),
haati to get slain.
Vikatthin (adj.) [fr. vi+katth] boasting; only neg. a not boasting, modest A v.157; Sn 850; Miln 414.
Vikanta=vikatta; cut open, cut into pieces J ii.420.
Vikantati [vi+kantati2 ] to cut J v.368 (=chindati C.). - pp. vikatta
& vikanta.
Vikantana (nt.) [fr. vikantati] knife M i.244. Cp. vikattana.
Vikappa [vi+kappa] 1. thinking over, considering, thought, intention Nd 97, 351. 2. doubtfulness, indecision, alternative,
appld to the part. v SnA 202, 266; KhA 166; DA i.51; PvA
18. attha consideration or application of meaning, exposition, statement, sentence J iii.521; SnA 433, 591. Cp.
nibbikappa.
Vikappana (nt.) & (f.) [fr. vikappeti] 1. assignment, apportioning Vin iv.60=123=283. At Vin iv.122 two ways of assigning a gift are distinguished: sammukhvikappan & parammukh. All these passages refer to the cvara. 2. alternative, indecision, indefiniteness (=vikappa), as t. t. g. applied
to part. ca and v, e. g. SnA 179 ("ca"); KhA 166 ("v").
Vikappita [pp. of vikappeti] prepared, put in order, arranged,
made; in combn su well prepared, beautifully set Sn 7; VvA
188 (manohara+). Bdhgh. at SnA 21 interprets kappita as
chinna "cut," saying it has that meaning from "kappita kesa
massu" (with trimmed hair & beard), which he interprets ad
sensum, but not etymologically correctly. Cp. vikappeti 5.
Vikappin (adj.) [fr. vikappa] having intentions upon (), designing A iii.136 (an issara intentioning unruliness).
Vikappiya (adj.) [grd. of vikappeti] to be designed or intended
Sdhp 358.
Vikappeti [vi+kappeti] 1. to distinguish, design, intend, to have
intentions or preferences, to fix one's mind on (loc. or acc.)
Sn 793=802 (=vikappa pajjati Nd1 97), 918 (id. Nd1 351).
2. to detail, describe, state KhA 166; SnA 43. 3. to
assign, apportion, give Vin i.289 (cvara); iv.121 (id.).
4. to arrange, put on, get ready Vin i.297. 5. to change,
alter, shape, form J v.4 (ambapakka satthena v.; C. not quite
correctly =vicchindati). pp. vikappita.
Vikampin (adj.) [fr. vikampati] shaking; only neg. a not shaking, steadfast, steady, settled Sn 952; Vv 5022 .
Vikattana (nt.) [fr. vi+kantati2 ] cutter, knife Vin iii.89 (tiha go)
M i.449; J vi.441.
Vikatthati [vi+katthati] to boast, show off S ii.229; J i.454 (=vacana vacana vadati C.). pp. vikatthita.
679
Vikalaka
Vikubbana
Vikasati2 [vi+k, cp. oksa] to shine; Caus. vikseti to illuminate Davs v.47 (mukh' ambuja vanni viksayanto).
Vikasita [pp. of vikasati1 ] burst asunder, blossoming, opened
(wide), expanded, usually appld to flowers J iii.320 (=phlita
C.); iv.407; VvA 40, 206 (of eyes); SnA i 39; DA i.40.
Vikra [fr. vi+k] 1. change, alteration, in mah great change
Vism 366, 367 (of two kinds: anupdia & updia, or primary & secondary, i. e. the first caused by kappa vuhna,
the second by dhtu kkhobha); KhA 107 (vaa).
2. distortion, reversion, contortion, in var. connections, as
kucchi stomach ache Vin i.301; bhamuka frowning DhA
iv.90; raukha grimace, contortion of the face, J ii.448; PvA
123; hattha hand figuring, signs with the hand, gesture Vin i.157 (+hattha vilanghaka)=M i.207 (reads vilangaka); Vin v.163 (with other simila gestures); J iv.491; v.287;
vi.400, 489. Kern. Toev. s. v. vikra is hardly correct
in translating hattha-vikrena at Vin i.157 by "eigenhandig,"
i. e. with his own hand. It has to be combd with hattha
vilanghakena. 3. perturbation, disturbance, inconvenience, deformity Vin i.271, 272 ( sallakkheti observe the
uneasiness); Miln 224 (tvataka v. temporary inconvenience),
254 (vipphra disturbing influence); SnA 189 (bhta natural
blemish). 4. constitution, property, quality (cp. Cpd. 1572 ,
1681 ) Vism 449 (rpa material quality); VvA 10 (so correct
under maya in P.D. vol. iii. p. 147). 5. deception, fraud
PvA 211 (=nikati). Cp. nibbikra.
Viksika [fr. vi+k: see kasati] a linen bandage (Kern: "pluksel") Vin i.206 (for wound dressing). May be a dern fr.
ksika, i. e. Benares cloth, the vi denoting as much as "a
kind of."
Viksin (adj.) () [fr. vi+k: see vikasati2 ] illumining, delighting Mhvs 18, 68.
Vikseti see vikasati.
Vikia [pp. of vikirati] scattered about, strewn all over, loose
Vin i.209 (undurehi okia; overrun); J v.82.
-kesa with dishevelled hair J i.47; Vism 415. -vca (adj.)
of loose talk S i.61 (=asaata vacana K.S. i.320); Pug 35
(same expln PugA 217): J v.77 (=patthaavacana C.).
Vikubbana (nt.) & (f.) [fr. vikubbati] miraculous transformation, change; assuming a diff. form by supernatural power;
miracle Th 1, 1183; Ps ii.174, 210; Dpvs viii.6 (esu kovida);
680
Vikubbana
Vikkhittaka
Mhvs 19, 19; Miln 343; Vism 309, 316 sq. More specific as
iddhi-vikubbana (or ), i. e. by psychic powers, e. g. D
ii.213; Vism 373 sq.; or vikubban iddhi Vism 378, 406; VvA
58; DhsA 91 (the var. forms of iddhi). Cp. Kvu trsl. 50; Cpd.
61. The BSk. form is represented by the pp. of vikubbati,
i. e. vikurvita, e. g. Av i.258; Divy 269 etc.
Vikkhambhika (adj.) [fr. vikkhambheti] leading to arrest (of passions), conducive to discarding (the blemishes of character)
Vism 114.
Vikkhambhita [pp. of vikkhambheti] arrested, stopped, paralysed, destroyed Ps ii.179; Tikp 155, 320 sq.; Dukp 10.
Vikkhambheti [vi+khambheti] (trs.) to "unprop," unsettle, discard; to destroy, extirpate, paralyse (cp. khambha 2 and
chambheti), give up, reject Sn 969 (=abhibhavati etc. Nd1
492); Vism 268; J i.303 (jhnabalena kilese v.); Miln 34 (nvarae); DhA iv.119 (pti vikkhambhetv: here in meaning
"set up, establish"? Or to produce such pti as to be called
phara pti, thus vikkhambheti=pharati 2? Or as Denom.
fr. vikkhambha "diameter"=to establish etc.?); VvA 156 (read
etv.) pp. vikkhambhita.
681
Vikkhittaka
Vicakka
Viggaha [fr. vi+gah: see gahati 3] 1. dispute, quarrel J i.208 (takna aamaa viggaho); Miln 90; often combd with
kalaha, e. g. Vin ii.88; A iv.401; Nd1 302; Miln 383. 2.
taking up form (lit. seizing on), "incorporation," form, body D
ii.210=226 (sovao viggaho mnusa viggaha atirocati);
Vin i.97 (manussa); ii.286 (id.); iv.215 (tiracchnagata
manussa), 269 (id.); J v.398=405 (=sarra C); vi.188 (rucira);
Dvs i.42 (uju somma). 3. (t.t.g.) resolution of words
into their elements, analysis, separation of words Miln 381;
VvA 226 (pada); SnA 168; ThA 202 (pada).
Vikkhepika (adj.) [fr. vikkhepa], in phrase amar: see under amar; another suggestion as to explanation may be:
khipa=eel basket, thus vikhep ika one who upsets the
eel basket, i. e. causes confusion.
Vigghika (adj.) [fr. viggaha] of the nature of dispute or quarrel; only in cpd. kath quarrelsome speech, dispute D i.8; S
v.419; Sn 930; DA i.91.
Vigama () [fr. vi+gam] going away, disappearance, departing, departure Dvs v.68 (sabb' sava); DhsA 166; Sdhp 388
(jighacch), 503 (sandeha).
Vicakka (adj.)
682
Vicakka
Vicchandanika
Vicaraa (adj. nt.) [fr. vicarati] going about, circulating, moving, travelling J v.484 (bhaa travelling merchandise).
Vicarati [vi+carati] to go or move about in (loc.), to walk (a
road=acc.), to wander Sn 444 (rah raha vicarissa, fut.),
696 (dhamma magga); Nd1 201, 263; Pv iii.73 (aor. vicari); DhA i.66; PvA 4, 22, 33, 69, 120, 185 (=hiati); Sdhp
133. In Sn often with loke (in this world), e. g. Sn 466,
501, 845, 846, 864. Caus. vicreti; pp. vicarita, vicrita
& vicia. Cp. anu.
Vicinati (cinti) [vi+cinti] 1. to investigate, examine, discriminate S i.34 (yoniso vicine dhamma); A iv.3 sq. (id.); Sn 658,
933; Ap 42; J vi.373; Nd1 398; Nett 10, 22 (grd. vicetabba),
25 sq.; Miln 298; Dpvs iv.2; DhsA 147; PvA 140; Sdhp 344.
ger. viceyya discriminating; with discrimination D ii.21
(doubled: with careful discrimn ); iii.167 (pekkhitar); Sn 524
sq.; usually in phrase viceyya-dna a gift given with discrimination S i.21; A iv.244; J iv.361; v.395; Pv ii.972 ; DhA iii.221;
Mhvs 5, 35. 2. to look for, to seek, to linger, to choose Pv
iii.64 (aor. vicini=gavesi C.); iv.142 (ger. viceyya=vicinitv
PvA 240); J i.419. See also pacinati.
Vicra [vi+cra] investigation, examination, consideration, deliberation. Defd as "vicaraa vicro, anusacaraan ti vutta hoti" Vism 142 (see in def. under vitakka). Hardly ever
by itself (as at Th 1, 1117 mano), usually in close connection
or direct combn with vitakka (q. v.).
Vicraka (adj.) [fr. vicreti] 1. looking after something; watching J i.364 (ghara). 2. investigating; (n.) a judge Mhvs
35, 18.
Vicra (f.) & a (nt.) [fr. vicreti] 1. investigation, search,
attention Sn 1108, 1109 (f. & nt.); J iii.73 (pa). 2. arranging, planning, looking after; scheme J i.220; ii.404 (yuddha); vi.333 sq.
Vicua [vi+cua] crushed up, only in redupl. iter. formation cua-vicua crushed to bits, piecemeal J i.26; iii.438
etc. See under cua.
Vicchandanika (& ya) (adj.) [vi+chanda+na+ika] fit to disinterest, "disengrossing," in kath sermon to rid of the desire for
683
Vicchandanika
Vijita
the body Vin iii.271 (Sam. Ps. on Pr. iii.3, 1); & sutta the
Suttanta having disillusionment for its subject (another name
given by Bdhgh to the Vijayasutta Sn 193 206) SnA 241 sq.
(ya). Cp. vicchindati.
Vijahati [vi+jahati] to abandon, forsake, leave; to give up, dismiss Pv iii.615 (sarra); VvA 119; Pot. vijaheyya Pv iv.110 ;
fut. vijahissati S ii.220; Pv ii.67 (jvita). ger. vihya
Mhvs 12, 55; & vijahitv Vin iv.269; J i.117; iii.361 (iddh'
nubhvena attabhva). grd. vihtabba A iii.307 sq.;
Miln 371. Pass. vihyati J vi.499 (eko v.=kilamissati C.).
pp. vijahita & vihna.
Vicchika [cp. Vedic vcka: Zimmer, Altind. Leben 98] a scorpion D i.9 (vijj scorpion craft); Vin ii.110; A ii.73; iii.101,
306; iv.320; v.289 sq.; J ii.146; Miln 272, 394; Vism 235; DA
i.93.
Vicchita in phrase balavicchita-krin at Miln 110 is to be read
balav' icchita-krin "a man strong to do what he likes," i. e.
a man of influence.
Vijnana (nt.) [the diaeretic form of Sk. vijna: cp. jnana=a] recognition, knowing, knowledge, discrimination
Vian 452; DhsA 141.
Vijigucchati [vi+j.]
to loathe Sn 41 (amna=aiyamna
haryamna Nd2 566), 253, 958 (ato=aiyato haryato Nd1
466), 963; Nd1 479.
684
Vijita
(3) iddhi, (4) dibba sota, (5) ceto pariyaa, (6) pubbe
nivs' nussatia, (7) cut' papatti a, (8) savna
khaya a. Other terms used are: for the 2nd sampad:
caraa (D. i.100), and for the 3rd : vijj (ibid.). The discussion at D i.100 is represented as contradicting the (brahmaic)
opinion of Ambaha, who thought that "vijj nma tayo Ved,
caraa paca slni" (DA i.267 sq.). In the enumn of 3
vijjs at M i.22 sq. only Nos. 6 8 of the 3rd sampad (said
to have been attained by the Buddha in the 3 night watches)
with the verbs anussarati (No. 6), pajnti (7), abhijnti
(8), each signifying a higher stage of ("saving") knowledge,
yet all called "vijj." Quoted at Vism 202, where all 8 stages
are given as "aha vijj," and caraa with 15 qualities (sla
savara, indriyesu guttadvra etc.). The same 3 vijjs (No.
6, 7, 8) are given at D iii.220, 275, and poetically at A ii.165
as the characteristics of a proper (ariya, Buddhist) monk (or
brhmaa): "ethi thi vijjhi tevijjo hoti brhmao," opposing the threeVeda knowledge of the Brahmins. Tevijja
(adj.) in same meaning at S i.146 (where it refers to Nos. 3,
5, 8 of above enumn ), 192, 194. In brahmanic sense at Sn 594
(=tiveda SnA 463). Both meanings compared & contrasted at
A i.163 (aath brhma brhmaa tevijja papenti,
aath ca pana ariyassa vinaye tevijjo hoti "different in the
Brahmanic and diff. in the Buddhist sense"). Tisso vijj
(without specification, but referring to above 6, 7, 8) further at
Vin ii.183; Sn 656; Ps i.34; ii.56; Pv iv.134 ; Miln 359 (+chaabhi); DhA iv.30 (id.). It is doubtful whether the defn of a
as "tisso vijj" at Vin iii.91 is genuine. On vijj-caraa
see also D iii.97, 98, 237; S i.153, 166; ii.284; v.197; A ii.163;
iv.238; v.327; Sn 163, 289, 442. On vijj in the doctrinal
appln see: D iii.156, 214, 274; S ii.7 sq. (cakkhu, a, pa,
vijj, loka); iii.47; 163; 171; iv.31, 49 sq. A i.83; ii.247; Sn
334 (simply meaning "wisdom," craft, care, but Bdhgh SnA
339 takes it as "savna khaya a"), 1026 (opposed
to avijj); Pug 14, 57; Vbh 324; Nett 76, 191. (c) popular meanings & usage of vijj: science, craft, art, charm,
spell D i.213 (Gandhr nma v., also mentioned at J iv.498 as
practised by physicians), 214 (Maika n. v.); J iii.504 (Cintmai v.); iv.323 (vatthu: see under vatthu), 498 (ghora);
v.458 (anga palmistry); Miln 200; Dh i.259 (bhmicala n. v.
"earthquake" charm), 265 (dhanu agamanya Ambaha
n. v.); KhA 237 (vatthu, khetta, anga); and see the list of
forbidden crafts at D i.9 (anga, vatthu, khetta etc.; cp. Dial.
i.18, 19).
-gata having attained wisdom Sn 730 (opp. avijj; the
playful expln at SnA 505 is "ye arahatta maggavijjya kilese
vijjhitv gat khsava satt"). -caraa ( sampanna)
(endowed with) special craft (wisdom) & virtue: see above, b.
-hna branch of study; there are 18 vijja-hnni or "arts
& sciences," subjects of study, referred to at J i.259. -dhara
a knower of charms, a sorcerer J iii.303, 529; iv.496; v.94;
Miln 153, 200, 267. -bhgiy (dhamm) (states) conducive
to wisdom (6 kinds of sa) A iii.334; cp. D iii.243; S v.395;
A iv.52 sq. -may (iddhi) (potency) accomplished by art or
knowledge (Expos. i.122) Vism 383; see iddhi. -vimutti wisdom (higher knowledge) as salvation S v.28, 335 sq.; Ps ii.243
(in detail).
Vijju & vijjut (f.) [cp. Vedic vidyut; fr. vi+dyut: see juti] light-
685
Via
686
Via
Viupasaha
687
Viupasaha
Vitia
later works one comes to the conclusion that they were once
used to denote one & the same thing: just thought, thinking,
only in an emphatic way (as they are also semantically synonymous), and that one has to take them as one expression,
like jnti passati, without being able to state their difference.
With the advance in the Sangha of intensive study of terminology they became distinguished mutually. Vitakka became the
inception of mind, or attending, and was no longer applied,
as in the Suttas, to thinking in general. The explns of Commentators are mostly of an edifying nature and based more on
popular etymology than on natural psychological grounds.
Viapa [cp. Epic Sk. viapa] the fork of a tree, a branch J i.169,
215, 222; iii.28; vi.177 (nigrodha).
Vitakka [vi+takka] reflection, thought, thinking; "initial application" (Cpd. 282). Defd as "vitakkana vitakko, hanan
ti vutta hoti" at Vism 142 (with simile on p. 143, comparing vitakka with vicra: kumbhakrassa daa ppahrena
cakka bhamayitv, bhjana karontassa uppana hattho
viya vitakko (like the hand holding the wheel tight), ito c' ito
sacaraahattho viya vicro: giving vitakka the characteristic of fixity & steadiness, vicra that of movement & display).
D ii.277 ("pre occupation" trsln : see note Dial. ii.311);
iii.104, 222, 287 (eight Mahpurisa); M i.114 (dvidh kato
v.), 377; S i.39, 126, 186, 203; ii.153; iv.69, 216; A ii.36;
iii.87 (dhamma); iv.229 (Mahpurisa), 353 (upaccheda);
Sn 7, 270 sq., 970, 1109; J i.407 (Buddha, Sangha, Nibbna); Nd1 386, 493, 501 (nine); Nd2 s. v. takka; Ps i.36,
136, 178; Pv iii.58 ; Pug 59, 68; Vbh 86, 104 (rpa, sadda
etc.), 228 (sa), 362 (akusala); Dhs 7, 160, 1268; Tikp 61,
333, 353; Vism 291 (upaccheda); Miln 82, 309; DhsA 142;
DhA iv.68; VbhA 490; PvA 226, 230. kma, vihis,
vypda (sensual, malign, cruel thought): D iii.226; S ii.151
sq.; iii.93; A i.148, 274 sq.; ii.16, 117, 252; iii.390, 428. Opp.
nekkhamma, avypda, avihis A i.275; ii.76; iii.429.
vitakka is often combd with vicra or "initial & sustained
application" Mrs. Rh. D.; Cpd. 282; "reflection & investigation" Rh. D.; to denote the whole of the mental process of
thinking (viz. fixing one's attention and reasoning out, or as
Cpd. 17 expls it "vitakka is the directing of concomitant properties towards the object; vicra is the continued exercise of
the mind on that object." See also above defn at Vism 142).
Both are properties of the first jhna (called sa vitakka sa
vicra) but are discarded in the second jhna (called a).
See e. g. D. i.37; S iv.360 sq.; A iv.300; Vin iii.4; Vism 85;
and formula of jhna. The same of pti & samdhi at Vbh 228,
of pa at Vbh 323. The same combn (vitakka+vicra) at
foll. passages: D iii.219 (of samdhi which is either sa, or
a, or avitakka vicra matta); S iv.193; v.111; A iv.409 sq.,
450; Nett 16; Miln 60, 62; Vism 453. Cp. rpa- (sadda
etc.) vitakka+rpa (sadda etc.) vicra A iv.147; v.360;
Vbh 103. On term (also with vicra) see further: Cpd. 40,
56, 98, 238 sq., 282 (on difference between v. & manasikra);
Expos. i.188n ; Kvu trsln 2381 . Cp. pa, pari.
Note. Looking at the combn vitakka+vicra in earlier and
Vitia
Vidlana
Vitthyitatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. vitthyita, pp. of vitthyati] perplexity, hesitation D i.249.
Vitthreti [fr. vitthra] 1. to spread out A iii.187. 2. to expand, detail give in full Vism 351; SnA 94, 117, 127, 274 and
passim. pp. vitthrita; f.pp. vithretabba.
Vitti (f.) [cp. Sk. vitti, fr. vid] prosperity, happiness, joy, felicity A iii.78; J iv.103; vi.117; Kvu 484; Th 1, 609; Dhs 9 (cp.
DhsA 143); PvA 106.
Vitthambhana (nt.) [fr. vi+thambhati] making firm, strengthening, supporting Vism 351 (cp. DhsA 335).
Vitthambheti [vi+thambheti] to make firm, strengthen DhsA 335.
Vidraa (nt.) [fr. vidreti] splitting, rending Dhtp 247 (in expln
of dar), 381 (do of bhid).
Vitthyati [vi+sty: see under thna] to be embarrassed or confused (lit. to become quite stiff), to be at a loss, to hesitate
Vin i.94=ii.272; aor. vitthsi (vitthyi?) ibid. [the latter taken
as aor. of tras by Geiger, P.Gr. 166]. pp. vitthata2 &
vitthyita.
689
Vidlana
Vidhav
Viddhasana (adj. nt.) [fr. viddhaseti; cp. BSk. vidhvasana Divy 180] shattering, destruction (trs. & intrs.), undoing, making disappear; adj. destroying S iv.83; Miln 351
(kosajja); J i.322; v.267 (adj.); Vism 85 (vikkhepa+); VvA
58, 161 (adj.). Often in phrase (denoting complete destruction): anicc ucchdana parimaddana bhedana viddhasana dhamma, e. g. D i.76; M i.500; A iv.386; J i.146
[cp. Divy 180: atanapatana vikiraa vidhvasana
dharmat; see also under vikiraa].
Viddhasta [pp. of viddhasati] fallen to pieces, broken, destroyed M i.227; A ii.50; Sn 542; J i.203; v.69, 401; Vv 6314
(=vinaha VvA 265).
Videsa [vi+desa; cp. dis at Vin i.50] foreign country Miln 326;
VvA 338.
Vidomanass (f.) [vi+domanassa] absence of dejection Vism
504=VbhA 105.
Viddha2 (adj.) [cp. *Sk. vdhra clear sky] clear; only in phrase
viddha vigata-valhaka deva a clear sky without a cloud Vin
i.3; M i.317=S i.65=iii.156=v.44=It 20.
Viddhasa [fr.
(krin).
Vidhamana (nt.) [fr. vidhamati] destroying, scattering, dispersing Miln 244 (Maccu sena).
690
Vidhav
Vinaya
Vidhav (f.) [Vedic vidhav widow, vidhu lonely, vidhura separaed, Av. vidav=Goth. widuw=Ohg. wituwa (Ger.
Witwe=E. widow); Gr. unmarried; Lat. vidua widow,
etc., in all Idg. languages] a widow S i.170; A iii.128; J vi.33;
Miln 288; Vism 17; PvA 65, 161; VbhA 339.
Vidh (f.) [cp. Sk. vidh] 1. mode, manner, sort, kind; proportion, form, variety D iii.103 (desana); Th 2, 395 (cakkhu
"shape of an eye" trsln ); VbhA 496 (in expln of katha
vidha: "kra sahna vidh nma"); DA i.222 (iddhi), 294 (in expln of tividha yaa: "ettha vidh vuccati hapan" i. e. performance, arrangement), 299 (similarly tisso vidh=ti hapanni; of yaa). Used as
(abl.) adv. vidh in meaning "variously" at Pv ii.952 (C.
expln =vidhtabba, not quite correctly; PvA 135). Perhaps the
phrase vidhsamatikkanta is to be explained in this way,
viz. "excelling in a variety of ways, higher than a variety (of
things)" or perhaps better: "going beyond all distinctions" (i.
e. of personality); free from prejudice [i. e. No. 2] S ii.253;
iii.80, 136, 170; A iv.53. 2. (ethically) in special sense: a
distinctive feature (of a person as diff. from others), a "mode"
of pride or delusion, a "form" of conceit. As such specified as
three kinds of conceit (tisso vidh), viz. "seyyo 'ham asmi,"
"sadiso 'ham asmi," & "hno 'ham asmi" (i. e. I am better than
somebody else, equal to, & worse than somebody else). See
e. g. D iii.216; S i.12; iii.48, 80, 127; v.56, 98; Nd1 195; Vbh
367; Sn 842; VbhA 496 (mno va vidh nma). The adj.
form is vidha: see sep.
Vinandhana (nt.) [fr. vi+nandhati] tying, binding Vin ii.116 (rajju rope for binding).
Vinaya [fr. vi+n, cp. vineti] 1. driving out, abolishing destruction, removal Vin i.3 (asmi mnassa), 235= iii.3 (akusalna dhammna vinayya dhamma desemi); S i.40; Sn
921; A i.91 (kodha, upanha); ii.34 (pipsa); iv.15 (icch);
v.165 (id.); SnA 12; PvA 114 (atthassa mla nikati). Often
in phrase rga, dosa, moha, e. g. S iv.7 sq.; v.137 sq.,
241; A iv.175; Nett 22. 2. rule (in logic), way of saying or judging, sense, terminology (cp. imin nayena) S iv.95
(ariyassa vinaye vuccati loko); A i.163 (ariyassa vinaye tevijjo one called a threefold wise in the nomenclature of the Buddhist); ii.166 (ariyassa v.); SnA 403. 3. norm of conduct,
ethics, morality, good behaviour Sn 916, 974; J iv.241 (=cra
vinaya C.); A ii.112; iii.353 sq. (ariya vinaye saddh
yassa patihit etc. faith established in Buddhist ethics).
4. code of ethics, monastic discipline, rule, rules of morality
or of canon law. In this sense applied to the large collection
of rules which grew up in the monastic life and habits of the
bhikkhus and which form the ecclesiastical introduction to the
"Dhamma," the "doctrine," or theoretical, philosophical part of
the Buddhist Canon. The history & importance of the Vinaya
Piaka will be dealt with under the title "Vinaya" in the Dictionary of Names. Only a few refs. must suffice here to give a
general idea. See also under Dhamma C., and in detail Geiger,
Dhamma pp. 55 58. Often combd with dhamma: dham-
691
Vinaya
Vinicchaya
Vinma (m.) & Vinmana (nt.) [fr. vinmeti] bending Miln 352
(na); VbhA 272 (kya vinman, bending the body for the
purpose of getting up; in expln of vijambhik); Dhtp 208.
Vinmeti [vi+nmeti; Caus. of namati] to bend, twist Miln 107,
118.
Vinyaka [fr. vi+n] 1. a leader, guide, instructor M ii.94; Vv 167
(=veneyya satte vineti VvA 83); ThA 69. 2. a judge J
iii.336.
Vinsa [vi+nsa, of na] destruction, ruin, loss D i.34 (+uccheda
& vibhava), 55; Pv ii.710 ; Vism 427 (so read for vinasa); DA
i.120; PvA 102 (dhana), 133.
Vinsaka (ika) (adj.) [fr. vinsa] causing ruin; only neg. a not
causing destruction A iii.38; iv.266, 270; J v.116.
Vinsana (adj.) [fr. vinsa], only neg. a imperishable Dpvs
iv.16.
Vinseti [Caus. of vinassati] 1. to cause destruction, to destroy,
ruin, spoil Th 1, 1027; Sn 106; Pv ii.78 ; DA i.211; PvA 3
(dhana), 116; Sdhp 59, 314, 546. 2. to drive out of the
country, to expel, banish J iv.200.
Vinigaati [vi+nigaati] to drop down Miln 349.
Viniggata [vi+niggata] coming (out) from J vi.78; DA i.140; DhA
iv.46; Sdhp 23.
Viniggaha [vi+niggaha] checking, restraint Ps i.16; ii.119.
Viniggilati [vi+niggilati] to throw out, to emit KhA 95.
Vinightin (adj.) [fr. vi+nighta] afraid of defeat, anxious about
the outcome (of a disputation), in phrase vinighti-hoti (for
hoti) Sn 826, cp. Nd1 164.
Vinicchaya [vi+nicchaya; cp. Vedic vinicaya] 1. discrimination, distinction, thought, (firm) opinion; thorough knowledge
of () A iii.354 (ppakamma); Sn 327 (dhamma), 838
(=dvsahi dihi vinicchay Nd1 186), 867 ( krute; cp.
Nd1 265); J iii.205 (attha); PvA 1, 112, 210 (ka), 287.
2. decision; (as t. t. in law:) investigation, trial, judgment
(given by the king or his ministers) D ii.58 (with ref. to lbha,
expld as deciding what to do with one's gains)=iii.289=A
iv.400=Vbh 390 (expld at VbhA 512, where vinicchaya is said
to be fourfold, viz. a, tah, dihi, vitakka); J ii.2.
3. court house, hall of judgment J i.176; iii.105; iv.122, 370;
vi.333; Miln 332 (vinaya, i. e. having the Vinaya as the law
court in the City of Righteousness). 4. (as t. t. in logic
& psychology:) (process of) judgment, detailed analysis, deliberation, consideration, ascertainment J v.60 ( vicreti);
VbhA 46 sq. (according to attha, lakkhaa, etc.), 83 sq. (id.);
KhA 23, 75.
-kath analytical discussion, exegesis, interpretation
Vism 16; VbhA 291 (opp. pi vaan). - clever in
deciding or giving judgment J iii.205; v.367 (a). -hna
place of judgment, law court J v.229; DhA iii.141; iv.215.
-dhamma law practice J. v.125; DhA iii.141. -vthi process
of judgment (in logic): see Cpd. 241. -sl the law court(s) J
692
Vinicchaya
Vinvaraa
ination Vism 306 (dhtu), 368 (id.); neg. a absence of discrimination, indistinction DhsA 47; used as adj. in sense of
"not to be distinguished," indistinct at J iii.428 (sadda).
Vinidhya (indecl.) [vi+nidhya, ger. of vinidahati] lit. "misplacing," i. e. asserting or representing wrongly, giving a false
notion of (acc.) Vin ii.205, expld at Vin iv.2; SnA 204.
Vinivijjha (adj.) [grd. of vinivijjhati] to be pierced; in dubbinivijjha difficult to pierce, hard to penetrate J v.46.
Vinivijjhati [vi+ni+vijjhati] to pierce through & through J ii.91;
Miln 339; DhsA 253.
Vinivijjhana (nt.) [fr. vinivijjhati] piercing, perforating, penetrating DhsA 253; ThA 197 (in expln of bahuvidha).
Viniptika (adj.) [fr. vinipta] destined to suffer in purgatory, liable to punishment after death D ii.69; iii.253; M i.73, 390; A
i.123; ii.232 sq.; iv.39, 401; J v.117, 119.
Vinvaraa (adj.) [vi+nvaraa] unobstructed, unbiassed, unprejudiced A ii.71; Sdhp 458. Usually in phrase citta of an un-
Vinvaraa
Vipacita
vijjamna existing J i.214; iii.127; PvA 25, 87, 103; Miln 216
(gen. pl. vijjamnata). Caus. vedeti; Pass. Caus. vediyati; grd. vedanya: see separately, with other derivations.
B. vind to find, possess, enjoy (cp. vitta1 , vitta2 , vitti) Sn 187
(vindate dhana), 658; Th 1, 551; 2, 79 (aor. vindi); J vi.508
(vindate, med.=look for, try to find for oneself); Mhvs 1, 13
(ppr. vinda); DhA iii.128 (ppr. vindanto), 410. PvA 60, 77.
inf. vinditu Miln 122; J 18; grd; vindiya Vism 526 (as
avindiya in expln of avijj). Cp. nibbindati. pp. vitta1
(for which adhigata in lit. meaning).
Vinodaka (adj.) [fr. vinodeti, cp. nudaka & ndaka] driving out,
dispelling, allaying PvA 114 (parissama).
Vinodana (adj. nt.) [fr. vinodeti] dispelling, removal A
iii.387, 390; Sn 1086 (chanda rga,=pahna etc. Nd2 578);
Miln 285; DA i.140 (nidd); DhA i.41 (tama, adj.); PvA 38
(soka).
Vindati [vid, both in meaning "to know" & "to find"; cp. Gr.
I saw, I know=Sk. veda "Veda," "idol";
Vedic vindati to find, vetti to know, vidy knowledge; Goth.
witan to observe & know= Ger. wissen; Goth. weis=E. wise,
etc., for which see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. video] the Vedic
differentiations vetti "to know" and vindati "to find" are both
in Pli, but only in sporadic forms, some of which are archaic
and therefore only found in poetry. Of vid are more frequent
the Pass. vijjati and derivations fr. the Caus. ved. The root
vind occurs only in the present tense and its derivations. A.
vid to know, to ascertain: The old Vedic pres. vetti only at Th
1, 497 (spelt veti). Another old aor. is vedi [Sk. ayedt] Dh.
419, 423; J iii.420 (=asi); iv.35 (here perhaps as aor. to
Caus. vedeti: to cause to know or feel). Remnants of the old
perfect tense 3rd pl. [Sk. vidu] are vid & vidu (appears
as vidu in verse), e. g. at Th 1, 497; Sn 758; Pv ii.74 (=jnanti PvA 102); J v.62 (=vijnanti C.); Mhvs 23, 78. The old
participle of the same tense is vidv [=Sk. vidvn; cp. Geiger
P.Gr. 1002 ] in meaning "wise" Sn 792, 897, 1056, 1060; expld
as vijjgato vibhv medhv at Nd1 93, 308; Nd2 575.
Opp. avidv Sn 535; M i.311. Younger forms are a reconstructed (grammatical) pres. vidati DA i.139; ger. viditv S
v.193; Sn 353, 365, 581, 1053, 1068 and pp. vidita (q. v.).
Pass. vijjati to be found, to be known, to exist; very frequent,
e. g. Sn 20 (pl. vijjare), 21, 431, 611, 856, 1001, 1026; Th 1,
132; D i.18; Pv i.56 ; ii.318 (spelt vijjite!) ii.914 (=atthi C.); 3rd
sg. pret. vijjittha Sn 1098 (m v.=savijjittha Nd2 568). ppr.
Vipacita
Vipassan
Vipassaka (adj.) [fr. vipassati] qualified to win insight, contemplating, gifted with introspection S ii.232; Ps i.167; Miln 342,
369; 393, VbhA 297.
Vipassan
Vippaipdeti
Vipkatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. vipka] state of being ripe PvA 52.
Vipceti [Caus. of vi+pac, or distorted fr. vivceti?] to become
annoyed, to get angry (lit. to get heated): this meaning as
trsln of vi+pac, although not quite correct, as pac means to
"ripen" and is not ordinarily used of heated conditions. Since
the word is not sufficiently cleared up, we refrain from a detailed discussion concerning possible explanations. It may
suffice to point out that it occurs only in Vinaya (and in one
sporadic passage S i.232) in standing combn ujjhyati khyati
vipceti, expressing annoyance or irritation about something;
e. g. Vin i.191; ii.85, 291; iv.64. The corresponding BSk.
phrase is avadhyyati dhriyati [to resist, dh] vivcayati, e.
g. Divy 492. It is not quite clear which of the two versions
is the older one. There may be underlying a misunderstood
(dial.) phrase which was changed by popular analogy. The
BSk. phrase seems a priori the more intelligible one; if we
take vipceti=vivceti, we should translate it as "to speak disparagingly." Mrs. Rh. D at K.S. i.296 trsls as "were vexed
and fretted and consumed with indignation. " See remarks
under khyati & cp. vipaccat.
Vippakia [pp. of vippakirati] strewn all over, beset with, sprinkled (with) J ii.240; vi.42; DhA i.140; DA i.40; VvA 36.
Vippakiat (f.) [abstr. fr. vippakia] the fact of being beset
or endowed (with) Vism 8.
Vippakirati [vi+pakirati] 1. to strew all over PvA 92. - 2. to
confound, destroy J ii.398. pp. vippakia.
Vippakkamati [vi+pakkamati] to part company, to go away Vin
iv.284.
Vippajahati [vi+pajahati] to give up, to abandon Sn 817 (inf.
pahtave), 926 (Pot. pajahe); ger. pahya Sn 367, 499,
514; J i.87. pp. vippahna.
Vippaikkula (adj.) [vi+paikkla] contrary, antagonistic Dhs
1325=Pug 20.
Vippaipajjati [vi+paipajjati. Cp. BSk. vipratipadyate Divy
293] to go astray; fig. to err, fail; to commit sin Vin iii.166; S
i.73; J i.438. pp. vippaipanna. Caus. vippaipdeti.
Vippaipatti (f.) [vi+paipatti] wrong way, error, sin Vism 511.
Vippaipdeti
Vibdhati
Vippaisra [vi+paisra] bad conscience, remorse, regret, repentance Vin ii.250; D i.138; S iii.120, 125; iv.46; A iii.166, 197,
353; iv.69; J iv.12; v.88; Pug 62; DhA iv.42; VvA 116; PvA
14, 60, 105, 152. a no regret, no remorse A iii.46.
Vipphra [fr. vi+pharati 1 or 2] diffusion, pervasion, (adj.) pervading, spreading out A i.171 (vitakka vip phra sadda,
cp. Kvu trsln 241), 206 (mahjutika mah vipphra); iv.252;
Ps i.112 sq.; ii.174; J iii.12 (mah +mahjutika); v.150 (id.);
Miln 230 & 270 (vac dilating in talk), 130, 346; Vism 42;
DA i.192; VvA 103 (mah+mahjutika); PvA 178 (karu).
Vippavsa [vi+pavsa] absence; in sati absence of mind, neglect, absentmindedness, thoughtlessness J i.410; SnA 339;
a thoughtfulness, mindfulness Vin v.216; Sn 1142; J iv.92.
Vibdhaka (adj.) [fr. vibdha] doing harm to (), injuring, preventing Dvs ii.88.
697
Vibdhati
Vibhvin
PvA 239.
Vibhga [fr. vibhajati, cp. vibhanga & vibhajana] distribution, division; detailing, classification J iv.361; Vism 494; VbhA 83;
ThA 100; VvA 37; PvA 122. attha detailing of meaning
Vism 569; dhtu distribution of relics VvA 297; PvA 212;
pada division of words SnA 269; PvA 34. Cp. sa.
Vibhjana (nt.) [vi+bhjana2 ] distribution, division Dhtp 92,
561; Dhtm 776, 787.
698
Vibhvin
Vimna
Vimariydikata (adj.) [vi+mariyd+kata] lit. made unrestricted, i. e. delivered, set free S ii.173; iii.31 (vippamutto
ena cetas viharati); vi.11; A v.151 sq. At Th 1, 184 v. l.
for vipariydi.
Vibhtaka (& aka) [cp. *Sk. vibhta & ka] the plant Terminalia belerica; beleric myrobolan. Dice were made from its
fruits, which are also used as medicine (intoxicant); its flowers smell vilely. Vin i.201; J iii.161; v.363; vi.529.
Vimna1 (nt.) [in the Pli meaning not Vedic. Found in meaning "palace chariot" in the Mbhrata and elsewhere in Epic
Sk.] lit. covering a certain space, measuring; the defns given
by Dhpla refer it to "without measure," i. e. immeasurable. Thus=vigata mne appame mahanta vara psda
VvA 131;=visihamna, pamato mahanta VvA 160.
Appld meaning: heavenly (magic) palace, a kind of paradise,
elysium. 1. General remarks: (a) The notion of the vimna
is peculiar to the later, fantastic parts of the Canon, based on
popular superstition (Vimna & Peta Vatthu, Apadna, Jtaka
and similar fairy tales). It shows distinct traces of foreign (Hellenic Babylonian) influence and rests partly on tales of sea
faring merchants (cp. location of V. in mid ocean). On
the other hand it represents the old (Vedic) ratha as chariot
of the gods, to be driven at will (cp. below 5, 7, 8). Thus
at Vv 16 (here as 500 chariots!), 36, 63, 64; J i.59 (deva
vimnasadisa ratha). (b) The vimnas are in remote parts
of the world (cp. the island of the blessed), similar to the elysium in Homer's Odyssey, e. g. iv.563 sq.: *
*
etc. (trsln G. Chapman: "the immortal ends of
all the earth, the fields Elysian Fate to thee will give; where
Rhadamanthus rules, and where men live a nevertroubled life,
where snow, nor show'rs, nor irksome winter spends his fruitless pow'rs, but from the ocean zephyr still resumes a constant
breath, that all the fields perfume"). Cp. Ehni, Yama p. 206
sq. (c) In popular religion the influence of this eschatological literature has been very great, so great in fact as to make
the Vimna and Peta vatthus & the Jtakastories, exemplifying the theory of retribution as appealing to an ordinary
mind by vivid examples of mythology, greater favourites than
any other canonical book. From this point of view we have to
judge Mhvs 14, 58: Petavatthu Vimna ca sacca sayutta eva ca desesi thero... 2. The descriptions of the Vimnas are in the most exuberant terms. The palaces (kingdoms in
miniature) are of gold, crystal or exquisite jewels, their pillars
are studded with gems, their glittering roofs are peaked with
700 pinnacled turrets (VvA 244, 289; also as "innumerable"
VvA 188, or 18,000 Ap. 63). Surrounded are these towering (ucca) mansions by lovely, well planned gardens, the
paths of which are sprinkled with gold dust; they are full of
wishing trees, granting every desire. There is a variety of
stately trees, bearing heavenly flowers & fruit, swaying gently in delicious breezes. Lotus ponds with cool waters invite
to refreshing baths; a host of birds mix their songs with the
699
Vimna
Vimna
Vimna
Viya
Vimutta [pp. of vimucati] freed, released, intellectually emancipated Vin i.8; A iv.75, 179, 340; v.29; D iii.97, 100, 133,
258; S i.23, 35; iii.13, 53, 137; Sn 354, 475, 522, 877, 1071
sq., 1101, 1114; Nd1 283; Nd2 587; Pv iv.132 (arah+); Vism
410. Often as citta v. an emancipated heart, e. g. D i.80;
A iii.21; S i.46, 141; iii.90; iv.164; v.157 (here taken by Mrs.
Rh. D. at S vi.93, Index, as "unregulated, distrait"); Sn 975;
Nd1 284; Vbh 197. ubhatobhga emancipated in both ways
(see Dial ii. 70) D ii.71; iii.105, 253; S i.191; A i.73; iv.10,
77, 453; v.23; M i.439, 477 sq. pa, emancipated by insight, freed by reason (see Dial. ii.68) S i.191; ii.123; D ii.70;
iii.105, 254; M i.439, 477. saddh freed by faith A i.73;
iv.10, 77; v.23; Ps ii.52; M i.439, 477. anupd vimutta
freed without any further clinging to the world M i.486; S ii.18;
iii.59; iv.83 and passim.
-atta having an emancipated self S iii.46, 55, 58; A iv.428.
-yatana point or occasion of emancipation, of which there are
5, viz. hearing the Dhamma taught by the Master, teaching it
oneself, reciting it, pondering over it, understanding it A iii.21
sq.; D iii.241, 279; Ps i.5.
701
Viya
Viramati
Viya the diaeretic form (for sake of metre) of vya [=vi+ a],
which see generally. Cp. the identical veyya.
Viyatta (adj.) [cp. Sk. vyakta, vi+pp. of aj] determined, of settled opinion, learned, accomplished; only in stock phrase svak viyatt vint visrad (which Rh. D. trsls "true hearers, wise and well trained, ready etc." Dial. ii. 114) at
D ii.104=A iv.310=S v.260=Ud 63. The BSk. (at Divy 202)
has rvakh (for bhikkh!) pait bhaviyanti vyakt vint
viradh. 2. separated, split, dissenting, heretic Sn 800
(=vavatthita bhinna dvejjhpanna etc. Nd2 108; =bhinna SnA
530). Cp. the two meanings of vavatthita (=*vyakta), which
quasi correspond to viyatta 1 & 2 At this passage the v. l.
(all SS of the Commentary) viyutta is perhaps to be perferred
to viyatta.
Note. It is to be noted that viyatta in 1 does not occur
in poetry, but seems to have spelling viy because of the foll.
vinta and visrada. Cp. vyatta & veyyatta.
Virajjaka (adj.) [vi+rajja+ka] separated from one's kingdom, living in a foreign country VvA 336.
Virajjati [vi+rajjati] to detach oneself, to free oneself of passion,
to show lack of interest in (loc.). S ii.94, 125 (nibbinda [ppr.]
virajjati); iii.46, 189; iv.2, 86; A v.3; Sn 739=S iv.205 (tattha);
Th 1, 247; Sn 813 (na rajjati na virajjati), 853; Nd1 138, 237;
Miln 245; Sdhp 613. pp. viratta. Caus. virjeti
to put away, to estrange (acc.) from (loc.), to cleanse (oneself) of passion (loc.), to purify, to discard as rga D ii.51;
S i.16=Sn 171 (ettha chanda v.=vinetv viddhasetv SnA
213); S iv.17=Kvu 178; A ii.196 (rajanyesu dhammesu citta
v.); Sn 139, 203; Th 1, 282; Pv ii.1319 (itthi citta=viratta
citta PvA 168); ThA 49; DhA i.327 (itthi bhve chanda
v. to give up desire for femininity). pp. virjita.
Viyatti (f.) [cp. Sk. vyakti] distinctness Dhtp 366 & Dhtm 593
(in defn of br). Cp. veyyatti.
Viykra [vi+kra] preparation, display, distinction, splendour,
majesty Sn 299 (=sampatti SnA 319).
Viycikkhati in verse at Sn 1090 for vycikkhati, i.
vi+cikkhati, to tell, relate, explain; pp. vykhyta.
e.
Viraa (adj. nt.) [vi+raa] without fight or harm, peace Sdhp 579.
Viratta [pp. of virajjati] dispassioned, free from passion, detached, unattached to, displeased with (loc.) S iii.45 (rpadhtuy citta viratta vimutta); Sn 204 (chandarga), 235
(citta yatike bhavasmi); A v.3, 313; J v.233 (mayi); Sdhp
613.
[fr.
Viyoga [vi+yoga 2] separation J vi.482; Mhvs 19, 16 (Mahbodhi); PvA 160, 161 (pati from her husband); Sdhp 77, 164.
Viyyati [Pass. of vyati1 or vinti. The Vedic is yate] to be woven Vin iii.259. pp. vta2 .
Viramati [vi+ramati] to stop, cease; to desist (abl.), abstain, refrain Sn 400 (Pot. meyya), 828 (Pot. me), 925; Nd1 168,
702
Viramati
Viriya
Virava (& rva) [vi+rava & rva; cp. Vedic virava] shouting out,
roaring; crying (of animals) J i.25, 74 (), 203 (of elephants);
v.9 (, of swans).
Viravati [vi+ravati] 1. to shout (out), to cry aloud; to utter a cry or
sound (of animals) J ii.350 (kik sakuo viravi); v.206; Mhvs
12, 49 (mahrva viravisu mahjan); PvA 154, 217, 245
(vissara), 279 (id.); Sdhp 179, 188, 291. 2. to rattle J
i.51. Caus. virveti to sound Mhvs 21, 15 (ghaa to
ring a bell).
Viraha (adj.) [vi+raho] empty, rid of, bar, without PvA 137, 139
(sla).
Virga [vi+rga] 1. absence of rga, dispassionateness, indifference towards (abl. or loc.) disgust, absence of desire, destruction of passions; waning, fading away, cleansing, purifying;
emancipation, Arahantship. D iii.130 sq., 136 sq., 222,
243, 251, 290; S i.136; iii.19 sq., 59 sq., 163, 189; iv.33 sq.,
47, 226, 365; v.226, 255, 361; A i.100, 299; ii.26; iii.35, 85,
325 sq.; iv.146 sq., 423 sq.; v.112, 359; Th 1, 599; Sn 795; Ps
ii.220 sq.; Nd1 100; Kvu 600=Dh 273=Nett 188 (virgo seho
dhammna); Dhs 163; Nett 16, 29; Vism 290 (khaya & accanta) 293. Often nearly synonymous with nibbna, in
the description of which it occurs frequently in foll. formula:
tahakkhaya virga nirodha nibbna, e. g. S i.136; Vin
i.5; A ii.118; It 88; or combd with nibbid virga nirodha
upasama... nibbna, e. g. M i.431; S ii.223; cp. nibbna
ii.B1 & iii.8. In other connection (more objectively as "destruction"): aniccat sankhrna etc., viparima virga
nirodha, e. g. S iii.43; (as "ceasing, fading away":) khaya(
dhamma liable to), vaya, virga, nirodha M i.500; S
ii.26. 2. colouring, diversity or display of colour, dye,
hue (=rga 1) J i.89 (nn samujjala blazing forth different
colours); 395 (nn variously dyed); PvA 50 (nn vaa
samujjala).
703
Viriya
Vilambin
228 sq.; iii.65, 127; iv.85, 229, 291, 357; v.93, 95, 153, 335;
J i.110; ossaha one who has given up effort J i.110; hna
lacking in energy It 34 (here as vriya, in metre). v. is one
of the indriyas, the balas & the sambojjhangas (q. v.).
-rambha "putting forth of energy," application of exertion, will, energy, resolution D iii.252; S ii.202; iv.175; A i.12;
iii.117; iv.15 sq., 280; v.123 sq.; Ps i.103 sq.; Vbh 107, 194,
208; DhsA 145, 146. -indriya the faculty of energy D iii.239,
278; S v.196 sq.; Dhs 13; Vbh 123; Nett 7, 15, 19; VbhA 276.
-bala the power of energy D iii.229, 253; A iv.363; J i.109.
-savara restraint by will Vism 7; SnA 8; DhsA 351.
Virodhana (adj. nt.) [fr. virodheti] opposing, obstruction, opposition, contradiction, only neg. a absence of opposition, J
iii.274, 320, 412; v.378.
Viruta (nt.) [vi+ruta] noise, sound (of animals), cry Sn 927; expld
as "viruda [spelling with d, like ruda for ruta] vuccati
miga cakka; miga cakka pthak [i. e. experts in
the ways of animals; knowers of auspices] migacakka disanti" at Nd1 382; and as "mig' dna vassita" at SnA 564.
The passage is a little doubtful, when we compare the expression virua ca gabbhakaraa at Sn 927 with the passage
viruddha-gabbhakaraa at D i.11 (cp. DA i.96), which
seems more original.
Vilanghaka [fr. vilangheti] in hattha jerking of the hand beckoning (as a mode of making signs) Vin i.157= M i.207 (has g
for gh, cp. p. 547). Cp. hattha-vikra.
704
Vilambin
Viloketi
Vilulita (adj.) [vi+luita; cp. BSk. vilulita Jtm 210] stirred, agitated, shaken, disturbed Dvs iv.54 (bhayacitta). Cp. viloeti.
Vilna (adj.) [vi+lna] cut off (always with ref. to the hair) M
iii.180=A i.138; Miln 11; PvA 47.
Vilokana (nt.) [vi+lok (loc=roc), see loka & rocati] looking, reflection, investigation, prognostication; usually as 5 objects
of reflection as to when & where & how one shall be reborn
(paca-mah-ni), consisting in kla, desa, dpa, kula, mt
(the latter as janetti yu i. e. mother and her time of delivery
at J i.48) or time (right or wrong), continent, sky (orientation),
family (or clan) and one's (future) mother: J i.48, 49; DhA
i.84; as 8 at Miln 193, viz. kla, dpa, desa, kula, janetti, yu,
msa, nekkhamma (i. e. the 5+period of gestation, month of
his birthday, and his renunciation). Without special meaning
at DA i.194 (lokana+). Cp. volokana.
Vilokita (nt.) [pp. of viloketi] a look A ii.104, 106 sq., 210; Pug
44, 45; DA i.193; VvA 6 (lokita+).
Viloketar [n. ag. fr. viloketi] one who looks or inspects DA i.194
(loketar+).
Viloketi [vi+loketi, of lok, as in loka] to examine, study, inspect,
705
Viloketi
Vivattacchada
Vivaa (m. & nt.) [vi+vaa1 ] 1. "rolling back," with ref. to the
development of the world (or the aeons, kappa) used to denote a devolving cycle ("devolution"), whereas vaa alone or
savaa denote the involving cycle (both either with or without kappa). Thus as "periods" of the world they practically
mean the same thing & may both be interpreted in the sense
of a new beginning. As redupl. inter. cpds. they express
only the idea of constant change. We sometimes find vivaa
in the sense of "renewal" & savaa in the sense of "destruction," where we should expect the opposite meaning for each.
See also vaa & savata. Dogmatically vivaa is used as
"absence of vaa," i. e. nibbna or salvation from sasra
(see vaa & cp. citta vivaa, ceto, a, vimokkha at Ps
i.108 & ii.70). Fig. in kamma "the rolling back of k.," i.
e. devolution or course of kamma at S i.85. Abs. & combd
with savaa (i. e. devolution combd with evolution) e. g.
at D i.14, 16 sq.; iii.109; A ii.142 (where read vivae for vivao); Pug 60; Vism 419 (here as m. vivao, compared with
savao), 420 (hyin). In cpd. kappa (i. e. descending
aeon) at D iii.51; Pug 60; It 15. 2. (nt.) part of a bhikkhu's
dress (rolling up of the binding?), combd with anu vivaa
at Vin i.287.
Vivaana (nt.) & (f) [fr. vivaati] turning away, moving on,
moving back Ps i.66; ii.98; Vism 278 (f.; expld as "magga").
Vivattacchada
Viveka
Vivhana (nt.) [fr. vi+vah] giving in marriage or getting a husband for a girl (cp. vhana) D i.11; DA i.96. Cp. Vin iii.135.
Vivicca (indecl.) [ger. of viviccati] separating oneself from (instr.), aloof from D i.37; A iii.25; J vi.388; Dhs 160; Pug 68;
Vism 139, 140 (expld in detail). Doubtful reading at Pv
i.119 (for viricca?). As vivicca (& a) at J v.434 in meaning "secretly" (=raho paicchanna C.).
Vivasana (nt.) [vi+vas (u) to shine, cp. vibhti] (gradually) getting light; turning into dawn (said of the night), only in phrase
raty vivasane at the end of night, combd in stock phrase with
suriy' uggamana pati "towards sunrise" (evidently an old
phrase) at Th 1, 517; J iv.241; v.381, 461; vi.491; Pv iii.82 .
Also at Sn 710.
707
Viveka
Visati
Viveka [fr. vi+vic] detachment, loneliness, separation, seclusion; "singleness" (of heart), discrimination (of thought) D
i.37, 182; iii.222, 226, 283=S iv.191 (ninna citta); S i.2, 194;
iv.365 sq.; v.6, 240 sq.; A i.53; iii.329; iv.224; Vin iv.241; Sn
474, 772, 822, 851, 915, 1065; Nd1 158, 222; J i.79; iii.31; Dhs
160; Pug 59, 68; Nett 16, 50; DhsA 164, 166; ThA 64; PvA 43;
Sdhp 471. viveka is given as fivefold at Ps ii.220 sq. and
VbhA 316, cp. K.S. i.321 (Bdhgh on S iii.2, 8), viz. tadanga,
vikkhambhana, samuccheda paippassaddhi, nissaraa; as
threefold at Vism 140, viz. kya, citta, vikkhambhana, i.
e. physically, mentally, ethically; which division amounts to
the same as that given at Nd1 26 with kya, citta, upadhi,
the latter equivalent to "nibbna." Cp. on term Dial. i.84. See
also jhna. Cp. pa.
Vivecitatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. vivecita, pp. of viveceti] discrimination, specification DhsA 388.
Visaggat see a.
Visa (nt.) [cp. Vedic via; Av. vi poison, Gr. , Lat. vrus,
Oir. f: all meaning "poison"] poison, virus, venom M i.316=S
ii.110; Th 1, 418; 768; Sn 1 (sappa snake venom); A ii.110; J
i.271 (halhala deadly p.); iii.201; iv.222; Pug 48; Miln 302;
PvA 62, 256; ThA 489. On visa in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907,
137. Cp. s.
-uggra vomiting of poison SnA 176. -kaaka a poisoned thorn or arrow, also name of a sort of sugar DhsA 203.
-kumbha a vessel filled with p. It 86. -pnaka a drink of
p. DhA ii.15. -pta (an arrow) dipped into poison (lit. which
has drunk poison). At another place (see pta1 ) we have suggested reading visappita (visa+appita), i. e. "poison applied," which was based on reading at Vism 303. See e. g. J
v.36; Miln 198; Vism 303, 381; DhA i.216. -rukkha "poison
tree," a cert. tree Vism 512; VbhA 89; DA i.39. -vaijj trading with poison A iii.208. -vijj science of poison DA i.93.
vejja a physician who cures poison (ous snake bites) J
i.310. -salla a poisoned arrow Vism 503.
Visa & visat (f.) [abrh. formation fr. vi+saj, spelling t for tt:
see visatta. The writing of MSS. concerning t in these words is
very confused] "hanging on," clinging, attachment. The word
seems to be a quasi short form of visattik. Thus at Sn
715 (=tah C.; spelling t); Dhs 1059 (trsln "diffusion," i. e.
fr. vi+s; spelling )=Nd2 s. v. tah (spelt with t).
Visayutta (& visautta) (adj.) [vi+sayutta] 1. (lit.) unharnessed, unyoked Th 1, 1021 (half fig.). 2. detached from
the world A i.262=iii.214; S ii.279 (); Th 1, 1022; Sn 621,
626, 634; DhA iii.233 (sabba yoga); iv.141, 159, 185.
Visayoga (& visaoga) [vi+sayoga] disconnection, separation from (), dissociation Vin ii.259 ()=A iv.280; D
iii.230 (kma yoga, bhava, dihi, avijj; cp. the 4
oghas), 276; A ii.11; iii.156.
708
Visati
Vishra
Visada (adj.) [cp. Sk. viada] 1. clean, pure, white D ii.14; Miln
93, 247; Dvs v. 28. 2. clear, manifest Miln 93; DhsA 321,
328 (a); VbhA 388 sq.
-kiriy making clear: see under vatthu1 . -bhva clearness Vism 128; Tikp 59.
Visa (nt.) [cp. Sk. via] 1. the horn of an animal (as cow, ox,
deer, rhinoceros) Vin i.191; A ii.207; iv.376; Sn 35 (khagga,
q. v.), 309; Pug 56 (miga); Ap 50 (usabha); J i.505; Miln
103. 2. (also as m.) the tusks of an elephant J iii.184; v.41,
48.
-maya made of horn Vin ii.115.
Visla (adj.) [cp. Sk. vila] wide, broad, extensive Sn 38; J v.49,
215 (pakhuma); Miln 102, 311.
-akkh (f.) having large eyes J v.40; Vv 371 (+vipulalocan; or a pet).
Vislat (f.) [abstr. fr. visla] breadth, extensiveness VvA 104.
Vishaa (adj.) [visa+haa] only neg. a imperturbed, balanced
Dhs 11, 15, 24 etc.
Vishra [visa+hra, or vi+sa+hra] distractedness, perturba709
Vishra
Visesa
Viskyita (nt.) [pp. of viskyeti, denom. fr. viska] 1. restlessness, impatience M i.446. 2. disorder, twisting, distortion (of views); usually in phrase dihi with visevita &
vipphandita e. g. M i.234; S i.123 (Bdhgh's expln at K.S.
i.321 is "vinivijjhan' ahena viloman' ahena"); ii.62 (in same
combn ; Bdhgh at K.S. ii.203: "sabba micchdihi vevacana"); Dhs 381 ("disorder of opinion" trsln ); Nd2 271iii ;
Vbh 145; DhsA 253. Cp. v. l. S i.12317 (K.S. i.155 "disorders"; n. p. 321).
Visesa [fr. vi+i, cp. Epic Sk. viea] 1. (mark of) distinction,
characteristic, discrimination A i.267; S iv.210; J ii.9; Miln 29;
VvA 58, 131; PvA 50, 60. 2. elegance, splendour, excellence J v.151; DhA i.399. 3. distinction, peculiar merit or
advantage, eminence, excellence, extraordinary state D i.233
(so for vivesa all through?); A iii.349 (opp. hna); J i.435;
VvA 157 (pua); PvA 71 (id.), 147 (sukha). 4. difference, variety SnA 477, 504; VvA 2; PvA 37, 81, 135 (pl.=
items). abl. visesato, distinctively, altogether PvA 1, 259.
5. specific idea (in meditation), attainment J vi.69: see & cp.
Brethren 24, n. 1; 110. Cp. pai.
-dhigama specific attainment A iv.22; M ii.96; Nett 92;
Visesa
Vissamati
Vissajjana (nt.) & (f.) [fr. vissajjeti] 1. giving out, bestowing Nd1 262 (dhana). 2. sending off, discharging J i.239
(nv putting off to sea). 3. answer, reply Vism 6, 84; often in combn pucch question and answer, e. g. Mhvs 4, 54;
PvA 2.
Vissaha [pp. of vissajjati] 1. let loose; sent (out); released, dismissed; thrown; given out Mhvs 10, 68; J i.370; iii.373; PvA
46, 64, 123, 174. 2. (of the voice.) distinct, well enunciated D i.114 (=apalibuddha, i. e. unobstructed; sandiddha
vilambit' di dosa rahita DA i.282); ii.211; A ii.51; iii.114;
S i.189; J vi.16 (here as vissattha vacana). 3. vissaha
at J iv.219 in phrase indriya means something like "strong,"
distinguished. The v. l. visatta suggests a probable visaa;
it may on the other hand be a corruption of visiha.
Vissa (nt.) [cp. Sk. visra] a smell like raw flesh, as gandha at
Dhs 625; DhsA 319; SnA 286; DhA iii.393.
Vissaka [of vi] dwelling: see pai.
Vissagga [vi+sagga, vi+sj, cp. Sk. visarga] dispensing, serving,
donation, giving out, holding (a meal), only in phrases bhatta
the function of a meal Vin ii.153; iv.263; Pv iii.29 (so read for
vissatta); Miln 9; SnA 19, 140; and dna bestowing a gift Pv
ii.927 (=pariccga hne dn'agge PvA 124).
711
Vissamati
Vihrika
Visssaka (& ika) (adj.) [visssa] intimate, confidential; trustworthy A i.26; Miln 146; DA i.289.
Vihyasa [cp. Sk. viha & vihyasa] the air, sky PvA 14. Cases
adverbially: yas through the air Mhvs 12, 10, & yasa id.
J iv.47. Cp. vehyasa & vehsa.
Vihra [fr. viharati] 1. (as m. & adj.) spending one's time (sojourning or walking about), staying in a place, living; place
of living, stay, abode (in general) VvA 50 (jala); PvA 22,
79; eka living by oneself S ii.282 sq.; jangh wandering on
foot PvA 73; div passing the time of day Sn 679; PvA 142.
See also below 3 a. 2. (appld meaning) state of life, condition, mode of life (in this meaning almost identical with that of
vsa2 ), e. g. ariya best condition S v.326; SnA 136; dibba
supreme condition (of heart) Miln 225; brahma divine state
S v.326; SnA 136; Vism 295 sq. (ch. ix.); phsu comfort
A iii.119, 132; sukha happiness S iii.8; v.326; A i.43; ii.23;
iii.131 sq.; iv.111 sq., 230 sq.; v.10 sq. See further D i.145,
196; iii.220 (dibba, brahma, ariya), 250 (cha satata), 281; S
ii.273 (jhna); iii.235 (id.); A iii.294 ( kappeti to live one's
life); Ps ii.20; Nett 119 sq. 3. (a) a habitation for a Buddhist mendicant, an abode in the forest (araa), or a hut; a
dwelling, habitation, lodging (for a bhikkhu), a single room
Vin ii.207 sq.; D ii.7; A iii.51, 299 (yathvihra each to his
apartment); Sn 220 (dra a remote shelter for a bhikkhu), 391;
Vism 118 (different kinds; may be taken as c.). (b) place
for convention of the bhikkhus, meeting place; place for rest &
recreation (in garden or park) DA i.133. (c) (later) a larger
building for housing bhikkhus, an organized monastery, a Vihra Vin i.58; iii.47; S i.185 (pla the guard of the monastery);
J i.126; Miln 212; Vism 292; DhA i.19 (crik visit to the
monastery), 49 (pokkhara), 416; Mhvs 19, 77; PvA 12, 20,
54, 67, 141. 151; and passim. See also Dictionary of Names.
The modern province Behar bears its name from the vihras.
Visssin (adj.) [fr. visssa] intimate, confidential A iii.136 (asanthava intimate, although not acquainted).
Vissuta (adj.) [vi+suta, of ru] widely famed, renowned, famous
Sn 137, 597, 998, 1009; Pv ii.74 ; Mhvs 5, 19; PvA 107 (=dra
ghuha).
Vissussati [vi+u] to dry up, to wither S i.126 (in combn
ussussati vissussati, with ss from uss). Spelling here visuss,
but ss at S iii.149. Caus. visoseti (q. v.).
Vissota (adj.) [vi+sota, of sru] flowedaway, wasted Miln 294.
Vihaga [viha, sky, +ga] a bird (lit. going through the sky) DA
i.46. -pati lord of birds, a garua Dvs iv.33, 38, 55.
Vihanga=vihaga, J v.416; PvA 154, 157; Sdhp 241.
Vihangama (adj.) [viha+gam] going through the air, flying; (m.)
a bird A ii.39; iii.43; Sn 221, 606; Th 1, 1108; J i.216; iii.255;
DA i.125=DhsA 141.
Vihaati [Pass. of vihanati] to be struck or slain; to be vexed
or grieved, to get enraged, to be annoyed, suffer hardship; to
be cast down Sn 168 sq.; Pv ii.117 (=vighta pajjati PvA
150); iv.52 (with same expln ); J i.73, 359; ii.442; v.330; DA
i.289. ppr. vihaamna Sn 1121 (with long and detailed
exegesis at Nd2 604); S i.28 (a); PvA 150. pp. vihata DA
i.231.
Vihata1 [pp. of vihanati] struck, killed, destroyed, impaired It 100
(where A i.164 reads vigata); J vi.171; Sdhp 313, 425.
Vihata2 (adj.) [cp. Sk. vihti] broad, wide J vi.171 (=puthula C.).
Vihrika
Vta
Vihesik (f.) [probably for Sk. *vibhik, fr. bh, Epic Sk. bh,
cp. bhma=P. bhisa (q. v.)] fright J iii.147. (C. says "an expression of fearfullness").
Viheseti [vi+his, or Denom. fr. vihes, cp. Geiger, P.Gr.
102 ] to harass, vex, annoy, insult S iv.63; v.346; A iii.194;
Vin iv.36 sq.; Ud 44; Sn 277; Pv iv.147 (vihesa, aor.); iv.149
(vihesayi, aor.).
Vci (m. & f.) [cp. late Sk. vci wave; Vedic vci only in
meaning "deceit"; perhaps connected with Lat. vicis, Ags.
wce=E. week, lit. "change," cp. tide] 1. a wave J i.509;
Miln 117 (jala), 319 (puppha wave flower, fig.); Vism 63
(samudda); Dvs iv.46; DhsA 116= Vism 143. 2. interval, period of time (cp. "tide"= time interval) J v.271 (antara,
in Avci definition as "uninterrupted state of suffering"). In
contrast pair avci (adj.) uninterrupted, without an interval, &
savci with periods, in defn of jar at VbhA 99 & DhsA 328,
where avci means "not changing quickly," and savci "changing quickly." Also in defn of sad (continuously) as "avci
santati" at Nd2 631. Cp. avci.
Vjati [vj] to fan J i.165; SnA 487; VvA 6 (T. bjati). - Caus.
vjeti DhA iv.213; Mhvs 5, 161. Pass. vjiyati: ppr.
vjiyamna getting fanned J iii.374 (so read for vijy); PvA
176 (so for vijjamna!). pp. vjita.
Vihita (adj.) [pp. of vidahati] arranged, prepared, disposed, appointed; furnished, equipped J vi.201 (loka); Miln 345 (nagara); D i.45, S iii.46; Pug 55 (aneka); Mhvs 10, 93; PvA 51
(suhu). aa engaged upon something else Vin iv.269.
Vjana (nt.) [fr. vj, cp. Class. Sk. vjana] a fan, fanning; in
vjana-vta a fanning wind, a breeze SnA 174.
Vjan (f.) [fr. vjana, of vj] a fan Vv 472 (T. bjan, v. l. vj);
J i.46; Vism 310; DhA iv.39; VvA 147; PvA 176; KhA 95.
There are 3 kinds of fans mentioned at Vin ii.130, viz. vkamaya, usra, mora-picha, or fans made of bark, of a root
(?), and of a peacock's tail.
Vihna (adj.) [pp. of vijahati] left, given up, abandoned Sdhp 579.
*Vati (?), doubtful: see apa & pa. Kern, Toev. s. v. wrong
in treating it as a verb "to see."
Vta1 (adj.) [vi+ita, pp. of i] deprived of, free from, (being) without. In meaning and use cp. vigata. Very frequent as first
part of a cpd., as e. g. the foll.:
-accika without a flame, i. e. glowing, aglow (of cinders),
usually combd with dhma "without smoke" M i.365; S ii.99
(so read for vtacchika)=iv.188=M i.74; D ii.134; J i.15, 153;
iii.447; v.135; DhA ii.68; Vism 301. -iccha free from desire J ii.258. -gedha without greed Sn 210, 860, 1100; Nd1
250; Nd2 606. -taha without craving Sn 83, 741, 849, 1041,
1060; Nd1 211; Nd2 607. -tapo without heat J ii.450.
(d)dara fearless Th 1, 525; Dh 385. -dosa without anger Sn
713
Vta
Vsati & vsa (indecl.) [both for Vedic viati; cp. Av. vsaiti,
Gr. , Lat. viginti, Oir. fiche, etc.; fr. Idg. *i+komt
(decad), thus "two decads." Cp. vi] number 20. Both
forms are used indiscriminately. (1) vsati, e. g. Vin
ii.271 (vassa, as minimum age of ordination); Sn 457 (catu
vsat'akkhara); J i.89 (sahassa bhikkh); iii.360; VbhA 191
sq.; DhA i.4 (ekna, 19); ii.9, 54; iii.62 (sahassa bhikkh,
714
Vutti
Vhi [cp. Vedic vrhi] rice, paddy Vin iv.264 (as one of the 7 kinds
of maka dhaa); J i.429; iii.356; Miln 102, 267; Vism 383
(tumba); DhA i.125; iii.374 (piaka).
Vuccati [Pass. of vac] to be called D i.168, 245; Sn 436, 759,
848, 861, 946; Nd1 431; Nd2 s. v. katheti; SnA 204; DhA
ii.35. See also vatti. pp. vutta.
Vuha [pp. of vassati1 ] (water) shed, rained Pv i.56 ; PvA 29. See
also vaa & vaha.
*Vuti [we are giving this base as such only from analogy with
the Sk. form vrti (voti); from the point of view of Pli
grammar we must consider a present tense varati as legitimate
(cp. sa). There are no forms from the base vuti found in
the present tense; the Caus. vreti points directly to varati].
The two meanings of the root v as existing in Sk. are also
found in Pli, but only peculiar to the Caus. vreti (the form
aor avari as given by Childers should be read avrisu Mhvs
36, 78). The present tense varati is only found in meaning
"to wish" (except in prep. cpds. like savarati to restrain).
Defns of v: Dhtp 255 var= varaa sambhattisu; 274
val=savarae (see valaya); 606 var=vara'icchsu. 1.
to hinder, obstruct; to conceal, protect (on meanings "hinder"
and "conceal" cp. rundhati); Idg. *er and *el, cp. Gr.
, Sk. varutra, Lat. volvo, aperio etc. See vivarati.
The pp. *vuta only in combn with prefixes, like pari, sa.
It also appears as *vaa in vivaa. 2. to wish, desire;
Idg. *el, cp. Sk. varaa, varyn "better," Gr. to
long for, Lat. volo to intend, Goth. wiljan to "will," wilja=E.
will. Pres. varati (cp. vaeti): imper. varassu J iii.493
(vara take a wish; Pot. vare Pv ii.940 (=vareyysi C.); ppr.
varamna Pv ii.940 (=patthayamna PvA 128). pp. does
not occur.
Vuhi (& instr. vuhin) at Pgdp 13, 15, 19, 35 must be meant
for v-uha (& v'uhena), i. e. heat (see uha).
Vutta1 [pp. of vatti, vac; cp. utta] said DA i.17 ( hoti that is to
say); DhA ii.21, 75, 80; SnA 174.
-vdin one who speaks what is said (correctly), telling the
truth M i.369; S ii.33; iii.6.
Vuhi (f.) [fr. v, see vassati1 & cp. Vedic vi] rain S i.172=Sn
77 (fig.=saddh bja tapo vuhi); A iii.370, 378 (vta);
It 83; Dh 14; J vi.587 (dhr); Ap 38 (fig.), 52 (amata);
Miln 416; Vism 37, 234 (salila); Mhvs 1, 24; SnA 34, 224;
PvA 139 (dhr shower of rain). dubbuhi lack of rain,
drought (opp. suvuhi) J ii.367=vi.487; Vism 512.
Vuttaka (nt.) [vutta1 +ka. The P. conneetion seems to be vac, although formally it may be derived fr. vt "to happen" etc. (cp.
vuttin & vattin, both fr. vt, & vutti). The BSk. equivalent is
vttaka "tale" (lit. happening), e. g. Divy 439] what has been
said, saying; only in title of a canonical book "iti vuttaka"
("logia"): see under iti.
Vuhimant (adj.) [fr. vuhi, cp. Vedic vimant in same meaning] containing rain, full of rain; the rainy sky Th 2, 487
(=deva, i. e. rain god or sky ThA 287). Kern, Toev. s.
v. wrongly=*vyui, i. e. fr. vi+u (vas) to shine, "luisterrijk," i. e. lustrous, resplendent.
715
Vutti
Ve
Vutti (f.) [fr. vt, cp. vattati; Sk. vtti] mode of being or acting,
conduct, practice, usage, livelihood, habit S i.100 (ariya; cp.
ariya vsa); Sn 81=Miln 228 (=jvitavutti SnA 152); Sn 68,
220, 326, 676; J vi.224 (=jvita vutti C.); Pv ii.914 (=jvita
PvA 120); iv.121 (=jvik PvA 229); Miln 224, 253; VvA 23.
Vpaksa [formed fr. vpakseti] estrangement, alienation, separation, seclusion; always as twofold: kya & citta (of body
& of mind), e. g. D iii.285 (Dial. iii.260 not correctly "serenity"); S v.67; A iv.152.
Vpakseti [Caus. of vavakassati] to draw away, alienate, distract, exclude Vin iv.326; A v.72 sq. Caus. II. vpakspeti to cause to distract or draw away Vin i.49; iv.326.
pp. vpakaha.
Vusitatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. vusita] state of perfection D i.90 (vusitav mnin ki aatra avusitatt=he is proud of his perfection rather from imperfection).
716
Ve
Vetta
Vei (f.) [cp. Sk. vei] a braid of hair, plaited hair, hair twisted
into a single braid A iii.295; Vin ii.266 (dussa); Th 2, 255;
Vv 384 (=kesa vei C.). fig. of a "string" of people D
i.239 (andha). -kata plaited, having the hair plaited J ii.185;
v.431.
Vekalla (nt.) [fr. vikala] deficiency J v.400; Miln 107; Dhs 223;
DhA ii.26 (anga deformity), 79; iii.22; VvA 193; Sdhp 5, 17.
As vekalya at KhA 187 (where contrasted to skalya). ja avekalla karoti to keep one's knees straight Miln 418
(Kern, Toev. s. v. trsls "presses tightly together"). See also
avekalla.
Veu [cp. Vedic veu. Another P, form is veu (q. v.)] bamboo;
occurs only in cpds., e. g. -gumba thicket of bamboo DhA
i.177; -tinduka the tree Diospyros J v.405 (=timbaru C.);
-daaka jungle rope J iii.204; -bali a tax to be paid
in bamboo (by bamboo workers) DhA i.177; -vana bamboo
forest J v.38.
Vega [cp. Vedic vega, fr. vij to tremble] quick motion, impulse,
force; speed, velocity S iv.157; A iii.158 (sara); Sn 1074;
Miln 202, 258, 391; PvA 11, 47 (vta), 62 (visa), 67, 284
(kamma); Sdhp 295. instr. vegena (adv.) quickly DhA
i.49; another form in same meaning is vegas, after analogy
of thmas, balas etc., e. g. J iii.6; v. 117. Cp. sa.
Vetana (nt.) [cp. Epic & Class. Sk. vetana] wages, hire; payment,
fee, remuneration; tip J i.194 (nivsa rent); Sn 24; VvA 141;
DhA i.25; PvA 112. Most frequently combd with bhatta (q.
v.). As vedana at J iii.349.
Vetabba is grd. of *veti [vi]=vinti to weave (q, v.), thus "to be
woven," or what is left to be woven J vi.26. inf. vetu Vin
ii.150.
Vetasa [Vedic vetasa] the ratan reed, Calamus rotang J v.167; SnA
451.
Vetla at D i.6 (in the lists of forbidden crafts) refers to some
magic art. The proper meaning of the word was already unknown when Bdhgh at DA i.84 explained it as "ghana
ta" (cymbal beating) with remark "mantena mata sarr'
uhpanan ti eke" (some take it to be raising the dead by magic
charms). Rh. D. at Dial. i.8 translates "chanting of bards" (cp.
vetlika). It is of dialectical origin.
Vetlika [dial.; cp. Epic & Class. Sk. vaitlika] a certain office or
occupation at court connected with music or other entertainment, a bard. With other terms in list at Miln 331, some of
them obscure and regional. Also at J vi.277, where expld as
"vetl [read vettya?] uhpake," i. e. those whose duty it is
[by vetla or vetta] to make (people] rise. The expln is obscure,
the uhpaka reminds of Bdhgh's uhpana (under vetla).
Kern misunderstands the phrase by translating "chasing bards
away."
Vetulla (& vetulya) [cp. *Sk. vaitulya; also called vai-pulya, fr.
vipula. The P. form is not clear; it probably rests on dial. trsln
of a later term] a certain dissenting sect (see Mhvs. trsln 259,
n. 2) in vda heretic doctrine Mhvs 36, 41; Dpvs 22, 45;
-vdin an adherent of this doctrine.
Vehana (nt.) [fr. veheti, cp. Epic & Class. Sk. vehana] 1. surrounding, enveloping J vi.489. 2. a turban, head dress D
i.126; A i.145; iii.380 (ssa); J v.187; DhA iv.213; PvA 161.
3. wrapping, clothing, wrap, shawl J vi.12. Cp. pali.
717
Vetta
Vedik
Vetta (nt.) [cp. Epic Sk. vetra] twig, rod; creeper; jungle-rope
(cp. veu daa); cane (calamus). By itself only in standard list of punishments (tortures): vettehi teti to flog with
canes, e. g. A i.47; ii.122; Miln 196. Otherwise freq. in cpds.:
-agga cane top, sprout of bamboo (cp. kara) Vism
255 (where KhA in id. p. reads ankura); VbhA 60, 239, 252.
-ankura a shoot of bamboo KhA 52, 67. -sana cane chair
VvA 8. -cra (vettcra) "stick wandering" (?) J iii.541
(+sankupatha; C.: vettehi sacaritabba); Vv 8411 (vettcra
sankupatha ca magga, expld as vettalat bandhitv caritabba magga VvA 338); better as "jungle path." -patha "a
jungle full of sticks" (trsln Rh. D.) Miln 280 (+sankupatha),
jungle path.
-bandhana binding with twigs (rope?),
creeper bands S iii.155; v.51=A iv.127. -lat cane creeper
J i.342; VvA 8, 338. -valli garland of creeper Dvs iii.40.
Veda [fr. vid, or more specifically ved as P. root] 1. (cp. vediyati & vedan) (joyful) feeling, religious feeling, enthusiasm,
awe, emotion, excitement (something like savega) D ii.210
(pailbha+somanassa pailbha); M i.465 (ura); Sn
1027 (=pti SnA 585); J ii.336; iii.266. attha-veda+dhammaveda enthusiasm for the truth (for the letter & the spirit) of
Buddha's teaching M i.37; A v.329 sq., 333, 349, 352; veda
here interpreted as "somanassa" at MA i.173. See also
cpd. jta. 2. (cp. vedeti & vijj) (higher) knowledge (as
"Buddhist" antithesis to the authority of the "Veda"), insight,
revelation, wisdom: that which Bdhgh at MA i.173 defines
with "a," and illustrates with vedag of Sn 1059; or refers
to at DA i.139 with defn "vidanti eten ti vedo." Thus at Sn 529
& 792 (=ved vuccanti catsu maggesu a pa Nd1 93),
cp. SnA 403. As adj. veda Ep. of the Buddha "the knower"
or the possessor of revelation, at M i.386. See also vedag.
3. the Veda(s), the brahmanic canon of authorized religious
teaching (revelation) & practice; otherwise given as "gantha"
i. e. "text" at MA i.173, & illustrated with "tia vedna prag." The latter formula is frequent in stock phrase
describing the accomplishments of a Brahmin, e. g. at D i.88;
M ii.133; Sn 1019; A i.163; DhA iii.361. In the older texts
only the 3 Vedas (irubbeda=Rg; yaju & sma) are referred
to, whereas later (in the Commentaries) we find the 4 mentioned (athabbana added), e. g. the three at S iv.118; J i.168;
ii.47; iii.537; Miln 10; Vism 384; the four at DA i.247; Miln
178. Unspecified (sg.): SnA 462. As adj. veda "knowing the Vedas" SnA 463 (ti), cp. tevijja. The Vedas in
this connection are not often mentioned, they are almost identical with the Mantras (see manta) and are often (in Com.)
mentioned either jointly with manta or promiscuously, e. g.
Pv ii.613 (the Vedas with the 6 angas, i. e. vedngas, called
manta); SnA 293 (manta prag+veda prag), 322,
448.
-antagu "one who has reached the end of knowledge,"
i. e. one who has obtained perfection in wisdom Vin i.3; Sn
463. -g one who has attained to highest knowledge (said of
the Buddha). Thus different from "tia vedna prag,"
which is brahmanic. The expln of vedag is "catsu maggesu
a" Nd2 612, & see above 2. S i.141, 168; iv.83, 206;
A ii 6; iv.340; Sn 322, 458, 529, 749, 846, 947, 1049, 1060;
Nd1 93, 204, 299, 431. A peculiar meaning of vedag is that
of "soul" (lit. attainer of wisdom) at Miln 54 & 71. -jta
718
Vedik
Vemaka
Vedik (f.) (& vediy) [fr. vedi] cornice, ledge, railing D ii.179;
Vin ii.120; J iv.229, 266; Vv 786 (vediy= vedik VvA 304);
8416 (=vedik VvA 340); VvA 275.
Vedeha [=Npl. Vedeha] lit. from the Videha country; wise (see
connection between Vedeha & ved, vedeti at DA i.139, resting
on popular etymology) S ii.215 sq. (muni, of nanda; expld
as "vedeha muni=paitamuni," cp. K.S. i.321; trsln K.S.
ii.145 "the learned sage"); Mhvs 3, 36 (same phrase; trsln "the
sage of the Videha country"); Ap 7 (id.).
719
Vemaka
Vel
Veyyvacca (nt.) [corresponds to (although doubtful in what relation) Sk. *vaiy ptya, abstr. fr. vypta active, busy (to
p, poti)=P. vyvaa; it was later retranslated into BSk. as
vaiyvtya (as if vi++vt); e. g. Divy 54, 347; MVastu i.298]
service, attention, rendering a service; work, labour, commission, duty Vin i.23; A iii.41; J i.12 (kya); vi.154; SnA 466;
VvA 94; ThA 253. -kamma doing service, work J iii.422;
-kara servant, agent, (f.) housekeeper J iii.327; VvA 349;
-krik (f.) id. PvA 65. Cp. vyappatha.
Verama (f.) [fr. viramaa; cp. the odd form BSk. vrama,
e. g. Jtm. 213] abstaining from (), absti nence A ii.217,
253; v.252 sq., 304 sq.; Sn 291; Pug 39, 43; Vism 11; KhA 24;
DhA i.235, 305.
Veramba (& bha) (adj.) [etym.? Probably dialectical, i. e. regional] attribute of the wind (vta or pl. vt), a wind blowing
in high altitudes [cp. BSk. vairambhaka Divy 90] S ii.231; A
i.137; Th i.597; J iii.255, 484; vi.326; Nd2 562; VbhA 71.
720
Vel
Vehyasa=vihyasa
Velmika (adj.) [velma+ika, the word velma probably a district word] "belonging to Velma," at D ii.198 used as a clan
name (f. Velmikn), with vv. ll. Vessin & Vessyin (cp. Velma Np. combd with Vessantara at VbhA 414),
and at D ii.333 classed with khujj, vmanik & komrik
(trsln "maidens"; Bdhgh: "very young & childish": see Dial.
ii.359); v. l. celvik. They are some sort of servants, esp. in
demand for a noble's retinue. See also Np. Velma (the V.
sutta at J i.228 sq.).
Velyati [Denom. fr. vel] to destroy (?) DhsA 219 (cp. Expos.
ii.297); expld by viddhaseti. More appropriate would be a
meaning like "control," bound, restrict.
Vellin (adj.) [Is it a corruption fr. *veyyyin=*vyyin?] flashing (of swords) J vi.449.
Velli [dial.?] is a word peculiar to the Jtaka. At one passage it is
expld by the Commentary as "vedi" (i. e. rail, cornice), where
it is applied to the slender waist of a woman (cp. vilka &
vilaggita): J vi.456. At most of the other passages it is expld
as "a heap of gold": thus at J v.506 (verse: velli vilka
majjh; C.: "ettha vell ti rsi vilkamajjh ti vilagga majjh uttattaghana suvaa -rsi ppabh c' eva tanu
dgha majjh ca"), and vi.269 (verse: kacana velli
viggaha; C.: "suvaa -rsi sassirka sarr"). At v.398
in the same passage as vi.269 expld in C. as "kacana rpakasadisa sarr"). The idea of "golden" is connected with
it throughout.
Vehyasa=vihyasa
Vobhindati
Vokra [v(i)+okra; cp. vikra] 1. difference Sn 611. - 2. constituent of being (i. e. the khandhas), usually as eka, catu
& paca-bhava, e. g. Kvu 261; Vbh 137; Tikp 32, 36 sq.;
Vism 572; KhA 245; SnA 19, 158. In this meaning vokra is
peculiar to the Abhidhamma and is almost synonymous with
vikra 4, and in the Yamaka with khandha, e. g. paca v., catu
v. etc. 3. worthless thing, trifle S ii.29. 4. inconvenience, disadvantage (cp. vikra 3) PvA 12 (line 1 read: anek'
kra vokra).
Vobhindati
Vyajana
Vohra [vi+avahra] 1. trade, business M ii.360; Sn 614 ( upajvati); J i.495; ii.133, 202; v.471; PvA 111, 278. 2. current
appellation, common use (of language), popular logic, common way of defining, usage, designation, term, cognomen;
(adj.) () so called SnA 383, 466, 483 (laddha so called);
DA i.70; PvA 56, 231 (laddha padesa, with the name) VvA 8,
72 (po ti vohrato satto), 108 (loka nirhya samaya v.).
ariya-vohra proper (i. e. Buddhist) mode of speech (opp.
anariya unbuddhist or vulgar, common speech) D iii.232; A
ii.246; iv.307; Vin iv.2; Vbh 376, 387. lokiya-vohra common definition, general way of speech SnA 382. On term see
also Dhs. trsln 1306. 3. lawsuit, law, lawful obligation; juridical practice, jurisprudence (cp. vohrika) Sn 246
(ka fraudulent lawyer); J ii.423 ( sdheti to claim a debt
by way of law, or a lawful debt); vi.229; DhA iii.12 (pajvin
a lawyer); SnA 289. 4. name of a sea monster, which
gets hold of ships J v.259.
Vossajjati [=ossaj(j)ati] to give up, relinquish; to hand over, resign Sn 751 (ger. vossajja; SnA 508 reads oss); J v.124 (is723
Vyajana
Vykattar
v.86 (viyajanena under the pretext); Dhs 1306. gihi characteristic of a layman Sn 44 (cp. SnA 91); Miln 11; purisa
membrum virile Vin ii.269. 2. letter (of a word) as opposed
to attha (meaning, sense, spirit), e, g. D iii.127; S iv.281, 296;
v.430; A ii.139 (Cp. savyajana); or pada (word), e. g. M
i.213; A i.59; ii.147, 168, 182; iii.178 sq.; Vin ii.316; Nett
4; SnA 177. vyajanato according to the letter Miln 18
(opp. atthato). 3. condiment, curry Vin ii.214; A iii.49
(odano anekaspo aneka vyajano); Pv ii.115 (bhatta rice
with curry); PvA 50. Cp. byajana.
Vyavasita (adj.) [pp. of vi+ava+s (or ri?), cp. vyavasna] decided, resolute SnA 200.
Vyasana (nt.) [fr. vy+as] misfortune, misery, ruin, destruction,
loss D i.248; S iii.137 (anaya); iv.159; A i.33; v.156 sq., 317
(several); Sn 694 (gata ruined); Pv i.64 (=dukkha PvA 33);
iii.56 (=anattha PvA 199); Vbh 99 sq., 137; VbhA 102 (several); PvA 4, 103, 112; Sdhp 499. The 5 vyasanas are: ti,
bhoga, roga, sla, dihi or misfortune concerning one's relations, wealth, health, character, views. Thus at D iii.235; A
iii.147; Vin iv.277.
724
Vykattar
Vyyika
expounder A iii.81.
Vypatti (f.) [fr. vypajjati] injury, harm; doing harm, malevolence A v.292 sq.; Pug 18; J iv.137; Dhs 418 ("disordered
temper" trsln )
Vybdha (& bybdha) [fr. vi++bdh, but semantically connected with vi++pad, as in vypda & vypajjha] oppression, injury, harm, hurting; usually in phrase atta & para
(disturbing the peace of others & of oneself) M i.89; S iv.339;
A i.114, 157, 216; ii.179. Also at S iv.159 (pina
vybdhya, with v. l. vadhya). See also bybdha. The
corresponding adjectives are (a)vypajjha & veyybdhika
(q. v.).
Vybdheti (& bya) [Caus. of vi++badh or distortion fr. vypadeti, with which identical in meaning] to do harm, hurt, injure Vin ii.77/78; S iv.351 sq.; DA i.167. The BSk. is vybdhayate (e. g. Divy 105).
725
Vyyika
Sa
Vyvaa (adj.) [=Sk. vypta, cp. vypra, byappatha. & veyyvacca] doing service, active, busy; eager, keen, intent on (loc.),
busy with A iv.195 (mayi=worrying about me); J iii.315 (su);
iv.371 (kicckiccesu v.= uyyatta C.); v.395 (=ussukka); vi.229
(=kya veyyvacca dn' di kamma karaena vyvaa C.). dassana keen on a sight, eager to see J i.89; VvA
213 (preferred to T. reading!). dna serving in connection
with a gift, busy with giving, a "commissioner of gifts," i. e.
a superintendent installed by a higher (rich) person (as a king
or sehi) to look after the distribution of all kinds of gifts in
connection with a mahdna. Rh. Davids at Dial. ii.372 (following Childers) has quite misunderstood the term in referring
it to a vyvaa in meaning of "hindered," and by translating it
as "hindered at the largesse" or "objecting to the largesse." At
none of the passages quoted by him has it that meaning. See
e. g. D ii.354; J iii.129; Pv ii.950 (dne v.=ussukka panna
PvA 135); PvA 112 (dne), 124 (id.); DA i.296 (? not found).
avyvaa not busy, not bothering about (loc.), unconcerned
with, not worrying D ii.141 (Tathgatassa sarre; trsln not to
the point "hinder not yourselves"); Vin iii.136. See also separately. Note. vyvaa (& a) only occur in the meaning given above, and not in the sense of "covered, obstructed"
[wrongly fr. v] as given by Childers. Correct the trsln given
S
-S- a euphonic s seems to occur in combn ras-agga-s-aggin
(see rasa2 ). An apparent hiatus s in ye s idha Sn 1083,
and eva s- aha Sn 1134 (v. l.) may be an abbreviated su
(see su2 ), unless we take it as a misspelling for p.
Sa1 the letter s (sa kra) SnA 23; or the syllable sa DhA ii.6;
PvA 280.
Sa2 [Idg. *so- (m.), *s- (f.); nom. sg. to base *to- of the oblique
cases; cp. Sk. sa (sa), s; Av. h, h; Gr. , ; Goth. sa, s;
Ags. s "the" (=that one); pe s=E. thi s] base of the nom.
of the demonstr. pron. that, he, she. The form sg. m. sa is rare
(e. g. Dh 142; Sn 89). According to Geiger (P.Gr. 105) sa
occurs in Sn 40 times, but so 124 times. In later Pli sa is almost extinct. The final o of so is often changed into v before
vowels, and a short vowel is lengthened after this v: svjja
Sn 998=so ajja; svha J i.167=so aha; svya Vin i.2=so
aya. The foll. vowel is dropped in so ma It 57=so ima.
A form se is Mgadhism for nt. acc. sg. ta, found e. g.
at D ii.278, 279; M ii.254, 255, and in combn seyyath, seyyathda (for which tayath Miln 1). An idiomatic use is that
of so in meaning of "that (he or somebody)," e. g. "so vata...
726
Sa
Sayojana
Sa4 (reflex. pron.) [Vedic sva & svaya (=P. saya); Idg. *seo,
*se; cp. Av. hava & hva own; Gr. & his own; Lat.
sui, suus; Goth. sws own, sik=Ger. sich himself; etc.] own
M i.366; D ii.209; Sn 905; J ii.7; iii.164, 323 (loc. samhi
lohite), 402 (acc. sa his own, viz. kinsman; C=saka
jana); iv.249 (sa bhtara); Pv ii.121 =DhA iii.277 (acc.
san tanu); instr. sena on one's own, by oneself J v.24 (C. not
quite to the point: mama santakena). Often in composition,
like sadesa one's own country Dvs i.10. Cp. saka.
Sayaman (f.) [fr. last] a kind of ornament J v.202 (=maisuvaa pava rajata mayni pilandhanni C.).
Saycik (f.) [collect. abstr. fr. sa+yc] begging, what is
begged; only in instr. ya (adv.) by begging together, by
collecting voluntary offerings Vin iii.144 (so read for yo),
149 (expld incorrectly as "saya ycitv"); J ii.282 (so read
for yo).
Sayuga (nt.) [fr. sa+yuj] harness Th 1, 659.
Sa (indecl.) [prefix; Idg. *sem one; one & the same, cp.
Gr. even, at one, together; Sk. sama
even, the same; sam in the same way; Av. hama same=Goth.
sama, samap together; Lat. simul (=simultaneous), similis "re
sembling." Also Sk. sa (=sa2 ) together=Gr. (e.
g. ); Av. ha ; and samyak towards one point=P.
samm. Analogously to Lat. semel "once," simul, we
find sa as numeral base for "one" in Vedic sakt "once"=P.
sakid (& sakad), sahasra 1000=P. sahassa, and in adv. sad
"always," lit. "in one"] prefix, implying conjunction & completeness. sa is after vi (19%) the most frequent (16%) of
all Pli prefixes. Its primary meaning is "together" (cp. Lat.
con); hence arises that of a closer connection or a more accentuated action than that expressed by the simple verb (intensifying=thoroughly, quite), or noun. Very often merely pleonastic, esp. in combn with other prefixes (e. g. sam anu,
sam , sam pa). In meaning of "near by, together"
it is opposed to para; as modifying prefix it is contrary to
abhi and (more frequently) to vi (e. g. savadati> vivadati), whereas it often equals pa (e. g. pamodati> sammodati), with which it is often combd as sampa; and also abhi
(e. g. abhivahati>savahati), with which often combd
as abhisa. Bdhgh & Dhpla explain sa by samm
(SnA 151; KhA 209: so read for sam gat), suhu (see e.
g. santasita, santusita), or samant (=altogether; SnA 152,
154), or (dogmatically) sakena santena samena (KhA 240),
or as "sayoga" Vism 495. In combn with y we find both
say and sa. The usual conracted form before r is s.
Sayojana
Savigga
376, 406; Pug 12, 15; Nett 14; Dhs 1002; DA i.312. The seven
last are the satta sayojanni, Nett. 14. The first five are
called orambhgiyni e. g. A i.232 sq.; ii.5, 133; v.17; D
i.156; ii.92, 252; M i.432; S v.61, 69; Th 2, 165; Pug 17. The
last five are called uddhambhgiyni e. g. A v.17; S v.61,
69; Th 2, 167; ThA 159; Pug 22; Nett 14, 49.
A different enumeration of the ten sayojanas, at Nd2
657=Dhs 1113, 1463 (kmarga, paigha, mna, dihi, vicikicch, slabbataparmsa, bhavarga, iss, macchariya, avijj); compare, however, Dhs 1002.
A diff. enumn of seven sayojanas at D iii.254 & A
iv.7, viz. anunaya, paigha, dihi, vicikicch, mna,
bhavarga, avijj. A list of eight is found at M i.361 sq. Cp.
also ajjhatta-sayojano & bahiddhsayojano puggalo A
i.63 sq.; Pug 22; ki-su-s S i.39= Sn 1108.
pass.
Sarambha [sa+*rambha, fr. rabh, as in rabhasa (q. v.)] impetuosity, rage Dvs iv.34. This is the Sanskritic form for the
usual P. srambha.
Savigga
Savohrati
Savijjati1 [Vedic vijate, vij; not as simple verb in P.] to be agitated or moved, to be stirred A ii.114; It 30. pp. savigga.
Caus. savejeti M i.253; S i.141; Vin i.32; imper. vejehi
S v.270; aor. vejesi Miln 236; inf. vejetu S i.197; ger
vejetv J i.327; grd. vejanya that which should cause awe,
in ni hnni places of pilgrimage D ii.140; A i.36; ii.120;
It 30. pp. savijita & vejita.
Savibhajati [sa+vibhajati] to divide, to share, to communicate D ii.233; Miln 94, 344; inf. vibhajitu Miln 295; Dvs
v.54. pp. savibhatta. Caus. vibhjeti. It 65.
729
Savohrati
Sasuddhi
Savohrati [Denom. fr. savohra] to trade (with); ppr. vohramna [cp. BSk. savyavahramna Divy 259] A ii.188.
Sasaya [cp. Vedic saaya] doubt A ii.24; Nd 660 (=vicikicch etc.); Miln 94; Dhs 425.
Sasayita (nt.) [pp. of sasayati=sa+seti of i; in meaning=sasaya] doubt Dvs i.50.
Sasna [sa+sna, pp. of to crush, Sk. ra] fallen off, destroyed Sn 44 (patta without leaves=patita patta C.).
Sasuddha (adj.) [sa+suddha] pure D i.113; Sn 372, 1107; Nd1
289; Nd2 661; J i.2.
-gahaika of pure descent D i.113; DA i.281.
730
Sasuddhi
Sakaraya
Saka (adj.) [sa4 +ka] own D i.106, 119, 231; ii.173 (saka te "all
be your own," as greeting to the king); M i.79; Vin i.3, 249
(cariyaka); S v.261 (id.); Sn 861; It 76; Nd1 252; Pv i.51
(ghara); ii.61 (bht). Opp. assaka2 . -appassaka having little or nothing as one's own (=daidda) A i.261; ii.203;
kamma-ssaka possessing one's own kamma M iii.203 sq.; A
v.288; Miln 65; Dhs 1366.
-gavacaa violent towards one's own cows, harassing
one's own Pug 47.
Sakaa1 (m. & nt.) [cp. Sk. akaa; Vedic aka] a cart, waggon;
a cartload D ii.110; Vin iii.114; J i.191; Miln 238; PvA 102;
VbhA 435 (simile of two carts); SnA 58 (udaka bharita),
137 (bja). sakani pajpeti to cause the carts to go on J
ii.296.
-gopaka the guardian of the waggon DhA iv.60. -bhra
a cart load VvA 79. -mukha the front or opening of the
waggon, used as adj. "facing the waggon or the cart" (?) at D
ii.234, of the earth that is, India as then known and at D
ii.235 (comp. Mahvastu iii.208), of six kingdoms in Northern
India. At the second passage B. explains that the six kingdoms
all debouched alike on the central kingdom, which was hexagonal in shape. This explanation does not fit the other passage.
Could sakaa there be used of the constellation Rohin, which
in mediaeval times was called the Cart? Cp. Dial. ii.269.
-vha a cart load Pv ii.75 . -vyha "the waggon array," a
wedge shaped phalanx J ii.404; iv.343; Vism 384.
Sakat (f.) () [abstr. fr. saka] one's own nature, identity, peculiarity: see kamma-ssakat & adj. ssakata. It may also
be considered as an abstr. formation fr. kamma ssaka.
731
Sakaraya
Sakkya
138.
Sakkacca() (adv.) [orig. ger. of sakkaroti] respectfully, carefully, duly, thoroughly; often with uppahahati to attend,
serve with due honour. Vv 125 ; Miln 305; J iv.310. The
form sakkacca is the older and more usual, e. g. at D ii.356
sq.; S iv.314; A ii.147; iv.392; Vin iv.190, 275; Th 1, 1054; J
i.480; Dh 392; PvA 26, 121. The BSk. form is satktya, e. g.
MVastu i.10. -krin zealous S iii.267; Miln 94. -dna M
iii.24.
Sakala (adj.) [cp. Sk. sakala] all, whole, entire Vin ii.109; Vism
321; SnA 132; PvA 93, 97, 111. Cp. skalya.
Sakalik (f.) [fr. sakala=Sk. akala potsherd] a potsherd; a splinter, bit D ii.341; A ii.199=S iv.197; S i.27= Miln 179; M i.259;
A v.9 (aggi); J iv.430; Miln 134; KhA 43 (maccha); Nett 23;
DhsA 319. sakalika sakalika in little pieces Vin ii.112.
sakalika-hra a skewer J iv.29, 30.
Sakasaa (adj.) [sa3 +k.] faulty, wrong (lit. bitter) Miln 119 (vacana).
Sakicca (nt.) [sa4 +kicca] one's own duty or business Vism 321
(pasuta).
Sakiccaya (nt.) [sa4 +kiccaya=ktya]=sakicca Miln 42; DhsA 196
(pasuta).
Sakiya (adj.) [fr. saka, cp. Sk. svakya] own J ii.177 iii.48, 49;
iv.177.
Sakua [Vedic akuna] a bird (esp. with ref. to augury) D i.71
(pakkhin+); Vin iii.147; S i.197; A ii.209; iii.241 sq., 368; J
ii.111, 162 (Kandagala); KhA 241. pantha see under pantha.
f. saku S i.44. adj. sakua J v.503 (masa).
-kulvaka a bird's nest KhA 56. -patha bird course,
Npl. Nd1 155. -pda bird foot KhA 47. -ruta the cry of
birds Miln 178. -vatta the habit (i. e. life) of a bird J v.254.
-vijj bird craft, augury (i. e. understanding the cries of birds)
D i.9; DA i.93.
732
Sakkya
Sagocara
sakkya-vatthuk sassata-dihi, and five are kinds of svatthuk uccheda-dihi (ibid. 149, 150). Gods as well as
men are s pariypann S iii.85; and so is the eye, DhsA 308.
When the word dihi is not expressed it is often implied, Th 2,
199, 339; Sn 231. S dihi is the first Bond to be broken on entering the Path (see sayojana); it is identical with the fourth
kind of Grasping (see updna); it is opposed to Nibbna, S
iv.175; is extinguished by the Path, M i.299; S iii.159; iv.260;
and is to be put away by insight DhsA 346. See further: D
iii.234; A iii.438; iv.144 sq.; Kvu 81; Sn 950; Dhs 1003; and
on term Dhs. trsln 1003; K.S. iii.80, n. 3. -nirodha the
destruction of the existing body or of individuality A ii.165
sq.; iii.246; D iii.216. -samudaya the rise of individuality D
iii.216; Nd1 109.
Sakkhali (& ik) (f.) [cp. Sk. akul] 1. the orifice of the ear:
see kaa. 2. a sort of cake or sweetmeat (cp. sanguik)
A iii.76 (T. sakkhalak; v. l. lik & sankulik); Vin iii.59; J
ii.281.
Sagrava (adj.) [sa3 +grava] respectful, usually combd with sappatissa & other syn., e. g. Vin i.45; It 10; Vism 19, 221.
Sagravat (f.) [fr. sagrava] respect Th 1, 589.
Sagocara
Sankra
Sank (f.) [fr. ank: see sankati] doubt, uncertainty, fear (cp.
visanka) J vi.158; DhA iii.485.
Sankappa [sa+kp, cp. kappeti fig. meaning] thought, intention, purpose, plan D iii.215; S ii.143 sq.; A i.281; ii.36; Dh
74; Sn 154, 1144; Nd1 616 (=vitakka a pa buddhi); Dhs
21; DhA ii.78. As equivalent of vitakka also at D iii.215; A
Sankra
Sankha
Sankita [fr. ank] anxious, doubtful J v.85; Mhvs 7, 15; SnA 60.
Cp. pari, vi.
Sanketa [sa+keta: see ketu] intimation, agreement, engagement, appointed place, rendezvous Vin i.298; Miln 212; Nett
15, 18; cp. Cpd. 6, 33. sanketa gacchati to keep an appointment, to come to the rendezvous Vin ii.265. asanketena
without appointing a place Vin i.107. vassika the appointed
time for keeping the rainy season Vin i.298.
-kamma agreement Vin iii.47, 53, 78.
Sankiliha [pp. of sankilissati] stained, tarnished, impure, corrupt, foul D i.247; S ii.271; A iii.124; v.169; Dh 244; J ii.418;
Dhs 993, 1243; Pv iv.123 (kyena vcya ca); DhsA 319.
Sankilissati [sa+kilissati, cp. BSk. sankliyati Divy 57] to become soiled or impure D i.53; S iii.70; Dh 165; J ii.33, 271.
pp. sankiliha. Caus. sankileseti.
Sankilissana (nt.) [fr. sankilissati] staining, defiling; getting defiled VvA 329.
Sankilesa [sa+kilesa] impurity, defilement, corruption, sinfulness Vin i.15; D i.10, 53, 247 (opp. visuddhi); M i.402; S
iii.69; A ii.11; iii.418 sq.; v.34; J i.302; Dhs 993, 1229; Nett
100; Vism 6, 51, 89; DhsA 165.
Sankha
Sankhra
Sankha2 [etym.?] a water plant (combd with sevla) Miln 35. See
detail under paaka 2.
Sankhata [pp. of sankharoti; Sk. saskta] 1. put together,
compound; conditioned, produced by a combination of causes,
"created," brought about as effect of actions in former births S
ii.26; iii.56; Vin ii.284; It 37, 88; J ii.38; Nett 14; Dhs 1085;
DhsA 47. As nt. that which is produced from a cause, i. e.
the sankhras S i.112; A i.83, 152; Nett 22. asankhata not
put together, not proceeding from a cause Dhs 983 (so read
for sankhata), 1086; Ep. of nibbna "the Unconditioned" (&
therefore unproductive of further life) A i.152; S iv.359 sq.;
Kvu 317 sq.; Pv iii.710 (=laddhanma amata PvA 207); Miln
270; Dhs 583 (see trsln ibid.), 1439. The discernment of higher
jhna- states as sankhata is a preliminary to the attainment of
Arahantship M iii.244. Cp. abhi; visankhita; visankhra.
2. cooked, dressed Mhvs 32, 39. 3. embellished Mhvs 22,
29.
-lakkhaa properties of the sankhata, i. e. production,
decay and change A i.152; VvA 29.
736
Sankhra
Sankhitta
by Franke in his Dgha translation (pp. 307 sq., esp. 311 sq.);
see also the analysis in Cpd. 273 276. Lit. "preparation, get up"; appld : coefficient (of consciousness as well as of
physical life, cp. via), constituent, constituent potentiality; (pl.) synergies, cause combination, as in S iii.87; discussed, B. Psy., p. 50 sq. (cp. DhsA 156, where paraphrased in
defn of sa-sankhra with "ussha, payoga, upya, paccayagahaa"); composition, aggregate. 1. Aggregate of the conditions or essential properties for a given process or result
e. g. (i.) the sum of the conditions or properties making up
or resulting in life or existence; the essentials or "element" of
anything (), e. g. yusakhra, life element D ii.106; S
ii.266; PvA 210; bhavasankhra, jvitasakhra, D ii.99, 107.
(ii.) Essential conditions, antecedents or synergy (co ordinated activity), mental coefficients, requisite for act, speech,
thought: kya, vac, citta, or mano, described respectively
as "respiration," "attention and consideration," "percepts and
feelings," "because these are (respectively) bound up with," or
"precede" those M i.301 (cp. 56); S iv.293; Kvu 395 (cp. trsln
227); Vism 530 sq.; DhsA 8; VbhA 142 sq. 2. One of the
five khandhas, or constitutional elements of physical life (see
khandha), comprising all the citta sampayutta cetasik
dhamm i. e. the mental concomitants, or adjuncts which
come, or tend to come, into consciousness at the uprising of a
citta, or unit of cognition Dhs 1 (cp. M iii.25). As thus classified, the sakhra's form the mental factor corresponding to
the bodily aggregate or rpakkhandha, and are in contrast to
the three khandhas which represent a single mental function
only. But just as kya stands for both body and action, so
do the concrete mental syntheses called sankhr tend to take
on the implication of synergies, of purposive intellection, connoted by the term abhisakhra, q. v. e. g. M iii.99, where
sakhr are a purposive, aspiring state of mind to induce a
specific rebirth; S ii.82, where pua, opua, eja s.
abhisankharoti, is, in D iii.217 & Vbh 135, catalogued as the
three classes of abhisankhra; S ii.39, 360; A ii.157, where
s. is tantamount to sacetan; Miln 61, where s., as khandha,
is replaced by cetan (purposive conception). Thus, too, the
ss. in the Paiccasamuppda formula are considered as the aggregate of mental conditions which, under the law of kamma,
bring about the inception of the paisandhivia, or first stirring of mental life in a newly begun individual. Lists of the
psychologically, or logically distinguishable factors making
up the composite sakhrakkhandha, with constants and variants, are given for each class of citta in Dhs 62, etc. (N.B.
Read cetan for vedan, 338.) Phassa and cetan are the
two constant factors in the s kkhandha. These lists may
be compared with the later elaboration of the sakhra elements given at Vism 462 sq. 3. sankhr (pl.) in popular
meaning. In the famous formula (and in many other connections, as e. g. sabbe sankhr) "anicc vata sankhr uppdavaya dhammino" (D ii.157; S i.6, 158, 200; ii.193;
Th 1, 1159; J i.392, cp. Vism 527), which is rendered by
Mrs. Rh. D. (Brethren, p 385 e. g.) as "O, transient are
our life's experiences! Their nature 'tis to rise and pass away,"
we have the use of s. in quite a general & popular sense of
"life, physical or material life"; and sabbe sankhr means
"everything, all physical and visible life, all creation." Taken
with caution the term "creation" may be applied as t.t. in
737
[fr.
Sankhitta
Sangahaa
Sangahaa
Sanghaeti
Sangti (f.) [fr. sagyati; BSk. sangti Divy 61] 1. a song, chorus, music J i.32 (dibba); vi.528 (of birds). 2. proclamation (cp. sangara), rehearsal, general convocation of the Buddhist clergy in order to settle questions of doctrine and to fix
the text of the Scriptures. The first Council is alleged to have
been held at Rjagaha, Vin ii.284 sq.; Dpvs iv.; Mhvs iii.; DA
i.2 sq.; SnA 67, 483. The second Council at Vesli Vin ii.294
sq.; Dpvs iv.27 sq.; Mhvs iv.; the third at Paliputta, Dpvs
vii.34 sq.; Mhvs v.268 sq. A Council of heretics, the so
called Mahsagti, is mentioned Dpvs v.31 sq. 3. text rehearsed, recension Vin ii.290; DA i.17; Miln 175 (dhamma);
text, formula Vin i.95; ii.274, 278. On the question of the
Councils see especially Franke J.P.T.S. 1908, 1 sq.
-kra editor of a redaction of the Holy Scriptures SnA
42 sq., 292, 394, 413 sq., 504 and passim; PvA 49, 70, etc.
Sanghaeti
Saccika
Sace (conj.) [sa2 +ce; cp. sacca] if D i.8, 51; Vin i.7; Dh 134; J
i.311. sace... noce if... if not J vi.365.
Sacca (adj.) [cp. Sk. satya] real, true D i.182; M ii.169; iii.207;
Dh 408; nt. sacca truly, verily, certainly Miln 120; sacca kira is it really true? D i.113; Vin i.45, 60; J i.107; saccato truly S iii.112. (nt. as noun) sacca the truth A ii.25,
115 (parama); Dh 393; also: a solemn asseveration Mhvs 25,
18. Sacce patihya keeping to fact, M i.376. pl. (cattri)
saccni the (four) truths M ii.199; A ii.41, 176; Sn 883 sq.;
Dhs 358. The 4 ariya-saccni are the truth about dukkha,
dukkhasamudaya, dukkha nirodha, and dukkha nirodha
gminipaipad. Thus e. g. at Vin i.230; D ii.304 sq.;
iii.277; A i.175 sq.; Vism 494 sq.; VbhA 116 sq., 141 sq. A
shortened statement as dukkha, samudaya, nirodha, magga
is freq. found, e. g. Vin i.16; see under dukkha B. 1. See
also ariyasacca & asacca. -imin saccena in consequence of
this truth, i. e. if this be true J i.294.
-avhaya deserving his name, Cp. of the Buddha Sn
1133, cp. Nd2 624. -dhitthna determined on truth M
iii.245; D iii.229. -nupai realization of truth M ii.173 sq.
-nubodha awakening to truth M ii.171 sq. -nurakkhaa
warding of truth, M ii.176. -bhinivesa inclination to dogmatize, one of the kya-ganthas S v.59; Dhs 1139; DhsA 377.
-bhisamaya comprehension of the truth Sn 758; Th 1, 338;
ThA 239. -kra ratification, pledge, payment in advance as
guarantee J i.121. -kiriy a solemn declaration, a declaration
on oath J i.214, 294; iv.31, 142; v.94; Miln 120; Mhvs 18,
39 (see trsln p. 125 on term). -a knowledge of the truth
Vism 510; DhA iv.152. -nma doing justice to one's name,
bearing a true name, Ep. of the Buddha A iii.346; iv.285, 289;
PvA 231. -nikkhama truthful Sn 542. -paivedha penetration of the truth Ps ii.57. -vanka a certain kind of fish J v.405
(the Copenhagen MS. has [sa]sacca vanka, which has been
given by Fausbll as sata vanka). -vacana (1) veracity M
i.403; Dh i.160; (2)=saccakiriy KhA 169, 180. -vajja truthfulness D i.53; S iv.349; J iv.320. -vc id. A ii.228; iii.244;
J i.201. -vdin truthful, speaking the truth D i.4; iii.170; A
ii.209; iv.249, 389; S i.66; Sn 59; Dh 217; Miln 120; Nd2 623;
DhA iii.288. -vivaa revelation of truth Ps i.11. -sandha
truthful, reliable D i.4; iii.170; A ii.209; iv.249; DA i.73. sammat popular truth, maxim S iv.230.
Saccika (adj.) [cp. Sk. satyaka] real, true Miln 226 (the same
passage at Ps i.174 & Nd1 458 spells sacchika). saccik' aha truth, reality, the highest truth Kvu 1 sq.; DhsA 4
(nearly=paramaha); KhA 102. Kern in a phantastic interpretation (Toev. ii.49, 50) takes it as sacci kaha (=Sk. sci
Saccika
Sajjhyati
Sajja (adj.) [grd. formation fr. sajj=saj Caus.; cp. the exact likeness of Ger. "fertig"] prepared, ready J i.98; ii.325; iii.271;
Miln 351; PvA 156, 256. Of a bow furnished with a bow
string A iii.75.
Sacchavni (mlni) at A iii.371 (opp. ummla) means "roots taking to the soil again." It is doubtful whether it belongs to chavi
"skin."
Sajju (adv.) [Sk. sadya, sa+dya, lit. one the same day] 1. instantly, speedily, quickly Dvs iii.37. 2. newly, recently
Dh 71 (khra; cp. DhA ii.67).
Sajati1 [sj, cp. Av. hraiti to let loose; Sk. sarga pouring
out, si emanation, creation] to let loose, send forth; dismiss,
give up Sn 386, 390; J i.359; v.218 (imper. sajhi); vi.185,
205. infin. sahu (q. v.); pp. saha (see vissaha).
Caus. sajjeti (q. v.). For sajj (Caus.) we find saj in
sajitar.
2
Sajjha (nt.) [cp. Sk. sdhya] silver D ii.351 (v. l.); S v.92 (v. l.);
A iii.16. Cp. sajjhu.
-kra silversmith Miln 331.
Sajti (f.) [sa2 +jti] (being of) the same class or caste Vin i.87; J
ii.108 (putta).
Sajjhyati
Sajdiya
Miln 10.
Sajjhu (nt.) [cp. sajjha] silver D ii.351; S v.92; J vi.48; Mhvs 19,
4; 27, 26; 28, 33.
Sacaya [fr. sa+ci] accumulation, quantity Sn 697; It 17
(ahi); Miln 220.
Sacinteti (& ceteti) [sa+cinteti] to think, find out, plan, devise means D ii.180, 245 (aor. samacintesu); Th 1, 1103
(Pot. cintaye); J iii.438 (aor. samacetayi).
Sajanetar [n. ag. fr. sajaneti] one who produces S i.191; iii.66.
Sajambhari in karoti is not clear in dern & meaning; perhaps "to tease, abuse," see D i.189 (riya); A i.187; S ii.282.
Probably fr. bh (Intensive jarbhta Vedic!) as *jarbhari. See
on dern Konow, J.P.T.S. 1909, 42; Kern, Toev. ii.69. The
C. on S ii.282 (K.S. ii.203) expls as "sambharita nirantara
phua akasu, upari vijjhis ti," i. e. continually touching
(or nudging) (phua=phuha or phoita).
Sacetan (f.) [sa+cetan] thought, cogitation, perception, intention A ii.159 (atta, para); D iii.231 (id.); S ii.11, 40, 99
(mano); ii.39 sq., 247; iii.60, 227 sq.; Vbh 285; Dhs 70, 126.
Sixfold (i. e. the 6 fold sensory perception, rpa, sadda,
etc.): D ii.309; iii.244; Ps i.136. Threefold (viz. kya, vac,
mano): Vism 341, 530; VbhA 144, 145.
742
Sajdiya
Sain
743
Sain
Saik (saik)
Sai (adv.) [cp. Sk. anai] softly, gradually Sn 350; Mhvs 25,
84.
Saika (adv.) [fr. last] slowly, gently, gradually D ii.333; M
i.120; S i.82, 203; J i.9, 292; ii.103; Miln 117; DA i.197; DhA
i.60, 389; VvA 36, 178.
Saha a reed (used for bow strings) M i.429.
Sahapeti & hpeti [Caus. of santihati] 1. to settle, to establish A ii.94 (citta); S iv.263; J i.225; PvA 196. 2. to call
to order D i.179 (p). 3. to adjust, fold up J i.304.
Savda [sain+vda] name of a school maintaining conscious existence after death D i.31; DA i.119; Mhbv 110.
Sahna (nt.) [fr. sa+sth] 1. configuration, position; composition, nature, shape, form Vin ii.76; M i.120 (spelt nth);
A i.50; iv.190 (C. osakkana); Miln 270, 316, 405; J i.71, 291,
368; ii.108; Vism 184, 225, 243; DhsA 321; DA i.88 (nth);
SnA 464 (=linga). su well formed Sn 28. adj. ()
having the appearance of megha-vaa PvA 251; chavi
appearance of the skin J i.489; vaa outward semblance
Nett 27; J i.271; sarra the (material) body Vism 193.
2. fuel J ii.330 =iv.471. 3. (usually spelt nth) a resting
place, meeting place, public place (market) (cp. Sk. sansthna
in this meaning). At S i.201 in phrase nad-tresu sahne
sabhsu rathiysu (i. e. at all public places). S i.201 reads
sahne (v. l. santhne); cp. K.S. i.256 from C.: "a resting
place (vissamana hne) near the city gate, when market
wares had been brought down," trsln "resting by the gates."
This stanza is quoted at SnA 20, where the ed. prefers reading panthne as correct reading (v. l. sahne). At M i.481
(nth)= S ii.28 (2 fr. b.), it seems to be used in the sense of
"end, stopping, cessation"=A iv.190 (the editions of S and A
have sahna). At J vi.113 it is translated by "market place,"
the comp. sahna-gata being explained by the Comm.
by sahna mariyda gat, but at J vi.360 sahnagata is by the English translator translated "a wealthy man"
(vinicchaye hito, Com.), which, however, ought to be "in the
court house" (cp. vinicchaya hna), i. e. publicly. In both
places there is also v. l. santhna .
Sahita [pp. of santihati] 1. established in (), settled, composed Sn 330 (santi soracca samdhi); Sdhp 458; su
firmly or well established Sn 755; Miln 383; in a good position, well situated DhsA 65. 2. being composed (as), being
of the nature of (), ullumpanasabhva of a helping disposition DA i.177; PvA 35.
744
Saik (saik)
Satimant
Saha (adj.) [cp. Sk. laka] 1. smooth, soft Vin i.202; ii.151;
Vv 5018 (=mudu VvA 213); Vism 260=KhA 59. sahena
softly Th 1, 460. 2. gentle, mild D ii.259; Sn 853; J i.202,
376; Nd1 234; PvA 56, 215. Of speech (opp. pharusa harsh)
M i.126; A iii.196; Dhs 1343. 3. delicate, exquisite Th 2,
258, 262, 264, 268. Cp. pari.
-kara "a wooden instrument for smoothing the ground,
or a sort of trowel," Abhp 1007; J iv.250 (loc. iya pisito);
iv.4 ( viya tilni pisamn); v.271; vi.114 (asani viya viravanto iya viya pisanto); cp. KhA 59; thus it seems to
mean also a sort of instrument for oil pressing, or a mortar.
Satimant
Sattava=satta
Sattati [cp. Sk. saptati] seventy D ii.256; Ap 118, 126 & passim.
As sattari at S ii.59; Ap 248 & passim.
Satta4 (num.) [cp. Vedic sapta, Gr. ; Av. hapta; Lat. septem,
Goth. sibun=E. seven etc.] number seven. It is a collective and
concluding (serial) number; its application has spread from the
week of 7 days (or nights), and is based on astronomical conception (Babylon!), this science being regarded as mystic, it
invests the number with a peculiar magic nimbus. From time
expressions it was transferred to space, esp. when originally connected with time (like satta bhmaka the 7
storied palace; the Vimnas with 700 towers: see vimna 2
& 6; or the 7 great lakes: see sara3 ; yojana 7 miles, cp. the
7 league boots!). Extremely frequent in folklore and fairy
tales (cp. 7 years of famine in Egypt, 7 days' festivals, dragon
with 7 heads, 7 ravens, 7 dwarfs, 7 little goats, 7 years enchantment, etc. etc.). For time expressions see in cpds.: ha,
msa, ratta, vassa. Cp. Sn 446 (vassni); J ii.91 (ky, thick
masses); DA i.25 (of the Buddh. Scriptures: sattahi msehi
sangta); DhA ii.34 (dhanni), 101 (mangal); the collective
expression 7 years, 7 months, 7 days at J v.48; the 7X70 avatthni S ii.59; and the curious enumeration of heptads at D
i.54. Cases: instr. sattahi D i.34; gen. sattanna D i.56;
746
Sattava=satta
Sadevaka
Satti (f.) [fr. ak, cp. Vedic akti] ability, power Dhtp 508 Usually in phrase yath satti as much as one can do, according to
one's ability Cp i.106 ; DhA i.399; or yath satti D i.102, or
y. sattiy DhA i.92.
Satthaka2 (adj.) [fr. sattha3 ] belonging to a caravan, caravan people, merchant PvA 274.
Satthar [Venic st, n. ag. fr. s] teacher, master. nom.
satth D i.49; Sn 179; acc. satthra D i.163; Sn 153, 343;
instr. satthr D i.163; instr. satthun Mhvs 32, 19; gen.
satthu D i.110; It 79; Vin i.12; gen. satthuno D ii.128; Sn
547, 573, loc. satthari Dhs 1004; nom. and acc. pl. satthro
D i.230; A i.277; Miln 4; gen. pl. satthrna J i.509.
See e. g. D i.230; A i.277; Vin i.8; Th 2, 387. The 6
teachers (as in detail at D i.52 59 & var. places) are Praa
Kassapa, Makkhali Gosla, Nigaha Nthaputta, Sajaya Belahiputta, Ajita Kesakambal. 5 teachers at Vin ii.186;
A iii.123. 3 at D i.230; A i.277. The Master par excellence is the Buddha D i.110; ii.128; iii.119 sq.; A iii.248;
iv.120, 460; Sn 153, 545, 955 (see exegesis in detail at Nd1
446=Nd2 630), 1148; Vism 389, 401, 604. gaa-satthar
leader of a company J ii.41, 72; satthra-dassana sight of the
Master SnA 49; satthu-d-anvaya successor of the M. Sn 556.
Satti2 (f.) [cp. Vedic akti, orig. identical with satti1 ] 1. knife,
dagger, sword A iv.130; J ii.153; Vism 313 (dgha daa
with a long handle); DhA i.189; ii.134 (tikhia a sharp knife).
mukha piercing words J i.341. 2. a spear, javelin S i.13;
A ii.117; J i.150.
-pajara lattice work of spears D ii.164. -langhana
javelin dance J i.430. -simbali-vana the forest of swords
(in purgatory) J v.453. -sla a sword stake, often in simile
pam km S i.128; A iii.97; Vism 341. Also N. of a purgatory J v.143 sq.
Sattika see tala.
Sattu1 [Vedic atru] an enemy J v.94 (acc. pl. sattavo); Vism 234
(nimmathana).
Sattu2 [cp. Sk. aktu] barley meal, flour Vin ii.116 (satthu);
Nd1 372; J iii.343 sq.; Pv iii.13 ; Dhs 646.
-paa baker's shop J vi.365. -pasibbaka flour sack;
bhasta id. J iii.346.
Satthi1 (nt. & f.) [cp. Sk. sakthi] the thigh Vin ii.161; Th 1, 151;
Vv 8117 ; J ii.408; iii.83; vi.528; antar between the thighs A
ii.245.
Sattha2 (nt.) [cp. Vedic stra, fr. s to teach] a science, art, lore
Miln 3; SnA 327, 447. vda science of right belief SnA
540; sadda grammar SnA 266; supina dream telling SnA
564.
Sattha [sa +attha; Sk. srtha] a caravan D ii.130, 339; Vin i.152,
292; Nd1 446; Dh 123 (appa with a small c.), Miln 351.
-gamanya (magga) a caravan road Vin iv.63. -vsa encampment D ii.340, 344. -vsika & vsin caravan people J
i.333. -vha a caravan leader, a merchant D ii.342; Vv 847
(cp. VvA 337); leader of a band, teacher; used as Ep. of the
Buddha S i.192; It 80, 108; Vin i.6. In exegesis of term Satth
at Nd1 446=Nd2 630=Vism 208.
Sadevaka
Saddhi
deva world D i.62; iii.76, 135; Sn 86; Vin i.8, 11; Dh 44; DA
i.174. At J i.14 sadevake (loc.) is used in the sense of "in the
world of men & gods."
Saddha2 [cp. Epic Sk. & Stra literature rddha, fr. rad
dh] a funeral rite in honour of departed relatives connected
with meals and gifts to the brahmins D i.97; A i.166; v.269,
273; DA i.267; saddha pamucati to give up offerings, to
abandon Brahmanism Vin i.7; D ii.39; Sn 1146. The word is
n. according to Abhp and A v.269 273; loc. e, D i.97; J
ii.360; ka saddha (acc. in a gth), seems to be f.; Com.
ib. 360 has saddh bhatta, a funeral repast (v. l. saddha
). Thus it seems to be confused with saddh.
Sadevika (adj.) [sa +dev+ka] together with his queen Mhvs 33,
70.
Sadda [cp. late Vedic abda; BSk. abda as nt. at Av i.3] 1.
sound, noise D i.79, 152; iii. 102 sq., 146, 234, 244 sq.,
269, 281; M iii.56, 267; A iii.30 sq.; iv.91, 248; J i.3 (ten
sounds); Sn 71; Vism 408 (var. kinds); Dhs 621 (udaka);
DhA ii.7 (udryana); defd at Vism 446 ("sota paihanana
lakkhaa," etc.) & at VbhA 45 ("sappat ti saddo, udhariyat ti attho"). 2. voice J ii.108. 3. word Vin i.11; It 114;
DhA i.15 (itthi); VbhA 387 (in nirutti); SnA 261, 318, 335.
-kovida a grammarian or phonetician SnA 321. -dhtu
element of sound Dhs 707. -naya science of grammar, etymology KhA 107. -bheda word analysis Vism 519 sq. -vid
a grammarian SnA 169. -vedhin shooting by sound Mhvs 23,
85. -sattha science of words, grammar SnA 266. -siddhi
analysis or correct formation of a word, grammatical explanation SnA 304, 551.
Saddh (f.) [cp. Vedic raddh: see saddahati] faith (on term cp.
Geiger, Sayutta trsln ii.452 ) D i.63; iii.164 sq.; S i.172=Sn
76; S v.196; Dh 144; A i.150, 210; iii.4 sq., 352; iv.23;
v.96; Dhs 12; Miln 34 sq.; Tikp 61, 166, 277, 282. instr. saddhya (used as adv.) in faith, by faith in (acc. or
gen.) Vin ii.289 (yasmantna); J v.176 (pabbajita); PvA 49
(kammaphala s.); or shortened to saddh ( pabbajita) M
i.123; A i.24; J i.130. The same phrase as saddhya pabbajita
at S i.120 is expld as "saddahitv" by Bdhgh (see K.S. i.321),
thus taking it as ger.
-nusrin walking according to faith M i.479; A i.74;
Pug 15; Nett 112, 189. -indriya (saddh) the faculty, i. e.
the moral sense, of faith D iii.239, 278; A ii.149; S v.193,
377; Dhs 12, 62, 75; Nett 19. -cariy living in faith Vism
101. -deyya a gift in faith D i.5; Vin i.298; iv.30; DA i.81.
-vimutta emancipated through faith M i.478; A i.74, 118 sq.;
Pug 15; Nett 190. -vimutti emancipation through faith Pug
15.
Saddala (adj.) [cp. Sk. dvala] grassy Th 1, 211; J i.87; vi. 518;
Miln 286; Pv ii.1210 (=tarua tia PvA 158).
Saddahati [Vedic rad dh, only in impers. forms grd. rad
dadhna; pp. rad dhita; inf. rad dh; cp. Av.
ra d id.; Lat. cred (d)o (cp. "creed"); Oir. cretim to believe. Fr. Idg. *kred (=cord heart)+*dhe, lit. to
put one's heart on] to believe, to have faith D ii.115; 244; S
iii.225; Pv ii.83 ; J v.480; DhA ii.27. ppr saddahanto DA i.81;
PvA 148 (a), 151 (a), 285; & saddahna S i.20, 214; Sn
186; It 112. Pot. saddheyya J ii.446 (=saddaheyya C.); 2nd
pl. saddahetha J iii.192; 3rd pl. saddheyyu S ii.255. At
J vi.575 (Pot.) saddahe seems to be used as an exclamation
in the sense of "I wonder" (cp. mae). saddahase at Pv
iv.81 is to be read saddyase (see saddyati). grd. saddhtabba J ii.37; v.480; PvA 217; saddahtabba D ii.346;
saddahitabba Miln 310; saddheyya Vin iii.188; and saddhyitabba (Caus.!) PvA 109. A Caus. aor. 2 sg. is (m)...
saddahesi J vi.136140 ger. saddhya J v.176 (=saddahitv
C.); inf. saddhtu J v.445. pp. (Caus.) saddhyita.
Caus. II. saddahpeti to make believe, to convince; Pot.
dahpeyya J vi.575; Pv iv.125 ; fut. dahpessati J i.294.
748
Saddhi
Santpa
J iv.260 (bhaya).
Santaka2 (adj.) [sa3 +antaka] limited (opp. anantika) S v.272.
Santac (f.) [?] bark J v.202 (sattaca?).
Santaka1 (adj.) [fr. sant; cp. BSk. santaka Divy 280 etc.] 1.
belonging to J i.122; nt. property J i.91, 494; DhA i.346.
2. due to (gen.) J iii.408; iv.37. 3. (being) in the power of
749
Santpa
Santhra
Santpa (adj. n.) [fr. sa+tap] burning; heat, fire; fig. torment, torture Sn 1123 (cp. Nd2 636); J i.502; Miln 97, 324;
VbhA 70 (various), 245 (aggi, suriya); Sdhp 9, 572.
Santik (f.) [unclear in origin & meaning] a kind of game, "spellicans" (Rh. D.); (Kern: knibbelspel) D i.6; Vin ii.10; iii.180;
DA i.85.
Santihati [sa+tihati] 1. to stand, stand still, remain, continue A iv.101 (udaka=stands still), 282, 302 sq.; Pug 31;
J i.26. 2. to be established, to be put into order Vin ii.11.
3. to stick to, to be fixed or settled, to be composed D
ii.206; iii.239 (citta); S v.321; Vin i.9, 15; It 43. 4. to
restrain oneself J i.438. 5. to wait for (acc.) DhA i.50.
Forms: pres. santihati D ii.206; S iii.133; sahahati
J vi.160; & sahti Pug 31; J iv.469. ppr. sahahanto
Vin i.9; Pot. sahaheyya Vin ii.11; S v.321. aor. sahsi
Vin i.15; sahahisu (3rd pl.) S ii.224. Inf. sahtu J
i.438; DhA i.50. pp. sahita Caus. II. sahapeti (&
hpeti).
Santraa (nt.) [sa+traa] investigation, decision; as t.t. denoting a stage in the act of sense cognition, judging an impression (see Cpd. 28, 40, 238) DA i.194; DhsA 264, 269,
272; Vism 459. As (f.) at Nett 82, 191. -kicca function
of judging Tikp 33; Vism 21, 454.
Santhra
Sandhi
sandna).
Sandiddha [sa+diddha] smeared, indistinct, husky Vin ii.202;
DA i.282.
Sandiyyati & sandyati [sa+diyyati(=dyati)=Sk. dyate of dyati, i. e. d2 to cut: see dtta] to be vexed, to resent S ii.200 sq.;
J vi.570 (spelt wrongly sandhyati; C. expls as "manku hoti").
Sandana2 [cp. Vedic syandana] a chariot Mhvs 21, 25; Dpvs 14,
56; Vv 642; J iv.103; v.264; vi.22.
Sandahati [sa+dahati1 ] to put together, to connect, to fit, to arrange J iv.336; Mhvs vii.18; ppr. med. sandahamna DhsA
113; ger. sandahitv J iv.336; & sandhya lit. after putting
on J iv.258 (the arrow on to the bow); fig. with reference to,
concerning M i.503; J i.203, 274; ii.177; PvA 87, 89, 110; towards J i.491; iii.295. pp. sandhyate [& sandhiyyate] to be
put together, to be self contained Pug 32; to be connected
SnA 376, 572; to reflect upon, to resent Sn 366; to be reconciled J ii.114. pp. sahita.
- pp.
Sandhi (m. & f.) [fr. sa+dh] 1. union, junction Miln 330
(of 2 roads); Bdhgh on S ii.270 (between 2 houses). 2.
breach, break, hole, chasm D ii.83=A v.195; Th 1, 786; J
v.459. loka a window Vin ii.172; sandhi chindati to
make a break, to break into a house D i.52; DA i.159. 3.
joint, piece, link J ii.88; Vism 277 (the 5, of kammahna);
Mhvs 33, 11; 34, 47; applied to the joints of the body Vism
185 (the 14 mah); DhsA 324. 4. connection, combination VbhA 191 (hetuphala & phalahetu etc.). 5. euphonic
junction, euphony, "sandhi" SnA 76. See pada. 6. agreement Mhvs 9, 16.
-cheda (1) housebreaking J i.187 sq.; ii.388. (2) one
751
Sandhi
Sannisinna
Vism 43.
Sanniteti [sa+niteti] to strike J v.71.
Sannitodaka (nt.) [fr. sa+ni+tud] "pricking," instigating, jeering D i.189; A i.187; S ii.282.
Sannidhna (nt.) [sa+nidhna) lit. "putting down together,"
proximity Dvs v.39.
Sannidhi [sa+nidhi] putting together, storing up D i.6; Sn 306,
924; Nd1 372; -kra storing D i.6; -kraka, storing up, store
M i.523; Vin i.209; iv.87; D iii.235; A iii.109; iv.370. -kata
stored up Vin ii.270; put by, postponed Vin i.254.
Sandhovika [fr.
sandhovati] washing; kaa-sandhovik
khi ear washing sport or gambol (of elephants, with
pihi etc.) A v.202. So probably for saadhovika at M
i.229, 375. Cp. sadhovana (?).
Sanniptika (adj.) [fr. last] resulting from the union of the humours of the body A ii.87; v.110; S iv.230; Miln 135, 137,
302, 304.
Sannaddha [pp. of sannayhati] 1. fastened, bound, D ii.350 (susannaddha); Miln 339. 2. put on, clothed (with) Pv iv.136
(dussa). 3. armed, accoutred S ii.284; J i.179; Dh 387;
DhA iv.144; PvA 154 (dhanu kalpa).
752
Sannisinna
Sappaka
ii.109; Vin ii.296; J i.120. 2. (having become) settled, established Vin ii.278 (gabbh pregnant).
Sapadi (adv.) [sa2 +adv. formn fr. pada] instantly, at once Dvs
i.62.
Sannta [pp. fr. sanneti] mixed, put together, kneaded Mhvs 29,
11 & 12.
Sappaccaya (adj.) [sa3 +paccaya] correlated, having a cause, conditioned D i.180; A i.82; Dhs 1083.
Sappaa (adj.) [sa3 +paa] wise M i.225; Sn 591; often as
sapaa It 36; Sn 90; J ii.65.
Sapatta [Sk. sapatna] hostile, rival Th 2, 347; ThA 242; sapattarj a rival king J i.358; ii.94; iii.416; asapatta without enmity Sn 150; sapatta (m.) a rival, foe, It 83; A iv.94 sq.; J
i.297.
Sappati [sp, cp. Vedic sarpati, Gr. , Lat. serpo; Dhtp 194
"gamana"] to creep, crawl: see sa.
Sapatha [fr. ap] an oath Vin i.347; J i.180, 267; iii.138; SnA
418.
753
Sappaka
Sabrahmacarin
iii.125; J i.198.
Sappya (adj.) [sa+p (=pra+)+i, cp. pya. The corresponding BSk. form is smpreya (=sa+pra+i, with gua), e. g.
Av i.255; iii.110] likely, beneficial, fit, suitable A i.120; S
iii.268; iv.23 sq., 133 sq. (Nibbna paipad); J i.182, 195;
ii.436 (kici sappya something that did him good, a remedy); Vin i.292, 302; Miln 215 (sappyakiriy, giving a drug).
nt. something beneficial, benefit, help Vism 34, 87 (sevin);
VbhA 265 (various), 271 (kath). Ten sappyas & 10 asappyas at DhsA 168. sappysappya what is suitable,
and what not J i.215, 471; used as the last part of a compound,
meaning what is suitable with reference to: sensanasappya
(nt.) suitable lodgings J i.215.
Sappyat (f.) [abstr. fr. sappya] agreeableness, suitability,
convenience Vism 79, 121 (a), 127.
Sappi (nt.) [Vedic sarpis] clarified butter, ghee D i.9, 141, 201;
A i.278; A ii.95, 207 (tela); iii.219; iv.103; Sn 295 (tela).
Dhs 646; J i.184; ii.43; iv.223 (tela); Vin i.58, etc. -maa
[cp. BSk. sarpimaa Divy 3 etc.] the scum, froth, cream of
clarified butter, the best of ghee D i.201; A ii.95; VvA 172;
Pug 70; its tayo gu Miln 322.
Sappin (adj. n.) [fr. sappati] crawling, creeping; moving
along: see pha. (f.) sappin a female snake J vi.339
(where the differences between a male and a female snake are
discussed).
Sapptika (adj.) [sa3 +pti+ka] accompanied by the feeling of joy,
joyful A i.81; J i.10; Vism 86 (opp. nipptika).
Sappurisa [sat (=sant)+purisa] a good, worthy man M iii.21, 37;
D iii.252 (the 7 s dhamm), 274, 276, 283; A ii.217 sq.,
239; Dhs 259=1003; Vin i.56; Dh 54; Pv ii.98 ; ii.945 ; iv.187 ;
J i.202; equal to ariya M i.8; S iii.4; asappurisa=anariya SnA
479. sappurisatara a better man S v.20.
Saphala (adj.) [sa3 +phala] bearing fruit, having its reward Dh 52.
Saphalaka (adj.) [sa3 +phalaka] together with his shield Mhvs 25,
63.
Sabala [Vedic abala (e. g. A. V. 8, 1, 9)=, Weber, Ind.
Stud. ii.297] spotted, variegated Sn 675; Vism 51; VvA 253;
name of one of the dogs in the Lokantara hell J vi.106, 247
(Sablo ca Smo ca). asabala, unspotted D ii.80.
-krin acting inconsistently A ii.187.
Sabbvant (adj.) [cp. BSk. sarvvant Divy 294, 298, 352] all,
entire D i.73, 251; iii.224; A iii.27; v.299 sq., 344 sq.
Sabbha see a.
Sabbhin see a.
Sabrahmaka (adj.) [sa3 +brahma+ka] including the Brahma
world D i.62; iii.76, 135; A i.260; ii.70; S v.423; Vin i.11;
DA i.174.
Sabrahmacarin (adj. n.) [sa3 +brahmacrin] a fellow student
754
Sabrahmacarin
Samajjhaga
Samaka (adj.) [cp. BSk. samaka Divy 585] equal, like, same
Miln 122, 410; of the same height (of a seat) Vin ii.169.
samaka (adv.) equally Miln 82.
Sabhojana (adj. nt.) [sa3 +bhojana] sharing food (?) Vin iv.95;
Sn 102.
Sama1 [fr. am: see sammati1 ] calmness, tranquillity, mental
quiet Sn 896. sama carati to become calm, quiescent J
iv.172. Cp. cariy & crin.
Sama3 (adj.) [Vedic sama, fr. sa2 ; see etym. under sa] 1. even,
level J i.315; iii.172; Mhvs 23, 51. sama karoti to level Dh
178; SnA 66. Opp. visama. 2. like, equal, the same D
i.123, 174; S i.12; Sn 90, 226, 799, 842; It 17, 64; Dh 306;
Miln 4. The compared noun is put in the instr.; or precedes as
first part of cpd. 3. impartial, upright, of even mind, just A
i.74, 293 sq.; Sn 215, 468, 952. 4. sama, foll. by numerals, means "altogether,". e. g. tisa thirty altogether Bu 18,
18. 5. Cases as adv.: instr. samena with justice, impartially (=dhammena K.S. i.321) Dh 257; J i.180; acc. sama
equally D ii.166; together with, at, D ii.288; Mhvs 11, 12.
-cga equally liberal A ii.62. -jana an ordinary man,
common people M iii.154=Vin i.349. -jtika of the same
caste J i.68. -jvit regular life, living economically A iv.281
sq. -tala level, even J i.7; Pv iv.121 (of a pond). -dhraa
equal support or sustenance SnA 95. -dhura carrying an
equal burden, equal J i.191; asamadhura incomparable Sn 694
sq.; J i.193. But sama dhura ggahaa "complete imperiousness" VbhA 492 (see yugaggha). -vhita evenly borne
along (of equanimity) DhsA 133. -vibhatta in equal shares
Samacchati [sa+acchati] to sit down together J ii.67 (samacchare); iv.356; vi.104, 127.
Samacchidagatta (adj.)
limbs Sn 673.
755
Samajjhaga
Samanukkamati
samadhigacchati.)
Samacati [sam+ac] to bend together Vin iv.171, 363.
Samacara [sama1 +cara] pacified, calm S i.236.
Samacinteti to think S i.124; see sacinteti.
Sama (f.) [sa+a] designation, name D i.202; ii.20; M
iii.68; S ii.191; Sn 611, 648; J ii.65; Dhs 1306; loka a common appellation, a popular expression D i.202.
Samatikkama (adj.) [sa+atikamma] passing beyond, overcoming D i.34; ii.290; M i.41, 455; Vin i.3; J v.454; Vism 111.
Samatikkamati [sa+atikkamati] to cross over, to transcend D
i.35; to elapse Mhvs 13, 5; ger. samatikkamma D i.35; M
41; pp. samatikkanta crossed over, or escaped from S iii.80;
Dh 195.
Samatitthika (adj.) [sama3 +tittha+ika] even or level with the border or bank, i. e. quite full, brimful D i.244; ii.89; M i.435;
ii.7=Miln 213; S ii.134; v.170; J i.400; J i.235, 393; Miln
121; Vism 170 (patta tittika pretv; v. l. titthika);
A iii.403; Vin i.230; iv.190; often written tittika and tit-
756
Samanukkamati
Samaya
iii.373.
757
Samaya
Samdna
Samavattakkhandha (adj.)
[sama+vatta+kh., but BSk.
sasavtta] having the shoulders round, one of the lakkhaas
of a Buddha D ii.18; iii.144, 164; Dial. ii.15: "his bust is
equally rounded."
to transfer, entrust D
758
Samdna
Sampajjati
759
Sampajjati
Samiddha
Samitvin [samita3 +vin, cp. vijitvin] one who has quieted himself, calm, Sn 449, 520; S i.62, 188; A ii.49, 50. Cp. BSk.
amitvin & samitvin.
760
Samiddha
Samudaya
Samidh (f.) [fr. sa+idh; see indhana] fuel, firewood SnA 174.
Samihita [=sahita] collected, composed Vin i.245= D
i.104=238; A iii.224=229=DA i.273; D i.241, 272.
Sampa (adj.) [cp. Epic & Class. Sk. sampa] near, close (to) SnA
43 (bhumma vacana), 174, 437; KhA 111; PvA 47 (dvra
magga) (nt.) proximity D i.118. Cases adverbially: acc. a
near to PvA 107; loc. -e near (with gen.) SnA 23, 256; PvA
10, 17, 67, 120.
-ga approaching Mhvs 4, 27; 25, 74. -cara being near
DhsA 193. -crin being near D i.206; ii.139. -ha standing
near Mhvs 37, 164.
Samuchaka (adj.) [sa+uncha+ka] only as nt. adv. gleaning, (living) by gleaning S i.19; J iv.466 ( carati).
Samuttejaka (adj.) [fr. samuttejeti] instigating, inciting, gladdening M i.146; A ii.97; iv.296, 328; v.155; S v.162; It 107.
Samuttejeti [sa+ud+tij] to excite, gladden, to fill with enthusiasm Vin i.18; D i.126. Cp. BSk. samuttejayati, e. g. Divy
80.
Samudaya
Samuppilava
samudcarita, pp.
of
Samudcra [sa+ud+cra] behaviour, practice, habit, familiarity J iv.22; SnA 6; DhsA 392; PvA 279.
Samupahahati [sa+upahahati] to serve, help; pres. samupahti Sdhp 283; aor. samupahahi Mhvs 33, 95.
Samupama [sa+upama] resembling Mhvs 37, 68; also sampama J i.146; v.155; vi.534.
to;
aor.
Samupdika being on a level with the water Miln 237 (Trenckner conjectures samupodika). The better reading, however, is
samupp, sama=peace, quiet, thus "producing quiet," calm.
Samudeti [sa+udeti] to arise; pres. samudayati (v. l. samudyati) S ii.78; samudeti A iii.338; pp. samudita.
Samuppilava
Samosaraa
Samussita [sa+ussita] 1. elevated, erected J iii.497. - 2. arrogant, proud, haughty Dh 147 (interpreted at DhA iii.109 as
"compounded," i. e. the body made up of 300 bones); A i.199;
SnA 288 ( bhassa high and mighty talk).
Samodita united VvA 186 (so read for samm), 320; cp. samudita.
Samodhna (nt.) [sa+odhna, cp. odahana] collocation, combination Bu ii.59=J i.14; S iv.215=v.212; application (of a story)
J ii.381. samodhna gacchati to come together, to combine,
to be contained in Vin i.62; M i.184=S i.86; v.43, 231=A v.21
(Com. odhnapakkhepa) A iii.364; SnA 2; Vism 7; VbhA
107; samodhnagata wrapped together Miln 362; samodhnaparivsa a combined, inclusive probation Vin ii.48 sq.
Samodhnat (f.) [abstr. fr. samodhna] combination, application, pursuance, in vutti J iii.541 (so read for vatti).
Samodhneti [Denom. fr. samodhna] to combine, put together,
connect J i.9, 14; DA i.18; SnA 167, 193, 400; especially jtaka s. to apply a Jtaka to the incident J i.106, 171; ii.381
& passim.
Samorodha [sa+orodha] barricading, torpor Dhs 1157; DhsA
379.
Samorohati [sa+orohati] to descend; ger. samoruyha Mhvs
10, 35.
Samosaraa
Sampad
Miln 38.
Sampajaa (nt.) [fr. sampajna, i. e. *sampajnya] attention, consideration, discrimination, comprehension, circumspection A i.13 sq.; ii.93; iii.307; iv.320; v.98 sq.; S iii.169; D
iii.213 (sati+samp. opp. to muha-sacca+ asampajaa),
273. Description of it in detail at DA i.183 sq.=VbhA 347 sq.,
where given as fourfold, viz. stthaka, sappya, gocara,
asammoha, with examples. Often combined with sati, with
which almost synonymous, e. g. at D i.63; A i.43; ii.44 sq.;
v.115, 118.
Sampajna (adj.) [sa+pajna, cp. pajnti; BSk. sam-prajna,
MVastu i.206; ii.360] thoughtful, mindful, attentive, deliberate, almost syn. with sata, mindful D i.37; ii.94 sq.; Sn 413,
931; It 10, 42; Pug 25; D iii.49, 58, 221, 224 sq.; A iv.47 sq.,
300 sq., 457 sq.; Nd1 395; Nd2 141. sampajnakrin acting
with consideration or full attention D i.70; ii.95, 292; A ii.210;
v.206; VbhA 347 sq.; DA i.184 sq.; sampjanamusvda deliberate lie Vin iv.2; It 18; D iii.45; A i.128; iv.370; v.265; J
i.23.
Sampatthan (f.)
1059.
Sampad (f.) [fr. sa+pad, cp. BSk. sampad Divy 401 (devamanuya), also sampatti] 1. attainment, success, accomplishment; happiness, good fortune; blessing, bliss A i.38;
Pv ii.947 (=sampatti PvA 132). Sampad in its pregnant
meaning is applied to the accomplishments of the individual
in the course of his religious development. Thus it is used
with sla, citta, & pa at D i.171 sq. and many other passages in an almost encyclopedic sense. Here with sla the
whole of the slakkhandha (D i.63 sq.) is understood; citta
means the cultivation of the heart & attainments of the mind
relating to composure, concentration and religious meditation,
otherwise called samdhikkhandha. It includes those stages of
meditation which are enumd under samdhi. With pa are
meant the attainments of higher wisdom and spiritual emancipation, connected with supernormal faculties, culminating in
Arahantship and extinction of all causes of rebirth, otherwise
called vijj (see the 8 items of this under vijj b.). The same
764
Sampad
Samparibhinna
pp.
Samparibhinna (adj.)
765
Samparibhinna
Sampputi
(gatta).
Samparivajjeti [sa+parivajjeti] to avoid, shun Sdhp 52, 208.
Samparivattaka (adj.) [sa+parivattaka] rolling about grovelling J ii.142 (turning somersaults); DhA ii.5, 12; Miln 253,
357; samparivattaka (adv.) in a rolling about manner M
ii.138; samparivattaka samparivattaka continually turning (it) Vin i.50.
Samparivattati [sa+parivattati] to turn, to roll about; ppr. samparivattamna J i.140; pp. samparivatta. Caus. samparivatteti [cp. BSk. parivartayati to wring one's hands Divy
263] to turn over in one's mind, to ponder over S v.89.
Sampavaita (adj.)
vi.398.
Sampputi
Sambdha
Sampha (adj. n.) [not clear, if & how connected with Sk.
apa, grass. The BSk. has sambhinna pralpa for sampha ppalpa] frivolous; nt. frivolity, foolishness; only in
connection with expressions of talking, as sampha bhsati
to speak frivolously A ii.23; Sn 158; sampha gira bh.
J vi.295; sampha palapati Tikp 167 sq. Also in cpds.
palpa frivolous talk D i.4; iii.69, 82, 175, 269; A i.269 sq.,
298; ii.60, 84, 209; iii.254, 433; iv. 248; v.251 sq., 261 sq.;
Tikp 168, 281; DA i.76; palpin talking frivolously D i.138;
iii.82; A i.298; Pug 39, 58.
Sampiya (adj.) [sa+piya] friendly; sampiyena by mutual consent, in mutual love Sn 123, 290.
Sampiyyati [sa+piyyati] to receive with joy, to treat kindly,
address with love J iii.482; ppr. sampiyyanto J i.135;
sampiyyamna (do.) fondling, being fond of D ii.223; J i.191,
297, 361; ii.85; DhA ii.65. aor. 3rd pl. sampiyyisu J
vi.127.
Sambdha [cp. Sk. sambdha] 1. crowding, pressure, inconvenience from crowding, obstruction Vism 119. janasambdharahita free from crowding Miln 409; kihasambdha crowding of corn, the time when the corn is growing thick M i.115;
J i.143, 388. yassa sambdho bhavissati he who finds it
too crowded Vin iv.43; asambdha unobstructed Sn 150; atisambdhat (q. v.) the state of being too narrow J i.7; puttadrasambdhasayana a bed encumbered with child and wife
Sambdha
Miln 243; cp. S i.78; (in fig. sense) difficulty, trouble S i.7,
48; J iv.488; sambdhapaipanna of the eclipsed moon S i.50.
As adjective "crowded, dense" sambdho gharavso life in the
family is confined, i. e. a narrow life, full of hindrances D
i.63, 250; S ii.219; v.350; DA i.180; s. magga a crowded
path J i.104; nijana vana Vism 342; s. vyha S v.369.
atisambdha too confined DhA i.310 (cakkava). compar. sambdhatara S v.350; asambdha comfortably J i.80.
2. pudendum masculinum Vin i.216; ii.134; pudendum
muliebre Vin iv.259; Sn 609; sambdhahna (nt.) pudendum
muliebre J i.61; iv.260.
Sambhajati [sa+bhajati] to split, break J v.32; Caus. sambhajeti to break M i.237; S i.123; pass. aor. samabhajjisa J
v.70. pp. sambhagga. Cp. sampali.
Sambhati [rambh, given as sambh at Dhtp 214 in meaning "visssa"] to subside, to be calmed; only in prep. combn paippassambhati (q. v.).
Sambhatta [pp. of sambhajati] devoted, a friend J i.106, 221; Nd1
226=Vism 25. yathsambhatta according to where each
one's companions live D ii.98; S v.152.
Sambojjhanga [sa+bojjhanga] constituent of Sambodhi (enlightenment), of which there are seven: sati, selfpossession;
dhammavicaya, investigation of doctrine; viriya, energy; pti,
joy; passaddhi, tranquillity; samdhi, concentration; upekh,
equanimity D ii.79, 303 sq.; iii.106, 226; M i.61 sq.; A iv.23;
S v.110 sq.; Nd2 s. v. Miln 340; VbhA 135, 310. The characteristics of the several constitutents together with var. means
of cultivation are given at Vism 132 sq.=VbhA 275 sq.
Sambodha [sa+bodha] enlightenment, highest wisdom, awakening; the insight belonging to the three higher stages of the
Path, Vin i.10; D iii.130 sq., 136 sq.; S ii.223; v.214; M i.16,
241; A i.258; ii.200, 240 sq., 325 sq.; v.238 sq.; It 27; pubbe
sambodh, before attaining insight M i.17, 163; ii.211; iii.157;
S ii.5, 10; iv.6, 8, 97, 233; v.281; A i.258; iii.82, 240. abhabba
sambodhya, incapable of insight M i.200, 241=A ii 200. (Cp.
Dial. i.190 192.)
-gmin leading to enlightenment D iii.264; Sn p. 140.
-pakkhika belonging to enlightenment A iv.357. -sukha the
bliss of enlightenment A iv.341 sq.
768
Sammatta
Sambhra [fr. sa+bh] "what is carried together," viz. 1. accumulation, product, preparation; sambhraseda bringing on
sweating by artificial means Vin i.205. 2. materials, requisite ingredients (of food) Miln 258; J i.481; v.13, 506; J i.9;
ii.18; iv.492; dabba an effective requisite DhA i.321; ii.114;
bodhis the necessary conditions for obtaining enlightening J
i.1; vimokkhas ThA 214. 3. constituent part, element
S iv.197; DhsA 306. 4. bringing together, collocation S
i.135; Miln 28.
Samma3 a cymbal Miln 60; Dhs 621; J i.3; DhsA 319. - Otherwise as ta a kind of cymbal Th 1, 893, 911; Vv 353 ; VvA
161; J vi.60; 277 ( l ).
Sambhveti [Caus. of sambhavati. The Dhtp (512) gives a special root sambhu in meaning "ppuana"] 1. to undertake,
achieve, to be intent on (acc.) Vin i.253; DhsA 163. 2. to
reach, catch up to (acc.) Vin i.277; ii.300. 3. to produce,
effect Miln 49. 4. to consider J iii.220. 5. to honour,
esteem; grd. bhvanya to be honoured or respected, honourable VvA 152; MA 156. pp. sambhvita.
Sammatta
Sammijati
191; sammatta krit ibid. The 8 sammatt are the 8 angas of the ariya magga (see magga 2 a) D iii.255; the 10 are
the above with the addition of samm a and vimutti A
v.240.
770
Sammijati
Sayath
Sammissat (f.) [fr. sa+missa] the state of being mixed, confusion DhsA 311.
Saya (adv.) [see etym. under sa4 ] self, by oneself Vin i.8; D
i.12; DA i.175; Sn 57, 320, etc.; p. 57, 100, etc.; Mhvs 7, 63
(for f.). Also with ref. to several people, e. g. DhA i.13.
-kata made by itself, spontaneous D iii.137 (loka); S ii.19
sq. (dukkha); Ud 69 sq. -jta born from oneself, sprung up
spontaneously J i.325; ii.129. -pabha radiating light from
oneself, a kind of devas D i.17; iii.28 sq., 84 sq.; Sn 404; DA
i.110 -bh self dependent, an epithet of a Buddha Bu xiv.1
= J i.39; Miln 214, 227, 236; Vism 234; SnA 106 (f. abstr.
sayambhut), 135. -vara self choice J v.426. -vasin self
controlled, independent Bu ii.20=J i.5; Dvs i.22.
771
Sayath
Sarabha
68.
Sara [cp. Vedic ara] 1. the reed Saccharum sara Miln 342.
2. an arrow (orig. made of that reed) D i.9; Dh 304; Miln 396;
DhA 216 (visa pta).
-tua a beak as sharp as an arrow DhA iii.32. -daaka
shaft of an arrow DhA ii.141. -bhanga arrow breaking
Vism 411 (in comp.).
Saraa3 [fr. sm; i. e. sarati2 ] (nt.) remembrance; -t (f.) remembering Dhs 14, 23; Pug 21, 25.
Saraya (nt.) [grd. formation fr. saraa2 ] something to be remembered A i.106.
Sarati1 [s given by Dhtp 248 as "gati"] to go, flow, run, move
along J iii.95 (=parihyati nassati C.); Pot. sare J iv.284.
aor. asar J vi.199. pp. sarita1 . Caus. sreti (1) to
make go A i.141; iii.28=M i.124=S iv.176 J iv.99; Miln 378;
Vism 207. (2) to rub, to mix Vin ii.116. Also sarpeti.
A Desid. formn is sisare (3rd pl. med.) at Vv 647 (=Sk.
sisrati), cp. Geiger, P.Gr. 184.
Sarati2 [sm, cp. smti=sati; Dhtp 248 "cint"; Lat memor, memoria=memory; Gr. care, witness, martyr; Goth.
marnan=E. mourn to care, etc.] to remember D ii.234; Vin
i.28; ii.79; J ii.29. A diaeretic form is sumarati Dh 324; ger.
sumariya Mhvs 4, 65. 1st pl. saremhase Th 2, 383; med.
sare J vi.227; imper. sara Th 1, 445; & sarhi Miln 79; 3rd
sg. saratu Vin i.273. ppr. sara Mhvs 3, 6; & saramna
Vin i.103. aor. sari J i.330; fut. sarissati J vi.496. ger.
saritv J i.214. pp. sata2 & sarita2 . Caus. sreti to remind Vin ii.3 sq., 276; iii.221; srayamna, reminding J i.50;
ppr. pass. sriyamna Vin iii.221; w. acc. D ii.234; w. gen.
Dh 324; J vi.496; with foll. fut. II. (in t) Vin ii.125, 4; iii.44,
9, etc. Caus. II. sarpeti Vin iii.44; Miln 37 (with double
acc.), 79.
Saras (f.) [fr. sa3 +rasi] the sun (lit. having rays) Mhvs 18,
772
Sarabha
Salk
iv.263 sq.
-pallanka "antelope couch," a high seat, from which
the Bodhisat preaches J iii.342 (cp. vara pallanka J iii.364).
-pdaka having legs like those of a gazelle J i.267.
S iv.286; A i.50; ii.41; iii.57 sq., 323 sq.; iv.190. Sn 478, 584;
Dh 151; Nd1 181; J i.394 (six blemishes); ii.31; antimasarra
one who wears his last body, an Angmin Sn 624; S i.210;
Dh 400. 2. a dead body, a corpse D ii.141, 164; M iii.91.
3. the bones D ii.164. 4. relics Vv 63, 32; VvA 269.
-ahaka the bony framework of the body DhsA 338.
-bh radiation of light proceeding from the body, lustre SnA
16 ( mucati to send forth), 41 (id.), 140 (id.). -kicca (1)
funeral ceremonies, obsequies J i.180; ii.5; VvA 76, 257; PvA
74, 76, 162. (2) "bodily function," satisfying the body's
wants J ii.77; iv.37. -davya (=dabba1 ) fitness of body, good
body, beauty J ii.137. -dhtu a body relic (of the Buddha)
Mhvs 13, 167; VvA 165, 269. -pabh lustre of the body DhA
i.106. -parikamma attending the body SnA 52. -masa the
flesh of the body J iii.53. -vaa the (outward) appearance of
the body Vism 193. -valaja discharge from the body, faeces
DhA ii.55; iv.46 (hna). See valaja. -sanghta perfection
of body Vism 194. -sahna constitution of the body, bodily
form Vism 193.
Sarpa (adj.) [sa2 +rpa] 1. of the same form A i.162; Pug 56.
2. [sa3 +rpa] having a body A i.83.
Sarikkha (adj.) [cp. Sk. sadka, fr. sad=P. sadisa] like, resembling S i.66; J i.443; iii.262.
Salana (nt.) [fr. al] moving, shaking VvA 169; DhsA 62 (in defn
of kusala as "kucchitna salan'dhi atthehi kusala").
Sarikkhatta (nt.)
[fr.
sarikkha] likeness DhsA 63; as
sarikkhakatta (kamma) at DhsA 347.
773
Salk
Savighta
Sallapati [sa+lapati] to talk (with) D i.90; ii.109; Miln 4; sallapeti the same Vin iv.14 .
Sallalkata pierced, perforated J i.180. Trenckner suggests that
this form may have arisen from *sallakkata (from sallaka, porcupine).
Sallahuka (adj.) [sa+lahuka] light J i.277; ii.26; Vism 65; DhA
iv.17; sallahukena nakkhattena on lucky nights J ii.278; sallahukavuttin whose wants are easily met, frugal Sn 144; DA
i.207.
Sallpa [sa+lpa] conversation D i.89; A ii.182; J i.112, 189;
Miln 94. Often in cpd. kath & allpa.
Salila (nt.) [cp. Sk. salila, to sarati ] water Sn 62, 319, 672; J
i.8; v.169; VvA 41; PvA 157; Nd2 665 ("vuccati udaka");
Miln 132 (written salia); Sdhp 168. It is also adj. salila po
flowing water J vi.534; cp. Miln 114: na t nadiyo dhuva
salil.
-dhr shower of water Miln 117. -vuhi id. Vism 234.
Savant (f.) [cp. Vedic sravat, orig. ppr. of sru, sravati] a river
Vin ii.238; Bu ii.86=J i.18; J vi.485; Miln 319.
774
Savighta
Saha
19, 27.
Sassa (nt.) [cp. Vedic sasya] corn, crop M i.116; J i.86, 143, 152;
ii.135; Miln 2; DhA i.97; SnA 48; sassasamaya crop time J
i.143; susassa abounding in corn Vin i.238; pl. m. sass J
i.340. -kamma agriculture J vi.101; -kla harvest time Vin
iv.264; -hna= -khetta J vi.297; dussassa (having) bad
crops Vin i.238; A i.160; KhA 218 (=dubbhikkh).
-uddharaa lifting the corn Miln 307. -ghta destroying
property S ii.218 sq.
Savicra accompanied by investigation D i.37 etc., in the description of the first Jhna. See vicra.
Savijjuka (adj.)
ii.262.
Sassatika [fr. sassata] eternalist D i.17; Mhbv 110 (ekacca partial eternalist); Vin iii.312; -ika J v.18, 19.
Sasa [Vedic aa, with Ohg. haso=E. hare to Lat. canus grey,
greyish brown; cp. Ags. hasu] a hare, rabbit Dh 342; J
iv.85; of the hare in the moon J iv.84 sq.; saslk (=sas ca
ulk ca) J vi.564.
-lakkhaa the sign of a hare J i.172; iii.55. -lajana id.
VvA 314 (vant=sasin, the moon). -visa a hare's horn (an
impossibility) J iii.477.
Sassatisama (adv.) [cp. Sk. avat sam] for ever and ever
D i.14; M i.8; S iii.143; also sassat sam J iii.255; Vv 6314
(explained by sassathi samna, like the eternal things viz.,
earth, sun, moon, etc., VvA 265); J iii.256; DA i.105.
Sassamabrhmaa (fem. ) together, with samaas and
brahmins Vin i.11; D i.62; iii.76, 135; S v.423; Sn p. 100;
DA i.174.
Sasambhra (adj.) [sa3 +sambhra] with the ingredients or constituents Vism 20, 352, 353.
Sass and Sassu (f.) [Vedic var: see sasura] mother-in-law Vin
iii.137; A ii.78; Th 2, 407; Sn 125; J i.337; iii.425 sq.; v.286
(gen. sassuy); DhA i.307; VvA 110, 121; PvA 89. sassu
sasure, see sasura; sassudeva worshipping one's mother-in-law
as a god S i.86; J iv.322.
Sasin [Sk. ain, fr. aa] the moon Dvs iv.29; J iii.141; v.33;
Vv 811 (=canda VvA 314), 823 .
Sassa (adj.) [sa3 +ssa] together with the head; sassa up to the
head D i.76, 246; J i.298; sassaka head and all D ii.324; Sn,
p. 80.
Saha1 (indecl.) [fr. sa3 ; cp. Vedic saha] prep. & prefix, meaning:
in conjunction with, together, accompanied by; immediately
after (with instr.) Vin i.38; Sn 49, 928; Th 2, 414=425; sah
Sn 231.
-anukkama=sahnukkama with the bridle Dh 398; DhA
iv.161. -macca together with the ministers Mhvs 5, 182.
-vudha together with one's weapons J iv.416. -indaka together with Indra D ii.208, 221; Vv 301 . -daka together with
water J v.407. -oha together with the stolen goods; cora
a gahetv Vism 180; Mhvs 23, 11 (thena); 35, 11. See
oha. -odaka containing water Mhvs 4, 13. -orodha with
his harem Mhvs 5, 182; -kathin conversing with (instr.) M
775
Saha
Sahita
i.489. -kra a sort of fragrant mango KhA 53. -gata accompanying, connected with, concomitant Vin i.10; D ii.186;
S v.421; Kvu 337; DhsA 157. -ggaa together with his companions Dpvs 14, 58. -cetiya containing a Cetiya Mhvs 33,
10. -ja born at the same time Vv 8115 . -jta 1. born at
the same time, of equal age J i.54; vi.512. 2. arisen at
the same time, coinciding with (instr.) Kvu 337, 620; VbhA
127. 3. (in paccaya) the relation of co nascence, coincidence Dukp 17 sq., 52 sq., 113 sq., 129 sq., 145 sq., 225
sq., 334 sq. and passim; Tikp 36 sq., 62 sq., 107 sq., 243
sq.; Vism 535. -jvin (fem. ) living together with Vin
iv.291, 325 sq. -dhammika having the same Dhamma, co
religionist M i.64; Nd1 485 (opp. para); regarding the
Dhamma D i.94, 161; M i.368; Vin i.134; Nett 52; DA i.263
(=sahetuka, sakraa); that which is in accordance with the
dhamma Dhs 1327; M i.482; adv. in accordance with
the dhamma Vin i.60, 69; iii.178; iv.141. -dhammiya co
religionist Nett 169. -dhenuka accompanied by a cow
Mhvs 21, 18. -nandin rejoicing with It 73. -pasukita
a companion in play, a playfellow A ii.186: J i.364; iv.77;
PvA 30. -pesua together with slander Sn 862 f.; Nd1 257.
-bhvin being at one's service J iii.181 (amacca). -bh arising together with Dhs 1197; Nett 16; a class of devas D ii.260.
-macchara with envy Sn 862. -yoga=karaa vacana SnA
44. -vatthu living together with Th 2, 414= 425; ThA 269.
-vsa living together, associating Vin ii.34; It 68. -vsin living together J v.352. -sangha together with the Order Mhvs
1, 71. -seyy sharing the same couch, living together Vin
iv.16; KhA 190. -sevaka together with the servants Mhvs
36, 43. -sokin sorrowful (?) S iv.180.
Sahyat (f.) [abstr. fr. sahya] companionship Dh 61; sahyatta (nt.) the same Mhvs 30, 21.
Sahita [pp. of sa+dh, cp. Sk. sahita=sahita] 1. accompanied with Mhvs 7, 27. 2. united, keeping together D i.4; J
iv.347; Pug 57. 3. consistent, sensible, to the point D i.8;
A ii.138; iv.196; S iii.12; Dh 19 (at DhA i.157 expld as a name
for the Tipiaka, thus equalling Sk. sahita); Pug 42. 4.
776
Sahita
Sheyya
Sgara [cp. Epic Sk. sgara] the ocean D i.89; A ii.56, 140;
iii.52; v.116 sq.; Vin i.246; Sn 568; PvA 29; sgara mi a
wave of the ocean, a flood J iv.165; -vri the ocean J iv.165;
sgaranta or sgarapariyanta bounded or surrounded by the
ocean (said of the earth) J vi.203; -kuala the same J iii.32;
vi.278.
Sciyoga [sci+yoga; cp. Sk. sci crooked] crooked ways, insincerity D i.5; iii.176; M i.180; A ii.209; v.206; Pug 58; DA
i.80.
Sjva (nt.) rule of life, precept governing the monastic life of the
Buddhist bhikkhus Vin iii.2416 ; adj. sampanna ibid.; adj.
kara one who supports J iv.42 (=sa jvakara, C.).
Sik (f.)=saka Vin i.292 sq.; ii.31; 272, 279 (udaka bathing
mantle) J i.330; Vism 339 (in simile); Miln 240 (cp. M iii.253).
siya the same Vin ii.177 (ghpaka receiver of undergarments).
Setar [n. ag. fr. seti] one who dispels, drives away M i.220;
A v.347 sq., 351, 359.
777
Sheyya
Sdhu
pai.
1
Sdana (nt.) [cp. Vedic sdana, fr. sad] place, house J iv.405;
Yama sdana sampatto come to Yama's abode: dead J
iv.405; v.267, 304; vi.457, 505 (do., the MSS. always read
sdhana).
Sa2 [sa+ia] having a debt, indebted, fig. subjected to the kilesas, imperfect M iii.127=S ii.221 (=sakilesa, sa ia K.S.
ii.203); ThA 8; cp. anaa under aa.
Sta (adj.) [cp. *Sk. ta] pleasant, agreeable It 114; Nett 27.
Often combd with piya, e. g. It 114; Vbh 103; DA i.311.
Opp. kauka. sta (nt.) pleasure, joy M i.508; A i.81 sq.;
S ii.220; J i.410; Dh 341 (sita= sta nissita DhA iv.49); Sn
867 sq.; Nd1 30 (three, of bhava); Pv ii.113 ; iv.54 (+sukha);
Dhs 3. asta disagreeable, unpleasant Dhs 1343; J i.410; J
i.288; ii.105; Sn 867 sq.; stabhakkha Pug 55, read haabhakkha.
-odaka with pleasant water D ii.129; M i.76; Vin iii.108.
-kumbha gold VvA 13. See also v. l. under haka. -putta
a noble son J vi.238 (=amacca putta C.).
Sdu (adj.) [Vedic svdu, f. svdv; fr. svad, cp. Gr. , Lat.
suavis, Goth. sts=E. sweet; also Sk. sda cook; Gr.
to enjoy, pleasure] sweet, nice, pleasant Vin ii.196; M
i.114; Th 2, 273; Sn 102; J iv.168; v.5; Dhs 629; asdu (ka)
J iii.145; iv.509 (text, asdhuka, com. on kauka); sdu
karoti makes sweet J iii.319; Pot. a sdu kiyir makes
bitter, ibid. 319; sdu sweet things Vin ii.196; sdu phala
see sdhuphala; for kamyat see the latter.
Sdut (f.) [fr. sdu] sweetness Dvs i.40.
Sttha [sa3 +attha] with the meaning, in spirit D i.62; ii.48; It 79,
111; Sn p. 100; Vin i.21; DA i.176; Vism 214.
Stthaka (adj.) [sa+atthaka] (fem. ik) useful PvA 12.
Str-yga identical with sammpsa (Sn 303) SnA 322 (? conjecture ytr).
Sthalika (adj.) [rath, cp. sahila & sithila] lethargic, lax M i.14,
200 sq.; iii.6; A i.71; ii.148; iii.108, 179 sq.
778
Sdhu
Smaat
Snu (m. and nt.) [Vedic snu] ridge Vv 3210 ; J iii.172. The
commentary on the former passage (VvA 136), translates vana
wood, that on the latter pasupabbata; snupabbata a forest
hill J iv.277; vi.415, 540; pabbatasnu J iii.175; girisnu
J iii.301; iv.195.
J vi.371
779
Smaat
Sra
iv.33.
Smudda (nt.) [fr. samudda] sea salt Vin i.202; Abhp 461.
Smuddika (adj.) [fr. samudda] seafaring D i.222; S iii.155;
A iii.368 (vij); iv.127 (nv); Vism 63; DhsA 320. At J
vi.581 s. mahsankha denotes a kind of trumpet.
Smeti see sammati1 .
Sya [cp. Sk. sya, on which Aufrecht, Halyudha p. 380, remarks: "this word seems to be the gerund of s, and to have
signified originally having finished. A masc. sya does not
exist." Cp. Vedic sya] evening, only adverbially sya, at
night Vin iii.147; J ii.83; DhA i.234; usually opposed to pto
(pta) in the morning, early e. g. sya-pta D ii.188;
Miln 419; J i.432, 460; v.462; sya-pta Vin ii.185; DhA
ii.66; sya ca pto ca Pv i.63 ; ii.937 ; PvA 127; sya
tatiyaka for the third time in the evening D i.167; A ii.206;
v.263, 266, 268; M i.343; syamsa supper J i.297; v.461;
DhA i.204. sya as qusi nominative: sya ahosi J
vi.505; atisya too late Th 1, 231; J ii.362; v.94; syatara
later in the evening (compar.) J vi.366.
Smalat (f.) [sma1 +lat; Sk. ymalat] the creeper Ichnocarpus J i.60.
Sm (f) [Sk. ym Halyudha 2, 38; see sma1 , smalat, and
smka] a medicinal plant J iv.92 (bhisasm, C. bhisni ca
smk ca); the Priyangu creeper J i.500; v.405.
Smka [cp. Vedic ymka] a kind of millet (Panicum frumentaceum) D i.166; M i.78, 156, 343; A i.295; ii.206; Sn 239;
Pug 55; J iii.144, 371; Nett 141; DhA v.81.
Smjika [fr. Sk. samja: see samajja] a member of an assembly
Dvs iii.27.
Smdhika (adj.) [fr. samdhi] consisting in concentration S
i.120.
Syati [svad, Sk. svdate, cp. sdiyati] to taste, eat; pres. syati
Vin ii.121; ppr. syanto D iii.85; grd. syanya savoury Vin
i.44; S i.162; ger. syitv S iv.176; A iii.163. Cp. sasyati.
Smin [cp. Sk. svmin, fr. sva=sa4 ] 1. owner, ruler, lord, master
Vin i.303, 307; Sn 83; Mhvs 37, 241; J v.253 (paribhoga, q.
v.); Pv iv.66 ; Vism 63; DA i.261; PvA 43, 65. voc. smi "Sir"
J vi.300; DhA i.20. f. smin J v.297; VvA 225. See also
suvmin. -assmin not ruling Miln 253; Pv iv.66 . 2. husband PvA 31 (smi, voc.="my lord"), 82. f. smin wife
Mhvs 5, 43; PvA 82, 276.
-vacana (smi) the genitive case J i.185; iii.98 (upayog'atthe); v.42 (kara'atthe), 444; VvA 304; SnA 210 (for
upayoga), 310 (id.).
Sra
Srya
Sraka3 in the comp. kaa sraka a mat J iv.248 (v. l.); iv.474;
v.97 (cp. osraka).
Srakkhati=sarakkhati Th 1, 729.
Srakkh (f.) [fr. sa3 +rakkha] "standing under protection" (?), a
category of married women Vin iii.139 (cp. M i.287).
Srasa [cp. Epic Sk. srasa] a water bird, Ardea sibirica VvA 57,
163; at both pass.=koca.
Srajjitatta (nt.) [=srajjan] infatuation, the state of being infatuated Dhs 389.
Srya (adj.) [the question of derivation is still unsettled. According to Trenckner (Notes 75) fr. saraa (i. e. saraa1 or
sarana2 ?) with double vddhi. Kern (Toev. ii.74) considers
the (B) Sk. sarajanya as the original and derives it fr.
sa+raj to rejoice, to gladden: see rajati. The BSk. is divided: MVastu iii.47, 60, 206 etc. has sryaiya, whereas
Av i.229 & Divy 404 read sarajan and sarajanya
(see below). The C. at J iv.99 derives it fr. saraa3 in explaining sry kath as "sritabba yuttak kath"] courteous, polite, friendly (making happy, pleasing, gladdening?),
only in combn with kath, dhamma, or dhammakath, e.
g. s. kath polite speech, either in phrase sammodanya
katha srya vtisreti to exchange greetings of friendliness & courtesy D i.52; M i.16 (expld inter alia as "anussariyamnasukhato s." at MA 110); A i.55, 281; ii.42; cp. BSk.
sammodan sarajan vividh k. vyatisrya Av i.229.
srya katha. katheti DhA i.107; iv.87; sry
dhamm states of conciliation, fraternal living (Dial. iii.231)
781
Srya
Svana
Slik (f.) [cp. Epic Sk. srik crow, usually combd with uka
parrot] a kind of bird S i.190=Th 1, 1232; J v.110. See sliya
& sik.
Srin (adj.) [fr. sreti] wandering, going after, following, conforming to (loc.) J v.15; aniketasrin wandering about houseless Sn 844, 970; anokasrin wandering homeless Dh 404; Sn
628; dihisrin a partisan of certain views Sn 911; vaggasrin
conforming to a party, a partisan Sn 371, 800, 912.
Srrika (adj.) [fr. sarra] connected with the body, bodily M i.10;
A i.168 sq.; ii.153; (nt.) bodily relics Miln 341; cetiya
one of the 3 kinds: paribhogika, s., uddesika J iv.228.
Sruppa (nt.) [abstr. fr. sarpa, BSk. srpya & sropya] equal
state; as adj. fit, suitable, proper Vin i.39, 287; D ii.277; S
iv.21 sq.; J i.65, 362; DhsA 294; Sn 368; p. 79, 97, 104; J
iv.404. (a) (nt.) Vism 24; PvA 269. paribbjaka s, as
befits a Wanderer J v.228.
Sreti is Caus. of sarati1 as well as sarati2 . Cp. vti.
Slna (adj.) [fr. sli] fine (rice) Miln 16 ( odana; cp. lna
odana Divy 559).
Sropin (adj.) [sa+ropin, cp. ropeti1 & rhati1 ] healing, curative M ii.257 (vaa ).
Sluka (& ka) (nt.) [cp. Sk. lka] the edible root of the water
lily Vin i.246; J vi.563; VvA 142 (muhi).
Sla [cp. Sk. la & sla] a Sal tree (Shorea robusta) M i.488; D
ii.134; A i.202; iii.49, 214; Dh 162.
-maka an enclosure of Sal trees J i.316. -rukkha Sal
tree VvA 176. -lahi Sal sprout A ii.200. -vana Sal grove
D ii.134; M i.124; S i.157; Vv 392 .
Slohita [fr. sa2 +lohita] a kinsman, a blood relation, usually together with ti Vin i.4; D ii.26, 345; A i.139, 222; ii.115; Sn
p. 91; PvA 28; VbhA 108.
Sli [cp. Sk. li] rice D i.105, 230; ii.293; Vin iv.264; M i.57;
A i.32, 145; iii.49; iv.108 (+yavaka), 231; S v.10, 48; J i.66,
178; iv.276; v.37; vi.531; Miln 251; Sn 240 sq.; Vism 418; pl.
iyo J i.325; gen. pl. ina J vi.510. lohitaka red
rice Miln 252.
-khetta a rice field A i.241; iv.278; Vin ii.256; DhA
i.97; iii.6. -gabbha ripening (young) rice DhA i.97. -bja
782
Svana
Sikkhati
Shra (adj.) [sa+hra] with its food S iii.54 (via s.); D ii.96
(Vesl s.; trsln "with its subject territory").
Shu (adj.) [=sdhu] good, well Vin i.45; S i.8; Pug 71 sq.; Th 1,
43; VvA 284.
Svitt (f.) the Vedic verse Svitr Sn 457, 568=Vin i.246 (Svitth); J iv.184.
Svetar [n. ag. fr. sveti] one who makes others hear, who tells
D i.56; A iv.196.
783
Sikkhati
784
Siniyhati
Sing & singi (f.) [cp. Sk. ng] 1. gold Vin i.38; S ii.234; J
i.84. 2. "ginger" in sense of "dainties, sweets" J iv.352
(=singiver' dika uttaribhanga C.; cp. Tamil iji ginger).
-nada gold Vv 6428 ; VvA 284. -loa ( -kappa) license
as to ginger & salt Vin ii.300, 306. -vaa gold-coloured D
ii.133. -suvaa gold VvA 167.
Singu (f.) (?) a kind of fish J v.406; plur. sing J vi.537. According to Abhp. sing is m. and Payogasiddhi gives it as nt.
Sijjati [svid, Epic Sk. svidyate] to boil (intr.), to sweat; ppr. sijjamna boiling J i.503; Caus. sedeti (q. v.). The Dhtp 162
gives "pka" as meaning of sid. pp. sinna (wet) & siddha1
(cooked).
Sijjhati [sidh; Epic Sk. sidhyate. The Dhtp gives 2 roots sidh,
viz. one as "gamana" (170), the other as "sasidhi" (419)] to
succeed, to be accomplished, to avail, suit SnA 310; PvA 58,
113, 254 (inf. sijjhitu). pp. siddha.
Siddhika (adj.) () [fr. siddhi] connected with success; nmasiddhika who thinks luck goes by names J i.401; appasiddhika unprofitable, fatal, etc. J iv.4, 5 (sgara); vi.34
(samudda).
Sinta [pp. of sinti] bathed, bathing M i.39; S i.169= 183; J
v.330.
Sinti1 (to bind): see sinoti.
Sinti2 [Vedic snti, sn. For detail see nahyati. The Dhtp 426
gives root sin in meaning "soceyya," i. e. cleaning] to bathe;
imper. sinhi M i.39; inf. sinyitu M i.39; aor. sinyi Ap
204. pp. sinta.
Sinna (nt.) [fr. sn] bathing M i.39; S i.38, 43; iv.118; Nd2 39;
Vism 17; VbhA 337.
Siniyhati
Sira
The Dhtp 463 gives the 2 forms sinih & snih in meaning pana. Cp. sineha] (to be moist or sticky, fig.) to feel
love, to be attached Vism 317=DhsA 192 (in defn of mett).
Caus. sineheti (sneheti, snehayati) to lubricate, make oily or
tender (through purgatives etc.) Vin i.279 (kya); Miln 172;
DA i.217 (temeti+); to make pliable, to soften Miln 139 (mnasa). pp. siniddha.
Sineha & sneha [fr. snih] Both forms occur without distinction; sneha more frequently (as archaic) in poetry. - A.
sineha: 1. viscous liquid, unctuous moisture, sap S i.134; A
i.223 sq.; J i.108; Dhs 652 (=sinehana DhsA 335); Vism 262
(thna=meda; vilna=vas). 2. fat J ii.44 (bahu); VbhA
67. 3. affection, love, desire, lust J i.190; ii.27; PvA 82.
B. sneha: 1. (oily liquid) D i.74; Pv iii.52 (anguha, something like milk; expld as khra PvA 198). 2. (affection)
A ii.10; S iv.188 (kma); Sn 36, 209, 943 (=chanda, pema,
rga, Nd1 426); J iv.11.
-anvaya following an affection Sn 36. -gata anything
moist or oily A iii.394 sq.; DhsA 335. -ja sprung from affection Sn 272; S i.207. -bindu a drop of oil Vism 263.
-virecana an oily purgative J iii.48.
Sippaka=sippa J i.420.
Sippavant [fr. sippa] one who masters a craft J vi.296.
Sippika [fr. sippa] an artisan Sn 613, 651; Miln 78; Vism 336.
Also sippiya J vi.396, 397.
Sippik1 (f.) [fr. sipp] a pearl oyster J i.426; ii.100 (sippikasambuka); Vism 362 (in comp.)=VbhA 68.
Sinehana (nt.) oiling, softening Miln 229; DhsA 335. - Cp. senehika.
Sinehaniya (adj.) [grd. formation fr. sinehana] softening,
oily; ni bhesajjni softening medicines Miln 172 (opp.
lekhaniyni).
Sipp [cp. Prkrit sipp] (f.) a pearl oyster J ii.100; sippi-pua oyster shell J v.197, 206. sippi sambuka oysters and shells D
i.84; M i.279; A i.9; iii.395.
Sinoti [s or si; Vedic syati & sinti; the Dhtp 505 gives si in meaning "bandhana"] to bind DhsA 219 (sinoti bandhat ti setu). pp.
sita3 .
Sibba (nt.) [fr. sv] a suture of the skull; plur. -ni J vi.339;
sibbin (f.) the same Vin i.274.
Sibbati [sv, Vedic svyati. The root is sometimes given as siv, e.
g. Dhtp 390, with defn "tantu santna"] to sew J iv.25; VvA
251. Pres. also sibbeti Vin ii.116; iv.61, 280; ger. sibbetv J
i.316; grd. sibbitabba J i.9; aor. sibbi J iv.25; & sibbesi Vin
ii.289; inf. sibbetu, Vin i.203. pp. sibbita. Caus. II.
sibbpeti J ii.197; Vin iv.61.
786
Sira
Sgha
Sir [Sk. sir] (f.) a bloodvessel, vein Mhvs 37, 136; nerve, tendon, gut J v.344, 364; -jla the network of veins J v.69; PvA
68.
Sirisapa [Sk. sarspa] a (long) creeping animal, serpent, a reptile Vin i.3; ii.110; D ii.57; M i.10; S i.154; A ii.73, 117, 143;
v.15; Sn 52, 964; J i.93; Pv iii.52 ; Nd1 484; VbhA 6. -tta (nt.)
the state of being a creeping thing D ii.57.
Silesuma (nt.) [Sk. leman, fr. li. This the diaeretic form
for the usual contracted form semha] phlegm Pv ii.23 (=semha
PvA 80).
Sirsa (nt.) [cp. Class. Sk. ira] the tree Acacia sirissa D ii.4; S
iv.193; Vv 8432 ; VvA 331, 344; -puppha a kind of gem Miln
118. Cp. sersaka.
Siroruha [Sk. iras+ruha] the hair of the head Mhvs 1, 34; Sdhp
286.
Sisira (adj.) [Sk. iira] cool, cold Dvs v.33; VvA 132. (m.)
cold, cold season Vin ii.47=J i.93.
Sil (f.) [cp. Sk. il] a stone, rock Vin i.28; S iv.312 sq.; Vin 445;
DA i.154; J v.68; Vism 230 (in comparison); VbhA 64 (var.
kinds); a precious stone, quartz Vin ii.238; Miln 267, 380; Vv
8415 (=phalika VvA 339); pada sil a flag stone Vin
ii.121, 154. Cp. sela.
-uccaya a mountain A iii.346; Th 1, 692; J i.29; vi.272,
278; Dvs v.63. -gua a ball of stone, a round stone M iii.94.
-tthambha (sila) stone pillar Mhvs 15, 173. -paim stone
image J iv.95. -paa a slab of stone, a stone bench J i.59;
vi.37 (mangala); SnA 80, 117.
-pkra stone wall Vin
ii.153. -maya made of stone J vi.269, 270; Mhvs 33, 22;
36, 104. -ypa a stone column S v.445; A iv.404; Mhvs 28,
Sgha
Sla
Sta (adj.) [Vedic ta] cold, cool D i.74, 148; ii.129; A ii.117,
143; Sn 467, 1014; Vin i.31, 288. (nt.) cold Vin i.3; J i.165;
Mhvs 1, 28; Sn 52, 966. In compn with k & bh the form
is sti, e. g. sti-kata made cool Vin ii.122; sti-bhavati to
become cooled, tranquillized S ii.83; iii.126; iv.213; v.319; Sn
1073 (sti siy, Pot. of bhavati); It 38; -bhta, tranquillized Vin i.8; ii.156; S i.141, 178; Sn 542, 642; A i.138; v.65;
D iii.233; Vv 5324 ; Pv i.87 ; iv.132 . sti-bhva coolness, dispassionateness, calm A iii.435; Th 2, 360; Ps ii.43; Vism 248;
VbhA 230; PvA 230; ThA 244. At J ii.163 & v.70 read
sna ("fallen") for sta.
-luka susceptible of cold Vin i.288 (synon. stabhruka). -uha cold and heat J i.10. -odaka with cool
water (pokkhara) M i.76; Pv ii.104 ; stodika (iya) the same
J iv.438. -bhruka being a chilly fellow Vin i.28816 (cp.
stluka).
788
Sla
Sliya
789
Sliya
Su
roar, the Buddha's preaching, a song of ecstasy, a shout of exultation "halleluiah" A ii.33; M i.71; D i.161, 175; S ii.27, 55;
J 119; Miln 22; DhA ii.43, 178; VbhA 398; (=seha nda
abhta nda); SnA 163, 203. -ndika one who utters a
lion's roar, a song of ecstasy A i.23. -pajara a window J
i.304; ii.31; DhA i.191. -paptaka "lion's cliff," N. of one of
the great lakes in the Himav SnA 407 and passim. -pihe
on top of the lion J ii.244. -potaka a young lion J iii.149.
-mukha "lion's mouth," an ornament at the side of the nave
of the king's chariot KhA 172. See also kuala. -ratha a
chariot drawn by lions Miln 121. -vikkita the lion's play, the
attitude of the Buddhas and Arahants Nett 2, 4, 7, 124. -seyy
lying like a lion, on the right side D ii.134; A i.114; ii.40, 244;
J i.119, 330; VbhA 345; DhA i.357. -ssara having a voice
like a lion J v.284, 296 etc. (said of a prince). -hanu having
a jaw like a lion, of a Buddha D iii.144, 175; Bu xiii.1=J i.38.
Svathik (f.) [etym. doubtful; perhaps=*Sk. ivlaya; Kern derives it as van "lying"+atthi "bone," problematic] a cemetery,
place where dead bodies are thrown to rot away Vin iii.36; D
ii.295 sq.; A iii.268, 323; J i.146; Pv iii.52 (=susna PvA 198);
Vism 181, 240; PvA 195.
Svana & sveti: see vi.
Ssa1 (nt.) [cp. Sk. ssa] lead D ii.351; S v.92; Miln 331; VbhA
63 (=ka tipu); a leaden coin J i.7; -kra a worker in lead
Miln 331; -maya leaden Vin i.190.
Ssa2 (nt.) [Vedic ra: see under sira] 1. the head (of the body)
Vin i.8; A i.207; Sn 199, 208, p. 80; J i.74; ii.103; ssa
nahta, one who has performed an ablution of the head D
ii.172; PvA 82; ditta-ssa, one whose turban has caught fire
S i.108; iii.143; v.440; A ii.93; ssato towards the head Mhvs
25, 93; adho-ssa, head first J i.233. 2. highest part, top,
front: bhmi hill, place of vantage Dpvs 15, 26; J ii.406;
cankamana head of the cloister Vism 121; sangma front
of the battle Pug 69; J i.387; megha head of the cloud J i.103.
In this sense also opposed to pda (foot), e. g. sopa head
(& foot) of the stairs DhA i.115. Contrasted with sama (plain)
Ps i.101 sq. 3. chief point Ps i.102. 4. panicle, ear (of
rice or crops) A iv.169; DA i.118. 5. head, heading (as subdivision of a subject), as "chanda ssa citta ssa" grouped
under chanda & citta Vism 376. Usually instr ssena "under
the heading (or category) of," e. g. citta Vism 3; paribhoga
J ii.24; sa DhsA 200; kammahna DhA iii.159.
-nulokin looking ahead, looking attentively after something M i.147. -bdha disease of the head Vin i.270 sq.;
J vi.331. -bhitpa heat in the head, headache Vin i.204.
-kaha a skull D ii.297=M i.58; Vism 260=KhA 60; KhA
49. -kalanda Miln 292. [Signification unknown; cp. kalanda a squirrel and kalandaka J vi.227; a blanket [cushion?]
or kerchief.] -cchavi the skin of the head Vin i.277. -cola
a headcloth, turban Mhvs 35, 53. -cchejja resulting in decapitation A ii.241. -ccheda decapitation, death J i.167; Miln
358. -ppaclaka swaying the head about Vin iv.188. paramparya with heads close together DhA i.49. -virecana
purging to relieve the head D i.12; DA i.98. -veha head wrap
S iv.56. -vehana headcloth, turban M ii.193; ssaveha id.
M i.244=S iv.56. -vedan headache M i.243; ii.193.
Shaa Ceylon; (adj.) Singhalese Mhvs 7, 44 sq.; 37, 62; 37, 175;
Dhvs 9, 1; KhA 47, 50, 78; SnA 30, 53 sq., 397. -kuddla a
Singhalese hoe Vism 255; VbhA 238; -dpa Ceylon J vi.30;
DhsA 103; DA i.1; KhA 132; -bhs Singhalese (language)
DA i.1; Tikp 259. See Dict. of Names.
Shaaka (adj.) [fr. last] Singhalese SnA 397.
Su1 (indecl.) [onomat.] a part. of exclamation "shoo!"; usually
repeated su su J ii.250; vi.165 (of the hissing of a snake); ThA
110 (scaring somebody away), 305 (sound of puffing). Sometimes as s s, e. g. Tikp 280 (of a snake), cp. skara.
Denom susumyati (q. v.).
Su-2 (indecl.) [Vedic su, cp. Gr. ] a particle, combd with
adj., nouns, and certain verb forms, to express the notion of
"well, happily, thorough" (cp. E. well bred, wel come,
wel fare); opp. du. It often acts as simple intensive prefix
(cp. sa) in the sense of "very," and is thus also combd with
concepts which in themselves denote a deficiency or bad quality (cp. su ppika "very wicked") and the prefix du (e. g.
su duj jaya, su duddasa, su dub bala). Our
usual practice is to register words with su under the simple
word, whenever the character of the composition is evident at
first sight (cp. du). For convenience of the student however
we give in the foll. a few compns as illustrating the use of su.
-kaa well done, good, virtuous D i.55; Miln 5; sukata
the same D i.27; (nt.) a good deed, virtue Dh 314; A iii.245.
-kara feasible, easy D i.250; Dh 163; Sn p. 123; na sukaro
so Bhagav amhehi upasakamitu S i.9. -kiccha great
trouble, pain J iv.451. -kittika well expounded Sn 1057.
-kumra delicate, lovely Mhvs 59, 29; see sukhumla. kumlatta loveliness DA i.282. -kusala very skilful J i.220;
-khara very hard ( hearted) J vi.508. (=suhu khara C.).
-khetta a good field D ii.353; A i.135; S i.21. -gajjin shrieking beautifully (of peacocks) Th 1, 211. -gandha fragrant
J ii.20; pleasant odour Dhs 625. -gandhi=sugandha J 100.
-gandhika fragrant Mhvs 7, 27; J i.266. -gahana a good
grip, tight seizing J i.223. -gahita and suggahta, grasped
tightly, attentive A ii.148, 169; iii.179; J i.163, 222. -ggava
virtuous J iv.53 (probably misspelling for suggata). -ghara
having a nice house J vi.418, 420. -carita well conducted,
right, good Dh 168 sq. (nt.) good conduct, virtue, merit A
i.49 sq., 57, 102; D iii.52, 96, 152 sq., 169; Dh 231; It 55,
Su
Su
smooth VvA 275. -bahu very much, very many Mhvs 20, 9;
30, 18; 34, 15; 37, 48. -bhika see bhika. -bbata virtuous,
devout D i.52; S i.236; Sn 220; Dh 95; J vi.493; DhA ii.177;
iii.99; PvA 226; VvA 151. -bbinya easy to understand Nd
326. -bbuhi abundant rainfall Mhvs 15, 97; DhA i.52; -k
the same D i.11. -brah very big J iv.111. -bhara easily supported, frugal; t frugality Vin i.45; ii.2; M i.13. -bhikkha
having plenty of food (nt.) plenty D i.11.
-vca called
plenty, renowned for great liberality It 66. -bhmi good soil
M i.124. -majja well polished J iii.282. -majjhantika a
good noon A i.294. -mati wise Mhvs 15, 214. -matikata
well harrowed A i.239. -mada very joyful J v.328. -mana
glad, happy D i.3; iii.269; A ii.198; Sn 222, 1028; Dh 68;
Vism 174. kind, friendly J iv.217 (opp. disa). -manohara
very charming Mhvs 26, 17. -manta well-advised, careful
Miln 318. -mnasa joyful Vin i.25; Mhvs 1, 76. -mpita
well built J i.7. -mutta happily released D ii.162. -medha
wise Vin i.5; M i.142; A ii.49 and sq.; Dh 208; Sn 117, 211
etc.; It 33; Nd1 453. -medhasa wise D ii.267; A ii.70; Dh
29. -yiha well sacrificed A ii.44. -yutta well suited,
suitable J i.296. -ratta very red J i.119; DhA i.249. rabhi fragrant S iv.71; Vv 8432 ; J i.119; A iii.238; Vv 4412 ,
538 , 716 ; Pv ii.123 ; Vism 195 (vilepana); VvA 237; PvA 77;
Davs iv.40; Miln 358. karaaka fragrance box, a fragrant box Th 2, 253; ThA 209. -ruci resplendent Sn 548.
-ruddha very fierce J v.425, 431 (read rudda). -rpin handsome Mhvs 22, 20. -rosita nicely anointed J v.173. -laddha
well taken; (nt.) a good gain, bliss Vin i.17; It 77. -labha
easy to be obtained It 102; J i.66; vi.125; PvA 87. -vaca of
nice speech, compliant M i.43, 126; Sn 143; A iii.78; J i.224.
Often with padakkhiagghin (q. v.). See also subbaca &
abstr. der. sovacassa. -vatthi [i. e. su+asti] hail, well being Cp. 100=J iv.31; cp. sotthi. -vammita well harnessed J
i.179. -vavatthpita well known, ascertained J i.279; Miln
10. -vnaya [i. e. su v naya] easily brought, easy
to catch J i.80, 124, 238. -viggaha of a fine figure, handsome Mhvs 19, 28. -vijna easily known Sn 92; J iv.217.
-vipaya easy to instruct Vin i.6. -vidravidra very far
off A ii.50. -vibhatta well divided and arranged Sn 305.
-vilitta well perfumed D i.104. -vimhita very dismayed J
vi.270. -visada very clean or clear SnA 195. -visama
very uneven, dangerous Th ii.352; ThA 242. -vihna thoroughly bereft J i.144. -vuhik abundance of rain J ii.80;
SnA 27; DA i.95; see subbuhik. -vosita happily ended
J iv.314. -sankhata well prepared A ii.63. -sa (f.) having a good understanding J v.304; vi.49, 52, 503 (for so?
C. sussoiya, i. e. having beautiful hips); Ap 307 (id.). saata thoroughly restrained J i.188. -sahna having a
good consistence, well made Sn 28. -sattha well trained J
iii.4. -sandhi having a lovely opening J v.204. -samgata
thoroughly applied to A iv.271 (ahanga, i. e. uposatha).
-samraddha thoroughly undertaken D ii.103; S ii.264 sq.;
Dh 293; DhA iii.452. -samhita well grounded, steadfast D
ii.120; Dh 10; DhA iv.114; It 113; atta of steadfast mind
S i.4, 29. -samucchinna thoroughly eradicated M i.102. samuhpaya easily raised S v.113. -samudnaya easy to
accomplish J iii.313. -sambuddha easy to understand Vin
i.5; Sn 764; S i.136. -syaha a good, blissful evening A
i.294. -sikkhita well learnt, thoroughly acquired Sn 261;
791
Su
Sukha
792
Sukha
Suata
S v.326.
-vihrin dwelling at ease, well at ease D i.75;
Dhs 163; J i.140. -savsa pleasant to associate with Dh
207. -sain conceiving happiness, considering as happiness
A ii.52. -samuddaya origin of bliss It 16, 52. -samphassa
pleasant to touch Dhs 648. -sammata deemed a pleasure Sn
760. -sayita well embedded (in soil), of seeds A iii.404=D
ii.354.
Sukhin (adj.) [fr. sukha] happy, at ease D i.31, 73, 108; A ii.185;
S i.20, 170; iii.83; Dh 177; Sn 145; being well, unhurt J iii.541;
fem. -n D ii.13; M ii.126.
Sukhuma (adj.) [Epic Sk. skma] subtle, minute Vin i.14; D
i.182; S iv.202; A ii.171; Dhs 676; Th 2, 266; Dh 125=Sn
662; Vism 274, 488 (rp). fine, exquisite D ii.17, 188; Miln
313; susukhuma, very subtle Th 1, 71=210 ( nipuattha
dassin); cp. sokhumma; khoma , kappsa , kambala (n.?) the finest sorts of linen, cotton stuff, woolwork
(resp.) Miln 105. Der. sokhumma.
-acchika fine meshed D i.45; DA i.127; Ap 21 (jla).
-dihi subtle view It 75. -dhra with fine edge Miln 105.
Sukhumaka=sukhuma Ps i.185.
Suj (f.) [Vedic sruc, f.] a sacrificial ladle D i.120, 138; S i.169;
DA i.289, 299.
Sua (adj.) [cp. Sk. nya, fr. Vedic na, nt., void] 1. empty,
uninhabited D i.17; ii.202; S i.180; iv.173; DA i.110; Miln
5. 2. empty, devoid of reality, unsubstantial, phenomenal M i.435; S iii.167; iv.54, 296; Sn 1119; Nd1 439 (loka).
3. empty, void, useless M i.483; S iv.54, 297; Dvs v.17;
Miln 96; Vism 594 sq. (of nmarpa, in simile with sua
druyanta). suasua empty of permanent substance Ps
ii.178; asua not empty Miln 130. nt. sua emptiness,
annihilation, Nibbna Vism 513 (three nirodha suni);
abl. to from the point of view of the "Empty" Nd2 680 (long
exegesis of suato at Sn 1119); Vism 512; VbhA 89, 261;
KhA 74.
-gra an empty place, an uninhabited spot, solitude Vin
i.97, 228; ii.158, 183; iii.70, 91 sq.; D i.175; ii.86; 291, M i.33;
S iv.133, 359 sq.; A iii.353; iv.139, 392, 437; v.109, 207, 323
sq.; It 39; J iii.191; Miln 344; Vism 270; Nd2 94. -gma an
empty (deserted) village (in similes) Vism 484; VbhA 48; Dhs
597; DhsA 309; tthna Vism 353; VbhA 57.
Suata (adj.) [i. e. the abl. suato used as adj. nom.] void,
empty, devoid of lusts, evil dispositions, and karma, but especially of soul, ego Th 2, 46; ThA 50; Dhs 344; Mhvs 37,
793
Suata
Sutta
(text sussu ).
Suis (f.) [Vedic snu; cp. Gr. ; Ohg. snur; Ags. snoru;
Lat. nurus] a daughter-in-law Vin i.240; iii.136; D ii.148; M
i.186, 253; J vi.498; Vv 135 (=puttassa bhariy VvA 61); DhA
i.355; iv.8; Pv ii.46 (pl. suisyo, so read for stisye).
suh the same Vin ii.10; A iv.91; Th 2, 406; J ii.347; vi.506;
Pv iv.3.43
Suat (f.) [abstr. fr. sua] emptiness, "void," unsubstantiality, phenomenality; freedom from lust, ill will, and
dullness, Nibbna M iii.111; Kvu 232; DhsA 221; Nett 118
sq., 123 sq., 126; Miln 16; Vism 333 (n'atthi; sua; vivitta;
i, e. abhva, suat, vivitt' kra), 578 (12 fold, relating to
the Paiccasamuppda), 653 sq.; VbhA 262 (atta, attaniya,
niccabhva).
-paksana the gospel of emptiness DA i.99, 123;
-paisayutta relating to the Void, connected with Nibbna
A i.72=iii.107=S ii.267; DA i.100 sq.; Miln 16; -vihra
dwelling in the concept of emptiness Vin ii.304; M iii.104,
294. See on term e. g. Cpd. 69; Kvu trsln 142, n. 4.
Suta2 [Sk. suta, pp. of s (or su) to generate] son Mhvs 1, 47;
fem. sut daughter, Th 2, 384.
Sutatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. suta1 ] the fact of having heard or learnt
SnA 166.
Sutappaya (adj.) [su+grd. of tappati2 ] easily contented A i.87;
Pug 26 (opp. dut).
Sutavant (adj.) [suta1 +vant] one who is learned in religious
knowledge Vin i.14; A ii.178; iii.55; iv.68, 157; S iii.57; Tikp
279; Sn 70 (=gama sampanna SnA 124), 90, 371; sutavanta nimmita founded by learned, pious men Miln 1; assutavant, unlearned M i.1 (v puthujjano laymen); Dhs 1003;
A iii.54; iv.157.
Suti (f.) [cp. ruti revelation as opp. to smti tradition] 1. hearing,
tradition, inspiration, knowledge of the Vedas Sn 839, 1078;
Miln 3 (+sammuti); Mhvs 1, 3. 2. rumour; sutivasena by
hearsay, as a story, through tradition J iii.285, 476; vi.100.
3. a sound, tone VvA 139 (dvvsati suti bhed 22 kinds of
sound).
Sutitikkha (adj.) [fr. su+titikkh] easy to endure J 524.
Sutta1 [pp. of supati] asleep Vin iii.117; v.205; D i.70; ii.130; Dh
47; It 41; J v.328. (nt.) sleep D ii.95; M i.448; S iv.169.
In phrase -pabuddha "awakened from sleep" referring to the
awakening (entrance) in the deva world, e. g. Vism 314
(brahmaloka uppajjati); DhA i.28 (kanaka vimne nib794
Sutta
Suna
Suda (indecl.) [=Vedic svid, influenced by sma: see su3 ] a deictic (seemingly pleonastic) particle in combn with demonstr.
pronouns and adverbs; untranslatable, unless by "even, just,"
e. g. tapass suda homi, lkha ssuda [sic] homi etc. M
i.77=J i.390; cp. ittha suda thus Sn p. 59; tatra suda
there Vin i.4, 34; iv.108; D i.87; ii.91; It 15; api ssuda D
ii.264; S i.119; api suda S i.113; s ssudam S ii.255.
Sudda [cp. Vedic dra] (see detail under vaa 6) a Sdra Vin
ii.239; D i.104; iii.81, 95 sq. (origin); M i.384; A i.162; ii.194;
S i.102; Pug 60; Sn 314; fem. sudd D i.241; A iii.226, 229;
Vin iii.133.
Suddha [pp. of sujjhati] 1. clean, pure, Vin i.16; ii.152; D i.110;
Sn 476. 2. purified, pure of heart M i.39; Dh 125, 412; Sn
90 3. simple, mere, unmixed, nothing but S i.135; DhsA
72; J ii.252 (daaka just the stick).
-antaparivsa a probation of complete purification Vin
ii.59 sq. -jva clean livelihood VbhA 116; DhA iv.111.
-jvin living a pure life Dp 366. -nupassin considering
what is pure Sn 788; Nd1 85. -vsa pure abode, name of a
heaven and of the devas inhabiting it D ii.50; Vism 392. Five
are enumd at D iii.237, viz. Avih, Atapp, Sudass, Sudass,
Akanih; cp. M iii.103. -vsakyika belonging to the pure
abode, epithet of the Suddhvsa devas Vin ii.302; D ii.253;
S i.26. -pti whose joy is pure Mhvs 29, 49. -buddhi of
pure intellect J i.1. -vasat purity of lineage Mhvs 59, 25.
-vasana wearing pure clothes Th 2, 338; ThA 239. -vluk
white sand Mhvs 19, 37. -sankhrapuja a mere heap of
sankhras S i.135.
Suddhaka (nt.) [suddha+ka] a trifle, a minor offence, less than a
Sanghdisesa Vin ii.67.
Suddhat (f.) [abstr. fr. suddha] purity Sn 435.
Suddhatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. suddha] purity D ii.14; Vism 44.
Suddhi (f.) [fr. udh] purity, purification, genuineness, sterling quality D i.54; M i.80; ii.132, 147; S i.166, 169, 182;
iv.372; Th 2, 293; DhA iii.158 (v. l. visuddhi); VvA 60
(payoga); Vism 43 (fourfold: desan, savara, pariyehi,
paccavekkhaa); Dhs 1005; Sn 478; suddhivada stating purity, Sn 910; Nd1 326; suddhinya leading to purity Sn 910.
Cp. pari, vi.
-magga the path of purification (cp. visuddhi) S i.103.
Suttaka (nt.) [fr. sutta] a string Vin ii.271; PvA 145; a string of
jewels or beads Vin ii.106; iii.48; DhsA 321; a term for lust
DhsA 364.
Suttantika versed in the Suttantas. A suttantika bhikkhu is
one who knows the Suttas (contrasted with vinayadhara, who
knows the rules of the Vinaya) Vin ii.75. Cp. dhamma C
1 & piaka. Vin i.169; ii.75, 161; iii.159; J i.218; Miln
341; Vism 41, 72, 93; KhA 151. -duka the Suttanta pairs,
the pairs of terms occurring in the Suttantas Dhs 1296 sq.; vatthni the physical bases of spiritual exercise in the Suttantas Ps i.186.
Sutti (f.) [cp. Sk. ukti, given as pearl shell (Suruta), and as
a perfume] in kuruvindakasutti a powder for rubbing the body
Vin ii.107; see sotti.
Suna
Suyyati
Suna2 [Sk. una; see suva] a dog, also written sua J vi.353,
357 (cp. sunakha).
Suplavattha at J v.408 is doubtful in spelling & meaning. Perhaps to be read "suplavanta" gliding along beautifully; C.
expld as "sukhena plavan'attha."
Sundara (adj.) [cp. Epic & Class. Sk. sundara] beautiful, good,
nice, well J ii.11, 98; SnA 410, 493 (cp. parovara). It is very
frequent as Commentary word, e. g. for prefix su PvA 57,
77; VvA 111; for subha PvA 14, 44; for sdhu nA 176; for
sobhana PvA 49; for seyyo PvA 130.
Supaa [Vedic supara] "Fairwing" a kind of fairy bird, a mythical creature (cp. garua), imagined as winged, considered as
foe to the ngas D ii.259; S i.148; J i.202; ii.13, 107; iii.91,
187, 188; vi.256, 257; Vism 155 (rj), 400; Nd1 92, 448;
DhA i.280; PvA 272; DA i.51; Mhvs 14, 40; 19, 20. Four
kinds S iii.246.
Subha (adj.) [Vedic ubhas fr. subh; cp. sobhati] shining, bright,
beautiful D i.76=ii.13=M iii.102; Dhs 250; DA i.221; auspicious, lucky, pleasant Sn 341; It 80; good Sn 824, 910; subhato maati to consider as a good thing Sn 199; J i.146; cp. S
iv.111; (nt.) welfare, good, pleasantness, cleanliness, beauty,
pleasure; vasena for pleasure's sake J i.303, 304; asubha
anything repulsive, disgusting or unpleasant S i.188; v.320;
subhsubha pleasant and unpleasant Miln 136; J iii.243 (niraya=subhna asubha unpleasant for the good, C.); cp. below subhsubha.
-angana with beautiful courts J vi.272. -subha good
and bad, pleasant & unpleasant Dh 409=Sn 633. -kia the
lustrous devas, a class of devas D ii 69; M i 2. 329, 390;
iii.102; A i.122; J iii.358; Kvu 207; also written kiha A
ii.231, 233; iv.40, 401; Vism 414, 420 sq.; VbhA 520; KhA
86. -gati going to bliss, to heaven Mhvs 25, 115. -hyin
existing or remaining, continuing, in glory D i.17; DA i.110;
A v.60. -dhtu the element of splendour S ii.150. -nimitta
auspicious sign, auspiciousness as an object of one's thought
M i 26; A i.3, 87, 200; S v.64, 103; Vism 20. -sa perception or notion of what is pleasant or beautiful Nett 27. Opp.
asubhasa concept of repulsiveness A i.42; ii.17; iii.79;
iv.46; v.106. See asubha. -sain considering as beautiful
A ii.52.
796
Suyyati
Susu
VvA 104; often together with hiraa Vin iii.16, 48; D ii.179;
ni pl. precious things J i.206. Cp. soa.
-ihak gilt tiles DhA iii.29, 61; VvA 157. -kra goldsmith D i.78; M ii.18; iii.243; A i.253 sq.; J i.182; v.438 sq.;
Nd1 478; Vism 376 (in sim.); DhA iii.340; SnA 15; VbhA
222 (in sim.).
-gabbha a safe ( room) for gold DhA
iv.105. -guh "golden cave," N. of a cave SnA 66. -toraa
gilt spire VbhA 112. -paa a golden (writing) slab J iv.7;
SnA 228, 578; DhA iv.89. -paaka a golden diadem Miln
210. -pabbata N. of a mountain SnA 358. -passa id. SnA
66. -pduk golden slippers Vin i.15. -maya made of gold
J i.146. -ml golden garland DhA i.388. -meaka a
golden ram DhA iii.364; iv.217; -bhinkra a g. vase Mhbv
154 -bhmi "gold land," N. of Cambodia Nd1 155. rjahasa golden coloured royal mallard J i.342. -vaa
gold coloured (of the body of the Yathgata) D iii.143, 159;
J ii.104; iv.333; DhA iii.113. -vthi golden street (in Indra's
town) J v.386. -sivik a g. litter DhA iii.164. -hasa golden
swan J i.207; ii.353; SnA 277, 349.
Sura [cp. Epic Sk. sura probably after asura] god Sn 681 (=deva
SnA 484); name of a Bodhisatta J v.12, 13; suraka a goddess, a heavenly maid J v.407 (=devadht, C.); surinda the
king of gods Mhbv 28. Opp. asura.
Surata (adj.) [su+rata] (in good sense:) well loving, devoted:
see soracca; (in bad sense:) sexual intercourse, thus wrongly
for soracca at J iii.442 C., with expln as "dusslya." Cp. srata.
Sur (f.) [Vedic sur] spirituous (intoxicating) liquor ("drink")
Vin ii.295; 301; iv.110; D i.146; A i.212, 295; It 63; J i.199,
252 (tikhia sura yojetv mixing a sharp drink); DhA ii.9;
Dh 247; as nt. at J vi.23 (v. l. sur as gloss). Five kinds
of sur are mentioned, viz. piha, pva, odana (odaniya),
kiapakkhitta, sambhra sayutta VvA 73; VbhA 381.
-dhihaka addicted to drink J v.427. -geha a drinking house J i.302.
-ghaa a pitcher of liquor J iii.477.
-ghara=geha J v.367. -chaa a drinking festival J i.489;
DhA iii.100. -dhutta a drunkard Sn 106; J i.268; iii.260.
-nakkhatta a drinking festival J 362; SnA 185. -pna drinking strong liquor J i.50; iv.23; VbhA 383. -pyik a woman
drinking liquor J v.11. -pipsita thirsty after strong drink S
ii.110. -pta one who has drunk liquor J i.426. -mada tipsiness, intoxication A iv.213; J i.352, 362. -meraya ( pna)
(drinking) rum & spirits A i.261; ii.53. See also (paca )
sikkhpada. -vitthaka bowl for drinking spirits J v.427; DhA
iii.66. -soa a drunkard DhA iii.129. -soaka id. J v.433.
Suvaat (f.) [abstr. fr. suvaa] beauty of colour or complexion Pug 34.
Suva (& suvna) [cp. Sk. van, also vna (f. vn): fr. Vedic
acc. uvna, of van. For etym. cp. Gr. , Av. sp,
Lat. canis, Oir. c, Goth. hunds] a dog M iii.91 (=supa M
i.58); J vi.247 (the 2 dogs of hell: Sabala & Sma); Vism 259
(=supa KhA 58). As suv at Sdhp 379, 408. See also
the var. forms san, sua, suna, sunakha, supa, soa.
-doi a dog's (feeding) trough Vism 344, 358; VbhA 62.
-pia a dog biscuit Vism 344. -vamathu dog's vomit Vism
344 (=suv vanta Sdhp 379).
Suru (indecl.) [onamat.] a hissing sound ("suru"); suru- surukraka (adv.) after the manner of making hissing sounds
(when eating) Vin ii.214; iv.197.
Susu1 [cp. Sk. iu] a boy, youngster, lad Vin iii.147= J ii.284;
Vv 6414 (=dahara C.); Sn 420; D i.115; M i.82; A ii.22; J ii.57;
jnya suspama M i.445, read jny ass pama (cp.
Th 1, 72). In phrase susuka the susu is a double su, in
meaning "very, very black" (see under ka kesa), e. g. D
i.115=M i.82= A ii.22=iii.66=J ii.57; expld as suhu ka
DA i.284. susunga a young elephant D ii.254.
Susu2 the sound susu, hissing J iii.347 (cp. su and s); ThA 189.
Susu3 the name of a sort of water animal (alligator or sea-cow?)
797
Susu
Sra
Susss (f.) [Class. Sk. ur] wish to hear, obedience, attendance D iii.189; A v.136; Th 1, 588; Sn 186; J iii.526; Miln
115.
Sda [Sk. sda; for etym. see sdu] a cook D i.51; S v.149 sq.; J
v.292; DA i.157; Vism 150 (in simile); Pv ii.937 , 950 .
Ska [cp. Sk. ka] the awn of barley etc. S v.10, 48; A i.8.
Skara [Sk. skara, perhaps as s+kara; cp. Av. h pig, Gr.
; Lat. ss; Ags. s=E. sow] a hog, pig Vin i.200; D
i.5; A ii.42 (kukkua+), 209; It 36; J i.197 (Muika); ii.419
(Slka); iii.287 (Cullatuila & Mah tuila); Miln 118,
267; VbhA 11 (vara sayane saypita). f. skar J ii.406
(read vajha).
-antaka a kind of girdle Vin ii.136. -masa pork A iii.49
(sampanna kolaka). -maddava is with Franke (Dgha trsln
222 sq.) to be interpreted as "soft (tender) boar's flesh." So also
Oldenberg (Reden des B. 1922, 100) & Fleet (J.R.A.S. 1906,
656 & 881). Scarcely with Rh. D. (Dial. ii.137, with note) as
"quantity of truffles" D ii.127; Ud 81 sq.; Miln 175. -potaka
the young of a pig J v.19. -sli a kind of wild rice J vi.531 (v.
l. sukasli).
Sci (f.) [cp. Sk. sci; doubtful whether to sv] a needle Vin
ii.115, 117, 177; S ii.215 sq., 257; J i.111, 248; Vism 284 (in
simile); a hairpin Th 2, 254; J i.9; a small door bolt, a pin to
secure the bolt M i.126; Th 2, 116; J i.360; v.294 (so for suci);
ThA 117; cross bar of a rail, railing [cp. BSk. sc Divy
221] D ii.179.
-kra a needle maker S ii.216. -ghaik a small bolt to
a door Vin ii.237; Ud 52; A iv.206; J i.346; vi.444; Vism 394.
-ghara a needle case Vin ii.301 sq.; iv.123, 167; S ii.231; J
i.170. -nik a needle case made of bamboo Vin ii.116.
-mukha "needle mouthed," a mosquito Abhp 646; a sort
Spin (adj.) [fr. spa] having curry, together with curry J iii.328.
Speyya (nt.) [fr. spa=Sk. spya] 1. belonging to soup, broth,
soup M i.448; S iii.146. 2. curry D ii.198; Nd2 314; DhA
iv.209.
-paa curry leaf, curry stuff Vism 250=VbhA 233; J i.98,
99; -ska a potherb for making curry J iv.445.
Syati is passive of suti.
Sra1 [Vedic ra, fr. ] valiant, courageous S i.21; J i.262, 320;
ii.119; (m.) a hero, a valiant man D i.51, 89; iii.59, 142, 145
sq; A iv.107, 110; Sn 831; DA 157, 250; (nt.) valour S v.227,
798
Sra
read sriya.
-kath a tale about heroes D i.8; DA i.90. -kka the
valiant crow DhA iii.352. -bhva strength, valour J i.130;
Vism 417 (in def. of suriya).
Seha best, excellent D i.18, 99; S iii.13; Sn 47, 181, 822, 907;
Dh 1, 26; J i.443; Nd1 84=Nd2 502 (with syn.); J i.88; cp.
sehatara J v.148.
-kamma excellent, pious deeds Mhvs 59, 9. -sammata
considered the best J iii.111.
Sra2 [Vedic sra] the sun ThA 150 (Ap v.90); J v.56.
Sehitta (nt.) [abstr. fr. sehi] the office of treasurer or (wholesale) merchant S i.92.
Sei (f.) [Class. Sk. rei in meaning "guild"; Vedic= row] 1. a
guild Vin iv.226; J i.267, 314; iv.43; Dvs ii.124; their number
was eighteen J vi.22, 427; VbhA 466. -pamukha the head of
a guild J ii.12 (text seni ). 2. a division of an army J
vi.583; ratha J vi.81, 49; seimokkha the chief of an army
J vi.371 (cp. sen and seniya).
Seta (adj.) [Vedic veta & vitra; cp. Av. spata white; Lith. szaitti to make light; Ohg. hwz=E. white] white D ii.297=M
i.58; Sn 689; A iii.241; VbhA 63 (opp. ka); J i.175; PvA
157, 215. name of a mountain in the Himlayas S i.67=Miln
242; an elephant of King Pasenadi A iii.345.
-anga white bodied Mhvs 10, 54. -ahika lit. (having)
white bones, (suffering from) famine [cp. BSk. vetsthi Divy
131] Vin iii.6; iv.23; S iv.323; A i.160; iv.279. f. mildew
Vin ii.256; J v.401. -odaka clear (transparent) water Pv ii.120 .
-kambala white blanket J iv.353. -kamma whitewashing J
vi.432. -kuha white leprosy J v.69; vi.196. -geru N. of a
plant J vi.535. -cchatta a white parasol, an emblem of royalty D ii.19; A i.145; J i.177, 267; PvA 74; DhA i.167; iii.120.
-pacchda with white covering S iv.292=Ud 76=DhsA 397.
-puppha "white flowered," N. of a tree (Vitex trifolia?) J
v.422 (=piyaka). -vr (& vrisa) names of plants or trees J
vi.535, 536.
799
Sersamaha
-ghpaka house steward Vin ii.167. -crik a wandering from lodging to lodging Vin i.182, 203; iii.21; J 126.
-papaka regulator of lodging places Vin ii.75, 176;
iii.158 sq.; iv.38. -paibhana keeping out of the lodging
J i.217. -paviveka secluson in respect of lodging A i.240 sq.
-vatta rule of conduct in respect of dwelling Vin ii.220.
Setu [Vedic setu, to si or s (see sinoti); cp. Av. hatu dam; Lat.
saeta; Ags. sda rope; etc.] a causeway, bridge Vin i.230=D
ii.89, J i.199; Vism 412 (simile); DhA i.83; SnA 357; PvA
102, 151, 215. uttra- a bridge for crossing over M i.134; S
iv.174; Miln 194; naa- a bamboo bridge Th 1, 7.
-kraka a bridge maker, one who paves the way S i.33;
Kv 345. -ghta pulling down of the bridge (leading to something) Vin i.59; iii.6; A i.220, 261; ii.145 sq.; Dhs 299; DhsA
219; DA i.305; Nd2 462; DhA iv.36.
Seda [Vedic sveda, fr. svid, cp. Av. xvada, Gr. , Lat. sudor, Ags. svt=E. sweat] sweat D ii.293; A ii.67 sq.; It 76; Sn
196; J i.118, 138, 146, 243; in detai (physiologically) at Vism
262, 360; VbhA 66, 245; sweating for medicinal purposes,
mah a great steambath; sambhra bringing about sweating
by the use of herbs, etc.; seda kamma sweating Vin i.205.
pl. sed drops of perspiration DhA i.253.
-vakkhitta earned in the sweat of the brow A ii.67 sq.,
iii.45, 76; iv.95, 282. -gata sweat covered, sweating VvA
305. -mala the stain of sweat J iii.290; VbhA 276. -ysa
sweat Vism 195.
Seyyath (adv.) [=ta yath, with Mgadh se for ta; cp. sayath & tayath] as, just as, s. pi Vin i.5; D i.45; It 90, 113;
J i.339; seyyathda as follows "i. e." or "viz." Vin i.10; D
i.89; ii.91; S v.421; It 99.
Senn a general; only in cpd. -kuilat strategy (lit. crookedness of a general) DhsA 151.
Serin (adj.) [cp. Sk. svairin] self willed, independent, according to one's liking M i.506; Th 1, 1144; Pv iv.187 ; J i.5.
800
Sersamaha
So
123, 137; A i.51, 144; ii.21; v.141; Sn 584, 586; J i.189; SnA
155; DhA ii.166; KhA 153 (abbha); Pv i.43 (=citta santpa PvA 18); PvA 6, 14, 38, 42, 61. asoka without grief:
see viraja. See also dukkha B iii.1 b.
-aggi the fire of sorrow PvA 41. pl. -divas the days of
mourning (at the king's court after the death of the queen) SnA
89. -parideva sorrow and lamenting A iii.32, 326 sq.; v.216
sq.; Vism 503; Nd1 128. -pariddava id. Vv 8430 . -pareta
overcome with grief Pv i.86 . -vinaya dispelling of grief PvA
39. -vinodana id. PvA 61. -salla the dart or sting of sorrow
A iii.54, 58; Nd1 59, 414; Pv i.86 ; PvA 93, 162.
Socana (nt.) [fr. uc] sorrow, mourning PvA 18, 62; -n (f.) the
same D ii.306; S i.108=Sn 34; Nd2 694.
Socita (nt.) [fr. socati] grief Th 2, 462.
Soceyya (nt.) [abstr. fr. uc, *aucya] purity S i.78; A i.94; ii.188;
v.263; Vism 8; J i.214; Miln 115, 207; is threefold A i.271; It
55; D iii.219; further subdivided A v.264, 266 sq. In meaning
of "cleaning, washing" given in the Dhtp as def. of roots for
washing, bathing etc. (khal, nah, sin, sudh).
Soa2 [cp. yonka] a kind of tree; the Bodhi trees of the Buddhas
Paduma and Nrada Bu ix.22; x.24; J i.36, 37.
Soita (nt.) [Sk. oita, fr. oa red] blood Th 2, 467; DA i.120;
Vism 259.
801
So
Sotthi
So (f.) [cp. Sk. ro] 1. the buttock Sn 609; J v.155, 216, 302.
2. a bitch, see soa1 .
soto S iv.291 sq.; v.347; nom. plur. sot Sn 1034; acc. plur.
sotni Sn 433; plur. sotyo (f. [?], or wrong reading instead
of sotso, sotse [?]) J iv.287, 288. 2. passage, aperture
(of body, as eyes, ears, etc.), in kaa orifice of the ear, and
nsa nostril, e. g. D i.106; Sn p. 108; J i.163, 164 (heh
nsika s.); Vism 400 (dakkhia & vma kaa s.).
-patti entering upon the stream, i. e. the noble eightfold
path (S v.347), conversion Vin ii.93 etc. By it the first three
Sayojanas are broken S v.357, 376. It has four phases (angas): faith in the Buddha, the Dhamma, and the Order, and,
further, the noble Slas S ii.68 sq.; v.362 sq.; A iii.12; iv.405;
D iii.227 (in detail). Another set of four angas consists of
sappurisa sasev, saddhammasavana, yonisomanasikra,
and dhammnudhammapaipatti S v.347, 404. phala the
effect of having entered upon the stream, the fruit of conversion Vin i.293; ii.183; M i.325; A i.44; iii.441; iv.292 sq., 372
sq.; D i.229; iii.227; S iii.168, 225; v.410 sq.; Pug 13; DhA
iii.192; iv.5; PvA 22, 38, 66, 142. magga the way to
conversion, the lower stage of conversion DA i.237; J i.97;
VbhA 307; see magga. -panna one who has entered the
stream, a convert Vin ii.161, 240; iii.10; D i.156; iii.107 sq.,
132, 227; A ii.89; S ii.68; iii.203 sq., 225 sq.; v.193 sq.; DA
i.313; Vism 6, 709; PvA 5, 153. The converted is endowed
with yu, vaa, sukha, and dhipateyya S v.390; he is called
wealthy and glorious S v.402; conversion excludes rebirth in
purgatory, among animals and petas, as well as in other places
of misery; he is a-vinipta-dhamma: D i.156; ii.200; S v.193
sq., 343; A i.232; ii.238; iii.331 sq.; iv.405 sq., v.182; M iii.81;
or kha-niraya: A iii.211; iv.405 sq. (+kha tiracchnayoni etc.). The converted man is sure to attain the sambodhi
(niyato sambodhipryano D i.156, discussed in Dial. i.190
192).
Sota1 (nt.) [Vedic rotas & rotra; fr. ru: see suti] ear, the
organ of hearing Vin i.9, 34; D i.21; Sn 345 (nom. pl. sot);
Vism 444 (defined); Dhs 601; DhsA 310; dibba sota
the divine ear (cp. dibba cakkhu) D i.79, 154; iii.38, 281;
dhamma the ear of the Dhamma A iii.285 sq., 350; v.140; S
ii.43; sota odahati to listen (carefully) D i.230; ohita s.
with open ears A iv.115; v.154; J i.129.
-ajana a kind of ointment made with antimony Vin i.203.
-nugata following on hearing, acquired by hearing A ii.185.
-yatana the sense of hearing Dhs 601 sq.; D ii.243, 280, 290.
-vadhna giving ear, attention M ii.175. -indriya the faculty of hearing Dhs 604; D iii.239.
-dvra "door of the
ear," auditory sensation VbhA 41. -dhtu the ear element,
the ear Vin ii.299; D i.79; S ii.121; A i.255 (dibba); iii.17
(id.); v.199; Vbh 334; Vism 407 (defd ); Dhs 601, 604; Miln 6.
-via auditory cognition, perception through the ear Dhs
443. -vieyya cognizable by hearing D ii.281; Dhs 467;
KhA 101.
Sotar [n. ag. fr. suti] a hearer D i.56; A ii.116; iii.161 sq.
sot used as a feminine noun ThA 200 (Ap v.3).
Sotavant [sota1 +vant] having ears, nom. pl. sotavanto S i.138;
Vin i.7; D ii.39.
Sotukma [sotu (=inf. of suti)+kma] wish or wishing to hear
A i.150; iv.115; Vism 444; f. abstr. kamyat desire to listen
A v.145 sq., SnA 135.
Sotta [pp. of supati, for sutta] asleep S i.170.
Sotti (f.) [Sk. ukti] a shell (?) filled with chunam and lac, used
for scratching the back, a back scratcher acting as a sponge
M ii.46; A i.208; see sutti e. g. Vin ii.107.
Sottiya [=*rotriya] well versed in sacred learning, a learned man
M i.280; Sn 533 sq. See sotthiya.
Sottun see supati.
Sotthna (nt.) [cp. Sk. svastyayana] blessing, well fare Sn
258; A iv.271, 285; J v.29 (where the metre requires sotthayana, as at iv.75); vi.139.
Sota2 (m. & nt.) [Vedic srotas, nt., fr. sru; see savati] 1. stream,
flood, torrent Sn 433; It 144; J i.323; sgha s. having a
quick current D ii.132; Sn 319; metaphorically, the stream of
cravings Sn 715 (chinna; cp. MVastu iii.88 chinna srota),
1034; S iv.292; M i.226 (sota chetv); It 114; denotes noble eightfold path S v.347; bhava s. torrent of rebirth S
i.15; iv.128; via s. flux of mind, D iii.105; nom. sing.
802
Sotthi
Soasa
Sodhaka [fr. sodheti] one who cleanses Mhvs 10, 90; PvA 7.
Sodhana (nt.) [fr. sodheti] cleansing Vism 276 (as f. n); examining J i.292; payment (see uddhra) J i.321.
Somanassa (nt.) [fr. su+mano; cp. domanassa] mental ease, happiness, joy D i.3; ii.278; iii.270; M i.85, 313; S iv.232; A ii.69;
iii.207, 238; Dh 341; Sn 67; Pug 59; VbhA 73; PvA 6, 14, 133;
DA i.53; it is more than sukha D ii.214; defined at Vism 461
(ih'ramma' nubhavana lakkhaa, etc.). A syn. of
it is veda 1. On term see also Cpd. 277.
-indriya the faculty of pleasure D iii.224; S v.209 sq.; Dhs
18.
Sopavhana=sa+upavhana.
Sopna (m. and nt.) [cp. Sk. sopna; Aufrecht "sa+ upyana"]
stairs, staircase Vin ii.117, 152; D ii.178; J i.330, 348; iv.265;
Vism 10; VvA 188; PvA 156, 275; Vv 785 ; dhura sopna
the highest step of a staircase (?) J i.330.
-kalingara flight of steps Vin ii.128 (v. l. sopakaevara
as at M ii.92). -panti a flight or row of steps, a ladder Vism
392 (three). -pda the foot of the steps (opp. ssa) DhA
i.115. -phalaka a step of a staircase J i.330.
Soppa (nt.) [=supina] sleep, dream S i.110; A i.261 (i. e. laziness). ante in a dream J v.329 (C. reading for T. suppante).
Soppati see supati.
Sobbha [cp. Sk. vabhra] a hole, (deep) pit D ii.127; M i.11; A
i.243; ii.140; iii.389 (see papta); v.114 sq.; J vi.166; Th 1,
229; SnA 355, 479; a water pool S ii.32; Sn 720; Vism
186; as adj. at S iii.109 (+papta), i. e. "deep"; kussobbha a
small collection of water S ii.32, 118; Sn 720; mahsobbha
803
Soasa
Hasati
Sohada [Sk. sauhda, fr. su+hd] a friend Mhvs 38, 98. See also
suhada.
Sneha see sineha.
Sve (adv.) [cp. Sk. vas] to morrow Vin ii.77; D i.108, 205; J
i.32, 243; ii.47; VvA 230; svedivasa DhA i.103. The diaeretic
form is suve, e. g. Pv iv.15 ; Mhvs 29, 17; and doubled suve
suve day after day Dh 229; DhA iii.329; J v.507.
Svha=so aha.
Sosana (nt.) [fr. soseti] causing to dry (in surgery) Miln 353.
Sosnika (adj.) [fr. susna] connected with a cemetery, bier
like Vin ii.149; m., one who lives in or near a cemetery A
iii.220; Pug 69 sq.; Miln 342; Vism 61 sq.; DhA i.69.
H
Hasa2 [cp. Sk. hasa=Lat. (h)anser "goose," Gr. = Ags.
gs=E. goose, Ger. gans] 1. a water bird, swan S i.148;
Sn 221, 350, 1134; Dh 91, 175; DhA ii.170; J ii.176 sq.;
SnA 277; Pv ii.123 ; iii.34 . Considered as (suvaa- ) rjahasa ("golden royal swan") to be king of the birds: J i.207;
ii.353; Vism 650. At SnA 277 Bdhgh gives various kinds of
hasa's, viz. harita, tamba, khra, ka, pka, suvaa.
pka a species of water bird J v.356; vi.539; SnA 277.
f. has Dvs v.24 (rja). 2. a kind of building J i.92.
-potaka a young swan Vism 153 (in simile). -rja the
king of swans Vv 358 ; Vin iv.259.
Hasati
Hatthin
805
Hatthin
Hambho
Hanati2 [*han for had, probably from pp. hanna. The Dhtm (535)
gives had in meaning of "uccra ussagga"] to empty the bowels Pv iv.88 (=vacca osajjate PvA 268). pp. hanna. Cp.
hanati2 & ohanati.
Hanana (nt.) [fr. hanati] killing, striking, injuring Mhvs 3, 42.
Hanu (f.) [Vedic hanu; cp. Lat. gena jaw, Gr. chin, Goth.
kinnus=Ger. kinn=E. chin, Oir. gin mouth] the jaw D i.11; J
i.28 (mah), 498; SnA 30 (sacalana); VbhA 145 (sacopana). -sahanana jaw binding, incantations to bring on
dumbness D i.11; DA i.97.
Hanuk (f.) [fr. hanu] the jaw J i.498; DA i.97; Miln 229; also
nt. Vin ii.266; J i.461; ii.127; iv.188; -ahika the jaw bone
J i.265 sq.; Vism 251; VbhA 58; KhA 49; SnA 116.
Hantar [n. ag. fr. hanati] a striker, one who kills D i.56; A ii.116
sq.; iii.161 sq.; S i.85; Dh 389.
Handa (indecl.) [cp. Sk. hanta, ha+ta] an exhortative-emphatic
particle used like Gr. or French allons, voil: well
then, now, come along, alas! It is constructed with 1st pres.
& fut., or imper, 2nd person D i.106, 142; ii.288; Sn 153,
701, 1132; J i.88, 221, 233; iii.135; DA i.237 (=vavasy'atthe
nipto); Nd2 697 (=padasandhi); Pv i.103 (=gaha PvA 49);
ii.321 (=upasagg'atthe nipta PvA 88); DhA i.16, 410 (handa
je); SnA 200 (vvavasne), 491 (id.); VvA 230 (hand' ha
gamissmi).
Hanna (nt.) [pp. of hanati2 ] easing oneself, emptying of the bowels; su a good (i. e. modest) performance of bodily evacuation, i. e. modesty J i.421.
806
Hambho
Havya
Hammiya (nt.) [cp. Vedic harmya house & BSk. harmik "summer house" (?) Divy 244] customarily given as "a long,
storied mansion which has an upper chamber placed on the
top," a larger building, psda, (store ) house Vin i.58, 96,
239; ii.146 (with vihra, ahayoga, psda, guh, as the 5
lenni), 152, 195; Miln 393; Nd1 226=Vism 25. -gabbha a
chamber on the upper storey Vin ii.152.
Haya [cp. Vedic haya, fr. hi to impel. A diff. etym. see Walde,
Lat. Wtb. s. v. haedus] 1. a horse Vv 641 ; J ii.98; Miln 2.
2. speed M i.446. -vhin drawn by horses J vi.125.
807
Havya
Hsa
Hasita [pp. of hasati, representing both Sk. hasita & hita] laughing, merry; (nt.) laughter, mirth A i.261; Pv iii.35 (=hasitavant
hasita mukhin C.); Miln 297; Bu i.28; J i.62 (? read hesita);
iii.223; Vism 20.
-uppda "genesis of mirth," aesthetic faculty Tikp 276;
see Cpd. 20 sq.
Hassa (adj. nt.) [fr. has, cp. Sk. hsya] ridiculous Sn 328;
(nt.) 1. laughter, mirth D i.19; Sn 926; DA i.72; PvA 226;
DhA iii.258; Miln 266. 2. a joke, jest hass pi, even in fun
M i.415; hassena pi the same J v.481; Miln 220; vasena in
jest J i.439.
H (indecl.) an exclamation of grief, alas! ThA 154 (Ap v.154);
VvA 323, 324.
Haka (nt.) [cp. Sk. haka, connected with hari; cp. Goth.
gulp=E. gold] gold A i.215; iv.255, 258, 262 (where T reads
haaka, with staka as v. l. at all passages); Th 2, 382; J v.90.
Htabba at Nett 7, 32 may be interpreted as grd. of h to go
(pres. jihte). The C. expls it as "gametabba, netabba" (i. e. to
be understood). Doubtful.
Hna (nt.) [fr. h, cp. Sk. hna] relinquishing, giving up, falling
off; decrease, diminution, degradation A ii.167; iii.349 sq.
(opp. visesa), 427; Vism 11.
-gmin going into disgrace or insignificance A iii.349 sq.
-bhgiya conducive to relinquishing (of perversity and ignorance) D iii.272 sq.; A ii.167; Nett 77; Vism 85.
Hriya (adj.) [fr. hra] carrying Vv 509 ; ThA 200; VvA 212.
Hlidda (adj.) [fr. halidd] dyed with turmeric; a undyed, i. e.
not changing colour J iii.88; cp. iii.148.
Hsa [fr. has, cp. Sk. hsa & hara] laughter; mirth, joy Dh 146;
DA i.228=SnA 155 ("meita"); J i.33; ii.82; v.112; Miln
390. See also ahsa.
-kara giving pleasure, causing joy Miln 252. -kkhaya
ceasing of laughter Dhtp 439 (in defn of gilna, illness).
Hni (f.) [cp. Sk. hni] 1. decrease, loss A ii.434; v.123 sq.; S
i.111; ii.206, 242; J i.338, 346. 2. falling off, waste Mhvs
33, 103. Cp. sa, pari.
Hpana at J v.433 is with Kern. Toev. i.132 (giving the pas-
808
Hsa
Hirivera
Hiraa (nt.) [Vedic hiraya; see etym. under hari & cp. Av.
aranya gold] gold Vin i.245, 276; ii.159; A iv.393; Sn 285,
307, 769; Nd2 11; gold piece S i.89; J i.92. Often together with suvaa Vin i.150; D ii.179; h-suvaa gold
& money M iii.175; J i.341. olokana ( kamma) valuation
of gold J ii.272.
Hiri & hir (f.) [cp. Vedic hr] sense of shame, bashfulness, shyness S i.33; D iii.212; A i.51, 95; iii.4 sq., 331, 352; iv.11,
29; Sn 77, 253, 719; Pug 71; Pv iv.73 ; J i.129, 207; Nett 50,
82; Vism 8. Expld Pug 23 sq.; is one of the cga-dhana's:
see cga (cp. Jtm 311 ). Often contrasted to & combined
with ottappa (cp. below) fear of sin: A i.51; D iii.284; S
ii.206; It 36; Nett 39; their difference is expld at Vism 464
("kya duccarit' dhi hiriyat ti hiri; lajjy' eta adhivacana; tehi yeva ottappat ti ottappa; ppato ubbegass' eta
adhivacana"); J i.129 sq.; DhsA 124.
-ottappa shame & fear of sin M i.271; S ii.220; It 34; A
ii.78; J i.127, 206; Tikp 61; Vism 221; DhA iii.73. Frequently
spelt otappa, e. g. J i.129; It 36. -kopna a loin cloth M
i.10; Vism 31, 195. -nisedha restrained by conscience S i.7,
168=Sn 462; Dh 143; DhA iii.86. -bala the power of conscientiousness A ii.150; Dhs 30, 101. -mana modest in heart,
conscientious D ii.78; M i.43; S ii.159.
Hisana (nt.) [fr. his] striking, hurting, killing Mhvs 15, 28.
His (f.) [Vedic his] injury, killing J i.445; Dhtp 387. hisamano wish to destroy Dh 390. Opp. a.
Hisitar [n. ag. fr. hisati] one who hurts D ii.243; J iv.121.
Hikk (f.) [cp. Epic Sk. hikk, fr. hikk to sob; onomat.] hiccup
Sdhp 279.
Hikkra [hik+kra]=hikk, VbhA 70.
Hinkra (indecl.) [hi=hi, +kra, i. e. the syllable "hi"] an exclamation of surprise or wonder J vi.529 (C. hin ti kraa).
Hingu (nt.) [Sk. hingu] the plant asafetida Vin i.201; VvA 186.
-cua powder of asafetida DhA iv.171. -rja a sort of
bird J vi.539.
Hingulaka [cp. Sk. hingula, nt.] vermilion; as jti J v.67. 416;
VvA4 , 168. Also as ik (f.) VvA 324.
Hinguli [Sk. hinguli] vermilion Mhvs 27, 18.
Hirivera
Hetu
Hra [cp. late Sk. hra] 1. a necklace (?) VvA 176. 2. a small
piece, splinter J iv.30 (sakalika); hrahra karoti to cut to
pieces, to chop up J i.9; DhA i.224 (+khakhaa).
Hraka [hra+ka, cp. lexic. Sk. hraka "diamond"] a splinter; tla
"palm splinter," a name for a class of worms Vism 258.
Hrati is Pass. of harati.
Hana (nt.) & (f.) [fr. h] scorn(ing), disdain, contempt Miln
357; DA i.276 (of part. "re": hlana vasena mantana);
as at Vbh 353 (+ohan); VbhA 486.
Hu (indecl.) the sound "hu" an utterance of discontent or refusal DhA iii.108=VvA 77; Vism 96. Cp. ha. hunkra
growling, grumbling Vism 105. hunkaroti to grumble DhA
i.173. hunkaraa=kra DhA i.173 sq. See also huhunka.
Heta=hi eta.
Hetu [Vedic hetu, fr. hi to impel] 1. cause, reason, condition S
i.134; A iii.440 sq.; Dhs 595, 1053; Vism 450; Tikp 11, 233,
239. In the older use paccaya and hetu are almost identical
as synonyms, e. g. n'atthi hetu n'atthi paccayo D i.53; aha
het aha paccay D iii.284 sq.; cp. S iii.69 sq.; D ii.107; M
i.407; A i.55 sq., 66, 200; iv.151 sq.; but later they were differentiated (see Mrs. Rh. D., Tikp introd. p. xi. sq.). The diff.
between the two is expld e. g. at Nett 78 sq.; DhsA 303.
Hetu
Horphaka
811